D284/D285/D286

/D287/D288/D289
SERVICE MANUAL
Rev. 08/12/2021
It is the reader's responsibility when discussing the information contained
within this document to maintain a level of confidentiality that is in the best
interest of Ricoh USA, Inc. and its member companies.

NO PART OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE REPRODUCED IN ANY

FASHION AND DISTRIBUTED WITHOUT THE PRIOR
PERMISSION OF RICOH USA, Inc.

All product names, domain names or product illustrations, including

desktop images, used in this document are trademarks, registered
trademarks or the property of their respective companies.
They are used throughout this book in an informational or editorial fashion
only and for the benefit of such companies. No such use, or the use of
any trade name, or web site is intended to convey endorsement or other
affiliation with Ricoh products.

 2021 RICOH USA, Inc. All rights reserved.

 WARNING
The Service Manual contains information
regarding service techniques, procedures,
processes and spare parts of office equipment
distributed by Ricoh USA, Inc. Users of this
manual should be either service trained or
certified by successfully completing a Ricoh
Technical Training Program.
Untrained and uncertified users utilizing
information contained in this service manual to
repair or modify Ricoh equipment risk personal
injury, damage to property or loss of warranty
protection.

Ricoh USA, Inc.

 LEGEND
PRODUCT COMPANY
CODE LANIER RICOH SAVIN
D284 MP 2555 MP 2555 MP 2555
D285 MP 3055 MP 3055 MP 3055
D286 MP 3555 MP 3555 MP 3555
D287 MP 4055 MP 4055 MP 4055
D288 MP 5055 MP 5055 MP 5055
D289 MP 6055 MP 6055 MP 6055

DOCUMENTATION HISTORY
REV. NO. DATE COMMENTS
* 08/2021 Original Printing (New Format)
SYMBOLS, ABBREVIATIONS
This manual uses several symbols and abbreviations.

Symbols:
Symbol What it means
Clip ring
Screw
Connector
Clamp
E-ring
Flat Flexible Cable
Timing Belt
SEF Short Edge Feed
LEF Long Edge Feed
K Black
C Cyan
M Magenta
Y Yellow
B/W, BW Black and White
FC Full color

[A] Short Edge Feed (SEF)

[B] Long Edge Feed (LEF)
Trademarks
Adobe, Acrobat, PageMaker, PostScript, and PostScript 3 are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
and any use of such marks by Ricoh Company, Ltd. is under license.
Firefox and Thunderbird are registered trademarks of the Mozilla Foundation.
Google, Android, Google Drive, and Chrome are trademarks of Google Inc.
Java is a registered trademark of Oracle and/or its affiliates.
JAWS® is a registered trademark of Freedom Scientific, Inc., St. Petersburg, Florida and/or other
countries.
Kerberos is a trademark of the Massachusetts Institute of Technology (MIT).
Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds.
Macintosh, OS X, Bonjour, Safari, and TrueType are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the
U.S. and other countries.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Server, Windows Vista, Internet Explorer, Microsoft Edge, and
Outlook are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corp. in the United States
and/or other countries.
QR Code is a registered trademark of DENSO WAVE INCORPORATED in Japan and in other
countries.
"Red Hat" is a registered trademark of Red Hat, Inc.
The SD and SD logo are trademarks of SD-3C, LLC.
UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group.
UPnP is a trademark of UPnP Implementers Corporation.

This product includes RSA BSAFE® Cryptographic software of EMC Corporation. RSA and
BSAFE are registered trademarks or trademarks of EMC Corporation in the United States and
other countries.

The proper names of Internet Explorer 7 and 8 are as follows:

• Windows® Internet Explorer® 7
• Windows® Internet Explorer® 8
The proper names of the Windows operating systems are as follows:
• The product names of Windows Vista are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Ultimate
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Business
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Home Premium
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Home Basic
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Enterprise
• The product names of Windows 7 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Home Premium
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Professional
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Ultimate
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Enterprise
• The product names of Windows 8 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 8
Microsoft® Windows® 8 Pro
Microsoft® Windows® 8 Enterprise
• The product names of Windows 8.1 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 8.1
Microsoft® Windows® 8.1 Pro
Microsoft® Windows® 8.1 Enterprise
• The product names of Windows 10 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 10 Home Premium
Microsoft® Windows® 10 Pro
Microsoft® Windows® 10 Enterprise
Microsoft® Windows® 10 Education
• The product names of Windows Server 2008 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 Standard
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 Enterprise
• The product names of Windows Server 2008 R2 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 R2 Standard
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 R2 Enterprise
• The product names of Windows Server 2012 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 Foundation
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 Essentials
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 Standard
• The product names of Windows Server 2012 R2 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 R2 Foundation
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 R2 Essentials
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 R2 Standard
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of
their respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights to those marks.
Microsoft product screen shots reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation.
 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. PRODUCT INFORMATION ............................................................1-1

1.1 PRODUCT OVERVIEW ............................................................................................. 1-2
1.1.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT .................................................................................. 1-2
1.1.2 PAPER PATH .................................................................................................. 1-3
1.1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT .............................................................................................. 1-5
1.2 MACHINE CODES AND PERIPHERALS CONFIGURATION..................................... 1-6
1.2.1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND OPTIONS .................................................. 1-6
External Options for MP2555/MP3055/MP3555 (mainly Europe) ......................... 1-6
External Options for MP2555/MP3055/MP3555 (mainly Asia).............................. 1-7
External Options for MP2555/MP3055/MP3555 (mainly North America) .............. 1-8
External Options for MP4055/MP5055 (mainly Europe) ....................................... 1-9
External Options for MP4055/MP5055 (mainly Asia).......................................... 1-10
External Options for MP4055/MP5055 (mainly North America) .......................... 1-11
External Options for MP6055 (mainly Europe and Asia)..................................... 1-12
External Options for MP6055 (mainly North America) ........................................ 1-13
1.3 SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................................................... 1-14

2. INSTALLATION ...............................................................................2-1
2.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................ 2-2
2.1.1 ENVIRONMENT .............................................................................................. 2-2
2.1.2 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS .............................................................. 2-3
2.1.3 MACHINE DIMENSIONS................................................................................. 2-4
2.1.4 POWER REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................. 2-4
2.2 MAIN MACHINE INSTALLATION ............................................................................... 2-5
2.2.1 IMPORTANT NOTICE ON SECURITY ISSUES ............................................... 2-5
Overview ............................................................................................................. 2-5
Password Setting Procedure ............................................................................... 2-6
2.2.2 INSTALLATION FLOW CHART ....................................................................... 2-8
MP 2555SP, MP 3055SP, MP 3555SP ................................................................. 2-8
MP 4055SP, MP 5055SP, MP 6055SP ................................................................. 2-9
2.2.3 ACCESSORY CHECK ..................................................................................... 2-9
2.2.4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ...................................................................... 2-10
Removal of Packing Materials and Shipping Retainers ...................................... 2-10
For Machines with Preinstalled SPDF: Removal of Protective Sheet ................. 2-14
Attaching the Paper Exit Tray Parts ................................................................... 2-15

SM i D0CP/D0CQ/D0CM/D0CN
 Pulling out the Feeler for the Paper Exit Full Sensor .......................................... 2-16
Checking the Position of the Paper Exit Feeler .................................................. 2-16
Attaching the Decals ......................................................................................... 2-17
For Machines with Preinstalled ARDF: Fax Stamp Installation (Option) ............. 2-19
Toner Bottle Installation and Toner Initialization.................................................. 2-20
2.2.5 CHECK IMAGE QUALITY / SETTINGS ......................................................... 2-22
Loading Paper ................................................................................................... 2-22
Checking the Copy Image with the Test Chart ................................................... 2-22
Paper Settings................................................................................................... 2-23
Security Function Settings ................................................................................. 2-23
Settings Relevant to the Service Contract.......................................................... 2-23
2.2.6 AUTO REMOTE FIRMWARE UPDATE (ARFU) SETTINGS .......................... 2-23
Specifying the Time and Day of the Week to Prohibit Updating via Web Image
Monitor .............................................................................................................. 2-28
2.2.7 MOVING THE MACHINE............................................................................... 2-30
2.2.8 TRANSPORTING THE MACHINE ................................................................. 2-32
2.3 PAPER FEED UNIT PB3210/ PB3220 ..................................................................... 2-34
2.3.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ................................................................................... 2-34
2.3.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ...................................................................... 2-34
2.4 PAPER FEED UNIT PB3150.................................................................................... 2-40
2.4.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ................................................................................... 2-40
2.4.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ...................................................................... 2-40
2.5 LCIT PB3170/ PB3230 ............................................................................................. 2-45
2.5.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ................................................................................... 2-45
2.5.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ...................................................................... 2-45
Changing the Paper Size................................................................................... 2-49
2.6 LCIT RT3030 (D696) ............................................................................................... 2-51
2.6.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ................................................................................... 2-51
2.6.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ...................................................................... 2-51
Changing the Paper Size................................................................................... 2-58
2.7 CASTER TABLE TYPE M3 (D178)........................................................................... 2-59
2.7.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ................................................................................... 2-59
2.7.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ...................................................................... 2-59
For Installing Directly under the Main Machine .................................................. 2-60
For Installing under PB3150 .............................................................................. 2-61
2.8 PLATEN COVER PN2000 (D700) ............................................................................ 2-64
2.8.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ................................................................................... 2-64
2.8.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ...................................................................... 2-64
2.9 ARDF DF3090 ......................................................................................................... 2-67

D0CP/D0CQ/D0CM/D0CN ii SM
 2.9.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ................................................................................... 2-67
2.9.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ...................................................................... 2-67
When feeding thin paper ................................................................................... 2-71
2.10 SPDF DF3100 ................................................................................................... 2-72
2.10.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ................................................................................... 2-72
2.10.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ...................................................................... 2-72
Attaching the SPDF ........................................................................................... 2-73
Adjust SP Settings............................................................................................. 2-79
2.11ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATERS FOR SCANNER, PCU AND TRAYS ................. 2-81
2.11.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................................... 2-81
2.11.2 HEATER BOARD .......................................................................................... 2-81
Accessory Check............................................................................................... 2-81
Installation Procedure ........................................................................................ 2-81
2.11.3 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER (SCANNER) ............................................. 2-87
Accessory Check............................................................................................... 2-87
Installation Procedure ........................................................................................ 2-88
2.11.4 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER (PCU) ....................................................... 2-93
Accessory Check............................................................................................... 2-93
Installation Procedure ........................................................................................ 2-93
2.11.5 TRAY HEATER FOR MAIN UNIT................................................................... 2-98
Accessory Check............................................................................................... 2-98
Installation Procedure ........................................................................................ 2-98
2.11.6 TRAY HEATER FOR PAPER FEED UNIT PB3210 / PB3220 ....................... 2-100
Accessory Check............................................................................................. 2-100
Installation Procedure ...................................................................................... 2-100
2.11.7 TRAY HEATER FOR PAPER FEED UNIT PB3150 ...................................... 2-103
Accessory Check............................................................................................. 2-103
Installation Procedure ...................................................................................... 2-103
2.11.8 TRAY HEATER FOR LCIT PB3170/ PB3230 ............................................... 2-106
Accessory Check............................................................................................. 2-106
Installation Procedure ...................................................................................... 2-106
2.12 1 BIN TRAY BN3110 (D3CQ)........................................................................... 2-109
2.12.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ................................................................................. 2-109
2.12.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE .................................................................... 2-109
Checking the Position of the Paper Exit Feeler ................................................ 2-115
2.13 INTERNAL SHIFT TRAY SH3070 (D691) ........................................................ 2-116
2.13.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ................................................................................. 2-116
2.13.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE .................................................................... 2-116
Checking the Position of the Paper Exit Feeler ................................................ 2-120

SM iii D0CP/D0CQ/D0CM/D0CN
 2.14 SIDE TRAY TYPE M3 (D725) .......................................................................... 2-121
2.14.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ................................................................................. 2-121
2.14.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE .................................................................... 2-121
2.15 BRIDGE UNIT BU3070 (D685) ........................................................................ 2-127
2.15.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ................................................................................. 2-127
2.15.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE .................................................................... 2-127
2.16 INTERNAL MULTI-FOLD UNIT FD3000 (M482-17, -21) .................................. 2-133
2.16.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ................................................................................. 2-133
2.16.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE .................................................................... 2-134
2.16.3 WHEN ATTACHING THE FINISHER BEYOND THE INTERNAL MULTI-FOLD
UNIT 2-150
2.17 BOOKLET FINISHER SR3240 / FINISHER SR3230 ....................................... 2-151
2.17.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ................................................................................. 2-151
2.17.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE .................................................................... 2-152
2.17.3 ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLING THE FINISHER .................................. 2-159
How to Check and Adjust the Side-to-Side Registration ................................... 2-159
2.17.4 ATTACHING A SUPPORT TRAY ................................................................. 2-160
2.18 PUNCH UNIT PU3060 (D706) ......................................................................... 2-163
2.18.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ................................................................................. 2-163
2.18.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE .................................................................... 2-164
2.19 BOOKLET FINISHER SR3220 (D3B9) ............................................................ 2-174
2.19.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ................................................................................. 2-174
2.19.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE .................................................................... 2-175
2.19.3 ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLING THE FINISHER .................................. 2-183
How to Check and Adjust the Side-to-Side Registration ................................... 2-183
Attaching the Proof Support Tray ..................................................................... 2-184
2.20 FINISHER SR3210 (D3B8).............................................................................. 2-186
2.20.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ................................................................................. 2-186
2.20.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE .................................................................... 2-187
2.20.3 ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLING THE FINISHER .................................. 2-195
How to Check and Adjust the Side-to-Side Registration ................................... 2-195
Attaching the Proof Support Tray ..................................................................... 2-195
2.20.4 STAPLELESS STAPLER INITIAL SETTINGS .............................................. 2-196
How to change the setting of Staple Method for the Stapleless Stapler............ 2-196
How to set Margin Erase for the Stapleless Stapler ......................................... 2-197
2.21 PUNCH UNIT PU3050 .................................................................................... 2-198
2.21.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ................................................................................. 2-198
2.21.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE .................................................................... 2-198
2.22 INTERNAL FINISHER SR3180 (D766) ............................................................ 2-209

D0CP/D0CQ/D0CM/D0CN iv SM
 2.22.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ................................................................................. 2-209
2.22.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE .................................................................... 2-210
2.22.3 STAPLELESS STAPLER INITIAL SETTINGS .............................................. 2-222
How to change the setting of Staple Method for the Stapleless Stapler............ 2-222
How to set Margin Erase for the Stapleless Stapler ......................................... 2-223
2.23 INTERNAL FINISHER SR3130 (D690) ............................................................ 2-224
2.23.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ................................................................................. 2-224
2.23.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE .................................................................... 2-224
2.24 PUNCH UNIT PU3040 (D716) ......................................................................... 2-236
2.24.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ................................................................................. 2-236
2.24.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE .................................................................... 2-236
2.25 KEY COUNTER BRACKET TYPE M3 ............................................................. 2-242
2.25.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ................................................................................. 2-242
2.25.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE .................................................................... 2-242
2.26 OPTIONAL COUNTER INTERFACE UNIT TYPE M12 (B870-21).................... 2-246
2.26.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ................................................................................. 2-246
2.26.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE .................................................................... 2-246
2.27 NFC CARD READER TYPE M29 (D3E3-21) ................................................... 2-249
2.27.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ................................................................................. 2-249
2.27.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE .................................................................... 2-249
2.28 SMART CARD READER BUILT-IN UNIT TYPE M29 ....................................... 2-256
2.28.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ................................................................................. 2-256
2.28.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE (MACHINE USB SLOT) .............................. 2-256
2.28.3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE (SMART OPERATION PANEL USB SLOT) . 2-262
2.29 EXTERNAL KEYBOARD BRACKET TYPE M19 (D3BR-10) ............................ 2-268
2.29.1 COMPONENT CHECK ................................................................................ 2-268
2.29.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE .................................................................... 2-269
2.30 INTERNAL OPTIONS...................................................................................... 2-275
2.30.1 LIST OF SLOTS .......................................................................................... 2-275
2.31 IEEE 1284 INTERFACE BOARD TYPE M19 (D3C0) ....................................... 2-276
2.31.1 ACCESSORIES........................................................................................... 2-276
2.31.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE .................................................................... 2-276
2.32 IEEE 802.11A/G/N INTERFACE UNIT TYPE M19 ........................................... 2-278
2.32.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ................................................................................. 2-278
2.32.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE .................................................................... 2-278
Attaching the boards ....................................................................................... 2-279
Attaching the antenna...................................................................................... 2-280
2.32.3 USER TOOL SETTINGS FOR IEEE 802.11A/G/N ....................................... 2-280
2.32.4 SP MODE SETTINGS FOR IEEE 802.11 WIRELESS LAN .......................... 2-282

SM v D0CP/D0CQ/D0CM/D0CN
 2.33 FILE FORMAT CONVERTER TYPE M19 (D3BR-04) ...................................... 2-283
2.33.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ................................................................................. 2-283
2.33.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE .................................................................... 2-283
2.34 ENHANCED SECURITY HDD OPTION TYPE M10 (D792-09) ........................ 2-284
2.34.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ................................................................................. 2-284
2.34.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE .................................................................... 2-284
After Installing the HDD ................................................................................... 2-287
2.35 USB DEVICE SERVER OPTION TYPE M19 (D3BC-28,-29) ........................... 2-288
2.35.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ................................................................................. 2-288
Interface Board Surface................................................................................... 2-288
2.35.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE .................................................................... 2-289
What Do the LED Indications Mean? ............................................................... 2-294
Notes for Energy Save Mode Setting ............................................................... 2-294
2.35.3 IP ADDRESS SETTING ............................................................................... 2-294
2.36 EXTENDED USB BOARD TYPE M19 (D3BS-01)............................................ 2-296
2.36.1 COMPONENT CHECK ................................................................................ 2-296
2.36.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE .................................................................... 2-296
2.37 SD CARD OPTIONS ....................................................................................... 2-297
2.37.1 SD CARD SLOTS........................................................................................ 2-297
2.37.2 LIST OF SLOTS USED ............................................................................... 2-297
2.38 SD CARD APPLI MOVE .................................................................................. 2-298
2.38.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................................. 2-298
2.38.2 MOVE EXEC ............................................................................................... 2-298
2.38.3 UNDO EXEC ............................................................................................... 2-300
2.39 OCR UNIT TYPE M13 (D3AC-23, -24, -25) ..................................................... 2-301
2.39.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ................................................................................. 2-301
2.39.2 SEARCHABLE PDF FUNCTION OUTLINE ................................................. 2-301
2.39.3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE .................................................................... 2-301
2.39.4 RECOVERY PROCEDURE ......................................................................... 2-303
2.40 POSTSCRIPT3 UNIT TYPE M29 .................................................................... 2-304
2.40.1 COMPONENT CHECK ................................................................................ 2-304
2.40.2 OVERVIEW OF POSTSCRIPT3 UNIT TYPE M29 (ADOBE PS) .................. 2-304
2.40.3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE (ADOBE PS) ............................................... 2-304
Initial Settings for the Printer Driver ................................................................. 2-306
Switching back to Clone PS from Adobe PS .................................................... 2-307
2.41 XPS DIRECT PRINT OPTION TYPE M29 ....................................................... 2-308
2.41.1 COMPONENT CHECK ................................................................................ 2-308
2.41.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE .................................................................... 2-308
2.42 DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY UNIT TYPE M19 (D3BS-03) .......................... 2-310

D0CP/D0CQ/D0CM/D0CN vi SM
 2.42.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................................. 2-310
2.42.2 COMPONENT LIST ..................................................................................... 2-310
2.42.3 BEFORE YOU BEGIN THE PROCEDURE .................................................. 2-310
Seal Check and Removal ................................................................................ 2-311
2.42.4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE .................................................................... 2-312
2.42.5 CONFIGURING "AUTO ERASE MEMORY" (PERFORMED BY THE CUSTOMER)
2-314
2.43 SECURITY SETTING ...................................................................................... 2-316
2.43.1 SECURITY FUNCTION INSTALLATION ...................................................... 2-316
2.43.2 DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY .................................................................. 2-317
Before You Begin the Procedure...................................................................... 2-317
Installation Procedure ...................................................................................... 2-317
Using Auto Erase Memory ............................................................................... 2-318
2.43.3 HDD ENCRYPTION .................................................................................... 2-320
Before You Begin the Procedure:..................................................................... 2-320
Installation Procedure: ..................................................................................... 2-320
Enable Encryption Setting ............................................................................... 2-321
Check the Encryption Settings ......................................................................... 2-322
Backing Up the Encryption Key ....................................................................... 2-324
Encryption Key Restoration ............................................................................. 2-325
2.44 @REMOTE SETTINGS................................................................................... 2-328
2.45 OPERATION GUIDANCE FOR USERS .......................................................... 2-333

3. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ......................................................3-1

3.1.1 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE OF THE PM PARTS ...................................... 3-1
Replacing the Fusing Unit.................................................................................... 3-1
Method 1: By SP3701.......................................................................................... 3-2
Method 2: By [PM Counter / New Unit Set] Menu ................................................ 3-3
3.1.2 AFTER INSTALLING THE NEW PM PARTS.................................................... 3-4
SP descriptions ................................................................................................... 3-4
3.1.3 OPERATION CHECK ...................................................................................... 3-5
3.2 IMAGE QUALITY STANDARDS................................................................................. 3-6
3.2.1 RESOLUTION ................................................................................................. 3-6
3.2.2 MAGNIFICATION RATIO ERROR MARGIN .................................................... 3-6
3.2.3 MAGNIFICATION RATIO ERROR MARGIN DEVIATION................................. 3-6
3.2.4 PITCH ERROR MARGIN ................................................................................. 3-7
3.2.5 PERPENDICULARITY..................................................................................... 3-7
3.2.6 LINEARITY ...................................................................................................... 3-7
3.2.7 PARALLELISM ................................................................................................ 3-7
3.2.8 MISSING IMAGE AREA .................................................................................. 3-7

SM vii D0CP/D0CQ/D0CM/D0CN
 3.2.9 MARGIN POSITION ........................................................................................ 3-8
3.3 PAPER TRANSFER QUALITY STANDARDS ............................................................ 3-9
3.3.1 REGISTRATION .............................................................................................. 3-9
3.3.2 SKEW ............................................................................................................. 3-9
Exposure glass.................................................................................................... 3-9
ADF..................................................................................................................... 3-9

4. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ..........................................4-1

4.1.1 PUSH SWITCH ............................................................................................... 4-1
Characteristics of the Push Switch (DC Switch) ................................................... 4-1
Shutdown Method ............................................................................................... 4-2
Forced Shutdown ................................................................................................ 4-3
4.3 SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS ....................................................................... 4-4
4.3.1 SPECIAL TOOLS ............................................................................................ 4-4
4.3.2 LUBRICANTS.................................................................................................. 4-4
4.4 COVER REMOVAL ORDER ...................................................................................... 4-5
4.4.1 COVER LAYOUTS .......................................................................................... 4-5
4.5 EXTERIOR COVERS ................................................................................................ 4-9
4.5.2 FRONT COVER .............................................................................................. 4-9
4.5.3 CONTROLLER COVER ................................................................................ 4-10
4.5.4 LEFT UPPER COVER ................................................................................... 4-11
4.5.5 LEFT REAR COVER ..................................................................................... 4-11
4.5.6 LEFT COVER ................................................................................................ 4-12
4.5.7 REAR COVER............................................................................................... 4-14
4.5.8 REAR LOWER GAP COVER......................................................................... 4-15
4.5.9 REAR LOWER COVER ................................................................................. 4-15
4.5.10 RIGHT REAR COVER ................................................................................... 4-15
4.5.11 RIGHT UPPER COVER................................................................................. 4-17
4.5.12 RIGHT COVER.............................................................................................. 4-17
4.5.13 UPPER FRONT COVER ............................................................................... 4-19
4.5.14 INVERTER TRAY .......................................................................................... 4-20
4.5.15 PAPER EXIT TRAY........................................................................................ 4-20
4.5.16 PAPER EXIT COVER .................................................................................... 4-20
4.5.17 PAPER EXIT LOWER COVER ...................................................................... 4-21
4.5.18 UPPER INNER COVER ................................................................................ 4-21
4.5.19 PAPER EXIT FRONT COVER ....................................................................... 4-22
4.5.20 INNER COVER ............................................................................................. 4-23
4.5.21 TONER SUPPLY HOUSING .......................................................................... 4-23
4.6 SMART OPERATION PANEL .................................................................................. 4-26
4.6.1 OPERATION PANEL UNIT ............................................................................ 4-26

D0CP/D0CQ/D0CM/D0CN viii SM
 4.6.2 USB CABLE / HARNESS .............................................................................. 4-29
4.7 ADF ......................................................................................................................... 4-31
4.7.1 ADF REMOVAL ............................................................................................. 4-31
4.8 SCANNER UNIT ...................................................................................................... 4-35
4.8.1 BEFORE YOU BEGIN ................................................................................... 4-35
4.8.2 SCANNER EXTERIOR .................................................................................. 4-35
Scanner Front Cover ......................................................................................... 4-35
Scanner Right Cover ......................................................................................... 4-36
Scanner Left Cover ........................................................................................... 4-36
Scanner Upper Cover ........................................................................................ 4-37
4.8.3 EXPOSURE GLASS ...................................................................................... 4-37
4.8.4 SCANNER CARRIAGE ................................................................................. 4-39
Cleaning the scanner carriage mirror ................................................................. 4-43
4.8.5 SCANNER MOTOR ....................................................................................... 4-45
4.8.6 ORIGINAL SIZE SENSORS (APS) ................................................................ 4-46
4.8.7 SCANNER HP SENSOR ............................................................................... 4-47
4.8.8 ARDF/PLATEN COVER SENSOR ................................................................. 4-48
4.8.9 SCANNER FFC ............................................................................................. 4-48
When Changing the FFC ................................................................................... 4-49
4.8.10 MODIFYING THE SCANNER (CONTACT/CONTACTLESS) WHEN USING THE
ARDF 4-51
Procedure for the ADF ....................................................................................... 4-51
Procedure for the Scanner................................................................................. 4-54
4.8.11 MODIFYING THE SCANNER (CONTACT/CONTACTLESS) WHEN USING THE
SPDF 4-54
Procedure for the SPDF .................................................................................... 4-54
Procedure for the Scanner................................................................................. 4-56
4.9 LASER UNIT ........................................................................................................... 4-57
4.9.1 CAUTION DECAL LOCATION ....................................................................... 4-57
4.9.2 LASER UNIT ................................................................................................. 4-57
Removing the Laser Unit ................................................................................... 4-57
Installing a New Laser Unit ................................................................................ 4-58
After Installing the New Laser Unit..................................................................... 4-60
4.9.3 QUENCHING LAMP ...................................................................................... 4-61
4.9.4 PCL (PRE CLEANING LIGHT) ...................................................................... 4-61
4.10 PCDU ................................................................................................................ 4-62
4.10.1 PCDU ............................................................................................................ 4-62
4.10.2 PCU/DEVELOPMENT UNIT .......................................................................... 4-63
Before Replacing the PCU or Development Unit................................................ 4-63

SM ix D0CP/D0CQ/D0CM/D0CN
 Replacement Procedure .................................................................................... 4-64
Installing a PCU................................................................................................. 4-65
Installing a Development Unit ............................................................................ 4-65
4.10.3 OPC DRUM ................................................................................................... 4-66
4.10.4 CHARGE ROLLER, CLEANING ROLLER ..................................................... 4-67
4.10.5 PICK-OFF PAWLS......................................................................................... 4-68
4.10.6 CLEANING BLADE ....................................................................................... 4-69
4.10.7 DEVELOPER ................................................................................................ 4-70
4.10.8 DEVELOPMENT FILTERS ............................................................................ 4-75
4.10.9 TD SENSOR ................................................................................................. 4-76
4.10.10 DEVELOPMENT MIXING AUGER BEARINGS ....................................... 4-77
4.10.11 DEVELOPMENT MIXING AUGER (L / R) ................................................ 4-78
4.11WASTE TONER....................................................................................................... 4-80
4.11.1 WASTE TONER BOTTLE .............................................................................. 4-80
4.11.2 TONER COLLECTION FULL SENSOR ......................................................... 4-81
4.11.3 RECYCLING SHUTTER ................................................................................ 4-81
4.12 TRANSFER UNIT.............................................................................................. 4-85
4.12.1 TRANSFER UNIT .......................................................................................... 4-85
4.12.2 TRANSFER ROLLER UNIT ........................................................................... 4-87
4.12.3 ID SENSOR................................................................................................... 4-88
Before Replacing the ID Sensor ........................................................................ 4-88
Replacement Procedure .................................................................................... 4-88
4.12.4 TRANSFER UNIT OPEN/CLOSED LED ........................................................ 4-89
4.12.5 TEMPERATURE/HUMIDITY SENSOR .......................................................... 4-90
4.12.6 FUSING ENTRANCE SENSOR..................................................................... 4-91
4.12.7 TRANSFER UNIT OPEN/CLOSED SENSOR ................................................ 4-91
4.13 DRIVE UNIT ...................................................................................................... 4-92
4.13.1 DRUM/WASTE TONER MOTOR ................................................................... 4-92
4.13.2 DEVELOPMENT MOTOR ............................................................................. 4-92
4.13.3 FUSING/PAPER EXIT MOTOR (MP 2555 SP/3055 SP/3555 SP ONLY)........ 4-93
4.13.4 FUSING MOTOR (MP 4055 SP/5055 SP/6055 SP ONLY) ............................. 4-93
4.13.5 PAPER EXIT MOTOR (MP 4055 SP/5055 SP/6055 SP ONLY) ...................... 4-93
4.13.6 REGISTRATION MOTOR .............................................................................. 4-94
4.13.7 PAPER FEED MOTOR .................................................................................. 4-94
4.13.8 VERTICAL TRANSPORT MOTOR................................................................. 4-94
4.13.9 TRANSFER ROLLER CONTACT MOTOR .................................................... 4-95
4.13.10 TONER HOPPER.................................................................................... 4-95
4.13.11 TONER SUPPLY MOTOR ....................................................................... 4-97
4.14 FUSING UNIT ................................................................................................. 4-100

D0CP/D0CQ/D0CM/D0CN x SM
 4.14.1 FUSING UNIT ............................................................................................. 4-100
Replacement ................................................................................................... 4-100
4.14.2 FUSING ENTRANCE GUIDE PLATE .......................................................... 4-103
Cleaning the Fusing Entrance Guide Plate ...................................................... 4-103
4.14.3 FUSING EXIT GUIDE PLATE ...................................................................... 4-104
4.14.4 FUSING UPPER COVER ............................................................................ 4-104
4.14.5 FUSING LOWER COVER ........................................................................... 4-105
4.14.6 HEATING SLEEVE BELT UNIT ................................................................... 4-106
Replacement ................................................................................................... 4-107
To Clear SC544-02 or SC554-02 ..................................................................... 4-108
4.14.7 PRESSURE ROLLER AND PRESSURE ROLLER BEARINGS ................... 4-109
Adjustment before Replacing the Pressure Roller and Pressure Roller Bearings4-109
Replacement ................................................................................................... 4-109
4.14.8 THERMOSTAT UNIT ....................................................................................4-111
4.14.9 FUSING ROLLER TEMPERATURE SENSORS ...........................................4-111
4.14.10 PRESSURE ROLLER TEMPERATURE SENSORS ...............................4-111
4.14.11 FUSING THERMOPILES ...................................................................... 4-112
4.14.12 NOTES WHEN REASSEMBLING THE FUSING UNIT .......................... 4-112
4.15 PAPER EXIT ................................................................................................... 4-114
4.15.1 PAPER EXIT UNIT ...................................................................................... 4-114
4.15.2 PAPER EXIT SWITCHING SOLENOID ....................................................... 4-114
4.15.3 PAPER EXIT SENSOR ................................................................................ 4-115
4.15.4 REVERSE SENSOR ................................................................................... 4-116
4.15.5 PAPER EXIT FULL SENSOR ...................................................................... 4-117
4.15.6 REVERSE MOTOR ..................................................................................... 4-117
4.15.7 FUSING EXIT SENSOR .............................................................................. 4-119
4.16 PAPER FEED .................................................................................................. 4-120
4.16.1 PAPER FEED UNIT ..................................................................................... 4-120
1st Paper Feed Unit ........................................................................................ 4-120
2nd Paper Feed Unit ....................................................................................... 4-121
4.16.2 PAPER DUST COLLECTION UNIT ............................................................. 4-123
4.16.3 PICK-UP ROLLER, PAPER FEED ROLLER, SEPARATION ROLLER, TORQUE
LIMITER ................................................................................................................ 4-125
4.16.4 1ST / 2ND PAPER FEED TRAY LIFT MOTOR ............................................. 4-126
4.16.5 1ST / 2ND PAPER FEED SENSOR ............................................................. 4-127
4.16.6 VERTICAL TRANSPORT SENSOR ............................................................. 4-129
4.16.7 LIMIT SENSOR ........................................................................................... 4-130
4.16.8 1ST PAPER END SENSOR / 2ND PAPER END SENSOR .......................... 4-130
4.16.9 REGISTRATION SENSOR .......................................................................... 4-131

SM xi D0CP/D0CQ/D0CM/D0CN
 4.17 DUPLEX UNIT ................................................................................................ 4-133
4.17.1 DUPLEX/BY-PASS MOTOR ........................................................................ 4-133
4.17.2 DUPLEX ENTRANCE MOTOR.................................................................... 4-134
4.17.3 DUPLEX ENTRANCE SENSOR .................................................................. 4-135
4.17.4 DUPLEX EXIT SENSOR ............................................................................. 4-136
4.18 BYPASS TRAY UNIT ....................................................................................... 4-138
4.18.1 BYPASS TRAY ............................................................................................ 4-138
4.18.2 BYPASS PAPER END SENSOR ................................................................. 4-140
4.18.3 BYPASS PICK-UP ROLLER ........................................................................ 4-141
4.18.4 BYPASS PAPER FEED ROLLER ................................................................ 4-141
4.18.5 BYPASS SEPARATION ROLLER ................................................................ 4-142
4.18.6 TORQUE LIMITER ...................................................................................... 4-142
4.18.7 BYPASS WIDTH SENSOR .......................................................................... 4-143
4.18.8 BYPASS LENGTH SENSOR ....................................................................... 4-145
4.19 PCBS AND OTHER ITEMS ............................................................................. 4-146
4.19.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................................. 4-146
Around the Controller Box ............................................................................... 4-146
Around the Power Supply Box ......................................................................... 4-146
4.19.2 CONTROLLER BOX COVER ...................................................................... 4-147
4.19.3 IPU .............................................................................................................. 4-147
4.19.4 BCU ............................................................................................................ 4-148
When installing the new BCU .......................................................................... 4-148
Replacing the NVRAM (EEPROM) on the BCU ............................................... 4-149
4.19.5 CONTROLLER BOARD .............................................................................. 4-150
Replacing the NVRAM on the Controller Board ............................................... 4-152
4.19.6 HDD ............................................................................................................ 4-156
Adjustment after replacement .......................................................................... 4-157
4.19.7 HVPS .......................................................................................................... 4-157
4.19.8 PSU............................................................................................................. 4-157
4.19.9 HEATER BOARD ........................................................................................ 4-159
4.19.10 CONTROLLER BOX ............................................................................. 4-159
4.19.11 IMAGING TEMPERATURE SENSOR (THERMISTOR) ......................... 4-162
4.19.12 DC SW BOARD .................................................................................... 4-163
4.20 FANS/FILTERS ............................................................................................... 4-164
4.20.1 ODOR FILTER............................................................................................. 4-164
4.20.2 PARTICULATE FILTER (MP 4055 SP/5055 SP/6055 SP ONLY).................. 4-165
4.20.3 DUST FILTER.............................................................................................. 4-166
4.20.4 DEVELOPMENT EXHAUST FAN ................................................................ 4-167
4.20.5 PAPER EXIT COOLING FAN....................................................................... 4-168

D0CP/D0CQ/D0CM/D0CN xii SM
 4.20.6 FUSING FAN ............................................................................................... 4-169
4.20.7 DEVELOPMENT BEARING COOLING FAN (MP 4055 SP/5055 SP/6055 SP
ONLY).................................................................................................................... 4-170
4.20.8 PSU COOLING FAN (MP 4055 SP/5055 SP/6055 SP ONLY) ...................... 4-172
4.21 ADJUSTMENT AFTER REPLACEMENT......................................................... 4-173
4.21.1 PRINTING ................................................................................................... 4-173
Registration - Leading Edge/Side-to-Side ........................................................ 4-173
Blank Margin ................................................................................................... 4-175
Main Scan Magnification ................................................................................. 4-177
Parallelogram Image Adjustment ..................................................................... 4-177
4.21.2 SCANNING ................................................................................................. 4-178
Registration: Platen Mode ............................................................................... 4-178
Magnification ................................................................................................... 4-179
4.21.3 ADF IMAGE ADJUSTMENT ........................................................................ 4-179
ARDF side-to-side, leading edge registration and trailing edge ........................ 4-179
Sub Scan Magnification ................................................................................... 4-180

5. SYSTEM MAINTENANCE ..............................................................5-1

5.1.1 ENTERING SP MODE..................................................................................... 5-1
5.1.2 EXITING SP MODE ......................................................................................... 5-2
5.1.3 TYPES OF SP MODES ................................................................................... 5-2
SP Mode Button Summary .................................................................................. 5-3
Switching Between SP Mode and Copy Mode for Test Printing ............................ 5-3
Selecting the Program Number............................................................................ 5-4
Service Mode Lock/Unlock .................................................................................. 5-4
5.1.4 REMARKS ...................................................................................................... 5-5
Others ................................................................................................................. 5-5
5.2 FIRMWARE UPDATE (REMOTE FIRMWARE UPDATE) ........................................... 5-7
5.2.2 RFU PERFORMABLE CONDITION................................................................. 5-7
5.3 FIRMWARE UPDATE (SD CARD) ............................................................................. 5-8
5.3.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................................... 5-8
5.3.2 FIRMWARE TYPES ........................................................................................ 5-8
5.3.3 PROCEDURE ................................................................................................. 5-9
Preparation........................................................................................................ 5-10
Update procedure.............................................................................................. 5-10
5.3.4 ERROR SCREENS DURING UPDATING...................................................... 5-13
5.4 FIRMWARE UPDATE (SMART FIRMWARE UPDATE) ............................................ 5-18
5.4.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................................... 5-18
5.4.2 IMMEDIATE UPDATE .................................................................................... 5-19
5.4.3 UPDATE AT THE NEXT VISIT (RESERVE) ................................................... 5-22

SM xiii D0CP/D0CQ/D0CM/D0CN
 How to Set the Machine to Download Firmware Later (RESERVE).................... 5-22
How to Check if the Firmware Downloaded with Reserve .................................. 5-24
How to Install Firmware Downloaded with Reserve ........................................... 5-25
5.4.4 UPDATE VIA SD CARD ................................................................................. 5-28
5.5 FIRMWARE UPDATE (AUTO REMOTE FIRMWARE UPDATE) .............................. 5-30
5.5.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................................... 5-30
5.5.2 DOWNLOADING AND UPDATING PROCESS .............................................. 5-31
Downloads the latest package ........................................................................... 5-31
Judgement of ARFU .......................................................................................... 5-32
Update Process................................................................................................. 5-34
5.5.3 RELATED SP ................................................................................................ 5-36
5.6 UPDATING JAVAVM ................................................................................................ 5-40
5.6.1 CREATING AN SD CARD FOR UPDATING .................................................. 5-40
Updating Procedure .......................................................................................... 5-40
List of Error Messages....................................................................................... 5-41
5.7 NVRAM DATA UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD ..................................................................... 5-43
5.7.1 UPLOADING CONTENT OF NVRAM TO AN SD CARD ................................ 5-43
5.7.2 DOWNLOADING AN SD CARD TO NVRAM ................................................. 5-44
5.8 UP/SP DATA IMPORT/EXPORT .............................................................................. 5-45
5.8.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................................... 5-45
Import/export conditions .................................................................................... 5-45
5.8.2 UP DATA IMPORT/EXPORT.......................................................................... 5-45
Data that can be imported and exported ............................................................ 5-45
Data that cannot be imported or exported .......................................................... 5-45
Exporting Device Information............................................................................. 5-46
Importing Device Information ............................................................................. 5-47
5.8.3 SP DATA IMPORT/EXPORT .......................................................................... 5-48
Data that can be imported and exported ............................................................ 5-48
Exporting Device Information............................................................................. 5-48
Importing Device Information ............................................................................. 5-49
5.8.4 POSSIBLE SOLUTIONS FOR IMPORT/EXPORT PROBLEMS ..................... 5-50
5.9 ADDRESS BOOK UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD ............................................................... 5-53
5.9.1 INFORMATION LIST ..................................................................................... 5-53
5.9.2 DOWNLOAD ................................................................................................. 5-53
5.9.3 UPLOAD ....................................................................................................... 5-54
5.9.4 SPECIFICATION ........................................................................................... 5-55
5.10 CAPTURING THE DEVICE LOGS .................................................................... 5-56
5.10.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................................... 5-56
Security of the Operation Log ............................................................................ 5-57

D0CP/D0CQ/D0CM/D0CN xiv SM
 5.10.2 RETRIEVING THE DEVICE LOGS VIA OPERATION PANEL ........................ 5-58
Procedure for Retrieving the Device Log with SD Card ...................................... 5-58
5.10.3 RETRIEVING THE DEVICE LOGS VIA WEB IMAGE MONITOR ................... 5-61
5.11SMC LIST CARD SAVE FUNCTION ........................................................................ 5-64
5.11.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................................... 5-64
SMC List Card Save .......................................................................................... 5-64
5.11.2 PROCEDURE ............................................................................................... 5-64
5.11.3 FILE NAMES OF THE SAVED SMC LISTS ................................................... 5-66
5.11.4 ERROR MESSAGES..................................................................................... 5-67
5.12 CARD SAVE FUNCTION................................................................................... 5-68
5.12.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................................... 5-68
Card Save: ........................................................................................................ 5-68
5.12.2 PROCEDURE ............................................................................................... 5-68
5.12.3 ERROR MESSAGES..................................................................................... 5-71

6. TROUBLESHOOTING ....................................................................6-1
6.1.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS ........................................................................ 6-1
6.1.2 SC LOGGING.................................................................................................. 6-2
6.1.3 SC AUTOMATIC REBOOT .............................................................................. 6-2
6.1.4 SC MANUAL REBOOT .................................................................................... 6-5
6.2 SC TABLES: SC1XX (SCANNING) ............................................................................ 6-6
6.2.1 SC101-01 TO SC195-00.................................................................................. 6-6
6.3 SC TABLES: SC2XX (EXPOSURE) ......................................................................... 6-14
6.3.1 SC202-00 TO SC272-10................................................................................ 6-14
6.4 SC TABLES: SC3XX (IMAGE PROCESSING 1: CHARGE, DEVELOPMENT)......... 6-18
6.4.1 SC302-00 TO SC396-01................................................................................ 6-18
6.5 SC TABLES: SC4XX (IMAGE PROCESSING 2: AROUND THE DRUM).................. 6-22
6.5.1 SC440-00 TO SC498-00................................................................................ 6-22
6.6 SC TABLES: SC5XX (PAPER FEED AND FUSING) ................................................ 6-25
6.6.1 SC501-01 TO SC589-02................................................................................ 6-25
6.7 SC TABLES: SC6XX (COMMUNICATION AND OTHERS)....................................... 6-60
6.7.1 SC620-01 TO SC687-00................................................................................ 6-60
6.8 SC TABLES: SC7XX (PERIPHERALS) .................................................................... 6-69
6.8.1 SC700-01 TO SC792-00................................................................................ 6-69
6.9 SC TABLES: SC8XX.............................................................................................. 6-101
6.9.1 SC816 TO SC899 ........................................................................................ 6-101
6.10 SC TABLES: SC9XX (OTHERS) ..................................................................... 6-122
6.10.1 SC900-00 TO SC995-04.............................................................................. 6-122
6.11 WHEN SC549 IS DISPLAYED ............................................................................... 6-126
6.11.1 TROUBLESHOOTING FLOWCHART.......................................................... 6-126

SM xv D0CP/D0CQ/D0CM/D0CN
 6.11.2 FUSING SHIELD CHECK ............................................................................ 6-127
6.11.3 SOLUTION .................................................................................................. 6-130
6.12 JAM DETECTION ........................................................................................... 6-131
6.12.1 PAPER JAM DISPLAY ................................................................................. 6-131
6.12.2 JAM CODES AND DISPLAY CODES .......................................................... 6-131
Main Machine .................................................................................................. 6-132
Paper Feed Unit PB3210/PB3220 ................................................................... 6-133
Paper Feed Unit PB3150 ................................................................................. 6-133
LCIT RT3030 ................................................................................................... 6-133
ARDF DF3090................................................................................................. 6-134
SPDF DF3100 ................................................................................................. 6-134
Booklet Finisher SR3240 ................................................................................. 6-134
Finisher SR3230.............................................................................................. 6-136
Booklet Finisher SR3220 / Finisher SR 3210 ................................................... 6-138
Internal Finisher SR3180 ................................................................................. 6-139
Internal Finisher SR3130 ................................................................................. 6-139
Internal Multi-fold Unit FD3000 ........................................................................ 6-140
6.12.3 SENSOR LOCATIONS ................................................................................ 6-141
6.12.4 PAPER SIZE CODES .................................................................................. 6-142
6.13 OTHER PROBLEMS ....................................................................................... 6-143
6.13.1 WHEN SC670 IS DISPLAYED ..................................................................... 6-143
6.13.2 WHEN SC672 (CONTROLLER START UP ERROR) IS DISPLAYED .......... 6-143
Symptom: ........................................................................................................ 6-143
Cause:............................................................................................................. 6-144
Solution: .......................................................................................................... 6-144
[A]: LEDs on the controller board ..................................................................... 6-146
[B]: Abnormal mode: LEDs on the controller board .......................................... 6-146
[C]: Reconnecting and replacing the USB cable .............................................. 6-147
[D]: Replacing the Memory .............................................................................. 6-149
[E]: CMOS clear .............................................................................................. 6-149
[F]: Fuse on the IPU ........................................................................................ 6-150
[G]: Replacing the USB cable and the operation panel .................................... 6-150
6.13.3 MARKS (VERTICAL STREAKS) ON PRINTS AND COPIES DUE TO SCANNING
PROBLEMS........................................................................................................... 6-156
Converting the ARDF DF3090 to Contact Scanning......................................... 6-157
Converting the SPDF3100 to Contact Scanning .............................................. 6-159
6.13.4 FINISHER REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT ................................................ 6-161
For SR3240/SR3230 ....................................................................................... 6-161
For SR3220/SR3210 ....................................................................................... 6-163

D0CP/D0CQ/D0CM/D0CN xvi SM
 6.13.5 STACKING PROBLEM AT THE 1000-SHEET FINISHER ............................ 6-166
Installation procedure for attaching the sheet................................................... 6-166
Installation procedure for attaching the auxiliary tray to the 1000-sheet finisher6-167
6.13.6 FINISHER JOGGER PROBLEM.................................................................. 6-168
Finisher Jogger Problem (For Booklet Finisher SR3220 (D3B9) / Finisher SR3210
(D3B8)) ........................................................................................................... 6-168
6.13.7 EARLY PAPER TRAY FULL DETECTION MYLAR FOR INTERNAL FINISHER
SR3130 (D690) ...................................................................................................... 6-170
Attaching the Mylar.......................................................................................... 6-170
6.13.8 PAPER CURL PROBLEM FOR SR3180 ...................................................... 6-173
6.13.9 MAXIMUM NUMBER OF SHEETS FOR STAPLING AND WHAT HAPPENS
WHEN THE JOB HAS TOO MANY PAGES ........................................................... 6-175
Behavior: When the number of sheets exceeds the maximum staple capability6-175
Specifications: Maximum sheet capability for staple jobs ................................. 6-176
6.13.10 FUSING OFFSET OCCURS AT THE EDGE OR CENTER OF THE PAPER 6-
177
6.13.11 TROUBLESHOOTING FOR TONER DENSITY ..................................... 6-180
6.13.12 TROUBLESHOOTING FOR BLOTS ON MIDDLE THICK GLOSSY OR
COATED PAPER ................................................................................................... 6-180
6.14 BLOWN FUSE CONDITION ............................................................................ 6-182

7. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS...........................................................7-1
7.1.1 CHANGES FROM THE PREVIOUS MACHINE ............................................... 7-1
Scanner............................................................................................................... 7-1
Image Processing................................................................................................ 7-2
Toner Supply ....................................................................................................... 7-2
Feed / Transport Part........................................................................................... 7-3
Electrical parts..................................................................................................... 7-4
Exterior Cover/Air Flows (Fan Control) ................................................................ 7-4
Others, Options ................................................................................................... 7-4
7.2 OVERVIEW ............................................................................................................... 7-6
7.2.1 PARTS LAYOUT .............................................................................................. 7-6
Scanner Unit ....................................................................................................... 7-6
Paper Feed Unit .................................................................................................. 7-7
Laser Unit, PCDU ................................................................................................ 7-8
Fusing Unit .......................................................................................................... 7-9
Waste Toner Bottle ............................................................................................ 7-10
Duplex/Bypass Unit ........................................................................................... 7-11
Paper Exit/Reverse Unit .................................................................................... 7-12
Air Flow ............................................................................................................. 7-13

SM xvii D0CP/D0CQ/D0CM/D0CN
 Drive Unit .......................................................................................................... 7-14
Electrical Components....................................................................................... 7-15
7.3 SCANNING.............................................................................................................. 7-16
7.3.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................................... 7-16
Reading system................................................................................................. 7-16
Scanner............................................................................................................. 7-17
7.3.2 MECHANISM ................................................................................................ 7-17
Scanner drive .................................................................................................... 7-17
Operation Flowchart .......................................................................................... 7-18
Scanner carriage storage control ....................................................................... 7-18
Document size detection ................................................................................... 7-19
Improved tolerance to black lines when paper passes through ARDF/SPDF...... 7-22
Difference between Non-contact Transport and Contact Transport in DF Scanning 7-
24
Anti-Condensation Heater ................................................................................. 7-25
7.4 IMAGE PROCESSING ............................................................................................ 7-26
7.4.1 STRUCTURAL BLOCK DIAGRAM ................................................................ 7-26
7.4.2 MECHANISM ................................................................................................ 7-28
SBU .................................................................................................................. 7-28
IPU .................................................................................................................... 7-28
7.5 PLOTTER PROCESS .............................................................................................. 7-30
7.5.1 LASER EXPOSURE ...................................................................................... 7-30
Overview ........................................................................................................... 7-30
Auto Power Control (APC) ................................................................................. 7-31
LD Safety Switch ............................................................................................... 7-32
7.5.2 PCU .............................................................................................................. 7-33
Overview ........................................................................................................... 7-33
OPC Drum Drive Mechanism ............................................................................ 7-34
Drum Charge..................................................................................................... 7-34
Drum Cleaning, Toner Discarding ...................................................................... 7-35
ID Sensor .......................................................................................................... 7-35
7.5.3 DEVELOPMENT ........................................................................................... 7-36
Overview ........................................................................................................... 7-36
Development Mechanism .................................................................................. 7-37
Development Bias ............................................................................................. 7-37
Drive ................................................................................................................. 7-38
Toner Supply ..................................................................................................... 7-38
Toner Density Control ........................................................................................ 7-39
Toner End Detection .......................................................................................... 7-40

D0CP/D0CQ/D0CM/D0CN xviii SM
 Toner End Recovery .......................................................................................... 7-40
7.5.4 TRANSFER AND SEPARATION .................................................................... 7-41
Overview ........................................................................................................... 7-41
Transfer Roller Unit Charge ............................................................................... 7-42
Transfer Roller Contact and Release Mechanism .............................................. 7-42
7.5.5 FUSING......................................................................................................... 7-43
Overview ........................................................................................................... 7-43
Mechanism ........................................................................................................ 7-44
7.5.6 WASTE TONER ............................................................................................ 7-50
Toner Discarding ............................................................................................... 7-51
Waste Toner Bottle ............................................................................................ 7-52
7.6 FEED/ TRANSPORT PART ..................................................................................... 7-54
7.6.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................................... 7-54
7.6.2 FEED / TRANSPORT PART .......................................................................... 7-54
Tray bottom plate lifting ..................................................................................... 7-54
Paper feed mechanism...................................................................................... 7-56
Paper feed transport mechanism ....................................................................... 7-57
Paper size detection (1st / 2nd paper tray) ........................................................ 7-58
Remaining paper detection ................................................................................ 7-59
Paper end detection .......................................................................................... 7-60
Paper feed drive ................................................................................................ 7-60
Paper powder removal mechanism.................................................................... 7-62
7.6.3 BYPASS FEED SECTION ............................................................................. 7-62
Bypass feed paper/separation mechanism ........................................................ 7-63
Bypass feed paper size detection ...................................................................... 7-63
Bypass feed paper end detection ...................................................................... 7-63
Bypass paper feed drive .................................................................................... 7-64
7.6.4 DUPLEX SECTION ....................................................................................... 7-64
Transport reverse mechanism ........................................................................... 7-65
Duplex drive ...................................................................................................... 7-65
Interleave mechanism ....................................................................................... 7-66
7.6.5 PAPER EXIT UNIT ........................................................................................ 7-67
Delivery location change-over ........................................................................... 7-67
Paper Exit Full and Jam Detection ..................................................................... 7-69
7.6.6 PAPER PATH AND SENSOR LOCATIONS.................................................... 7-70
Intervals of Rollers............................................................................................. 7-70
Intervals of Sensors........................................................................................... 7-71
7.7 AIR FLOWS (FAN CONTROL)................................................................................. 7-72
7.7.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................................... 7-72

SM xix D0CP/D0CQ/D0CM/D0CN
 7.7.2 MECHANISM ................................................................................................ 7-74
Cooling of PSU.................................................................................................. 7-74
Cooling of Development Unit ............................................................................. 7-75
Cooling of PCDU ............................................................................................... 7-75
Cooling of Fusing Unit ....................................................................................... 7-75
Crisis management when temperature rises in the MFP .................................... 7-75
7.8 ELECTRICAL PARTS .............................................................................................. 7-77
7.8.1 BLOCK DIAGRAM......................................................................................... 7-77
7.8.2 BOARD OUTLINE ......................................................................................... 7-79
Controller .......................................................................................................... 7-79
SBU .................................................................................................................. 7-79
LDB ................................................................................................................... 7-79
BCU .................................................................................................................. 7-79
IPU .................................................................................................................... 7-79
FCU .................................................................................................................. 7-79
OPU .................................................................................................................. 7-79
HVPS ................................................................................................................ 7-79
PSU .................................................................................................................. 7-79
7.8.3 FEED TRAY DEHUMIDIFIER HEATER, SCANNER/PCDU ANTI-CONDENSATION
HEATER .................................................................................................................. 7-80
Circuit configuration........................................................................................... 7-80
7.9 ONE-WAY CLUTCHES ............................................................................................ 7-82
7.9.1 PAPER FEED/BYPASS ................................................................................. 7-82
7.9.2 DUPLEX ........................................................................................................ 7-82
7.10 PROCESS CONTROL ...................................................................................... 7-84
7.10.1 IMAGE DENSITY CONTROL (PROCESS CONTROL) .................................. 7-84
Outline............................................................................................................... 7-84
Potential Control ................................................................................................ 7-85
Vtref Compensation........................................................................................... 7-87
TD Sensor Initial Setting When a New PCDU Is Installed .................................. 7-87
7.10.2 MECHANISM ................................................................................................ 7-88
Sensor Composition .......................................................................................... 7-88
ID Sensor .......................................................................................................... 7-88
TD Sensor ......................................................................................................... 7-88
7.11ENERGY SAVE ....................................................................................................... 7-90
7.11.1 ENERGY SAVER MODES............................................................................. 7-90
Setting items that are related to Energy Saving ................................................. 7-90
Recovery Time/Reduced Electrical Consumption............................................... 7-91
7.11.2 POWER STATES OF THIS MACHINE........................................................... 7-92

D0CP/D0CQ/D0CM/D0CN xx SM
 7.11.3 VERIFICATION OF UP TIME FOR EACH ENERGY SAVING STATE ............ 7-94
7.11.4 CHECKING THE UP TIME BY DEVICE STATE ............................................. 7-95
7.11.5 RECOMMENDATION .................................................................................... 7-96
7.12 ADOBE PS VS. CLONE PS .............................................................................. 7-97
7.12.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................................... 7-97
7.12.2 HOW TO DISTINGUISH ADOBE PS FROM CLONE PS ............................... 7-97
7.12.3 DIFFERENCE IN DEVICE FONTS .............................................................. 7-100
Font Change Confirmation Screen .................................................................. 7-101
List of fonts and their replacements (Adobe PS -> Clone PS) .......................... 7-102
7.12.4 DIFFERENCES IN DRIVER FUNCTIONS ................................................... 7-106

SM xxi D0CP/D0CQ/D0CM/D0CN
 Product Overview

1. PRODUCT INFORMATION

Information
Product

SM 1-1 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Product Overview

1.1 PRODUCT OVERVIEW

1.1.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT

No. Description No. Description

1 Scanner Unit 7 Bypass Tray Unit
2 Reverse Unit 8 Vertical Transport
3 Paper Exit Unit 9 Paper Feed Unit
4 Fusing Unit 10 Laser Unit
5 OPC Drum 11 Toner Supply Unit
6 Duplex Unit

SM 1-2 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Product Overview

1.1.2 PAPER PATH

Information
Product
No. Description No. Description
1 ARDF 4 Booklet Finisher
2 LCIT 5 Bridge Unit
3 LCIT (Tandem Tray)

SM 1-3 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Product Overview

No. Description No. Description

1 ARDF 3 Paper Feed Unit
2 LCIT 4 Internal Finisher

No. Description No. Description

1 Platen Cover 3 Side Tray Unit

SM 1-4 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Product Overview

No. Description No. Description

2 Paper Feed Unit 4 1 Bin Tray Unit

1.1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT

Information
Product
No. Description No. Description
1 Scanner motor 9 Development motor
2 Paper exit motor (MP 4055 SP/5055 SP/6055 SP only) 10 Vertical transport motor
3 Reverse motor 11 Duplex/bypass motor
4 Fusing motor (MP 4055 SP/5055 SP/6055 SP only) 12 Paper feed motor
Fusing/paper exit motor (MP 2555 SP/3055 SP/3555 SP
only)
5 Drum/waste toner motor 13 Paper feed tray lift
motor
6 Duplex entrance motor 14 Polygon motor
7 Transfer roller contact motor 15 Toner supply motor
8 Registration motor

SM 1-5 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Machine Codes and Peripherals Configuration

1.2 MACHINE CODES AND PERIPHERALS

CONFIGURATION
1.2.1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND OPTIONS

External Options for MP2555/MP3055/MP3555 (mainly Europe)

No. Item Machine Code

1 Paper Feed Unit PB3150 D694
2 Caster Table Type M3 D178
3 LCIT PB3170 D695
4 LCIT RT3030 D696
5 Paper Feed Unit PB3210 D787
6 1 Bin Tray BN3110 D3CQ
7 Bridge Unit BU3070 D685
8 Internal Shift Tray SH3070 D691
9 Side Tray Type M3 D725
10 Internal Finisher SR3130 D690
11 Internal Finisher SR3180 D766
12 Finisher SR3210 D3B8

SM 1-6 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Machine Codes and Peripherals Configuration

No. Item Machine Code

13 Booklet Finisher SR3220 D3B9

External Options for MP2555/MP3055/MP3555 (mainly Asia)

Information
Product
No. Item Machine Code
1 SPDF DF3100 D3B0
2 ARDF DF3090 D779
3 Platen Cover PN2000 D700
4 Paper Feed Unit PB3150 D694
5 Caster Table Type M3 D178
6 LCIT PB3230 D695
7 LCIT RT3030 D696
8 Paper Feed Unit PB3220 D787
9 1 Bin Tray BN3110 D3CQ
10 Bridge Unit BU3070 D685
11 Internal Shift Tray SH3070 D691
12 Side Tray Type M3 D725
13 Internal Finisher SR3130 D690
14 Internal Finisher SR3180 D766
15 Finisher SR3210 D3B8
16 Booklet Finisher SR3220 D3B9

SM 1-7 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Machine Codes and Peripherals Configuration

External Options for MP2555/MP3055/MP3555 (mainly North America)

No. Item Machine Code

1 SPDF DF3100 D3B0
2 ARDF DF3090 D779
3 Handset HS3020 D739
4 Paper Feed Unit PB3150 D694
5 Caster Table Type M3 D178
6 LCIT PB3230 D695
7 LCIT RT3030 D696
8 Paper Feed Unit PB3220 D787
9 1 Bin Tray BN3110 D3CQ
10 Bridge Unit BU3070 D685
11 Internal Shift Tray SH3070 D691
12 Side Tray Type M3 D725
13 Internal Finisher SR3130 D690
14 Internal Finisher SR3180 D766
15 Finisher SR3210 D3B8
16 Booklet Finisher SR3220 D3B9

SM 1-8 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Machine Codes and Peripherals Configuration

External Options for MP4055/MP5055 (mainly Europe)

Information
Product
No. Item Machine Code
1 Paper Feed Unit PB3150 D694
2 Caster Table Type M3 D178
3 LCIT PB3170 D695
4 LCIT RT3030 D696
5 Paper Feed Unit PB3210 D787
6 1 Bin Tray BN3110 D3CQ
7 Internal Multi-Fold Unit FD3000 M482
8 Bridge Unit BU3070 D685
9 Internal Shift Tray SH3070 D691
10 Side Tray Type M3 D725
11 Internal Finisher SR3130 D690
12 Finisher SR3210 D3B8
13 Booklet Finisher SR3220 D3B9
14 Finisher SR3230 D3BA
15 Booklet Finisher SR3240 D3BB

SM 1-9 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Machine Codes and Peripherals Configuration

External Options for MP4055/MP5055 (mainly Asia)

No. Item Machine Code

1 SPDF DF3100 D3B0
2 ARDF DF3090 D779
3 Platen Cover PN2000 D700
4 Paper Feed Unit PB3150 D694
5 Caster Table Type M3 D178
6 LCIT PB3230 D695
7 LCIT RT3030 D696
8 Paper Feed Unit PB3220 D787
9 1 Bin Tray BN3110 D3CQ
10 Internal Multi-Fold Unit FD3000 M482
11 Bridge Unit BU3070 D685
12 Internal Shift Tray SH3070 D691
13 Side Tray Type M3 D725
14 Internal Finisher SR3130 D690
15 Finisher SR3210 D3B8
16 Booklet Finisher SR3220 D3B9
17 Finisher SR3230 D3BA
18 Booklet Finisher SR3240 D3BB

SM 1-10 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Machine Codes and Peripherals Configuration

External Options for MP4055/MP5055 (mainly North America)

Information
Product
No. Item Machine Code
1 Handset HS3020 D739
2 Paper Feed Unit PB3150 D694
3 Caster Table Type M3 D178
4 LCIT PB3230 D695
5 LCIT RT3030 D696
6 Paper Feed Unit PB3220 D787
7 1 Bin Tray BN3110 D3CQ
8 Internal Multi-Fold Unit FD3000 M482
9 Bridge Unit BU3070 D685
10 Internal Shift Tray SH3070 D691
11 Side Tray Type M3 D725
12 Internal Finisher SR3130 D690
13 Finisher SR3210 D3B8
14 Booklet Finisher SR3220 D3B9
15 Finisher SR3230 D3BA

SM 1-11 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Machine Codes and Peripherals Configuration

No. Item Machine Code

16 Booklet Finisher SR3240 D3BB

External Options for MP6055 (mainly Europe and Asia)

No. Item Machine Code

1 Paper Feed Unit PB3150 D694
2 Caster Table Type M3 D178
3 LCIT PB3170 (Europe) D695
LCIT PB3230 (Asia)
4 LCIT RT3030 D696
5 Paper Feed Unit PB3210 (Europe) D787
Paper Feed Unit PB3220 (Asia)
6 1 Bin Tray BN3110 D3CQ
7 Internal Multi-Fold Unit FD3000 M482
8 Bridge Unit BU3070 D685
9 Internal Shift Tray SH3070 D691
10 Side Tray Type M3 D725
11 Finisher SR3210 D3B8
12 Booklet Finisher SR3220 D3B9
13 Finisher SR3230 D3BA
14 Booklet Finisher SR3240 D3BB

SM 1-12 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Machine Codes and Peripherals Configuration

External Options for MP6055 (mainly North America)

Information
Product
No. Item Machine Code
1 Handset HS3020 D739
2 Paper Feed Unit PB3150 D694
3 Caster Table Type M3 D178
4 LCIT PB3230 D695
5 LCIT RT3030 D696
6 Paper Feed Unit PB3220 D787
7 1 Bin Tray BN3110 D3CQ
8 Internal Multi-Fold Unit FD3000 M482
9 Bridge Unit BU3070 D685
10 Internal Shift Tray SH3070 D691
11 Side Tray Type M3 D725
12 Finisher SR3210 D3B8
13 Booklet Finisher SR3220 D3B9
14 Finisher SR3230 D3BA
15 Booklet Finisher SR3240 D3BB

SM 1-13 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Specifications

1.3 SPECIFICATIONS
See “Appendices” for the following information:
• Machine Specifications
• Software Accessories
• Supported Paper Sizes
• Optional Specifications

SM 1-14 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
INSTALLATION
 Specifications

2. INSTALLATION

Installation

SM 2-1 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Installation Requirements

2.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

2.1.1 ENVIRONMENT

1. Temperature Range: 10 °C to 32 °C (50 °F to 89.6 °F)

2. Humidity Range: 15% to 80% RH
3. Ambient Illumination: Less than 1,500 lux (do not expose to direct sunlight.)
4. Ventilation: Room air should turn over at least 3 times/hr/person
5. Ambient Dust: Less than 0.10 mg/m3
6. Avoid an area which is exposed to sudden temperature changes. This includes:
• Areas directly exposed to cool air from an air conditioner.
• Areas directly exposed to heat from a heater.
7. Do not place the machine in an area where it will be exposed to corrosive gases.
8. Do not install the machine at any location over 2,000 m (6,500 ft.) above sea level. (In NA, it
can be installed only up to 2,500m (8,202 ft.))
9. Place the copier on a strong and level base. (Inclination on any side should be no more than
5 mm.)
10. Do not place the machine where it may be subjected to strong vibrations.

SM 2-2 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Installation Requirements

2.1.2 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS

Machine Level
Front to back: Within 5 mm (0.2") of level
Right to left: Within 5 mm (0.2") of level

Installation
Place the copier near the power source, and provide clearance as shown:

11. Rear: Over 101 mm (4")

12. Right: Over 432 mm (17")
13. Front: Over 750 mm (15.8")
14. Left: Over 100 mm (4")

• The 400 mm recommended for the space at the front is only for pulling out the paper
tray. If an operator stands at the front of the copier, more space is required.

SM 2-3 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Installation Requirements

2.1.3 MACHINE DIMENSIONS

[A]: 587 mm (23.1")

[B]: 340mm (with D696)
[C]: 1210 mm (with D3B0), 1160 mm (with D779)
[D]: 657 mm (with D3BA or D3BB)

2.1.4 POWER REQUIREMENTS

• Make sure that the wall outlet is near the copier and easily accessible.
• Make sure the plug is firmly inserted in the outlet.
• Avoid multi-wiring.
• Be sure to ground the machine.

Input voltage level

• 120 V to 127 V, 60 Hz: More than 12 A: NA

• 220 V to 240 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz: More than 8A: EU/AP
• 110V, 60 Hz: More than 13.6 A: Taiwan
• 220V,60Hz More than 8A:KO

Voltage tolerance

• Voltage must not fluctuate by more than +8.66% or less than -10%.: NA
• Voltage must not fluctuate by more than 10%.: EU/AP

SM 2-4 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Main Machine Installation

2.2 MAIN MACHINE INSTALLATION

2.2.1 IMPORTANT NOTICE ON SECURITY ISSUES
In order to increase the security of the MFP, and to ensure that the customer sets the

Installation
administrator password, an administrator set/change prompt display is shown up at the first
power-up.

Overview
• The following Program/Change Administrator screen is displayed at the first power-up.

• When the customers set the administrator/supervisor login password, the display disappears
and the home display will appear. The customers, however, can erase this screen with the
following procedure in the case that they think there is no need to set the password.
1. On the Program/Change Administrator screen, press [Change] next to Supervisor and then
touch [OK] without inputting any password.
2. Touch [OK] again when the Confirm password display shows up.
3. For Administrator 1, do the same procedure as steps 1 and 2.
4. Press the [OK] button, and then turn the power OFF/ON.
• SP5-755-002 (Display Setting: Hide Administrator Password Change Scrn) allows you to
skip this screen temporarily and continue the installation procedure without setting an
administrator password. However, the Program/Change Administrator screen appears every
time you turn the power OFF/ON, if the password is not set.

• For how to enter SP mode, see the note at the end of the Password Setting
Procedure.

SM 2-5 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Main Machine Installation

Password Setting Procedure

• For more details about this security issue, see "Notes on Using Multi-Function Printers
Safely" supplied with the MFP.

• When Supervisor / Administrator 1-4 passwords are configured via network, the
"Change Supervisor login password" window will not display.
• The passwords for Supervisor or Administrator 1 to 4 can be set via "System Settings".
But the Program/Change Administrator screen appears every time the power switch is
turned ON if the passwords are input this way. So we recommend the customers to set
the passwords via network or the Program/Change Administrator screen.
1. Install the machine.
2. Turn ON the main power.
Password change display appears.
3. Press [Change] and change the supervisor login password.

4. Input the password, and then press [OK].

5. Confirm the password, and then press [OK].
6. Change the administrator 1 login password.

7. Input the password, and then press [OK].

SM 2-6 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Main Machine Installation

8. Confirm the password, and then press [OK].

9. Turn the main power OFF and back ON again.

Installation
• To enter the SP mode, there are two ways to display the number keyboard on screen;
1. Press the "Document Server" icon.
2. Press and hold the button [A] located at the left side of the operation panel and
"Check Status [B]" at the same time.

SM 2-7 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Main Machine Installation

2.2.2 INSTALLATION FLOW CHART

MP 2555SP, MP 3055SP, MP 3555SP

SM 2-8 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Main Machine Installation

MP 4055SP, MP 5055SP, MP 6055SP

Installation
2.2.3 ACCESSORY CHECK
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following list:
No. Description Q'ty Remarks
1 Plate: Logo: RIC 1
2 Sheet: Logo 1
3 Rear Lower Gap Cover 1
4 Cap Cover 2
5 Stopper: Paper Exit Tray 1
6 NFC Tag 1
7 Decal: Paper Tray 1
8 Decal: Bluetooth 1
9 Original Caution Decal: English 1 EU Only
10 Original Caution Decal: Multi-Language 1 EU Only

SM 2-9 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Main Machine Installation

No. Description Q'ty Remarks

11 Power Supply Cord 1
12 Cleaning Cloth 1
13 Cleaning Cloth Holder 1
14 Sheet: EMC address 1 EU Only
15 Caution: CE 1 EU Only
16 Caution: Smart Operation Panel 1 NA/AA Only
17 Caution: FCC 1 NA Only
18 Caution: FCC (for Canada) 1 NA Only
19 Sheet: Safety Information 1 EU Only
20 Sheet: Notes for Users (AIRPRINT) NA/AA: 1
EU: 2
21 Sheet: EULA (21 Languages) 1
22 Sheet: Notes for Users (Security) 1
23 Sheet: Start Guide 1 NA/AA Only
24 Caution: NFC Tag 1
25 Seal: Caution (21 Languages) 1 AA Only
26 CD-ROM (Drivers) 1
27 CD-ROM (OI) 1 AA Only
28 Manual: Read This First 1 NA/AA Only

2.2.4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Removal of Packing Materials and Shipping Retainers

1. Remove the machine from the box, and check the items in the package.

• Remove the retainer [A] at the lower front right before lifting up the machine,
because the handle for lifting the machine is hidden by the retainer [A].

• When you lift the machine, hold the correct parts, as shown in the photo below. Do
not lift by holding the scanner unit, etc., because this might deform the machine or

SM 2-10 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Main Machine Installation

break the exterior covers.

Installation
2. Remove the tapes and retainers on the DF.

SM 2-11 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Main Machine Installation

3. Remove the tapes on the exterior of the copier.

4. Remove the cushioning material [A] on the exposure glass.

5. Remove the orange tape on the scanner shipping locks.

SM 2-12 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Main Machine Installation

6. Remove the two scanner shipping locks [A] by rotating them 90 degrees counterclockwise.
SC120 is displayed when the machine is turned ON with the shipping lock attached.

Installation
• Keep the scanner shipping locks after installing the machine. The scanner shipping
locks must be installed before moving the machine to a new location.
• Before moving the machine, make sure to move the scanner carriage to the correct
position with SP4-806-001 (Super SP mode) and reattach the shipping locks (page
101 "Moving the Machine").
7. Attach the two caps [A] provided with the machine.

8. Pull out the 1st and 2nd paper feed trays and remove the tapes and accessories.

SM 2-13 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Main Machine Installation

9. Remove the scanner support [A].

10. Open the front cover and store the scanner support [A] in the storage location.

• The factory setting sheet is kept in the storage location.

11. Close the front cover.

For Machines with Preinstalled SPDF: Removal of Protective Sheet

1. Open the DF.
2. Release the lever [A], open the pressure plate sheet [B], and pull out the protective sheet [C]
slowly.
3. Remove the filament tape [D].

SM 2-14 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Main Machine Installation

4. Close the pressure plate sheet [A].

Installation
5. Close the DF.

• If the protective sheet remains in the DF, a paper jam will be detected.

Attaching the Paper Exit Tray Parts

1. Attach the stopper [A] to the paper exit tray.

• Before installing the stopper, move the bar inside the stopper in order to avoid
damaging the bar.

SM 2-15 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Main Machine Installation

Pulling out the Feeler for the Paper Exit Full Sensor

This procedure is unnecessary when attaching the Bridge Unit or the Inner Finisher.
1. Pull the sensor feeler [A] out.

Checking the Position of the Paper Exit Feeler

Check the following points for the paper exit feeler [A] installed at the paper exit.
• It can move in line with the ejection of paper.
• It holds contact with the surface of the ejected paper and is still movable.

Paper will get jammed in the following cases.

• The paper exit feeler does not function due to obstacles (such as cables).
• The paper exit feeler does not function when the paper is pulled out and pushed back again.

SM 2-16 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Main Machine Installation

Attaching the Decals

Attach the following decals provided with the machine accessories.

Installation
1: Original Set Decal
2: NFC Tag
3: ADF Caution Decal
4: Paper Size Tray Number Decal
5: Brand Logo for Smart Operation Panel
6: Brand Logo for Front cover
7: Bluetooth Decal

SM 2-17 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Main Machine Installation

Location for each decal

SM 2-18 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Main Machine Installation

Installation
For Machines with Preinstalled ARDF: Fax Stamp Installation (Option)
This procedure is required for the machine which has the fax function installed as standard.
1. Open the ARDF original cover and stamp holder [A].

2. Install the fax stamp [A] provided with the machine.

SM 2-19 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Main Machine Installation

3. Close the holder.

Make sure that it is pushed in to the position where the marks on the holder and the exterior
cover face each other. If not, jam detection (001) will occur.

Toner Bottle Installation and Toner Initialization

• This machine has toner bottle set detection and does not operate without the toner
bottle.
• Print Cartridge MP 3554 is compatible with MP 4055SP, MP 5055SP, MP 6055SP.
However, Print Cartridge MP 6054 is incompatible with MP 2555SP, MP 3055SP, MP
3555SP.
1. Open the front cover.
2. Make sure that the black cap of the toner bottle is firmly tightened, then shake the toner
bottle up and down seven or eight times while the cap faces upward.

• Shaking the bottle while the cap faces downward may cause a toner blockage.
3. Remove the toner bottle protection cap [A].

SM 2-20 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Main Machine Installation

4. Push the toner bottle [A] into the machine slowly.

Installation
Rev 09/18/2019

5. Connect the power cord to the machine.

Use the power cord that is provided with the machine. Do not use any other power cord.
Also, do not use an extension cord.
6. While the front cover is open, turn on the main power switch.

• If the front cover is closed when turning on the main power switch, the machine
starts a normal toner supply.
7. Enter the SP mode, and then press [System Sp].
8. Set SP3-510-031 (ImgQltyAdj :ExeFlag: Init Toner Replenish: K) to “1”, and then press “#”
on the operation panel.
9. Press [EXIT] to end the SP mode.
10. Close the front cover.
11. The machine automatically starts the initial toner supply. The initialization message appears.

• It takes about one to two minutes to finish the initial toner supply. If the toner has
not been shaken well, it may take up to about 10 minutes.
• If a toner bottle has not been set, the machine does not work because there is a
toner bottle set detection mechanism.

SM 2-21 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Main Machine Installation

12. Enter SP mode again, and then press [System Sp].

13. Enter SP3-011-001 (Manual ProCon :Exe), and then press [Execute].

• Be sure to do this procedure in the main machine installation. Otherwise, abnormal

images may be developed until the next process control.
14. Press [Exit] when completed.
15. Press [EXIT] to end the SP mode.

Note if the initial toner supply has not been performed

If you start printing without executing the initial toner supply at installation, the machine goes to
the toner end condition even if the machine has plenty of toner in the toner bottle. Do the
following procedure to perform the toner end recovery if the machine has entered the toner end
condition.
1. Open the front cover for five seconds or more.
2. Make sure that the toner bottle is set properly.
3. Close the front cover.
4. The toner end recovery automatically starts

• MP 2555/3055/3555/4055/5055/6055 series models do not require resetting the

counter, because the replacement year/date is updated automatically. (This is different
from the MP 2554/3054/3554/4054/5054/6054 series.)

2.2.5 CHECK IMAGE QUALITY / SETTINGS

Loading Paper
When there are other options to be installed, install according to the procedure for each.
1. Connect the power cord to the machine.
2. Turn the main power ON.
3. Pull out the tray slowly until it stops, and then adjust the side fences and end fence to match
the paper size.

To move the side fences, first pull out the tray fully, then push down the green lock at the
rear of the tray.
4. Check that the operation panel shows the following display.
"Please supply the tray with paper."
5. Square the paper and load it print side up.
6. The paper size is basically detected automatically.

Checking the Copy Image with the Test Chart

Check the copy image with the test chart.

SM 2-22 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Main Machine Installation

Paper Settings
If necessary, adjust the registration for the paper feed tray. (Registration - Leading Edge/Side-
to-Side)
• SP1-002-002 (Side-to-Side Registration Paper Tray 1)

Installation
• SP1-002-003 (Side-to-Side Registration Paper Tray 2)

Security Function Settings

Perform the encryption and overwrite settings to protect the user information in the HDD as
necessary.
Follow the instructions in Security Setting.

Settings Relevant to the Service Contract

Change the necessary settings for the following SP modes if the customer has made a service
contract.
SP No. Function Default
SP5-045-001 Specifies the counting method used in meter charge "0": 1 count
Counter method mode.
SP5-104-001 Specifies whether the counter is doubled for A3/DLT "1": Double
(SSP) paper. counting
A3/DLT double
count
SP5-812-001 and -001: shows or sets the telephone number of the service representative.
-002 -002: shows or sets the fax number of the service station. The number is
Service Tel: printed on the counter list when the "Meter Click Charge" is enabled. User can
Telephone / send a fax message with the counter list.
Facsimile
Installation is now completed.

2.2.6 AUTO REMOTE FIRMWARE UPDATE (ARFU) SETTINGS

Specify ARFU settings as required.

Operating Conditions:
• ARFU requires connection to the Internet. Be sure to get permission from the customer
before setting ARFU up. Otherwise, it may cause an incident.
• ARFU is available only for machines that contain a HDD. If the machine does not have
a HDD, an option HDD must be installed.

• The connection is one-way, so the user’s data cannot be accessed from the firmware
server.

SM 2-23 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Main Machine Installation

Procedure:

1. ARFU enable setting

2. Server connection check
3. Prohibited date and time setting

(1) Enable ARFU

1. Set SP5-886-111 (Auto Update Setting) to "1 (ON)".

1: ON / 0: OFF (Default)

To download the firmware only using SFU (Smart Firmware Update), and not by ARFU,
specify the settings as follows:
- SP5-886-111(Auto Update Setting) to "0 (OFF)"
- SP5-886-115 (SFU Auto Download Setting) to "1 (ON)"

(2) Server connection check

1. Enter the SP mode.

2. Press [Firmware update] > [Update] > [Execute update].

3. Check if one of the following messages appears: "Will you download the latest package Ver
*** and update?" or "The installed package is the latest version.".
If the message appears, it is possible to execute ARFU. Press “No” and close SP mode to
complete the configuration.

The update will run immediately if you press “Yes” at the message "Will you download the
latest package Ver *** and update?" The update cannot be canceled if it is run by SFU.
(The update can be canceled if ARFU is used.)

SP5-886-116 (Auto Update Prohibit Term Setting) displays the scheduled date and time of
the next ARFU.
If error code 71: [Network connection error] appears when you click “Execute update”, see
troubleshooting below.

SM 2-24 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Main Machine Installation

(3) Prohibited date and time setting

Ask the customer for the prohibited times and days of the week for ARFU execution and set the
following as needed. The default prohibited time is from 9 a.m. to 5 p.m. and there is no
prohibited day.

Installation
• SP5-886-112 (Auto Update Prohibit Term Setting) Default: 1 (ON)
• SP5-886-113 (Auto Update Prohibit Start hour) Default: 9
• SP5-886-114 (Auto Update Prohibit End hour) Default: 17
• SP5-886-120 (Auto Update Prohibit Day Of Week Setting) Default: 00000000 [00H]
Set the bits for the days of the week to prohibit updating.
Prohibited (Monday - Sunday): bit 7, Monday: bit 6, Tuesday: bit 5
Wednesday: bit 4, Thursday: bit 3, Friday: bit 2, Saturday: bit 1, Sunday: bit 0
e.g.) Prohibited on Mon., Fri., Sat., and Sun.: 01000111 [47H]

They can be specified also via Web Image Monitor if logged in as the machine administrator from
the device if SP5-886-111(Auto Update Setting) is set to "1 (ON)". For details, see Specifying
the Time and Day of the Week to Prohibit Updating via Web Image Monitor.

Troubleshooting: If error code 71: [Network connection error] appears

If error code 71: [Network connection error] appears when you click [Firmware update] >
[Update] > [Execute update] in SP mode, check the following.
• 4-1. IPv4 address, Subnet mask of the machine and Gateway IPv4 address
• 4-2. IPv4 address of the DNS server
• 4-3. Proxy server settings
• 4-4. Encryption level setting SP
4-1. IPv4 address, Subnet mask of the machine and Gateway IPv4 address
Check the machine’s IPv4 address, subnet mask, and gateway IPv4 address.
(In User Tools > Machine Features > System Settings > Interface Settings)

SM 2-25 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Main Machine Installation

4-2. IPv4 address of the DNS server

Check the DNS IPv4 address and check the connection.
(In User Tools > Machine Features > System Settings > Interface Settings > DNS configuration)

How to find the IP address:

Ask the customer to tell you the IP address of the DNS server. If the customer does not know it,
ask the customer to check the IP address by one of the following ways:
1. Run "ipconfig / all" at the command prompt on the computer, then check the IP address of the
DNS server.
2. Open the IPv4 properties dialog box on the computer, then check whether the IP address
setting of the DNS server is manual or automatic.
• If the setting of the DNS IP address is automatic, select [Auto-Obtain (DHCP)] at the
MFP machine's DNS settings.
• If the setting of the DNS IP address is manual, select [Specify] and specify the DNS
server 1 to 3.
• Press [Connection Test] to check the connection with the input address. Make sure that
it is connected successfully.

SM 2-26 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Main Machine Installation

Installation
4-3. Proxy server settings
Check the user’s network environment and, as required, specify the proxy server settings in the
following SPs:
• SP5-816-062 (Use Proxy)
1: Used / 0: Not used
• SP5-816-063 (Proxy Host)
• SP5-816-064 (Proxy PortNumber)
• SP5-816-065 (Proxy User Name)
• SP5-816-066 (Proxy Password)

If access to the external server is restricted, request the network administrator (customer) to
permit the following FQDN name for communication.- FQDN: p-rfu-ds2.support.ricoh.com

They can be specified also via Web Image Monitor if logged in as the machine administrator from
the device if SP5-886-111(Auto Update Setting) is set to "1(ON)". For details, see Specifying the
Time and Day of the Week to Prohibit Updating via Web Image Monitor.
4-4. Encryption level setting SP
Check SP5-816-087 (Remote Service: CERT:Macro Ver) and make sure the encryption level is
[2]: 2048 bit.

If SP5-816-087 is [1]: 512 bit, specify the settings as follows:

1. Initialize the encryption level by executing SP5-870-003 (Common Key Info Writing: Initialize)
2. Rewrite as 2048 bit in SP5-870-004 (Common Key Info Writing: Writing 2048 bit).
3. Turn the main switch off and on.

Make sure to check the conditions before changing the encryption level and do the
corresponding workaround. ARFU uses the same certificate as @Remote to communicate with
the Global Server. This may cause failure in connecting with the Center Server, if the device is to
be installed in the following conditions.

SM 2-27 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Main Machine Installation

Conditions
1) Customer uses RC Gate Type BN1.
RC Gate Type BN1 does not support 2048 bit encryption level communication with Ricoh devices
(HTTPS Managed device). Therefore, the device cannot be registered under RC Gate Type BN
1.
2) Ricoh device (HTTPS Managed) that supports only 512 bit encryption level is registered
as an external appliance.
Only one encryption level can be set for an external appliance for its communication with imaging
devices. If a 512 bit encryption level Ricoh device (HTTPS Managed) is registered, the external
appliance as well as other devices must also use 512 bit encryption even if 2048 bit encryption is
supported on those devices.
Workaround
For Condition 1:
Advise your customer to change to the latest appliance that supports 2048 bit encryption level
communication.
For Condition 2:
1. Manage the device with embedded RC Gate (2048 bit)
2. Exclude non-supported devices (i.e., those devices that cannot be changed from 512-bit to
2048-bit) from the external appliances, then change the encryption level of external appliances
and all managed devices (from 512 bit to 2048 bit).

Specifying the Time and Day of the Week to Prohibit Updating via Web
Image Monitor
1. Start Web Image Monitor.
2. Log in as the machine administrator.
3. Point to [Device Management], and then click [Configuration].

SM 2-28 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Main Machine Installation

4. Click "Auto Firmware Update".

Installation
Turn the main power OFF and back ON again after setting SP5-886-111
(AutoUpdateSetting) to "1 (ON)". "Auto Firmware Update" will appear in the menu list of Web
Image Monitor.
5. Specify the times and days of the week to prohibit updating.
Select the check boxes of the applicable days of the week to prohibit updating on that day

SM 2-29 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Main Machine Installation

2.2.7 MOVING THE MACHINE

This section shows you how to manually move the machine from one floor to another floor.
Before turning off the main power, make sure 100% is shown as available memory on the screen
if the fax option is installed.
• Move the scanner carriage to the correct position [A] with SP4-806-001 (Super SP mode),
and reattach the scanner shipping locks at the lock position [B].

• Turn off the main power.

• Disconnect the power plug from the outlet.
• Close all covers and paper trays, including the front cover and bypass tray.
• Remove the optional feed tray when lifting the main machine for moving it to another floor.
• Keep the machine level and carry it carefully, taking care not to shake or tilt it, and protect
the machine from strong shocks.
• When moving the machine, do not press against the ADF.

SM 2-30 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Main Machine Installation

• Do not push the center part of the rear cover. Do not hold the covers of the
stabilizers.

Installation
• Do not put hard pressure on the rear cover [A] when moving or picking up the
machine as it is fragile. This also applies to the operation panel [C]. Hold the areas
[B] when moving the machine.

SM 2-31 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Main Machine Installation

• Hold 4 corners on the bottom base when holding the machine with the optional
paper feeding tray joined to the main machine. Do not hold any other parts.

2.2.8 TRANSPORTING THE MACHINE

1. Do SP4-806-001 (Super SP mode) to move the scanner carriage from the home position.
This prevents dust from falling into the machine during transportation.
2. Remove the toner cartridges. This prevents toner leaks, which are caused by vibration
during transport.
3. Make sure there is no paper left in the paper trays. Then fix down the bottom plates with a
sheet of paper and tape.
4. Take out the scanner stay from inside the front cover and install the scanner stay.
5. Do one of the following steps:
• Attach shipping tape to the covers and doors.
• Shrink-wrap the machine tightly.

Cautions upon Lashing

1. Position the machine so that its left side faces the wall. Make sure to put cushioning in
between.
2. Fasten the belt at the ridge line with cushioning.

SM 2-32 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Main Machine Installation

3. Make sure that the belt is over the front cover (at 45 - 75cm height from the ground).

Installation

SM 2-33 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Paper Feed Unit PB3210/ PB3220

2.3 PAPER FEED UNIT PB3210/ PB3220

2.3.1 ACCESSORY CHECK
No. Description Q’ty
1 Screws (M4 × 10) 2
2 Screw with Spring Washer (M4 × 10) 1
3 Securing Bracket 2

2.3.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

• The machine should be held at the correct locations and lifted gently.
• If it is lifted without care, handled carelessly or dropped, it may result in an injury.
• When installing this option, turn the machine power OFF, and unplug the power supply
cord from the wall socket.
• If this option is installed with the power on, it may result in an electric shock or a
malfunction.
• Be sure to join the machine to the paper feed unit so as to prevent equipment from
falling over.
• If they are not connected, they may move and fall over, resulting in injury.
1. Remove the orange tape and retainers.

SM 2-34 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Paper Feed Unit PB3210/ PB3220

2. Remove the items provided (fixing screws, etc.) from the package.

Installation
3. Holding the grips on the machine, align it with the locating pins [A], and place the machine
on the paper feed unit.

• When you lift the machine, hold the correct locations.

• Do not hold any other parts of the machine when lifting it, because this may cause
the machine to deform.
• Do not put the machine down on the paper feed unit as a temporary resting place.
This may cause the paper feed unit to deform. Always connect the machine and
paper feed unit properly.
4. Pull out the 2nd paper feed tray.

SM 2-35 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Paper Feed Unit PB3210/ PB3220

5. Using a securing bracket as a screwdriver, fix the machine to the feed unit (spring washer:
screw: M4×10: 1).

6. Attach the securing brackets [A] to two positions on the left and right at the rear of the
machine (screws: 1 each).

• If the anti-condensation heater for this optional tray is to be installed, connect its
heater harness prior to this step (step 6) (Tray Heater for Paper Feed Unit
PB3210 / PB3220).
• If “LCIT RT3030” is to be installed, connect its harness prior to this step (step 6)
(LCIT RT3030 (D696)).

SM 2-36 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Paper Feed Unit PB3210/ PB3220

7. Attach the rear lower gap cover [A] ( x 2)

Installation
8. Return the paper feed tray to the machine
9. Attach the decals as shown below.

[A]: Tray number decal

[B]: Paper size decal

• The tray number decal and paper size decal are packaged together with the
machine.
10. Lock the casters of the paper feed unit.

SM 2-37 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Paper Feed Unit PB3210/ PB3220

11. Connect the power cord to the machine.

• Stabilizers are attached to the machine when it is shipped. Do not remove them.

12. Turn the main power ON.

13. Set the paper, and check that the paper size set in the paper feed tray is displayed on the
operation panel.
• Paper size for the paper feed unit can be changed with following SPs.
SP5-181-009 (0: A4 LEF or 1: LT LEF) for Tray 3
SP5-181-010 (0: A3 or 1: DLT) for Tray 3
SP5-181-011 (0: B4 or 1: LG) for Tray 3
SP5-181-012 (0: B5 LEF or 1: Exe LEF) for Tray 3
SP5-181-014 (0: A4 LEF or 1: LT LEF) for Tray 4
SP5-181-015 (0: A3 or 1: DLT) for Tray 4
SP5-181-016 (0: B4 or 1: LG) for Tray 4
SP5-181-017 (0: B5 LEF or 1: Exe LEF) for Tray 4
14. Adjust the registration for the paper feed unit.
• For Tray 3
SP1-001-0xx (Leading Edge Registration Tray 3)
-055 Tray3: Thin -062 Tray3: Thin:1200
-056 Tray3: Plain -063 Tray3: Plain:1200
-057 Tray3: Mid-thick -064 Tray3: Mid-thick:1200
-058 Tray3: Thick 1 -065 Tray3: Thick 1:1200
-059 Tray3: Thick 2 -066 Tray3: Thick 2:1200
-060 Tray3: Thick 3 -067 Tray3: Thick 3:1200
-061 Tray3: Thick 4 -068 Tray3: Thick 4:1200
SP1-002-004 (Side-to-Side Registration Paper Tray 3)

SM 2-38 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Paper Feed Unit PB3210/ PB3220

• For Tray 4
SP1-001-0xx (Leading Edge Registration Tray 4)
-069 Tray4: Thin -076 Tray4: Thin:1200
-070 Tray4: Plain -077 Tray4: Plain:1200

Installation
-071 Tray4: Mid-thick -078 Tray4: Mid-thick:1200
-072 Tray4: Thick 1 -079 Tray4: Thick 1:1200
-073 Tray4: Thick 2 -080 Tray4: Thick 2:1200
-074 Tray4: Thick 3 -081 Tray4: Thick 3:1200
-075 Tray4: Thick 4 -082 Tray4: Thick 4:1200
SP1-002-005 (Side-to-Side Registration Paper Tray 4)

SM 2-39 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Paper Feed Unit PB3150

2.4 PAPER FEED UNIT PB3150

2.4.1 ACCESSORY CHECK
No. Description Q’ty
1 Screws - M4 × 10 2
2 Screw with Spring Washer - M4 × 10 1
3 Securing Bracket 2

2.4.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

• The machine should be held at the correct locations and lifted gently by two people.
• If it is lifted without care, handled carelessly or dropped, it may result in injury.
• When installing this option, turn the machine power OFF, and unplug the power supply
cord from the wall socket.
• If this option is installed with the power on, it may result in an electric shock or a
malfunction.
• Be sure to join the machine to the paper feed unit so as to prevent equipment from
falling over.
• If they are not connected, they may move and fall over, resulting in injury.

• The Paper Feed Unit PB3150 does not have casters. Attach the “Caster Table Type M3”
under the Paper Feed Unit PB3150, if necessary. (Caster Table Type M3 (D178))

SM 2-40 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Paper Feed Unit PB3150

1. Remove the orange tape and retainers.

Installation
2. Remove the items provided (fixing screws, etc.) from the package.

3. Install this option on the Caster Table (Caster Table Type M3 (D178)).
4. Holding the grips on the machine, align it with the locating pins [A], and place the machine
on the paper feed unit.

SM 2-41 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Paper Feed Unit PB3150

• When you lift the machine, hold the correct locations.

• Do not hold any other parts of the machine when lifting it, because this may cause
the machine to deform.
• Do not put the machine down on the paper feed unit as a temporary resting place.
This may cause the paper feed unit to deform. Always connect the machine and
paper feed unit properly.
5. Pull out the 2nd paper feed tray of the main machine.
6. Using a securing bracket as a screwdriver, fix the machine to the feed unit (spring washer:
screw: M4×10: 1).

7. Attach the securing brackets [A] to two positions on the left and right at the rear of the
machine.

SM 2-42 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Paper Feed Unit PB3150

8. Attach the rear lower gap cover [A] ( x 2)

Installation
9. Return the paper feed tray to the machine.
10. Attach the decals as shown below.

[A]: Tray number decal

[B]: Paper size decal

• The tray number decal and paper size decal are packaged together with the
machine.
11. Lock the casters.

SM 2-43 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Paper Feed Unit PB3150

12. Connect the power cord to the machine.

• Stabilizers are attached to the paper feed unit when it is shipped. Do not remove
them.

13. Turn the main power switch ON.

14. Set the paper, and check that the paper size set in the paper feed tray is displayed on the
operation panel.
• Paper size for the paper feed unit can be changed with following SP.
SP5-181-009 (0: A4 LEF or 1: LT LEF)
SP5-181-010 (0: A3 or 1: DLT)
SP5-181-011 (0: B4 or 1: LG)
SP5-181-012 (0: B5 LEF or 1: Exe LEF)
15. Adjust the registration for the paper feed unit.
SP1-001-0xx (Leading Edge Registration Tray 3)
-055 Tray3: Thin -062 Tray3: Thin:1200
-056 Tray3: Plain -063 Tray3: Plain:1200
-057 Tray3: Mid-thick -064 Tray3: Mid-thick:1200
-058 Tray3: Thick 1 -065 Tray3: Thick 1:1200
-059 Tray3: Thick 2 -066 Tray3: Thick 2:1200
-060 Tray3: Thick 3 -067 Tray3: Thick 3:1200
-061 Tray3: Thick 4 -068 Tray3: Thick 4:1200
SP1-002-004 (Side-to-Side Registration Paper Tray 3)

SM 2-44 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 LCIT PB3170/ PB3230

2.5 LCIT PB3170/ PB3230

2.5.1 ACCESSORY CHECK
No. Description Q’ty

Installation
1 Securing Bracket 2
2 Screw(M4×10) 2
3 Hexagonal Bolt 1

2.5.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

• The machine should be held at the correct locations and lifted gently.
• If it is lifted without care, handled carelessly or dropped, it may result in an injury.
• When installing this option, turn the machine power OFF, and unplug the power supply
cord from the wall socket.
• If this option is installed with the power on, it may result in an electric shock or a
malfunction.
• Be sure to join the machine to the paper feed unit so as to prevent equipment from
falling over.
• If they are not connected, they may move and fall over, resulting in injury.
1. Remove the orange tape and retainers.

SM 2-45 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
LCIT PB3170/ PB3230

2. Remove the items provided (fixing screws, etc.) from the package.

3. Holding the grips on the machine, align it with the locating pins [A], and place the machine
on the paper feed unit.

• When you lift the machine, be sure to hold the grips on the machine.
• In particular, do not lift the machine by holding the scanner unit, etc., because this
may cause the machine to deform.
• Do not put the machine down on the paper feed unit as a temporary resting place.
This may cause the paper feed unit to deform. Always connect the machine and
paper feed unit properly.
4. Pull out the 2nd paper feed tray of the machine.

SM 2-46 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 LCIT PB3170/ PB3230

5. Using a securing bracket as a screwdriver, secure the machine to the LCT unit (hexagonal
bolt: M4×8: 1).

Installation
6. Attach the securing brackets [A] to two positions on the left and right at the rear of the
machine.

• If the anti-condensation heater for this optional tray is to be installed, connect its
heater harness prior to this step (step 6) (Tray Heater for LCIT PB3170/ PB3230).
• If “LCIT RT3030” is to be installed, connect its harness prior to this step (step 6)
(LCIT RT3030 (D696)).

SM 2-47 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
LCIT PB3170/ PB3230

7. Attach the rear lower gap cover [A] ( x2)

8. Return the paper feed tray to the machine.

9. Attach the decals as shown below.

[A]: Tray number decal

[B]: Paper size decal

• The tray number decal and paper size decal are packaged together with the
machine.
10. Lock the casters of the paper feed unit.

SM 2-48 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 LCIT PB3170/ PB3230

11. Connect the power cord to the machine.

• Stabilizers are attached to the LCIT when it is shipped. Do not remove any of them.

Installation
12. Turn the power switch ON.
13. Set the paper, and check that the paper size set in the paper feed tray is displayed on the
operation panel.
14. Adjust the registration for the paper feed unit.
SP1-001-0xx (Leading Edge Registration Tray 3)
-055 Tray3: Thin -062 Tray3: Thin:1200
-056 Tray3: Plain -063 Tray3: Plain:1200
-057 Tray3: Mid-thick -064 Tray3: Mid-thick:1200
-058 Tray3: Thick 1 -065 Tray3: Thick 1:1200
-059 Tray3: Thick 2 -066 Tray3: Thick 2:1200
-060 Tray3: Thick 3 -067 Tray3: Thick 3:1200
-061 Tray3: Thick 4 -068 Tray3: Thick 4:1200
SP1-002-004 (Side-to-Side Registration Paper Tray 3)

Changing the Paper Size

Paper size is set as shown below when the machine is shipped from the factory.
NA: LT LEF
EU.AA.CHN: A4 LEF
The paper size can be changed to A4 LEF or LT LEF.
1. Pull out the left tray and right tray.

SM 2-49 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
LCIT PB3170/ PB3230

2. Remove the right tray side fence (front) [A], right tray side fence (rear) [B], and right tray end
fence [C] ( ×3).

3. Attach the fences to the required position (A4 or LT) ( ×3).

• Make sure that the spring [B] of the end fence [A] is attached

4. Remove the left tray side fence (front) [A] and the left tray side fence (rear) [B] ( ×2).

5. Attach the fences to the required position (A4 or LT) ( ×2).

6. Set the paper size setting.
• SP5-181-009 (0: A4 LEF or 1: LT LEF)

SM 2-50 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 LCIT RT3030 (D696)

2.6 LCIT RT3030 (D696)

2.6.1 ACCESSORY CHECK
No. Description Q’ty Remarks

Installation
1 Connector Cover 1
2 Front Bracket 1
3 Rear Bracket 1
4 Harness 1
5 Stud screw 4
6 Joint Pins 2
7 Tapping Screw – M3 × 6 1
8 Screw – M3 × 6 1

2.6.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

• When installing this option, turn the power of the machine off, and unplug the power
plug from the wall socket.
• If this option is installed when the power is on, it will result in an electric shock or a
malfunction.

• Before installing this option, first attach the “Paper Feed Unit PB3210/ PB3220” or “LCIT
PB3170/ PB3230”.

SM 2-51 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
LCIT RT3030 (D696)

1. Remove the orange tape and retainers.

2. Remove the enclosed items (stud screws, etc.).

3. Remove the eight covers on the right of the paper feed unit.

SM 2-52 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 LCIT RT3030 (D696)

4. Attach the joint pins [A] to the front and rear on the right of the paper feed unit.

Installation
5. Attach the brackets [A] and [B] at the positions of the joint pins ( ×4).

6. Remove the rear lower gap cover [A] ( x2)

SM 2-53 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
LCIT RT3030 (D696)

7. Take off the securing brackets [A] from the two positions on the left and right at the rear of
the machine.

8. Remove the paper feed unit rear cover [A] ( ×2).

9. Connect the harness [A] ( x2).

For the machine with Paper Feed Unit PB3170/ PB3230

SM 2-54 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 LCIT RT3030 (D696)

For the machine with Paper Feed Unit PB3210/ PB3220

Installation
10. Clamp the harness (PB3170/ PB3230: ×9, PB3210/ PB3220: ×5).
For the machine with Paper Feed Unit PB3170/ PB3230

For the machine with Paper Feed Unit PB3210/ PB3220

SM 2-55 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
LCIT RT3030 (D696)

11. Attach the paper feed unit rear cover.

12. Attach the rear lower gap cover [A] ( x2).

13. Attach the hook of the side LCT to the bracket.

14. Connect the cable [A] of the side LCT to the machine ( ×1).

SM 2-56 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 LCIT RT3030 (D696)

15. Attach the cable cover [A] ( ×1).

Installation
16. Push the side LCT towards the machine.

17. Turn the power switch ON.

18. Set the paper, and check that the paper size set in the paper feed tray is displayed on the
operation panel.
19. Do the registration adjustment for the large capacity tray.
SP1-001-0xx (Leading Edge Registration Tray 5(LCT))
-083 Tray5(LCT): Thin -090 Tray5(LCT): Thin:1200
-084 Tray5(LCT): Plain -091 Tray5(LCT): Plain:1200
-085 Tray5(LCT): Mid-thick -092 Tray5(LCT): Mid-thick:1200
-086 Tray5(LCT): Thick 1 -093 Tray5(LCT): Thick 1:1200
-087 Tray5(LCT): Thick 2 -094 Tray5(LCT): Thick 2:1200
-088 Tray5(LCT): Thick 3 -095 Tray5(LCT): Thick 3:1200
-089 Tray5(LCT): Thick 4 -096 Tray5(LCT): Thick 4:1200
SP1-002-007 (Side-to-Side Registration Large Capacity Tray)

SM 2-57 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
LCIT RT3030 (D696)

Changing the Paper Size

Paper size is set as shown below when the machine is shipped from the factory.
NA: LT LEF
EU.AA.CHN: A4 LEF
The paper size can be changed to A4 LEF, LT LEF, or B5 LEF.
1. Open the tray cover.
2. Remove the upper screw at the front side fence, and after setting the side fence to the
position of the paper (outer: A4 LEF, center: LT LEF, inner: B5 LEF), tighten the screw that
was removed( ×1).

3. Also change the rear side fence to the same size position( ×1).

4. Change the paper size according to the new side fence position.
SP5-181-024 (Size Adjust LCT)
0: A4 LEF, 1: LT LEF, 2: B5 LEF

SM 2-58 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Caster Table Type M3 (D178)

2.7 CASTER TABLE TYPE M3 (D178)

2.7.1 ACCESSORY CHECK
No. Description Q’ty Remarks

Installation
1 Right Lower Cover 1 Used when not installing the Paper Feed Unit
PB3150.
2 Securing Bracket 2
3 Screws (M4 × 10) 2
4 Screw with Spring Washer (M4 × 1
10)

2.7.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

• The machine must be held at the correct locations, and must be lifted slowly.
• If it is lifted with force, handled carelessly or dropped, it will result in an injury.
• If installing this option, turn the power to the machine off, and unplug the power plug
from the wall socket.
• If this option is installed when the power is on, it will result in an electric shock or
malfunction.
• Be sure to join the machine and caster table to prevent equipment from falling over.
• If it is not joined, the machine will move or fall over, which will result in an injury.

SM 2-59 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Caster Table Type M3 (D178)

For Installing Directly under the Main Machine

1. Attach the 3 locating pins.

2. Holding the grips on the machine, align it with the locating pins, and place the machine on
the caster table.

• When you lift the machine, hold the lifting handles.

• In particular, do not lift it by holding the scanner unit, etc., (as it may deform).
• Do not put the machine down on the caster table as a temporary resting place. This
may cause the machine to deform. Always connect the machine and caster unit
properly.
3. Attach the right lower cover between the right side of the main machine and the caster table.
4. Pull out the 2nd paper feed tray of the machine.
5. Using a securing bracket as a screwdriver, fix the machine or paper feed unit to the caster
table (spring washer: screw: M4×10: 1).

SM 2-60 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Caster Table Type M3 (D178)

6. Attach the securing brackets [A] at 2 positions to left and right at the rear of the machine or
paper feed unit (screws: 1 each).

Installation
7. Attach the right lower cover provided with this option to the right lower side of the main
machine.
8. Return the paper feed tray to the machine or the paper feed unit on the caster table.

For Installing under PB3150

1. Place the paper feed unit [B] on the caster table [A].

2. Pull out the paper feed tray of the PB3150.

3. Using a securing bracket, fix the caster table to the paper tray unit (spring washer: screw:
M4×10: 1).
4. Attach the securing brackets at 2 positions to left and right at the rear of the machine
(screws: 1 each).
5. Put back the tray of the PB3150 in place.

SM 2-61 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Caster Table Type M3 (D178)

6. By holding the grips on the main machine, mount the main machine on the PB3150 while
fitting it to the locating pins [A].

• Be sure to use the specified grips on the main machine. Using any other positions
may damage the machine.

• Do not put the machine down on the PB3150 as a temporary resting place. This
may cause the PB3150 to deform.
7. Pull out the 2nd paper feed tray of the main machine.
8. Using a securing bracket as a screwdriver, secure the main machine and the PB3150
(M4×10: ×1).

SM 2-62 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Caster Table Type M3 (D178)

9. Attach the securing bracket [A] to the rear of the main machine.

Installation
10. Attach the rear lower gap cover [A] ( ×2).

11. Return the 2nd paper feed tray to the main machine.

SM 2-63 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Platen Cover PN2000 (D700)

2.8 PLATEN COVER PN2000 (D700)

2.8.1 ACCESSORY CHECK
Check that you have the accessories indicated below.
No. Descriptions Q’ty Remarks
1 Platen Cover 1
2 Platen Sheet 1
3 Feeler Guide 1
4 Stepped Screw 2

2.8.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

• Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure.
1. Install the stepped screws ( × 2).

SM 2-64 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Platen Cover PN2000 (D700)

2. Install the feeler guide [A].

Installation
3. Install the platen cover [A].

4. Place the platen sheet [A] on the exposure glass.

SM 2-65 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Platen Cover PN2000 (D700)

5. Line up the rear left corner of the platen sheet flush against corner [B] on the exposure
glass.

6. Close the platen cover.

7. Open the platen cover.
8. Press the surface of the platen sheet gently to fix it on the platen cover securely.
9. Connect the power cord and turn on the main power.
10. Place an original on the platen and make a copy to check the installation.

SM 2-66 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 ARDF DF3090

2.9 ARDF DF3090

2.9.1 ACCESSORY CHECK
No. Description Q’ty

Installation
1 ARDF 1
2 Screw 2
3 Knob Screw 2
4 Stud Screw (Small) 1
5 Stud Screw (Large) 1
6 Attention Decal - Top Cover 1
- Decal - Exposure Glass 1

2.9.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

• Turn OFF the main power and unplug the power cord from the wall socket. If installing
without turning OFF the main power, an electric shock or a malfunction may occur.

• Do not turn the power on until you perform "adjustment after installation," or it may not
start normally.
1. Remove all tapes and shipping retainers.

SM 2-67 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
ARDF DF3090

2. Insert the two stud screws ([A] is the larger stud, [B] is the smaller stud).

3. Mount the ARDF [A] by aligning the screw keyholes [B] of the ARDF support plate over the
stud screws.
4. Slide the ARDF toward the front of the machine.
5. Secure the ARDF with the two knob screws [C].

6. Align the rear left corner of the platen sheet [A] with the corner [B] on the exposure glass.
7. Close the ARDF.

8. Open the ARDF and check that the platen sheet is correctly attached.

SM 2-68 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 ARDF DF3090

9. Remove the rear cover [A].

Installation
10. Connect the ARDF cable as shown and mount the bracket [A] on the machine’s rear frame.
Make sure to connect the grounding wire.

11. Connect the scanner cable to the connector at the machine’s rear.

12. Reattach the rear cover.

13. Lift the ARDF original tray.

SM 2-69 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
ARDF DF3090

14. Slide the stamp holder [A] out and install the stamp cartridge in it, if necessary.

15. Close the holder.

After the stamp installation, be sure to slide the holder in correctly. Make sure to slide it in
thoroughly until the reference marks on the holder and exterior cover are aligned. If it is not
mounted correctly, the machine detects a J001 paper jam.

16. Attach the decals [A] and [B] to the top cover as shown. Choose the language that you want.

SM 2-70 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 ARDF DF3090

17. Attach the decal [A] to the scanner front cover.

Installation
18. Plug in and turn ON the main power.
19. Set SP4-688-001 (DF Density Adjustment ARDF) to "106".
20. Check the ARDF operation, and make a full size copy. Check that the registrations (side-to-
side and leading edge) and image skew are correct. If they are not, adjust the registrations
and image skew. (ADF Image Adjustment)

When feeding thin paper

When feeding thin paper, adjust the sliding tray to the point shown below [A].
When feeding normal paper, adjust the sliding tray to the point shown below [B].
If not, it may cause problems as follows:
• Original jam
• Original curl
• Originals cannot be stacked neatly

SM 2-71 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
SPDF DF3100

2.10 SPDF DF3100

2.10.1 ACCESSORY CHECK
No. Description Q’ty Remarks
1 Attention Decal – Top Cover 1
2 Decal – Exposure Glass 1
3 Ferrite Core (L) 1
4 Ferrite Core (S) 1
5 Face-Up Document Decal 1
6 Knob Screw 2
7 Stud Screw 2
8 Screw (3x6) 4

2.10.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

• Turn OFF the main power and unplug the power cord from the wall socket. If installing
without turning OFF the main power, an electric shock or a malfunction may occur.

• Do not turn the power on until you perform "adjustment after installation," or it may not
start normally.

SM 2-72 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 SPDF DF3100

Attaching the SPDF

1. When unpacking, hold both sides of the SPDF and take it out of the box.

Installation
2. Place the unit on the machine temporarily, and remove the orange tapes and shipping
retainers.

3. Remove the accessories in the package (boards, fixing screws, etc.).

4. Attach the 2 stepped screws to the machine.

5. Align the hinges of the SPDF with the stepped screws, and attach them by sliding them in.

SM 2-73 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
SPDF DF3100

6. Fix the SPDF to the machine (coin screws×2)

7. Release the lever [A], then open the pressure plate sheet [B], and gently remove the
protective sheet [C].
8. Remove the filament tape, and shut the pressure plate sheet.

9. Remove the platen sheet [A], and set it on the exposure glass.
Align it with the left scale and rear scale of the printer.

SM 2-74 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 SPDF DF3100

10. Close the SPDF slowly, and attach the platen sheet and SPDF.

Installation
11. Remove the rear cover [A].

12. Remove the controller box cover [A].

Red Circle: Remove, Blue Circle: Loosen

SM 2-75 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
SPDF DF3100

13. Connect the SPDF cable as shown and mount the brackets [A] and [B] on the machine’s
rear frame.
Make sure to connect the grounding wire.

14. Connect the scanner cable to the connector at the machine’s rear.

SM 2-76 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 SPDF DF3100

15. Attach the scanner cable with the bracket [A] to the inside of the controller box.

Installation
16. Connect the cable to the IPU (CN531).

SM 2-77 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
SPDF DF3100

17. Attach the supplied ferrite core (L) [A] and ferrite core (S) [B].
Attach [A] close to the connector.
Attach [B] near the end of the tube.

18. Reattach the controller box cover and the rear cover.
19. Attach the decals [A] and [B] to the SPDF.

SM 2-78 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 SPDF DF3100

20. Attach the decal [A] to the scanner front cover.

Installation
Adjust SP Settings
1. Turn ON the main power.
2. Set SP4-688-002 (Scan Image Density Adjustment 1-pass DF) to "101".
3. Execute SP4-730-002 (FROM Main Factory Setting Execution ON/OFF).
4. Check the vertical registration for the SPDF.
1. Create an original as shown in the following picture.
The large white arrow indicates the direction of feed.

2. Copy the original and make sure that the position of the line [A] is within 0±1mm
3. If not within the standard, adjust with the SP modes.
SP6-006-001 (ADF Adjustment Side-to-Side Regist: Front)
SP6-006-002 (ADF Adjustment Side-to-Side Regist: Rear)

• The above SPs must be executed with the ADF cover closed, because the SPs
will not succeed if the ADF cover is opened or lifted up.

SM 2-79 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
SPDF DF3100

5. Check the horizontal registration for the SPDF.

4. Copy the original and make sure that the position of the line [B] that you wrote on the
original (see above) is within 0±2mm.
5. If not within the standard, adjust with the SP modes.
SP6-006-010 (ADF Adjustment L-Edge Regist (1-Pass): Front)
SP6-006-011 (ADF Adjustment L-Edge Regist (1-Pass): Rear)
6. Check the skew.
6. Make sure that the difference between both end positions of the line [A] that you wrote
on the original (see above) is within 0±2mm.
7. If not within the standard, change the position of the fixing screw [A] to the long hole [B]
at the right hinge.

SP descriptions
• SP4-688-002 (Scan Image Density Adjustment: 1-pass DF)
Adjusts density difference between Book and ADF. This SP is only for the SPDF models.
• SP4-730-002 (FROM Main Factory Setting Execution ON/OFF)
Copies the parameters written in FROM in the SPDF to the engine board in the MFP. This
SP is only for the SPDF models.

SM 2-80 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Anti-Condensation Heaters for Scanner, PCU and Trays

2.11 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATERS FOR SCANNER, PCU

AND TRAYS

Installation
• Turn off the main power and disconnect the power supply cord when installing this
option.

2.11.1 OVERVIEW
The following diagram shows the heater configuration. When installing the heater, the heater
board is required.

2.11.2 HEATER BOARD

• Turn off the main power and disconnect the power supply cord when installing this
option.

Accessory Check
Description Q’ty Shown in the Overview as
Tapping Screw: M3x6 3 -
Clamp: LWSM-0306A 7 -
Clamp: LWS-1211A 1 -
Heater Board 1 #3
BCU Harness 1 #2
PSU Harness 1 #1
PFU Harness 1 #5

Installation Procedure
1. Open the front cover [A].

SM 2-81 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Anti-Condensation Heaters for Scanner, PCU and Trays

2. Remove the paper exit tray [A].

3. Remove the left upper cover [A] ( ×1).

• Slide the cover in the direction of the blue arrow.

4. Remove the controller cover [A].

5. Open the 1st and 2nd paper feed trays slightly.

SM 2-82 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Anti-Condensation Heaters for Scanner, PCU and Trays

6. Remove the left cover [A].

Remove it while pressing down.

Installation
7. Remove the rear cover [A].

8. Remove the rear lower gap cover [A] (hook×2).

SM 2-83 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Anti-Condensation Heaters for Scanner, PCU and Trays

9. Remove the rear lower cover [A].

10. Attach the heater board [A] ( x3).

11. Attach the clamps (LWSM-0306A). Connect the PSU harness [A] to CN904 of the PSU and
CN920 of the heater board, and clamp the harness [A].

SM 2-84 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Anti-Condensation Heaters for Scanner, PCU and Trays

12. Connect the BCU harness [A] to CN121 of the BCU and CN930 of the heater board.

Installation
13. Clamp the harness.

14. Clamp the harness [A] which was connected in step 12.

SM 2-85 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Anti-Condensation Heaters for Scanner, PCU and Trays

15. Attach the clamp (LWS-1211A).

16. Connect the PFU harness [A] to CN921 of the heater board.

17. Attach the socket on the PFU harness [A] to the rear frame of the main unit.

SM 2-86 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Anti-Condensation Heaters for Scanner, PCU and Trays

18. Connect the connector.

Installation
19. Clamp the PFU harness ( x3).

2.11.3 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER (SCANNER)

• Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure.
• Do the following procedure not to damage any harnesses.
• Check that harnesses are not damaged or pinched after installation.

Accessory Check
Description Q’ty Shown in the Remarks
Overview as
Scanner/PCU 1 #4 This part is not needed if the PCU heater has
Harness been installed.
Clamp: LWSM- 6 - These parts are not needed if the PCU heater
0511A has been installed.
Scanner Heater 1 #6
Bracket 1 -
Heater Cover 1 -
Tapping Screw: 2 -
M3x6

SM 2-87 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Anti-Condensation Heaters for Scanner, PCU and Trays

Installation Procedure
1. Install the heater board. (Installation Procedure)
2. Connect the Scanner/PCU Harness [A] to CN922 of the heater board [B] and clamp the
harness.

3. Attach the clamps around the controller board in the rear main unit.

4. Route the heater cable to the rear of the main unit.

SM 2-88 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Anti-Condensation Heaters for Scanner, PCU and Trays

5. Clamp the harness [A].

Installation
6. Open the DF or platen cover.
7. Remove the guide scale [A].

8. Remove the sheet-through exposure glass [A].

SM 2-89 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Anti-Condensation Heaters for Scanner, PCU and Trays

9. Remove the rear scale [A].

10. Remove the left scale and the exposure glass [A].

• The exposure glass and the left scale are attached with double-sided tape.

11. Move the carriage to the right.

12. Attach the heater [B] to the bracket [A] provided with the accessories ( ×2).

SM 2-90 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Anti-Condensation Heaters for Scanner, PCU and Trays

13. Remove the release paper [A] on the back side of the bracket, and secure the heater [B]
with the seal, aligning it with the boss on the frame.

Installation
14. Pull the harness [A] out of the frame hole.
Route the harness into the harness guide.

SM 2-91 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Anti-Condensation Heaters for Scanner, PCU and Trays

15. Set the tabs into the cutout [A], and attach the heater cover [B].

16. Connect the connector, which is shown in step 14, to the Scanner/PCU Harness.

17. Attach the scanner scales and exposure glass, and all covers which have been removed.

SM 2-92 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Anti-Condensation Heaters for Scanner, PCU and Trays

2.11.4 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER (PCU)

• Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure.
•

Installation
Do the following procedure not to damage any harnesses.
• Check that harnesses are not damaged or pinched after installation.

Accessory Check
Description Q'ty Shown in the Remarks
Overview as
Scanner/PCU Harness 1 #4 This part is not needed if the
scanner heater has been installed.
Clamp: LWSM-0511A 6 - These parts are not needed if the
scanner heater has been installed.
PCU Heater 1 #7
THERMOSTAT:ASS'Y 1 -
SCREW:SMALL 1 -
ROUND/SPRING:M3X6
DECAL:WARNING (HIGH 1 -
TEMPERATURE)

Installation Procedure
1. Install the heater board. (Installation Procedure)
2. Connect the Scanner/PCU Harness cable [A] to CN922 of the heater board [B] and clamp
the harness.

SM 2-93 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Anti-Condensation Heaters for Scanner, PCU and Trays

3. Attach the clamps around the controller board in the rear main unit.

4. Route the heater cable to the rear of the main unit.

5. Open the front cover.

6. Open the right cover.
7. Open the transfer unit [A].

SM 2-94 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Anti-Condensation Heaters for Scanner, PCU and Trays

8. Remove the PCDU [A].

Installation
9. Pull out the waste toner bottle [A] ( x1).

10. Take off the heater bracket [A].

SM 2-95 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Anti-Condensation Heaters for Scanner, PCU and Trays

11. Attach the anti-condensation heater (PCU) [A] to the heater bracket [B].

• Fit the anti-condensation heater (PCU) [A] into the tab [C] on the heater bracket [B].

12. Attach the thermostat [A] to the anti-condensation heater (PCU) [B] ( x1).

• Fit the thermostat [A] into the tab [C] on the heater bracket [B].

SM 2-96 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Anti-Condensation Heaters for Scanner, PCU and Trays

13. Put back the anti-condensation heater (PCU) [A], and then pass the heater harnesses out
through the opening [B] at the inner rear side of the main unit.

Installation
14. For MP 4055 SP, MP 5055 SP, and MP 6055 SP only: Remove the development bearing
cooling fan [A].

15. Connect the harnesses of the thermostat [A] and of the anti-condensation heater (PCU) [B]
to the harnesses [C] which are routed in step 4.

• You can connect the harnesses [C] up to either harness [A] or [B].

SM 2-97 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Anti-Condensation Heaters for Scanner, PCU and Trays

16. Attach the warning decal on the bracket.

17. Reattach the development bearing cooling fan, PCDU, waste toner bottle and covers which
have been removed.

2.11.5 TRAY HEATER FOR MAIN UNIT

• Turn off the main power switch and disconnect the power supply cord when installing
this option.

Accessory Check
Description Q’ty Shown in the Overview as
Tray Heater for Main Unit 1 #8
TAPPING SCREW - M3X8 1 -

Installation Procedure

In North America, this option has a decal [A] attached that says 110V-130V. Peel off this decal.

1. Install the heater board. (Installation Procedure)

2. Pull out the first and second paper feed trays.

SM 2-98 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Anti-Condensation Heaters for Scanner, PCU and Trays

3. Connect the harness of the tray heater [A] for the main unit to the socket in the inner rear
frame of the main unit ( x1).

Installation
4. Insert the tabs of the tray heater for the main unit in the cutouts in the inner rear frame of the
main unit, and then attach the heater ( x1).

5. Reattach all the paper feed trays, covers, etc. which have been taken off.
Do the following two steps to set the Anti-Condensation Heater to be constantly ON.
6. Set the setting of SP5-805-001 (Anti-Condensation Heater ON/OFF setting) to [1].
7. Manually disconnect the PCU and scanner heaters.

• The PCU and scanner heaters must be disabled because the temperature in the
machine could become too high, causing problems with toner clogging, or damage
to the scanner lamp stabilizer.

SM 2-99 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Anti-Condensation Heaters for Scanner, PCU and Trays

2.11.6 TRAY HEATER FOR PAPER FEED UNIT PB3210 / PB3220

Turn off the main power switch and disconnect the power supply cord when installing this option.

Accessory Check
Description Q’ty Shown in the Overview as
Tray Heater 1 #9
SCREW:SPRING WASHER:ROUND POINT:M4X10 1 -

Installation Procedure

In North America, this option has a decal [A] attached that says 110V-130V. Peel off this decal.

1. Install the heater board. (Installation Procedure)

2. Pull out the 1st and 2nd paper feed trays of the paper feed unit.
3. Pass the harness of the heater [A] for the optional paper feed unit through the hole in the
inner rear frame of the optional paper feed unit, and then attach it ( x1).

SM 2-100 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Anti-Condensation Heaters for Scanner, PCU and Trays

4. Remove the bracket [A].

Installation
5. Remove the rear cover [A] of the optional paper feed unit.

6. Connect the PFU harness [A] of the optional paper feed unit to the relay harness [B] of the
main unit and the heater harness [C].

• Put the PFU harness through the hole which is revealed when the bracket is
removed in step 6.

SM 2-101 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Anti-Condensation Heaters for Scanner, PCU and Trays

7. Reattach the rear cover of the optional paper feed unit, securing brackets, and rear lower
cover of the main unit.
8. Connect the power supply cord and turn ON the main power.
Do the following two steps to set the anti-condensation heater to be constantly ON.
9. Set the setting of SP5-805-001 (Anti-Condensation Heater ON/OFF setting) to [1].
10. Manually disconnect the PCU and scanner heaters.

• The PCU and scanner heaters must be disabled because the temperature in the
machine could become too high, causing problems with toner clogging, or damage
to the scanner lamp stabilizer.

SM 2-102 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Anti-Condensation Heaters for Scanner, PCU and Trays

2.11.7 TRAY HEATER FOR PAPER FEED UNIT PB3150

Turn off the main power switch and disconnect the power supply cord when installing this option.

Installation
Accessory Check
Description Q’ty Shown in the Overview as
Tray Heater 1 #9
SCREW:SPRING WASHER:ROUND POINT:M4X10 1 -

Installation Procedure

In North America, this option has a decal [A] attached that says 110V-130V. Peel off this decal.

1. Install the heater board. (Installation Procedure)

2. Pull out the paper feed tray of PB3150.
3. Put the harness of the heater [A] for the optional paper feed unit through the hole at the
inner rear frame, and then attach it ( x1).

SM 2-103 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Anti-Condensation Heaters for Scanner, PCU and Trays

4. Remove the bracket [A].

5. Remove the rear cover [A] of Paper Feed Unit PB3150.

6. Connect the PFU harness [A] of the optional paper feed unit to the relay harness [B] of the
main unit and the heater harness [C].

• Put the PFU harness through the hole which is revealed when the bracket is
removed in step 4.

SM 2-104 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Anti-Condensation Heaters for Scanner, PCU and Trays

Installation
7. To gain access to the connector at the back of the board, remove the controller board’s
screws and clamp.

8. Tilt the controller board to the front to expose the connector, and then connect the heater
harness.

9. Reattach the rear cover of the paper feed unit PB3150, securing brackets, and rear lower
cover of the main unit.

SM 2-105 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Anti-Condensation Heaters for Scanner, PCU and Trays

10. Connect the power supply cord and turn ON the main power.
Do the following two steps to set the anti-condensation heater to be constantly ON.
11. Set the setting of SP5-805-001 (Anti-Condensation Heater ON/OFF setting) to [1].
12. Manually disconnect the PCU and scanner heaters.

• The PCU and scanner heaters must be disabled because the temperature in the
machine could become too high, causing problems with toner clogging, or damage
to the scanner lamp stabilizer.

2.11.8 TRAY HEATER FOR LCIT PB3170/ PB3230

Turn off the main power switch and disconnect the power supply cord when installing this option.

Accessory Check
Description Q’ty Shown in the Overview as
Tray Heater 1 #9
SCREW:SPRING WASHER:ROUND POINT:M4X10 1 -

Installation Procedure

In North America, this option has a decal [A] attached that says 110V-130V. Peel off this decal.

1. Install the heater board. (Installation Procedure)

2. Pull out the paper feed tray of the optional LCT unit.

SM 2-106 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Anti-Condensation Heaters for Scanner, PCU and Trays

3. Pass the harness of the heater [A] for the optional tray out through the hole in the inner rear
frame of the optional LCT unit, and then attach it ( x1).

Installation
4. Remove the bracket [A].

5. Remove the rear cover [A] of the optional LCT unit.

SM 2-107 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Anti-Condensation Heaters for Scanner, PCU and Trays

6. Connect the PFU harness [A] of the optional LCT unit to the relay harness [B] of the main
unit and the heater harness [C].

• Put the PFU harness through the hole which is revealed when the bracket is
removed in step 4.

7. Reattach the rear cover of the optional LCT unit, securing brackets, and rear lower cover of
the main unit.
8. Connect the power supply cord and turn ON the main power.
Do the following two steps to set the anti-condensation heater to be constantly ON.
1. Set the setting of SP5-805-001 (Anti-Condensation Heater ON/OFF setting) to [1].
2. Manually disconnect the PCU and scanner heaters.

• The PCU and scanner heaters must be disabled because the temperature in the
machine could become too high, causing problems with toner clogging, or damage
to the scanner lamp stabilizer.

SM 2-108 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 1 Bin Tray BN3110 (D3CQ)

2.12 1 BIN TRAY BN3110 (D3CQ)

2.12.1 ACCESSORY CHECK
No. Description Q’ty Remarks

Installation
1 Tray 1
2 1-bin tray unit 1
3 Tray support bar 1
4 Harness 1
5 Gear 1
6 Screw: M3 x 8 2
7 Harness cover 1
8 Paper support guide 1 Not used for this machine

2.12.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

• When installing this option, turn OFF the main power and unplug the power cord from
the wall socket. If installing without turning OFF the main power, an electric shock or a
malfunction may occur.

• When attaching this 1-bin tray unit at the same time as the following peripherals, attach
the one-bin tray first. Otherwise, the 1-bin tray’s exit tray cannot be attached.
- Internal Shift Tray SH3070 (D691)
- Side Tray Type M3 (D725)
- Bridge Unit BU3070 (D685)
• To use together with the “Internal Finisher SR3130” or “Internal Finisher SR3180”, first

SM 2-109 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
1 Bin Tray BN3110 (D3CQ)

attach the bottom plate of Internal Finisher SR3130 and Internal Finisher SR3180, and
then install the 1-bin tray.
1. Remove the orange tape and shipping retainers.
2. Remove the accessories (fixing screws, etc.) provided with the machine.
3. Open the right cover, and remove the upper front cover.

• When removing the upper front cover, release the hooks at the back of the cover.
• Tilt the operation panel [B] upward to a horizontal position, and then remove the
upper front cover [A].

4. Remove the paper exit tray [A].

SM 2-110 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 1 Bin Tray BN3110 (D3CQ)

5. Remove the paper exit feeler [A].

Installation
6. Tuck in the lever [A] for detecting when the tray is full.

7. Open the front cover, and then remove the upper left cover [A] by pulling it towards the front
( ×1).

8. Release the hooks [A], and remove the left rear cover [B].

SM 2-111 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
1 Bin Tray BN3110 (D3CQ)

9. Remove the inverter tray [A], and tray support rod cover [B] ( ×1).

10. Remove the paper exit cover [A] ( ×1).

11. Attach the gear [A] provided with the accessories.

SM 2-112 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 1 Bin Tray BN3110 (D3CQ)

12. Attach the 1-bin tray unit [A].

Make sure to engage it with the gear attached in the previous step.
Take care that the harness is not trapped between the 1-bin tray unit and the machine frame.

Installation
13. Attach the harness provided with the accessories.

14. Attach the tray support bar [A] ( ×1).

When attaching the tray support bar [A], make sure that the harness attached in the previous
step goes through the slit in the tray support bar circled in blue [A] and comes outside of it as
shown below.

SM 2-113 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
1 Bin Tray BN3110 (D3CQ)

15. Hook the 1-bin tray [A] onto the 1-bin tray unit, aligning the positions in the blue circle.

16. Connect the harness to the 1-bin tray, and bring it around.

17. Insert the tray support bar firmly in the 1-bin tray, and attach the harness cover [A].

18. Reattach the covers, and close the right door.

19. Reattach the paper exit tray and paper exit feeler.

SM 2-114 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 1 Bin Tray BN3110 (D3CQ)

20. Turn ON the main power.

21. Check that output to this tray can be selected on the operation panel, and check the
operation.

Installation
Checking the Position of the Paper Exit Feeler
Check the following points for the paper exit feeler [A] at the paper exit.
• It can move in line with the ejection of paper
• It holds contact with the surface of the ejected paper and is still movable

Paper will get jammed in the following cases.

• The paper exit feeler does not function due to obstacles (such as cables).
• The paper exit feeler does not function when the paper is pulled out and pushed back again.

SM 2-115 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Internal Shift Tray SH3070 (D691)

2.13 INTERNAL SHIFT TRAY SH3070 (D691)

2.13.1 ACCESSORY CHECK
No. Description Q’ty
1 Tray Cover 1
2 Lever 1 Not used for this machine
3 Sheet 2

2.13.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

• When installing this option, turn OFF the main power and unplug the power cord from
the wall socket. If installing without turning OFF the main power, an electric shock or a
malfunction may occur.

• The internal shift tray cannot be used together with the following peripherals:
- Side Tray Type M3 (D725)
- Internal Finisher SR 3180 (D766)
- Internal Finisher SR 3130 (D690)
- Bridge Unit BU3070 (D685)
- Internal Multi-fold Unit FD3000 (M482-17, -21)
• To use together with the "1 Bin Tray BN3110 (D3CQ)", attach the "1 Bin Tray BN3110
(D3CQ)" first before installing the internal shift tray.

SM 2-116 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Internal Shift Tray SH3070 (D691)

1. Remove the orange tapes, shipping retainers, and provided accessories (fixing screws, etc.).

Installation
2. Attach the tray cover [B] to the shift tray [A].

3. Remove the paper exit tray [A].

SM 2-117 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Internal Shift Tray SH3070 (D691)

4. Remove the connector cover [A].

5. Attach the shift tray [A].

6. Remove the paper exit feeler [A].

SM 2-118 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Internal Shift Tray SH3070 (D691)

7. Attach the Mylar sheets [A] at the sides of the paper exit cover.

• Make sure to attach the Mylar as shown in the photo below. This is to prevent
curling when the paper lands in the tray.

Installation
• The Mylar’s top edge should be 0-2.5mm from the top edge of the paper exit cover,
i.e. between the two red lines.
• The Mylar's side edge should be flush against the side of the cover, i.e. along the
yellow dotted line.

8. Reattach the paper exit tray and close the right door.
9. Tuck in the lever [A] for detecting when the tray is full.

10. Reattach the removed paper exit feeler [A].

SM 2-119 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Internal Shift Tray SH3070 (D691)

11. Do not use the lever supplied with the optional unit. Doing so may affect the stacking
function.
12. Turn ON the main power.
13. Check that paper output to the shift tray can be selected at the operation panel, and check
the operation.

Checking the Position of the Paper Exit Feeler

Check the following points for the paper exit feeler [A] at the paper exit.
• It can move in line with the ejection of paper
• It holds contact with the surface of the ejected paper and is still movable

Paper will get jammed in the following cases.

• The paper exit feeler does not function due to obstacles (such as cables).
• The paper exit feeler does not function when the paper is pulled out and pushed back again.

SM 2-120 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Side Tray Type M3 (D725)

2.14 SIDE TRAY TYPE M3 (D725)

2.14.1 ACCESSORY CHECK
No. Description Q’ty

Installation
1 Left Extension Tray 1
2 Upper Extension Tray 1
3 Fixing Plate 1
4 Knob Screw 1
5 Tapping screw - M3 x 8 1
6 Tapping screw - M4 x 14 1
7 Bracket 1
8 Paper Support Guide 1
9 Driven Roller (Flat) 1
- SHEET:NOTE_OPTIONAL_UNIT:EXP 1

2.14.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

• When installing this option, turn OFF the main power and unplug the power cord from
the wall socket. If installing without turning OFF the main power, an electric shock or a
malfunction may occur.

• The side tray cannot be used together with the following peripherals:
- Internal Shift Tray SH3070 (D691)
- Bridge Unit BU3070 (D685)
- Internal Finisher SR 3180 (D766)
SM 2-121 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Side Tray Type M3 (D725)

- Internal Finisher SR 3130 (D690)

- Internal Multi-fold Unit FD3000 (M482-17, -21)
• To use together with the "1 Bin Tray BN3110 (D3CQ)", attach the "1 Bin Tray BN3110
(D3CQ)" first before installing the side tray.
1. Remove the orange tapes, shipping retainers, and accessories (fixing screws, etc.).

2. Remove the paper exit tray [A].

3. Remove the paper exit feeler [A].

SM 2-122 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Side Tray Type M3 (D725)

4. Tuck in the lever [A] for detecting when the tray is full.

Installation
5. Remove the driven roller [B] at the machine’s exit tray and attach the supplied driven roller
[A].
• Insert a flathead screwdriver into the depression in the center, and then, lifting the
driven roller, unlock the part indicated by the red arrow.
• When attaching the driven roller, push its center all the way in until it clicks.

[A]: The supplied driven roller has flat rollers.

[B]: The machine’s standard driven roller has drum-type rollers (as indicated by the red
frames).

SM 2-123 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Side Tray Type M3 (D725)

6. Attach the paper support guide [A] (Tab x4).

7. Open the right cover, and then remove the upper front cover [A].

• When removing the upper front cover, release the hooks at the back of the cover.
• Tilt the operation panel [B] upward to a horizontal position, and then remove the
upper front cover [A].

SM 2-124 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Side Tray Type M3 (D725)

8. Remove the connector cover [A].

Installation
9. Attach the bracket [A].

10. Reattach the covers, and close the right door.

11. Attach the side tray unit [A] to the machine, and fix it with a knob screw.

SM 2-125 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Side Tray Type M3 (D725)

12. Attach the fixing plate [A] ( ×1).

13. Attach the upper extension tray [A] and the left extension tray [B].

14. Turn ON the main power.

15. Check that paper output to the side tray can be selected at the operation panel, and check
the operation.

SM 2-126 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Bridge Unit BU3070 (D685)

2.15 BRIDGE UNIT BU3070 (D685)

2.15.1 ACCESSORY CHECK
No. Description Q’ty

Installation
1 Tapping Screw- M3 × 8 1
2 Screw - M4 1
3 Knob Screw - M4 1
4 Right Front Bracket 1
5 Upper Left Cover 1
6 Left Front Bracket 1
7 Paper Support Guide 1
8 Driven Roller (Flat) 1
- SHEET:NOTE_OPTIONAL_UNIT:EXP 1

2.15.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

• When installing this option, turn OFF the main power and unplug the power cord from
the wall socket. If installing without turning OFF the main power, an electric shock or a
malfunction may occur.

• The bridge unit cannot be used together with the following peripherals:
- Internal Shift Tray SH3070 (D691)
- Side Tray Type M3 (D725)
- Internal Finisher SR 3180 (D766)
- Internal Finisher SR 3130 (D690)
- Internal Multi-fold Unit FD3000 (M482-17, -21)
• To use together with the "1 Bin Tray BN3110 (D3CQ)", attach the "1 Bin Tray BN3110
(D3CQ)" first before installing the bridge unit.

SM 2-127 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Bridge Unit BU3070 (D685)

1. Remove the orange tapes, shipping retainers, and provided accessories (fixing screws, etc.).

2. Remove the paper exit tray [A].

3. Remove the connector cover [A].

4. Remove the paper exit feeler [A].

SM 2-128 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Bridge Unit BU3070 (D685)

5. Tuck in the lever [A] for detecting when the tray is full.

Installation
6. Remove the driven roller [B] at the machine’s exit tray and attach the supplied driven roller
[A].
• Insert a flathead screwdriver into the depression in the center, and then, lifting the
driven roller, unlock the part indicated by the red arrow.
• When attaching the driven roller, push its center all the way in until it clicks.

[A]: The supplied driven roller has flat rollers.

[B]: The machine’s standard driven roller has drum-type rollers (as indicated by the red
frames).

SM 2-129 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Bridge Unit BU3070 (D685)

7. Attach the paper support guide [A] (Tab x4).

8. Open the front cover.

9. Remove the upper left cover [A] ( ×1).

• The screw removed is used again in step 14.

10. Open the right cover, and then remove the upper front cover [A].

SM 2-130 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Bridge Unit BU3070 (D685)

• When removing the upper front cover, release the hooks at the back of the cover.
• Tilt the operation panel [B] upward to a horizontal position, and then remove the
upper front cover [A].

Installation
11. Attach the right front bracket [A].

12. Attach the bridge unit to the machine (using the knob screw [A]).

13. Attach the covers removed in step 9 and step 10, and then close the right cover.

SM 2-131 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Bridge Unit BU3070 (D685)

14. Attach the upper left cover [A] provided with the accessories.

15. Attach the L type connecting bracket [A].

To fix the bridge unit securely on the machine, tighten the finisher's joint bracket [A] and the
L type connecting bracket [B] together when installing the finisher.

16. Complete the bridge unit attachment. Refer to the procedure for connecting the optional unit
downstream of the bridge unit.
• Booklet Finisher SR3240 (D3BB) (Booklet Finisher SR3240 / Finisher SR3230)
• Finisher SR3230 (D3BA) (Booklet Finisher SR3240 / Finisher SR3230)
• Booklet Finisher SR3220 (D3B9) (Booklet Finisher SR3220 (D3B9))
• Finisher SR3210 (D3B8) (Finisher SR3210 (D3B8))
17. After the finisher is installed, turn ON the main power.
18. Check that the finisher can be selected at the operation panel.

SM 2-132 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Internal Multi-fold Unit FD3000 (M482-17, -21)

2.16 INTERNAL MULTI-FOLD UNIT FD3000 (M482-17, -21)

2.16.1 ACCESSORY CHECK
No. Description Q'ty Remarks

Installation
1 Paper Exit Tray 1
2 Base Plate 1
3 Correction Plate for Side to side 1
registration
4 Coin Screw M4 1
5 Screw M4x6 1
6 Screw M3x6 1
7 Bind Screw M3x6 3
8 Coin Screw M4x8 4
9 Paper Exit Guide (Relay) 1 Use this when connecting the finisher beyond
the internal multi-fold unit.
10 Paper Relay Cover 1
11 Left Upper Cover 1 Use this when connecting the finisher beyond
the internal multi-fold unit.
12 Support Tray: Shift 1 Use this for the Finisher SR3230/SR3240 shift
tray.
13 Support Tray: Proof 1 Use this for the Finisher SR3230/SR3240 proof
tray.
14 Driven Roller (Flat) 1
15 Paper Support Guide (Small) 1
16 Cushion (Top/Front) 1 Not used for this machine.
17 Cushion (Rear) 1
18 Cushion (Paper Entrance) 1
19 Cushion (Short) 1 Not used for this machine.
- Sheet (applying pressure to the 1
folding roller)
- Sheet (attaching the paper support 1
guide)
- Sheet (keeping the accessories) 1
- Sheet (about interference with the 1
finisher's I/F cables)

SM 2-133 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Internal Multi-fold Unit FD3000 (M482-17, -21)

When installing the internal multi-fold unit alone

Use the paper exit tray [1] and the paper relay cover [10].

When connecting the finisher beyond the internal multi-fold unit

Use the paper exit guide (relay) [9] and the left upper cover [11].

The customer should keep the unused accessories included with the product. When connecting
a finisher that was purchased separately or when disconnecting the finisher that is connected
downstream from the internal multi-fold unit, if the customer did not keep the necessary
accessories, order them as service parts.

2.16.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

• When installing this option, turn OFF the main power and unplug the power cord from
the wall socket. If installing without turning OFF the main power, an electric shock or a
malfunction may occur.

• This option cannot be used together with the following peripherals:

- Internal Shift Tray SH3070 (D691)
- Side Tray Type M3 (D725)
- Bridge Unit BU3070 (D685)
- Internal Finisher SR 3180 (D766)
- Internal Finisher SR 3130 (D690)

SM 2-134 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Internal Multi-fold Unit FD3000 (M482-17, -21)

• For using this option together with "1 Bin Tray BN3110 (D3CQ)", attach the bottom plate
of this option at the beginning, then install the "1 Bin Tray BN3110 (D3CQ)", followed by
installing this option.

Installation
1. Unpack the internal multi-fold unit [A].
Hold the parts circled in blue. Do not hold other parts. Doing so may damage exterior cover
or deform the frame.

2. Remove the orange tapes and shipping retainers, and take out the accessories (fixing
screws, etc.) provided with this unit.

• When removing the upper front cover, release the hooks at the back of the cover.

SM 2-135 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Internal Multi-fold Unit FD3000 (M482-17, -21)

3. Open the right cover, and remove the upper front cover [A].

• When removing the upper front cover, release the hooks at the back of the cover.
• Tilt the operation panel [B] upward to a horizontal position, and then remove the
upper front cover [A].

SM 2-136 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Internal Multi-fold Unit FD3000 (M482-17, -21)

4. Remove the inverter tray [A].

Installation
5. Remove the paper exit feeler [A].
The removed paper exit feeler can be discarded.

6. Tuck in the lever [A] for detecting when the tray is full.

7. Remove the paper exit cover [A] ( ×1).

SM 2-137 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Internal Multi-fold Unit FD3000 (M482-17, -21)

8. Remove the paper exit tray [A].

9. Open the front cover, and remove the upper left cover [A] by sliding it in the direction of the
arrow ( ×1).

10. Release the hooks [A], and remove the left rear cover [B].

SM 2-138 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Internal Multi-fold Unit FD3000 (M482-17, -21)

11. Remove the connector cover [A].

Installation
12. Remove the driven roller [B] at the machine’s exit tray and attach the supplied driven roller
[A].
• Insert a flathead screwdriver into the depression in the center, and then, lifting the
driven roller, unlock the part indicated by the red arrow.
• When attaching the driven roller, push its center all the way in until it clicks.

[A]: The supplied driven roller has flat rollers.

[B]: The machine’s standard driven roller has drum-type rollers (as indicated by the red
frames).

SM 2-139 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Internal Multi-fold Unit FD3000 (M482-17, -21)

13. Attach the paper support guide (small) to the exit tray (hook x2).
1. Align and insert the support guide’s tabs under the notches in the discharge brush
frame [A] upward at an angle.

2. Rotate the support guide upward so that the support guide’s hooks [C] become
horizontal to the discharge brush frame [B].

SM 2-140 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Internal Multi-fold Unit FD3000 (M482-17, -21)

• Do not continue to hold the support guide at an angle when pushing it in.
Otherwise you might cause faulty attachment or damage to the hooks.

Installation
3. Holding the back of the discharge brush frame with the forefingers, push the hooks in
horizontally one at a time until they click.

14. Remove the paper exit lower cover [A].

SM 2-141 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Internal Multi-fold Unit FD3000 (M482-17, -21)

15. Attach the base plate (3 × 6). Before you attach it, insert the base plate’s 2 tabs [A] into the
slots in the machine.

16. Reattach the covers in the following order: paper exit cover and upper front cover. Then
close the front cover and right door.
17. Attach the cushions to the internal multi-fold unit.
• When attaching the cushion (paper entrance) [1], align the cutout [A] with the top of the
upper cover.
• When attaching the cushion (rear) [2], align it with a point 3 mm from the left edge [B].

SM 2-142 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Internal Multi-fold Unit FD3000 (M482-17, -21)

Installation
18. Open the front cover of the internal multi-fold unit, and then secure the 2 screws in the
recesses.

• This operation is required to apply pressure to the internal multi-fold unit roller when
attaching it. The screw holes become inaccessible when the unit is attached to the
machine, so be sure to perform this in advance.
• Be sure to turn the screws until they stop. It is not necessary to continue tightening
them.
19. Temporarily place the internal multi-fold unit [A] on the base plate.

20. Open the front cover of the internal multi-fold unit, and then, holding the exit tray frame [A]
and the top edge of the opening [B], lift the internal multi-fold unit and attach it to the
machine.
• Lower the lever [C] to keep the paper guide plate open during operation, because the
plate might be deformed if a strong force is applied while the guide plate is closed.

SM 2-143 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Internal Multi-fold Unit FD3000 (M482-17, -21)

• Hold the metal frame part of the opening [B], not the exterior cover, to avoid the
deformation of the cover.
• Be careful not to touch the mylar sheet [D] located behind.

• Be careful not to let the securing bracket [A] get caught between the internal
multi-fold unit and the machine.

21. Attach the securing bracket [A] (M4x6).

SM 2-144 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Internal Multi-fold Unit FD3000 (M482-17, -21)

22. Temporarily attach the internal multi-fold unit with the supplied coin screw (M4x1).

• The unit is only temporarily attached at this stage, so leave the screws loose.
• Fix the screw to the left screw hole [A] of the two screw holes. Do not use the right

Installation
screw hole [B].

23. Attach the correction plate for side-to-side registration [A] to the machine (M3x6).

• Partially secure the adjusting screw [B] on the upper part of the correction plate,
and then secure the screw [C] at the bottom part of the plate.
24. Connect the cable [A] of the internal multi-fold unit to the machine.

25. Turn ON the main power.

SM 2-145 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Internal Multi-fold Unit FD3000 (M482-17, -21)

26. Feed A3/DLT paper (any brand) from Tray 2 and check the scale [A].
Select the [User Tools] icon > [Machine Features] > [Printer Features] > [List/ Test Print] >
[Operation Test].

27. Check the movement at the paper edge from the leading to trailing edges, and turn the
adjusting screws of the correction plate to adjust the internal multi-fold unit’s position until
the deviation stays within 2 marks on the scale. (Each mark represents 1 mm.)
• [A]: When the paper edge shifts towards the front, turn the adjusting screw clockwise.
• [B]: When the paper edge shifts towards the rear, turn the adjusting screw
counterclockwise.

SM 2-146 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Internal Multi-fold Unit FD3000 (M482-17, -21)

28. After registration, tighten the coin screw [A] to secure the internal multi-fold unit.

• When you fully open the front cover of the internal multi-fold unit, it may interfere
with the machine’s upper front cover, causing the internal multi-fold unit to become

Installation
misaligned. Therefore, tighten the screw [A] with a stubby screwdriver.

29. Reattach the hooks [A], and re-install the left rear cover [B].

30. When attaching the finisher beyond the internal multi-fold unit, attach the supplied paper exit
guide (No.9). For details, refer to When Attaching the Finisher Beyond the Internal Multi-
Fold Unit.

SM 2-147 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Internal Multi-fold Unit FD3000 (M482-17, -21)

31. Reattach the left upper cover.

• The exit tray of the internal multi-fold unit has mylar sheets [A] on it. When attaching the
cover, be careful not to damage the mylar sheets [A].
• The left upper cover bulges slightly because of the mylar sheets, but this does not
cause any problem if the mylar sheets are positioned correctly.

• Reattach the left upper cover with the mylar sheets [B] sandwiched behind it. The mylar
sheets must not catch on or hang over the left upper cover, as shown by [C].

32. Reattach the inverter tray.

33. Insert the 4 hooks on the paper exit tray [A] into the slots (hook x 4).
When attaching the paper exit tray, do not put the movable plate [B] under the paper exit
tray, because that would interfere with the operation of the internal multi-fold unit.

SM 2-148 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Internal Multi-fold Unit FD3000 (M482-17, -21)

Installation
34. Tighten the screws to secure the paper exit tray (coin screw x2 :M4).

35. Attach the paper relay cover (coin screw x2: M4)

SM 2-149 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Internal Multi-fold Unit FD3000 (M482-17, -21)

2.16.3 WHEN ATTACHING THE FINISHER BEYOND THE

INTERNAL MULTI-FOLD UNIT
When attaching a finisher downstream from the internal multi-fold unit, attach the supplied left
upper cover [A] and paper exit guide (relay) [B].

1. Attach the paper exit guide (relay) [A] provided with this unit. (coin screw x2)
When attaching the paper exit tray, do not put the movable plate [B] under the paper exit
tray, because that would interfere with the operation of the internal multi-fold unit.

2. Attach the left upper cover [A] provided with this unit.

3. To complete installation of the finisher, refer to the finisher installation below.

• Booklet Finisher SR3240 / Finisher SR3230
• Booklet Finisher SR3220 (D3B9)
• Finisher SR3210 (D3B8)

SM 2-150 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Booklet Finisher SR3240 / Finisher SR3230

2.17 BOOKLET FINISHER SR3240 / FINISHER SR3230

• To attach this optional unit, the following optional units are required.

Installation
- Bridge Unit BU3070 (D685) or Internal Multi-Fold Unit FD3000 (D3E4)
- LCIT PB3170/PB3230 (D695) or Paper Feed Unit PB3150 (D694)

2.17.1 ACCESSORY CHECK

No. Description Q’ty Remarks
1 Booklet Tray 1 Booklet Finisher SR3240 only
2 Shift Tray 2 1
3 Cushion 1
4 Joint Bracket 1
5 Entrance Guide Plate 1
6 Ground Plate 1
7 Booklet Stapler Unit Fixing Cover 1 Booklet Finisher SR3240 only
8 Tray Holder 1
9 Proof Support Tray 1
10 Screws (3x6) 4
11 Screws (3x8) 1
12 Round Rivets 2
13 Screws (4x12) 4

SM 2-151 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Booklet Finisher SR3240 / Finisher SR3230

2.17.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

• When installing this option, turn OFF the main power and unplug the power cord from
the wall socket. If installing without turning OFF the main power, an electric shock or a
malfunction may occur.

• Before installing this option, attach the "Bridge Unit BU3070 (D685)" or "Internal Multi-
Fold Unit FD3000 (D3E4)" first.
• Attach the "LCIT PB3170/PB3230 (D695)" or "Paper Feed Unit PB3210/PB3220
(D787)" first before installing this option.
1. Remove the external orange tape and shipping retainers.

SM 2-152 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Booklet Finisher SR3240 / Finisher SR3230

2. Open the front cover, and remove the orange tapes, shipping retainers and fixing bracket
[A].
Keep the screws that were removed when removing the fixing bracket [A] and reuse them
for attaching the supplied booklet stapler unit fixing cover [A] in step 4.

Installation
3. Pull out the saddle stitch unit and remove the fixing bracket [A] at the lower part of the
finisher.

SM 2-153 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Booklet Finisher SR3240 / Finisher SR3230

4. Attach the supplied booklet stapler unit fixing cover [A]. (Booklet Finisher SR3240 only).
When attaching Punch Unit PU3060, it is not necessary to attach this cover.

5. Pull out the saddle stitch unit [A] again, and remove the orange tape and shipping retainers
(Booklet Finisher SR3240 only).

6. Remove the accessories in the package (fixing screws, etc.).

7. Attach the shift tray [A] ( ×1:3x8).

SM 2-154 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Booklet Finisher SR3240 / Finisher SR3230

8. Attach the booklet tray [A] (Booklet Finisher SR3240 only).

Installation
9. Attach the entrance guide plate [A] ( ×2: 3x6).

10. Attach the ground plate [A] ( ×2: 3x6).

SM 2-155 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Booklet Finisher SR3240 / Finisher SR3230

11. Attach the joint bracket [A] to the machine ( ×4).

Tighten the joint bracket [A] and bracket [B] of the bridge unit together.

• Attach the screw so that the screw head is at the center of the mark.

12. Clean the right side of the upper cover with a cloth moistened with alcohol, and then attach
the cushion to the finisher.
• Make sure that the cushion is aligned with the rear-lower edge [A] of the upper cover.

SM 2-156 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Booklet Finisher SR3240 / Finisher SR3230

13. Connect the cable of the finisher to the connector of the Internal Multi-Fold Unit. (Only when
the Internal Multi-Fold Unit is installed.)

Installation
14. Remove the screw on the connection lever [A] and pull the lever.

15. Connect the finisher to the main unit, and then push in the connection lever [A] to fasten it to
the main unit.

SM 2-157 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Booklet Finisher SR3240 / Finisher SR3230

16. Connect the interface cable [A] to the machine. (Only when the Bridge Unit is installed.)

17. Set the staple cartridge [A].

18. Attach the tray holder ( x2).

19. Close the front cover.

20. Turn ON the main power.
21. Deliver some A3/DLT paper to the proof tray and check if the vertical registration is correct
according to the adjustment scale for A3/DLT paper. (Finisher Registration Adjustment)

SM 2-158 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Booklet Finisher SR3240 / Finisher SR3230

22. Check that the finisher can be selected on the operation panel, and check the finisher’s
operation.

2.17.3 ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLING THE FINISHER

Installation
After installing a finisher, make sure that the side-to-side registration of the finisher matches that
of the main machine.

How to Check and Adjust the Side-to-Side Registration

Check the side-to-side registration by exiting to the proof tray. Print out an A3 or DLT sheet to the
proof tray. Using the markings on the front-most exit roller, check to see where the paper edge is
located when the paper is fed out. For purposes of accuracy, print out about 5 sets. If side-to-side
registration shift occurs, see the Troubleshooting section and make adjustments (Other
Problems).

[A]: Scale marks for DLT

[B]: Scale marks for A3
[C]: 7 scale marks at 2mm intervals
[D]: Center mark

• Each marking represents 2mm.

• If the paper edge is lined up with the center marking, this means the paper is aligned
correctly.
• If the paper edge is lined up with any marking to the right of center, this means the
paper is shifted toward the front.
• If the paper edge is lined up with any marking to the left of center, this means the paper
is shifted toward the rear.

SM 2-159 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Booklet Finisher SR3240 / Finisher SR3230

2.17.4 ATTACHING A SUPPORT TRAY

Explain the following information to the users.
The sensor may detect that the exit tray is full prematurely when delivering z-folded sheets or
curled paper to the tray.
If a message reporting a full paper exit tray appears, the job is suspended until the paper is
removed from the paper exit tray. By attaching a support tray, you can prevent the premature full
detection.
Three types of support tray are supplied with this finisher. Make sure that you understand the
purpose of each support tray before installing one of them.

Support Tray: Proof Tray ("1" marked on the back)

When using B4, LG or larger paper, or when using limp paper, the sheet may become bent,
resulting in premature full detection.

SM 2-160 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Booklet Finisher SR3240 / Finisher SR3230

This can be solved by attaching the proof support tray [B] on the proof tray [A].

Installation
Problem that may occur after attaching this support tray:
When printing A4, LT or smaller paper with the support tray, the machine stacks only 200 sheets,
which is less than the standard specification of 250 sheets.
When printing B4, LG or larger paper with the support tray, the machine stacks 50 sheets, which
is the same as the standard specification.

Support Tray: Proof Tray ("2" marked on the back) provided with the Internal
Multi-Fold Unit FD3000

By attaching Support Tray: Proof [A], more sheets can be stacked when delivering z-folded
sheets to the proof tray, preventing premature full detection.

SM 2-161 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Booklet Finisher SR3240 / Finisher SR3230

Support Tray: Shift Tray ("3" marked on the back) provided with the Internal Multi-
Fold Unit FD3000

By attaching Support Tray: Shift [A], more sheets can be stacked when delivering z-folded sheets
to the shift tray, preventing premature full detection.
The sensor is located at the paper exit. During the installation, be careful not to remove the
feeler.

SM 2-162 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Punch Unit PU3060 (D706)

2.18 PUNCH UNIT PU3060 (D706)

• This Punch Unit is for the Booklet Finisher SR3240 (D3BB)/Finisher SR3230 (D3BA)

Installation
2.18.1 ACCESSORY CHECK
No. Description Q’ty Remarks
1 Punch Unit 1
2 Registration Guide Plate 1
3 Punch Waste Paper Guide 1
4 Hopper 1
5 Hopper Bracket 1
6 Harness 1
7 Tapping Screw- M3×6 15
8 Clip Ring 1
9 Side-to-side Detection Unit 1
10 Punch Unit Movement Motor Unit 1
11 Punch Unit Stay 1
12 Cover 1

SM 2-163 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Punch Unit PU3060 (D706)

2.18.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

• When installing this option, turn OFF the main power and unplug the power cord from
the wall socket. If installing without turning OFF the main power, an electric shock or a
malfunction may occur.
1. Remove the rear upper cover [A]. ( ×2)

2. Remove the rear lower cover [A]. ( ×2)

3. For booklet finisher SR3240, remove the cover [A] of the booklet finisher unit.

SM 2-164 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Punch Unit PU3060 (D706)

4. Remove the inner cover [A]. ( ×3, ×1)

• There is a connector on the back of the inner cover.

Installation
5. Remove the punch guide plate [A].

6. Attach the punch unit stay [A]. ( ×4)

SM 2-165 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Punch Unit PU3060 (D706)

[A]: Rear, [B]: Front

7. Attach the punch waste paper guide [A]. ( ×1)

• After inserting the front tab of the punch waste paper guide into the frame [B] of the
finisher, insert the rear tab into the frame [C].

8. Attach the hopper bracket [A], inserting it from the outside frame of the finisher. ( ×2, 2
hooks)

SM 2-166 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Punch Unit PU3060 (D706)

• Hook the hooks of the hopper bracket onto the back side of the frame.

Installation
• Hook the upper frame of the hopper bracket onto the outside frame of the finisher.

SM 2-167 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Punch Unit PU3060 (D706)

9. Fix the harness of the hopper sensor. ( ×1)

10. Attach the registration guide plate [A]. ( ×2)

[A]: Rear, [B]: Front

11. Attach the side-to-side detection unit [A]. ( ×2)

SM 2-168 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Punch Unit PU3060 (D706)

Installation
• Insert the front pins of the side-to-side detection unit into the holes in the frame.

12. Attach the punch unit [A]. ( ×2)

• After inserting the pins [B] of the punch unit stay into the front and rear holes in the
punch unit, fix the punch unit with two screws.

SM 2-169 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Punch Unit PU3060 (D706)

• Rear

• Front

SM 2-170 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Punch Unit PU3060 (D706)

13. Attach the punch unit movement motor unit [A]. ( ×2)

Installation
• Engage the gear [B] of the punch unit movement motor unit with the rack [C] of the
punch unit.

14. Connect the harness of the hopper sensor to the connector of the finisher. ( ×1)

SM 2-171 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Punch Unit PU3060 (D706)

15. Connect the harness of the punch unit to the connector of the registration drive unit. ( ×1)

16. Connect the harness of the punch unit to the main board, and then clamp it. ( ×2, ×2)

17. Connect the harness [B] of the punch unit movement motor unit and the harness [C] of the
side-to-side detection unit to the punch unit board [A].

SM 2-172 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Punch Unit PU3060 (D706)

18. Attach the supplied cover [A] to the punch unit board.

Installation
19. Fix all the harnesses of the punch unit PU3060. ( ×8)

20. Attach the hopper [A].

21. Attach the rear upper cover, the rear lower cover, the inner cover, and the punch guide plate.

SM 2-173 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Booklet Finisher SR3220 (D3B9)

2.19 BOOKLET FINISHER SR3220 (D3B9)

• To attach this optional unit, the following optional units are required.
- Bridge Unit BU3070 (D685) or Internal Multi-Fold Unit FD3000 (D3E4)
- LCIT PB3170/PB3230 (D695) or Paper Feed Unit PB3150 (D694)

2.19.1 ACCESSORY CHECK

No. Description Q’ty Remarks
1 Shift Tray 1
2 Booklet Tray 1
3 Joint Bracket 1
4 Entrance Guide 1
Plate
5 Cushion 1
6 Tapping screws - M3 4
×6
7 Tapping screw - M4 1
×8
8 Screws - M4 × 12 4
9 Ground Plate 1
10 Proof Support Tray 1
11 Stabilizer 1 This part must be attached to the finisher just after it is taken
out of the shipping box.

SM 2-174 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Booklet Finisher SR3220 (D3B9)

2.19.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

• When installing this option, turn OFF the main power and unplug the power cord from
the wall socket. If installing without turning OFF the main power, an electric shock or a

Installation
malfunction may occur.

• Before installing this option, attach the “Bridge Unit BU3070 (D685)” or "Internal Multi-
Fold Unit FD3000 (D3E4)"first.
• Attach the “LCIT PB3170/ PB3230 (D695)” or “Paper Feed Unit PB3210/PB3220
(D787)” first before installing this option.
• This finisher is light and has a high center of gravity, so it easily topples when installing
or moving it. Therefore, it is equipped with the stabilizer [A] attached to it when shipped.

• The following is important information when moving the finisher.

As a general rule for moving the finisher, move it from the front to the rear of the machine as
indicated with the arrows in green, by gripping the positions outlined in blue in the photo below.

Make sure to grip both front and back of the finisher at the top to prevent the unit from tipping
over.

When connecting or disconnecting the finisher to or from the main frame, slightly move it in the
direction indicated with the yellow arrow.

Grip here
Grip here

Direction for
Grip here connecting/
disconnecting

Move direction

Grip here

SM 2-175 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Booklet Finisher SR3220 (D3B9)
Rev. 08/15/2017

• When the finisher has to be lifted up, for instance, when moving it over an object on the
ground, hold the stay of the slide rail or the bottom frame. DO NOT hold the ground
plate or caster. The parts to be holded for lifting up

Stay of slide rail

Caster

Ground plate

Bottom frame

Do not grip the following locations when moving the finisher:

• Proof tray
• Entrance guide plate
• Front and rear covers
• Shift Tray base
• Connection lever
• Door switch stay
• Booklet stapler unit
Rear cover
Proof tray

Connection lever

Door switch stay

Front cover

Shift tray base

Entrance guide plate

Booklet stapler unit

SM 2-176 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Booklet Finisher SR3220 (D3B9)

1. After unpacking, immediately attach the stabilizer [B] to prevent toppling.

Attach it along the guide rail [A] and push it in all the way, until it clicks.

Installation
2. Remove the external orange tape and shipping retainers.

3. Open the front cover, and then remove the filament tape and packing materials.
4. Remove the fixing bracket [A].

SM 2-177 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Booklet Finisher SR3220 (D3B9)

5. Pull out the saddle stitch unit [A], and remove the filament tape and packing materials.

6. Remove the accessories in the package (fixing screws, etc.).

7. Attach the shift tray [A] ( x1; M4 x 8).

8. Attach the booklet tray [A].

SM 2-178 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Booklet Finisher SR3220 (D3B9)

9. Attach the entrance guide plate [A]. (M3×6)

Installation
10. Clean the right side of the upper cover with a cloth moistened with alcohol, and then attach
the cushion to the finisher.
• Make sure that the cushion is aligned with the left-upper edge [A] of the upper cover.

If the internal multi-fold unit is installed on the main machine, the cushion is too long. So
cut off a section of the cushion at the notch in the cushion, so that the cushion does not
interfere with the I/F connector [A] of the finisher.

SM 2-179 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Booklet Finisher SR3220 (D3B9)

11. Attach the ground plate [A] (M3x6).

12. Attach the joint bracket [A] to the machine (4x12).

Tighten the joint bracket [A] and bracket [B] of the bridge unit together.

If the machine is equipped with the internal multi-fold unit, attach the joint bracket [A] only.

SM 2-180 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Booklet Finisher SR3220 (D3B9)

Installation
• Attach the screw so that the screw head is at the center of the mark.

SM 2-181 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Booklet Finisher SR3220 (D3B9)

13. If the internal multi-fold unit is installed, connect the finisher cable to the connector on the
internal multi-fold unit.

14. Remove the screw on the connection lever [A] and pull the lever.

15. Connect the finisher to the main unit, and then push in the connection lever [A] to fasten it to
the main unit. ( x1)

When the Internal Multi-Fold Unit is installed, check that the two cables of the finisher do not
cross each other, before connecting the finisher.

SM 2-182 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Booklet Finisher SR3220 (D3B9)

Installation
16. Connect the interface cable [A] to the machine (only when the bridge unit is installed).

17. Close the front cover.

18. Turn ON the main power.
19. Deliver some A3/DLT paper to the proof tray and check if the vertical registration is correct
according to the adjustment scale for A3/DLT paper. (Finisher Registration Adjustment)
20. Check that the finisher can be selected on the operation panel, and check the finisher’s
operation.

2.19.3 ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLING THE FINISHER

After installing a finisher, make sure that the side-to-side registration of the finisher matches that
of the main machine.

How to Check and Adjust the Side-to-Side Registration

Check the side-to-side registration by exiting to the proof tray. Print out an A3 sheet to the proof
tray. Using the markings on the front-most exit roller, check to see where the paper edge is
located when the paper is fed out. For purposes of accuracy, print out about 5 sets. If side-to-side
registration shift occurs, see the Troubleshooting section and make adjustments (Other
Problems).

SM 2-183 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Booklet Finisher SR3220 (D3B9)

[A]: Scale marks for DLT

[B]: Scale marks for A3
[C]: 7 scale marks in 2 mm intervals
[D]: Center mark

• Each marking represents 2 mm.

• If the paper edge is lined up with the center marking, this means the paper is aligned
correctly.
• If the paper edge is lined up with any marking to the right of center, this means the
paper is shifted toward the front.
• If the paper edge is lined up with any marking to the left of center, this means the paper
is shifted toward the rear.

Attaching the Proof Support Tray

Explain the following information to the users.
The sensor may detect that the exit tray is full prematurely when delivering z-folded sheets or
curled paper to the tray.
If a message reporting a full paper exit tray appears, the job is suspended until the paper is
removed from the paper exit tray. By attaching a support tray, you can prevent the premature full
detection.

SM 2-184 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Booklet Finisher SR3220 (D3B9)

Proof Support Tray ("1" marked on the back), provided with this finisher

When using B4, LG or larger paper, or when using limp paper, the sheet may become bent,
resulting in premature full detection.

Installation
This can be solved by attaching the proof support tray [B] on the proof tray [A].

Problem that may occur after attaching this support tray:

When printing A4, LT or smaller paper with the support tray, the machine stacks only 200 sheets,
which is less than the standard specification of 250 sheets.
When printing B4, LG or larger paper with the support tray, the machine stacks 50 sheets, which
is the same as the standard specification.

SM 2-185 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Finisher SR3210 (D3B8)

2.20 FINISHER SR3210 (D3B8)

• To attach this optional unit, the following optional units are required.
- Bridge Unit BU3070 (D685) or Internal Multi-Fold Unit FD3000 (D3E4)
- LCIT PB3170/PB3230 (D695) or Paper Feed Unit PB3150 (D694)

2.20.1 ACCESSORY CHECK

No. Description Q'ty Remarks
1 Joint Bracket 1
2 Cushion 1
3 Entrance Guide Plate 1
4 Shift Tray 1
5 Ground Plate 1
6 Stabilizer 1 This part must be attached to the finisher just after it is
taken out of the shipping box.
7 Screws - M4 × 12 4
8 Tapping Screws - M3 × 6 4
9 Tapping Screw - M4 × 8 1
10 Proof Support Tray 1
- Installation Instructions for 1
Stabilizer

SM 2-186 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Finisher SR3210 (D3B8)

2.20.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

• When installing this option, turn OFF the main power and unplug the power cord from
the wall socket. If installing without turning OFF the main power, an electric shock or a

Installation
malfunction may occur.

• Before installing this option, attach the “Bridge Unit BU3070 (D685)” or "Internal Multi-
Fold Unit FD3000 (D3E4)"first.
• Attach the “LCIT PB3170/ PB3230 (D695)” or “Paper Feed Unit PB3210/PB3220
(D787)” first before installing this option.
• This finisher is light and has a high center of gravity, so it easily topples when installing
or moving it. Therefore, it is equipped with the stabilizer [A] attached to it when shipped.

• Refer to IMPORTANT information regarding Moving the Finisher in Booklet Finisher

SR3220 (D3B9). The same precautions concern the SR3210 (D3B8).
• When you lift the finisher at the time of unpacking, do not hold the part [A]. Doing so
may damage the frame.

SM 2-187 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Finisher SR3210 (D3B8)

1. After unpacking, immediately attach the stabilizer [B] to prevent toppling.

Push it in thoroughly along the guide [A] until it clicks.

2. Remove the external orange tape and shipping retainers.

3. Open the front cover, and then remove the orange tapes and shipping retainers.

4. Remove the accessories in the package (fixing screws, etc.).

SM 2-188 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Finisher SR3210 (D3B8)

5. Remove the fixing brackets of the stapleless stapler unit. ( ×4)

Remove the fixing brackets in the order of [A], [B], and [C].

Installation
The fixing brackets are hooked to the metal plate, so slightly lift it and then remove it.

Be careful not to touch the encoder [D] at the back of the motor.

Be careful so that the fixing brackets do not come into contact with the feedout pawl HP
sensor.

SM 2-189 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Finisher SR3210 (D3B8)

If they come into contact, check that the feeler [B] is positioned correctly.

6. Attach the shift tray [A] ( x1; M4 x 8).

7. Attach the entrance guide plate [A]. (M3 x 6)

SM 2-190 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Finisher SR3210 (D3B8)

8. Clean the right side of the upper cover with a cloth moistened with alcohol, and then attach
the cushion to the finisher.
• Make sure that the cushion is aligned with the left-upper edge [A] of the upper cover.

Installation
If the internal multi-fold unit is installed on the main machine, the cushion is too long. So cut
off a section of the cushion at the notch in the cushion, so that the cushion does not interfere
with the I/F connector [A] of the finisher.

9. Attach the ground plate [A] (M3×6).

SM 2-191 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Finisher SR3210 (D3B8)

10. Attach the joint bracket [A] to the main machine (M4x12).
If the machine is equipped with the bridge unit, attach the joint bracket [A] together with the L
type connecting bracket [B] of the bridge unit.

If the machine is equipped with the internal multi-fold unit, attach the joint bracket [A] only.

SM 2-192 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Finisher SR3210 (D3B8)

• Attach the screw so that the screw head is at the center of the mark.

Installation
11. Connect the cable of the finisher to the connector of the Internal Multi-Fold Unit. (Only when
the Internal Multi-Fold Unit is installed.)

12. Remove the screw on the connection lever [A] and pull the lever.

SM 2-193 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Finisher SR3210 (D3B8)

13. Connect the finisher to the main unit, and then push in the connection lever [A] to fasten it to
the main unit.

When the Internal Multi-Fold Unit is installed, check that the two cables of the finisher do not
cross each other, before connecting the finisher (for interference prevention).

14. Connect the interface cable [A] to the machine. (Only when the Bridge Unit is installed.)

15. Close the front cover.

16. Turn ON the main power.
17. Deliver some A3/DLT paper to the proof tray and check if the vertical registration is correct
according to the adjustment scale for A3/DLT paper. (Finisher Registration Adjustment)
18. Check that the finisher can be selected on the operation panel, and check the finisher’s
operation.

SM 2-194 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Finisher SR3210 (D3B8)

2.20.3 ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLING THE FINISHER

After installing a finisher, make sure that the side-to-side registration of the finisher matches that
of the main machine.

Installation
How to Check and Adjust the Side-to-Side Registration
Check the side-to-side registration by exiting to the proof tray. Print out an A3 sheet to the proof
tray. Using the markings on the front-most exit roller, check to see where the paper edge is
located when the paper is fed out. For purposes of accuracy, print out about 5 sets. If side-to-side
registration shift occurs, see the Troubleshooting section and make adjustments (Other
Problems).

[A]: Scale marks for DLT

[B]: Scale marks for A3
[C]: 7 scale marks in 2 mm intervals
[D]: Center mark

• Each marking represents 2 mm.

• If the paper edge is lined up with the center marking, this means the paper is aligned
correctly.
• If the paper edge is lined up with any marking to the right of center, this means the
paper is shifted toward the front.
• If the paper edge is lined up with any marking to the left of center, this means the paper
is shifted toward the rear.

Attaching the Proof Support Tray

Explain the following information to the users.
The sensor may detect that the exit tray is full prematurely when delivering z-folded sheets or
curled paper to the tray.
If a message reporting a full paper exit tray appears, the job is suspended until the paper is
removed from the paper exit tray. By attaching a support tray, you can prevent the premature full
detection.

SM 2-195 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Finisher SR3210 (D3B8)

Proof Support Tray ("1" marked on the back), provided with this finisher

When using B4, LG or larger paper, or when using limp paper, the sheet may become bent,
resulting in premature full detection.
This can be solved by attaching the proof support tray [B] on the proof tray [A].

Problem that may occur after attaching this support tray:

When printing A4, LT or smaller paper with the support tray, the machine stacks only 200 sheets,
which is less than the standard specification of 250 sheets.
When printing B4, LG or larger paper with the support tray, the machine stacks 50 sheets, which
is the same as the standard specification.

2.20.4 STAPLELESS STAPLER INITIAL SETTINGS

• To adjust the strength of the crimp between sheets of stapled paper, there is a setting to
select either single or double stapling.
• The crimp is weakened when there is an image (toner) at the point which is to be
stapled. There also is a setting to mask the image on the point for stapling, in order to
prevent the crimp from being weakened.
• Depending on users demands, explain the settings/methods of the settings by checking
the following instructions.

How to change the setting of Staple Method for the Stapleless Stapler
Use this procedure to select the type of stapling that is done by the stapleless stapler.
Note that if you change the finisher type from Internal Finisher SR3180 to Finisher SR3210,
which has the same type of stapleless staple unit, the current setting in [Stapling Method for
Stapleless Stapler] is not carried over, so configure the setting again.

SM 2-196 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Finisher SR3210 (D3B8)

1. Press the [User Tools] icon on Home screen.

2. Press [Machine Features] > [System Setting] > [General Setting] > [Stapling Method for
Stapleless Stapler].
3. Select [Double] or [Single].

Installation
How to set Margin Erase for the Stapleless Stapler
1. Press the [User Tools] icon.
2. Press [Machine Features] > [System Setting] > [General Setting].
3. Press [Erase Margin for Stapleless Stapler].

SM 2-197 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Punch Unit PU3050

2.21 PUNCH UNIT PU3050

• This Punch Unit is for the Booklet Finisher SR3220 (D3B9)/Finisher SR3210 (D3B8).

2.21.1 ACCESSORY CHECK

No. Description Q’ty Remarks
1 Punch unit 1
2 Cover 1
3 Stay 1
4 Hopper 1
5 Side-to-side detection unit 1
6 Punch unit movement motor unit 1
7 Hopper guide plate 1
8 Guide plate 1
9 Tapping screws - M3 × 6 16
10 Harness (Short) 1 Used for SR3220
11 Harness (Long) 1 Used for SR3210

2.21.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

• When installing this option, turn OFF the main power and unplug the power cord from
the wall socket. If installing without turning OFF the main power, an electric shock or a
malfunction may occur.
1. Take out of the box, and remove the orange tape and shipping retainers.
2. Pull out the finisher interface cable, and move it away from the machine.

SM 2-198 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Punch Unit PU3050

3. Remove the finisher rear cover [A] ( ×3).

Installation
4. Open the top cover, and then remove the arm [A] ( ×1).

5. Open the finisher front cover, and remove the three knobs ( x1).

• Knobs with a lock mechanism are removed using a knob screwdriver or similar
while releasing the lock.

SM 2-199 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Punch Unit PU3050

6. Pull the saddle stitch unit [A] or stapling unit.

7. Remove the finisher inner cover [A] ( ×3).

• Remove the connector at the back of the inner cover.

SM 2-200 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Punch Unit PU3050

8. Cut off part of the finisher inner cover [A].

Installation
9. Remove the supporting plate [A] ( ×3).

SM 2-201 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Punch Unit PU3050

10. Remove the guide plate [A] ( ×4).

11. Insert and attach the hopper guide plate [A] from the front ( ×4).
At this time, pass the harness [B] through the clamp [C].

SM 2-202 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Punch Unit PU3050

12. Attach the stay [A] ( ×3).

Installation
Front [B]: Insert the holes in the stay over the embossed parts on the finisher.
Rear [C]: Place the shaft of the stay through the notch in the finisher.

13. Insert and attach the guide plate [A] from the rear ( ×2).

SM 2-203 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Punch Unit PU3050

14. Insert and attach the side-to-side detection unit [A] from the rear ( ×2).
Front: The two shafts of the unit are passed through bearings in the finisher.

15. Connect the harness [A] of the hopper guide plate to the relay connector [B] of the side-to-
side detection unit, and then clamp the harness.

SM 2-204 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Punch Unit PU3050

16. Insert and attach the punch unit [A] from the rear.

Installation
17. Attach the punch unit movement motor unit [A] so that the gear [B] meshes firmly ( ×2).

18. Insert the hopper [A].

SM 2-205 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Punch Unit PU3050

19. Connect the provided harness to the punch unit board [A] and the control board [B] of the
finisher ( ×6).
Use Harness (short) for SR3220 and Harness (long) for SR3210.

20. Remove the harness [A] from the clamp [B], and connect it to the punch unit board [C] (
×1).

SM 2-206 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Punch Unit PU3050

21. Connect the harness [A] of the side-to-side detection unit to the relay connector [B] of the
harness ( ×1).

Installation
22. Connect the harness [A] of the punch unit movement motor unit to the punch unit board [B]
( ×1).

23. Attach the supplied cover [A] to the punch unit board.

SM 2-207 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Punch Unit PU3050

24. Clamp the harnesses.

For SR3220

For SR3210

25. Reattach the finisher rear cover.

26. Reattach the finisher inner cover and three knobs.
27. Close the front cover.
28. Close the top cover.
29. Reconnect the finisher to the machine, and connect the interface cable.
30. Turn ON the main power.
31. Check that the punch can be selected at the operation panel, and check the operation.

SM 2-208 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Internal Finisher SR3180 (D766)

2.22 INTERNAL FINISHER SR3180 (D766)

2.22.1 ACCESSORY CHECK
No. Description Q’ty Remarks

Installation
1 Bottom Plate 1
2 Left Lower Cover 1
3 Paper Exit Tray 1
4 Tapping Screw: 3x8 2
5 Tapping Screw: 3x8 2
6 Tapping Screw: 3x8 2
7 Screw: M3x6 3
8 Tapping Screw: 3x6 1
9 Tapping Screw: 4x8 1
10 Slide Rail 1
11 Nylon Clamp 1
12 Paper Support Guide 1
13 Driven Roller (Flat) 1
- SHEET:NOTE_OPTIONAL_UNIT:EXP 1

SM 2-209 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Internal Finisher SR3180 (D766)

2.22.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

• When installing this option, turn OFF the main power and unplug the power cord from
the wall socket. If installing without turning OFF the main power, an electric shock or a
malfunction may occur.

• This option cannot be used together with the following peripherals:

- Internal Shift Tray SH3070 (D691)
- Side Tray Type M3 (D725)
- Internal Finisher SR 3130 (D690)
- Bridge Unit BU3070 (D685)
- Internal Multi-Fold Unit FD3000 (D3E4)
• For using this option together with "1 Bin Tray BN3110 (D3CQ)", attach the bottom plate
of this option at the beginning, then install the "1 Bin Tray BN3110 (D3CQ)", followed by
installing this option.
1. Remove the orange tape and shipping retainers.

2. Remove the knob screw and red tag [A] ( x 1).

SM 2-210 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Internal Finisher SR3180 (D766)

3. Remove the shaft [B] from the slide rail [A] ( x 1).

Installation
4. Remove the paper exit cover [A] ( x 2).

5. Place the slide rail [A] under the internal finisher [B].

6. Insert the shaft [A] into the holes in the slide rail and internal finisher, and then fasten with
the screw ( x 1).

SM 2-211 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Internal Finisher SR3180 (D766)

7. Attach the paper exit cover (removed in step 4) [A] ( x 2).

8. Remove the paper exit tray [A].

9. Remove the paper exit feeler [A].

10. Tuck in the lever [A] for detecting when the tray is full.

SM 2-212 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Internal Finisher SR3180 (D766)

11. Open the front cover, and then remove the left upper cover [A] ( x 1).

Installation
12. Release the hooks [A], and remove the left rear cover [B].

13. Remove the inverter tray [A] and tray support plate [B] ( x 1).

SM 2-213 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Internal Finisher SR3180 (D766)

14. Open the right cover, and then remove the upper front cover [A].

• When removing the upper front cover, release the hooks at the back of the cover.
• Tilt the operation panel [B] upward to a horizontal position, and then remove the
upper front cover [A].

15. Remove the paper exit cover [A] ( x 1).

SM 2-214 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Internal Finisher SR3180 (D766)

16. Remove the connector cover [A].

Installation
17. Remove the paper exit lower cover [A].

• The lower inside cover can be removed together with the paper exit lower cover,
because the inside cover is secured to the paper exit lower cover with three
screws.

18. Remove the lower inside cover [B] from the paper exit lower cover [A] ( x 2).

SM 2-215 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Internal Finisher SR3180 (D766)

19. Remove the fixing screws on the upper inside cover [A].

20. Remove the upper inside cover [A].

21. Insert the bottom plate [A] into the holes.

SM 2-216 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Internal Finisher SR3180 (D766)

22. Install the bottom plate [A] ( x 3, Accessory No. 7).

Installation
23. Install the lower inside cover (removed in step 18) [A] in the finisher ( x 2, Accessory
No.5).

24. Reattach the upper inside cover (removed in step 20) [A] ( x 2).

SM 2-217 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Internal Finisher SR3180 (D766)

25. Reattach the paper exit cover [A] and the connector cover [B] (removed in step 15 and step
16).

• Touching the moving parts inside of the cover can result in an injury. To avoid this,
be sure to install the connector cover [B].

26. Reattach the tray support plate (removed in step 13) [A] ( x 1).

27. Reattach the covers (removed in step 14 and step 15), and close the right door.
28. Remove the driven roller [B] at the machine’s exit tray and attach the supplied driven roller
[A].
• Insert a flathead screwdriver into the depression in the center, and then, lifting the
driven roller, unlock the part indicated by the red arrow.
• When attaching the driven roller, push its center all the way in until it clicks.

SM 2-218 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Internal Finisher SR3180 (D766)

Installation
[A]: The supplied driven roller has flat rollers.
[B]: The machine’s standard driven roller has drum-type rollers (as indicated by the red
frames).
29. Attach the paper support guide [A] (Tab x 4)

SM 2-219 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Internal Finisher SR3180 (D766)

30. Install the internal finisher [A].

31. Secure the finisher ( x 1, Accessory No.8).

32. Attach the left upper cover [A] and the left rear cover [B] (removed in step 11 and step 12).

SM 2-220 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Internal Finisher SR3180 (D766)

33. Attach the left lower cover [A] ( x 2, Accessory No.6).

Installation
34. Attach the paper exit tray ( x 2, Accessory No.4).

35. Reattach the inverter tray [A] removed in step 13.

SM 2-221 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Internal Finisher SR3180 (D766)

36. Connect the interface cable [A].

37. Attach the nylon clamp [A] as shown below (Accessory No.9).

38. Turn ON the main power.

39. Ensure that the operation panel displays finisher jobs properly and that it works properly.

2.22.3 STAPLELESS STAPLER INITIAL SETTINGS

• To adjust the strength of the crimp between sheets of stapled paper, there is a setting to
select either single or double stapling.
• The crimp is weakened when there is an image (toner) at the point which is to be
stapled. There also is a setting to mask the image on the point for stapling, in order to
prevent the crimp from being weakened.
• Depending on users demands, explain the settings/methods of the settings by checking
the following instructions.

How to change the setting of Staple Method for the Stapleless Stapler
Use this procedure to select the type of stapling that is done by the stapleless stapler.
Note that if you change the finisher type from Finisher SR3210 to Internal Finisher SR3180,
which has the same type of stapleless staple unit, the current setting in [Stapling Method for
Stapleless Stapler] is not carried over, so configure the setting again.

SM 2-222 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Internal Finisher SR3180 (D766)

1. Press the [User Tools] icon on Home screen.

2. Press [Machine Features] > [System Setting] > [General Setting] >[Stapling Method for
Stapleless Stapler].
3. Select [Double] or [Single].

Installation
How to set Margin Erase for the Stapleless Stapler
1. Press the [User Tools] icon.
2. Press [Machine Features] > [System Setting] > [General Setting].
3. Press [Erase Margin for Stapleless Stapler].

SM 2-223 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Internal Finisher SR3130 (D690)

2.23 INTERNAL FINISHER SR3130 (D690)

2.23.1 ACCESSORY CHECK
No. Description Q’ty Remarks
1 Staple Cartridge 1
2 Front Right Cover 1
3 Stabilizer 2
4 Bottom Plate 1
5 Left Lower Cover 1
6 Entrance Guide Plate 1 Not used when the punch unit is attached.
7 Paper Support Guide 1
8 Driven Roller (Flat) 1
- Screw - M3 × 6 6
- Tapping Screw – M4 x 6 1
- Decal - EMC Address 1
- SHEET:NOTE_OPTIONAL_UNIT:EXP 1

2.23.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

• When installing this option, turn OFF the main power and unplug the power cord from
the wall socket. If installing without turning OFF the main power, an electric shock or a
malfunction may occur.

• This option cannot be used together with the following peripherals:

- Internal Shift Tray SH3070 (D691)
- Side Tray Type M3 (D725)
- Internal Finisher SR 3180 (D766)
- Bridge Unit BU3070 (D685)
- Internal Multi-Fold Unit FD3000 (D3E4)
• To use together with the "1 Bin Tray BN3110 (D3CQ)", after attaching the bottom plate
SM 2-224 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Internal Finisher SR3130 (D690)

of this option, attach the "1 Bin Tray BN3110 (D3CQ)", and then install this option.
• To use together with the "Punch Unit PU3040 (D716)", first attach the "Punch Unit
PU3040 (D716)" before installing this option.
1. Remove the orange tape and shipping retainers.

Installation
2. Remove the package accessories (fixing screws, etc.).
3. Remove the paper exit tray [A].

4. Remove the paper exit feeler [A].

SM 2-225 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Internal Finisher SR3130 (D690)

5. Tuck in the lever [A] for detecting when the tray is full.

6. Open the front cover, and then remove the upper left cover [A] ( ×1).

7. Release the hooks [A], and remove the left rear cover [B].

SM 2-226 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Internal Finisher SR3130 (D690)

8. Remove the inverter tray [A], and the tray support plate [B] ( ×1).

Installation
9. Open the right cover, and then remove the upper front cover [A].

• When removing the upper front cover, release the hooks at the back of the cover.
• Tilt the operation panel [B] upward to a horizontal position, and then remove the
upper front cover [A].

SM 2-227 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Internal Finisher SR3130 (D690)

10. Remove the paper exit cover [A] ( ×1).

11. Remove the connector cover [A].

12. Remove the paper exit lower cover [A].

SM 2-228 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Internal Finisher SR3130 (D690)

13. Remove the fixing screws on the upper rear inner cover [A].

Installation
14. Remove the upper rear inner cover [A].

15. Install a screw removed in step 12 ( ×1).

SM 2-229 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Internal Finisher SR3130 (D690)

16. While pressing the bottom plate [A] into the area shown by the blue circle [B], insert it into
the slot shown by the blue circles [C] and [D].

• The following procedure is the easiest way to set this component.

• 1) Slip the bottom plate [A] into the position in the blue circle [B].
• 2) Insert the bottom plate [A] into the hole in the blue circle [C].
• 3) When the bottom plate [A] is picked up (see below), it can be inserted into the
hole in the blue circle [D].

SM 2-230 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Internal Finisher SR3130 (D690)

17. Attach the bottom plate [A] ( ×3)

Installation
18. Attach the upper rear inner cover.
19. Attach the paper exit cover.
20. Reattach the connector cover and the covers (removed in step 9 and step 10), and then
close the right door.
21. Remove the driven roller [B] at the machine’s exit tray and attach the supplied driven roller
[A].
• Insert a flathead screwdriver into the depression in the center, and then, lifting the
driven roller, unlock the part indicated by the red arrow.
• When attaching the driven roller, push its center all the way in until it clicks.

SM 2-231 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Internal Finisher SR3130 (D690)

[A]: The supplied driven roller has flat rollers.

[B]: The machine’s standard driven roller has drum-type rollers (as indicated by the red
frames).
22. Attach the paper support guide [A] (Tab x4).

• Up to this point, the procedure is the same as punch unit installation (for fitting the
punch unit, refer to Step 3 and later of the punch unit installation procedure).
23. Slide the finisher front right cover [A] from left to right to attach it ( ×1).

24. Reattach the inverter tray.

SM 2-232 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Internal Finisher SR3130 (D690)

25. Attach the entrance guide plate [B] to the finisher [A] ( ×2).

Installation
26. Slide the finisher [A] along the rail of the bottom plate from the left-hand side of the machine
to attach it ( ×1).

• Hold the front side [A] of the internal finisher as shown below to check if the internal
finisher is correctly set in the rail of the bottom plate.

27. Reattach the left rear cover.

SM 2-233 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Internal Finisher SR3130 (D690)

28. Insert the upper left cover [A] from the front, and slide it to reattach it ( ×1).

29. Attach the stabilizers [A].

• Because the weight is biased to the left of the machine if the internal finisher is
installed, stabilizers are required on the left side. Because they are included with
the finisher, install these stabilizers at the same time as you install the internal
finisher.

30. Connect the interface cable [A] to the machine.

SM 2-234 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Internal Finisher SR3130 (D690)

31. Move the stapler unit forward, then set the staple cartridge [A].

Installation
32. Reinstall the stapler unit, and then turn ON the main power.
33. Check that the finisher can be selected at the operation panel, and check the finisher
operation. Also when the punch unit is installed, check the punching operation.

SM 2-235 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Punch Unit PU3040 (D716)

2.24 PUNCH UNIT PU3040 (D716)

2.24.1 ACCESSORY CHECK
No. Description Q’ty
1 Hopper 1
2 Punch Unit Cover 1
3 Lower Front Cover 1
4 Lower Rear Cover 1
5 Holder 1
- Knob Screw - M4 1
- Tapping screws: M3x6 3
- Decal - EMC Address 1

2.24.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

• When installing this option, turn the power to the machine off, and unplug the power
plug from the wall socket.
• If this option is installed when the power is on, it will result in an electric shock or a
malfunction.

• When installing this option together with the “Internal Finisher SR3130”, attach this
option first before installing the “Internal Finisher SR3130”
1. Take out from the box, and remove the filament tape and packing material.
2. Perform steps 1 to 22 of the installation procedure for the "Internal finisher SR3130".

SM 2-236 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Punch Unit PU3040 (D716)

3. Change the position of the bracket [A] on the bottom plate ( ×1).

Installation
4. Replace the lock holder of the bottom plate with the lock holder [A] provided ( ×1).

5. Attach the upper front cover.

SM 2-237 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Punch Unit PU3040 (D716)

6. Pass the shafts [B] of the punch unit [A] through the bearings [C] in the bottom plate, and
attach the punch unit to the machine ( ×1, knob screw).

SM 2-238 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Punch Unit PU3040 (D716)

7. Attach the front right cover [A] provided with the punch unit, inserting the claws ( ×1).

Installation
8. Insert the hopper [A].

9. Slide the finisher [A] along the rail of the bottom plate from the left of the machine, and then
attach it ( ×1).

SM 2-239 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Punch Unit PU3040 (D716)

• Before fastening the screw, make sure that the finisher is correctly set in the rail of
the bottom plate.

• When installing the punch unit in a finisher which is already installed, remove the
entrance guide plate [A] ( ×2). Note that this step is unnecessary when installing
the finisher and punch unit at the same time.

10. Attach the lower rear cover [A] and the lower front cover [B] to the finisher ( ×2).

11. Attach the left rear cover to the machine.

SM 2-240 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Punch Unit PU3040 (D716)

12. Insert the upper left cover [A] from the front, and then attach it ( x1).

Installation
13. Connect the interface cable [A] to the machine.

14. Turn the main power switch on.

15. Check that the finisher can be selected at the operation panel, and check the finisher and
punch operation.

SM 2-241 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Key Counter Bracket Type M3

2.25 KEY COUNTER BRACKET TYPE M3

2.25.1 ACCESSORY CHECK
Description Q’ty
Screw: M3X8 1
Binding Self-Tapping Screw: M4X8 3
Clamp:LWS-1211Z 2
Clamp:NK-3N 1
Double Sided Tape 2
Key Counter Plate Nut 2
Key Counter Harness 1

2.25.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

1. Hold the key counter plate nuts [A] on the inside of the key counter bracket [B], and insert
the key counter holder [C].
2. Secure the key counter holder to the bracket ( x2).
3. Install the key counter cover [D] ( x2).

4. Attach the harness that comes from the key counter to the right side of the main machine
with the two clamps provided with the accessories (CLAMP:LWS-1211Z).

SM 2-242 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Key Counter Bracket Type M3

5. Remove the rear cover [A].

Installation
6. Remove the rear lower gap cover [A].

7. Remove the rear lower cover [A].

SM 2-243 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Key Counter Bracket Type M3

8. Remove the controller box cover [A].

Red Circle: Remove / Blue Circle: Loosen

9. Connect the key counter harness to CN133 [A] of the BCU. ( ×1)

10. Secure the harness to the inside of the main frame with a clamp.
11. Remove the cut off part [A] of the rear right cover.

SM 2-244 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Key Counter Bracket Type M3

12. Pass the harness from the key counter through the cut off part [A] of the right rear cover.

Installation
13. Reinstall all the covers on the main machine.
14. Peel off the double-sided tape on the key counter bracket, and attach the key counter to the
scanner right cover.
15. Reassemble the machine.

SM 2-245 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Optional Counter Interface Unit Type M12 (B870-21)

2.26 OPTIONAL COUNTER INTERFACE UNIT TYPE M12

(B870-21)
2.26.1 ACCESSORY CHECK
No. Description Q’ty Remarks
1 PCB: MKB 1
2 Harness Clamp: LWS-0711 1
3 Stud 4
4 Harness Band 80mm 1
5 Screws M3x6 Standoffs 4
6 Harness (IOB to MKB) Not Used 1
7 Harness (Relay) Not Used 1
8 Harness (MB to MKB) Not Used 1

2.26.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

• When installing this option, turn OFF the main power and unplug the power cord from
the wall socket. If installing without turning OFF the main power, an electric shock or a
malfunction may occur.
1. Remove the following exterior covers. (Exterior Covers)
• Rear cover
• Rear lower cover
2. Remove the controller box cover [A].

SM 2-246 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Optional Counter Interface Unit Type M12 (B870-21)

Red Circle: Remove / Blue Circle: Loosen

Installation
3. Install the four stud stays [A] in the location as shown below.

4. Install the optional counter interface board [A] on the four stud stays.

5. Connect the supplied harness (13 pins) to CN3 [A] on the optional counter interface board

SM 2-247 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Optional Counter Interface Unit Type M12 (B870-21)

and CN132 [B] on the BCU.

6. Route the harness [A] and clamp it as shown below.

7. Re-install the exterior covers.

SM 2-248 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 NFC Card Reader Type M29 (D3E3-21)

2.27 NFC CARD READER TYPE M29 (D3E3-21)

2.27.1 ACCESSORY CHECK
No. Description Q'ty Remarks

Installation
1 Corner Cover 1
2 Reader Spacer 1
3 Reader Cover 1
4 Reader 1
5 Sponge Cushions 2
6 Interface Cable 1
7 Ferrite Core (Black) 1

2.27.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

• When installing this option, turn OFF the main power and unplug the power cord from
the wall socket. If installing without turning OFF the main power, an electric shock or a
malfunction may occur.

SM 2-249 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
NFC Card Reader Type M29 (D3E3-21)

1. Open the right cover, and then remove the upper front cover [A].

• When removing the upper front cover, release the hooks at the back of the cover.
• Tilt the operation panel [B] upward to a horizontal position, and then remove the
upper front cover [A].

2. Remove the upper cover [A] of the upper front cover.

SM 2-250 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 NFC Card Reader Type M29 (D3E3-21)

3. Attach the corner cover [A] provided with this option.

Use the screws removed in the previous step.

Installation
4. Remove the scanner front cover [A].

5. Remove the operation panel upper cover [A].

SM 2-251 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
NFC Card Reader Type M29 (D3E3-21)

6. Remove the operation panel right cover [A].

7. Attach the ferrite core [A] to the cable as the picture below.

8. Connect the USB connector, which does not have the ferrite core, to the operation panel.

SM 2-252 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 NFC Card Reader Type M29 (D3E3-21)

9. Hook the USB cable [B] in the notch [A].

Installation
10. Reattach the operation panel right cover [A].

11. Pass the USB cable [A] between the operation panel bracket [B] and the operation panel
under cover [C].

SM 2-253 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
NFC Card Reader Type M29 (D3E3-21)

12. Reattach the operation panel upper cover [A].

13. Pass the USB cable [A] through the hole in the upper front cover, and reattach the upper
front cover [B].

14. Attach the reader spacer [A].

15. Connect the USB cable [A] to the reader, and attach the reader [B].

SM 2-254 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 NFC Card Reader Type M29 (D3E3-21)

16. If the USB cable is sticking out, put the cable inside the upper front cover.

Installation
• The cable [A] should be placed in the lower area in the left side.

17. Attach the reader cover [A].

18. Reattach the removed covers.

SM 2-255 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Smart Card Reader Built-in Unit Type M29

2.28 SMART CARD READER BUILT-IN UNIT TYPE M29

2.28.1 ACCESSORY CHECK
No. Description Q’ty Remark
1 Corner cover 1
2 Reader spacer 1
3 Reader cover 1
4 Sponge: 20 x 20 2
- Decal 1
- Label 1

• An IC card reader and a USB cable are not provided with this option.

• There are 2 ways to connect the USB cable

of the IC card. One is to the machine USB
slot and another is to the smart operation

2.28.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE (MACHINE USB SLOT)

• When installing this option, turn OFF the main power and unplug the power cord from
the wall socket. If installing without turning OFF the main power, an electric shock or a
malfunction may occur.
1. Open the right cover, and then remove the upper front cover [A].

SM 2-256 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Smart Card Reader Built-in Unit Type M29

• When removing the upper front cover, release the hooks at the back of the cover.
• Tilt the operation panel [B] upward to a horizontal position, and then remove the
upper front cover [A].

Installation
2. Remove the upper cover [A] of the upper front cover.

3. Attach the corner cover [A] provided with this option.

Use the screws removed in the previous step.

SM 2-257 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Smart Card Reader Built-in Unit Type M29

4. Remove the scanner right cover [A].

5. Pass the USB cable [A] through the hole.

• This cable is not included in this unit. The user may need to provide it.
6. Route the cable [A] to the back of the cover.

SM 2-258 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Smart Card Reader Built-in Unit Type M29

7. Attach the upper front cover [A].

Installation
8. Attach the spacer [A].

9. Attach the sponge [A].

SM 2-259 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Smart Card Reader Built-in Unit Type M29

10. Connect the cable to the IC reader [A] and attach the reader to the table.

• This IC reader is not included in this unit. The user may need to provide it.
11. Attach the reader cover [A].

• Do not sandwich the USB cable with this cover.

• Make sure that the reading area on the IC card reader is in contact with the IC card
cover. If they do not contact each other, put the sponge(s) provided with the
accessories underneath the IC card reader to fill the gap. Otherwise, the IC card
reader will not work properly.
12. Route the cable [A] along the right side of the scanner unit as shown below.

SM 2-260 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Smart Card Reader Built-in Unit Type M29

13. Route the cable [A] along the rear side of the scanner unit.

Installation
• Route the cable [A] behind the FFC [B].

14. Remove the cutout [A] in the left rear cover to make a hole for the cable, and then pass the
cable [B] through it.

SM 2-261 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Smart Card Reader Built-in Unit Type M29

15. Connect the keyboard cable [A] to the USB slot.

16. Reattach the removed covers.

2.28.3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE (SMART OPERATION PANEL

USB SLOT)

• There are 2 ways to connect the USB cable of the IC card. One is to the machine
USB slot and another is to the smart operation panel USB slot.
1. Open the right cover, and then remove the upper front cover [A].

• When removing the upper front cover, release the hooks at the back of the cover
• Tilt the operation panel [B] upward to a horizontal position, and then remove the
upper front cover [A].

SM 2-262 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Smart Card Reader Built-in Unit Type M29

2. Remove the upper cover [A] of the upper front cover.

Installation
3. Attach the corner cover [A] provided with this option.
Use the screws removed in the previous step.

4. Remove the scanner front cover [A].

5. Remove the operation panel upper cover [A].

SM 2-263 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Smart Card Reader Built-in Unit Type M29

6. Remove the operation panel right cover [A].

7. Attach the ferrite core [A] to the cable as the picture below.

• This cable is not included in this unit. The user may need to provide it.
8. Connect the USB connector, which does not have the ferrite core, to the operation panel.

9. Hook the USB cable [B] in the notch [A].

SM 2-264 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Smart Card Reader Built-in Unit Type M29

10. Reattach the operation panel right cover [A].

Installation
11. Pass the USB cable [A] between the operation panel bracket [B] and the operation panel
under cover [C].

12. Reattach the operation panel upper cover [A].

13. Pass the USB cable [A] through the hole in the upper front cover, and reattach the upper
front cover [B].

SM 2-265 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Smart Card Reader Built-in Unit Type M29

14. Attach the reader spacer [A].

15. Connect the USB cable [A] to the reader, and attach the reader [B].

16. If the USB cable is sticking out, put the cable inside the upper front cover.

• The cable [A] should be placed in the lower area in the left side.

SM 2-266 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Smart Card Reader Built-in Unit Type M29

17. Attach the reader cover [A].

Installation
18. Reattach the removed covers.

SM 2-267 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
External Keyboard Bracket Type M19 (D3BR-10)

2.29 EXTERNAL KEYBOARD BRACKET TYPE M19 (D3BR-

10)
2.29.1 COMPONENT CHECK
No. Description Q’ty
1 CASE:KEYBOARD:OPTION 1
2 BRACKET:KEYBOARD:OPTION 1
3 BASE:KEYBOARD 1
4 SPONGE:20X20 2
5 SPACER:IC CARD:DOM 1
6 COVER:UPPER:IC CARD 1
7 COVER:IC CARD 1
- COVER:IC CARD:BLANK 1
- TAPPING SCREW:4X14 2
- TAPPING SCREW:ROUND POINT:3X8 4
- TAPPING SCREW:3X14 1
- WIRE BINDER 3
- CLAMP:KS-15 1
- PAN HEAD TAPPING SCREW:M5X13:PIAS 1

• This optional unit is not supplied with a keyboard. Use a commercially available
keyboard.

SM 2-268 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 External Keyboard Bracket Type M19 (D3BR-10)

2.29.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

• When installing this option, turn OFF the main power and unplug the power cord from
the wall socket. If installing without turning OFF the main power, an electric shock or a

Installation
malfunction may occur.
1. Open the right cover.
2. Remove the upper front cover [A].

• When removing the upper front cover, release the hooks at the back of the cover.
• Tilt the operation panel [B] upward to a horizontal position, and then remove the
upper front cover [A].

SM 2-269 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
External Keyboard Bracket Type M19 (D3BR-10)

3. Thread holes in the positions [A] marked "2" on the back of the upper front cover, using the
supplied tapping screw.

• Position the screw at the center part of the guide rib and thread each hole. After
threading each hole, use a tool such as a screwdriver to enlarge the hole so that
the fastening screw (M4) can go through it. (There are dents of 0.2mm depth at the
positions where you should thread the holes.)

• Be careful not to drop the shavings into the machine (do not leave shavings around
the holes).
• Make the holes a bit larger, because you cannot fix the cover with the screws if the
holes are not in the exact position with respect to the screw holes in the main
machine (the rib can be a guide for the hole size).
4. Remove the screw [A] on the frame of the machine.

SM 2-270 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 External Keyboard Bracket Type M19 (D3BR-10)

5. Reattach the upper front cover to the machine.

Installation
6. Attach the keyboard stand bracket [A] on the upper front cover.

• Use the screw holes marked "B". Use 4×14 screws for the blue circles and use a
3×14 screw for the red circle in the picture below.
• Fasten the screw [B] first.

7. Attach the keyboard stand [A] on the keyboard stand bracket.

Fasten the screw [B] first.

SM 2-271 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
External Keyboard Bracket Type M19 (D3BR-10)

8. Attach the partition board [B] so that it is below the hooks [A].

9. Place a keyboard on the keyboard stand, and then pass the keyboard cable through the hole
in the keyboard stand.

• If the cable is too long, clamp with the supplied clamp.

10. Remove the rear cover [A].

11. Remove the scanner right cover [A] ( ×1).

SM 2-272 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 External Keyboard Bracket Type M19 (D3BR-10)

12. Route the keyboard cable [A] along the right side of the scanner unit as shown below.

Installation
13. Route the keyboard cable [A] along the rear side of the scanner unit.

• Route the cable [A] behind the FFC [B].

SM 2-273 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
External Keyboard Bracket Type M19 (D3BR-10)

14. Remove the cutout [A] in the left rear cover to make a hole for the cable, and then pass the
keyboard cable [B] through it.

15. Connect the keyboard cable [A] to the USB slot.

16. Reattach the scanner right cover and the rear cover.
17. Close the right door.

SM 2-274 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Internal Options

2.30 INTERNAL OPTIONS

2.30.1 LIST OF SLOTS

Installation
Slot Option
[A] USB ports *1 External Keyboard Bracket Type M19
Smart Card Reader Built-in Unit Type M29
[B] I/F slot A IEEE 1284 Interface Board Type M19
IEEE 802.11a/g/n Interface Unit Type M19
File Format Converter Type M19
USB Device Server Option Type M19
Extended USB Board Type M19
*1 There is no difference between the left and right USB ports.

SM 2-275 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
IEEE 1284 Interface Board Type M19 (D3C0)

2.31 IEEE 1284 INTERFACE BOARD TYPE M19 (D3C0)

2.31.1 ACCESSORIES
No. Description Qty Remarks
1 IEEE 1284 Interface Board 1
2 FCC document 1
3 Notes for users 1

2.31.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

• When installing this option, turn OFF the main power and unplug the power cord from
the wall socket. If installing without turning OFF the main power, an electric shock or a
malfunction may occur.
• Do not put your hand into the controller box. It will result in a malfunction or injury.
• Before doing any work, touch a metal object to discharge static electricity from the body.
There is a possibility that the IEEE 1284 Interface Board may malfunction due to static
electricity.
1. Remove the I/F slot cover [A] ( x2).

2. Install the IEEE 1284 Interface Board into the I/F slot ( x2).
3. Turn ON the main power.
4. Check that the system settings list is output, and that the board is recognized correctly.

SM 2-276 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 IEEE 1284 Interface Board Type M19 (D3C0)

• User Tools > Machine Features > Printer Features > List/Test Page > Configuration
Page

Installation
• The customer should keep the slot covers which were removed.

SM 2-277 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
IEEE 802.11a/g/n Interface Unit Type M19

2.32 IEEE 802.11A/G/N INTERFACE UNIT TYPE M19

This option is not available in China, Taiwan, and Korea.

2.32.1 ACCESSORY CHECK

No. Description Q’ty
1 IEEE802.11a/g/n Unit 1
2 Clamps 8
3 Velcro Fasteners 2
4 Notes for Users 2

• Since disassembly/alteration of a wireless LAN board is illegal, during service

replacements, replace the whole PCB assembly.
• Be sure to give the provided leaflet to the customer.

2.32.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

• When installing this option, turn OFF the main power and unplug the power cord from
the wall socket. If installing without turning OFF the main power, an electric shock or a
malfunction may occur.
• Do not put your hand into the controller box. It will result in a malfunction or injury.

SM 2-278 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 IEEE 802.11a/g/n Interface Unit Type M19

• Before doing any work, touch a metal object to discharge static electricity from the body.
There is a possibility that the extension wireless LAN board may malfunction due to
static electricity.

Installation
• When using wireless LAN (IEEE802.11 b/g/n:2.4-GHz band), this radio product uses the
2.4-GHz band. Check that industrial, scientific and medical devices using the same
frequency bands, such as a microwave oven or a cordless telephone, are not used
nearby.
• If there is interference, communication may become unstable. Check that there are no
devices likely to cause interference in the surrounding area.

Attaching the boards

1. Remove the slot cover [A].

2. Insert the extended wireless LAN board [A] into the slot.

• Press the extended wireless LAN board firmly in, and check it is firmly connected.
• The customer should keep the slot covers which were removed.

SM 2-279 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
IEEE 802.11a/g/n Interface Unit Type M19

Attaching the antenna

1. Attach the velcro fastener [B] (provided with the accessories) to the antenna [A].

2. Peel the backing paper off the velcro fastener, and attach the antenna to the rear cover and
scanner left cover as shown ( x4).

• Take care to loop it around so that it does not interfere with other options or I/F
cables.
3. Turn ON the main power.
4. Check that the system settings list is output, and that the option is recognized correctly.
• User Tools > Machine Features > Printer Features > List/Test Page > Configuration
Page

2.32.3 USER TOOL SETTINGS FOR IEEE 802.11A/G/N

Go into the User Tools mode and do the procedure below. These settings take effect every time
the machine is powered on.

• IEEE 802.11a/g/n function is disabled while using Ethernet.

1. Press the "User Tools" icon.
2. Press "Machine Features" > "System Settings".

• Select "Interface Settings"> "Network" > "LAN Type". The "LAN Type" (default:
Ethernet) must be set for either Ethernet or wireless LAN.
3. Select "Interface Settings"> "Wireless LAN". Only the wireless LAN options show.

SM 2-280 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 IEEE 802.11a/g/n Interface Unit Type M19

4. Set the "Communication Mode".

5. Enter the "SSID setting". (The setting is case sensitive.)
6. Set the "Ad-hoc Channel". You need this setting when Ad Hoc Mode is selected. The
allowed range for the channel settings may vary for different countries.

Installation
• For mainly Europe and Asia
2412 - 2462 MHz (1 - 11 channels)
5180 - 5240 MHz (36, 40, 44 and 48 channels)
(default: 11)

• In some countries, only the following channels are available: 2412 - 2462 MHz (1 -
11 channels)
• For mainly North America
2412 - 2462 MHz (1 - 11 channels)
5180 - 5240 MHz (36, 40, 44 and 48 channels)
(default: 11)
7. Set the "Security Method" to specify the encryption of the Wireless LAN.
• The "WEP" (Wired Equivalent Privacy) setting is designed to protect wireless data
transmission. The same WEP key is required on the receiving side in order to unlock
encoded data. There are 64 bit and 128 bit WEP keys.
• Range of Allowed Settings:
64 bit: 10 characters
128 bit: 26 characters
• Specify "WPA2" when "Communication Mode" is set to "Infrastructure Mode". Set the
"WPA2 Authent. Method".
• WPA2 Authent. Method:
Select either "WPA2-PSK" or "WPA2".
If you select "WPA2-PSK", enter the pre-shared key (PSK) of 8-63 characters in
ASCII code.
When "WPA2" is selected, authentication settings and certificate installation
settings are required.
8. Press "Wireless LAN Signal" to check the machine's radio wave status using the operation
panel.
• Press "Restore Factory Defaults" to initialize the wireless LAN settings.

SM 2-281 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
IEEE 802.11a/g/n Interface Unit Type M19

2.32.4 SP MODE SETTINGS FOR IEEE 802.11 WIRELESS LAN

The following SP commands and UP modes can be set for IEEE 802.11
SP No. Name Function
SP5- Channel MAX Sets the maximum range of the channel settings for the country.
840-006
SP5- Channel MIN Sets the minimum range of the channels settings allowed for your
840-007 country.
SP5- Transmission Sets the transmission speed.
840-008 Speed Auto, 54 Mbps, 48 Mbps, 36 Mbps, 24 Mbps, 18 Mbps, 12 Mbps, 9
Mbps, 6 Mbps, 11 Mbps, 5.5 Mbps, 2 Mbps, 1 Mbps (default: Auto).
SP5- WEP Key Select Used to select the WEP key (Default: 00).
840-011
UP Name Function
mode SSID Used to confirm the current SSID setting.
WEP Key Used to confirm the current WEP key setting.
WEP Mode Used to show the maximum length of the string that can be used
for the WEP Key entry.
WPA2 Authent. Used to confirm the current WPA authentication setting and
Method preshared key.

SM 2-282 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 File Format Converter Type M19 (D3BR-04)

2.33 FILE FORMAT CONVERTER TYPE M19 (D3BR-04)

2.33.1 ACCESSORY CHECK
No. Description Q’ty

Installation
1 File Format Converter 1
2 Notes for Users 1

2.33.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

• When installing this option, turn OFF the main power and unplug the power cord from
the wall socket. If installing without turning OFF the main power, an electric shock or a
malfunction may occur.
• Do not put your hand into the controller box. It will result in a malfunction or injury.
• Before doing any work, touch a metal object to discharge static electricity from the body.
There is a possibility that the board may malfunction due to static electricity.
1. Remove the I/F slot cover [A]. The customer should keep the slot covers which were
removed.

2. Insert the file format converter board into the I/F slot. ( ×2)
3. Turn ON the main power.
4. Check the system settings list is output, and that the option is recognized correctly.
• User Tools > Machine Features > Printer Features > List/Test Page > Configuration
Page

SM 2-283 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Enhanced Security HDD Option Type M10 (D792-09)

2.34 ENHANCED SECURITY HDD OPTION TYPE M10 (D792-

09)
2.34.1 ACCESSORY CHECK
No. Description Q'ty Remarks
1 Enhanced Security HDD 1
- EMC Address 1

2.34.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

• When installing this option, turn OFF the main power and unplug the power cord from
the wall socket. If installing without turning OFF the main power, an electric shock or a
malfunction may occur.
1. Remove the rear cover [A].

SM 2-284 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Enhanced Security HDD Option Type M10 (D792-09)

2. Remove the controller box cover [A].

Red Circle: Remove / Blue Circle: Loosen

Installation
3. Remove the standard HDD [A] installed on the machine.

4. Separate the standard HDD from the bracket.

SM 2-285 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Enhanced Security HDD Option Type M10 (D792-09)

5. Disconnect the cables from the standard HDD.

6. Remove the enhanced security HDD from its protective pack.

7. Connect the two cables to the enhanced security HDD.

8. Fasten the HDD to the bracket.

9. Install the HDD bracket in the controller box.
10. Reassemble the machine.

SM 2-286 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Enhanced Security HDD Option Type M10 (D792-09)

After Installing the HDD

1. Connect the power cord and turn the machine on. A message prompts you to format the
hard disk.

Installation
2. Touch [Format].

3. Wait for the machine to finish formatting the hard disk.

• Do not touch the power switch while the hard disk format is in progress. Wait for the
machine to tell you that the formatting is finished.

4. Turn the main power OFF and back ON again after the message tells you formatting is
finished.
5. Ask an administrator to register an HDD authentication code in the machine.

• If the HDD Authentication Code is not registered, the function of the enhanced
security HDD is not activated.

SM 2-287 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
USB Device Server Option Type M19 (D3BC-28,-29)

2.35 USB DEVICE SERVER OPTION TYPE M19 (D3BC-28,-

29)
2.35.1 ACCESSORY CHECK
No Items Q’ty Remarks
1 USB Cable 1
2 Interface Board 1
3 Ferrite Core 2
4 Cable Ties 2 North America only

• An Ethernet cable is not packed with this option.

Interface Board Surface

No. Item Description

1 Switch Used to reset to the factory settings.
2 Ethernet port Used to connect the Ethernet cable.
3 USB port Used to connect this option to the main machine.
Do not use this port with other options.

• When installing the USB device server option, make sure that the labels 'USB-A' and

SM 2-288 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 USB Device Server Option Type M19 (D3BC-28,-29)

'Ethernet' are upside down.

Installation
2.35.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

• When installing this option, turn OFF the main power and unplug the power cord from
the wall socket. If installing without turning OFF the main power, an electric shock or a
malfunction may occur.

• The USB device server option has an IP address stored on the PCB. This is different
from the machine's IP address. The IP address and other network settings of the USB
device server option must be configured after installing this option.
1. Remove the interface slot cover [A].

SM 2-289 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
USB Device Server Option Type M19 (D3BC-28,-29)

2. Install the interface board in the interface slot [A].

3. Remove the controller cover [A].

4. Cut off the USB port cover [A] with nippers or another such tool.

5. Reattach the covers.

6. Insert the USB cable [A] into the USB port (Type A) on the machine I/F.

SM 2-290 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 USB Device Server Option Type M19 (D3BC-28,-29)

7. Insert the other side of the USB cable [B] into the USB port (Type B) on this option board.

Installation
8. Attach the ferrite cores to the Ethernet cable, while looping the cable at 3 cm (approx. 1.2
inch) [A] from each end of the cable.

9. Only for installing this option in North America, bind both cores with cable ties [A] as shown
below. The two binds are not included in options produced before March, 2015. To bind the
cores, use the binds registered as service parts or similar ones.

SM 2-291 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
USB Device Server Option Type M19 (D3BC-28,-29)

10. Insert the Ethernet cable [A] into the Ethernet port on this option.

11. Insert the other end of the Ethernet cable to a PC for network setup.
12. Connect the power cord to the machine and turn on the main power of the machine.

• Do not unplug the USB cable while the machine is recognizing this option. It may
take between 30 seconds to 1 minute to finish recognizing it (the LEDs on the
Ethernet port of this option light up after recognizing this option; see below). If
unplugged, connect the cable again.
13. Make sure that the machine recognizes this option correctly by doing one of the following:
1. Access the option’s IP address from a web browser.
2. Ping the option’s IP address from a command prompt on a Windows PC in the same
network as the mainframe.
If the IP address cannot be found (DHCP server), use the MAC address. This is the
number printed on the seal attached to the printed circuit board for the USB server.

SM 2-292 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 USB Device Server Option Type M19 (D3BC-28,-29)

Installation
3. Use "RX" + the option’s MAC address and access a web browser.
Example: http://RX0080926A3264

4. Ping "RX" + "MAC address" from the command prompt on a windows PC which is on
the same network as the mainframe.

• When installing the USB Device Server Option Type M19, the installation status is not
shown on the Configuration Page.
• The customer should keep the slot covers which were removed.

SM 2-293 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
USB Device Server Option Type M19 (D3BC-28,-29)

What Do the LED Indications Mean?

When this option is properly installed and recognized by the main machine, the LED indicators
light up under the following conditions.

No. Light Color Lights Up When:

1 Green and Yellow 1000BASE-T operates
2 Green 10BASE-T operates
3 Yellow 100BASE-TX operates

Notes for Energy Save Mode Setting

If the machine which has this option enters into the energy save mode, you cannot print because
there will be a communication error. Follow the instructions below to disable the machine’s
entering into the energy save mode.

1. Set SP5-191-001 (Power Str Set) to a value of "0".

2. Exit SP mode.
3. Turn the machine main power OFF/ON.

2.35.3 IP ADDRESS SETTING

This section describes how to set an IP address on this option manually. Note that you can set
an IP address which is not only on the same network segment but also on a different network
segment, to share a single printer with devices in multiple networks.

• You cannot change the IP address for this option from the operation panel of the main
machine. The setting must be done from a web browser on your PC.
• The network setting of this option is initially assigned as follows:
IP address: 192.168.100.100 / Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
• The network setting of your PC must be in the same network segment to change the
network setting of this option.
1. Make a note of the current network settings of your PC.
2. Change the IP address on your PC to [192.168.100.xxx (*0 - 255)].
3. Change the subnet mask on your PC to [255.255.255.0].

SM 2-294 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 USB Device Server Option Type M19 (D3BC-28,-29)

4. Open a web browser.

5. Type [http://192.168.100.100/] in the address bar.
6. Press the “Enter” key.

Installation
• The setting screen for this option appears.
7. Click [Network Setting].

8. Type [root] in the user name textbox and click [OK].

9. Input [IP Address], [Subnet Mask] and [Default Gateway].

10. Set other items if needed.

11. Press [Set]
12. Close the web browser.
13. Disconnect the Ethernet cable from the PC.
14. Connect the Ethernet cable to a network device (e.g. switching hub).
15. Set the IP address of this option in the printer driver which you use.

SM 2-295 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Extended USB Board Type M19 (D3BS-01)

2.36 EXTENDED USB BOARD TYPE M19 (D3BS-01)

2.36.1 COMPONENT CHECK
No. Items Q'ty Remarks
1 Extended USB Board 1

2.36.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

• When installing this option, turn OFF the main power and unplug the power cord from
the wall socket. If installing without turning OFF the main power, an electric shock or a
malfunction may occur.
• Do not put your hand into the controller box. It will result in a malfunction or injury.
• Before doing any work, touch a metal object to discharge static electricity from the body.
1. Remove the slot cover [A]. The customer should keep the slot covers which were removed.

2. Insert the Extended USB Board into the I/F slot. ( x 2)

3. Turn ON the main power.
4. Check that the board is recognized correctly on Web Image Monitor.
Log in with an administrator account on Web Image Monitor > Device Management >
Configuration > Interface Settings > USB > Active

SM 2-296 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 SD Card Options

2.37 SD CARD OPTIONS

2.37.1 SD CARD SLOTS

Installation
[A]: SD card slot 1 (option slot)
[B]: SD card slot 2 (service slot)

2.37.2 LIST OF SLOTS USED

Optional SD cards can be set in either slot 1 or slot 2. However, slot 2 is the service slot, so we
recommend that you use slot 1 to install the SD card options.

• In this machine, it is possible to transfer data from a "Postscript3 Unit" SD card, unlike in
earlier models, due to a change in the software licensing (the part of the Postscript
software that requires licensing is now built into the controller, so the portion on the SD
card can be moved to another SD card).
Option Name Slot Remarks
1 PostScript3 Unit Type M29 Slot 1 or Slot 2
2 SD Card for Fonts Type D
3 XPS Direct Print Option Type M29
4 Fax Connection Unit Type M29
5 OCR Unit Type M13
6 DataOverwriteSecurity Unit Type M19
7 IPDS Unit
8 Unicode Font Package for SAP(R) 1 License
9 Unicode Font Package for SAP(R) 10 Licenses
10 Unicode Font Package for SAP(R) 100 Licenses

SM 2-297 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
SD Card Appli Move

2.38 SD CARD APPLI MOVE

2.38.1 OVERVIEW
The service program "SD Card Appli Move" (SP5-873) lets you move application programs from
one SD card to another SD card.
If more than one application is required, the applications must be moved to one SD card with
SP5873-1 (PostScript 3, IPDS unit, etc.).
Be very careful when you do the SD Card Appli Move procedure:
• The data necessary for authentication is transferred with the application program from an SD
card to another SD card. Authentication fails if you try to use the SD card after you move the
application program from one card to another card.
• Do not use the SD card if it has been used before for other purposes. Normal operation is
not guaranteed when such an SD card is used.

• Store the vacant SD card in the storage space inside the upper front cover as shown above.
This is done for the following reasons:
• The SD card can be the only proof that the user is licensed to use the application
program.
• You may need to check the SD card and its data to solve a problem in the future.

2.38.2 MOVE EXEC

The menu "Move Exec" (SP5-873-001) lets you move application programs from the original SD
card to another SD card.

• Do not turn ON the write protect switch of the system SD card or application SD card on
the machine. If the write protect switch is ON, a download error (e.g. Error Code 44)
occurs during a firmware upgrade or application merge.

SM 2-298 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 SD Card Appli Move

1. Turn OFF the main power.

2. Remove the SD card slot cover [A].

Installation
3. Make sure that a target SD card is in SD Card Slot 1 [A]. The application program is moved
to this SD card.
4. Insert the source SD card with the application program in SD Card Slot 2 [B]. The application
program is copied from this source SD card.

5. Turn ON the main power.

6. Start the SP mode.
7. Select SP5-873-001 "Move Exec".
8. Follow the messages shown on the operation panel.
9. Turn OFF the main power.
10. Remove the source SD card from SD Card Slot 2.
11. Turn ON the main power.
12. Check that the application programs run normally.

SM 2-299 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
SD Card Appli Move

2.38.3 UNDO EXEC

"Undo Exec" (SP5-873-002) lets you move back application programs from an SD card in SD
Card Slot 1 to the original SD card in SD Card Slot 2. You can use this program when, for
example, you have mistakenly copied some programs by using Move Exec (SP5-873-001).

• Do not turn ON the write protect switch of the system SD card or application SD card on
the machine. If the write protect switch is ON, a download error (e.g. Error Code 44)
occurs during a firmware upgrade or application merge.
1. Turn OFF the main power.
2. Remove the SD card slot cover [A].

3. Insert the original SD card in SD Card Slot 2 [B]. The application program is copied back into
this card.
4. Insert the SD card with the application program in SD Card Slot 1 [A]. The application
program is copied back from this SD card.

5. Turn ON the main power.

6. Start the SP mode.
7. Select SP5-873-002 "Undo Exec."
8. Follow the messages shown on the operation panel.
9. Turn OFF the main power.
10. Remove the SD card from SD Card Slot 2.
11. Turn ON the main power.
12. Check that the application programs run normally.

SM 2-300 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 OCR Unit Type M13 (D3AC-23, -24, -25)

2.39 OCR UNIT TYPE M13 (D3AC-23, -24, -25)

2.39.1 ACCESSORY CHECK
No. Description Q’ty

Installation
1 SD Card 1

2.39.2 SEARCHABLE PDF FUNCTION OUTLINE

This option adds a searchable PDF function to the scanning function.
• The searchable PDF function performs OCR by the MFP on a document read with the
scanner, and embeds text data in the PDF. This permits PDF text browsing, automatic
assignment of filenames, and automatic alignment of document orientation.
• This option is provided with an SD card. By installing an SD card in the MFP, a functional
icon is added to the control unit. It is not necessary to install software in a PC.
• If this option is installed, various settings related to the searchable PDF function are
available.
• After reading of the document is completed (after it is read by the SPDF/ARDF and output),
OCR is performed. Therefore, after reading is completed, documents can be collected from
the document glass or SPDF/ARDF.
• Other functions, such as the copy function and printer function, can be used during OCR.

2.39.3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

• When installing this option, turn OFF the main power and unplug the power cord from
the wall socket. If installing without turning OFF the main power, an electric shock or a
malfunction may occur.

• When installing more than one SD card, perform the merge operation. (SD Card Appli
Move)

SM 2-301 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
OCR Unit Type M13 (D3AC-23, -24, -25)

1. Remove the SD card slot covers [A].

2. Insert the OCR Unit SD card in SD card slot 1 [A: Upper Slot].

3. Turn ON the main power.

4. Enter the SP mode, and then press "Enter" in SP5-878-004 (Option Setup: OCR Dictionary).
The SD card ID is saved in the NVRAM, and the ID of the MFP is saved on the SD card. The
MFP and SD card are thereby linked.
5. When “operation complete” is displayed, press "Close”.

• If installation fails, "Failed" is displayed.

• If installation fails, perform the following steps.
1. Check whether it is a used SD card.
2. Turn the main power OFF, and repeat steps 1-5.
6. Turn the machine OFF and back ON again.
7. Press “Enter” in SP5-878-004 (Option Setup: OCR Dictionary).
Dictionary data is copied to the HDD.

• On the first run, SP5-878-004 links the SD card, and on the second run, copies
dictionary data.
8. Turn OFF the main power.

SM 2-302 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 OCR Unit Type M13 (D3AC-23, -24, -25)

9. Remove the SD card from the SD card slot.

• Keep the SD card in the SD card storage location of the MFP. The original SD card
is needed in the event of a HDD malfunction.

Installation
10. Reattach the SD card slot cover.
11. Turn ON the main power.
12. Press [File Format / File Name] on the scanner function screen.
13. Check that [OCR setting] is displayed on the "File format / "File Name" screen.

• After installation, the OCR setting can be changed on the "OCR setting" screen.
• When setting OCR, set [OCR setting] to [Yes]. (Default setting: [No])

2.39.4 RECOVERY PROCEDURE

When this option is installed, a function is saved on the HDD, and ID information on the SD card
is saved in the NVRAM. Therefore, when replacing the HDD and/or NVRAM, this option must be
reinstalled.

When storing the original SD card

• When only the HDD is replaced

Reinstall using the original SD card.
• When only the NVRAM is replaced
When performing upload/download of NVRAM data, reinstall using the original SD card.
When not performing upload/download of NVRAM data, order and reinstall a new SD card
(service part).
• When the HDD and NVRAM are replaced simultaneously
Reinstall using the original SD card.

If the original SD card is lost

Order and reinstall a new SD card (service part).

SM 2-303 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
PostScript3 Unit Type M29

2.40 POSTSCRIPT3 UNIT TYPE M29

2.40.1 COMPONENT CHECK
No. Description Q’ty
1 SD Card (PostScript3 Unit) 1
2 PS3 Decal 1

2.40.2 OVERVIEW OF POSTSCRIPT3 UNIT TYPE M29 (ADOBE PS)

This machine is equipped with a clone program for emulating Adobe PostScript/PDF (hereafter
“Clone PS”) as a standard feature. So, by factory default, it can perform printing using PostScript
3 and PDF Direct Print, in addition to RPCS.
However, the variety and number of built-in fonts (device fonts) differ between Adobe PS and
Clone PS, sometimes resulting in different printing results.
To address the possible customer needs listed below, the PostScript3 Unit Type M29 is made
available as an option.
• When you want to use device fonts supplied with Adobe PS.
• Since forms and ledgers have been created based on device fonts supplied with Adobe PS,
a changeover to Clone PS requires redesign of these documents.
• From the viewpoint of precise printing operation, it is impossible to accept any differences in
output results in comparison with Adobe PS.

For details of the functions of Adobe PS and Clone PS, refer to Adobe PS vs. Clone PS.

2.40.3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE (ADOBE PS)

• When installing this option, turn OFF the main power and unplug the power cord from
the wall socket. If installing without turning OFF the main power, an electric shock or a
malfunction may occur.

• Clone PS and Adobe PS cannot be run simultaneously. If PostScript3 Unit Type M29
(Adobe PS) is installed, Clone PS will be disabled.
• When installing more than one SD card, perform the merge operation (SD Card Appli

SM 2-304 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 PostScript3 Unit Type M29

Move).
1. Remove the SD card slot cover [A].

Installation
2. Insert the PS3 SD card in SD card slot 1 [A: Upper Slot].

3. Reattach the SD card slot cover (coin screw x 1).

4. Stick the "Adobe PostScript3" decal [A] on the front face of the machine.

5. Turn ON the main power.

Adobe PostScript3 installation starts.

SM 2-305 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
PostScript3 Unit Type M29

6. Press [Restart] when the following message appears.

7. Print out the "Configuration Page", and then check if this option is correctly recognized.
• User Tools > Machine Features > Printer Features > List/Test Page > Configuration
Page
• Note that the description of Firmware Version shown in the printed Configuration Page
differs between Clone PS and Adobe PS.
PS type Description of Firmware Version
When PostScript3 Unit Type M29 (Adobe RPCS [x.xx.xx] Adobe PostScript 3 [x.xx],
PS) is installed Adobe PDF [x.xx]
Clone PS RPCS [x.xx.xx] PS3 [x.xx], PDF [x.xx]

Initial Settings for the Printer Driver

After installation of an SD card, configure the settings for the printer driver in accordance with the
type of PS to be used.

The same printer driver, PS3 printer driver, can be used for printing either for Adobe PS or Clone
PS.
• Setting items (Windows):
In an environment where interactive communication is enabled, the machine attempts to
acquire information to perform automatic configuration.
When manual configuration is to be performed, select “Adobe PostScript” if Adobe PS is
used, and choose “Emulated PostScript” if Clone PS is used.
1. On the [Start] menu, click [Devices and Printers].
2. Right-click the icon of the printer you want to use.
3. Click [Printer properties].

SM 2-306 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 PostScript3 Unit Type M29

4. Click the “Accessories” tab and configure settings for Adobe PS/Clone PS using the
PostScript pull-down menu.

Installation
• Setting items (Mac OS X):
If the driver is installed by means of the Bonjour function or “HP Jetdirect - Socket”, the
settings will be automatically configured.
Automatic configuration will not work if any other protocol is used for installation. In this
case, manual configuration is required.
When manual configuration is to be performed, select “Adobe PostScript” if Adobe PS is
used, and “Emulated PostScript” if Clone PS is used.

Switching back to Clone PS from Adobe PS

Clone PS can be resumed by removing the Adobe PS card from the SD card slot and applying
the firmware for Clone PS/PDF (“.fwu” or “.rfu”).
Note: The work should be carried out by customer engineers.
In doing this, be sure to apply both PS3 and PDF firmware modules. If only one of them is
applied, the machine will not operate properly. (As a stopgap measure to fix the malfunction,
insert the optional Adobe PS card again into the SD card slot to enable the use of Adobe PS.
Then, Clone PS can be resumed by applying both the PS3 and PDF firmware modules once
again.)
Classification Firmware name Software part number
Clone PS Clone PS3 D2895594
component firmware Clone PDF D2895595
IRIPS Font D2895596
Adobe PS Adobe PS3 D3DW5731
component firmware Adobe PDF D3DW5733
PS3 Font D2415681

SM 2-307 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
XPS Direct Print Option Type M29

2.41 XPS DIRECT PRINT OPTION TYPE M29

2.41.1 COMPONENT CHECK
No. Description Qty
1 XPS Direct Print SD Card 1

2.41.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

• When installing this option, turn OFF the main power and unplug the power cord from
the wall socket. If installing without turning OFF the main power, an electric shock or a
malfunction may occur.

• When installing more than one SD card, perform the merge operation. (SD Card Appli
Move)

1. Remove the SD card slot cover [A].

SM 2-308 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 XPS Direct Print Option Type M29

2. Insert the XPS SD card in SD card slot 1 [A: Upper Slot].

Installation
3. Reattach the SD card slot cover ( x 1).
4. Turn ON the main power.
5. Print out the “Configuration Page”, and then check if this option is correctly recognized.
• User Tools > Machine Features > Printer Features > List/Test Page > Configuration
Page

SM 2-309 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Data Overwrite Security Unit Type M19 (D3BS-03)

2.42 DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY UNIT TYPE M19 (D3BS-

03)
2.42.1 OVERVIEW
The machine’s hard disk stores all document data from the Copier, Printer, and Scanner
functions. It also stores the data of users’ Document Server and code counters, and the Address
Book. To prevent data on the hard disk being leaked before disposing of the machine, you can
overwrite all data stored on the hard disk (Erase All Memory). You can also automatically
overwrite temporarily-stored data (Auto Erase Memory).
The function of this option is completely the same as the Data Overwrite Security in Security
Functions, which is standard on this machine (Security Setting)
This option should be installed only for the customer who requires the CC certified Data
Overwrite Security function.

2.42.2 COMPONENT LIST

Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following list.
No. Description Q’ty
1. SD Card 1
- Comments Sheet 1
- Operating Instructions CD-ROM 1

2.42.3 BEFORE YOU BEGIN THE PROCEDURE

1. Confirm that the Data Overwrite Security unit SD card is the correct type for the machine.
The correct type for this machine is "Type M19".

• If you install any version other than "Type M19" for this machine, you will have to
replace the NVRAM and do this installation procedure again.

SM 2-310 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Data Overwrite Security Unit Type M19 (D3BS-03)

2. Make sure that the following settings are not at their factory default values.
• Supervisor login password
• Administrator login name
• Administrator login password

Installation
If any of these settings is at a factory default value, tell the customer these settings must be
changed before you do the installation procedure.
3. Make sure that "Admin. Authentication" is ON.
User Tools > Machine Features > System Settings > Administrator Tools > Administrator
Authentication Management > Admin. Authentication
If this setting is OFF, tell the customer this setting must be ON before you do the installation
procedure.
4. Make sure that "Administrator Tools" is enabled (selected).
User Tools > Machine Features > System Settings > Administrator Tools >
Administrator Authentication Management> Available Settings
If this setting is disabled (not selected), tell the customer this setting must be enabled
(selected) before you do the installation procedure.

• See the Operating Instructions (Security Guide) for the factory default values.

Seal Check and Removal

Before opening the corrugated envelope, make sure that the seal has not been broken or peeled
off. If the seal has been broken or peeled off (even partially), this is considered an arrival defect.
Note that once the seal is peeled off, this will leave a mark on the bag.

SM 2-311 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Data Overwrite Security Unit Type M19 (D3BS-03)

• You must check the box seals to make sure that they were not removed after the items
were sealed in the box at the factory before you do the installation.
1. Check the box seals [A] on each corner of the box.
• Make sure that a tape is attached to each corner.
• The surfaces of the tapes must be blank. If you see "VOID" on the tapes, do not install
the components in the box.
2. If the surfaces of the tapes do not show "VOID", remove them from the corners of the box.
3. You can see the "VOID" marks [B] when you remove each seal. In this condition, they
cannot be attached to the box again.

2.42.4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

• When installing this option, turn OFF the main power and unplug the power cord from
the wall socket. If installing without turning OFF the main power, an electric shock or a
malfunction may occur.

• When installing more than one SD card, perform the merge operation. (SD Card Appli
Move)
1. Turn the main power off, and then remove the power plug and cables that are connected.
2. Remove the SD card slot cover [A].

SM 2-312 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Data Overwrite Security Unit Type M19 (D3BS-03)

3. Insert the Data Overwrite Security Unit Type M19 SD card in SD card slot 1 [A: Upper Slot].

Installation
4. Reattach the SD card slot cover.( ×1)
5. Insert the power cord into the outlet and turn ON the main power.
6. Enter the SP mode.
7. Do this step only if you are installing the option on a machine that is already in use (not a
new machine):
• If the customer wishes to continue using the same hard disk, execute all three SP
modes below.
• SP5-801-014 (Clear DCS Setting)
• SP5-832-001 (HDD Formatting (ALL))
• SP5-832-002 (HDD Formatting (IMH))
• If the customer wishes to replace the hard disk with a new one, execute SP5-801-014
only.

• If the customer continues using the same hard disk, the overwriting of the data
stored on the disk before the option is installed cannot be guaranteed. It is highly
recommended to replace the hard disk with a new one.
8. Set SP5-836-001 (Capture Function (0:Off 1:On)) to a value of 0 (disable).
9. Execute SP5-878-001 ([Option Setup: Data Overwrite Security)
If the installation fails, "Installation failed" is displayed when this SP is executed.
10. Print out the System Settings List and make sure that the option was installed successfully.
11. Reconnect the network cable.
12. Execute SP5-990-005 (SP print mode Diagnostic Report).
Make sure to shut down and reboot the machine once before printing the SMC. Otherwise,
the latest settings may not be collected when the SMC is printed.
13. Make sure that ROM number "D3BC5757A" and firmware version "1.02" appear in both of
the following areas on the report (they must match):
• "ROM Number / Firmware Version" - "HDD Format Option"
• "Loading Program"

SM 2-313 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Data Overwrite Security Unit Type M19 (D3BS-03)

2.42.5 CONFIGURING "AUTO ERASE MEMORY" (PERFORMED BY

THE CUSTOMER)
1. Press the [User Tools] icon.
2. Press [Machine Features].
3. Press [System Settings].
4. Press [Administrator Tools].
5. Press [Next] three times.
6. Press [Auto Erase Memory Setting].

7. Press [On].
8. Select the method of overwriting.

• If you select [NSA] or [DoD], proceed to Step 11.

• If you select [Random Numbers], proceed to Step 9.
9. Press [Change].
10. Enter the number of times that you want to overwrite using the ten keys, and then press [#].

SM 2-314 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Data Overwrite Security Unit Type M19 (D3BS-03)

The Random Numbers method overwrites the data using random numbers. You can set the
overwrite to be performed anywhere from 1-9 times, with a default of 3 times.
11. Press [OK].
12. Make sure that the Data Overwrite icon is displayed in the bottom right hand corner of the

Installation
screen.
13. Take a test copy, and then make sure that the Data Overwrite icon changes from "Dirty"
(solid) to "Dirty" (blinking), and then to "Clear".
• If the Data Overwrite icon does not change to Clear, check to see if there are any active
Sample Print or Locked Print jobs. A Sample Print or Locked Print job can only be
overwritten after it has been executed.
• The Dirty icon blinks while an overwrite is in progress.
• If you use your machine for a while with Auto Erase Memory disabled, and then
suddenly enable it, the overwrite process may take 10 or more hours depending on
HDD usage.

Data Overwrite icon:

Icon This icon is lit when there is temporary data to be overwritten, and
[1] blinks during overwriting.

Icon This icon is lit when there is no temporary data to be overwritten.

[2]

SP descriptions

• SP5-801-014 (Memory Clear: Clear DCS Setting)

Initializes the DCS (Delivery Control Service) settings.
• SP5-832-001 (HDD Formatting : HDD Formatting (ALL))
Initializes the hard disk.
• SP5-832-002 (HDD Formatting : HDD Formatting (IMH))
Initializes the hard disk.
• SP5-836-001 (Capture Settings: Capture Function (0:Off 1:On))
With this function disabled, the settings related to the capture feature cannot be initialized,
displayed, or selected.
• SP5-878-001 (Data Overwrite Security)
Enables the Data Overwrite Security unit. Press "EXECUTE" on the operation panel. Then
turn the machine off and on.
• SP5-990-005 (SP Print Mode: Diagnostic Report).
Prints the configuration sheets of the system and user settings : SMC.
Make sure to shut down and reboot the machine once before printing the SMC. Otherwise,
the latest settings may not be collected when the SMC is printed.

SM 2-315 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Security Setting

2.43 SECURITY SETTING

2.43.1 SECURITY FUNCTION INSTALLATION
The machine contains the security functions (Data Overwrite Security and HDD Encryption unit)
in the controller board.
If you are installing a new machine, it is recommended to activate Data Overwrite Security and
HDD Encryption by selecting "Format All Data" from “System Settings” on the operation panel.

• This method is recommended because there is no user data on the hard drive yet
(Address Book data, image data, etc.).
If the customer wishes to activate Data Overwrite Security and HDD Encryption unit on a
machine that is already running, it is recommended to activate the unit by selecting "All Data"
from “System Settings” on the operation panel.

• Selecting "All Data" will preserve the data that has already been saved to the HDD. (If
"Format All Data" is selected, all user data saved to the HDD up to that point will be
erased).
Immediately after encryption is enabled, the encryption setting process will take several minutes
to complete before you can begin using the machine.

• If encryption is enabled after data has been stored on the HDD, or if the encryption key
is changed, this process can take up to three and a half hours or more.
The machine cannot be operated while data is being encrypted.
Once the encryption process begins, it cannot be stopped.
Make sure that the machine's main power is not turned off while the encryption process is in
progress.
If the machine's main power is turned off while the encryption process is in progress, the HDD
will be damaged and all data on it will be unusable.
Print the encryption key and keep the encryption key (which is printed as a paper sheet).
Keep the encryption key in a safe place. If the encryption key is lost and is needed, the controller
board, HDD and NVRAM must all be replaced at the same time.

• "NVRAM" mentioned in here means the NVRAM on the Controller Board.

• "NVRAM" or EEPROM on the BCU has nothing to do with this.
Please use the following procedure when the Data Overwrite Security and HDD Encryption are
reinstalled.

SM 2-316 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Security Setting

2.43.2 DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY

Before You Begin the Procedure

1. Make sure that the following settings (1) to (3) are not at their factory default values.

Installation
(1) Supervisor login password
(2) Administrator login name
(3) Administrator login password
If any of these settings is at a factory default value, tell the customer these settings must be
changed before you do the installation procedure.
2. Make sure that “Admin. Authentication” is on.
[User Tools] icon -> [Machine Features] -> [System Settings] -> [Administrator Tools] ->
[Administrator Authentication Management] -> [Admin. Authentication]
If this setting is off, tell the customer this setting must be on before you do the installation
procedure.
3. Make sure that “Administrator Tools” is enabled (selected).
[User Tools] icon -> [Machine Features] -> [System Settings] -> [Administrator Tools] ->
[Administrator Authentication Management] -> [Available Settings]
If this setting is disabled (not selected), tell the customer this setting must be enabled
(selected) before you do the installation procedure.

Installation Procedure
1. Connect the network cable if it needs to be connected.
2. Turn ON the main power.
3. Go into the SP mode and push "EXECUTE" in SP5-878-001.
4. Exit the SP mode and turn off the operation switch. Then turn off the main power switch.
5. Turn on the machine power.
6. Do SP5-990-005 (SP print mode Diagnostic Report).
Make sure to shut down and reboot the machine once before printing the SMC. Otherwise,
the latest settings may not be collected when the SMC is printed.
7. Go into the User Tools mode, and select [Machine Features] [System Settings]
[Administrator Tools] [Auto Erase Memory Setting] [On].

SM 2-317 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Security Setting

8. Exit the User Tools mode.

Icon This icon is lit when there is temporary data to be overwritten, and
[1] blinks during overwriting.

Icon This icon is lit when there is no temporary data to be overwritten.

[2]

9. Check the display and make sure that the overwrite erase icon appears.
10. Check the overwrite erase icon.
The icon [1] is lit when there is temporary data to be overwritten, and blinks during
overwriting.
The icon [2] is lit when there is no temporary data to be overwritten.

Using Auto Erase Memory

The Auto Erase Memory function can be enabled by the following procedure.
1. Log in as the machine administrator from the control panel.
2. Press the [User Tools] icon.
3. Press [Machine Features].
4. Press [System Settings].
5. Press [Administrator Tools].
6. Press [Next] three times.

SM 2-318 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Security Setting

7. Press [Auto Erase Memory Setting].

Installation
8. Press [On].
9. Select the method of overwriting.
If you select [NSA] or [DoD], proceed to step 12.
If you select [Random Numbers], proceed to step 10
10. Press [Change].
11. Enter the number of times that you want to overwrite using the number keys, and then press
[#].
12. Press [OK]. Auto Erase Memory is set.
13. Log out.
14. Check the display and make sure that the overwrite erase icon appears.
15. Check the overwrite erase icon.
The icon [1] is lit when there is temporary data to be overwritten, and blinks during
overwriting.
The icon [2] is lit when there is no temporary data to be overwritten.

SM 2-319 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Security Setting

Icon This icon is lit when there is temporary data to be overwritten, and
[1] blinks during overwriting.

Icon This icon is lit when there is no temporary data to be overwritten.

[2]

2.43.3 HDD ENCRYPTION

Before You Begin the Procedure:

1. Make sure that the following settings (1) to (3) are not at the factory default settings.
(1) Supervisor login password
(2) Administrator login name
(3) Administrator login password
If any of these settings is at a factory default value, tell the customer these settings must be
changed before you do the installation procedure.
2. Confirm that "Admin. Authentication" is on:
[User Tools] icon - [Machine Features] - [System Settings] - [Administrator Tools] -
[Administrator Authentication Management] - [Admin. Authentication] - [On]
If this setting is off, tell the customer that this setting must be on before you can do the
installation procedure.
3. Confirm that "Administrator Tools" is selected and enabled.
[User Tools] icon - [Machine Features] - [System Settings] - [Administrator Tools] -
[Administrator Authentication Management] - [Available Settings]
"Available Settings" is not displayed until step 2 is done.
If this setting is not selected, tell the customer that this setting must be selected before you
can do the installation procedure.

Installation Procedure:
1. Turn ON the main power, and then enter the SP mode.
2. Select SP5-878-002, and then press "Execute" on the LCD.
3. Exit the SP mode after "Completed" is displayed on the LCD.
4. Turn OFF the main power.

SM 2-320 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Security Setting

Enable Encryption Setting

Machine Data Encryption Settings can be enabled by the following procedure.

• When setting up encryption, specify whether to start encryption after deleting data

Installation
(initialize) or encrypt and retain existing data. If data is retained, it may take some time
to encrypt it.
1. Turn on the main power.
2. Log in as the machine administrator from the control panel.
3. Press the [User Tools] icon.
4. Press [Machine Features].
5. Press [System Settings].
6. Press [Administrator Tools].
7. Press [Next] three times.
8. Press [Machine Data Encryption Settings].

9. Press [Encrypt].

10. Select the data to be carried over to the HDD and not be reset.
To carry all of the data over to the HDD, select [All Data].
To carry over only the machine settings data, select [File System Data Only].
To reset all of the data, select [Format All Data].

SM 2-321 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Security Setting

11. Select the backup method.

If you have selected [Save to SD Card], load an SD card into the media slot on the side of
the control panel and press [OK] to back up the machine's data encryption key.
If you have selected [Print on Paper], press the [Start] key. Print out the machine's data
encryption key.
12. Press [OK].
13. Press [Exit].

14. Press [Exit].

15. Log out.
16. Turn off the main power, and then turn the main power back on.
The machine will start to convert the data on the memory after you turn on the machine.
Wait until the message "Memory conversion complete. Turn the main power switch off."
appears, and then turn the main power off again.

Check the Encryption Settings

1. Press the [User Tools] icon.
2. Press [Machine Features].
3. Press [System Settings].
4. Press [Administrator Tools].

SM 2-322 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Security Setting

5. Press [Machine Data Encryption Settings].

6. Confirm whether the encryption has been completed or not on this display.

Installation
Print the encryption key
Use the following procedure to print the key again if it has been lost or misplaced.
1. Press the [User Tools] icon.
2. Press [Machine Features].
3. Press [System Settings].
4. Press [Administrator Tools].
5. Press [Machine Data Encryption Settings].
If this item is not visible, press [Next] to display more settings.
6. Press [Print Encryption Key].

Encryption key sample

The encryption key is printed out as a sheet of paper like the example shown above.
Please instruct the customer to keep it in a safe place.

SM 2-323 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Security Setting

Backing Up the Encryption Key

The encryption key can be backed up. Select whether to save it to an SD card or to print it.

• The encryption key is required for data recovery if the machine malfunctions. Be sure to
store the encryption key safely for retrieving backup data.
1. Log in as the machine administrator from the control panel.
2. Press the [User Tools] icon.
3. Press [Machine Features].
4. Press [System Settings].
5. Press [Administrator Tools].
6. Press [Next] three times.
7. Press [Machine Data Encryption Settings].
8. Press [Print Encryption Key].

9. Select the backup method.

If you have selected [Save to SD Card], load an SD card into the media slot on the side of
the control panel and press [OK]; once the machine's data encryption key is backed up,
press [Exit].
If you have selected [Print on Paper], press the [Start] key. Print out the machine's data
encryption key.
10. Press [Exit].
11. Log out.

SM 2-324 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Security Setting

Encryption Key Restoration

How to restore the old encryption key to the machine
The following message appears after the controller board is replaced. In such a case, it is
necessary to restore the encryption key to the new controller board.

Installation
To do this, follow the procedure below.
1. Prepare an SD card that has been initialized in FAT16 format.
2. Using a PC, create a folder in the SD card and name it "restore_key".
3. Create a folder in the “restore_key” folder and name it the same as machine’s serial number,
“xxxxxxxxxxx” (11 digits).
4. Create a text file called "key_xxxxxxxxxxx.txt" and save it in the "xxxxxxxxxxx“ folder. Write
the encryption key in the text file.
/restore_key/xxxxxxxxxxx/key_xxxxxxxxxxx.txt

• Ask an Administrator to enter the encryption key. The key has already been printed
out by the user and may have been saved in the "key_xxxxxxxxxxx.txt" file. (The
function of back-up the encryption key to the SD card directly is provided 11A
products or later.)
5. Turn ON the machine’s main power.
6. Confirm that a message is displayed on the LCD telling to insert the SD card that contains
the encryption key.
7. Turn OFF the main power.
8. Insert the SD card that contains the encryption key into SD card slot 2 (the lower slot).
9. Turn ON the main power.

• The machine will automatically restore the encryption key to the flash memory on
the controller board.
10. Turn OFF the main power when the machine has returned to normal status.
11. Remove the SD card from SD card slot 2.
How to do a forced start up with no encryption key
If the encryption key back-up has been lost, follow the procedure below to do a forced start-up.

• The HDD will be formatted after the forced start-up.

• Encrypted data will be deleted.
• User settings will be cleared.

SM 2-325 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Security Setting

1. Prepare an SD card.
2. Create a directory named “restore_key” inside the root directory of the SD card. Then, save
the “nvram_key.txt” file using the following name:
/restore_key/nvram_key.txt
3. Create a text file and write "nvclear".

• Write this string at the head of the file.

• Use all lower-case letters.
• Do not use quotation marks or blank spaces.
• It is judged that a forced start has been selected when the content of "nvclear" is
executed and the machine shifts to the alternate system (forced start).
4. Confirm that a message is displayed on the LCD telling to insert the SD card that contains
the encryption key.
5. Turn OFF the main power.
6. Insert the SD card that contains the encryption key into SD card slot 2 (the lower slot).
7. Turn ON the main power.
The machine automatically clear the HDD encryption.
8. Turn OFF the main power when the machine has returned to normal status.
9. Remove the SD card from SD card Slot 2.
10. Turn ON the main power.
11. Memory clear SP5-801-xxx (Exclude SP-5-801-001: All Clear and SP-5-801-002: Engine),
and clear SP5-846-046: address book.
12. Set necessary user settings in User Tools.
SP descriptions
• SP5-878-002 (Option Setup: HDD Encryption)
Executes the setup for encryption.
• SP5-990-005 (SP Print Mode: Diagnostic Report)
Prints the configuration sheets of the system and user settings : SMC.
Make sure to shut down and reboot the machine once before printing the SMC. Otherwise,
the latest settings may not be collected when the SMC is printed.
• SP5-801-001 (Memory Clear: All Clear)
Resets all correction data for process control and all software counters, and returns all
modes and adjustments to their default values.
• SP5-801-002 (Memory Clear: Engine)
Clears non-volatile memory of engine.

SM 2-326 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Security Setting

• SP5-846-046 (UCS Setting: Addr Book Media)

Displays the slot number where an address book data is in.
0: Unconfirmed
1: SD Slot 1

Installation
2: SD Slot 2
3: SD Slot 3
4: USB Flash ROM
10: SD Slot 10
20: HDD
30: Nothing

SM 2-327 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
@Remote Settings

2.44 @REMOTE SETTINGS

• Prepare and check the following check points before you visit the customer site. For
details, ask the @Remote key person.
Check points before making @Remote settings
1. The setting of SP5816-201 in the mainframe must be "0".
2. Print the SMC with SP5990-002 and then check if a device ID2 (SP5811-003) must be
correctly programmed.
• 6 spaces must be put between the 3-digit prefix and the following 8-digit number (e.g.
xxx______xxxxxxxx).
• ID2 (SP5811-003) and the serial number (SP5811-001) must be the same (e.g. ID2:
A01______23456789 = serial No. A0123456789)
• Make sure to shut down and reboot the machine once before printing the SMC.
Otherwise, the latest settings may not be collected when the SMC is printed.
3. The following settings must be correctly programmed.
• Proxy server IP address (SP5816-063)
• Proxy server Port number (SP5816-064)
• Proxy User ID (SP5816-065)
• Proxy Password (SP5816-066)
4. Get a Request Number
Execute the @Remote Settings
1. Enter the SP mode.
2. Input the Request number which you have obtained from @Remote Center GUI, and then
enter [OK] with SP5816-202.
3. Confirm the Request number, and then click [EXECUTE] with SP5816-203.
4. Check the confirmation result with SP5816-204.
Value Meaning Solution/ Workaround
0 Succeeded -
3 Communication error (proxy Check the network condition.
enabled)
4 Communication error (proxy Check the network condition.
disabled)
5 Proxy error (authentication error) Check Proxy user name and password.
6 Communication error Check the network condition.
8 Other error See "SP5816-208 Error Codes" below this.
9 Request number confirmation Processing… Please wait.
executing
11 Already registered -

SM 2-328 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 @Remote Settings

Value Meaning Solution/ Workaround

12 Parameter error -
20 Dial-up authentication error * These errors occur only in the modems that
21 Answer tone detection error support @Remote.

Installation
22 Carrier detection error
23 Invalid setting value (modem)
24 Low power supply current
25 unplugged modem
26 Busy line
5. Make sure that the screen displays the Location Information with SP5816-205 only when it
has been input at the Center GUI.
6. Click [EXECUTE] to execute the registration with SP5816-206.
7. Check the registration result with SP5816-207.
Value Meaning Solution/ Workaround
0 Succeeded -
1 Request number error Check the request number again.
2 Already registered Check the registration status.
3 Communication error (proxy Check the network condition.
enabled)
4 Communication error (proxy Check the network condition.
disabled)
5 Proxy error (Authentication error) Check Proxy user name and password.
8 Other error See "SP5816-208 Error Codes" below this.
9 Request number confirmation Processing… Please wait.
executing
11 Already registered -
12 Parameter error -
20 Dial-up authentication error * These errors occur only in the modems that
21 Answer tone detection error support @Remote.
22 Carrier detection error
23 Invalid setting value (modem)
24 Low power supply current
25 unplugged modem
26 Busy line
8. Exit the SP mode.

SM 2-329 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
@Remote Settings

SP5816-208 Error Codes

Caused by Operation Error, Incorrect Setting
Code Meaning Solution/ Workaround
- Inquiry, registration attempted without acquiring Obtain a Request Number before
12002 Request No. attempting the Inquiry or Registration.
- Attempted registration without execution of a Perform Confirmation before
12003 confirmation and no previous registration. attempting the Registration.
- Attempted setting with illegal entries for Check ID2 of the mainframe.
12004 certification and ID2.
- @Remote communication is prohibited. The Make sure that "Remote Service" in
12005 device has an Embedded RC gate-related User Tools is set to "Do not prohibit".
problem.
- A confirmation request was made after the Execute registration.
12006 confirmation had been already completed.
- The request number used at registration was Check Request No.
12007 different from the one used at confirmation.
- Update certification failed because mainframe Check the mainframe condition. If the
12008 was in use. mainframe is in use, try again later.
- The ID2 in the NVRAM does not match the ID2 in Check ID2 of the mainframe.
12009 the individual certification.
- The certification area is not initialized. Initialize the certification area.
12010
Error Caused by Response from GW URL
Code Meaning Solution/ Workaround
-2385 Other error
-2387 Not supported at the Service Center
-2389 Database out of service
-2390 Program out of service
-2391 Two registrations for the same Check the registration condition of the
mainframe mainframe
-2392 Parameter error
-2393 External RCG not managed
-2394 Mainframe not managed
-2395 Box ID for external RCG is illegal.
-2396 Mainframe ID for external RCG is illegal.
-2397 Incorrect ID2 format Check the ID2 of the mainframe.
-2398 Incorrect request number format Check the Request No.

SM 2-330 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 @Remote Settings

SP descriptions

• SP5-816-201 (Remote Service: Regist Status DFU(SSP))

Displays a number that indicates the status of the @Remote service device.
0: Neither the registered device by the external nor embedded RCG device is set.

Installation
1: The embedded RCG device is being set. Only Box registration is completed. In this
status, this unit cannot answer a polling request from the external RCG.
2: The embedded RCG device is set. In this status, the external RCG unit cannot answer a
polling request.
3: The registered device by the external RCG is being set. In this status the embedded RCG
device cannot be set.
4: The registered module by the external RCG has not started.
• SP5-990-002 (SP Print Mode: SP(Mode Data List)
Prints the configuration sheets of the system and user settings : SMC.
Make sure to shut down and reboot the machine once before printing the SMC. Otherwise,
the latest settings may not be collected when the SMC is printed.
• SP5-811-003 (Machine No. Setting: ID2 Code Display)
Sets the ID-2 code used to identify the @remote device at installation.
• SP5-816-063 (Remote Service: Proxy server IP address)
This SP sets the address of the proxy server used for communication between the RCG
device and the gateway. Use this SP to set up or display the customer proxy server address.
The address is necessary to set up the embedded RCG-N.
The address display is limited to 127 characters. Characters beyond the 127 characters are
ignored.
This address is customer information and is not printed in the SMC report.
• SP5-816-064 (Remote Service: Proxy server Port number)
This SP sets the port number of the proxy server used for communication between the
embedded RCG-N and the gateway. This setting is necessary to set up the embedded RC
Gate-N.
This port number is customer information and is not printed in the SMC report.
• SP5-816-065 (Remote Service: Proxy User ID)
This SP sets the HTTP proxy certification user name.
The length of the name is limited to 31 characters. Any character beyond the 31st character
is ignored.
This name is customer information and is not printed in the SMC report.
• SP5-816-066 (Remote Service: Proxy Password)
This SP sets the HTTP proxy certification password.
The length of the password is limited to 31 characters. Any character beyond the 31st
character is ignored.
This name is customer information and is not printed in the SMC report.

SM 2-331 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
@Remote Settings

• SP5-816-202 (Remote Service: Letter Number DFU(SSP))

Allows entry of the number of the request needed for the RCG-N device.
• SP5-816-203 (Remote Service: Confirm Execute)
Executes the inquiry request to the @Remote GW URL.
• SP5-816-204 (Remote Service: Confirm Result DFU(SSP))
Displays a number that indicates the result of the inquiry executed with SP5816 203.
• SP5-816-205 (Remote Service: Confirm Place DFU(SSP))
Displays the installed section informed from G/W for response of request number inquiry if
the section is enrolled on the G/W.
• SP5-816-206 (Remote Service: Register Execute)
Executes "Embedded RCG Registration".
• SP5-816-207 (Remote Service: Register Result DFU(SSP))
Displays a number that indicates the registration result.

SM 2-332 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Operation Guidance for Users

2.45 OPERATION GUIDANCE FOR USERS

Function/Operation Instruction to provide
Basic machine functions, • How to load the toner bottle

Installation
operations • How to load paper and other consumables/supplies
• How to turn the main power switch ON/OFF
• How to clear paper jams
• How to program, modify, and delete Address Book entries
• How to customize the UI and home screen
• Overview of machine options/peripherals
• How to take the proper action for SC errors (clearing the error,
contacting service and support, etc.), how to interpret @Remote
notifications
• Important notes to keep in mind whenever moving the machine
• Product limitations
Copier • Basic Copier operations
• How to load an original in the ARDF or place it on the exposure
glass for scanning
• How to use thick paper and other specialized paper/media
• How to configure the Copier main screen (duplex/simplex, auto
color selection, User Codes, etc.)
• Basic Document Server operations
Fax (when installed) • How to send a fax (Memory Transmission, Direct Transmission)
Printer • How to install printer drivers (using the recommended method)
• How to connect to a PC (performing the port settings)
• How to print out a test page
• Overview of various settings inside each tab in the printer driver
(e.g. duplex printing)
Scanner • How to install printer drivers (using the recommended method)
• How to connect to a PC and perform a test scan

SM 2-333 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
 Operation Guidance for Users

3. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

3.1 PM PARTS SETTINGS

Maintenance
Preventive
3.1.1 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE OF THE PM PARTS
When you replace the PM parts, you need to reset the PM counter manually.
There are two ways to reset the PM counter for this machine.
• Method 1: Reset by SP3-701 (Manual New Unit Set). This is the conventional method.
• Method 2: Reset by [PM Counter / New Unit Set] Menu.
"Method 2" is recommended for its ease of operation.

• For the following units, there is a new unit detection mechanism. It is not necessary to
reset PM counters.
- Fusing unit
- PCDU
- Waste Toner Bottle (When the machine stopped because the waste toner bottle was
full)

• If you only replace the development unit (not replacing the PCU), the PCU counter will
not be cleared when you set SP3-701-023 (Manual New Unit Set: Development Unit) in
advance.

• Toner recycling mode is disabled by default.

Replacing the Fusing Unit

For MP 2555 SP/MP 3055 SP/MP 3555 SP

• After the PM counter for the Fusing Belt (heating sleeve belt unit) reaches 260K pages or
the PM counter distance reaches 139,378,000 mm, the machine stops automatically.
• Replace the heating sleeve belt unit before the machine stops (stop warning: 240K pages,
stop: 260K pages).

For MP4055 SP/MP 5055 SP/MP 6055 SP

• After the PM counter for the Fusing Belt (heating sleeve belt unit) reaches 350K pages or
the PM counter distance reaches 165,936,000 mm, the machine stops automatically.
• Replace the heating sleeve belt unit before the machine stops (stop warning: 320K pages,
stop: 350K pages).

SM 3-1 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Operation Guidance for Users

Method 1: By SP3701
1. Enter the SP mode.
2. Output the SMC logging data with SP5-990-004.
Make sure to shut down and reboot the machine once before printing the SMC. Otherwise,
the latest settings may not be collected when the SMC is printed.
3. Set the following SPs (New Unit Detection) to "1".
Item SP
PCU PCU: SP3-701-002
Cleaning Blade: SP3-701-009
Charge Roller: SP3-701-018
Cleaner: Charge Roller (Cleaning Roller): SP3-
701-019
OPC: SP3-701-021
Separation Pawl (Pick-off Pawls): SP3-701-022
Development Unit Development Unit: SP3-701-023
Development (Developer): SP3-701-024
Development Filter: SP3-701-025
Bearings: Development Screw (Development
Mixing Auger Bearings): SP3-701-028
PTR (Paper Transfer) Unit SP3-701-108
Fusing Unit Fusing Unit: SP3-701-115
Fusing Belt (Heating Sleeve Belt Unit): SP3-
701-116
Pressure Roller: SP3-701-118
Pressure Roller Bearings: SP3-701-119
Waste Toner Bottle SP3-701-142
(When the bottle is replaced before the
machine detects bottle full and stops)
ADF ADF: Pick-up Roller: SP3-701-206
ADF: Feeding Belt: SP3-701-207
ADF: Reverse Roller: SP3-701-208
4. Turn the main power switch OFF, and disconnect the power cord from the outlet.
5. Replace the PM parts and turn the main power ON.
The machine will reset the PM counters automatically. In the case of the development unit,
developer initialization will also be done automatically.
6. Exit the SP mode.

SM 3-2 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Operation Guidance for Users

Method 2: By [PM Counter / New Unit Set] Menu

1. Enter the SP mode.
2. Output the SMC logging data with SP5-990-004.

Maintenance
Make sure to shut down and reboot the machine once before printing the SMC. Otherwise,

Preventive
the latest settings may not be collected when the SMC is printed.
3. Press [PM Counter / New Unit Set].

4. Press [All PM Parts List : New Unit Set].

5. Set the PM part that you want to replace to "YES" under "New Unit Set".
After pressing "YES", the [Exit] key will not be available.
[TBD: Screen]

SM 3-3 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Operation Guidance for Users

6. Turn OFF the main power and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
7. Replace the PM parts and turn the main power ON.
The machine will reset the PM counters automatically. In the case of the development unit,
developer initialization will also be done automatically.
8. Exit the SP mode.

3.1.2 AFTER INSTALLING THE NEW PM PARTS

1. Output the SMC logging data with SP5-990-004 and check the counter values.
Make sure to shut down and reboot the machine once before printing the SMC. Otherwise,
the latest settings may not be collected when the SMC is printed.
2. Make sure that the PM counters for the replaced units are "0" with SP7-621, or SP7-944. If
the PM counter for a unit was not reset, then execute the new unit detect setting with SP3-
701 again and turn the machine OFF/ON.
3. Make sure that the exchange counter counts up with SP7-853.
4. Make sure that the counters for the previous units (SP7-908) on the new SMC logging data
list (from step 2 above) are equal to the counters (SP7-621, or SP7-944) for these units on
the previous SMC logging data list (the list that was output in the "Before removing the old
parts" section).
5. Make sure that the unit replacement date is updated with SP7-950.

SP descriptions
• SP7-621-001 (PM Counter Display: Paper)
Displays the number of sheets printed for each current maintenance unit.
When a unit is replaced, the machine automatically detects that the new unit is installed.
Then, the current PM counter value is automatically moved to the PM Counter – Previous
(SP7-906-1 to 10) and is reset to "0".
• SP7-853 (Replace Counter)
Displays the number of times each PM part has been replaced.
• SP7-908 (Previous Unit Counter: Pages (%))
Displays the PM counter of the previous PM Part which was replaced last time.
• SP7-950 (Unit Replacement Date)
Displays the replacement date of each PM unit.
• SP5-990
Prints the configuration sheets of the system and user settings : SMC.
Make sure to shut down and reboot the machine once before printing the SMC. Otherwise,
the latest settings may not be collected when the SMC is printed.

SM 3-4 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Operation Guidance for Users

3.1.3 OPERATION CHECK

Check if the sample image has been copied normally.
PM Parts List

Maintenance
See “Appendices” for the following information:

Preventive
• Preventive Maintenance Tables

SM 3-5 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Image Quality Standards

3.2 IMAGE QUALITY STANDARDS

3.2.1 RESOLUTION
Item Specification Chart Measuring method
Copy (100%/Enlargement), Ave 5.0 Book: S-5 Copy onto plain paper using Auto
Black and White (1C) lines/mm or (revised) Image Density/5 notches and then
more determine resolution.
Min 4.5lines/mm
or more
Copy (Reduction), Black Min 4.5×M DF: S-5Y
and White (1C) lines/mm or (revised)
more

3.2.2 MAGNIFICATION RATIO ERROR MARGIN

Item Specification Chart Measuring method
Engine, Main Scan, Black ±0.50% or Mono_CCD Copy the scale and compare it with
and White (1C) less the scale at 100 mm to see if it is
Engine, Sub Scan, Black ±0.50% or Scale chart within specification.
and White (1C) less Leave the sheet for 3 minutes or
Copy (100%), Main Scan, ±0.80% or more after it has been output before
Black and White (1C) less measuring.
Copy (100%), Sub Scan, ±1.00% or
Black and White (1C) less
Copy (Reduction), Main ±1.00% or
Scan/Sub Scan, Black and less
White (1C)
Copy (Enlargement), Main ±1.00% or
Scan/Sub Scan, Black and less
White (1C) The swelling/shrinkage of paper
caused by humidity are excluded.
First side of the sheet only.

3.2.3 MAGNIFICATION RATIO ERROR MARGIN DEVIATION

Item Specification Chart Measuring method
Copy (100% / Enlargement / 1.00% or Scale Leave the sheet for 3 minutes or more
Reduction), Black and White less chart after it has been output before
(1C) measuring.

SM 3-6 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Image Quality Standards

3.2.4 PITCH ERROR MARGIN

Item Specification Chart Measuring method
Engine, Black and White(1C) 1.50% or less Mono_CCD For a line of about 1/2 inch in length.

Maintenance
Preventive
3.2.5 PERPENDICULARITY
Item Specification Chart Measuring method
Engine, Black and ±1.25mm/200mm or less Mono_CCD Measure with the full length
White(1C) (90° ± 0.35°) and width of the image.
Copy (100%), Black ±1.75mm/200mm or less Scale chart
and White (1C) (90° ± 0.5°)

3.2.6 LINEARITY
Item Specification Chart Measuring method
Engine, Black and ±0.20mm/100mm or Mono_CCD Measure with the full length and width
White(1C) less of the image.
Copy, Black and ±0.50mm/100mm or Scale chart
White (1C) less

15. Inner line

16. 100mm
17. Base line
18. Copy
19. 100mm
20. 0.5mm

3.2.7 PARALLELISM
Item Specification Chart Measuring method
Engine, Black and ± 1.8mm or Mono_CCD Measure with the full length and width of
White(1C) less the image.

3.2.8 MISSING IMAGE AREA

Item Specification Chart Measuring method
Engine/Copy (leading 4.2±1.5% Trim Since there is a variability of about 1 mm in
edge), Black and the sizes of sheets of paper, correct the size
White(1C) of the sheet before measuring.
Engine/Copy (left/right), 0.5 to 4.0mm

SM 3-7 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Image Quality Standards

Item Specification Chart Measuring method

Black and White(1C)
Engine/Copy (trailing 0.5 to 6.0mm
edge), Black and (Duplex: 3.0 to
White(1C) 6.0mm)

3.2.9 MARGIN POSITION

Item Specification Chart Measuring
method
Engine (simplex), Main Scan/Sub Scan, Black 0±1.5mm Mono_CCD
and White (1C)
Engine (duplex), Main Scan/Sub Scan, Black 0±3mm
and White (1C)

SM 3-8 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Paper Transfer Quality Standards

3.3 PAPER TRANSFER QUALITY STANDARDS

3.3.1 REGISTRATION

Maintenance
Item Specification Note

Preventive
Simplex (1st print side), 100% or 0±2mm (Vertically and horizontally)
reduction
Simplex (1st print side), 0±2mm × M mm (Vertically and M: Magnification
enlargement horizontally) ratio
Duplex (2nd print side), 100% or 0±4mm (Vertically and horizontally)
reduction
Duplex (2nd print side), 0±2mm × (2×M+2) mm (Vertically and M: Magnification
enlargement horizontally) ratio

3.3.2 SKEW

Exposure glass
Item Specification Note
1st side, B5 SEF or less 0±1.3mm/100mm or less
1st side, B5 SEF or more 0±0.9mm/100mm or more
2nd side, B5 SEF or less 0±1.8mm/100mm or less
2nd side, B5 SEF or more ±1.3mm/100mm or more

ADF
Item Specification Note
1st side, B5 SEF or less Main and Sub: 0±2.30mm/100mm
1st side, B5 SEF or more Main scanning: 0±1.65mm/100mm
Sub scanning: 0±1.40mm/100mm
2nd side, B5 SEF or less Main and Sub: 0±2.80mm/100mm
2nd side, B5 SEF or more, DF3100 Main scanning: 0±2.05mm/100mm
Sub scanning: 0±1.80mm/100mm
2nd side, B5 SEF or more, DF3090 Main and Sub: 0±2.30mm/100mm

SM 3-9 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
 Paper Transfer Quality Standards

4. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

4.1 NOTES ON THE MAIN POWER SWITCH

Replacement

Adjustments
4.1.1 PUSH SWITCH

&
The main power button of this machine has been changed to a push-button switch (push button)
from the conventional rocker switch. The push switch has characteristics and specifications
different from the rocker switch. Care must be taken when replacing and adjusting parts.

Characteristics of the Push Switch (DC Switch)

Power is supplied to the machine even when the main power switch is turned OFF.

The push switch in this machine uses DC (direct current). Therefore, if the AC power cord is
connected to an electrical outlet, power is supplied to the controller board, the operation unit and
other modules even when the main power is turned OFF.
Replacing the controller board and operation unit in this state will damage the boards and other
electrical components.
So, when performing maintenance work such as replacing parts, in addition to turning off the
main power with the push switch, always unplug the AC power cord.

When you disconnect the power cord from the AC wall outlet, inside the machine
there is still residual charge.

When you disconnect the power cord from the AC wall outlet, inside the machine for a while
there is still residual charge. Therefore, if you remove boards in this state, it can cause a blown
fuse or memory failure.
• How to remove the residual charge inside the machine
After you unplug the power cord from the AC wall outlet, in order to remove the residual
charge from inside the machine, be sure to press the main power switch. Thus, the charge
remaining in the machine is released, and it is possible to remove boards.

When you reconnect the AC power cord into an AC wall outlet, the machine will
start automatically.

In order to remove the residual charge, push the main power switch while you disconnect the AC
power cord. At that time, the power ON flag inside the machine is set. Therefore, after you finish
work on the machine and reconnect the power cord to the AC, even if you do not press the main
power switch, the machine will start automatically, and the moving parts will begin to move.
When working on moving parts, be careful that fingers or clothes do not get caught.

SM 4-1 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Paper Transfer Quality Standards

• Automatic restart deals with cases when you accidentally unplugged the AC power cord
or unexpected power outages. By keeping the power flag ON, after the resumption of
power, the machine will start up automatically.
In rare cases, when you reconnect the AC power cord to a power outlet, the machine does not
start automatically. In this case, the machine has not failed. The cause is due to the timing of
releasing the residual charge. If you press the main power switch while the residual charge was
already released, the power ON flag will not be set. At this time, start the machine manually by
pressing the main power switch.

Shutdown Method
1. Press the main power switch [A] on the machine.

2. The shutdown message appears. After the shutdown process, the main power is turned off
automatically.
The operation panel and the main power indicator are turned off when the machine completes the
shutdown.

• Even after the shutdown message disappears, do not disconnect the power cord while
the main power indicator [A] is flashing to indicate that the machine is still shutting
down.

• Before removing and adjusting electrical boards, do the following procedure. Otherwise,
the board can be damaged by the residual charge inside the machine and must be
replaced.

SM 4-2 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Paper Transfer Quality Standards

1. Take out the power cord after shutdown.

2. Press the power switch for a second to remove the residual charge inside the machine.

Forced Shutdown

Replacement

Adjustments
If the machine does not shut down normally for some reason, the machine has a forced

&
shutdown function.

To force the shutdown, press and hold the main power switch for 6 seconds.
In general, do not use the forced shutdown.

• Forced shutdown may damage the hard disk and memory and can cause damage to
the machine. Use a forced shutdown only if it is unavoidable.

4.2 BEFOREHAND

• Turn off the main power switch and disconnect the power cord.
• After replacing, make sure that all removed harnesses are connected up again and
secured in their clamps.

SM 4-3 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Special Tools and Lubricants

4.3 SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS

The following special tools should be prepared for maintenance of this model in the field.
Unique or Common:
U: Unique for this model
C: Common with listed model

4.3.1 SPECIAL TOOLS

No. Part Number Description Q’ty Unique or Common
1 A0069104 Scanner Positioning Pin (4pcs/set) 1 C (General)
2 D1979010 Adjustment Seal (4pcs/set) – Laser Unit 1 U
3 B6455020 SD Card (1GB) 1 C (General)
4 C4019503 20X Magnification Scope 1 C (General)
5 VSSG9002 FLUOTRIBO MG GREASE: 100G 1 C (General)
6 A2929500 Test Chart – S5S(10pcs/set) 1 C (General)

• A PC (Personal Computer) is required for creating the Encryption key file to an SD card
when replacing the controller board for a model in which HDD encryption has been
enabled.

4.3.2 LUBRICANTS
No. Part No. Description Q'ty Unique or Common
1 52039502 Silicone Grease G-501 1 C (General)
2 A2579300 Grease Barrierta – S552R 1 C (General)

SM 4-4 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Cover Removal Order

4.4 COVER REMOVAL ORDER

4.4.1 COVER LAYOUTS
Front

Replacement

Adjustments
&
No. Name
1 Operation Panel
2 Scanner Front Cover
3 Upper Front Cover
4 Front Cover
5 1st Paper Feed Tray
6 2nd Paper Feed Tray
7 Paper Exit Tray
8 Inner Cover
9 Laser Unit Cover
10 Paper Exit Front Cover
11 Tray Support Rod Cover
12 Upper Inner Cover
13 Connector Cover

SM 4-5 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Cover Removal Order

Right

No. Name
1 Scanner Right Cover
2 Right Upper Cover
3 Right Rear Cover
4 Right Cover
5 Bypass Tray

SM 4-6 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Cover Removal Order

Left

Replacement

Adjustments
&
No. Name
1 Left Upper Cover
2 Left Cover
3 Controller Cover
4 Left Rear Cover
5 Scanner Left Cover

SM 4-7 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Cover Removal Order

Rear

No. Name
1 Scanner Upper Cover
2 Rear Cover
3 Rear Lower Cover
4 Rear Lower Gap Cover

SM 4-8 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Exterior Covers

4.5 EXTERIOR COVERS

Precautions concerning Stabilizers

The stabilizers [A] are necessary for meeting the requirements of IEC60950-1, the international

Replacement

Adjustments
standard for safety.

&
The aim of these components is to prevent the products, which are heavy, from toppling as a
result of people running into or leaning onto the products, which can lead to serious accidents
such as persons becoming trapped under the product. (U.S.: UL60950-1, Europe: EN60950-1)

4.5.2 FRONT COVER

1. Open the front cover [A].

SM 4-9 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Exterior Covers

2. Remove the belt [A], and the front cover.

• The front cover can be removed by sliding it in the direction of the blue arrow.

4.5.3 CONTROLLER COVER

1. Remove the controller cover [A].

SM 4-10 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Exterior Covers

4.5.4 LEFT UPPER COVER

• Each part enclosed by a blue circle has a tab. Be careful not to damage it when
attaching and detaching.

Replacement

Adjustments
&
1. Open the front cover. (Front Cover)
2. Remove the paper exit tray. (Paper Exit Tray)
3. Remove the left upper cover [A]. ( ×1)

• Slide the cover in the direction of the blue arrow.

4.5.5 LEFT REAR COVER

1. Remove the left upper cover. (Left Upper Cover)

SM 4-11 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Exterior Covers

2. Release the hooks [A], and remove the left rear cover [B].

4.5.6 LEFT COVER

• Each part enclosed by a blue circle has a tab. Be careful not to damage it when
attaching and detaching.

1. Remove the left upper cover. (Left Upper Cover)

2. Remove the controller cover. (Controller Cover)
3. Remove the rear lower gap cover. (Rear Lower Gap Cover)
4. Pull out the 1st and 2nd paper feed trays.

SM 4-12 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Exterior Covers

5. Remove the left cover [A].

Replacement

Adjustments
&
Order to remove

1. Front cover
2. Paper exit tray
3. Left upper cover
4. Controller cover
5. Rear lower gap cover
6. 1st paper feed tray
7. 2nd paper feed tray
8. Left cover

SM 4-13 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Exterior Covers

4.5.7 REAR COVER

Each part enclosed by a blue circle has a tab. Be careful not to damage it when attaching and
detaching.

1. Remove the rear cover [A].

SM 4-14 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Exterior Covers

4.5.8 REAR LOWER GAP COVER

1. Remove the rear lower gap cover [A]. (hook×2)

Replacement

Adjustments
&
4.5.9 REAR LOWER COVER
1. Remove the rear cover. (Rear Cover)
2. Remove the rear lower gap cover. (Rear Lower Gap Cover)
3. Remove the rear lower cover [A].

4.5.10 RIGHT REAR COVER

1. Open the right cover.
2. Remove the rear lower gap cover. (Rear Lower Gap Cover)

SM 4-15 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Exterior Covers

3. Remove the right rear cover [A].

• When installing, insert the projections [A] in the holes [B], taking care not to trap the
harness.

SM 4-16 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Exterior Covers

4.5.11 RIGHT UPPER COVER

1. Remove the upper front cover. (Upper Front Cover)
2. Remove the right upper cover [A] ( ×2)

Replacement

Adjustments
&
4.5.12 RIGHT COVER
1. Open the 1st paper feed tray [A], 2nd paper feed tray [B], and right cover [D].
2. Remove the 1st paper feed tray right cover [C].

3. Remove the right rear cover. (Right Rear Cover)

4. Remove the rear cover. (Rear Cover)

SM 4-17 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Exterior Covers

5. Remove clamps and connectors.

6. Release the right cover arms [A] [B]. ( ×2)

SM 4-18 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Exterior Covers

7. Slide to the left and remove the right cover [A]. ( ×1)

Replacement

Adjustments
&
4.5.13 UPPER FRONT COVER
1. Open the right cover.
2. Remove the upper front cover [A].

• When removing the upper front cover, release the hooks at the back of the cover.
• Tilt the operation panel [B] upward to a horizontal position, and then remove the
upper front cover [A].

SM 4-19 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Exterior Covers

4.5.14 INVERTER TRAY

1. Remove the inverter tray [A].

4.5.15 PAPER EXIT TRAY

1. Remove the paper exit tray [A].

4.5.16 PAPER EXIT COVER

1. Remove the upper front cover. (Upper Front Cover)
2. Remove the paper exit tray. (Paper Exit Tray)
3. Remove the inverter tray. (Inverter Tray)
4. Remove the paper exit cover [A]. ( ×1)

SM 4-20 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Exterior Covers

4.5.17 PAPER EXIT LOWER COVER

1. Remove the left rear cover. (Left Rear Cover)
2. Remove the paper exit cover. (Paper Exit Cover)
3. Remove the connector cover [A].

Replacement

Adjustments
&
4. Remove the paper exit lower cover [A].

4.5.18 UPPER INNER COVER

1. Remove the left upper cover. (Left Upper Cover)
2. Remove the paper exit cover. (Paper Exit Cover)
3. Remove the paper exit lower cover. (Paper Exit Lower Cover)
4. Remove the tray support rod cover [A]. ( ×1)

SM 4-21 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Exterior Covers

5. Remove the fixing screws on the upper inner cover [A].

6. Remove the upper inner cover [A].

4.5.19 PAPER EXIT FRONT COVER

1. Remove the paper exit lower cover. (Paper Exit Lower Cover)
2. Remove the paper exit front cover [A].

SM 4-22 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Exterior Covers

4.5.20 INNER COVER

1. Remove the front cover. (Front Cover)
2. Open the right cover.
3. Remove the laser unit cover [A].

Replacement

Adjustments
&
4. Remove the inner cover [A].

4.5.21 TONER SUPPLY HOUSING

1. Pull out the toner bottle.
2. Remove the paper exit lower cover. (Paper Exit Lower Cover)
3. Remove the upper inner cover. (Upper Inner Cover)
4. Remove the development exhaust fan. (Development Exhaust Fan)

SM 4-23 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Exterior Covers

5. Remove the duct [A].

6. Remove the brackets [A] and [B].

7. Remove the screws on the toner supply housing [A].

SM 4-24 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Exterior Covers

8. Remove the toner supply housing [A].

Replacement

Adjustments
&

SM 4-25 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Smart Operation Panel

4.6 SMART OPERATION PANEL

This section explains how to remove the Smart Operation Panel from the machine. For details
about disassembling the Smart Operation Panel, See the service manual for Smart Operation
Panel 2nd Generation.

4.6.1 OPERATION PANEL UNIT

1. Remove the scanner front cover. (Scanner Front Cover)
2. Holding down both the sides of the operation panel upper cover [A], unhook the tabs
(indicated by blue circles) and remove the cover.

3. Remove the operation panel [A].

4. Open the platen cover or ADF.

SM 4-26 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Smart Operation Panel

5. Spread a cloth or service mat [A] on the exposure glass to protect the display. Place the
operation panel on the exposure glass so that the display faces down.

Replacement

Adjustments
&
6. Remove the rear center cover [A].

7. Disconnect the connectors.

SM 4-27 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Smart Operation Panel

8. Remove the left small cover [A] and right small cover [B].

9. Release the hooks, and remove the right hinge cover [A]. (Hook x 2)

10. Remove the left hinge cover [A] and right cover [B].

11. Remove the hinges [A] [B].

SM 4-28 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Smart Operation Panel

4.6.2 USB CABLE / HARNESS

1. Remove the rear cover. (Rear Cover)
2. Remove the scanner upper cover. (Scanner Upper Cover)
3. Remove the controller box cover. (Controller Box Cover)

Replacement

Adjustments
4. Disconnect the USB cable [A].

&
5. Remove the harness [A].

6. Remove the clamps on the cables above the controller box.

SM 4-29 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Smart Operation Panel

7. Remove the clamps on the cables under the scanner unit.

When removing a clamp, insert a long flathead screwdriver or such a tool from the side to
remove it.

• The cable has a set of 2 cable ties [A]. When attaching the cable, position the clamp
outside the two cable ties.

SM 4-30 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 ADF

4.7 ADF
4.7.1 ADF REMOVAL
1. Remove the rear cover.

Replacement

Adjustments
2. Remove the controller box cover (for SPDF DF3100 only)(Controller Box Cover).

&
3. Remove the connector.

SPDF DF3100

ARDF DF3090

SM 4-31 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
ADF

4. Remove the bracket [A].

SPDF DF3100

ARDF DF3090

SM 4-32 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 ADF

5. Remove the screws on the ADF base.

SPDF DF3100

Replacement

Adjustments
&
ARDF DF3090

6. Slowly and carefully (the ADF is heavy) lift the ADF [A] off the machine.
7. Set the ADF on its edge on the floor, and then lean it against a wall [B].

SM 4-33 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
ADF

• To prevent damage to the fragile feelers [A] of the ADF position sensor, never lay the
ADF on a flat surface as shown below.

• If the SPDF DF3100 is being replaced, do SP4-730-002 after the new SPDF has been
installed.

SP descriptions

• SP4-730-002 (FROM Main Factory Setting Execution ON/OFF)

Copies the parameters written in FROM in the SPDF to the engine board in the MFP. This
SP is only for the SPDF models.

SPDF DF3100

SM 4-34 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Scanner Unit

4.8 SCANNER UNIT

4.8.1 BEFORE YOU BEGIN
There is no SIO (Scanner Interface Board) in this machine. The functions of the SIO of the

Replacement

Adjustments
previous machine are controlled by the IPU. Harnesses of the scanner unit connect directly to the

&
IPU in the controller box on the back of the machine.

4.8.2 SCANNER EXTERIOR

Scanner Front Cover

1. Open the ARDF or platen cover.
2. Remove the scanner front cover [A].

SM 4-35 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Scanner Unit

• There are a tab and bosses inside the cover. Be careful not to damage them when
attaching and detaching.

Scanner Right Cover

1. Remove the rear cover. (Rear Cover)
2. Remove the scanner right cover [A].

Scanner Left Cover

1. Remove the scanner front cover. (Scanner Front Cover)
2. Remove the scanner left cover [A]. ( ×3)

SM 4-36 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Scanner Unit

Scanner Upper Cover

1. Remove the rear cover. (Rear Cover)
2. Remove the scanner right cover. (Scanner Right Cover)
3. Remove the scanner left cover. (Scanner Left Cover)

Replacement

Adjustments
4. Remove the platen cover or ADF.

&
5. Remove the scanner upper cover [A].

4.8.3 EXPOSURE GLASS

1. Open the platen cover or ADF.
2. Remove the scanner front cover. (Scanner Front Cover)
3. Remove the scanner right cover. (Scanner Right Cover)
4. Remove the guide scale [A].

SM 4-37 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Scanner Unit

5. Remove the ADF exposure glass [A]

6. Remove the rear scale [A]

7. Remove the left scale and exposure glass [A].

• The exposure glass and the left scale are attached with double-sided tape.

SM 4-38 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Scanner Unit

• When installing, please follow the points below:

• The red mark [A] of the ADF exposure glass must be on the left at the rear of
the operation panel.

Replacement

Adjustments
• The locating holes of the left scale must fit over the locating bosses of the

&
front/rear frame.

4.8.4 SCANNER CARRIAGE

1. Remove the exposure glass. (Exposure Glass)
2. Remove the scanner front cover. (Scanner Front Cover)
3. Remove the scanner carriage front cover [A].

SM 4-39 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Scanner Unit

4. Move the scanner carriage [A] to the indicated position as shown below.

5. Loosen the screw, remove the spring [A], and then remove the belt [B].

6. Turn the scanner carriage over to the other side and place it on the frame [A].

SM 4-40 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Scanner Unit

• When holding the scanner carriage, be careful not to touch the circuit board [A],
lens [B], and mirror [C].

Replacement

Adjustments
&
7. Remove the belt [A].

8. Lower the lock lever [A] and disconnect the FFC [B].

9. Remove the ferrite core [A] and the mylar [B]. (Hook x 4)

SM 4-41 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Scanner Unit

10. Remove the scanner carriage.

• When attaching the scanner carriage, hold the carriage with the screw [A]
loosened, and move the carriage back and forth to the sides twice to have the belt
stretch evenly. Then, fasten the screw [A].

• After replacing the scanner carriage, enter the values supplied with the carriage in
the following SPs:
- SP4-871-002 (Distortion Correction Distortion Initialization)
- SP4-880-001 (Dot shift amount between R Line and G Line).
- SP4-880-002 (Dot shift amount between G Line and B Line).
To apply the specified settings, turn the power off and then back on.
The specified values are cleared when the NVRAM is initialized, so be sure to keep
the supplied sheet showing the values in the machine.

SM 4-42 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Scanner Unit

Cleaning the scanner carriage mirror

1. Remove the exposure glass. (Exposure Glass)
2. Remove the scanner carriage front cover [A].

Replacement

Adjustments
&
3. Move the scanner carriage [A] to the indicated position as shown.

4. Remove the resin cover [A]. (Hook x 3)

SM 4-43 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Scanner Unit

5. Open the metal cover [A].

6. Wipe clean the mirror with a dry cloth.

• When reattaching the metal cover [A], fasten the screws in the order of "1", "2", and
"3".

SM 4-44 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Scanner Unit

• When attaching the resin cover, insert its tip under the metal frame.

Replacement

Adjustments
&
4.8.5 SCANNER MOTOR
1. Remove the scanner upper cover. (Scanner Upper Cover)
2. Remove the rear cover. (Rear Cover)
3. Remove the grounding plate [A].

4. Remove the spring [A].

SM 4-45 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Scanner Unit

5. Remove the scanner motor unit [A].

6. Remove the scanner motor [A].

4.8.6 ORIGINAL SIZE SENSORS (APS)

1. Remove the exposure glass (Exposure Glass)
2. Remove the original size sensor harness cover [A].

SM 4-46 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Scanner Unit

3. Remove the original size sensors [A]. (Hook x 2)

Replacement

Adjustments
&
4.8.7 SCANNER HP SENSOR
1. Remove the ADF or platen cover.
2. Remove the exposure glass (Exposure Glass)
3. Slide the scanner carriage [A] in the direction of the arrow.

4. Remove the scanner HP sensor [A].

SM 4-47 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Scanner Unit

4.8.8 ARDF/PLATEN COVER SENSOR

1. Remove the scanner upper cover. (Scanner Upper Cover)
2. Remove the ARDF/Platen cover sensor [A].

4.8.9 SCANNER FFC

1. Remove the exposure glass. (Exposure Glass)
2. Remove the FFC from the scanner carriage. (Scanner Carriage)
3. Remove the original size sensor harness cover [A].

4. Remove the double-sided tape.

When reattaching the same part, apply a double-sided tape again.

5. Remove the rear cover. (Rear Cover)

SM 4-48 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Scanner Unit

6. Remove the controller box cover. (Controller Box Cover)

7. While pressing the lock release lever, pull out the FFC [A].

Replacement

Adjustments
&
When Changing the FFC
When changing the FFC, attach the Mylar [A] to the new FFC.

When attaching the Mylar, follow the steps below.

1. Feed the FFC through the ferrite core [A].

SM 4-49 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Scanner Unit

2. Connect the FFC to the scanner carriage’s connector, and then lift the lever [A] to lock it.

3. Attach the Mylar [A] to the FFC from above, and then insert the tabs at both ends of the
Mylar into the gaps in the FFC holder to secure it in position.

SM 4-50 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Scanner Unit

When applying the Mylar, do not stretch the FFC.

Applying the Mylar while stretching the FFC causes the circuit board to be deformed.

Replacement

Adjustments
&
4.8.10 MODIFYING THE SCANNER (CONTACT/CONTACTLESS)
WHEN USING THE ARDF

Procedure for the ADF

1. Remove the ADF front cover [A] ( ×1)

• Remove with the document table lifted up.

SM 4-51 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Scanner Unit

2. Remove the document reader guide plate [A]. ( ×1)

3. Replace the contactless guide plate (front) [A] with the contact guide plate (front) [B]. ( ×1).
There is a hole in the contact guide plate (front).

SM 4-52 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Scanner Unit

4. Replace the contactless guide plate (rear) [A] with the contact guide plate (rear) [B].
There is a hole in the contact guide plate (rear).

Replacement

Adjustments
&
5. Attach the document reader guide plate. Be careful not to scratch the sheet [A].

6. Attach the ADF front cover, and return the ADF to its original position.
7. Enter SP mode, and then change the DF density setting (SP4-688-001) from [102%] to
[97%].

SM 4-53 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Scanner Unit

Procedure for the Scanner

1. Remove the exposure glass, and peel off the black sheet [A].

2. Wipe the exposure glass with general alcohol glass cleaner so that no glue remains from the
double-sided tape.

• Remember that if any glue remains, it will cause a paper jam in the ADF.

4.8.11 MODIFYING THE SCANNER (CONTACT/CONTACTLESS)

WHEN USING THE SPDF
When changing from contactless to contact original feed, some parts of the ADF and scanner
must be replaced.

Procedure for the SPDF

1. Open the SPDF.
2. Remove the lower entrance guide unit [A]. ( ×2)

• The part below the contactless lower entrance guide unit is black [A].
• The part below the contact lower entrance guide unit is colorless and transparent
[B].

SM 4-54 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Scanner Unit

Replacement

Adjustments
&
3. Remove the document reader guide plate [A]. ( ×1)

• The part below the contactless document reader guide plate is gray [A].
• The part below the contact document reader guide plate is white [B].

4. Attach the contact document reader guide plate [A].

SM 4-55 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Scanner Unit

5. Attach the contact lower entrance guide unit [B]. ( ×2)

6. Enter SP mode, and then change the Scan Image Density Adjustment (SP4-688-002) from
[103] to [96].

Procedure for the Scanner

1. Remove the exposure glass. (Exposure Glass)
2. Peel off the gap sheet (black) [A] from the sheet-through glass [B].

3. Wipe the exposure glass with general alcohol glass cleaner, so that no glue remains from
the double-sided tape.

• Remember that if any glue remains, it will cause a paper jam in the ADF.

SM 4-56 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Laser Unit

4.9 LASER UNIT

• Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the

Replacement

Adjustments
procedures in this section. Laser beams can cause serious eye injury.

&
4.9.1 CAUTION DECAL LOCATION
Caution decals are placed as shown below.

• Be sure to turn off the main power switch and disconnect the power plug from the power
outlet before beginning any disassembly or adjustment of the laser unit. This copier
uses a class IIIb laser beam with a wavelength of 660 nm and an output of 17 mW. The
laser can cause serious eye injury.

4.9.2 LASER UNIT

Removing the Laser Unit

1. Open the front cover.
2. Remove the laser unit cover [A]. ( x 1)

SM 4-57 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Laser Unit

3. Release the stopper [A].

4. Pull out the laser unit [A]. ( x 3)

Installing a New Laser Unit

1. Replace the laser unit with a new laser unit.
2. Insert the new laser unit [A] halfway.

SM 4-58 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Laser Unit

3. Connect three harnesses to the new laser unit ( x 3).

Replacement

Adjustments
&
4. Insert the new laser unit along the guide frame [A].

• Make sure that the new laser unit claws fit into two mainframe claws as shown
below.

Mainframe Claws

Laser Unit Claws

SM 4-59 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Laser Unit

5. Set the laser unit with the stopper [A].

• Use a screw driver to pry in the stopper.

6. Attach the laser unit cover [A] ( x 1).

After Installing the New Laser Unit

Download new data stored in a new laser unit to the mainframe.
1. Close the front cover.
2. Plug in and turn on the main power switch.
3. Enter the SP mode.
4. Download the new data stored in the new laser unit to the mainframe with SP2-110-005.

• If the error message indicating the failure of the data download appears, execute
SP2-110-005 again.
• If this step is not correctly done, an image problem may occur on printouts.
5. Perform image adjustments if needed (ADF Image Adjustment).

SM 4-60 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Laser Unit

4.9.3 QUENCHING LAMP

1. Remove the PCDU. (PCDU)
2. Remove the quenching lamp [A].

Replacement

Adjustments
&
4.9.4 PCL (PRE CLEANING LIGHT)
1. Remove the PCDU. (PCDU)
2. Remove the fusing unit. (Fusing Unit)
3. Remove the PCL [A].

SM 4-61 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
PCDU

4.10 PCDU

• To prevent damage from toner spillage during the PCDU removal, be sure to place a
ground cloth on the floor.
• To prevent damage from excess light, wrap the OPC drum with protective paper and
store the OPC drum in a cool dark place.
• Do not touch the OPC drum, cleaning blade, or any seals or tapes.
• Do not use any alcohols or solvents to clean the OPC drum; Be sure to wipe with a dry
cloth. If excess dirt exists, first wipe with a damp cloth, and next wipe off completely with
a dry cloth.
• Do not rotate the OPC drum clockwise after the PCDU has been installed.

4.10.1 PCDU

• If you install a complete new PCDU, you do not need to perform SP 3-701. This is
because the machine detects a new unit automatically when you cycle the main power
off/on, and performs the initial adjustment automatically.
1. Open the front cover.
2. Open the right cover.
3. Tilt the transfer unit [A].

4. Remove the PCDU [A].

SM 4-62 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 PCDU

• Carefully and slowly pull out the PCDU without tilting, to prevent toner spillage.

Replacement

Adjustments
&
• When installing the PCDU, push the PCDU into the machine while screwing it in, as
shown below, and then secure the PCDU. If the PCDU is not installed straight, the
transfer roller contact and release mechanism does not work properly and dirt may
appear on the 2nd side of outputs.

4.10.2 PCU/DEVELOPMENT UNIT

Before Replacing the PCU or Development Unit

• Before replacing the PCU, set SP3-701-002 (Manual New Unit Set: PCU) to “1” and turn
off the main power switch. After replacing the PCU, turn on the main power.
• Before replacing the development unit, set SP3-701-023 (Manual New Unit Set:
Development Unit) to "1" and turn off the main power switch. After replacing the
development unit, turn on the main power.

SM 4-63 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
PCDU

Replacement Procedure
1. Remove the PCDU. (PCDU)
2. Remove the face plates [A][B]. ( x4, x1)

3. Split the assembly into the PCU [A] and development unit [B].

Notes When Installing the Face Plates

When installing the face plates, check the fitting points as shown below.
[A]: The bearing of the face plate fits the OPC drum.
[B]: The bearing of the face plate fits the bearing of the development roller.
Face plate for front side

SM 4-64 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 PCDU

Face plate for rear side

Replacement

Adjustments
&
Installing a PCU
1. Disassemble the PCDU into PCU and development unit (PCU/Development Unit).
2. Replace the used PCU with a new one.
3. Reassemble the PCDU.

Installing a Development Unit

1. Disassemble the PCDU into PCU and development unit (PCU/Development Unit).
2. Replace the used development unit with a new one.
3. Reassemble the PCDU.
4. Pull out the heat seal [A].

SM 4-65 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
PCDU

5. Remove the cap [A].

• Attach the removed cap to the used development unit.

4.10.3 OPC DRUM

• Before replacing the OPC drum, set SP3-701-021 to “1” and turn off the main power
switch.
• If you have to turn the power on again before replacing the part, execute the SP again
before replacing the part.
• After replacing the OPC drum, turn on the main power on.
1. Remove the PCU. (PCU/Development Unit)
2. Remove the stopper [A] for the PCU.

SM 4-66 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 PCDU

3. Pull out the OPC drum [A].

Replacement

Adjustments
&
4.10.4 CHARGE ROLLER, CLEANING ROLLER

• Before replacing these rollers, set SP3-701-018 for the charge roller and/or SP3-701-
019 for the cleaning roller to “1” and turn the main power switch OFF.
• If you have to turn the power on again before replacing the part, execute the SP again
before replacing the part.
• After replacing the rollers, turn the main power switch ON.
1. Remove the PCU. (PCU/Development Unit)
2. Remove the OPC drum. (OPC Drum)
3. Remove the charge roller and cleaning roller [A] with its bearing.

4. Split the assembly into the charge roller [A] and cleaning roller [B].

SM 4-67 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
PCDU

4.10.5 PICK-OFF PAWLS

• Before replacing the pick-off pawls, set SP3-701-022 to “1” and turn off the main power
switch.
• If you have to turn the power on again before replacing the part, execute the SP again
before replacing the part.
• After replacing the pick-off pawls, turn on the main power on.
1. Remove the PCU. (PCU/Development Unit)
2. Remove the pick-off pawls [A].

• Use a screw driver to pry away the tabs of the pick-off pawl. If the pick-off pawl has
marked the drum with a line, the pick-off pawl position can be moved from 1 to 2.

SM 4-68 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 PCDU

4.10.6 CLEANING BLADE

• Before replacing the cleaning blade, set SP3-701-009 to “1” and turn the main power
switch OFF.

Replacement

Adjustments
• If you have to turn the power on again before replacing the part, execute the SP again

&
before replacing the part.
• After replacing the cleaning blade, turn the main power switch ON.
1. Remove the PCU. (PCU/Development Unit)
2. Remove the OPC drum. (OPC Drum)
3. Remove the charge roller and cleaning roller. (Charge Roller, Cleaning Roller)
4. Remove the cleaning blade [A]. ( x2)

• The cleaning blade [A] has two different types of holes: a circle ( ), and an oval
( ). Remove the screw on the circle side first, and then, remove the oval side.

SM 4-69 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
PCDU

4.10.7 DEVELOPER

• These sheets used in steps 6, 11, and 12 are not provided as accessories; please do
not forget to order them with the developer.

• Before replacing the developer, set SP3-701-024 to “1” and turn the main power switch
OFF.
• If you have to turn the power on again before replacing the part, execute the SP again
before replacing the part.
• After replacing the developer, turn the main power switch ON.

• If you replace developer together with the development filters, first replace the
developer, then replace the filters.
1. Remove the development unit. (PCU/Development Unit)
2. Remove the bearing (front) [A]. (E-ring x1)

3. Pull the shaft toward the blue arrow shown below, then remove the pin [A] and the gear [B].

SM 4-70 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 PCDU

4. Remove the gear [A]. ( x1)

Replacement

Adjustments
&
5. Remove the bearing (rear) [A].

6. Remove the development side seal and development case entrance seal [A] at each end.

SM 4-71 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
PCDU

7. Lift up the development sleeve unit [A].

• Do not touch or hold the development sleeve edge [A] when holding the sleeve
unit. Otherwise, it may cause an injury.
8. Remove the developer after turning the development unit upside down in the reverse
direction of the development filter.

• Rotate the gear to remove as much toner as you can.

SM 4-72 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 PCDU

9. Stand the development unit up, and add new developer evenly across the width of the
development unit while rotating the gear.

Replacement

Adjustments
&
10. Reassemble the development sleeve unit, gear and bearing.

• The sheets for the development sleeve unit [A] must be under the sheets [B] for the
development unit.

Correct Wrong

SM 4-73 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
PCDU

11. Wipe off the areas [A] indicated by the red-dashed line and paste new development case
entrance seals to cover the blue-circled position.
• These seals are part of the development seal set, which must be ordered together with
the new developer.

• The seal [A] for the front side is not the same shape as the one [B] for the rear side,
as shown below. Be careful when you paste them.

12. Paste the new development side seals [A] on the face of the development sleeve unit as
shown below.
• These seals are part of the development seal set, which must be ordered together with
the new developer.

SM 4-74 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 PCDU

Replacement

Adjustments
&
13. Reassemble the PCU and development unit.
14. Turn on the main power switch.
The machine detects the new developer and starts the initial adjustment.

4.10.8 DEVELOPMENT FILTERS

• Before replacing the development filters, set SP3-701-025 to “1” and turn the main
power switch OFF.
• If you have to turn the power on again before replacing the part, execute the SP again
before replacing the part.
• After replacing the development filters, turn the main power switch ON.

• If you replace the development filter together with developer, first replace the developer,
then replace the filters.
1. Remove the development unit. (PCU/Development Unit)
2. Remove the development filters [A].

SM 4-75 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
PCDU

4.10.9 TD SENSOR
1. Remove the development unit. (PCU/Development Unit)
2. Remove the TD sensor cover [A].

• Use a screw driver to release the tab(s) of the cover.

3. Remove the TD sensor [A]. ( x1)

SM 4-76 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 PCDU

4.10.10 DEVELOPMENT MIXING AUGER BEARINGS

• Before replacing the development mixing auger bearings, set SP3-701-028 to “1” and
turn the main power switch OFF.

Replacement

Adjustments
• If you have to turn the power on again before replacing the part, execute the SP again

&
before replacing the part.
• After replacing the development mixing auger bearings, turn the main power switch ON.
1. Remove the development unit. (PCU/Development Unit)
2. Pull the shaft toward you, and then pull out the pin [A] and remove the gear [B].

3. Remove the gears [A] [B]. ( x1, E-ring x1)

4. Remove the two development mixing auger bearings [A] (E-ring x1).

SM 4-77 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
PCDU

5. Remove the gears [A] [B] [C]. (E-ring x2)

6. Remove the two development mixing auger bearings [A].

• The development mixing auger bearings are D-shaped. Make sure that you install them
in the orientation exactly as shown above.

4.10.11 DEVELOPMENT MIXING AUGER (L / R)

• [A]: Development Mixing Auger (L)

• [B]: Development Mixing Auger (R)

1. Remove the development unit. (PCU/Development Unit)

2. Remove the developer. (Developer)
3. Remove the development mixing auger bearings. (Development Mixing Auger Bearings)

SM 4-78 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 PCDU

4. Remove the development mixing auger (L) [A].

Replacement

Adjustments
&
5. Remove the development mixing auger (R) [A].

• Each auger is different; please make sure that the augers are attached correctly.
• [A]: Development Mixing Auger (L)
• [B]: Development Mixing Auger (R)

SM 4-79 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Waste Toner

4.11 WASTE TONER

4.11.1 WASTE TONER BOTTLE
Before Replacing the Waste Toner Bottle

When the bottle is replaced after the machine detects that the waste toner bottle is full and stops,
the counter for the Waste Toner Bottle is reset automatically.
When the bottle is replaced before the machine stops due to a full bottle, it is necessary to reset
the PM counter manually (set SP3-701-142 to “1” before replacing the bottle, then switch the
power off).

SP3-701 (Manual New Unit Set)

This SP is the new unit detection flag.

0: new unit detection flag OFF, 1: new unit detection flag ON
Item SP
Waste toner bottle SP3-701-142

1. Open the front cover.

2. Pull out the waste toner bottle [A] ( x1, ×1).

• There is no waste toner bottle set switch. If you remove the waste toner bottle, be
sure to replace it before you finish work on the machine.

SM 4-80 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Waste Toner

4.11.2 TONER COLLECTION FULL SENSOR

1. Remove the waste toner bottle. (Waste Toner Bottle)
2. Remove the toner collection full sensor [A]. ( ×1)

Replacement

Adjustments
&
4.11.3 RECYCLING SHUTTER
1. Remove the waste toner bottle. (Waste Toner Bottle)
2. Remove the PCDU. (PCDU)
3. Remove the controller box. (Controller Box)
4. Remove the duct [A].

• Remove the Development Bearing Cooling Fan along with the duct (for MP 4055
SP/MP 5055 SP/MP 6055 SP only).

SM 4-81 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Waste Toner

5. Remove the connectors.

6. Remove the motor unit [A].

7. Remove the recycling shutter bracket [A]. ( ×4)

• Spread paper on the floor to catch possible toner spills.

SM 4-82 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Waste Toner

8. Remove the bracket [A] ( ×4).

Replacement

Adjustments
&
9. Remove the two pulleys [A] [B] and the belt [C]. ( ×1)

10. Remove the bracket [A]. ( ×2, ×1, bearing × 1)

• Place a sheet of paper underneath the bracket, and then put the bracket on the
sheet. Otherwise, the grease applied to the gear in the bracket may adhere to the
floor.

SM 4-83 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Waste Toner

11. Remove the recycling shutter unit [A]. ( ×3, Gear × 1)

• Place a sheet of paper underneath the recycling shutter unit, and then put the
recycling shutter unit on the sheet. Otherwise, the grease applied to the gear in the
unit may adhere to the floor.

SM 4-84 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Transfer Unit

4.12 TRANSFER UNIT

4.12.1 TRANSFER UNIT
1. Open the right cover.

Replacement

Adjustments
2. Close the transfer unit [A].

&
3. Remove the clip of the transfer unit [A] and disconnect the connector. ( ×1, ×1)

4. Slide the bearing in the blue arrow direction to release it from the frame of the main
machine.

SM 4-85 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Transfer Unit

5. Open the transfer unit [A].

6. Release the arm of the transfer unit [A] ( ×1).

7. Remove the transfer unit [A].

SM 4-86 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Transfer Unit

4.12.2 TRANSFER ROLLER UNIT

• Before replacing the transfer roller unit, set SP3-701-108 to “1” and turn off the main
power switch.

Replacement

Adjustments
• If you have to turn the power on again before replacing the part, execute the SP again

&
before replacing the part.
• After replacing the transfer roller unit, turn on the main power on.
1. Open the right cover.
2. Release the claws of the transfer roller unit [A].

3. Remove the transfer roller unit [A].

SM 4-87 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Transfer Unit

4.12.3 ID SENSOR

Before Replacing the ID Sensor

• You must take note of the original value of SP3-331-061 to prepare for the possibility
that the process control after replacement will not be done properly.
A QR-code is pasted on the sensor head of an ID sensor, which includes the characteristic value
for the sensor. This characteristic value must be input into SP3-331-061 before replacing the ID
sensor.
1. Take a note of the characteristic value on the new ID sensor (surrounded by a red dashed
line in the following photo).

2. Turn the main power ON and enter SP mode.

3. Input the characteristic value into SP3-331-061.

Replacement Procedure
1. Open the right cover.
2. Remove the ID sensor [A]. ( ×1, ×1)

SM 4-88 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Transfer Unit

4.12.4 TRANSFER UNIT OPEN/CLOSED LED

1. Open the right cover.
2. Remove the guide plate [A]. ( ×2)

Replacement

Adjustments
&
3. Remove the LED cover [A]. ( ×1)

4. Remove the transfer unit open/closed LED [A]. ( ×1)

SM 4-89 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Transfer Unit

4.12.5 TEMPERATURE/HUMIDITY SENSOR

1. Pull out the 1st and 2nd paper feed trays.
2. Remove the right lower cover [A].

3. Inserting a driver through the frame hole, remove the screw of the temperature/humidity
sensor.

4. Remove the temperature/humidity sensor [A].

SM 4-90 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Transfer Unit

4.12.6 FUSING ENTRANCE SENSOR

1. Open the right cover.
2. Remove the fusing entrance sensor [A] with bracket. ( ×1)

Replacement

Adjustments
&
3. Remove the fusing entrance sensor [A]. ( ×1)

4.12.7 TRANSFER UNIT OPEN/CLOSED SENSOR

1. Open the right cover.
2. Remove the transfer unit open/closed sensor [A]. ( ×1, hooks)

SM 4-91 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Drive Unit

4.13 DRIVE UNIT

4.13.1 DRUM/WASTE TONER MOTOR
1. Remove the rear cover. (Rear Cover)
2. Remove the drum/waste toner motor [A].

4.13.2 DEVELOPMENT MOTOR

1. Remove the rear cover. (Rear Cover)
2. Remove the development motor [A].

SM 4-92 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Drive Unit

4.13.3 FUSING/PAPER EXIT MOTOR (MP 2555 SP/3055 SP/3555 SP

ONLY)
1. Remove the rear cover. (Rear Cover)
2. Remove the fusing/paper exit motor [A].

Replacement

Adjustments
&
4.13.4 FUSING MOTOR (MP 4055 SP/5055 SP/6055 SP ONLY)
1. Remove the rear cover. (Rear Cover)
2. Remove the fusing motor [A].

4.13.5 PAPER EXIT MOTOR (MP 4055 SP/5055 SP/6055 SP ONLY)

1. Remove the rear cover. (Rear Cover)
2. Remove the paper exit motor [A].

SM 4-93 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Drive Unit

4.13.6 REGISTRATION MOTOR

1. Remove the rear cover. (Rear Cover)
2. Remove the registration motor [A].

4.13.7 PAPER FEED MOTOR

1. Remove the rear lower cover. (Rear Lower Cover)
2. Remove the paper feed motor [A].

4.13.8 VERTICAL TRANSPORT MOTOR

1. Remove the rear lower cover. (Rear Lower Cover)
2. Remove the vertical transport motor [A].

SM 4-94 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Drive Unit

4.13.9 TRANSFER ROLLER CONTACT MOTOR

1. Remove the front cover. (Front Cover)
2. Remove the inner cover. (Inner Cover)
3. Remove the transfer roller contact motor [A]. ( ×3, ×2)

Replacement

Adjustments
&
4.13.10 TONER HOPPER
1. Pull out the toner bottle.
2. Remove the paper exit lower cover. (Paper Exit Lower Cover)
3. Remove the upper inner cover. (Upper Inner Cover)
4. Remove the development exhaust fan. (Development Exhaust Fan)
5. Remove the toner supply housing. (Toner Supply Housing)
6. Remove the controller box. (Controller Box)
7. Remove the screws on the toner hopper [A]. ( ×3)

SM 4-95 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Drive Unit

8. Remove the gear [B] on the gearbox [A]. ( ×1)

9. Remove the screws and tab on the gearbox [A]. ( ×3, tab×1)

10. Remove the toner hopper [A].

• Toner remains in the toner hopper [A]. Be sure to place the toner hopper on a sheet
of paper to protect against toner spillage.

SM 4-96 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Drive Unit

• Attach the toner supply pipe [A] before installing the gear box and toner hopper.
• Fit the hole of the supply pipe to the pin [B] and then stabilize the pipe ( x1).

Replacement

Adjustments
&
4.13.11 TONER SUPPLY MOTOR
1. Remove the toner hopper. (Toner Hopper)
2. Remove the screws and connector on the gearbox [A]. ( ×3, ×1)

SM 4-97 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Drive Unit

3. Remove the gear [A] and part [B] from the gear box cover [C].

• Make sure that the angle of the part [B] is as shown below when attaching the part
[B] to the gear box cover.

4. Remove the gear box cover [A].

SM 4-98 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Drive Unit

5. Remove the toner supply motor [B] with its spacer from the gear box cover [A]. ( ×2)

Replacement

Adjustments
&
6. Remove the spacer [B] from the toner supply motor [A].

SM 4-99 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Fusing Unit

4.14 FUSING UNIT

4.14.1 FUSING UNIT

Replacement

• In 100 V models, only one of the AC lines for the fusing unit is shut off when you turn off
the main power; the other line carries current even when you turn off the main power
switch. Because of this, turn off the main power switch, and also always pull out the AC
power cord from the wall socket before doing replacement.
• Because there is a danger of burns on contact with hot parts of the fusing unit, start
work when the temperature drops to a low enough temperature.
• To clear SC544-02 or SC554-02, replace the fusing unit or install a fuse (provided in the
heating sleeve belt unit) in the fusing unit. If you will install a new fusing unit, follow the
procedure below to clear SC544-02 or SC554-02.
1. Install a new fusing unit.
2. Clear SC544-02 or SC554-02 with SP5-810-002
3. Turn the machine off and on.

• MP 2555 SP/3055 SP/3555 SP

When the fusing unit is used past its PM cycle, the fusing unit may break, causing a
service call. Therefore, the machine displays a warning on the operation panel at 240K
pages and stops at 260K pages.
• MP 4055 SP/5055 SP/6055 SP
When the fusing unit is used past its PM cycle, the fusing unit may break, causing a
service call. Therefore, the machine displays a warning on the operation panel at 320K
pages and stops at 350K pages.

• If you replace a whole fusing unit, you do not need to perform SP3-701. This is because
the machine detects a new unit automatically. If you replace only a part of the fusing
unit, however, such as the pressure roller, you must set SP3-701 for that part.

SM 4-100 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Fusing Unit

1. Open the right cover.

2. Remove the screws on the fusing unit [A] and disconnect the connectors ( x2, x2).
• Do not pull out the fusing unit now. The fusing unit is still connected to the machine.

Replacement

Adjustments
&
• When disconnecting the harness, hold the connector as shown below in order to
avoid breaking the connector pins.

3. Remove the fusing unit connector cover [A].

SM 4-101 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Fusing Unit

• Attach the fusing unit connector cover by fitting the space on the connector cover
[A] (surrounded by red dashes in the diagram) and the frame of the fusing unit [B]
together when installing.

• The connector cover must be attached before screwing in the fusing unit.
4. Remove the connector [A]. ( x1)

5. Pull out the fusing unit [A].

SM 4-102 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Fusing Unit

• When installing the fusing unit, attach the rear screw first, then attach the front
screw.

Replacement

Adjustments
4.14.2 FUSING ENTRANCE GUIDE PLATE

&
1. Remove the fusing unit. (Fusing Unit)
2. Remove the fusing entrance guide plate [A]. ( x3)

Cleaning the Fusing Entrance Guide Plate

Carefully remove toner adhering as shown in the diagram below with a dry cloth. Then, wipe with
a cloth moistened with alcohol.

SM 4-103 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Fusing Unit

4.14.3 FUSING EXIT GUIDE PLATE

1. Remove the fusing unit. (Fusing Unit)
2. Open the fusing exit guide plate [A].

• Wipe clean with a dry cloth. Then wipe clean with a cloth dampened with alcohol.

4.14.4 FUSING UPPER COVER

1. Remove the fusing unit. (Fusing Unit)
2. Release the two harnesses [A].

3. Remove the connector [A] while holding its sides. ( x1)

SM 4-104 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Fusing Unit

4. Remove the fusing upper cover [A]. ( x4)

Replacement

Adjustments
&
• You must route the harnesses for the pressure roller temperature sensor and the
fusing roller temperature sensor correctly when reassembling the fusing unit. See
the notes when reassembling the fusing unit. (Notes When Reassembling the
Fusing Unit)

4.14.5 FUSING LOWER COVER

1. Remove the fusing unit. (Fusing Unit)
2. Remove a screw of the grounding wire [A]. ( x1)

3. Remove the fusing lower cover [A]. ( x1, x5)

SM 4-105 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Fusing Unit

• The grounding plate [A] is uncovered after the fusing lower cover is removed. Be
careful not to damage it. ( x1)

• You must route the harnesses for the pressure roller temperature sensor and the fusing
roller temperature sensor correctly when reassembling the fusing unit. See the notes
when reassembling the fusing unit. (Notes When Reassembling the Fusing Unit)

4.14.6 HEATING SLEEVE BELT UNIT

• Set SP3-701-116 to “1” and turn the main power OFF before replacing.
• If you have to turn the power on again before replacing the part, execute the SP again
before replacing the part.
• After replacing the unit, turn the main power ON.

• To clear SC544-02 or SC554-02, replace the fusing unit or install a fuse (provided in the
heating sleeve belt unit) in the fusing unit.
• When clearing SC544-02 or SC554-02 by installing a fuse (provided in the heating
sleeve belt unit) in the fusing unit, see To Clear SC544-02 or SC554-02.
• The new unit detection fuse packed with the heating sleeve belt unit is used to cancel
SC544-02/554-02. Discard the fuse if these SCs did not occur.
• When replacing the heating sleeve belt unit at EM replacement, installing a fuse is not
necessary. Do not use the fuse for EM replacement.

SM 4-106 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Fusing Unit

Replacement
1. Remove the fusing upper cover. (Fusing Upper Cover)
2. Remove the fusing lower cover. (Fusing Lower Cover)
3. Remove the two pressure springs. ( x2)

Replacement

Adjustments
&
4. Remove the screws from left and right frames. ( x2 for each frame)

SM 4-107 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Fusing Unit

5. Remove the heating sleeve belt unit [A].

To Clear SC544-02 or SC554-02

• To clear SC544-02 or SC554-02, attach the new unit detection fuse provided with the
heating sleeve belt unit or replace the fusing unit.
1. Prepare a new fuse provided with the heating sleeve belt unit.

2. Connect the fuse pins into the fusing unit connector.

SM 4-108 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Fusing Unit

3. Route the harness of the fuse through the slits (indicated by arrows).
4. Install the fuse in the notch (indicated by a blue circle).

Replacement

Adjustments
&
5. Reassemble the fusing unit.
6. Install the fusing unit in the machine.
7. Enter the SP mode, and then clear SC544-02 or SC554-02 with SP5-810-002.
8. Turn the machine off and on.

4.14.7 PRESSURE ROLLER AND PRESSURE ROLLER BEARINGS

Adjustment before Replacing the Pressure Roller and Pressure Roller

Bearings
Before replacing the pressure roller, set SP3-701-118 to "1" and switch the power OFF. Then
replace the pressure roller and turn the main power ON.
Before replacing the pressure roller bearings, set SP3-701-119 to "1" and turn the main power
OFF. Then replace the pressure roller bearings and turn the main power ON.
If you have to turn the power on again before replacing the part, execute the SP again before
replacing the part.

Replacement
1. Remove the heating sleeve belt unit. (Heating Sleeve Belt Unit)
2. Remove the pressure roller gear [A]. (C-ring x1)

SM 4-109 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Fusing Unit

3. Remove the pressure roller rear bearing [A].

4. Remove the pressure roller front bearing [A]. (C-ring x1)

5. Remove the pressure roller [A].

SM 4-110 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Fusing Unit

4.14.8 THERMOSTAT UNIT

1. Remove the fusing unit. (Fusing Unit)
2. Remove the thermostats [A]. ( x2 for each thermostat)

Replacement

Adjustments
&
4.14.9 FUSING ROLLER TEMPERATURE SENSORS
1. Remove the fusing lower cover. (Fusing Lower Cover)
2. Remove the fusing roller temperature sensors [A].

4.14.10 PRESSURE ROLLER TEMPERATURE SENSORS

1. Remove the fusing lower cover. (Fusing Lower Cover)
2. Remove the pressure roller temperature sensors. ( x1, for each)

SM 4-111 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Fusing Unit

4.14.11 FUSING THERMOPILES

1. Remove the fusing unit. (Fusing Unit)
2. Remove the fusing thermopile unit [A]. ( x2)

3. Remove the fusing thermopiles [A]. ( x2, x2)

4.14.12 NOTES WHEN REASSEMBLING THE FUSING UNIT

Route the harnesses for the pressure roller temperature sensor [A] and the fusing roller
temperature sensor [B] correctly when reassembling the fusing unit.
Harness [A] for the pressure roller temperature sensor has black and white wires. Routing starts
from the bottom of the fusing unit, then the rear, and to the side.
Harness [B] for the fusing roller temperature sensor has black, white, and blue wires. Routing
starts from the bottom of the fusing unit, then the rear, and to the top.

SM 4-112 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Fusing Unit

Harness route: when looking at the bottom of the fusing unit

Replacement

Adjustments
&
Harness route: when looking at the side of the fusing unit

SM 4-113 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Paper Exit

4.15 PAPER EXIT

4.15.1 PAPER EXIT UNIT
1. Open the right cover.
2. Remove the fusing unit. (Fusing Unit)
3. Remove the inner cover [A].

4. Remove the paper exit cover. (Paper Exit Cover)

5. Remove the paper exit unit [A].

4.15.2 PAPER EXIT SWITCHING SOLENOID

1. Remove the paper exit unit. (Paper Exit Unit)
2. Remove the paper exit switching solenoid [A].

SM 4-114 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Paper Exit

4.15.3 PAPER EXIT SENSOR

1. Remove the paper exit unit. (Paper Exit Unit)
2. Remove the feeler [A].

Replacement

Adjustments
&
3. Remove the paper exit sensor with bracket [A].

4. Remove the paper exit sensor [A].

SM 4-115 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Paper Exit

4.15.4 REVERSE SENSOR

1. Remove the paper exit unit. (Paper Exit Unit)
2. Remove the reverse sensor [A].

When attaching the reverse sensor, if you screw too tightly in the direction of the blue arrow,
it may cause the gap between the guide plates [A] to be too narrow, resulting in paper jams.
Make sure that there is a gap [A] of 3mm or more after you fasten the screw.

SM 4-116 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Paper Exit

4.15.5 PAPER EXIT FULL SENSOR

1. Remove the paper exit unit. (Paper Exit Unit)
2. Remove the paper exit full sensor with bracket [A].

Replacement

Adjustments
&
3. Remove the paper exit full sensor [A].

4.15.6 REVERSE MOTOR

1. Remove the paper exit unit. (Paper Exit Unit)
2. Remove the gear [A].

SM 4-117 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Paper Exit

3. Release the harness.

4. Remove the bearings [A].

5. Remove the reverse motor with bracket [A].

SM 4-118 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Paper Exit

6. Remove the reverse motor [A].

Replacement

Adjustments
&
4.15.7 FUSING EXIT SENSOR
1. Remove the paper exit unit. (Paper Exit Unit)
2. Remove the fusing exit sensor [A].

SM 4-119 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Paper Feed

4.16 PAPER FEED

• The 1st paper feed unit can be removed without removing the duplex unit (just open the
right cover), and you can remove the paper feed unit after pulling out the paper tray.
• Note that the 1st paper feed unit and 2nd paper feed unit are not interchangeable.

4.16.1 PAPER FEED UNIT

1st Paper Feed Unit

1. Remove the right cover. (Right Cover)
2. Pull out the 1st paper feed tray.
3. Remove the screws attached to the 1st paper feed unit [A] ( x2).

4. Pull out the 1st paper feed unit [A] slightly toward the front, and then take off the paper feed
guide plate [B].
• Release the rear side first to remove the paper feed guide plate.

SM 4-120 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Paper Feed

• The following picture shows the shape of the guide plate at the rear side.

Replacement

Adjustments
&
5. Remove the 1st paper feed unit [A]. ( x1)

2nd Paper Feed Unit

1. Remove the right cover. (Right Cover)
2. Pull out the 2nd paper feed tray [A].

• Depending on the model, remove the right lower cover or open the paper transport
cover.

SM 4-121 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Paper Feed

3. Remove the bracket [A]. ( ×1)

4. Lift the harness guide [A], and then remove it ( ×1).

• The harness guide has a claw, so make sure that you do not break it when
removing.

SM 4-122 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Paper Feed

5. Remove the paper feed guide plate [A].

• Release the rear side first to remove the paper feed guide plate.

Replacement

Adjustments
&
6. Remove the 2nd paper feed unit [A]. ( ×2, x1)

4.16.2 PAPER DUST COLLECTION UNIT

1. Open the right cover.
2. Remove the screw on the paper dust collection unit [A]. ( ×1)

SM 4-123 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Paper Feed

3. Release the tab on the paper dust collection unit [A] ( ×1).

4. While slightly opening and holding the transfer unit [A] with your hand, remove the paper
dust collection unit [B] in the order shown in the picture below.

• The right side of the paper dust collection unit has a C-shaped cutout. Do not pull
the unit by force during removal. When installing, open the transfer unit [A] to
prevent the sheet [B] from breaking.

SM 4-124 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Paper Feed

4.16.3 PICK-UP ROLLER, PAPER FEED ROLLER, SEPARATION

ROLLER, TORQUE LIMITER
1. Remove the roller holder [A]. ( ×1)

Replacement

Adjustments
&
2. Remove the pickup roller [A].

3. Remove the paper feed roller [A].

SM 4-125 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Paper Feed

4. Remove the separation roller [A]. ( ×1)

5. Remove the torque limiter [A].

4.16.4 1ST / 2ND PAPER FEED TRAY LIFT MOTOR

1. Remove the rear lower cover. (Rear Lower Cover)
2. Remove the development bearing cooling fan. (Development Bearing Cooling Fan (MP
4055 SP/5055 SP/6055 SP Only))
3. Remove the HVPS [A] along with the bracket.

SM 4-126 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Paper Feed

4. Remove the 1st paper feed tray lift motor [A].

Replacement

Adjustments
&
5. Remove the 2nd paper feed tray lift motor [A].

4.16.5 1ST / 2ND PAPER FEED SENSOR

• There is no difference in removal procedure between 1st paper feed sensor and 2nd
paper feed sensor.
1. Remove the paper feed unit. (Paper Feed Unit)
2. Remove the paper feed sensor bracket [A]. ( ×1, ×1)

SM 4-127 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Paper Feed

3. Remove the paper feed sensor [A] (hooks).

• Make sure that the end of the spring on the sensor unit is in the hole.

SM 4-128 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Paper Feed

4.16.6 VERTICAL TRANSPORT SENSOR

1. Remove the paper feed unit. (Paper Feed Unit)
2. Remove the vertical transport sensor unit [A]. ( ×1, ×1)

Replacement

Adjustments
&
3. Remove the vertical transport sensor [A] (hooks).

SM 4-129 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Paper Feed

4.16.7 LIMIT SENSOR

• There are two limit sensors in this model but the removal procedure is the same.
1. Remove the paper feed unit. (Paper Feed Unit)
2. Remove the limit sensor [A]. ( ×1)

4.16.8 1ST PAPER END SENSOR / 2ND PAPER END SENSOR

• There is no difference in removal procedure between 1st paper end sensor and 2nd
paper end sensor.
1. Remove the paper feed unit. (Paper Feed Unit)
2. Remove the feeler [A]. ( ×1)

SM 4-130 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Paper Feed

3. Remove the paper end sensor [A]. ( ×1)

Replacement

Adjustments
&
4. After reinstalling the paper end sensor, check the operation of the actuator [A].

4.16.9 REGISTRATION SENSOR

1. Open the right cover (Right Cover).
2. Remove the transfer unit. (Transfer Unit)
3. Remove the inner guide bracket [A]. ( ×2)

SM 4-131 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Paper Feed

4. Remove the registration sensor [A](hooks, ×1, x1).

SM 4-132 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Duplex Unit

4.17 DUPLEX UNIT

4.17.1 DUPLEX/BY-PASS MOTOR
1. Remove the right cover. (Right Cover)

Replacement

Adjustments
2. Remove the duplex inner cover [A]. ( ×4)

&
3. Remove the duplex/by-pass motor unit [A] ( ×3, ×1)

4. Remove the duplex/by-pass motor. ( ×2)

SM 4-133 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Duplex Unit

4.17.2 DUPLEX ENTRANCE MOTOR

1. Remove the right cover. (Right Cover)
2. Remove the duplex inner cover [A]. ( ×4)

3. Remove the duplex entrance motor bracket [A]. ( ×2, ×1)

4. Remove the duplex entrance motor [A]. ( ×2)

SM 4-134 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Duplex Unit

4.17.3 DUPLEX ENTRANCE SENSOR

1. Remove the right cover. (Right Cover)
2. Remove the screws and stoppers for the paper transfer guide plate [A]. ( ×2, ×1)

Replacement

Adjustments
&
3. Remove the duplex inner entrance guide [A].

4. Remove the duplex outer entrance guide [A]. ( ×8, ×1, ×1)

SM 4-135 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Duplex Unit

5. Remove the duplex entrance sensor [A] (hooks).

4.17.4 DUPLEX EXIT SENSOR

1. Open the right cover.
2. Remove the duplex exit sensor bracket [A]. ( ×1, ×1)

SM 4-136 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Duplex Unit

3. Remove the duplex exit sensor [A] (hooks).

Replacement

Adjustments
&

SM 4-137 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Bypass Tray Unit

4.18 BYPASS TRAY UNIT

4.18.1 BYPASS TRAY
1. Open the right cover.
2. Remove the wire [A]. ( ×1)

3. Release two arms [A] [B]. ( ×2)

SM 4-138 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Bypass Tray Unit

4. Open the right cover wide.

Replacement

Adjustments
&
5. Remove the paper transport guide [A]. ( ×2)

6. Remove the harness. ( ×1, ×1, ×1)

7. Remove the bypass tray [A]. ( ×4)

SM 4-139 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Bypass Tray Unit

4.18.2 BYPASS PAPER END SENSOR

1. Open the bypass tray [A].

2. Remove the bypass paper end sensor cover [A].

3. Remove the bypass paper end sensor unit [A]. ( ×1, ×1)

SM 4-140 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Bypass Tray Unit

4. Remove the bypass paper end sensor [A] from the bracket (hooks).

Replacement

Adjustments
&
4.18.3 BYPASS PICK-UP ROLLER
1. Open the bypass tray (Bypass Tray).
2. Remove the bypass pick-up roller [A]. ( ×1)

4.18.4 BYPASS PAPER FEED ROLLER

1. Remove the bypass paper end sensor unit. (Bypass Paper End Sensor)
2. Remove the bypass paper feed roller [A]. ( ×1)

SM 4-141 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Bypass Tray Unit

4.18.5 BYPASS SEPARATION ROLLER

1. Remove the paper transport guide. (Bypass Tray)
2. Remove the bypass separation roller [A]. ( ×1)

4.18.6 TORQUE LIMITER

1. Remove the bypass separation roller. (Bypass Separation Roller)
2. Remove the torque limiter [A].

SM 4-142 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Bypass Tray Unit

4.18.7 BYPASS WIDTH SENSOR

1. Remove the bypass tray. (Bypass Tray)
2. Remove the six screws on the bypass tray [A]. ( ×6).

Replacement

Adjustments
&
3. Release the hooks around the bypass tray [A].

• There is a hook in the tray cover. Be careful not to damage it during removal or
installation.

SM 4-143 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Bypass Tray Unit

4. Release the links.

5. Remove the bypass tray upper cover [A]. (pin x 1, x1)

6. Remove the bypass width sensor [A]. ( ×1, x2)

SM 4-144 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Bypass Tray Unit

• When installing, the holes must align as shown below.

Replacement

Adjustments
&
4.18.8 BYPASS LENGTH SENSOR
1. Remove the bypass tray upper cover. (Bypass Width Sensor).
2. Remove the bypass length sensor [A]. ( ×1, hooks)

SM 4-145 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
PCBs and Other Items

4.19 PCBS AND OTHER ITEMS

4.19.1 OVERVIEW

Around the Controller Box

[A] IPU
[B] HDD
[C] Controller Board
[D] BCU
[E] HVPS

Around the Power Supply Box

[A] PSU

SM 4-146 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 PCBs and Other Items

4.19.2 CONTROLLER BOX COVER

1. Remove the rear cover. (Rear Cover)
2. Remove the controller box cover [A].

Replacement

Adjustments
Red Circle: Remove, Blue Circle: Loosen

&
4.19.3 IPU

• The FFC connector [A] has a lock mechanism. Do not use force to pull it out.

• For the FCC connector [B], pull out it by pressing the release levers on both sides.

1. Remove the controller box cover. (Controller Box Cover)

2. Remove the IPU Sub if the SPDF is installed.

SM 4-147 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
PCBs and Other Items

3. Remove the IPU [A].

4.19.4 BCU

• The FFC connector has a lock mechanism. Do not use force to pull it out.
1. Remove the rear lower cover. (Rear Lower Cover)
2. Remove the BCU [A].

When installing the new BCU

Remove the NVRAM (EEPROM) from the old BCU. Then install it on the new BCU after you
replace the BCU.
Replace the NVRAM (Replacing the NVRAM (EEPROM) on the BCU) if the NVRAM on the old
BCU is defective.

• Make sure you print out the SMC reports ("SP Mode Data" and "Logging Data") before
you replace the NVRAM (EEPROM).

• Keep NVRAMs (EEPROM) away from any objects that can cause static electricity.
Static electricity can damage NVRAM data.
• Make sure the serial number is input in the machine for the NVRAM data with SP5-811-
004, if not, SC995-001 occurs

SM 4-148 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 PCBs and Other Items

Replacing the NVRAM (EEPROM) on the BCU

1. Make sure that you have the SMC report (factory settings). This report comes with the
machine.
2. Output the SMC data (“ALL”) using SP5-990-001/SP5-992-001.

Replacement

Adjustments
3. Turn off the main switch.

&
4. Insert a blank SD card in the SD slot #2, and then turn on the main switch.
5. Use SP5-824-001 to upload the NVRAM data from the BCU.
6. Turn off the main power switch and unplug the power cord.
7. Replace the NVRAM [A] on the BCU with a new one.

• Install a new NVRAM [C] so that the indentation [A] on the NVRAM corresponds
with the mark [B] on the BCU. Incorrect installation of the NVRAM will damage both
the BCU and NVRAM.

8. Plug in, and then turn on the main switch.

• When the power is turned ON, SC195-00 appears, but continue with the following
steps.
9. Select the destination setting. (SP5-131-001) (JPN: 0, NA: 1, EU/AA/TWN/CHN: 2)
10. Check the machine serial number with SP5-811-004, and then set the machine serial
number of SP5-811-001.

SM 4-149 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
PCBs and Other Items

• For information on how to configure SP5-811-001, contact the supervisor in your

branch office.
11. Set the area selection with SP5-807-001.

• For information on how to configure SP5-807-001, contact the supervisor in your

branch office.
12. Turn off the machine, and then turn it back on.
13. Use SP5-801-002 “Memory Clear Engine”.

• After changing the EEPROM, Some SPs do not have appropriate initial values.
Because of this, steps 10 to 12 must be done.
14. Turn off the machine, and then turn it back on.
15. From the SD card where you saved the NV-RAM data in step 5, download the NV-RAM data
with SP5-824-002.
16. Turn off the machine, and then remove the SD card from SD slot 2.
17. Turn on the main switch.
18. Check the factory setting sheet and the SMC data printout from step 2, and set the user tool
and SP settings so they are the same as before.

4.19.5 CONTROLLER BOARD

• Keep NVRAM away from any objects that can cause static electricity. Static electricity
can damage NVRAM data.

Special Procedure for Machines that have a Self Encrypting Drive (SED) Installed
• The machine holds data, linking the controller board and SED, created automatically
during SED installation. The data, however, will not be deleted automatically at
controller board replacement. Therefore, before replacing a controller board, you must
delete the link data manually so that the machine can create new link data.
• Do the following steps when doing the replacement.
• Execute [Erase All Memory] on the operation panel
[System Settings] – [Administrator Tools] – [Erase All Memory]
• Turn OFF the main power switch
• Replace the controller board
• Turn ON the main power switch
• Do not turn the main power ON after step 2, until after you replaced the board.
1. Remove the left rear cover. (Left Rear Cover)
2. Remove the HDD bracket. (HDD)

SM 4-150 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 PCBs and Other Items

3. Remove the controller bracket [A].

Replacement

Adjustments
&
4. Slide the controller board [A] to the right side to remove it.

5. Release the guide rail [A].

SM 4-151 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
PCBs and Other Items

6. Remove the NVRAMs 1 [A] and 2 [B] on the controller board.

Note the orientation
of the NVRAM
before removing or
replacing.

• When installing a new controller board, install the NVRAM removed from the old
board, or a new NVRAM if the old NVRAM is defective. Install the NVRAM [C] so
that the indentation [B] on the NVRAM corresponds with the mark [A] on the
controller board. Incorrect installation of the NVRAM will damage both the controller
board and the NVRAM.

• Make sure to attach the NVRAM in the

CORRECT ORIENTATION, boxed in blue
below. As shown here, the cutout in the
NVRAM should be facing UP.
• If you attach the NVRAM in the reverse
orientation, a short will occur and may (in
the worst case) melt the NVRAM.

Replacing the NVRAM on the Controller Board

• Referring to the previous procedure, be sure that there are no mistakes in the mounting
position and orientation of the NVRAM.

• SC195 (Machine serial number error) will be displayed if you forget to attach the
NVRAM.
• If you mounted the NVRAM in the wrong direction, each component needs to be
replaced because a short circuit was caused in the controller board and the NVRAM.
1. Make sure you have the SMC report (factory settings). This report comes with the machine.
2. Output all the SMC data using SP5-990-001 (SP Print Mode: All (Data List)).
3. Turn off the main power switch.
4. Insert a blank SD card in the SD slot 2, and then turn on the main power switch.
5. Use SP5-824-001 to upload the NVRAM data from the controller board.

SM 4-152 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 PCBs and Other Items

6. Make sure the customer has a backup of their address book data. If not, obtain the backup
by referring to the following procedure.
1. Insert an SD card into SD slot 2, and then turn the main power ON.
2. Save the address book data in the SD card using SP5-846-051.

Replacement

Adjustments
&
• The address data stored in the machine will be discarded later during this
procedure. So be sure to obtain a backup of the customer’s address book data.
• Note that the counters for the user will be reset when doing the backup/restore of
the address book data.
• If they have a backup of the address book data, use their own backup data for
restoring. This is because there is a risk that the data cannot be backed up properly
depending on the NVRAM condition.
7. Do the following steps if the machine has the fax unit. If not, skip this step.
1. Print the Box List by with the User Tools/Counter.
• [User Tools/Counter] - [Facsimile Features] - [General Settings] - [Box Setting: Print
List]
2. Print the Special Sender List by pressing these buttons in the following order.
• [User Tools/Counter] - [Facsimile Features] - [Reception Settings] - [Program
Special Sender: Print List]
3. Write down the following fax settings.
• [Receiver] in [User Tools/Counter] - [Facsimile Features] - [Reception Settings] -
[Reception File Settings] - [Forwarding].
• [Notify Destination] in [User Tools/Counter] - [Facsimile Features] - [Reception
Settings] - [Reception File Settings] - [Store].
• [Specify User] in [User Tools/Counter] - [Facsimile Features] - [Reception Settings]
- [Stored Reception File User Setting].
• [Notify Destination] in [User Tools/Counter] - [Facsimile Features] - [Reception
Settings] - [Folder Transfer Result Report].
• Specified folder in [User Tools/Counter] - [Facsimile Features] - [Send Settings] -
[Backup File TX Setting].
• [Receiver] in [User Tools/Counter] - [Facsimile Features] - [Reception Settings] -
[Reception File Settings] - [Output Mode Switch Timer].
• [Store: Notify Destination] in [User Tools/Counter] - [Facsimile Features] -
[Reception Settings] - [Output Mode Switch Timer].
• All the destination information shown on the display.

• In the fax settings, address book data is stored with entry IDs, which the
system internally assigns to each data. The entry IDs may be changed due to
re-assigning in backup/restore operations.

SM 4-153 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
PCBs and Other Items

4. Make sure that there is no transmission standby file. If any standby file exists, ask the
customer to delete it or complete the transmission.
8. Turn the main power OFF and unplug the power supply cord.
9. Push the main power switch ON again to discharge the residual charge.
10. Replace the NV-RAM with a brand-new one.
11. Turn the power ON with the SD card to which the NV-RAM data has been uploaded in Slot
2.

• SC673 appears at start-up, but this is normal behavior. This is because the
controller and the smart operation panel cannot communicate with each other due
to changing the SP settings for the operation panel.
12. Change the SP settings for the operation panel.
If you switch the screen to enter the SP mode, SC995-02 is displayed. However, continue
the following steps.
• SP5-748-101: (OpePanel Setting: Op Type Action Setting): Change bit 0 from 0 to 1.
• SP5-748-201: (OpePanel Setting: Cheetah Panel Connect Setting): Change the value
from 0 to 1.
13. Change the Flair API SP values.
• SP5-752-001 (Copy FlairAPIFunction Setting): Change bit from 0 to 1.
• SP1-041-001 (Scan:FlairAPI Setting): Change bit from 0 to 1.
• SP3-301-001 (FAX:FlairAPI Setting) Change bit from 0 to 1.
14. Cycle the power OFF/ON.

• The model information is written on the NVRAM (Novita), so SC995-02 does not
occur.
• Program/Change Administrator will be displayed in Japanese, but this is normal.
15. Enter the SP mode and specify the following settings manually.
• SP5-985-001 (Device Setting: On Board NIC) Change the value from 0 to 1.
• SP5-985-002 (Device Setting: On Board USB) Change the value from 0 to 1.
16. Turn OFF the main power, and then turn ON the main power with the SD card to which the
NV-RAM data has been uploaded in Slot 2.
17. Download the NV-RAM data stored in the SD card to the brand-new NV-RAM using SP5-
825-001 (NV-RAM Data Download).

• The download will take a couple of minutes.

18. Turn the power OFF and remove the SD card from slot 2.
19. Turn the power ON.
The screen "Program/Change Administrator" will be displayed in the language that is the
same language as the time when the data was uploaded to the SD card in step 5.

SM 4-154 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 PCBs and Other Items

20. Execute SP5-755-002 (Hide Administrator Password Change Scrn).

After you execute this SP and exit SP mode, the Home screen is displayed and user
functions can be used.
21. Check that the fax and scanner icons are displayed, and then change the following SP

Replacement

Adjustments
settings.

&
a. SP5-193-001 (External Controller Info. Settings)
b. SP5-895-001 (Application invalidation: Printer)
c. SP5-895-002 (Application invalidation: Scanner)
22. If the security functions (e.g. Stored file encryption/ Auto Erase Memory Setting) were
applied, set the functions again.
23. Ask the customer to restore their address book. Or restore the address book data using
SP5-846-052 (UCS Setting: Restore All Addr Book), and ask the customer to ensure the
address book data has been restored properly.

• If you obtained the backup of the customer’s address book data in step 3, delete
the backup immediately after the NV-RAM replacement to avoid accidentally taking
out the customer’s data.
24. Output all the SMC data with SP5-990-001 and make sure all the SP/UP settings except for
counter information are properly restored, by checking the SMC data obtained in step 2.

• The counters will be reset.

25. When equipped with fax, make sure that the list printed in step 2 and 6 are the same as the
sender information.
If the setting is different from the original setting after the replacement of the NVRAM, then
set it again to the original setting.
26. Execute the process control (SP3-011-001).
27. Execute the ACC (Copy).
28. Execute the ACC (Printer).
29. Cycle the power OFF/ON.

• If you cannot execute SP5-824-001 or SP5-825-001 for some reason, try all the
following things.
- Check the changed SP value on the SMC which was output in step 2 and set it
manually. Especially, ensure that the values of the following SPs are same as the
setting before the replacement.
- a. SP5-045-001 (Accounting counter: Counter Method)
- b. SP5-104-001 (A3/DLT Double Count)
- c. SP5-104-002 (Bypass Paper Size Undetection)
- d. SP5-302-002 (Set Time: Time Difference)

SM 4-155 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
PCBs and Other Items

• Because the PM counters have been reset during NV-RAM replacement, it is

necessary to replace all the PM parts for proper PM management.

• If a message tells you need a SD card to restore displays after the NV-RAM
replacement, create a “SD card for restoration” and restore with the SD card.

4.19.6 HDD

• Before replacing the HDD, copy the address book data to an SD card with SP5-846-051
if possible.
• If the customer is using the Data Overwrite Security, the Data Encryption feature or
OCR Scanned PDF, these applications must be installed again.
1. Remove the controller cover. (Controller Cover)
2. Remove the controller box cover. (Controller Box Cover)
3. Remove the HDD with bracket [A].

4. Remove the HDD [A] from the bracket.

SM 4-156 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 PCBs and Other Items

Adjustment after replacement

1. Execute SP5-832-001 to initialize the hard disk.
Even if you use an HDD that is already formatted, it is recommended that you re-initialize.
2. Execute SP5-853-001 to install the fixed stamps.

Replacement

Adjustments
3. Execute SP5-846-052 to copy the address book from the SD card to the HDD.

&
4. Turn off the machine, and then turn it back on.

4.19.7 HVPS
1. Remove the rear lower cover. (Rear Lower Cover)
2. Remove the HVPS [A].

4.19.8 PSU

• NEVER touch the areas outlined in red in the photos below, to prevent electric shock
caused by residual charge.
• A residual charge of about 100V-400V remains in the AC circuits on the PSU board for
several months even when the board has been removed from the machine after turning
off the machine power and unplugging the power cord.

SM 4-157 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
PCBs and Other Items

• The procedure to discharge residual charge from the machine by unplugging the power
cord from the AC wall outlet and pressing the main power switch works only for the DC
circuits on this board. Residual charge remains in the AC circuits.

1. Remove the left cover. (Left Cover)

2. Remove the bracket [A].

SM 4-158 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 PCBs and Other Items

3. Remove the PSU cooling fan (for MP 4055 SP/5055 SP/6055 SP only). (PSU Cooling Fan
(MP 4055 SP/5055 SP/6055 SP Only))
4. Remove the PSU [A].

Replacement

Adjustments
&
4.19.9 HEATER BOARD
1. Remove the left cover. (Left Cover)
2. Remove the heater board [A].

4.19.10 CONTROLLER BOX

1. Remove the left rear cover. (Left Rear Cover)
2. Remove the left cover. (Left Cover)
3. Remove the rear lower cover. (Rear Lower Cover)
4. Remove the controller box cover. (Controller Box Cover)

SM 4-159 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
PCBs and Other Items

5. Release the clamps on the upper side of the controller box.

6. Release the clamps on the side of the controller box.

7. Release the clamps in the controller box.

SM 4-160 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 PCBs and Other Items

8. Release the fixing of the bracket [A].

Replacement

Adjustments
&
9. Remove the connectors on the IPU [A].

10. Remove the FFC on the BCU [A].

11. Remove the connector.

SM 4-161 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
PCBs and Other Items

12. Remove the bracket [A].

13. Remove the controller box [A].

4.19.11 IMAGING TEMPERATURE SENSOR (THERMISTOR)

1. Remove the rear cover. (Rear Cover)
2. Remove the connector.

3. Remove the PCL. (PCL (Pre Cleaning Light))

SM 4-162 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 PCBs and Other Items

4. Remove the imaging temperature sensor (thermistor) [A].

Replacement

Adjustments
&
4.19.12 DC SW BOARD
1. Pull out the 1st and 2nd paper feed trays.
2. Remove the right lower cover [A].

3. Remove the DC SW board [A].

SM 4-163 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Fans/Filters

4.20 FANS/FILTERS
4.20.1 ODOR FILTER
1. Remove the odor filter box [A].

MP 2555 SP/3055 SP/3555 SP

MP 4055 SP/5055 SP/6055 SP

2. Remove the odor filter [A].

MP 2555 SP/3055 SP/3555 SP

SM 4-164 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Fans/Filters

MP 4055 SP/5055 SP/6055 SP

Replacement

Adjustments
&
4.20.2 PARTICULATE FILTER (MP 4055 SP/5055 SP/6055 SP ONLY)
1. Remove the odor filter box [A].

2. Remove the particulate filter [A].

SM 4-165 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Fans/Filters

4.20.3 DUST FILTER

1. Remove the PCDU. (PCDU)
2. Mount the dust filter on the duct [A].

• Attach the right side of the filter first when you mount it.

SM 4-166 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Fans/Filters

4.20.4 DEVELOPMENT EXHAUST FAN

1. Remove the left cover. (Left Cover)
2. Remove the bracket [A].

Replacement

Adjustments
&
3. Remove the development exhaust fan with duct [A]. ( ×2, ×1)

4. Dismantle the duct [A]. ( ×4)

SM 4-167 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Fans/Filters

5. Remove the development exhaust fan [A].

• Pay attention to the direction of the fan when installing. The decal pasted on the fan
must face the outside.

4.20.5 PAPER EXIT COOLING FAN

1. Remove the upper front cover. (Upper Front Cover)
2. Remove the paper exit cooling fan [A].

• Pay attention to the direction of the fan when installing. The decal pasted on the fan
must face the inside.

SM 4-168 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Fans/Filters

4.20.6 FUSING FAN

1. Remove the rear cover. (Rear Cover)
2. Remove the fusing exhaust heat fan [A] with duct.

Replacement

Adjustments
MP 2555 SP/3055 SP/3555 SP

&
MP 4055 SP/5055 SP/6055 SP

3. Remove the fusing exhaust heat fan [A]. ( ×4)

MP 2555 SP/3055 SP/3555 SP

SM 4-169 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Fans/Filters

• Pay attention to the direction of the fan when installing. The decal pasted on the fan
must face the outside.

4.20.7 DEVELOPMENT BEARING COOLING FAN (MP 4055

SP/5055 SP/6055 SP ONLY)
1. Remove the rear lower cover. (Rear Lower Cover)
2. Remove the development bearing cooling fan with duct [A].

SM 4-170 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Fans/Filters

3. Dismantle the duct [A]. ( ×4)

Replacement

Adjustments
&
4. Remove the development bearing cooling fan [A].

• Pay attention to the direction of the fan when installing. The decal pasted on the fan
must face the outside.

SM 4-171 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Fans/Filters

4.20.8 PSU COOLING FAN (MP 4055 SP/5055 SP/6055 SP ONLY)

1. Remove the left cover. (Left Cover)
2. Remove the tie wrap band [A], and remove the PSU cooling fan [B].

• Pay attention to the direction of the fan when installing. The decal pasted on the fan
must face the inside.

SM 4-172 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Adjustment after Replacement

4.21 ADJUSTMENT AFTER REPLACEMENT

4.21.1 PRINTING

Replacement

Adjustments
• Make sure the paper is installed correctly in each paper tray before you start these

&
adjustments.
• Use the Trimming Area Pattern (SP2-109-003, No.14) to print the test pattern for the
following procedures.
• Set SP 2-109-003 to “0” again after completing these printing adjustments.

Registration - Leading Edge/Side-to-Side

A: Leading Edge Registration (4.2 ± 1.5 mm)

B: Side-to-side Registration (2 ± 1.5 mm)
Make sure that the registration is adjusted within the adjustment standard range as shown
above.
After doing the registration adjustment, do the Blank Margin Adjustment in the next section.
1. Check the leading edge registration [A] for each paper feed station, and adjust them using
SP1-001.
Tray SP No. Threshold
Tray1: Thin SP1-001-001 4.2 ± 1.5 mm
Tray1: Plain SP1-001-002
Tray1: MidThick SP1-001-003
Tray1: Thick1 SP1-001-004
Tray1: Thick2 SP1-001-005
Tray1: Thick3 SP1-001-006
Tray1: Thick4 SP1-001-007
Tray2: Thin SP1-001-008 4.2 ± 1.5 mm
Tray2: Plain SP1-001-009
Tray2: MidThick SP1-001-010

SM 4-173 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Adjustment after Replacement

Tray SP No. Threshold

Tray2: Thick1 SP1-001-011
Tray2: Thick2 SP1-001-012
Tray2: Thick3 SP1-001-013
Tray2: Thick4 SP1-001-014
Bypass: Thin SP1-001-015 4.2 ± 1.5 mm
Bypass: Plain SP1-001-016
Bypass: MidThick SP1-001-017
Bypass: Thick1 SP1-001-018
Bypass: Thick2 SP1-001-019
Bypass: Thick3 SP1-001-020
Bypass: Thick4 SP1-001-021
Duplex: Thin SP1-001-022 4.2 ± 1.5 mm
Duplex: Plain SP1-001-023
Duplex: MidThick SP1-001-024
Duplex: Thick1 SP1-001-025
Duplex: Thick2 SP1-001-026
Duplex: Thick3 SP1-001-027
Tray1: Thin: 1200 SP1-001-028 4.2 ± 1.5 mm
Tray1: Plain: 1200 SP1-001-029
Tray1: MidThick: 1200 SP1-001-030
Tray1: Thick1: 1200 SP1-001-031
Tray1: Thick2: 1200 SP1-001-032
Tray1: Thick3: 1200 SP1-001-033
Tray1: Thick4: 1200 SP1-001-034
Tray2: Thin: 1200 SP1-001-035 4.2 ± 1.5 mm
Tray2: Plain: 1200 SP1-001-036
Tray2: MidThick: 1200 SP1-001-037
Tray2: Thick1: 1200 SP1-001-038
Tray2: Thick2: 1200 SP1-001-039
Tray2: Thick3: 1200 SP1-001-040
Tray2: Thick4: 1200 SP1-001-041
Bypass: Thin: 1200 SP1-001-042 4.2 ± 1.5 mm
Bypass: Plain: 1200 SP1-001-043
Bypass: MidThick: 1200 SP1-001-044
Bypass: Thick1: 1200 SP1-001-045
Bypass: Thick2: 1200 SP1-001-046
Bypass: Thick3: 1200 SP1-001-047

SM 4-174 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Adjustment after Replacement

Tray SP No. Threshold

Bypass: Thick4: 1200 SP1-001-048
Duplex: Thin: 1200 SP1-001-049 4.2 ± 1.5 mm
Duplex: Plain: 1200 SP1-001-050

Replacement

Adjustments
Duplex: MidThick: 1200 SP1-001-051

&
Duplex: Thick1: 1200 SP1-001-052
Duplex: Thick2: 1200 SP1-001-053
Duplex: Thick3: 1200 SP1-001-054
2. Check the side-to-side registration [B] for each paper feed station, and adjust them using
SP1-002.
Tray SP No. Threshold
Tray 1 SP1-002-002 2 ±1.5 mm
Tray 2 SP1-002-003
Tray 3 (Optional PFU tray 1 or LCT) SP1-002-004
Tray 4 (Optional PFU tray 2) SP1-002-005
Duplex (side 1) SP1-002-006
LCT SP1-002-007

Blank Margin

• After adjusting the Leading Edge Registration and Side Registration settings (see the
previous section), do the Blank Margin Adjustment. To do this, check the values of
Margins C and D.
• If they are not within the specifications (see below), then adjust C and D with SP2-103-
001 to -020 as explained below. Then check Margins A and B again.

A: Trailing Edge Blank Margin

B: Right Edge Blank Margin

SM 4-175 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Adjustment after Replacement

C: Leading Edge Blank Margin

D: Left Edge Blank Margin
1. Check the trailing edge [A], right edge [B], leading edge [C], left edge [D] blank margins, and
adjust them using the following SP modes.
Edge SP No. Adjustment Range
Leading Edge SP2-103-001 4.2 ± 1.5 mm (Plain, Thin)
Trailing Edge SP2-103-002 More than 0.5 mm
Left Edge SP2-103-003 2.0 ±1.5 mm
Right Edge SP2-103-004 2.0 +2.5 /-1.5 mm
Duplex: Trailing Edge: SP2-103-006 2.0 ±2.0 mm
L Size: Plain
Duplex: Trailing Edge: SP2-103-007
M Size: Plain
Duplex: Trailing Edge: SP2-103-008
S Size: Plain
Duplex: Left Edge SP2-103-009 -2.0 ±1.5 mm
Plain
Duplex: Right Edge: SP2-103-010 2.0 +2.5 /-1.5 mm
Plain
Duplex: Trailing Edge: SP2-103-011 2.0 ±2.0 mm
L Size: Thick
Duplex: Trailing Edge: SP2-103-012
M Size: Thick
Duplex: Trailing Edge: SP2-103-013
S Size: Thick
Duplex: Left Edge SP2-103-014 -2.0 ±1.5 mm
Thick
Duplex: Right Edge: SP2-103-015 2.0 +2.5 /-1.5 mm
Thick
Duplex Trail. L Size:Thin SP2-103-016 -4.0 ± 4.0 mm
Duplex Trail. M Size:Thin SP2-103-017
Duplex Trail. S Size:Thin SP2-103-018
Lead Edge Width:Thin SP2-103-019 0.0 ± 9.9 mm
Trail. Edge Width:Thin SP2-103-020
• L Size: Paper Length is 297.1 mm or more
• M Size: Paper Length is 216.1 to 297 mm
• S Size: Paper Length is 216 mm or less.

SM 4-176 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Adjustment after Replacement

Main Scan Magnification

1. Use SP2-109-003, no.5 (Grid Pattern) to print the single-dot grid pattern.
2. Check the magnification, and adjust the magnification using SP2-102-001 (Magnification
Adjustment Main Scan) if necessary. The specification is ± 1%.

Replacement

Adjustments
&
Parallelogram Image Adjustment
Laser unit adjustment is to fix parallelogram images that developed as a result of the laser
operation, by means of adjusting the physical angle of the laser unit itself. This adjustment must
be done after the skew-correction for the paper feed unit.
If parallelogram images are caused by the scanner after doing the laser unit adjustment, scanner
unit adjustment must also be performed to correct this.
1. Enter SP mode.
2. Using SP2-109-003, output a trimming pattern to measure the parallelogram.
• It is not necessary to do this step if output image is developed properly.

• If the laser unit causes a parallelogram image, there is a slanted line in the main-
scan direction, and there is a straight line in the sub-scan direction.
3. Remove the laser unit (Laser Unit).
4. Paste the adjustment sheet(s) on the reference points located on the back side of the laser
unit (two points on the inside and/or one point on the front side).

• A set of four sheets is provided as service parts. The number of sheets to be

pasted depends on the condition of the image.
• If lines slant down to the left [A], paste one or two sheets on the front side.
• If lines slant down to the right [B], paste one or two sheets at each position on the
rear side.
• Adjustable amount: 0.5mm – 0.6mm/sheet

SM 4-177 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Adjustment after Replacement

5. Do step 1 and 2 again to check that there is no parallelogram image.

4.21.2 SCANNING

• Before doing the following scanner adjustments, perform or check the printing
registration /side-to-side adjustment and the blank margin adjustment.
• Use an S5S test chart to perform the following adjustments.

Registration: Platen Mode

A: Leading Edge Registration (Sub Scan Registration Adj)

B: Side-to-side Registration (Main Scan Reg)

SM 4-178 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Adjustment after Replacement

1. Place the test chart on the exposure glass and make a copy from one of the feed stations.
2. Check the leading edge and side-to-side registration, and adjust them using the following SP
modes if necessary.
SP No. SP Name Adjustment Range

Replacement

Adjustments
SP4-803-001 Home Position Adj Value ±2.0 mm

&
SP4-011-001 Main Scan Reg ±2.5 mm

Magnification

• Use an S5S test chart to do the following adjustment.

A: Sub-scan magnification
1. Place the test chart on the exposure glass and make a copy from one of the feed stations.
2. Check the magnification ratio and adjust using the following SP mode if necessary.
SP No. SP Name Adjustment Range
SP4-008-001 Sub Scan Magnification Adj ±1.0 %

4.21.3 ADF IMAGE ADJUSTMENT

ARDF side-to-side, leading edge registration and trailing edge

A: Leading Edge Registration

B: Side-to-side Registration
SM 4-179 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Adjustment after Replacement

• Use A3/DLT paper to make a temporary test chart as shown above.

1. Put the temporary test chart on the ARDF. Then make a copy from one of the feed stations.
2. Check the registration. Check the leading edge and side-to-side registration. Adjust the
following SP modes if necessary.
Standard: 4.2 ± 2 mm for the leading edge registration, 2 ± 1 mm for the side-to-side
registration. Use the following SP modes to adjust if necessary.

ARDF DF3090

SP No. SP Name Adjustment Range

SP6-006-001 Side-to-Side Regist: Front ±3.0 mm
SP6-006-002 Side-to-Side Regist: Rear ±3.0 mm
SP6-006-003 Leading Edge Registration: Front ±5.0 mm
SP6-006-004 Leading Edge Registration: Rear ±5.0 mm
SP6-006-005 Buckle: Duplex Front ±5.0 mm
SP6-006-006 Buckle: Duplex Rear ±5.0 mm
SP6-006-007 Rear Edge Erase Front ±10.0 mm
SP6-006-008 Rear Edge Erase Rear ±10.0 mm

SPDF DF3100

SP No. SP Name Adjustment Range

SP6-006-001 Side-to-Side Regist: Front ±3.0 mm
SP6-006-002 Side-to-Side Regist: Rear ±3.0 mm
SP6-006-010 L-Edge Regist (1-Pass): Front ±5.0 mm
SP6-006-011 L-Edge Regist (1-Pass): Rear ±5.0 mm
SP6-006-012 1st Buckle (1-Pass) ±3.0 mm
SP6-006-013 2nd Buckle (1-Pass) -2 to +3 mm
SP6-006-014 T-Edge Erase (1-Pass): Front ±5.0 mm
SP6-006-015 T-Edge Erase (1-Pass): Rear ±5.0 mm

Sub Scan Magnification

• Make a temporary test chart as shown above using A3/DLT paper.

1. Place the temporary test chart on the ADF and make a copy from one of the feed stations.
2. Check the magnification, and adjust using the following SP modes if necessary.
SP No. SP Name Adjustment Range
SP6-017-001 DF Magnification Adj. ±5.0 %

SM 4-180 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
 Adjustment after Replacement

5. SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

Maintenance
System
5.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE

• Make sure that the data-in LED ( ) is not on before you go into the SP mode. This LED
indicates that the machine is receiving data. When the LED is on, wait for the copier to
process the data.

• The Service Program Mode is for use by service representatives only. If this mode is
used by anyone other than service representatives for any reason, data might be
deleted, or settings might be changed. If that happens, product quality can no longer be
guaranteed.

5.1.1 ENTERING SP MODE

If there are no Classic Application (copy/printer/scanner/fax) icons on the HOME screen, follow
the procedure below to display the number keyboard.
1. Press and hold the button [A] located at the left side of the operation panel and "Check
Status [B]" at the same time, until the number keyboard is displayed.

SM 5-1 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Adjustment after Replacement

2. Enter the key code for SP mode.

For details of the key code to enter the SP mode, ask your supervisor.

5.1.2 EXITING SP MODE

Press "Exit" on the LCD twice to return to the copy window.

5.1.3 TYPES OF SP MODES

• System SP: SP modes related to the engine functions
• Printer SP: SP modes related to the controller functions
• Scanner SP: SP modes related to the scanner functions
• Fax SP: SP modes related to the fax functions
Select one of the Service Program modes (System, Printer, Scanner, or Fax) from the touch
panel as shown in the diagram below after you access the SP mode. This section explains the
functions of the System/Printer/Scanner SP modes. Refer to the Fax service manual for the Fax
SP modes.

SM 5-2 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Adjustment after Replacement

SP Mode Button Summary

Here is a short summary of the touch-panel buttons.

Maintenance
System
1 Opens all SP groups and sublevels.
2 Closes all open groups and sublevels and restores the initial SP mode display.
3 Opens the copy window (copy mode) so you can make test copies. Press SP Mode
(highlighted) in the copy window to return to the SP mode screen,
4 Enter the SP code directly with the number keys if you know the SP number. Then press [#].
The required SP Mode number will be highlighted when pressing [#]. If not, just press the
required SP Mode number.)
5 Press two times to leave the SP mode and return to the copy window to resume normal
operation.
6 Press any Class 1 number to open a list of Class 2 SP modes.
7 Press to scroll the show to the previous or next group.
8 Press to scroll to the previous or next display in segments the size of the screen display
(page).
9 Press to scroll the show the previous or next line (line by line).
10 Press to move the highlight on the left to the previous or next selection in the list.

Switching Between SP Mode and Copy Mode for Test Printing

1. In the SP mode, select the test print. Then press "Copy Window".
2. Use the copy window (copier mode), to select the appropriate settings (paper size, etc.) for
the test print.
3. Press [Start] key to start the test print.
4. Press SP Mode (highlighted) to return to the SP mode screen and repeat from step 1.

SM 5-3 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Adjustment after Replacement

Selecting the Program Number

Program numbers have two or three levels.
1. Refer to the Service Tables to find the SP that you want to adjust before you begin.
2. Press the Group number on the left side SP Mode window that contains the SP that you
want to adjust.
3. Use the scrolling buttons in the center of the SP mode window to show the SP number that
you want to open. Then press that number to expand the list.
4. Use the center touch-panel buttons to scroll to the number and title of the item that you want
to set and press it. The small entry box on the right activates and shows the below default or
the current settings.

• Refer to the Service Tables for the range of allowed settings.

5. Do this procedure to enter a setting:
• Press to toggle between plus and minus and use the keypad to enter the appropriate
number. The number you enter writes over the previous setting.
• Press [#] to enter the setting. (The value is not registered if you enter a number that is out
of range.)
• Press "Yes" when you are prompted to complete the selection.
6. If you need to perform a test print, press Copy Window to open the copy window and select
the settings for the test print. Press [Start] key and then press SP Mode (highlighted) in the
copy window to return to the SP mode display.
7. Press Exit two times to return to the copy window when you are finished.

Service Mode Lock/Unlock

At locations where the machine contains sensitive data, the customer engineer cannot operate
the machine until the Administrator turns the service mode lock off. This function makes sure that
work on the machine is always done with the permission of the Administrator.
1. If you cannot go into the SP mode, ask the Administrator to log in with the User Tool and

SM 5-4 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Adjustment after Replacement

then set "Service Mode Lock" to OFF after he or she logs in:
User Tools > System Settings > Administrator Tools > Service Mode Lock > OFF

Maintenance
• This unlocks the machine and lets you get access to all the SP codes.

System
• The CE can service the machine and turn the machine power switch off and on. It is not
necessary to ask the Administrator to log in again each time the main power switch is
turned on.
2. Go into the SP mode and set SP5-169 to "1" if you must use the printer bit switches.
3. After machine servicing is completed:
• Change SP5-169 from "1" to "0".
• Turn the machine power switch off and on. Tell the administrator that you have completed
servicing the machine.
• The Administrator will then set the "Service Mode Lock" to ON.

5.1.4 REMARKS
The maximum number of characters which can show on the control panel screen is limited to 30
characters. For this reason, some of the SP modes shown on the screen need to be abbreviated.
The following are abbreviations used for the SP modes for which the full description is over 20
characters.
Item Description
2
Paper Weight Thin paper: 52-59 g/m , 13.9-15.7lb.
Plain Paper1: 60-74 g/m2, 16-19.7lb.
Plain Paper2: 75-81 g/m2, 20-21.6lb.
Middle Thick: 82-105 g/m2, 21.9-28lb.
Thick Paper1: 106-157 g/m2, 28.3-41.9lb.
Paper Type N: Normal paper
MTH: Middle thick paper
TH: Thick paper
Paper Feed Station P: Paper tray
B: By-pass table
Print Mode S: Simplex
D: Duplex

Others
The settings of each SP mode are explained in the right-hand column of the SP table in the
following way.
[Adjustable range / Default setting / Step] Alphanumeric

SM 5-5 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Adjustment after Replacement

• If "Alphanumeric" is written to the right of the bracket as shown above, the setting
of the SP mode shows on the screen using alphanumeric characters instead of only
numbers. However, the settings in the bracket in the SP mode table are explained
by using only the numbers.

The following symbols are used in the SP mode tables.

Notation What it means

ENG Engine SP
CTL Controller SP
FA Factory setting: Data may be adjusted from the default setting at the factory. Refer to
the factory setting sheets enclosed. You can find it in the front cover.
DFU Design/Factory Use only: Do not touch these SP modes in the field.
* An asterisk (*) to the left side of ENG/CTL column means that this mode is stored in the
NVRAM. If you do a RAM clear, this SP mode will be reset to the default value. "ENG"
and "CTL" show which NVRAM contains the data.
• *ENG: NVRAM on the BCU board
• *CTL: NVRAM on the controller board
SSP This denotes a "Special Service Program" mode setting.

SM 5-6 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Firmware Update (Remote Firmware Update)

5.2 FIRMWARE UPDATE (REMOTE FIRMWARE UPDATE)

Maintenance
In this machine, software can be updated by remote control using @Remote.

System
Types of firmware update files, supported update methods:

SFU SD RFU ARFU

Individual firmware N/A Available Available N/A
Package firmware Available Available Available Available

5.2.2 RFU PERFORMABLE CONDITION

RFU is performable for a device which meets the following conditions.
1. The customer consents to the use of RFU.
2. The devise is connected to a network via TCP/IP for @Remote.

SM 5-7 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Firmware Update (SD Card)

5.3 FIRMWARE UPDATE (SD CARD)

5.3.1 OVERVIEW
In order to update the firmware of this machine, it is necessary to download the latest version of
firmware on an SD card.
Insert the SD card into SD card slot 2 beside the rear left of the controller box.

Types of firmware update files, supported update methods:

SFU SD Card RFU ARFU

Individual firmware N/A Available Available N/A
Package firmware Available Available Available Available

5.3.2 FIRMWARE TYPES

Firmware type Firmware position
System/Copy Controller Board
Network Support Controller Board
Web Support Controller Board
Fax FCU
Scanner Controller Board
Web Uapl Controller Board
NetworkDocBox Controller Board
Animation Controller Board
Printer Controller Board
RPCS Controller Board
Font EXP Controller Board
IRIPS Font Controller Board
PCL Controller Board
PDF Controller Board
PS3 Controller Board
Java VM v12 std Controller Board
Data Erase Onb Controller Board
PowerSaving Sys Controller Board
Engine BCU
OpePanel Smart Operation Panel
ADF ADF
Finisher Finisher

• Even when not using a RPCS driver, the XPS driver requires RPCS firmware.

SM 5-8 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Firmware Update (SD Card)

What is Included in the Firmware Package

Modules included in the firmware package are indicated by ticks ( ).

Maintenance
System
Firmware not included in the package require updating by SD cards, etc.
Included Firmware
- aics
animation
Application Site
BluetoothService
CheetahSystem
- CSPF
- Data Erase Onb
- EcoInfoWidget
Engine
- External Auth
Fax
- FaxInfoWidget
GWFCU3.8-9(WW)

5.3.3 PROCEDURE

• An SD card is a precision device, so when you handle an SD card, respect the

following.
• When the power is switched ON, do not insert or remove a card.
• During installation, do not switch the power OFF.
• Since the card is manufactured to high precision, do not store it in a hot or humid
location, or in direct sunlight.
• Do not bend the card, scratch it, or give it a strong shock.
• Before downloading firmware to an SD card, check whether write-protection of the
SD card is canceled. If write-protection is enabled, an error code (error code 44,
etc.) will be displayed during download, and the download will fail.
• Before updating firmware, remove the network cable from this machine.
• If SC818 is generated during software update, switch the power OFF -> ON, and
complete the update which was interrupted.
• During software update, disconnect network cables and interface cables, remove
wireless boards, etc., (so that they are not accessed during the update).
• During software update, network cables, remove interface cables, wireless boards,
etc., (so that they are not accessed during update).

SM 5-9 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Firmware Update (SD Card)

Preparation
• If the SD card is blank, copy the entire "romdata" folder onto the SD card.
If the card already contains folders up to "D284", copy the necessary firmware files (e.g.
D284xxxx.fwu) into this folder.

• Do not put multiple machine firmware programs on the same SD card. Copy the
only model firmware you want.

Update procedure
1. First download the new firmware to the SD card.
2. Turn OFF the main power.
3. Remove the SD card slot cover [A].

4. Insert the SD card [A] straight in slot 2.

• Check whether the card is properly in the SD card slot. When a SD card is inserted, a click
is heard, and it is locked.
• To remove the card, release by pressing once in the set state.
5. Turn ON the main power.
6. Wait until the update screen starts (about 45 seconds).
When it appears, "Please Wait" is displayed.

SM 5-10 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Firmware Update (SD Card)

7. Check whether a program installation screen is displayed. (English display) When the SD
card contains two or more software modules, they are displayed as follows.

Maintenance
System
When two or more software names are displayed

1. Press the module selection button or [1] - [5] on the 10-key pad.
2. Choose the appropriate module. (If already selected, cancel the selection)

Operation of keys or buttons

Keys or buttons to press Contents

[Exit] or 10 key [0] Returns to normal screen.
[Start] Key Select all modules.
[Clear/Stop] key Cancel all selections.

Display contents

On the above screen, two programs, i.e., engine firmware and printer application are displayed.
(The screen may change depending on the firmware or application).
The display contents are as follows:
Display Contents
ROM: Display installed module number / version information.
NEW: Display module number / version information in the card.
The upper row corresponds to the module number, the lower row corresponds to the version
name.
8. Select the module with the module selection button or 10 key operation. The selected module
is highlighted, and [Verify] and [Update] are displayed.

• Depending on the combination of modules to update, it may not be possible to

select all of them simultaneously.

SM 5-11 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Firmware Update (SD Card)

Key or button operations

Keys or buttons to press Contents

[Update] or [#] key Update the ROM of the selected module.
[Verify] button or [./*] key Perform verification of the selected module.
9. Press the [Update] or [#] key, and perform software update.
10. During firmware update, a “firmware update/ verification progress screen" is displayed. When
firmware update is complete, a “firmware update end screen" is displayed.

• In the middle row, the name of the module currently being updated is displayed. (in
this case, the printer module is being updated)
• In the lower row, a progress bar is displayed in ten steps. (The more *, the more the
progress.)

Firmware update end screen

• This screen is displayed when all selected firmware modules are to be updated.
"printer" in the second row shows that the module updated last is the printer. (When
more than one are updated simultaneously, only what was updated last is
displayed.)
• When Verify has completed normally, the Update done display of the above screen
is "Verify done." If "Verify Error" is displayed, reinstall the software of the application
displayed in the lower row.
11. After switching power OFF, remove the SD card.
12. Turn the main power ON again, and check whether the machine is operating normally.
13. Return the SD card slot cover to the original position.

SM 5-12 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Firmware Update (SD Card)

• When the power supply is switched OFF during firmware update, update is interrupted,

Maintenance
and the power is switched ON again, normal operation cannot be guaranteed.

System
• To guarantee operation, an update error continues to be displayed until update is
successful.
• In this case, insert the SD card again, switch the power ON, and continue download of
firmware from the SD card automatically.
• The PS3 firmware program is included in the preinstalled PDF firmware. In the default
state, although the PS3 firmware program is hidden in the disabled state, the function is
enabled by installing the PS3 card. (The program installed in the PS3 card is a dongle
(key) for enabling the PS3 function).
• Due to the above specification, the self-diagnosis result report shows the ROM module
number / software version of the PDF firmware at the PS location.

5.3.4 ERROR SCREENS DURING UPDATING

EXX shows an error code.

For error codes, refer to the following table:
Error Code List
Code Contents Solutions
20 Physical address mapping cannot • Switch the main power supply off and
be performed. on to try again.
• Re-insert the SD card to reboot it.
• Replace the controller board if the
above solutions do not solve the
problem.
21 Insufficient memory for the • Switch the main power supply off and
download on to try again.
• Replace the controller board if the
updating cannot be done by switching
the power off and on.
22 Decompression of compressed • Switch the main power supply off and
data failed. on to try again.
• Replace the SD card used for the

SM 5-13 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Firmware Update (SD Card)

Code Contents Solutions

update.
• Replace the controller board if the
above solutions do not solve the
problem.
24 SD card access error • Re-insert the SD card.
• Switch the main power supply off and
on to try again.
• Replace the SD card used for the
update.
• Replace the controller board if the
above solutions do not solve the
problem.
32 The SD card used after download • Insert the SD card containing the
suspension is incorrect. same program as when the firmware
SD cards are different between the update was suspended, and then
one which was inserted before switch the main power supply off and
power interruption and the one on to try again.
which was inserted after power • There is a possibility that the SD card
interruption. is damaged if the update cannot be
done after the correct SD card has
been inserted. In this case, try again
with a different SD card.
• Replace the controller board if the
above solutions do not solve the
problem.
Replace all relevant boards if the update is
done for the BCU and FCU.
Replace the operation panel unit if the
update is done for the operation panel.
33 Card version error. • Install the correct ROM update data
The wrong card version is for each version in the SD card.
downloaded.
34 Destination error. • Install the correct ROM update data
A card for the wrong destination is for each destination (JPN/ EXP/ OEM)
inserted. in the SD card.
35 Model error. • Install the correct ROM update data
A card for the wrong model is for each model in the SD card.
inserted.

SM 5-14 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Firmware Update (SD Card)

Code Contents Solutions

36 Module error. • Install the program to be updated in

Maintenance
The program to be downloaded advance.

System
does not exist on the main unit. • There is a possibility that the SD card
The download destination specified containing the program to be updated
by the card does not match up to has not been mounted. Check to
the destination for the main unit’s confirm that the SD card has been
program. correctly mounted.
• The SD card is incorrect if the
program to be updated has been
correctly installed. In this case, insert
the correct SC card.
38 The version of the downloaded • Make sure that the program to be
program has not been authorized overwritten is the specified version.
for the update.
40 Engine download fails. • Switch the main power supply off and
on to try again.
• If the download fails again, replace the
controller board and the BCU.
41 Fax download fails. • Switch the main power supply off and
on to try again.
• If the download fails again, replace the
controller board and the FCU board.
42 Control panel / language download • Switch the main power supply off and
fails. on to try again.
• If the download fails again, replace the
controller board and the operation
panel unit.
43 Printing download fails. • Switch the main power supply off and
on to try again.
• The SD card media is damaged if the
update fails again. Replace the SD
card media.
44 The data to be overwritten cannot • Switch the main power supply off and
be accessed when controller- on to try again.
related programs are downloaded. • Install the correct ROM update data in
the SD card.
• Replace the controller board if the
data to be overwritten is contained on

SM 5-15 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Firmware Update (SD Card)

Code Contents Solutions

the controller board.
49 Firmware updates are currently • The setting of Update Firmware in the
prohibited. Administrator Tools has been set to
[Prohibit] by an administrator. Amend
the setting to [Do not Prohibit] and try
again.
50 The results of the electronic • Install the correct ROM update data in
authorization check have rejected the SD card.
the update data.
57 @Remote is not connected at the • Check the @Remote connection.
date/time reserved for receiving the
package firmware update from the
network.
58 Update cannot be done due to a • Check the @Remote connection.
reception route problem.
59 HDD is not mounted. • Check the HDD connection.
60 HDD could not be used during the • Try again.
package firmware update. • Replace the HDD if the download fails
again.
61 The module ID for the package • Prepare the correct package files.
firmware update is incorrect.
62 The configuration of the package • Prepare the correct package files.
firmware update files is incorrect.
63 Reception fails due to the power off • Update is to be done automatically
at the reserved date/time of the when the next reception time has
remote firmware update from the elapsed.
network.
64 Reception fails due to the power off • Reset the reservation date/time for the
at the reserved date/time of the remote update.
package firmware update from the
network.
65 Reception fails due to the status • Update is to be done automatically
error of the machine at the when the next reception time has
reserved date/time of the remote elapsed.
firmware update from the network.
66 Reception failed due to the status • Reset the reservation date/time for the
error of the machine at the remote update.
reserved date/time of the package

SM 5-16 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Firmware Update (SD Card)

Code Contents Solutions

firmware update from the network.

Maintenance
67 Acquisition of the latest version • Check that the network is connected

System
information from the Gateway fails correctly.
at the reserved date/time of the
remote firmware update from the
network.
68 Acquisition of the latest version • Check that the network is connected
information from the Gateway fails. correctly.
69 Download fails at the reserved • Check that the network is connected
date/time of the remote firmware correctly.
update from the network.
70 Package firmware download from • Check that the network is connected
the network fails. correctly.
71 Network communication error • Check that the network is connected
occurs at the reserved date/time of correctly.
the package firmware update from
the network.
72 The setting of @Remote is invalid • Set the setting of @Remote Service in
at the reserved date/time of the the Administrator Tools to [Do not
package firmware update from the Prohibit].
network.

• The PDF firmware installed as standard contains the program required to print PS3 data
by default. However, this PS3 program is normally disabled.
• The PS3 firmware is a dongle (key) which enables PS3 data printing functions. When the
PS3 firmware is installed, the PS3 program in the PDF firmware is enabled. Due to this
specification, the self-diagnosis result report shows the ROM part number/software
version of the PDF firmware contained in the PS3 program.

SM 5-17 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Firmware Update (Smart Firmware Update)

5.4 FIRMWARE UPDATE (SMART FIRMWARE UPDATE)

• An HDD unit must be installed on the machine to enable the SFU or the package
firmware update via SD card.

5.4.1 OVERVIEW
Each firmware module (such as System/Copy, Engine, etc) used to be updated individually.
However, an all-inclusive firmware package (package_ALL) is now available.
There are two ways to update using the firmware package.
• Package Firmware Update via a network: SFU (Smart Firmware Update)
• Package Firmware Update with an SD card

Package Firmware Update via a network: SFU (Smart Firmware Update)

• There are two methods for SFU.

• Immediate Update: To update the firmware when visiting
• Update at the next visit: To set the date and time for downloading. The firmware will be
automatically downloaded beforehand and updated at the following visit.
• “Update at the next visit” is recommended since firmware download may take some
minutes due to the network condition.

• SFU requires the connection to @Remote via a device which has the embedded
@Remote communicating function. When a machine is connected to @Remote via
an intermediate device (RC Gate), the SFU function is disabled.

Package Firmware Update via an SD Card

Package firmware update can also be performed using the conventional SD card method by
writing the package firmware directly to the SD card.

SM 5-18 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Firmware Update (Smart Firmware Update)

Types of firmware update files, supported update methods:

SFU SD Card RFU ARFU

Maintenance
System
Individual firmware N/A Available Available N/A
Package firmware Available Available Available Available

5.4.2 IMMEDIATE UPDATE

Enter the [Firmware Update] menu in the SP mode and update the package firmware.

• The [Firmware Update] button will appear even when a machine is connected to
@Remote with a device which does not have an embedded @Remote communicating
function.
• If an error code is displayed, refer to Error screens during updating (Error Screens
During Updating).
1. Enter the SP mode.
2. Touch [Firmware Update].

3. Touch [Update].

SM 5-19 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Firmware Update (Smart Firmware Update)

4. Touch [Execute Update].

5. Touch [YES].

6. The following display will be displayed.

SM 5-20 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Firmware Update (Smart Firmware Update)

• If the error code E66, which indicates that the download of the firmware has failed, is

Maintenance
displayed, go back to step 1.

System
• Update will be started automatically after the download is finished.
• When the machine is in the update mode, the automatic update is suspended if a print
job is started. After the print job is finished, touch [YES] on the display shown below to
restart updating.

7. [Update done] is displayed.

• The machine will automatically reboot itself.

• The figures at the lower right of the display indicate “Number of updated items/ All items
to be updated”.

SM 5-21 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Firmware Update (Smart Firmware Update)

5.4.3 UPDATE AT THE NEXT VISIT (RESERVE)

It is possible to set the machine to download the package firmware which is necessary for SFU in
advance, and then perform the actual installation at the next service visit. This saves waiting time
for the firmware to download at the service visit.

How to Set the Machine to Download Firmware Later (RESERVE)

Enter the [Firmware Update] menu in the SP mode and update the package firmware.

• The [Firmware Update] button will appear even when a machine is connected to
@Remote with a device which does not have an embedded @Remote communicating
function. If an error code is displayed, refer to Error Screens During Updating.
1. Enter the SP mode.
2. Touch [Firmware Update].

3. Touch [Reserve].

SM 5-22 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Firmware Update (Smart Firmware Update)

4. Touch [Reservation setting].

Maintenance
System
5. Enter the dates and times of the next visit and the start of receiving data.
• ”Next time to visit this customer”: The package firmware will be automatically downloaded
by this time/date.
• ”When to receive? (1-7)”: The download of the package firmware will begin this number
of days before the next visit.

Successful Download

In the two diagrams below, the firmware is set to be downloaded by the day before the next
scheduled visit. In the first diagram, the download is successful on the first try. In the second
diagram, the download fails three times and is successful on the fourth try.

SM 5-23 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Firmware Update (Smart Firmware Update)

• If the firmware download fails or cannot be completed due to the network

settings/condition, no power to the machine, or other reason, the machine will continue
retrying every six hours until the scheduled deadline (up to a maximum of four tries). For
example, if the download is set for the day before the next visit, the machine will attempt
the download at 24 hours before the visit, and then continue trying every six hours (max.
four tries total).
• The retry is only performed in cases when the firmware download has failed.
• If the machine is in Energy Saver mode when the download is scheduled to begin, the
download will be performed in the background and the machine/panel will stay in Energy
Saver mode.
• The download will continue uninterrupted even if the customer initiates a print job, copy
job, fax receiving or other operation while the download is in progress.
• The download will be terminated if the customer turns the power off while the download is
in progress.
• If the download cannot be completed successfully by the time of the next scheduled visit,
the machine will stop trying to download the firmware.

How to Check if the Firmware Downloaded with Reserve

1. Enter the SP mode.
2. Touch [Firmware Update].

3. Touch [Reserve].

SM 5-24 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Firmware Update (Smart Firmware Update)

4. Touch [Reserve and received package information].

Maintenance
System
5. Check the information displayed.
When the package firmware was downloaded successfully, the details of the download
result are displayed as the following picture shows.

• This information will only be displayed if the reserved firmware has already been
downloaded. If not, all the data items are indicated with “-”.

How to Install Firmware Downloaded with Reserve

1. Enter the SP mode.
2. Touch [Firmware Update].

SM 5-25 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Firmware Update (Smart Firmware Update)

3. Touch [Update].

4. Touch [Execute Update].

5. Check the version of the received package firmware, and then touch [YES].
• Update is started.

SM 5-26 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Firmware Update (Smart Firmware Update)

• If the version of the reserved package in the HDD is older than the latest version, the

Maintenance
messages shown in the following picture are displayed.

System
• If you wish to download the latest version, touch [Execute] beside the message
“Download and update the latest package.” Then update of the package firmware will be
started.
• If you wish to update using the firmware in the HDD (old version), touch [Execute] beside
the message “Update to the received package.”
6. [Update done] is displayed.
• The machine will automatically reboot itself.

• The figures at the lower right of the display indicate “Number of updated items/ All items
to be updated”.

SM 5-27 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Firmware Update (Smart Firmware Update)

5.4.4 UPDATE VIA SD CARD

Update with an SD card, which is the conventional method, is available if you write the package
firmware to the SD card.

• If an error code is displayed, refer to Error Screens During Updating.

1. Create a new folder in the SD card, and then name it “package”.
2. Copy the package firmware (xxxxxxxx.pkg) to this folder.

• If you copy the package firmware into the conventional “romdata” folder, the update will
not work.
• Only one version of the package firmware should be copied into the folder. If you copy
multiple versions of package firmware to the SD card, the machine will select only one
version of the firmware randomly.
3. Turn the power OFF.
4. Insert the SD card which contains the package into SD card slot 2 (for service).
5. Turn the power ON and touch [Update].

SM 5-28 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Firmware Update (Smart Firmware Update)

• When the SD card contains both a firmware package and one or more modules, the

Maintenance
following display may show up. Select [Package] and touch [OK] to move to step 5

System
above.

6. Update is started automatically after the package firmware download to the HDD has been
completed.
7. When update is completed, “Update done” is displayed.

• The figures at the lower right of the display indicate “Number of updated items/ All items
to be updated”.
8. Turn the main power switch OFF, and then pull out the SD card from SD card slot 2.
9. Turn the power ON.

SM 5-29 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Firmware Update (Auto Remote Firmware Update)

5.5 FIRMWARE UPDATE (AUTO REMOTE FIRMWARE

UPDATE)

• Auto remote firmware update (ARFU) requires connection to an external network. Be

sure to get permission from the customer before setting.
• Internet connection is needed.

5.5.1 OVERVIEW
By Auto Remote Firmware Update (ARFU), the firmware is updated by checking the global
server every 76 hours and downloading the latest package if it is newer than the one installed on
the machine.

Function Overview

Types of firmware update files, supported update methods:

SFU SD Card RFU ARFU

Individual firmware N/A Available Available N/A
Package firmware Available Available Available Available

What is Included in the Firmware Package

Modules included in the firmware package are indicated by ticks ( ).

Firmware not included in the package requires updating by SD cards, etc.
Included Firmware
- aics
animation
Application Site
BluetoothService
CheetahSystem
- CSPF
- Data Erase Onb
- EcoInfoWidget

SM 5-30 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Firmware Update (Auto Remote Firmware Update)

Included Firmware
Engine

Maintenance
- External Auth

System
Fax
- FaxInfoWidget
GWFCU3.8-9(WW)

5.5.2 DOWNLOADING AND UPDATING PROCESS

Downloads the latest package

The machine checks the server for the latest package version. If the version of the package on
the global server is later than that of the package installed on the machine, or if the machine has
not downloaded the firmware package, the machine downloads the latest package in the
background even when the customer is using the machine. If download fails, the machine will
retry downloading 76 hours later. The downloaded package can also be used with SFU (Smart
Firmware Update). A package downloaded with SFU (Smart Firmware Update) can be used with
ARFU (Auto Remote Firmware Update) and vice versa. When replacing the hard disk,
information concerning the current firmware package becomes lost from the hard disk. So, even
if the latest firmware is on the new hard disk, be sure to download the latest package data.
When the machine connects to the server where the package files are stored, the DNS settings
and the name solution by DNS are needed. The machine will still try to download the package
even if the name cannot be resolved, but will fail as the name is not resolved. The time and date
to send the next inquiry to the global server can be checked with SP5-886-116 (Farm Update
Setting: Auto Update Next Date). The auto remote firmware update is executed every 76 hours.

SM 5-31 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Firmware Update (Auto Remote Firmware Update)

Judgement of ARFU
Update judgement is done when the latest update package is successfully downloaded, or the
package has already been downloaded.

If the judgement timing is in the range of the update prohibited time or day set with SP or WIM,
the machine will retry the update after 76 hours.

If the machine is in use when the judgement process runs, the process is retried. Retry is done
up to three times every hour (can be changed with SP) and if the machine is in use for all three
retries, the machine will retry the update after 76 hours

SM 5-32 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Firmware Update (Auto Remote Firmware Update)

Maintenance
System
Situations judged as machine in use

No. Situations judged as machine in use

1 When the control panel is used within 30 seconds
2 During firmware update
3 While firmware update is disabled
4 While printing (copy, printer, fax, re-printing via network)
5 While scanning (copy, scanner, fax)
6 Retrieving image data via network
7 While initial setting (User Tools settings) or SP is being set
8 While fax is transferring data
9 During on hook / on handset
10 During the PC-FAX process (from PC to machine data transfer to the end of the job)
11 While shifting to/from the energy server mode
12 When not being able to run firmware update due to the modules that are running
e.g.) Waiting for DCS transfer (refer to appendix), accessing devices such as HDD/SD card,
etc.
13 While displaying a preview
14 While the document server function is in use
15 Connecting to TWAIN
16 During the interrupt copy process
17 While displaying the printer menu
18 While updating the display for the document server function via WIM or for stored fax
documents
19 While writing log information
20 While accessing the address book
21 During SC

SM 5-33 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Firmware Update (Auto Remote Firmware Update)

Update Process
When the machine has decided to run the auto firmware update, the following message is
displayed.

The popup will have "Cancel" and "OK" buttons and the update process will start either when the
"OK" button is selected or 30 seconds has passed.
When the "Cancel" button is selected, the machine will run the "Retry update" process.
When the device update and three retries in recovery mode both fail, it is determined as a device
defect and will display an SC for the defective device. If such an SC appears, replace the
indicated board. In the case of SC845, the SC cannot be reported to the call center.

Device and corresponding SC number.

Device name SC number

Engine board SC845-01
Controller board SC845-02
Operation panel (normal panel) SC845-03
Operation panel (smart panel) SC845-04
FCU SC845-05

SM 5-34 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Firmware Update (Auto Remote Firmware Update)

Canceling the update

It is possible to cancel the Auto Remote Firmware Update (ARFU) or update in recovery mode

Maintenance
System
from the operation panel.

But this is not possible while updating the operation panel itself. On the other hand, the update
for the operation panel will run at the final stage of the update. Thus canceling the update at that
stage has no real effect.
When the update is cancelled, the machine will reboot when updates for all modules of one of
the following devices is done.
1. Engine Board
2. FCU
3. Controller Board
4. Operation Panel
For example, when the update process is cancelled while updating the first module of the
operation panel, the machine will reboot when all modules in the operation panel have been
updated.
The firmware contents included in the package can be referred to in the release note in SERES
release of the package.
The next update will run 76 hours after the cancellation. The old (cancelled) package will be
discarded if the package downloaded 76 hours later is the latest.

SM 5-35 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Firmware Update (Auto Remote Firmware Update)

5.5.3 RELATED SP
SP Number Selection Overview
Def.
SP5-886-111 0: OFF Sets auto update ON/OFF by ARFU.
1: ON
SP5-886-112 0: OFF Will not run the update when update prohibited time setting is ON and
1: ON the current time is in the range of the time set.
SP5-886-113 0 to 23 • Start time < End time: Prohibited time is from the start
9 time to the end time on the same day.
SP5-886-114 0 to 23 • Start time > End time: Prohibited time is from the start
17 time to the end time on the next day.
• Start time == End time: Prohibited time setting is
disabled. (Update will not be prohibited.)
SP5-886-115 0: OFF Even when the update function is disabled, downloading the package
1: ON is allowed.
The downloaded package can be used with SFU.
SP5-886-116 Display Displays when the latest package check will run.
only
SP5-886-117 1 to 24 Set time for the next version check after retry.
1
SP5-886-120 0x00 Update will not run if the corresponding bit for each day below is set
to 1.
• prohibited:bit7
• Monday: bit 6
• Tuesday: bit 5
• Wednesday: bit 4
• Thursday: bit 3
• Friday: bit 2
• Saturday: bit 1
• Sunday: bit 0
This setting is not affected by the prohibited time setting.
e.g.) Prohibited on Mon., Fri., Sat., and Sun. : 0x47 (01000111)
SP7-520-011 Display History of date and time when update has started.
to 015 only The five most recent are recorded, the lowest number being most
recent.
If the last update failed, this is not recorded.
SP7-520-021 Display History of date and time when update has finished.
to 025 only The five most recent are recorded, the lowest number being most

SM 5-36 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Firmware Update (Auto Remote Firmware Update)

SP Number Selection Overview

Def.

Maintenance
recent.

System
The record is created when the update has successfully finished.
When the update is cancelled, no record is created.
SP7-520-031 Display History of the package number (including suffix) for which update has
to 035 only completed.
The five most recent are recorded, the lowest number being most
recent.
The record is created when the update has successfully finished.
When the update is cancelled, no record is created.
SP7-520-041 Display History of the package version for which update has completed.
to 045 only The five most recent are recorded, the lowest number being most
recent.
The record is created when the update has successfully finished.
When the update is cancelled, no record is created.
SP7-520-051 Display History of the result of the download and the update.
to 060 only Refer below for the numbers set.

Numbers set for the result history for SP7-520-051 to 060

No. Result Description

1 Downloading with SFU Cannot download or update as the machine is now
downloading the package for SFU.
2 HDD uninstalled Cannot download or update as the machine has no HDD.
3 Updating with SFU Cannot download or update as the machine is being updated
with SFU.
4 HDD error Cannot download or update as the HDD cannot be used.
5 Version information obtain Cannot download or update as the version information
error cannot be obtained.
6 Update download error Cannot download or update as the update download failed.
In non @Remote method, this shows that the download
failed because there was no proxy set.
7 Name resolution error Cannot download or update as the name cannot be resolved
upon downloading the update.
8 Auto update setting disabled The package has been downloaded but will not run the
update as SP5-886-111 (auto update setting) is disabled and
SP5-886-115 (auto download setting for SFU) is enabled.
9 Update prohibited time Cannot start to update as the auto update prohibited time
setting (SP5-886-112) is enabled and the time update

SM 5-37 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Firmware Update (Auto Remote Firmware Update)

No. Result Description

initiated was in the range of prohibited time (SP5-886-113 to
114).
Or the day which update was initiated was a day for which
update was prohibited (SP5-886-120).
10 Update postponed due to Cannot start update due to the following conditions when
machine in use update was initiated.
• The machine is in use by a user (the panel
was used within 30 seconds)
• Machine offline for other reasons
• Operation prohibited
• Displaying SP/UP menu
• Firmware update is running with another
method
• Configuration change prohibited
• Verifying the operation panel (smart panel)
11 Update cancelled by user Update was cancelled because a user selected "Cancel" in
the popup shown before starting the update.
12 Offline failed Cannot start to update as the machine is offline for other
reasons.
13 Update successful Update was started and successfully completed.
14 Update failed Update was started but failed.
15 Update cancelled by user Update was cancelled after the process initiated because a
after update initiated user selected "Cancel" during the update.
16 Update deemed completed Update was cancelled after the process was initiated
because a user selected “Cancel”. There is no need to
resume the update due to one of the following reasons:
• A newer update has been released and
received.
• When retrying ARFU, the update has already
been completed by another method.
17 Version information obtain Cannot download or update as the proxy verification failed
error (proxy verification with proxy settings when obtaining version information.
failure)
18 Version information obtain Cannot download or update as an error other than proxy
error (other than proxy verification with proxy settings occurred when obtaining
verification failure when version information.
proxy is set)
19 Update download error Cannot download or update as the proxy verification failed

SM 5-38 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Firmware Update (Auto Remote Firmware Update)

No. Result Description

(proxy verification failure) with proxy settings when downloading the package.

Maintenance
20 Update download error Cannot download or update as an error other than proxy

System
(other than proxy verification verification with proxy settings occurred when downloading
failure when proxy is set) the package.
22 Update by retry successful After power failure, unsuccessful update, or rebooting,
update by retry is executed successfully.
However, this does not apply to the case where the update
was cancelled after the process was initiated because a user
selected “Cancel”.
In this case, the update is “successful” if the retry is not
executed between the start and completion of the next
update (76 hours after the cancellation).

SM 5-39 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Updating JavaVM

5.6 UPDATING JAVAVM

5.6.1 CREATING AN SD CARD FOR UPDATING
1. Download the update modules from Firmware Download Center. As one of the model
modules, "Java VM v11 UpdateTool" is available for download. (The version differs
depending on the model.)
2. Unzip the downloaded file. Copy the whole "sdk" folder to the root of the SD card directly
below.

• When unzipping the downloaded file, two subfolders ("update" and "sdk") exist in the "sdk"
folder. Rather than just copying the subfolder "sdk", copy the whole folder "sdk".

Updating Procedure

• SD card can be inserted with the machine power off.

• During the updating process, do not turn off the power.
• If you turn off the power during the updating, the machine performance is not guaranteed.
(There is a possibility that an SC and boot failure occurs.)
• If you accidentally turn off the power during the updating, retry the updating procedure from
the beginning. (If the update fails again, you will need to replace the controller board.)
3. If the boot priority application is set to the ESA application, switch to the copy application.
([System Settings]-[General Features]-[Function Priority])
4. Take a note of the current Heap size. ([Extended Feature Settings] – [Administrator Tools] –
[Heap/Stack Size Settings])
5. Turn OFF the main power.
6. Insert the SD card you created into the service slot, and then turn ON the main power
switch.
7. After booting Java VM, update of the application is started. "Updating SDK/J" appears in the
banner message of the touch panel display. (Estimated time: about 2 minutes)
8. After completing the update and starting the Java VM, "Update SDK / J done SUCCESS"
will appear in the banner message of the touch panel display. After turning off the power,
remove the SD card from the slot.
When you fail to update, "Update SDK/J done FAIL" is displayed. You can confirm the cause
of the error message below.
9. Turn ON the main power.
10. Check the Heap size is set to the value that you noted in step 2. ([Extended Feature
Settings]-[Administrator Tools]-[Heap/Stack Size Settings]).
11. Return to the previous setting for the boot priority application.

SM 5-40 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Updating JavaVM

List of Error Messages

Update results are output as a text file on the SD card called "sdkjversionup.log" in the "\sdk

Maintenance
System
\update" folder.
Result File contents Description of the output
Success script file = /mnt/sd0/sdk/update/bootscript Boot script path
2012/08/22 17:57:47 start Boot scripts processing start time
2012/08/22 17:59:47 end SUCCESS End time boot script processing, the results
Failure script file = /mnt/sd0/sdk/update/bootscript Boot script path
2012/08/22 17:57:47 start Boot scripts processing start time
XXXX Error Error message (Possibly multiple)
2012/08/22 17:57:57 end FAIL End time boot script processing, the results

Error Message Cause Remedy

PIECEMARK Applied the wrong Use the correct updating tool for this
Error,machine=XXXXX updating tool (Using the model.
updating tool of a
different model)
pasePut() - error : The file of Inadequacy with the SD Re-create the SD card for updating.
the card for updating
copy origin is not found (Files are missing in the
Put Error! updating tool)
paseCopy() - error : The file Inadequacy SD card for Inadequacy SD card for updating
of the copy origin is not updating (Files in the updating tool are missing)
found. (Files in the updating
Copy Error! tool are missing)
[file name: XX] error,No Writing destination is full. Uninstall the unnecessary SDK
space (The NAND flash applications.
left on device memory on the controller If you can not uninstall it, implement
pasePut() - error : The board is full.) escalation, stating the "model name,
destination directory cannot application configuration, SMC sheet
be (SP5-990-006/024/025), and error file."
made.
pasePut() - error : fileCopy
Error.
Put Error!
[file name: XX] error,No Writing destination is full. Uninstall the unnecessary SDK
space (The NAND flash applications.
left on device memory on the controller If you can not uninstall it, implement
paseCopy() - error : The board is full.) escalation stating the "model name,

SM 5-41 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Updating JavaVM

Error Message Cause Remedy

destination directory cannot application configuration, SMC sheet
be (SP5-990-006/024/025), and error file."
made.
paseCopy() - error : fileCopy
Error.
Copy Error!
Put Error! *1 Error, not normally If you cannot uninstall it, implement
Copy Error! *1 expected to occur escalation stating the "model name,
Delete Error! application configuration, SMC sheet
[XXXXX] is an unsupported (SP5-990-006/024/025), and error file."
command. *1

Version Error Without the foregoing error message,

only "Put Error / Copy Error" will be
displayed

SM 5-42 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 NVRAM Data Upload/Download

5.7 NVRAM DATA UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD

Maintenance
5.7.1 UPLOADING CONTENT OF NVRAM TO AN SD CARD

System
Do the following procedure to upload SP code settings from NVRAM to an SD card.

• This data should always be uploaded to an SD card before the NVRAM is replaced.
• Make sure that the write protection of an SD card is unlocked
1. Do SP5-990-001 (SP Print Mode: All(Data List)) before you switch the machine off. You will
need a record of the NVRAM settings if the upload fails.
Make sure to shut down and reboot the machine once before printing the SMC. Otherwise,
the latest settings may not be collected when the SMC is printed.
2. Turn OFF the main power.
3. Remove the SD card slot cover [A].

4. Insert the SD card into SD slot 2 [A].

5. Turn on the main power switch.

6. Execute SP5-824-001 (NVRAM Data Upload) and then press the “Execute” key.
7. The following files are coped to an NVRAM folder on the SD card when the upload
procedure is finished.
The file is saved to the path and the following filename:
NVRAM\<serial number>.NV
Here is an example with Serial Number “K5000017114”:

SM 5-43 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
NVRAM Data Upload/Download

NVRAM\K5000017114.NV
8. In order to prevent an error during the download, be sure to mark the SD card that holds the
uploaded data with the number of the machine from which the data was uploaded.

• You can upload NVRAM data from more than one machine to the same SD card.

5.7.2 DOWNLOADING AN SD CARD TO NVRAM

Do the following procedure to download SP data from an SD card to the NVRAM in the machine.
• The NVRAM data download may fail if the SD card with the NVRAM data is damaged, or
if the connection between the controller and BCU is defective.
• Do the download procedure again if the download fails.
• Do the following procedure if the second attempt fails:
• Enter the NVRAM data manually using the SMC print you created before uploading the
NVRAM data.
1. Turn OFF the main power.
2. Remove the controller cover ( x1).
3. Insert the SD card with the NVRAM data into SD slot 2.
4. Switch the copier main power switch on.
5. Do SP5-825-001 (NVRAM Data Download) and press the “Execute” key.

• The serial number of the file on the SD card must match the serial number of the
machine for the NVRAM data to download successfully. The download fails if the serial
numbers do not match.
This procedure does not download the following data to the NVRAM:
• Total Count
• C/O, P/O Count

SM 5-44 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 UP/SP Data Import/Export

5.8 UP/SP DATA IMPORT/EXPORT

Maintenance
5.8.1 OVERVIEW

System
Import/export conditions
Import/export is possible between devices only if their model type, region of use, and the
following device configurations match.
• Input Tray
• Output Tray
• ARDF
• Whether or not equipped with a hard disk
• Whether or not equipped with a finisher and the type of finisher

5.8.2 UP DATA IMPORT/EXPORT

Data that can be imported and exported

• Copier / Document Server Features
• Printer Features
• Scanner Features
• Facsimile Features
• Browser Features
• Extended Feature Settings
• Program (Document Server)
• Program (Copier)
• Program (Scanner)
• Web Image Monitor Setting
• Web Service Settings
• System Settings

Data that cannot be imported or exported

• Some System Settings *1 *2
*1 The setting for the date, settings that require the device certificate, and settings that
need to be adjusted for each machine (for example, image adjustment settings) cannot
be imported or exported.
*2 Settings only for executing functions and settings only for viewing cannot be imported
or exported.
• Extended Feature Settings
• Address book
• Programs (fax function)
• Programs (printer function)

SM 5-45 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
UP/SP Data Import/Export

• User stamp in Copier / Document Server Features

• Settings that can be specified via telnet
• @Remote-related data
• Counters
• EFI printer unit settings
• Settings that can only be specified via Web Image Monitor or Web Service (for example,
Bonjour, SSDP setting)

Exporting Device Information

This can be exported / imported by an administrator with all privileges.
When exporting SP device information from the control panel, the data is saved on an SD card.
1. Insert an SD card into the media slot on the side of the control panel.
2. Log in from the control panel as an administrator with all privileges.
3. Press [User Tools] icon > [Machine Features] > [System Settings].
4. Press [Administrator Tools].
5. Press [Device Setting Information: Export (Memry Strge Devc)].

6. Set the export conditions.

• Specify whether to [Include] or [Exclude] the "Device Unique Information". "Device

Unique Information" includes the IP address, host name, fax number, etc.
• Specify an encryption key.

SM 5-46 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 UP/SP Data Import/Export

7. Press [Run Export].

8. Press [OK].

Maintenance
9. Press [Exit].

System
10. Log out.

• If data export fails, the details of the error can be viewed in the log.
• When device Information is periodically imported, it is necessary to create the device
setting information file with special software and store it on the web server.

Importing Device Information

This can be exported / imported by an administrator with all privileges.
Import device information saved on an SD card.
1. Insert an SD card into the media slot on the side of the control panel.
2. Log in from the control panel as an administrator with all privileges.
3. Press [User Tools] icon > [Machine Features] > [System Settings].
4. Press [Administrator Tools].
5. Press [Device Setting Information: Import (Memry Strge Devc)].
6. Configure the import conditions.

• Press [Select] of the "Device Setting Info. File" to select the file(s) to import.
• When inserting a file into a home screen, press [Select] for the Image for Home screen
and select the file. You cannot use this setting when using the Smart Operation Panel.
• Specify whether to [Include] or [Exclude] the "Device Unique Information". "Device
Unique Information" includes the IP address, host name, fax number, etc.
• Enter the encryption key that was specified when the file was exported.
7. Press [Run Import].
8. Press [OK].
9. Press [Exit].
The machine restarts.

• If data export fails, the details of the error can be viewed in the log.

SM 5-47 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
UP/SP Data Import/Export

5.8.3 SP DATA IMPORT/EXPORT

Data that can be imported and exported

• System SP
• Printer SP
• Fax SP
• Scanner SP

Exporting Device Information

When exporting SP device information from the control panel, the data is saved on an SD card.
1. Insert an SD card into the media slot on the side of the control panel.
2. Enter SP mode.
3. Press SP5-749-001 (Import/Export: Export)
4. Select “Target” SP settings (System/Printer/Fax/Scanner/Smart Operation Panel) to be
exported.
5. Select “Option” settings (Unique/Secret).
Item Specification Note
Unique Unique information of the machine is Unique information that can be updated
included in the exported file if you #1. Items that are to be used to identify the
select "Unique" setting. machine.
Example: Network Information/ Host name /
Information related to fax number /Mail
address assigned to the machine
#2. Items for specifying the options
equipped on the machine.
Example: Lot number for developer
Unique information that cannot be
updated
#1. Items that may cause a problem if
imported
Example: Serial number / Information
related to @Remote
#2. Items for managing the history of the
machine
Example: Time and date / Counter
information / Installation date
#3. Setting values for the Engine
Secret Secret information is exported if you Secret information
select "Secret" setting. #1. Data that cannot be exported without

SM 5-48 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 UP/SP Data Import/Export

Item Specification Note

being encrypted.

Maintenance
(Exported data is encrypted.)

System
Example: Password / Encryption key / PIN
code
#2. Confidential information for the customer
Example: User name / User ID / Department
code / Mail address / Phone number
#3. Personal information
Example: Document name / Image data
#4. Sensitive information for the customer
Example: MAC address / Network
parameters
* The IP address is exported when both 'Unique' and 'Secret' are selected.
6. Select “Crpt config” setting (Encryption).
Encryption Select whether to encrypt or If the encryption function is used, setting of
not when exporting. an encryption key is required by direct input.
If you push the "Encryption" • Type the arbitrary password
key, you can export secret using the soft keyboard
information. • Can enter up to 32 characters
7. Press [Execute].
8. Press [OK].

• If data export fails, the details of the error can be viewed in the log.

Importing Device Information

Import device information saved on an SD card.
1. Insert an SD card into the media slot on the side of the control panel.
2. Enter SP mode.
3. Press SP5-749-101(Import/Export: Import)
4. Select a unique setting.
5. Press [Encryption Key], if the encryption key was created when the file was exported.

SM 5-49 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
UP/SP Data Import/Export

6. Select an encryption setting.

Unique If you want to apply the unique information to the Refer to the above
target machine, select the "Unique" key. information.
Encryption If an encrypted file is selected as the import file, this
setting is required.
7. Press [Execute].
8. Press [OK].

• If data export fails, the details of the error can be viewed in the log.

5.8.4 POSSIBLE SOLUTIONS FOR IMPORT/EXPORT PROBLEMS

The access log file is created when export/import is executed. The file is stored in the same
location as the exported device setting information file.
If an error occurs, check the log's result code in the access log file first. Values other than 0
indicate that an error occurred.
The result code will appear in the circled area illustrated below.
- Example of a log file

If you cannot solve the problem or do not know how to solve it after checking the code, note
down the error log entry, then contact your supervisor.
Result Code Cause Solutions
2 (INVALID A file import was attempted between Import files exported from the same
REQUEST) different models or machines with model with the same device
different device configurations. configurations.
4 (INVALID Failed to write the device information Check whether the destination device is
OUTPUT DIR) to the destination device. operating normally.
7( MODULE An unexpected error occurred during Switch the power off and then back on,
ERROR) import or export. and then try the operation again. If the

SM 5-50 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 UP/SP Data Import/Export

Result Code Cause Solutions

error persists, contact your supervisor.

Maintenance
8 (DISK FULL) The available storage space on the Execute the operation again after making

System
external medium is insufficient. sure there is enough storage space.
9 (DEVICE Failed to write or read the log file. Check whether the path to the folder for
ERROR) storing the file or the folder in which the
file is stored is missing.
10 (LOG The hard disk is faulty. Contact your supervisor.
ERROR)
20 (PART Failed to import some settings. The reason for the failure is logged in
FAILED) "NgCode". Check the code.
Reason for the Error (Ng-Name)
2. INVALID VALUE
The specified value exceeds the
allowable range.
3. PERMISSION ERROR
The permission to edit the setting is
missing.
4. NOT EXIST
The setting does not exist in the system.
5. INTERLOCK ERROR
The setting cannot be changed because
of the system status or interlocking with
other specified settings.
6. OTHER ERROR
The setting cannot be changed for some
other reason.
21 (INVALID Failed to import the file because it is Check whether the file format is correct.
FILE) in the wrong format in the external The import file should be a CSV file.
medium.
22 (INVALID The encryption key is not valid. Use the correct encryption key.
KEY)

SM 5-51 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
UP/SP Data Import/Export

• When exporting device information from the control panel, the data can be saved only on
an SD card.
• The file format for exports is CSV.

SM 5-52 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Address Book Upload/Download

5.9 ADDRESS BOOK UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD

Maintenance
5.9.1 INFORMATION LIST

System
The following information is possible to be uploaded and downloaded.
Information
• Registration No. • Select Title
• User Code • Folder
• E-mail • Local Authentication
• Protection Code • Folder Authentication
• Fax Destination • Account ACL
• Fax Option • New Document Initial ACL
• Group Name • LDAP Authentication
• Key Display

5.9.2 DOWNLOAD
Backup address book information on SD card formatted with the specified software.
1. Prepare a formatted SD card.
2. Make sure that the write-protection on the SD card is off.
3. Turn OFF the main power.
4. Remove the SD slot cover [A].

5. Insert the SD card in the service slot [A].

SM 5-53 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Address Book Upload/Download

6. Enter the SP mode.

7. Do SP5-846-051 (Backup All Addr Book).
8. Exit the SP mode, and then turn OFF the main power switch.
9. Remove the SD card.
10. Attach the SD slot cover to the original position ( x1).

• If the capacity of SD card is not enough to store the local user information, an error
message is displayed.
• Carefully handle the SD card, which contains user information. Do not take it back to your
location.

5.9.3 UPLOAD
1. Turn OFF the main power.
2. After removing the SD slot cover of the controller unit, set the SD card in the service slot.
3. Turn ON the main power.
4. Enter the SP mode.
5. Do SP5-846-052 (Restore All Addr Book).
6. Exit the SP mode, and then turn OFF the main power switch.
7. Remove the SD card.
8. Attach the SD slot cover to the original position ( x1).
9. Turn ON the main power, and check that the address book has been restored.

• The counter in the user code information is initialized after uploading.

• The information of an administrator and supervisor cannot be downloaded nor uploaded.
• If there is no data of address book information in the SD card, an error message is
displayed.
• If a download file does not exist, or if erasure is complete, execution malfunction is
displayed.

SM 5-54 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Address Book Upload/Download

5.9.4 SPECIFICATION

Maintenance
The information which can be exported /imported is the following items.

System
• Entry information
• User code information
• E-mail information
• Protection code information
• Fax information
• Fax additional information
• Group information
• Title information
• Title position information
• Folder information
• SMTP attestation
• Local authorization
• Folder authorization information
• Account ACL information
• New document initial ACL information
• LDAP authorization information

SM 5-55 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Capturing the Device Logs

5.10 CAPTURING THE DEVICE LOGS

5.10.1 OVERVIEW
With this feature, you can save device logs that are stored in the machine (HDD or operation
panel) on an SD card. It allows the Customer Engineer to save and retrieve error information for
analysis.
The Capturing Log feature saves device logs for the following four.
• Controller device log
• Engine device log
• FCU device log
• Operation panel log

• In older models, a technician enabled the logging tool after a problem occurred. After
that, when the problem had been reproduced, the technician was able to retrieve the
device log.
• However, this new feature saves the device logs at the time that problems occur. Then
you can copy the logs to an SD card.
• You can retrieve the device logs using a SD card without a network.
• Analysis of the device log is effective for problems caused by the software. Analysis of
the device log is not valid for the selection of defective parts or problems caused by
hardware.
• Make sure to shut down and reboot the machine once before retrieving the Device Logs.
Otherwise, the latest settings may not be collected when the device logs are retrieved.

Types of device logs that can be saved

Type Storage Timing Destination

(maximum storage
capacity)
Controller device • Saved at all times HDD (4 GB) or SD
log including card connected to the
operation log service slot.
When the data gets
over 4.0 GB, the older
data is deleted.
Engine device • When an engine SC occurs HDD or SD card
log • When paper feeding/output stop because of connected to the
a jam service slot (Up to 300
• When the machine doors are opened during times)
normal operation

SM 5-56 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Capturing the Device Logs

Type Storage Timing Destination

(maximum storage

Maintenance
capacity)

System
FCU device log • When a specified amount of FCU device log HDD or SD card
is stored in the FCU. If fax application is connected to the
unavailable (e.g. not installed), the machine service slot
does not transfer the log.
Operation panel • When an error related to the operation panel Memory in the
log occurs. operation panel.

• Device logs are not saved in the following conditions:

• While erasing all memory
• While data encryption equipment is installed
• While changing the firmware configuration
• Forced power OFF (accidentally disconnecting the outlet)
• Engine device log while the machine is shutting down
• When the power supply to the HDD is off because of energy saving (engine OFF
mode/STR mode)
• When one of the following SCs occurs: SC672, SC816, SC819, SC878, SC899, SC859,
SC860, SC861, SC863, or SC864

• The following logs are not saved:

• Logs related to the energy saver mode (Engine-off, suspend-mode, or other cases)
Network communication log
Logs related to NRS
IP-FAX log
Access log for unauthorized users (guests)
• HTTP session timeout log
• Auto log-out log
• IC card related log
• Authorization for Fax

Security of the Operation Log

The following operation logs related to security are not saved.
• User ID
• Password
• IP address
• Telephone number
• Encryption key

SM 5-57 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Capturing the Device Logs

• Transition to SP mode
Also the following operation logs are not saved.
• Number keys (0 to 9) on the operation panel
• Soft keyboard on the touch panel display
• External keyboard

5.10.2 RETRIEVING THE DEVICE LOGS VIA OPERATION PANEL

• Retrieve device logs to identify the date of occurrence of the problems and to find details
of the problems
• e.g.: At around 8:00 am on March 10, an engine stall occurred. The operation panel does
not respond. Turn the main power supply off / on.
• Analysis of the device log is effective for problems caused by the software. Analysis of
the device log is not valid for the selection of defective parts or problems caused by
hardware.

Procedure for Retrieving the Device Log with SD Card

1. Insert the SD card into the slot on the side of the operation panel or the service slot.

• It is recommended to use the SD card (2 GBs* or 8 GBs**) provided as a service part.

This is because the log data can be acquired much faster than when using commercially
available SD cards.
• Format the SD card by using SD Formatter from Panasonic before copying the logs:
https://www.sdcard.org/downloads/formatter_3/ (free software)
• Insert the SD card into the machine's service slot instead of the SD slot on the side of the
operation panel.
* The part number of the SD card with 2 GBs that is registered as a service part is
"B6455030".
** The part number of the SD card with 8 GBs that is registered as a service part is
"B6455040".
2. Turn ON the main power.
3. Enter SP mode.
4. Specify the date that the problem occurred in SP5-858-101 (Start Date) by setting it to the
year-month-day calendar format.
• For example, if a problem occurred on February 1, 2015, the date should be set to
"20150201", as shown above.
• Be sure to confirm the date when the problem occurred before obtaining the logs.

SM 5-58 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Capturing the Device Logs

5. Specify the number of days to collect the logs in SP5-858-102 (Days of Tracing).
• "2" is set by default, which is the minimum needed for investigating the problem.

Maintenance
• A value of "1" to "180" can be set.

System
6. Execute SP5-858-111 (Acquire All Info & Logs) to copy all of the log types to an SD card.
It is possible to obtain the logs separately by the following SPs.
SP Collectable Information and/or Logs
SP5-858- All of the information and logs that are collected by executing the SPs from SP5-
111 858-121 to SP5-858-145, and SMC.
SP5-858- Configuration page
121
SP5-858- Font page
122
SP5-858- Print settings list
123
SP5-858- Error log
124
SP5-858- Fax information (whether the fax destinations are included or not depends on the
131 setting of SP5-858-103.)
SP5-858- Controller log, engine log, operation panel log, FCU, and SMC.
141
SP5-858- Controller log
142
SP5-858- Engine log
143
SP5-858- Operation panel log
144
SP5-858- FCU log
145
SP5-992- SMC
001

SM 5-59 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Capturing the Device Logs

7. After executing the SP for copying the information and/or logs, a confirmation screen will
appear. To proceed with obtaining the information and/or logs, tap "Execute"

• The approximate time it takes to transfer the debug log is as follows. Transfer time may
be affected by the type or format of the SD card.
Controller device log (GW device log): 2 - 20 minutes
Engine device log: 2 minutes
Operation panel device log: 2 - 20 minutes
If the estimated time is not calculated due to an error, an error code will be displayed.
Error Description
Code
-1 Other.
-2 No SD card is inserted in the service slot or in the SD slot on the side of the
operation panel. In this case, insert an SD card into either of the SD slots.
-3 The SD card is locked. In this case, unlock the SD card, as shown below.

[A]: Unlocked, [B]: Locked

SM 5-60 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Capturing the Device Logs

8. Wait for the information and/or logs to be copied to the SD card.

Maintenance
System
9. After a message stating that the process has completed appears on the operation panel,
confirm that the LED light next to the SD card slot is not flashing and then remove the SD
card.
10. Make sure that the SD card access LED is off, then remove the SD card.

• The process of obtaining logs fails in the following cases:

- When the size of the logs to obtain exceeds the amount of space available on the SD
card.
- When the SD card is removed while the logs are being copied to it.
- When the SD card is not formatted.
• If ‘failed’ appears on the touch panel display, turn the power off, and then recover from
step 1 again.

5.10.3 RETRIEVING THE DEVICE LOGS VIA WEB IMAGE

MONITOR
The device logs can be retrieved via the Web Image Monitor.
1. Access the following URL and logon as an administrator:
http://[IP address or host name]/web/entry/df/websys/direct/getSysInfo.cgi

SM 5-61 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Capturing the Device Logs

2. Specify the date that the problem occurred and the number of days to download the logs. If
the fax destinations need to be included in the fax information, set "On" as "Obtain Fax
Destination(s) Information". Then click "Download".

• "3" is set by default for "Number of days, including date fault occurred, to obtain".
However "2", which is the minimum needed for investigating the problems, is
recommended for reducing the downloading time.
• "Obtain Fax Destination(s) Information" is set to "Off" by default.
3. The confirmation screen will appear and the information and/or logs will start downloading.
To proceed to download the information and/or logs, wait for the open-or-save dialog to
appear.

• To cancel downloading, click "Cancel".

• To reconfigure some settings, click "Download again".
• Operation panel when downloading the logs:

SM 5-62 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Capturing the Device Logs

4. After a while, the open-or-save dialog will appear. Specify where to download and save the
file.

Maintenance
System
• The debug logs are saved with the following file names. These names are the same as
the files downloaded with SD card.

The device logs are saved with the following file names.

Controller /LogTrace/[the model number]/watching/[yyyymmdd_hhmmss]_[a unique

log value].gz
(mmesg)
Engine /LogTrace/[Machine Serial]/engine/[yyyymmdd_hhmmss].gz
device log
Operation /LogTrace/[the model number]/opepanel/[yyyymmdd_hhmmss].tar.gz
panel log
SMC /LogTrace/[the model number]/smc/[the model
number]_[5992XXX]_[yyyymmdd]_[hhmmss].csv
Configuratio /LogTrace/[the model number]/gps/ConfigrationPage/ConfigrationPage_
n page [yyyymmdd_hhmmss].csv
Font page • /LogTrace/[the model number]/gps/FontPage/FontPage_PCL_[the
page number]_[yyyymmdd_hhmmss].jpg
• /LogTrace/[the model number]/gps/FontPage/FontPage_PDF_[the
page number]_[yyyymmdd_hhmmss].jpg
• /LogTrace/[the model number]/gps/FontPage/FontPage_PS_[the page
number]_[yyyymmdd_hhmmss].jpg
Print • /LogTrace/[the model
settings list number]/gps/PrintSettingList/PrintSettingList_RPGL_[yyyymmdd_hhm
mss].txt
• /LogTrace/[the model
number]/gps/PrintSettingList/PrintSettingList_RTIFF_[yyyymmdd_hhm
mss].csv
Error log /LogTrace/[the model number]/gps/ErrorLog/[yyyymmdd_hhmmss].csv
Fax /LogTrace/[the model number]/faxreport/[yyyymmdd_hhmmss].csv
information
FCU debug /LogTrace/[Machine Serial]/fculog/[yyyymmdd_hhmmss].gz
log

SM 5-63 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
SMC List Card Save Function

5.11 SMC LIST CARD SAVE FUNCTION

5.11.1 OVERVIEW

SMC List Card Save

The SMC List Card Save (SP Text Mode) function is used to save the SMC list as CSV files to
the SD-card inserted into the operation panel SD-card slot.

• Make sure to shut down and reboot the machine once before exporting the SMC sheet
data. Otherwise, the latest settings may not be collected when the SMC is exported.

5.11.2 PROCEDURE
1. Turn OFF the main power.
2. Insert the SD card into the operation panel SD-card slot, and then turn OFF the main power.
3. Enter SP mode.
4. Select "System SP".

5. Select SP5-992-001 (SP Text Mode).

6. Select a detail SP number shown below to save data on the SD card.
SP5-992-xxx (SP Text Mode)
Detail No. SMC Categories to Save
001 All (Data List)
002 SP (Mode Data List)
003 User Program
004 Logging Data
005 Diagnostic Report
006 Non-Default
007 NIB Summary
008 Capture Log
021 Copier User Program
022 Scanner SP

SM 5-64 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 SMC List Card Save Function

Detail No. SMC Categories to Save

023 Scanner User Program

Maintenance
024 SDK/J Summary

System
025 SDK/J Application Info
026 Printer SP
027 Smart Operation Panel SP
028 Smart Operation Panel UP
7. Press [EXECUTE].

8. Press [EXECUTE] again to start. Press [CANCEL] to cancel the saving.

9. "It is executing it" is shown on the screen while executing.

10. Wait for 2 to 3 minutes until "Completed" is shown.

SM 5-65 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
SMC List Card Save Function

• The SMC list saving may take from 2 to 3 minutes to complete.

• Press [CANCEL] to abort executing.
11. Press [Exit] to exit from SP mode.

5.11.3 FILE NAMES OF THE SAVED SMC LISTS

The SMC list data saved on the SD-card will be named automatically. The file naming rules are
as follows.
Example:

A:
Machine serial number (fixed for each machine)
B:
SP number saved in this file.
First four digits (5992) in this part are fixed. The other one or two digits are the detail SP
number(s). In this case, it is one digit. Therefore, this file is of SP5-992-001 (All data list). See the
upper SP table for the correspondence between SP detail numbers and the contents.
C:
File creation date
Year/Month/Day ("Zero" will be omitted if each is one digit.)
D:
File creation time
Hour/Minute/Second ("Zero" will be omitted if each is one digit.)
E:
File Extension CSV (Comma Separated Value)
This part is fixed.

• A folder named by the machine serial number will be created on the SD card when this
function is executed.
• This function can save the SMC list data only to an SD card inserted into the operation
panel SD card slot.

SM 5-66 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 SMC List Card Save Function

5.11.4 ERROR MESSAGES

Maintenance
SMC List Card Save error message:

System
• Failed:
FACTOR: Read-only file system, No space left on device.
If an error occurs, pressing "Exit" will cause the device to discard the job and return to the ready
state.

SM 5-67 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Card Save Function

5.12 CARD SAVE FUNCTION

5.12.1 OVERVIEW

Card Save:
• The Card Save function is used to save print jobs received by the printer on an SD card
with no print output. Card Save mode is toggled using printer Bit Switch #1 bit number 4.
Card Save will remain enabled until the SD card becomes full, or until all file names have
been used.
• Captures are stored on the SD card in the folder /prt/cardsave. File names are assigned
sequentially from PRT00000.prn to PRT99999.prn. An additional file PRT.CTL will be
created. This file contains a list of all files created on the card by the card save function.
• Previously stored files on the SD card can be overwritten or left intact. Card Save SD has
"Add" and "New" menu items.
• Card Save (Add): Appends files to the SD Card. Does not overwrite existing files. If the
card becomes full or if all file names are used, an error will be displayed on the operation
panel. Subsequent jobs will not be stored.
• Card Save (New): Overwrites files in the card's /prt/cardsave directory.
Limitation:
• Card Save cannot be used with PJL Status Readback commands. PJL Status
Readbacks will not work. In addition they will cause the Card Save to fail.

5.12.2 PROCEDURE
1. Turn OFF the main power.
2. Insert the SD card into slot 2 (lower), then turn ON the main power.
3. Enter SP mode.
4. Select the "Printer SP".
5. Select SP-1001 "Bit Switch".

SM 5-68 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Card Save Function

6. Select "Bit Switch 1 Settings" and use the numeric keypad to turn bit 4 ON and then press
the "#" to register the change. The result should look like: 00010000. By doing this, Card

Maintenance
Save option will appear in the "List/Test Print" menu.

System
7. Press "Exit" to exit SP Mode.
8. Press the "User Tools" icon > "Machine Features".
9. Select "Printer Features".

10. Card Save (Add) and Card Save (New) should be displayed on the screen. Select Card
Save (Add) or Card Save (New).

SM 5-69 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Card Save Function

11. Press "OK" and then return to Home screen.

12. Press the "Printer (Classic)" icon.

13. "Hex Dump Mode" is be displayed in the top left of the display panel.

14. Send a job to the printer. The Communicating light should start blinking.
15. As soon as the printer receives the data, it will be stored on the SD card automatically with
no print output.
Nothing is displayed on the screen, indicating that a Card Save operation was successful.

SM 5-70 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Card Save Function

16. Press "Reset" to exit Card Save mode.

Maintenance
System
17. Change the Bit Switch Settings back to the default 00000000, then press the "#" in the
numeric keypad to register the changes.
18. Remove the SD card after the main power switch is turned OFF.

5.12.3 ERROR MESSAGES

Card Save error messages:
• Init error: A card save process (e.g. card detection, change to kernel mode) failed to
initialize.
• Card not found: Card cannot be detected in the slot.
• No memory: Insufficient working memory to process the job.
• Write error: Failed to write to the card.
• Other error: An unknown error occurred.
If an error occurs, pressing "OK" will cause the device to discard the job and return to the ready
state.

SM 5-71 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
TROUBLESHOOTING
 Card Save Function

6. TROUBLESHOOTING

Troubleshooting
6.1 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
6.1.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS
The ‘SC Table’ section shows the SC codes for controller errors and other errors. The latter are
put into four types. The type is determined by their reset procedures. The table shows the
classification of the SC codes.
Type Display How to reset SC call or SC alarm
in customer support
system
A The SC is immediately displayed on Reset the SC (set SP5- Occurrence & alarm
the operation panel when SC occurs. 810-1) and then cycle the count
The error involves the fusing unit. main power off and on.
The machine operation is disabled. Immediate alarm
The user cannot reset the error.
B When a function is selected, the SC Turn the operation switch Occurrence & alarm
is displayed on the operation panel. off and on. count
The machine cannot be used (down-
time mitigation). Power OFF and ON

Alarm count and

alarm only if
recurrence
C No display on the operation panel. Only the SC history is Occurrence
The machine operates as usual. updated.
Logging count &
alarm count
D The SC is displayed on the operation Turn the main power Occurrence & alarm
panel. switch off and on. count
The machine cannot be used
(machine-error SC). Power OFF and ON

Alarm count and

alarm only if
recurrence

SM 6-1 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Card Save Function

• When an ordinary SC (type D) is generated, an automatic reboot is performed. When an

event is reported by the customer support system, even in the event of an ordinary SC,
reboot is not performed. During automatic reboot, a confirmation screen is displayed after
the reboot.
• When automatic reboot occurs twice continuously, an SC is displayed without rebooting,
and logging count is performed. Also, when an SMC print is output, an * mark is added
alongside the SC number for clarity.
• Automatic reboot can be enabled or disabled with SP5-875-001 (SC automatic reboot
setting) (default value: OFF).
SP descriptions
• SP5-875-001 (SC automatic reboot: Reboot Setting)
Enables or disables the automatic reboot function when an SC error occurs.
0: The machine reboots automatically when the machine issues an SC error and logs
the SC error code. If the same SC occurs again, the machine does not reboot.
1: The machine does not reboot when an SC error occurs.
The reboot is not executed for the pattern A or C.

6.1.2 SC LOGGING
When an SC is generated, the "total count value when the SC is generated" and the "SC code"
are logged. However, if the total count value during the SC is the same as last time, logging is
not performed.
Logged data can be checked by outputting an administrative report (SMC print). The SC history
is logged up to the last 10 entries, and if there are more than 10 entries, data are progressively
deleted starting from the oldest.

6.1.3 SC AUTOMATIC REBOOT

When an ordinary SC (pattern D) is generated, automatically reboot is performed. Automatic
reboot or reboot by user operation can be set by SP5-875-001 (SC automatic reboot setting out)
(default value: 1 "OFF").
When a type D occurs, automatic reboot is done or the machine display asks the customer if it
can reboot. However, when the SC occurs twice in a short time, the machine sends a report to
the @Remote server without rebooting. This is because just rebooting may not be a good
solution if an SC occurs twice.
When an automatic reboot is performed, a confirmation screen is displayed after reboot. The
confirmation screen can be cancelled by pressing the [OK] key (display is not cancelled only
when the main power switch is switched OFF to ON).

SM 6-2 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Card Save Function

Screen display during reboot

Troubleshooting
• Status display on the current screen
• Post-processing ...... Post-processing during printing, etc.
• Automatic reboot .... After operation end
Post-processing

Until automatic reboot

• Reset key (Reboot key)

Key to perform reboot
# Cancel key is not displayed.
• Turn ON spanner LED (same as when an SC is generated).

Operation during SC reboot

• Timing of SC reboot
When @Remote is enabled, and when a NRS alarm*1 is not generated, the
corresponding SC is the object of an automatic reboot.
*1 NRS alarm: Issued when an ordinary SC (type D) is generated twice while the total
counter counts 10 times.
• Time to automatic reboot
Reboot is performed 30 seconds after an engine reboot is possible, after the end of
post-processing during printing, etc.
At that time, a reboot is performed even if the MFP is operating. The engine does not
start process control when a reboot is possible.
• Automatic reboot
See the flowchart below.

SM 6-3 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Card Save Function

SM 6-4 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Card Save Function

6.1.4 SC MANUAL REBOOT

Troubleshooting
When the automatic reboot is disabled in SP5-875-001 (SC automatic reboot setting), user
reboot the machine manually. See the flowchart below.

SM 6-5 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
SC Tables: SC1xx (Scanning)

6.2 SC TABLES: SC1XX (SCANNING)

6.2.1 SC101-01 TO SC195-00
SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution
SC101- D Lamp Error (Scanning)
01 The white level peak did not reach the prescribed threshold when the white
guide plate was scanned.
• Condensation in scanner unit
• Connector defective (disconnected, loose)
• Scanner Carriage defective
• IPU defective
• Harness defective
• White Reference Seal dirty or installed incorrectly (sheet-through
exposure glass)
• White Guide Plate, or White Roller dirty or installed incorrectly
(SPDF/ARDF)
• BCU defective
21. Perform a system reboot.
22. Turn the power off/on.
23. Reconnect the connectors.
24. Replace the following parts:
• Replace the scanner carriage
• Replace the IPU board
• Replace the harness
• Clean and replace the white reference seal (sheet-through
exposure glass)
• Clean and replace the white guide plate, or white roller
(SPDF/ARDF)
• Replace the BCU board

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC101- D LED Error (LED illumination adjustment)
02 LED error was detected.
• Condensation in scanner unit
• Connector defective (disconnected, loose)
• Scanner Carriage defective
• IPU defective
• Harness defective
• White Reference Seal dirty or installed incorrectly (sheet-through

SM 6-6 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 SC Tables: SC1xx (Scanning)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

exposure glass)

Troubleshooting
• BCU defective
25. Perform a system reboot.
26. Turn the power off/on.
27. Reconnect the connectors.
28. Replace the following parts:
• Replace the scanner carriage
• Replace the IPU board
• Replace the harness
• Clean and replace the white reference seal (sheet-through
exposure glass)
• Replace the BCU board

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC102- D LED Illumination Adjustment Error
00 The white level peak reached the prescribed threshold (ex. 571/10 bit) when the
white plate was scanned after a specified number of adjustments (ex. 10 times).
• Connector defective (disconnected, loose)
• Scanner Carriage defective
• IPU defective
• Harness defective
• BCU defective
29. Perform a system reboot.
30. Turn the power off/on.
31. Reconnect the connectors.
32. Replace the following parts:
• Replace the scanner carriage
• Replace the IPU board
• Replace the harness
• Clean and replace the white reference seal (sheet-through
exposure glass)
• Replace the BCU board

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC120- D Scanner Home Position Error 1
00 The scanner HP sensor does not go OFF.
Details:
Error detection timing

SM 6-7 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
SC Tables: SC1xx (Scanning)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

• During homing (when the machine is turned ON or when it
returns from energy save mode)
• During an automatic adjustment (when the machine is turned ON
or when it returns from energy save mode)
• During a scan from the ADF/ARDF or exposure glass.
• Scanner motor driver defective
• Scanner motor defective
• Scanner HP sensor defective
• Harness defective
• Timing belt, pulley, wire, or carriage not installed correctly
Check if the SC occurs by turning the power OFF then ON. If the SC occurs
again, do the following steps.
33. Replace the following parts:
• Replace the HP sensor
• Replace the scanner motor
• Replace the harness.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC121- D Scanner Home Position Error 2
00 The scanner HP sensor does not go ON.
Details:
Error detection timing
• During homing
• During an automatic adjustment
• During a scan from the ADF/ARDF or exposure glass.
• Scanner motor driver defective
• Scanner motor defective
• Scanner HP sensor defective
• Harness defective
• Timing belt, pulley, wire, or carriage not installed correctly
Check if the SC occurs by turning the power OFF then ON. If the SC occurs
again, do the following steps.
34. Replace the following parts:
• Replace the scanner HP sensor
• Replace the scanner motor
• Replace the harness.
• Reattach or replace the timing belt, pulleys, wires, or carriage
unit.

SM 6-8 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 SC Tables: SC1xx (Scanning)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Troubleshooting
SC141- D Black Level Detection Error
00 The black level cannot be adjusted within the target during auto gain control.
• Scanner Carriage defective
• IPU defective
• Harness defective
• BCU defective
Check if the SC occurs by turning the power OFF then ON. If the SC occurs
again, do the following steps. Check if the SC reoccurs by cycling the power
after each step.
35. Reconnect the following connectors:
• Scanner Carriage - IPU harness (FFC)
• IPU- BCU harness
36. Replace the Scanner Carriage.
37. Replace the IPU.
38. Replace the following harnesses:
• Scanner Carriage - IPU harness (FFC)
• IPU - BCU harness
39. Replace the BCU.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC142- D White Level Detection Error
00 The white level cannot be adjusted to the second target level within the target
during auto gain control.
• Scanner Carriage defective
• IPU defective
• Harness defective
• Connector defective (disconnected, loose)
• Condensation in scanner unit
• White plate dirty or installed incorrectly
Check if the SC occurs by turning the power OFF then ON. If the SC occurs
again, do the following steps. Check if the SC reoccurs by cycling the power
after each step.
40. Reconnect the following connectors:
• Scanner Carriage - IPU harness (FFC)
• SBU - LEDB (scanner lamp unit) harness (FFC)
• IPU- BCU harness
41. Check the white reference seal that attached back of sheet-

SM 6-9 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
SC Tables: SC1xx (Scanning)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

through exposure glass. Replace the sheet-through exposure
glass, if dirty or damaged.
42. Replace the scanner carriage.
43. Replace the IPU.
44. Replace the following harnesses:
• Scanner Carriage - IPU harness (FFC)
• IPU - BCU harness
45. Replace the BCU.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC144- D SBU Communication Error
00 • The machine cannot detect that the Scanner Carriage is
connected.
• The machine cannot communicate with the Scanner Carriage.
• The communication data is incorrect.
• Scanner Carriage defective
• IPU defective
• BCU defective
• Harness defective
Check if the SC occurs by turning the power OFF then ON. If the SC occurs
again, do the following steps. Check if the SC reoccurs by cycling the power
after each step.
46. Reconnect the following connectors:
• Scanner Carriage - IPU harness (FFC)
• IPU- BCU harness
47. Replace the Scanner Carriage.
48. Replace the IPU.
49. Replace the BCU.
50. Replace the following harnesses:
• Scanner Carriage - IPU harness (FFC)
• IPU - BCU harness

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC151- D Black Level Error: Side 2
00 The black level scanned is not specified range.
• CIS for SPDF defective
• SPDF main board defective
• Harness defective

SM 6-10 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 SC Tables: SC1xx (Scanning)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Check if the SC occurs by turning the power OFF then ON. If the SC occurs

Troubleshooting
again, do the following steps. Check if the SC reoccurs by cycling the power
after each step.
51. Reconnect the SPDF main board - CIS connectors if they are
disconnected, or loose.
52. Replace the CIS for SPDF
53. Replace the following harnesses:
• SPDF main board - CIS
• IPU -SPDF main board
54. Replace the SPDF main board.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC152- D White Level Error: Side 2
00 The shading data peak value read out from the CIS is not specified range from
the target value.
• CIS defective
• White roller defective
• SPDF main board defective
• Harness defective
Check if the SC occurs by turning the power OFF then ON. If the SC occurs
again, do the following steps. Check if the SC reoccurs by cycling the power
after each step.
55. Reconnect the SPDF main board - CIS connectors if they are
disconnected, or loose.
56. Replace the CIS for SPDF
57. Replace the following harnesses:
• SPDF main board - CIS
• IPU -SPDF main board
58. Replace the SPDF main board.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC154- D Scanner Communication Error: Side 2
00 The value read out from the ASIC and FROM area inside the CIS is different
from the expected value.
• CIS defective
• "FROM" area error
• SPDF main board defective
• Connector defective (loose, broken)

SM 6-11 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
SC Tables: SC1xx (Scanning)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Check if the SC occurs by turning the power OFF then ON. If the SC occurs
again, do the following steps. Check if the SC reoccurs by cycling the power
after each step.
59. Reconnect the SPDF main board - CIS connectors if they are
disconnected, or loose.
60. Replace the CIS for SPDF
61. Replace the following harnesses:
• SPDF main board - CIS
• IPU -SPDF main board
62. Replace the SPDF main board.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC161- D IPU error (Lsync Error: Side 2)
02 The machine detects the error from the results of self-diagnostic test before
scanning the side 2.
• Harness defective between CIS and IPU (disconnected, loose)
• CIS defective
• IPU defective (ASIC: Macaron error)
63. Perform an automatic reboot.
64. Turn the power off/on.
65. Replace the following parts:
• Replace the harness.
• Replace the CIS.
• Replace the IPU (BCU) board.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC161- D IPU error (DRAM initialization failure)
20 An error occurred during performed every time the machine is turned on, or
returns to full operation from energy save mode.
• IPU defective (Macaron/ DRAM device connection error)
• DRAM device defective
66. Perform an automatic reboot.
67. Turn the power off/on.
68. Replace the following parts:
• Reconnect the connector.
• Replace the harness.
• Replace the CIS.
• Replace the IPU (BCU) board.

SM 6-12 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 SC Tables: SC1xx (Scanning)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Troubleshooting
SC195- D Machine Serial Number Error
00 Comparison of the product identification code in the machine serial number (11
digits).
The product identification code in the machine serial number (11 digits) does
not match.
Re-enter the machine serial number.

SM 6-13 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
SC Tables: SC2xx (Exposure)

6.3 SC TABLES: SC2XX (EXPOSURE)

6.3.1 SC202-00 TO SC272-10
SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution
SC202- D Polygon Motor: ON Timeout Error
00 After the polygon motor turned on, or within 10 sec. after the rpm’s changed,
the motor did not enter READY status.
• The interface harness to the polygon motor driver damaged or
not connected correctly.
• Polygon motor or polygon motor driver defective
• Polygon motor drive pulse cannot be output correctly. (Polygon
controller)
• XSCRDY signal observation failing (Polygon controller)
• Turn the power off/on.
• Replace the laser unit.
• Replace the harness.
• Replace the IPU board.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC203- D Polygon Motor: OFF Timeout Error
00 The XSCRDY signal (polygon ready) never becomes inactive (H) within 3 sec.
after the polygon motor went OFF.
• The interface harness to the polygon motor driver damaged or
not connected correctly.
• Polygon motor or polygon motor driver defective
• Polygon motor drive pulse cannot be output correctly. (Polygon
controller)
• XSCRDY signal observation failing (Polygon controller)
• Turn the power off/on.
• Replace the laser unit.
• Replace the harness.
• Replace the IPU board.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC204- D Polygon Motor: XSCRDY Signal Error
00 During polygon motor rotation, the XSCRDY signal was inactive (H) for longer
than one rotation of the polygon.
• The interface harness to the polygon motor driver damaged or
not connected correctly.

SM 6-14 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 SC Tables: SC2xx (Exposure)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

•

Troubleshooting
Polygon motor or polygon motor driver defective
• Turn the power off/on.
• Replace the laser unit.
• Replace the harness.
• Replace the IPU board.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC220- D Laser Synchronization Detection Error: Leading Edge
00 The laser synchronizing detection signal for the start position of the LD was not
output for 200msec. after LDB unit turned on with the polygon motor rotating
normally.
• The interface harness to the synchronization detection unit
damaged or not connected correctly.
• Synchronization detection board defective
• Beam does not enter photo detector.
• Abnormality around GAVD
• IDB (LED driver) defective
• LDB defective
• IPU defective
• Turn the power off/on.
• Replace the laser unit.
• Replace the harness.
• Replace the IPU board.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC230- D FGATE ON Error
00 The FGATE signal did not turn ON within the given time period after the writing
process started.
• GAVD defective
• Image processing ASIC defective
• BCU, controller board not connected correctly or defective
• Harness between BCU and LDB defective
• Turn the power off/on.
• Replace the harness between IPU and laser unit.
• Replace the IPU board.
• Replace the controller board.

SM 6-15 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
SC Tables: SC2xx (Exposure)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC231- D FGATE OFF Error
00 The FGATE signal did not turn OFF within the given time period after the
writing process ended.
• GAVD defective
• Image processing ASIC defective
• IPU, controller board not connected correctly or defective
• Harness between IPU and LDB defective
• Turn the power off/on.
• Replace the harness between IPU and laser unit.
• Replace the IPU board.
• Replace the controller board.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC240- D LD Error
00 • The LD error status of LD driver is asserted after the LD is
initialized.
• The LD driver's error signal is detected during LD initialization.
• LD degradation (LD broken, shift of output characteristics etc.)
• The interface harness damaged or not connected correctly.
• LD driver defective
• Cycle the main power off/on.
• Replace the laser unit.
• Replace the harness.
• Replace the IPU board.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC272- D LD Driver Communication Error
01 If the value is not same when the machine reads and writes the same
registration at the machine start-up.
If the communication parity retries three consecutive times, the SC is
generated.
• CPU defective
• IPU defective
• BCU defective
• Harness defective
• Cycle the main power off/on.
• Replace the laser unit.
• Replace the harness.

SM 6-16 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 SC Tables: SC2xx (Exposure)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

•

Troubleshooting
Replace the IPU board.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC272- D LD Driver Communication Error: Others
10 If the “Door Open” status does not change to “Door Close” after closing the
door.
• CPU defective
• IPU defective
• BCU defective
• Harness defective
• Cycle the main power off/on.
• Replace the laser unit.
• Replace the harness.
• Replace the IPU board.

SM 6-17 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
SC Tables: SC3xx (Image Processing 1: Charge, Development)

6.4 SC TABLES: SC3XX (IMAGE PROCESSING 1:

CHARGE, DEVELOPMENT)
6.4.1 SC302-00 TO SC396-01
SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution
SC302- D High Voltage Power Source: Charge: Output Error
00 The machine detects the error detection signal “L (unexpected)” 10 times for
200 msec consecutively when monitoring the error signal every 20 msec during
outputting the PWM signal.
Hardware error
• Input / Output connector is disconnected.
• Input / Output harness is short-circuited.
• Surface/air clearance insufficient (arc discharge)
• BCU error (signal error)
• HVPS defective
Load error
• Grounding fault of charging output, short-circuit with other outputs
• Surface/air clearance insufficient in charging output path
(including distance from other outputs)
• Unexpected deterioration of drum and over current due to
pinholes gap error between the drum and charge roller (PCU
error).
• Over current due to drum surface condensation
• PCU is disconnected.
• Cycle the main power off/on.
• Replace the HVPS.
• Replace the harness of the HVPS.
• Replace the harness of the PCU.
• Replace the PCU.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC324- D Development Motor: Bk: Lock
01 Lock signals are observed at 2 sec intervals during motor ON, and a High level
is detected at least 20 times.
• Motor defective
• Connector disconnected
• Harness broken
• BCU defective
• Unit torque increased

SM 6-18 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 SC Tables: SC3xx (Image Processing 1: Charge, Development)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

•

Troubleshooting
Replace the development motor.
• Reconnect the connector.
• Replace the harness.
• Replace the BCU.
• Replace the development unit.
• Replace the driven unit.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC360- D TD Sensor Adjustment Error
01 • When Mu count exceeds the judgment threshold of no developer
status.
• When Mu count does not satisfy the following target ranges for 3
times in a row.
• Upper threshold
• Lower threshold
• TD sensor defective
• Loose connection
• Harness broken
• Developer toner density differs from initial developer
• Replace the TD sensor harness.
• Reconnect the TD sensor connector.
• Replace the TD sensor.
• Replace the development unit.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC361- D TD Sensor Output Error: Upper Limit (K)
01 The following condition continuously exceeds the upper limit threshold value
(SP3-211-003).
• TD sensor output: Vt (SP3-210-001) > output upper limit error
threshold (SP3-211-002)
• TD sensor connector dropout (connection fault)
• Check if the TD sensor connector is connected.
• Check the harness of the TD sensor (disconnection, etc.).
• Replace the TD sensor.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC362- D TD Sensor Output Error: Lower limit (K)
01 TD sensor output: Vt (SP3-210-001) < output lower limit error threshold (SP3-

SM 6-19 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
SC Tables: SC3xx (Image Processing 1: Charge, Development)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

211-004) is continuously below the lower limit occurrence threshold value (SP3-
211-005)
TD sensor connector missing/dropout
• Check if the TD sensor connector is connected.
• Check the harness of the TD sensor (disconnection, etc.).
• Replace the TD sensor.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC370- C ID Sensor Calibration Error
00 Regular reflection optical output voltage of the ID sensor: Vsg_reg cannot be
adjusted to within target range.
Upper limit (SP3-320-013: initial value 4.5V)
Lower limit (SP3-320-014: initial value 3.5V)
• ID sensor connector missing/connection fault
• ID sensor detection window dirt
• ID sensor malfunction
• Check the ID sensor connector. If it is not connected, reconnect it.
• Check for dirt on the ID sensor detection window. If the detection
window is dirty, clean by the predetermined method (do not wipe
it dry).
• If neither of the above have occurred, replace the ID sensor.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC391- D High Voltage Power Source: Development : Output Error
00 When the machine detects the error detection signal “L (abnormal)” 10 times for
200 ms consecutively by monitoring the error detection signal every 20ms during
output of the PWM signal used as an error detection target.
Hardware error
• Input / Output connector is disconnected.
• Surface/air clearance insufficient (arc discharge)
• Input / Output harness is short-circuited.
• BCU error (signal error)
• HVPS defective
Load error
• Grounding fault of charging output, short-circuit with other outputs
• Surface/air clearance insufficient in charging output path
(including distance from other outputs)
• Unexpected deterioration of drum, and over current due to

SM 6-20 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 SC Tables: SC3xx (Image Processing 1: Charge, Development)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

pinholes

Troubleshooting
• Over current due to drum surface condensation
• PCDU is not set properly.
• Cycle the main power off/on
• Replace the harness between the BCU and HVPS.
• Reconnect or replace the harness between the BCU and HVPS.
• Reinstall or replace the development unit.
• Check if the contact and separation movement of the transfer unit
works correctly.
• Replace the HVPS.
• Replace the BCU.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC396- D Drum Motor Lock
01 Lock signals are observed at 2 sec intervals during motor ON, and a High level
is detected at least 20 times.
• Motor defective
• Connector disconnected
• Harness broken
• BCU defective
• PCU torque increased
• Reconnect the connector.
• Replace the harness of the drum/waste toner motor.
• Replace the drum/waste toner motor.
• Replace the PCDU.
• Replace the BCU.

SM 6-21 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
SC Tables: SC4xx (Image Processing 2: Around the Drum)

6.5 SC TABLES: SC4XX (IMAGE PROCESSING 2:

AROUND THE DRUM)
6.5.1 SC440-00 TO SC498-00
SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution
SC440- D High Voltage Power Source: Paper Transfer : Output Error
00 The machine detects the error detection signal “L (unexpected)” 10 times for
200 msec consecutively when monitoring the error signal every 20 msec during
outputting the PWM signal.
Hardware error
• Input / Output connector is disconnected.
• Input / Output harness is short-circuited.
• BCU error (signal error)
• HVPS defective
Load error
• Transfer roller's impedance increases.
• Transfer unit is not set properly.
• Cycle the main power off/on.
• Reconnect or replace the harness of the HVPS (power pack).
• Reconnect or replace the harness between the BCU and the
HVPS.
• Reset or replace the transfer unit.
• Check if the contact and separation movement of the transfer unit
works correctly.
• Replace the HVPS.
• Replace the BCU.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC452- D Transfer Roller Contact Motor Error
00 When the machine does not detect the high/low signal for a specified time after
the transfer roller contact motor has been turned on.
• Motor overload, Motor defective
• Connector disconnected
• Harness broken
• Interlock mechanism is defective.
• Cycle the main power off/on
• Check if the contact and separation movement of the transfer unit
works correctly.
• Replace the transfer roller contact motor.

SM 6-22 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 SC Tables: SC4xx (Image Processing 2: Around the Drum)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Troubleshooting
SC460- D High Voltage Power Source: Separation : Output Error
00 The machine detects the error detection signal “L (unexpected)” 10 times for
200 msec consecutively when monitoring the error signal every 20 msec during
outputting the PWM signal.
Hardware error
• Input / Output connector is disconnected.
• Input / Output harness is short-circuited.
• Transfer unit is not set properly.
• BCU error (signal error)
• HVPS defective
Load error
• Grounding fault of separation power output, short-circuit with
other outputs
• Surface/air clearance insufficient in separation power output path
(including distance from other outputs)
• Cycle the main power off/on
• Reconnect or replacethe harness of the HVPS (power pack).
• Reconnect or replace the harness between the BCU to the HVPS.
• Reset or replace the transfer unit.
• Check if the contact and separation movement of the transfer unit
works correctly.
• Replace the HVPS.
• Replace the BCU.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC497- C Machine Temperature Detection Thermistor Error
00 The output of the temperature sensor is out of the following range.
• 0.56 V or less (90°C or more)
• 3.0 V or more (-18°C or less)
• Imaging temperature sensor is not set (connector disconnected
or broken)
• Imaging temperature sensor defective
• Reconnect the connector.
• Replace the connector.
• Replace the imaging temperature sensor (thermistor).

SM 6-23 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
SC Tables: SC4xx (Image Processing 2: Around the Drum)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC498- C Temperature and Humidity Sensor Error (Main machine)
00 The output of the temperature/humidity sensor is out of the following range.
• 0.76 V or less/ 2.90 V or more (temperature sensor)
• 2.4 V or more (humidity sensor)
• Temperature/Humidity sensor is not set (connector disconnected
or broken)
• Temperature/Humidity sensor defective
• Reconnect the connector.
• Replace the connector.
• Replace the temperature/humidity sensor.

SM 6-24 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 SC Tables: SC5xx (Paper Feed and Fusing)

6.6 SC TABLES: SC5XX (PAPER FEED AND FUSING)

Troubleshooting
6.6.1 SC501-01 TO SC589-02
SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution
SC501- B 1st Tray Lift Error
01 The machine detects the error of the 1st paper feed tray lift motor 3 times
consecutively when the 1st paper feed tray is lifted.
(The message of resetting the tray is displayed when the machine detects the
error consecutively 2 times or less.)
• 1st paper feed tray limit sensor connector disconnection,
malfunction or sensor's dirt.
• 1st paper feed tray lift motor connector disconnection,
malfunction
• Foreign matter, such as paper scrap, is caught between the
paper feed tray and the paper feed tray lift motor.
• Paper set fault
• Reset the paper.
• Remove the foreign matter (1st paper feed tray limit sensor, 1st
paper feed tray lift motor).
• Check the harness.
• Reset or replace the connector.
• Replace the 1st paper feed unit and 1st paper feed tray.
• Replace the BCU.
SC501- B 1st Tray Lowering Error
02 The machine detects the error of the 1st paper feed tray lift motor 5 times
consecutively when the 1st paper feed tray is lowered.
(The message of resetting the tray is displayed when the machine detects the
error consecutively 4 times or less.)
• 1st paper feed tray limit sensor connector disconnection,
malfunction or sensor's dirt.
• 1st paper feed tray lift motor connector disconnection,
malfunction
• Foreign matter, such as paper scrap, is caught between the
paper feed tray and the paper feed tray lift motor.
• Paper set fault
• Paper overload
• Reset the paper.
• Remove the foreign matter (1st paper feed tray limit sensor, 1st
paper feed tray lift motor).

SM 6-25 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
SC Tables: SC5xx (Paper Feed and Fusing)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

• Check the harness.
• Reset or replace the connector.
• Replace the 1st paper feed unit, 1st paper feed tray.
• Replace the BCU.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC502- B 2nd Tray Lift Error
01 The machine detects the error of the 2nd paper feed tray lift motor 3 times
consecutively when the 2nd paper feed tray is lifted.
(The message of resetting the tray is displayed when the machine detects the
error consecutively 2 times or less.)
• 2nd paper feed tray limit sensor connector disconnection,
malfunction, dirt
• 2nd paper feed tray lift motor connector disconnection,
malfunction
• Foreign matter, such as paper scrap, is caught between the
paper feed tray and the paper feed tray lift motor
• Paper set fault
• Reset the paper.
• Remove the foreign matter (2nd paper feed tray limit sensor, 2nd
paper feed tray lift motor).
• Check the harness.
• Reset or replace the connector.
• Replace the 2nd paper feed unit, 2nd paper feed tray.
• Replace the BCU.
SC502- B 2nd Tray Lowering Error
02 The machine detects the error of the 2nd paper feed tray lift motor 5 times
consecutively when the 2nd paper feed tray is lowered.
(The message of resetting the tray is displayed when the machine detects the
error consecutively 4 times or less.)
• The 2nd paper feed tray limit sensor connector disconnection,
malfunction, and dirt
• 2nd paper feed tray lift motor connector disconnection,
malfunction
• Foreign matter, such as paper scrap, is caught between the
paper feed tray and the paper feed tray lift motor
• Paper set fault
• Paper overload

SM 6-26 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 SC Tables: SC5xx (Paper Feed and Fusing)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

•

Troubleshooting
Reset the paper.
• Remove the foreign matter (2nd paper feed tray limit sensor, 2nd
paper feed tray lift motor).
• Check the harness.
• Reset or replace the connector.
• Replace the 2nd paper feed unit, 2nd paper feed tray.
• Replace the BCU.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC503- B 3rd Tray Lift Error (D694)
01 The machine detects the lift error of the tray lift motor for the PFU (D694) 3 times
consecutively when the 3rd paper feed tray is lifted at the machine’s
initialization.
(The message of resetting the tray is displayed when the machine detects the
error consecutively 2 times or less.)
• Tray lift motor connector disconnected
• Limit sensor harness disconnected or broken
• Control board defective
• Foreign matter, such as paper scrap, is caught between the paper
feed tray and the tray lift motor
• Paper set fault
• Reset the paper.
• Remove the foreign matter.
• Replace the tray lift motor.
• Reset the connector.
• Replace the harness.
• Replace the limit sensor.
• Replace the control board for the optional PFU (D694).
• Replace the tray.
• Replace the paper feed roller.
• Replace the pick-up arm.
SC503- B 3rd Tray Lowering Error (D694)
02 The machine detects the lowering error of the tray lift motor for the PFU (D694)
5 times consecutively when the 3rd tray is lowered at the machine’s initialization.
(The message of resetting the tray is displayed when the machine detects the
error consecutively 4 times or less.)
• Tray lift motor connector disconnected
• Limit sensor harness disconnected or broken

SM 6-27 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
SC Tables: SC5xx (Paper Feed and Fusing)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

• Controller board defective
• Paper overload
• Foreign matter, such as paper scrap, is caught between the paper
feed tray and the tray lift motor
• Paper set fault
• Reset the paper.
• Remove the foreign matter.
• Replace the tray lift motor.
• Reset the connector.
• Replace the harness.
• Replace the limit sensor.
• Replace the controller board for the optional PFU (D694).
• Replace the tray.
• Replace the paper feed roller.
• Replace the pick-up arm.
SC503- B 3rd Tray Lift Error (D787)
11 The machine detects the lift error of the tray lift motor for the PFU (D787) 3 times
consecutively when the 3rd tray is lifted at the machine’s initialization.
(The message of resetting the tray is displayed when the machine detects the
error consecutively 2 times or less.)
• Tray lift motor connector disconnected
• Upper limit sensor harness disconnected or broken
• Controller board defective
• Foreign matter, such as paper scrap, is caught between the paper
feed tray and the tray lift motor
• Paper set fault
• Reset the paper.
• Remove the foreign matter.
• Replace the tray lift motor.
• Reset the connector.
• Replace the harness.
• Replace the upper limit sensor.
• Replace the controller board for the optional PFU (D787).
• Replace the tray.
• Replace the paper feed roller.
• Replace the pick-up arm.
SC503- B 3rd Tray Lowering Error (D787)
12 The machine detects the lowering error of the tray lift motor for the PFU (D787)

SM 6-28 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 SC Tables: SC5xx (Paper Feed and Fusing)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

3 times consecutively when the 3rd tray is lowered at the machine’s initialization.

Troubleshooting
(The message of resetting the tray is displayed when the machine detects the
error 2 times consecutively.)
• Tray lift motor connector disconnected
• Upper limit sensor harness disconnected or broken
• Controller board defective
• Paper overload
• Foreign matter, such as paper scrap, is caught between the paper
feed tray and the tray lift motor
• Paper set fault
• Reset the paper.
• Remove the foreign matter.
• Replace the tray lift motor.
• Reset the connector.
• Replace the harness.
• Replace the upper limit sensor.
• Replace the controller board for the optional PFU (D787).
• Replace the tray.
• Replace the paper feed roller.
• Replace the pick-up arm.
SC503- B 3rd Tray Lift Error (LCIT: D695)
31 • The machine detects the lift error of the tray lift motor for the LCIT
(D695) 3 times consecutively when the 3rd tray is lowered at the
machine’s initialization.
• The machine detects the lift error of the tray lift motor for the LCIT
(D695) 3 times consecutively when the 3rd tray is lifted at the
machine’s initialization.
(The message of resetting the tray is displayed when the machine detects the
error consecutively 2 times or less.)
• Tray lift motor connector disconnected
• Limit sensor harness disconnected or broken
• Controller board defective
• Foreign matter, such as paper scrap, is caught between the right
tray and the tray lift motor.
• Paper set fault
• Timing belt damage or dropout
• Timing pulley damage or dropout
• Base plate damaged or plate horizontality fault

SM 6-29 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
SC Tables: SC5xx (Paper Feed and Fusing)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

• Paper feed roller missing
• Pickup arm damage
• Foreign matter, such as paper scrap, is caught inside the right
tray.
• Reset the paper.
• Remove the foreign matter.
• Replace the tray lift motor.
• Reset the connector.
• Replace the harness.
• Replace the limit sensor.
• Replace the controller board for the optional LCIT (D695).
• Replace the tray.
• Replace the paper feed roller.
• Replace the pick-up arm.
• Replace the timing belt.
• Replace the timing pulley.
• Replace the base plate.
SC503- B 3rd Tray Lowering Error (LCIT: D695)
32 • The machine detects the lift error of the tray lift motor for the LCIT
(D695) 3 times consecutively when the 3rd tray is lowered at the
machine’s initialization.
• The machine detects the lift error of the tray lift motor for the LCIT
(D695) 3 times consecutively when the 3rd tray is lifted at the
machine’s initialization.
(The message of resetting the tray is displayed when the machine detects the
error consecutively 2 times or less.)
• Tray lift motor connector disconnected
• Lower limit sensor harness disconnected or broken
• Controller board defective
• Foreign matter, such as paper scrap, is caught between the right
tray and the tray lift motor.
• Paper set fault
• Timing belt damage or dropout
• Timing pulley damage or dropout
• Base plate damaged or plate horizontality fault
• Foreign matter, such as paper scrap, is caught inside the right
tray.
• Reset the paper.

SM 6-30 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 SC Tables: SC5xx (Paper Feed and Fusing)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

•

Troubleshooting
Remove the foreign matter.
• Replace the tray lift motor.
• Reset the connector.
• Replace the harness.
• Replace the lower limit sensor.
• Replace the controller board for the LCIT (D695).
• Replace the tray.
• Replace the timing belt.
• Replace the timing pulley.
• Replace the base plate.
SC503- B 3rd Tray Paper Overload Error (LCIT: D695)
33 Both of the upper limit sensor and lower limit sensor detects the base plate 3
times consecutively at the machine’s initialization.
(The message of resetting the tray is displayed when the both sensors detect
the error consecutively 2 times or less.)
• Paper overload
• Paper set fault
• Upper limit sensor harness disconnected or broken
• Lower limit sensor harness disconnected or broken
• Control board defective
• Foreign matter, such as paper scrap, is caught inside the right
tray.
• Reset the paper.
• Remove the foreign matter.
• Reset the connector.
• Replace the harness.
• Replace the upper limit sensor.
• Replace the lower limit sensor.
• Replace the controller board for the LCIT (D695).
SC503- B 3rd Tray Paper Position Error (LCIT: D695)
34 During left/right tray set, or when power is switched ON, or when transfer is
complete, "open" is detected 5 times consecutively by end fence open/close
detection.
(The message of resetting the tray is displayed when the both sensors detect
the error consecutively 4 times or less.)
• Paper set fault (paper is offset from position for pushing end
fence)
• Foreign matter entry (foreign matter is caught in the position for

SM 6-31 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
SC Tables: SC5xx (Paper Feed and Fusing)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

pushing end fence)
• Paper transport cover open/close switch error, connector missing
• Harness broken
• Bank controller board defective
• Reset the paper.
• Remove the foreign matter.
• Reset the connector.
• Replace the harness.
• Replace the sensor.
• Replace the controller board for the optional paper feed tray.
SC503- B 3rd Tray Transfer Error (LCIT: D695)
35 • Transfer end detection error
At right tray paper end (right tray lower limit detection, left tray paper
detection), left tray paper is transferred to the right tray, but the left tray
paper sensor is detected although a predetermined time elapsed
(transfer paper missing is not detected), for 3 times consecutively.
(The message of resetting the tray is displayed when the both sensors
detect the error consecutively 2 times or less.)
• Paper transfer motor error/connector missing
• Left tray paper sensor error/connector missing
• Harness broken
• Bank control board defective
• Paper overload
• Foreign matter, such as paper scrap, is caught between the left
tray and the paper tray transfer motor
• Paper set fault
• Timing belt damage/dropout
• Timing pulley damage/dropout
• Transfer fence defective
• Foreign matter, such as paper scrap, is caught inside the left tray
• Replace the motor.
• Reset the connector.
• Replace the harness.
• Replace the sensor.
• Replace the controller board for the optional paper feed tray.
• Reset the paper.
• Remove the foreign matter.
• Replace the tray.

SM 6-32 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 SC Tables: SC5xx (Paper Feed and Fusing)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

•

Troubleshooting
Replace the timing belt.
• Replace the timing pulley.
• Replace the end fence of the left tray.
SC503- B 3rd Tray Transfer HP Error (LCIT: D695)
36 • HP detection error (during transfer start)
At right tray paper end (right tray lower limit detection, left tray paper
detection), left tray paper is transferred to the right tray, but the transfer
fence home position sensor is detected although a predetermined time
elapsed (home position sensor missing cannot be detected).
• HP detection error (during transfer fence HP return)
During transfer fence HP not detected (stop after paper transfer, during
power supply ON, during left tray set), the transfer fence is moved to
HP, but the transfer fence home position sensor is not detected
although a predetermined time elapsed.
*If an error occurs 3 times consecutively: LCIT transmits "3rd paper
feed tray transfer HP error" to the main machine.
(The message of resetting the tray is displayed when the both sensors detect
the error consecutively 2 times or less.)
• Paper transfer motor error/connector missing
• Transfer fence home position sensor error/connector missing
• Harness broken
• Bank controller board defective
• Paper overload
• Foreign matter, such as paper scrap, is caught between the left
tray and the paper transport motor
• Paper set fault
• Timing belt damage/dropout
• Timing pulley damage/dropout
• Transfer fence defective
• Foreign matter, such as paper scrap, is caught inside the left tray
• Replace the motor.
• Reset the connector.
• Replace the harness.
• Replace the sensor.
• Replace the controller board for the optional paper feed tray.
• Reset the paper.
• Remove the foreign matter.
• Replace the tray.

SM 6-33 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
SC Tables: SC5xx (Paper Feed and Fusing)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

• Replace the timing belt.
• Replace the timing pulley.
• Replace the end fence of the left tray.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC504- B 4th Tray Lift Error (D787)
21 • Lift motor ascent error detection
During tray initialization (upper limit not detected/lower limit detection),
the tray base plate is raised to check the tray base plate position, but
the upper limit sensor is not detected although a predetermined time
elapsed, for 3 times consecutively.
(The message of resetting the tray is displayed when the both sensors
detect the error consecutively 2 times or less.)
• Tray lift motor error/connector missing
• Upper limit sensor error/connector missing
• Harness broken
• Bank controller board defective
• Foreign matter, such as paper scrap, is caught between the paper
feed tray and the tray lift motor
• Paper set fault
• Reset the paper.
• Remove the foreign matter.
• Replace the motor.
• Reset the connector.
• Replace the harness.
• Replace the sensor.
• Replace the controller board for the optional paper feed tray.
• Replace the tray.
• Replace the paper feed roller.
• Replace the pick-up arm.
SC504- B 4th Tray Lowering Error (D787)
22 • Lift motor descent error detection
During tray initialization, the tray base plate is lowered to check the
tray base plate position, but the upper limit sensor is detected although
a predetermined time elapsed, for 3 times consecutively.
(The message of resetting the tray is displayed when the both sensors
detect the error consecutively 2 times or less.)
• Tray lift motor error/connector missing

SM 6-34 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 SC Tables: SC5xx (Paper Feed and Fusing)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

•

Troubleshooting
Upper limit sensor error/connector missing
• Harness broken
• Bank controller board defective
• Paper overload
• Foreign matter, such as paper scrap, is caught between the paper
feed tray and the tray lift motor
• Paper set fault
• Reset the paper.
• Remove the foreign matter.
• Replace the motor.
• Reset the connector.
• Replace the harness.
• Replace the sensor.
• Replace the controller board for the optional paper feed tray.
• Replace the tray.
• Replace the paper feed roller.
• Replace the pick-up arm.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC505- B Side LCIT Limit Detection Error (D696)
41 • Upper limit detection error (during descent)
During tray initialization (upper limit detection/lower limit not detected),
the tray base plate is lowered to check the tray base plate position, but
the upper limit sensor is detected although a predetermined time
elapsed.
• Upper limit detection error (during ascent)
During tray initialization (upper limit not detected /lower limit detection),
the tray base plate is raised to check the tray base plate position, but
the upper limit sensor is not detected although a predetermined time
elapsed.
*If an error occurs for 3 times consecutively: the side LCIT transmits a
"5th paper feed tray upper limit detection error" to the main machine.
(The message of resetting the tray is displayed when the both sensors detect
the error consecutively 2 times or less.)
• Tray lift motor error/connector missing
• Upper limit sensor error/connector missing
• Harness broken
• Bank controller board defective

SM 6-35 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
SC Tables: SC5xx (Paper Feed and Fusing)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

• Paper set fault
• Timing belt damage/dropout
• Timing pulley damage/dropout
• Base plate damage/horizontality fault
• Paper feed roller missing item
• Pickup arm defective
• Foreign matter, such as paper scrap, is caught inside the tray
• Reset the paper.
• Remove the foreign matter.
• Replace the motor.
• Reset the connector.
• Replace the harness.
• Replace the sensor.
• Replace the controller board for the optional side LCT.
• Replace the tray.
• Replace the paper feed roller.
• Replace the pick-up arm.
• Replace the timing belt.
• Replace the timing pulley.
• Replace the base plate.
SC505- B Side LCIT Lower Limit Detection Error (D696)
42 • Lower limit detection error (during descent)
During tray initialization (upper limit not detected /lower limit eject
detection), the tray base plate is lowered to check the tray base plate
position, but the lower limit sensor is not detected although a
predetermined time elapsed.
Alternatively, at paper end, the tray base plate is lowered, but the lower
limit sensor is not detected although a predetermined time elapsed.
• Lower limit detection error (during ascent)
During tray initialization (upper limit not detected/lower limit detection),
the tray base plate is raised to check the tray base plate position, but
the lower limit sensor is detected although a predetermined time
elapsed.
*If an error occurs for 3 times consecutively: the side LCIT transmits a
"5th paper feed tray upper limit detection error" to the main machine.
(The message of resetting the tray is displayed when the both sensors detect
the error consecutively 2 times or less.)
• Tray lift motor error/connector missing

SM 6-36 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 SC Tables: SC5xx (Paper Feed and Fusing)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

•

Troubleshooting
Lower limit sensor error/connector missing
• Harness broken
• Bank control board defective
• Paper set fault
• Timing belt damage/dropout
• Timing pulley damage/dropout
• Base plate damage/horizontality fault
• Foreign matter, such as paper scrap, is caught inside the tray
• Reset the paper.
• Remove the foreign matter.
• Replace the motor.
• Reset the connector.
• Replace the harness.
• Replace the sensor.
• Replace the controller board for the optional side LCT.
• Replace the tray.
• Replace the timing belt.
• Replace the timing pulley.
• Replace the base plate.
SC505- B Side LCIT Paper Overload Error (D696)
43 During tray initialization, both the upper limit and lower limit are detected for 3
times consecutively.
(The message of resetting the tray is displayed when the both sensors detect
the error consecutively 2 times or less.)
• Paper overload
• Paper set fault
• Upper Limit sensor error/connector missing
• Lower limit sensor error/connector missing
• Harness broken
• Bank control board defective
• Foreign matter, such as paper scrap, is caught inside the tray
• Reset the paper.
• Remove the foreign matter.
• Reset the connector.
• Replace the harness.
• Replace the sensor.
• Replace the controller board for the optional side LCT.

SM 6-37 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
SC Tables: SC5xx (Paper Feed and Fusing)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC508- B Bypass Tray Size Detection Error
00 The paper size detected on the bypass tray is different from any of the pattern
of automatic size detection.
• Bypass Length Sensor or Bypass Width Sensor malfunction
• Bypass Length Sensor or Bypass Width Sensor harness
disconnected
• Replace the Bypass Length Sensor, or Bypass Width Sensor.
• Replace the harness for Bypass Length Sensor, or Bypass Width
Sensor.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC520- C Registration Motor: Lock
01
SC520- C Paper feed Motor: Lock
02
SC520- C Vertical Transport Motor: Lock
03
During motor ON, after checking the motor error notification registers (err_velo
and err_posi) for 500msec, the error state of either register was detected at
least 5 times.
• Motor defective
• Connector disconnected
• Harness broken
• BCU defective
• Encoder defective
• Replace the motor.
• Reset the connector.
• Replace the harness.
• Replace the BCU.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC521- C Duplex Entrance Motor: Lock
01
SC521- C Duplex By-pass Motor: Lock
02
During motor ON, after checking the motor error notification registers (err_velo
and err_posi) for 500msec, the error state of either register was detected at
least 5 times.

SM 6-38 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 SC Tables: SC5xx (Paper Feed and Fusing)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

•

Troubleshooting
Motor defective
• Connector disconnected
• Harness broken
• BCU defective
• Encoder defective
• Replace the motor.
• Reset the connector.
• Replace the harness.
• Replace the BCU.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC522- C Paper Exit Motor: Lock
00 During motor ON, after checking the motor error notification registers (err_velo
and err_posi) for 500msec, the error state of either register was detected at
least 5 times.
• Motor defective
• Connector disconnected
• Harness broken
• BCU defective
• Encoder defective
• Replace the motor.
• Reset the connector.
• Replace the harness.
• Replace the BCU.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC530-00 D Fusing Fan Lock
In the motor ON state, the value of the lock sensor is checked every 100msec.
If a lock signal is not obtained for 50 times consecutively.
• Motor defective
• Connector disconnected
• Harness broken
• BCU defective
• Replace the fusing fan.
• Reset the connector.
• Replace the harness.
• Replace the BCU.

SM 6-39 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
SC Tables: SC5xx (Paper Feed and Fusing)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC531-00 D Development Bearing Cooling Fan Lock
In the motor ON state, the value of the lock sensor is checked every 100msec.
If a lock signal is not obtained for 50 times consecutively.
• Motor defective
• Connector disconnected
• Harness broken
• BCU defective
• Replace the development bearing cooling fan
• Reset the connector.
• Replace the harness.
• Replace the BCU.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC533-00 D PSU Cooling Fan Lock
SC533-01 D Development Bearing Cooling Fan
In the motor ON state, the value of the lock sensor is checked every 100msec.
If a lock signal is not obtained for 50 times consecutively.
• Motor defective
• Connector disconnected
• Harness broken
• BCU defective
• Replace the development bearing cooling fan.
• Reset the connector.
• Replace the harness.
• Replace the BCU.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC534-00 D Development Exhaust Fan
In the motor ON state, the value of the lock sensor is checked every 100msec.
If a lock signal is not obtained for 50 times consecutively.
• Motor defective
• Connector disconnected
• Harness broken
• BCU defective
• Replace the development exhaust fan.
• Reset the connector.
• Replace the harness.
• Replace the BCU.

SM 6-40 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 SC Tables: SC5xx (Paper Feed and Fusing)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Troubleshooting
SC535-00 D Paper Exit Cooling Fan Lock
In the motor ON state, the value of the lock sensor is checked every 100msec.
If a lock signal is not obtained for 50 times consecutively.
• Motor defective
• Connector disconnected
• Harness broken
• BCU defective
• Replace the paper exit cooling fan.
• Reset the connector.
• Replace the harness.
• Replace the BCU.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC540- D Fusing/paper Exit Motor: Lock
00 During motor ON, after checking lock signals for 2sec, a High level was
detected at least 20 times.
• Motor defective
• Connector disconnected
• Harness broken
• BCU defective
• Unit torque increased
• Replace the fusing/paper exit motor.
• Reset the connector.
• Replace the harness.
• Replace the BCU.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC541- A Fusing Thermopile (Center) Disconnection
01 Below a predetermined temperature (or below CB) is detected for specified
seconds continuously.
Detection frequency: 10 times or more.
• Harness broken
• Connector disconnected
• Reconnect the connectors between the fusing unit and the BCU.
• Replace the thermopile (center).
• Replace the harness between the fusing unit and the BCU.
• Replace the BCU.

SM 6-41 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
SC Tables: SC5xx (Paper Feed and Fusing)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC541- A NC Sensor (Center) Disconnection
02 3ED - 3FF (FB voltage: 3.243V-3.300V) is detected for specified seconds
continuously (NC sensor (center): detection & compensation, NC sensor (end):
detection & compensation).
Detection period: 100 ms, detection frequency: 10 times or more.
• Harness broken
• Connector disconnected
• Reconnect the connectors between the fusing unit and the BCU.
• Replace the NC sensor (center).
• Replace the harness between the fusing unit and the BCU.
• Replace the BCU.
SC541- A NC Sensor (Center) Short-circuit
03 AD value: 0-13 (FB voltage: 0.000V-0.041V) is detected for specified seconds
continuously.
Detection period: 100 ms, detection frequency: 10 times or more.
• Harness broken
• Connector disconnected
• Reconnect the connectors between the fusing unit and the BCU.
• Replace the NC sensor (center).
• Replace the harness between the fusing unit and the BCU.
• Replace the BCU.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC542- A Fusing Thermopile (Center) Thermopile Does Not Reload
02 When the thermopile (center) does not reach a predetermined temperature for 7
seconds consecutively.
SC542- A Fusing Thermopile (Center) Does Not Reload
03 When the thermopile (center) does not reach the permission temperature of
heat central reloading for specified seconds continuously.
SC542- C Fusing Thermopile (Center) Does Not Reload (Low Voltage)
05 When the thermopile (center) does not reach a predetermined temperature for 7
seconds consecutively.
SC542- C Fusing Thermopile (Center) Does Not Reload (Low Voltage)
06 When the thermopile (center) does not reach the permission temperature of
heat central reloading for specified seconds continuously.
• Thermopile (center) lens dirt
• Thermopile (center) installed incorrectly
• Thermopile (center) deformed or not installed (or mounted)

SM 6-42 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 SC Tables: SC5xx (Paper Feed and Fusing)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

properly

Troubleshooting
• Outside input voltage guarantee
• After excessive temperature rise prevention unit operation
• Remove the jammed paper in the fusing unit.
• Check and replace the thermopile (center).
• Check the power supply voltage and reconnect the cable to the
outlet.
• Replace the thermostat.
• Replace the BCU.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC543- A Fusing Thermopile (Center) High Temperature Detection (Software)
00 When the thermopile (center) detects a predetermined temperature or above for
specified seconds consecutively.
Detection period 100ms, detection count: 10 times or more.
• Triac short-circuit
• Engine controller defective
• Fusing roller temperature sensor (center) defective
• Fusing control software defective
• Check the fusing unit.
• Check that the triac of the AC controller on the PSU does not
short-circuit.
• Reconnect the following connectors: CN115 of BCU, connectors
between the fusing unit and the BCU, connectors connected to
the fusing unit
• Replace the the following harness: CN115 of BCU, connectors
between the fusing unit and the BCU, connectors connected to
the fusing unit
• Replace the BCU board.
• Replace the fusing unit.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC544- A Fusing High Temperature Detection (hardware)
01 (Fusing Thermopile (Center) High Temperature Error)
In the event of an error
• Triac defective (short-circuit)
• Engine controller defective
• Fusing roller temperature sensor (center) defective

SM 6-43 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
SC Tables: SC5xx (Paper Feed and Fusing)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

• Fusing control software: out of control
• Check the sensor temperature with the following SPs. If the
temperature is lower than 250°C, replace the thermopile or
thermistor.
• SP1-141-101 (Thermopile (center))
• SP1-141-102 (Thermopile (edge))
• SP1-141-103 (Thermistor (center))
• SP1-141-104 (Thermistor (edge))
• SP1-141-151 (Thermopile (center): 200 msec before the SC is
generated)
• SP1-141-152 (Thermopile (edge): 200 msec before the SC is
generated)
• SP1-141-153 (Thermistor (center): 200 msec before the SC is
generated)
• SP1-141-154 (Thermistor (edge): 200 msec before the SC is
generated)
Note: The high temperature state of the fusing unit is detected when
the temperature detected by the sensor is 250°C or more. Therefore, if
the temperature of the above SPs is lower than 250°C, the thermopile
or thermistor may be defective or out of position.
• Check the fusing unit.
• Check the triac of the AC controller on the PSU and replace the
PSU.
• Reconnect the following connectors: CN115 of BCU, connectors
between the fusing unit and the BCU, connectors connected to
the fusing unit
• Replace the following harness: CN115 of BCU, connectors
between the fusing unit and the BCU, connectors connected to
the fusing unit
• Replace the BCU board.
• Turn the power off/on.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC544- A Fusing High Temperature Detection (hardware)
02 (Non-Contact thermistor High Temperature Error)
In the event of an error
• Triac defective (short-circuit)
• Engine controller defective

SM 6-44 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 SC Tables: SC5xx (Paper Feed and Fusing)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

•

Troubleshooting
Fusing roller temperature sensor (center) defective
• Fusing control software: out of control
• Check the sensor temperature with the following SPs. If the
temperature is lower than 250°C, replace the thermopile or
thermistor.
• SP1-141-101 (Thermopile (center))
• SP1-141-102 (Thermopile (edge))
• SP1-141-103 (Thermistor (center))
• SP1-141-104 (Thermistor (edge))
• SP1-141-151 (Thermopile (center): 200 msec before the SC is
generated)
• SP1-141-152 (Thermopile (edge): 200 msec before the SC is
generated)
• SP1-141-153 (Thermistor (center): 200 msec before the SC is
generated)
• SP1-141-154 (Thermistor (edge): 200 msec before the SC is
generated)
Note: The high temperature state of the fusing unit is detected when
the temperature detected by the sensor is 250°C or more. Therefore, if
the temperature of the above SPs is lower than 250°C, the thermopile
or thermistor may be defective or out of position.
• Check the fusing unit.
• Check the triac of the AC controller on the PSU and replace the
PSU.
• Reconnect the following connectors: CN115 of BCU, connectors
between the fusing unit and the BCU, connectors connected to
the fusing unit
• Replace the following harness: CN115 of BCU, connectors
between the fusing unit and the BCU, connectors connected to
the fusing unit
• Replace the BCU board.
• Turn the power off/on.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC545- A Fusing Central Heater Continuously Heat
01 After waiting for full power for more than specified seconds continuously, not
detected for specified seconds.
• Definition of heater full power

SM 6-45 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
SC Tables: SC5xx (Paper Feed and Fusing)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Continuously heating rate set point (maximum heating rate)
• Measurement start point
After reload (after heater extinguished, after rotation complete) below
the standby temperature (target temperature), measurement starts
after a heater heat-up request is issued.
• Measurement stop condition
Rotation started due to a print signal during measurement or other.
• Maximum heat-up Duty (SP interlinked value) 0% is excluded.
• Thermopile (center) lens dirt
• Thermopile (center) installed incorrectly
• Thermopile bracket deformation
• Heater disconnection
• After excessive temperature rise prevention unit operates
• Outside input voltage guarantee
• Remove the jammed paper in the fusing unit
• Check and replace the thermopile (center).
• Check the power supply voltage and reconnect the cable to the
outlet.
• Replace the thermostat.
• Replace the BCU board.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC545- C Fusing Central Heater Continuously Heat (Low Voltage)
05 After waiting for full power for more than specified seconds continuously, not
detected for specified seconds.
• Definition of heater full power
Continuously heating rate set point (maximum heating rate)
• Measurement start point
After reload (after heater extinguished, after rotation complete) below
the standby temperature (target temperature), measurement starts
after a heater heat-up request is issued.
• Measurement stop condition
Rotation started due to a print signal during measurement or other.
• Maximum heat-up Duty (SP interlinked value) 0% is excluded.
• Thermopile (center) lens dirt
• Thermopile (center) installed incorrectly
• Thermopile bracket deformation
• Heater disconnection

SM 6-46 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 SC Tables: SC5xx (Paper Feed and Fusing)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

•

Troubleshooting
After excessive temperature rise prevention unit operates
• Outside input voltage guarantee
• Remove the jammed paper in the fusing unit
• Check and replace the thermopile (center).
• Check the power supply voltage and reconnect the cable to the
outlet.
• Replace the thermostat.
• Replace the BCU board.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC547- D Zero cross Error (relay-contact soldering)
01 In the event of an error
• Fusing relay defective (contact soldering)
• Fusing relay drive circuit fault
• Turn the main power supply switch OFF/ON
• If the fusing relay is damaged, replace the PSU.
• Check the connection between PSU and controller board, and
replace harness and board if necessary.
SC547- D Zero cross Error (relay contact fault)
02 In the event of an error
• Fusing relay damage (contact open)
• Fusing relay drive circuit fault
• PSU fuse (24VS) blowout
• Turn the main power supply switch OFF/ON.
• If the fusing relay is damaged, replace the PSU.
• Check the connection between PSU and controller board, and
replace harness and board if necessary.
• If the PSU fuse (24VS) blows out, replace the fuse.
SC547- D Zero cross Error (low-frequency error)
03 In the event of an error
Frequency instability of commercial power line
• Turn the main power supply switch OFF/ON.
• Check the power source.
• Check the connection between PSU and controller board, and
replace harness and board if necessary.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC551- A Fusing Thermopile (Edge) Disconnection

SM 6-47 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
SC Tables: SC5xx (Paper Feed and Fusing)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

01 When the thermopile (edge) detects a predetermined temperature or less for
specified seconds consecutively.
• Harness broken
• Connector disconnected
• Reconnect the connectors between the fusing unit and the BCU.
• Replace the thermopile (edge).
• Replace the harness between the fusing unit and the BCU.
• Replace the BCU.
SC551- A NC Sensor (End) Disconnection
02 3ED - 3FF (FB voltage: 3.243V-3.300V) is detected for specified seconds
continuously (NC sensor (center): detection & compensation, NC sensor (end):
detection & compensation).
Detection period: 100 ms, detection frequency: 10 times or more.
• Harness broken
• Connector disconnected
• Reconnect the connectors between the fusing unit and the BCU.
• Reset the NC sensor.
• Replace the harness between the fusing unit and the BCU.
• Replace the BCU.
SC551- A NC Sensor (End) Short-circuit
03 AD value: 0-13 (FB voltage: 0.000V-0.041V) is detected for specified seconds
continuously.
Detection period: 100 ms, detection frequency: 10 times or more.
• Harness broken
• Connector disconnected
• Reconnect the connectors between the fusing unit and the BCU.
• Reset the NC sensor.
• Replace the harness between the fusing unit and the BCU.
• Replace the BCU.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC552- A Fusing Thermopile (Edge) Does Not Reload
02 When the thermopile (edge) does not reach a predetermined temperature for
specified seconds consecutively.
SC552- A Fusing Thermopile (Edge) Does Not Reload
03 Heating edge reload permission temperature not reached after heater 1 ON for
specified seconds.
SC552- C Fusing Thermopile (Edge) Does Not Reload (Low Voltage)

SM 6-48 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 SC Tables: SC5xx (Paper Feed and Fusing)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

05 When the thermopile (edge) does not reach a predetermined temperature for

Troubleshooting
specified seconds consecutively.
SC552- C Fusing Thermopile (Edge) Does Not Reload (Low Voltage)
06 When the thermopile (edge) does not reach the permission temperature of heat
edge reloading for specified seconds continuously.
• Thermopile (edge) lens dirt
• Thermopile (edge) installed incorrectly
• Thermopile modification
• Outside input voltage guarantee
• After excessive temperature rise prevention unit operation
• Remove the jammed paper in the fusing unit.
• Check and replace the thermopile (edge).
• Check the power supply voltage and reconnect the cable to the
outlet.
• Replace the thermostat.
• Replace the BCU.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC553- A Fusing Thermopile (Edge) High Temperature Detection (software)
00 Above a predetermined temperature detected for specified seconds
continuously.
Detection period: 100ms, detection count: 10 times or more.
• Triac short-circuit
• Engine controller defective
• Fusing roller temperature sensor (center) defective
• Fusing control software defective
• Check the fusing unit.
• Check that the triac of the AC controller on the PSU does not
short-circuit.
• Reconnect the following connectors CN115 of BCU, connectors
between the fusing unit and the BCU, connectors connected to
the fusing unit
• Replace the following harness CN115 of BCU, connectors
between the fusing unit and the BCU, connectors connected to
the fusing unit
• Replace the BCU board.
• Replace the fusing unit.

SM 6-49 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
SC Tables: SC5xx (Paper Feed and Fusing)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC554- A Fusing Thermopile (Edge) High Temperature Detection (hardware)
01 In the event of an error
• Triac defective (short-circuit)
• Engine controller defective
• Fusing roller temperature sensor (center) defective
• Fusing control software: out of control
• Check the sensor temperature with the following SPs. If the
temperature is lower than 250°C, replace the thermopile or
thermistor.
• SP1-141-101 (Thermopile (center))
• SP1-141-102 (Thermopile (edge))
• SP1-141-103 (Thermistor (center))
• SP1-141-104 (Thermistor (edge))
• SP1-141-151 (Thermopile (center): 200 msec before the SC is
generated)
• SP1-141-152 (Thermopile (edge): 200 msec before the SC is
generated)
• SP1-141-153 (Thermistor (center): 200 msec before the SC is
generated)
• SP1-141-154 (Thermistor (edge): 200 msec before the SC is
generated)
Note: The high temperature state of the fusing unit is detected when
the temperature detected by the sensor is 250°C or more. Therefore, if
the temperature of the above SPs is lower than 250°C, the thermopile
or thermistor may be defective or out of position.
• Check the fusing unit.
• Check that the triac of the AC controller on the PSU does not
short-circuit.
• Replace the PSU.
• Reconnect the following connectors: CN115 of BCU, connectors
between the fusing unit and the BCU, connectors connected to
the fusing unit
• Replace the following harness CN115 of BCU, connectors
between the fusing unit and the BCU, connectors connected to
the fusing unit
• Replace the BCU board.
• Turn the power off/on.

SM 6-50 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 SC Tables: SC5xx (Paper Feed and Fusing)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC554- A NC Sensor (End) High Temperature Detection (hardware)

Troubleshooting
02 In the event of an error
• Triac defective (short-circuit)
• Engine controller defective
• Fusing roller temperature sensor defective (rear)
• Fusing control software: out of control
• Check the sensor temperature with the following SPs. If the
temperature is lower than 250°C, replace the thermopile or
thermistor.
• SP1-141-101 (Thermopile (center))
• SP1-141-102 (Thermopile (edge))
• SP1-141-103 (Thermistor (center))
• SP1-141-104 (Thermistor (edge))
• SP1-141-151 (Thermopile (center): 200 msec before the SC is
generated)
• SP1-141-152 (Thermopile (edge): 200 msec before the SC is
generated)
• SP1-141-153 (Thermistor (center): 200 msec before the SC is
generated)
• SP1-141-154 (Thermistor (edge): 200 msec before the SC is
generated)
Note: The high temperature state of the fusing unit is detected when
the temperature detected by the sensor is 250°C or more. Therefore, if
the temperature of the above SPs is lower than 250°C, the thermopile
or thermistor may be defective or out of position.
• Check the fusing unit.
• Check that the triac of the AC controller on the PSU does not
short-circuit.
• Replace the PSU.
• Reconnect the following connectors: CN115 of BCU, connectors
between the fusing unit and the BCU, connectors connected to
the fusing unit
• Replace the following harness: CN115 of BCU, connectors
between the fusing unit and the BCU, connectors connected to
the fusing unit
• Replace the BCU board.
• Turn the power off/on.

SM 6-51 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
SC Tables: SC5xx (Paper Feed and Fusing)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC555- A Fusing Edge Heater Continuously Heat
01
SC555- C Fusing Edge Heater Continuously Heat (Low Voltage)
05
After waiting for full power for more than specified seconds continuously, not
detected for specified seconds.
• Definition of heater full power
Continuously heating rate set point (maximum heating rate)
• Measurement start point
After reload (after heater extinguished, after rotation complete) below
the standby temperature (target temperature), measurement starts
after a heater heat-up request is issued.
• Measurement stop condition
Rotation started due to a print signal during measurement or other
• Maximum heat-up Duty (SP interlinked value) 0% is excluded
• Thermopile (edge) lens dirt
• Thermopile (edge) installed incorrectly
• Thermistor deformation
• Heater disconnection
• After excess temperature rise prevention unit operation
• Outside input voltage guarantee
• Remove the jammed paper in the fusing unit.
• Check and replace the thermopile (edge).
• Check the power supply voltage and reconnect the cable to the
outlet.
• Replace the thermostat.
• Replace the BCU.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC557-00 C Zero Cross Frequency Exceeded
In the event of an error
Frequency instability of commercial power line/Noise
-

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC558- C Low Input Voltage
00 On the mains power supply, detected the input voltage that is less than the
specification and is more than 50V.

SM 6-52 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 SC Tables: SC5xx (Paper Feed and Fusing)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Low input of mains power supply

Troubleshooting
-

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC559- A Fusing Jam Detected for 3 Times Consecutively
00 Fusing jam (does not reach fusing exit sensor) is detected for 3 times
consecutively.
• Detection conditions
Displays the SC559-00 at the time of integrating the counter each time
fusing jam occurs, became fusing jam counter value = 3.
The counter value is retained without fusing jam also reset by OFF/ON
the power supply.
• Control ON/OFF
And enables ON / OFF is this SC, the default is set to OFF, then ON
at the time of customer requirements.
SP1-142-001 0: OFF (default), 1: ON (Set at the time of customer
requirements)
• Counter reset condition occurs fusing jam
1. Normal paper exit has been done during this continuous fusing
jam, fusing jam counter is reset.
2. When "1" is changed to "0" SP1-142-001, to reset the (SP9-912-
001) fusing jam counter.
3. When after displaying SC559, SC release is made, reset the
(SP9912-001) fusing jam counter.
Fusing unit paper jam
Remove the jam.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC561- A Pressure Roller Thermistor (Center) Disconnection
00 When the pressure roller thermistor (center) detects a predetermined
temperature or less for specified seconds consecutively.
Detection period 100ms, detection count: 10 times or more.
• Harness broken
• Connector disconnected
• Reconnect the connectors between the fusing unit and the BCU.
• Replace the pressure roller thermistor (center).
• Replace the harness between the fusing unit and the BCU.
• Replace the BCU.

SM 6-53 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
SC Tables: SC5xx (Paper Feed and Fusing)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC562- A Pressure Roller Thermistor (Center) Does Not Reload
02 When the pressure roller thermistor (center) does not reach a predetermined
temperature for specified seconds consecutively.
• Thermistor dirt
• Thermopile deformed or not installed (or mounted) properly
• Outside input voltage guarantee
• After excess temperature rise prevention unit operation
• Remove the jammed paper in the fusing unit.
• Check and replace the pressure roller thermistor (center).
• Check the power supply voltage and reconnect the cable to the
outlet.
• Replace the thermostat.
• Replace the thermopile.
• Replace the BCU.
SC562- C Pressure Roller Thermistor (Center) Does Not Reload (Low Voltage)
05
When the pressure roller thermistor (center) does not reach a predetermined
temperature for specified seconds consecutively.
• Thermistor dirt
• Thermopile deformed or not installed (or mounted) properly
• Outside input voltage guarantee
• After excess temperature rise prevention unit operation
• Remove the jammed paper in the fusing unit.
• Check and replace the pressure roller thermistor (center).
• Check the power supply voltage and reconnect the cable to the
outlet.
• Replace the thermostat.
• Replace the thermopile.
• Replace the BCU.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC563- A Pressure Roller Thermistor (Center) High Temperature Detection (software)
00 Above a predetermined temperature detected for specified seconds
continuously.
Detection period: 100ms, detection count: 10 times or more.
• Triac short-circuit
• Engine controller defective

SM 6-54 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 SC Tables: SC5xx (Paper Feed and Fusing)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

•

Troubleshooting
Pressure roller thermistor (end) defective
• Fusing control software defective
• Check the fusing unit.
• Check that the triac of the AC controller on the PSU does not
short-circuit.
• Reconnect the following connectors: CN115 of BCU, connectors
between the fusing unit and the BCU, connectors connected to
the fusing unit
• Replace the following harness: CN115 of BCU, connectors
between the fusing unit and the BCU, connectors connected to
the fusing unit
• Replace the BCU.
• Replace the fusing unit.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC564- A Fusing High Temperature Detection (hardware)
00 (Pressure Roller Thermistor Error)
In the event of an error
• Triac short-circuit
• Engine controller defective
• Pressure roller thermistor (end) defective
• Fusing controller software defective
• Check the sensor temperature with the following SPs. If the
temperature is lower than 250°C, replace the thermopile or
thermistor.
• SP1-141-101 (Thermopile (center))
• SP1-141-102 (Thermopile (edge))
• SP1-141-103 (Thermistor (center))
• SP1-141-104 (Thermistor (edge))
• SP1-141-151 (Thermopile (center): 200 msec before the SC is
generated)
• SP1-141-152 (Thermopile (edge): 200 msec before the SC is
generated)
• SP1-141-153 (Thermistor (center): 200 msec before the SC is
generated)
• SP1-141-154 (Thermistor (edge): 200 msec before the SC is
generated)
Note: The high temperature state of the fusing unit is detected when

SM 6-55 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
SC Tables: SC5xx (Paper Feed and Fusing)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

the temperature detected by the sensor is 250°C or more. Therefore, if
the temperature of the above SPs is lower than 250°C, the thermopile
or thermistor may be defective or out of position.
• Check the fusing unit.
• Check that the triac of the AC controller on the PSU does not
short-circuit.
• Replace the PSU.
• Reconnect the following connectors: CN115 of BCU, connectors
between the fusing unit and the BCU, connectors connected to
the fusing unit
• Replace the following harness: CN115 of BCU, connectors
between the fusing unit and the BCU, connectors connected to
the fusing unit.
• Replace the BCU.
• Turn the power off/on.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC571- A Pressure Roller Thermistor (End) Disconnection
00 When the pressure roller thermistor (end) detects a predetermined temperature
or less for specified seconds consecutively.
Detection period: 100 ms, detection counts: 10 times or more.
• Harness broken
• Connector disconnected
• Reconnect the connectors between the fusing unit and the BCU.
• Replace the pressure roller thermistor (end).
• Replace the harness between the fusing unit and the BCU.
• Replace the BCU.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC572- A Pressure Roller Thermistor (End) Does Not Reload
02 When the temperature does not reach 40 degrees Centigrade for 100 seconds
consecutively.
• Thermistor dirt
• Thermopile deformed or not installed (or mounted) properly
• Outside input voltage guarantee
• After excess temperature rise prevention unit operation
• Remove the jammed paper in the fusing unit.
• Check and replace the pressure roller thermistor (end).

SM 6-56 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 SC Tables: SC5xx (Paper Feed and Fusing)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

•

Troubleshooting
Check the power supply voltage and reconnect the cable to the
outlet.
• Replace the thermostat.
• Replace the thermopile.
• Replace the BCU.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC573- A Pressure Roller Thermistor (End) High Temperature Detection (software)
00 When the pressure roller thermistor (end) detects a predetermined temperature
or above for specified second consecutively.
• Triac short-circuit
• Engine controller defective
• Pressure roller thermistor (end) defective
• Fusing controller software defective
• Check the fusing unit.
• Check that the triac of the AC controller on the PSU does not
short-circuit.
• Reconnect the following connectors: CN115 of BCU, connectors
between the fusing unit and the BCU, connectors connected to
the fusing unit
• Replace the following harness: CN115 of BCU, connectors
between the fusing unit and the BCU, connectors connected to
the fusing unit
• Replace the BCU.
• Replace the fusing unit.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC574- A Pressure Roller Thermistor (End) High Temperature Detection (hardware)
00 In the event of an error
• Triac short-circuit
• Engine controller defective
• Pressure roller thermistor (end) defective
• Fusing control: out of control
• Check the sensor temperature with the following SPs. If the
temperature is lower than 250°C, replace the thermopile or
thermistor.
• SP1-141-101 (Thermopile (center))
• SP1-141-102 (Thermopile (edge))

SM 6-57 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
SC Tables: SC5xx (Paper Feed and Fusing)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

• SP1-141-103 (Thermistor (center))
• SP1-141-104 (Thermistor (edge))
• SP1-141-151 (Thermopile (center): 200 msec before the SC is
generated)
• SP1-141-152 (Thermopile (edge): 200 msec before the SC is
generated)
• SP1-141-153 (Thermistor (center): 200 msec before the SC is
generated)
• SP1-141-154 (Thermistor (edge): 200 msec before the SC is
generated)
Note: The high temperature state of the fusing unit is detected when
the temperature detected by the sensor is 250°C or more. Therefore, if
the temperature of the above SPs is lower than 250°C, the thermopile
or thermistor may be defective or out of position.
• Check the fusing unit.
• Check that the triac of the AC controller on the PSU does not
short-circuit.
• Replace the PSU.
• Reconnect the following connectors: CN115 of BCU, connectors
between the fusing unit and the BCU, connectors connected to
the fusing unit
• Replace the following harness: CN115 of BCU, connectors
between the fusing unit and the BCU, connectors connected to
the fusing unit
• Replace the BCU.
• Turn the power off/on.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC589- D Fusing center: Low Temperature Detection
01 When the thermopile (center) detects the temperature which is 180 degrees
Centigrade lower than target Temperature for 12 seconds consecutively.
• Central heater harness disconnected
• Connector defective
• After excess temperature rise prevention unit (thermostat)
operation
• Replace the jammed paper in the fusing unit.
• Check and replace the thermopile (center).
• Check the power supply voltage and reconnect the cable to the

SM 6-58 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 SC Tables: SC5xx (Paper Feed and Fusing)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

outlet.

Troubleshooting
• Replace the thermostat.
• Replace the BCU.
SC589- D Fusing edge: Low Temperature Detection
02 When the thermopile (edge) detects the temperature which is 180 degrees
Centigrade lower than target Temperature for 12 seconds consecutively.
• Edge heater harness disconnected
• Connector defective
• After excess temperature rise prevention unit (thermostat)
operation
• Replace the jammed paper in the fusing unit.
• Check and replace the thermopile (edge).
• Check the power supply voltage and reconnect the cable to the
outlet.
• Replace the thermostat.
• Replace the BCU.

SM 6-59 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
SC Tables: SC6xx (Communication and Others)

6.7 SC TABLES: SC6XX (COMMUNICATION AND OTHERS)

6.7.1 SC620-01 TO SC687-00
SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution
SC620- D ADF Communication Error 1
01
SC620- D ADF Communication Error 2
02
SC620- D ADF Communication Error 3
03
SC620-01:
After ADF connection was recognized on startup, an error is detected.
(disconnection detection)
SC620-02:
After ADF connection was recognized on startup, an error is detected. (Retry
out due to communication error)
SC620-03:
SC is displayed when CIS initialization complete command is not received for
certain time.
• ADF connection fault
• ADF defection
• IPU board defection
• Noise contamination
• ADF machine code unmatched
• Check the ADF cable connection
• Replace the ADF
• Replace the IPU board
• Replace the ADF which matches the machine code

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC621-00 D Finisher/Mail Box Communication Error
• Detected an error when connecting the communication line.
• Received a communication error notification from the UART.
• Finisher control board defective.
• BCU defective
• Connection fault between finisher and main machine.
• Turn the power off/on.
• Reconnect the finisher/mail box interface cable
• Replace the BCU

SM 6-60 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 SC Tables: SC6xx (Communication and Others)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

•

Troubleshooting
Replace the finisher/mail box.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC622 D Paper Bank Communication Error
SC622- D Paper Bank 1 Communication Error (D694)
01
SC622- D Paper Bank 1 Communication Error (D787)
11
SC622- D Paper Bank 1 Communication Error (D787)
12
SC622- D Paper Bank 1 Communication Error (D695)
31
Detected an error when connecting the communication line.
• Paper bank control board defective
• BCU defective
• Paper bank-main machine connection fault
Check if the SC occurs by turning the main power OFF then ON. If the SC
occurs again, do the following steps. Check if the SC reoccurs by cycling the
power after each step.
1. Check if all connectors in tray 1, 2, and optional paper tray are connected
securely. Reconnect the connectors if they are disconnected, or loose.
2. Check the harness in tray 1, 2, and optional paper tray. Replace the
harness if it is disconnected, or damaged.
3. Check if there are any signs of a short circuit on the Bank Main Board. If
there are any defects, replace the board.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC623- D Paper Bank Communication Error (D696)
00 When two trays PFU (D787) and side LICT (D696) or LCIT (D695) and side
LCIT (D696) are installed,
1. When the upper stream unit (D787 or D695) recognizes the lower stream
unit (D696), the break of the lower stream unit is not canceled within
predetermined milliseconds.
2. After the upper stream unit (D787 or D695) recognizes the lower stream
unit (D696), there is no ACK within predetermined milliseconds after
transmission of a data frame to the lower stream unit, and a timeout error
occurs for 3 times consecutively even if retransmission is performed.
• Bank control board fault

SM 6-61 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
SC Tables: SC6xx (Communication and Others)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

• Connector disconnected
• Turn the power off/on.
• Reset the optional paper tray connecting cable.
• Replace the BCU.
• Replace the optional paper tray.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC664- D Access Permission Error to VODKA SRAM
01
SC664- D Write Error to VODKA SRAM
02
SC664- D VODKA Program Startup Error
03
The machine detects the communication error between VODKA and SRAM
when starting up, or recovery from energy saver mode.
• BCU defective (Parts implementation defect, solder scrap,
implemented parts defect, etc.)
• Turn the power off/on.
• Replace the BCU.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC665- D BCU-IPU Connection Error
01 The machine detects the communication error between BCU and IPU (No FFC
connection) when starting up, or recovery from energy saver mode.
• BCU defective, IPU defective (Parts implementation defect,
solder scrap, implemented parts defect, etc.)
• Reconnect the FFC.
• Replace the FFC.
• Replace the BCU.
• Replace the IPU.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC665- D BCU (IOB Module) Does Not Start
04 The IOB does not start up when starting up, or recovery from energy saver
mode.
• No power supply to the BCU (IOB module) (power supply
connector installed incorrectly, harness broken)
• Board defective (Parts implementation defect, solder scrap,

SM 6-62 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 SC Tables: SC6xx (Communication and Others)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

implemented parts defect, etc.)

Troubleshooting
• Turn the power off/on.
• Reconnect the BCU power supply harness.
• Replace the BCU power supply harness.
• Replace the BCU.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC665- D Master Device Communication Error
05 The machine detects the communication error between CPU and Slave1 when
starting up, or recovery from energy saver mode.
• BCU defective (Parts implementation defect, solder scrap,
implemented parts defect, etc.)
• Turn the power off/on.
• Replace the BCU.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC665- D IPU signal Communication Error
07 The machine detects the communication error between CPU and Slave1 when
starting up, or recovery from energy saver mode.
• BCU defective, IPU defective (Parts implementation defect,
solder scrap, implemented parts defect, etc.)
• Reconnect the FCC.
• Replace the FCC.
• Replace the BCU.
• Replace the IPU.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC665- D IOB signal Communication Error
08 The machine detects the communication error between CPU and Slave1 when
starting up, or recovery from energy saver mode.
• BCU defective (Parts implementation defect, solder scrap,
implemented parts defect, etc.)
• Turn the power off/on.
• Replace the BCU.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC667- D Master Device Mode Setting Error
01 The machine detects the CPU mode error when starting up, or recovery from

SM 6-63 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
SC Tables: SC6xx (Communication and Others)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

energy saver mode.
• BCU defective (Parts implementation defect, solder scrap,
implemented parts defect, etc.)
• Turn the power off/on.
• Replace the BCU.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC667- D Slave1 Device Mode Setting Error
10 The machine detects the Slave1 mode error when starting up, or recovery from
energy saver mode.
• BCU defective (Parts implementation defect, solder scrap,
implemented parts defect, etc.)
• Turn the power off/on.
• Replace the BCU.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC667- D Macaron1 Mode Setting Error
40 The machine detects the Macaron1 mode error when starting up, or recovery
from energy saver mode.
• BCU defective (Parts implementation defect, solder scrap,
implemented parts defect, etc.)
• Turn the power off/on.
• Replace the BCU.
• Replace the IPU.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC669 EEPROM Communication Error
SC669- D EEPROM OPEN: ID error
01
SC669- D EEPROM OPEN: Channel error
02
SC669- D EEPROM OPEN: Device error
03
SC669- D EEPROM OPEN: Communication abort error
04
SC669- D EEPROM OPEN: Communication timeout error
05
SC669- D EEPROM OPEN: Operation stopped error

SM 6-64 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 SC Tables: SC6xx (Communication and Others)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

06

Troubleshooting
SC669- D EEPROM OPEN: Buffer full
07
SC669- D EEPROM OPEN: No error code
08
SC669- D EEPROM CLOSE: ID error
09
SC669- D EEPROM CLOSE: No error code
10
SC669- D EEPROM Data write: ID error
11
SC669- D EEPROM Data write: Channel error
12
SC669- D EEPROM Data write: Device error
13
SC669- D EEPROM Data write: Communication abort error
14
SC669- D EEPROM Data write: Communication timeout error
15
SC669- D EEPROM Data write: Operation stopped error
16
SC669- D EEPROM Data write: Buffer full
17
SC669- D EEPROM Data write: No error code
18
SC669- D EEPROM Data read: ID error
19
SC669- D EEPROM Data read: Channel error
20
SC669- D EEPROM Data read: Device error
21
SC669- D EEPROM Data read: Communication abort error
22
SC669- D EEPROM Data read: Communication timeout error
23
SC669- D EEPROM Data read: Operation stopped error
24
SC669- D EEPROM Data read: Buffer full

SM 6-65 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
SC Tables: SC6xx (Communication and Others)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

25
SC669- D EEPROM Data read: No error code
26
Received an error notification during EEPROM communication and does not
resume after 3 retries.
• Electrical noise
• EEPROM not connected fully
• EEPROM damaged
• BCU damaged
• Turn the power off/on.
• Check the EEPROM.
• Replace the EEPROM.
• Replace the BCU.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC669- D EEPROM: Verify Error
36 The machine receives an error notification during EEPROM (BCU)
communication and does not resume after 2 retries.
The machine detects an abnormal value in the EEPROM data when starting up,
or recovery from energy saver mode.
• Electrical noise
• EEPROM not connected fully
• EEPROM damaged
• BCU damaged
• Turn the power off/on.
• Check the EEPROM.
• Replace the EEPROM.
• Replace the BCU.
SC669- D EEPROM: Failure Detection Error
37 The machine receives an error notification during EEPROM (BCU)
communication and does not resume after 1 retries.
The machine determined EEPROM failure in the EEPROM detection operation
when starting up, or recovery from energy saver mode.
• Electrical noise
• EEPROM not connected fully
• EEPROM damaged
• BCU damaged
• Turn the power off/on.

SM 6-66 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 SC Tables: SC6xx (Communication and Others)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

•

Troubleshooting
Check the EEPROM.
• Replace the EEPROM.
• Replace the BCU.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC682 PCU: ID Chip Communication Error
SC682- D Invalid Device ID
01
SC682- D Channel Error
06
SC682- D Device Error
11
SC682- D Communication Aborted (error during communication)
16
SC682- D Communication Timeout
21
SC682- D Device Stopped (logically stopped)
26
SC682- D Requested Buffer Full
31
Received an error notification during EEPROM communication and does not
resume after 3 retries.
• Device ID date error
• Mu sesnsor / EEPROM defective
• Electrical noise
• PCU is not set properly.
• Turn the power off/on.
• Replace the PCU.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC682- D PCU: Verify Error
36 Received a error notification during EEPROM communication and does not
resume after 2 retries.
• Device ID date error
• Mu sensor / EEPROM defective
• Electrical noise
• PCU is not set properly.
• Turn the power off/on.

SM 6-67 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
SC Tables: SC6xx (Communication and Others)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

• Replace the PCU.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC687-00 D PER Not Received Error
Unable to receive the PER command from the controller.
• Communication error
• Replace the BCU.

SM 6-68 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 SC Tables: SC7xx (Peripherals)

6.8 SC TABLES: SC7XX (PERIPHERALS)

Troubleshooting
6.8.1 SC700-01 TO SC792-00
SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution
SC700 SPDF error
SC700- D ADF Bottom Plate Lift Motor (SPDF)
01
SC700- D ADF Pick-Up Roller Lift Motor Error (SPDF)
02
SC700- D ADF Feed Motor Error (SPDF)
04
SC700- D ADF Entrance Motor Error (SPDF)
05
SC700- D ADF Transport Motor Error (SPDF)
06
SC700- D ADF Scanning Motor Error (SPDF)
07
SC700- D ADF Exit Motor Error (SPDF)
09
SC700-01
Even if the ADF bottom plate lift motor is rotated in the base plate ascent
direction, the bottom plate position sensor does not detect.
Even if the ADF bottom plate lift motor is rotated in the base plate descent
direction, the bottom plate HP sensor does not detect.
SC700-02
Even if the ADF pick-up roller lift motor is rotated, the pick-up roller HP sensor
does not detect.
SC700-04, 05, 06, 07, 09
When an error notification signal is detected during the motor drive period.
SC700-01
• Bottom plate position sensor error (output error)
• Bottom plate HP sensor
• ADF bottom plate lift motor error (does not rotate)
• ADF controller board error
SC700-02
• Pick-up roller HP sensor error (output error)
• ADF pick-up roller lift motor error (does not rotate)
• ADF controller board error
SC700-04, 05, 06, 07, 09

SM 6-69 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
SC Tables: SC7xx (Peripherals)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

• Motor defective
• Connector disconnected
• Harness broken
• Overload
SC700-01, 02
• Check the sensor harness and motor harness connection
• Replace the sensor harness and motor harness
• Replace the sensor
• Replace the motor
• Replace the ADF controller board
SC700-04, 05, 06, 07, 09
• Check the harness connection
• Replace the harness
• Replace the motor

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC701-03 D Paper Feed Motor Driver Error (ARDF)
Detection of error signal from motor driver
• Encoder disconnection
• Encoder connector dropout
• Encoder defective
• Overload
• Motor deterioration
• Replace the encoder harness
• Check the harness connection
• Replace the motor
SC701-08 D Paper Exit Motor Driver Error (ARDF)
Detection of error signal from motor driver.
• Encoder disconnection
• Encoder connector dropout
• Encoder defective
• Overload
• Motor deterioration
• Replace the encoder harness
• Check the harness connection
• Replace the motor

SM 6-70 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 SC Tables: SC7xx (Peripherals)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC702- D Protection Device Intercept Error 1 (ARDF)

Troubleshooting
01 When original source 5V power supply is ON, protection device intercept of 24V
power supply system is detected.
Any of feed motor, transport motor, inverter solenoid, pick-up solenoid, feed
clutch and cooling fan motor defective, a harness short-circuit occurs, and the
protection device of the 24V power supply system intercepts.
• Replace the blown fuse or circuit board
• Replace the short-circuited parts
SC702- D Protection Device Intercept Error 2 (ARDF)
02 When original source 5V power supply is ON, protection device intercept of 24V
OUT power supply system is detected.
Stamp solenoid defective or harness short-circuit occurs in 24VOUT power
supply system.
• Replace the blown fuse or circuit board
• Replace the short-circuited parts
SC702- D Protection Device Intercept Error 3 (ARDF)
03 When original source 5V power supply is ON, protection device intercept of 5VE
power supply system is detected.
Original set sensor defective or a harness short-circuit occur in 5VE power
supply system.
• Replace the blown fuse or circuit board
• Replace the short-circuited parts
SC702- D Protection Device Intercept Error 4 (SPDF)
04 Motor defective in any of the ADF pick-up roller lift motor, stamp solenoid, ADF
bottom plate lift motor or FAN motor, or a harness short-circuit occurs, and the
protection device of the non-interlocking power supply system intercepts.
Motor defective or a harness short-circuit occurs in the non-interlocking power
supply system.
• Replace the blown fuse or circuit board
• Replace the short-circuited parts
SC702- D Protection Device Intercept Error 5 (SPDF)
05 Motor defective in the paper feed motor, entrance motor, transport motor, ADF
scanning motor or ADF exit motor, or a harness short-circuit occurs, and the
protection device of the interlocking power supply system intercepts.
Motor defective or a harness short-circuit occurs in the interlocking power supply
system.
• Replace the blown fuse or circuit board
• Replace the short-circuited parts

SM 6-71 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
SC Tables: SC7xx (Peripherals)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC720 Booklet Finisher SR3240/Finisher SR3230 Error
SC720- B Protection Device Intercept Error 1
03 Protection device intercept error state (fuse break) is detected.
• Short-circuit defective
• Overload defective
• Motor defective
• Solenoid defective
Check if the SC occurs by turning the main power OFF then ON. If the SC
occurs again, do the following steps. Check if the SC reoccurs by cycling the
power after each step.
• The target parts are all the motors and the sensors.
1. Check if the connector of the target part is connected securely. Reconnect
the connector if it is disconnected, or loose.
2. Check the harness for the target part. Replace the harness if it is
disconnected, or damaged.
3. Check if the motor runs, sensors turn OFF/ON, has no overloads, and is
properly driven. Replace the parts if there are any defects.
4. Check if there are any signs of a short circuit. Replace the parts if there are
any defects.
SC720- C Access error to NVRAM
06 Error occurs when accessing NVRAM.
Connection failure or malfunction of NVRAM
Check if the SC occurs by turning the main power OFF then ON. If the SC
occurs again, do the following steps.
1. Pull out and reinsert the NVRAM to check if the NVRAM is correctly
inserted into the IC socket. If the SC cannot be recovered, replace the main
board.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC720 Booklet Finisher SR3240/Finisher SR3230 Error
SC720- B Entrance Transport Motor Error
10
SC720- B Horizontal Transport Motor Error
11
SC720- B Transport Motor Error
13
SC720- B Pre-stack Transport Motor Error

SM 6-72 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 SC Tables: SC7xx (Peripherals)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

15

Troubleshooting
SC720- B Exit Motor Error
17
Error Condition of -06, -10, -11, -13, -15, -17
• Motor driver detects an error (DC motor control error) (1st time is
jam notification, 2nd time is SC notification)
SC720- B Lower Junction Gate Motor Error
20
SC720- B Paper Exit Guide Plate Motor Error
24
SC720- B Punch Motor Error
25
SC720- B Punch Unit Movement Motor Error
27
SC720- B Punch Registration Motor Error
28
SC720- B Jogger Motor Error
30
SC720- B Positioning Roller Shift Motor Error
33
Error Condition of -20, -24, -25, -27, -28, -30, -33
• During movement to home, the home position could not be
detected within a predetermined pulse (1st time is jam notification,
2nd time is SC notification).
• During movement from home, the home position was detected for
longer than a predetermined pulse (1st time is jam notification,
2nd time is SC notification).
SC720- B Positioning Roller Motor Error
34
• Motor driver detects an error (DC motor control error) (1st time is
jam notification, 2nd time is SC notification)
SC720- B Paper Stacking Holder Motor Error
35
• Motor driver detects an error (DC motor control error) (1st time is
jam notification, 2nd time is SC notification)
• During movement to home, the home position could not be
detected within a predetermined time (1st time is jam notification,
2nd time is SC notification).

SM 6-73 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
SC Tables: SC7xx (Peripherals)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

• During movement from home, the home position was detected for
longer than a predetermined time (1st time is jam notification, 2nd
time is SC notification).
SC720- B Stack Feed-out Motor Error
41
• Motor driver detects an error (DC motor control error) (1st time is
jam notification, 2nd time is SC notification)
• During movement to home, the home position could not be
detected within a predetermined pulse (1st time is jam notification,
2nd time is SC notification).
• During movement from home, the home position was detected for
longer than a predetermined pulse (1st time is jam notification,
2nd time is SC notification).
SC720- B Corner Stapler Movement Motor Error
42
• During movement to home, the home position could not be
detected within a predetermined pulse (1st time is jam notification,
2nd time is SC notification).
• During movement from home, the home position was detected for
longer than a predetermined pulse (1st time is jam notification,
2nd time is SC notification).
SC720- B Corner Stapler Motor Error
44
• During movement to home, the home position could not be
detected within a predetermined time (1st time is jam notification,
2nd time is SC notification).
• During movement from home, the home position was detected for
longer than a predetermined time (1st time is jam notification, 2nd
time is SC notification).
SC720- B Booklet Jogger Motor Error
50
SC720- B Booklet Jogging Pawl Movement Motor Error
51
SC720- B Press Folding Motor Error
52
SC720- B Bottom Fence Motor Error
53
Error Condition of -50, -51, -52, -53

SM 6-74 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 SC Tables: SC7xx (Peripherals)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

• During movement to home, the home position could not be detected within a

Troubleshooting
predetermined pulse (1st time is jam notification, 2nd time is SC notification).
• During movement from home, the home position was detected for longer than
a predetermined pulse (1st time is jam notification, 2nd time is SC notification).
SC720- B Fold Roller Motor Error
54
Motor driver detects an error (short-circuit and overheating)
(1st time is jam notification, 2nd time is SC notification).
SC720- B Booklet Stapler Motor Error
60
• During movement to home, the home position could not be
detected within a predetermined time (1st time is jam notification,
2nd time is SC notification).
• During movement from home, the home position was detected for
longer than a predetermined time (1st time is jam notification, 2nd
time is SC notification).
SC720- B Tray Lift Motor Error
70
• Motor controller detects an error (overload) (1st time is jam
notification, 2nd time is SC notification).
• During descent, the paper surface sensor still detects paper even
after a predetermined time (t0sec) elapses (1st time is jam
notification, 2nd time is SC notification).
• During ascent, the paper surface sensor could not detect the
paper surface even after a predetermined time (t1sec) elapses
(1st time is jam notification, 2nd time is SC notification).
SC720- B Shift Motor Error
71
SC720- B Shift Jogger Front Motor Error
72
SC720- B Shift Jogger Rear Motor Error
73
SC720- B Shift Jogger Retreat Motor Error
74
Error Condition of -71, -72, -73, -74
• During movement to home, the home position could not be
detected within a predetermined pulse (1st time is jam notification,
2nd time is SC notification).

SM 6-75 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
SC Tables: SC7xx (Peripherals)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

• During movement from home, the home position was detected for
longer than a predetermined pulse (1st time is jam notification,
2nd time is SC notification).
SC720- B Return Roller Motor Error
75
• Motor driver detects an error (DC motor control error) (1st time is
jam notification, 2nd time is SC notification)
• During movement to home, the home position could not be
detected within a predetermined time (1st time is jam notification,
2nd time is SC notification).
• During movement from home, the home position was detected for
longer than a predetermined time (1st time is jam notification, 2nd
time is SC notification).
SC720- B Protection Device Intercept Error 3
80
Fuse blowout is detected
SC720- B Shift Roller Drive Motor Error
81
Motor driver detects an error (DC motor control error) (1st time is jam
notification, 2nd time is SC notification)
SC720- B Edge Guide Motor Error
82
SC720- B Paper Guide Motor Error
83
Error Condition of -82, -83
• During movement to home, the home position could not be
detected within a predetermined pulse (1st time is jam notification,
2nd time is SC notification).
• During movement from home, the home position was detected for
longer than a predetermined pulse (1st time is jam notification,
2nd time is SC notification).
• Harness short-circuit -80 only
• Overload
• Motor defective
• Solenoid defective -03, -80 only
• Connector disconnected
• Encoder defective -10, -25, -34 -81 only
• Home position sensor defective

SM 6-76 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 SC Tables: SC7xx (Peripherals)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Check if the SC occurs by turning the main power OFF then ON. If the SC

Troubleshooting
occurs again, do the following steps. Check if the SC reoccurs by cycling the
power after each step.
1. The target parts are the motor and related HP sensor that SC occurred.
2. Check if the connector of the target part is connected securely. Reconnect
the connector if it is disconnected, or loose.
3. Check the harness for the target part. Replace the harness if it is
disconnected, or damaged.
4. Check if the motor runs, sensors turn OFF/ON, has no overloads, and is
properly driven. Replace the parts if there are any defects.
5. Check if there are any signs of a short circuit. Replace the parts if there are
any defects.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC721 Booklet Finisher SR3220 (D3B9) Error
SC721- B Protection Device Intercept Error 1
03
Fuse blowout is detected
SC721- C See the descriptions next table below.
06
SC721- B Entrance Transport Motor Error (1K sheet finisher)
10
Motor driver detects an error state (DC motor control error).
1st error detection is determined as a jam and 2nd error detection is determined
as an SC.
SC721- B Proof Transport Motor Error (1K sheet finisher)
11
Motor driver detects an error state (DC motor control error).
1st error detection is determined as a jam and 2nd error detection is determined
as an SC.
SC721- B Paper Eject Transport Motor Error (1K sheet finisher)
17
Motor driver detects an error state (DC motor control error).
1st error detection is determined as a jam and 2nd error detection is determined
as an SC.
SC721- B Paper Exit Guide Plate Open/Close Motor (1K sheet finisher)
24
• During movement to home, the home position could not be

SM 6-77 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
SC Tables: SC7xx (Peripherals)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

detected within a predetermined pulse (p0 pulse) (1st time is jam
notification, 2nd time is SC notification).
• During movement from home, the home position was detected for
longer than a predetermined pulse (p1 pulse) (1st time is jam
notification, 2nd time is SC notification).
The return pulse to home and pulse coming from home during normal operation
are calculated and measured. The pulses which are 1.5-2 times the normal
operation pulse are taken as p0 and p1.
SC721- B Punch Unit Drive Motor Error (1K sheet finisher)
25
• During movement to home, the home position could not be
detected within a predetermined time (t0 sec) (1st time is jam
notification, 2nd time is SC notification).
• During movement from home, the home position was detected
even after a predetermined time (t1 sec) elapsed (1st time is jam
notification, 2nd time is SC notification).
• Output from the encoder could not be counted for a
predetermined number of times within a predetermined time (t0
sec) (1st time is jam notification, 2nd time is SC notification).
The time to return to home without fail, the time coming from home, and the time
for which the encoder output can be counted during normal operation, are taken
as t0, t1 and t2.
SC721- B Punch Movement Motor Error (1K sheet finisher)
27
SC721- B Horizontal Registration Correction Motor Error (1K sheet finisher)
28
SC721- B Jogger Motor Error (1K sheet finisher)
30
SC721- B Positioning Roller Motor Error (1K sheet finisher)
33
SC721- B Feedout Pawl Motor Error (1K sheet finisher)
41
• During movement to home, the home position could not be
detected within a predetermined pulse (p0 pulse) (1st time is jam
notification, 2nd time is SC notification).
• During movement from home, the home position was detected
even after a predetermined pulse (p1 pulse) elapsed (1st time is
jam notification, 2nd time is SC notification).

SM 6-78 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 SC Tables: SC7xx (Peripherals)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

The return pulse to home and pulse coming from home during normal operation

Troubleshooting
are calculated and measured. The pulses which are 1.5-2 times the normal
operation pulse are taken as p0 and p1.
SC721- B Stapler Unit Displacement Motor Error (1K sheet finisher)
42
• During movement to home, the home position could not be
detected within a predetermined pulse (p0 pulse) (1st time is jam
notification, 2nd time is SC notification).
• During movement from home, the home position was detected
even after a predetermined pulse (p1 pulse) elapsed (1st time is
jam notification, 2nd time is SC notification).
• During movement from home, retreat sensor ON could not be
detected even after a predetermined pulse (p2 pulse) elapsed (1st
time is jam notification, 2nd time is SC notification).
• During initialization, retreat sensor ON was detected
simultaneously when the home position is detected (1st time is
jam notification, 2nd time is SC notification).
The return pulse to home and pulse coming from home during normal operation
are calculated and measured. The pulses which are 1.5-2 times the normal
operation pulse are taken as p0, p1 and p2.
SC721- B Stapler Error (1K sheet finisher)
44
• Motor driver detects an error (short-circuit and overheating) (1st
time is SC).
• During movement to home, the home position could not be
detected even after a predetermined time (t0 sec) elapsed (1st
time is jam notification, 2nd time is SC notification).
• During movement from home, the home position was detected
even after a predetermined time (t1 sec) elapsed (1st time is jam
notification, 2nd time is SC notification).
• During motor drive, the output from the encoder could not be
counted for a predetermined number of times within a
predetermined time (t0 sec) (1st time is jam notification, 2nd time
is SC notification).
The time to return to home without fail, the time coming from home, and the time
for which the encoder output can be counted during normal operation, are taken
as t0, t1 and t2.
SC721- B Folding Blade Motor Error (1K sheet finisher)

SM 6-79 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
SC Tables: SC7xx (Peripherals)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

52
• Motor driver detects an error (short-circuit and overheating) (1st
time is SC).
• During movement to home, the home position could not be
detected within a predetermined pulse (p0 pulse) (1st time is jam
notification, 2nd time is SC notification).
• During movement from home, the home position was detected for
longer than a predetermined pulse (p1 pulse) (1st time is jam
notification, 2nd time is SC notification).
The return pulse to home and pulse coming from home during normal operation
are calculated and measured. The pulses which are 1.5-2 times the normal
operation pulse are taken as p0 and p1.
SC721- B Rear End Fence Displacement Motor Error (1K sheet finisher)
53
• During movement to home, the home position could not be
detected within a predetermined pulse (p0 pulse) (1st time is jam
notification, 2nd time is SC notification).
• During movement from home, the home position was detected for
longer than a predetermined pulse (p1 pulse) (1st time is jam
notification, 2nd time is SC notification).
The return pulse to home and pulse coming from home during normal operation
are calculated and measured. The pulses which are 1.5-2 times the normal
operation pulse are taken as p0 and p1.
SC721- B Booklet Transport (Upper) Pressure Release Motor Error (1K sheet finisher)
58
SC721- B Booklet Transport (Lower) Pressure Release Motor Error (1K sheet finisher)
59
• During movement to home, the home position could not be
detected within a predetermined pulse (p0 pulse) (1st time is jam
notification, 2nd time is SC notification).
• During movement from home, the home position was detected for
longer than a predetermined pulse (p1 pulse) (1st time is jam
notification, 2nd time is SC notification).
The return pulse to home and pulse coming from home during normal operation
are calculated and measured. The pulses which are 1.5-2 times the normal
operation pulse are taken as p0 and p1.
SC721- B Tray Lift Motor Error (1K sheet finisher)
70

SM 6-80 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 SC Tables: SC7xx (Peripherals)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

•

Troubleshooting
Motor driver detects an error (short-circuit or overheating) (1st
time is SC).
• During descent, the paper surface sensor still detects paper even
after a predetermined time (t0sec) elapses (1st time is jam
notification, 2nd time is SC notification).
• During ascent, the paper surface sensor could not detect the
paper surface even after a predetermined time (t0sec) elapses
(1st time is jam notification, 2nd time is SC notification).
The return pulse to home and pulse coming from home during normal operation
are calculated and measured. The pulses which are 1.5-2 times the normal
operation pulse are taken as p0 and p1.
SC721- B Shift Motor Error (1K sheet finisher)
71
• During movement to home, the home position could not be
detected within a predetermined pulse (p0 pulse) (1st time is jam
notification, 2nd time is SC notification).
• During movement from home, the home position was detected for
longer than a predetermined pulse (p1 pulse) (1st time is jam
notification, 2nd time is SC notification).
The return pulse to home and pulse coming from home during normal operation
are calculated and measured. The pulses which are 1.5-2 times the normal
operation pulse are taken as p0 and p1.
SC721- B Folding Transport Motor Error (1K sheet finisher)
80
• Motor driver detects an error (short-circuit or overheating) (1st
time is SC)
SC721- B Paper Guide Drive Motor Error
81
• During movement to home, the home position could not be
detected within a predetermined pulse (1st time is jam notification,
2nd time is SC notification).
• During movement from home, the home position was detected for
longer than a predetermined pulse (1st time is jam notification,
2nd time is SC notification).
• Overcurrent (-03 only)
• Staple jam (-44 only)
• Encoder error (-11, -11, -25, -44)
• Motor defective

SM 6-81 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
SC Tables: SC7xx (Peripherals)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

• Connecter disconnected, or loose
• Motor overload
• HP sensor defective
• Paper surface sensor defective (-70 only)
Check if the SC occurs by opening/closing covers, and input/output check. If the
SC occurs again, do the following steps. Check if the SC reoccurs by cycling the
power after each step.
1. The target parts are the motor and related HP sensor that SC occurred.
2. Check if the connector of the target part is connected securely. Reconnect
the connector if it is disconnected, or loose.
3. Check the harness for the target part. Replace the harness if it is
disconnected, or damaged.
4. Check if the motor runs, sensors turn OFF/ON, has no overloads, and is
properly driven. Replace the parts if there are any defects.
5. Check if there are any signs of a short circuit. Replace the parts if there are
any defects.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC721 Booklet Finisher SR3220 (D3B9) Error
SC721- C Access error to NVRAM
06 Error occurs when accessing NVRAM.
Connection failure or malfunction of NVRAM
Check if the SC occurs by turning the main power OFF then ON. If the SC
occurs again, do the following steps.
1. Pull out and reinsert the NVRAM to check if the NVRAM is correctly
inserted into the IC socket. If the SC cannot be recovered, replace the
main board.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC722 Finisher SR3210 (D3B8) Error
SC722- B Protection Device Intercept Error 1
03
Fuse blowout is detected
SC722- C See the descriptions next table below.
06
SC722- B Entrance Transport Motor Error
10
Motor driver detects an error state (DC motor control error) (1st time is jam

SM 6-82 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 SC Tables: SC7xx (Peripherals)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

notification, 2nd time is SC notification).

Troubleshooting
SC722- B Proof Transport Motor Error
11
Motor driver detects an error state (DC motor control error) (1st time is jam
notification, 2nd time is SC notification).
SC722- B Paper Exit Transport Motor 2 Error
17
Motor driver detects an error state (DC motor control error) (1st time is jam
notification, 2nd time is SC notification).
SC722- B Paper Exit Guide Plate Open/Close Motor Error
24
• During movement to home, the home position could not be
detected within a predetermined pulse (1st time is jam notification,
2nd time is SC notification).
• During movement from home, the home position was detected for
longer than a predetermined pulse (1st time is jam notification,
2nd time is SC notification).
SC722- B Punch Unit Drive Motor Error
25
• During movement to home, the home position could not be
detected within a predetermined time (1st time is jam notification,
2nd time is SC notification).
• During movement from home, the home position was detected
even after a predetermined time elapsed (1st time is jam
notification, 2nd time is SC notification).
• Output from the encoder could not be counted for a
predetermined number of times within a predetermined time (1st
time is jam notification, 2nd time is SC notification).
SC722- B Horizontal Registration Unit Transfer Motor Error
27
SC722- B Horizontal Registration Correction Motor Error
28
SC722- B Jogger Motor Error
30
SC722- B Positioning Roller Motor Error
33
SC722- B Feedout Pawl Motor Error
41

SM 6-83 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
SC Tables: SC7xx (Peripherals)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

• During movement to home, the home position could not be
detected within a predetermined pulse (1st time is jam notification,
2nd time is SC notification).
• During movement from home, the home position was detected
even after a predetermined pulse elapsed (1st time is jam
notification, 2nd time is SC notification).
SC722- B Stapler Transfer Motor Error
42
• During movement to home, the home position could not be
detected within a predetermined pulse (1st time is jam notification,
2nd time is SC notification).
• During movement from home, the home position was detected
even after a predetermined pulse elapsed (1st time is jam
notification, 2nd time is SC notification).
• During movement from home, retreat sensor ON could not
bebdetected even after a predetermined pulse elapsed (1st time
is jambnotification, 2nd time is SC notification).
• During initialization, retreat sensor ON was detected
simultaneouslybwhen the home position is detected (1st time is
jam notification, 2ndbtime is SC notification).
SC722- B Stapler Motor Error
44
• Motor driver detects an error (short-circuit or overheating) (1st
time is SC).
• During movement to home, the home position could not be
detected even after a predetermined time elapsed (1st time is jam
notification, 2nd time is SC notification).
• During movement from home, the home position was detected
even after a predetermined time elapsed (1st time is jam
notification, 2nd time is SC notification).
• During motor drive, the output from the encoder could not be
counted for a predetermined number of times within a
predetermined time (1st time is jam notification, 2nd time is SC
notification).
SC722- B Stapleless Stapler Transfer Motor Error
45
• Motor driver detects an error (short-circuit or overheating) (1st
time is SC).

SM 6-84 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 SC Tables: SC7xx (Peripherals)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

•

Troubleshooting
During movement to home, the home position could not be
detected within a predetermined pulse (1st time is jam notification,
2nd time is SC notification).
• During movement from home, the home position was detected
even after a predetermined pulse elapsed (1st time is jam
notification, 2nd time is SC notification).
SC722- B Stapleless Stapler Motor Error
46
• Motor driver detects an error (short-circuit or overheating) (1st
time is SC).
• During movement to home, the home position could not be
detected even after a predetermined time elapsed (1st time is jam
notification, 2nd time is SC notification).
• During movement from home, the home position was detected
even after a predetermined time elapsed (1st time is jam
notification, 2nd time is SC notification).
SC722- B Paper Guide Drive Motor Error
47
• During movement to home, the home position could not be
detected within a predetermined pulse (1st time is jam notification,
2nd time is SC notification).
• During movement from home, the home position was detected for
longer than a predetermined pulse (1st time is jam notification,
2nd time is SC notification).
SC722- B Tray Lift Motor Error
70
• Motor driver detects an error (short-circuit or overheating) (1st
time is SC).
• During descent, the paper surface sensor still detects paper even
after a predetermined time (t0sec) elapses (1st time is jam
notification, 2nd time is SC notification).
• During ascent, the paper surface sensor could not detect the
paper surface even after a predetermined time (t0sec) elapses
(1st time is jam notification, 2nd time is SC notification).
SC722- B Shift Motor Error
71
SC722- B Paper Guide Drive Motor
81

SM 6-85 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
SC Tables: SC7xx (Peripherals)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

• During movement to home, the home position could not be
detected within a predetermined pulse (1st time is jam notification,
2nd time is SC notification).
• During movement from home, the home position was detected for
longer than a predetermined pulse (1st time is jam notification,
2nd time is SC notification).
• Overcurrent (-03 only)
• Staple jam (-44 only)
• Encoder error (-11, -11, -25, -44)
• Motor defective
• Connecter disconnected, or loose
• Motor overload
• HP sensor defective
• Paper surface sensor defective (-70 only)
Check if the SC occurs by opening/closing covers, and input/output check. If the
SC occurs again, do the following steps. Check if the SC reoccurs by cycling the
power after each step.
1. The target parts are the motor and related HP sensor that SC occurred.
2. Check if the connector of the target part is connected securely. Reconnect
the connector if it is disconnected, or loose.
3. Check the harness for the target part. Replace the harness if it is
disconnected, or damaged.
4. Check if the motor runs, sensors turn OFF/ON, has no overloads, and is
properly driven. Replace the parts if there are any defects.
5. Check if there are any signs of a short circuit. Replace the parts if there are
any defects.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC722 Finisher SR3210 (D3B8) Error
SC722- C Access error to NVRAM
06
Error occurs when accessing NVRAM.
Connection failure or malfunction of NVRAM
Check if the SC occurs by turning the main power OFF then ON. If the SC
occurs again, do the following steps.
1. Pull out and reinsert the NVRAM to check if the NVRAM is correctly
inserted into the IC socket. If the SC cannot be recovered, replace the
main board.

SM 6-86 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 SC Tables: SC7xx (Peripherals)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Troubleshooting
SC723- B Power Supply Error (Internal Finisher: Non-Staple Bind)
03 When original source 24V power supply is ON, protection device intercept of
non-interlock power supply system is detected.
A motor failure or harness short-circuit occur in the non-interlock power supply
system.
• Replace the short-circuited harnesses
• Replace the protection devices
SC723- B Transport Motor Error (Internal Finisher: Non-Staple Bind)
10 The DCM driver error detection is started after reset, and predetermined
milliseconds error signal is detected.
This SC will be issued when the above phenomenon repeated 2 times.
• Transport Motor failure
• Harness short-circuit
• Circuit board failure
• Over current
• Abnormal temperature
• Replace the motor
• Replace the harness
• Replace the circuit board.
SC723- B Junction Gate Motor Error (Internal Finisher: Non-Staple Bind)
20 When the junction gate motor HP sensor was not turned off while
predetermined seconds applied to the junction gate motor with the HP sensor
turned on.
When the junction gate motor HP sensor was not turned on while
predetermined seconds applied to the junction gate motor with the HP sensor
turned off.
This SC will be issued when the above phenomenon repeated 2 times.
• Junction Gate Motor failure
• Connector disconnected
• Over load
• Junction gate motor HP sensor error
• Check the connection
• Replace the motor/sensor
• Replace the harness
SC723- B Paper Exit Pressure Motor Error (Internal Finisher: Non-Staple Bind)
24 When the exit paper pressure HP sensor was not turned off while
predetermined seconds applied to the exit pressure release motor with the HP

SM 6-87 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
SC Tables: SC7xx (Peripherals)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

sensor turned on.
When paper output pressure HP sensor was not turned on while predetermined
seconds applied to the exit pressure release motor with the HP sensor turned
off.
This SC will be issued when the above phenomenon repeated 2 times.
• Exit Pressure Release Motor failure
• Connector disconnected
• Over load
• Exit pressure release HP sensor error
• Check the connection
• Replace the motor/sensor
• Replace the harness
SC723- B Stapler Drive Motor Error (Internal Finisher: Non-Staple Bind)
44 When the stapler drive HP sensor was not turned off while predetermined
seconds applied to the stapler motor with the HP sensor turned on.
When stapler drive HP sensor was not turned on while predetermined seconds
applied to the stapler motor with the HP sensor turned off.
The STM driver error detection is started after reset, and predetermined
seconds error signal is detected.
This SC will be issued when the above phenomenon repeated 2 times.
• Stapler Motor failure
• Connector disconnected
• Stapler Motor overload
• Stapler HP sensor error
• Harness short-circuit
• Circuit board failure
• Excess current
• Abnormal temperature
• Check the connection
• Replace the motor/sensor
• Replace the harness
• Replace the circuit board
SC723- B Shift Motor Error (Internal Finisher: Non-Staple Bind)
71 When the shift HP sensor was not turned off while predetermined seconds
applied to the shift motor with the HP sensor turned on.
When shift HP sensor was not turned on while predetermined seconds applied
to the shift motor with the HP sensor turned off.
The STM driver error detection is started after reset, and predetermined

SM 6-88 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 SC Tables: SC7xx (Peripherals)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

seconds error signal is detected.

Troubleshooting
This SC will be issued when the above phenomenon repeated 2 times.
• Shift Motor failure
• Connector disconnected
• Shift Motor overload
• Shift HP sensor error
• Harness short-circuit
• Circuit board failure
• Excess current
• Abnormal temperature
• Check the connection
• Replace the motor/sensor
• Replace the harness
• Replace the circuit board

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC724 Internal Finisher Error
SC724- B Paper Exit Guide Plate Motor Error (Internal finisher)
24 • When Paper Output Open/Close Guide Plate Motor is driven for
predetermined seconds after paper exit guide plate HP sensor
ON, the HP sensor does not switch OFF (1st time is jam
notification, 2nd time is SC notification).
• When Paper Output Open/Close Guide Plate Motor is driven for
predetermined seconds after paper exit guide plate HP sensor
OFF, the HP sensor does not switch ON (1st time is jam
notification, 2nd time is SC notification).
SC724- B Punch Unit Motor Error (Internal finisher)
25 • When punch motor is driven for predetermined seconds after
punch HP sensor ON, the HP sensor does not switch OFF (1st
time is jam notification, 2nd time is SC notification).
• When punch motor is driven for predetermined seconds after
punch HP sensor OFF, the HP sensor does not switch ON (1st
time is jam notification, 2nd time is SC notification).
SC724- B Horizontal Registration Movement Unit Motor Error (Internal finisher)
27 • When Horizontal Registration Movement Unit Motor is driven for
predetermined seconds when horizontal registration movement
HP sensor is ON, the HP sensor does not switch OFF (1st time is
jam notification, 2nd time is SC notification).

SM 6-89 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
SC Tables: SC7xx (Peripherals)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

• When Horizontal Registration Movement Unit Motor is driven for
predetermined seconds when horizontal registration movement
HP sensor is OFF, the HP sensor does not switch ON (1st time is
jam notification, 2nd time is SC notification).
SC724- B Horizontal Registration Transport Unit Motor Error (Internal finisher)
28 • When Punch Horizontal Registration Detection Unit Motor is
driven for predetermined seconds when horizontal registration
detection HP sensor is ON, the HP sensor does not switch OFF
(1st time is jam notification, 2nd time is SC notification).
• When Punch Horizontal Registration Detection Unit Motor is
driven for predetermined seconds when horizontal registration
detection HP sensor is OFF, the HP sensor does not switch ON
(1st time is jam notification, 2nd time is SC notification).
SC724- B Jogger Fence Motor (Front) Error (Internal finisher)
31 • When Jogger Fence Motor (Front) is driven for predetermined
seconds when front jogger HP sensor is ON, the HP sensor does
not switch OFF (1st time is jam notification, 2nd time is SC
notification).
• When Jogger Fence Motor (Front) is driven for predetermined
seconds when front jogger HP sensor is OFF, the HP sensor does
not switch ON (1st time is jam notification, 2nd time is SC
notification).
SC724- B Jogger Fence Motor (Rear) Error (Internal finisher)
32 • When Jogger Fence Motor (Rear) is driven for predetermined
seconds when rear jogger HP sensor is ON, the HP sensor does
not switch OFF (1st time is jam notification, 2nd time is SC
notification).
• When Jogger Fence Motor (Rear) is driven for predetermined
seconds when rear jogger HP sensor is OFF, the HP sensor does
not switch ON (1st time is jam notification, 2nd time is SC
notification).
SC724- B Positioning Roller Motor Error (Internal finisher)
33 • During initialization/strike descent, even when the strike roller
motor is driven for predetermined seconds when the strike roller
HP sensor is ON, the HP sensor does not switch OFF (1st time is
jam notification, 2nd time is SC notification).
• During initialization, even when the strike roller motor is driven for
predetermined seconds when the strike roller HP sensor is OFF,

SM 6-90 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 SC Tables: SC7xx (Peripherals)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

the HP sensor does not switch ON (1st time is jam notification,

Troubleshooting
2nd time is SC notification).
• When the strike roller is lifted from the press position, even when
driven for predetermined seconds the HP sensor does not switch
ON (1st time is jam notification, 2nd time is SC notification).
SC724- B Stack Height Lever Motor Error (Internal finisher)
38 • When the paper press HP sensor is ON and the paper press
motor is driven for predetermined seconds, the HP sensor does
not switch OFF (1st time is jam notification, 2nd time is SC
notification).
• When the paper press HP sensor is OFF and the paper press
motor is driven for predetermined seconds, the HP sensor does
not switch ON (1st time is jam notification, 2nd time is SC
notification).
SC724- B Stapler Retreat Motor Error (Internal finisher)
42 • Sifter stapler displacement HP sensor ON, even when the stapler
displacement motor is driven for predetermined seconds, the HP
sensor does not switch OFF (1st time is jam notification, 2nd time
is SC notification).
• After stapler displacement HP sensor OFF, even when the stapler
displacement motor is driven for predetermined seconds, the HP
sensor does not switch ON (1st time is jam notification, 2nd time
is SC notification).
SC724- B Tray Lift Motor Error (Internal finisher)
70 • During ascent from paper surface sensor ON, even after
predetermined seconds elapses, the paper surface sensor does
not switch OFF (1st time is jam notification, 2nd time is SC
notification).
• During descent from paper surface sensor OFF, the paper surface
sensor does not switch ON even after predetermined seconds
elapses (1st time is jam notification, 2nd time is SC notification).
• During descent to the packing position, the full sensor does not
switch ON even if predetermined seconds elapses.
SC724- B Shift Motor Error
71 If the shift sensor has no response after the shift motor starts moving 1.86 sec.
SC724- B Shift Motor Error (Internal finisher)
80 • When the shift roller HP sensor is ON, the HP sensor does not
switch OFF even when the shift roller motor is driven for

SM 6-91 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
SC Tables: SC7xx (Peripherals)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

predetermined seconds (1st time is jam notification, 2nd time is
SC notification)
• When the shift roller HP sensor is OFF, the HP sensor does not
switch ON even when the shift roller motor is driven for
predetermined seconds (1st time is jam notification, 2nd time is
SC notification).
SC724- B Stapler Motor Error (Internal finisher)
86 • HP sensor does not switch OFF even when the stapler motor is
driven for predetermined seconds after the stapler HP sensor
switches ON (1st time is jam notification, 2nd time is SC
notification).
• HP sensor does not switch ON even when the stapler motor is
driven for predetermined seconds after the stapler HP sensor
switches OFF (1st time is jam notification, 2nd time is SC
notification).
• Motor defective
• Connector disconnected
• Motor overload
• Home position sensor error
• Paper surface sensor error (*SC724-38, 70 only)
• Staple jam (*SC724-86 only)
• Reset the connector
• Replace the motor
• Replace the sensor
• Replace the harness
• Remove the staple jam (*SC724-86 only)

SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC727 Internal Multi-fold Unit FD3000 Error

SC727- B Connection Error to Downstream Unit

01
Communication error has occurred with the serial interface of the downstream
unit.
This is displayed as an SC code from its initial detection.
• Harness defective
• Downstream unit defective
• Controller board defective

SM 6-92 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 SC Tables: SC7xx (Peripherals)

SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

•

Troubleshooting
I/F connector defective
Remove the jammed paper or slip of paper from the tray, and check if the SC
occurs by turning the main power OFF then ON. If the SC occurs again, do the
following steps. Check if the SC reoccurs by cycling the power after each step.
1. Turn the power off, disconnect the interface connector connected to the
machine, connect the interface connector of the downstream unit to the
machine, and then turn the power on.
2. If the downstream unit does not operate, resulting in connection error, there
is a problem with the downstream unit, so repair the downstream unit.
3. Check the harness connections between the controller board and each
connector. Replace the harness if it is damaged, or connect it if it is
disconnected.
4. Check if there are any signs of a short circuit. Replace the parts if there are
any defects.
SC727- B Protection Device Intercept Error 1
03
• Fuse (FU3) break is detected
• 24-V power supply line error
This is displayed as an SC code from its initial detection.
• Fuse (FU3) is blowout
• Controller board defective
• 24-V harness entrapment (short circuit)
Remove the jammed paper or slip of paper from the tray, and check if the SC
occurs by turning the main power OFF then ON. If the SC occurs again, do the
following steps. Check if the SC reoccurs by cycling the power after each step.
1. The target parts are all the motors and the sensors.
2. Check that the harness between the PCB and motor/solenoid is not stripped
or entrapped. Replace the harness if there are any defects.
3. Rotate each motor shaft by hand to check for any overload. Replace the
motor if there are any defects.
4. Check if there is any unusual odor from the solenoid or any problem with its
appearance. Replace the solenoid if there are any defects.
5. Check if there are any signs of a short circuit on PCB. Replace the PCB if
there are any defects.
SC727- B Protection Device Intercept Error 2
04
• Poly-switch (FU4) break is detected
• Limit line disturbances from inrush currents has occurred to the

SM 6-93 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
SC Tables: SC7xx (Peripherals)

SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

interlock system.
• This is displayed as an SC code from its initial detection.
• Poly-switch (FU4) trip (Trip refers to the phenomenon whereby an
overcurrent flows into the poly-switch, resulting in high resistance.)
• Controller board defective
• 24-V harness entrapment (short circuit)
Remove the jammed paper or slip of paper from the tray, and check if the SC
occurs by turning the main power OFF then ON, submitting a job, feeding paper,
opening/closing covers, and input/output check. If the SC occurs again, do the
following steps. Check if the SC reoccurs by cycling the power after each step.
1. The target parts are all the motors and the sensors.
2. Check that the harness between the PCB and the motor/solenoid is not
stripped or entrapped. Replace the harness if there are any defects.
3. Rotate each motor shaft by hand to check for any overload. Replace the
motor if there are any defects.
4. Check if there is any unusual odor from the solenoid or any problem with its
appearance. Replace the solenoid if there are any defects.
5. Check if there are any signs of a short circuit on PCB. Replace the PCB if
there are any defects.
SC727- C NVRAM Error 1
06
An error has occurred during an access to the NVRAM.
This is displayed as an SC code from its initial detection.
NVRAM is disconnected, or defective
Turn the main power OFF then ON after checking whether there are no foreign
objects (such as remaining paper) in the tray. If the SC occurs again, replace the
controller board.
SC727- B Transport Motor Error
10
Motor error (Encoder error)
This is reported as a jam error when detected for the first time. If it occurs again
in a row, its SC code appears.
• Motor defective
• Motor harness entrapped (short circuit or breaking of wire)
• Connector disconnected
• Controller board defective
Remove the jammed paper or slip of paper from the tray, and check if the SC
occurs by turning the main power OFF then ON, submitting a job, feeding paper,

SM 6-94 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 SC Tables: SC7xx (Peripherals)

SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

opening/closing covers, and input/output check. If the SC occurs again, do the

Troubleshooting
following steps. Check if the SC reoccurs by cycling the power after each step
1. Check if all connectors between the controller board and the motors are
connected securely. Reconnect the connectors if they are disconnected, or
loose.
2. Replace the harness if it is disconnected, or damaged.
3. Check if the motor runs, has no overloads, and is properly driven. Replace
the parts if there are any defects.
4. Check if there are any signs of a short circuit. Replace the parts if there are
any defects.
SC727- B Registration Motor Error
12
Motor error (Encoder error)
This is reported as a jam error when detected for the first time. If it occurs again
in a row, its SC code appears.
• Motor defective
• Motor harness entrapped (short circuit or breaking of wire)
• Connector disconnected
• Controller board defective
Remove the jammed paper or slip of paper from the tray, and check if the SC
occurs by turning the main power OFF then ON, submitting a job, feeding paper,
opening/closing covers, and input/output check. If the SC occurs again, do the
following steps. Check if the SC reoccurs by cycling the power after each step.
1. Check if all connectors between the controller board and the motors are
connected securely. Reconnect the connectors if they are disconnected, or
loose.
2. Replace the harness if it is disconnected, or damaged.
3. Check if the motor runs, has no overloads, and is properly driven. Replace
the parts if there are any defects.
4. Check if there are any signs of a short circuit. Replace the parts if there are
any defects.
SC727- B JG Crease Motor Error 1
20
• Motor error (Encoder error)
• The junction gate is not at the HP position.
This is reported as a jam error when detected for the first time. If it
occurs again in a row, its SC code appears.
• Motor defective

SM 6-95 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
SC Tables: SC7xx (Peripherals)

SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

• Motor/sensor harness entrapped (short circuit or breaking of wire)
• Connector disconnected
• Junction Solenoid HP Sensor defective
• Controller board defective
Remove the jammed paper or slip of paper from the tray, and check if the SC
occurs by turning the main power OFF then ON, submitting a job, feeding paper,
opening/closing covers, and input/output check. If the SC occurs again, do the
following steps. Check if the SC reoccurs by cycling the power after each step.
1. Check if all connectors between the controller board and the motors/sensors
are connected securely. Reconnect the connectors if they are disconnected,
or loose.
2. Replace the harness if it is disconnected, or damaged.
3. Check if the motor runs, has no overloads, and is properly driven. Replace
the parts if there are any defects.
4. Check if the sensor turns OFF/ON. Replace the parts if there are any
defects.
5. Check if there are any signs of a short circuit. Replace the parts if there are
any defects.
SC727- B 1st Fold Motor Error
39
Motor error (Encoder error)
This is reported as a jam error when detected for the first time. If it occurs again
in a row, its SC code appears.
• Motor defective
• Motor harness entrapped (short circuit or breaking of wire)
• Connector disconnected
• Controller board defective
Remove the jammed paper or slip of paper from the tray, and check if the SC
occurs by turning the main power OFF then ON, submitting a job, feeding paper,
opening/closing covers, and input/output check. If the SC occurs again, do the
following steps. Check if the SC reoccurs by cycling the power after each step.
1. Check if all connectors between the controller board and the motors are
connected securely. Reconnect the connectors if they are disconnected, or
loose.
2. Replace the harness if it is disconnected, or damaged.
3. Check if the motor runs, has no overloads, and is properly driven. Replace
the parts if there are any defects.
4. Check if there are any signs of a short circuit. Replace the parts if there are

SM 6-96 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 SC Tables: SC7xx (Peripherals)

SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

any defects.

Troubleshooting
SC727- B JG Crease Motor Error 2
41
• Motor error (Encoder error)
• Crease Roller is not at the HP position.
This is reported as a jam error when detected for the first time. If it occurs again
in a row, its SC code appears.
• Motor defective
• Motor/sensor harness entrapped (short circuit or breaking of wire)
Connector disconnected
• Crease HP Sensor defective
• Controller board defective
Remove the jammed paper or slip of paper from the tray, and check if the SC
occurs by turning the main power OFF then ON, submitting a job, feeding paper,
opening/closing covers, and input/output check. If the SC occurs again, do the
following steps. Check if the SC reoccurs by cycling the power after each step.
1. Check if all connectors between the controller board and the motors/sensors
are connected securely. Reconnect the connectors if they are disconnected,
or loose.
2. Replace the harness if it is disconnected, or damaged.
3. Check if the motor runs, has no overloads, and is properly driven. Replace
the parts if there are any defects.
4. Check if the sensor turns OFF/ON. Replace the parts if there are any
defects.
5. Check if there are any signs of a short circuit. Replace the parts if there are
any defects.
SC727- B 2nd Fold Motor Error
71
Encoder error
This is reported as a jam error when detected for the first time. If it occurs again
in a row, its SC code appears.
• Motor defective
• Motor harness entrapped (short circuit or breaking of wire)
• Connector disconnected
• Controller board defective
Remove the jammed paper or slip of paper from the tray, and check if the SC
occurs by turning the main power OFF then ON, submitting a job, feeding paper,
opening/closing covers, and input/output check. If the SC occurs again, do the

SM 6-97 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
SC Tables: SC7xx (Peripherals)

SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

following steps. Check if the SC reoccurs by cycling the power after each step.
1. Check if all connectors between the controller board and the motors are
connected securely. Reconnect the connectors if they are disconnected, or
loose.
2. Replace the harness if it is disconnected, or damaged.
3. Check if the motor runs, has no overloads, and is properly driven. Replace
the parts if there are any defects.
4. Check if there are any signs of a short circuit. Replace the parts if there are
any defects.
SC727- B The power supply for the sensor is defective.
72
The power supply for the sensor (5V_SN) is defective.
This is displayed as an SC code from its initial detection.
• Sensor harness entrapped (short circuit or breaking of wire)
• Sensor defective
• Controller board defective
Turn the main power OFF then ON after checking whether there are no foreign
objects (such as remaining paper) in the tray. If the SC occurs again, do the
following steps. Check if the SC reoccurs by cycling the power after each step.
1. Check if the harness is connected to the wrong sensor. Reconnect the
connector if there are any defects.
2. Replace the harness if it is disconnected, or damaged.
3. Check if the sensor turns OFF/ON. Replace the parts if there are any
defects.
4. Check if the motor runs, has no overloads, and is properly driven. Replace
the parts if there are any defects.
5. Check if there are any signs of a short circuit. Replace the parts if there are
any defects.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC761 Bridge Unit BU3070 (D685) or Side Tray Type M3 (D725) Error
SC761- B Protection Device Intercept Error 5V
03
SC761- B Protection Device Intercept Error 24V
04
Fuse blowout occurs due to over current during power injection (output
detected for longer than 2 seconds).
• Over current of bridge unit motor

SM 6-98 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 SC Tables: SC7xx (Peripherals)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

•

Troubleshooting
Over current due to short-circuit in PCB
• Replace the bridge unit or side tray.
• Replace the PCB of bridge unit or side tray.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC780- D Bank 1 (Upper optional paper tray) Protection Device Intercept Error
01
When original source of 5V power supply is ON, protection device intercept of
24V power system is detected.
In 24V power supply system:
• Motor defective
• Solenoid defective
• Harness short- circuit
Remove the jammed paper or slip of paper from the tray, and check if the SC
occurs by turning the main power OFF then ON. If the SC occurs again, do the
following steps. Check if the SC reoccurs by cycling the power after each step.
1. Check if all connectors in tray 1, 2, and optional upper tray are connected
securely. Reconnect the connectors if they are disconnected, or loose.
2. Check the harness in tray 1, 2, and optional upper tray. Replace the
harness if it is disconnected, or damaged.
3. Check if the motor runs, has no overloads, and is properly driven. Replace
the parts if there are any defects.
4. Check if there are any signs of a short circuit. Replace the parts if there are
any defects.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC781- D Bank 2 (Lower optional paper tray) Protection Device Intercept Error
01
When original source of 5V power supply is ON, protection device intercept of
24V power system is detected.
In 24V power supply system:
• Motor defective
• Solenoid defective
• Harness short- circuit
Remove the jammed paper or slip of paper from the tray, and check if the SC
occurs by turning the main power OFF then ON. If the SC occurs again, do the
following steps. Check if the SC reoccurs by cycling the power after each step.
1. Check if all connectors in tray 1, 2, and optional upper/lower trays are

SM 6-99 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
SC Tables: SC7xx (Peripherals)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

connected securely. Reconnect the connectors if they are disconnected, or
loose.
2. Check the harness in tray 1, 2, and optional upper/lower trays. Replace the
harness if it is disconnected, or damaged.
3. Check if the motor runs, has no overloads, and is properly driven. Replace
the parts if there are any defects.
4. Check if there are any signs of a short circuit. Replace the parts if there are
any defects.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC791- D No Bridge Unit when Finisher is Present
00
When power supply is switched on or paper is transported, finisher set is
detected but bridge unit set is not detected.
(during internal finisher connection, not detected)
• Bridge unit not attached
• Bridge unit defective
• Reset the bridge unit.
• Turn the main power off/on.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC792- B No Finisher, Bridge Unit Provided
00
When power supply is switched on, it is recognized there is no finisher, and a
bridge unit is fitted.
• Finisher connector set incorrectly
• In a machine which has a bridge unit connected, a finisher is not
fitted
• Finisher defective
Connect finisher or disconnect bridge unit, and turn the main power off/on.

SM 6-100 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 SC Tables: SC8xx

6.9 SC TABLES: SC8XX

Troubleshooting
6.9.1 SC816 TO SC899
SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution
SC816 [0x0000] Energy save I/O subsystem error
SC816-01 D Subsystem error
SC816-02 D Sysarch (LPUX_GET_PORT_INFO) error
SC816-03 D Transition to STR was denied.
SC816-04 D Interrupt in kernel communication driver
SC816-05 D Preparation for transition to STR failed.
SC816-07 D Sysarch (LPUX_GET_PORT_INFO) error
SC816-08 D Sysarch (LPUX_ENGINE_TIMERCTRL) error
SC816-09 D Sysarch (LPUX_RETURN_FACTOR_STR) error
SC816-10 to D Sysarch (LPUX_GET_PORT_INFO) error
12
SC816-13 D open() error
SC816-14 D Memory address error
SC816-15 to D open() error
18
SC816-19 D Double open() error
SC816-20 D open() error
SC816-22 D Parameter error
SC816-23, D read() error
24
SC816-25 D write () error
SC816-26 to D write() communication retry error
28
SC816-29, D read() communication retry error
30
SC816-35 D read() error
SC816-36 to D Subsystem error
94
Energy save I/O subsystem detected some abnormality.
• Energy save I/O subsystem defective
• Energy save I/O subsystem detected a controller board
error (non-response).
• Error was detected during preparation for transition to
STR.

SM 6-101 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
SC Tables: SC8xx

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

• Turn the main power off/on.
• Replace the controller board.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC818- D Watchdog timer error
00 The system program fell into a bus-hold state or an endless loop of the program
interruption occurred, causing other process to stop.
• System program defective
• Controller board defective
• Optional board defective
• Turn the main power off/on.
• Replace the controller board.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC819- D Kernel halt error
00 [xxxx]: Detailed error code
Due to a control error, a RAM overflow occurred during system processing.
One of the following messages was displayed on the operation panel.
[0x5032] HAIC-P2 error
HAIC-P2 decompression error (An error occurred in the ASIC
compression/decompression module.)
• Turn the main power off/on.
• Replace the HDD.
• Repace the memory
• Replace the controller board.
• Fix the software
[0x6261] HDD defective
6261 6420 6469 7200 00 -> "bad dir"
Replace the HDD.
[0x696e] gwinit processing end
If the SCS process is ended for some reason
If an unexpected error occurs at SCS processing end, gwint processing
also halts (this result is judged a kernel stop error, by gwinit specification)
“0x69742064” -> “init died”
Turn the main power off/on.
[0x766d] VM full error
Occurs when too much RAM is used during system processing
"vm_pageout: VM is full"

SM 6-102 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 SC Tables: SC8xx

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Turn the main power off/on.

Troubleshooting
Console Other error (characters on operation panel)
string System detected internal mismatch error
• Software defective
• Insufficient memory
• Hardware driver defective (RAM, Flash memory)
• Turn the main power off/on.
• Replace the controller board.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC840- D EEPROM access error
00 • During the I/O processing, a reading error occurred. The 3rd
reading failure causes this SC code.
• During the I/O processing, a writing error occurred.
• Defective EEPROM
-

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC841-00 D EEPROM read data error
Mirrored data of the EEPROM is different from the original data in EEPROM.
Data in the EEPROM is overwritten for some reason.
-

No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC842- C Nand-Flash updating verification error
00 SCS write error (verify error) occurred at the Nand-Flash module when remote
ROM or main ROM was updated.
Nand-Flash defective
Turn the main power OFF/ON.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC842- B Insufficient Nand-Flash blocks (threshold exceeded)
01 At startup, or when machine returned from low power mode, the Nand-Flash
status was read and judged that the number of unusable blocks had exceeded
threshold, and then SCS generated the SC code.
Number of unusable blocks exceeded threshold for Nand-Flash
Replace the controller board.

SM 6-103 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
SC Tables: SC8xx

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC842- B Number of Nand-Flash block deletions exceeded
02 At startup, or when the machined returned from low power mode, the Nand-
Flash was read and judged that the number of deleted blocks had exceeded
threshold, and then SCS generated this SC code.
Number of blocks deleted exceeded threshold for Nand-Flash
Replace the controller board.

No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC845 Hardware Error Detected when the automatic firmware update
SC845- D Engine Board
01
SC845- D Controller Board
02
SC845- D Operation Panel (Normal)
03
SC845- D Operation Panel (Smart Panel)
04
SC845- D FCU
05
When updating the firmware automatically (ARFU), the firmware cannot be read
or written normally, and the firmware update cannot be completed even by 3
retries.
Hardware abnormality of the target board
Replace the target board.
For SC845-02, HDD and memory may cause the problem. Replace the HDD or
memory if the SC cannot be recovered by replacing the controller board.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC855-01 B Wireless LAN board error (driver attachment failure)
Wireless LAN board error (wireless LAN card: 802.11 is covered)
• Defective wireless LAN board
• Loose connection
• Turn the main power off/on.
• Replace the wireless LAN board.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC855-02 B Wireless LAN board error (driver initialization failure)
Wireless LAN board error (wireless LAN card: 802.11 is covered)

SM 6-104 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 SC Tables: SC8xx

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

•

Troubleshooting
Defective wireless LAN board
• Loose connection
• Turn the main power off/on.
• Replace the wireless LAN board.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC858-00 A Data encryption conversion error (Key Setting Error)
A serious error occurred during an attempt to update the encryption key.
• USB Flash, other data, corrupted
• Communication error caused by electrostatic noise
• Controller board defective
Replace the controller board.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC858-01 A Data encryption conversion error (HDD Key Setting Error)
A serious error occurred during an attempt to update the encryption key.
• USB Flash, other data, corrupted
• Communication error caused by electrostatic noise
• Controller board defective
Replace the controller board.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC858- A Data encryption conversion error (NVRAM Read/Write Error)
02 A serious error occurred after data conversion during an attempt to update the
encryption key.
NVRAM defective
Replace the controller board.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC858- A Data encryption conversion error (NVRAM Before Replace Error)
30 A serious error occurred after data conversion during an attempt to update the
encryption key.
Software error such as conversion parameters being invalid.
Replace the controller board.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC858- A Data encryption conversion error (Other Error)

SM 6-105 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
SC Tables: SC8xx

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

31 A serious error occurred after data conversion during an attempt to update the
encryption key.
Controller board defective
Replace the controller board.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC859- B Data encryption conversion HDD conversion error
00 When the data encryption key was updated, HDD data was converted, but not
correctly. Image displayed at conversion only (this SC is not displayed), but SC
is displayed after machine is cycled off/on.
• HDD conversion was set with the data encryption key update
function, but the HDD was removed.
• Machine lost power during data encryption key update
• Electrostatic noise, or an HDD error occurred, during data
encryption key update, and data was not encrypted.
• Check the HDD connection.
• Format the HDD.
• If there is a problem with the HDD, it has to be replaced.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC859- B Data encryption conversion HDD conversion error (HDD check error)
01 When the data encryption key was updated, HDD data was converted, but not
correctly. Image displayed at conversion only (this SC is not displayed), but SC
is displayed after machine is cycled off/on.
• HDD conversion was set with the data encryption key update
function, but the HDD was removed.
• Machine lost power during data encryption key update
• Electrostatic noise, or an HDD error occurred, during data
encryption key update, and data was not encrypted.
• Check the HDD connection.
• Format the HDD.
• If there is a problem with the HDD, it has to be replaced.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC859- B Data encryption conversion HDD conversion error (Power failure during
02 conversion)
When the data encryption key was updated, HDD data was converted, but not
correctly. Image displayed at conversion only (this SC is not displayed), but SC

SM 6-106 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 SC Tables: SC8xx

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

is displayed after machine is cycled off/on.

Troubleshooting
Details:
NVRAM/HDD conversion is incomplete.
Power failure occurred during encryption key update.
None
The display after restart instructs the user to format the HDD.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC859- B Data encryption conversion HDD conversion error (Data read/write command
10 error)
When the data encryption key was updated, HDD data was converted, but not
correctly. Image displayed at conversion only (this SC is not displayed), but SC
is displayed after machine is cycled off/on.
Details:
Abnormal DMAC return value has been received two or more times (DMAC
timeout, serial communication error etc.)
HDD was not successfully converted during encryption key update due to HDD
errors or cable noises.
• Check the HDD connection.
• Format the HDD.
• If there is a problem with the HDD, it has to be replaced.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC860- B HDD startup error at main power on (HDD error)
00
• The HDD is connected but the driver detected the following
errors.
• SS_NOT_READY:/* (-2)HDD does not become READY*/
• SS_BAD_LABEL:/* (-4)Wrong partition type*/
• SS_READ_ERROR:/* (-5)Error occurred while reading or
checking the label*/
• SS_WRITE_ERROR:/* (-6)Error occurred while writing or
checking the label*/
• SS_FS_ERROR:/* (-7)Failed to repair the filesystem*/
• SS_MOUNT_ERROR:/* (-8)Failed to mount the filesystem*/
• SS_COMMAND_ERROR:/* (-9)Drive not responding to
command*/
• SS_KERNEL_ERROR:/* (-10)Internal kernel error*/

SM 6-107 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
SC Tables: SC8xx

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

• SS_SIZE_ERROR:/* (-11)Drive size too small*/
• SS_NO_PARTITION:/* (-12)The specified partition does not
exist*/
• SS_NO_FILE:/* (-13)Device file does not exist*/
• Attempted to acquire HDD status through the driver but there has
been no response for 30 seconds or more.
• Unformatted HDD
• Label data corrupted
• HDD defective
Format the HDD through SP mode.

No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC862- D Number of the defective sector reaches the maximum count
00
101 defective sectors are generated at the image storage area in the HDD.
SC863 occurs during the HDD reading and defective sectors are registered up
to 101.
• Format the HDD with SPSP5-832.
• Replace the HDD.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC863- D HDD data read failure
01 The data written to the HDD cannot be read normally.
Bad sectors were generated during operation.
(An error occurred in an area that does not belong to a partition, such as the disk
label area.)
Guide for when to replace the HDD
1. When SC863 has occurred ten times or more
2. The interval is short.
3. Repeatedly occurs in the same situation (At power-on, etc.).
4. Startup takes a long time when the main power is turned on.
5. It takes a long time after main power on for the operation panel to become
ready.
HDD access may be consuming time. Normal HDD access time after main
power on is about 5 seconds. If the machine is not waiting for the engine to
be ready and it still takes 20 to 30 seconds or more, the HDD may be the
cause. If there is a problem with the HDD, HDD-related SCs such as SC860
and SC863 will occur frequently. Print the SC log data and check them.

SM 6-108 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 SC Tables: SC8xx

SC Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Troubleshooting
No.
SC863 D HDD data read failure
-02 to The data written to the HDD cannot be read normally.
23 Bad sectors were generated during operation.
(An error occurred in partition "a" (SC863-02) to partition “v” (SC863-23)).
Guide for when to replace the HDD
1. When SC863 has occurred ten times or more
2. The interval is short.
3. Repeatedly occurs in the same situation (At power-on, etc.).
4. Startup takes a long time when the main power is turned on.
5. It takes a long time after main power on for the operation panel to become
ready.
HDD access may be consuming time. Normal HDD access time after main
power on is about 5 seconds. If the machine is not waiting for the engine to
be ready and it still takes 20 to 30 seconds or more, the HDD may be the
cause. If there is a problem with the HDD, HDD-related SCs such as SC860
and SC863 will occur frequently. Print the SC log data and check them.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC864- D HDD data CRC error
01 During HDD operation, the HDD cannot respond to a CRC error query. Data
transfer did not execute normally while data was being written to the HDD.
Bad sectors were generated during operation.
(An error occurred in an area that does not belong to a partition, such as the
disk label area.)
• Format the HDD.
• Replace the HDD.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC864 D HDD data CRC error
-02 to During HDD operation, the HDD cannot respond to a CRC error query. Data
23 transfer did not execute normally while data was being written to the HDD.
Bad sectors were generated during operation.
(An error occurred in partition "a" (SC864-02) to partition “v” (SC864-23)).
• Format the HDD.
• Replace the HDD.

SM 6-109 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
SC Tables: SC8xx

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC865- D HD access error
00 During HDD operation, the HDD returned an error.
The HDD returned an error that does not constitute SC863 (bad sector) or
SC864 (CRC error).
Replace the HDD.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC865- D HDD access error
01 During HDD operation, the HDD returned an error.
The HDD returned an error that does not constitute SC863 (bad sector) or
SC864 (CRC error).
(An error occurred in an area that does not belong to a partition, such as the
disk label area.)
Replace the HDD.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC865 D HDD access error
-02 to During HDD operation, the HDD returned an error.
23 The HDD returned an error that does not constitute SC863 (bad sector) or
SC864 (CRC error).
(An error occurred in partition "a" (SC865-02) to partition “v” (SC865-23)).
Replace the HDD.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC865-50 D HDD time-out error
The machine does not detect a reply from the HDD during the HDD operation.
The HDD does not respond to the read/ write command from the machine.
• Check the harness connections between the controller board and HDD.
• Replace the HDD.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC865-51 D HDD time-out error
The machine does not detect a reply from the HDD during the HDD operation.
(An error occurred in an area that does not belong to a partition.)
The HDD does not respond to the read/ write command from the machine.
• Check the harness connections between the controller board and HDD.
• Replace the HDD.

SM 6-110 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 SC Tables: SC8xx

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC865 D HDD time-out error

Troubleshooting
-52 to 73 The machine does not detect a reply from the HDD during the HDD operation.
(An error occurred in partition "a" (SC865-52) to partition "v" (SC865-73)).
The HDD does not respond to the read/ write command from the machine.
• Check the harness connections between the controller board and HDD.
• Replace the HDD.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC866-00 B SD card authentication error
A license error of an application that is started from the SD card was detected.
Invalid program data is stored on the SD card.
Store a valid program data on the SD card.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC867- C SD card removed
00 The SD card was removed while the machine is on.
An application SD card has been removed from the slot (mount point of
/mnt/sd0).
Turn the main power off/on.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC867- C SD card removed
01 The SD card was removed while the machine is on.
An application SD card has been removed from the slot (mount point of
/mnt/sd1).
Turn the main power off/on.

No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC867- C SD card removed
02 The SD card was removed while the machine is on.
An application SD card has been removed from the slot (mount point of
/mnt/sd2).
Turn the main power OFF/ON.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC868-00 D SD card access error
The SD controller returned an error during operation.

SM 6-111 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
SC Tables: SC8xx

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

(An error occurred at the mount point of /mnt/sd0)
• SD card defective
• SD controller defective
• Reformat the SD card (using the "SD Formatter" made by Panasonic).*
• Check the SD card insertion status.
• Replace the SD card.
• Replace the controller board.
* Do not format an SD card supplied with the main machine or sold as an option. You may only
format SD cards used for Firmware Update by a Customer Engineer.
SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution
SC868- D SD card access error
01 The SD controller returned an error during operation.
(An error occurred at the mount point of /mnt/sd1)
• SD card defective
• SD controller defective
SD card that starts an application
• Turn the main power off and check the SD card insertion status.
• If no problem is found, insert the SD card and turn the main power on.
• If an error occurs, replace the SD card.
• SD card for users
• In case of a file system error, reformat the SD card (using the "SD
Formatter" made by Panasonic).*
• In case of a device access error, turn the main power off and check the
SD card insertion status.
• If no problem is found, insert the SD card and turn the main power on.
• If an error occurs, use another SD card.
• If the error persists even after replacing the SD card, replace the
controller board.
* Do not format an SD card supplied with the main machine or sold as an option. You may only
format SD cards used for Firmware Update by a Customer Engineer.
SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution
SC868- D SD card access error
02 The SD controller returned an error during operation.
(An error occurred at the mount point of /mnt/sd1)
• SD card defective
• SD controller defective
SD card that starts an application
• Turn the main power off and check the SD card insertion status.

SM 6-112 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 SC Tables: SC8xx

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

•

Troubleshooting
If no problem is found, insert the SD card and turn the main power on.
• If an error occurs, replace the SD card.
• SD card for users
• In case of a file system error, reformat the SD card (using the "SD
Formatter" made by Panasonic).*
• In case of a device access error, turn the main power off and check the
SD card insertion status.
• If no problem is found, insert the SD card and turn the main power on.
• If an error occurs, use another SD card.
• If the error persists even after replacing the SD card, replace the
controller board.
* Do not format an SD card supplied with the main machine or sold as an option. You may only
format SD cards used for Firmware Update by a Customer Engineer.
No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution
SC869- Malfunction of the proximity sensor is detected
**
SC869- C Continuously detecting malfunction
01
The proximity sensor keeps in a detection state and accumulated time exceeds
24 hours.
The proximity sensor is disabled and is in the detection state at all times.
SC869- C Continuously non-detecting malfunction
02
In the non-detection state, the following operations are detected 20 times
continuously.
• Pressing "energy saver" key or touching the operation panel
• Opening/closing the plate cover or ADF
• Setting the original
• Opening the front cover
• Opening the paper feed tray
The proximity sensor is disabled and is in the non-detection state at all times.
1. Go to the SP5-102-203 (input check SP for the proximity sensor).
2. Cover the sensor with 10 sheets of plain paper, and then execute SP to
confirm if it becomes “0”. (Do not place your hand near the sensor even
over the papers when covering the sensor)
3. Remove the papers from the sensor and confirm if it becomes “1”.
4. If there is no issue after the confirmation in step 2 and 3, confirm that there
are no possible factors around the machine that may cause the temperature

SM 6-113 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
SC Tables: SC8xx

No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

change such as heater or fan. (Deal with the issue as necessary)
5. Replace the proximity sensors and proximity sensor board if the abnormal
value is detected after the confirmation in step 2 and 3.
6. Turn on the main power on and perform step 1, 2, and 3 again.
7. If SC is not solved, turn the main power off and replace the harness which
connects proximity sensors and proximity sensor board.
8. If SC is still not solved, there is a possibility that the other parts of the
machine such as the connector at the controller side or the harness
between proximity sensor board and IPU are broken.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC870- B Address Book data error (Anytime: Address Book Error.)
00
SC870- B Address Book data error (On startup: Media required for storing the Address
01 Book is missing.)
SC870- B Address Book data error (On startup: encryption is configured but the module
02 required for encryption (DESS) is missing.)
SC870- B Address Book data error (Initialization: Failed to generate a file to store internal
03 Address Book.)
SC870- B Address Book data error (Initialization: Failed to generate a file to store delivery
04 sender.)
SC870- B Address Book data error (Initialization: Failed to generate a file to store delivery
05 destination.)
SC870- B Address Book data error (Initialization: Failed to generate a file to store
06 information required for LDAP search.)
SC870- B Address Book data error (Initialization: Failed to initialize entries required for
07 machine operation.)
SC870- B Address Book data error (Machine configuration: HDD is present but the space
08 for storing the Address Book is unusable.)
SC870- B Address Book data error (Machine configuration: Inconsistency in the NVRAM
09 area used for storing settings required for Address Book configuration.)
SC870- B Address Book data error (Machine configuration: Cannot make a directory for
10 storing the Address Book in the SD/USB FlashROM.)
SC870- B Address Book data error(On startup: Inconsistency in Address Book entry
11 number.)
SC870- B Address Book data error (File I/O: Failed to initialize file.)
20
SC870- B Address Book data error (File I/O: Failed to generate file.)

SM 6-114 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 SC Tables: SC8xx

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

21

Troubleshooting
SC870- B Address Book data error (File I/O: Failed to open file.)
22
SC870- B Address Book data error (File I/O: Failed to write to file.)
23
SC870- B Address Book data error (File I/O: Failed to read file.)
24
SC870- B Address Book data error (File I/O: Failed to check file size.)
25
SC870- B Address Book data error (File I/O: Failed to delete data.)
26
SC870- B Address Book data error (File I/O: Failed to add data.)
27
SC870- B Address Book data error (Search: Failed to obtain data from cache when
30 searching in the machine Address Book. delivery destination/sender.)
SC870- B Address Book data error (Search:Failed to obtain data from cache during LDAP
31 search.)
SC870- B Address Book data error (Search:Failed to obtain data from cache while
32 searching the WS-Scanner Address Book.)
SC870- B Address Book data error (Cache: failed to obtain data from cache.)
41
SC870- B Address Book data error (On startup: Detected abnormality of the Address Book
50 encryption status.)
SC870- B Address Book data error (Encryption settings: Failed to create directory required
51 for conversion between plaintext and encrypted text.)
SC870- B Address Book data error (Encryption settings: Failed to convert from plaintext to
52 encrypted text.)
SC870- B Address Book data error (Encryption settings: Failed to convert from encrypted
53 text to plaintext.)
SC870- B Address Book data error (Encryption settings: Detected data inconsistency
54 when reading the encrypted Address Book.)
SC870- B Address Book data error (Encryption settings: Failed to delete file when
55 changing encryption setting.)
SC870- B Address Book data error (Encryption settings: Failed to erase the file that
56 records the encryption key during an attempt to change the encryption setting.)
SC870- B Address Book data error (Encryption settings: Failed to move a file during an
57 attempt to change the encryption setting.)
SC870- B Address Book data error (Encryption settings: Failed to delete a directory during

SM 6-115 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
SC Tables: SC8xx

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

58 an attempt to change the encryption setting.)
SC870- B Address Book data error (Encryption settings: Detected a resource shortage
59 during an attempt to change the encryption setting.)
SC870- B Address Book data error (Unable to obtain the on/off setting for administrator
60 authentication (06A and later).)
When an error related to the Address Book is detected during startup or
operation.
• Software bug
• Inconsistency of Address Book source location (machine/delivery
server/LDAP server)
• Inconsistency of Address Book encryption setting or encryption key
(NVRAM or HDD was replaced individually without formatting the Address
Book)
• Address Book storage device (SD/HDD) was temporarily removed or
hardware configuration does not match the application configuration.
• Address Book data corruption was detected.
• Check the HDD connection.
• Initialize all UCS settings and address/authentication information (SP5-
846-046).
• Initialize the Address Book partition (SP5-832-006).

No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC871-01 D FCU error
An error occurred when FCS detects FCU defective.
• Time-out error
• Abnormal Parameter
• Turn the main power OFF/ON.
• Update the firmware if more recent firmware was released.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC872- B HDD mail reception error
00 An error was detected on the HDD immediately after the machine was turned
on.
• HDD defective
• Power was turned off while the machine used the HDD.
• Format the HDD (SP5-832-007).
• Replace the HDD.
When you do the above, the following information will be initialized.

SM 6-116 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 SC Tables: SC8xx

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

•

Troubleshooting
Partly received partial mail messages.
• Already-read statuses of POP3-received messages (All messages on the
mail server are handled as new messages).

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC873- B HDD mail reception error
00 An error was detected on the HDD immediately after the machine was turned
on.
• HDD defective
• Power was turned of while the machine used the HDD.
• Format the HDD (SP5-832-007).
• Replace the HDD.
When you do the above, the following information will be initialized.
• Sender’s mail text
• Default sender name/password (SMB/FTP/NCP)
• Administrator mail address
• Scanner delivery history

No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC874-05 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : Read error
SC874-06 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : Write error
SC874-09 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : No response from HDD
SC874-10 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : Error in Kernel
SC874-12 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : No designated partition
SC874-13 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : No device file
SC874-14 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : Start option error
SC874-15 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : No designated sector number
SC874-16 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : failure in performing hdderase
SC874-41 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : Other fatal errors
SC874-42 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : End by cancellation
SC874-61 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : library error
to -65
SC874-66 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : Unavailable
SC874-67 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : Erasing not finished
SC874-68 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : HDD format failure (Normal)
SC874-69 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : HDD format failure (Abnormal)
SC874-70 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : Unauthorized library

SM 6-117 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
SC Tables: SC8xx

No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC874-99 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : other errors
An error occurred while data was being erased on HDD or NVRAM.
• Error detected in HDD data delete program
• Error detected in NVRAM data delete program
• The “Delete All” option was not set
• Turn the main power switch off and back on, and then execute "Erase All
Memory" under UP mode again. (However, if there is a defective sector
or other problem with the hard disk, the error will persist even after trying
the above.)
• If the "Delete All" option is not installed when this error occurs, install the
option.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC875- D Delete all error (HDD erasure) (hddchack –i error)
01
SC875- D Delete all error (HDD erasure) (Data deletion failure)
02
An error was detected before HDD/data erasure starts. (Failed to erase
data/failed to logically format HDD)
• HDD logical formatting failed.
• The modules failed to erase data.
Turn the main power off/on.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC876- D Log Data Error 1
01 An error was detected in the handling of the log data at power on or during
machine operation.
Damaged log data file
Initialize the HDD (SP5-832-004).

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC876- D Log Data Error 2
02 An error was detected in the handling of the log data at power on or during
machine operation.
Log encryption is enabled but encryption module is not installed.
• Replace or set again the encryption module.
• Disable the log encryption setting.

SM 6-118 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 SC Tables: SC8xx

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC876- D Log Data Error 3

Troubleshooting
03 An error was detected in the handling of the log data at power on or during
machine operation.
Inconsistency of encryption key between NV-RAM and HDD.
• Disable the log encryption setting.
• Initialize LCS memory (SP5801-019).
• Initialize the HDD (SP5-832-004).

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC876- D Log Data Error 4
04 An error was detected in the handling of the log data at power on or during
machine operation.
• Log encryption key is disabled but the log data file is encrypted. (NVRAM
data corruption)
• Log encryption key is enabled but the log data file is not encrypted.
(NVRAM data corruption)
Initialize the HDD (SP5-832-004).

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC876- D Log Data Error 5
05 An error was detected in the handling of the log data at power on or during
machine operation.
• Only the NV-RAM has been replaced with one previously used in another
machine.
• Only the HDD has been replaced with one previously used in another
machine.
• Attach the original NV-RAM.
• Attach the original HDD.
• With the configuration that caused the SC, initialize the HDD (SP5-832-
004).

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC876- D Log Data Error 99
99 An error was detected in the handling of the log data at power on or during
machine operation.
Other causes
-

SM 6-119 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
SC Tables: SC8xx

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC878-00 D TPM authentication error
TPM electronic recognition failure
• Update of system module attempted without correct update path
• USB flash memory not operating correctly
Replace the controller board.
Trusted Platform Module
• In computing, Trusted Platform Module (TPM) is both the name of a published
specification detailing a secure crypto processor that can store cryptographic keys
that protect information, as well as the general name of implementations of that
specification, often called the "TPM chip" or "TPM Security Device" (as designated
in certain Dell BIOS settings).
SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution
SC878-01 D USB flash error
There is a problem in the file system of the USB flash memory.
USB Flash system files corrupted
Replace the controller board.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC878-02 D TPM error
An error occurred in either TPM or the TPM driver
TPM not operating correctly
Replace the controller board.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC878-03 D TCSD dffof
An error occurred in the TPM software stack.
• TPM, TPM software cannot start
• A file required by TPM is missing
Replace the controller board.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC880-00 D MLB error
Reply to MLB access was not returned within a specified time.
MLB defective
• Replace the MLB.
• Remove the MLB.

SM 6-120 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 SC Tables: SC8xx

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC881- D Management area error

Troubleshooting
01 • A problem was detected in the software
• This error may occur even when an IC card option is not installed.
• This is caused by accumulation of abnormal authentication information in
the software. (User operation will not directly cause it.)
• At login
Example: When a job is sent to the printer/when logged on from the
operation panel/when logged on from a Web browser
Turn the main power off/on.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC899-00 D Software performance error (signal reception end)
Unknown software error occurred.
Occurs when an internal program behaves abnormally.
In case of a hardware defect
• Replace the hardware.
In case of a software error
• Turn the main power off/on.
• Try updating the firmware.

SM 6-121 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
SC Tables: SC9xx (Others)

6.10 SC TABLES: SC9XX (OTHERS)

6.10.1 SC900-00 TO SC995-04
SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution
SC940- C 1st Paper Feed Tray Pickup Solenoid Non-Drive Error
01
SC940- C 2nd Paper Feed Tray Pickup Solenoid Non-Drive Error
02
SC940- C Bypass Pickup Solenoid Non-Drive Error
03
SC940- C Paper Exit Switching Solenoid Non-Drive Error
04
When the solenoid is not moving, the registration value of the failure detection
is "0" three times consecutively.
• Connector disconnected
• Harness broken
• Solenoid defective
SC940-01: 1st Paper Feed Tray Pickup Solenoid
SC940-02: 2nd Paper Feed Tray Pickup Solenoid
SC940-03: Bypass Pickup Solenoid
SC940-04: Paper Exit Switching Solenoid
• Driver defective (which drive the solenoid)
• Turn the main power off/on.
• Reconnect the connector on the BCU.
• Reconnect the relay connector and electronic connector.
• Replace the solenoid.
• Replace the BCU.
• Replace the harness.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC940- C Key Counter Error
50 When the key counter is ON, the registration value of the key counter detection
signal 2 is "1" three times consecutively.
• Driver defective (which drive the key counter) (open)
• Turn the main power off/on.
• Replace the BCU.

SM 6-122 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 SC Tables: SC9xx (Others)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC940- C 1st Paper Feed Tray Pickup Solenoid Drive Error

Troubleshooting
51
SC940- C 2nd Paper Feed Tray Pickup Solenoid Drive Error
52
SC940- C Bypass Pickup Solenoid Drive Error
53
SC940- C Paper Exit Switching Solenoid Drive Error
54
When the solenoid is moving, the registration value of the failure detection is
"1" three times consecutively.
• Driver defective (which drive the solenoid)
• Turn the main power off/on.
• Replace the BCU.
• Replace the harness.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC990-00 D Software operation error
Software attempted an unexpected operation.
• Parameter error
• Internal parameter error
• Insufficient work memory
• Operation error caused by abnormalities that are normally undetectable.
• Turn the main power off/on.
• Reinstall the software of the controller and BCU board.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC991-00 C Recoverable software operation error
Software attempted an unexpected operation.
SC991 covers recoverable errors as opposed to SC990.
• Parameter error
• Internal parameter error
• Insufficient work memory
• Operation error caused by abnormalities that are normally undetectable.
Logging only

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC995- D CPM setting error 1
01 Comparison of machine serial number (11 digits) and machine identification

SM 6-123 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
SC Tables: SC9xx (Others)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

code.
Details:
• Machine serial number cannot be identified because of BICU
replacement or malfunctioning.
• Machine serial number cannot be identified because of NV-RAM
replacement
Machine serial number (11 digits) or machine identification code does not
match.
• Enter the machine serial number using SP5-811, and then turn the power
on/off.
• Attach the NV-RAM that was installed previously.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC995- D CPM setting error 2
02 Comparison of machine serial number (11 digits) and machine identification
code.
Details:
Machine serial number cannot be identified because of NV-RAM replacement
or malfunctioning.
Machine serial number (11 digits) or machine identification code does not
match.
• Attach the NV-RAM that was installed previously.
• Download data on the NV-RAM using SP5-825.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC995- D CPM setting error 3
03 Comparison of machine serial number (11 digits) and machine identification
code.
Details:
Unable to recognize machine identification code because the controller was
replaced incorrectly or is malfunctioning.
Machine serial number (11 digits) or machine identification code does not
match.
Replace it with a compatible controller.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC995- D CPM setting error 4
04 Comparison of machine serial number (11 digits) and machine identification

SM 6-124 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 SC Tables: SC9xx (Others)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

code.

Troubleshooting
Machine serial number (11 digits) or machine identification code does not
match.
Return the parts to the original configuration, and then replace them according
to the manual.

SM 6-125 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
When SC549 Is Displayed

6.11 WHEN SC549 IS DISPLAYED

6.11.1 TROUBLESHOOTING FLOWCHART

SM 6-126 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 When SC549 Is Displayed

6.11.2 FUSING SHIELD CHECK

Troubleshooting
Procedure 1: Operation check for the lower side of the shield detection feeler
1. Place the fusing unit on a flat place and tilt it towards the drawer connector [A].

2. Move the shield drive gear with your hands to put the upper surface of the feeler [A] in a
horizontal position.

3. Keep your fingers off the shield drive gear.

SM 6-127 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
When SC549 Is Displayed

4. Make sure that the shield detection feeler [A] moves down to the lowest point by its own
weight.

• The feeler moves smoothly: OK

• The feeler does not move / stops during moving / moves but slowly: NG
Procedure 2: Operation check for the upper side of the shield detection feeler
1. Place the fusing unit on a flat place with the drawer connector [A] turned up and the handle
[B] touching a flat surface.

SM 6-128 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 When SC549 Is Displayed

2. Move the shield drive gear with your hands to put the upper surface of the feeler [A] in a
vertical position.

Troubleshooting
3. Keep your fingers off of the shield drive gear.
4. Make sure that the shield detection feeler [A] moves up to the highest point by its own
weight.

• The feeler moves smoothly: OK

• The feeler does not move / stops during moving / moves but slowly: NG
Results
• Both Procedure 1 and 2 are OK: No problem.
• Either Procedure 1 or 2 is NG: The mechanism is blocked.
• The shield detection feeler never moves while moving the shield drive gear by
hands or fingers: Locked.

SM 6-129 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
When SC549 Is Displayed

6.11.3 SOLUTION
By tilting the fusing unit, you can check whether the feeler does not move smoothly due to burrs
on a part in the unit, and remove the burrs.
1. Tilt the fusing unit [A] approx. 30°.

2. Put the fusing unit back to the horizontal position.

3. Perform the checking procedures (Fusing Shield Check).
There is no blockage: Resolved
There is some blockage: Not resolved
4. Tilt the fusing unit [A] approx. 30° in the opposite direction from step 1.

There is no blockage: Resolved

There is some blockage: Not resolved

SM 6-130 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Jam Detection

6.12 JAM DETECTION

Troubleshooting
6.12.1 PAPER JAM DISPLAY
When a jam occurs, the location is displayed on the operation panel.

SP7-507 shows the paper jam history.

• CODE: Indicates the jam code.

• SIZE: Indicates the paper size code.
• TOTAL: Indicates the total counter (SP7-502-001).
• DATE: indicates the date when the jam occurred.

• The 10 latest printer jams are displayed.

• Initial jams are not recorded.

6.12.2 JAM CODES AND DISPLAY CODES

• Jam code: Shows the cause of a jam. Appears in the log data.
• Position code: Shows the location of a jam. Appears on the operation panel.
These are lists of jam codes for the main machine and peripheral devices. Please note:
• Late jam. The paper has failed to arrive within the prescribed time due to a jam that
has occurred upstream of the referenced sensor.
• Lag jam. The paper has failed to leave the location of the referenced sensor within
the prescribed time due to a jam downstream of the referenced sensor.

SM 6-131 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Jam Detection

Main Machine
Cause Cause of Jam Late Lag Stay Display
Code Jam Jam Jam Code
001 Transport Sensor 1 A
001 Transport Sensor 2 A
001 Registration Sensor B
001 Fusing Entrance Sensor C
001 Fusing Exit Sensor C
001 Paper Exit Sensor C
001 Reverse Sensor C
001 Duplex Exit Sensor Z
001 Duplex Entrance Sensor Z
003 Paper not fed from tray 1 A1
004 Paper not fed from tray 2 A2
008 Paper not fed from bypass tray A
009 Paper not transported to duplex unit Z
010 Disappearance of the detection Timing
Only remaining paper position information displayed
011 Transport Sensor 1 A
012 Transport Sensor 2 A
017 Registration Sensor A
018 Fusing Entrance Sensor B
019 Fusing Exit Sensor C
020 Paper Exit Sensor C
051 Transport Sensor 1 (when paper not fed A
from Tray 1)
052 Transport Sensor 2 (when paper not fed A
from Tray 2)
057 Registration Sensor B
060 Paper Exit Sensor C
024 Reverse Sensor C
064 Reverse Sensor C
025 Duplex Exit Sensor Z
025 Duplex Exit Sensor & No Paper at Z
Duplex Entrance Sensor
065 Duplex Exit Sensor Z
027 Duplex Entrance Sensor C
027 Duplex Entrance Sensor & No Paper at Z

SM 6-132 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Jam Detection

Cause Cause of Jam Late Lag Stay Display

Code Jam Jam Jam Code

Troubleshooting
Reverse Sensor
067 Duplex Entrance Sensor Z
021 Relay Exit Sensor D
022 Relay Transport Sensor D
061 Relay Exit Sensor D
062 Relay Transport Sensor D

Paper Feed Unit PB3210/PB3220

Cause Cause of Jam Late Lag Stay Display
Code Jam Jam Jam Code
005 Paper not fed from tray 3 Y1
013 Transport Sensor 3 Y
053 Transport Sensor 3 (when paper not Y
fed from Tray 3)
001 Transport Sensor 3 Y
006 Paper not fed from tray 4 Y2
014 Transport Sensor 4 Y
054 Transport Sensor 4 (when paper not Y
fed from Tray 4)
001 Transport Sensor 4 Y

Paper Feed Unit PB3150

Cause Cause of Jam Late Lag Stay Display
Code Jam Jam Jam Code
005 Paper not fed from tray 3 Y1
013 Transport Sensor 3 Y
053 Transport Sensor 3 (when paper not Y
fed from Tray 3)
001 Transport Sensor 3 Y

LCIT RT3030
Cause Cause of Jam Late Lag Stay Display
Code Jam Jam Jam Code
007 Paper not fed from LCT U1
015 LCT Transport Sensor U
055 LCT Transport Sensor (when paper not U

SM 6-133 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Jam Detection

Cause Cause of Jam Late Lag Stay Display

Code Jam Jam Jam Code
fed from LCT)
001 LCT Transport Sensor U

ARDF DF3090
Cause Code Cause of Jam Late Jam Lag Jam Stay Jam Display Code
014 Skew Correction Sensor P
064 Skew Correction Sensor P
016 Registration Sensor P
066 Registration Sensor P
017 Exit Sensor P
067 Exit Sensor P
239 Misfeed: Original Removed P

SPDF DF3100
Cause Code Cause of Jam Late Jam Lag Jam Stay Jam Display Code
013 Separation Sensor P
063 Separation Sensor P
014 Skew Correction Sensor P
064 Skew Correction Sensor P
015 Interval Sensor P
065 Interval Sensor P
016 Registration Sensor P
066 Registration Sensor P
017 Original Exit Sensor P
067 Original Exit Sensor P
239 Misfeed: Original Removed P
001 Initial jam P
001 Overload jam P

Booklet Finisher SR3240

Cause Cause of Jam Late Lag Stay Display
Code Jam Jam Jam Code
001 Entrance Sensor R1-R5
001 Horizontal Transport Sensor R1-R5
001 Switchback Transport Sensor R1-R5
001 Proof Exit Sensor R1-R5

SM 6-134 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Jam Detection

Cause Cause of Jam Late Lag Stay Display

Code Jam Jam Jam Code

Troubleshooting
001 Shift Tray Exit Sensor R1-R5
001 Booklet Exit Sensor 1 R6-R11
001 Transport Path Paper Sensor R1-R5
001 Booklet Upper Transport Path Stack R6-R11
Sensor
001 Booklet Lower Transport Path Stack R6-R11
Sensor
150 Entrance Sensor R1-R5
151 Entrance Sensor R1-R5
152 Horizontal Transport Sensor R1-R5
153 Horizontal Transport Sensor R1-R5
154 Switchback Transport Sensor R1-R5
155 Switchback Transport Sensor R1-R5
156 Jam in proof exit unit R1-R5
157 Jam in proof exit unit R1-R5
158 Jam in shift exit unit R1-R5
159 Jam in shift exit unit R1-R5
160 Jam in Booklet exit R6-R11
161 Jam in Booklet exit R6-R11
162 Jam in Entrance Transport Motor R1-R5
163 Jam in Horizontal Transport Motor R1-R5
164 Jam in Pre-stack Transport Motor R1-R5
165 Jam in Relay Transport Motor R1-R5
166 Jam in Upper Tray Exit Motor R1-R5
167 Jam in Trailing Edge Pressure Plate R1-R5
Motor
168 Jam in Paper Exit Gate Motor R1-R5
169 Jam in Punch Drive Motor R1-R5
170 Jam in Punch Unit Movement Motor R1-R5
171 Jam in Punch Registration Motor R1-R5
172 Jam in Lower Junction Gate Motor R1-R5
173 Jam in Jogger Motor R1-R5
174 Jam in Positioning Roller Motor R1-R5
175 Jam in Feed-out Belt Motor R1-R5
176 Jam in Corner Stapler Movement R1-R5
Motor

SM 6-135 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Jam Detection

Cause Cause of Jam Late Lag Stay Display

Code Jam Jam Jam Code
177 Jam in Corner Stapler Motor R1-R5
178 Jam in Booklet Jogger Motor R6-R11
179 Jam in Booklet Jogging Pawl R6-R11
Movement Motor
180 Jam in Booklet Bottom Fence Motor R6-R11
181 Jam in Booklet Stapler Motor R6-R11
182 Jam in Shift Roller Drive Motor R6-R11
183 Jam in Fold Transport Motor R6-R11
184 Jam in Press Fold Motor R6-R11
185 Jam in Tray Lift Motor R1-R5
186 Jam in Shift Motor R1-R5
187 Jam in Shift Jogger Front Motor R1-R5
188 Jam in Shift Jogger Rear Motor R1-R5
189 Jam in Shift Jogger Retreat Motor R1-R5
190 Jam in Return Roller Motor R1-R5
191 Jam in Paper Stacking Holder Motor R1-R5
192 Jam in Positioning Roller Motor R1-R5
193 Jam in Paper Guide Motor R1-R5
194 Main instruction data defect R1-R5, R6-
R11

Finisher SR3230
Cause Cause of Jam Late Lag Stay Display
Code Jam Jam Jam Code
001 Entrance Sensor R1-R5
001 Horizontal Transport Sensor R1-R5
001 Switchback Transport Sensor R1-R5
001 Proof Exit Sensor R1-R5
001 Shift Tray Exit Sensor R1-R5
001 Transport Path Paper Sensor R1-R5
150 Entrance Sensor R1-R5
151 Entrance Sensor R1-R5
152 Horizontal Transport Sensor R1-R5
153 Horizontal Transport Sensor R1-R5
154 Switchback Transport Sensor R1-R5
155 Switchback Transport Sensor R1-R5

SM 6-136 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Jam Detection

Cause Cause of Jam Late Lag Stay Display

Code Jam Jam Jam Code

Troubleshooting
156 Proof Exit Sensor R1-R5
157 Proof Exit Sensor R1-R5
158 Shift Tray Exit Sensor R1-R5
159 Shift Tray Exit Sensor R1-R5
162 Jam in Entrance Transport Motor R1-R5
163 Jam in Horizontal Transport Motor R1-R5
164 Jam in Pre-stack Transport Motor R1-R5
165 Jam in Relay Transport Motor R1-R5
166 Jam in Upper Tray Exit Motor R1-R5
167 Jam in Trailing Edge Pressure Plate R1-R5
Motor
168 Jam in Paper Exit Gate Motor R1-R5
169 Jam in Horizontal registration unit R1-R5
displace motor
170 Jam in Punch Drive Motor R1-R5
171 Jam in Punch Registration Motor R1-R5
172 Jam in Lower Junction Gate Motor R1-R5
173 Jam in Jogger Motor R1-R5
174 Jam in Positioning Roller Motor R1-R5
175 Jam in Feed-out Belt Motor R1-R5
176 Jam in Corner Stapler Movement R1-R5
Motor
177 Jam in Corner Stapler Motor R1-R5
185 Jam in Tray Lift Motor R1-R5
186 Jam in Shift Motor R1-R5
187 Jam in Shift Jogger Front Motor R1-R5
188 Jam in Shift Jogger Rear Motor R1-R5
189 Jam in Shift Jogger Retreat Motor R1-R5
190 Jam in Return Roller Motor R1-R5
191 Jam in Paper Stacking Holder Motor R1-R5
192 Jam in Positioning Roller Motor R1-R5
193 Jam in Paper Guide Motor R1-R5
194 Main instruction data defect R1-R5

SM 6-137 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Jam Detection

Booklet Finisher SR3220 / Finisher SR 3210

Cause Cause of Jam Late Lag Stay Display
Code Jam Jam Jam Code
200 Paper Entrance R1-R4
201 Paper Entrance R1-R4
202 Proof Exit R1-R4
203 Proof Exit R1-R4
204 Intermediate transport (right) R1-R4
205 Intermediate transport (left) R1-R4
206 Intermediate transport (left) R1-R4
207 Shift Exit R1-R4
208 Shift Exit R1-R4
209 Stack Transport R5-R10
210 Rear Edge Stopper Transport R5-R10
211 Rear Edge Stopper Transport R5-R10
212 Paper did not reach middle folding exit R5-R10
213 Middle Folding exit R5-R10
220 Jam in entrance transport motor R1-R4
221 Jam in proof transport motor R1-R4
222 Jam in paper exit transport R1-R4
motor/positioning roller motor
223 Jam in shift motor R1-R4
224 Jam in jogger motor R1-R4
225 Jam in paper exit guide plate open/close R1-R4
motor
226 Jam in feedout pawl motor R1-R4
227 Jam in tray lift motor R1-R4
228 Jam in positioning roller motor R1-R4
229 Jam in stapler unit displacement motor R1-R4
230 Jam in stapler motor R1-R4
231 Jam in punch system motor R1-R4
232 Jam in booklet transport motors R5-R10
233 Jam in rear edge stopper motor R5-R10
234 Jam in folding blade motor R5-R10
235 Jam in paper exit guide drive motor R1-R4
236 Jam in stapleless stapler transfer motor R1-R4
237 Jam in stapleless stapler motor R1-R4
238 Jam in paper guide drive motor R1-R4

SM 6-138 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Jam Detection

Cause Cause of Jam Late Lag Stay Display

Code Jam Jam Jam Code

Troubleshooting
248 Paper exit end is not responding R1-R4
249 Main instruction data defect R1-R4

Internal Finisher SR3180

Cause Code Cause of Jam Late Jam Lag Jam Stay Jam Display Code
300 Entrance sensor R1-R2
301 Entrance sensor R1-R2
302 Paper exit sensor R1-R2
303 Paper exit sensor R1-R2
304 Shift motor R1-R2
305 Junction gate motor R1-R2
306 Paper Exit Pressure Motor R1-R2
307 Stapler Drive Motor R1-R2
348 Paper exit end not responding R1-R2
349 Main instruction data defect R1-R2
308 Exit Lag Jam R1-R2

Internal Finisher SR3130

Cause Cause of Jam Late Lag Stay Display
Code Jam Jam Jam Code
100 Entrance Sensor R1-R2
101 Entrance Sensor R1-R2
102 Transport Sensor R1-R2
103 Transport Sensor R1-R2
104 Paper Exit Unit R1-R2
105 Jogger Fence Motor (Front) R1-R2
106 Jogger Fence Motor (Rear) R1-R2
107 Shift Motor R1-R2
108 Positioning Roller Motor R1-R2
109 Paper Exit Guide Plate Motor R1-R2
110 Stapler Retreat Motor R1-R2
111 Tray Lift Motor R1-R2
112 Stapler Motor R1-R2
113 Stack Height Lever Motor R1-R2
114 Punch Unit Motor R1-R2
115 Horizontal Registration Movement R1-R2

SM 6-139 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Jam Detection

Cause Cause of Jam Late Lag Stay Display

Code Jam Jam Jam Code
Unit Motor
116 Horizontal Registration Transport R1-R2
Unit Motor
148 Paper exit end not responding R1-R2
149 Main instruction data defect R1-R2

Internal Multi-fold Unit FD3000

Cause Cause of jam Late Lag Stay Display
code Jam Jam Jam code
350 Registration sensor N1
351 Registration sensor N1
352 1st Fold sensor N2-N4
353 1st Fold sensor N2-N4
354 2nd Fold Sensor N6-N8
355 2nd Fold Sensor N6-N8
356 Crease Sensor N6-N8
357 Crease Sensor N6-N8
358 Folder Tray Exit Sensor N2-N4
359 Folder Tray Exit Sensor N2-N4
360 Horizontal Path Exit Sensor N2-N4, N5
361 Horizontal Path Exit Sensor N5
370 Jam in mechanisms driven by N1
Registration Motor
371 Jam in mechanisms driven by JG Crease N2-N4
Motor
372 Jam in mechanisms driven by Transport N2-N4
Motor
373 Jam in mechanisms driven by 1st Fold N6-N8
Motor
374 Jam in mechanisms driven by 2nd Fold N6-N8
Motor
375 Jam in mechanisms driven by JG Crease N6-N8
Motor
398 Paper exit end is not responding N1
399 Main instruction data defect N1

SM 6-140 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Jam Detection

6.12.3 SENSOR LOCATIONS

Troubleshooting

SM 6-141 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Jam Detection

6.12.4 PAPER SIZE CODES

Paper size codes are as follows.
Note: The unit of Main Scan/Sub Scan Length is 0.1 mm.
Size Code Paper Size Name Orientation Main Scan Length Sub Scan Length
132(84H) A3 SEF 2970 4200
005(05H) A4 LEF 2970 2100
133(85H) A4 SEF 2100 2970
141(8DH) B4 SEF 2570 3640
006(06H) A5 LEF 2100 1480
134(86H) A5 SEF 1480 2100
014(0EH) B5 LEF 2570 1820
142(8EH) B5 SEF 1820 2570
135(87H) A6 SEF 1050 1480
143(8FH) B6 SEF 1280 1820
160(A0H) 11”x17”(DLT) SEF 2794 4318
164(A4H) 8 1/2”x14”(LG) SEF 2159 3556
166(A6H) 8 1/2”x11”(LT) SEF 2159 2794
038(26H) 8 1/2”x11”(LT) LEF 2794 2159
172(ACH) 5 1/2”x8 1/2”(HLT) SEF 1397 2159
175(AFH) 12” x 18” SEF 3048 4572

SM 6-142 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Other Problems

6.13 OTHER PROBLEMS

Troubleshooting
6.13.1 WHEN SC670 IS DISPLAYED

6.13.2 WHEN SC672 (CONTROLLER START UP ERROR) IS

DISPLAYED

Symptom:
Note: CTL = Controller
The following occur:
SC672- Communication error between operation panel and CTL after machine is powered
00 on.
SC672- Communication error (receive) between operation panel and CTL after machine is
10 powered on.
SC672- Communication error (send) between operation panel and CTL after machine is
11 powered on.
SC672- Communication error between operation panel and CTL after normal start-up.
12
SC672- Communication error between operation panel and CTL after normal start-up;
13 Operation panel not detected.
SC672- Operation panel cable error
20
SC672- Controller board error
21

SM 6-143 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Other Problems

• SC672 does not appear on the SMC report, as it is not logged.

• The Smart Operation Panel communicates with the controller via a USB cable and
IPU. SC672 is triggered when the panel cannot communicate with the controller.

Cause:
Possible causes of SC672 include:
• USB communication path failure (USB cable, IPU)
• CTL boot up error and/or operation panel boot up error due to abnormal break in
operations of CTL.
Possible causes of operation panel cannot light include:
• USB communication path failure (USB cable, IPU)
• Operation panel cannot communicate with CTL due to CTL boot-up error

[A]: Operation Panel

[B]: IPU
[C]: FCU
[D]: Controller
[E]: USB cable

Solution:
Do the following.
1. Turn the machine power OFF/ON.
2. Do the action in the flowchart below to determine the cause and best course of action when
SC672 occurs.

• If the SC recurs after you do the action in this flowchart, do the following.
- If SC819 (cache error) appears in the SC history, replace the controller board.
- If SC991 (SCS: scs time count level c’) appears in the SC history, replace the
controller board and USB cable.

SM 6-144 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Other Problems

Flowchart to determine parts to replace when SC672 occurs

Troubleshooting
Parts How to determine the cause
USB cable LED on CTL blinks once every second
Operation panel LED on CTL blinks once every second
CTL LEDs on CTL blink constantly
Memory LEDs on CTL blink constantly
Flowchart to determine parts to replace when no display on operation panel

SM 6-145 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Other Problems

Parts How to determine the cause

USB cable LED on CTL blinks once every second
Operation panel LED on CTL blinks once every second
IPU Fuse 3 on the IPU
CTL LED on CTL does not blink
Memory LED on CTL does not blink

[A]: LEDs on the controller board

Check the condition (lit, off, blinking) of the LED on the CTL.
Normal situation: POSTCODE LED 8 [A] and BIOS LED [B] blinking for 1 second

• The LED lit or off when there is a problem with the CPU.

[B]: Abnormal mode: LEDs on the controller board

POSTCODE LEDs 1 to 8 blink constantly

LED Note
POSTCODE 1. For self-diagnosis code (BIOS).
1-8 2. After the BIOS starts up, POSTCODE 4,5,7 turn off and POSTCODE 1,2,3 ,6
turn on and POSTCODE 8 blinks. POSTCODE 8 is lit or off when there is a
problem with the CPU.
BIOS/OS - LED is lit when the BIOS is running.

SM 6-146 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Other Problems

LED Note
- LED blinks when the OS is running.

Troubleshooting
[C]: Reconnecting and replacing the USB cable
9. Re-connect the USB cable between IPU board and operation panel.

When connecting the cable, hold the molded part of the cable as shown in the
figure below so as not to apply excessive force on the connector part. Applying
excessive force in the upper direction on the connector may cause connection
failure.

Applied to the machine built in October 2016 and beyond:

A bracket [A] which covers the upper part of the cable will be added.

SM 6-147 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Other Problems

PCB for the operation panel

• 1, 3, 6, and 7 are ON for normal.

SM 6-148 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Other Problems

USB connector [A] (IPU)

Troubleshooting
[D]: Replacing the Memory
1. Turn the machine power OFF.
2. Attach the memory on the CTL as shown (in a vertical orientation).

3. Lock the hook.

[E]: CMOS clear

1. Turn the machine power OFF.
2. Turn switch 5 ON for 10 seconds.
3. Turn switch 5 OFF.
4. Turn the machine power ON.

SM 6-149 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Other Problems

Locatoin of Switch 5 [A] (CTL)

[F]: Fuse on the IPU

Check that the switch 1 [A] is operating normally.

• In the normal operation, all of the switches in the SW1 block are OFF.

[G]: Replacing the USB cable and the operation panel

1. Remove the platen cover, or ARDF/SPDF. (ADF Removal)
2. Remove the rear cover [A].

SM 6-150 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Other Problems

3. Remove the scanner right cover [A].

Troubleshooting
4. Remove the scanner front cover [A].

5. Remove the scanner left cover [A].

SM 6-151 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Other Problems

6. Holding down both the sides of the operation panel upper cover [A], unhook the tabs
(indicated by blue circles) and remove the cover.

7. Remove the USB cable connector [A] ( x1, x2).

8. Remove the two screws ( x2).

SM 6-152 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Other Problems

9. Remove the two connectors.

Troubleshooting
10. Remove the scanner unit [A] ( x11).

SM 6-153 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Other Problems

• Never loosen or remove the following screw when you remove or re-attach the unit.
This screw fixes the scanner cam in place. If the position of the scanner cam changes,
the scanner will be misaligned. This will result in image skew and other image alignment
issues.

11. Remove the USB cable.

• Make sure that there is no space between the machine frame and the following three
areas of the scanner unit when you re-attach the scanner unit.

SM 6-154 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Other Problems

Troubleshooting
If the symptom is not resolved, escalate the issue using the normal process, together with the
following information for further investigation.
• SC sub code (SC672-10 or 99)
• Date/time of problem occurrence
• Factor(s) that trigger the problem (ex. SC672-11 occurred 3 minutes after tuning
ON the main power switch.)
• Occurrence frequency (ex. One out of ten times when turning ON the main power
switch)
• Parts replaced
• Date/time when parts were replaced

SM 6-155 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Other Problems

6.13.3 MARKS (VERTICAL STREAKS) ON PRINTS AND COPIES

DUE TO SCANNING PROBLEMS
Marks on prints and copies are mostly due to dirt on the DF exposure glass [A], generally caused
by adhesive contaminants (such as ball point pen ink and correction fluid).

Compared to non-adhesive contaminants (such as paper fragments and eraser dust), adhesive
contaminants are more likely to lead to complaints from customers because of the following:
• Vertical streaks caused by adhesive contaminants are more visible in terms of
image quality.
• Unless removed by cleaning, adhesive contaminants continue to produce vertical
streaks, while non-adhesive contaminants stop producing streaks after they are
dislodged.
• Many adhesive contaminants are difficult to remove by cleaning.
The ARDF DF3090 (D779) features a system (non-contact scanning) to reduce vertical streaks
caused by adhesive contaminants.
Contact scanning: Non-contact scanning:
Other ADFs/ARDFs DF3090 (D779)
In contact scanning, the whole of the original By means of the Mylar sheet [B], originals are
comes into contact with the DF exposure kept slightly above the DF exposure glass [A],
glass [A] so that non-adhesive contaminants preventing adhesive contaminants from adhering
can be removed. to the glass.

The ARDF DF3090 (D779) can be converted from non-contact scanning to contact scanning for
users who wish to reduce vertical streaks caused by non-adhesive contaminants.
SP No. Contact scanning Non-contact scanning
SP4-688-001 (DF Density Adjustment ARDF) 97% 102%

SM 6-156 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Other Problems

Converting the ARDF DF3090 to Contact Scanning

Troubleshooting
• Turn OFF the main power and unplug the power cord from the wall socket, before
starting the following procedure. If installing without turning OFF the main power, an
electric shock or a malfunction may occur.
1. Remove the ARDF front cover [A] ( x1).

2. Remove the scanning guide plate [B] ( [A]x1).

3. Remove the plastic guides [A] on the sides of the scanning guide plate ( x1).

SM 6-157 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Other Problems

4. Attach the guides for contact scanning. Each guide has a hole [A].

5. Mount the scanning guide plate, taking care not to damage the sheet [A].

6. Peel off the gap sheet [A] from the DF exposure glass with your hands.

7. Clean the DF exposure glass [A] with alcohol.

To avoid paper jams, make sure adhesive is completely removed.

SM 6-158 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Other Problems

8. Turn the main switch on.

9. Start the SP mode.

Troubleshooting
10. Select SP4-688-001 (DF Density Adjustment ARDF) and change the setting to “97” for
contact scanning.
11. Change the DF magnification (SP4-871-003) from [0.11%] to [0.00%].

• When returning the setting back to non-contact scanning, return the SP values also.

Converting the SPDF3100 to Contact Scanning

1. Open the SPDF and exchange the entrance lower guide unit [A] to a non-contact type part.

• Entrance lower guide unit for non-contact transport: The following areas are black
[A].
• Entrance lower guide unit for contact transport: The following areas are clear and
colorless [B].

2. Exchange the scanning guide plate [A] to a non-contact type part (hook x 1).

SM 6-159 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Other Problems

• [A] : The color of the marker of the non-contact type scanning guide plate for this
machine is gray.
• [B]: The color of the marker of the contact type scanning guide plate for this
machine is white.
• [C]: The color of the marker of the non-contact type scanning guide plate for
previous machine is black.

3. Attach the scanning guide plate for contact transport [A] (hook x 1).
4. Attach the entrance lower guide unit for contact transport [B] ( x 2).

5. Peel off the gap sheet [A] from the DF exposure glass with your hands.

SM 6-160 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Other Problems

6. Clean the DF exposure glass [A] with alcohol.

To avoid paper jams, make sure adhesive is completely removed.

Troubleshooting
7. Turn the main switch on.
8. Enter the SP mode.
9. Change SP4-688-002 (Scan Image Density Adjustment 1-pass) from “101” to "96".
10. Change the DF magnification (SP4-871-003) from [0.11%] to [0.00%].

• When returning the setting back to non-contact scanning, return the SP values also.

6.13.4 FINISHER REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT

A side-to-side registration error can be produced when the paper is being fed from the mainframe
to the finisher.

For SR3240/SR3230
The docking bracket for SR3240/SR3230 [A] (and its screw [B]) can adjust the side-to-side
registration.

SM 6-161 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Other Problems

To adjust the side-to-side registration:

Change the position of the standard bracket [B] by rotating it 90 degrees as shown by the arrow.
This makes the docking bracket [A] easier to slide horizontally.
Then reattach the docking bracket [A] to the mainframe.

If the paper shifts toward the front

Slide the docking bracket forward by the amount which corresponds to that of the shift, to move
the finisher in the same direction.
e.g.: When paper has shifted by 4 mm from the center toward the front (2 mm/division of the
scale), move the docking bracket toward the front by 4 mm (2 divisions).

[A]: Proof tray

[B]: Docking Bracket Screw

SM 6-162 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Other Problems

If the paper shifts toward the rear

Troubleshooting
Slide the docking bracket backward by the amount which corresponds to that of the shift, to
move the finisher in the same direction.
e.g.: When paper has shifted by 4 mm from the center toward the rear (2 mm/division of the
scale), move the docking bracket backward by 4 mm (2 divisions).

[A]: Proof tray

[B]: Docking Bracket Screw

• After the adjustment, check the side-to-side registration by feeding paper out to the
proof tray. If the shift has not been solved, adjust the docking bracket (screw for the
docking bracket) slightly again.

For SR3220/SR3210
Side-to-side registration can be adjusted by the docking bracket for SR3220/SR3210 [A] (and the
docking bracket screw [B]).

SM 6-163 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Other Problems

1. Eject a sheet of A4(LEF) or A3 paper to the proof tray and check how many divisions of the
scale the edge of the paper has shifted from the center.

[A]: Scale marks for DLT

[B]: Scale marks for A3
[C]: 7 scale marks in 2mm intervals
[D]: Center mark
2. Change the position of the standard bracket by rotating it 180 degrees as shown below. This
makes the docking bracket easier to slide horizontally. Then reattach the docking bracket to
the mainframe.

[A]: Reverse

SM 6-164 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Other Problems

If paper shifts toward the front

Troubleshooting
Slide the docking bracket backward by the amount which corresponds to that of the shift, in order
to move the finisher in the same direction.
e.g.: When paper has shifted by 4 mm from the center toward the rear (2 mm/division of the
scale), move the docking bracket backward by 4 mm (2 divisions).

[A]: Proof Tray

[B]: Docking Bracket Screw

If paper shifts toward the rear

Slide the docking bracket backward by the amount which corresponds to that of the shift, in order
to move the finisher in the same direction.
e.g.: When paper has shifted by 4mm from the center toward the rear (2 mm/division of the
scale), move the docking bracket backward by 4 mm (2 divisions).

[A]: Proof Tray

[B]: Docking Bracket Screw

• After the adjustment, check the side-to-side registration by feeding paper out to the
proof tray. If the shift has not been solved, adjust the docking bracket (screw for the
docking bracket) slightly again.

SM 6-165 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Other Problems

6.13.5 STACKING PROBLEM AT THE 1000-SHEET FINISHER

Stacking problems may occur due to paper curl depending on the paper type / size. In this case,
it is possible to avoid the problem by attaching the auxiliary tray.

Installation procedure for attaching the sheet

1. Clean the back [B] of the auxiliary tray [A] with alcohol

2. Attach the fixing sheets [B] to the auxiliary tray [A].

SM 6-166 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Other Problems

• Place the sheets on the outer ends [A] of the auxiliary tray and hook the bent portion [B]

Troubleshooting
at the edge of the tray.

Installation procedure for attaching the auxiliary tray to the 1000-sheet

finisher
1. Turn on the machine.
2. Manually lift the paper surface detection feeler [A] to keep the sensor “ON”.
Keep lifting the feeler until step 4.

3. Open and close the upper cover [A] or the front cover [B]. The shift tray [C] starts to
descend.

4. "JAM227" is displayed about 3 seconds later. The shift tray descent is stopped. Release
your hand from the feeler.

SM 6-167 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Other Problems

5. Clean the place [A] to attach the fixing sheet with alcohol.

6. Place the auxiliary tray [A] on the shift tray.

7. Attach the fixing sheet [B] on the shift tray and fasten the auxiliary tray.
8. Open and close the front cover or the upper cover. The shift tray starts to rise [C],
and ”JAM227” is cleared.

6.13.6 FINISHER JOGGER PROBLEM

Finisher Jogger Problem (For Booklet Finisher SR3220 (D3B9) / Finisher

SR3210 (D3B8))

• Check the jogger width in the exposure glass reading mode.

• If a paper alignment problem occurs as below, do the following procedure to adjust
the jogger width.

SM 6-168 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Other Problems

1. Place an A4 original (SEF) on the exposure glass.

2. Select [Staple] on the operation panel (you can select any staple location: top or bottom.)

Troubleshooting
3. Press [Start].
4. A copy is put out on the staple tray. Put the copy next to the bottom jogger [A].

5. Measure the distance between the aligning side of the top jogger and the edge of the copy
with a scale.

6. Press the [#] button.

7. Adjust the jogger width with SP6-143-004 (adjustable threshold: -1.5 to +1.5 mm for each
paper size).
SP6-143-004 (Jogger Pos Adj:1K FIN)

• Adjust the jogger width to be slightly narrower (approximately -0.5 mm) than the paper
width.
8. Repeat step 3 through step 6 to make the jogger width same as the paper width.

SM 6-169 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Other Problems

6.13.7 EARLY PAPER TRAY FULL DETECTION MYLAR FOR

INTERNAL FINISHER SR3130 (D690)
Paper curl may occur when the output tray is nearly full. Attach the mylar to the tray full detection
feeler to detect tray full early before paper curl occurs.

Attaching the Mylar

1. Pull the finisher [A].

2. Remove the finisher front cover [A]. ( x2)

SM 6-170 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Other Problems

3. Remove the left lower cover [A]. ( x2)

Troubleshooting
4. Rotate the gear [A] to move down the movable tray [B].

5. Remove the paper exit tray [A]. ( x2)

SM 6-171 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Other Problems

6. Attach the mylar [A] on the tray full detection feeler [B].

7. Re-attach the paper exit tray. ( x2)

8. Move the movable tray [A] up and down to check that the mylar does go through the sensor
properly.

SM 6-172 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Other Problems

9. Re-attach the left lower cover. ( x2)

10. Re-attach the finisher front cover. ( x2)

Troubleshooting
6.13.8 PAPER CURL PROBLEM FOR SR3180
When using mixed mode, with duplex (curls downwards) over simplex (curl upwards) and paper
curl occurs, attach the auxiliary tray (D7667010), disable the tray full detection sensor, and paste
the mylar.
1. Paper output cover [A] ( ×2)

2. Release the clamp and disconnect the harness of the paper exit full sensor 1 [A] ( x1,
x1).

3. Loop and clamp the harness [A] as shown ( x1).

SM 6-173 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Other Problems

4. Release the clamp and disconnect the harness of the paper exit full sensor 2 (Staple) [A]
( x1, x1).

5. Loop and clamp the harness [A] as shown( x1).

• If the harness cable [A] is too short to loop, clamp the harness without looping ( x1).

6. Re-attach the paper output cover ( ×2)

7. Attach the auxiliary tray (D7667010) [B] to the paper output tray [A]

SM 6-174 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Other Problems

8. Paste the mylars [A] on the frame of the finisher.

Troubleshooting
6.13.9 MAXIMUM NUMBER OF SHEETS FOR STAPLING AND
WHAT HAPPENS WHEN THE JOB HAS TOO MANY PAGES

Behavior: When the number of sheets exceeds the maximum staple

capability
When corner stapling

Sheets are fed out without being stapled. First, the maximum number of sheets (50) is stacked in
the staple tray and fed out. Following this, any remaining sheets that exceed this maximum are
also stacked and fed out without being stapled, in the same way.
Example:
If 60 sheets are set to be stapled, the first 50 are stacked in the staple tray and then fed out
without being stapled. The remaining 10 are then stacked in the tray and fed out without being
stapled.
When the maximum number of originals for a stapled set has been scanned, "Stapling capacity
exceeded" is displayed on the LCD.

There is no message displayed prompting the user to cancel or continue with the 51st original.

SM 6-175 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Other Problems

When booklet stapling

The following dialog is displayed when the maximum number of sheets in a stapled set is
reached during the scanning of the originals. The user is prompted before printing begins.

[Stop] The job is canceled (no further scanning, no printing)

[Continue] Sets are stapled at maximum capacity as a batch and fed out.
Example:
The machine stops scanning after 20 out of 30 originals are scanned.
The message shown above is displayed.
If [Continue] is selected, printing starts and sheets are stapled in a batch of one 20-sheet set and
one 10-sheet set.

Specifications: Maximum sheet capability for staple jobs

Model Corner Stapling Booklet Stapling
Finisher SR3210 50 sheets -
Booklet Finisher SR3220 50 sheets 15 sheets
Booklet Finisher SR3240 50 sheets 20 sheets
Finisher SR3230 50 sheets -
Internal Finisher SR3130 50 sheets -

SM 6-176 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Other Problems

6.13.10 FUSING OFFSET OCCURS AT THE EDGE OR CENTER OF

THE PAPER

Troubleshooting
Symptom:

Fusing offset occurs at the edge or center of the paper.

The customer may report a strange odor coming from the machine.

Cause:

The temperature is too low at the edge or center of the paper when the paper enters the fusing
unit.

Solution:

If the symptom occurs, do the procedure in the Flowchart below.

SM 6-177 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Other Problems

Workaround A:

Change the paper tray setting (paper thickness setting) in User Tools to match the actual paper
thickness.
*1: User Tools > Tray paper setting > page 2 > Select tray > Select paper thickness

Workaround B:

Change the paper tray setting in User Tools.

• There is no workaround for Thick Paper 4.

Thin paper -> Plain paper
Plain paper -> Mid thick (For MP 5055/6055 models, Plain paper -> Thick paper 1)

• The copy speed will be reduced from 60cpm to 50cpm on the MP 6055 model.
Mid thick -> Thick paper 1

• The copy speed will be reduced (See the chart below).

Thick paper 1 -> Thick paper 2

• The copy speed will be reduced (See the chart below).

Thick paper 2 -> Thick paper 3
Thick paper 3 -> Thick paper 4

• Auto duplex cannot be used (See the chart below).

Postcards: Thick paper 2 -> Thick paper 3
Side effects: The following may occur, depending on the paper thickness.
• Paper curl
• Decreased productivity

Workaround C:

Increase the target fusing temperature by 5 degrees using the following SPs:
• SP 1-105-003
• SP 1-105-007
• SP 1-105-011
• SP 1-105-015
If the symptom occurs with 1200 dpi printing, also increase the target temperature by 5 degrees
for these SPs as well:
• SP 1-105-107
• SP 1-105-137
• SP 1-105-111
Side effects: Paper curl may occur.

SM 6-178 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Other Problems

Workaround D:

Troubleshooting
Change the target temperature using the following SPs as shown below.
• SP 1- 105-019: 145 deg -> 150 deg
• SP 1- 105-023: 130 deg -> 140 deg
• SP 1- 105-027: 135 deg -> 140 deg
• SP 1- 105-141: 140 deg -> 145 deg
• SP 1- 105-115: 120 deg -> 125 deg (For 1200 dpi mode)
Side effects: Paper curl may occur.

Workaround C':

Increase the target fusing temperature by 5 more degrees using the following SPs:
• SP 1-105-003
• SP 1-105-007
• SP 1-105-011
• SP 1-105-015
For 1200 dpi printing:
• SP 1-105-107
• SP 1-105-137
• SP 1-105-111
Side effects: Paper curl may occur.

Workaround D':

Increase the target fusing temperature by 5 more degrees using the following SPs:
• SP 1- 105-019: 145 deg -> 150 deg -> 155 deg
• SP 1- 105-023: 130 deg -> 140 deg -> 145 deg
• SP 1- 105-027: 135 deg -> 140 deg -> 145 deg
• SP 1- 105-141: 140 deg -> 145 deg -> 150 deg
• SP 1- 105-115: 120 deg -> 125 deg -> 130 deg (For 1200 dpi mode)
Side effects: Paper curl may occur.
CPM information
MP2555 MP3055 MP3555 MP4055 MP5055 MP6055
Plain paper 25 30 35 40 50 60
Mid-thick 25 30 35 40 50 50
Thick paper 1 25 28 28 30 30 30
Thick paper 2 18 18 18 18 18 18
Thick paper 3 18 18 18 18 18 18
Thick paper 4 18 18 18 18 18 18

SM 6-179 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Other Problems

6.13.11 TROUBLESHOOTING FOR TONER DENSITY

Symptom:

The image density decreases with continuous printing, especially in solid image areas (though it
is within specification).

• This does not occur in text areas.

Cause:

This may occur due to the condition of the developer, and also occurs more easily when repeat
prints are made from the same original.

Solution:

Change the following SP modes as shown.

• SP3-629-001 (Vc Vsp): Set to 530
• SP3-629-101 (Vb Vsp): Set to 330

• This will increase the amount of toner used to develop the image.
• As a side effect, this will shorten the yield of the toner bottle.

6.13.12 TROUBLESHOOTING FOR BLOTS ON MIDDLE THICK

GLOSSY OR COATED PAPER
Symptom:

Printed images contain blots when using middle thick (or thick) glossy or coated paper.

• This may occur when paper weight is 82 g/m2 or more and its smoothness is
100(S) or more.

Cause:

Glossy or coated paper contacts the PCU more closely than plain paper, and using middle thick
or thick paper increases the transfer pressure.
So more dust or blots on the PCU may be transferred to the paper than usual.
These may result in more blots appearing on printouts.

SM 6-180 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Other Problems

Solution:

Troubleshooting
1. Change the following SP modes as shown.
SP3-629-001 (Vc Vsp): Set to 630 (If the symptom still occurs, set to 680)
SP3-629-101 (Vb Vsp): Set to 430 (If the symptom still occurs, set to 480)
2. Enter SP3-011-001 (Manual ProCon :Exe), and then press [Execute].

Depending on the environment, the printout toner density may decrease.

SM 6-181 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Blown Fuse Condition

6.14 BLOWN FUSE CONDITION

Fuse: EU

Name Output connector Capacity Part number Field replacement

possible
Voltage Part name Remarks
FU101 CN902 (Fusing Lamp) 8A 11071346 Yes
AC FIH250V8A -
(EM/CR)
FU102 CN904 (DHB) 5A 11071344 Yes
AC FIH 250V -
5A(TP/CR)
FU105 CN913-5, 12 (Zero cross circuit 2A - No
/ DH Heater) AC SCT250V2A -
FU11 CN911-3 (IPU) 5A - No
5V SLT250V5A -
FU12 CN912-5, 6 (SIO) 10A 11071216 Yes
24V FBT250V10A -
(EM)
FU13 CN912-7 (BCU) 10A 11071216 Yes
24V FBT250V10A -
(EM)
FU14 CN912-8 (BCU) 10A 11071216 Yes
24V FBT250V10A -
(EM)

Fuse: NA

Name Output connector Capacity Part number Field replacement

possible
Voltage Part name Remarks
FU101 CN902 (Fusing Lamp) 15A 11071241 Yes
AC TLC-15A-N4 -
FU102 CN904 (DHB) 10A 11071347 Yes
AC FIH 250V -
10A(EM/CR)
FU105 CN913-5, 12 (Zero cross circuit 2A - No
/ DH heater) AC SLT250V2A -
FU11 CN911-3 (IPU) 5A - No
5V SLT250V5A -

SM 6-182 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Blown Fuse Condition

Name Output connector Capacity Part number Field replacement

possible

Troubleshooting
Voltage Part name Remarks
FU12 CN912-5, 6 (SIO) 10A 11071216 Yes
24V FBT250V10A (EM) -
FU13 CN912-7 (BCU) 10A 11071216 Yes
24V FBT250V10A (EM) -
FU14 CN912-8 (BCU) 10A 11071216 Yes
24V FBT250V10A (EM) -
Fuse Location

SM 6-183 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
 Blown Fuse Condition

7. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS

Operation
Smart

Panel
7.1 GUIDANCE FOR THOSE WHO ARE FAMILIAR WITH
PREDECESSOR PRODUCTS
7.1.1 CHANGES FROM THE PREVIOUS MACHINE
The difference between this model and the previous (MP 2554/3054/3554/4054/5054/6054)
models are as follows:

Scanner
Items MP MP 2555/3055/3555/4055/5055/6055
2554/3054/3554/4054/5054/6054
Scanner type - Short focus scanner, for distortion
correction:
After replacing the scanner carriage, the
correction value specified on the supplied
sheet in the SP code must be entered. For
details, see Scanner Carriage.
Main scanning Not available Magnification adjustment is available for
magnification the main scanning direction with SP4-871-
adjustment 003, -004.
Scanner - Provided
shipping
retainers
Oiling to guide Launa oil Grease
rails
Scanner drive With wire drive With belt drive
Paper size Reading all lamps Reading half lamps in the front side
detection
(main
scanning
direction,
width)
Paper size Put one reflecting sensor in a Put one reflecting sensor in a horizontal
detection vertical direction. direction.
(sub scanning
direction,
length)

SM 7-1 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Blown Fuse Condition

Items MP MP 2555/3055/3555/4055/5055/6055
2554/3054/3554/4054/5054/6054
Option heater Attach the heater at an angle in the Attach the heater horizontally in the left
center of the bottom plate. rear of the bottom plate.

Image Processing
Items MP MP 2555/3055/3555/4055/5055/6055
2554/3054/3554/4054/5054/6054
SIO Available Not available
The functions of this old board are built
into the IPU.
IPU SUB Available Not available
The functions of this old board are built
into the IPU.
Copy Data Available by option Available by default on the IPU
Security
Function

Toner Supply
Items MP MP 2555/3055/3555/4055/5055/6055
2554/3054/3554/4054/5054/6054
Resetting The toner end sensor detects “toner To prevent clearing of the toner end condition
the Toner remaining” once. due to erroneous detection, the counter is
End reset if the toner end sensor detects “toner
Counter remaining” 4 times in a row.
Toner end When the development motor is When the polygon motor is “on”.
sensor’s “on”.
operation
timing

SM 7-2 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Blown Fuse Condition

Feed / Transport Part

Items MP MP 2555/3055/3555/4055/5055/6055

Operation
2554/3054/3554/4054/5054/6054

Smart

Panel
Bypass tray / - The following codes are used to isolate the
Main cause;
machine jam • JAM048: Transport Sensor
code Lag Jam from Bypass Tray
• JAM051: Transport Sensor
Lag Jam from 1st Feed Tray
Main tray - • Improved stacking
paper exit performance after feedout by
adding resilience to the paper
with the paper exit driven
roller (drum shape).
• To prevent paper jam when
the paper is delivered from the
machine’s paper exit to the
internal exit peripherals,
attach the paper support guide
(supplied with the
peripherals).
• Replaced the paper exit driven
roller to a flat type roller to
prevent jamming when paper
is fed to the internal exit
peripherals.
Paper feed The solenoid removes the pick-up Not available
transport roller from the paper.
mechanism

SM 7-3 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Blown Fuse Condition

Electrical parts
Items MP MP 2555/3055/3555/4055/5055/6055
2554/3054/3554/4054/5054/6054
SIO Available Not available
The functions for this old board are included on
the IPU
OPU 1st generation Smart Operation Panel 2nd generation Smart Operation Panel
FFC With hooks Without hooks

Exterior Cover/Air Flows (Fan Control)

Items MP MP
2554/3054/3554/4054/5054/6054 2555/3055/3555/4055/5055/6055
Rear Covers, 5 covers, 20 screws 2 covers, 12 screws
Screws (upper part:4 covers, 15 screws) (upper part: 1 cover, 7 screws)
(lower part: 1 cover, 5 screws) (lower part: 1 cover, 5 screws)
Main Power Switch Main power switch cover (front side) Right side of the 1st paper tray
Labyrinth Structure - Available
of the Exterior
Fusing Fan 1 2 (MP 4055 SP/5055 SP/6055 SP)
Odor Filter 1 2 (MP 4055 SP/5055 SP/6055 SP)
Particulate Filter Not available Available (MP 4055 SP/5055
SP/6055 SP)

Others, Options
Items MP MP 2555/3055/3555/4055/5055/6055
2554/3054/3554/4054/5054/6054
Finisher paper exit - Available
guide mechanism
Ten key options - Available
Inner Finisher - Available
SR3180
Paper feed - Productivity Mode/Silent Mode (the UP
accuracy selection is available)
Starting up the - 15 seconds starting up (the UP
machine with all selection is available)
options
Replacing a paper - Replace to the flat roller and attach the
exit roller on the paper support guide according to the

SM 7-4 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Blown Fuse Condition

Items MP MP 2555/3055/3555/4055/5055/6055
2554/3054/3554/4054/5054/6054

Operation
main unit side options.

Smart

Panel
when installing
internal paper exit
options
NFC card R/W - Available
options
Noise Control - Equipped with the sound absorbing
material and the sound insulation
sheet.

SM 7-5 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Overview

7.2 OVERVIEW
7.2.1 PARTS LAYOUT

Scanner Unit

No. Description No. Description

1 Operation panel 6 Auto Paper Size (APS) sensor
2 Anti-condensation heater (Scanner heater)*1 7 Scanner lamp unit (LEDB)
3 Scanner HP sensor 8 Scanner motor
4 DF Position Sensor 9 Sensor Board Unit (SBU)
5 Auto Paper Size (APS) sensor
*1: Service part

SM 7-6 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Overview

Paper Feed Unit

Operation
Smart

Panel
No. Description No. Description
1 1st paper feed sensor 10 2nd paper feed sensor
2 1st vertical transport sensor 11 1st paper feed tray set switch
3 1st paper end sensor 12 1st paper feed tray lift motor
4 1st paper feed tray limit sensor 13 2nd paper feed tray set switch
5 1st paper feed tray pick up solenoid 14 2nd paper feed tray lift motor
6 2nd paper feed tray pick up solenoid 15 Registration sensor
7 2nd paper feed tray limit sensor 16 1st paper feed tray size switch
8 2nd vertical transport sensor 17 2nd paper feed tray size switch
9 2nd paper end sensor 18 Anti-condensation heater *Option

SM 7-7 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Overview

Laser Unit, PCDU

No. Description No. Description

1 Laser Unit 3 TD sensor
2 Quenching lamp 4 PCL (Pre Cleaning Light)

SM 7-8 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Overview

Fusing Unit

Operation
Smart

Panel
No. Description No. Description
1 Thermopile 6 Thermostat
2 Thermopile 7 Thermostat
3 Fusing exit sensor 8 NC sensor (Center)
4 Pressure roller thermistor (End) 9 NC sensor (End)
5 Pressure roller thermistor (Center) 10 Fusing lamp

SM 7-9 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Overview

Waste Toner Bottle

No. Description No. Description

1 Drum/waste toner motor 2 Toner collection full sensor

SM 7-10 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Overview

Duplex/Bypass Unit

Operation
Smart

Panel
No. Description No. Description
1 Right cover open/closed switch 6 Bypass paper length sensor
2 Duplex entrance sensor 7 Bypass pickup solenoid
3 Duplex entrance motor 8 Bypass paper width switch
4 Duplex guide switch 9 Bypass paper end sensor
5 Duplex/bypass motor 10 Duplex exit sensor

SM 7-11 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Overview

Paper Exit/Reverse Unit

No. Description No. Description

1 Paper exit switching solenoid 6 Transfer unit open/close sensor
2 Paper exit sensor 7 Fusing entrance sensor
3 Reverse sensor 8 Transfer roller contact sensor
4 Paper exit full sensor 9 Temperature / Humidity Sensor
5 Reverse motor

SM 7-12 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Overview

Air Flow

Operation
Smart

Panel
No. Description No. Description
1 Development bearing cooling fan (MP 4055 4 PSU cooling fan (MP 4055 SP/5055
SP/5055 SP/6055 SP only) SP/6055 SP only)
2 Fusing fan 5 Development exhaust fan
3 Paper exit fan 6 Temperature/humidity sensor

SM 7-13 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Overview

Drive Unit

No. Description No. Description

1 Paper exit motor (MP 4055 SP/5055 SP/6055 SP only) 5 Development motor
2 Fusing motor (MP 4055 SP/5055 SP/6055 SP only) 6 Vertical transport
Fusing/paper exit motor (MP 2555 SP/3055 SP/3555 SP motor
only)
3 Drum/Waste toner motor 7 Paper feed motor
4 Registration motor

SM 7-14 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Overview

Electrical Components

Operation
Smart

Panel
No. Description No. Description
1 Interlock switch (Front Cover) 6 IPU
2 PSU 7 Controller Board
3 DHB (Option) 8 Interlock Switch (Right Cover)
4 BCU 9 Main power switch
5 HVP

SM 7-15 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Scanning

7.3 SCANNING
7.3.1 OVERVIEW
The short focus scanner is realized by implementing a lens block (SBU, CCD, and Lens) on the
carriage.
After the scanner lamp unit emits the light to the document, the light goes through the route
shown below and reaches the CCD.
Scanner lamp unit (LED) -> Original -> 1st mirror (13) -> 2nd mirror (3) -> 3rd mirror (6) -> 2nd
mirror (3) -> 4th mirror (5) -> 5th mirror (14) -> lens -> pre-sensor lens -> CCD

No. Description No. Description

1 Sheet-through exposure glass 9 Sensor board unit (SBU)
2 Exposure glass 10 CCD
3 2nd mirror 11 Pre-sensor lens
4 Scanner lamp unit (LEDB) 12 Lens
5 4th mirror 13 1st mirror
6 3rd mirror 14 5th mirror
7 Scanner motor 15 Anti-condensation heater* (Scanner heater)
8 APS sensors
*Service part

Reading system
Two scan modes are available: book mode (platen mode) and ADF mode (sheet-through
method).
In book mode (platen mode), the scanner scans the document from left to right.
When the ADF is used (ADF mode), the scanner is fixed in the home position on the left side,
and the document is transported and read (sheet-through method).

SM 7-16 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Scanning

Scanner
Scanner lamp

Operation
Smart

Panel
The light source is an LED. The LED emits little heat (low power consumption), and has excellent
light output rise characteristics.

CCD

The 3 line color CCD converts shade in the document to 3 color (B, G, and R) electrical signals.
The use of a 4.7 µm image CCD achieves low-cost and compactness.

Reflection plate (reflector)

The reflection plate reflects light from the scanner lamp, and collects light for the document read
unit. The light which illuminates the document is adjusted to be the same on the left and right so
as not to cast any shadow on the document.

White reference seal

A white reference seal for shading correction is affixed to the underside of the scale on the left of
the MFP. This is read by the scanner and CCD when the power is ON. The data read are
temporarily stored in a RAM, and used for correction of document image data.

7.3.2 MECHANISM

Scanner drive
The scanner is driven by the scanner motor [D] via the timing belt [C]. For each mode, reading is
completed in one pass.
Position control of the scanner carriage [B] is based on the scanner HP sensor [A].

SM 7-17 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Scanning

Operation Flowchart
Overall Flowchart

Scanner carriage storage control

To protect the scanner carriage, the carriage must be locked to the scanner frame before
shipping. The scanner can be moved to the shipping lock position with SP4-806-001 (Scanner
carriage storage operation) (Super SP mode).
If pre-shipping check is required, make sure to move the scanner carriage to the right position
with SP4-806-001 and mount the locking parts.
SC121-00 will occur when the power is turned on or scanning takes place while the carriage is
locked.

SM 7-18 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Scanning

Document size detection

In this MFP, for document size detection, two reflecting sensors are used for the sub scanning

Operation
direction, and a CCD is used for the main scanning direction.

Smart

Panel
Sub scanning direction

The document size is detected by the ON/OFF states of the sensor (the CCD can also detect the
length). The pressure plate open/closed sensor is used for document size detection timing. When
the pressure plate open/closed sensor has changed from "no cover" to "cover," the size is
detected.

Main scanning direction

RGB color densities at 3 locations (S1, S2, S3) are detected by a CCD, and when any of the
RGB densities is 12 digits or more, it is determined that a document is present.
The pressure plate open/closed sensor is used for document size detection timing. When the
pressure plate open/closed sensor detects "no cover," the scanner lamp is moved to the right;
when it detects "cover," the scanner lamp is moved to home position while lit, and during this
time, the size is read.

Document size Sensor response

Size Direction Dimensions S1 S2 S3 L1 L2
(main × sub)
A3 SEF 297x420 - -
B4 SEF 257x364 - -
A4 SEF 210x297 - - -
A4 LEF 297x210 - - - -
B5 SEF 182x257 - - - -
B5 LEF 257x182 - - -
A5 SEF 148x210 - - - - -
A5 LEF 210x148 - - - -

SM 7-19 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Scanning

Document size Sensor response

B6 SEF 128×182 - - - - -
B6 LEF 182×128 - - - - -
DLT SEF 11"×17" - - -
10×15 SEF 10"×15" - - -
USB4 SEF 10"×14" - - -
LG SEF 8 1/2"×14" - - -
Oficio SEF 8 1/2"×13.4" - - -
Foolscap SEF 8 1/2"×13" - - -
Folio SEF 8 1/4"×13" - - -
F SEF 8"×13" - - -
LT SEF 8 1/2"×11" - - -
LT LEF 11"×8 1/2" - - - -
8×10 SEF 8"×10" - - -
10×8 LEF 10"×8" - - - -
Executive SEF 7 1/4"×10 1/2" - - - -
HLT SEF 5 1/2"×8 1/2" - - - - -
HLT LEF 8 1/2"×5 1/2" - - - -
8kai SEF 267×388 - - -
16kai SEF 194×267 - - - -
16kai LEF 267×194 - - - -

• The document width (main scanning direction) is detected by the sensor indicated
with ‘ ’.

How to check the sensor state

• SP4-301 (Operation Check APS Sensor)

How to read the screen
(7)00000000(0)
0: no document
1: document present
When the sensor responds, bit 0 is displayed as "1."
• SP4-310 (Scan Size Detect Value)
Viewed from the control panel, labeling positions from rear to front S1-S3 in that order,
the RGB density at each position is displayed in digit units (the value just before scan is
displayed).

SM 7-20 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Scanning

Other

• SP4-303 (Min Size for APS)

Operation
Sets the display when non-standard (small size) size original is detected.

Smart

Panel
0: Display message "Original size unknown".
1: Operate assuming the original size is A5 LEF (HLT LEF for inches).
• SP4-305-001(8K/16K Detection)
By changing this SP, you can change between A4 size/letter size or Chinese paper size
(8×16).
0: Normal setting. (Default)
1: When detecting A4/LT size -> Assume that it is A4 when SEF, LT when LEF.
2: When detecting A4/LT size -> Assume that it is LT when SEF, A4 when LEF.
3: Change to 8K/16K settings.
A3, B4 -> 8K LEF
A4 LEF, B4 LEF, A5 LEF -> 16K LEF
A4 SEF, B4 SEF, A5 SEF -> 16K SEF
• SP5-126 (Set F-size Document)
Selects the paper size for the F-size original.
0: When detecting Foolscap -> Assume that the size is 8 1/2"x13". (Default)
1: When detecting Folio -> Assume that the size is 8 1/4"x13".
2: When detecting F -> Assume that the size is 8"/13".
• SP4-308 (Scan Size Detection)
Sets CCD original size detection and APS original size detection.
0: Disable: Does not detect original size
1: Enable: Detects original size with the CCD unit
2: APS: APS sensor is used for detecting original size. (Do not select this option
because this is for special order.)
• SP4-309-004 (Scan Size Detect:Setting LED PWM Duty)
If the user specifies that the pre-scan lamp is too bright, the brightness pre-scan can be
reduced by decreasing the value of SP4-309-004 (Scan Size Detect:Setting LED PWM
Duty). However, if the lamp brightness is reduced, size detection for a document with a
large number of solid images will be less accurate.
• SP5-135 (LG_Oficio Change)
1: When detecting LG size -> Assume that the size is 8 1/2"x14".
2: When detecting Oficio size -> Assume that the size is 8 1/2"x13.4". (Default)

SM 7-21 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Scanning

Improved tolerance to black lines when paper passes through ARDF/SPDF

The original document does not come in contact with the sheet-through exposure glass, which
prevents adhesive dirt (ball pen ink) on the document from adhering to the sheet-through
exposure glass.
ADF cross-section diagram, non-contact scanning

[A]: Sheet
[B]: Sheet-through exposure glass
[C]: Read position
[D]: Document
• Contact scanning
As the document comes in contact with the sheet-through exposure glass this is useful
for dealing with adhesion of free dirt particles (paper scraps, etc.). (Self-cleaning
mechanism using paper)
On the other hand, sticky dirt adhering to the document sticks to the sheet-through
exposure glass, and may give rise to the appearance of black lines.
ADF cross-section diagram, contact scanning

[A]: Sheet-through exposure glass

[B]: Read position
[C]: Document
If black lines due to free dirt particles appear within a short time, such as when users

SM 7-22 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Scanning

have documents with large amounts of paper scraps, you can change from the non-
contact scanning system to the contact scanning system with the procedure in

Operation
Troubleshooting - Vertical Streaks on Copies due to Scanning Problems.

Smart

Panel
• Reference (reading position correction)
By changing SP4-020-001 (Dust Check Dust Detect:On/Off), when dirt is detected at
the reading position, the reading position may be changed to avoid the dirt.
(If it cannot be avoided, an alert is displayed on the control panel advising the user to
perform target glass cleaning).
Image diagram

[A]: Read position

[B]: Sheet-through exposure glass
[C]: Dirt

• Dirt is detected when a document passes through, so the alert will not disappear
until reading of the next document begins, even after the sheet-through exposure
glass cleaning is performed.
• If dirt is detected not on the sheet-through exposure glass but on the background
guide plate, the alert will not disappear even if the glass is wiped.
• The time required for the first copy is slightly (almost imperceptibly) longer.
• The detection threshold value can be changed using SP4-020-002 (Dust Check
Dust Detect:Lvl). (The larger the value is, the smaller the dirt particles that can be
detected become.)
• It is prohibited to change the setting of SP4-020-003 (Dust Check Lvl Dust
Reject:Lvl).

SM 7-23 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Scanning

Difference between Non-contact Transport and Contact Transport in DF

Scanning
Transport Non-contact Transport Contact Transport
Method
Descriptions

Because of the film attached to the While passing, the original contacts the
glass, the original doesn’t contact the glass.
glass.
Merit It almost never causes stripes on the It almost never causes stripes on the
image that arise from foreign image that arise from dust on the glass,
substances transferring from the because the glass is cleaned by contact
original to the glass. with the transported original.
Demerit Compared with the contact method, Compared with the non-contact method,
stripes on the image caused by dust stripes on the image caused by foreign
occur more often. substances transferred from the surface
of an original to the glass occur more
often.
Aim To improve prevention of stripes in the Considering the target users of this
image caused by sticky foreign machine, it’s important to improve
substances. prevention of stripes caused by dust in
the path
Note 69. Be sure to replace the -
sheet-through glass with
the film attached on the
glass.
70. When you attach the film
on the glass, you need
to keep the left scale
attached on the glass in
order to fix the location
of the film.*1
71. You can change the
method (contact method
to non-contact, or vice
versa) by replacing
some parts.*1
*1: For details, Vertical Streaks on Copies due to Scanning Problems.

SM 7-24 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Scanning

Anti-Condensation Heater
Under low temperature conditions, condensation may appear on optical parts (such as mirrors).

Operation
This will cause image deletion, blacked out images, and gray images. As a countermeasure,

Smart

Panel
there is an anti-condensation heater [A] that is an optional service part. This heater turns on
automatically when the power source turns off.

A Anti-condensation heater

SM 7-25 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Image Processing

7.4 IMAGE PROCESSING

7.4.1 STRUCTURAL BLOCK DIAGRAM
For MP 2555 SP/3055 SP/3555 SP models

SM 7-26 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Image Processing

For MP 4055 SP/5055 SP/6055 SP models

Operation
Smart

Panel

SM 7-27 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Image Processing

7.4.2 MECHANISM

SBU
Functions

Performs Black level correction and White level correction (AGC), Creating the SBU test pattern,
and A/D conversion.

Operation overview

Samples 2 analog signals (ODD, EVEN) from RGB output from the 3-line CCD by an analog
ASIC: SCAT, and converts them to digital signals (output 10 bit) by a built-in 12-bit A/D converter.
The digital signals which are A/D converted by the analog ASIC are output to the IPU as an
LVDS signal.

SP correction value storage

The SBU correction value is stored in an EEPROM of the BCU. This correction value must be re-
adjusted when the lens block is replaced.
• SP4-008 (Sub Scan Magnification Adj)
• SP4-010 (Sub Scan Registration Adj)
• SP4-011 (Main Scan Reg)
• SP4-688-001 (DF Density Adjustment ARDF) or SP4-688-002 (Scan Image Density
Adjustment 1-pass DF)

Dirty Background Adjustment When Using DF:

• The image density scanned by using the DF may be lower compared to the image
density scanned by using the platen. The image density value of DF scanning can
be adjusted by SP4-688-001 (DF Density Adjustment ARDF) or SP4-688-002 (Scan
Image Density Adjustment 1-pass DF).

IPU
Image processing function overview

The image signals from the SBU are subjected to various image processing, and output to the
controller (memory) via a PCI bus. The image signals from the controller (memory) are received
via the PCI bus, and output to the LDB via a GAVD (the LDB is provided in the write unit).
For the direct fax transmission application, the image signals from the SBU are subjected to
various image processing, and output to the FCU via the PCI bus.

SM 7-28 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Image Processing

Image processing overview (copy application)

Digital signal data output from the SBU is subjected to shading correction and line interval

Operation
correction, as well as image processing, which are performed by the IPU. Finally, the data is sent

Smart

Panel
to the MFP unit as digital signals-2 bit/pixels.
Image processing items Details
Shading correction Corrects for uneven scanner lamp lighting, and scatter in CCD light
receiving sensitivity.
Line interval correction Line shift during subscanning magnification/reduction by scanner.
Corrects integer part.
Dot correction Line shift during subscanning magnification/reduction by scanner.
Corrects below decimal point.
Vertical line correction Corrects a vertical striped image during sheet-through ADF.
Image area separation Determines text parts and photo parts of image.
Scanner gamma correction Corrects scatter of image data relative to exposure amount.
From reflectivity linear to density linear.
Filter Performs image sharpness adjustment and removes moire.
ADS Performs natural complexion removal in full color mode.
Color compensation Determines hue in masking mode, and improves chromaticity.
preprocessing
Color compensation Converts RGB data to density value CMYK data of color materials.
Image magnification change Arbitrarily changes main scanning magnification, subscanning fixed
image reduction and magnification of scanner image.
Image shift function Shifts image data in the main scanning or subscanning directions.
Image binarization function In scanner mode, outputs a binary signal.
Image mask Masks an area outside a frame of an arbitrary region in scanner or
printer data.
Image Compresses or expands an image.
compression/expansion
Printer gamma correction Adjusts exposure amount of photosensitive body relative to image
density.
Gradation processing Applies 600dpi, 4bit 16 value gradation processing.

SM 7-29 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Plotter Process

7.5 PLOTTER PROCESS

7.5.1 LASER EXPOSURE

Overview

Name
1 Polygon Mirror
2 F-theta Lens
3 Synchronization Detector Lens
4 Synchronization Detector Mirror
5 Toner Shield Glass
6 LD Board
7 Cylindrical Lens
8 Shield Glass

• The LD drive board controls both the laser output and laser synchronization mechanism.
• The machine cuts off the power supply to the LD drive board if the front or right cover is
opened.

SM 7-30 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Plotter Process

Auto Power Control (APC)

Operation
Smart

Panel
The LD driver IC drives the laser diode. To prevent the intensity of the laser beam from changing
because of the temperature, the machine monitors the current passing through the laser diode
(LD). The machine adjusts the current to the laser diode by comparing it with the reference level
from the reference circuit.
This auto power control is done just after the machine is turned on and during printing.
The laser diode power is adjusted on the production line.

• Do not touch the variable resistors on the LD unit in the field.

SM 7-31 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Plotter Process

LD Safety Switch
For MP 2555 SP/3055 SP/3555 SP models

For MP 4055 SP/5055 SP/6055 SP models

“+24V” goes through the BCU and is converted to “+5VS” on the IPU. “+5VS” is supplied to the
LD Board. The interlock switch turns off when the front cover or the right door is opened. As a
result, the power supply (“+24VS”) to the BCU is cut off.
This system prevents unexpected laser emission, and ensures user safety and technician safety.

SM 7-32 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Plotter Process

7.5.2 PCU

Overview

Operation
Smart

Panel
No. Part Name No. Part Name
1 Cleaning Blade 7 ID Sensor
2 Toner Collection Coil 8 Development Sleeve
1
3 PCL (Pre Cleaning Light) * 9 Charge Roller
4 Pick-off Pawl 10 Brush Roller
5 OPC Drum 11 Quenching Lamp
6 Transfer Roller
*1 New feature. The PCL decreases the electro-static adhesion force generated between the
OPC drum and remaining toner to enhance cleaning efficiency.

SM 7-33 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Plotter Process

OPC Drum Drive Mechanism

The drum/waste toner motor [B] drives the OPC drum [A] through gears and the drum drive shaft
[C].

Drum Charge

Charging to the drum is performed by the charge roller [B]. The charge roller always contacts the
surface of the drum and applies a charge bias.
A power pack applies the bias to the charge roller via a receptacle and electrode terminal. Dirt
can easily adhere to the charge roller because the roller always contacts to the drum with the
pressure spring. Therefore, the brush roller [A] is in contact with the charge roller for cleaning.

SM 7-34 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Plotter Process

Drum Cleaning, Toner Discarding

Operation
Smart

Panel
A counter blade cleaning system is used for drum cleaning. A cleaning blade [B] removes toner
on the drum by always contacting the drum against the drum rotation. Toner scraped off by the
blade is transferred by the toner collection coil [A] from the front to the rear, to be discarded into
the waste toner bottle via the transportation route [C] to the rear of the drum. Depending on the
job conditions, used toner may be discarded by the toner recycle/discard switch mechanism.
Paper dust that adheres to the edge of the cleaning blade is removed by rotating the drum [D] in
reverse after job end.

ID Sensor
The ID sensor is used to keep image density by changing the value of ID sensor standard,
development bias, drum potential and LD power with Vsp and Vsg.
The ID sensor operats at the following times:
72. When the machine has been unused beyond the time determined and the printed
sheet count has exceeded the predetermined value.
73. When the temperature and/or humidity has changed by more than a certain range,
and the machine restarts the engine (i.e. the main power is turned on, warming-up
after the fusing-off mode, and the front cover is closed.)
74. When the machine is processing a job that has more than a set number of sheets
(job is interrupted) or when the machine has completed a job that has the set
number of sheets.

SM 7-35 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Plotter Process

7.5.3 DEVELOPMENT

Overview

The development unit consists of the following parts.

Description Description
1 Doctor Blade 4 Mixing Auger 2
2 OPC Drum 5 TD Sensor
3 Development Sleeve 6 Mixing Auger 1

SM 7-36 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Plotter Process

Development Mechanism

Operation
Smart

Panel
This machine uses a dry two-component magnetic brush development system.
This machine uses 2 mixing augers [C] and [D] to keep the developer evenly mixed. Mixing
auger 2 [C] transports excess developer, scraped off the development roller by the doctor blade
[B], towards the rear of the machine. Mixing auger 1 [D] returns the excess developer, along with
new toner, to the front of the mixing assembly. Here the developer is reapplied to the
development roller.
The TD sensor [A] detects the toner density in the development unit.

Development Bias

Development bias is generated by a power pack and is applied to the development sleeve [A] via
the development sleeve drive shaft and bias terminal [B].

SM 7-37 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Plotter Process

Drive

The development motor [C] drives the mixing auger 1 [A], mixing auger 2 [E] and development
sleeve [B] through a serration gear [D].

Toner Supply

SM 7-38 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Plotter Process

When the toner bottle [A] is set, the transport nozzle [B] on the side of the main machine is
inserted into the bottle (Hi-ACT system).

Operation
The drive of the toner supply motor is transmitted to the toner transport coil [F] through the drive

Smart

Panel
gear [E], which transports the toner in the bottle horizontally. Transporting by a coil provides a
stable and accurate toner supply and low toner remaining.

Toner transported by the coil [A] falls directly into the development unit from the sub-hopper via
the transport pipe [B]. To prevent toner from remaining, a coil is provided in the transport pipe.
When the PCDU is put in the machine, the sub-hopper [C] slides the shutter [D] on the bottle
assembly and the toner goes to the entrance [E] of the development unit.

Toner Density Control

There is only one toner density control mode, called PID mode.
Mode Toner supply TD Sensor Reference Toner Supply Amount Toner End
decision Value Detection
PID Compares Vt ID sensor control The toner supply amount Is Available
with Vtref corrects the TD sensor calculated with the difference
reference value. between Vt and Vtref.

SM 7-39 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Plotter Process

Toner End Detection

The TD sensor detects toner near end.
If the difference between the TD sensor output and the target value is equal to or larger than the
near end threshold, the machine detects that a “possible” toner near end exists. As the machine
continues to operate, it starts to calculate an integrated value. If the integrated value is equal to
or larger than the near end total threshold, the machine determines that a “true” toner near end
exists. The toner near end indicator blinks on the operation panel at this time.
If the difference between the TD sensor output and the target value is less than the near end
threshold twice in a row, the toner near end indicator is turned off.
If the difference between the TD sensor output and the target is equal to or larger than the end
threshold, the machine detects that a “possible” toner end exists. As the machine continues to
operate, it starts to calculate an integrated value. If the integrated value is equal or larger than
the toner end total threshold, the machine determines that a “true” toner end exists.

Toner End Recovery

In a toner end condition or toner near end condition, if the front cover is kept open for more than
5 seconds and then it is closed, the machine changes to a toner end recovery mode. You must
keep the main power on when you replace the toner bottle or toner end recovery will not work.

SM 7-40 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Plotter Process

7.5.4 TRANSFER AND SEPARATION

Overview

Operation
Smart

Panel
Description Description
1 OPC Drum 4 Transfer Roller
2 Pick-off Pawl 5 ID Sensor
3 Discharge Plate
The machine uses a transfer roller [4], which touches the surface of the OPC drum [1]. The high
voltage supply board supplies a positive current to the transfer roller, which attracts the toner
from the drum onto the paper. The current depends on the paper width, paper type, and paper
feed tray.
The curvature of the drum and the discharge plate [3] help the paper to separate from the drum.
The high voltage supply board also supplies a negative dc voltage to the discharge plate. The
drum/waste toner motor drives the transfer roller through the OPC drum [1].

SM 7-41 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Plotter Process

Transfer Roller Unit Charge

The high voltage supply board supplies a positive current to the transfer roller [A], which attracts
the toner from the drum onto the paper. The current depends on the paper width, paper type, and
paper feed tray.
The curvature of the drum and the discharge plate [B] help the paper to separate from the drum.
The high voltage supply board also supplies a negative dc voltage to the discharge plate [B],
which helps the paper to separate from the drum..

Transfer Roller Contact and Release Mechanism

The transfer roller contact and release mechanism prevents dirt and distortion. A transfer roller
contact cam [A] in the front right side of the mainframe is driven by the transfer roller contact
motor [C]. The transfer roller contact cam moves the transfer roller contact arm [C] by its rotation.
The transfer roller [D] and OPC drum [E] are separated by the movement of the transfer roller
contact arm during process control, discarding toner, or when the main power is turned off.

SM 7-42 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Plotter Process

7.5.5 FUSING

Overview

Operation
Smart

Panel
This product uses a QSU-DH fusing system, in which a heater emits light to heat a fusing belt.

No. Description No. Description

1 Thermopile 6 Pressure Roller
2 Heating Sleeve Belt 7 Pressure Roller Thermistor
3 Stripper Plate 8 Fusing Entrance Guide Plate
4 Fusing Exit Guide Plate 9 Thermostat
5 Pressurizing/depressurizing Lever 10 NC Sensor

No. Description No. Description

1 Thermopile (edge) 6 Thermistor (center)
2 Thermopile (center) 7 Thermostat (center)
3 Fusing lamp 8 Non-contact Thermistor (center)

SM 7-43 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Plotter Process

No. Description No. Description

4 Thermostat (edge) 9 Non-contact Thermistor (end)
5 Thermistor (edge)

Mechanism
QSU-DH Fixing System

No. Description No. Description

1 Halogen heater (Fusing Lamps) 5 Stay
2 Light Shielding Plate 6 Nip Pad (heat conduction plate method)
(at both ends)
3 Reflector 7 Pressure Roller
4 Heating Sleeve Belt
The heating sleeve belt is driven by drag rotation following the pressure roller, and presses a nip
pad against the pressure roller to fix toner to the paper.
The fusing lamp emits light, and the area of the fusing sleeve belt which is heated moves in an
anticlockwise direction so that heat is transmitted up to the contact point with the pressure roller.
• Fusing lamp
There are four lamps
Lamp power:
Input voltage Model Center Edge
120V ~ 127V: NA MP 2555/3055/3555/4055/5055/6055 860W 447W
110V: Taiwan MP 2555/3055/3555/4055/5055/6055 793W 420W
220V ~ 240V: EU/AP MP 2555/3055/3555/ 702W 514W
MP 4055/5055/6055 878W 838W

SM 7-44 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Plotter Process

How to distinguish the four fusing units

Step1:

Operation
Remove the fusing upper cover.

Smart

Panel
Step2:
Check the color of the two harnesses (#1 and #2).

Step3:
Identify the model from the table below.
Harness color
Input voltage Model
#2 #1
120V ~ 127V: NA MP 2555/3055/3555/4055/5055/6055 Blue Black
110V: Taiwan MP 2555/3055/3555/4055/5055/6055 Red Blue
220V ~ 240V: EU/AP MP 2555/3055/3555/ Red Red
MP 4055/5055/6055 Red Black

SM 7-45 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Plotter Process

Nip pad

Presses against the Pressure roller to form a fusing nip. The top surface is covered with
a slippery sheet.
Light Shielding plate and Heat Conduction Plate
The heating sleeve belt unit in this model has light shielding and heat conduction plates.
These prevent the fusing sleeve from damage caused by temperature increase.
Otherwise, this could happen at parts of the sleeve where paper does not pass by
during a multi-page job using paper widths that are less than the full width of the sleeve.
When handling an A3 (SEF) or A4 (LEF) sheet
A cylindrical-shaped light shielding plate [C] covers the ends [D] of fusing lamp [A]
where paper does not pass by, to prevent the temperature from rising at those places.

Description
[A] Area where the fusing lamp lights up
[B] Print width of A3 (SEF) / A4 (LEF)
[C] Light shielding plates
[D] Areas where paper does not pass by and that would heat up without the light shielding
plates
When handling an A4 (SEF) or smaller sheet
The machine lights up only the fusing lamp for center [A]. At this time, the temperature
increases around the area [D] where paper does not pass. This is the gap between the
lit part of the fusing lamp [A] and the edge of the sheet being fed.
To prevent the heating sleeve belt unit from damage caused by the temperature
increase, heat conduction plates [C] which are made of a highly heat conductive
material are attached to the nip pad [B] to release the heat.

SM 7-46 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Plotter Process

Operation
Smart

Panel
Description
[A] Area where the fusing lamp lights up
[B] Nip pad
[C] Heat conductive plates
[D] Areas where paper does not pass by and that would heat up without the heat conducting
plates
[E] Print width of A4 (SEF)
[F] Print width of small size
• Reflector
Transmits heat efficiently to the left of the fusing belt.
• Flanges
Situated on both ends of the fusing belt. They maintain the shape of the belt.

Fusing Drive

The pressure roller [B] is driven by the fusing motor or fusing/paper exit motor [A] (depending on
the model). The fusing belt [C] is driven by the pressure roller (drag rotation).

SM 7-47 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Plotter Process

Pressure Release Mechanism

To easily remove paper in the event of a jam in the fusing unit, a pressure release mechanism is
provided.
The pressing or releasing movement is applied together when the right cover [A] opens/closes:
When the right cover is closed, pressure is applied. When the right cover is open, the pressure is
released.

Fusing Temperature Control

• Warm-up mode
After power ON, fusing warm-up begins. The fusing motor or fusing/paper exit motor is
switched ON, the halogen heater is energized, and the fusing temperature is increased
to the “reload target temperature.”
When the fusing warm-up is completed, the fusing motor or fusing/paper exit motor is
switched ON for a certain time, and the fusing temperature is maintained at the “reload
target temperature.”
• Standby mode
After fusing reload, when a certain time has elapsed, power supply to the halogen
heater is switched OFF, and the fusing motor or fusing/paper exit motor is switched
OFF. At the same time, the temperature is maintained at the “standby target
temperature (SP1107-001)” by the halogen heater.
In standby mode, the fusing motor or fusing/paper exit motor is switched ON
intermittently.
• Printing ready mode
After returning to standby mode, the halogen heater is re-energized, and the fusing
temperature is raised to the “printing ready target temperature.” If printing is not
required, the machine again enters the standby mode after a certain time has elapsed.
If printing is required during return to standby, the halogen heater is energized, the
fusing temperature is increased to “target temperature after reload/after paper feed,”
and the print job starts.

SM 7-48 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Plotter Process

CPM Down Control

To maintain image quality and MFP quality, this MFP has a low-temperature CPM mode and

Operation
high-temperature CPM mode, and implements 3 levels of CPM down according to the usage

Smart

Panel
situation and MFP state.
• Low-temperature CPM mode
In a low-temperature environment, the fusing lamp cannot keep up, and it may be
difficult to maintain the target temperature. To handle this, the detection temperature of
the fusing center thermopile is checked at given intervals, and if the detected
temperature is below a threshold value, the CPM is decreased by 1 level.
This low temperature CPM reduction is performed in the following 3 levels:
CPM down level
Mode Level
Normal CPM 100%
CPM down 1 80%
CPM down 2 65%
CPM down 3 50%
• Hot CPM mode
To shorten warm-up time and reduce the TEC value, this MFP employs a fusing unit
with a low heat capacity.
For this reason, the temperature of those parts of the fusing belt where paper does not
pass easily increases, and outside of the paper width it may get extremely hot. In order
to prevent the belt from breaking due to this excessive temperature rise, CPM down is
implemented depending on the usage conditions. CPM down can be implemented in the
following 3 levels depending on the detected temperature at the temperature sensor, or
the paper passage time.

• The down level % is a value for the case where a typical paper (Normal paper:
A3/DLT/LT/A4) passes through the SEF. There may be some differences depending
on paper size/paper thickness.
CPM down level
Mode Level
Normal CPM 100%
CPM down 1 80%
CPM down 2 50%
CPM down 3 30%

SM 7-49 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Plotter Process

CPM down determination using a temperature sensor

The temperature sensor is checked at given intervals, and if the detected temperature is
above a threshold value, the CPM is decreased by 1 level.
Since the points at which temperature tends to increase depend on the paper size, the
sensor used is changed depending on the paper size.
Paper width Sensor used
A3/DLT/B4 (SEF) Fusing thermistor (pressure roller end)
LT/A4 (SEF) Fusing thermopile (end)
B5/A5/B6/A6 (SEF) Fusing thermistor (pressure roller center)
• CPM down determination using paper passage time
Depending on the paper size, it may not be possible to use a sensor to determine the
points on the fusing belt which tend to rise in temperature.
Therefore, time conditions are also used to determine CPM down, and if continuous
paper passage time is above a threshold value, CPM is decreased by 1 level.
(When CPM down is performed by time conditions, CPM does not increase thereafter.)

7.5.6 WASTE TONER

A: Silicone Pipe C: PCDU

B: Waste Toner Transfer Coil D: Waste Toner Bottle
The waste toner transfer coil transfers waste toner from the PCU to the waste toner bottle via a
silicone pipe. The silicone pipe is part of the main machine.

SM 7-50 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Plotter Process

Toner Discarding
Overview

Operation
Smart

Panel
Printing with low toner coverage leaves a lot of uncharged toner in the development unit. This
degrades developer more quickly. To keep toner in the development unit fresh, the machine
makes a belt pattern on the drum at the end of a job when image coverage is less than 3%, to
make sure that the equivalent toner for 3% coverage is consumed. This supplies a certain
amount of fresh toner to the development unit. The belt pattern is cleaned off the drum, and the
waste toner is stored in the cleaning unit and from there it goes to the waste toner bottle.

For these examples, let us say that toner consumption at 3% is 10 mg/m.

6% Coverage (Toner consumption ratio = 20 mg/m)

In the first example, we have 6% coverage. 20 mg/m of toner is sent from the development unit
to the drum. 17 mg/m ends up on the paper and 3 mg/m is cleaned off the drum and goes to the
waste toner bottle. 3 mg/m = 20 mg/m x 0.15. This factor of 0.15 is a constant for this
development mechanism. In other words, at all times, 15% of the toner applied to the drum does
not get on the paper, and is discarded.

1.5% Coverage (Toner consumption ratio = 5 mg/m)

In this example, we have a lot less than 3% coverage. 1.5% coverage is only 5 mg/m of toner.
The development unit sends 5 mg/m of toner to the drum. 4.25 mg/m of this gets on the paper,
and 0.75 mg/m is cleaned off the drum and sent to the waste toner bottle (this is the 15% factor
we talked about above). In this job, only 4.25 mg/m was consumed. The machine has to
consume 10 mg/m for each job. So, to make this 4.25 up to 10 mg/m for the preceding job, the
machine then consumes 5.75 mg/m by making patterns on the drum (shown in red in the
diagram). This toner is cleaned off the drum and sent to the waste toner bottle.

SM 7-51 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Plotter Process

• Red letters indicate the toner amount that the belt patterns forcibly consume.

Waste Toner Bottle

Waste Toner Bottle Drive Mechanism

SM 7-52 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Plotter Process

When the recycling shutter solenoid [A] moves the recycling shutter, collected toner is
transported to the left side by the waste toner transfer coil [B] and falls into the development unit.

Operation
The collected toner in the waste toner bottle is moved to the front side by the waste toner bottle

Smart

Panel
coil [C]. As a result, the height of the collected toner is kept level.
The drum/waste toner motor drives the waste toner transfer coil [B] and waste toner bottle coil
[C]. In this model, there is no set detection mechanism for the waste toner bottle.

Toner Collection Full Detection Mechanism

The toner collection full sensor [A] is located above the feeler [B] of the waste toner bottle. When
the amount of collected toner in the waste toner bottle reaches about 90%, the feeler [B] is lifted
and interrupts the toner collection full sensor. After the machine detects that the waste toner
bottle is full based on the coverage counter or page counter, whichever comes first, the pixel
counter calculates the remaining days for the waste toner bottle replacement. When the machine
prints 7,500 sheets after detecting a bottle near full, the status is changed to bottle full. SP3-810-
011 allows you to adjust the duration between bottle near full and bottle full. The remaining day
counter = 15 days: The machine informs the status via @remote (if connected).
The remaining day counter = 5 days: The machine displays a message that indicates the near
full condition on the operation panel. The remaining day counter = 0 days: The machine displays
a warning on the operation panel and the machine stops.

(Reference) Waste Toner Bottle Life (Sheet count)

Coverage 3%: 460K

Coverage 6%: 320K
Coverage 10%: 230K
*MP 5055 SP model / 5 pages per job

SM 7-53 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Feed/ Transport part

7.6 FEED/ TRANSPORT PART

7.6.1 OVERVIEW

No. Description No. Description

1 Pick-up roller (1st paper tray) 4 Feed roller (2nd paper tray)
2 Feed roller (1st paper tray) 5 Friction roller (2nd paper tray)
3 Friction roller (1st paper tray) 6 Pick-up roller (2nd paper tray)

7.6.2 FEED / TRANSPORT PART

The paper feed tray consists of 2 stages, i.e., a main double tray and a bypass feed tray. By
using both the 1st and 2nd tray as universal trays, a space-saving two-step feed is enabled.
Tray Paper size Loading number of Corresponding paper
sheets thickness
1st/2nd paper A3 - postcard 550 sheets 60 – 300 g/m2
tray
Bypass feed tray 12 x 18 - 100 sheets 52 – 300 g/m2
postcard
Duplex unit A3 - postcard Interleave 52 – 256 g/m2

Tray bottom plate lifting

When the paper feed tray is set in the machine, the set switch at the rear of the tray switches
ON, and it is detected that the tray is set.
The coupling between the shaft at the rear of the tray and the lift motor then engages, the motor
rotates, and the tray bottom plate is lifted. The tray bottom plate lifts until the paper surface
pushes up the pick-up roller, the upper limit sensor switches OFF (interrupt), and the machine
enters the paper feed standby mode.

SM 7-54 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Feed/ Transport part

When the tray is removed, the coupling is released, and the tray bottom plate moves down. The
lift motor then rotates until the coupling returns to the home position.

Operation
Smart

Panel
No. Description No. Description
1 Tray lift motor 3 Tray rear axis
2 Coupling 4 Tray bottom plate

No. Description No. Description

1 Upper limit sensor 2 Pick-up roller

SM 7-55 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Feed/ Transport part

Paper feed mechanism

No. Description No. Description

1 Pickup arm 4 Feed roller
2 Upper limit sensor 5 Feed guide
3 Pick-up roller 6 Friction roller
The paper feed unit employs an RF system.
In a conventional FRR system, transport of 2 sheets at a time is prevented by reverse rotation of
the separating roller, but in the RF system, paper separation is assisted by the resistance of a
separating roller with a torque limiter (reverse drive is not performed).
When the paper feed tray is set in the machine, an arm [A] is pressed, the friction roller [B]
comes in contact with the feed roller, and the pick-up roller [C] contacts the top of the paper (to
prevent paper remaining, when the paper feed tray is withdrawn, the arm returns and contact
with the rollers is released).
The machine enters paper supply standby mode when the tray bottom plate moves up. When the
paper feed motor is switched ON, the rollers rotate and paper is supplied.
The roller holder functions as a paper guide and roller clip ring. The roller holder prevents the
paper from winding up.

SM 7-56 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Feed/ Transport part

Operation
Smart

Panel
Paper feed transport mechanism
In order to maintain a proper interval of each paper, this machine has a paper feed sensor near
the paper feed roller to adjust the timing of paper feeding.
1. The Paper feed motor is switched ON, and the first sheet is supplied.
2. The paper feed motor switches OFF right before the rear edge of the first sheet completely
passes the paper feed roller.
3. The pick-up arm lowers the pick-up roller, which makes the pick-up roller contacting with the
surface of the paper when the rear edge of the first sheet finishes passing the paper feed
roller.
4. The paper feed motor switches ON to supply the second sheet of paper when the first sheet
is transported for a predetermined distance by the downstream transport roller.

SM 7-57 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Feed/ Transport part

Paper size detection (1st / 2nd paper tray)

The end fence interlocking rotation detection plate is an automatic detection system which
recognizes patterns by a 4-position push switch.
Size is detected by the detection patterns of knobs 1, 2, 3, and 4. Tray set is detected by the tray
set switch.
If there has been a change in the pattern, “machine tray automatic size detection” control is
performed continuously.
If the paper size is selected manually by user setting, the automatic size detection is overridden.

No. Description No. Description

1 Size detection switch 3 Tray set switch
2 Size detection feeler 4 End fence
• Tray detection sizes:
SRA3, A3, B4, A4 SEF, LT SEF, B5 SEF, A4 LEF, B5 LEF, and A5 LEF
• Tray size detection patterns
Size Knob
4 3 2 1
A3(DLT) 0 1 0 0
B4(LG) 0 0 1 1
0 1 1 1
A4 SEF 1 1 1 0
LT SEF 1 1 0 0
B5 SEF 1 0 0 0
A4 LEF (LT LEF) 0 0 0 1
B5 LEF (Exe LEF) 0 0 1 0
A5 LEF 0 1 0 1
* “0” is switch ON (PUSH), “1” is switch OFF.

SM 7-58 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Feed/ Transport part

* The figures in parentheses are automatic detection sizes which can be switched over in SP
mode (for SP settings, see “SP mode (paper supply transport)” : SP5-181-005 to 008, SP5-131-

Operation
001).

Smart

Panel
* Exe LEF=10.5" x 7.25"
* If a pattern other than the above is detected, “Unknown Pattern” is displayed on the control
panel.

Remaining paper detection

When the tray lift motor rotates, the remaining paper detection sensors 1, 2 [A] built into the
motor switch ON (pass) or OFF (interrupt). Paper remaining in the paper feed tray is detected by
a combination of this ON/OFF.

These are the following 4 remaining paper detection levels:

Remaining paper status 100% 70% 30% 10%
Remaining paper status sensor 1 ON OFF OFF ON
Remaining paper status sensor 2 ON ON OFF OFF
Control panel remaining paper display Bar 4 Bar 3 Bar 2 Bar 1

SM 7-59 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Feed/ Transport part

Paper end detection

When there is no more paper in the paper feed tray, the leading edge of the paper end feeler falls
into a notch in the tray bottom plate, and the paper end detection sensor at the rear edge of the
end feeler switches ON (pass).

No. Description No. Description

1 Paper end sensor 3 Notch
2 End feeler

Paper feed drive

The 1st/2nd pick-up rollers and 1st/2nd paper feed rollers are driven by the paper feed motor.
The 1st/2nd separating rollers are driven by the vertical transport motor.
A bypass transport roller is driven by a duplex/bypass motor, and the registration roller is driven
by the registration motor.

No. Description No. Description

1 Paper feed motor 6 Bypass transport roller

SM 7-60 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Feed/ Transport part

No. Description No. Description

2 Vertical transport motor 7 Vertical transport roller (2nd tray)

Operation
3 Pick-up roller (1st tray) 8 Paper feed roller (2nd tray)

Smart

Panel
4 Paper feed roller (1st tray) 9 Pick-up roller (2nd tray)
5 Vertical transport roller (1st tray)
Registration roller corrects skews of paper to match a leading edge of an image on the drum with
paper selections. The registration roller (Driven) employs a plastic roller to correct skews. The
registration roller (Drive) employs a rubber roller to enhance its transport capability. Registration
buckle for each tray or paper type can be adjustable with SP1-003.

No. Description No. Description

1 Registration roller (Driven) 3 Registration motor
2 Registration roller (Drive)

SM 7-61 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Feed/ Transport part

Paper powder removal mechanism

The registration part of the machine removes paper scrap by 1 paper removal sheet in contact
with the driven roller (resin). Paper scrap removed by the paper removal sheet is collected in a
paper removal container.

No. Description No. Description

1 Paper powder removal container 3 Registration roller (Driven)
2 Paper powder removal sheet 4 Registration roller (Drive)

7.6.3 BYPASS FEED SECTION

No. Description No. Description

1 Bypass paper end sensor 4 Bypass/Duplex motor
2 Bypass paper feed roller 5 Bypass Reverse roller
3 Bypass pick-up roller 6 Paper detection filler

SM 7-62 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Feed/ Transport part

Bypass feed paper/separation mechanism

The manual paper feed mechanism employs an FRR system. The bypass feed unit comprises a

Operation
paper feed roller, reverse roller and bypass pick-up roller.

Smart

Panel
When the paper feed tray is selected and the machine is started, the bypass pick-up solenoid is
switched OFF, and paper is supplied by the duplex/bypass motor (CCW).
*1 The bypass pick-up roller does not come in contact with the paper surface by default. It is
opposite to the paper feed tray.

Bypass feed paper size detection

Paper size width detection is performed by a bypass feed size detection switch (rotary switch).
The bypass feed size detection switch has a rotation plate which rotates together with the side
fence of the bypass feed table, and detects the paper size.
Paper portrait/landscape is determined by a length detection sensor.
Two feelers [A] for the bypass paper length sensor [B] are added to the rear of the tray to prevent
a false detection in paper length detection caused by floating on the rear of paper when large
size paper is set without pulling out the extension bypass tray.

Bypass feed paper end detection

To detect bypass feed paper end, a paper detection filler and bypass feed paper end sensor are
provided.
When the paper is set, the bypass paper end sensor switches ON (interrupt), and paper set is
detected.
When there is no more paper, a detection filler falls into a hole in the bypass feed table, the
bypass paper end sensor switches OFF (pass), and paper end is detected.

SM 7-63 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Feed/ Transport part

Bypass paper feed drive

The paper feed roller, reverse roller and pick-up roller are driven by the duplex/bypass feed
motor.

7.6.4 DUPLEX SECTION

No. Description No. Description

1 Reverse sensor 6 Duplex entrance roller 2
2 Reverse roller 7 Duplex transport roller 1
3 Junction gate 8 Duplex transport roller 2
4 Duplex entrance roller 1 9 Duplex exit roller
5 Duplex entrance sensor 10 Duplex exit sensor

SM 7-64 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Feed/ Transport part

Transport reverse mechanism

The paper passes through the junction gate, and is transported to the reverse tray by the reverse

Operation
roller. After the trailing edge of paper has left the fusing exit sensor, the junction gate is moved to

Smart

Panel
the duplex path direction and the reverse motor starts rotating reversely.

No. Description No. Description

1 Fusing exit sensor 4 Junction gate
2 Reverse sensor 5 Duplex entrance roller 1
3 Reverse roller

Duplex drive
The rollers are driven by the following motors:
Rollers Drive sources
Reverse roller Reverse motor
Duplex entrance roller 1 Duplex entrance motor
Duplex entrance roller 2 Duplex entrance motor
Duplex transport roller 1 Duplex/bypass motor
Duplex exit roller Duplex/bypass motor

SM 7-65 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Feed/ Transport part

Interleave mechanism
The duplex unit performs interleave to reduce the overall duplex copying time.
<Paper exit from machine>
Length No. of interleaves
Less than 216 mm 3
216-432 mm 2
*When bypass/duplexing (regardless of paper sizes) 1
<1bin exit from machine>
Length No. of interleaves
Less than 216 mm 2
216-432 mm 1

3 sheet leave

Back side of 1st sheet -> Back side of 2nd sheet -> Back side of 3rd sheet -> Front side of 1st
sheet -> Back side of 4th sheet -> Front side of 2nd sheet

2 sheet leave

Back side of 1st sheet -> Back side of 2nd sheet -> Front side of 1st sheet -> Back side of 3rd
sheet -> Front side of 2nd sheet

SM 7-66 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Feed/ Transport part

7.6.5 PAPER EXIT UNIT

Operation
Smart

Panel
No. Description No. Description
1 Paper exit full sensor 6 Duplex entrance sensor
2 Reverse sensor 7 Paper exit sensor
3 Reverse roller 8 Paper exit roller
4 Junction gate 9 Paper exit full feeler
5 Duplex entrance roller

Delivery location change-over

The paper transported from the fusing unit is changed over by the junction gate in the “machine
paper exit/bridge unit” direction or the “reverse tray/1 bin unit” direction.

SM 7-67 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Feed/ Transport part

Machine paper exit/bridge unit direction

1. The registration sensor switches ON.

2. The fusing/ paper exit motor (*MP 2555 SP/3055 SP/3555 SP) or the paper exit motor (*MP
4055 SP/5055 SP/6055 SP) switches ON (CCW).
3. When the rear edge of the paper leaves the paper exit roller, the fusing/paper exit motor or
the paper exit motor switches OFF.

No. Description
1 Paper exit roller
2 Paper exit sensor
3 Junction gate

Reverse tray/1 bin unit direction

1. Registration sensor switches ON.

2. The reverse motor switches ON (CCW).
3. Before the leading edge of the paper reaches the junction gate [A], the junction gate moves
in the reverse tray/1 bin unit direction.
* If the junction gate is in the reverse tray/1 bin unit direction, the junction gate is not
changed over.
4. After the trailing edge of the paper has left the fusing exit sensor [B], the exit junction
solenoid switches OFF.

SM 7-68 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Feed/ Transport part

5. When the trailing edge of the paper leaves the reverse roller [C], the reverse motor switches
OFF.

Operation
Smart

Panel
Paper Exit Full and Jam Detection
The paper exit full sensor detects paper exit jam.

When outputs push up the paper exit full feeler, the paper exit full sensor detects that standard
output tray is full of outputs and a jam message is displayed after a job end.

Paper exit sensor

When a sheet of paper stays in the paper exit unit, the paper exit sensor detects the paper jam
and a jam message is displayed.

SM 7-69 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Feed/ Transport part

7.6.6 PAPER PATH AND SENSOR LOCATIONS

Intervals of Rollers
Module From To Interval
(mm)
1st Paper Feed Unit Pick-up Roller (1st tray) Feed Roller (1st tray) 30.0
Feed Roller (1st tray) 1st Vertical Transport Roller 43.0
2nd Paper Feed Pick-up Roller (2nd tray) Feed Roller (2nd tray) 30.0
Unit Feed Roller (2nd tray) 2nd Vertical Transport 43.0
Roller
2nd Vertical Transport 1st Vertical Transport Roller 96.9
Roller
Registration Unit 1st Vertical Transport Roller Registration Roller 84.8

SM 7-70 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Feed/ Transport part

Module From To Interval

(mm)

Operation
Registration Roller Transfer Roller 83.5

Smart

Panel
Fusing Unit Transfer Roller Heating Sleeve Belt 102.9
Paper Exit Unit Heating Sleeve Belt Paper Exit Roller 138.5
Reverse Unit Heating Sleeve Belt Reverse Roller 138.5
Reverse Roller Duplex Entrance Roller 1 131.3
Duplex Unit Duplex Entrance Roller 1 Duplex Entrance Roller 2 120.1
Duplex Entrance Roller 2 Duplex Transport Roller 1 89.6
Duplex Transport Roller 1 Duplex Transport Roller 2 84.0
Duplex Transport Roller 2 Duplex Exit Roller 27.1
Duplex Exit Roller Registration Roller 88.0
Bypass Feed Unit Duplex Pick-up Roller Duplex Feed Roller 30.0
Duplex Feed Roller Duplex Transport Roller 24.5
Duplex Transport Roller 1st Vertical Transport Roller 56.0

Intervals of Sensors
Module From To Interval
(mm)
1st Paper Feed Unit Feed Roller (1st tray) 1st Paper Feed Sensor 5.0
1st Vertical Transport Roller 1st Vertical Transport 16.8
Sensor
2nd Paper Feed Feed Roller (2nd tray) 2nd Paper Feed Sensor 5.0
Unit 2nd Vertical Transport Roller 2nd Vertical Transport 24.3
Sensor
2nd Vertical Transport 1st Vertical Transport 88.7
Sensor Sensor
Registration Unit Registration Sensor Registration Roller 17.0
Paper Exit Unit Paper Exit Sensor Paper Exit Roller 17.0
Reverse Unit Reverse Roller Reverse Sensor 14.0
Duplex Unit Duplex Entrance Roller 1 Duplex Entrance Sensor 34.0
Duplex Exit Roller Duplex Exit Sensor 17.1
1-bin Unit Reverse Sensor 1-bin Exit Roller -

SM 7-71 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Air Flows (Fan Control)

7.7 AIR FLOWS (FAN CONTROL)

7.7.1 OVERVIEW
Around the Development Unit / Laser Unit

No. Part Name

1 Odor filter
2 Fusing fan
3 Paper exit fan
4 Development exhaust fan
5 Dust filter

SM 7-72 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Air Flows (Fan Control)

Around the Fusing Unit and Development Unit

Operation
Smart

Panel
No. Part Name
1 Odor filter
2 Fusing fan
3 Paper exit fan
4 Development bearing cooling fan (MP 4055 SP/5055 SP/6055 SP only)

SM 7-73 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Air Flows (Fan Control)

Around the PSU

No. Part Name

1 PSU board
2 PSU cooling fan (MP 4055 SP/5055 SP/6055 SP only)

7.7.2 MECHANISM
By installing the duct corresponding to each fan, the air flow is efficiently controlled to a cooling
target. Moreover, improvement in quietness and energy-saving efficiency is achieved by
performing stepwise operation of the fan according to the imaging temperature.

Cooling of PSU
The PSU is cooled by the PSU cooling fan, cooling the PSU board directly. Note that the PCU
cooling fan is installed on MP 4055 SP/5055 SP/6055 SP models only.

SM 7-74 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Air Flows (Fan Control)

Cooling of Development Unit

The cooling for development unit is provided by a development bearing cooling fan that takes air

Operation
in from the rear of the machine outside and applies the air to the bearing of mixing auger and

Smart

Panel
bottom side of the development unit.
Note that the development bearing cooling fan is installed on MP 4055 SP/5055 SP/6055 SP
models only.

Cooling of PCDU
Air taken in from the PCDU cleaning unit is taken out from the left rear exhaust. An air-flow duct
is installed at between the fusing unit and the toner bottle, to suppress excessive temperature
rise of the toner bottle.

Cooling of Fusing Unit

Air taken in from the paper exit fan at the front is discharged from the fusing fan at the rear to
outside the machine. By cooling the paper immediately after fusing, it is used for not only cooling
of the paper exit sensor but also reduction of stored heat of stack paper and reduction of curl are
realized. This also serves to prevent dew condensation of the paper discharge guide sheet. As a
measure against odor, an odor filter is installed downstream from the fusing fan.

Crisis management when temperature rises in the MFP

In order to suppress excessive temperature rise in the MFP and maintain equipment quality, a
temperature detection sensor (imaging temperature sensor (thermistor)) [A] is installed in the
MFP. The imaging temperature sensor (thermistor) detects the temperature environment in the
MFP, and controls cooling operation ( x1, x1).

SM 7-75 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Air Flows (Fan Control)

Overview of cooling operation in the machine

The temperature in the machine is detected during output and after output, and the interior of the
machine is cooled by fan operation (stepwise operation of fan, prolonged fan rotation after paper
has passed through) according to the temperature inside the machine.
However, if the temperature inside the machine rises significantly due to passing a large volume
of paper, in addition to fan operation, the CPM is specified to control the temperature in the
machine.

The Conditions of Fans Operation

The following table illustrates how/when the fans operate under the specific conditions of the
main machine.
Condition Development Paper Fusing Fan Development PSU
Exhaust Heat Fan Exit Fan Bearing Cooling Cooling
2
Fan* Fan*2
Warm-up Stops Stops Stops Stops Stops
Standby Rotates in low Stops Rotates in Stops Stops
speed low speed
During Rotates Rotates Rotates Rotates Rotates
printing
After Rotates in low Stops*1 Rotates in Stops*1 Stops*1
printing speed *1 low speed*1
Abnormal Stops Stops Stops Stops Stops
(Jams)
*1 When the temperature in the machine reaches 45.5 degrees, these fans keep revolving until
the temperature decreases by two degrees.
*2 MP 4055 SP/5055 SP/6055 SP only

Print Duty Control

1. The machine repeats a 16-page-print and 25-second-pause. The following two messages
will alternatively appear on the operation panel.
“The printing speed is now being limited, because the internal cooling fan is active.”
“Internal cooling fan is active.”
2. All the fan motors in the machine works after printing and standby. The message will appear
on the operation panel.
“Internal cooling fan is active.”
3. If the temperature of the image processing unit reaches under the pre-set temperature, the
machine turns to the normal control.

SM 7-76 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Electrical parts

7.8 ELECTRICAL PARTS

7.8.1 BLOCK DIAGRAM

Operation
Smart

Panel
For MP 2555 SP/3055 SP/3555 SP models

SM 7-77 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Electrical parts

For MP 4055 SP/5055 SP/6055 SP models

SM 7-78 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Electrical parts

7.8.2 BOARD OUTLINE

Controller

Operation
Smart

Panel
Controls the MFP system overall. Comprises an x86 CPU, controller ASIC, IO control ASIC, and
RAM.

SBU
Read control circuit which performs analog signal processing and AD image conversion of the
CCD read image.
It also has an IPU I/F, and controls scanner input output signals according to CPU commands.

LDB
LD control circuit which drives the laser diode by a universal driver.

BCU
Controls the engine, as well as MFP engine sensor, motor and solenoid (The BCU has the IOB
functions).

IPU
Processes digital signals by an IPU.

FCU
Controls the fax program.

OPU
Controls the control panel.

HVPS
Generates the high-voltage power required for process control. The HVPS consists of two units:
TTS for transfer and CB for charging/developing.

PSU
Generates DC power from a commercial AC power supply, and supplies it to each control circuit.
Comprises an A/C drive circuit for controlling the fusing lamp.

SM 7-79 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Electrical parts

7.8.3 FEED TRAY DEHUMIDIFIER HEATER, SCANNER/PCDU ANTI-

CONDENSATION HEATER

Circuit configuration

If a heater is used in the main machine, it is required that the harness from the heater sub-board
is connected to the BCU. When this harness is connected to the BCU, the supply power is
controlled based on the main machine operation and the setting of SP5-805-001 as shown in the
following table.
Heater SP5-805- Plug- Sleep JAM/ Stand-by Printing
001 in Mode Door Mode/
Open/ Fusing Unit
SC Off Mode
Dehumidification Heater 0 (OFF) On On Off Off Off
(Paper Feed Tray: 1 (ON) On On On On Off
Standard)
Dehumidification Heater 0 (OFF) On On Off Off Off
(Paper Feed Tray: 1 (ON) On On On On Off
Option)
Anti-condensation heater 0 (OFF) On On Off Off Off
(Scanner) 1 (ON) Disabled*

SM 7-80 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Electrical parts

Heater SP5-805- Plug- Sleep JAM/ Stand-by Printing

001 in Mode Door Mode/

Operation
Open/ Fusing Unit

Smart

Panel
SC Off Mode
Anti-condensation heater 0 (OFF) On On Off Off Off
(PCDU) 1 (ON) Disabled *
* If SP5-805-001 is set to “1” (ON), disconnect the harnesses of anti-condensation heaters
(Scanner and PCDU) manually to disable. Otherwise, the followings may occur:
• Malfunctions such as toner fixation
• Failure or deterioration of the stabilizer in the scanner due to temperature rise

• As the heater circuit of this machine comprises of a single system, the machine
cannot control the heaters for paper feed trays and for the main machine
individually. If the SP is set to “1” (ON), all the heaters are turned on even though
the machine is in “Sleep Mode” or “Fusing Unit Off Mode”. Activating the anti-
condensation heaters (Scanner and PCDU) in “Sleep Mode” or “Fusing Unit Off
Mode” causes a part failure in the machine. Be sure to deactivate these heaters
(Scanner and PCDU) beforehand.

SM 7-81 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
One-way Clutches

7.9 ONE-WAY CLUTCHES

This machine adapts one-way clutches, used for paper feed mechanism.
Each one-way clutch locations are pointed below.

7.9.1 PAPER FEED/BYPASS

7.9.2 DUPLEX

No. Description
(1) Duplex exit roller
(2) Bypass Paper Feed Roller
(3) Bypass Pick-up Roller

SM 7-82 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 One-way Clutches

No. Description
(4) Bypass Separation Roller Drive Shaft

Operation
(5) Bypass Separation Roller

Smart

Panel

SM 7-83 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Process Control

7.10 PROCESS CONTROL

7.10.1 IMAGE DENSITY CONTROL (PROCESS CONTROL)

Outline
Process control is a system that adjusts the image creation process to maintain a constant image
density. Process control is executed at the following conditions.
Trigger Operative Condition Notes
1 • Power ON • When a certain time passes after No retry if an SC occurs
• Recovering the previous job end, and when a during adjusting.
from Energy certain number of sheets are
Saver printed after the last process
• Closing the control at the previous Power ON,
front cover recovering from Energy Saver
mode or closing the front cover.
• When a new PCDU is detected.
• When the TD sensor detects a
toner end before turning the
power on.
2 Job End When the job end counter becomes • Process
more than the threshold. Control
clears the
Job end
counter.
3 Job Interruption When the job interrupt counter Process control clears
becomes more than the threshold. the job interrupt counter.
4 Non-use (Idle) • When the non-use time counter Available only when the
becomes more than the energy saver mode is off.
threshold.
• When significant environmental
changes occur after the last job
end.
5 Manual process control When SP 3-011-001 is executed. -
The process control consists of the following features.
• Potential Control (Charge/Development Bias and LD power Control)
• Vtref Compensation

SM 7-84 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Process Control

Flowchart: From Process Control to Printing

Operation
Smart

Panel
Potential Control
Potential Control adjusts Charge/Development bias and LD power to maintain a constant image
output.
Charge roller, development roller, OPC drum and laser unit involve with imaging process.
Charge bias (Vc) is a bias for charge roller. Applying a charge bias to the OPC drum increases
the potential of the OPC drum.
Development bias (Vb) is a bias for development roller. When a development bias is applied to
developer (carrier), the OPC drum which is charged the opposite bias from development part
attracts toner.
Development potential (Vd – Vb) is the ability to attract the toner to the OPC drum. A larger
development potential increases the amount of toner adhesion.
In image density adjusting, the potential control process creates an ID pattern patch using the
“bias for ID pattern creation” which has a lower density and lower Charge/Development bias than
for printing.
With the results of Vsp (the ID sensor output from ID pattern patch) and Vsg (the ID sensor
output from bare surface of the OPC drum), the potential control process adjusts the
development bias so that the amount of toner adhesion becomes a specified target value.

SM 7-85 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Process Control

Charge/Development Bias is done with the following operation. The operation time differs
depending on the line speed.
• ID sensor Vsg Adjustment
The machine adjusts the LED strength of the ID sensor so that the value of Vsg (the
charge which is detected from the bare surface of the OPC drum) is in the range of 4.0V
±0.5V. When Vsg is detected as not within the target range three times, SC370 (ID
sensor error) appears.
• Developer Stirring (0 to 5 seconds)
The machine agitates the developer and reads the µ sensor output.
• Bias Compensation
The machine compensates the development bias (Vb) using the Vsp/Vsg ratio. The
machine also compensates charge bias (Vc) and LD power based on the Vb result.
Vsp/Vsg Toner Density Vb Compensation SP
High High SP3-235-011
Slightly high Slightly high SP3-235-012
Correct Correct SP3-235-013
Slightly low Slightly low SP3-235-014
Low Low SP3-235-015

Fig. 1: Relation b/w Dev. bias and Toner adhesion amount

SM 7-86 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Process Control

Vtref Compensation
To maintain a constant/proper toner density, the toner density in the developer must be controlled

Operation
as well as the bias control. Vtref is the target of the toner density in the developer.

Smart

Panel
• Vtref Determination
With the output of ID sensor and µ sensor in ID sensor detection, the machine
determines the Vtref used for the reference value for µ sensor.

TD Sensor Initial Setting When a New PCDU Is Installed

When a new PCDU is set in the mainframe, this is detected by the machine as a new PCDU, and
the initial µ count (the output from the µ sensor of initial developer setting) is determined after
entering the TD sensor initial setting mode. The TD sensor initial setting is done as follows.
• Starting the developer initial setting
The new unit detecting mechanism performs the TD sensor initial setting.
• Developer Agitation
The developer is stirred, with the development roller and the transport coil rotating (30
seconds).
• Initial µ Count Detection
The machine detects the µ sensor output while mixing the developer, and stores the
output as the initial µ count. The followings are the stored data location in machine
types.
• MP 2555 SP/3055 SP: SP3-030-062 Initial µ count (Line speed 3)
• MP 3555 SP/4055 SP: SP3-030-121 Initial µ count (Line speed 2)
• MP 5055 SP/6055 SP: SP3-030-061 Initial µ count (Line speed 1)
• Vt Calculation
The machine refers to the initial µ count with the above SP according to the machine
type and calculates Vt with the difference of the present µ count.
• If the initial µ count detected is out of the upper/lower output limit, the machine
displays a TD sensor calibration error (SC360-01).
• After replacing an AIT and performing the initial TD sensor setting, the machine
forcibly executes the process control.

SM 7-87 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Process Control

7.10.2 MECHANISM

Sensor Composition
Sensor Description
ID sensor Used to measure the amount of toner that adhered on the OPC drum
TD Sensor Used to measure the toner density in the developer

ID Sensor
An ID sensor consists of a light-receiving element located at the opposite position of LED.
It detects the amount of toner adhered using reflection from the LED.

ID sensor is fixed in the right cover of the mainframe and detects the patch density formed on the
center of the OPC drum.

TD Sensor
In this model, a non-contact toner density (TD) sensor, which we call µ sensor, is used for the
toner density control.
The TD sensor is attached on the lower side of the development unit. Unlike HST sensor, the
board of TD sensor is exposed. So there is a cover around the sensor to protect the sensor and
to maintain a good contact condition of the sensor and development unit.
The TD sensor measures the permeability of the developer without contacting from outside of the
case, and converts the measured value to the toner density.
According to the toner density measured by this sensor, the proper amount of toner is supplied to
the developer.

SM 7-88 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Process Control

A counter corresponding to the frequency is used as the unit of TD sensor output. Thus, unlike
HST sensor which directly detects Vt, the TD sensor output is converted into Vt for the toner

Operation
supply control.

Smart

Panel
In the TD sensor, there is an ID chip storing the machine identification information, the running
distance information of Development unit and PCU, and other information used by the image
density control.

SM 7-89 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Energy Save

7.11 ENERGY SAVE

7.11.1 ENERGY SAVER MODES
Customers should use energy saver modes properly, to save energy and protect the
environment.

The area shaded grey in this diagram represents the amount of energy that is saved when the
timers are at the default settings. If the timers are changed, then the energy saved will be
different. For example, if the timers are all set to 60 min., the grey area will disappear, and no
energy is saved before 60 min. expires.

Setting items that are related to Energy Saving

The user can set these timers with User Tools (System settings > Timer setting)

Sleep Mode Timer

User Tools (System settings > Timer setting)

After a specified period has passed, or [Energy Saver] is pressed, the machine enters Sleep
mode in order to conserve energy. Specify the time to elapse before Sleep mode.
Default: [1 minute(s)]
Sleep Mode Timer may not work when error messages appear.
Depending on which Embedded Software Architecture application is installed on it, the machine
might take longer than indicated to enter Sleep mode.

SM 7-90 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Energy Save

Fusing Unit Off Mode (Energy Saving) On/Off

User Tools (System settings > Timer setting)

Operation
Specifies whether Fusing Unit Off mode is enabled or not.

Smart

Panel
When Fusing Unit Off mode is enabled, the display is on but the fusing unit is off to save energy.
The machine requires roughly the same time as warm-up time to recover from Fusing Unit Off
mode.
Default: [Off]
If [Fusing Unit Off Mode (Energy Saving) On/Off] is set to [On], you can specify when to exit
Fusing Unit Off mode and the time to elapse before entering Fusing Unit Off mode.
If [Exit Fusing Unit Off Mode] is set to [On Printing], the machine exits Fusing Unit Off mode
when printing is performed.
If [Exit Fusing Unit Off Mode] is set to [On Operating Control Panel], the machine exits Fusing
Unit Off mode when a key other than the copy function key is pressed on the control panel of the
machine.
If printing is performed with the copy function or a key in the copy function is pressed on the
control panel of the machine, the machine exits Fusing Unit Off mode regardless of this setting. If
the timer is set to [On], you can set the time from 10 seconds to 240 minutes, using the number
keys.

Energy Saving Recvry. for Business Applicatn.

User Tools (System settings > General Settings)

Specify whether or not to enable low-energy recovery from Sleep mode to use applications
independent of the machine, such as Address Book Management or Browser.
Default: [Off]
If [On (Energy Saving)] is selected, it takes longer than usual to be ready to use the machine.

Recovery Time/Reduced Electrical Consumption

Reduced electrical consumption in Sleep mode
MP 2555 MP 3055 MP 3555 MP 4055 MP 5055 MP 6055
mainly Europe and Asia 0.84 W 0.84 W 0.84 W 0.82 W 0.82 W 0.82 W
mainly North America 0.74 W 0.74 W 0.74 W 0.79 W 0.79 W 0.79 W

SM 7-91 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Energy Save

Recovery time from Sleep mode

MP 2555 MP 3055 MP 3555 MP 4055 MP 5055 MP 6055
mainly Europe and Asia 7.9 sec. 7.9 sec. 7.9 sec. 8.0 sec. 8.4 sec. 8.8 sec.
mainly North America 7.9 sec. 7.9 sec. 7.9 sec. 7.9 sec. 8.2 sec. 8.7 sec.

• The time it takes to switch out from energy saving functions and electrical
consumption may differ depending on the conditions and environment of the
machine.

7.11.2 POWER STATES OF THIS MACHINE

SM 7-92 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Energy Save

State Description
1 Standby/Printing • State where normal operation is possible after warm-up
•

Operation
State during printing

Smart

Panel
2 Printing State when printing with the backlight of the operation panel turned off
state/Panel OFF
3 Fusing OFF State where the Standby Fusing OFF state is entered when the time set
with the "Fusing Unit Off Mode (Energy Saving) On/Off" setting of the
User Tools has elapsed.
• State where the operation panel is flashing and the fusing
heater is OFF.
• The bottom plate of the paper feed tray is raised.
4 Quiet state Quiet state is entered when the Energy Saving key is pressed or the time
set with the "Sleep Mode Timer" of the User Tools has elapsed. This is a
temporary energy saving state before entering sleep mode.
• Basically, no homing (initialization) of peripheral devices is
performed.
• The bottom plate of the paper feed tray is raised.
• The fusing heater is turned OFF.
5 Engine OFF Entered from Quiet state with internal timer.
(Sleep mode) • The relevant power systems (24V, 12V, 5V) are turned OFF
at the same time as the fusing heater.
• When receiving a fax or printing is performed in engine OFF
state, warm-up is started and printing is performed while the
backlight of the operation panel is turned OFF.
6 STR state Supplying of power and clock to the CPU and peripheral chips on the
(Sleep mode) controller board is stopped.
7 Pre-recovery The Pre-recovery state is entered from STR state when the Proximity
Sensor detects presence of a person.
This is the Energy Saving state where the power of the operation panel
and HDD is ON and the power of the engine is OFF, but the backlight of
the operation panel LCD is off.
Device state for each Energy Saving state
State Energy Operation Engine HDD CTL
Saving LED panel (Printer/Scanner)
LCD
Standby/Printing ON ON ON ON ON
Printing state/Panel ON OFF ON ON ON
OFF (Only scanner is in Quiet
state)

SM 7-93 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Energy Save

State Energy Operation Engine HDD CTL

Saving LED panel (Printer/Scanner)
LCD
fusing OFF ON ON ON ON ON
(Both printer/scanner are in
Quiet state)
Quiet state ON OFF ON ON ON
ON*1 (Both printer/scanner are in
Quiet state)
Engine OFF Blinking Sleep OFF OFF ON
gradually OFF or ON*1
ON*1 ON*1
STR state Blinking Sleep OFF OFF STR
gradually
Pre-recovery ON OFF OFF ON ON
ON*1
*1 When [Energy Saving Recvry. for Business Applicatn.] is [On (Energy Saving)], ON/OFF is
determined by the internal timer of the Smart Operation Panel.

Transition of operation panel to Energy Saving when [Energy Saving Recvry. for
Business Applicatn.] is [On (Energy Saving)]

Normally, the Energy Saving state of the operation panel LCD changes in step with the energy
saving state of the MFP/LP main unit, but to support the scenario where an application that does
not use the engine (printer/scanner) is executed from the operation panel, the Energy Saving
state of the operation panel is transitioned through the three states ON, OFF, and Sleep with its
internal timer when [Energy Saving Recvry. for Business Applicatn.] is [On (Energy Saving)].

7.11.3 VERIFICATION OF UP TIME FOR EACH ENERGY SAVING

STATE
The up time for each power state of the machine can be checked with SP8-961 (Electricity
Status). It is also output on the SMC sheet.
SP Name Description
SP8-961- Ctrl Standby Time Cumulative time of Engine OFF mode, Quiet mode, and Standby
001 mode
SP8-961- STR Time Cumulative time of STR mode
002
SP8-961- Main Power Off Cumulative time of state in which the power plug is connected to
003 Time the outlet but the main power is off
SP8-961- Reading and Cumulative time of state in which both the plotter engine and

SM 7-94 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Energy Save

SP Name Description
004 Printing Time scanner engine are running or warming up

Operation
SP8-961- Printing Time Cumulative time of the state in which the plotter engine is running

Smart

Panel
005
SP8-961- Reading Time Cumulative time of the state in which the scanner engine is
006 running
SP8-961- Eng Waiting Time Cumulative time of state in which the power state of the engine is
007 Standby state
SP8-961- Low Power State Not used for this machine
008 Time
SP8-961- Quiet State Time Cumulative time of the state in which the power state of the
009 engine is Quiet state
SP8-961- Heater Off State Cumulative time of the state in which the power state of the
010 Time engine is Fusing OFF state
SP8-961- LCD on Time Cumulative time of the state in which the backlight of the LCD is
011 on.

7.11.4 CHECKING THE UP TIME BY DEVICE STATE

SP 8941 (Machine Status) keeps a record of the amount of time that the machine spends in each
mode.

SP8-941- Operation Cumulative time of the state in which the engine state notification is
001 Time enabled.
The state in which the engine is not running (such as when storing to
HD only with the controller) is excluded from the running state.
SP8-941- Standby Cumulative time of the state in which the engine state is not running.
002 Time
SP8-941- Low Power Not used for this machine
003 Time
SP8-941- Sleep mode Cumulative time in Sleep Mode state.
004 time
SP8-941- Off Mode Cumulative time in which the Energy Saving state of the device is
005 Time Engine OFF state.
SP8-941- Down time Cumulative time in which the device is disabled because itself or its
006 to 009 component is in the following state.
• SP8-941-006: SC (excluding mode SC)
• SP8-941-007: Jam (plotter)
• SP8-941-008: Jam (scanner)
• SP8-941-009: Supply/PM unit end

SM 7-95 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Energy Save

With this data, and the power consumption values from the specifications, we can estimate the
amount of energy that is used by the machine.
This should only be used as a reference value, because the power consumption specifications
are measured in a controlled environment with a constant power supply.
To get an exact measurement at the customer’s site, a watt meter must be used to measure the
actual energy consumed.
To use SP8941 to calculate the energy consumed:
• At the start of the measurement period, read the values of SP8-941-001 to 005.
• At the end of the measurement period, read the values of SP8-941-001 to 005
again.
• Find the amount of time spent in each mode (subtract the earlier measurement
from the later measurement).
• Multiply this by the power consumption spec for each mode.
• Convert the result to kWh (kilowatt hours)

7.11.5 RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that the default settings related to energy saving should be kept.
• If the customer requests that these settings should be changed, please explain that
their energy costs could increase, and that they should consider the effects on the
environment of extra energy use.

SM 7-96 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Adobe PS vs. Clone PS

7.12 ADOBE PS VS. CLONE PS

7.12.1 OVERVIEW

Operation
Smart

Panel
This machine is equipped with a clone program for emulating Adobe PostScript/PDF (hereafter
“Clone PS”) as a standard feature. So, by default, it can perform printing using PostScript 3 and
PDF Direct Print, in addition to RPCS.
• What is Clone PS?
Based on the specifications of PostScript/PDF languages developed by Adobe, clone
programs for interpretation of PostScript and PDF documents have been created by
various companies other than Adobe. While the original program sold by the developer
of the language is named Adobe PS, compatible programs made by other
manufacturers are called clones. Strictly speaking, these clones must be fully
compatible with the original program; however, they are called clones even if they have
some differences, because they cannot completely imitate the original.
Clone PS is basically designed to perform similar functions to Adobe PS, except for
several differences such as inability to use Adobe fonts.

• Adobe PS, previously offered as an optional product for past models, is available
again as an option. (It comes in an SD card, as was the case for former models.)
• Clone PS and Adobe PS cannot be run simultaneously.
• The same printer driver can be used for Clone PS and Adobe PS.
• Clone PS emulates Adobe PostScript 3 version 3017. (The version of Adobe PS
used in the SD card option is v. 3018.)
• For the PDF Direct Print function, Clone PS emulates Adobe PDF version 1.7.

7.12.2 HOW TO DISTINGUISH ADOBE PS FROM CLONE PS

In the operation panel screen, it is difficult to tell whether Adobe PS or Clone PS is in use.
Both “PS3” and “PDF” are shown on the screen, regardless of whether Adobe PS or Clone PS is
used.

SM 7-97 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Adobe PS vs. Clone PS

Identification can be done as follows:

• Configuration Page
The description of the Firmware Version listed on the page varies as shown below:
PS type Description of Firmware Version
Adobe PS RPCS [x.xx.xx] Adobe PostScript 3 [x.xx], Adobe PDF [x.xx]
Clone PS RPCS [x.xx.xx] PS3 [x.xx], PDF [x.xx]
The manufacturers name “Adobe” is shown in the list if Adobe PS is used.
• PS Configuration / Font Page
The “Adobe” logo is printed on the page if Adobe PS is used.

• Web Image Monitor

Go to Status/Information > Device Info, and open the Printer Language menu.
If Adobe PS is used, the screen shows the program name “Adobe PostScript 3” and
"Adobe PDF".

SM 7-98 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Adobe PS vs. Clone PS

• Operation Panel: Firmware Version

User Tools > Machine Features > System Settings > Administrator Tools > Firmware

Operation
Version

Smart

Panel
When PostScript3 Unit Type M29(Adobe PS) is installed:

Clone PS only:

No. Module Description

Name
1 PDF (1st The Clone PS firmware number appears.
page) The clone PS firmware number starts with “D289”.
2 PDF (2nd The Adobe PS firmware number "D3DW5733" appears.
page) This module name appears in the firmware list only if PostScript3 Unit
Type M29 is installed.
3 PS3 (Left) The Clone PS firmware number appears.
The clone PS firmware number starts with “D289”.
4 PS3 (Right) The Adobe PS firmware number "D3DW5731".
This module name appears in the firmware list only if PostScript3 Unit

SM 7-99 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Adobe PS vs. Clone PS

No. Module Description

Name
Type M29 is installed.
• Font Change Confirmation screen
The “Font Change Confirmation” screen is accessible only when Clone PS is used.
On the Home screen, select the User Tools icon > Machine Features > Printer Features
> PS Menu > Font Change Confirmation.

7.12.3 DIFFERENCE IN DEVICE FONTS

The variety and number of built-in fonts (device fonts) differ between Adobe PS and Clone PS.
PS type Number of European fonts
Adobe PS 136 fonts
Clone PS 93 fonts
For license reasons, the device fonts for Adobe PS cannot be handled by Clone PS. Instead,
Clone PS is equipped with fonts similar to Adobe device fonts under different names; when an
Adobe PS font is specified in the data to be printed, Clone PS will replace it with a similar font.
Use of a substitute font sometimes leads to different printing results, as shown in the table below.
Example 1
PS Helvetica
type
Adobe
PS
Clone
PS
When Helvetica is used in the original document, Clone PS applies a substitute font
named NimbusSans-Regular, maintaining almost the same appearance as the original
data.

SM 7-100 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Adobe PS vs. Clone PS

Example 2
PS LetterGothic

Operation
type

Smart

Panel
Adobe
PS
Clone
PS
When LetterGothic is originally used, Clone PS substitutes it with LetterGothic-Regular.
In this case, the character spacing differs from that in the original data.
Example 3
PS Chicago
type
Adobe
PS
Clone
PS
Clone PS does not support alternative fonts for Chicago; instead, the Courier font (*) is
used. (The font shape differs significantly from Chicago.)
* Since Courier itself is named among the Adobe PS device fonts, Clone PS substitutes
it with an alternative font, NimbusMonoPS-Regular.

Font Change Confirmation Screen

Clone PS itself incorporates no Adobe fonts in it, and therefore replaces them with similar fonts
when Adobe PS fonts are specified in the print data output to the printer.
However, there is a possibility that a substitute font not desired by the customer may be used; to
cope with this issue, the operation panel shows a confirmation screen whenever an Adobe font is
to be replaced by a similar font.

SM 7-101 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Adobe PS vs. Clone PS

If the customer often prints data containing Adobe fonts that are almost the same in terms of
spacing and shape as their substitutes, the confirmation screen appears every time printing is
performed, making the printing operation cumbersome. In such a case, the font change
confirmation screen can be hidden.
• User Tools icon on Home screen > Machine Features > Printer Features > PS
Menu > Font Change Confirmation

List of fonts and their replacements (Adobe PS -> Clone PS)

No. Adobe PS Clone PS
1 Courier NimbusMonoPS-Regular
2 Courier-Bold NimbusMonoPS-Bold
3 Courier-BoldOblique NimbusMonoPS-BoldItalic
4 Courier-Oblique NimbusMonoPS-Italic
5 Helvetica NimbusSans-Regular
6 Helvetica-Bold NimbusSans-Bold
7 Helvetica-BoldOblique NimbusSans-BoldOblique
8 Helvetica-Oblique NimbusSans-Oblique
9 Symbol StandardSymL
10 Times-Bold NimbusRoman-Bold
11 Times-BoldItalic NimbusRoman-BoldItalic
12 Times-Italic NimbusRoman-Italic
13 Times-Roman NimbusRoman-Regular
14 AlbertusMT NimbusMonoPS-Regular
15 AlbertusMT-Italic NimbusMonoPS-Regular
16 AlbertusMT-Light NimbusMonoPS-Regular
17 AntiqueOlive-Roman NimbusMonoPS-Regular
18 AntiqueOlive-Italic AntiqueOlive-Italic
19 AntiqueOlive-Bold AntiqueOlive-Bold
20 AntiqueOlive-Compact NimbusMonoPS-Regular
22 Apple-Chancery NimbusMonoPS-Regular
22 ArialMT NimbusSansNo2-Regular
23 Arial-ItalicMT NimbusSansNo2-Italic
24 Arial-BoldMT NimbusSansNo2-Bold
25 Arial-BoldItalicMT NimbusSansNo2-BoldItalic

SM 7-102 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Adobe PS vs. Clone PS

No. Adobe PS Clone PS

26 AvantGarde-Book URWGothic-Book

Operation
27 AvantGarde-BookOblique URWGothic-BookOblique

Smart

Panel
28 AvantGarde-Demi URWGothic-Demi
29 AvantGarde-DemiOblique URWGothic-DemiOblique
30 Bodoni NimbusMonoPS-Regular
31 Bodoni-Italic NimbusMonoPS-Regular
32 Bodoni-Bold NimbusMonoPS-Regular
33 Bodoni-BoldItalic NimbusMonoPS-Regular
34 Bodoni-Poster NimbusMonoPS-Regular
35 Bodoni-PosterCompressed NimbusMonoPS-Regular
36 Bookman-Light URWBookman-Light
37 Bookman-LightItalic URWBookman-LightItalic
38 Bookman-Demi URWBookman-Demi
39 Bookman-DemiItalic URWBookman-DemiItalic
40 Carta NimbusMonoPS-Regular
41 Chicago NimbusMonoPS-Regular
42 Clarendon NimbusMonoPS-Regular
43 Clarendon-Light NimbusMonoPS-Regular
44 Clarendon-Bold NimbusMonoPS-Regular
45 CooperBlack NimbusMonoPS-Regular
46 CooperBlack-Italic NimbusMonoPS-Regular
47 Copperplate-ThirtyTwoBC NimbusMonoPS-Regular
48 Copperplate-ThirtyThreeBC NimbusMonoPS-Regular
49 Coronet-Regular NimbusMonoPS-Regular
50 Eurostile NimbusMonoPS-Regular
51 Eurostile-Bold NimbusMonoPS-Regular
52 Eurostile-ExtendedTwo NimbusMonoPS-Regular
53 Eurostile-BoldExtendedTwo NimbusMonoPS-Regular
54 Geneva NimbusMonoPS-Regular
55 GillSans NimbusMonoPS-Regular
56 GillSans-Italic NimbusMonoPS-Regular
57 GillSans-Bold NimbusMonoPS-Regular
58 GillSans-BoldItalic NimbusMonoPS-Regular
59 GillSans-Condensed NimbusMonoPS-Regular
60 GillSans-BoldCondensed NimbusMonoPS-Regular
61 GillSans-Light NimbusMonoPS-Regular
62 GillSans-LightItalic NimbusMonoPS-Regular

SM 7-103 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Adobe PS vs. Clone PS

No. Adobe PS Clone PS

63 GillSans-ExtraBold NimbusMonoPS-Regular
64 Goudy NimbusMonoPS-Regular
65 Goudy-Italic NimbusMonoPS-Regular
66 Goudy-Bold NimbusMonoPS-Regular
67 Goudy-BoldItalic NimbusMonoPS-Regular
68 Goudy-ExtraBold NimbusMonoPS-Regular
69 Helvetica-Condensed NimbusMonoPS-Regular
70 Helvetica-Condensed-Oblique NimbusMonoPS-Regular
71 Helvetica-Condensed-Bold NimbusMonoPS-Regular
72 Helvetica-Condensed-BoldObl NimbusMonoPS-Regular
73 Helvetica-Narrow NimbusSansNarrow-Regular
74 Helvetica-Narrow-Oblique NimbusSansNarrow-Oblique
75 Helvetica-Narrow-Bold NimbusSansNarrow-Bold
76 Helvetica-Narrow-BoldOblique NimbusSansNarrow-BoldOblique
77 HoeflerText-Regular NimbusMonoPS-Regular
78 HoeflerText-Italic NimbusMonoPS-Regular
79 HoeflerText-Black NimbusMonoPS-Regular
80 HoeflerText-BlackItalic NimbusMonoPS-Regular
81 HoeflerText-Ornaments NimbusMonoPS-Regular
82 JoannaMT NimbusMonoPS-Regular
83 JoannaMT-Italic NimbusMonoPS-Regular
84 JoannaMT-Bold NimbusMonoPS-Regular
85 JoannaMT-BoldItalic NimbusMonoPS-Regular
86 LetterGothic LetterGothic-Regular
87 LetterGothic-Slanted NimbusMonoPS-Regular
88 LetterGothic-Bold LetterGothic-Bold
89 LetterGothic-BoldSlanted NimbusMonoPS-Regular
90 LubalinGraph-Book NimbusMonoPS-Regular
91 LubalinGraph-BookOblique NimbusMonoPS-Regular
92 LubalinGraph-Demi NimbusMonoPS-Regular
93 LubalinGraph-DemiOblique NimbusMonoPS-Regular
94 Marigold Mauritius-Regular
95 Monaco NimbusMonoPS-Regular
96 MonaLisa-Recut NimbusMonoPS-Regular
97 NewCenturySchlbk-Roman URWCenturySchoolbook-Roman
98 NewCenturySchlbk-Italic URWCenturySchoolbook-Italic
99 NewCenturySchlbk-Bold URWCenturySchoolbook-Bold

SM 7-104 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Adobe PS vs. Clone PS

No. Adobe PS Clone PS

100 NewCenturySchlbk-BoldItalic URWCenturySchoolbook-BdIta

Operation
101 NewYork NimbusMonoPS-Regular

Smart

Panel
102 Optima NimbusMonoPS-Regular
103 Optima-Italic NimbusMonoPS-Regular
104 Optima-Bold NimbusMonoPS-Regular
105 Optima-BoldItalic NimbusMonoPS-Regular
106 Oxford NimbusMonoPS-Regular
107 Palatino-Roman Palladio-Roman
108 Palatino-Italic Palladio-Italic
109 Palatino-Bold Palladio-Bold
110 Palatino-BoldItalic Palladio-BoldItalic
111 StempelGaramond-Roman NimbusMonoPS-Regular
112 StempelGaramond-Italic NimbusMonoPS-Regular
113 StempelGaramond-Bold NimbusMonoPS-Regular
114 StempelGaramond-BoldItalic NimbusMonoPS-Regular
115 Tekton NimbusMonoPS-Regular
116 TimesNewRomanPSMT NimbusRomanNo9-Regular
117 TimesNewRomanPS-ItalicMT NimbusRomanNo9-Italic
118 TimesNewRomanPS-BoldMT NimbusRomanNo9-Bold
119 TimesNewRomanPS-BoldItalicMT NimbusRomanNo9-BoldItalic
120 Univers NimbusMonoPS-Regular
121 Univers-Oblique NimbusMonoPS-Regular
122 Univers-Bold URWClassicSans-Bold
123 Univers-BoldOblique NimbusMonoPS-Regular
124 Univers-Light NimbusMonoPS-Regular
125 Univers-LightOblique NimbusMonoPS-Regular
126 Univers-Condensed NimbusMonoPS-Regular
127 Univers-CondensedOblique NimbusMonoPS-Regular
128 Univers-CondensedBold NimbusMonoPS-Regular
129 Univers-CondensedBoldOblique NimbusMonoPS-Regular
130 Univers-Extended NimbusMonoPS-Regular
131 Univers-ExtendedObl NimbusMonoPS-Regular
132 Univers-BoldExt NimbusMonoPS-Regular
133 Univers-BoldExtObl NimbusMonoPS-Regular
134 Wingdings-Regular URWDingbats
135 ZapfChancery-MediumItalic URWChancery-MediumItalic
136 ZapfDingbats Dingbats

SM 7-105 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Adobe PS vs. Clone PS

7.12.4 DIFFERENCES IN DRIVER FUNCTIONS

As shown below, there are differences in available driver functions between Adobe PS and Clone
PS.
1. Font Substitution Table (Applicable only to driver for Windows OS)
Start > Device and Printer > Printer Properties > Device Settings
For Clone PS, the Font Substitution Table under the Device Settings menu will not be
displayed. Clone PS has font substitution table data similar to that of Adobe PS, and
performs font replacement as appropriate.
To disable font replacement, go to Printing Preferences > Detailed Settings > “Print
Quality: Option” > “True Type Font:” option, and select “Download as SoftFont”.

2. Fonts used for unauthorized copy prevention (Common to drivers for Windows OS
and Mac OS X)
The watermark text used for unauthorized copy prevention consists of a device font.
The range of available fonts varies between Adobe PS and Clone PS because of the
difference in available device fonts.
Adobe PS provides a choice from 136 fonts while 3 fonts are selectable for Clone PS.

SM 7-106 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
 Adobe PS vs. Clone PS

3. “User Setting” for dithering (Common to drivers for Windows OS and Mac OS X)
Clone PS ignores the “User Setting” option for dithering and performs dithering in the

Operation
same manner as when the “Automatic” setting (*) is selected.

Smart

Panel
* “Text Priority” is selected for text, and “Photo” for graphic objects and image objects.
In the driver menu for Mac OS X, the “User Setting” option is shown at half brightness
and cannot be selected.

SM 7-107 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
SERVICE MANUAL APPENDICES

VER. 1.0

Latest Release: -
Initial Release: November, 2016
Copyright (c) 2016 Ricoh Co.,Ltd.

Rev. 08/12/2021
 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
APPENDICES
TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. SPECIFICATIONS .......................................................................... 1-1

1.1 MACHINE SPECIFICATIONS .................................................................................... 1-1
1.1.1 MAINFRAME ................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1.2 PRINTER SPECIFICATIONS......................................................................... 1-10
1.1.3 SCAN SPECIFICATIONS .............................................................................. 1-11
1.2 SOFTWARE ACCESSORIES .................................................................................. 1-15
1.2.1 PRINTER DRIVERS ...................................................................................... 1-15
1.2.2 SCANNER AND LAN FAX DRIVERS ............................................................. 1-16
1.3 SUPPORTED PAPER SIZES ................................................................................... 1-17
1.3.1 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION ....................................................................... 1-17
1.3.2 PAPER FEED ................................................................................................ 1-18
1.3.3 PAPER EXIT.................................................................................................. 1-22
1.4 OPTION SPECIFICATIONS ..................................................................................... 1-42
1.4.1 ARDF DF3090 (D779-17, -21) ....................................................................... 1-42
1.4.2 SPDF DF3100 (D3B0-17, -21) ....................................................................... 1-42
1.4.3 INTERNAL FINISHER SR3130 (D690) .......................................................... 1-43
1.4.4 FINISHER SR3210 (D3B8) ............................................................................ 1-45
1.4.5 BOOKLET FINISHER SR3220 (D3B9) .......................................................... 1-47
1.4.6 FINISHER SR3230 (D3BA)............................................................................ 1-49
1.4.7 BOOKLET FINISHER SR3240 (D3BB) .......................................................... 1-51
1.4.8 SIDE TRAY TYPE M3 (D725) ........................................................................ 1-54
1.4.9 INTERNAL FINISHER SR3180 (D766) .......................................................... 1-55
1.4.10 INTERNAL SHIFT TRAY SH3070 (D691)....................................................... 1-56
1.4.11 1 BIN TRAY BN3110 (D3CQ) ......................................................................... 1-57
1.4.12 BRIDGE UNIT BU3070 (D685) ...................................................................... 1-58
1.4.13 PUNCH UNIT PU3040 NA/EU/SC (D716)...................................................... 1-58
1.4.14 PUNCH UNIT PU3050 NA/EU/SC (D717)...................................................... 1-59
1.4.15 PUNCH UNIT PU3060 NA/EU/SC (D706)...................................................... 1-60
1.4.16 INTERNAL MULTI-FOLD UNIT FD3000 (M482) ............................................ 1-60
1.4.17 PAPER FEED UNIT PB3150 (D694) .............................................................. 1-61

SM Appendices i M0A0
Specifications

1.4.18 PAPER FEED UNIT PB3220/PB3210 (D787-17, -18) .................................... 1-62

1.4.19 LCIT PB 3170 (D695) .................................................................................... 1-62
1.4.20 LCIT RT 3030 (D696) .................................................................................... 1-62

2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ..................................................... 2-1

2.1 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE.................................................................................. 2-1
2.1.1 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ITEMS............................................................ 2-1
2.1.2 OTHERS YIELD PARTS .................................................................................. 2-7

3. SP MODE TABLES ........................................................................ 3-1

3.1 SP GROUP 1000 ....................................................................................................... 3-1
3.2 SP GROUP 2000 ..................................................................................................... 3-20
3.3 SP GROUP 3000 ..................................................................................................... 3-24
3.4 SP GROUP 4000 ..................................................................................................... 3-33
3.5 SP GROUP 5000 ..................................................................................................... 3-40
3.6 SP GROUP 6000 ................................................................................................... 3-117
3.7 SP GROUP 7000 ................................................................................................... 3-176
3.8 SP GROUP 8000 ................................................................................................... 3-222
3.9 PRINTER SERVICE MENU ................................................................................... 3-287
3.9.1 SP1-XXX (SERVICE MODE) ....................................................................... 3-287
3.10 SCANNER SERVICE MENU ........................................................................... 3-297
3.10.1 SP1-XXX (SYSTEM AND OTHERS) ............................................................ 3-297
3.10.2 SP2-XXX (SCANNING-IMAGE QUALITY) ................................................... 3-298
3.11INPUT AND OUTPUT CHECK ............................................................................... 3-300
3.11.1 INPUT CHECK TABLE................................................................................. 3-300
3.11.2 OUTPUT CHECK TABLE............................................................................. 3-313
3.12 TEST PATTERN PRINTING ............................................................................ 3-324

4. APPENDICES: SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION ......................... 4-1

4.1 PRINTING FEATURES .............................................................................................. 4-1
4.1.1 AUTO PDL DETECTION FUNCTION .............................................................. 4-1
4.1.2 PRINT IMAGES ROTATION ............................................................................ 4-5
4.1.3 PJL USTATUS ................................................................................................. 4-6
4.1.4 BEHAVIOR OF USB PRINTER DETECTION................................................... 4-8
4.2 SCANNER FEATURES.............................................................................................. 4-9
4.2.1 DISPLAY SETTINGS OF RECENTLY USED SCAN DESTINATION ................ 4-9
4.2.2 THE SETTING OF SMTP AUTHENTICATION IN SCAN TO EMAIL ................. 4-9
4.2.3 THE QUALIFICATION SWITCHING OF SCAN TO FOLDER ......................... 4-11

SM Appendices ii D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Specifications

1. SPECIFICATIONS
1.1 MACHINE SPECIFICATIONS
1.1.1 Mainframe
Item Spec.
Configuration Desktop
Hard disk 320 GB
Photosensitivity type OPC drum
Original scanning One-dimensional solid-state scanning system through CCD
Copy process Laser beam scanning and electro-photographic printing
Development Laser beam scanning and electro-photographic printing
Fusing Direct Heating (DH) fusing
Resolution • Scanning originals: 600 dpi
• Printing: 600 dpi
Exposure glass Stationary original exposure type
Original reference position Rear left corner
Warm-up time (23 °C • Normal mode: 54 seconds
(73.4 °F), rated voltage) • Quick mode: 20 seconds
Originals Sheet, book, three-dimensional object
Maximum original size • NA: 11x17 SEF
• EU/Asia: A3 SEF
Paper size (Tray 1-4) Plain Paper 1–Thick Paper 4
(Paper sizes that can be detected automatically.)
• NA
A4 SEF, A5 LEF,B5 JIS SEF, 11x17 SEF, 8 1/2” x14 SEF, 8 1/2” x11
SEF/LEF, 7 1/4” x10 1/2” LEF, 8 1/2” x13 2/5” SEF
• EU/Asia
A3 SEF, A4 SEF/LEF, A5 LEF, B4 JIS SEF,B5 JIS SEF/LEF, 8 1/2”
x11 SEF
Plain Paper 1–Thick Paper 4
(Select the paper size using the Tray Paper Settings menu. Adjust the
supporting side fence before loading B4 JIS SEF, A3 SEF, or 11x17
SEF paper into Trays 3–4.)
• NA
A3 SEF, A4 LEF, A5 SEF, A6 SEF, B4 JIS SEF,B5 JIS LEF, B6 JIS
SEF, 8 1/2” x14 SEF, 8 1/2” x13 SEF, 8 1/4” x13 SEF, 8x13 SEF,

SM Appendices 1-1 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Specifications

Item Spec.
8x10 SEF, 7 /4” x10 /2” SEF, 5 1/2” x8 1/2” SEF, 8K SEF, 16K
1 1

SEF/LEF, 11x15 SEF, 10x14 SEF

• EU/Asia
A5 SEF, A6 SEF, B6 JIS SEF, 11x17 SEF, 8 1/2” x14 SEF, 8 1/2”
x13 SEF, 8 1/2” x11 LEF, 8 1/4” x14 SEF, 8 1/4” x13 SEF, 8x13 SEF,
8x10 SEF, 7 1/4” x10 1/2” SEF/LEF, 5 1/2” x8 1/2” SEF, 8K SEF, 16K
SEF/LEF, 11x15 SEF, 10x14 SEF, 8 1/2” x13 2/5” SEF
Custom size
When loading paper with a vertical length of more than 279.4 mm
(11.0 inches) in Tray 1, use paper that has a horizontal width of 420
mm (16.6 inches) or less.
• NA
Vertical: 3.55–11.69 inches
Horizontal: 5.83–17.00 inches
• EU/Asia
Vertical: 90.0–297.0 mm
Horizontal: 148.0–431.8 mm
Envelopes
4 1/8” x9 1/2” SEF/LEF, 3 7/8” x7 1/2” SEF, C5 Env SEF/LEF, C6 Env
SEF/LEF, DL Env SEF/LEF
Paper size (Bypass tray) Plain Paper 1–Thick Paper 4
(Paper sizes that can be detected automatically.)
• NA
A5 LEF,B5 JIS SEF, 11x17 SEF, 8 1/2” x11 SEF/LEF, 5 1/2” x8 1/2”
SEF, 7 1/4” x10 1/2” LEF, 12x18 SEF
• EU/Asia
A3 SEF, A4 SEF/LEF, A5 SEF/LEF, A6 SEF, B4 JIS SEF,B5 JIS
SEF/LEF, B6 JIS SEF
Plain Paper 1–Thick Paper 4
(Select the paper size using the Tray Paper Settings menu.)
• NA
A3 SEF, A4 SEF/LEF, A5 SEF, A6 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS LEF,
B6 JIS SEF, 8 1/2” x14 SEF, 8 1/2” x13 SEF, 8 1/4” x14 SEF, 8 1/4”
x13 SEF, 8x13 SEF, 8x10 SEF, 7 1/4” x10 1/2” SEF, 8K SEF, 16K
SEF/LEF, 11x15 SEF, 10x14 SEF, 8 1/2” x13 2/5” SEF
• EU/Asia
11x17 SEF, 8 1/2” x14 SEF, 8 1/2” x13 SEF, 8 1/2” x11 SEF/LEF, 8

SM Appendices 1-2 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Specifications

Item Spec.
/4” x14 SEF, 8 /4” x13 SEF, 8x13 SEF, 8x10 SEF, 7 1/4” x10 1/2”
1 1

SEF/LEF, 5 1/2” x8 1/2” SEF, 8K SEF, 16K SEF/LEF, 12x18 SEF,

11x15 SEF, 10x14 SEF, 8 1/2” x13 2/5” SEF
Custom size
Vertical:
When only the Internal Multi-folding unit is installed, the vertical size
range is limited to 90.0–297.0 mm (3.55–11.69 inches).
Horizontal:
(Paper that has a horizontal length of 432 mm (17.1 inches) or more is
prone to creasing, feed failures, and jamming.
• NA
Vertical: 3.55–12.00 inches
Horizontal: 5.83–23.62 inches
• EU/Asia
Vertical: 90.0–304.8 mm
Horizontal: 148.0–600.0 mm
OHP transparencies
A4 SEF/LEF, 8 1/2” x11 SEF/LEF
Translucent paper
A3 SEF, A4 SEF/LEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS SEF/LEF
Label paper (adhesive labels)
A4 SEF/LEF, B4 JIS SEF
Envelopes
4 1/8” x9 1/2” SEF/LEF, 3 7/8” x7 1/2” SEF/LEF, C5 Env SEF/LEF, C6 Env
SEF/LEF, DL Env SEF/LEF
Paper size (Tray 3 (LCT)) Plain Paper 1–Thick Paper 4
• NA
8 1/2” x11 LEF
• EU/Asia
A4 LEF
Plain Paper 1–Thick Paper 4
(To load paper any of the sizes specified above, contact your service
representative.)
• NA
A4 LEF
• EU/Asia
8 1/2” x11 LEF

SM Appendices 1-3 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Specifications

Item Spec.
Paper size (Large capacity Plain Paper 1–Thick Paper 4
tray (LCT)) • NA
8 1/2” x11 LEF
• EU/Asia
A4 LEF
Plain Paper 1–Thick Paper 4
(To load paper any of the sizes specified above, contact your service
representative.)
• NA
A4 LEF, B5 JIS LEF
• EU/Asia
B5 JIS LEF, 8 1/2” x11 LEF
Paper size (Duplex) A3 SEF, A4 SEF/LEF, A5 SEF/LEF, A6 SEF, B4 JIS SEF,B5 JIS
SEF/LEF, B6 JIS SEF, 11x17 SEF, 8 1/2” x14 SEF, 8 1/2” x13 SEF, 8 1/2”
x11 SEF/LEF, 8 1/4” x14 SEF, 8 1/4” x13 SEF, 8x13 SEF, 8x10 SEF, 7
/4” x10 1/2” SEF/LEF, 5 1/2” x8 1/2” SEF, 8K SEF, 16K SEF/LEF, 12x18
1

SEF, 11x15 SEF, 10x14 SEF, 8 1/2” x13 2/5” SEF

• Custom size
Vertical: 90.0–297.0 mm (3.55–11.69 inches)
Horizontal: 148.0–431.8 mm (5.83–17.00 inches)
Paper weight • Trays 1-4
60–300 g/m2 (16 lb. Bond–110 lb. Cover)
• Bypass tray
52–300 g/m2 (14 lb. Bond–110 lb. Cover)
• Tray 3 (LCT)
60–300 g/m2 (16 lb. Bond–110 lb. Cover)
• Large capacity tray (LCT)
60–300 g/m2 (16 lb. Bond–110 lb. Cover)
• Duplex
52–256 g/m2 (14 lb. Bond–140 lb. Index)
Missing image area • Leading edge: 4.2 ± 1.5 mm (0.17 ± 0.06 inches)
(Copier) • Trailing edge: 0.5–6.0 mm (0.02–0.24 inches)
• Left edge: 0.5–4.0 mm (0.02–0.16 inches)
• Right edge: 0.5–4.0 mm (0.02–0.16 inches)
First copy/print time MP 2555: 4.6 seconds
(A4 LEF, 8 1/2” x11 LEF, MP 3055: 4.6 seconds
100% reproduction, feeding MP 3555: 4.3 seconds

SM Appendices 1-4 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Specifications

Item Spec.
from tray 1, on the MP 4055: 4.0 seconds
exposure glass) MP 5055: 2.9 seconds
MP 6055: 2.9 seconds

Copy/print speed (A4 LEF, MP 2555: 25 sheets/minute

8 1/2” x11 LEF) MP 3055: 30 sheets/minute
MP 3555: 35 sheets/minute
MP 4055: 40 sheets/minute
MP 5055: 50 sheets/minute
MP 6055: 60 sheets/minute
Reproduction ratio (%) • NA
Enlargement: 400, 200, 155, 129, 121
Full size: 100
Reduction: 93, 85, 78, 73, 65, 50, 25
• EU/Asia
Enlargement: 400, 200, 141, 122, 115
Full size: 100
Reduction: 93, 82, 75, 71, 65, 50, 25
• Zoom: From 25–400% in increments of 1%
Maximum continuous copy 999 sheets
run
Paper capacity (80 g/m2, Trays 1–4
20 lb. Bond) • Plain Paper 1–Thick Paper 4
550 sheets
• Envelopes (LEF)
50 sheets
• Envelopes (LEF)
Double flap: 15 sheets
Single flap: 25 sheets
Bypass tray
• Thin Paper–Thick Paper 4
100 sheets (up to 10 mm in height)
Thick Paper 1: 40 sheets
Thick Paper 2–Thick Paper 3: 20 sheets
Thick Paper 4: 16 sheets
• OHP transparencies
50 sheets

SM Appendices 1-5 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Specifications

Item Spec.
• Translucent paper
1 sheet
• Label paper (adhesive labels)
30 sheets
• Envelopes
10 sheets
Tray 3 (LCT)
1000 sheets x 2
Large capacity tray (LCT)
500 sheets
Power requirements • NA
120–127 V, 12 A, 60 Hz
• EU/Asia
220–240 V, 8 A, 50/60 Hz
Dimensions NA
• Models equipped with the ARDF (W x D x H up to ADF):
587 x 665 x 913 mm (23.2 x 26.2 x 36.0 inches)
• Models equipped with the one-pass duplex scanning DF (W x D x
H up to ADF):
587 x 665 x 963 mm (23.2 x 26.2 x 38.0 inches)
EU
• Models equipped with the ARDF (W x D x H up to ADF):
587 x 665 x 913 mm (23.2 x 26.2 x 36.0 inches)
• Models equipped with the one-pass duplex scanning ADF (W x D
x H up to ADF):
587 x 665 x 963 mm (23.2 x 26.2 x 38.0 inches)
Asia
• Models equipped with the exposure glass cover (W x D x H up to
exposure glass):
587 x 665 x 788 mm (23.2 x 26.2 x 31.1 inches)
• Models equipped with the ARDF (W x D x H up to ADF):
587 x 665 x 913 mm (23.2 x 26.2 x 36.0 inches)
• Models equipped with the one-pass duplex scanning ADF (W x D
x H up to ADF):
587 x 665 x 963 mm (23.2 x 26.2 x 38.0 inches)
Space for main unit (W x D) • Models equipped with the ARDF
(including the paper trays, 1,149 x 1,160 mm (45.3 x 45.7 inches)

SM Appendices 1-6 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Specifications

Item Spec.
bypass tray, and output • Models equipped with the one-pass duplex scanning ADF
trays) 1,149 x 1,205 mm (45.3 x 47.5 inches)
• Main unit without the ADF
1,149 x1,104 mm (45.3 x 43.5 inches)
Weight NA
• MP 2555/ 3055/ 3555:
Approx. 62.5 kg (137.8 lb.)
• MP 2555/ 3055/ 3555 (Models equipped with the ARDF):
Approx. 71.5 kg (157.6 lb.)
• MP 4055/ 5055/ 6055:
Approx. 76.5 kg (168.7 lb.)
EU
• MP 2555/ 3055/ 3555/ 4055/ 5055 (Models equipped with the
ARDF):
Approx. 71.5 kg (157.6 lb.)
• MP 2555/ 3055/ 3555/ 4055/ 5055 (Models equipped with the one-
pass duplex scanning ADF):
Approx. 76.5 kg (168.7 lb.)
• MP 6055:
Approx. 76.5 kg (168.7 lb.)
Asia
• MP 2555/ 3055/ 3555/ 4055/ 5055:
Approx. 62.5 kg (137.8 lb.)
• MP 6055:
Approx. 76.5 kg (168.7 lb.)
HDD
HDD 73GB
Maximum 9,000 pages
(The total number of pages that can be stored with all functions
combined.)
Copier/A4 original 9,000 pages
Printer/A4/600 dpi, 2 bits 9,000 pages
Scanner/Full Color/A4/200 9,000 pages
dpi, 8 bits/JPEG (In the printer and scanner modes, the number of pages that can be
stored depends on the print image and the original.)
Stored documents
maximum 3,000 pages

SM Appendices 1-7 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Specifications

Item Spec.
Number of pages supported by memory sorting
Maximum 2,000 pages
Copier/A4 original 2,000 pages
Printer/A4/600 dpi, 2 bits 2,000 pages
(In the printer mode, the number of pages that can be sorted depends
on the print image.)

Noise emission
Sound power level (NA)

Main unit only

MP 2555 MP 3055 MP 3555 MP 4055 MP 5055 MP 6055
Stand-by 31.0 dB (A) 31.0 dB (A) 31.0 dB (A) 30.5 dB (A) 30.4 dB (A) 30.7 dB (A)
Copying 58.0 dB (A) 58.6 dB (A) 59.5 dB (A) 60.5 dB (A) 63.6 dB (A) 63.8 dB (A)
Complete system
MP 2555 MP 3055 MP 3555 MP 4055 MP 5055 MP 6055
Stand-by 33.2 dB (A) 33.2 dB (A) 33.2 dB (A) 32.9 dB (A) 33.0 dB (A) 32.8 dB (A)
Copying 67.6 dB (A) 67.6 dB (A) 69.0 dB (A) 69.2 dB (A) 70.1 dB (A) 69.9 dB (A)

Sound pressure level (NA)

Main unit only

MP 2555 MP 3055 MP 3555 MP 4055 MP 5055 MP 6055
Stand-by 22.7 dB (A) 22.4 dB (A) 22.6 dB (A) 19.5 dB (A) 19.4 dB (A) 19.7 dB (A)
Copying 46.0 dB (A) 46.0 dB (A) 46.6 dB (A) 48.9 dB (A) 51.6 dB (A) 51.9 dB (A)
Complete system
MP 2555 MP 3055 MP 3555 MP 4055 MP 5055 MP 6055
Stand-by 18.8 dB (A) 18.9 dB (A) 18.9 dB (A) 18.8 dB (A) 18.9 dB (A) 19.0 dB (A)
Copying 54.8 dB (A) 54.9 dB (A) 56.1 dB (A) 56.4 dB (A) 57.3 dB (A) 56.7 dB (A)
• Sound power level and sound pressure level are actual values measured in accordance with ISO
7779.
• Sound pressure level is measured from the position of the bystander.
• The complete system of MP 2555/3055/3555 consists of the main unit, ARDF, lower paper trays,
internal tray 2, bridge unit, and Booklet Finisher SR3220.
• The complete system of MP 4055/5055 consists of the main unit, ARDF, lower paper trays, internal
tray 2, bridge unit, and Booklet Finisher SR3240.
• The complete system of MP 6055 consists of the main unit, one-pass duplex scanning ADF, lower
paper trays, internal tray 2, bridge unit, and Booklet Finisher SR3240.

SM Appendices 1-8 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Specifications

Sound power level (EU/Asia)

Main unit only

MP 2555 MP 3055 MP 3555 MP 4055 MP 5055 MP 6055
Stand-by 31.0 dB (A) 31.0 dB (A) 31.0 dB (A) 30.9 dB (A) 30.9 dB (A) 31.0 dB (A)
Copying 58.0 dB (A) 58.6 dB (A) 59.5 dB (A) 61.0 dB (A) 63.2 dB (A) 63.8 dB (A)
Complete system
MP 2555 MP 3055 MP 3555 MP 4055 MP 5055 MP 6055
Stand-by 33.2 dB (A) 33.1 dB (A) 33.2 dB (A) 32.9 dB (A) 32.8 dB (A) 32.9 dB (A)
Copying 67.6 dB (A) 67.6 dB (A) 69.0 dB (A) 69.4 dB (A) 70.0 dB (A) 69.8 dB (A)

Sound pressure level (EU/Asia)

Main unit only

MP 2555 MP 3055 MP 3555 MP 4055 MP 5055 MP 6055
Stand-by 22.7 dB (A) 22.4 dB (A) 22.6 dB (A) 21.1 dB (A) 20.7 dB (A) 21.0 dB (A)
Copying 46.0 dB (A) 46.0 dB (A) 46.6 dB (A) 49.0 dB (A) 51.7 dB (A) 52.0 dB (A)
Complete system
MP 2555 MP 3055 MP 3555 MP 4055 MP 5055 MP 6055
Stand-by 18.8 dB (A) 18.9 dB (A) 18.9 dB (A) 18.8 dB (A) 18.7 dB (A) 18.9 dB (A)
Copying 54.8 dB (A) 54.9 dB (A) 56.1 dB (A) 56.7 dB (A) 57.2 dB (A) 56.6 dB (A)
• Sound power level and sound pressure level are actual values measured in accordance with ISO
7779.
• Sound pressure level is measured from the position of the bystander.
• The complete system of MP 2555/3055/3555 consists of the main unit, ARDF, lower paper trays,
internal tray 2, bridge unit, and Booklet Finisher SR3220.
• The complete system of MP 4055/5055 consists of the main unit, ARDF, lower paper trays, internal
tray 2, bridge unit, and Booklet Finisher SR3240.
• The complete system of MP 6055 consists of the main unit, one-pass duplex scanning ADF, lower
paper trays, internal tray 2, bridge unit, and Booklet Finisher SR3240.

SM Appendices 1-9 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Specifications

1.1.2 Printer Specifications

Item Spec.
Resolution 200 dpi, 300 dpi, 400 dpi, 600 dpi, 1200 dpi
Printing speed • MP 2555: 25 sheets/minute
(A4 LEF, 8 1/2” x11 LEF, • MP 3055: 30 sheets/minute
plain paper) • MP 3555: 35 sheets/minute
• MP 4055: 40 sheets/minute
• MP 5055: 50 sheets/minute
• MP 6055: 60 sheets/minute
Printing speeds depend on the machine. Check which type of machine
you have. See Read This First.
Interface • Standard
Ethernet interface (1000BASE-T/100BASE-TX/10BASE-T)
USB 2.0 (Type A) port (on the control panel)
SD card slot (on the control panel)
• Option
IEEE 1284 parallel interface
IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n wireless LAN interface
File Format Converter
Extended USB board
USB device server
Network protocol TCP/IP (IPv4, IPv6)
Printer language • Standard
RPCS, PCL 5e/6, PDF, MediaPrint(JPEG, TIFF), PostScript 3
• Option
RPCS, PCL 5e/6, PDF, MediaPrint(JPEG, TIFF), PostScript 3
Fonts • Standard
PostScript 3: 93 fonts
• Option
Adobe PostScript 3: 136 fonts
IPDS: 108 fonts
Memory 2 GB
USB interface • Supported operating system
Windows Vista/7/8/8.1/10, Windows Server 2008/2008
R2/2012/2012 R2, OS X 10.8 or later
• Transmission spec
USB 2.0 Standard
• Connectable device

SM Appendices 1-10 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Specifications

Item Spec.
Devices corresponding to USB 2.0 Standard
• The maximum length for the cable connecting the machine to an Ethernet network is 100 meters.

1.1.3 Scan Specifications

Item Spec.
Type Full-color scanner
Scan method Flatbed scanning
Image sensor type CCD Image Sensor
Scan type Sheet, book, three-dimensional object
Original sizes that can be • Length
scanned 10–297 mm (0.4–11 inches)
• Width
10–432 mm (0.4–17 inches)
Scan sizes automatically • NA
detectable from the 11x17 SEF, 8 1/2” x14 SEF, 8 1/2” x13 2/5” SEF, 8 1/2” x11
exposure glass SEF/LEF, 5 1/2” x8 1/2” LEF
• EU/Asia
A3 SEF, A4 SEF/LEF, A5 LEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS SEF/LEF, 8 1/2”
x13 SEF
Scan sizes automatically • NA
detectable from the ADF A3 SEF, A4 SEF/LEF, 11x17 SEF, 8 1/2” x14 SEF, 8 1/2” x13 2/5”
SEF, 8 1/2” x11 SEF/LEF, 7 1/4” x10 1/2” SEF, 5 1/2” x8 1/2”
SEF/LEF, 10x14 SEF
• EU/Asia
A3 SEF, A4 SEF/LEF, A5 SEF/LEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS SEF/LEF, B6
JIS SEF/LEF, 11x17 SEF, 8 1/2” x13 SEF, 8 1/2” x11 SEF/LEF
Scan speed (the machine When using the E-mail, Scan to Folder, WSD (Push Type), or Scan to
equipped with the ARDF) Removable device (Original size: A4 LEF, 8 1/2” x11 LEF, Resolution: 200
dpi/300 dpi)
• Black and white:
80 pages/minute (A4 LEF), 79 pages/minute (8 1/2” x11 LEF)
(Original Type: B & W: Text / Line Art, Compression (Black & White):
MMR, ITU-T No1 Chart)
• Full Color:
80 pages/minute (A4 LEF), 79 pages/minute (8 1/2” x11 LEF)
(Original Type: Full Color: Text / Photo, Compression (Gray Scale /
Full Color): Default, Original Chart)

SM Appendices 1-11 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Specifications

Item Spec.
Scan speed (the machine When using the E-mail, Scan to Folder, WSD (Push Type), or Scan to
equipped with the one- Removable device (Original size: A4 LEF, 8 1/2” x11 LEF, Resolution: 200
pass duplex scanning dpi/300 dpi)
ADF) • When scanning one-sided originals
Black and white: 110 pages/minute
• When scanning two-sided originals
Black and white: 180 pages/minute
(Original Type: B & W: Text / Line Art, Compression (Black & White):
MMR, ITU-T No1 Chart)
• When scanning one-sided originals
Full Color: 110 pages/minute
• When scanning two-sided originals
Full Color: 180 pages/minute
(Original Type: Full Color: Text / Photo, Compression (Gray Scale /
Full Color): Default, Original Chart)
Scanning speed differs depending on the following; operating
environment of the machine and computer, scan settings, and the
content of originals (denser images require more time).
Tone • Black and white: 2 tones
• Full color / Gray scale: 256 tones
Basic scanning resolution 200 dpi
Image compression type TIFF (MH, MR, MMR, JBIG2)
for black and white (two-
value)
Image compression type JPEG
for gray scale/full color
Interface • Standard
Ethernet interface (1000BASE-T/100BASE-TX/10BASE-T)
USB 2.0 (Type A) port (on the control panel)
SD card slot (on the control panel)
• Option
IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n wireless LAN interface
Network protocol TCP/IP
Selectable scanning 100 dpi, 200 dpi, 300 dpi, 400 dpi, 600 dpi
resolutions when using
the E-mail function
Protocol for sending e- POP, SMTP, IMAP4

SM Appendices 1-12 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Specifications

Item Spec.
mail
Sendable file formats TIFF, JPEG, PDF, High Compression PDF, PDF/A
when using the E-mail When you select [PDF], [High Compression PDF], or [PDF/A] for the file
function format, you can attach a digital signature. You can also specify the
security settings for [PDF] or [High Compression PDF]. For details, see
“Specifying Digital Signature for PDF files”, “Security Settings for PDF
Files”, Scan.
Selectable scanning 100 dpi, 200 dpi, 300 dpi, 400 dpi, 600 dpi
resolutions when using
the Scan to Folder
function
Protocol for Scan to SMB, FTP
Folder
Sendable file formats TIFF, JPEG, PDF, High Compression PDF, PDF/A
when using the Scan to When you select [PDF], [High Compression PDF], or [PDF/A] for the file
Folder function format, you can attach a digital signature. You can also specify the
security settings for [PDF] or [High Compression PDF]. For details, see
“Specifying Digital Signature for PDF files”, “Security Settings for PDF
Files”, Scan.
WSD Supported.
DSM Supported.
Selectable scanning 100–1,200 dpi
resolution when using
TWAIN scanner
Protocol for TWAIN TCP/IP
scanner
Operating system for Windows Vista/7/8/8.1/10, Windows Server 2008/2008 R2/2012/2012 R2
TWAIN scanner (TWAIN scanner runs in 32-bit compatible mode on a 64-bit operating
system, so TWAIN scanner is not compatible with 64-bit applications.
Use it with 32-bit applications.)
Selectable scanning 100–1,200 dpi
resolutions when using
WIA scanner
Protocol for WIA scanner TCP/IP
Operating system for WIA Windows Vista (SP1 or later)/7/8/8.1/10, Windows Server 2008/2008
scanner R2/2012/2012 R2
(WIA scanner can function under both 32- and 64-bit operating systems.)

SM Appendices 1-13 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Specifications

• Specifications are subject to change without notice.

• The maximum length for the cable connecting the machine to an Ethernet network is 100 meters.

SM Appendices 1-14 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Specifications

1.2 SOFTWARE ACCESSORIES

The printer drivers and utility software are provided on one CD-ROM. An auto-run installer allows you to
select which components to install.

1.2.1 Printer Drivers

Operating System*1 Printer Language
PCL 5c PCL 6 PostScript 3
Windows Vista *2 Supported Supported Supported
Windows 7 *3 Supported Supported Supported
Windows 8 *4 Supported Supported Supported
Windows 8.1 *5 Supported Supported Supported
Windows 10 *6
Supported Supported Supported
Windows Server 2003 *7 Supported Supported Supported
Windows Server 2008 *8 Supported Supported Supported
Windows Server 2012 *9
Supported Supported Supported
OS X *10 Not available Not available Supported
*1 Windows operating system supports both versions (32/64 bit).
*2 Microsoft Windows Vista Ultimate/Microsoft Windows Vista Enterprise/Microsoft Windows Vista
Business/Microsoft Windows Vista Home Premium/Microsoft Windows Vista Home Basic
*3 Microsoft Windows 7 Home Premium/Microsoft Windows 7 Professional/Microsoft Windows 7
Ultimate/Microsoft Windows 7 Enterprise
*4 Microsoft Windows 8/Microsoft Windows 8 Pro/Microsoft Windows 8 Enterprise
*5 Microsoft Windows 8.1/Microsoft Windows 8.1 Pro/Microsoft Windows 8.1 Enterprise
*6 Microsoft Windows 10 Home/Microsoft Windows 10 Pro/Microsoft Windows 10 Enterprise/Microsoft
Windows 10 Education
*7 Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition/Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Enterprise
Edition/Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 Standard Edition/Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2
Enterprise Edition
*8 Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Standard/Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Enterprise/Microsoft
Windows Server 2008 R2 Standard/Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 Enterprise
*9 Microsoft Windows Server 2012 Foundation/Microsoft Windows Server 2012 Essentials/Microsoft
Windows Server 2012 Standard/Microsoft Windows Server 2012 R2 Foundation/Microsoft Windows
Server 2012 R2 Essentials/Microsoft Windows Server 2012 R2 Standard
*10 OS X 10.7 or later

• Some applications may require installation of the PCL 5c printer driver. In this case, you can
install PCL 5c without having to install PCL 6.
• Adobe PostScript printer driver allows the computer to communicate with the printer using a

SM Appendices 1-15 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Specifications

printer language. PPD files allow the printer driver to enable specific printer functions.

1.2.2 Scanner and LAN Fax Drivers

Operating System TWAIN*1 PC-FAX
Windows Vista Supported Supported
Windows 7 Supported Supported
Windows 8 Supported Supported
Windows 8.1 Supported Supported
Windows 10 Supported Supported
Windows Server 2003/2003 R2 Supported Supported
Windows Server 2008/2008 R2 Supported Supported
Windows Server 2012/2012 R2 Supported Supported
OS X Not available Not available
*1 TWAIN scanner runs on a 64-bit operating system, but is not compatible with 64-bit applications. Use
it with 32-bit applications.

SM Appendices 1-16 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Specifications

1.3 SUPPORTED PAPER SIZES

1.3.1 Original Size Detection
Size (W x L) [mm] NA EU/AP
Book ADF Book ADF
A3 SEF (297 x 420) - Y Y*4 Y
B4 SEF (257 x 364) - - Y*4 Y
A4 SEF (210 x 297) Y *5
Y Y *4, 5
Y
A4 LEF (297 x 210) Y*5 Y Y*4, 5 Y
B5 SEF (182 x 257) - - Y*4 Y
B5 LEF (257 x 182) - - Y *4
Y
A5 SEF (148 x 210) - - Y*2, 4 Y
A5 LEF (210 x 148) - - Y*4 Y
B6 SEF (128 x 182) - - - Y
B6 LEF (182 x 128) - - - Y
DLT SEF (11" x 17") Y Y *Db
- Y*Df
LG SEF (81/2" x 14") Y*6 Y*Dc, 6 - -

Oficio SEF (81/2" x 13.4") Y*6 Y*Dc, 6 - -

LT SEF (81/2" x 11") Y*5 Y*Dd Y*5 Y*Dg
LT LEF (11" x 81/2") Y*5 Y*De Y*5 Y*Dh
HLT SEF (51/2" x 81/2") Y*2 Y - -
HLT LEF (81/2" x 51/2") Y Y - -
F SEF (8" x 13") - - Y *S3
Y*S3
Foolscap SEF (81/2" x 13") - Y*Sc Y*D3 Y*D3
Folio SEF (81/4" x 13") - - Y*S3 Y*S3
Folio SEF (11" x 15") - Y*Sb - -
Folio SEF (10" x 14") - Y - -
Folio SEF (8" x 10") - Y *Sd
- -
US EXE SEF (71/4" x 101/2") - Y - -
US EXE LEF (101/2 x 71/4") - Y*Se - -
8K SEF (267 x 390) - - Y *4
Y*Sf
16K SEF (195 x 267) - - Y*4 Y*Si
16K LEF (267 x 195) - - Y*4v Y*Sg
Sizes with letters (a to h) means only either size with the corresponding letter can be selected for size
detection. “D” is for default set sizes, and when setting “S” sizes for size detection from SP mode, “D”
sizes can no longer be detected.
(*2)For detected originals smaller then A5 size, with SP mode either “detect as A5” or “Detect as

SM Appendices 1-17 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Specifications

Unknown” can be selected. (Default is “Detect as unknown”)

(*3)F Sizes (8.5” x 13” SEF, 8.25” x 13” SEF, 8” x 13” SEF) will be available by SP mode settings.
(*4)Switch Book scanner original detection between “K” series and ”A/B” series from SP mode.
(Can not set both to detect, but 8K/16K detect can de set from SO mode)
8K SEF -> Switch between A3, B4 SEF
16K SEF -> Switch between A4, A5, B5 SEF
16K LEF -> Switch between A4, A5, B5 LEF *Can not switch only either size.
(*5)Can be selected with switching A4/LT from SP mode:
• Standard detect (default)
• When placing A4/LT size LEF, detect as A4 LEF. When placing SEF, detect as LT SEF.
• When placing A4/LT size LEF, detect as LT LEF. When placing SEF, detect as A4 SEF.
(*6)The machine can detect either LG or Oficio, depending on a UP mode setting. For the ADF, "C"
sizes from SP should be set to "LG setting" in advance.
Remarks:
Y Yes; available
- Not available

1.3.2 Paper Feed

Tray 1 to 4, and the side LCT

Size (W x L) [mm] Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3/4 Tray 3
1 drawer Tandem LCT
/2 drawers bank
Region (EU/AA) NA EU/AA NA EU/AA NA EU/AA NA EU/AA
A3 SEF (297 x 420) G2 A2 G2 A2 G2 A2 - -
A4 SEF (210 x 297) A A A A A A - -
A4 LEF (297 x 210) G1 A1 G1 A1 G1 A1 K H
A5 SEF (148 x 210) B B B B B B - -
A5 LEF (210 x 148 ) A A A A A A - -
A6 SEF (105 x 148) B B B B B B - -
B4 SEF (257 x 364) G3 A3 G3 A3 G3 A3 - -
B5 SEF (182 x 257) A A A A A A - -
B5 LEF (257 x 182 ) G4 A4 G4 A4 G4 A4 - -
B6 SEF (128 x 182 ) B B B B B B - -
DLT SEF (11" x 17") A2 G2 A2 G2 A2 G2 - -
Legal SEF (81/2" x 14") A3 G3 A3 G3 A3 G3 - -
Foolscap SEF (8 /2" x 13")
1
B B B B B B - -
LT SEF (81/2" x 11") A A A A A A - -

SM Appendices 1-18 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Specifications

Size (W x L) [mm] Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3/4 Tray 3

1 drawer Tandem LCT
/2 drawers bank
Region (EU/AA) NA EU/AA NA EU/AA NA EU/AA NA EU/AA
LT LEF (11" x 81/2") A1 G1 A1 G1 A1 G1 H K
Gov. LG SEF (81/4" x 14") B B B B B B - -
Folio SEF (81/4" x 13") B B B B B B - -
F/GL SEF (8" x 13") B B B B B B - -
Eng Quatro SEF (8" x 10") B B B B B B - -
Executive SEF (71/4" x 101/2") B B B B B B - -
Executive LEF (101/2" x 71/4") A4 G4 A4 G4 A4 G4 - -
HLT SEF (5 /2" x 8 /2")
1 1
B B B B B B - -
Com10 SEF (104.8 x 241.3) B B B B B B - -
Com10 LEF (241.3 x 104.8) B B B B B B - -
Monarch SEF (98.4 x 190.5) B B B B B B - -
Monarch LEF (190.5 x 98.4) - - - - - - - -
C5 SEF (162 x 229) B B B B B B - -
C5 LEF (229 x 162) B B B B B B - -
C6 SEF (114 x 162) B B B B B B - -
C6LEF (162 x 114) B B B B B B - -
DL Env SEF (110 x 220) B B B B B B - -
DL Env LEF (220 x 110) B B B B B B - -
8K SEF (267 x 390) B B B B B B - -
16K SEF (195 x 267 ) B B B B B B - -
16K LEF (267 x 195 ) B B B B B B - -
12" x 18" SEF - - - - - - - -
11" x 15" SEF B B B B B B - -
10" x 14" SEF B B B B B B - -
8.5” x 13.4” SEF A3 B A3 B A3 B - -
Remarks:
A Auto detectable. Also can be selected with size button of initial setting.
B Can be selected with size button from initial setting.
C Select this size by setting the dial.
D Set dial to “*”, then select with size button from initial setting.
E <Bypass setting>
Copy window/Bypass/Standard size/Size select or select with the print bypass paper size/size
button from initial setting.
F Select with SP from preset paper sizes.

SM Appendices 1-19 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Specifications

Cannot be selected from printer driver.

G Switches which size to set as auto detect with SP.
*Example: The combination of A1-G1.
G (When not auto detectable) will be as same as B.
Combinations are only made from same region same tray.
*Example: The combination of G1 and J1.
G (When not auto detectable) will be as same as E.
Combinations are only made from same region same tray.
H Size fixed when shipping.
I <Bypass setting>
With bypass tray, after 1st sheet trailing edge goes through, auto detects size, then fixed to size
detected from the 2nd sheet.
J <Bypass setting>
Auto detect of Copy window/Bypass/Standard size/Select with size button.
K Select with SP from preset paper sizes.
Can be selected from printer driver.
- Not available

Bypass Trays
Size (W x L) [mm] LCT Bypass
Region (EU/AA) NA EU/AA NA EU/AA
A3 SEF (297 x 420) - - E J
A4 SEF (210 x 297) - - E J
A4 LEF (297 x 210) K H E J
A5 SEF (148 x 210) - - E J
A5 LEF (210 x 148 ) - - J J
A6 SEF (105 x 148) - - E J
B4 SEF (257 x 364) - - E J
B5 SEF (182 x 257) - - J J
B5 LEF (257 x 182 ) K K E J
B6 SEF (128 x 182 ) - - E J
DLT SEF (11" x 17") - - J E
Legal SEF (8 /2" x 14")
1
- - G1 E
Foolscap SEF (81/2" x 13") - - E E
LT SEF (81/2" x 11") - - J1 E
LT LEF (11" x 81/2") H K J E
Gov. LG SEF (81/4" x 14") - - E E
Folio SEF (8 /4" x 13")
1
- - E E

SM Appendices 1-20 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Specifications

Size (W x L) [mm] LCT Bypass

Region (EU/AA) NA EU/AA NA EU/AA
F/GL SEF (8" x 13") - - E E
Eng Quatro SEF (8" x 10") - - E E
Executive SEF (71/4" x 101/2") - - E E
Executive LEF (101/2" x 71/4") - - J E
HLT SEF (5 /2" x 8 /2")
1 1
- - J E
Com10 SEF (104.8 x 241.3) - - E*1 E*1
Com10 LEF (241.3 x 104.8) - - E*1 E*1
Monarch SEF (98.4 x 190.5) - - E*1 E*1
Monarch LEF (190.5 x 98.4) - - E*1 E*1
C5 SEF (162 x 229) - - E*1 E*1
C5 LEF (229 x 162) - - E*1 E*1
C6 SEF (114 x 162) - - E*1 E*1
C6LEF (162 x 114) - - E*1 E*1
DL Env SEF (110 x 220) - - E*1 E*1
DL Env LEF (220 x 110) - - E*1 E*1
8K SEF (267 x 390) - - E E
16K SEF (195 x 267) - - E E
16K LEF (267 x 195) - - E E
12" x 18" SEF - - J E
11" x 15" SEF - - E E
10" x 14" SEF - - E E
8.5” x 13.4” SEF - - E E
Remarks:
A Auto detectable. Also can be selected with size button of initial setting.
B Can be selected with size button from initial setting.
C Select this size by setting the dial.
D Set dial to “*”, then select with size button from initial setting.
E <Bypass setting>
Copy window/Bypass/Standard size/Size select or select with the print bypass paper size/size
button from initial setting.
F Select with SP from preset paper sizes.
Cannot be selected from printer driver.
G Switches which size to set as auto detect with SP.
*Example: The combination of A1-G1.
G (When not auto detectable) will be as same as B.
Combinations are only made from same region same tray.

SM Appendices 1-21 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Specifications

*Example: The combination of G1 and J1.

G (When not auto detectable) will be as same as E.
Combinations are only made from same region same tray.
H Size fixed when shipping.
I <Bypass setting>
With bypass tray, after 1st sheet trailing edge goes through, auto detects size, then fixed to size
detected from the 2nd sheet.
J <Bypass setting>
Auto detect of Copy window/Bypass/Standard size/Select with size button.
K Select with SP from preset paper sizes.
Can be selected from printer driver.
- Not available

*1 Even the paper size is in the range or available sizes for duplex, envelopes cannot be done so.

1.3.3 Paper Exit

Main unit tray, 1-bin tray, Internal shift tray SH3070, Side tray
Size (W x L) [mm] Main unit 1 bin tray Internal shift tray Side Tray
tray SH3070
Main unit Upper Shift Shifting Bridge upper Side
tray tray exit tray
A3 SEF (297 x 420) A A A A A A
A4 SEF (210 x 297) A A A A A A
A4 LEF (297 x 210) A A A A A A
A5 SEF (148 x 210) A A A A A A
A5 LEF (210 x 148 ) A A A A A A
A6 SEF (105 x 148) A B*1 A*1 A A*1 A*1
B4 SEF (257 x 364) A A A A A A
B5 SEF (182 x 257) A A A A A A
B5 LEF (257 x 182 ) A A A A A A
B6 SEF (128 x 182 ) A B*1 A*1 A A*1 A*1
DLT SEF (11" x 17") A A A A A A
Legal SEF (8 /2" x 14")
1
A A A A A A
Foolscap SEF (81/2" x A A A A A A
13")
LT SEF (81/2" x 11") A A A A A A
LT LEF (11" x 81/2") A A A A A A

SM Appendices 1-22 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Specifications

Size (W x L) [mm] Main unit 1 bin tray Internal shift tray Side Tray
tray SH3070
Main unit Upper Shift Shifting Bridge upper Side
tray tray exit tray
Gov. LG SEF (81/4" x A A A A A A
14")
Folio SEF (81/4" x 13") A A A A A A
F/GL SEF (8" x 13") A A A A A A
Eng Quatro SEF (8" x A A A A A A
10")
Executive SEF (71/4" x A A A A A A
101/2")
Executive LEF (101/2" x A A A A A A
71/4")
HLT SEF (51/2" x 81/2") A A A A A A
Com10 SEF (104.8 x A B A*1
A A *1, 3
B
241.3)
Com10 LEF (241.3 x A B A*1 A A*1, 3, 4 -
104.8)
Monarch SEF (98.4 x A B A*1 A A*1, 3 B
190.5)
Monarch LEF (190.5 x A B A*1 A A*1, 3, 4 -
98.4)
C5 SEF (162 x 229) A B A*1 A A*1, 3 B

C5 LEF (229 x 162) A B A*1 A A*1, 3, 4 B

C6 SEF (114 x 162) A B A*1 A A*1, 3 B

C6LEF (162 x 114) A B A*1 A A*1, 3, 4 -

DL Env SEF (110 x A B A*1 A A*1, 3 B

220)
DL Env LEF (220 x 110) A B A*1 A A*1, 3, 4 -

8K SEF (267 x 390) A A A A A A

16K SEF (195 x 267 ) A A A A A A
16K LEF (267 x 195 ) A A A A A A

SM Appendices 1-23 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Specifications

Size (W x L) [mm] Main unit 1 bin tray Internal shift tray Side Tray
tray SH3070
Main unit Upper Shift Shifting Bridge upper Side
tray tray exit tray
12" x 18" SEF - A*1 A*1 B A A
11" x 15" SEF A A A A A A
10" x 14" SEF A A A A A A
8.5” x 13.4” SEF A A A A A A
Shift: The paper is fed out to the shift tray, but without shifting.
Shifting: The paper is fed out to the shift tray, and the shifting function is used.

Internal Finisher SR3130

Size (W x L) Paper exit Staple Punch
[mm] Shift Shifting Single/Double Stapling EU 2 NA 3 NA 2 SC 4
size amount SC 4 EU 4 Holes Holes
Holes Holes
A3 SEF (297 x A A A 30 A A A A
420)
A4 SEF (210 x A A A 50 A - B A
297)
A4 LEF (297 x A A A 50 A A A A
210)
A5 SEF (148 x A*1 A*1 - - - - - -
210)
A5 LEF (210 x A*1 A*1 - - - - - -
148 )
A6 SEF (105 x A*1 - - - - - - -
148)
B4 SEF (257 x A A A 30 A - - A
364)
B5 SEF (182 x A A A 50 A - - A
257)
B5 LEF (257 x A A A 50 A - - A
182 )
B6 SEF (128 x A*1 - - - - - - -
182 )
DLT SEF (11" x A A A 30 A A A A
17")

SM Appendices 1-24 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Specifications

Size (W x L) Paper exit Staple Punch

[mm] Shift Shifting Single/Double Stapling EU 2 NA 3 NA 2 SC 4
size amount SC 4 EU 4 Holes Holes
Holes Holes
Legal SEF (81/2" x A A A 30 A - A A
14")
Foolscap SEF A A A 30 A - A A
(81/2" x 13")
LT SEF (81/2" x A A A 50 A - A A
11")
LT LEF (11" x A A A 50 A A A A
81/2")
Gov. LG SEF A A A 30 - - - -
(81/4" x 14")
Folio SEF (81/4" x A A A 30 - - - -
13")
F/GL SEF (8" x A A*1 - - - - - -
13")
Eng Quatro SEF A A*1 - - - - - -
(8" x 10")
Executive SEF A A A 50 A - A A
(7 /4" x 10 /2")
1 1

Executive LEF A A A 50 - - - -
(10 /2" x 7 /4")
1 1

HLT SEF (51/2" x A*1 - - - - - - -

81/2")
Com10 SEF A*1 - - - - - - -
(104.8 x 241.3)
Com10 LEF A*1,3,4 - - - - - - -
(241.3 x 104.8)
Monarch SEF A*1 - - - - - - -
(98.4 x 190.5)
Monarch LEF A*1,3,4 - - - - - - -
(190.5 x 98.4)
C5 SEF (162 x A*1 -
- - - - - -
229)
C5 LEF (229 x A*1 -
- - - - - -
162)

SM Appendices 1-25 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Specifications

Size (W x L) Paper exit Staple Punch

[mm] Shift Shifting Single/Double Stapling EU 2 NA 3 NA 2 SC 4
size amount SC 4 EU 4 Holes Holes
Holes Holes
C6 SEF (114 x A*1 - - - - - - -
162)
C6LEF (162 x A*1,3,4 - - - - - - -
114)
DL Env SEF (110 A*1 - - - - - - -
x 220)
DL Env LEF (220 A*1,3,4 - - - - - - -
x 110)
8K SEF (267 x A A A 30 A - - -
390)
16K SEF (195 x A A A 50 A - - -
267 )
16K LEF (267 x A A A 50 A - - -
195 )
12" x 18" SEF A - - - - - - -
11" x 15" SEF A A - - - - - -
10" x 14" SEF A A - - - - - -
8.5” x 13.4” SEF A A A 30 A - A A

Finisher SR3230/SR3240
Size (W Paper exit Half Staple Punch
x L) fold
[mm] Proof/shi shiftin Hal Middl Single Staplin Saddl Saddl EU2 NA2 NA3
ft g f e fold /Doubl g e e SC4 Hole EU4
fol e amoun stitch stitch Hole s Hole
d stitch t amou s s
nt
A3 SEF A A A A*2 A 50 A 20 A A A
(297 x
420)
A4 SEF A A A A*2 A 50 A 20 A B -
(210 x
297)
A4 LEF A A - - A 50 - - A A A

SM Appendices 1-26 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Specifications

Size (W Paper exit Half Staple Punch

x L) fold
[mm] Proof/shi shiftin Hal Middl Single Staplin Saddl Saddl EU2 NA2 NA3
ft g f e fold /Doubl g e e SC4 Hole EU4
fol e amoun stitch stitch Hole s Hole
d stitch t amou s s
nt
(297 x
210)
A5 SEF A A - - - - - - A A -
(148 x
210)
A5 LEF A A - - - - - - A B -
(210 x
148 )
A6 SEF A - - - - - - - - - -
(105 x
148)
B4 SEF A A A A*2 A 50 A 20 A A A
(257 x
364)
B5 SEF A A A A*2 A 50 A 20 A A -
(182 x
257)
B5 LEF A A - - A 50 - - A A A
(257 x
182 )
B6 SEF A B - - - - - - - - -
(128 x
182 )
DLT A A A A*2 A 50 A 20 A A A
SEF
(11" x
17")
Legal A A A A*2 A 50 A 20 A A
SEF
(81/2" x
14")

SM Appendices 1-27 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Specifications

Size (W Paper exit Half Staple Punch

x L) fold
[mm] Proof/shi shiftin Hal Middl Single Staplin Saddl Saddl EU2 NA2 NA3
ft g f e fold /Doubl g e e SC4 Hole EU4
fol e amoun stitch stitch Hole s Hole
d stitch t amou s s
nt
Foolsca A A - - A 50 - - A A -
p SEF
(81/2" x
13")
LT SEF A A A A*2 A 50 A 20 A A
(81/2" x
11")
LT LEF A A - - A 50 - - A A A
(11" x
81/2")
Gov. LG A A A A*2 A 50 A 20 A A -
SEF
(81/4" x
14")
Folio A A A A*2 A 50 A 20 A A -
SEF
(81/4" x
13")
F/GL A A - - A 50 - - A A -
SEF (8"
x 13")
Eng A A - - A 50 - - A A -
Quatro
SEF (8"
x 10")
Executiv A A - - A 50 - - A A -
e SEF
(71/4" x
101/2")
Executiv A A - - A 50 - - A A A
e LEF

SM Appendices 1-28 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Specifications

Size (W Paper exit Half Staple Punch

x L) fold
[mm] Proof/shi shiftin Hal Middl Single Staplin Saddl Saddl EU2 NA2 NA3
ft g f e fold /Doubl g e e SC4 Hole EU4
fol e amoun stitch stitch Hole s Hole
d stitch t amou s s
nt
(10 /2" x
1

71/4")
HLT A A - - - - - - A A -
SEF
(51/2" x
81/2")
Com10 - - - - - - - - - - -
SEF
(104.8 x
241.3)
Com10 - - - - - - - - - - -
LEF
(241.3 x
104.8)
Monarc - - - - - - - - - - -
h SEF
(98.4 x
190.5)
Monarc - - - - - - - - - - -
h LEF
(190.5 x
98.4)
C5 SEF - - - - - - - - - - -
(162 x
229)
C5 LEF - - - - - - - - - - -
(229 x
162)
C6 SEF - - - - - - - - - - -
(114 x
162)

SM Appendices 1-29 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Specifications

Size (W Paper exit Half Staple Punch

x L) fold
[mm] Proof/shi shiftin Hal Middl Single Staplin Saddl Saddl EU2 NA2 NA3
ft g f e fold /Doubl g e e SC4 Hole EU4
fol e amoun stitch stitch Hole s Hole
d stitch t amou s s
nt
C6LEF - - - - - - - - - - -
(162 x
114)
DL Env - - - - - - - - - - -
SEF
(110 x
220)
DL Env - - - - - - - - - - -
LEF
(220 x
110)
8K SEF A A - - A 50 - - A A A
(267 x
390)
16K A A - -
A 50 - - A A -
SEF
(195 x
267 )
16K A A - -
A 50 - - A A A
LEF
(267 x
195 )
12" x A A - - - - - - - - -
18" SEF
11" x A A A A*2 A 50 A 20 A A A
15" SEF
10" x A A A A*2 A 50 A 20 A A A
14" SEF
8.5” x A A A A*2 A 50 A 20 A A -
13.4”
SEF

SM Appendices 1-30 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Specifications

Booklet Finisher SR3220

Size Paper exit Half Staple Punch
(W x L) fold
[mm] Pro Shi Shifti Sadd Midd Single/Do Stapl Sadd Saddl EU2 NA2 NA3
of ft ng le le uble stitch e le e SC4 Hol EU4
stitch fold amou stitch stitch Hol es Hol
nt amou es es
nt
A3 A A A A A *5
A 30 A 15 A A A
SEF
(297 x
420)
A4 A A A A A*5 A 50 A 15 A B -
SEF
(210 x
297)
A4 LEF A A A - - A 50 - - A A A
(297 x
210)
A5 A A A*1 - - - - - - A A -
SEF
(148 x
210)
A5 LEF A A A - - - - - - A B -
(210 x
148 )
A6 A B - - - - - - - - - -
SEF
(105 x
148)
B4 A A A A A*5 A 30 A 15 A A A
SEF
(257 x
364)
B5 A A A*1 A A*5 A 50 A 15 A A -
SEF
(182 x
257)

SM Appendices 1-31 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Specifications

Size Paper exit Half Staple Punch

(W x L) fold
[mm] Pro Shi Shifti Sadd Midd Single/Do Stapl Sadd Saddl EU2 NA2 NA3
of ft ng le le uble stitch e le e SC4 Hol EU4
stitch fold amou stitch stitch Hol es Hol
nt amou es es
nt
B5 LEF A A A - - A 50 - - A A A
(257 x
182 )
B6 A A A*1 - - - - - - - - -
SEF
(128 x
182 )
DLT A A A A A*5 A 30 A 15 A A A
SEF
(11" x
17")
Legal A A A A A*5 A 30 A 15 A A -
SEF
(81/2" x
14")
Foolsc A A A - - A 30 - - A A -
ap SEF
(81/2" x
13")
LT SEF A A A A A*5 A 50 A 15 A A -
(81/2" x
11")
LT LEF A A A - - A 50 - - A A A
(11" x
81/2")
Gov. A A A - - A 30 - - A A -
LG
SEF
(81/4" x
14")
Folio A A A - - A 30 - - A A -

SM Appendices 1-32 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Specifications

Size Paper exit Half Staple Punch

(W x L) fold
[mm] Pro Shi Shifti Sadd Midd Single/Do Stapl Sadd Saddl EU2 NA2 NA3
of ft ng le le uble stitch e le e SC4 Hol EU4
stitch fold amou stitch stitch Hol es Hol
nt amou es es
nt
SEF
(81/4" x
13")
F/GL A A A - - A 30 - - A A -
SEF
(8" x
13")
Eng A A A - - A 50 - - A A -
Quatro
SEF
(8" x
10")
Executi A A A - - A 50 - - A A -
ve SEF
(71/4" x
101/2")
Executi A A A - - A 50 - - A A A
ve LEF
(101/2"
x 71/4")
HLT A A A*1 - - - - - - A A -
SEF
(51/2" x
81/2")
Com10 - - - - - - - - - - - -
SEF
(104.8
x
241.3)
Com10 - - - - - - - - - - - -
LEF

SM Appendices 1-33 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Specifications

Size Paper exit Half Staple Punch

(W x L) fold
[mm] Pro Shi Shifti Sadd Midd Single/Do Stapl Sadd Saddl EU2 NA2 NA3
of ft ng le le uble stitch e le e SC4 Hol EU4
stitch fold amou stitch stitch Hol es Hol
nt amou es es
nt
(241.3
x
104.8)
Monarc - - - - - - - - - - - -
h SEF
(98.4 x
190.5)
Monarc - - - - - - - - - - - -
h LEF
(190.5
x 98.4)
C5 - - - - - - - - - - - -
SEF
(162 x
229)
C5 - - - - - - - - - - - -
LEF
(229 x
162)
C6 - - - - - - - - - - - -
SEF
(114 x
162)
C6LEF - - - - - - - - - - - -
(162 x
114)
DL Env - - - - - - - - - - - -
SEF
(110 x
220)
DL Env - - - - - - - - - - - -

SM Appendices 1-34 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Specifications

Size Paper exit Half Staple Punch

(W x L) fold
[mm] Pro Shi Shifti Sadd Midd Single/Do Stapl Sadd Saddl EU2 NA2 NA3
of ft ng le le uble stitch e le e SC4 Hol EU4
stitch fold amou stitch stitch Hol es Hol
nt amou es es
nt
LEF
(220 x
110)
8K A A A - - A 30 - - A A A
SEF
(267 x
390)
16K A A A - - A 50 - - A A -
SEF
(195 x
267 )
16K A A A - - A 50 - - A A A
LEF
(267 x
195 )
12" x - - - - - - - - - - - -
18"
SEF
11" x A A A - - A 30 - - A A A
15"
SEF
10" x A A A - - A 30 - - A A A
14"
SEF
8.5” x A A A A A*5 A 30 A 15 A A -
13.4”
SEF

SM Appendices 1-35 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Specifications

Bridge Unit
Size (W x L) [mm] Paper exit Bridge
Bridge upper paper exit Finisher Bridge
A3 SEF (297 x 420) A A
A4 SEF (210 x 297) A A
A4 LEF (297 x 210) A A
A5 SEF (148 x 210) A A
A5 LEF (210 x 148 ) A A
A6 SEF (105 x 148) A A
B4 SEF (257 x 364) A A
B5 SEF (182 x 257) A A
B5 LEF (257 x 182 ) A A
B6 SEF (128 x 182 ) A A
DLT SEF (11" x 17") A A
Legal SEF (81/2" x 14") A A
Foolscap SEF (8 /2" x 13")
1
A A
LT SEF (81/2" x 11") A A
LT LEF (11" x 81/2") A A
Gov. LG SEF (8 /4" x 14")
1
A A
Folio SEF (81/4" x 13") A A
F/GL SEF (8" x 13") A A
Eng Quatro SEF (8" x 10") A A
Executive SEF (71/4" x 101/2") A A
Executive LEF (10 /2" x 7 /4")
1 1
A A
HLT SEF (51/2" x 81/2") A A
Com10 SEF (104.8 x 241.3) A*1, 3 -

Com10 LEF (241.3 x 104.8) A*1, 3, 4 -

Monarch SEF (98.4 x 190.5) A*1, 3 -

Monarch LEF (190.5 x 98.4) A*1, 3, 4 -

C5 SEF (162 x 229) A*1, 3 -

C5 LEF (229 x 162) A*1, 3, 4 -

SM Appendices 1-36 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Specifications

Size (W x L) [mm] Paper exit Bridge

Bridge upper paper exit Finisher Bridge
C6 SEF (114 x 162) A*1, 3 -

C6LEF (162 x 114) A*1, 3 ,4 -

DL Env SEF (110 x 220) A*1, 3 -

DL Env LEF (220 x 110) A*1, 3, 4 -

8K SEF (267 x 390) A A

16K SEF (195 x 267 ) A A
16K LEF (267 x 195 ) A A
12" x 18" SEF A A
11" x 15" SEF A A
10" x 14" SEF A A
8.5” x 13.4” SEF A A

Internal Finisher SR3180

Size (W x L) [mm] Paper exit Staple
Shift Shifting Single stitch Staple amount
A3 SEF (297 x 420) A A A 5
A4 SEF (210 x 297) A A A 5
A4 LEF (297 x 210) A A A 5
A5 SEF (148 x 210) B B - -
A5 LEF (210 x 148 ) B B - -
A6 SEF (105 x 148) B - - -
B4 SEF (257 x 364) A A A 5
B5 SEF (182 x 257) A A A 5
B5 LEF (257 x 182 ) A A A 5
B6 SEF (128 x 182 ) B B - -
DLT SEF (11" x 17") A A A 5
Legal SEF (81/2" x 14") A A A 5
Foolscap SEF (81/2" x 13") A A A 5
LT SEF (8 /2" x 11")
1
A A A 5
LT LEF (11" x 81/2") A A A 5
Gov. LG SEF (81/4" x 14") A A A 5
Folio SEF (81/4" x 13") A A A 5

SM Appendices 1-37 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Specifications

Size (W x L) [mm] Paper exit Staple

Shift Shifting Single stitch Staple amount
F/GL SEF (8" x 13") B B - -
Eng Quatro SEF (8" x 10") B B - -
Executive SEF (71/4" x 101/2") A A A 5
Executive LEF (101/2" x 71/4") A A A 5
HLT SEF (5 /2" x 8 /2")
1 1
B B - -
Com10 SEF (104.8 x 241.3) B - - -
Com10 LEF (241.3 x 104.8) B*1,3,4 - - -
Monarch SEF (98.4 x 190.5) B - - -
Monarch LEF (190.5 x 98.4) B*1,3,4 - - -
C5 SEF (162 x 229) B - - -
C5 LEF (229 x 162) B - - -
C6 SEF (114 x 162) B - - -
C6LEF (162 x 114) B *1,3,4
- - -
DL Env SEF (110 x 220) B - - -
DL Env LEF (220 x 110) B*1,3,4 - - -
8K SEF (267 x 390) A A A 5
16K SEF (195 x 267 ) A A A 5
16K LEF (267 x 195 ) A A A 5
12" x 18" SEF B - - -
11" x 15" SEF B B - -
10" x 14" SEF B B - -
8.5” x 13.4” SEF A A A 5

Internal Multi-Fold Unit FD3000

For the unit without a finisher
Size (W x L) [mm] Paper exit Fold-supporting paper size (for folding one sheet)
Z-fold Half fold Letter fold in/Letter fold out
A3 SEF (297 x 420) A A A A
A4 SEF (210 x 297) A A A A
A4 LEF (297 x 210) A - - -
A5 SEF (148 x 210) A - - -
A5 LEF (210 x 148 ) A - - -
A6 SEF (105 x 148) A - - -
B4 SEF (257 x 364) A A A -
B5 SEF (182 x 257) A - - -
B5 LEF (257 x 182 ) A - - -

SM Appendices 1-38 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Specifications

Size (W x L) [mm] Paper exit Fold-supporting paper size (for folding one sheet)
Z-fold Half fold Letter fold in/Letter fold out
B6 SEF (128 x 182 ) A - - -
DLT SEF (11" x 17") A A A A
Legal SEF (81/2" x 14") A A A A
Foolscap SEF (81/2" x 13") A - - -
LT SEF (8 /2" x 11")
1
A A A A
LT LEF (11" x 81/2") A - - -
Gov. LG SEF (81/4" x 14") A - - -
Folio SEF (8 /4" x 13")
1
A - - -
F/GL SEF (8" x 13") A - - -
Eng Quatro SEF (8" x 10") A - - -
Executive SEF (71/4" x 101/2") A - - -
Executive LEF (101/2" x 71/4") A - - -
HLT SEF (5 /2" x 8 /2")
1 1
A - - -
Com10 SEF (104.8 x 241.3) B*1,3,4 - - -
Com10 LEF (241.3 x 104.8) B*1,3,4 - - -
Monarch SEF (98.4 x 190.5) B *1,3,4
- - -
Monarch LEF (190.5 x 98.4) B*1,3,4 - - -
C5 SEF (162 x 229) B *1,3,4
- - -
C5 LEF (229 x 162) B*1,3,4 - - -
C6 SEF (114 x 162) B*1,3,4 - - -
C6LEF (162 x 114) B *1,3,4
- - -
DL Env SEF (110 x 220) B*1,3,4 - - -
DL Env LEF (220 x 110) B*1,3,4 - - -
8K SEF (267 x 390) A A A -
16K SEF (195 x 267 ) A - - -
16K LEF (267 x 195 ) A - - -
12" x 18" SEF - - - -
11" x 15" SEF A - - -
10" x 14" SEF A - - -
8.5” x 13.4” SEF A A A A
For the unit with a finisher
Size (W x L) [mm] Paper exit Fold-supporting paper size (for folding one
sheet)
Fold Finisher Z-fold Half fold Letter fold in/Letter fold out
tray
A3 SEF (297 x 420) A*6 A A A A

SM Appendices 1-39 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Specifications

Size (W x L) [mm] Paper exit Fold-supporting paper size (for folding one
sheet)
Fold Finisher Z-fold Half fold Letter fold in/Letter fold out
tray
A4 SEF (210 x 297) A*6 A A A A
A4 LEF (297 x 210) A*7 A - - -
A5 SEF (148 x 210) - A - - -
A5 LEF (210 x 148 ) A*7 A - - -
A6 SEF (105 x 148) - A - - -
B4 SEF (257 x 364) A*6 A A A -
B5 SEF (182 x 257) - A - - -
B5 LEF (257 x 182 ) A *7
A - - -
B6 SEF (128 x 182 ) - A - - -
DLT SEF (11" x 17") A*6 A A A A
Legal SEF (81/2" x 14") A*6 A A A A
Foolscap SEF (81/2" x 13") - A - - -
LT SEF (8 /2" x 11")
1
A *6
A A A A
LT LEF (11" x 81/2") A*7 A - - -
Gov. LG SEF (81/4" x 14") - A - - -
Folio SEF (8 /4" x 13")
1
- A - - -
F/GL SEF (8" x 13") - A - - -
Eng Quatro SEF (8" x 10") - A - - -
Executive SEF (71/4" x - A - - -
101/2")
Executive LEF (101/2" x - A - - -
71/4")
HLT SEF (51/2" x 81/2") - A - - -
Com10 SEF (104.8 x 241.3) B*1,3,4 - - - -
Com10 LEF (241.3 x 104.8) B*1,3,4 - - - -
Monarch SEF (98.4 x 190.5) B *1,3,4
- - - -
Monarch LEF (190.5 x 98.4) B*1,3,4 - - - -
C5 SEF (162 x 229) B*1,3,4 - - - -
C5 LEF (229 x 162) B*1,3,4 - - - -
C6 SEF (114 x 162) B*1,3,4 - - - -
C6LEF (162 x 114) B *1,3,4
- - - -
DL Env SEF (110 x 220) B*1,3,4 - - - -
DL Env LEF (220 x 110) B*1,3,4 - - - -
8K SEF (267 x 390) A *6
A A A -

SM Appendices 1-40 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Specifications

Size (W x L) [mm] Paper exit Fold-supporting paper size (for folding one
sheet)
Fold Finisher Z-fold Half fold Letter fold in/Letter fold out
tray
16K SEF (195 x 267 ) - A - - -
16K LEF (267 x 195 ) A*7 A - - -
12" x 18" SEF A*8 A - A -
11" x 15" SEF - A - - -
10" x 14" SEF - A - - -
8.5” x 13.4” SEF A*6 A A A A
Remarks:
A Paper through, paper exit available.
B Will not guarantee, but paper can go through or exit.
- Not available.

*1 Out of the true up precision guarantee.

*2 Multi folding can be done up to 5 sheets.
*3 Envelopes can only go through each at a time.
*4 Except envelopes with triangle flap.
*5 Only one sheet can be half folded with saddle stitch mode.
Therefore, multi sheets/sets must be paginated and exit one at a time.
*6 Paper exit is available when using a folding option. If not using a folding option, paper exit is not
available.
*7 Plain paper can be delivered to the tray only when Z-fold or half fold is partially specified in the
job.
*8 Paper exit is not available even when using a folding option.

SM Appendices 1-41 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Specifications

1.4 OPTION SPECIFICATIONS

1.4.1 ARDF DF3090 (D779-17, -21)
Mode: Batch mode, SADF mode, Mixed Sizes mode, Original
Orientation mode, and Custom Size originals mode
Original Size: EU/AA
• One-sided originals: A3 SEF-B6 JIS SEF/LEF, 11 x 17 SEF-
8 1/2 x 11 SEF/LEF
• Two-sided originals: A3 SEF-A5 SEF/LEF, 11 x 17 SEF-8
1/2 x 11 SEF/LEF
NA
• One-sided originals: 11 x 17 SEF-5 1/2 x 8 1/2 SEF/LEF, A3
SEF-A4 SEF/LEF
• Two-sided originals: 11 x 17 SEF-5 1/2 x 8 1/2 SEF/LEF, A3
SEF-A4 SEF/LEF
Original weight: • One-sided originals: 40-128 g/m2 (11-34 lb. Bond)
• Two-sided originals: 52-128 g/m2 (14-34 lb. Bond)
Number of originals to be set (81 100 sheets
g/m2, 20 lb. Bond):
Maximum power consumption: 42 W or less (Power is supplied from the main unit.)
Dimensions (W x D x H): 565 x 500 x 125 mm (22.3 x 19.7 x 5.0 inches)
Weight: Approx. 9 kg (19.9 lb.)

1.4.2 SPDF DF3100 (D3B0-17, -21)

Configuration Automatic document feed duplex scanner (one pass two-side scanning)
Mode: Batch mode, SADF mode, Mixed Sizes mode, Original Orientation mode,
and Custom Size originals mode
Original size EU/AA
• One-sided originals: A3 SEF-B6 JIS SEF/LEF, 11 x 17 SEF-8 1/2 x 11
SEF/LEF
• Two-sided originals: A3 SEF-A5 SEF/LEF, 11 x 17 SEF-8 1/2 x 11
SEF/LEF
NA
• One-sided originals: 11 x 17 SEF-5 1/2 x 8 1/2 SEF/LEF, A3 SEF-A4
SEF/LEF
• Two-sided originals: 11 x 17 SEF-5 1/2 x 8 1/2 SEF/LEF, A3 SEF-A4
SEF/LEF
Scanning origin point Origin at rear upper left corner

SM Appendices 1-42 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Specifications

Original setting Face-up on original tray

Original feed Feeds from top of stack on original tray
Original separation Feed belt and reverse roller separation by friction
Original scanning Through-sheet method (Front: White platen plate, Back: Color CIS and
method white roller)
Original tray capacity 220 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
Dimensions (w x d x h) 587 x 520 x 175 mm (23.2 x 20.5 x 6.9 in.)
Weight Approx. 14 kg (30.9 lb.)
Maximum power 55 W or less (Power is supplied from the main unit.)
consumption:

1.4.3 Internal Finisher SR3130 (D690)

Paper size: A3 SEF, A4 SEF/LEF, A5 SEF/LEF, A6 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS SEF/LEF, B6
JIS SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 8 1/2 x 14 SEF, 8 1/2 x 13 LEF, 8 1/2 x 11 SEF/LEF, 8
1/4 x 14 SEF, 8 1/4 x 13 SEF, 8 x 13 SEF, 8 x 10 SEF, 7 1/4 x 10 1/2
SEF/LEF, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2 SEF, 4 1/8 x 9 1/2 SEF/LEF, 3 7/8 x 7 1/2 SEF/LEF, C5
Env SEF/LEF, C6 Env SEF/LEF, DL Env SEF/LEF, 8K SEF, 16K SEF/LEF, 12
x 18 SEF, 11 x 15 SEF, 10 x 14 SEF, SRA3 SEF, SRA4 SEF/LEF, custom size
Paper weight: 60–300 g/m2 (16 lb. Bond–110 lb. Cover)
Paper sizes that can A3 SEF, A4 SEF/LEF, A5 SEF/LEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS SEF/LEF, 11 x 17
be shifted: SEF, 8 1/2 x 14 SEF, 8 1/2 x 13 LEF, 8 1/2 x 11 SEF/LEF, 8 1/4 x 14 SEF, 8
1/4 x 13 SEF, 8 x 13 SEF, 8 x 10 SEF, 7 1/4 x 10 1/2 SEF/LEF, C5 Env
SEF/LEF, 8K SEF, 16K SEF/LEF, 11 x 15 SEF, 10 x 14 SEF, SRA4 LEF,
custom size
Paper weight that 64–105 g/m2 (17–28 lb. Bond)
can be shifted:
Stack capacity (80 • 500 sheets: A4, 81/2 x 11 or smaller
g/m2, 20 lb. Bond): • 250 sheets: B4 JIS, 81/2 x 14 or larger
Staple paper size: A3 SEF, A4 SEF/LEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS SEF/LEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 8 1/2 x 14
SEF, 8 1/2 x 13 LEF, 8 1/2 x 11 SEF/LEF, 8 1/4 x 14 SEF, 8 1/4 x 13 SEF, 7
1/4 x 10 1/2 SEF/LEF, 8K SEF, 16K SEF/LEF
Staple paper weight: 64–105 g/m2 (17–28 lb. Bond)
Staple capacity (80 • Without Mixed Size:
g/m2, 20 lb. Bond): 30 sheets:
A3 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 8 1/2 x 14 SEF, 8 1/2 x 13 LEF, 8 1/4 x
14 SEF, 8 1/4 x 13 SEF, 8K SEF
50 sheets:
A4 SEF/LEF, B5 JIS SEF/LEF, 8 1/2 x 11 SEF/LEF, 7 1/4 x 10 1/2

SM Appendices 1-43 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Specifications

SEF/LEF, 16K SEF/LEF

• With Mixed Size:
30 sheets:
A3 SEF/ A4 LEF, B4 JIS SEF/ B5 JIS SEF, 11 x 17 SEF/8 1/2 x 11 SEF
Stack capacity after • 2–9 sheets: 55–46 sets (A4 LEF, B5 JIS LEF, 8 1/2 x 11 LEF)
stapling (80 g/m , 20
2
• 10–50 sheets: 45–10 sets (A4 LEF, B5 JIS LEF, 8 1/2 x 11LEF)
lb. Bond): • 2–9 sheets: 55–27 sets (A4 SEF, B5 JIS SEF, 8 1/2 x 11 SEF)
• 10– 50 sheets: 25–8 sets (A4 SEF, B5 JIS SEF, 8 1/2 x 11 SEF)
• 2–9 sheets: 55–27 sets (A3 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 8 1/2 x 14
SEF)
• 10–30 sheets: 25–8 sets (A3 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 8 1/2 x 14
SEF)
Staple position: Top 1, Bottom 1, Left 2, Top 2
Power consumption: • 50 W or less (without punch unit) (Power is supplied from the main unit.)
• 60 W or less (with punch unit) (Power is supplied from the main unit.)
Dimensions (W x D 546 x 523 x 170 mm (21.5 x 20.6 x 6.7 inches)
x H):
Weight: Approx. 13 kg (28.7 lb.) (without punch unit)
Approx. 17 kg (37.5 lb.) (with punch unit)

Finisher part specifications

Item Specification
Type Case system
Shift tray Yes
No. of sheets which can be A4, 81/2×11 or smaller: 500 / height: lower than 57mm
accommodated B4, 81/2×14 or larger: 250 / height: lower than 28.5mm
Paper thicknesses which can 52g/m2-300g/m2
be handled
Up/down shift function No
Left/right shift function Yes
Stapling function Yes
Punching function Option
Remainder detection No
Full-load detection Yes
Paper detection No
Power consumption Less than 47W (24V DC /2A)
Power source 24V DC (supplied from main printer), 5V SC (generated by FIN
board), SELV (super-low voltage secondary power supply)

SM Appendices 1-44 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Specifications

Item Specification
Dimensions 546×523×170 mm
(width×depth×height)
Mass 12.8kg or less

Stapler unit specifications

Item Specification
No. of sheets which can A3 SEF, B4 SEF, 11"×17" SEF, 81/2”×14” SEF, 81/2”×13” SEF, 81/4”×14”
be stitched SEF, 81/4”×13” SEF: 30
A4 LEF / SEF, B5 LEF / SEF, 81/2"×11" LEF / SEF, 71/4"×101/2" LEF /
SEF: 50
When loading mixed widths: 30
Sizes which can be A3 SEF, B4 SEF, 11"×17" SEF, 81/2”×14” SEF, 81/2”×13” SEF, 81/4”×14”
stitched SEF, 81/4”×13” SEF
A4 LEF / SEF, B5 LEF / SEF, 81/2"×11" LEF / SEF, 71/4"×101/2" LEF /
SEF
Thicknesses which can be 52g/m2 -105g/m2
stitched The quality for sheets of paper which are thinner than 64g/m2 is not
guaranteed.
No. of sheets to be stitched decreases when sheets of paper are thicker
than 64g/m2, depending on the weight.
Stitching position Top, bottom, 2 positions on the left, 2 positions on the top
Staple supply Refill charge to dedicated staple cartridge
Stitching capacity 5000 / cartridge

1.4.4 Finisher SR3210 (D3B8)

Paper size for the A3 SEF B4 JIS SEF, A4 SEF/LEF, B5 JIS SEF/LEF, A5 SEF/LEF, B6 JIS
finisher upper tray: SEF, A6 SEF, 12 x 18 SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 11 x 15 SEF, 10 x 14 SEF, 8 1/2 x
14 SEF, 8 1/2 x 13 LEF, 8 1/2 x 11 SEF/LEF, 8 1/4 x 14 SEF, 8 1/4 x 13
SEF, 8 x 13 SEF, 8 x 10 SEF, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2 SEF, 7 1/4 x 10 1/2 SEF/LEF,
8K SEF, 16K SEF/LEF, SRA3 SEF, SRA4 SEF/LEF, 8 1/2 x 13 2/5 LEF,
custom size
Paper weight for the 52–169 g/m2 (14 lb. Bond–90 lb. Index)
finisher upper tray:
Stack capacity for the 250 sheets: A4, 81/2 x 11 or smaller
finisher upper tray (80 50 sheets: B4 JIS, 81/2 x 14 or larger
g/m , 20 lb. Bond):
2

Paper size for the A3 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, A4 SEF/LEF, B5 JIS SEF, /LEF, A5 SEF/LEF, B6 JIS

SM Appendices 1-45 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Specifications

finisher shift tray: SEF, A6 SEF, 12 x 18 SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 11 x 15 SEF, 10 x 14 SEF, 8 1/2 x
14 SEF, 8 1/2 x 13 LEF, 8 1/2 x 11 SEF/LEF, 8 1/4 x 14 SEF, 8 1/4 x 13
SEF, 8 x 13 SEF, 8 x 10 SEF, 7 1/4 x 10 1/2 SEF/LEF, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2 SEF,
8K SEF, 16K SEF/LEF, SRA3 SEF, SRA4 SEF/LEF, 8 1/2 x 13 2/5 LEF,
custom size
Paper weight for the 52–300 g/m2 (14 lb. Bond–110 lb. Cover)
finisher shift tray:
Paper sizes that can be A3 SEF, A4 SEF/LEF, A5 SEF/LEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS SEF/LEF, B6 JIS
shifted when delivered SEF, 12 x 18 SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 11 x 15 SEF, 10 x 14 SEF, 8 1/2 x 14 SEF,
to the finisher shift tray: 8 1/2 x 13 LEF, 8 1/2 x 11 SLF/LEF, 8 1/4 x 14 SEF, 8 1/4 x 13 SEF,
8 x 13 SEF, 8 x 10 SEF, 7 1/4 x 10 1/2 SEF/LEF, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2 SEF, 8K
SEF, 16K SEF/LEF, SRA4 LEF, 8 1/2 x 13 2/5 LEF, custom size
Paper weight that can 52–300 g/m2 (14 lb. Bond–110 lb. Cover)
be shifted when
delivered to the finisher
shift tray:
Stack capacity for the 1,000 sheets: A4, 81/2 x 11 or smaller
finisher shift tray (80 500 sheets: B4 JIS, 81/2 x 14 or larger
g/m , 20 lb. Bond):
2

Staple paper size: A3 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, A4 SEF/LEF, B5 JIS SEF/LEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 11 x 15
SEF, 10 x 14 SEF, 8 1/2 x 14 SEF, 8 1/2 x 11 SEF/LEF, 7 1/4 x 10 1/2
SEF/LEF, 8 x 13 SEF, 8 1/2 x 13 LEF, 8 1/4 x 14 SEF, 8 1/4 x 13 SEF, 8 x
10 SEF, 12 x 18 SEF, 8K SEF, 16K SEF/LEF, 8 1/2 x 13 2/5 LEF, custom
size
Staple paper weight: • Stapling with staples: 52–105 g/m2 (14–28 lb. Bond)
• Staple-free stapling: 64–80 g/m2 (17–20 lb. Bond)
You can use two sheets of paper weighing up to 216 g/m2 (80 lb. Cover)
per set as cover sheets.
Staple capacity (80 • Without Mixed Size:
g/m , 20 lb. Bond):
2
30 sheets:
A3 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 8 1/2 x 14 SEF, 8 x 13 SEF, 8 1/2 x
13 LEF, 8 1/4 x 14 SEF, 8 1/4 x 13 SEF, 11 x 15 SEF, 10 x 14 SEF, 8K
SEF, 12 x 18 SEF, 8 1/2 x 13 2/5 LEF
50 sheets:
A4 SEF/LEF, B5 JIS SEF/LEF, 8 1/2 x 11 SEF/LEF, 8 x 10 SEF, 7 1/4
x 10 1/2 SEF/LEF, 16K SEF/LEF
• With Mixed Size:
22 sheets:

SM Appendices 1-46 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Specifications

A3 SEF/A4 LEF, B4 JIS SEF/B5 JIS SEF, 11 x 17 SEF/8 1/2 x 11SEF

Stack capacity after • Stapling with staples:
stapling (80 g/m2, 20 lb. • 2–9 sheets: 100 sets (A4 LEF, B5 JIS LEF, 8 1/2 x 11 LEF)
Bond): • 10–50 sheets: 100–20 sets (A4 LEF, B5 JIS LEF, 8 1/2 x 11LEF)
• 10–50 sheets: 50–10 sets (A4 SEF, B5 JIS SEF, 8 1/2 x 11SEF)
• 2–9 sheets: 50 sets (A3 SEF, A4 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS SEF,
11 x 17 SEF, 8 1/2 x 14 SEF, 8 1/2 x 11 SEF)
• 10–30 sheets: 50–10 sets (A3 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 8
1/2 x 14 SEF)
• Staple-free stapling:
• 2–5 sheets: 100 sets (A4 SEF, B5 JIS SEF, 8 1/2 x 11 SEF)
• 2–5 sheets: 50 sets (A3 SEF, A4 LEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS LEF, 11
x 17 SEF, 8 1/2 x 14 SEF, 8 1/2 x 11 LEF)
Staple position: 3 positions (Top, Bottom, 2 Staples)
Power consumption: 35.4 W (Power is supplied from the main unit.)
Dimensions (W x D x • Tray is folded:
H): 575 x 620 x 960 mm (22.6 x 24.5 x 37.8 inches)
• Tray is extended:
658 x 620 x 960 mm (25.9 x 24.5 x 37.8 inches)
Weight: Approx. 34 kg (75.0 lb.)

1.4.5 Booklet Finisher SR3220 (D3B9)

Paper size for the A3 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, A4 SEF/LEF B5 JIS SEF/LEF, A5 SEF/LEF, B6 JIS
finisher upper tray SEF, A6 SEF, 12 x 18 SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 11 x 15 SEF, 10 x 14 SEF, 8 1/2 x
14 SEF, 8 1/2 x 13 LEF, 8 1/2 x 11 SEF/LEF, 8 1/4 x 14 SEF, 8 1/4 x 13
SEF, 8 x 13 SEF, 8 x 10 SEF, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2 SEF, 7 1/4 x 10 1/2 SEF/LEF,
8K SEF, 16K SEF/LEF, SRA3 SEF, SRA4 SEF/LEF, 8 1/2 x 13 2/5 LEF,
custom size
Paper weight for the 52–169 g/m2 (14 lb. Bond–90 lb. Index)
finisher upper tray:
Stack capacity for the 250 sheets: A4, 81/2 x 11 or smaller
finisher upper tray (80 50 sheets: B4 JIS, 81/2 x 14 or larger
g/m2, 20 lb. Bond):
Paper size for the A3 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, A4 SEF/LEF, B5 JIS/LEF, A5 SEF/LEF, B6 JIS SEF,
finisher shift tray: A6 SEF, 12 x 18 SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 11 x 15 SEF, 10 x 14 SEF, 8 1/2 x 14
SEF, 8 1/2 x 13 LEF, 8 1/2 x 11 SEF/LEF, 8 1/4 x 14 SEF, 8 1/4 x 13 SEF, 8
x 13 SEF, 8 x 10 SEF, 7 1/4 x 10 1/2 SEF/LEF, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2 SEF, 8K SEF,
16K SEF/LEF, SRA3 SEF, SRA4 SEF/LEF, 8 1/2 x 13 2/5 LEF, custom size

SM Appendices 1-47 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Specifications

Paper weight for the 52–300 g/m2 (14 lb. Bond–110 lb. Cover)
finisher shift tray:
Paper sizes that can be A3 SEF, A4 SEF/LEF, A5 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS SEF, B6 JIS SEF, 12 x
shifted when delivered 18 SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 11 x 15 SEF, 10 x 14 SEF, 8 1/2 x 14 SEF, 8 1/2 x 13
to the finisher shift tray: LEF, 8 1/2 x 11 SEF/LEF, 8 1/4 x 14 SEF, 8 1/4 x 13 SEF, 8 x 13 SEF, 8 x
10 SEF, 7 1/4 x 10 1/2 SEF/LEF, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2 SEF, 8K SEF, 16K SEF/LEF
SRA4 LEF, 8 1/2 x 13 2/5 LEF
Paper weight that can 52–300 g/m2 (14 lb. Bond–110 lb. Cover)
be shifted when
delivered to the finisher
shift tray:
Stack capacity for the 1,000 sheets: A4, 81/2 x 14 or smaller
finisher shift tray (80 500 sheets: B4 JIS, 81/2 x 14 or larger
g/m2, 20 lb. Bond):
Staple paper size: A3 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, A4 SEF/LEF, B5 JIS SEF/LEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 11 x 15
SEF, 10 x 14 SEF, 8 1/2 x 14 SEF, 8 1/2 x 11 SEF/LEF, 7 1/4 x 10 1/2
SEF/LEF, 8 x 13 SEF, 8B 1/2 x 13 LEF, 8 1/4 x 14 SEF, 8 1/4 x 13 SEF, 8 x
10 SEF, 12 x 18 SEF, 8K SEF, 16K SEF/LEF, 8 1/2 x 13 2/5 LEF, custom
size
Staple paper weight: 52–105 g/m2 (14-28 lb. Bond)
You can use two sheets of paper weighing up to 216 g/m2 (80 lb. Cover)
per set as cover sheets.
Staple capacity (80 • Without Mixed Size:
g/m2, 20 lb. Bond): 30 sheets:
A3 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 8 1/2 x 14 SEF, 8 x 13 SEF, 8 1/2 x
13 LEF, 8 1/4 x 14 SEF, 8 1/4 x 13 SEF, 11 x 15 SEF, 10 x 14 SEF, 8K
SEF, 12 x 18 SEF, 8 1/2 x 13 2/5 LEF
50 sheets:
A4 SEF/LEF, B5 JIS SEF/LEF, 8 1/2 x 11 SEF/LEF, 8 x 10 SEF, 7 1/4
x 10 1/2 SEF/LEF, 16K SEF/LEF
• With Mixed Size:
22 sheets:
A3 SEF/A4 LEF, B4 JIS SEF/B5 JIS SEF, 11 x 17 SEF/8 1/2 x 11 SEF
Stack capacity after • Without Mixed Size:
stapling (80 g/m2, 20 lb. • 2–9 sheets: 100 sets (A4 LEF, B5 JIS LEF, 8 1/2 x 11 LEF)
Bond): • 10–50 sheets: 100–20 sets (A4 LEF, B5 JIS LEF, 8 1/2 x 11 LEF)
• 10–50 sheets: 50–10 sets (A4 SEF, B5 JIS SEF, 8 1/2 x 11 SEF)
• 2–9 sheets: 50 sets (A3 SEF, A4 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS SEF,

SM Appendices 1-48 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Specifications

11 x 17 SEF, 8 1/2 x 14 SEF, 8 1/2 x 11 SEF)

• 10–30 sheets: 50–10 sets (A3 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 8
1/2 x 14 SEF)
• With Mixed Size:
• 2–22 sheets: 22 sets (A3 SEF/ A4 LEF, B4 JIS SEF/B5 JIS SEF,
11 x 17 SEF/8 1/2 x 11 SEF)
Staple position: 3 positions (Top, Bottom, 2 Staples)
Saddle stitch paper A3 SEF, A4 LEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS LEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 8 1/2 x 14 SEF, 8
size: 1/2 x 11 LEF, 12 x 18 SEF
Saddle stitch paper 52–105 g/m2 (14–28 lb. Bond)
weight:
Saddle stitch capacity 1 set (15 sheets)
(80 g/m , 20 lb. Bond):
2

Stack capacity after 2–5 sheets: approx. 20 sets

saddle stitching (80 6–10 sheets: approx. 10 sets
g/m2, 20 lb. Bond): 11–15 sheets: approx. 7 sets
Saddle stitch position: Center 2 positions
Types of folds: Half Fold
Half fold paper size: A3 SEF, A4 LEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS LEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 8 1/2 x 14 SEF, 8
1/2 x 11 LEF, 12 x 18 SEF, 8 1/2 x 13 2/5 LEF
Half fold paper weight: 52–105 g/m2 (14–28 lb.Bond)
Power consumption: 35.4 W (Power is supplied from the main unit.)
Dimensions (W x D x • Tray is folded:
H): 575 x 620 x 960 mm (22.6 x 24.5 x 37.8 inches)
• Tray is extended:
658 x 620 x 960 mm (25.9 x 24.5 x 37.8 inches)
Weight: Approx. 42 kg (92.6 lb.)

1.4.6 Finisher SR3230 (D3BA)

Paper size for the A3 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, A4 SEF/LEF, B5 JIS SEF/LEF, A5 SEF/LEF, B6 JIS
finisher upper tray: SEF, A6 SEF, 12 x 18 SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 11 x 15 SEF, 10 x 14 SEF, 8 1/2 x
14 SEF, 8 1/2 x 13 LEF, 8 1/2 x 11 SEF/LEF, 8 1/4 x 14 SEF, 8 1/4 x 13
SEF, 8 x 13 SEF, 8 x 10 SEF, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2 SEF, 7 1/4 x 10 1/2 SEF/LEF,
8K SEF, 16K SEF/LEF, SRA3 SEF, SRA4 SEF/LEF, 8 1/2 x 13 2/5 LEF,
custom size
Paper weight for the 52–220 g/m2 (14 lb. Bond–80 lb. Cover)
finisher upper tray:
Stack capacity for the 250 sheets: A4, 81/2 x 11 or smaller

SM Appendices 1-49 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Specifications

finisher upper tray (80 50 sheets: B4 JIS, 81/2 x 14 or larger

g/m , 20 lb. Bond):
2

Paper size for the A3 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, A4 SEF/LEF, B5 JIS SEF/LEF, A5 SEF/LEF, B6 JIS
finisher shift tray: SEF, A6 SEF, 12 x 18 SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 11 x 15 SEF, 10 x 14 SEF, 8 1/2 x
14 SEF, 8 1/2 x 13 LEF, 8 1/2 x 11 SEF/LEF, 8 1/4 x 14 SEF, 8 1/4 x 13
SEF, 8 x 13 SEF, 8 x 10 SEF, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2 SEF, 7 1/4 x 10 1/2 SEF/LEF,
8K SEF, 16K SEF/LEF, SRA3 SEF, SRA4 SEF/LEF, 8 1/2 x 13 2/5 LEF,
custom size
Paper weight for the 52–300 g/m2 (14 lb. Bond–110 lb. Cover)
finisher shift tray:
Paper sizes that can be A3 SEF, A4 SEF/LEF, A5 SEF/LEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS SEF/LEF, B6 JIS
shifted when delivered SEF, 12 x 18 SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 11 x 15 SEF, 10 x 14 SEF, 8 1/2 x 14 SEF,
to the finisher shift tray: 8 1/2 x 13 LEF, 8 1/2 x 11 SEF/LEF, 8 1/4 x 14 SEF, 8 1/4 x 13 SEF, 8 x 13
SEF, 8 x 10 SEF, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2 SEF, 7 1/4 x 10 1/2 SEF/LEF, 8K SEF, 16K
SEF/LEF, SRA4 LEF, 8 1/2 x 13 2/5 LEF, custom size
Paper weight that can 52–300 g/m2 (14 lb. Bond–110 lb. Cover)
be shifted when
delivered to the finisher
shift tray:
Stack capacity for the • 3,000 sheets: A4 SEF, 8 1/2 x 11 SEF
finisher shift tray (80 • 1,500 sheets: A3 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, A4 LEF, B5 JIS SEF/LEF, 12 x 18
g/m2, 20 lb. Bond): SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 8 1/2 x 14 SEF, 8 1/2 x 11 LEF, SRA3LEF
• 500 sheets: A5 SEF
• 100 sheets: A5 LEF, B6 JIS SEF, A6 SEF, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2 SEF
Staple paper size: A3 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, A4 SEF/LEF, B5 JIS SEF/LEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 11 x 15
SEF, 10 x 14LEF, 8 1/2 x 14 SEF, 8 1/2 x 11 SEF/LEF, 7 1/4 x 10 1/2
SEF/LEF, 8 x 13 SEF, 8 1/2 x 13 LEF, 8 1/4 x 14 SEF, 8 1/4 x 13 SEF, 8 x
10 SEF, 8K SEF, 16K SEF/LEF, 8 1/2 x 13 2/5 LEF, custom size
Staple paper weight: 52–105 g/m2 (14–28 lb. Bond)
You can use two sheets of paper weighing up to 256 g/m2 (140 lb. Index)
per set as cover sheets.
Staple capacity (80 • Without Mixed Size:
g/m2, 20 lb. Bond): 50 sheets:
A3 SEF, A4 SEF/LEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS SEF/LEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 8
1/2 x 14 SEF, 8 x 13 SEF, 8 1/2 x 13 LEF, 8 1/2 x 11 SEF/LEF, 8 x 10
SEF, 7 1/4 x 10 1/2 SEF/LEF, 8 1/4 x 14 SEF, 8 1/4 x 13 SEF, 11 x 15
SEF, 10 x 14 SEF, 8K SEF, 16K SEF/LEF, 8 1/2 x 13 2/5 LEF
• With Mixed Size:

SM Appendices 1-50 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Specifications

50 sheets:
A3 SEF/A4 LEF, B4 JIS SEF/B5 JIS SEF, 11 x 17 SEF/8 1/2 x 11 SEF
Stack capacity after Without Mixed Size:
stapling (80 g/m , 20 lb.
2
• 2–19 sheets: 150 sets (A4 LEF, 8 1/2 x 11 LEF)
Bond): • 20–50 sheets: 150–46 sets (A4 LEF, 8 1/2 x 11 LEF)
• 2–14 sheets: 100 sets (A4 SEF, B5 JIS SEF/SEF, 8 1/2 x 11 SEF)
• 15–50 sheets: 100–23 sets (A4 SEF, B5 JIS SEF/SEF, 8 1/2 x
11 ;SEF)
• 2–14 sheets: 100 sets (other size paper)
• 15–50 sheets: 100–23 sets (other size paper)
With Mixed Size:
• 2–50 sheets: 23 sets (A3 SEF/A4 LEF, B4 JIS SEF/B5 JIS SEF, 11 x
17 SEF/8 1/2 x 11 SEF)
Staple position: 4 positions (Top, Top Slant, Bottom, 2 Staples)
Power consumption: 64 W (Power is supplied from the main unit.)
Dimensions (W x D x 657 x 613 x 960 mm (25.9 x 24.2 x 37.8 inches)
H):
Weight: • Approx. 34 kg (75.0 lb.) (without punch unit)
• Approx. 39 kg (86.0 lb.) (with punch unit)

1.4.7 Booklet Finisher SR3240 (D3BB)

Paper size for the A3 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, A4 SEF/LEF, B5 JIS SEF/LEF, A5 SEF/LEF, B6 JIS
finisher upper tray: SEF, A6 SEF, 12 x 18 SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 11 x 15 SEF, 10 x 14 SEF, 8 1/2 x
14 SEF, 8 1/2 x 13 LEF, 8 1/2 x 11 SEF/LEF, 8 1/4 x 14 SEF, 8 1/4 x 13
SEF, 8 x 13 SEF, 8 x 10 SEF, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2 SEF, 7 1/4 x 10 1/2 SEF/LEF,
8K SEF, 16K SEF/LEF, SRA3 SEF, SRA4 SEF/LEF, 8 1/2 x 13 2/5 LEF,
custom size
Paper weight for the 52–220 g/m2 (14 lb. Bond–80 lb. Cover)
finisher upper tray:
Stack capacity for the • 250 sheets: A4, 81/2 x 11 or smaller
finisher upper tray (80 • 50 sheets: B4 JIS, 81/2 x 14 or larger
g/m , 20 lb. Bond):
2

Paper size for the A3 SEF 1, B4 JIS SEF, A4 SEF/LEF, B5 JIS SEF/LEF, A5, B6 JIS SEF, A6,
finisher shift tray: 12 x 18 SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 11 x 15 SEF, 10 x 14 SEF, 81/2 x 14 SEF, 81/2
x 13 SEF, 81/2 x 11 SEF/LEF, 81/4 x 14 SEF, 81/4 x 13 SEF, 8 x 13 SEF, 8
x 10 SEF, 51/2 x 81/2 SEF, 71/4 x 101/2 SEF/LEF, 8K SEF, 16K SEF/LEF,
SRA3 SEF, SRA4 SEF/LEF, 8 1/2 x 13 2/5 LEF, custom size
Paper weight for the 52–300 g/m2 (14 lb. Bond–110 lb. Cover)

SM Appendices 1-51 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Specifications

finisher shift tray:

Paper sizes that can be A3 SEF, A4 SEF/LEF, A5 SEF/LEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS SEF/LEF, B6 JIS
shifted when delivered SEF, 12 x 18 SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 11 x 15 SEF, 10 x 14 SEF, 8 1/2 x 14 SEF,
to the finisher shift tray: 8 1/2 x 13 LEF, 8 1/2 x 11 SEF/LEF, 8 1/4 x 14 SEF, 8 1/4 x 13 SEF, 8 x 13
SEF, 8 x 10 SEF, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2 SEF, 7 1/4 x 10 1/2 SEF/LEF, 8K SEF, 16K
SEF/LEF SRA4 LEF, 8 1/2 x 13 2/5 LEF, custom size
Paper weight that can 52–300 g/m2 (14 lb. Bond–110 lb. Cover)
be shifted when
delivered to the finisher
shift tray:
Stack capacity for the • 2,000 sheets: A4 LEF, 8 1/2 x 11 LEF
finisher shift tray (80 • 1,000 sheets: A3 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, A4 SEF, B5 JIS SEF/LEF, 11 x 17
g/m , 20 lb. Bond):
2
SEF, 8 1/2 x 14 SEF, 8 1/2 x 11 SEF, 12 x 18 SEF, SRA3 SEF
• 500 sheets: A5 LEF
• 100 sheets: A5 SEF, B6 JIS SEF, A6 SEF, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2 SEF
Staple paper size: A3 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, A4 SEF/LEF B5 JIS SEF/LEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 11 x 15
SEF, 10 x 14 SEF, 8 1/2 x 14 SEF, 8 1/2 x 11 SEF/LEF, 7 1/4 x 10 1/2
SEF/LEF, 8 x 13 SEF, 8 1/2 x 13 LEF, 8 1/4 x 14 SEF, 8 1/4 x 13 SEF, 8 x
10 SEF, 8K SEF, 16K SEF/LEF, 8 1/2 x 13 2/5 LEF, custom size
Staple paper weight: 52–105 g/m2 (14–28 lb. Bond)
You can use two sheets of paper weighing up to 256 g/m2 (140 lb. Index)
per set as cover sheets.
Staple capacity (80 • Without Mixed Size:
g/m2, 20 lb. Bond): 50 sheets:
A3 SEF, A4 SEF/LEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS SEF/LEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 8
1/2 x 14 SEF, 8 x 13 SEF, 8 1/2 x 13 LEF, 8 1/2 x 11 SEF/LEF, 8 x 10
SEF, 7 1/4 x 10 1/2 SEF/LEF, 8 1/4 x 14 SEF, 8 1/4 x 13 SEF, 11 x
15v, 10 x 14 SEF, 8K SEF, 16K SEF/LEF, 8 1/2 x 13 2/5 LEF
• With Mixed Size:
50 sheets:
A3 SEF /A4 LEF, B4 JIS SEF /B5 JIS SEF, 11 x 17 SEF /81/2 x 11
SEF
Stack capacity after Without Mixed Size:
stapling (80 g/m2, 20 lb. • 2–12 sheets: 150 sets (A4 LEF, 81/2 x 11 LEF)
Bond): • 13–50 sheets: 150–30 sets (A4 LEF, 8 1/2 x 11 LEF)
• 2–9 sheets: 100 sets (A4 SEF, B5 JIS SEF/LEF, 8 1/2 x 11 SEF)
• 10–50 sheets: 100–15 sets (A4 SEF, B5 JIS SEF/LEF, 8 1/2 x 11
SEF)

SM Appendices 1-52 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Specifications

• 2–9 sheets: 100 sets (other size paper)

• 10–50 sheets: 100–15 sets (other size paper)
With Mixed Size:
• 2–50 sheets: 23 sets (A3 SEF /A4 LEF, B4 JIS SEF /B5 JIS SEF, 11 x
17 SEF /8 1/2 x 11 SEF)
Staple position: 4 positions (Top, Top Slant, Bottom, 2 Staples)
Saddle stitch paper A3 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, A4 LEF, B5 JIS LEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 8 1/2 x 14 SEF, 8
size: 1/2 x 11 LEF, 8 1/4 x 14 SEF, 8 1/4 x 13 SEF, 12 x 18 SEF, 11 x 15 SEF,
10 x 14 SEF, 8 1/2 x 13 2/5 LEF, custom size
Saddle stitch paper 64–105 g/m2 (17–28 lb. Bond)
weight: You can use a sheet of paper weighing up to 216 g/m2 (80 lb. Cover) per
set as a cover sheet.
Saddle stitch capacity 1 set (20 sheets)
(80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond):
Stack capacity after • 2–5 sheets: approx. 30 sets
saddle stitching (80 • 6–10 sheets: approx. 15 sets
g/m , 20 lb. Bond):
2
• 11–15 sheets: approx. 10 sets
• 16–20 sheets: approx. 6 sets
Saddle stitch position: Center 2 positions
Types of folds: Half Fold
Half fold paper size: A3 SEF, A4 LEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS LEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 8 1/2 x 14 SEF, 8
1/2 x 11, 8 1/4 x 14 SEF, 8 1/4 x 13 SEF, 12 x 18 SEF, 11 x 15 SEF, 10 x
14 SEF, 8 1/2 x 13 2/5 LEF
Half fold paper weight: • 1 sheet:
64–216 g/m2 (17 lb. Bond–80 lb. Cover)
• 2-5 sheets:
64–90 g/m2 (17–24 lb. Bond)
Power consumption: 64 W (Power is supplied from the main unit.)
Dimensions (W x D x 657 x 613 x 960 mm (25.9 x 24.2 x 37.8 inches)
H):
Weight: • Approx. 53 kg (116.9 lb.) (without punch unit)
• Approx. 57 kg (125.7 lb.) (with punch unit)

SM Appendices 1-53 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Specifications

1.4.8 Side Tray Type M3 (D725)

Paper size: A3 SEF, A4 SEF/LEF, A5 SEF/LEF, A6 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS SEF/LEF, B6
JIS SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 8 1/2 x 14 SEF, 8 1/2 x 13 LEF, 8 1/2 x 11 SEF/LEF, 8 1/4
x 14 SEF, 8 1/4 x 13 SEF, 8 x 13 SEF, 8 x 10 SEF, 7 1/4 x 10 1/2 SEF/LEF, 5 1/2
x 8 1/2 SEF, 4 1/8 x 9 1/2 SEF/LEF, 3 7/8 x 7 1/2 SEF/LEF, C5 Env SEF/LEF,
C6 Env SEF/LEF, DL Env SEF/LEF, 8K SEF, 16K SEF/LEF, 12 x 18 SEF, 11 x
15 SEF, 10 x 14 SEF, SRA3 SEF, SRA4 SEF/LEF, custom size
Paper weight: 52–300 g/m2 (14 lb. Bond–110 lb. Cover)
Paper capacity • Internal tray 1:
(80 g/m2, 20 lb. 250 sheets: A4, 81/2 x 11 or smaller
Bond): 125 sheets: B4 JIS, 81/2 x 14 or larger
• External tray:
125 sheets
Power 12 W (Power is supplied from the main unit.)
consumption:
Dimensions (W x 800 x 549 x 156 mm (31.5 x 21.7 x 6.2 inches)
D x H):
Weight: Approx. 4 kg (8.9 lb.)

Item Specification
Linear velocity 73-450 mm/sec
Sizes which can be handled Upper paper output: Paper width 90-320 mm, Paper feed direction
length 148-600 mm
Left paper output: Paper width 90-320 mm, Paper feed direction length
148-457.2 mm
Paper thicknesses Upper paper output and left paper output are 52-300g/m2.
Upper paper output 250 sheets (A4, 81/2"×11" or smaller), 80g/m2
capacity 125 sheets (B4, 81/2"×14" or larger), 80g/m2
Left paper output capacity 125 sheets, 80g/m2
Power source Supplied from main printer (24V DC±10%, 5V DC ±5%).
Maximum power Less than 12W
consumption
Dimensions Smaller than 800×549×156 mm
(width×depth×height)
Weight Less than 3.8 kg (not including paper, packaging materials, and other
items in package)

SM Appendices 1-54 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Specifications

1.4.9 Internal Finisher SR3180 (D766)

Finisher part specifications

Item Specification
Type Case system
Shift tray Yes
No. of sheets which can be A4, 81/2×11 or smaller: 250
accommodated B4, 81/2×14 or larger: 125
Paper thicknesses which can 52g/m2-300g/m2
be handled
Up/down shift function No
Left/right shift function Yes
Stapling function Yes
Punching function No
Remainder detection No
Full-load detection Yes
Paper detection No
Power consumption Less than 30W
Power source 24V DC (supplied from main frame), 5V SC (generated by FIN
board), SELV (super-low voltage secondary power supply)
Dimensions 435×515×150 mm
(width×depth×height)
Mass Less than 9.8 kg

Stapler unit specifications

Item Specification
No. of sheets which can be stitched 2 to 5 sheets
Sizes which can be stitched A3 SEF - B5 SEF / DLT SEF - LT SEF
Thicknesses which can be stitched 54g/m2-80g/m2
Stitching position 1 position (Top Slant)
Staple supply No
Stitching capacity No

SM Appendices 1-55 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Specifications

1.4.10 Internal Shift Tray SH3070 (D691)

Paper size: A3 SEF, A4 SEF/LEF, A5 SEF/LEF, A6 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS SEF/LEF, B6
JIS SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 8 1/2 x 14 SEF, 8 1/2 x 13 LEF, 8 1/2 x 11 SEF/LEF, 8 1/4
x 14 SEF, 8 1/4 x 13 SEF, 8 x 13 SEF, 8 x 10 SEF, 7 1/4 x 10 1/2 SEF/LEF, 5 1/2
x 8 1/2 SEF, 4 1/8 x 9 1/2 SEF/LEF, 3 7/8 x 7 1/2 SEF/LEF, C5 Env SEF/LEF, C6
Env SEF/LEF, DL Env SEF/LEF, 8K SEF, 16K SEF/LEF, 12 x 18 SEF, 11 x 15
SEF, 10 x 14 SEF, SRA3 SEF, SRA4 SEF/LEF, custom size
Paper weight: 60–300 g/m2 (16 lb. Bond–110 lb. Cover)
Paper sizes that A3 SEF, A4 SEF/LEF, A5 SEF/LEF, A6 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS SEF/LEF, B6
can be shifted: JIS SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 8 1/2 x 14 SEF, 8 1/2 x 13 LEF, 8 1/2 x 11 SEF/LEF, 8 1/4
x 14 SEF, 8 1/4 x 13 SEF, 8 x 13 SEF, 8 x 10 SEF, 7 1/4 x 10 1/2 SEF/LEF, 5 1/2
x 8 1/2 SEF, 4 1/8 x 9 1/2 SEF/LEF, 3 7/8 x 7 1/2 SEF/LEF, C5 Env SEF/LEF, C6
Env SEF/LEF, DL Env SEF/LEF, 8K SEF, 16K SEF/LEF, 12 x 18 SEF, 11 x 15
SEF, 10 x 14 SEF, SRA3 SEF, SRA4 SEF/LEF, custom size
Paper weight that 60–300 g/m2 (16 lb. Bond–110 lb. Cover)
can be shifted:
Stack capacity (80 • 250 sheets: A4, 81/2 x 11 or smaller
g/m2, 20 lb. • 125 sheets: B4 JIS, 81/2 x 14 or larger
Bond):
Power 4.3 W (Power is supplied from the main unit.)
consumption:
Dimensions (W x 420 x 489 x 107 mm (16.6 x 19.3 x 4.3 inches)
D x H):
Weight: Approx. 2 kg (4.5 lb.)

Item Specification
Type Case installation, paper ejection tray displacement system
Linear velocity 73-450 mm/sec
Sizes which can be A3 SEF, A4 SEF, A4 LEF, A5 SEF, A5 LEF, A6 SEF, B4 SEF, B5 SEF,
accommodated B5 LEF, B6 SEF, 11"×17" SEF, 81/2"×14" SEF, 81/2"×11" SEF,
81/2"×11" LEF, 51/2"×81/2" SEF, 12"×18" SEF, undefined size
Width: 90-320 mm, length*2:148-600 mm (stack quality is guaranteed
to 432 mm)
Paper thicknesses which can 52-300g/m2
be accommodated
Sizes which can be shifted A3 SEF, A4 LEF, A4 SEF, A5 LEF, A5 SEF, A6 SEF, B4 SEF, B5 LEF,
B5 SEF, B6 SEF, 11"×17" SEF, 81/2"×14" SEF, 81/2"×11" LEF,
81/2"×11" SEF, 51/2"×81/2" SEF, 12"×18" SEF

SM Appendices 1-56 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Specifications

Item Specification
Width: 90-320 mm, length :148-600 mm (stack quality is guaranteed
*2

to 432 mm)
No. of bins 1 bin (can be shifted)
No. of sheets which can be A4, 81/2”×11” or smaller: 250
accommodated*1 B4, 81/2”×14” or larger: 125
Power source Supplied from main printer (24V DC±10%, 5V DC ±5%).
Maximum power 4.3W
consumption
Dimensions 420×489×107 mm (except for projecting parts)
(width×depth×height)
Weight Less than 1.4 kg
(not including packaging materials and other items in package)
Service life 1200k sheets or 5 years
*1 80g/m2 or less (paper exceeding 80g/m2 is calculated by weight)
*2 Up to 1280 mm in SP mode.

1.4.11 1 Bin Tray BN3110 (D3CQ)

Number of bins: 1
Paper size: A3 SEF A4 SEF/LEF, A5 SEF/LEF, B4 JIS SEF B5 JIS SEF/LEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 8
1/2 x 14 SEF, 8 1/2 x 13 LEF, 8 1/2 x 11 SEF/LEF, 8 1/4 x 14 SEF, 8 1/4 x 13
SEF, 8 x 13 SEF, 8 x 10 SEF, 7 1/4 x 10 1/2 SEF/LEF, 51/2 x 8 1/2 SEF, 8K
SEF, 16K SEF/LEF, 11 x 15 SEF, 10 x 14 SEF, SRA3 SEF, SRA4 SEF/LEF,
custom size
Paper weight: 52–300 g/m2 (14 lb. Bond–110 lb. Cover)
Paper capacity (80 125 sheets
g/m2, 20 lb. Bond):
Power 1 W or less (Power is supplied from the main unit.)
consumption:
Dimensions (W x 444 x 450 x 150 mm (17.5 x 17.8 x 6.0 inches)
D x H):
Weight: Approx. 2 kg (4.5 lb.)

Item Specification
Type Cabinet installation, paper received from right
Linear velocity 73-512 mm/sec
Sizes which can be SRA3 SEF, A3 SEF, A4 SEF, A4 LEF, A5 SEF, A5 LEF, A6 SEF, B4 SEF,
accommodated B5 SEF, B5 LEF, B6 SEF, 12"×18" SEF, 11"×17" SEF, 81/2"×14" SEF,

SM Appendices 1-57 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Specifications

Item Specification
8 /2"×11" SEF, 8 /2"×11" LEF, 51/2"×81/2" SEF, undefined size
1 1

Paper thicknesses which 52-300g/m2

can be accommodated
No. of bins 1 bin
No. of sheets which can 125 (up to 80g/m2)
be accommodated
Power source Supplied from main machine (DC5V±5%).
Maximum power For copy: 0.15W
consumption
Dimensions 444×450×150 mm (except for projecting parts)
(width x depth x height)
Weight Less than 1.4 kg (not including decals, paper, packaging materials and
other items in package)
Service life 3000k sheets or 5 years

1.4.12 Bridge Unit BU3070 (D685)

Stack capacity (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond): • 250 sheets: A4, 81/2 x 11 or smaller
• 125 sheets: B4 JIS, 81/2 x 14 or larger
Power consumption: 15 W (Power is supplied from the main unit.)
Dimensions (W x D x H): 412 x 466 x 143 mm (16.3 x 18.4 x 5.7 inches)
Weight: Approx. 4 kg (8.9 lb.)

1.4.13 Punch Unit PU3040 NA/EU/SC (D716)

Paper Punch unit type Paper size
size:
2 & 4 holes type: 2 holes SEF: A3, A4, B4 JIS, B5 JIS, 11 x 17, 8 1/2 x 14, 8 1/2 x 13, 8
1/2 x 11, 7 1/4 x 10 1/2, 8K, 16K
2 & 4 holes type: 2 holes LEF: A4, B5 JIS, 8 1/2 x 11, 16K
2 & 4 holes type: 4 holes SEF: A3, 11 x 17
2 & 4 holes type: 4 holes LEF: A4, 8 1/2 x 11
4 holes type: 4 holes SEF: A3, A4, B4 JIS, B5 JIS, 11 x 17, 8 1/2 x 14, 8 1/2 x 13, 8
1/2 x 11, 7 1/4 x 10 1/2
4 holes type: 4 holes LEF: A4, B5 JIS, 8 1/2 x 11
2 & 3 holes type: 2 holes SEF: A3, 11 x 17, 8 1/2 x 14, 8 1/2 x 13, 8 1/2 x 11, 7 1/4 x 10
1/2
2 & 3 holes type: 2 holes LEF: A4, 8 1/2 x 11

SM Appendices 1-58 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Specifications

2 & 3 holes type: 3 holes SEF: A3, 11 x 17

2 & 3 holes type: 3 holes LEF: A4, 8 1/2 x 11

Paper weight: 60–169 g/m2 (16 lb. Bond –90 lb. Index)

1.4.14 Punch Unit PU3050 NA/EU/SC (D717)

Paper Punch unit Paper size
size: type
2 & 4 holes SEF: A3, B4 JIS, A4, B5 JIS, A5, 11 x 17, 8 1/2 x 14, 8 1/2 x 11, 5 1/2 x 8
type: 2 holes 1/2, 7 1/4 x 10 1/2, 8 x 13, 8 1/2 x 13, 8 1/4 x 13, 8K, 16K, 8 1/4 x 14, 8 x
10, 11 x 15, 10 x 14
2 & 4 holes LEF: A4, B5 JIS, A5, 8 1/2 x 11, 7 1/4 x 10 1/2, 16K
type: 2 holes
2 & 4 holes SEF: A3, B4 JIS, 11 x 17, 11 x 15, 8K
type: 4 holes
2 & 4 holes LEF: A4, B5 JIS, 8 1/2 x 11, 7 1/4 x 10 1/2, 16K
type: 4 holes
4 holes type: SEF: A3, B4 JIS, A4, B5 JIS, A5, 11 x 17, 8 1/2 x 14, 8 1/2 x 11, 5 1/2 x 8
4 holes 1/2, 7 1/4 x 10 1/2, 8 x 13, 8 1/2 x 13, 8 1/4 x 13, 8K, 16K, 8 1/4 x 14, 8 x
10, 11 x 15, 10 x 14
4 holes type: LEF: A4, B5 JIS, A5, 8 1/2 x 11, 7 1/4 x 10 1/2, 16K
4 holes
2 & 3 holes SEF: A3, B4 JIS, B5 JIS, A5, 11 x 17, 8 1/2 x 14, 8 1/2 x 11, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2,
type: 2 holes 7 1/4 x 10 1/2, 8 x 13, 8 1/2 x 13, 8 1/4 x 13, 8K, 16K, 8 1/4 x 14, 8 x 10,
11 x 15, 10 x 14
2 & 3 holes LEF: A4, B5 JIS, 8 1/2 x 11, 7 1/4 x 10 1/2, 16K
type: 2 holes
2 & 3 holes SEF: A3, B4 JIS, 11 x 17, 11 x 15, 10 x 14, 8K
type: 3 holes
2 & 3 holes LEF: A4, B5 JIS, 8 1/2 x 11, 7 1/4 x 10 1/2, 16K
type: 3 holes

Paper weight: 52–256 g/m2 (14 lb. Bond–140 lb. Index)

SM Appendices 1-59 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Specifications

1.4.15 Punch Unit PU3060 NA/EU/SC (D706)

Paper Punch unit Paper size
size: type
2 & 4 holes SEF: A3, B4 JIS, A4, B5 JIS, A5, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 51/2 x 81/2,
type: 2 holes 71/4 x 101/2, 8 x 13, 81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 8K, 16K, 81/4 x 14, 8 x 10, 11 x 15,
10 x 14, custom size
2 & 4 holes LEF: A4, B5 JIS, A5, 81/2 x 11, 71/4 x 101/2, 16K, custom size
type: 2 holes
2 & 4 holes SEF: A3, B4 JIS, 11 x 17, 11 x 15, 8K, custom size
type: 4 holes
2 & 4 holes LEF: A4, B5 JIS, 81/2 x 11, 71/4 x 101/2, 16K, custom size
type: 4 holes
4 holes type: SEF: A3, B4 JIS, A4, B5 JIS, A5, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 51/2 x 81/2,
4 holes 71/4 x 101/2, 8 x 13, 81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 8K, 16K, 81/4 x 14, 8 x 10, 11 x 15,
10 x 14, custom size
4 holes type: LEF: A4, B5 JIS, A5, 81/2 x 11, 71/4 x 101/2, 16K, custom size
4 holes
2 & 3 holes SEF: A3, B4 JIS, B5 JIS, A5, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 51/2 x 81/2, 71/4 x
type: 2 holes 101/2, 8 x 13, 81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 8K, 16K, 81/4 x 14, 8 x 10, 11 x 15, 10 x
14, custom size
2 & 3 holes LEF: A4, B5 JIS, 81/2 x 11, 71/4 x 101/2, 16K, custom size
type: 2 holes
2 & 3 holes SEF: A3, B4 JIS, 11 x 17, 11 x 15, 10 x 14, 8K, custom size
type: 3 holes
2 & 3 holes LEF: A4, B5 JIS, 81/2 x 11, 71/4 x 101/2, 16K, custom size
type: 3 holes

Paper weight: 52–256 g/m2 (14 lb. Bond–140 lb. Index)

1.4.16 Internal Multi-fold Unit FD3000 (M482)

Item Specification
Fold type Half Fold, Letter Fold-out, Letter Fold-in, Z-fold
Paper size: • With Z-fold:
A3 SEF, A4 SEF, B4 SEF, 11 × 17 SEF, 81/2 × 14 SEF, 81/2 × 11 SEF, 8K
SEF, 81/2 × 132/5 SEF
• With Half Fold:
A3 SEF, A4 SEF, B4 SEF, 11 × 17 SEF, 81/2 × 14 SEF, 81/2 × 11 SEF, 8K

SM Appendices 1-60 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Specifications

Item Specification
SEF, 12 × 18 SEF*, SRA3 SEF*, 81/2 × 132/5SEF
*12×18 SEF and SRA3 SEF papers can be delivered only if the finisher is
connected beyond the internal multi-fold unit.
• With Letter Fold-out, and Letter Fold-in:
A3 SEF, A4 SEF, 11 × 17 SEF, 81/2 × 14 SEF, 81/2 × 11 SEF, 81/2 × 132/5
SEF
Paper weight: 64 - 105 g/m2 (17 - 28 lb. Bond)
Power Power is supplied from the main unit.
requirements:
Power 40 W
consumption:
Dimensions (W × D • Without Finisher:
× H): • When the tray is stowed:
612 × 555 × 184 mm (9.5 × 21.9 × 7.3 inches)
• When the tray is extended:
714 × 555 × 242 mm (28.2 × 21.9 × 9.6 inches)
• With Finisher:
420 × 555 × 152 mm (16.6 × 21.9 × 6.0 inches)
Weight: Approx. 15 kg (33.1 lb.)

1.4.17 Paper Feed Unit PB3150 (D694)

Paper size: A3 SEF, A4 SEF/LEF, A5 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS SEF/LEF,
11 x 17 SEF, 8 1/2 x 14 SEF, 8 1/2 x 13 LEF, 8 1/2 x 11 SEF/LEF, 8 1/4 x 14
SEF, 8 1/4 x 13 SEF, 8 x 13 SEF, 8 x 10 SEF, 7 1/4 x 10 1/2 SEF/LEF, 8K SEF,
16K SEF/LEF, 12 x 18 SEF, 11 x 15 SEF, 10 x 14 SEF, 4 1/8 x 9 1/2 SEF, C5
Env SEF, SRA3 SEF, custom size
Paper weight: 52–300 g/m2 (14 lb. Bond–110 lb. Cover)
Paper capacity (80 550 sheets x 1 tray
g/m , 20 lb. Bond):
2

Power 19 W or less (Power is supplied from the main unit.)

consumption:
Dimensions (W x D 587 x 685 x 120 mm (23.2 x 27.0 x 4.8 inches)
x H):
Weight: Approx. 11 kg (24.3 lb.)

SM Appendices 1-61 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Specifications

1.4.18 Paper Feed Unit PB3220/PB3210 (D787-17, -18)

Paper size: A3 SEF, A4 SEF/LEF, A5 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS SEF/LEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 8 1/2
x 14 SEF, 8 1/2 x 13 LEF, 8 1/2 x 11 SEF/LEF, 8 1/4 x 14 SEF, 8 1/4 x 13 SEF, 8
x 13 SEF, 8 x 10 SEF, 7 1/4 x 10 1/2 SEF/LEF, 8K SEF, 16K SEF/LEF, 12 x 18
SEF, 11 x 15 SEF, 10 x 14 SEF, 4 1/8 x 9 1/2 SEF, C5 Env SEF, SRA3 SEF,
custom size
Paper weight: 60–300 g/m2 (16 lb. Bond–110 lb. Cover)
Paper capacity (80 550 sheets x 2 trays
g/m , 20 lb. Bond):
2

Power 21 W or less (Power is supplied from the main unit.)

consumption:
Dimensions (W x 587 x 685 x 247 mm (23.2 x 27.0 x 9.8 inches)
D x H):
Weight: Approx. 22.0 kg (48.5 lb.)

1.4.19 LCIT PB 3170 (D695)

Paper size: A4 LEF, 8 1/2 x 11 LEF,
Paper weight: 52–300 g/m2 (14 lb. Bond–110 lb. Cover)
Paper capacity (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond): 1,000 sheets x 2 trays
Power consumption: 15 W or less (Power is supplied from the main unit.)
Dimensions (W x D x H): 587 x 685 x 247 mm (23.2 x 27.0 x 9.8 inches)
Weight: Approx. 20 kg (44.1 lb.)

1.4.20 LCIT RT 3030 (D696)

Paper size: A4 LEF, B5 JIS LEF, 8 1/2 x 11 LEF
Paper weight: 52–300 g/m2 (14 lb. Bond–110 lb. Cover)
Paper capacity (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond): 1,500 sheets
Power consumption: 13 W or less (Power is supplied from the main unit.)
Dimensions (W x D x H): 340 x 540 x 290 mm (13.4 x 21.3 x 11.5 inches)
Weight: Approx. 10 kg (22.1 lb.)

SM Appendices 1-62 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Preventive Maintenance

2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
2.1 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
2.1.1 Preventive Maintenance Items

• The amounts mentioned as the PM interval indicate the number of prints.

Chart: A4/LT (LEF) / 6%
Mode:
MP 2555/3055: 3 copies/original (prints/job)
MP 3555/4055/5055/6055: 5 copies/original (prints/job)
Environment: Normal temperature and humidity
Yield may change depending on circumstances and print conditions.
Symbol keys: C: Clean, R: Replace, L: Lubricate, I: Inspect

Mainframe: MP 3555/3055/2555
Item 120K 240K 360K EM Life Note
Scanner
Exposure Glass - C/I/L - C/I/L - Clean with a cleaning cloth.
- Do not clean with alcohol. Doing so may
Sheet-through - C/I/L - C/I/L - leave a whitish trace that affects image
Exposure Glass scanning.
Shield Glass - - - C/I/L Clean with an optics cloth.
PCU
Developer R - - - - Clear the PM counter.
Development C/I/L - - - - Clean
Roller
Development Filter R - - - - Clear the PM counter.
Development Case C/I/L - - - - Clean the guide plate and remove spots
where toner adheres.
Development C/I/L - - C/I/L - Remove dust.
Entrance Seal
Development Side R - - - -
Seal
Doctor Blade C/I/L - - - - Remove adhering developer.
Development - R - - -

SM Appendices 2-1 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Preventive Maintenance

Item 120K 240K 360K EM Life Note

Bearing
Charge Roller R - - - - Clear the PM counter.
Charge Roller R - - - -
Cleaner
Cleaning Blade R - - - -
Cleaning Blade C/I/L - - - -
Side Seal
Cleaning Entrance C/I/L - - - -
Seal
OPC Drum R - - - - Clear the PM counter.
Pick-off Pawl R - - - -
Waste Toner Bottle R - - - Replace when waste toner bottle full is
detected.
Clear the PM counter.
Quenching Lamp C/I/L - - - -
Transfer
Transfer Unit R - - - - Clear the PM counter.
Fusing Exit Guide C/I/L - - - -
ID Sensor C/I/L - - C/I/L - Use a blower brush.
Initialize the ID sensor after cleaning.
Fusing
Heating Sleeve - R - - 260k Clear the PM counter.
Belt Unit
Fusing Entrance - - - C/I/L - Remove adhering toner.
Guide Plate
Fusing Exit Guide - - - C/I/L -
Plate
Stripper Plate - - - C/I/L -
Pressure Roller - R - 260k Clear the PM counter.
Pressure Roller - R - 260k Lubricate (FLUOTRIBO MG GREASE)
Bearing after replacing the bearing.
Thermopile - C/I/L - C/I/L - Clean with a dry cloth.
Pressure Roller - - - C/I/L - Replace when the gear is worn out.
Gear
Idler Gear - - - C/I/L -
Fusing Entrance C/I/L - - C/I/L - Clean the sensor part with a blower
Sensor brush.

SM Appendices 2-2 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Preventive Maintenance

Item 120K 240K 360K EM Life Note

Fusing Exit Sensor C/I/L - - C/I/L -

Mainframe: MP 6055/5055/4055
Item 160K 320K 480K EM Life Note
Scanner
Exposure Glass - C/I/L - C/I/L - Clean with a cleaning cloth.
Sheet-through - C/I/L - C/I/L - Do not clean with alcohol. Doing so may
Exposure Glass leave a whitish trace that affects image
scanning.
Shield Glass - - - C/I/L - Clean with an optics cloth.
PCU
Developer R - - - - Clear the PM counter.
Development C/I/L - - - - Clean
Roller
Development Filter R - - - - Clear the PM counter.
Development Case C/I/L - - - - Clean guide plate and spots where toner
adheres.
Development C/I/L - - C/I/L - Remove dust.
Entrance Seal
Development Side R - - - -
Seal
Doctor Blade C/I/L - - - - Remove adhering developer.
Development - R - - - Clear the PM counter.
Bearing
Charge Roller R - - - -
Charge Roller R - - - -
Cleaner
Cleaning Blade R - - - -
Cleaning Blade C/I/L - - - -
Side Seal
Cleaning Entrance C/I/L - - - -
Seal
OPC Drum R - - - - Clear the PM counter.
Pick-off Pawl R - - - -
Waste Toner Bottle R - - - - Replace when waste toner full is
detected.
Clear the PM counter.

SM Appendices 2-3 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Preventive Maintenance

Item 160K 320K 480K EM Life Note

Quenching Lamp C/I/L - - - -
Transfer
Transfer Unit R - - - - Clear the PM counter.
Fusing Exit Guide C/I/L - - - -
ID Sensor C/I/L - - C/I/L - Use a blower brush.
Initialize the ID sensor after Cleaning.
Fusing
Heating Sleeve - R - - 350k Clear the PM counter.
Belt Unit
Fusing Entrance - - - C/I/L - Remove adhering toner.
Guide Plate
Fusing Exit Guide - - - C/I/L -
Plate
Stripper Plate - - C/I/L -
Pressure Roller - R - - 350k Clear the PM counter.
Pressure Roller - R - - 350k Lubricate (FLUOTRIBO MG GREASE)
Bearing after replacing the bearing.
Thermopile - C/I/L - C/I/L - Clean with a dry cloth.
Pressure Roller - - - C/I/L - Replace if the gear is worn out.
Gear
Idler Gear - - - C/I/L -
Fusing Entrance C/I/L - - C/I/L - Clean the sensor part with a blower
Sensor brush.
Fusing Exit Sensor C/I/L - - C/I/L -

Optional Peripheral Devices

ARDF DF3090

Item EM 120K 240K 360K Note

Pick-up Roller C R R R Wipe with a cloth dampened with ethyl alcohol.
Feed Belt C R R R Wipe with a cloth dampened with ethyl alcohol.
Separation Roller C R R R Wipe with a cloth dampened with ethyl alcohol.
Sensors C - - - Clean with a blower brush.
Gears L - - - Lubricate, if necessary.
Platen Sheet C - - - Wipe with a cloth dampened with ethyl alcohol.
Other Rollers C - - -
Scanner Guide Plate C - - -

SM Appendices 2-4 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Preventive Maintenance

SPDF DF3100

Item EM 120K Note

Pick-up roller C R Wipe with a cloth dampened with ethyl alcohol.
Feed belt C R Wipe with a cloth dampened with ethyl alcohol or water.
Separation roller C R Wipe with a cloth dampened with ethyl alcohol.
CIS (Glass area) C - Clean with the RICOH’s glass cleaner.
Sensors C - Clean with a blower brush.
Gears L - Lubricate, if necessary.
Platen sheet C - Wipe with a cloth dampened with ethyl alcohol.
Other rollers C -
Scanner guide plate C -

Paper Feed Unit PB3150/PB3210/PB3220

Item EM Note
Paper Feed Roller C Wipe with a cloth dampened with ethyl alcohol.
Pick-up Roller C
Separation Roller C
Relay Rollers C
Bottom Plate Pad C Remove dust with dry cloth.
Sensors C

LCIT PB3170/PB3230/RT3030

Item EM Note
Paper Feed Roller C Wipe with a cloth dampened with ethyl alcohol.
Pick-up Roller C
Separation Roller C
Relay Rollers C
Bottom Plate Pad C Remove dust with dry cloth.
Sensors C

1 Bin Tray BN3110

Item EM Note
Rollers C Wipe with a cloth dampened with ethyl alcohol.
Copy Tray C Clean with a damp cloth, and then wipe with a dry cloth.
Sensors C Clean with a blower brush.
Bearings C Lubricate with silicone oils when noise occurred.

Bridge Unit BU3070

SM Appendices 2-5 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Preventive Maintenance

Item EM Note
Rollers C Wipe with a cloth dampened with ethyl alcohol.

Internal Shift Tray SH3070

Item EM Note
Exit Tray C Clean with a damp cloth, and then wipe with a dry cloth.

Side Tray Type M3

Item EM Note
Rollers C Wipe with a cloth dampened with ethyl alcohol.
Sensors C Remove dusts with dry cloth.

Internal Multi-Fold Unit FD3000

Item EM Note
Bearings C Lubricate with Silicone Grease G-501 when noise occurs.
Driven rollers C Wipe with a damp cloth, then a dry cloth.
Fold rollers C
Paper exit rollers C
Paper sensor C Remove paper dust with a blower brush or the corner of a triangular-
folded cloth.
Paper transport C Wipe with a damp cloth, then a dry cloth.
rollers
Trays C

Booklet Finisher SR3220 / Finisher SR3210

Item EM 500K Note

Drive rollers C - Wipe with a cloth dampened with ethyl alcohol.
Driven rollers C -
Quenching C -
brush
Bearings C - Lubricate with Silicone Grease G-501 when noise occurs.
Sensors C - Clean with a blower brush.
Jogger fences C - Lubricate with Silicone Grease G-501 when abnormal noise is
generated or abnormal operation occurs.
Stapler - R Replace when the staple counter in the logging data reached 500k.

Booklet Finisher SR3230 / Finisher SR3240

Item EM Note
Drive rollers C Wipe with a cloth dampened with ethyl alcohol.

SM Appendices 2-6 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Preventive Maintenance

Item EM Note
Driven rollers C
Quenching C
brush
Bearings C Lubricate with Silicone Grease G-501 when noise occurs.
Sensors C Clean with a blower brush.
Stapler R Replace when the staple counter in the logging data reached 500k.
(Corner) Staple a few times to test after replacement.
Punch R Replace the unit when the punch reaches the end of life, i.e., when the
number of punched sheets exceeds one million.
Punch dust C Discard paper dust when the hopper is detected to be full.

Punch Unit Type PU3060 (D706)

This Punch Unit is for the Booklet Finisher SR3240 (D3BB)/Finisher SR3230 (D3BA)
2400K 3000K 4000K EM Note
Punch Waste Hopper I I I I Remove and empty
Punch Unit C Replace after 1000k punches.

Internal Finisher SR3130

Item EM Notes
Rollers C Wipe with a cloth dampened with ethyl alcohol.
Sensors C Clean with a blower brush.
Stapler R Replace when staple counter on logging data reached 200 thousand times.
Bearings C Lubricate with silicone oils when noise occurred.

Internal Finisher SR3180

Item EM Notes
Rollers C Wipe with a cloth dampened with ethyl alcohol.
Sensors C Clean with a blower brush.
Stapler R Replace when staple counter on logging data reached 200 thousand times.

Related SP Codes

This is a list of the PM related SP codes.

SP7803 PM Counter Display Displays the PM count since the last PM.
SP7804 PM Counter Reset Resets the PM count.

2.1.2 Others Yield Parts

Some of the parts mentioned in these tables have a target yield. However, the total copy/print volume
made by the machine will not reach the target yield within the machine's targeted lifetime if the machine

SM Appendices 2-7 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Preventive Maintenance

is used under the target usage conditions (ACV, color ratio, P/J, and C/O). So, these parts are
categorized not as PM parts but as yield parts (EM parts). The parts with “(R)” in this table are yield
parts.
Chart: A4 (LT)/5%
Mode: 4 copies / original (prints/job)
Ratio 30%
Environment: Normal temperature and humidity
Yield may change depending on circumstances and print conditions.

Symbol keys: C: Clean, R: Replace, L: Lubricant, I: Inspect, U: Unique for this model,

Mainframe:

Description Q’ty/Unit Expected Yield (Pages) Unique or Common

Development Unit 1 MP2555/MP3055/MP3555: 420k U
MP4055/MP5055/MP6055: 900k

ARDF DF3090/SPDF DF3100:

Description Q’ty/Unit Expected Yield (Pages) Unique or Common

Paper Feed Belt 1 120k C
Pick-up Roller 1
Reverse Roller 1

SM Appendices 2-8 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

3. SP MODE TABLES
3.1 SP GROUP 1000
SP Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to
No. CTL Max/Init./Step]
1-001- Leading Edge Tray1: Thin ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
001 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Tray1: Plain ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
002 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Tray1: Mid-thick ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
003 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Tray1: Thick 1 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
004 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Tray1: Thick 2 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
005 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Tray1: Thick 3 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
006 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Tray1: Thick 4 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
007 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Tray2: Thin ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
008 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Tray2: Plain ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
009 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Tray2: Mid-thick ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
010 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Tray2: Thick 1 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
011 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Tray2: Thick 2 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
012 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Tray2: Thick 3 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
013 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Tray2: Thick 4 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
014 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge By-pass: Thin ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
015 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge By-pass: Plain ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
016 Registration

SM Appendices 3-1 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to

No. CTL Max/Init./Step]
1-001- Leading Edge By-pass: Mid-thick ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
017 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge By-pass: Thick 1 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
018 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge By-pass: Thick 2 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
019 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge By-pass: Thick 3 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
020 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge By-pass: Thick 4 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
021 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Duplex: Thin ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
022 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Duplex: Plain ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
023 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Duplex: Mid-thick ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
024 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Duplex: Thick 1 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
025 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Duplex: Thick 2 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
026 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Duplex: Thick 3 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
027 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Tray1: Thin:1200 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
028 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Tray1: Plain:1200 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
029 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Tray1: Mid-thick:1200 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
030 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Tray1: Thick 1:1200 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
031 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Tray1: Thick 2:1200 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
032 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Tray1: Thick 3:1200 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
033 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Tray1: Thick 4:1200 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
034 Registration

SM Appendices 3-2 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to

No. CTL Max/Init./Step]
1-001- Leading Edge Tray2: Thin:1200 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
035 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Tray2: Plain:1200 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
036 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Tray2: Mid-thick:1200 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
037 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Tray2: Thick 1:1200 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
038 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Tray2: Thick 2:1200 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
039 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Tray2: Thick 3:1200 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
040 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Tray2: Thick 4:1200 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
041 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge By-pass: Thin:1200 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
042 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge By-pass: Plain:1200 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
043 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge By-pass: Mid-thick:1200 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
044 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge By-pass: Thick 1:1200 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
045 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge By-pass: Thick 2:1200 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
046 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge By-pass: Thick 3:1200 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
047 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge By-pass: Thick 4:1200 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
048 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Duplex: Thin:1200 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
049 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Duplex: Plain:1200 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
050 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Duplex: Mid-thick:1200 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
051 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Duplex: Thick 1:1200 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
052 Registration

SM Appendices 3-3 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to

No. CTL Max/Init./Step]
1-001- Leading Edge Duplex: Thick 2:1200 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
053 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Duplex: Thick 3:1200 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
054 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Tray3: Thin ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
055 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Tray3: Plain ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
056 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Tray3: Mid-thick ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
057 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Tray3: Thick 1 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
058 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Tray3: Thick 2 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
059 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Tray3: Thick 3 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
060 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Tray3: Thick 4 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
061 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Tray3: Thin:1200 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
062 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Tray3: Plain:1200 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
063 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Tray3: Mid-thick:1200 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
064 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Tray3: Thick 1:1200 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
065 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Tray3: Thick 2:1200 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
066 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Tray3: Thick 3:1200 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
067 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Tray3: Thick 4:1200 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
068 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Tray4: Thin ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
069 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Tray4: Plain ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
070 Registration

SM Appendices 3-4 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to

No. CTL Max/Init./Step]
1-001- Leading Edge Tray4: Mid-thick ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
071 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Tray4: Thick 1 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
072 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Tray4: Thick 2 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
073 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Tray4: Thick 3 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
074 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Tray4: Thick 4 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
075 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Tray4: Thin:1200 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
076 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Tray4: Plain:1200 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
077 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Tray4: Mid-thick:1200 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
078 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Tray4: Thick 1:1200 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
079 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Tray4: Thick 2:1200 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
080 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Tray4: Thick 3:1200 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
081 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Tray4: Thick 4:1200 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
082 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Tray5(LCT): Thin ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
083 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Tray5(LCT): Plain ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
084 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Tray5(LCT): Mid-thick ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
085 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Tray5(LCT): Thick 1 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
086 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Tray5(LCT): Thick 2 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
087 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Tray5(LCT): Thick 3 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
088 Registration

SM Appendices 3-5 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to

No. CTL Max/Init./Step]
1-001- Leading Edge Tray5(LCT): Thick 4 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
089 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Tray5(LCT): Thin:1200 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
090 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Tray5(LCT): Plain:1200 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
091 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Tray5(LCT): Mid-thick:1200 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
092 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Tray5(LCT): Thick 1:1200 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
093 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Tray5(LCT): Thick 2:1200 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
094 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Tray5(LCT): Thick 3:1200 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
095 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Tray5(LCT): Thick 4:1200 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
096 Registration
1-002- Side-to-Side By-pass Tray ENG* [ -4 to 4 / 0 / 0.1mm]
001 Registration
1-002- Side-to-Side Paper Tray 1 ENG* [ -4 to 4 / 0 / 0.1mm]
002 Registration
1-002- Side-to-Side Paper Tray 2 ENG* [ -4 to 4 / 0 / 0.1mm]
003 Registration
1-002- Side-to-Side Paper Tray 3 ENG* [ -4 to 4 / 0 / 0.1mm]
004 Registration
1-002- Side-to-Side Paper Tray 4 ENG* [ -4 to 4 / 0 / 0.1mm]
005 Registration
1-002- Side-to-Side Duplex ENG* [ -4 to 4 / 0 / 0.1mm]
006 Registration
1-002- Side-to-Side Large Capacity Tray ENG* [ -4 to 4 / 0 / 0.1mm]
007 Registration
1-003- Paper Buckle Paper Tray1: Thin ENG [ -4 to 5 / 0 / 0.1mm]
001
1-003- Paper Buckle Paper Tray1: Plain ENG [ -4 to 5 / 0 / 0.1mm]
002
1-003- Paper Buckle Paper Tray 1: Mid-thick ENG [ -4 to 5 / 0 / 0.1mm]
003

SM Appendices 3-6 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to

No. CTL Max/Init./Step]
1-003- Paper Buckle Paper Tray1: Thick1 ENG [ -4 to 5 / -2 / 0.1mm]
004
1-003- Paper Buckle Tray2/3/4/5/LCT: Thin ENG [ -4 to 5 / 0 / 0.1mm]
005
1-003- Paper Buckle Tray2/3/4/5/LCT: Plain ENG [ -4 to 5 / 0 / 0.1mm]
006
1-003- Paper Buckle Tray 2/3/4/5/LCT: Mid-thick ENG [ -4 to 5 / 0 / 0.1mm]
007
1-003- Paper Buckle Tray2/3/4/5/LCT: Thick 1 ENG [ -4 to 5 / -2 / 0.1mm]
008
1-003- Paper Buckle By-pass: Thin ENG [ -4 to 5 / 0 / 0.1mm]
009
1-003- Paper Buckle By-pass: Plain ENG [ -4 to 5 / 0 / 0.1mm]
010
1-003- Paper Buckle By-pass: Mid-thick ENG [ -4 to 5 / 0 / 0.1mm]
011
1-003- Paper Buckle By-pass:Thick1 ENG [ -4 to 5 / -1 / 0.1mm]
012
1-003- Paper Buckle Duplex:Thin ENG [ -4 to 5 / 0 / 0.1mm]
013
1-003- Paper Buckle Duplex:Plain ENG [ -4 to 5 / 0 / 0.1mm]
014
1-003- Paper Buckle Duplex: Mid-thick ENG [ -4 to 5 / 0 / 0.1mm]
015
1-003- Paper Buckle Duplex:Thick1 ENG [ -4 to 5 / -1 / 0.1mm]
016
1-003- Paper Buckle Paper Tray1: Thin:1200 ENG [ -4 to 5 / 0 / 0.1mm]
017
1-003- Paper Buckle Paper Tray1: Plain:1200 ENG [ -4 to 5 / 0 / 0.1mm]
018
1-003- Paper Buckle Paper Tray 1: Mid-thick:1200 ENG [ -4 to 5 / 0 / 0.1mm]
019
1-003- Paper Buckle Paper Tray1: Thick1:1200 ENG [ -4 to 5 / -2 / 0.1mm]
020
1-003- Paper Buckle Tray2/3/4/5/LCT: Thin:1200 ENG [ -4 to 5 / 0 / 0.1mm]
021

SM Appendices 3-7 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to

No. CTL Max/Init./Step]
1-003- Paper Buckle Tray2/3/4/5/LCT: Plain:1200 ENG [ -4 to 5 / 0 / 0.1mm]
022
1-003- Paper Buckle Tray2/3/4/5/LCT: Mid:1200 ENG [ -4 to 5 / 0 / 0.1mm]
023
1-003- Paper Buckle Tray2/3/4/5/LCT: Thick 1:1200 ENG [ -4 to 5 / -2 / 0.1mm]
024
1-003- Paper Buckle By-pass: Thin:1200 ENG [ -4 to 5 / 0 / 0.1mm]
025
1-003- Paper Buckle By-pass: Plain:1200 ENG [ -4 to 5 / 0 / 0.1mm]
026
1-003- Paper Buckle By-pass: Mid-thick:1200 ENG [ -4 to 5 / 0 / 0.1mm]
027
1-003- Paper Buckle By-pass:Thick1:1200 ENG [ -4 to 5 / -1 / 0.1mm]
028
1-003- Paper Buckle Duplex:Thin:1200 ENG [ -4 to 5 / 0 / 0.1mm]
029
1-003- Paper Buckle Duplex:Plain:1200 ENG [ -4 to 5 / 0 / 0.1mm]
030
1-003- Paper Buckle Duplex: Mid-thick:1200 ENG [ -4 to 5 / 0 / 0.1mm]
031
1-003- Paper Buckle Duplex:Thick1:1200 ENG [ -4 to 5 / -1 / 0.1mm]
032
1-007- By-Pass Size Switch LT SEF/LG SEF ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
001 Detection 0: 8.5x11SEF
1: 8.5x14SEF
1-007- By-Pass Size By-Pass Jam Detection Set ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
002 Detection 0: Normal
1: Simple Detect
1-009- Initial Operation Registration Gear Backlash Cut ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
001 Setting 0: OFF
1: ON
1-010- Feed Pickup SOL Control ON/OFF 0:OFF/1:ON ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
001 Initial Movement 0: OFF
1: ON
1-011- Pickup SOL Separate Paper Tray1: Thin ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
001 Setting 0: OFF

SM Appendices 3-8 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to

No. CTL Max/Init./Step]
1: ON
1-011- Pickup SOL Separate Paper Tray1: Plain ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
002 Setting 0: OFF
1: ON
1-011- Pickup SOL Separate Paper Tray1: Thick ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
003 Setting 0: OFF
1: ON
1-011- Pickup SOL Separate Paper Tray2: Thin ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
004 Setting 0: OFF
1: ON
1-011- Pickup SOL Separate Paper Tray2: Plain ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
005 Setting 0: OFF
1: ON
1-011- Pickup SOL Separate Paper Tray2: Thick ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
006 Setting 0: OFF
1: ON
1-011- Pickup SOL Separate Paper Tray3: Thin ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
007 Setting 0: OFF
1: ON
1-011- Pickup SOL Separate Paper Tray3: Plain ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
008 Setting 0: OFF
1: ON
1-011- Pickup SOL Separate Paper Tray3: Thick ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
009 Setting 0: OFF
1: ON
1-011- Pickup SOL Separate Paper Tray4: Thin ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
010 Setting 0: OFF
1: ON
1-011- Pickup SOL Separate Paper Tray4: Plain ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
011 Setting 0: OFF
1: ON
1-011- Pickup SOL Separate Paper Tray4: Thick ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
012 Setting 0: OFF
1: ON
1-011- Pickup SOL Separate Paper LCT: Thin ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
013 Setting 0: OFF

SM Appendices 3-9 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to

No. CTL Max/Init./Step]
1: ON
1-011- Pickup SOL Separate Paper LCT: Plain ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
014 Setting 0: OFF
1: ON
1-011- Pickup SOL Separate Paper LCT: Thick ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
015 Setting 0: OFF
1: ON
1-012- Operation Setting Paper Exit Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
001 0: OFF
1: ON
1-012- Operation Setting ExitLineSpdSetting: ENG [ 0 to 3 / 1 / 1]
002 AfterSpdDown 0: Standard Speed
1: 150mm/s
2: 128mm/s
3: 75mm/s
1-101- Flicker Control Flicker Control ENG* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 1]
030
1-105- Print Target Temp. Plain1:BW:Center ENG* [ 100 to 180 / * /
003 1deg]
*MP 2555: 123
*MP 3055: 123
*MP 3555: 130
*MP 4055: 130
*MP 5055: 147
*MP 6055: 147
1-105- Print Target Temp. Plain2:BW:Center ENG* [ 100 to 180 / * /
007 1deg]
*MP 2555: 128
*MP 3055: 128
*MP 3555: 135
*MP 4055: 135
*MP 5055: 157
*MP 6055: 157
1-105- Print Target Temp. Thin:BW:Center ENG* [ 100 to 180 / * /
011 1deg]
*MP 2555: 119

SM Appendices 3-10 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to

No. CTL Max/Init./Step]
*MP 3055: 119
*MP 3555: 120
*MP 4055: 120
*MP 5055: 132
*MP 6055: 132
1-105- Print Target Temp. M-thick:BW:Center ENG* [ 100 to 180 / * /
015 1deg]
*MP 2555: 140
*MP 3055: 140
*MP 3555: 143
*MP 4055: 143
*MP 5055: 157
*MP 6055: 157
1-105- Print Target Temp. Thick1:BW:Center ENG* [ 100 to 180 / 145 /
019 1deg]
1-105- Print Target Temp. Thick2:BW:Center ENG* [ 100 to 180 / 140 /
023 1deg]
1-105- Print Target Temp. Thick3:BW:Center ENG* [ 100 to 180 / 140 /
027 1deg]
1-105- Print Target Temp. Special1:BW:Center ENG* [ 100 to 180 / * /
031 1deg]
*MP 2555: 123
*MP 3055: 123
*MP 3555: 130
*MP 4055: 130
*MP 5055: 152
*MP 6055: 152
1-105- Print Target Temp. Special2:BW:Center ENG* [ 100 to 180 / 145 /
035 1deg]
1-105- Print Target Temp. Special3:BW:Center ENG* [ 100 to 180 / 130 /
039 1deg]
1-105- Print Target Temp. Envelop:Center ENG* [ 100 to 180 / 135 /
041 1deg]
1-105- Print Target Temp. Special1:BW:Center:Middle ENG* [ 100 to 180 / 140 /
053 Speed 1deg]
1-105- Print Target Temp. Special2:BW:Center:Middle ENG* [ 100 to 180 / 145 /

SM Appendices 3-11 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to

No. CTL Max/Init./Step]
057 Speed 1deg]
1-105- Print Target Temp. Special3:BW:Center:Middle ENG* [ 100 to 180 / 150 /
061 Speed 1deg]
1-105- Print Target Temp. Plain1:BW:Center:Low Speed ENG* [ 100 to 180 / 110 /
103 1deg]
1-105- Print Target Temp. Plain2:BW:Center:Low Speed ENG* [ 100 to 180 / 110 /
107 1deg]
1-105- Print Target Temp. M-thick:BW:Center:Low Speed ENG* [ 100 to 180 / 115 /
111 1deg]
1-105- Print Target Temp. Thick1:BW:Center:Low Speed ENG* [ 100 to 180 / 120 /
115 1deg]
1-105- Print Target Temp. Special1:BW:Center:Low Speed ENG* [ 100 to 180 / 110 /
119 1deg]
1-105- Print Target Temp. Special2:BW:Center:Low Speed ENG* [ 100 to 180 / 120 /
123 1deg]
1-105- Print Target Temp. Plain1:Glossy:Center ENG* [ 100 to 180 / 110 /
125 1deg]
1-105- Print Target Temp. Plain2:Glossy:Center ENG* [ 100 to 180 / 110 /
127 1deg]
1-105- Print Target Temp. M-thick:Glossy:Center ENG* [ 100 to 180 / 115 /
129 1deg]
1-105- Print Target Temp. OHP:Center ENG* [ 100 to 180 / 160 /
131 1deg]
1-105- Print Target Temp. Envelop:Center:Low Speed ENG* [ 100 to 180 / 135 /
133 1deg]
1-105- Print Target Temp. Thin:BW:Center:Low Speed ENG* [ 100 to 180 / 110 /
137 1deg]
1-105- Print Target Temp. Thick4:BW:Center ENG* [ 100 to 180 / 140 /
141 1deg]
1-105- Print Target Temp. Postcard:Center ENG* [ 100 to 180 / 130 /
143 1deg]
1-105- Print Target Temp. Special3:BW:Center:Middle ENG* [ 100 to 180 / 130 /
147 Speed 1deg]
1-106- Fusing Temp. Display Heat Center ENG [ -10 to 250 / 0 /
001 1deg]
1-106- Fusing Temp. Display Heat End ENG [ -10 to 250 / 0 /

SM Appendices 3-12 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to

No. CTL Max/Init./Step]
002 1deg]
1-106- Fusing Temp. Display Press Center ENG [ -10 to 250 / 0 /
003 1deg]
1-106- Fusing Temp. Display Press End ENG [ -10 to 250 / 0 /
004 1deg]
1-113- Curl Correction Execute Pattern ENG* [ 0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
001 0: OFF
1: ON(No Decurl)
2: ON
1-133- Voltage Detection Voltage Detection ENG* [ 0 to 350 / 97 / 0.1V]
001
1-133- Voltage Detection Max ENG* [ 0 to 350 / 0 / 0.1V]
002
1-133- Voltage Detection Min ENG* [ 0 to 350 / 350 /
003 0.1V]
1-133- Voltage Detection Last ENG* [ 0 to 350 / 0 / 0.1V]
004
1-133- Voltage Detection SC ENG* [ 0 to 350 / 0 / 0.1V]
005
1-133- Voltage Detection Threshold Voltage ENG* [ 0 to 255 / 80 / 1V]
006
1-135- Inrush Control Inrush Control ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
001
1-141- Fusing SC Error Time SC Number ENG* [ 0 to 99999 / 0 / 1]
001 Info
1-141- Fusing SC Error Time Htg Roller:Ctr Det1 ENG* [ -5 to 300 / 0 / 1deg]
101 Info
1-141- Fusing SC Error Time Htg Roller:End Det1 ENG* [ -5 to 300 / 0 / 1deg]
102 Info
1-141- Fusing SC Error Time Press Roller:Ctr Det1 ENG* [ -5 to 300 / 0 / 1deg]
103 Info
1-141- Fusing SC Error Time Press Roller:End Det1 ENG* [ -5 to 300 / 0 / 1deg]
104 Info
1-141- Fusing SC Error Time Htg Roller:Ctr Det2 ENG* [ -5 to 300 / 0 / 1deg]
151 Info
1-141- Fusing SC Error Time Htg Roller:End Det2 ENG* [ -5 to 300 / 0 / 1deg]

SM Appendices 3-13 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to

No. CTL Max/Init./Step]
152 Info
1-141- Fusing SC Error Time Press Roller:Ctr Det2 ENG* [ -5 to 300 / 0 / 1deg]
153 Info
1-141- Fusing SC Error Time Press Roller:End Det2 ENG* [ -5 to 300 / 0 / 1deg]
154 Info
1-141- Fusing SC Error Time Htg Roller:Ctr Det3 ENG* [ -5 to 300 / 0 / 1deg]
201 Info
1-141- Fusing SC Error Time Htg Roller:End Det3 ENG* [ -5 to 300 / 0 / 1deg]
202 Info
1-141- Fusing SC Error Time Press Roller:Ctr Det3 ENG* [ -5 to 300 / 0 / 1deg]
203 Info
1-141- Fusing SC Error Time Press Roller:End Det3 ENG* [ -5 to 300 / 0 / 1deg]
204 Info
1-142- Fusing Jam Detection SC Display ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
001 0: OFF
1: ON
1-152- Fusing Nip Band Execute ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
001 Check
1-153- Abnormal Noise Unit: Execute ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
001 Confirmation
1-153- Abnormal Noise No Unit: Execute ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
002 Confirmation
1-153- Abnormal Noise Operation Line Speed ENG [ 0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
003 Confirmation 0: Std Speed
1: Middle Speed
2: Low Speed
1-153- Abnormal Noise Operation Time ENG [ 0 to 240 / 60 / 1sec]
004 Confirmation
1-154- Switch:Rotation Overshoot Prevent Temp.:SC ENG* [ 0 to 250 / * / 1deg]
006 Start/Stop *MP 2555: 185
*MP 3055: 185
*MP 3555: 185
*MP 4055: 195
*MP 5055: 200
*MP 6055: 200
1-301- Paper Thick Error Tray1 (0:Off 1:On) ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-14 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to

No. CTL Max/Init./Step]
001 Detect
1-301- Paper Thick Error Tray2 (0:Off 1:On) ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
002 Detect
1-301- Paper Thick Error Tray3 (0:Off 1:On) ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
003 Detect
1-301- Paper Thick Error Tray4 (0:Off 1:On) ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
004 Detect
1-301- Paper Thick Error LCT (0:Off 1:On) ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
005 Detect
1-301- Paper Thick Error Bypass Tray (0:Off 1:On) ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
006 Detect
1-303- Paper Thick Error Tray1 ENG* [ 1 to 8 / 3 / 1]
001 Rank
1-303- Paper Thick Error Tray2 ENG* [ 1 to 8 / 3 / 1]
002 Rank
1-303- Paper Thick Error Tray3 ENG* [ 1 to 8 / 3 / 1]
003 Rank
1-303- Paper Thick Error Tray4 ENG* [ 1 to 8 / 3 / 1]
004 Rank
1-303- Paper Thick Error LCT ENG* [ 1 to 8 / 3 / 1]
005 Rank
1-303- Paper Thick Error Bypass Tray ENG* [ 1 to 8 / 3 / 1]
006 Rank
1-306- Num. of Sheets to Num. of Sheets to Shift to Err ENG* [ 1 to 999 / 1 / 1]
001 Shift to Err
1-307- Paper Thick Standard Middle Thick ENG* [ 0 to 999 / 82 / 1]
003 Value
1-307- Paper Thick Standard Thick1 ENG* [ 0 to 999 / 106 / 1]
004 Value
1-307- Paper Thick Standard Thick2 ENG* [ 0 to 999 / 170 / 1]
005 Value
1-307- Paper Thick Standard Thick3 ENG* [ 0 to 999 / 221 / 1]
006 Value
1-307- Paper Thick Standard Thick4 ENG* [ 0 to 999 / 257 / 1]
007 Value
1-308- Paper Thikness Error Tray1 ENG* [ 0 to 999 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-15 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to

No. CTL Max/Init./Step]
001 Times
1-308- Paper Thikness Error Tray2 ENG* [ 0 to 999 / 0 / 1]
002 Times
1-308- Paper Thikness Error Tray3 ENG* [ 0 to 999 / 0 / 1]
003 Times
1-308- Paper Thikness Error Tray4 ENG* [ 0 to 999 / 0 / 1]
004 Times
1-308- Paper Thikness Error LCT ENG* [ 0 to 999 / 0 / 1]
005 Times
1-308- Paper Thikness Error Bypass Tray ENG* [ 0 to 999 / 0 / 1]
006 Times
1-314- Paper Size Tray1 ENG* [ 0 to 10 / 0 / 1]
001
1-314- Paper Size Tray2 ENG* [ 0 to 10 / 0 / 1]
002
1-314- Paper Size Tray3 ENG* [ 0 to 10 / 0 / 1]
003
1-314- Paper Size Tray4 ENG* [ 0 to 10 / 0 / 1]
004
1-314- Paper Size LCT ENG* [ 0 to 10 / 0 / 1]
005
1-314- Paper Size Bypass Tray ENG* [ 0 to 10 / 0 / 1]
006
1-316- Paper Thick Start Tray1 ENG* [ -50 to 50 / 0 /
001 Time 1msec]
1-316- Paper Thick Start Tray2 ENG* [ -50 to 50 / 0 /
002 Time 1msec]
1-316- Paper Thick Start Tray3 ENG* [ -50 to 50 / -20 /
003 Time 1msec]
1-316- Paper Thick Start Tray4 ENG* [ -50 to 50 / -20 /
004 Time 1msec]
1-316- Paper Thick Start LCT ENG* [ -50 to 50 / -20 /
005 Time 1msec]
1-316- Paper Thick Start Bypass Tray ENG* [ -50 to 50 / -20 /
006 Time 1msec]
1-907- Paper Feed Timing By-pass Size Decision Timing ENG* [ 1 to 3 / 3 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-16 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to

No. CTL Max/Init./Step]
029 Adj.
1-907- Paper Feed Timing ExitLineSpdUp EndPos:StdSpd ENG [ -30 to 15 / 0 / 1mm]
030 Adj.
1-907- Paper Feed Timing ExitLineSpdUp EndPos:MidSpd ENG [ -30 to 15 / 0 / 1mm]
031 Adj.
1-907- Paper Feed Timing ExitLineSpdUp EndPos:LowSpd ENG [ -30 to 15 / 0 / 1mm]
032 Adj.
1-907- Paper Feed Timing ExitLineSpdUp ENG [ -30 to 15 / 0 / 1mm]
033 Adj. EndPos:LowSpd:1200:Plain
1-907- Paper Feed Timing Bypass Emvlp. Regist. Stop ENG [ 0 to 40 / 0 / 1mm]
109 Adj. Timing
1-955- Fan Control Fusing Exit Fan High Temp Op ENG* [ 0 to 100 / 40 /
008 Sw Temp 0.1deg]
1-955- Fan Control Front Development Cooling Fan ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
021
1-955- Fan ON/OFF Switch Toner Bottle Cooling Fan ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
022 Set
1-955- Fan Control Fusing Exit Fan Low Speed Op ENG* [ 0 to 100 / 30 / 1%]
031 DUTY
1-955- Fan Control Fusing Exit Fan Middle Speed ENG* [ 0 to 100 / * / 1%]
032 Op DUTY *MP 2555: 60
*MP 3055: 60
*MP 3555: 60
*MP 4055
(NA/TWN/KOR): 60
*MP 4055
(EU/AP/CHN): 65
*MP 5055
(NA/TWN/KOR): 60
*MP 5055
(EU/AP/CHN): 65
*MP 6055
(NA/TWN/KOR): 60
*MP 6055
(EU/AP/CHN): 65
1-955- Fan Control Fusing Exit Fan Full Speed Op ENG* [ 0 to 100 / * / 1%]

SM Appendices 3-17 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to

No. CTL Max/Init./Step]
033 DUTY *MP 2555: 60
*MP 3055: 60
*MP 3555: 60
*MP 4055
(NA/TWN/KOR): 60
*MP 4055
(EU/AP/CHN): 80
*MP 5055
(NA/TWN/KOR): 60
*MP 5055
(EU/AP/CHN): 80
*MP 6055
(NA/TWN/KOR): 60
*MP 6055
(EU/AP/CHN): 80
1-955- Fan Control Extra Fan Op Decision time ENG* [ 0 to 10000 / 480 /
041 1sec]
1-955- Fan Control Fusing Exit Fan Extra Cooling ENG* [ 0 to 900 / * / 1sec]
042 Time Set *MP 2555: 0
*MP 3055: 0
*MP 3555: 0
*MP 4055
(NA/TWN/KOR): 0
*MP 4055
(EU/AP/CHN): 120
*MP 5055
(NA/TWN/KOR): 0
*MP 5055
(EU/AP/CHN): 120
*MP 055
(NA/TWN/KOR): 0
*MP 055
(EU/AP/CHN): 120
1-955- Fan Control Paper Exit Cooling Extra Cooling ENG* [ 0 to 900 / * / 1sec]
043 Time Set *MP 2555: 0
*MP 3055: 0

SM Appendices 3-18 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to

No. CTL Max/Init./Step]
*MP 3555: 0
*MP 4055
(NA/TWN/KOR): 0
*MP 4055
(EU/AP/CHN): 120
*MP 5055
(NA/TWN/KOR): 0
*MP 5055
(EU/AP/CHN): 120
*MP 055
(NA/TWN/KOR): 0
*MP 055
(EU/AP/CHN): 120
1-955- Fan Control AntiCondens.Fan Op Execution ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
051 Temp
1-955- Fan Control AntiCondens.Fan Op ON/OFF ENG* [ 0 to 30 / 3 / 0.1deg]
052 Setting

SM Appendices 3-19 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

3.2 SP GROUP 2000

SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step]
CTL
2-101- Reistration Main Dot ENG* [ -512 to 511 / 0 / 1dot]
001 Correction
2-102- LSU Adjustment Main Mag. ENG* [ -1 to 1 / 0 / 0.1%]
001
2-103- Erase Margin Lead Edge Width ENG [ 0 to 9.9 / 4.2 / 0.1mm]
001 Adjustment
2-103- Erase Margin Trail. Edge Width ENG [ 0 to 9.9 / 4.2 / 0.1mm]
002 Adjustment
2-103- Erase Margin Left ENG [ 0 to 9.9 / 2 / 0.1mm]
003 Adjustment
2-103- Erase Margin Right ENG [ 0 to 9.9 / 2 / 0.1mm]
004 Adjustment
2-103- Erase Margin Duplex Trail. L Size ENG [ -4 to 4 / 1 / 0.1mm]
006 Adjustment
2-103- Erase Margin Duplex Trail. M Size ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0.8 / 0.1mm]
007 Adjustment
2-103- Erase Margin Duplex Trail. S Size ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0.6 / 0.1mm]
008 Adjustment
2-103- Erase Margin Duplex Left Edge ENG [ 0 to 1.5 / 0.3 / 0.1mm]
009 Adjustment
2-103- Erase Margin Duplex Right Edge ENG [ 0 to 1.5 / 0.3 / 0.1mm]
010 Adjustment
2-103- Erase Margin Duplex Trail. L Size:Thick ENG [ -4 to 4 / 1 / 0.1mm]
011 Adjustment
2-103- Erase Margin Duplex Trail. M Size:Thick ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0.8 / 0.1mm]
012 Adjustment
2-103- Erase Margin Duplex Trail. S Size:Thick ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0.6 / 0.1mm]
013 Adjustment
2-103- Erase Margin Duplex Left Edge:Thick ENG [ 0 to 1.5 / 0.3 / 0.1mm]
014 Adjustment
2-103- Erase Margin Duplex Right Edge:Thick ENG [ 0 to 1.5 / 0.3 / 0.1mm]
015 Adjustment
2-103- Erase Margin Duplex Trail. L Size:Thin ENG [ -4 to 4 / 1 / 0.1mm]
016 Adjustment
2-103- Erase Margin Duplex Trail. M Size:Thin ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0.8 / 0.1mm]

SM Appendices 3-20 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step]

CTL
017 Adjustment
2-103- Erase Margin Duplex Trail. S Size:Thin ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0.6 / 0.1mm]
018 Adjustment
2-103- Erase Margin Lead Edge Width:Thin ENG [ 0 to 9.9 / 4.2 / 0.1mm]
019 Adjustment
2-103- Erase Margin Trail. Edge Width:Thin ENG [ 0 to 9.9 / 4.2 / 0.1mm]
020 Adjustment
2-109- Test Pattern Pattern Selection ENG [ 0 to 24 / 0 / 1]
003 0: None
1: 1dot Vertical
2: 2dot Vertical
3: 1dot Horizontal Line
4: 2dot Horizontal Line
5: Grid Vert
6: Grid Horizontal
7: Grid Pattern Small
8: Grid Pattern Large
9: Argyle Pattern Small
10: Argyle P:L
11: 1dot Ind. Pttrn
12: 2dot Ind. Pttrn
13: 4dot Ind. Pttrn
14: Trimming Area
15: HoundstoothH
16: Houndstooth V
17: Black Band H
18: Black Band V
19: Checker Flag
Pattern
20: Grayscale V
21: Grayscale H
22: 2 Beam Density
Pttrn
23: Full Dot Pattern
24: All White Pattern
2-109- Test Pattern Density ENG [ 0 to 15 / 15 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-21 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step]

CTL
006
2-110- LD Driver Error ENG* [ 0x0000 to 0xFFFF /
001 0x0000 / 1]
2-110- LD Driver Memory Transfer ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
005
2-152- Shad. Correct Strandard Speed ENG* [ 50 to 150 / 100 /
001 Setting 0.1%]
2-152- Shad. Correct Middle Speed ENG* [ 50 to 150 / 100 /
005 Setting 0.1%]
2-152- Shad. Correct Low Speed ENG* [ 50 to 150 / 100 /
009 Setting 0.1%]
2-160- Vertical Line Width 600dpi:Indet ENG* [ 10 to 15 / 15 / 1]
001
2-160- Vertical Line Width 1200dpi:Indet ENG* [ 10 to 15 / 15 / 1]
002
2-242- TS Operation Env. Log Clear ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
100 Log
2-250- Interval DownMode ON/OFF ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
001 0: OFF
1: ON
2-400- Paper Transfer Detatch timing in waiting ENG* [ 0 to 600 / 240 / 1min]
002 Roller Settings
2-906- Tailing Control Shift Range ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 0.1mm]
004
2-906- Tailing Control Number of Sheets ENG* [ 0 to 10 / 0 / 1sheet]
005
2-970- Interrupt Transfer Low-temperature, low-humidity ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
004 CL
2-970- Interrupt Transfer Moderate temperature and ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
005 CL humidity
2-970- Interrupt Transfer High-temperature, high- ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
006 CL humidity
2-980- Drum Idling Idle Time: Low-temperature, ENG* [ 0 to 60 / 0 / 1sec]
001 low-humidity
2-980- Drum Idling Idle Time: Moderate ENG* [ 0 to 60 / 0 / 1sec]
002 temperature and humidity

SM Appendices 3-22 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step]

CTL
2-980- Drum Idling Idle Time: High-temperature, ENG* [ 0 to 60 / 0 / 1sec]
003 high-humidity
2-990- Print Duty Control Forced CPM Down Thresh: No ENG* [ 0 to 5000 / 0 / 1page]
004 Duty Control:MM
2-990- Print Duty Control Forced CPM Down Thresh: ENG* [ 0 to 5000 / 16 /
007 Duty Control 1page]
2-990- Print Duty Control Down-time_BW: Duty Control ENG* [ 0 to 240000 / 25000 /
008 10msec]
2-990- Print Duty Control Execution Temp. Threshold ENG* [ 20 to 70 / 45.5 /
011 0.1deg]
2-990- Print Duty Control Forced CPM Down Thresh: No ENG* [ 0 to 5000 / 0 / 1page]
101 Duty Control: LL
2-990- Print Duty Control Forced CPM Down Thresh: No ENG* [ 0 to 5000 / 0 / 1page]
102 Duty Control: ML
2-990- Print Duty Control Forced CPM Down Thresh: No ENG* [ 0 to 5000 / 0 / 1page]
103 Duty Control: HH

SM Appendices 3-23 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables
Rev 09/18/2019

3.3 SP GROUP 3000

SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or CTL [Min to Max/Init./Step]
3-011-001 Manual ProCon :Exe Normal ProCon ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]

SP3-012 display result detail

Category Code Result name Description

Factory default setting(SP

00 and larger 00 Not executed
default)

10 and larger
11 Succeed -
Result(Normal)

Out of range from

21 ID Sensor Vsg adjust error
Vsg=4.0±x.x[V/step]

22 ID Sensor LED Adjust error Ifsg>Max

ID Sensor Output
23 Vsg_reg<Min(Max)
error(Positive reflect)
20 and larger
ID Sensor ID Sensor output
24 Vsg_dif<Min(Max)
error(Diffusion reflect)

ID Sensor offset Voltage

25 Voffset_reg>Max
error(Positive reflect)

ID Sensor offset Voltage

26 Voffset_dif>Max
error(Diffusion reflect)

40 and larger 41 TD sensor error (Max) Vt>Max

TD sensor
42 TD sensor error (Min) Vt<Min

45 ID Pattern extract error Can not detect ID Pattern

46 Vsp error (Max) Vsp>Max

45 and larger 47 Vsp error (Min) Vsp<Min

ID Pattern detect 48 Vsdp error (Max) Vsdp>Max

49 Vsdp error (Min) Vsdp<Min

50 Vmin_Bk/K2 error(Max) K:Vmin_Bk / CMY:K2>Max

SM Appendices 3-24 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

 Rev 09/18/2019
SP Mode Tables

51 Vmin_Bk/K2 error(Min) K:Vmin_Bk / CMY:K2<Min

52 K5 error(Max) K5>Max

53 K5 error(Min) K5<Min

K5 calculated approximate K5 calculated approximate

54
point error point <Min

55 Develop gamma error(Max) Develop gamma >Max

56 Develop gamma error(Min) Develop gamma <Min

Start developing voltage: Start developing voltage:

57
Vk error(Max) Vk>Max

Start developing voltage: Start developing

58
Vk error(Min) voltage :Vk<Min

Adhesion amount data for

59 Not enough valid data develop gamma calculation
point is under 2

61 LD won’t light P patter is not written.

Residual potential: Vr
62 Vr>Max
error
60 and lager
Potential adjust Electrified potential: Vd Vd can not be adjusted in
63
adjust error target range.

Exposure potential: Vpl Vpl can not be adjusted in

64
adjust error target range

Potential control method

90 Potential not adjust
is set as [0:FIX]
90 and lager
Result(End) Kill by door open, power
99 Kill off, error.
(Set when execute.)

SM Appendices 3-25 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

3-012- ProCon OK? History:Last ENG* [ 0 to 99 / 0 / 1]

001
3-012- ProCon OK? History:Last 2 ENG* [ 0 to 99 / 0 / 1]
002
3-012- ProCon OK? History:Last 3 ENG* [ 0 to 99 / 0 / 1]
003
3-012- ProCon OK? History:Last 4 ENG* [ 0 to 99 / 0 / 1]
004
3-012- ProCon OK? History:Last 5 ENG* [ 0 to 99 / 0 / 1]
005
3-012- ProCon OK? History:Last 6 ENG* [ 0 to 99 / 0 / 1]
006
3-012- ProCon OK? History:Last 7 ENG* [ 0 to 99 / 0 / 1]
007
3-012- ProCon OK? History:Last 8 ENG* [ 0 to 99 / 0 / 1]
008
3-012- ProCon OK? History:Last 9 ENG* [ 0 to 99 / 0 / 1]
009
3-012- ProCon OK? History:Last 10 ENG* [ 0 to 99 / 0 / 1]
010
3-030- Init TD Sensor :Exe Execute ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
001
3-030- InitTDSensor :Exe Init Temp: K ENG* [ -100 to 100 / 23 /
071 0.1deg]
3-030- InitTDSensor :Exe Init Rel Hum: K ENG* [ 0 to 100 / 50 / 0.1%RH]
081
3-030- InitTDSensor :Exe Init Abs Hum: K ENG* [ 0 to 100 / 10.3 /
091 0.01g/m3]
3-030- InitTDSensor :Exe Init Coverage: K ENG* [ 0 to 2147483647 / 0 /
101 1%]
3-030- InitTDSensor :Exe Total DC: Dev: K ENG* [ 0 to 2147483647 / 0 /
111 1%]
3-031- TD Sens Init OK? K ENG* [ 0 to 9 / 0 / 1]
001
3-050- Force Tnr Supply :Exe Execute ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
001
3-050- Force Tnr Supply :Exe Supply Quantity ENG* [ 0 to 5 / 0.5 / 0.1wt%]
021

SM Appendices 3-26 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

3-072- T Sensor: Check Execute Check ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]

001
3-073- T Sensor Measurement mu count ENG* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 1]
001 Value:
3-074- ID.Sens Check Execute ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
001
3-075- ID.Sens Measurement Vsg reg ENG* [ 0 to 5.5 / 0 / 0.01V]
001 Value:
3-075- ID.Sens Measurement Voffset ENG* [ 0 to 5.5 / 0 / 0.01V]
011 Value:
3-100- Tonner End Detection: Set ON/OFF ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
001 0: Enable
1: Disable
3-100- Tonner End Detection: Set TE Detection ENG* [ 0 to 2 / 1 / 1]
003 0: Page & Vt
1: Vt Only
2: Page Counter Only
3-101- Toner Status :Disp K ENG* [ 0 to 2 / 2 / 1]
001
3-133- TE Detect :Set Set Sheets ENG* [ 0 to 5000 / 90 / 1sheets]
001
3-133- TE Detect :Set Page Cnt:K ENG* [ 0 to 5000 / 0 / 1sheets]
011
3-200- TnrDensity K ENG* [ 0 to 25.5 / 0 / 0.1wt%]
001
3-201- TnrDensity Upper TC ENG* [ 1 to 15 / 5.5 / 0.1wt%]
001
3-201- TnrDensity Lower TC ENG* [ 1 to 15 / 2.7 / 0.1wt%]
002
3-210- TD.Sens:Vt :Disp Current ENG* [ 0 to 5.5 / 0 / 0.01V]
001
3-230- Vtref :Disp/Set Current ENG* [ 0 to 5 / 2.5 / 0.01V]
001
3-250- ImgArea :Disp ImgArea ENG* [ 0 to 9999 / 0 / 1cm2]
001
3-251- DotCoverage :Disp DotCoverage ENG* [ 0 to 100 / 0 / 0.01%]
001

SM Appendices 3-27 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

3-252- AccumImgArea :Disp ImgArea ENG* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 1cm^2]

001
3-260- Temperature/Humidity: Temperature ENG [ -5 to 45 / 0 / 0.1deg]
001 Display
3-260- Temperature/Humidity: Relative Humidity ENG [ 0 to 100 / 0 / 0.1%RH]
002 Display
3-260- Temperature/Humidity: Absolute Humidity ENG [ 0 to 100 / 0 / 0.01g/m3]
003 Display
3-310- ID.Sens :Voffset Voffset reg ENG* [ 0 to 5.5 / 0 / 0.01V]
001
3-310- ID.Sens :Voffset Voffset TM(Front) ENG* [ 0 to 5.5 / 0 / 0.01V]
021
3-320- Vsg Adj: Execute P Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
001
3-320- Vsg Adj: Execute Vsg Error Counter ENG* [ 0 to 99 / 0 / 1times]
011
3-321- Adjusted Vsg Vsg reg ENG* [ 0 to 5.5 / 0 / 0.01V]
001
3-322- Adjusted Ifsg Ifsg ENG* [ 0 to 50 / 10 / 0.001mA]
001
3-322- Adjusted Ifsg Ifsg Min ENG* [ 0 to 50 / 27 / 0.001mA]
011
3-323- Vsg Adj OK? Latest ENG* [ 0 to 9 / 0 / 1]
001
3-323- Vsg Adj OK? Latest 2 ENG* [ 0 to 9 / 0 / 1]
002
3-323- Vsg Adj OK? Latest 3 ENG* [ 0 to 9 / 0 / 1]
003
3-323- Vsg Adj OK? Latest 4 ENG* [ 0 to 9 / 0 / 1]
004
3-323- Vsg Adj OK? Latest 5 ENG* [ 0 to 9 / 0 / 1]
005
3-323- Vsg Adj OK? Latest 6 ENG* [ 0 to 9 / 0 / 1]
006
3-323- Vsg Adj OK? Latest 7 ENG* [ 0 to 9 / 0 / 1]
007
3-323- Vsg Adj OK? Latest 8 ENG* [ 0 to 9 / 0 / 1]
008

SM Appendices 3-28 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

3-323- Vsg Adj OK? Latest 9 ENG* [ 0 to 9 / 0 / 1]

009
3-323- Vsg Adj OK? Latest 10 ENG* [ 0 to 9 / 0 / 1]
010
3-331- ID.Sens Coef :Set Vsp Coef ENG* [ 0.5 to 1.5 / 1 / 0.001]
061
3-331- ID.Sens Coef :Set Vsdp Coef ENG* [ 0.5 to 1.5 / 1 / 0.001]
071
3-400- Toner Supply Type K ENG* [ 0 to 2 / 2 / 1]
001 0: FIXED
2: PID
3-411- Toner Supply Qty K ENG [ 0 to 40000 / 0 / 0.1mg]
001
3-440- Fixed Supply Mode Fixed Rate ENG* [ 0 to 100 / 10 / 1%]
001
3-500- ImgQltyAdj :ON/OFF ProCon ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
002 0: OFF
1: ON
3-510- ImgQltyAdj :ExeFlag Init Toner Replenish: K ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
031
3-520- ImgQltyAdj :Interval During Job ENG* [ 0 to 100 / 30 / 1pages]
001
3-520- ImgQltyAdj :Interval During Stand-by ENG* [ 0 to 100 / 5 / 1minute]
002
3-529- ProCon Interval Page Cnt:BW ENG* [ 0 to 5000 / 0 / 1sheets]
006 Control :Set
3-530- PowerON ProCon :Set Non-use Time Setting ENG* [ 0 to 1440 / 360 /
001 1minute]
3-530- PowerON ProCon :Set Temperature Range ENG* [ 0 to 99 / 10 / 1deg]
002
3-530- PowerON ProCon :Set Relative Humidity Range ENG* [ 0 to 99 / 50 / 1%RH]
003
3-530- PowerON ProCon :Set Absolute Humidity Range ENG* [ 0 to 99 / 6 / 1g/m3]
004
3-530- PowerON ProCon :Set Interval:BW ENG* [ 0 to 5000 / 100 /
005 1sheets]
3-530- PowerON ProCon :Set Page Cnt:BW ENG* [ 0 to 5000 / 0 / 1sheets]
007

SM Appendices 3-29 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

3-531- Non-useTime Procon :Set Non-use Time Setting ENG* [ 0 to 1440 / 360 /
001 1minute]
3-531- Non-useTime Procon :Set Temperature Range ENG* [ 0 to 99 / 10 / 1deg]
002
3-531- Non-useTime Procon :Set Relative Humidity Range ENG* [ 0 to 99 / 50 / 1%RH]
003
3-531- Non-useTime Procon :Set Absolute Humidity Range ENG* [ 0 to 99 / 6 / 1g/m3]
004
3-531- Non-useTime Procon :Set Maximum Execution ENG* [ 0 to 99 / 10 / 1times]
005 Number
3-533- Interrupt ProCon :Set Interval:Set:BW ENG* [ 0 to 5000 / 100 /
001 1sheets]
3-533- Interrupt ProCon :Set Interval:Disp:BW ENG* [ 0 to 5000 / 100 /
002 1sheets]
3-533- Interrupt ProCon :Set Corr(Short):BW ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0.5 / 0.01]
003
3-533- Interrupt ProCon :Set Corr(Mid):BW ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 0.01]
004
3-534- JobEnd ProCon :Set Interval:Set:BW ENG* [ 0 to 5000 / 100 /
001 1sheets]
3-534- JobEnd ProCon :Set Interval:Disp:BW ENG* [ 0 to 5000 / 100 /
002 1sheets]
3-534- JobEnd ProCon :Set Corr(Short):BW ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0.5 / 0.01]
003
3-534- JobEnd ProCon :Set Corr(Mid):BW ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 0.01]
004
3-551- Select Recycle/Waste Select Status ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
010
3-600- Select ProCon Potential Control ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
001 0: OFF
1: ON
3-611- Chrg DC Control Std Speed ENG* [ 300 to 2000 / 790 / 1-V]
001
3-612- Dev DC Control Std Speed ENG* [ 200 to 800 / 590 / 1-V]
001
3-613- LD Power Control PrcsCntrlCorrect ENG* [ 0 to 200 / 130 / 1%]
101

SM Appendices 3-30 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

3-623- LD Power :Set UpperLimit ENG* [ 100 to 200 / 132 / 1%]

101
3-623- LD Power :Set LowerLimit ENG* [ 0 to 100 / 67 / 1%]
111
3-630- Vsp :Disp/Set Current ENG* [ 0 to 5.5 / 0 / 0.01V]
001
3-630- Dev gamma :Disp/Set Target:K ENG* [ 0.5 to 2.55 / 0.95 /
011 0.01mg/cm2/-kV]
3-630- Dev gamma :Disp/Set TnrDensity ENG* [ 0 to 25.5 / 0 / 0.1wt%]
061
3-631- Vsdp :Disp Current ENG* [ 0 to 5.5 / 0 / 0.01V]
001
3-700- New Unit Detection ON/OFF Setting ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
001
3-701- Manual New Unit Set #PCU ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
002
3-701- Manual New Unit Set Cleaning Blade ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
009
3-701- Manual New Unit Set Charge Roller ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
018
3-701- Manual New Unit Set Cleaner:Charge Roller ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
019
3-701- Manual New Unit Set OPC ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
021
3-701- Manual New Unit Set Separation Pawl ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
022
3-701- Manual New Unit Set #Development Unit ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
023
3-701- Manual New Unit Set Development ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
024
3-701- Manual New Unit Set Development Filter ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
025
3-701- Manual New Unit Set Bearing:Development ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
028 Screw
3-701- Manual New Unit Set #PTR Unit ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
108
3-701- Manual New Unit Set #Fusing Unit ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
115

SM Appendices 3-31 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

3-701- Manual New Unit Set Fusing Belt ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]

116
3-701- Manual New Unit Set Pressure Roller ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
118
3-701- Manual New Unit Set Pressure Roller Bearings ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
119
3-701- Manual New Unit Set Waste Toner bottle ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
142
3-701- Manual New Unit Set ADF:Pick-up Roller ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
206
3-701- Manual New Unit Set ADF:Feeding Belt ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
207
3-701- Manual New Unit Set ADF:Reverse Roller ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
208
3-710- mu Concentration Control: mu sensor resolution ENG* [ 0 to 3 / 1 / 1]
011 Set
3-710- mu Concentration Control: Ini mu count offset ENG* [ 0 to 10000 / 5912 / 1]
012 Set
3-800- Waste Toner Full Threshold : Remainder ENG* [ 1 to 255 / 15 / 1day]
014 Detection days
3-903- Adjust Toner Remains Bottle Motor Time ENG* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 /
001 1msec]
3-903- Adjust Toner Remains Toner Level ENG* [ 0 to 100 / 100 / 1%]
002
3-903- Adjust Toner Remains Reset-Bottle Motor Time ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
004
3-903- Adjust Toner Remains 0:OFF 1:ON ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
005

SM Appendices 3-32 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

3.4 SP GROUP 4000

SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step]
CTL
4-008- Sub Scan ENG* [ -1 to 1 / 0 / 0.1%]
001 Magnification Adj
4-010- Sub Scan Registration ENG* [ -2 to 2 / 0 / 0.1mm]
001 Adj
4-011- Main Scan Reg ENG* [ -2.5 to 2.5 / 0 /
001 0.1mm]
4-012- Set Scale Mask Book:Sub LEdge ENG [ 0 to 3 / 1 / 0.1mm]
001
4-012- Set Scale Mask Book:Sub TEdge ENG [ 0 to 3 / 0 / 0.1mm]
002
4-012- Set Scale Mask Book:Main:LEdge ENG [ 0 to 3 / 1 / 0.1mm]
003
4-012- Set Scale Mask Book:Main:TEdge ENG [ 0 to 3 / 0 / 0.1mm]
004
4-012- Scanner Erase Margin: ADF: Leading Edge ENG* [ 0 to 3 / 0 / 0.1mm]
005 Scale
4-012- Scanner Erase Margin: ADF: Right ENG* [ 0 to 3 / 0 / 0.1mm]
007 Scale
4-012- Scanner Erase Margin: ADF: left ENG* [ 0 to 3 / 0 / 0.1mm]
008 Scale
4-013- Scanner Free run Book mode :Lamp Off ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
001
4-013- Scanner Free run Book mode :Lamp On ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
002
4-020- DF Dust Check Dust Detect:On/Off ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
001
4-020- DF Dust Check Dust Detect:Lvl ENG [ 0 to 8 / 4 / 1]
002
4-020- DF Dust Check Dust Reject:Lvl ENG [ 0 to 4 / 0 / 1]
003
4-020- DF Dust Check Dust Detect Level:Rear ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
011
4-020- DF Dust Check Correction Level:Rear ENG [ 0 to 8 / 4 / 1]
012
4-201- LoCPP edge level:K 600dpi 1bit edge1 ENG* [ 0 to 15 / 11 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-33 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step]

CTL
005
4-201- LoCPP edge level:K 600dpi 1bit edge23 ENG* [ 0 to 15 / 11 / 1]
006
4-201- LoCPP edge lv:K 1200dpi1bit edge12 ENG* [ 0 to 15 / 12 / 1]
011
4-201- LoCPP edge lv:K 1200dpi1bit edge34 ENG* [ 0 to 15 / 12 / 1]
012
4-301- Operation Check APS ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
001 Sensor
4-303- Min Size for APS ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
001 0: No Original
1: A5-Lengthwise
4-305- 8K/16K Detection ENG* [ 0 to 3 / 0 / 1]
001 0: Normal Dtct
1: A4-LEF LT-SEF
2: LT-LEF A4-SEF
3: 8K 16K
4-308- Scan Size Detection Detection ON/OFF ENG* [ 0 to 2 / 1 / 1]
001 0: OFF
1: ON
2: APS
4-309- Scan Size Original Density Thresh ENG* [ 0 to 255 / 26 / 1digit]
001 Detect:Setting
4-309- Scan Size Detection Time ENG* [ 20 to 100 / 60 /
002 Detect:Setting 20msec]
4-309- Scan Size Lamp ON:Delay Time ENG* [ 40 to 200 / 40 /
003 Detect:Setting 10msec]
4-309- Scan Size LED PWM Duty ENG* [ 0 to 100 / 45 / 1]
004 Detect:Setting
4-310- Scan Size Detect Value S1:R ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1digit]
001
4-310- Scan Size Detect Value S1:G ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1digit]
002
4-310- Scan Size Detect Value S1:B ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1digit]
003
4-310- Scan Size Detect Value S2:R ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1digit]

SM Appendices 3-34 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step]

CTL
004
4-310- Scan Size Detect Value S2:G ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1digit]
005
4-310- Scan Size Detect Value S2:B ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1digit]
006
4-310- Scan Size Detect Value S3:R ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1digit]
007
4-310- Scan Size Detect Value S3:G ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1digit]
008
4-310- Scan Size Detect Value S3:B ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1digit]
009
4-400- Org Edge Mask Book:Sub:LEdge(Left) ENG [ 0 to 3 / 0 / 0.1mm]
001
4-400- Org Edge Mask Book:Sub:TEdge(Right) ENG [ 0 to 3 / 0 / 0.1mm]
002
4-400- Org Edge Mask Book:Main:LEdge(Rear) ENG [ 0 to 3 / 0 / 0.1mm]
003
4-400- Org Edge Mask Book:Main:Tedge(Front) ENG [ 0 to 3 / 0 / 0.1mm]
004
4-400- Scanner Erase Margin ADF:Sub:LEdge(Left) ENG* [ 0 to 3 / 0 / 0.1mm]
005
4-400- Scanner Erase Margin ADF:Main:LEdge(Rear) ENG* [ 0 to 3 / 0 / 0.1mm]
007
4-400- Scanner Erase Margin ADF:Main:TEdge(Front) ENG* [ 0 to 3 / 0 / 0.1mm]
008
4-417- IPU Test Pattern Test Pattern ENG [ 0 to 8 / 0 / 1]
001 0: Scan Image
1: Gradation:Main A
2: Patch 16C
3: Grid pattern A
4: Slant grid pattern B
5: Argyle P:C
6: Argyle P:D
7: Scanned+Argyle
P:C
8: Scanned+Argyle

SM Appendices 3-35 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step]

CTL
P:D
4-429- Select Copy Data Copying ENG [ 0 to 3 / 3 / 1]
001 Security
4-429- Select Copy Data Scanning ENG [ 0 to 3 / 3 / 1]
002 Security
4-429- Select Copy Data Fax Operation ENG [ 0 to 3 / 3 / 1]
003 Security
4-600- SBU Version Display SBU ID ENG [ 0x00 to 0xFF / 0 / 1]
001
4-609- Gray Balance Set: R Book Scan ENG* [ -384 to 255 / -100 /
001 1digit]
4-609- Gray Balance Set: R DF Scan ENG* [ -384 to 255 / -100 /
002 1digit]
4-610- Gray Balance Set: G Book Scan ENG* [ -384 to 255 / -100 /
001 1digit]
4-610- Gray Balance Set: G DF Scan ENG* [ -384 to 255 / -100 /
002 1digit]
4-611- Gray Balance Set: B Book Scan ENG* [ -384 to 255 / -100 /
001 1digit]
4-611- Gray Balance Set: B DF Scan ENG* [ -384 to 255 / -100 /
002 1digit]
4-635- SSCG Correction Set Mode Selection ENG* [ 0 to 3 / 1 / 1]
001
4-646- Scan Adjust Error White level ENG* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 1]
001
4-646- Scan Adjust Error Black level ENG* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 1]
002
4-646- Scan Adjust Error SSCG Correction ENG* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 1]
003
4-647- Scanner Hard Error Power-ON ENG [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 1]
001
4-688- DF Density Adjustment ARDF ENG* [ 80 to 120 / 106 / 1%]
001
4-688- Scan Image Density 1-pass DF ENG* [ 80 to 120 / 101 / 1%]
002 Adjustment
4-699- SBU Test Pattern ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-36 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step]

CTL
001 Change
4-700- CIS ID Display ENG [ 0x00 to 0xFF / 0 / 1]
001
4-712- CIS GB Adj. Value: R ENG* [ 0 to 2048 / 1023 /
001 1digit]
4-713- CIS GB Adj. Value: G ENG* [ 0 to 2048 / 1023 /
001 1digit]
4-714- CIS GB Adj. Value: B ENG* [ 0 to 2048 / 1023 /
001 1digit]
4-730- FROM ADF Factory CIS Parameter ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
001 Setting
4-730- FROM Main Factory Execution ON/OFF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
002 Setting
4-730- FROM Main Factory Execution Flag ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
003 Setting
4-730- FROM Data Update ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
004
4-745- CIS Image Level Error ENG [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 1]
001 Flag
4-746- CIS GB Adj Error Flag ENG [ 0 to 7 / 0 / 1]
001
4-747- CIS Hard Error Flag ENG [ 0 to 15 / 0 / 1]
001
4-796- Low Density Color Front Side ENG* [ 0 to 3 / 0 / 1]
001 Correction 0: OFF
1: WEAK
2: MEDIUM
3: STRONG
4-796- Low Density Color Rear Side ENG* [ 0 to 3 / 0 / 1]
002 Correction 0: OFF
1: WEAK
2: MEDIUM
3: STRONG
4-797- Rear Side: Digital AE Background Erase Level ENG* [ 512 to 1535 / 932 / 1]
002
4-799- CIS TEST Pattern select ENG [ 0 to 5 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-37 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step]

CTL
001 0: Normal Scan
1: Fix Value Output
2: EO Fix Value Output
3: Main Scan
Gradation
4: Sub Scan Gradation
5: Grid Pattern
4-799- CIS TEST Pattern Even Output Level Setting ENG [ 0 to 1023 / 0 / 1digit]
002
4-799- CIS TEST Pattern Odd Output Level Setting ENG [ 0 to 1023 / 0 / 1digit]
003
4-803- Home Position Adj ENG* [ -2 to 2 / 0 / 0.1mm]
001 Value
4-853- Partial LED ON ON/OFF(Scan) ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
001
4-853- Partial LED ON ON/OFF(Size Detection) ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
002
4-860- Scan Size Shading Data ENG* [ 512 to 1023 / 800 /
001 Detect:Setting 1digit]
4-871- Distortion Correction Distortion Correction ENG [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
001 ON/OFF
4-871- Distortion Correction Distortion Initialization ENG [ 0 to 21 / 0 / 1]
002
4-871- Distortion Correction Magnification Adjust(DF) ENG* [ -0.35 to 0.35 / 0.11 /
003 0.01%]
4-871- Distortion Correction Magnification Adjust(FB) ENG* [ -0.35 to 0.35 / 0 /
004 0.01%]
4-903- Filter Setting Ind Dot Erase: Text ENG* [ 0 to 7 / 0 / 1]
001
4-903- Filter Setting Ind Dot Erase: Generation ENG* [ 0 to 7 / 0 / 1]
002 Copy
4-907- Gamma Correction Stamp Entry ENG [ 0 to 2 / 1 / 1]
001
4-938- ACS:Edge Mask Scan:Sub LEdge ENG* [ 0 to 31 / 15 / 1]
005
4-938- ACS:Edge Mask Scan:Sub TEdge ENG* [ 0 to 31 / 15 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-38 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step]

CTL
006
4-938- ACS:Edge Mask Scan:Main LEdge ENG* [ 0 to 31 / 15 / 1]
007
4-938- ACS:Edge Mask Scan:Main TEdge ENG* [ 0 to 31 / 15 / 1]
008
4-939- ACS:Color Range ENG* [ -2 to 2 / 0 / 1]
001
4-954- Restore Test Chart Chromaticity Rank ENG* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
005
4-958- Restore Test Chart: Chromaticity Rank ENG* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
005 Rear
4-994- Adj Txt/Photo Recog High Compression PDF ENG [ 0 to 2 / 1 / 1]
001 Level
4-996- White Paper Detection ENG [ 0 to 6 / 3 / 1]
001 Level

SM Appendices 3-39 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

3.5 SP GROUP 5000

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to Max/Init./Step]
No. or
CTL
5- Add display language 1-8 CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
009-
201
5- Add display language 9-16 CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
009-
202
5- Add display language 17-24 CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
009-
203
5- Add display language 25-32 CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
009-
204
5- Add display language 33-40 CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
009-
205
5- Add display language 41-48 CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
009-
206
5- Add display language 49-56 CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
009-
207
5- mm/inch Display Selection 0:mm 1:inch CTL* [ 0 to 1 / * / 1]
024- *NA: 1
001 *EU/AP/CHN/TWN/KOR:
0
0: mm
1: inch
5- Accounting counter Counter Method CTL* [ 0 to 7 / 0 / 1]
045- 0: Developments
001 1: Prints
2: Coverage
7: Coverage (YMC)
5- Paper Display Backing Paper CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
047- 0: OFF

SM Appendices 3-40 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to Max/Init./Step]

No. or
CTL
001 1: ON
5- Display IP address CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
055- 0: OFF
001 1: ON
5- Toner Remaining Icon CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
061- Display Change 0: Not display
001 1: Display
5- Toner Remaining Window CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 3 / 1]
061- Display Change
101
5- Part Replacement Alert #PCU CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
062- Display
002
5- Part Replacement Alert Cleaning Blade CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
062- Display
009
5- Part Replacement Alert Charge Roller CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
062- Display
018
5- Part Replacement Alert Cleaner:Charge Roller CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
062- Display
019
5- Part Replacement Alert OPC CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
062- Display
021
5- Part Replacement Alert Stripper CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
062- Display
022
5- Part Replacement Alert #Dev Unit CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
062- Display
023
5- Part Replacement Alert Developer CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
062- Display
024
5- Part Replacement Alert Development Filter CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-41 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to Max/Init./Step]

No. or
CTL
062- Display
025
5- Part Replacement Alert Bearing:Development CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
062- Display Screw
028
5- Part Replacement Alert #Paper Transfer Roller Unit CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
062- Display
108
5- Part Replacement Alert #Fusing Unit CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
062- Display 0: Not display
115 1: Display
5- Part Replacement Alert Fusing Belt CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
062- Display 0: Not display
116 1: Display
5- Part Replacement Alert Pressure Roller CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
062- Display 0: Not display
118 1: Display
5- Part Replacement Alert Bearing:Pressure Roller CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
062- Display
119
5- Part Replacement Alert #Waste Toner Bottle CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
062- Display 0: Not display
142 1: Display
5- Part Replacement Alert #ADF Pick-up Roller CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
062- Display 0: Not display
206 1: Display
5- Part Replacement Alert #ADF Paper Supply Belt CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
062- Display 0: Not display
207 1: Display
5- Part Replacement Alert #ADF Reverse Roller CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
062- Display 0: Not display
208 1: Display
5- PM Parts Display CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
066- 0: Not display
001 1: Display

SM Appendices 3-42 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to Max/Init./Step]

No. or
CTL
5- Part Replacement #PCU CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
067- Operation Type
002
5- Part Replacement Cleaning Blade CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
067- Operation Type
009
5- Part Replacement Charge Roller CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
067- Operation Type
018
5- Part Replacement Cleaner:Charge Roller CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
067- Operation Type
019
5- Part Replacement OPC CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
067- Operation Type
021
5- Part Replacement Stripper CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
067- Operation Type
022
5- Part Replacement #Dev Unit CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
067- Operation Type
023
5- Part Replacement Developer CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
067- Operation Type
024
5- Part Replacement Development Filter CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
067- Operation Type
025
5- Part Replacement Bearing:Development CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
067- Operation Type Screw
028
5- Part Replacement #Paper Transfer Roller Unit CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
067- Operation Type
108
5- Part Replacement #Fusing Unit CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
067- Operation Type 0: Service

SM Appendices 3-43 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to Max/Init./Step]

No. or
CTL
115 1: User
5- Part Replacement Fusing Belt CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
067- Operation Type 0: Service
116 1: User
5- Part Replacement Pressure Roller CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
067- Operation Type 0: Service
118 1: User
5- Part Replacement Bearing:Pressure Roller CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
067- Operation Type
119
5- Part Replacement #Waste Toner Bottle CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
067- Operation Type 0: Service
142 1: User
5- Part Replacement #ADF Pick-up Roller CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
067- Operation Type 0: Service
206 1: User
5- Part Replacement #ADF Paper Supply Belt CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
067- Operation Type 0: Service
207 1: User
5- Part Replacement #ADF Reverse Roller CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
067- Operation Type 0: Service
208 1: User
5- Set Bypass Paper Size CTL [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
071- Display 0: Off
001 1: On
5- Supply Part Replacement Waste Tonner Bottle CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
073- Operation Type 0:No Display
001 1:Display
5- Home Key Customization Login Setting CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
074-
002
5- Home Key Customization Show Home Edit Menu CTL* [ 0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
074-
050
5- Home Key Customization Function Setting CTL* [ 0 to 2 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-44 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to Max/Init./Step]

No. or
CTL
074- 0: Function disable
091 1: SDK application
2: Legacy application
(reserved)
5- Home Key Customization Product ID CTL* [ 0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 1]
074-
092
5- Home Key Customization Application Screen ID CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
074-
093
5- USB Keyboard Display setting CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
075- 0: Disable
003 1: Enable
5- ServiceSP Entry Code CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
081- Setting
001
5- LED Light Switch Setting Toner Near End CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
083- 0: OFF
001 1: ON
5- LED Light Switch Setting Waste Toner Near End CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
083-
002
5- Copy Auto Clear Setting Auto Clear Timer Setting CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
101- (0:ON 1:OFF)
202
5- Optional Counter Type Default Optional Counter CTL* [ 0 to 12 / 0 / 1]
113- Type
001
5- Optional Counter Type External Optional Counter CTL* [ 0 to 3 / 0 / 1]
113- Type
002
5- Optional Counter I/F MF Key Card Extension CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
114- 0: Not installed
001 1: Installed (scanning
accounting)

SM Appendices 3-45 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to Max/Init./Step]

No. or
CTL
5- Disable Copying CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
118- 0: Not disabled
001 1: Disabled
5- Mode Clear Opt. Counter 0:Yes 1:StandBy 2:No CTL* [ 0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
120- Removal 0: Yes (removed)
001 1: Standby (installed but
not used)
2: No (not removed)
5- Counter Up Timing 0:Feed 1:Exit CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
121- 0: Feed
001 1: Exit
5- Set F-size Document ENG [ 0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
126- 0: 8 1/2x13
001 1: 8 1/4x13
2: 8x13
5- APS OFF Mode CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
127- 0: Not disabled
001 1: Disabled
5- Paper Size Type Selection ENG* [ 0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
131- 0: JP
001 1: NA
2: EU
5- LG_Oficio Change ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
135-
001
5- Length Setting Bypass(0:OFF 1:Long) CTL [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
150- 0: OFF
001 1: ON
5- Fax Printing Mode at CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
167- Optional Counter Off 0: Automatic printing
001 1: No automatic printing
5- CE Login CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
169- 0: Disabled
001 1: Enabled
5- Size Adjust TRAY 1: 1 ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-46 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to Max/Init./Step]

No. or
CTL
181- 0: A4 LEF
001 1: 8 1/2x11 LEF
5- Size Adjust TRAY 1: 2 ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
181- 0: A3
002 1: 11x17
5- Size Adjust TRAY 1: 3 ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
181- 0: B4
003 1: 8 1/2x14 SEF
5- Size Adjust TRAY 1: 4 ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
181- 0: B5 LEF
004 1: 7 1/4x10 1/2 LEF
5- Size Adjust TRAY 2: 1 ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
181- 0: A4 LEF
005 1: 8 1/2x11 LEF
5- Size Adjust TRAY 2: 2 ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
181- 0: A3
006 1: 11x17
5- Size Adjust TRAY 2: 3 ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
181- 0: B4
007 1: 8 1/2x14 SEF
5- Size Adjust TRAY 2: 4 ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
181- 0: B5 LEF
008 1: 7 1/4x10 1/2 LEF
5- Size Adjust TRAY 3/T-LCT: 1 ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
181- 0: A4LEF
009 1: LTLEF
5- Size Adjust TRAY 3: 2 ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
181- 0: A3
010 1: DLT
5- Size Adjust TRAY 3: 3 ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
181- 0: B4
011 1: LG
5- Size Adjust TRAY 3: 4 ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
181- 0: B5LEF
012 1: ExeLEF

SM Appendices 3-47 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to Max/Init./Step]

No. or
CTL
5- Size Adjust TRAY 3: 5 ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
181- 0: 12.6x17.7
013 1: 12x18
5- Size Adjust TRAY 4: 1 ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
181- 0: A4LEF
014 1: LTLEF
5- Size Adjust TRAY 4: 2 ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
181- 0: A3
015 1: DLT
5- Size Adjust TRAY 4: 3 ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
181- 0: B4
016 1: LG
5- Size Adjust TRAY 4: 4 ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
181- 0: B5LEF
017 1: ExeLEF
5- Size Adjust TRAY 4: 5 ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
181- 0: 12.6x17.7
018 1: 12x18
5- Size Adjust TRAY 5: 1 ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
181- 0: A4LEF
019 1: LTLEF
5- Size Adjust TRAY 5: 2 ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
181- 0: A3
020 1: DLT
5- Size Adjust TRAY 5: 3 ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
181- 0: B4
021 1: LG
5- Size Adjust TRAY 5: 4 ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
181- 0: B5LEF
022 1: ExeLEF
5- Size Adjust TRAY 5: 5 ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
181- 0: 12.6x17.7
023 1: 12x18
5- Size Adjust LCT ENG* [ 0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
181- 0: A4LEF

SM Appendices 3-48 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to Max/Init./Step]

No. or
CTL
024 1: LTLEF
2: B5LEF
5- RK4 ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
186-
001
5- Copy Nv Version CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
188-
001
5- Mode Set Power Str Set CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
191- 0: OFF
001 1: ON
5- Limitless SW CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
195- 0: Productivity Precede
001 1: Use paper up
5- Paper Exit After Staple End Staple(1:Without 2:After CTL [ 0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
199- 0:Auto)
001
5- Paper Exit After Staple End Saddle(1:Without 2:After CTL [ 0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
199- 0:Auto)
002
5- Paper Exit After Staple End Stapless(1:Without 2:After CTL [ 0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
199- 0:Auto)
003
5- Page Numbering Duplex Printout Left/Right CTL* [ -1000 to 1000 / 0 /
212- Position of Left/Right 0.01mm]
003 Facing
5- Page Numbering Duplex Printout Top/Bottom CTL* [ -1000 to 1000 / 0 /
212- Position of Left/Right 0.01mm]
004 Facing
5- Page Numbering Duplex Printout Left/Right CTL* [ -1000 to 1000 / 0 /
212- Position of Top/Bottom 0.01mm]
018 Facing
5- Page Numbering Duplex Printout Top/Bottom CTL* [ -1000 to 1000 / 0 /
212- Position of Top/Bottom 0.01mm]
019 Facing

SM Appendices 3-49 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to Max/Init./Step]

No. or
CTL
5- Page Numbering Allow Page No. Entry CTL* [ 2 to 9 / 9 / 1]
227-
201
5- Page Numbering Zero Surplus Setting CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
227- 0:OFF
202 1:ON
5- Set Time Time Difference CTL* [ -1440 to 1440 / * / 1]
302- *NA: -300
002 *EU: 60
*AP/CHN/TWN: 480
*KOR: 540
5- Auto Off Set Auto Off Limit Set CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
305-
101
5- Daylight Saving Time Setting CTL* [ 0 to 1 / * / 1]
307- *NA/EU: 1
001 *AP/CHN/TWN/KOR: 0
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
5- Daylight Saving Time Rule Set(Start) CTL* [ 0 to 0xffffffff / * / 1]
307- *NA: 0x03200210
003 *EU: 0x03500010
*AP: 0x10500010
*CHN/TWN/KOR: 0
5- Daylight Saving Time Rule Set(End) CTL* [ 0 to 0xffffffff / * / 1]
307- *NA: 0x11100200
004 *EU: 0x10500100
*AP: 0x03100000
*CHN/TWN/KOR: 0
5- Access Control Default Document ACL CTL* [ 0 to 3 / 0 / 1]
401-
103
5- Access Control Authentication Time CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1sec]
401-
104

SM Appendices 3-50 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to Max/Init./Step]

No. or
CTL
5- Access Control Extend Certification Detail CTL* [ 0 to 0xff / 0 / 1]
401-
162
5- Access Control SDK1 UniqueID CTL* [ 0 to 0xFFFFFFFF / 0 /
401- 1]
200
5- Access Control SDK1 Certification Method CTL* [ 0 to 0xFF / 0 / 1]
401-
201
5- Access Control SDK2 UniqueID CTL* [ 0 to 0xFFFFFFFF / 0 /
401- 1]
210
5- Access Control SDK2 Certification Method CTL* [ 0 to 0xFF / 0 / 1]
401-
211
5- Access Control SDK3 UniqueID CTL* [ 0 to 0xFFFFFFFF / 0 /
401- 1]
220
5- Access Control SDK3 Certification Method CTL* [ 0 to 0xFF / 0 / 1]
401-
221
5- Access Control SDK Certification Device CTL* [ 0 to 0xff / 0 / 1]
401- 0-1: SDK authentication
230 available
0-0: Disable all functions
1-1: SKB Display
1-0: Disable
2-1: Administrator login
2-0: Disable
3 to 7-0: Reserved (set
“0” only)
5- Access Control Detail Option CTL* [ 0 to 0xff / 0 / 1]
401- 0: Logout confirm option
240 -1: ON, 0: OFF
2 to 1: Auto-logout

SM Appendices 3-51 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to Max/Init./Step]

No. or
CTL
timer(retry timer)
-11: 30sec, 10: 20sec,
01: 10sec, 00: 60sec
3: personal authority /
Group authority and
operation
-1: ON, 0: OFF
4: Skip password entry
-1: ON, 0: OFF
5: Set the display of the
remaining Frequence
-1: ON, 0: OFF
6 to 7: Set the display
time
-1: ON, 0: OFF
5- Access Control SDKJ1 Limit Setting CTL* [ 0 to 0xFF / 0 / 1]
402-
101
5- Access Control SDKJ2 Limit Setting CTL* [ 0 to 0xFF / 0 / 1]
402-
102
5- Access Control SDKJ3 Limit Setting CTL* [ 0 to 0xFF / 0 / 1]
402-
103
5- Access Control SDKJ4 Limit Setting CTL* [ 0 to 0xFF / 0 / 1]
402-
104
5- Access Control SDKJ5 Limit Setting CTL* [ 0 to 0xFF / 0 / 1]
402-
105
5- Access Control SDKJ6 Limit Setting CTL* [ 0 to 0xFF / 0 / 1]
402-
106
5- Access Control SDKJ7 Limit Setting CTL* [ 0 to 0xFF / 0 / 1]
402-

SM Appendices 3-52 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to Max/Init./Step]

No. or
CTL
107
5- Access Control SDKJ8 Limit Setting CTL* [ 0 to 0xFF / 0 / 1]
402-
108
5- Access Control SDKJ9 Limit Setting CTL* [ 0 to 0xFF / 0 / 1]
402-
109
5- Access Control SDKJ10 Limit Setting CTL* [ 0 to 0xFF / 0 / 1]
402-
110
5- Access Control SDKJ11 Limit Setting CTL* [ 0 to 0xFF / 0 / 1]
402-
111
5- Access Control SDKJ12 Limit Setting CTL* [ 0 to 0xFF / 0 / 1]
402-
112
5- Access Control SDKJ13 Limit Setting CTL* [ 0 to 0xFF / 0 / 1]
402-
113
5- Access Control SDKJ14 Limit Setting CTL* [ 0 to 0xFF / 0 / 1]
402-
114
5- Access Control SDKJ15 Limit Setting CTL* [ 0 to 0xFF / 0 / 1]
402-
115
5- Access Control SDKJ16 Limit Setting CTL* [ 0 to 0xFF / 0 / 1]
402-
116
5- Access Control SDKJ17 Limit Setting CTL* [ 0 to 0xFF / 0 / 1]
402-
117
5- Access Control SDKJ18 Limit Setting CTL* [ 0 to 0xFF / 0 / 1]
402-
118
5- Access Control SDKJ19 Limit Setting CTL* [ 0 to 0xFF / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-53 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to Max/Init./Step]

No. or
CTL
402-
119
5- Access Control SDKJ20 Limit Setting CTL* [ 0 to 0xFF / 0 / 1]
402-
120
5- Access Control SDKJ21 Limit Setting CTL* [ 0 to 0xFF / 0 / 1]
402-
121
5- Access Control SDKJ22 Limit Setting CTL* [ 0 to 0xFF / 0 / 1]
402-
122
5- Access Control SDKJ23 Limit Setting CTL* [ 0 to 0xFF / 0 / 1]
402-
123
5- Access Control SDKJ24 Limit Setting CTL* [ 0 to 0xFF / 0 / 1]
402-
124
5- Access Control SDKJ25 Limit Setting CTL* [ 0 to 0xFF / 0 / 1]
402-
125
5- Access Control SDKJ26 Limit Setting CTL* [ 0 to 0xFF / 0 / 1]
402-
126
5- Access Control SDKJ27 Limit Setting CTL* [ 0 to 0xFF / 0 / 1]
402-
127
5- Access Control SDKJ28 Limit Setting CTL* [ 0 to 0xFF / 0 / 1]
402-
128
5- Access Control SDKJ29 Limit Setting CTL* [ 0 to 0xFF / 0 / 1]
402-
129
5- Access Control SDKJ30 Limit Setting CTL* [ 0 to 0xFF / 0 / 1]
402-
130

SM Appendices 3-54 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to Max/Init./Step]

No. or
CTL
5- Access Control SDKJ1 ProductID CTL* [ 0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 1]
402-
141
5- Access Control SDKJ2 ProductID CTL* [ 0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 1]
402-
142
5- Access Control SDKJ3 ProductID CTL* [ 0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 1]
402-
143
5- Access Control SDKJ4 ProductID CTL* [ 0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 1]
402-
144
5- Access Control SDKJ5 ProductID CTL* [ 0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 1]
402-
145
5- Access Control SDKJ6 ProductID CTL* [ 0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 1]
402-
146
5- Access Control SDKJ7 ProductID CTL* [ 0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 1]
402-
147
5- Access Control SDKJ8 ProductID CTL* [ 0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 1]
402-
148
5- Access Control SDKJ9 ProductID CTL* [ 0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 1]
402-
149
5- Access Control SDKJ10 ProductID CTL* [ 0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 1]
402-
150
5- Access Control SDKJ11 ProductID CTL* [ 0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 1]
402-
151
5- Access Control SDKJ12 ProductID CTL* [ 0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 1]
402-

SM Appendices 3-55 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to Max/Init./Step]

No. or
CTL
152
5- Access Control SDKJ13 ProductID CTL* [ 0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 1]
402-
153
5- Access Control SDKJ14 ProductID CTL* [ 0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 1]
402-
154
5- Access Control SDKJ15 ProductID CTL* [ 0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 1]
402-
155
5- Access Control SDKJ16 ProductID CTL* [ 0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 1]
402-
156
5- Access Control SDKJ17 ProductID CTL* [ 0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 1]
402-
157
5- Access Control SDKJ18 ProductID CTL* [ 0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 1]
402-
158
5- Access Control SDKJ19 ProductID CTL* [ 0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 1]
402-
159
5- Access Control SDKJ20 ProductID CTL* [ 0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 1]
402-
160
5- Access Control SDKJ21 ProductID CTL* [ 0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 1]
402-
161
5- Access Control SDKJ22 ProductID CTL* [ 0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 1]
402-
162
5- Access Control SDKJ23 ProductID CTL* [ 0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 1]
402-
163
5- Access Control SDKJ24 ProductID CTL* [ 0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-56 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to Max/Init./Step]

No. or
CTL
402-
164
5- Access Control SDKJ25 ProductID CTL* [ 0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 1]
402-
165
5- Access Control SDKJ26 ProductID CTL* [ 0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 1]
402-
166
5- Access Control SDKJ27 ProductID CTL* [ 0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 1]
402-
167
5- Access Control SDKJ28 ProductID CTL* [ 0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 1]
402-
168
5- Access Control SDKJ29 ProductID CTL* [ 0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 1]
402-
169
5- Access Control SDKJ30 ProductID CTL* [ 0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 1]
402-
170
5- User Code Count Clear User Code Count Clear CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
404-
001
5- User Code Count Clear User Code Count Clear CTL [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
404- Permit Setting
101
5- LDAP-Certification Simplified Authentication CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
411- 1: On
004 0: Off
5- LDAP-Certification Password Null Not Permit CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
411- 0: Password NULL not
005 permitted.
1: Password NULL
permitted.
5- LDAP-Certification Detail Option CTL* [ 0 to 0xff / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-57 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to Max/Init./Step]

No. or
CTL
411- 0: OFF
006 1: ON
5- Krb-Certification Encrypt Mode CTL* [ 0 to 0xFF / 0x1F / 1]
412-
100
5- Lockout Setting Lockout On/Off CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
413- 0: Off
001 1: On
5- Lockout Setting Lockout Threshold CTL* [ 1 to 10 / 5 / 1]
413-
002
5- Lockout Setting Cancelation On/Off CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
413- 0: Off (no wait time,
003 lockout not cancelled)
1: On (system waits,
cancels lockout if correct
user ID and password
are entered)
5- Lockout Setting Cancelation Time CTL* [ 1 to 9999 / 60 / 1min]
413-
004
5- Access Mitigation Mitigation On/Off CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
414- 0: OFF
001 1: ON
5- Access Mitigation Mitigation Time CTL* [ 0 to 60 / 15 / 1min]
414-
002
5- Password Attack Permissible Number CTL* [ 0 to 100 / 30 / 1]
415-
001
5- Password Attack Detect Time CTL* [ 1 to 10 / 5 / 1]
415-
002
5- Access Information Access User Max Num CTL* [ 50 to 200 / 200 / 1]
416-

SM Appendices 3-58 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to Max/Init./Step]

No. or
CTL
001
5- Access Information Access Password Max CTL* [ 50 to 200 / 200 / 1]
416- Num
002
5- Access Information Monitor Interval CTL* [ 1 to 10 / 3 / 1]
416-
003
5- Access Attack Access Permissible CTL* [ 0 to 500 / 100 / 1]
417- Number
001
5- Access Attack Attack Detect Time CTL* [ 10 to 30 / 10 / 1sec]
417-
002
5- Access Attack Productivity Fall Waite CTL* [ 0 to 9 / 3 / 1sec]
417-
003
5- Access Attack Attack Max Num CTL* [ 50 to 200 / 200 / 1]
417-
004
5- User Authentication Copy CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
420- 0: On
001 1: Off
5- User Authentication DocumentServer CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
420- 0: On
011 1: Off
5- User Authentication Fax CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
420- 0: On
021 1: Off
5- User Authentication Scanner CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
420- 0: On
031 1: Off
5- User Authentication Printer CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
420- 0: On
041 1: Off
5- User Authentication SDK1 CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-59 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to Max/Init./Step]

No. or
CTL
420- 0: ON
051 1: OFF
5- User Authentication SDK2 CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
420- 0: ON
061 1: OFF
5- User Authentication SDK3 CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
420- 0: ON
071 1: OFF
5- User Authentication Browser CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
420- 0: ON
081 1: OFF
5- Auth Dialog Message Message Change On/Off CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
430- Change
001
5- Auth Dialog Message Message Text Download CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
430- Change
002
5- Auth Dialog Message Message Text ID CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
430- Change
003
5- External Auth User Preset Tag CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
431-
010
5- External Auth User Preset Entry CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
431-
011
5- External Auth User Preset Group CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
431-
012
5- External Auth User Preset Mail CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
431-
020
5- External Auth User Preset Fax CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
431-
030

SM Appendices 3-60 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to Max/Init./Step]

No. or
CTL
5- External Auth User Preset FaxSub CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
431-
031
5- External Auth User Preset Folder CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
431-
032
5- External Auth User Preset ProtectCode CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
431-
033
5- External Auth User Preset SmtpAuth CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
431-
034
5- External Auth User Preset LdapAuth CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
431-
035
5- External Auth User Preset Smb Ftp Fldr Auth CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
431-
036
5- External Auth User Preset AcntAcl CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
431-
037
5- External Auth User Preset DocumentAcl CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
431-
038
5- External Auth User Preset CertCrypt CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
431-
040
5- External Auth User Preset UserLimitCount CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
431-
050
5- Authentication Error Code System Log Disp CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
481- 0: Off
001 1: On
5- Authentication Error Code Panel Disp CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
481- 1: On

SM Appendices 3-61 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to Max/Init./Step]

No. or
CTL
002 0: Off
5- MF KeyCard Job Permit Setting CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
490- 0: Disabled. Cancels
001 operation without a user
code.
1: Enabled. Allows
operation without a user
code.
5- Optional Counter Detail Option CTL* [ 0 to 0xff / 0 / 1]
491-
001
5- PM Alarm PM Alarm Level CTL* [ 0 to 9999 / 0 / 1]
501- 0: Alarm off
001 1 to 9999: Alarm goes off
when Value (1 to 9999) x
1000 > PM counter
5- Jam Alarm CTL* [ 0 to 3 / 3 / 1]
504- 0: Z
001 1: L
2: M
3: H
5- Jam Alarm Threshold CTL [ 1 to 99 / 10 / 1]
504-
002
5- Error Alarm CTL* [ 0 to 255 / * / 1]
505- *MP 2555: 20
001 *MP 3055: 25
*MP 3555: 35
*MP 4055: 45
*MP 5055: 60
*MP 6055: 75
0: Alarm Off
5- Error Alarm Threshold CTL [ 1 to 99 / 5 / 1]
505-
002

SM Appendices 3-62 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to Max/Init./Step]

No. or
CTL
5- Supply/CC Alarm Paper Supply Alarm CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
507- 0: OFF
001 1: ON
5- Supply/CC Alarm Staple Supply Alarm CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
507- 0: OFF
002 1: ON
5- Supply/CC Alarm Toner Supply Alarm CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
507- 0: OFF
003 1: ON
5- Supply/CC Alarm Toner Call Timing CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
507- 0: Toner bottle
080 replacement
1: Less than toner
threshold
5- Supply/CC Alarm Toner Call Threshold CTL* [ 10 / 10 / Fixed value]
507- This program enables
081 only if SP5-507-080 is
“1”.
The threshold for
triggering a Toner Call is
fixed at 10%, and cannot
be changed. Therefore,
the timing of the toner
auto-delivery service and
alerts on the operation
panel also cannot be
changed.
5- Supply/CC Alarm Interval: Others CTL* [ 250 to 10000 / 1000 / 1]
507-
128
5- Supply/CC Alarm Interval: A3 CTL* [ 250 to 10000 / 1000 / 1]
507-
132
5- Supply/CC Alarm Interval: A4 CTL* [ 250 to 10000 / 1000 / 1]
507-

SM Appendices 3-63 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to Max/Init./Step]

No. or
CTL
133
5- Supply/CC Alarm Interval: A5 CTL* [ 250 to 10000 / 1000 / 1]
507-
134
5- Supply/CC Alarm Interval: B4 CTL* [ 250 to 10000 / 1000 / 1]
507-
141
5- Supply/CC Alarm Interval: B5 CTL* [ 250 to 10000 / 1000 / 1]
507-
142
5- Supply/CC Alarm Interval: DLT CTL* [ 250 to 10000 / 1000 / 1]
507-
160
5- Supply/CC Alarm Interval: LG CTL* [ 250 to 10000 / 1000 / 1]
507-
164
5- Supply/CC Alarm Interval: LT CTL* [ 250 to 10000 / 1000 / 1]
507-
166
5- Supply/CC Alarm Interval: HLT CTL* [ 250 to 10000 / 1000 / 1]
507-
172
5- CC Call Jam Remains CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
508- 0: Disable
001 1: Enable
5- CC Call Continuous Jams CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
508- 0: Disable
002 1: Enable
5- CC Call Continuous Door Open CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
508- 0: Disable
003 1: Enable
5- CC Call Jam Detection: Time CTL* [ 3 to 30 / 10 / 1]
508- Length
011
5- CC Call Jam Detection: Continuous CTL* [ 2 to 10 / 5 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-64 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to Max/Init./Step]

No. or
CTL
508- Count
012
5- CC Call Door Open: Time Length CTL* [ 3 to 30 / 10 / 1]
508-
013
5- PartsAlermlevelCount Normal CTL [ 1 to 9999 / 300 / 1]
513-
001
5- PartsAlermlevelCount Df CTL [ 1 to 9999 / 300 / 1]
513-
002
5- PartsAlermlev Normal CTL [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
514-
001
5- PartsAlermlev Df CTL [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
514-
002
5- SC/Alarm Setting SC Call CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
515- 0: OFF
001 1: ON
5- SC/Alarm Setting Service Parts Near End CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
515- Call 0: OFF
002 1: ON
5- SC/Alarm Setting Service Parts End Call CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
515- 0: OFF
003 1: ON
5- SC/Alarm Setting User Call CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
515- 0: OFF
004 1: ON
5- SC/Alarm Setting Communication Test Call CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
515- 0: OFF
006 1: ON
5- SC/Alarm Setting Machine Information Notice CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
515- 0: OFF
007 1: ON

SM Appendices 3-65 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to Max/Init./Step]

No. or
CTL
5- SC/Alarm Setting Alarm Notice CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
515- 0: OFF
008 1: ON
5- SC/Alarm Setting Supply Automatic Ordering CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
515- Call 0: OFF
010 1: ON
5- SC/Alarm Setting Supply Management CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
515- Report Call 0: OFF
011 1: ON
5- SC/Alarm Setting Jam/Door Open Call CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
515- 0: OFF
012 1: ON
5- SC/Alarm Setting Timeout:Manual Call CTL* [ 1 to 255 / 5 / 1min]
515-
050
5- SC/Alarm Setting Timeout:Other Call CTL [ 1 to 255 / 10 / 1min]
515-
051
5- Get Machine Information AutoDiscovery Execution CTL [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
517- Setting
061
5- Get Machine Information AutoDiscovery Execution CTL [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
517- Interval
062
5- Get Machine Information AutoDiscovery Execution CTL [ 0 to 6 / 0 / 1]
517- Weekday
063
5- Get Machine Information AutoDiscovery Execution CTL [ 0 to 23 / 0 / 1]
517- Hour
064
5- Get Machine Information AutoDiscovery Execution CTL [ 0 to 59 / 0 / 1]
517- Minute
065
5- Get Machine Information AutoDiscovery SNMP CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
517- Community Name

SM Appendices 3-66 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to Max/Init./Step]

No. or
CTL
066
5- Network Setting NAT Machine Port1 CTL* [ 1 to 65535 / 49101 / 1]
728-
001
5- Network Setting NAT UI Port1 CTL* [ 1 to 65535 / 55101 / 1]
728-
002
5- Network Setting NAT Machine Port2 CTL* [ 1 to 65535 / 49102 / 1]
728-
003
5- Network Setting NAT UI Port2 CTL* [ 1 to 65535 / 55102 / 1]
728-
004
5- Network Setting NAT Machine Port3 CTL* [ 1 to 65535 / 49103 / 1]
728-
005
5- Network Setting NAT UI Port3 CTL* [ 1 to 65535 / 55103 / 1]
728-
006
5- Network Setting NAT Machine Port4 CTL* [ 1 to 65535 / 49104 / 1]
728-
007
5- Network Setting NAT UI Port4 CTL* [ 1 to 65535 / 55104 / 1]
728-
008
5- Network Setting NAT Machine Port5 CTL* [ 1 to 65535 / 49105 / 1]
728-
009
5- Network Setting NAT UI Port5 CTL* [ 1 to 65535 / 55105 / 1]
728-
010
5- Network Setting NAT Machine Port6 CTL* [ 1 to 65535 / 49106 / 1]
728-
011
5- Network Setting NAT UI Port6 CTL* [ 1 to 65535 / 55106 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-67 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to Max/Init./Step]

No. or
CTL
728-
012
5- Network Setting NAT Machine Port7 CTL* [ 1 to 65535 / 49107 / 1]
728-
013
5- Network Setting NAT UI Port7 CTL* [ 1 to 65535 / 55107 / 1]
728-
014
5- Network Setting NAT Machine Port8 CTL* [ 1 to 65535 / 49108 / 1]
728-
015
5- Network Setting NAT UI Port8 CTL* [ 1 to 65535 / 55108 / 1]
728-
016
5- Network Setting NAT Machine Port9 CTL* [ 1 to 65535 / 49109 / 1]
728-
017
5- Network Setting NAT UI Port9 CTL* [ 1 to 65535 / 55109 / 1]
728-
018
5- Network Setting NAT Machine Port10 CTL* [ 1 to 65535 / 49110 / 1]
728-
019
5- Network Setting NAT UI Port10 CTL* [ 1 to 65535 / 55110 / 1]
728-
020
5- Network Setting PacketCapture CTL [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
728-
101
5- Network Setting PacketCapture:mode CTL [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
728-
102
5- Network Setting PacketCapture:interface CTL [ 0 to 3 / 0 / 1]
728-
103

SM Appendices 3-68 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to Max/Init./Step]

No. or
CTL
5- Network Setting PacketCapture:length CTL [ 54 to 65535 / 128 / 1]
728-
104
5- Network Setting PacketCapture:broadcast CTL [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
728-
105
5- Network Setting PacketCapture:specify port CTL [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
728-
106
5- Network Setting PacketCapture:portnumber CTL [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 1]
728-
107
5- Network Setting PacketCapture:time CTL [ 0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 1]
728-
108
5- Extended Function Setting JavaTM Platform setting CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
730- 0: Disable, 1: Enable
001
5- Extended Function Setting Expiration Prior Alarm Set CTL* [ 0 to 999 / 20 / 1days]
730-
010
5- Counter Effect Change Mk1 Cnt(Paper- CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
731- >Combine)
001
5- PDF Setting PDF/A Fixed CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
734-
001
5- Node Authentication CTL* [ 1 to 255 / 60 / 1sec]
741- Timuout
001
5- DeemedPowerConsumption Controller Standby CTL* [ 0 to 9999 / 0 / 1]
745-
211
5- DeemedPowerConsumption STR CTL* [ 0 to 9999 / 0 / 1]
745-

SM Appendices 3-69 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to Max/Init./Step]

No. or
CTL
212
5- DeemedPowerConsumption Main Power Off CTL* [ 0 to 9999 / 0 / 1]
745-
213
5- DeemedPowerConsumption Scanning and Printing CTL* [ 0 to 9999 / 0 / 1]
745-
214
5- DeemedPowerConsumption Printing CTL* [ 0 to 9999 / 0 / 1]
745-
215
5- DeemedPowerConsumption Scanning CTL* [ 0 to 9999 / 0 / 1]
745-
216
5- DeemedPowerConsumption Engine Standby CTL* [ 0 to 9999 / 0 / 1]
745-
217
5- DeemedPowerConsumption Low Power Consumption CTL* [ 0 to 9999 / 0 / 1]
745-
218
5- DeemedPowerConsumption Silent condition CTL* [ 0 to 9999 / 0 / 1]
745-
219
5- DeemedPowerConsumption Heater Off CTL* [ 0 to 9999 / 0 / 1]
745-
220
5- OpePanel Setting Op Type Action Setting CTL [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
748- 0: Normal operation
101 panel (1: Reconnect, 0:
Not recconect)
1: Smart operation panel
(1: Job stop, 0: Job
duration)
2: Smart Operation Panel
mode settings (1: Secure
boot, 0: Normal boot)

SM Appendices 3-70 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to Max/Init./Step]

No. or
CTL
5- OpePanel Setting Cheetah Panel Connect CTL [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
748- Setting 0: OFF
201 1: ON
5- Import/Export Export CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
749- Target: System, Printer,
001 Fax, Scanner
Option: Unique, Secret
Copy config: Encryption,
Encryption key (if
selected)
5- Import/Export Import CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
749- Option: Unique
101 Copy config: Encryption,
Encryption key (if
selected)
5- Key Event Encryption Password CTL [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
751- Setting
001
5- Copy:FlairAPI Setting 0x00 - 0xff CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
752- bit 0: Start of FlairAPI
001 Server (0: Off, 1: On)
bit 1: Access Perrmission
of FlairAPI from outside
of the machine (0:
Disabled, 1: Enabled)
bit 2: Reserved
bit 3: Reserved
bit 4: Simple UI Function
(0: Disabled, 1: Enabled)
bit 5: Accessing
permission of Simple UI
from outside of the
machine (0: Disabled, 1:
Enabled)
bit 6: Reserved

SM Appendices 3-71 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to Max/Init./Step]

No. or
CTL
bit 7: Reserved
5- Display Setting Disp Administrator CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
755- Password Change Scrn
001
5- Display Setting Hide Administrator CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
755- Password Change Scrn
002
5- RemoteUI Setting Authentication CTL [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
758-
001
5- Machine Limit Count Machine Limit Count CTL [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
759- Setting
001
5- Machine Limit Count Limit Count CTL [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
759-
051
5- SmartOperationPanel Restore the default Home CTL [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
761- Setting screen
001
5- Memory Clear All Clear CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
801-
001
5- Memory Clear Engine ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
801-
002
5- Memory Clear SCS CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
801-
003
5- Memory Clear IMH Memory Clr CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
801-
004
5- Memory Clear MCS CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
801-
005
5- Memory Clear Copier application CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]

SM Appendices 3-72 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to Max/Init./Step]

No. or
CTL
801-
006
5- Memory Clear Fax Application CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
801-
007
5- Memory Clear Printer Application CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
801-
008
5- Memory Clear Scanner Application CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
801-
009
5- Memory Clear Web Service CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
801-
010
5- Memory Clear NCS CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
801-
011
5- Memory Clear R-FAX CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
801-
012
5- Memory Clear Clear DCS Setting CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
801-
014
5- Memory Clear Clear UCS Setting CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
801-
015
5- Memory Clear MIRS Setting CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
801-
016
5- Memory Clear CCS CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
801-
017
5- Memory Clear SRM Memory Clr CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
801-
018

SM Appendices 3-73 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to Max/Init./Step]

No. or
CTL
5- Memory Clear LCS CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
801-
019
5- Cleae Memory Web Uapli CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
801-
020
5- Memory Clear ECS CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
801-
021
5- Memory Clear AICS CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
801-
023
5- Cleae Memory websys CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
801-
025
5- Memory Clear PLN CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
801-
026
5- Memory Clear SAS CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
801-
027
5- Memory Clear Rest WebService CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
801-
028
5- Anti-Condensation Heater 0:OFF / 1:ON ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
805-
001
5- SC Reset Fusing SC Reset ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
810-
001
5- SC Reset Hard High Temp. Detection ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
810-
002
5- MachineSerial Display ENG* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
811-

SM Appendices 3-74 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to Max/Init./Step]

No. or
CTL
002
5- MachineSerial Set BCU ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
811-
004
5- Machine Serial Update Date Latest ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
811-
021
5- Machine Serial Update Date Previous ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
811-
022
5- Machine Serial Previous ENG* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
811-
023
5- Machine Serial Update Date Latest(BCU) ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
811-
024
5- Machine Serial Update Date Previous(BCU) ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
811-
025
5- Machine Serial Previous(BCU) ENG* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
811-
026
5- Service Tel. No. Setting Service CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
812-
001
5- Service Tel. No. Setting Facsimile CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
812-
002
5- Service Tel. No. Setting Supply CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
812-
003
5- Service Tel. No. Setting Operation CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
812-
004
5- Remote Service I/F Setting CTL* [ 0 to 2 / 2 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-75 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to Max/Init./Step]

No. or
CTL
816- 0: Remote service off
001 1: CSS remote service on
2: NRS remote service
on
5- Remote Service CE Call CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
816- 0: Start of the service
002 1: End of the service
5- Remote Service Function Flag CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
816- 0: Disabled
003 1: Enabled
5- Remote Service SSL Disable CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
816- 0: Yes. SSL not used.
007 1: No. SSL used.
5- Remote Service RCG Connect Timeout CTL* [ 1 to 90 / 30 / 1sec]
816-
008
5- Remote Service RCG Write Timeout CTL* [ 0 to 100 / 60 / 1sec]
816-
009
5- Remote Service RCG Read Timeout CTL* [ 0 to 100 / 60 / 1sec]
816-
010
5- Remote Service Port 80 Enable CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
816- 0: No. Access denied
011 1: Yes. Access granted.
5- Remote Service RFU Timing CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
816- 0: Any status of a target
013 machine
1: Sleep or panel off
mode only
5- Remote Service RCG Error Cause CTL [ 0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
816- 0: Initial state, normal
014 condition
1: Error
5- Remote Service RCG-C Registed CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-76 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to Max/Init./Step]

No. or
CTL
816- 0: Installation not
021 completed
1: Installation completed
5- Remote Service Connect Type(N/M/3G) CTL* [ 0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
816- 0: internet connection
023 1: Dial-up connection
5- Remote Service Cert Expire Timing CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 1]
816- 0: Not use
061 1: Use
5- Remote Service Use Proxy CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
816- 0: Not use
062 1: Use
5- Remote Service Proxy Host CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
816-
063
5- Remote Service Proxy PortNumber CTL* [ 0 to 0xffff / 0 / 1]
816-
064
5- Remote Service Proxy User Name CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
816-
065
5- Remote Service Proxy Password CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
816-
066
5- Remote Service CERT:Up State CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
816-
067
5- Remote Service CERT:Error CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
816-
068
5- Remote Service CERT:Up ID CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
816-
069
5- Remote Service Firm Up Status CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
816- 0: Waiting for accepting

SM Appendices 3-77 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to Max/Init./Step]

No. or
CTL
083 firm update
1: Waiting for firm update
start schedule
2: Waiting for user
confirmation
3: In preparation for the
machine firm update
4: processing the
machine firm update
5: processing the closing
operation of the machine
firm update
5- Remote Service Firm Up User Check CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
816-
085
5- Remote Service Firmware Size CTL* [ 0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 1]
816-
086
5- Remote Service CERT:Macro Ver. CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
816-
087
5- Remote Service CERT:PAC Ver. CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
816-
088
5- Remote Service CERT:ID2Code CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
816-
089
5- Remote Service CERT:Subject CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
816-
090
5- Remote Service CERT:SerialNo. CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
816-
091
5- Remote Service CERT:Issuer CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
816-

SM Appendices 3-78 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to Max/Init./Step]

No. or
CTL
092
5- Remote Service CERT:Valid Start CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
816-
093
5- Remote Service CERT:Valid End CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
816-
094
5- Remote Service CERT:Encrypt Level CTL* [ 1 to 2 / 1 / 1]
816-
102
5- Remote Service Client Communication CTL* [ 0 to 3 / 0 / 1]
816- Method
103
5- Remote Service Client Communication Limit CTL* [ 1 to 7 / 7 / 1]
816-
104
5- Remote Service Network Information CTL* [ 5 to 255 / 5 / 1sec]
816- Waiting timer
115
5- Remote Service Selection Country CTL* [ 0 to 10 / * / 1]
816- *NA: 1
150 *EU: 3
*AP/CHN/TWN/KOR: 0
0: Japan
1: USA
2: Canada
3: UK
4: Germany
5: France
6: Italy
7: Netherlands
8: Belgium
9: Luxembourg
10: Spain
5- Remote Service Line Type Automatic CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-79 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to Max/Init./Step]

No. or
CTL
816- Judgement
151
5- Remote Service Line Type Judgement CTL [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 0]
816- Result
152
5- Remote Service Selection Dial / Push CTL* [ 0 to 2 / * / 0]
816- *NA/EU: 1
153 *AP/CHN/TWN/KOR: 2
0: Tone Dialing Phone
1: Pulse Dialing Phone
5- Remote Service Outside Line Outgoing CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
816- Number
154
5- Remote Service Dial Up User Name CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
816-
156
5- Remote Service Dial Up Password CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
816-
157
5- Remote Service Local Phone Number CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
816-
161
5- Remote Service Connection Timing CTL* [ 0 to 24 / 1 / 1]
816- Adjustment Incoming
162
5- Remote Service Access Point CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
816-
163
5- Remote Service Line Connecting CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
816- 0: Sharing Fax
164 1: No Sharing Fax
5- Remote Service Modem Serial No. CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
816-
173
5- Remote Service Retransmission Limit CTL [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-80 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to Max/Init./Step]

No. or
CTL
816-
174
5- Remote Service FAX TX Priority CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
816- 0: Disable
187 1: Enable
5- Remote Service 3G DongleID CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
816-
190
5- Remote Service ppp Connect Timer CTL [ 15 to 30 / 15 / 1min]
816-
199
5- Remote Service Manual Polling CTL [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
816-
200
5- Remote Service Regist Status CTL [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
816-
201
5- Remote Service Letter Number CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
816-
202
5- Remote Service Confirm Execute CTL [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
816-
203
5- Remote Service Confirm Result CTL [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
816- 0: Success Inquiry
204 1: Request number error
3: Communication error
(Enabled Proxy)
4: Communication error
(Disabled Proxy)
5: Proxy error (failed
auth.)
6: Communication error
8: Other error (See SP5-
816-208 for detail)

SM Appendices 3-81 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to Max/Init./Step]

No. or
CTL
9: Processing inquiry
20: Failed Dial-up auth.
21: Failed answer tone
detection
22: Failed career
detection
23: Invalid modem value
24: Shortage of electrical
current
25: Cable disconnected
26: Line occupied
5- Remote Service Confirm Place CTL [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
816- 0: Success registration
205 1: Request number error
3: Communication error
(Enabled Proxy)
4: Communication error
(Disabled Proxy)
5: Proxy error (failed
auth.)
6: Communication error
8: Other error (See SP5-
816-208 for detail)
9: Processing registration
20: Failed Dial-up auth.
21: Failed answer tone
detection
22: Failed career
detection
23: Invalid modem value
24: Shortage of electrical
current
25: Cable disconnected
26: Line occupied
5- Remote Service Register Execute CTL [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-82 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to Max/Init./Step]

No. or
CTL
816-
206
5- Remote Service Register Result CTL [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
816-
207
5- Remote Service Error Code CTL [ -2147483647 to
816- 2147483647 / 0 / 0]
208
5- Remote Service Instl Clear CTL [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
816-
209
5- Remote Service CommErrorTime CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 1]
816-
240
5- Remote Service CommErrorCode 1 CTL* [ 0 to 0xffffffff /
816- 0x00000000 / 1]
241
5- Remote Service CommErrorCode 2 CTL* [ 0 to 0xffffffff /
816- 0x00000000 / 1]
242
5- Remote Service CommErrorCode 3 CTL* [ 0 to 0xffffffff /
816- 0x00000000 / 1]
243
5- Remote Service CommErrorState 1 CTL* [ 0 to 0xffff / 0x0000 / 1]
816-
244
5- Remote Service CommErrorState 2 CTL* [ 0 to 0xffff / 0x0000 / 1]
816-
245
5- Remote Service CommErrorState 3 CTL* [ 0 to 0xffff / 0x0000 / 1]
816-
246
5- Remote Service SSL Error Count CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
816-
247

SM Appendices 3-83 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to Max/Init./Step]

No. or
CTL
5- Remote Service Other Err Count CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
816-
248
5- Remote Service CommLog Print CTL [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 0]
816-
250
5- Remote Service RCG RCG IPv4 Address CTL* [ 0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 1]
821- Setting
002
5- Remote Service RCG RCG Port CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 443 / 1]
821- Setting
003
5- Remote Service RCG RCG IPv4 URL Path CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
821- Setting
004
5- Remote Service RCG RCG IPv6 Address CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
821- Setting
005
5- Remote Service RCG RCG IPv6 URL Path CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
821- Setting
006
5- Remote Service RCG RCG Host Name CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
821- Setting
007
5- Remote Service RCG RCG Host URL Path CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
821- Setting
008
5- NV-RAM Data Upload CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
824-
001
5- NV-RAM Data Download CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
825-
001
5- Network Setting User Class CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
828-

SM Appendices 3-84 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to Max/Init./Step]

No. or
CTL
039
5- Network Setting Class Id CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
828-
040
5- Network Setting 1284 Compatiblity (Centro) CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
828- 0: Disabled
050 1: Enabled
5- Network Setting ECP (Centro) CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
828- 0: Disabled
052 1: Enabled
5- Network Setting Job Spooling CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
828- 0: Disabled
065 1: Enabled
5- Network Setting Job Spooling Clear: Start CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
828- Time 0: ON (Data is cleared)
066 1: OFF (Automatically
printed)
5- Network Setting Job Spooling (Protocol) CTL* [ 0x00 to 0xff / 0x7f / 0]
828- 0: Validates
069 1: Invalidates
bit0: LPR
bit1: FTP
bit2: IPP
bit3: SMB
bit4: BMLinkS
bit5: DIPRINT
bit6: sftp
bit7: (Reserved)
5- Network Setting Protocol usage CTL* [ 0x00000000 to 0xffffffff /
828- 0x00000000 / 1]
087 0: Off (Not used the
network with the
protocol.)
1: On (Used the network
with the protocol once or

SM Appendices 3-85 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to Max/Init./Step]

No. or
CTL
more.)
bit0: IPsec, bit1: IPv6,
bit2: IEEE 802. 1X,
bit3:Wireless LAN,
bit4: Security mode level
setting, bit5:Appletalk,
bit6: DHCP,
bit7: DHCPv6, bit8:
telnet, bit9: SSL, bit10:
HTTPS,
bit11: BMLinkS printing,
bit12: diprint printing,
bit13: LPR printing,
bit14: ftp printing, bit15:
rsh printing, bit16: SMB
printing,
bit17: WSD-Printer, bit18:
WSD-Scanner, bit19:
Scan to SMB,
bit20: Scan to NCP, bit21:
Reserve, bit22:
Bluetooth,
bit23: IEEE 1284, bit24:
USB printing, bit25:
Dynamic DNS,
bit26: Netware printing,
bit27: LLTD, bit28: IPP
printing,
bit29: IPP printing (SSL),
bit30: ssh, bit31: sftp
5- Network Setting TELNET(0:OFF 1:ON) CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
828- 0: Disable
090 1: Enable
5- Network Setting Web(0:OFF 1:ON) CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
828- 0: Disable

SM Appendices 3-86 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to Max/Init./Step]

No. or
CTL
091 1: Enable
5- Network Setting Active IPv6 Link Local CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
828- Address
145
5- Network Setting Active IPv6 Stateless CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
828- Address 1
147
5- Network Setting Active IPv6 Stateless CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
828- Address 2
149
5- Network Setting Active IPv6 Stateless CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
828- Address 3
151
5- Network Setting Active IPv6 Stateless CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
828- Address 4
153
5- Network Setting Active IPv6 Stateless CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
828- Address 5
155
5- Network Setting IPv6 Manual Address CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
828-
156
5- Network Setting IPv6 Gateway Address CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
828-
158
5- Network Setting IPv6 Stateless Auto Setting CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
828- 0: Disable
161 1: Enable
5- Network Setting IPsec Aggressive Mode CTL [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
828- Setting
219
5- Network Setting Web Item visible CTL* [ 0x0000 to 0xffff / 0xffff /
828- 1]
236 bit0: Net RICOH
bit1: Consumable

SM Appendices 3-87 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to Max/Init./Step]

No. or
CTL
Supplier
bit2-15: Reserved (all)
5- Network Setting Web shopping link visible CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
828- 0: Not display
237 1:Display
5- Network Setting Web Supplies Link visible CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
828- 0: Not display
238 1: Display
5- Network Setting Web Link1 Name CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
828-
239
5- Network Setting Web Link1 URL CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
828-
240
5- Network Setting Web Link1 visible CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
828- 0: Not display
241 1: Display
5- Network Setting Web Link2 Name CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
828-
242
5- Network Setting Web Link2 URL CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
828-
243
5- Network Setting Web Link2 visible CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
828-
244
5- Network Setting DHCPv6 DUID CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
828-
249
5- HDD HDD Formatting (ALL) CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
832-
001
5- HDD HDD Formatting (IMH) CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
832-
002

SM Appendices 3-88 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to Max/Init./Step]

No. or
CTL
5- HDD HDD Formatting CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
832- (Thumbnail/OCR)
003
5- HDD HDD Formatting (Job Log) CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
832-
004
5- HDD HDD Formatting (Printer CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
832- Fonts)
005
5- HDD HDD Formatting (User CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
832- Info)
006
5- HDD Mail RX Data CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
832-
007
5- HDD Mail TX Data CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
832-
008
5- HDD HDD Formatting (Data for CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
832- a Design)
009
5- HDD HDD Formatting (Log) CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
832-
010
5- HDD HDD Formatting (Ridoc I/F) CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
832-
011
5- HDD HDD Formatting CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
832- (Thumbnail)
012
5- Capture Setting Capture Function (0:Off CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
836- 1:On) 0: Disable
001 1: Enable
5- Capture Setting Print Back Up Function CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
836- (0:Off 1:On)

SM Appendices 3-89 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to Max/Init./Step]

No. or
CTL
003
5- Capture Setting Capture Setting: Copy CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
836-
011
5- Capture Setting Capture Setting: Doc. Svr. CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
836-
012
5- Capture Setting Capture Setting: Fax RX CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
836- Printer
013
5- Capture Setting Capture Setting: Fax TX CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
836-
014
5- Capture Setting Capture Setting: Printer CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
836-
015
5- Capture Setting Capture Setting: Scanner CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
836-
016
5- Capture Setting Capture Setting: SDK CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
836-
017
5- Capture Setting Captured File Resend CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
836- (0:Off 1:On)
061
5- Capture Setting Reduction for Copy Color CTL* [ 0 to 3 / 2 / 1]
836- 0: 1to-1
071 1: 1/2
2: 1/3
3: 1/4
5- Capture Setting Reduction for Copy B&W CTL* [ 0 to 6 / 0 / 1]
836- Text 0: 1to-1
072 1: 1/2
2: 1/3
3: 1/4

SM Appendices 3-90 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to Max/Init./Step]

No. or
CTL
6: 2/3
5- Capture Setting Reduction for Copy B&W CTL* [ 0 to 6 / 0 / 1]
836- Other 0: 1to-1
073 1: 1/2
2: 1/3
3: 1/4
6: 2/3
5- Capture Setting Reduction for Printer Color CTL* [ 0 to 3 / 2 / 1]
836- 0: 1to-1
074 1: 1/2
2: 1/3
3: 1/4
5- Capture Setting Reduction for Printer B&W CTL* [ 0 to 6 / 0 / 1]
836- 0: 1to-1
075 1: 1/2
2: 1/3
3: 1/4
6: 2/3
5- Capture Setting Format for Copy Color CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 1]
836- 0: JFIF/JPEG
081 1: TIFF/MMR
2: TIFF/MH
3: TIFF/MR
5- Capture Setting Format for Copy B&W Text CTL* [ 0 to 3 / 1 / 1]
836- 0: JFIF/JPEG
082 1: TIFF/MMR
2: TIFF/MH
3: TIFF/MR
5- Capture Setting Format for Copy B&W CTL* [ 0 to 3 / 1 / 1]
836- Other
083
5- Capture Setting Format for Printer Color CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 1]
836-
084
5- Capture Setting Format for Printer B&W CTL* [ 0 to 3 / 1 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-91 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to Max/Init./Step]

No. or
CTL
836- 0: JFIF/JPEG
085 1: TIFF/MMR
2: TIFF/MH
3: TIFF/MR
5- Capture Setting Default for JPEG CTL* [ 5 to 95 / 50 / 1]
836-
091
5- Capture Setting Primary srv IP address CTL* [ 0 to 0xffffffff / 0x00 / 0]
836-
101
5- Capture Setting Primary srv scheme CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
836-
102
5- Capture Setting Primary srv port number CTL* [ 1 to 65535 / 80 / 1]
836-
103
5- Capture Setting Primary srv URL path CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
836-
104
5- Capture Setting Secondary srv IP address CTL* [ 0 to 0xffffffff / 0x00 / 0]
836-
111
5- Capture Setting Secondary srv scheme CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
836-
112
5- Capture Setting Secondary srv port number CTL* [ 1 to 65535 / 80 / 1]
836-
113
5- Capture Setting Secondary srv URL path CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
836-
114
5- Capture Setting Default Reso Rate Switch CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
836-
120
5- Capture Setting Reso: Copy(Mono) CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 3 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-92 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to Max/Init./Step]

No. or
CTL
836- 0: 600dpi/
122 1: 400dpi/
2: 300dpi/
3: 200dpi/
4: 150dpi/
5: 100dpi/
6: 75dpi
5- Capture Setting Reso: Print(Mono) CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 3 / 1]
836- 0:600DPi
124 1:400DPi
2:300DPi
3:200DPi
4:150DPi
5:100DPi
6:75DPi
5- Capture Setting Reso: Fax(Color) CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 4 / 1]
836- 0:600DPi
125 1:400DPi
2:300DPi
3:200DPi
4:150DPi
5:100DPi
6:75DPi
5- Capture Setting Reso: Fax(Mono) CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 3 / 1]
836- 0:600DPi
126 1:400DPi
2:300DPi
3:200DPi
4:150DPi
5:100DPi
6:75DPi
5- Capture Setting Reso: Scan(Color) CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 4 / 1]
836- 0:600DPi
127 1:400DPi
2:300DPi

SM Appendices 3-93 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to Max/Init./Step]

No. or
CTL
3:200DPi
4:150DPi
5:100DPi
6:75DPi
5- Capture Setting Reso: Scan(Mono) CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 3 / 1]
836- 0:600DPi
128 1:400DPi
2:300DPi
3:200DPi
4:150DPi
5:100DPi
6:75DPi
5- Capture Setting Reso: SDK(Color) CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 4 / 1]
836-
129
5- Capture Setting Reso: SDK(Mono) CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 3 / 1]
836-
130
5- Capture Setting All Addr Info Switch CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
836-
141
5- Capture Setting Stand-by Doc Max Number CTL* [ 10 to 10000 / 2000 / 1]
836-
142
5- Capture Setting ClearLightPDF Switch CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
836-
143
5- IEEE 802.11 Channel MAX CTL* [ 1 to 14 / 14 / 1]
840- Europe/Asia: 1 to 13
006 NA/ Asia: 1 to 11
5- IEEE 802.11 Channel MIN CTL* [ 1 to 14 / 1 / 1]
840- Europe: 1 to 13
007 NA/ Asia: 1 to 11
5- IEEE 802.11 WEP Key Select CTL* [ 0x00 to 0x11 / 0x00 / 0]
840- 00: Key #1

SM Appendices 3-94 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to Max/Init./Step]

No. or
CTL
011 01: Key #2 (Reserved)
10: Key #3 (Reserved)
11: Key #4 (Reserved)
5- IEEE 802.11 WPA Debug Lvl CTL* [ 1 to 3 / 3 / 1]
840- 1: Info
045 2: wArning
3: error
5- IEEE 802.11 11w CTL* [ 0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
840-
046
5- IEEE 802.11 PSK Set Type CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
840-
047
5- Supply Name Setting Toner Name Setting: Black CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
841-
001
5- Supply Name Setting OrgStamp CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
841-
007
5- Supply Name Setting StapleStd1 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
841-
011
5- Supply Name Setting StapleStd2 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
841-
012
5- Supply Name Setting StapleStd3 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
841-
013
5- Supply Name Setting StapleStd4 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
841-
014
5- Supply Name Setting StapleBind1 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
841-
021
5- Supply Name Setting StapleBind2 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]

SM Appendices 3-95 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to Max/Init./Step]

No. or
CTL
841-
022
5- Supply Name Setting StapleBind3 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
841-
023
5- GWWS Analysis Setting 1 CTL* [ 0x00 to 0xFF / 0 / 1]
842- 0bit[LSB]: system, other
001 group
1bit: capture related
group
2bit: authentication
related group
3bit: address book
related group
4bit: device management
related group
5bit: output related(print,
FAX, and delivery) group
6bit: repository, F0,etc.
document related group
7bit: debug log level
suppression
5- GWWS Analysis Setting 2 CTL* [ 0x00 to 0xFF / 0 / 1]
842- 0~6bit: unused
002 7bit: time stamp setting
for 5682mmesg log.
(1: min./sec/msec, 0:
day/hour/min./sec)
5- USB Transfer Rate CTL* [ 1 to 4 / 4 / 0]
844- 0x01: Full speed
001 0x04: Auto Change
5- USB Vendor ID CTL* [ 0x0000 to 0xffff / 0x05ca
844- / 0]
002
5- USB Product ID CTL* [ 0x0000 to 0xffff /

SM Appendices 3-96 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to Max/Init./Step]

No. or
CTL
844- 0x0403 / 0]
003
5- USB Device Release Number CTL* [ 0 to 9999 / 100 / 1]
844-
004
5- USB Fixed USB Port CTL* [ 0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
844-
005
5- USB PnP Model Name CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
844-
006
5- USB PnP Serial Number CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
844-
007
5- USB Mac Supply Level CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
844-
008
5- USB USB Toggle Clear Mode CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
844-
009
5- USB Notify Unsupport CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
844-
100
5- Delivery Server Setting FTP Port No. CTL* [ 1 to 65535 / 3670 / 1]
845-
001
5- Delivery Server Setting IP Address (Primary) CTL* [ 0 to 0xffffffff / 0x00 / ]
845-
002
5- Delivery Server Setting Delivery Error Display Time CTL* [ 0 to 999 / 300 / 1sec]
845-
006
5- Delivery Server Setting IP Address (Secondary) CTL* [ 0 to 0xffffffff / 0x00 / ]
845-
008

SM Appendices 3-97 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to Max/Init./Step]

No. or
CTL
5- Delivery Server Setting Delivery Server Model CTL* [ 0 to 4 / 0 / 1]
845- 0: Unknown
009 1: SG1 Provided
2: SG1 Package
3: SG2 Provided
4: SG2 Package
5- Delivery Server Setting Delivery Svr. Capability CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
845- Bit7=1: Comment
010 information exits
Bit6=1: Direct
specification of mail
address possible
Bit5=1: Mail RX
confirmation setting
possible
Bit4=1: Address book
automatic update
function exists
Bit3=1: Fax RX delivery
function exists
Bit2=1: Sender password
function exists
Bit1=1: Function to link
MK-1 user and Sender
exists
Bit0=1: Sender
specification required (if
set to 1, Bit6 is set to "0")
5- Delivery Server Setting Delivery Svr. Capability CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
845- (Ext) Bit7=1: Address book
011 usage limitation
(Limitation for each
authorized user)
Bit6=1: RDH
authorization link

SM Appendices 3-98 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to Max/Init./Step]

No. or
CTL
Bit5 to 0: Not used
5- Delivery Server Setting Server Scheme(Primary) CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
845-
013
5- Delivery Server Setting Server Port CTL* [ 1 to 65535 / 80 / 1]
845- Number(Primary)
014
5- Delivery Server Setting Server URL Path(Primary) CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
845-
015
5- Delivery Server Setting Server CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
845- Scheme(Secondary)
016
5- Delivery Server Setting Server Port CTL* [ 1 to 65535 / 80 / 1]
845- Number(Secondary)
017
5- Delivery Server Setting Server URL CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
845- Path(Secondary)
018
5- Delivery Server Setting Rapid Sending Control CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
845- 0: Control disabled
022 1: Control enabled
5- UCS Setting Machine ID (for Delivery CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
846- Server)
001
5- UCS Setting Machine ID Clear (for CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
846- Delivery Server)
002
5- UCS Setting Maximum Entries CTL* [ 2000 to 20000 / 2000 /
846- 1]
003
5- UCS Setting Delivery Server Retry CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
846- Timer
006
5- UCS Setting Delivery Server Retry CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-99 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to Max/Init./Step]

No. or
CTL
846- Times
007
5- UCS Setting Delivery Server Maximum CTL* [ 2000 to 20000 / 2000 /
846- Entries 1]
008
5- UCS Setting LDAP Search Timeout CTL* [ 1 to 255 / 60 / 1]
846-
010
5- UCS Setting WSD Maximum Entries CTL* [ 50 to 250 / 250 / 1]
846-
020
5- UCS Setting Folder Auth Change CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
846- 0: Login User, 1:
021 Destination
5- UCS Setting Addr Book Migration(USB- CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
846- >HDD)
040
5- UCS Setting Fill Addr Acl Info CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
846-
041
5- UCS Setting Addr Book Media CTL* [ 0 to 30 / 0 / 1]
846- 0: Unconfirmed
043 1: SD Slot 1
2: SD Slot 2
3: SD Slot 3
4: USB Flash ROM
10: SD Slot 10
20: HDD
30: Nothing
5- UCS Setting Initialize Local Addr Book CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
846-
047
5- UCS Setting Initialize Delivery Addr CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
846- Book
048

SM Appendices 3-100 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to Max/Init./Step]

No. or
CTL
5- UCS Setting Initialize LDAP Addr Book CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
846-
049
5- UCS Setting Initialize All Addr Book CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
846-
050
5- UCS Setting Backup All Addr Book CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
846-
051
5- UCS Setting Restore All Addr Book CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
846-
052
5- UCS Setting Clear Backup Info CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
846-
053
5- UCS Setting Search option CTL* [ 0x00 to 0xff / 0x0f / 1]
846- Bit 0: Checks both
060 upper/lower case
characters
Bit 1: Japan Only
Bit 2: Japan Only
Bit 3: Japan Only
Bit 4 to 7: Not Used
5- UCS Setting Complexity option 1 CTL* [ 0 to 32 / 0 / 1]
846-
062
5- UCS Setting Complexity option 2 CTL* [ 0 to 32 / 0 / 1]
846-
063
5- UCS Setting Complexity option 3 CTL* [ 0 to 32 / 0 / 1]
846-
064
5- UCS Setting Complexity option 4 CTL* [ 0 to 32 / 0 / 1]
846-
065

SM Appendices 3-101 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to Max/Init./Step]

No. or
CTL
5- UCS Setting FTP Auth Port Setting CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 3671 / 1]
846-
091
5- UCS Setting Encryption Stat CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 0]
846-
094
5- Rep Resolution Reduction Rate for Copy B&W Text CTL* [ 0 to 6 / 0 / 1]
847- 0: 1x
002 1: 1/2x
2: 1/3x
3: 1/4x
4: 1/6x
5: 1/8x
6: 2/3x
5- Rep Resolution Reduction Rate for Copy B&W Other CTL* [ 0 to 6 / 0 / 1]
847- 0: 1x
003 1: 1/2x
2: 1/3x
3: 1/4x
4: 1/6x
5: 1/8x
6: 2/3x
5- Rep Resolution Reduction Rate for Printer B&W CTL* [ 0 to 6 / 0 / 1]
847- 0: 1x
005 1: 1/2x
2: 1/3x
3: 1/4x
4: 1/6x
5: 1/8x
6: 2/3x
5- Rep Resolution Reduction Rate for Printer B&W CTL* [ 0 to 6 / 1 / 1]
847- 1200dpi 0: 1x
007 1: 1/2x
2: 1/3x
3: 1/4x

SM Appendices 3-102 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to Max/Init./Step]

No. or
CTL
4: 1/6x
5: 1/8x
6: 2/3x
5- Rep Resolution Reduction Network Quality Default for CTL* [ 5 to 95 / 50 / 1]
847- JPEG
021
5- Web Service Access Ctrl: CTL* [ 0x00 to 0xFF / 0x02 / 0]
848- Repository(onlyLower4bits) 0000: No access control
002 0001: Denies access to
DeskTop Binder.
0010: No writing control
5- Web Service Access Ctrl: Doc.Svr.Print CTL* [ 0x00 to 0xFF / 0x00 / 0]
848- (Lower 4bits) 0000: No access control
003 0001: Denies access to
DeskTop Binder.
5- Web Service Access Ctrl: udirectory CTL* [ 0x00 to 0xFF / 0x00 / 0]
848- (Lower 4bits) 0000: No access control
004 0001: Denies access to
DeskTop Binder.
5- Web Service Access Ctrl: Comm. Log CTL* [ 0x00 to 0xFF / 0x00 / 0]
848- Fax(Lower 4bits) 0000: No access control
007 0001: Denies access to
DeskTop Binder.
5- Web Service Access Ctrl: Job Ctrl CTL* [ 0x00 to 0xFF / 0x00 / 0]
848- (Lower 4bits) 0000: No access control
009 0001: Denies access to
DeskTop Binder.
5- Web Service Access Ctrl: CTL* [ 0x00 to 0xFF / 0x00 / 0]
848- Devicemanagement(Lower 0000: No access control
011 4bits) 0001: Denies access to
DeskTop Binder.
5- Web Service Access Ctrl: Delivery CTL* [ 0x00 to 0xFF / 0x00 / 0]
848- (Lower 4bits) 0000: No access control
021 0001: Denies access to
DeskTop Binder.

SM Appendices 3-103 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to Max/Init./Step]

No. or
CTL
5- Web Service Access Ctrl: CTL* [ 0x00 to 0xFF / 0x00 / 0]
848- uadministration (Lower 0000: No access control
022 4bits) 0001: Denies access to
DeskTop Binder.
5- Web Service Access Ctrl: Log Service CTL* [ 0x00 to 0xFF / 0x00 / 0]
848- (Lower 4bits) 0000: No access control
024 0001: Denies access to
DeskTop Binder.
5- Web Service Access Ctrl: Rest CTL* [ 0x00 to 0xFF / 0x00 / 0]
848- WebService (Lower 4bits) 0000: No access control
025 0001: Denies access to
DeskTop Binder.
5- Web Service Repository: Download CTL* [ 0x00 to 0xFF / 0x00 / 1]
848- Image Setting
099
5- Web Service Repository: Download CTL* [ 1 to 2048 / 2048 / 1]
848- Image Max. Size
100
5- Web Service Log Operation Mode CTL* [ 0 to 9 / 0 / 1]
848-
150
5- LogTrans Setting: Timing CTL* [ 0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
848-
217
5- Installation Date Display CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
849-
001
5- Installation Date Switch to Print CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
849- 0: OFF (No Print)
002 1: ON (Print)
5- Installation Date Total Counter CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
849- 1: G3
003 2: EXT
3: G3-1
4: G3-1- EXT

SM Appendices 3-104 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to Max/Init./Step]

No. or
CTL
5: G3-2
6: G3-2- EXT
7: G3-3
8: G3-3-EXT
9: G3-idle-EXT
10: idle-EXT
11: I-G3
12: I-G3-EXT
13: G4
5- Address Book Function Replacement of Circuit CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
850- Classifications
003
5- Bluetooth Mode CTL* [ 0x00 to 0x01 / 0x00 / 1]
851-
001
5- Stamp Data Download CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
853-
001
5- Remote ROM Update Local Port CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
856- 0: Disable
002 1: Enable
5- Collect Machine Info 0:OFF 1:ON CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
858-
001
5- Collect Machine Info Save To (0:HDD 1:SD) CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
858-
002
5- Collect Machine Info Make Log Trace Dir CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
858-
003
5- Collect Machine Info Failure Occuring Date CTL* [ 0 to 20371212 / 0 / 1]
858-
101
5- Collect Machine Info Tracing Days CTL* [ 1 to 180 / 2 / 1day]
858-

SM Appendices 3-105 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to Max/Init./Step]

No. or
CTL
102
5- Collect Machine Info Acquire Fax CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
858- Address(0:OFF 1:ON)
103
5- Collect Machine Info Acquire All Info & Logs CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
858-
111
5- Collect Machine Info Acquire Configuration CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
858- Page
121
5- Collect Machine Info Acquire Font Page CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
858-
122
5- Collect Machine Info Acquire Print Setting List CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
858-
123
5- Collect Machine Info Acquire Error Log CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
858-
124
5- Collect Machine Info Acquire Fax Info CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
858-
131
5- Collect Machine Info Acquire All Debug Logs CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
858-
141
5- Collect Machine Info Acquire Controller Debug CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
858- Logs Only
142
5- Collect Machine Info Acquire Engine Debug CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
858- Logs Only
143
5- Collect Machine Info Acquire Opepanel Debug CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
858- Logs Only
144
5- Collect Machine Info Acquire FCU Debug Logs CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 0]

SM Appendices 3-106 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to Max/Init./Step]

No. or
CTL
858- Only
145
5- Collect Machine Info Acquire Only Network CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
858- Packets
146
5- SMTP/POP3/IMAP4 Partial Mail Receive CTL* [ 1 to 168 / 72 / 1hour]
860- Timeout
020
5- SMTP/POP3/IMAP4 MDN Response RFC2298 CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
860- Compliance 0: No
021 1: Yes
5- SMTP/POP3/IMAP4 SMTP Auth. From Field CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
860- Replacement 0: No. “From” item not
022 switched.
1: Yes. “From item
switched.
5- SMTP/POP3/IMAP4 SMTP Auth. Direct Setting CTL* [ 0 to 0xff / 0x0 / 1]
860- Bit 0: LOGIN
025 Bit 1: PLAIN
Bit 2: CRAM MD5
Bit 3: DIGEST MD5
Bit 4 to 7: Not used
5- SMTP/POP3/IMAP4 S/MIME:MIME Header CTL* [ 0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
860- Setting 0: Microsoft Outlook
026 Express standard
1: Internet Draft standard
2: RFC standard
5- SMTP/POP3/IMAP4 S/MIME: Authentication CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
860- Check 0: No (not check)
028 1: Yes (check)
5- SMTP/POP3/IMAP4 SMTP Server 3G Line IP CTL [ 0 to 0xffffffff / 0x00 / ]
860- Address
029
5- E-Mail Report Report Validity CTL [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
866- 0: Enabled

SM Appendices 3-107 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to Max/Init./Step]

No. or
CTL
001 1: Disabled
5- E-Mail Report Add Date Field CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
866- 0: Enabled
005 1: Disabled
5- E-Mail Report CounterE-Mail:3G Line CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
866- Validity
109
5- E-Mail Report CounterE-Mail:Validity CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
866-
110
5- E-Mail Report CounterE-Mail:Destination CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
866- Registration
111
5- E-Mail Report CounterE-Mail:Send Test CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
866-
112
5- E-Mail Report CounterE-Mail:Next Send CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
866- Date
113
5- E-Mail Report CounterE-Mail:Send Date CTL* [ 0 to 31 / 0 / 1]
866- Setting
114
5- E-Mail Report CounterE-Mail:Send Time CTL* [ 0 to 2359 / 0 / 1]
866- Setting
115
5- E-Mail Report CounterE- CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
866- Mail:Destination1
121
5- E-Mail Report CounterE- CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
866- Mail:Destination2
122
5- E-Mail Report CounterE- CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
866- Mail:Destination3
123
5- Common KeyInfo Writing Writing CTL [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-108 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to Max/Init./Step]

No. or
CTL
870-
001
5- Common KeyInfo Writing Initialize CTL [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
870-
003
5- Common Key Info Writing Writing: 2048bit CTL [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
870-
004
5- SDCardAppliMove MoveExec CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 1]
873-
001
5- SDCardAppliMove UndoExec CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 1]
873-
002
5- SC Auto Reboot Reboot Setting CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
875-
001
5- SC Auto Reboot Reboot Type CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
875- 0: Manual reboot
002 1: Automatic reboot
5- Option Setup Data Overwrite Security CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
878-
001
5- Option Setup HDD Encryption CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
878-
002
5- Option Setup OCR Dictionary CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
878-
004
5- Fixed Phrase Block Erasing CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
881-
001
5- Set WIM Function DocSvr Acc Ctrl CTL* [ 0x00 to 0xFF / 0x00 / 0]
885- 0: OFF
020 1: ON

SM Appendices 3-109 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to Max/Init./Step]

No. or
CTL
Bit 0: Forbid all document
server access (1)
Bit 1: Forbid user mode
access (1)
Bit 2: Forbid print function
(1)
Bit 3: Forbid fax TX (1)
Bit 4: Forbid scan
sending (1)
Bit 5: Forbid downloading
(1)
Bit 6: Forbid delete (1)
Bit 7: Reserved
5- Set WIM Function DocSvr Format CTL* [ 0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
885- 0: Thumbnail, 1: Icon, 2:
050 Details
5- Set WIM Function DocSvr Trans CTL* [ 5 to 20 / 10 / 1]
885-
051
5- Set WIM Function Set Signature CTL* [ 0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
885- 0: Setting for each e-mail
100 1: Signature for all
2: No signature
5- Set WIM Function Set Encrypsion CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
885- 0: Not encrypted
101 1: Encryption
5- Set WIM Function Detect Mem Leak CTL* [ 0x00 to 0xFF / 0x00 / 0]
885-
200
5- Farm Update Setting Skip Version Check CTL [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
886-
100
5- Farm Update Setting Skip LR Check CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
886-
101

SM Appendices 3-110 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to Max/Init./Step]

No. or
CTL
5- Farm Update Setting Auto Update Setting CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
886-
111
5- Farm Update Setting Auto Update Prohibit Term CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
886- Setting
112
5- Farm Update Setting Auto Update Prohibit Start CTL* [ 0 to 23 / 9 / 1hour]
886- hour
113
5- Farm Update Setting Auto Update Prohibit End CTL* [ 0 to 23 / 17 / 1hour]
886- hour
114
5- Farm Update Setting SFU Auto Download CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
886- Setting
115
5- Farm Update Setting Auto Update Next Date CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
886-
116
5- Farm Update Setting Auto Update Retry Interval CTL* [ 1 to 24 / 1 / 1hour]
886- Hour
117
5- Farm Update Setting Auto Update @Remote CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
886- Using Setting
119
5- Farm Update Setting Auto Update Prohibit Day CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
886- of Week Setting
120
5- Farm Update Setting Restore Date CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
886-
201
5- Farm Update Setting Save Old Version List CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
886-
202
5- SD GetCounter CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
887-

SM Appendices 3-111 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to Max/Init./Step]

No. or
CTL
001
5- Personal Information CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
888- Protect 0: No authentication, No
001 protection for logs
1: No authentication,
Protected logs (only an
administrator can see the
logs)
5- SDK Application Counter SDK-1 CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
893-
001
5- SDK Application Counter SDK-2 CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
893-
002
5- SDK Application Counter SDK-3 CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
893-
003
5- SDK Application Counter SDK-4 CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
893-
004
5- SDK Application Counter SDK-5 CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
893-
005
5- SDK Application Counter SDK-6 CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
893-
006
5- SDK Application Counter SDK-7 CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
893-
007
5- SDK Application Counter SDK-8 CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
893-
008
5- SDK Application Counter SDK-9 CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
893-
009

SM Appendices 3-112 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to Max/Init./Step]

No. or
CTL
5- SDK Application Counter SDK-10 CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
893-
010
5- SDK Application Counter SDK-11 CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
893-
011
5- SDK Application Counter SDK-12 CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
893-
012
5- External Mech Count Mech Counter Switch ENG* [ 0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
894- Setting Setting
001
5- Application invalidation Printer CTL [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
895-
001
5- Application invalidation Scanner CTL [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
895-
002
5- Engine Log Upload Pattern ENG* [ 0 to 4 / 0 / 1]
900-
001
5- Engine Log Upload Trigger ENG* [ 0 to 3 / 0 / 1]
900-
002
5- Plug & Play Maker/Model CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
907- Name
001
5- Switchover Permission Print Application Timer CTL* [ 0 to 30 / 3 / 1]
913- Time
002
5- Copy Server : Set Function (0:ON 1:OFF) CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
967- 0: ON
001 1: OFF
5- User Stamp Registration Frame deletion setting CTL* [ 0 to 3 / 0 / 1]
973-

SM Appendices 3-113 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to Max/Init./Step]

No. or
CTL
101
5- Device Setting On Board NIC CTL [ 0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
985- 0: Disable
001 1: Enable
2: Function limitation
5- Device Setting On Board USB CTL [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
985-
002
5- SP Print Mode All (Data List) CTL [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 0]
990-
001
5- SP Print Mode SP (Mode Data List) CTL [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 0]
990-
002
5- SP Print Mode User Program CTL [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 0]
990-
003
5- SP Print Mode Logging Data CTL [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 0]
990-
004
5- SP Print Mode Diagnostic Report CTL [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 0]
990-
005
5- SP Print Mode Non-Default CTL [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 0]
990-
006
5- SP Print Mode NIB Summary CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
990-
007
5- SP Print Mode Capture Log CTL [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
990-
008
5- SMC Print Copier User Program CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
990-
021

SM Appendices 3-114 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to Max/Init./Step]

No. or
CTL
5- SP Print Mode Scanner SP CTL [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 0]
990-
022
5- SP Print Mode Scanner User Program CTL [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 0]
990-
023
5- SP Print Mode SDK/J Summary CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
990-
024
5- SP Print Mode SDK/J Application Info CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
990-
025
5- SP Print Mode Printer SP CTL [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 0]
990-
026
5- SP Print Mode SmartOperationPanel SP CTL [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 0]
990-
027
5- SP Print Mode SmartOperationPanel UP CTL [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 0]
990-
028
5- SP Text Mode All (Data List) CTL [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 0]
992-
001
5- SP Text Mode SP (Mode Data List) CTL [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 0]
992-
002
5- SP Text Mode User Program CTL [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 0]
992-
003
5- SP Text Mode Logging Data CTL [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 0]
992-
004
5- SP Text Mode Diagnostic Report CTL [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 0]
992-

SM Appendices 3-115 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to Max/Init./Step]

No. or
CTL
005
5- SP Text Mode Non-Default CTL [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 0]
992-
006
5- SP Text Mode NIB Summary CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
992-
007
5- SP Text Mode Capture Log CTL [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
992-
008
5- SP Text Mode Copier User Program CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
992-
021
5- SP Text Mode Scanner SP CTL [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 0]
992-
022
5- SP Text Mode Scanner User Program CTL [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 0]
992-
023
5- SP Text Mode SDK/J Summary CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
992-
024
5- SP Text Mode SDK/J Application Info CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
992-
025
5- SP Text Mode Printer SP CTL [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 0]
992-
026
5- SP Text Mode SmartOperationPanel SP CTL [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 0]
992-
027
5- SP Text Mode SmartOperationPanel UP CTL [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 0]
992-
028

SM Appendices 3-116 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

3.6 SP GROUP 6000

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to
No. or CTL Max/Init./Step]
6- ADF Adjustment Side-to-Side Regist: Front ENG* [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
006- 0.1mm]
001
6- ADF Adjustment Side-to-Side Regist: Rear ENG* [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
006- 0.1mm]
002
6- ADF Adjustment Leading Edge ENG* [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
006- Registration: Front 0.1mm]
003
6- ADF Adjustment Leading Edge ENG* [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
006- Registration: Rear 0.1mm]
004
6- ADF Adjustment Buckle: Duplex Front ENG* [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
006- 0.1mm]
005
6- ADF Adjustment Buckle: Duplex Rear ENG* [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
006- 0.1mm]
006
6- ADF Adjustment Rear Edge Erase Front ENG* [ -10 to 10 / -2.3
006- / 0.1mm]
007
6- ADF Adjustment Rear Edge Erase Rear ENG* [ -10 to 10 / -2.3
006- / 0.1mm]
008
6- ADF Adjustment L-Edge Regist (1-Pass): ENG* [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
006- Front 0.1mm]
010
6- ADF Adjustment L-Edge Regist (1-Pass): ENG* [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
006- Rear 0.1mm]
011
6- ADF Adjustment 1st Buckle (1-Pass) ENG* [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
006- 0.1mm]
012
6- ADF Adjustment 2nd Buckle (1-Pass) ENG* [ -2 to 3 / 0 /
006- 0.1mm]

SM Appendices 3-117 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to

No. or CTL Max/Init./Step]
013
6- ADF Adjustment T-Edge Erase (1-Pass): ENG* [ -5 to 5 / -3 /
006- Front 0.1mm]
014
6- ADF Adjustment T-Edge Erase (1-Pass): ENG* [ -5 to 5 / -2.5 /
006- Rear 0.1mm]
015
6- ADF Free Run Free Run Simplex ENG [OFF or ON / - /
009- Motion 1/step]
001
6- ADF Free Run Free Run Duplex Motion ENG [OFF or ON / - /
009- 1/step]
002
6- ADF Free Run Free Run Stamp Motion ENG [OFF or ON / - /
009- 1/step]
003
6- ADF Free Run Free Run Simplex ENG [OFF or ON / - /
009- Motion(low speed) 1/step]
004
6- ADF Free Run Free Run Simplex ENG [OFF or ON / - /
009- Motion(high speed) 1/step]
005
6- ADF Free Run Free Run Duplex ENG [OFF or ON / - /
009- Motion(low speed) 1/step]
006
6- ADF Free Run Free Run Duplex ENG [OFF or ON / - /
009- Motion(high speed) 1/step]
007
6- Stamp Position Adj. ENG* [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
010- 0.1mm]
001
6- Original Size Detect Setting ENG* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
016-
001
6- DF Magnification Adj. ENG* [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
017- 0.1%]

SM Appendices 3-118 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to

No. or CTL Max/Init./Step]
001
6- Skew Correction Moving Setting ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
020-
001
6- Sub-scanPunchPosAdj:2K/3K FIN JPN/EU: 2-Hole ENG [ -7.5 to 7.5 / 0 /
100- 0.5mm]
001
6- Sub-scanPunchPosAdj:2K/3K FIN NA: 3-Hole ENG [ -7.5 to 7.5 / 0 /
100- 0.5mm]
002
6- Sub-scanPunchPosAdj:2K/3K FIN Europe: 4-Hole ENG [ -7.5 to 7.5 / 0 /
100- 0.5mm]
003
6- Sub-scanPunchPosAdj:2K/3K FIN NEU: 4-Hole ENG [ -7.5 to 7.5 / 0 /
100- 0.5mm]
004
6- Sub-scanPunchPosAdj:2K/3K FIN NA: 2-Hole ENG [ -7.5 to 7.5 / 0 /
100- 0.5mm]
005
6- Sub-scanPunchPosAdj:2K/3K FIN JPN: 1-Hole ENG [ -7.5 to 7.5 / 0 /
100- 0.5mm]
006
6- Main-scanPunchPosAdj:2K/3K FIN JPN/EU: 2-Hole ENG [ -2 to 2 / 0 /
101- 0.4mm]
001
6- Main-scanPunchPosAdj:2K/3K FIN NA: 3-Hole ENG [ -2 to 2 / 0 /
101- 0.4mm]
002
6- Main-scanPunchPosAdj:2K/3K FIN Europe: 4-Hole ENG [ -2 to 2 / 0 /
101- 0.4mm]
003
6- Main-scanPunchPosAdj:2K/3K FIN NEU: 4-Hole ENG [ -2 to 2 / 0 /
101- 0.4mm]
004
6- Main-scanPunchPosAdj:2K/3K FIN NA: 2-Hole ENG [ -2 to 2 / 0 /
101- 0.4mm]

SM Appendices 3-119 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to

No. or CTL Max/Init./Step]
005
6- Main-scanPunchPosAdj:2K/3K FIN JPN:1-1Hole ENG [ -2 to 2 / 0 /
101- 0.4mm]
006
6- SkewCorrectBuckleAdj:2K/3K FIN A3 SEF ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
102- 0.2mm]
001
6- SkewCorrectBuckleAdj:2K/3K FIN B4 SEF ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
102- 0.2mm]
002
6- SkewCorrectBuckleAdj:2K/3K FIN A4 SEF ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
102- 0.2mm]
003
6- SkewCorrectBuckleAdj:2K/3K FIN A4 LEF ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
102- 0.2mm]
004
6- SkewCorrectBuckleAdj:2K/3K FIN B5 SEF ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
102- 0.2mm]
005
6- SkewCorrectBuckleAdj:2K/3K FIN B5 LEF ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
102- 0.2mm]
006
6- SkewCorrectBuckleAdj:2K/3K FIN A5 LEF ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
102- 0.2mm]
007
6- SkewCorrectBuckleAdj:2K/3K FIN DLT SEF ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
102- 0.2mm]
008
6- SkewCorrectBuckleAdj:2K/3K FIN LG SEF ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
102- 0.2mm]
009
6- SkewCorrectBuckleAdj:2K/3K FIN Oficio SEF ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
102- 0.2mm]
010
6- SkewCorrectBuckleAdj:2K/3K FIN LT SEF ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
102- 0.2mm]

SM Appendices 3-120 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to

No. or CTL Max/Init./Step]
011
6- SkewCorrectBuckleAdj:2K/3K FIN LT LEF ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
102- 0.2mm]
012
6- SkewCorrectBuckleAdj:2K/3K FIN HLT LEF ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
102- 0.2mm]
013
6- SkewCorrectBuckleAdj:2K/3K FIN 12"x18" ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
102- 0.2mm]
014
6- SkewCorrectBuckleAdj:2K/3K FIN 8K SEF ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
102- 0.2mm]
015
6- SkewCorrectBuckleAdj:2K/3K FIN 16K SEF ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
102- 0.2mm]
016
6- SkewCorrectBuckleAdj:2K/3K FIN 16K LEF ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
102- 0.2mm]
017
6- SkewCorrectBuckleAdj:2K/3K FIN Other ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
102- 0.2mm]
018
6- SkewCorrectCtrlSW:2K/3K FIN A3 SEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
103- 0: BuckleAdj On
001 1: BuckleAdj Off
6- SkewCorrectCtrlSW:2K/3K FIN B4 SEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
103- 0: BuckleAdj On
002 1: BuckleAdj Off
6- SkewCorrectCtrlSW:2K/3K FIN A4 SEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
103- 0: BuckleAdj On
003 1: BuckleAdj Off
6- SkewCorrectCtrlSW:2K/3K FIN A4 LEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
103- 0: BuckleAdj On
004 1: BuckleAdj Off
6- SkewCorrectCtrlSW:2K/3K FIN B5 SEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
103- 0: BuckleAdj On

SM Appendices 3-121 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to

No. or CTL Max/Init./Step]
005 1: BuckleAdj Off
6- SkewCorrectCtrlSW:2K/3K FIN B5 LEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
103- 0: BuckleAdj On
006 1: BuckleAdj Off
6- SkewCorrectCtrlSW:2K/3K FIN A5 LEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
103- 0: BuckleAdj On
007 1: BuckleAdj Off
6- SkewCorrectCtrlSW:2K/3K FIN DLT SEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
103- 0: BuckleAdj On
008 1: BuckleAdj Off
6- SkewCorrectCtrlSW:2K/3K FIN LG SEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
103- 0: BuckleAdj On
009 1: BuckleAdj Off
6- SkewCorrectCtrlSW:2K/3K FIN Oficio SEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
103- 0: BuckleAdj On
010 1: BuckleAdj Off
6- SkewCorrectCtrlSW:2K/3K FIN LT SEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
103- 0: BuckleAdj On
011 1: BuckleAdj Off
6- SkewCorrectCtrlSW:2K/3K FIN LT LEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
103- 0: BuckleAdj On
012 1: BuckleAdj Off
6- SkewCorrectCtrlSW:2K/3K FIN HLT LEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
103- 0: BuckleAdj On
013 1: BuckleAdj Off
6- SkewCorrectCtrlSW:2K/3K FIN 12"x18" ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
103- 0: BuckleAdj On
014 1: BuckleAdj Off
6- SkewCorrectCtrlSW:2K/3K FIN 8K SEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
103- 0: BuckleAdj On
015 1: BuckleAdj Off
6- SkewCorrectCtrlSW:2K/3K FIN 16K SEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
103- 0: BuckleAdj On
016 1: BuckleAdj Off
6- SkewCorrectCtrlSW:2K/3K FIN 16K LEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
103- 0: BuckleAdj On

SM Appendices 3-122 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to

No. or CTL Max/Init./Step]
017 1: BuckleAdj Off
6- SkewCorrectCtrlSW:2K/3K FIN Other ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
103- 0: BuckleAdj On
018 1: BuckleAdj Off
6- ShiftTrayJogPosAdj:2K/3K FIN A3 SEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
104- 0.5mm]
001
6- ShiftTrayJogPosAdj:2K/3K FIN B4 SEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
104- 0.5mm]
002
6- ShiftTrayJogPosAdj:2K/3K FIN A4 SEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
104- 0.5mm]
003
6- ShiftTrayJogPosAdj:2K/3K FIN A4 LEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
104- 0.5mm]
004
6- ShiftTrayJogPosAdj:2K/3K FIN B5 LEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
104- 0.5mm]
005
6- ShiftTrayJogPosAdj:2K/3K FIN A5 LEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
104- 0.5mm]
006
6- ShiftTrayJogPosAdj:2K/3K FIN DLT SEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
104- 0.5mm]
007
6- ShiftTrayJogPosAdj:2K/3K FIN LG SEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
104- 0.5mm]
008
6- ShiftTrayJogPosAdj:2K/3K FIN Oficio SEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
104- 0.5mm]
009
6- ShiftTrayJogPosAdj:2K/3K FIN LT SEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
104- 0.5mm]
010
6- ShiftTrayJogPosAdj:2K/3K FIN LT LEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
104- 0.5mm]

SM Appendices 3-123 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to

No. or CTL Max/Init./Step]
011
6- ShiftTrayJogPosAdj:2K/3K FIN HLT LEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
104- 0.5mm]
012
6- ShiftTrayJogPosAdj:2K/3K FIN 8K SEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
104- 0.5mm]
013
6- ShiftTrayJogPosAdj:2K/3K FIN 16K LEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
104- 0.5mm]
014
6- ShiftTrayJogPosAdj:2K/3K FIN Other ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
104- 0.5mm]
015
6- ShftTJogRtrctAngAdj:2K/3K FIN A3 SEF ENG [ -10 to 10 / 0 /
105- 5deg]
001
6- ShftTJogRtrctAngAdj:2K/3K FIN B4 SEF ENG [ -10 to 10 / 0 /
105- 5deg]
002
6- ShftTJogRtrctAngAdj:2K/3K FIN A4 SEF ENG [ -10 to 10 / 0 /
105- 5deg]
003
6- ShftTJogRtrctAngAdj:2K/3K FIN DLT SEF ENG [ -10 to 10 / 0 /
105- 5deg]
004
6- ShftTJogRtrctAngAdj:2K/3K FIN LG SEF ENG [ -10 to 10 / 0 /
105- 5deg]
005
6- ShftTJogRtrctAngAdj:2K/3K FIN Oficio SEF ENG [ -10 to 10 / 0 /
105- 5deg]
006
6- ShftTJogRtrctAngAdj:2K/3K FIN LT SEF ENG [ -10 to 10 / 0 /
105- 5deg]
007
6- ShftTJogRtrctAngAdj:2K/3K FIN 8K SEF ENG [ -10 to 10 / 0 /
105- 5deg]

SM Appendices 3-124 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to

No. or CTL Max/Init./Step]
008
6- ShftTJogRtrctAngAdj:2K/3K FIN Other ENG [ -10 to 10 / 0 /
105- 5deg]
009
6- Use Paper Jogger: 2K/3K FIN A3 SEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
106- 0: Jogging On
001 1: Jogging Off
6- Use Paper Jogger: 2K/3K FIN B4 SEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
106- 0: Jogging On
002 1: Jogging Off
6- Use Paper Jogger: 2K/3K FIN A4 SEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
106- 0: Jogging On
003 1: Jogging Off
6- Use Paper Jogger: 2K/3K FIN A4 LEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
106- 0: Jogging On
004 1: Jogging Off
6- Use Paper Jogger: 2K/3K FIN B5 LEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
106- 0: Jogging On
005 1: Jogging Off
6- Use Paper Jogger: 2K/3K FIN A5 LEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
106- 0: Jogging On
006 1: Jogging Off
6- Use Paper Jogger: 2K/3K FIN DLT SEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
106- 0: Jogging On
007 1: Jogging Off
6- Use Paper Jogger: 2K/3K FIN LG SEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
106- 0: Jogging On
008 1: Jogging Off
6- Use Paper Jogger: 2K/3K FIN Oficio SEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
106- 0: Jogging On
009 1: Jogging Off
6- Use Paper Jogger: 2K/3K FIN LT SEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
106- 0: Jogging On
010 1: Jogging Off
6- Use Paper Jogger: 2K/3K FIN LT LEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
106- 0: Jogging On

SM Appendices 3-125 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to

No. or CTL Max/Init./Step]
011 1: Jogging Off
6- Use Paper Jogger: 2K/3K FIN HLT LEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
106- 0: Jogging On
012 1: Jogging Off
6- Use Paper Jogger: 2K/3K FIN 8K SEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
106- 0: Jogging On
013 1: Jogging Off
6- Use Paper Jogger: 2K/3K FIN 16K LEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
106- 0: Jogging On
014 1: Jogging Off
6- Use Paper Jogger: 2K/3K FIN Other ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
106- 0: Jogging On
015 1: Jogging Off
6- JogPosAdj(CrnrStplr):2K/3K FIN A3 SEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
107- 0.5mm]
001
6- JogPosAdj(CrnrStplr):2K/3K FIN B4 SEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
107- 0.5mm]
002
6- JogPosAdj(CrnrStplr):2K/3K FIN A4 SEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
107- 0.5mm]
003
6- JogPosAdj(CrnrStplr):2K/3K FIN A4 LEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
107- 0.5mm]
004
6- JogPosAdj(CrnrStplr):2K/3K FIN B5 SEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
107- 0.5mm]
005
6- JogPosAdj(CrnrStplr):2K/3K FIN B5 LEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
107- 0.5mm]
006
6- JogPosAdj(CrnrStplr):2K/3K FIN DLT SEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
107- 0.5mm]
007
6- JogPosAdj(CrnrStplr):2K/3K FIN LG SEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
107- 0.5mm]

SM Appendices 3-126 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to

No. or CTL Max/Init./Step]
008
6- JogPosAdj(CrnrStplr):2K/3K FIN Oficio SEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
107- 0.5mm]
009
6- JogPosAdj(CrnrStplr):2K/3K FIN LT SEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
107- 0.5mm]
010
6- JogPosAdj(CrnrStplr):2K/3K FIN LT LEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
107- 0.5mm]
011
6- JogPosAdj(CrnrStplr):2K/3K FIN 8K SEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
107- 0.5mm]
012
6- JogPosAdj(CrnrStplr):2K/3K FIN 16K SEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
107- 0.5mm]
013
6- JogPosAdj(CrnrStplr):2K/3K FIN 16K LEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
107- 0.5mm]
014
6- JogPosAdj(CrnrStplr):2K/3K FIN Other ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
107- 0.5mm]
015
6- JogPosAdj(BookStplr):2K/3K FIN A3 SEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
108- 0.5mm]
001
6- JogPosAdj(BookStplr):2K/3K FIN B4 SEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
108- 0.5mm]
002
6- JogPosAdj(BookStplr):2K/3K FIN A4 SEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
108- 0.5mm]
003
6- JogPosAdj(BookStplr):2K/3K FIN B5 SEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
108- 0.5mm]
004
6- JogPosAdj(BookStplr):2K/3K FIN DLT SEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
108- 0.5mm]

SM Appendices 3-127 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to

No. or CTL Max/Init./Step]
005
6- JogPosAdj(BookStplr):2K/3K FIN LG SEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
108- 0.5mm]
006
6- JogPosAdj(BookStplr):2K/3K FIN Oficio SEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
108- 0.5mm]
007
6- JogPosAdj(BookStplr):2K/3K FIN LT SEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
108- 0.5mm]
008
6- JogPosAdj(BookStplr):2K/3K FIN 12"x18" ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
108- 0.5mm]
009
6- JogPosAdj(BookStplr):2K/3K FIN 8K SEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
108- 0.5mm]
010
6- JogPosAdj(BookStplr):2K/3K FIN Other ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
108- 0.5mm]
011
6- CrnrStplrJogTimeAdj:2K/3K FIN A3 SEF ENG [ 0 to 2 / 0 /
109- 1times]
001
6- CrnrStplrJogTimeAdj:2K/3K FIN B4 SEF ENG [ 0 to 2 / 0 /
109- 1times]
002
6- CrnrStplrJogTimeAdj:2K/3K FIN A4 SEF ENG [ 0 to 2 / 0 /
109- 1times]
003
6- CrnrStplrJogTimeAdj:2K/3K FIN A4 LEF ENG [ 0 to 2 / 0 /
109- 1times]
004
6- CrnrStplrJogTimeAdj:2K/3K FIN B5 SEF ENG [ 0 to 2 / 0 /
109- 1times]
005
6- CrnrStplrJogTimeAdj:2K/3K FIN B5 LEF ENG [ 0 to 2 / 0 /
109- 1times]

SM Appendices 3-128 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to

No. or CTL Max/Init./Step]
006
6- CrnrStplrJogTimeAdj:2K/3K FIN DLT SEF ENG [ 0 to 2 / 0 /
109- 1times]
007
6- CrnrStplrJogTimeAdj:2K/3K FIN LG SEF ENG [ 0 to 2 / 0 /
109- 1times]
008
6- CrnrStplrJogTimeAdj:2K/3K FIN Oficio SEF ENG [ 0 to 2 / 0 /
109- 1times]
009
6- CrnrStplrJogTimeAdj:2K/3K FIN LT SEF ENG [ 0 to 2 / 0 /
109- 1times]
010
6- CrnrStplrJogTimeAdj:2K/3K FIN LT LEF ENG [ 0 to 2 / 0 /
109- 1times]
011
6- CrnrStplrJogTimeAdj:2K/3K FIN 8K SEF ENG [ 0 to 2 / 0 /
109- 1times]
012
6- CrnrStplrJogTimeAdj:2K/3K FIN 16K SEF ENG [ 0 to 2 / 0 /
109- 1times]
013
6- CrnrStplrJogTimeAdj:2K/3K FIN 16K LEF ENG [ 0 to 2 / 0 /
109- 1times]
014
6- CrnrStplrJogTimeAdj:2K/3K FIN Other ENG [ 0 to 2 / 0 /
109- 1times]
015
6- BookStplrJogTimeAdj:2K/3K FIN A3 SEF ENG [ 0 to 2 / 0 /
110- 1times]
001
6- BookStplrJogTimeAdj:2K/3K FIN B4 SEF ENG [ 0 to 2 / 0 /
110- 1times]
002
6- BookStplrJogTimeAdj:2K/3K FIN A4 SEF ENG [ 0 to 2 / 0 /
110- 1times]

SM Appendices 3-129 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to

No. or CTL Max/Init./Step]
003
6- BookStplrJogTimeAdj:2K/3K FIN B5 SEF ENG [ 0 to 2 / 0 /
110- 1times]
004
6- BookStplrJogTimeAdj:2K/3K FIN DLT SEF ENG [ 0 to 2 / 0 /
110- 1times]
005
6- BookStplrJogTimeAdj:2K/3K FIN LG SEF ENG [ 0 to 2 / 0 /
110- 1times]
006
6- BookStplrJogTimeAdj:2K/3K FIN Oficio SEF ENG [ 0 to 2 / 0 /
110- 1times]
007
6- BookStplrJogTimeAdj:2K/3K FIN LT SEF ENG [ 0 to 2 / 0 /
110- 1times]
008
6- BookStplrJogTimeAdj:2K/3K FIN 12"x18" ENG [ 0 to 2 / 0 /
110- 1times]
009
6- BookStplrJogTimeAdj:2K/3K FIN 8K SEF ENG [ 0 to 2 / 0 /
110- 1times]
010
6- BookStplrJogTimeAdj:2K/3K FIN Other ENG [ 0 to 2 / 0 /
110- 1times]
011
6- Staple Position Adj: 2K/3K FIN A3 SEF ENG [ -3.5 to 3.5 / 0 /
111- 0.5mm]
001
6- Staple Position Adj: 2K/3K FIN B4 SEF ENG [ -3.5 to 3.5 / 0 /
111- 0.5mm]
002
6- Staple Position Adj: 2K/3K FIN A4 SEF ENG [ -3.5 to 3.5 / 0 /
111- 0.5mm]
003
6- Staple Position Adj: 2K/3K FIN A4 LEF ENG [ -3.5 to 3.5 / 0 /
111- 0.5mm]

SM Appendices 3-130 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to

No. or CTL Max/Init./Step]
004
6- Staple Position Adj: 2K/3K FIN B5 SEF ENG [ -3.5 to 3.5 / 0 /
111- 0.5mm]
005
6- Staple Position Adj: 2K/3K FIN B5 LEF ENG [ -3.5 to 3.5 / 0 /
111- 0.5mm]
006
6- Staple Position Adj: 2K/3K FIN DLT SEF ENG [ -3.5 to 3.5 / 0 /
111- 0.5mm]
007
6- Staple Position Adj: 2K/3K FIN LG SEF ENG [ -3.5 to 3.5 / 0 /
111- 0.5mm]
008
6- Staple Position Adj: 2K/3K FIN Oficio SEF ENG [ -3.5 to 3.5 / 0 /
111- 0.5mm]
009
6- Staple Position Adj: 2K/3K FIN LT SEF ENG [ -3.5 to 3.5 / 0 /
111- 0.5mm]
010
6- Staple Position Adj: 2K/3K FIN LT LEF ENG [ -3.5 to 3.5 / 0 /
111- 0.5mm]
011
6- Staple Position Adj: 2K/3K FIN 8K SEF ENG [ -3.5 to 3.5 / 0 /
111- 0.5mm]
012
6- Staple Position Adj: 2K/3K FIN 16K SEF ENG [ -3.5 to 3.5 / 0 /
111- 0.5mm]
013
6- Staple Position Adj: 2K/3K FIN 16K LEF ENG [ -3.5 to 3.5 / 0 /
111- 0.5mm]
014
6- Staple Position Adj: 2K/3K FIN Other ENG [ -3.5 to 3.5 / 0 /
111- 0.5mm]
015
6- BookletStaplerPosAdj:2K/3K FIN A3 SEF ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
112- 0.2mm]

SM Appendices 3-131 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to

No. or CTL Max/Init./Step]
001
6- BookletStaplerPosAdj:2K/3K FIN B4 SEF ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
112- 0.2mm]
002
6- BookletStaplerPosAdj:2K/3K FIN A4 SEF ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
112- 0.2mm]
003
6- BookletStaplerPosAdj:2K/3K FIN B5 SEF ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
112- 0.2mm]
004
6- BookletStaplerPosAdj:2K/3K FIN DLT SEF ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
112- 0.2mm]
005
6- BookletStaplerPosAdj:2K/3K FIN LG SEF ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
112- 0.2mm]
006
6- BookletStaplerPosAdj:2K/3K FIN Oficio SEF ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
112- 0.2mm]
007
6- BookletStaplerPosAdj:2K/3K FIN LT SEF ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
112- 0.2mm]
008
6- BookletStaplerPosAdj:2K/3K FIN 12"x18" ENG [ -1.8 to 1.8 / 0 /
112- 0.2mm]
009
6- BookletStaplerPosAdj:2K/3K FIN 8K SEF ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
112- 0.2mm]
010
6- BookletStaplerPosAdj:2K/3K FIN Other ENG [ -1.8 to 1.8 / 0 /
112- 0.2mm]
011
6- BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN A3 SEF ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
113- 0.2mm]
001
6- BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN B4 SEF ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
113- 0.2mm]

SM Appendices 3-132 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to

No. or CTL Max/Init./Step]
002
6- BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN A4 SEF ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
113- 0.2mm]
003
6- BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN B5 SEF ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
113- 0.2mm]
004
6- BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN DLT SEF ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
113- 0.2mm]
005
6- BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN LG SEF ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
113- 0.2mm]
006
6- BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN Oficio SEF ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
113- 0.2mm]
007
6- BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN LT SEF ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
113- 0.2mm]
008
6- BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN 12"x18" ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
113- 0.2mm]
009
6- BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN 8K SEF ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
113- 0.2mm]
010
6- BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN Other ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
113- 0.2mm]
011
6- BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN A3 SEF(1-5) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
113- 0.2mm]
012
6- BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN A3 SEF(6-10) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
113- 0.2mm]
013
6- BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN A3 SEF(11-15) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
113- 0.2mm]

SM Appendices 3-133 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to

No. or CTL Max/Init./Step]
014
6- BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN A3 SEF(16-over) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
113- 0.2mm]
015
6- BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN B4 SEF(1-5) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
113- 0.2mm]
016
6- BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN B4 SEF(6-10) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
113- 0.2mm]
017
6- BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN B4 SEF(11-15) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
113- 0.2mm]
018
6- BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN B4 SEF(16-over) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
113- 0.2mm]
019
6- BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN A4 SEF(1-5) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
113- 0.2mm]
020
6- BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN A4 SEF(6-10) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
113- 0.2mm]
021
6- BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN A4 SEF(11-15) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
113- 0.2mm]
022
6- BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN A4 SEF(16-over) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
113- 0.2mm]
023
6- BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN B5 SEF(1-5) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
113- 0.2mm]
024
6- BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN B5 SEF(6-10) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
113- 0.2mm]
025
6- BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN B5 SEF(11-15) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
113- 0.2mm]

SM Appendices 3-134 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to

No. or CTL Max/Init./Step]
026
6- BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN B5 SEF(16-over) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
113- 0.2mm]
027
6- BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN DLT SEF(1-5) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
113- 0.2mm]
028
6- BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN DLT SEF(6-10) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
113- 0.2mm]
029
6- BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN DLT SEF(11-15) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
113- 0.2mm]
030
6- BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN DLT SEF(16-over) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
113- 0.2mm]
031
6- BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN LG SEF(1-5) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
113- 0.2mm]
032
6- BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN LG SEF(6-10) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
113- 0.2mm]
033
6- BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN LG SEF(11-15) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
113- 0.2mm]
034
6- BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN LG SEF(16-over) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
113- 0.2mm]
035
6- BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN Oficio SEF(1-5) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
113- 0.2mm]
036
6- BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN Oficio SEF(6-10) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
113- 0.2mm]
037
6- BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN Oficio SEF(11-15) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
113- 0.2mm]

SM Appendices 3-135 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to

No. or CTL Max/Init./Step]
038
6- BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN Oficio SEF(16-over) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
113- 0.2mm]
039
6- BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN LT SEF(1-5) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
113- 0.2mm]
040
6- BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN LT SEF(6-10) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
113- 0.2mm]
041
6- BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN LT SEF(11-15) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
113- 0.2mm]
042
6- BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN LT SEF(16-over) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
113- 0.2mm]
043
6- BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN 12"x18"(1-5) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
113- 0.2mm]
044
6- BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN 12"x18"(6-10) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
113- 0.2mm]
045
6- BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN 12"x18"(11-15) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
113- 0.2mm]
046
6- BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN 12"x18"(16-over) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
113- 0.2mm]
047
6- BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN 8K SEF(1-5) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
113- 0.2mm]
048
6- BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN 8K SEF(6-10) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
113- 0.2mm]
049
6- BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN 8K SEF(11-15) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
113- 0.2mm]

SM Appendices 3-136 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to

No. or CTL Max/Init./Step]
050
6- BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN 8K SEF(16-over) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
113- 0.2mm]
051
6- BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN Other(1-5) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
113- 0.2mm]
052
6- BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN Other(6-10) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
113- 0.2mm]
053
6- BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN Other(11-15) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
113- 0.2mm]
054
6- BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN Other(16-over) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
113- 0.2mm]
055
6- Fold Speed Adj.: 2K/3K FIN A3 SEF ENG [ 0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
114- 0: Std Speed
001 1: Middle Speed
2: Low Speed
6- Fold Speed Adj.: 2K/3K FIN B4 SEF ENG [ 0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
114- 0: Std Speed
002 1: Middle Speed
2: Low Speed
6- Fold Speed Adj.: 2K/3K FIN A4 SEF ENG [ 0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
114- 0: Std Speed
003 1: Middle Speed
2: Low Speed
6- Fold Speed Adj.: 2K/3K FIN B5 SEF ENG [ 0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
114- 0: Std Speed
004 1: Middle Speed
2: Low Speed
6- Fold Speed Adj.: 2K/3K FIN DLT SEF ENG [ 0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
114- 0: Std Speed
005 1: Middle Speed
2: Low Speed

SM Appendices 3-137 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to

No. or CTL Max/Init./Step]
6- Fold Speed Adj.: 2K/3K FIN LG SEF ENG [ 0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
114- 0: Std Speed
006 1: Middle Speed
2: Low Speed
6- Fold Speed Adj.: 2K/3K FIN Oficio SEF ENG [ 0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
114- 0: Std Speed
007 1: Middle Speed
2: Low Speed
6- Fold Speed Adj.: 2K/3K FIN LT SEF ENG [ 0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
114- 0: Std Speed
008 1: Middle Speed
2: Low Speed
6- Fold Speed Adj.: 2K/3K FIN 12"x18" ENG [ 0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
114- 0: Std Speed
009 1: Middle Speed
2: Low Speed
6- Fold Speed Adj.: 2K/3K FIN 8K SEF ENG [ 0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
114- 0: Std Speed
010 1: Middle Speed
2: Low Speed
6- Fold Speed Adj.: 2K/3K FIN Other ENG [ 0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
114- 0: Std Speed
011 1: Middle Speed
2: Low Speed
6- Finisher Free Run: 2K/3K FIN Free Run 5 ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
115-
005
6- CrnrStplrMxPrstkShAdj:2K/3KFIN A3 SEF ENG [ -1 to 0 / 0 /
116- 1sheets]
001
6- CrnrStplrMxPrstkShAdj:2K/3KFIN B4 SEF ENG [ -1 to 0 / 0 /
116- 1sheets]
002
6- CrnrStplrMxPrstkShAdj:2K/3KFIN A4 SEF ENG [ -1 to 0 / 0 /
116- 1sheets]
003

SM Appendices 3-138 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to

No. or CTL Max/Init./Step]
6- CrnrStplrMxPrstkShAdj:2K/3KFIN A4 LEF ENG [ -1 to 0 / 0 /
116- 1sheets]
004
6- CrnrStplrMxPrstkShAdj:2K/3KFIN B5 SEF ENG [ -1 to 0 / 0 /
116- 1sheets]
005
6- CrnrStplrMxPrstkShAdj:2K/3KFIN B5 LEF ENG [ -1 to 0 / 0 /
116- 1sheets]
006
6- CrnrStplrMxPrstkShAdj:2K/3KFIN DLT SEF ENG [ -1 to 0 / 0 /
116- 1sheets]
007
6- CrnrStplrMxPrstkShAdj:2K/3KFIN LG SEF ENG [ -1 to 0 / 0 /
116- 1sheets]
008
6- CrnrStplrMxPrstkShAdj:2K/3KFIN Oficio SEF ENG [ -1 to 0 / 0 /
116- 1sheets]
009
6- CrnrStplrMxPrstkShAdj:2K/3KFIN LT SEF ENG [ -1 to 0 / 0 /
116- 1sheets]
010
6- CrnrStplrMxPrstkShAdj:2K/3KFIN LT LEF ENG [ -1 to 0 / 0 /
116- 1sheets]
011
6- CrnrStplrMxPrstkShAdj:2K/3KFIN 8K SEF ENG [ -1 to 0 / 0 /
116- 1sheets]
012
6- CrnrStplrMxPrstkShAdj:2K/3KFIN 16K SEF ENG [ -1 to 0 / 0 /
116- 1sheets]
013
6- CrnrStplrMxPrstkShAdj:2K/3KFIN 16K LEF ENG [ -1 to 0 / 0 /
116- 1sheets]
014
6- CrnrStplrMxPrstkShAdj:2K/3KFIN Other ENG [ -1 to 0 / 0 /
116- 1sheets]
015

SM Appendices 3-139 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to

No. or CTL Max/Init./Step]
6- BookStplrMxPrstkShAdj:2K/3KFIN A3 SEF ENG [ -7 to 0 / 0 /
117- 1sheets]
001
6- BookStplrMxPrstkShAdj:2K/3KFIN B4 SEF ENG [ -7 to 0 / 0 /
117- 1sheets]
002
6- BookStplrMxPrstkShAdj:2K/3KFIN A4 SEF ENG [ -7 to 0 / 0 /
117- 1sheets]
003
6- BookStplrMxPrstkShAdj:2K/3KFIN B5 SEF ENG [ -7 to 0 / 0 /
117- 1sheets]
004
6- BookStplrMxPrstkShAdj:2K/3KFIN DLT SEF ENG [ -7 to 0 / 0 /
117- 1sheets]
005
6- BookStplrMxPrstkShAdj:2K/3KFIN LG SEF ENG [ -7 to 0 / 0 /
117- 1sheets]
006
6- BookStplrMxPrstkShAdj:2K/3KFIN Oficio SEF ENG [ -7 to 0 / 0 /
117- 1sheets]
007
6- BookStplrMxPrstkShAdj:2K/3KFIN LT SEF ENG [ -7 to 0 / 0 /
117- 1sheets]
008
6- BookStplrMxPrstkShAdj:2K/3KFIN 12"x18" ENG [ -7 to 0 / 0 /
117- 1sheets]
009
6- BookStplrMxPrstkShAdj:2K/3KFIN 8K SEF ENG [ -7 to 0 / 0 /
117- 1sheets]
010
6- BookStplrMxPrstkShAdj:2K/3KFIN Other ENG [ -2 to 0 / 0 /
117- 1sheets]
011
6- CrnrStplrPrstkOffsAdj:2K/3KFIN A3 SEF ENG [ -16 to 16 / 0 /
118- 2mm]
001

SM Appendices 3-140 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to

No. or CTL Max/Init./Step]
6- CrnrStplrPrstkOffsAdj:2K/3KFIN B4 SEF ENG [ -16 to 16 / 0 /
118- 2mm]
002
6- CrnrStplrPrstkOffsAdj:2K/3KFIN A4 SEF ENG [ -16 to 16 / 0 /
118- 2mm]
003
6- CrnrStplrPrstkOffsAdj:2K/3KFIN A4 LEF ENG [ -16 to 16 / 0 /
118- 2mm]
004
6- CrnrStplrPrstkOffsAdj:2K/3KFIN B5 SEF ENG [ -16 to 16 / 0 /
118- 2mm]
005
6- CrnrStplrPrstkOffsAdj:2K/3KFIN B5 LEF ENG [ -16 to 16 / 0 /
118- 2mm]
006
6- CrnrStplrPrstkOffsAdj:2K/3KFIN DLT SEF ENG [ -16 to 16 / 0 /
118- 2mm]
007
6- CrnrStplrPrstkOffsAdj:2K/3KFIN LG SEF ENG [ -16 to 16 / 0 /
118- 2mm]
008
6- CrnrStplrPrstkOffsAdj:2K/3KFIN Oficio SEF ENG [ -16 to 16 / 0 /
118- 2mm]
009
6- CrnrStplrPrstkOffsAdj:2K/3KFIN LT SEF ENG [ -16 to 16 / 0 /
118- 2mm]
010
6- CrnrStplrPrstkOffsAdj:2K/3KFIN LT LEF ENG [ -16 to 16 / 0 /
118- 2mm]
011
6- CrnrStplrPrstkOffsAdj:2K/3KFIN 8K SEF ENG [ -16 to 16 / 0 /
118- 2mm]
012
6- CrnrStplrPrstkOffsAdj:2K/3KFIN 16K SEF ENG [ -16 to 16 / 0 /
118- 2mm]
013

SM Appendices 3-141 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to

No. or CTL Max/Init./Step]
6- CrnrStplrPrstkOffsAdj:2K/3KFIN 16K LEF ENG [ -16 to 16 / 0 /
118- 2mm]
014
6- CrnrStplrPrstkOffsAdj:2K/3KFIN Other ENG [ -16 to 16 / 0 /
118- 2mm]
015
6- BookStplrPrstkOffsAdj:2K/3KFIN A3 SEF ENG [ -30 to 30 / 0 /
119- 2mm]
001
6- BookStplrPrstkOffsAdj:2K/3KFIN B4 SEF ENG [ -30 to 30 / 0 /
119- 2mm]
002
6- BookStplrPrstkOffsAdj:2K/3KFIN A4 SEF ENG [ -30 to 30 / 0 /
119- 2mm]
003
6- BookStplrPrstkOffsAdj:2K/3KFIN B5 SEF ENG [ -30 to 30 / 0 /
119- 2mm]
004
6- BookStplrPrstkOffsAdj:2K/3KFIN DLT SEF ENG [ -30 to 30 / 0 /
119- 2mm]
005
6- BookStplrPrstkOffsAdj:2K/3KFIN LG SEF ENG [ -30 to 30 / 0 /
119- 2mm]
006
6- BookStplrPrstkOffsAdj:2K/3KFIN Oficio SEF ENG [ -30 to 30 / 0 /
119- 2mm]
007
6- BookStplrPrstkOffsAdj:2K/3KFIN LT SEF ENG [ -30 to 30 / 0 /
119- 2mm]
008
6- BookStplrPrstkOffsAdj:2K/3KFIN 12"x18" ENG [ -30 to 30 / 0 /
119- 2mm]
009
6- BookStplrPrstkOffsAdj:2K/3KFIN 8K SEF ENG [ -30 to 30 / 0 /
119- 2mm]
010

SM Appendices 3-142 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to

No. or CTL Max/Init./Step]
6- BookStplrPrstkOffsAdj:2K/3KFIN Other ENG [ -30 to 30 / 0 /
119- 2mm]
011
6- CrnStpPosExFeedAmtAdj:2K/3KFIN A3 SEF ENG [ 0 to 30 / 0 /
120- 10mm]
001
6- CrnStpPosExFeedAmtAdj:2K/3KFIN B4 SEF ENG [ 0 to 30 / 0 /
120- 10mm]
002
6- CrnStpPosExFeedAmtAdj:2K/3KFIN A4 SEF ENG [ 0 to 30 / 0 /
120- 10mm]
003
6- CrnStpPosExFeedAmtAdj:2K/3KFIN A4 LEF ENG [ 0 to 30 / 0 /
120- 10mm]
004
6- CrnStpPosExFeedAmtAdj:2K/3KFIN B5 SEF ENG [ 0 to 30 / 0 /
120- 10mm]
005
6- CrnStpPosExFeedAmtAdj:2K/3KFIN B5 LEF ENG [ 0 to 30 / 0 /
120- 10mm]
006
6- CrnStpPosExFeedAmtAdj:2K/3KFIN DLT SEF ENG [ 0 to 30 / 0 /
120- 10mm]
007
6- CrnStpPosExFeedAmtAdj:2K/3KFIN LG SEF ENG [ 0 to 30 / 0 /
120- 10mm]
008
6- CrnStpPosExFeedAmtAdj:2K/3KFIN Oficio SEF ENG [ 0 to 30 / 0 /
120- 10mm]
009
6- CrnStpPosExFeedAmtAdj:2K/3KFIN LT SEF ENG [ 0 to 30 / 0 /
120- 10mm]
010
6- CrnStpPosExFeedAmtAdj:2K/3KFIN LT LEF ENG [ 0 to 30 / 0 /
120- 10mm]
011

SM Appendices 3-143 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to

No. or CTL Max/Init./Step]
6- CrnStpPosExFeedAmtAdj:2K/3KFIN 8K SEF ENG [ 0 to 30 / 0 /
120- 10mm]
012
6- CrnStpPosExFeedAmtAdj:2K/3KFIN 16K SEF ENG [ 0 to 30 / 0 /
120- 10mm]
013
6- CrnStpPosExFeedAmtAdj:2K/3KFIN 16K LEF ENG [ 0 to 30 / 0 /
120- 10mm]
014
6- CrnStpPosExFeedAmtAdj:2K/3KFIN Other ENG [ 0 to 30 / 0 /
120- 10mm]
015
6- NV Adj. Data Mod. Jogger Pos. Factory Adj. ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
121- 0.5mm]
001
6- NV Adj. Data Mod. Folding Pos. Factory Adj. ENG [ -1.4 to 1.4 / 0 /
121- 0.2mm]
002
6- BkFoldJogSolMovAmtAdj:2K/3KFIN A3 SEF ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
122- 1mm]
001
6- BkFoldJogSolMovAmtAdj:2K/3KFIN B4 SEF ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
122- 1mm]
002
6- BkFoldJogSolMovAmtAdj:2K/3KFIN A4 SEF ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
122- 1mm]
003
6- BkFoldJogSolMovAmtAdj:2K/3KFIN B5 SEF ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
122- 1mm]
004
6- BkFoldJogSolMovAmtAdj:2K/3KFIN DLT SEF ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
122- 1mm]
005
6- BkFoldJogSolMovAmtAdj:2K/3KFIN LG SEF ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
122- 1mm]
006

SM Appendices 3-144 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to

No. or CTL Max/Init./Step]
6- BkFoldJogSolMovAmtAdj:2K/3KFIN Oficio SEF ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
122- 1mm]
007
6- BkFoldJogSolMovAmtAdj:2K/3KFIN LT SEF ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
122- 1mm]
008
6- BkFoldJogSolMovAmtAdj:2K/3KFIN 12"x18" ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
122- 1mm]
009
6- BkFoldJogSolMovAmtAdj:2K/3KFIN 8K SEF ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
122- 1mm]
010
6- BkFoldJogSolMovAmtAdj:2K/3KFIN Other ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
122- 1mm]
011
6- Use Paper Guide(Large Size) All Sizes ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
125- 0: Guide On
001 1: Guide Off
6- Use Paper Guide(Small Size) All Sizes ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
126- 0: Guide On
001 1: Guide Off
6- Paper Guide PossAdj:2K/3K FIN All Sizes ENG [ -10 to 10 / 0 /
127- 1mm]
001
6- Paper Guide RetraAdj:2K/3K FIN All Sizes ENG [ -50 to 50 / 0 /
128- 5mm]
001
6- Paper Guide AceptAdj:2K/3K FIN All Sizes ENG [ -50 to 50 / 0 /
129- 5msec]
001
6- Sub-scan PunchPosAdj:FrontFIN Domestic 2Hole(Europe ENG [ -7.5 to 7.5 / 0 /
130- 2Hole) 0.5mm]
001
6- Sub-scan PunchPosAdj:FrontFIN North America 3Hole ENG [ -7.5 to 7.5 / 0 /
130- 0.5mm]
002

SM Appendices 3-145 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to

No. or CTL Max/Init./Step]
6- Sub-scan PunchPosAdj:FrontFIN Europe 4Hole ENG [ -7.5 to 7.5 / 0 /
130- 0.5mm]
003
6- Sub-scan PunchPosAdj:FrontFIN North Europe 4Hole ENG [ -7.5 to 7.5 / 0 /
130- 0.5mm]
004
6- Sub-scan PunchPosAdj:FrontFIN North America 2Hole ENG [ -7.5 to 7.5 / 0 /
130- 0.5mm]
005
6- Main-scan PunchPosAdj:FrontFIN Domestic 2Hole(Europe ENG [ -2 to 2 / 0 /
131- 2Hole) 0.4mm]
001
6- Main-scan PunchPosAdj:FrontFIN North America 3Hole ENG [ -2 to 2 / 0 /
131- 0.4mm]
002
6- Main-scan PunchPosAdj:FrontFIN Europe 4Hole ENG [ -2 to 2 / 0 /
131- 0.4mm]
003
6- Main-scan PunchPosAdj:FrontFIN North Europe 4Hole ENG [ -2 to 2 / 0 /
131- 0.4mm]
004
6- Main-scan PunchPosAdj:FrontFIN North America 2Hole ENG [ -2 to 2 / 0 /
131- 0.4mm]
005
6- Jogger Fence Fine Adj:FrontFIN A3T ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
132- 0.5mm]
001
6- Jogger Fence Fine Adj:FrontFIN B4T ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
132- 0.5mm]
002
6- Jogger Fence Fine Adj:FrontFIN A4T ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
132- 0.5mm]
003
6- Jogger Fence Fine Adj:FrontFIN A4Y ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
132- 0.5mm]
004

SM Appendices 3-146 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to

No. or CTL Max/Init./Step]
6- Jogger Fence Fine Adj:FrontFIN B5T ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
132- 0.5mm]
005
6- Jogger Fence Fine Adj:FrontFIN B5Y ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
132- 0.5mm]
006
6- Jogger Fence Fine Adj:FrontFIN DLT-T ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
132- 0.5mm]
007
6- Jogger Fence Fine Adj:FrontFIN LG-T ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
132- 0.5mm]
008
6- Jogger Fence Fine Adj:FrontFIN Oficio-T ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
132- 0.5mm]
009
6- Jogger Fence Fine Adj:FrontFIN LT-T ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
132- 0.5mm]
010
6- Jogger Fence Fine Adj:FrontFIN LT-Y ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
132- 0.5mm]
011
6- Jogger Fence Fine Adj:FrontFIN 8K-T ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
132- 0.5mm]
012
6- Jogger Fence Fine Adj:FrontFIN 16K-T ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
132- 0.5mm]
013
6- Jogger Fence Fine Adj:FrontFIN 16K-Y ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
132- 0.5mm]
014
6- Jogger Fence Fine Adj:FrontFIN Other ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
132- 0.5mm]
015
6- Staple Position Adj: FrontFIN Finisher1 ENG [ -2 to 2 / 0 /
133- 0.5mm]
001

SM Appendices 3-147 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to

No. or CTL Max/Init./Step]
6- Staple Position Adj: 1K FIN ENG [ -3.5 to 3.5 / 0 /
140- 0.5mm]
001
6- Staple Position Adj: 1K FIN Without Staples ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
140- 0.3mm]
002
6- Booklet Stapler Pos Adj:1K FIN A3 SEF ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
141- 0.2mm]
001
6- Booklet Stapler Pos Adj:1K FIN B4 SEF ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
141- 0.2mm]
002
6- Booklet Stapler Pos Adj:1K FIN A4 SEF ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
141- 0.2mm]
003
6- Booklet Stapler Pos Adj:1K FIN B5 SEF ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
141- 0.2mm]
004
6- Booklet Stapler Pos Adj:1K FIN DLT SEF ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
141- 0.2mm]
005
6- Booklet Stapler Pos Adj:1K FIN LG SEF ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
141- 0.2mm]
006
6- Booklet Stapler Pos Adj:1K FIN Oficio SEF ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
141- 0.2mm]
007
6- Booklet Stapler Pos Adj:1K FIN LT SEF ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
141- 0.2mm]
008
6- Booklet Stapler Pos Adj:1K FIN 12"x18" ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
141- 0.2mm]
009
6- Sub-scan Punch Pos Adj:1K FIN JPN/EU: 2-Hole ENG [ -7.5 to 7.5 / 0 /
142- 0.5mm]
001

SM Appendices 3-148 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to

No. or CTL Max/Init./Step]
6- Sub-scan Punch Pos Adj:1K FIN NA: 3-Hole ENG [ -7.5 to 7.5 / 0 /
142- 0.5mm]
002
6- Sub-scan Punch Pos Adj:1K FIN Europe: 4-Hole ENG [ -7.5 to 7.5 / 0 /
142- 0.5mm]
003
6- Sub-scan Punch Pos Adj:1K FIN NEU: 4-Hole ENG [ -7.5 to 7.5 / 0 /
142- 0.5mm]
004
6- Sub-scan Punch Pos Adj:1K FIN NA: 2-Hole ENG [ -7.5 to 7.5 / 0 /
142- 0.5mm]
005
6- Jogger Pos Adj:1K FIN A3 SEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
143- 0.5mm]
001
6- Jogger Pos Adj:1K FIN B4 SEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
143- 0.5mm]
002
6- Jogger Pos Adj:1K FIN A4 SEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
143- 0.5mm]
003
6- Jogger Pos Adj:1K FIN A4 LEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
143- 0.5mm]
004
6- Jogger Pos Adj:1K FIN B5 SEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
143- 0.5mm]
005
6- Jogger Pos Adj:1K FIN B5 LEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
143- 0.5mm]
006
6- Jogger Pos Adj:1K FIN DLT SEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
143- 0.5mm]
007
6- Jogger Pos Adj:1K FIN LG SEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
143- 0.5mm]
008

SM Appendices 3-149 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to

No. or CTL Max/Init./Step]
6- Jogger Pos Adj:1K FIN Oficio SEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
143- 0.5mm]
009
6- Jogger Pos Adj:1K FIN LT SEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
143- 0.5mm]
010
6- Jogger Pos Adj:1K FIN LT LEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
143- 0.5mm]
011
6- Jogger Pos Adj:1K FIN 12"x18" ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
143- 0.5mm]
012
6- Jogger Pos Adj:1K FIN 8K SEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
143- 0.5mm]
013
6- Jogger Pos Adj:1K FIN 16K SEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
143- 0.5mm]
014
6- Jogger Pos Adj:1K FIN 16K LEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
143- 0.5mm]
015
6- Jogger Pos Adj:1K FIN Other ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
143- 0.5mm]
016
6- Main-scan Punch Pos Adj:1K FIN JPN/EU: 2-Hole ENG [ -2 to 2 / 0 /
144- 0.4mm]
001
6- Main-scan Punch Pos Adj:1K FIN NA: 3-Hole ENG [ -2 to 2 / 0 /
144- 0.4mm]
002
6- Main-scan Punch Pos Adj:1K FIN Europe: 4-Hole ENG [ -2 to 2 / 0 /
144- 0.4mm]
003
6- Main-scan Punch Pos Adj:1K FIN NEU: 4-Hole ENG [ -2 to 2 / 0 /
144- 0.4mm]
004

SM Appendices 3-150 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to

No. or CTL Max/Init./Step]
6- Main-scan Punch Pos Adj:1K FIN NA: 2-Hole ENG [ -2 to 2 / 0 /
144- 0.4mm]
005
6- Skew Correct Buckle Adj:1K FIN A3 SEF ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
145- 0.2mm]
001
6- Skew Correct Buckle Adj:1K FIN B4 SEF ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
145- 0.2mm]
002
6- Skew Correct Buckle Adj:1K FIN A4 SEF ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
145- 0.2mm]
003
6- Skew Correct Buckle Adj:1K FIN A4 LEF ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
145- 0.2mm]
004
6- Skew Correct Buckle Adj:1K FIN B5 SEF ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
145- 0.2mm]
005
6- Skew Correct Buckle Adj:1K FIN B5 LEF ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
145- 0.2mm]
006
6- Skew Correct Buckle Adj:1K FIN A5 LEF ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
145- 0.2mm]
007
6- Skew Correct Buckle Adj:1K FIN DLT SEF ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
145- 0.2mm]
008
6- Skew Correct Buckle Adj:1K FIN LG SEF ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
145- 0.2mm]
009
6- Skew Correct Buckle Adj:1K FIN Oficio SEF ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
145- 0.2mm]
010
6- Skew Correct Buckle Adj:1K FIN LT SEF ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
145- 0.2mm]
011

SM Appendices 3-151 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to

No. or CTL Max/Init./Step]
6- Skew Correct Buckle Adj:1K FIN LT LEF ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
145- 0.2mm]
012
6- Skew Correct Buckle Adj:1K FIN HLT LEF ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
145- 0.2mm]
013
6- Skew Correct Buckle Adj:1K FIN 12"x18" ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
145- 0.2mm]
014
6- Skew Correct Buckle Adj:1K FIN 8K SEF ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
145- 0.2mm]
015
6- Skew Correct Buckle Adj:1K FIN 16K SEF ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
145- 0.2mm]
016
6- Skew Correct Buckle Adj:1K FIN 16K LEF ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
145- 0.2mm]
017
6- Skew Correct Buckle Adj:1K FIN Other ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
145- 0.2mm]
018
6- Skew Correct Ctrl SW:1K FIN A3 SEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
146-
001
6- Skew Correct Ctrl SW:1K FIN B4 SEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
146-
002
6- Skew Correct Ctrl SW:1K FIN A4 SEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
146-
003
6- Skew Correct Ctrl SW:1K FIN A4 LEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
146-
004
6- Skew Correct Ctrl SW:1K FIN B5 SEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
146-
005

SM Appendices 3-152 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to

No. or CTL Max/Init./Step]
6- Skew Correct Ctrl SW:1K FIN B5 LEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
146-
006
6- Skew Correct Ctrl SW:1K FIN A5 LEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
146-
007
6- Skew Correct Ctrl SW:1K FIN DLT SEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
146-
008
6- Skew Correct Ctrl SW:1K FIN LG SEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
146-
009
6- Skew Correct Ctrl SW:1K FIN Oficio SEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
146-
010
6- Skew Correct Ctrl SW:1K FIN LT SEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
146-
011
6- Skew Correct Ctrl SW:1K FIN LT LEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
146-
012
6- Skew Correct Ctrl SW:1K FIN HLT LEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
146-
013
6- Skew Correct Ctrl SW:1K FIN 12"x18" ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
146-
014
6- Skew Correct Ctrl SW:1K FIN 8K SEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
146-
015
6- Skew Correct Ctrl SW:1K FIN 16K SEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
146-
016
6- Skew Correct Ctrl SW:1K FIN 16K LEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
146-
017

SM Appendices 3-153 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to

No. or CTL Max/Init./Step]
6- Skew Correct Ctrl SW:1K FIN Other ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
146-
018
6- Booklet Folder Pos Adj:1K FIN A3 SEF ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
147- 0.2mm]
001
6- Booklet Folder Pos Adj:1K FIN B4 SEF ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
147- 0.2mm]
002
6- Booklet Folder Pos Adj:1K FIN A4 SEF ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
147- 0.2mm]
003
6- Booklet Folder Pos Adj:1K FIN B5 SEF ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
147- 0.2mm]
004
6- Booklet Folder Pos Adj:1K FIN DLT SEF ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
147- 0.2mm]
005
6- Booklet Folder Pos Adj:1K FIN LG SEF ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
147- 0.2mm]
006
6- Booklet Folder Pos Adj:1K FIN Oficio SEF ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
147- 0.2mm]
007
6- Booklet Folder Pos Adj:1K FIN LT SEF ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
147- 0.2mm]
008
6- Booklet Folder Pos Adj:1K FIN 12"x18" ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
147- 0.2mm]
009
6- Booklet Folder Pos Adj:1K FIN A3 SEF(1-5) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
147- 0.2mm]
010
6- Booklet Folder Pos Adj:1K FIN A3 SEF(6-10) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
147- 0.2mm]
011

SM Appendices 3-154 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to

No. or CTL Max/Init./Step]
6- Booklet Folder Pos Adj:1K FIN A3 SEF(11-over) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
147- 0.2mm]
012
6- Booklet Folder Pos Adj:1K FIN B4 SEF(1-5) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
147- 0.2mm]
013
6- Booklet Folder Pos Adj:1K FIN B4 SEF(6-10) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
147- 0.2mm]
014
6- Booklet Folder Pos Adj:1K FIN B4 SEF(11-over) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
147- 0.2mm]
015
6- Booklet Folder Pos Adj:1K FIN A4 SEF(1-5) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
147- 0.2mm]
016
6- Booklet Folder Pos Adj:1K FIN A4 SEF(6-10) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
147- 0.2mm]
017
6- Booklet Folder Pos Adj:1K FIN A4 SEF(11-over) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
147- 0.2mm]
018
6- Booklet Folder Pos Adj:1K FIN B5 SEF(1-5) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
147- 0.2mm]
019
6- Booklet Folder Pos Adj:1K FIN B5 SEF(6-10) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
147- 0.2mm]
020
6- Booklet Folder Pos Adj:1K FIN B5 SEF(11-over) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
147- 0.2mm]
021
6- Booklet Folder Pos Adj:1K FIN DLT SEF(1-5) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
147- 0.2mm]
022
6- Booklet Folder Pos Adj:1K FIN DLT SEF(6-10) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
147- 0.2mm]
023

SM Appendices 3-155 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to

No. or CTL Max/Init./Step]
6- Booklet Folder Pos Adj:1K FIN DLT SEF(11-over) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
147- 0.2mm]
024
6- Booklet Folder Pos Adj:1K FIN LG SEF(1-5) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
147- 0.2mm]
025
6- Booklet Folder Pos Adj:1K FIN LG SEF(6-10) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
147- 0.2mm]
026
6- Booklet Folder Pos Adj:1K FIN LG SEF(11-over) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
147- 0.2mm]
027
6- Booklet Folder Pos Adj:1K FIN Oficio SEF(1-5) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
147- 0.2mm]
028
6- Booklet Folder Pos Adj:1K FIN Oficio SEF(6-10) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
147- 0.2mm]
029
6- Booklet Folder Pos Adj:1K FIN Oficio SEF(11-over) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
147- 0.2mm]
030
6- Booklet Folder Pos Adj:1K FIN LT SEF(1-5) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
147- 0.2mm]
031
6- Booklet Folder Pos Adj:1K FIN LT SEF(6-10) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
147- 0.2mm]
032
6- Booklet Folder Pos Adj:1K FIN LT SEF(11-over) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
147- 0.2mm]
033
6- Booklet Folder Pos Adj:1K FIN 12"x18"(1-5) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
147- 0.2mm]
034
6- Booklet Folder Pos Adj:1K FIN 12"x18"(6-10) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
147- 0.2mm]
035

SM Appendices 3-156 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to

No. or CTL Max/Init./Step]
6- Booklet Folder Pos Adj:1K FIN 12"x18"(11-over) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
147- 0.2mm]
036
6- Fold Times Adj: 1K FIN ENG [ 0 to 29 / 0 /
148- 1sec]
001
6- Last Paper Pos Time Adj:1K FIN ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 /
149- 1times]
001
6- PositioningStrtTimingAdj:1KFIN A3 SEF ENG [ -100 to 100 / 0
150- / 10msec]
001
6- PositioningStrtTimingAdj:1KFIN B4 SEF ENG [ -100 to 100 / 0
150- / 10msec]
002
6- PositioningStrtTimingAdj:1KFIN A4 SEF ENG [ -100 to 100 / 0
150- / 10msec]
003
6- PositioningStrtTimingAdj:1KFIN A4 LEF ENG [ -100 to 100 / 0
150- / 10msec]
004
6- PositioningStrtTimingAdj:1KFIN B5 SEF ENG [ -100 to 100 / 0
150- / 10msec]
005
6- PositioningStrtTimingAdj:1KFIN B5 LEF ENG [ -100 to 100 / 0
150- / 10msec]
006
6- PositioningStrtTimingAdj:1KFIN DLT SEF ENG [ -100 to 100 / 0
150- / 10msec]
007
6- PositioningStrtTimingAdj:1KFIN LG SEF ENG [ -100 to 100 / 0
150- / 10msec]
008
6- PositioningStrtTimingAdj:1KFIN Oficio SEF ENG [ -100 to 100 / 0
150- / 10msec]
009

SM Appendices 3-157 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to

No. or CTL Max/Init./Step]
6- PositioningStrtTimingAdj:1KFIN LT SEF ENG [ -100 to 100 / 0
150- / 10msec]
010
6- PositioningStrtTimingAdj:1KFIN LT LEF ENG [ -100 to 100 / 0
150- / 10msec]
011
6- PositioningStrtTimingAdj:1KFIN 12"x18" ENG [ -100 to 100 / 0
150- / 10msec]
012
6- PositioningStrtTimingAdj:1KFIN 8K SEF ENG [ -100 to 100 / 0
150- / 10msec]
013
6- PositioningStrtTimingAdj:1KFIN 16K SEF ENG [ -100 to 100 / 0
150- / 10msec]
014
6- PositioningStrtTimingAdj:1KFIN 16K LEF ENG [ -100 to 100 / 0
150- / 10msec]
015
6- PositioningStrtTimingAdj:1KFIN Other ENG [ -100 to 100 / 0
150- / 10msec]
016
6- PosTimeAdj(LstPr2ndTime):1KFIN ENG [ -100 to 100 / 0
151- / 10msec]
001
6- PosTiAdj(ExcLstPr3rdTi):1KFIN A3 SEF ENG [ -100 to 100 / 0
152- / 10msec]
001
6- PosTiAdj(ExcLstPr3rdTi):1KFIN B4 SEF ENG [ -100 to 100 / 0
152- / 10msec]
002
6- PosTiAdj(ExcLstPr3rdTi):1KFIN A4 SEF ENG [ -100 to 100 / 0
152- / 10msec]
003
6- PosTiAdj(ExcLstPr3rdTi):1KFIN A4 LEF ENG [ -100 to 100 / 0
152- / 10msec]
004

SM Appendices 3-158 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to

No. or CTL Max/Init./Step]
6- PosTiAdj(ExcLstPr3rdTi):1KFIN B5 SEF ENG [ -100 to 100 / 0
152- / 10msec]
005
6- PosTiAdj(ExcLstPr3rdTi):1KFIN B5 LEF ENG [ -100 to 100 / 0
152- / 10msec]
006
6- PosTiAdj(ExcLstPr3rdTi):1KFIN DLT SEF ENG [ -100 to 100 / 0
152- / 10msec]
007
6- PosTiAdj(ExcLstPr3rdTi):1KFIN LG SEF ENG [ -100 to 100 / 0
152- / 10msec]
008
6- PosTiAdj(ExcLstPr3rdTi):1KFIN Oficio SEF ENG [ -100 to 100 / 0
152- / 10msec]
009
6- PosTiAdj(ExcLstPr3rdTi):1KFIN LT SEF ENG [ -100 to 100 / 0
152- / 10msec]
010
6- PosTiAdj(ExcLstPr3rdTi):1KFIN LT LEF ENG [ -100 to 100 / 0
152- / 10msec]
011
6- PosTiAdj(ExcLstPr3rdTi):1KFIN 12"x18" ENG [ -100 to 100 / 0
152- / 10msec]
012
6- PosTiAdj(ExcLstPr3rdTi):1KFIN 8K SEF ENG [ -100 to 100 / 0
152- / 10msec]
013
6- PosTiAdj(ExcLstPr3rdTi):1KFIN 16K SEF ENG [ -100 to 100 / 0
152- / 10msec]
014
6- PosTiAdj(ExcLstPr3rdTi):1KFIN 16K LEF ENG [ -100 to 100 / 0
152- / 10msec]
015
6- PosTiAdj(ExcLstPr3rdTi):1KFIN Other ENG [ -100 to 100 / 0
152- / 10msec]
016

SM Appendices 3-159 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to

No. or CTL Max/Init./Step]
6- Pos Time Adj By Sheet: 1K FIN 1 - 10 Sheets ENG [ -100 to 100 / 0
154- / 10msec]
001
6- Pos Time Adj By Sheet: 1K FIN 11 - 20 Sheets ENG [ -100 to 100 / 0
154- / 10msec]
002
6- Pos Time Adj By Sheet: 1K FIN 21 - 30 Sheets ENG [ -100 to 100 / 0
154- / 10msec]
003
6- Pos Time Adj By Sheet: 1K FIN 31 - 40 Sheets ENG [ -100 to 100 / 0
154- / 10msec]
004
6- Pos Time Adj By Sheet: 1K FIN 41 - 50 Sheets ENG [ -100 to 100 / 0
154- / 10msec]
005
6- Paper Guide Position Adj: 1K FIN ENG [ -10 to 10 / 0 /
155- 1mm]
001
6- Paper Guide Rtrct. Timming: 1K FIN ENG [ -50 to 50 / 0 /
156- 5mm]
001
6- Paper Guide Move Timming: 1K FIN ENG [ -50 to 50 / 0 /
157- 5msec]
001
6- Bind Speed Setting: 1K FIN_HY ENG [ 1 to 3 / 3 / 2]
158- 1: Bind Speed
001 1(Low)
3: Bind Speed
3(High)
6- Bind Times: 1K FIN_HY ENG* [ 1 to 2 / 2 / 1]
159- 1: Once
001 2: Twice
6- Finisher Free Run: 1K FIN Free Run 4 ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
160-
004
6- Use Paper Guide 1KShtFIN Large Size ENG [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-160 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to

No. or CTL Max/Init./Step]
163- 0: Guide On
001 1: Guide Off
6- Use Paper Guide 1KShtFIN Small Size ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
163- 0: Guide On
002 1: Guide Off
6- NV Adj. Data Mod. 1KShtFIN Jogger Pos. Factory Adj. ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
164- 0.5mm]
001
6- NV Adj. Data Mod. 1KShtFIN Stapling Pos. Factory Adj. ENG [ -2 to 2 / 0 /
164- 0.5mm]
002
6- NV Adj. Data Mod. 1KShtFIN HY Stapling Pos. Factory Adj. ENG [ -2.1 to 2.1 / 0 /
164- (HY) 0.3mm]
003
6- NV Adj. Data Mod. 1KShtFIN HY Stapleless Stapling Pos. ENG [ -2.1 to 2.1 / 0 /
164- Factory Adj. 0.3mm]
004
6- NV Adj. Data Mod. 1KShtFIN Folding Pos. Factory Adj. ENG [ -2 to 2 / 0 /
164- 0.1mm]
005
6- M-ScanBindPosAdj:NoStplBindFIN ENG [ -1 to 1 / 0 /
180- 0.5mm]
001
6- BindSpeedSetting:NoStplBindFIN ENG [ 1 to 3 / 3 / 2]
181- 1: Bind Spd1(L)
001 3: Bind Speed 3
6- ExitSpeedSwitch:NoStplBindFIN PaperLength:297.0- ENG [ 1 to 5 / 2 / 1]
182- 457.2mm,Thick(106- 1: Exit Spd1(L)
001 300g/m2) 2: Exit Speed 2
3: Exit Speed 3
4: Exit Speed 4
5: Exit Speed
5(High)
6- ExitSpeedSwitch:NoStplBindFIN PaperLength:297.0- ENG [ 1 to 5 / 2 / 1]
182- 457.2mm,Plain(60- 1: Exit Spd1(L)
002 105g/m2) 2: Exit Speed 2

SM Appendices 3-161 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to

No. or CTL Max/Init./Step]
3: Exit Speed 3
4: Exit Speed 4
5: Exit Speed
5(High)
6- ExitSpeedSwitch:NoStplBindFIN PaperLength:297.0- ENG [ 1 to 5 / 4 / 1]
182- 457.2mm,Thin(52- 1: Exit Spd1(L)
003 59g/m2) 2: Exit Speed 2
3: Exit Speed 3
4: Exit Speed 4
5: Exit Speed
5(High)
6- ExitSpeedSwitch:NoStplBindFIN PaperLength:210.0- ENG [ 1 to 5 / 2 / 1]
182- 296.9mm,Thick(106- 1: Exit Spd1(L)
004 300g/m2) 2: Exit Speed 2
3: Exit Speed 3
4: Exit Speed 4
5: Exit Speed
5(High)
6- ExitSpeedSwitch:NoStplBindFIN PaperLength:210.0- ENG [ 1 to 5 / 2 / 1]
182- 296.9mm,Plain(60- 1: Exit Spd1(L)
005 105g/m2) 2: Exit Speed 2
3: Exit Speed 3
4: Exit Speed 4
5: Exit Speed
5(High)
6- ExitSpeedSwitch:NoStplBindFIN PaperLength:210.0- ENG [ 1 to 5 / 4 / 1]
182- 296.9mm,Thin(52- 1: Exit Spd1(L)
006 59g/m2) 2: Exit Speed 2
3: Exit Speed 3
4: Exit Speed 4
5: Exit Speed
5(High)
6- ExitSpeedSwitch:NoStplBindFIN PaperLength:148.0- ENG [ 1 to 5 / 2 / 1]
182- 209.9mm,Thick(106- 1: Exit Spd1(L)
007 300g/m2) 2: Exit Speed 2
3: Exit Speed 3

SM Appendices 3-162 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to

No. or CTL Max/Init./Step]
4: Exit Speed 4
5: Exit Speed
5(High)
6- ExitSpeedSwitch:NoStplBindFIN PaperLength:148.0- ENG [ 1 to 5 / 2 / 1]
182- 209.9mm,Plain(60- 1: Exit Spd1(L)
008 105g/m2) 2: Exit Speed 2
3: Exit Speed 3
4: Exit Speed 4
5: Exit Speed
5(High)
6- ExitSpeedSwitch:NoStplBindFIN PaperLength:148.0- ENG [ 1 to 5 / 4 / 1]
182- 209.9mm,Thin(52- 1: Exit Spd1(L)
009 59g/m2) 2: Exit Speed 2
3: Exit Speed 3
4: Exit Speed 4
5: Exit Speed
5(High)
6- BindTimes NoStplBindFIN ENG* [ 1 to 2 / 2 / 1]
186- 1: Once
001 2: Twice
6- Z-Fold:FineAdj 1st A3 SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
301- 0.1mm]
001
6- Z-Fold:FineAdj 1st B4 SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
301- 0.1mm]
002
6- Z-Fold:FineAdj 1st A4 SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
301- 0.1mm]
003
6- Z-Fold:FineAdj 1st DLT SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
301- 0.1mm]
004
6- Z-Fold:FineAdj 1st LG SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
301- 0.1mm]
005
6- Z-Fold:FineAdj 1st LT SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /

SM Appendices 3-163 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to

No. or CTL Max/Init./Step]
301- 0.1mm]
006
6- Z-Fold:FineAdj 1st 8K SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
301- 0.1mm]
007
6- Z-Fold:FineAdj 1st Oficio SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
301- 0.1mm]
008
6- Z-Fold:FineAdj 1st Other ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
301- 0.1mm]
009
6- Z-Fold:FineAdj 2nd A3 SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
302- 0.2mm]
001
6- Z-Fold:FineAdj 2nd B4 SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
302- 0.2mm]
002
6- Z-Fold:FineAdj 2nd A4 SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
302- 0.2mm]
003
6- Z-Fold:FineAdj 2nd DLT SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
302- 0.2mm]
004
6- Z-Fold:FineAdj 2nd LG SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
302- 0.2mm]
005
6- Z-Fold:FineAdj 2nd LT SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
302- 0.2mm]
006
6- Z-Fold:FineAdj 2nd 8K SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
302- 0.2mm]
007
6- Z-Fold:FineAdj 2nd Oficio SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
302- 0.2mm]
008
6- Z-Fold:FineAdj 2nd Other ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /

SM Appendices 3-164 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to

No. or CTL Max/Init./Step]
302- 0.2mm]
009
6- Equal 1/2:FineAdjFld A3 SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
304- 0.1mm]
001
6- Equal 1/2:FineAdjFld B4 SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
304- 0.1mm]
002
6- Equal 1/2:FineAdjFld A4 SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
304- 0.1mm]
003
6- Equal 1/2:FineAdjFld DLT SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
304- 0.1mm]
004
6- Equal 1/2:FineAdjFld LG SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
304- 0.1mm]
005
6- Equal 1/2:FineAdjFld LT SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
304- 0.1mm]
006
6- Equal 1/2:FineAdjFld 8K SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
304- 0.1mm]
007
6- Equal 1/2:FineAdjFld "12x18" ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
304- 0.1mm]
008
6- Equal 1/2:FineAdjFld Oficio SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
304- 0.1mm]
009
6- Equal 1/2:FineAdjFld Other ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
304- 0.1mm]
010
6- Equal 3rds:Fine Adj 1st A3 SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
307- 0.1mm]
001
6- Equal 3rds:Fine Adj 1st DLT SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /

SM Appendices 3-165 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to

No. or CTL Max/Init./Step]
307- 0.1mm]
002
6- Equal 3rds:Fine Adj 1st A4 SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
307- 0.1mm]
003
6- Equal 3rds:Fine Adj 1st LG SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
307- 0.1mm]
004
6- Equal 3rds:Fine Adj 1st LT SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
307- 0.1mm]
005
6- Equal 3rds:Fine Adj 1st Oficio SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
307- 0.1mm]
006
6- Equal 3rds:Fine Adj 1st Other ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
307- 0.1mm]
007
6- Equal 3rds:Fine Adj 2nd A3 SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
308- 0.1mm]
001
6- Equal 3rds:Fine Adj 2nd DLT SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
308- 0.1mm]
002
6- Equal 3rds:Fine Adj 2nd A4 SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
308- 0.1mm]
003
6- Equal 3rds:Fine Adj 2nd LG SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
308- 0.1mm]
004
6- Equal 3rds:Fine Adj 2nd LT SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
308- 0.1mm]
005
6- Equal 3rds:Fine Adj 2nd Oficio SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
308- 0.1mm]
006
6- Equal 3rds:Fine Adj 2nd Other ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /

SM Appendices 3-166 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to

No. or CTL Max/Init./Step]
308- 0.1mm]
007
6- 3rds 1 Flap:Fine Adj 1st A3 SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
311- 0.1mm]
001
6- 3rds 1 Flap:Fine Adj 1st DLT SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
311- 0.1mm]
002
6- 3rds 1 Flap:Fine Adj 1st A4 SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
311- 0.1mm]
003
6- 3rds 1 Flap:Fine Adj 1st LG SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
311- 0.1mm]
004
6- 3rds 1 Flap:Fine Adj 1st LT SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
311- 0.1mm]
005
6- 3rds 1 Flap:Fine Adj 1st Oficio SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
311- 0.1mm]
006
6- 3rds 1 Flap:Fine Adj 1st Other ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
311- 0.1mm]
007
6- 3rds 1 Flap:Fine Adj 2nd A3 SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
312- 0.1mm]
001
6- 3rds 1 Flap:Fine Adj 2nd DLT SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
312- 0.1mm]
002
6- 3rds 1 Flap:Fine Adj 2nd A4 SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
312- 0.1mm]
003
6- 3rds 1 Flap:Fine Adj 2nd LG SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
312- 0.1mm]
004
6- 3rds 1 Flap:Fine Adj 2nd LT SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /

SM Appendices 3-167 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to

No. or CTL Max/Init./Step]
312- 0.1mm]
005
6- 3rds 1 Flap:Fine Adj 2nd Oficio-T ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
312- 0.1mm]
006
6- 3rds 1 Flap:Fine Adj 2nd Other ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
312- 0.1mm]
007
6- Registration Buckle Adjust A3 SEF ENG [ 0 to 5 / 2 /
313- 0.5mm]
001
6- Registration Buckle Adjust B4 SEF ENG [ 0 to 5 / 2 /
313- 0.5mm]
002
6- Registration Buckle Adjust A4 SEF ENG [ 0 to 5 / 2 /
313- 0.5mm]
003
6- Registration Buckle Adjust DLT SEF ENG [ 0 to 5 / 2 /
313- 0.5mm]
004
6- Registration Buckle Adjust LG SEF ENG [ 0 to 5 / 2 /
313- 0.5mm]
005
6- Registration Buckle Adjust LT SEF ENG [ 0 to 5 / 2 /
313- 0.5mm]
006
6- Registration Buckle Adjust 8K SEF ENG [ 0 to 5 / 2 /
313- 0.5mm]
007
6- Registration Buckle Adjust "12x18" ENG [ 0 to 5 / 2 /
313- 0.5mm]
008
6- Registration Buckle Adjust Oficio SEF ENG [ 0 to 5 / 2 /
313- 0.5mm]
009
6- Registration Buckle Adjust Other ENG [ 0 to 5 / 2 /

SM Appendices 3-168 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to

No. or CTL Max/Init./Step]
313- 0.5mm]
010
6- Registration Buckle Select ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
314- 0: Mode1
001 1: Mode2
6- Set Number of Creasing ENG [ 0 to 4 / 1 /
315- 1times]
001 0: -1
1: 0
2: 1
3: 2
4: 3
6- Silent Mode Select ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
316- 0: OFF
001 1: ON
6- Not Fold Exit Speed Plain: Large-Size ENG [ 1 to 5 / 2 / 1]
317- 1: Exit Speed
001 1(Low)
2: Exit Speed 2
3: Exit Speed 3
4: Exit Speed 4
5: Exit Speed
5(High)
6- Not Fold Exit Speed Plain: Middle-Size ENG [ 1 to 5 / 2 / 1]
317- 1: Exit Speed
002 1(Low)
2: Exit Speed 2
3: Exit Speed 3
4: Exit Speed 4
5: Exit Speed
5(High)
6- Not Fold Exit Speed Plain: Small-Size ENG [ 1 to 5 / 1 / 1]
317- 1: Exit Speed
003 1(Low)
2: Exit Speed 2
3: Exit Speed 3

SM Appendices 3-169 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to

No. or CTL Max/Init./Step]
4: Exit Speed 4
5: Exit Speed
5(High)
6- Not Fold Exit Speed Thick: Large-Size ENG [ 1 to 5 / 3 / 1]
317- 1: Exit Speed
004 1(Low)
2: Exit Speed 2
3: Exit Speed 3
4: Exit Speed 4
5: Exit Speed
5(High)
6- Not Fold Exit Speed Thick: Middle-Size ENG [ 1 to 5 / 3 / 1]
317- 1: Exit Speed
005 1(Low)
2: Exit Speed 2
3: Exit Speed 3
4: Exit Speed 4
5: Exit Speed
5(High)
6- Not Fold Exit Speed Thick: Small-Size ENG [ 1 to 5 / 1 / 1]
317- 1: Exit Speed
006 1(Low)
2: Exit Speed 2
3: Exit Speed 3
4: Exit Speed 4
5: Exit Speed
5(High)
6- Not Fold Exit Speed Thin: Large-Size ENG [ 1 to 5 / 4 / 1]
317- 1: Exit Speed
007 1(Low)
2: Exit Speed 2
3: Exit Speed 3
4: Exit Speed 4
5: Exit Speed
5(High)
6- Not Fold Exit Speed Thin: Middle-Size ENG [ 1 to 5 / 4 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-170 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to

No. or CTL Max/Init./Step]
317- 1: Exit Speed
008 1(Low)
2: Exit Speed 2
3: Exit Speed 3
4: Exit Speed 4
5: Exit Speed
5(High)
6- Not Fold Exit Speed Thin: Small-Size ENG [ 1 to 5 / 1 / 1]
317- 1: Exit Speed
009 1(Low)
2: Exit Speed 2
3: Exit Speed 3
4: Exit Speed 4
5: Exit Speed
5(High)
6- Z-Fold Exit Speed Plain: Large-Size ENG [ 1 to 5 / 3 / 1]
318- 1: Exit Speed
001 1(Low)
2: Exit Speed 2
3: Exit Speed 3
4: Exit Speed 4
5: Exit Speed
5(High)
6- Z-Fold Exit Speed Plain: Middle-Size ENG [ 1 to 5 / 3 / 1]
318- 1: Exit Speed
002 1(Low)
2: Exit Speed 2
3: Exit Speed 3
4: Exit Speed 4
5: Exit Speed
5(High)
6- Z-Fold Exit Speed Plain: Small-Size ENG [ 1 to 5 / 3 / 1]
318- 1: Exit Speed
003 1(Low)
2: Exit Speed 2
3: Exit Speed 3

SM Appendices 3-171 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to

No. or CTL Max/Init./Step]
4: Exit Speed 4
5: Exit Speed
5(High)
6- Equal 1/2 Exit Speed Plain: Large-Size ENG [ 1 to 5 / 3 / 1]
319- 1: Exit Speed
001 1(Low)
2: Exit Speed 2
3: Exit Speed 3
4: Exit Speed 4
5: Exit Speed
5(High)
6- Equal 1/2 Exit Speed Plain: Middle-Size ENG [ 1 to 5 / 3 / 1]
319- 1: Exit Speed
002 1(Low)
2: Exit Speed 2
3: Exit Speed 3
4: Exit Speed 4
5: Exit Speed
5(High)
6- Equal 1/2 Exit Speed Plain: Small-Size ENG [ 1 to 5 / 3 / 1]
319- 1: Exit Speed
003 1(Low)
2: Exit Speed 2
3: Exit Speed 3
4: Exit Speed 4
5: Exit Speed
5(High)
6- Equal 3rds Exit Speed Plain: Large-Size ENG [ 1 to 5 / 3 / 1]
320- 1: Exit Speed
001 1(Low)
2: Exit Speed 2
3: Exit Speed 3
4: Exit Speed 4
5: Exit Speed
5(High)
6- Equal 3rds Exit Speed Plain: Middle-Size ENG [ 1 to 5 / 3 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-172 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to

No. or CTL Max/Init./Step]
320- 1: Exit Speed
002 1(Low)
2: Exit Speed 2
3: Exit Speed 3
4: Exit Speed 4
5: Exit Speed
5(High)
6- Equal 3rds Exit Speed Plain: Small-Size ENG [ 1 to 5 / 3 / 1]
320- 1: Exit Speed
003 1(Low)
2: Exit Speed 2
3: Exit Speed 3
4: Exit Speed 4
5: Exit Speed
5(High)
6- 3rds 1 Flap Exit Fold Plain: Large-Size ENG [ 1 to 5 / 3 / 1]
321- 1: Exit Speed
001 1(Low)
2: Exit Speed 2
3: Exit Speed 3
4: Exit Speed 4
5: Exit Speed
5(High)
6- 3rds 1 Flap Exit Fold Plain: Middle-Size ENG [ 1 to 5 / 3 / 1]
321- 1: Exit Speed
002 1(Low)
2: Exit Speed 2
3: Exit Speed 3
4: Exit Speed 4
5: Exit Speed
5(High)
6- 3rds 1 Flap Exit Fold Plain: Small-Size ENG [ 1 to 5 / 3 / 1]
321- 1: Exit Speed
003 1(Low)
2: Exit Speed 2
3: Exit Speed 3

SM Appendices 3-173 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to

No. or CTL Max/Init./Step]
4: Exit Speed 4
5: Exit Speed
5(High)
6- NV Adj. Data Mod. 1st Fold Pos. Factory ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
324- Setting 0.1mm]
001
6- NV Adj. Data Mod. 2nd Fold Pos. Factory ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
324- Setting 0.1mm]
002
6- NV Adj. Data Mod. Crease Pos. Factory ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
324- Setting 0.1mm]
003
6- Folder. Free Run Free Run1(Not Fold) ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
325-
001
6- Folder. Free Run Free Run2(Z-Fold) ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
325-
002
6- Folder. Free Run Free Run3(Equal 1/2) ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
325-
003
6- Folder. Free Run Free Run4(Equal 3rds) ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
325-
004
6- Folder. Free Run Free Run5(3rds 1 Flap ) ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
325-
005
6- Z-Fold Full Detact Adjust Large Size ENG [ -1 to 1 / 0 /
326- 0.2v]
001
6- Z-Fold Full Detact Adjust Middle Size ENG [ -1 to 1 / 0 /
326- 0.2v]
002
6- Z-Fold Full Detact Adjust Small Size ENG [ -1 to 1 / 0 /
326- 0.2v]
003

SM Appendices 3-174 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to

No. or CTL Max/Init./Step]
6- Equal 1/2 Full Detact Adjust Large Size ENG [ -1 to 1 / 0 /
327- 0.2v]
001
6- Equal 1/2 Full Detact Adjust Middle Size ENG [ -1 to 1 / 0 /
327- 0.2v]
002
6- Equal 1/2 Full Detact Adjust Small Size ENG [ -1 to 1 / 0 /
327- 0.2v]
003
6- 1-pass Stamp Unit ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
801- 0: NO
001 1: YES
6- Extra Staples 0 to 50 (Initial:0) CTL* [ 0 to 50 / 0 / 1]
830-
001
6- Extra Saddles 0 to 50 (Initial:0) CTL* [ 0 to 50 / 0 / 1]
830-
002
6- Extra Half-Fold 0 to 50 (Initial:0) CTL* [ 0 to 50 / 0 / 1]
830-
003
6- Extra StaplessStaples 0 to 50 CTL* [ 0 to 50 / 0 / 1]
830- (Initial:0)
005
6- Function Enabled Z-Fold 0:No Punch CTL [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
890- 1:Punching OK
001
6- ADF Move Setting ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
901-
001
6- ADF Move Setting Stacking Priority ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
901- Adjustment
002

SM Appendices 3-175 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

3.7 SP GROUP 7000

SP Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to
No. CTL Max/Init./Step]
7-401- Total SC SC Counter CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
001
7-401- Total SC Total SC Counter CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
002
7-403- SC History Latest CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
001
7-403- SC History Latest 1 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
002
7-403- SC History Latest 2 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
003
7-403- SC History Latest 3 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
004
7-403- SC History Latest 4 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
005
7-403- SC History Latest 5 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
006
7-403- SC History Latest 6 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
007
7-403- SC History Latest 7 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
008
7-403- SC History Latest 8 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
009
7-403- SC History Latest 9 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
010
7-404- Software Error History Latest CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
001
7-404- Software Error History Latest 1 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
002
7-404- Software Error History Latest 2 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
003
7-404- Software Error History Latest 3 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
004
7-404- Software Error History Latest 4 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
005
7-404- Software Error History Latest 5 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]

SM Appendices 3-176 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to

No. CTL Max/Init./Step]
006
7-404- Software Error History Latest 6 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
007
7-404- Software Error History Latest 7 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
008
7-404- Software Error History Latest 8 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
009
7-404- Software Error History Latest 9 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
010
7-502- Total Paper Jam Jam Counter CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
001
7-502- Total Paper Jam Total Jam Counter CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
002
7-503- Total Original Jam Original Jam Counter CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
001
7-503- Total Original Jam Total Original Jam Counter CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
002
7-504- Paper Jam Location At Power On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
001
7-504- Paper Jam Location Tray1: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
003
7-504- Paper Jam Location Tray2: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
004
7-504- Paper Jam Location Tray3: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
005
7-504- Paper Jam Location Tray4: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
006
7-504- Paper Jam Location LCT: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
007
7-504- Paper Jam Location Bypass: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
008
7-504- Paper Jam Location Duplex: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
009
7-504- Paper Jam Location Timing: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
010
7-504- Paper Jam Location Transport Sn1: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]

SM Appendices 3-177 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to

No. CTL Max/Init./Step]
011
7-504- Paper Jam Location Transport Sn2: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
012
7-504- Paper Jam Location Vertical Trans. Sn3: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
013
7-504- Paper Jam Location Vertical Trans. Sn4: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
014
7-504- Paper Jam Location LCT Transport Sn: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
015
7-504- Paper Jam Location Registration Sn: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
017
7-504- Paper Jam Location Fusing Ent Sn: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
018
7-504- Paper Jam Location Fusing Ext Sn: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
019
7-504- Paper Jam Location Paper Ext Sn: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
020
7-504- Paper Jam Location Bridge Tray Exit Sn: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
021
7-504- Paper Jam Location Bridge Relay Sn: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
022
7-504- Paper Jam Location Inverter Sn: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
024
7-504- Paper Jam Location Duplex Exit Sn: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
025
7-504- Paper Jam Location Duplex Entrance Sn: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
027
7-504- Paper Jam Location Tray1: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
051
7-504- Paper Jam Location Tray2: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
052
7-504- Paper Jam Location Tray3: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
053
7-504- Paper Jam Location Tray4: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
054
7-504- Paper Jam Location LCT Transport Sn: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]

SM Appendices 3-178 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to

No. CTL Max/Init./Step]
055
7-504- Paper Jam Location Registratin Sn: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
057
7-504- Paper Jam Location Paper Ext Sn: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
060
7-504- Paper Jam Location Bridge Tray Ext Sn: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
061
7-504- Paper Jam Location Bridge Relay Sn: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
062
7-504- Paper Jam Location Inverter Sn: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
064
7-504- Paper Jam Location Duplex Ext Sn: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
065
7-504- Paper Jam Location Duplex Ent Sn: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
067
7-504- Paper Jam Location Entrance Sn: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
100
7-504- Paper Jam Location Entrance Sn: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
101
7-504- Paper Jam Location Transport Sn: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
102
7-504- Paper Jam Location Transport Sn: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
103
7-504- Paper Jam Location Paper Exit CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
104
7-504- Paper Jam Location Front Jogger Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
105
7-504- Paper Jam Location Rear Jogger Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
106
7-504- Paper Jam Location Shift Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
107
7-504- Paper Jam Location Positioning Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
108
7-504- Paper Jam Location Exit Guide Plate Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
109
7-504- Paper Jam Location Stapler Shift Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]

SM Appendices 3-179 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to

No. CTL Max/Init./Step]
110
7-504- Paper Jam Location Tray Lift Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
111
7-504- Paper Jam Location Staple Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
112
7-504- Paper Jam Location Stack Height Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
113
7-504- Paper Jam Location Punch Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
114
7-504- Paper Jam Location Punch Move Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
115
7-504- Paper Jam Location S-to-S Registration Move CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
116 Motor
7-504- Paper Jam Location No Exit Response CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
148
7-504- Paper Jam Location Main Machine Setting CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
149 Incorrect
7-504- Paper Jam Location Entrance Sensor: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
150
7-504- Paper Jam Location Entrance Sensor: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
151
7-504- Paper Jam Location Horizontal Transport Sensor: CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
152 On
7-504- Paper Jam Location Horizontal Transport Sensor: CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
153 Off
7-504- Paper Jam Location Switchback Transport CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
154 Sensor: On
7-504- Paper Jam Location Switchback Transport CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
155 Sensor: Off
7-504- Paper Jam Location Proof Tray Exit: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
156
7-504- Paper Jam Location Proof Tray Exit: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
157
7-504- Paper Jam Location Shift Tray Exit: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
158
7-504- Paper Jam Location Shift Tray Exit: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]

SM Appendices 3-180 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to

No. CTL Max/Init./Step]
159
7-504- Paper Jam Location Booklet Stapler Exit: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
160
7-504- Paper Jam Location Booklet Stapler Exit: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
161
7-504- Paper Jam Location Enrance Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
162
7-504- Paper Jam Location Horizontal Transport Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
163
7-504- Paper Jam Location Pre-Stack Transport Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
164
7-504- Paper Jam Location ITB Transport Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
165
7-504- Paper Jam Location Exit Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
166
7-504- Paper Jam Location TE Press Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
167
7-504- Paper Jam Location Ext Plate Guide Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
168
7-504- Paper Jam Location Punching Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
169
7-504- Paper Jam Location Punch Move Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
170
7-504- Paper Jam Location S-to-S Registration Move CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
171 Motor
7-504- Paper Jam Location Lower Junction Solenoid CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
172 Motor
7-504- Paper Jam Location Jogger Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
173
7-504- Paper Jam Location Positioning Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
174
7-504- Paper Jam Location Feed Out Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
175
7-504- Paper Jam Location Corner Stapler Move Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
176
7-504- Paper Jam Location Corner Stapler Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]

SM Appendices 3-181 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to

No. CTL Max/Init./Step]
177
7-504- Paper Jam Location Saddle Stitch Stapler Jogger CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
178 Motor
7-504- Paper Jam Location Saddle Stitch Stapler Jog CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
179 SOL Motor
7-504- Paper Jam Location Saddle Stitch Stapler CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
180 Standard Fence Motor
7-504- Paper Jam Location Saddle Stitch Stapler Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
181
7-504- Paper Jam Location Dynamic Roller Transport Mt CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
182
7-504- Paper Jam Location Folder Transport Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
183
7-504- Paper Jam Location Flat Fold Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
184
7-504- Paper Jam Location Output Tray Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
185
7-504- Paper Jam Location Shift Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
186
7-504- Paper Jam Location Shift Tray Jogger Front Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
187
7-504- Paper Jam Location Shift Tray Jogger Rear Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
188
7-504- Paper Jam Location Shift Tray Jogger Retraction CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
189 Motor
7-504- Paper Jam Location Stack Roller Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
190
7-504- Paper Jam Location Leading Edge Guide Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
191
7-504- Paper Jam Location Positioning Roller Transport CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
192 Motor
7-504- Paper Jam Location Paper Guide Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
193
7-504- Paper Jam Location Main Machine Setting CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
194 Incorrect
7-504- Paper Jam Location Entrance: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]

SM Appendices 3-182 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to

No. CTL Max/Init./Step]
200
7-504- Paper Jam Location Entrance: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
201
7-504- Paper Jam Location Proof Tray Exit: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
202
7-504- Paper Jam Location Proof Tray Exit: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
203
7-504- Paper Jam Location Right Relay: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
204
7-504- Paper Jam Location Left Relay: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
205
7-504- Paper Jam Location Left Relay: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
206
7-504- Paper Jam Location Shift Tray Exit: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
207
7-504- Paper Jam Location Shift Tray Exit: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
208
7-504- Paper Jam Location Stack: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
209
7-504- Paper Jam Location TE Stopper: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
210
7-504- Paper Jam Location TE Stopper: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
211
7-504- Paper Jam Location Booklet Folder Exit: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
212
7-504- Paper Jam Location Booklet Folder Exit: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
213
7-504- Paper Jam Location Entrance Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
220
7-504- Paper Jam Location Proof Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
221
7-504- Paper Jam Location Exit Transport/ Positioning CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
222 Roller Motor
7-504- Paper Jam Location Shift Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
223
7-504- Paper Jam Location Jogger Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]

SM Appendices 3-183 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to

No. CTL Max/Init./Step]
224
7-504- Paper Jam Location Exit Guide Plate Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
225
7-504- Paper Jam Location Feed Out Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
226
7-504- Paper Jam Location Output Tray Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
227
7-504- Paper Jam Location Positioning Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
228
7-504- Paper Jam Location Stapler Shift Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
229
7-504- Paper Jam Location Stapler Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
230
7-504- Paper Jam Location Punch Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
231
7-504- Paper Jam Location Stack Transport Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
232
7-504- Paper Jam Location LE Stopper Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
233
7-504- Paper Jam Location Folder Blade Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
234
7-504- Paper Jam Location Paper Guide Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
235
7-504- Paper Jam Location Stapler Shift Motor(without CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
236 staples)
7-504- Paper Jam Location Stapler Motor(without CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
237 staples)
7-504- Paper Jam Location Movable Guide Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
238
7-504- Paper Jam Location No Exit Response CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
248
7-504- Paper Jam Location Main Machine Setting CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
249 Incorrect
7-505- Original Jam Detection At Power On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
001
7-505- Original Jam Detection Separation Sensor: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]

SM Appendices 3-184 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to

No. CTL Max/Init./Step]
013
7-505- Original Jam Detection Skew Correction Sn: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
014
7-505- Original Jam Detection Scanning Entrance Sn: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
015
7-505- Original Jam Detection Registration Sensor: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
016
7-505- Original Jam Detection Original Exit Sensor: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
017
7-505- Original Jam Detection Separation Sensor: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
063
7-505- Original Jam Detection Skew Correction Sn: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
064
7-505- Original Jam Detection Scanning Entrance Sn: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
065
7-505- Original Jam Detection Registration Sensor: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
066
7-505- Original Jam Detection Original Exit Sensor: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
067
7-505- Original Jam Detection Original Pull CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
239
7-506- Jam Count by Paper Size A4 LEF CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
005
7-506- Jam Count by Paper Size A5 LEF CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
006
7-506- Jam Count by Paper Size B5 LEF CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
014
7-506- Jam Count by Paper Size LT LEF CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
038
7-506- Jam Count by Paper Size HLT LEF CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
044
7-506- Jam Count by Paper Size A3 SEF CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
132
7-506- Jam Count by Paper Size A4 SEF CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
133
7-506- Jam Count by Paper Size A5 SEF CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]

SM Appendices 3-185 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to

No. CTL Max/Init./Step]
134
7-506- Jam Count by Paper Size B4 SEF CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
141
7-506- Jam Count by Paper Size B5 SEF CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
142
7-506- Jam Count by Paper Size DLT SEF CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
160
7-506- Jam Count by Paper Size LG SEF CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
164
7-506- Jam Count by Paper Size LT SEF CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
166
7-506- Jam Count by Paper Size HLT SEF CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
172
7-506- Jam Count by Paper Size Others CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
255
7-507- Plotter Jam History Latest CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
001
7-507- Plotter Jam History Latest 1 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
002
7-507- Plotter Jam History Latest 2 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
003
7-507- Plotter Jam History Latest 3 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
004
7-507- Plotter Jam History Latest 4 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
005
7-507- Plotter Jam History Latest 5 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
006
7-507- Plotter Jam History Latest 6 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
007
7-507- Plotter Jam History Latest 7 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
008
7-507- Plotter Jam History Latest 8 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
009
7-507- Plotter Jam History Latest 9 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
010
7-508- Original Jam History Latest CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]

SM Appendices 3-186 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to

No. CTL Max/Init./Step]
001
7-508- Original Jam History Latest 1 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
002
7-508- Original Jam History Latest 2 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
003
7-508- Original Jam History Latest 3 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
004
7-508- Original Jam History Latest 4 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
005
7-508- Original Jam History Latest 5 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
006
7-508- Original Jam History Latest 6 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
007
7-508- Original Jam History Latest 7 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
008
7-508- Original Jam History Latest 8 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
009
7-508- Original Jam History Latest 9 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
010
7-509- Paper Jam Location Entrance: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
045
7-509- Paper Jam Location Entrance: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
046
7-509- Paper Jam Location Original Exit Sensor: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
047
7-509- Paper Jam Location Original Exit Sensor: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
048
7-509- Paper Jam Location Shift Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
049
7-509- Paper Jam Location Junction Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
050
7-509- Paper Jam Location Exit Pressure Release Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
051
7-509- Paper Jam Location Staple Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
052
7-509- Paper Jam Location Feed-Out: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]

SM Appendices 3-187 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to

No. CTL Max/Init./Step]
053
7-509- Paper Jam Location No Exit Response CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
093
7-509- Paper Jam Location Main Machine Setting CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
094 Incorrect
7-509- Paper Jam Location Registration: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
095
7-509- Paper Jam Location Registration: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
096
7-509- Paper Jam Location 1st 2-direction Paper Feed CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
097 SN: On
7-509- Paper Jam Location 1st 2-direction Paper Feed CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
098 SN: Off
7-509- Paper Jam Location 2nd 2-direction Paper Feed CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
099 SN: On
7-509- Paper Jam Location 2nd 2-direction Paper Feed CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
100 SN: Off
7-509- Paper Jam Location Additional Fold: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
101
7-509- Paper Jam Location Additional Fold: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
102
7-509- Paper Jam Location Top Tray Exit: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
103
7-509- Paper Jam Location Top Tray Exit: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
104
7-509- Paper Jam Location Bridge Exit: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
105
7-509- Paper Jam Location Bridge Exit: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
106
7-509- Paper Jam Location Registration Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
115
7-509- Paper Jam Location Folding Junction Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
116
7-509- Paper Jam Location Transport Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
117
7-509- Paper Jam Location Folding Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]

SM Appendices 3-188 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to

No. CTL Max/Init./Step]
118
7-509- Paper Jam Location 2nd 2-direction Paper Feed CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
119 Motor
7-509- Paper Jam Location Additional Folding Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
120
7-509- Paper Jam Location No Exit Response CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
143
7-509- Paper Jam Location Main Machine Setting CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
144 Incorrect
7-514- Paper Jam Count by At Power On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
001 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Tray1: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
003 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Tray2: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
004 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Tray3: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
005 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Tray4: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
006 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by LCT: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
007 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Bypass: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
008 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Duplex: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
009 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Timing: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
010 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Transport Sn1: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
011 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Transport Sn2: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
012 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Vertical Trans. Sn3: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
013 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Vertical Trans. Sn4: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
014 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by LCT Transport Sn: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]

SM Appendices 3-189 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to

No. CTL Max/Init./Step]
015 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Registration Sn: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
017 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Fusing Ent Sn: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
018 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Fusing Ext Sn: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
019 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Paper Ext Sn: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
020 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Bridge Tray Exit Sn: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
021 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Bridge Relay Sn: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
022 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Inverter Sn: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
024 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Duplex Exit Sn: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
025 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Duplex Entrance Sn: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
027 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Tray1: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
051 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Tray2: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
052 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Tray3: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
053 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Tray4: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
054 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by LCT Transport Sn: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
055 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Registratin Sn: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
057 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Paper Ext Sn: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
060 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Bridge Tray Ext Sn: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
061 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Bridge Relay Sn: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]

SM Appendices 3-190 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to

No. CTL Max/Init./Step]
062 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Inverter Sn: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
064 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Duplex Ext Sn: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
065 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Duplex Ent Sn: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
067 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Entrance Sn: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
100 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Entrance Sn: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
101 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Transport Sn: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
102 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Transport Sn: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
103 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Paper Exit CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
104 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Front Jogger Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
105 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Rear Jogger Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
106 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Shift Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
107 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Positioning Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
108 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Exit Guide Plate Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
109 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Stapler Shift Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
110 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Tray Lift Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
111 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Staple Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
112 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Stack Height Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
113 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Punch Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]

SM Appendices 3-191 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to

No. CTL Max/Init./Step]
114 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Punch Move Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
115 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by S-to-S Registration Move CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
116 Location Motor
7-514- Paper Jam Count by No Exit Response CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
148 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Main Machine Setting CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
149 Location Incorrect
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Entrance Sensor: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
150 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Entrance Sensor: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
151 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Horizontal Transport Sensor: CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
152 Location On
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Horizontal Transport Sensor: CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
153 Location Off
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Switchback Transport CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
154 Location Sensor: On
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Switchback Transport CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
155 Location Sensor: Off
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Proof Tray Exit: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
156 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Proof Tray Exit: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
157 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Shift Tray Exit: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
158 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Shift Tray Exit: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
159 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Booklet Stapler Exit: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
160 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Booklet Stapler Exit: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
161 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Enrance Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
162 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Horizontal Transport Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]

SM Appendices 3-192 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to

No. CTL Max/Init./Step]
163 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Pre-Stack Transport Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
164 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by ITB Transport Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
165 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Exit Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
166 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by TE Press Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
167 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Ext Plate Guide Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
168 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Punching Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
169 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Punch Move Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
170 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by S-to-S Registration Move CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
171 Location Motor
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Lower Junction Solenoid CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
172 Location Motor
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Jogger Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
173 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Positioning Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
174 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Feed Out Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
175 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Corner Stapler Move Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
176 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Corner Stapler Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
177 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Saddle Stitch Stapler Jogger CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
178 Location Motor
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Saddle Stitch Stapler Jog CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
179 Location SOL Motor
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Saddle Stitch Stapler CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
180 Location Standard Fence Motor
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Saddle Stitch Stapler Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]

SM Appendices 3-193 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to

No. CTL Max/Init./Step]
181 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Dynamic Roller Transport Mt CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
182 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Folder Transport Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
183 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Flat Fold Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
184 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Output Tray Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
185 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Shift Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
186 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Shift Tray Jogger Front Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
187 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Shift Tray Jogger Rear Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
188 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Shift Tray Jogger Retraction CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
189 Location Motor
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Stack Roller Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
190 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Leading Edge Guide Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
191 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Positioning Roller Transport CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
192 Location Motor
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Paper Guide Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
193 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Main Machine Setting CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
194 Location Incorrect
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Entrance: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
200 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Entrance: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
201 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Proof Tray Exit: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
202 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Proof Tray Exit: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
203 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Right Relay: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]

SM Appendices 3-194 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to

No. CTL Max/Init./Step]
204 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Left Relay: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
205 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Left Relay: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
206 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Shift Tray Exit: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
207 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Shift Tray Exit: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
208 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Stack: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
209 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by TE Stopper: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
210 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by TE Stopper: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
211 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Booklet Folder Exit: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
212 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Booklet Folder Exit: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
213 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Entrance Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
220 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Proof Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
221 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Exit Transport/ Positioning CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
222 Location Roller Motor
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Shift Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
223 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Jogger Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
224 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Exit Guide Plate Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
225 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Feed Out Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
226 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Output Tray Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
227 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Positioning Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]

SM Appendices 3-195 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to

No. CTL Max/Init./Step]
228 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Stapler Shift Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
229 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Stapler Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
230 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Punch Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
231 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Stack Transport Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
232 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by LE Stopper Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
233 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Folder Blade Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
234 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Paper Guide Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
235 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Stapler Shift Motor(without CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
236 Location staples)
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Stapler Motor(without CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
237 Location staples)
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Movable Guide Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
238 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by No Exit Response CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
248 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Main Machine Setting CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
249 Location Incorrect
7-515- Original Jam Count by At Power On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
001 Detection
7-515- Original Jam Count by Separation Sensor: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
013 Detection
7-515- Original Jam Count by Skew Correction Sn: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
014 Detection
7-515- Original Jam Count by Scanning Entrance Sn: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
015 Detection
7-515- Original Jam Count by Registration Sensor: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
016 Detection
7-515- Original Jam Count by Original Exit Sensor: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]

SM Appendices 3-196 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to

No. CTL Max/Init./Step]
017 Detection
7-515- Original Jam Count by Separation Sensor: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
063 Detection
7-515- Original Jam Count by Skew Correction Sn: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
064 Detection
7-515- Original Jam Count by Scanning Entrance Sn: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
065 Detection
7-515- Original Jam Count by Registration Sensor: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
066 Detection
7-515- Original Jam Count by Original Exit Sensor: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
067 Detection
7-515- Original Jam Count by Original Pull CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
239 Detection
7-516- Paper Size Jam Count A4 LEF CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
005
7-516- Paper Size Jam Count A5 LEF CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
006
7-516- Paper Size Jam Count B5 LEF CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
014
7-516- Paper Size Jam Count LT LEF CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
038
7-516- Paper Size Jam Count HLT LEF CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
044
7-516- Paper Size Jam Count A3 SEF CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
132
7-516- Paper Size Jam Count A4 SEF CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
133
7-516- Paper Size Jam Count A5 SEF CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
134
7-516- Paper Size Jam Count B4 SEF CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
141
7-516- Paper Size Jam Count B5 SEF CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
142
7-516- Paper Size Jam Count DLT SEF CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
160
7-516- Paper Size Jam Count LG SEF CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]

SM Appendices 3-197 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to

No. CTL Max/Init./Step]
164
7-516- Paper Size Jam Count LT SEF CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
166
7-516- Paper Size Jam Count HLT SEF CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
172
7-516- Paper Size Jam Count Others CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
255
7-519- Paper Jam Count by Entrance: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
045 Location
7-519- Paper Jam Count by Entrance: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
046 Location
7-519- Paper Jam Count by Original Exit Sensor: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
047 Location
7-519- Paper Jam Count by Original Exit Sensor: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
048 Location
7-519- Paper Jam Count by Shift Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
049 Location
7-519- Paper Jam Count by Junction Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
050 Location
7-519- Paper Jam Count by Exit Pressure Release Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
051 Location
7-519- Paper Jam Count by Staple Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
052 Location
7-519- Paper Jam Count by Feed-Out: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
053 Location
7-519- Paper Jam Count by No Exit Response CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
093 Location
7-519- Paper Jam Count by Main Machine Setting CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
094 Location Incorrect
7-519- Paper Jam Count by Registration: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
095 Location
7-519- Paper Jam Count by Registration: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
096 Location
7-519- Paper Jam Count by 1st 2-direction Paper Feed CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
097 Location SN: On
7-519- Paper Jam Count by 1st 2-direction Paper Feed CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]

SM Appendices 3-198 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to

No. CTL Max/Init./Step]
098 Location SN: Off
7-519- Paper Jam Count by 2nd 2-direction Paper Feed CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
099 Location SN: On
7-519- Paper Jam Count by 2nd 2-direction Paper Feed CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
100 Location SN: Off
7-519- Paper Jam Count by Additional Fold: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
101 Location
7-519- Paper Jam Count by Additional Fold: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
102 Location
7-519- Paper Jam Count by Top Tray Exit: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
103 Location
7-519- Paper Jam Count by Top Tray Exit: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
104 Location
7-519- Paper Jam Count by Bridge Exit: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
105 Location
7-519- Paper Jam Count by Bridge Exit: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
106 Location
7-519- Paper Jam Count by Registration Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
115 Location
7-519- Paper Jam Count by Folding Junction Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
116 Location
7-519- Paper Jam Count by Transport Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
117 Location
7-519- Paper Jam Count by Folding Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
118 Location
7-519- Paper Jam Count by 2nd 2-direction Paper Feed CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
119 Location Motor
7-519- Paper Jam Count by Additional Folding Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
120 Location
7-519- Paper Jam Count by No Exit Response CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
143 Location
7-519- Paper Jam Count by Main Machine Setting CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
144 Location Incorrect
7-520- Update Log ErrorRecord1 CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
001
7-520- Update Log ErrorRecord2 CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-199 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to

No. CTL Max/Init./Step]
002
7-520- Update Log ErrorRecord3 CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
003
7-520- Update Log ErrorRecord4 CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
004
7-520- Update Log ErrorRecord5 CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
005
7-520- Update Log ErrorRecord6 CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
006
7-520- Update Log ErrorRecord7 CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
007
7-520- Update Log ErrorRecord8 CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
008
7-520- Update Log ErrorRecord9 CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
009
7-520- Update Log ErrorRecord10 CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
010
7-520- Update Log Auto:StartDate1 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
011
7-520- Update Log Auto:StartDate2 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
012
7-520- Update Log Auto:StartDate3 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
013
7-520- Update Log Auto:StartDate4 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
014
7-520- Update Log Auto:StartDate5 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
015
7-520- Update Log Auto:EndDate1 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
021
7-520- Update Log Auto:EndDate2 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
022
7-520- Update Log Auto:EndDate3 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
023
7-520- Update Log Auto:EndDate4 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
024
7-520- Update Log Auto:EndDate5 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]

SM Appendices 3-200 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to

No. CTL Max/Init./Step]
025
7-520- Update Log Auto:Piecemark1 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
031
7-520- Update Log Auto:Piecemark2 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
032
7-520- Update Log Auto:Piecemark3 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
033
7-520- Update Log Auto:Piecemark4 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
034
7-520- Update Log Auto:Piecemark5 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
035
7-520- Update Log Auto:Version1 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
041
7-520- Update Log Auto:Version2 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
042
7-520- Update Log Auto:Version3 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
043
7-520- Update Log Auto:Version4 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
044
7-520- Update Log Auto:Version5 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
045
7-520- Update Log Auto:Result1 CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
051
7-520- Update Log Auto:Result2 CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
052
7-520- Update Log Auto:Result3 CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
053
7-520- Update Log Auto:Result4 CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
054
7-520- Update Log Auto:Result5 CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
055
7-520- Update Log Auto:Result6 CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
056
7-520- Update Log Auto:Result7 CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
057
7-520- Update Log Auto:Result8 CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-201 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to

No. CTL Max/Init./Step]
058
7-520- Update Log Auto:Result9 CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
059
7-520- Update Log Auto:Result10 CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
060
7-617- PM Parts Counter Display Normal CTL* [ 0 to 9999999 / 0 /
001 0]
7-617- PM Parts Counter Display Df CTL* [ 0 to 9999999 / 0 /
002 0]
7-618- PM Parts Counter Reset Normal CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
001
7-618- PM Parts Counter Reset Df CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
002
7-621- PM Counter #PCU ENG [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 /
002 Display:Pages 1page]
7-621- PM Counter Cleaning Blade ENG [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 /
009 Display:Pages 1page]
7-621- PM Counter Charge Roller ENG* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 /
018 Display:Pages 1page]
7-621- PM Counter Cleaner:Charge Roller ENG [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 /
019 Display:Pages 1page]
7-621- PM Counter OPC ENG [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 /
021 Display:Pages 1page]
7-621- PM Counter Stripper ENG [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 /
022 Display:Pages 1page]
7-621- PM Counter #Dev Unit ENG [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 /
023 Display:Pages 1page]
7-621- PM Counter Developer ENG [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 /
024 Display:Pages 1page]
7-621- PM Counter Development Filter ENG [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 /
025 Display:Pages 1page]
7-621- PM Counter Bearing:Development Screw ENG [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 /
028 Display:Pages 1page]
7-621- PM Counter Paper Transfer Roller Unit ENG [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 /
108 Display:Pages 1page]
7-621- PM Counter Fusing Unit ENG [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 /

SM Appendices 3-202 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to

No. CTL Max/Init./Step]
115 Display:Pages 1page]
7-621- PM Counter Fusing Belt ENG [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 /
116 Display:Pages 1page]
7-621- PM Counter Pressure Roller ENG [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 /
118 Display:Pages 1page]
7-621- PM Counter Bearing:Pressure Roller ENG [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 /
119 Display:Pages 1page]
7-621- PM Counter Waste Toner bottle ENG [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 /
142 Display:Pages 1mg]
7-621- PM Counter ADF Pick-up Roller ENG [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 /
206 Display:Pages 1page]
7-621- PM Counter ADF Supply Belt ENG [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 /
207 Display:Pages 1page]
7-621- PM Counter ADF Reverse Roller ENG [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 /
208 Display:Pages 1page]
7-622- PM Counter Reset #PCU ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
002
7-622- PM Counter Reset Cleaning Blade ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
009
7-622- PM Counter Reset Charge Roller ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
018
7-622- PM Counter Reset Cleaner:Charge Roller ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
019
7-622- PM Counter Reset OPC ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
021
7-622- PM Counter Reset Stripper ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
022
7-622- PM Counter Reset #Dev Unit ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
023
7-622- PM Counter Reset Developer ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
024
7-622- PM Counter Reset Development Filter ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
025
7-622- PM Counter Reset Bearing:Development Screw ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
028
7-622- PM Counter Reset Paper Transfer Roller Unit ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-203 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to

No. CTL Max/Init./Step]
108
7-622- PM Counter Reset Fusing Unit ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
115
7-622- PM Counter Reset Fusing Belt ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
116
7-622- PM Counter Reset Pressure Roller ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
118
7-622- PM Counter Reset Bearing:Pressure Roller ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
119
7-622- PM Counter Reset ADF Pick-up Roller ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
206
7-622- PM Counter Reset ADF Supply Belt ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
207
7-622- PM Counter Reset ADF Reverse Roller ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
208
7-622- PM Counter Reset SCS ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
250
7-624- Part Replacement #PCU CTL [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
002 Operation ON/OFF
7-624- Part Replacement Cleaning Blade CTL [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
009 Operation ON/OFF
7-624- Part Replacement Charge Roller CTL [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
018 Operation ON/OFF
7-624- Part Replacement Cleaner:Charge Roller CTL [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
019 Operation ON/OFF
7-624- Part Replacement OPC CTL [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
021 Operation ON/OFF
7-624- Part Replacement Stripper CTL [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
022 Operation ON/OFF
7-624- Part Replacement #Dev Unit CTL [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
023 Operation ON/OFF
7-624- Part Replacement Developer CTL [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
024 Operation ON/OFF
7-624- Part Replacement Development Filter CTL [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
025 Operation ON/OFF
7-624- Part Replacement Bearing:Development Screw CTL [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-204 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to

No. CTL Max/Init./Step]
028 Operation ON/OFF
7-624- Part Replacement #Paper Transfer Roller Unit CTL [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
108 Operation ON/OFF
7-624- Part Replacement #Fusing Unit CTL [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
115 Operation ON/OFF
7-624- Part Replacement Fusing Belt CTL [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
116 Operation ON/OFF
7-624- Part Replacement Pressure Roller CTL [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
118 Operation ON/OFF
7-624- Part Replacement Bearing:Pressure Roller CTL [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
119 Operation ON/OFF
7-624- Part Replacement #Waste Toner Bottle CTL [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
142 Operation ON/OFF
7-624- Part Replacement #ADF Pick-up Roller CTL [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
206 Operation ON/OFF
7-624- Part Replacement #ADF Paper Supply Belt CTL [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
207 Operation ON/OFF
7-624- Part Replacement #ADF Reverse Roller CTL [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
208 Operation ON/OFF
7-628- PM Counter Reset SCS ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
002
7-801- ROM No. Engine ENG [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
002
7-801- ROM No. ADF ENG [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
005
7-801- ROM No. Finisher ENG [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
007
7-801- ROM No. PTU ENG [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
009
7-801- ROM No. LCT ENG [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
010
7-801- ROM No. PTU2 ENG [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
019
7-801- ROM No. Folder ENG [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
025
7-801- Firmware Version Engine ENG [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]

SM Appendices 3-205 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to

No. CTL Max/Init./Step]
102
7-801- Firmware Version ADF ENG [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
105
7-801- Firmware Version Finisher ENG [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
107
7-801- Firmware Version PTU ENG [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
109
7-801- Firmware Version LCT ENG [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
110
7-801- Firmware Version Folder ENG [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
125
7-801- ROM No./ Firmware CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
255 Version
7-803- PM Counter Display Paper CTL* [ 0 to 9999999 / 0 /
001 0]
7-804- PM Counter Reset Paper CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
001
7-807- SC/Jam Counter Reset CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
001
7-826- MF Error Counter Error Total CTL* [ 0 to 9999999 / 0 /
001 0]
7-826- MF Error Counter Error Staple CTL* [ 0 to 9999999 / 0 /
002 0]
7-827- MF Error Counter Clear CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
001
7-832- Self-Diagnose Result CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
001 Display
7-836- Total Memory Size CTL [ 0 to 0xffffffff / 0 /
001 0MB]
7-840- ServiceSP Entry Code Change Time :Latest CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
001 Chg Hist
7-840- ServiceSP Entry Code Change Time :Last1 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
002 Chg Hist
7-840- ServiceSP Entry Code Initialize Time :Latest CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
101 Chg Hist
7-840- ServiceSP Entry Code Initialize Time :Last1 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]

SM Appendices 3-206 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to

No. CTL Max/Init./Step]
102 Chg Hist
7-852- DF Glass Dust Check Dust Detection Counter ENG* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 1]
001
7-852- DF Glass Dust Check Dust Counter Clear Counter ENG* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 1]
002
7-852- DF Glass Dust Check Dust Detection Counter: ENG* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 1]
003 Back
7-901- Assert Info. File Name CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
001
7-901- Assert Info. Number of Lines CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
002
7-901- Assert Info. Location CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
003
7-910- ROM No System/Copy CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
001
7-910- ROM No Engine CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
002
7-910- ROM No Lcdc CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
003
7-910- ROM No ADF CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
005
7-910- ROM No Finisher1 CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
007
7-910- ROM No Bank CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
009
7-910- ROM No LCT CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
010
7-910- ROM No FCU CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
012
7-910- ROM No NetworkSupport CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
018
7-910- ROM No Bank2 CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
019
7-910- ROM No BIOS CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
022
7-910- ROM No HDD Format Option CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]

SM Appendices 3-207 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to

No. CTL Max/Init./Step]
023
7-910- ROM No Folding Unit CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
025
7-910- ROM No RPCS CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
150
7-910- ROM No PS CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
151
7-910- ROM No RPDL CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
152
7-910- ROM No R98 CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
153
7-910- ROM No R16 CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
154
7-910- ROM No RPGL CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
155
7-910- ROM No R55 CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
156
7-910- ROM No RTIFF CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
157
7-910- ROM No PCL CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
158
7-910- ROM No PCLXL CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
159
7-910- ROM No MSIS CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
160
7-910- ROM No PDF CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
162
7-910- ROM No PJL CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
165
7-910- ROM No IPDS CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
166
7-910- ROM No MediaPrint:JPEG CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
167
7-910- ROM No MediaPrint:TIFF CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
168
7-910- ROM No XPS CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]

SM Appendices 3-208 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to

No. CTL Max/Init./Step]
169
7-910- ROM No FONT CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
180
7-910- ROM No FONT1 CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
181
7-910- ROM No FONT2 CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
182
7-910- ROM No FONT3 CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
183
7-910- ROM No FONT4 CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
184
7-910- ROM No FONT5 CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
185
7-910- ROM No FONT6 CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
186
7-910- ROM No FONT7 CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
187
7-910- ROM No Factory CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
200
7-910- ROM No Copy CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
201
7-910- ROM No NetworkDocBox CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
202
7-910- ROM No Fax CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
203
7-910- ROM No Printer CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
204
7-910- ROM No Scanner CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
205
7-910- ROM No RFax CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
206
7-910- ROM No MIB CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
210
7-910- ROM No Websupport CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
211
7-910- ROM No WebUapl CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]

SM Appendices 3-209 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to

No. CTL Max/Init./Step]
212
7-910- ROM No SDK1 CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
213
7-910- ROM No SDK2 CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
214
7-910- ROM No SDK3 CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
215
7-910- ROM No Package CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
250
7-911- Firmware Version System/Copy CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
001
7-911- Firmware Version Engine CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
002
7-911- Firmware Version Lcdc CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
003
7-911- Firmware Version ADF CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
005
7-911- Firmware Version Finisher1 CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
007
7-911- Firmware Version Bank CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
009
7-911- Firmware Version LCT CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
010
7-911- Firmware Version FCU CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
012
7-911- Firmware Version NetworkSupport CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
018
7-911- Firmware Version Bank2 CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
019
7-911- Firmware Version BIOS CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
022
7-911- Firmware Version HDD Format Option CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
023
7-911- Firmware Version Folding Unit CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
025
7-911- Firmware Version RPCS CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]

SM Appendices 3-210 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to

No. CTL Max/Init./Step]
150
7-911- Firmware Version PS CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
151
7-911- Firmware Version RPDL CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
152
7-911- Firmware Version R98 CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
153
7-911- Firmware Version R16 CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
154
7-911- Firmware Version RPGL CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
155
7-911- Firmware Version R55 CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
156
7-911- Firmware Version RTIFF CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
157
7-911- Firmware Version PCL CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
158
7-911- Firmware Version PCLXL CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
159
7-911- Firmware Version MSIS CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
160
7-911- Firmware Version PDF CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
162
7-911- Firmware Version PJL CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
165
7-911- Firmware Version IPDS CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
166
7-911- Firmware Version MediaPrint:JPEG CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
167
7-911- Firmware Version MediaPrint:TIFF CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
168
7-911- Firmware Version XPS CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
169
7-911- Firmware Version FONT CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
180
7-911- Firmware Version FONT1 CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]

SM Appendices 3-211 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to

No. CTL Max/Init./Step]
181
7-911- Firmware Version FONT2 CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
182
7-911- Firmware Version FONT3 CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
183
7-911- Firmware Version FONT4 CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
184
7-911- Firmware Version FONT5 CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
185
7-911- Firmware Version FONT6 CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
186
7-911- Firmware Version FONT7 CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
187
7-911- Firmware Version Factory CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
200
7-911- Firmware Version Copy CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
201
7-911- Firmware Version NetworkDocBox CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
202
7-911- Firmware Version Fax CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
203
7-911- Firmware Version Printer CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
204
7-911- Firmware Version Scanner CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
205
7-911- Firmware Version RFax CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
206
7-911- Firmware Version MIB CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
210
7-911- Firmware Version Websupport CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
211
7-911- Firmware Version WebUapl CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
212
7-911- Firmware Version SDK1 CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
213
7-911- Firmware Version SDK2 CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]

SM Appendices 3-212 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to

No. CTL Max/Init./Step]
214
7-911- Firmware Version SDK3 CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
215
7-911- Firmware Version Package CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
250
7-942- PM Counter #PCU ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
002 Display:Distance(%)
7-942- PM Counter Cleaning Blade ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
009 Display:Distance(%)
7-942- PM Counter Charge Roller ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
018 Display:Distance(%)
7-942- PM Counter Cleaner:Charge Roller ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
019 Display:Distance(%)
7-942- PM Counter OPC ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
021 Display:Distance(%)
7-942- PM Counter Stripper ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
022 Display:Distance(%)
7-942- PM Counter #Dev Unit ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
023 Display:Distance(%)
7-942- PM Counter Developer ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
024 Display:Distance(%)
7-942- PM Counter Development Filter ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
025 Display:Distance(%)
7-942- PM Counter Bearing:Development Screw ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
028 Display:Distance(%)
7-942- PM Counter Paper Transfer Roller Unit ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
108 Display:Distance(%)
7-942- PM Counter Fusing Unit ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
115 Display:Distance(%)
7-942- PM Counter Fusing Belt ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
116 Display:Distance(%)
7-942- PM Counter Pressure Roller ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
118 Display:Distance(%)
7-942- PM Counter Bearing:Pressure Roller ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
119 Display:Distance(%)
7-944- PM Counter #PCU ENG* [ 0 to 4294967295 /

SM Appendices 3-213 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to

No. CTL Max/Init./Step]
002 Display:Distance 0 / 1mm]
7-944- PM Counter Cleaning Blade ENG [ 0 to 4294967295 /
009 Display:Distance 0 / 1mm]
7-944- PM Counter Charge Roller ENG* [ 0 to 4294967295 /
018 Display:Distance 0 / 1mm]
7-944- PM Counter Cleaner:Charge Roller ENG [ 0 to 4294967295 /
019 Display:Distance 0 / 1mm]
7-944- PM Counter OPC ENG* [ 0 to 4294967295 /
021 Display:Distance 0 / 1mm]
7-944- PM Counter Stripper ENG [ 0 to 4294967295 /
022 Display:Distance 0 / 1mm]
7-944- PM Counter #Dev Unit ENG [ 0 to 4294967295 /
023 Display:Distance 0 / 1mm]
7-944- PM Counter Developer ENG* [ 0 to 4294967295 /
024 Display:Distance 0 / 1mm]
7-944- PM Counter Development Filter ENG [ 0 to 4294967295 /
025 Display:Distance 0 / 1mm]
7-944- PM Counter Bearing:Development Screw ENG [ 0 to 4294967295 /
028 Display:Distance 0 / 1mm]
7-944- PM Counter Paper Transfer Roller Unit ENG [ 0 to 4294967295 /
108 Display:Distance 0 / 1mm]
7-944- PM Counter Fusing Unit ENG [ 0 to 4294967295 /
115 Display:Distance 0 / 1mm]
7-944- PM Counter Fusing Belt ENG [ 0 to 4294967295 /
116 Display:Distance 0 / 1mm]
7-944- PM Counter Pressure Roller ENG [ 0 to 4294967295 /
118 Display:Distance 0 / 1mm]
7-944- PM Counter Bearing:Pressure Roller ENG [ 0 to 4294967295 /
119 Display:Distance 0 / 1mm]
7-951- Remain Day #PCU ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 /
002 Counter:Pages 1days]
7-951- Remain Day Cleaning Blade ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 /
009 Counter:Pages 1days]
7-951- Remain Day Charge Roller ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 /
018 Counter:Pages 1days]
7-951- Remain Day Cleaner:Charge Roller ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 /

SM Appendices 3-214 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to

No. CTL Max/Init./Step]
019 Counter:Pages 1days]
7-951- Remain Day OPC ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 /
021 Counter:Pages 1days]
7-951- Remain Day Stripper ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 /
022 Counter:Pages 1days]
7-951- Remain Day #Dev Unit ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 /
023 Counter:Pages 1days]
7-951- Remain Day Developer ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 /
024 Counter:Pages 1days]
7-951- Remain Day Development Filter ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 /
025 Counter:Pages 1days]
7-951- Remain Day Bearing:Development Screw ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 /
028 Counter:Pages 1days]
7-951- Remain Day Paper Transfer Roller Unit ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 /
108 Counter:Pages 1days]
7-951- Remain Day Fusing Unit ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 /
115 Counter:Pages 1days]
7-951- Remain Day Fusing Belt ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 /
116 Counter:Pages 1days]
7-951- Remain Day Pressure Roller ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 /
118 Counter:Pages 1days]
7-951- Remain Day Bearing:Pressure Roller ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 /
119 Counter:Pages 1days]
7-951- Remain Day Waste Toner bottle ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 /
142 Counter:Pages 1days]
7-951- Remain Day ADF Pick-up Roller ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 /
206 Counter:Pages 1days]
7-951- Remain Day ADF Supply Belt ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 /
207 Counter:Pages 1days]
7-951- Remain Day ADF Reverse Roller ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 /
208 Counter:Pages 1days]
7-952- Remain Day #PCU ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 /
002 Counter:Distance 1days]
7-952- Remain Day Cleaning Blade ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 /
009 Counter:Distance 1days]
7-952- Remain Day Charge Roller ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 /

SM Appendices 3-215 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to

No. CTL Max/Init./Step]
018 Counter:Distance 1days]
7-952- Remain Day Cleaner:Charge Roller ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 /
019 Counter:Distance 1days]
7-952- Remain Day OPC ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 /
021 Counter:Distance 1days]
7-952- Remain Day Stripper ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 /
022 Counter:Distance 1days]
7-952- Remain Day #Dev Unit ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 /
023 Counter:Distance 1days]
7-952- Remain Day Developer ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 /
024 Counter:Distance 1days]
7-952- Remain Day Development Filter ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 /
025 Counter:Distance 1days]
7-952- Remain Day Bearing:Development Screw ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 /
028 Counter:Distance 1days]
7-952- Remain Day Paper Transfer Roller Unit ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 /
108 Counter:Distance 1days]
7-952- Remain Day Fusing Unit ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 /
115 Counter:Distance 1days]
7-952- Remain Day Fusing Belt ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 /
116 Counter:Distance 1days]
7-952- Remain Day Pressure Roller ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 /
118 Counter:Distance 1days]
7-952- Remain Day Bearing:Pressure Roller ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 /
119 Counter:Distance 1days]
7-954- PM Counter #PCU ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
002 Display:Pages(%)
7-954- PM Counter Cleaning Blade ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
009 Display:Pages(%)
7-954- PM Counter Charge Roller ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
018 Display:Pages(%)
7-954- PM Counter Cleaner:Charge Roller ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
019 Display:Pages(%)
7-954- PM Counter OPC ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
021 Display:Pages(%)
7-954- PM Counter Stripper ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]

SM Appendices 3-216 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to

No. CTL Max/Init./Step]
022 Display:Pages(%)
7-954- PM Counter #Dev Unit ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
023 Display:Pages(%)
7-954- PM Counter Developer ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
024 Display:Pages(%)
7-954- PM Counter Development Filter ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
025 Display:Pages(%)
7-954- PM Counter Bearing:Development Screw ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
028 Display:Pages(%)
7-954- PM Counter Paper Transfer Roller Unit ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
108 Display:Pages(%)
7-954- PM Counter Fusing Unit ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
115 Display:Pages(%)
7-954- PM Counter Fusing Belt ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
116 Display:Pages(%)
7-954- PM Counter Pressure Roller ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
118 Display:Pages(%)
7-954- PM Counter Bearing:Pressure Roller ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
119 Display:Pages(%)
7-954- PM Counter Waste Toner bottle ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
142 Display:Pages(%)
7-954- PM Counter ADF Pick-up Roller ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
206 Display:Pages(%)
7-954- PM Counter ADF Supply Belt ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
207 Display:Pages(%)
7-954- PM Counter ADF Reverse Roller ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
208 Display:Pages(%)
7-955- Estimated Remain Pages #PCU ENG [ 0 to 9999999 / 0 /
002 1page]
7-955- Estimated Remain Pages Cleaning Blade ENG [ 0 to 9999999 / 0 /
009 1page]
7-955- Estimated Remain Pages Charge Roller ENG [ 0 to 9999999 / 0 /
018 1page]
7-955- Estimated Remain Pages Cleaner:Charge Roller ENG [ 0 to 9999999 / 0 /
019 1page]
7-955- Estimated Remain Pages OPC ENG [ 0 to 9999999 / 0 /

SM Appendices 3-217 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to

No. CTL Max/Init./Step]
021 1page]
7-955- Estimated Remain Pages Stripper ENG [ 0 to 9999999 / 0 /
022 1page]
7-955- Estimated Remain Pages #Dev Unit ENG [ 0 to 9999999 / 0 /
023 1page]
7-955- Estimated Remain Pages Developer ENG [ 0 to 9999999 / 0 /
024 1page]
7-955- Estimated Remain Pages Development Filter ENG [ 0 to 9999999 / 0 /
025 1page]
7-955- Estimated Remain Pages Bearing:Development Screw ENG [ 0 to 9999999 / 0 /
028 1page]
7-955- Estimated Remain Pages Paper Transfer Roller Unit ENG [ 0 to 9999999 / 0 /
108 1page]
7-955- Estimated Remain Pages Fusing Unit ENG [ 0 to 9999999 / 0 /
115 1page]
7-955- Estimated Remain Pages Fusing Belt ENG [ 0 to 9999999 / 0 /
116 1page]
7-955- Estimated Remain Pages Pressure Roller ENG [ 0 to 9999999 / 0 /
118 1page]
7-955- Estimated Remain Pages Bearing:Pressure Roller ENG [ 0 to 9999999 / 0 /
119 1page]
7-956- Estimated Remain Days #PCU ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 /
002 1days]
7-956- Estimated Remain Days Cleaning Blade ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 /
009 1days]
7-956- Estimated Remain Days Charge Roller ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 /
018 1days]
7-956- Estimated Remain Days Cleaner:Charge Roller ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 /
019 1days]
7-956- Estimated Remain Days OPC ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 /
021 1days]
7-956- Estimated Remain Days Stripper ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 /
022 1days]
7-956- Estimated Remain Days #Dev Unit ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 /
023 1days]
7-956- Estimated Remain Days Developer ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 /

SM Appendices 3-218 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to

No. CTL Max/Init./Step]
024 1days]
7-956- Estimated Remain Days Development Filter ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 /
025 1days]
7-956- Estimated Remain Days Bearing:Development Screw ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 /
028 1days]
7-956- Estimated Remain Days Paper Transfer Roller Unit ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 /
108 1days]
7-956- Estimated Remain Days Fusing Unit ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 /
115 1days]
7-956- Estimated Remain Days Fusing Belt ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 /
116 1days]
7-956- Estimated Remain Days Pressure Roller ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 /
118 1days]
7-956- Estimated Remain Days Bearing:Pressure Roller ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 /
119 1days]
7-956- Estimated Remain Days Waste Toner bottle ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 /
142 1days]
7-956- Estimated Remain Days ADF Pick-up Roller ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 /
206 1days]
7-956- Estimated Remain Days ADF Supply Belt ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 /
207 1days]
7-956- Estimated Remain Days ADF Reverse Roller ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 /
208 1days]
7-960- Estimated Usage Rate #PCU ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
002
7-960- Estimated Usage Rate Cleaning Blade ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
009
7-960- Estimated Usage Rate Charge Roller ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
018
7-960- Estimated Usage Rate Cleaner:Charge Roller ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
019
7-960- Estimated Usage Rate OPC ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
021
7-960- Estimated Usage Rate Stripper ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
022
7-960- Estimated Usage Rate #Dev Unit ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]

SM Appendices 3-219 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to

No. CTL Max/Init./Step]
023
7-960- Estimated Usage Rate Developer ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
024
7-960- Estimated Usage Rate Development Filter ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
025
7-960- Estimated Usage Rate Bearing:Development Screw ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
028
7-960- Estimated Usage Rate Paper Transfer Roller Unit ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
108
7-960- Estimated Usage Rate Fusing Unit ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
115
7-960- Estimated Usage Rate Fusing Belt ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
116
7-960- Estimated Usage Rate Pressure Roller ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
118
7-960- Estimated Usage Rate Bearing:Pressure Roller ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
119
7-960- Estimated Usage Rate Waste Toner bottle ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
142
7-960- Estimated Usage Rate ADF Pick-up Roller ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
206
7-960- Estimated Usage Rate ADF Supply Belt ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
207
7-960- Estimated Usage Rate ADF Reverse Roller ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
208
7-979- CPU Reset Log Data1 ENG* [ 0x00 to 0xFF /
001 0x00 / 1]
7-979- CPU Reset Log Data2 ENG* [ 0x0000 to 0xFFFF
002 / 0x0000 / 1]
7-979- CPU Reset Log Data3 ENG* [ 0x0000 to 0xFFFF
003 / 0x0000 / 1]
7-979- CPU Reset Log Data4 ENG* [ 0x0000 to 0xFFFF
004 / 0x0000 / 1]
7-979- CPU Reset Log Data5 ENG* [ 0x0000 to 0xFFFF
005 / 0x0000 / 1]
7-979- CPU Reset Log Data6 ENG* [ 0x0000 to 0xFFFF

SM Appendices 3-220 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to

No. CTL Max/Init./Step]
006 / 0x0000 / 1]
7-979- CPU Reset Log Data7 ENG* [ 0x0000 to 0xFFFF
007 / 0x0000 / 1]
7-979- CPU Reset Log Data8 ENG* [ 0x0000 to 0xFFFF
008 / 0x0000 / 1]
7-979- CPU Reset Log Data9 ENG* [ 0x0000 to 0xFFFF
009 / 0x0000 / 1]
7-979- CPU Reset Log Data10 ENG* [ 0x0000 to 0xFFFF
010 / 0x0000 / 1]
7-979- CPU Reset Log Data11 ENG* [ 0x0000 to 0xFFFF
011 / 0x0000 / 1]
7-979- CPU Reset Log Data12 ENG* [ 0x0000 to 0xFFFF
012 / 0x0000 / 1]
7-979- CPU Reset Log Data13 ENG* [ 0x0000 to 0xFFFF
013 / 0x0000 / 1]
7-979- CPU Reset Log Data14 ENG* [ 0x0000 to 0xFFFF
014 / 0x0000 / 1]
7-979- CPU Reset Log Data15 ENG* [ 0x0000 to 0xFFFF
015 / 0x0000 / 1]
7-979- CPU Reset Log Data16 ENG* [ 0x0000 to 0xFFFF
016 / 0x0000 / 1]
7-979- CPU Reset Log Data17 ENG* [ 0x0000 to 0xFFFF
017 / 0x0000 / 1]
7-979- CPU Reset Log Data18 ENG* [ 0x0000 to 0xFFFF
018 / 0x0000 / 1]
7-979- CPU Reset Log Data19 ENG* [ 0x0000 to 0xFFFF
019 / 0x0000 / 1]
7-979- CPU Reset Log Data20 ENG* [ 0x0000 to 0xFFFF
020 / 0x0000 / 1]
7-979- CPU Reset Log Data21 ENG* [ 0x0000 to 0xFFFF
021 / 0x0000 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-221 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

3.8 SP GROUP 8000

SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step]
CTL
8-001- T:Total Jobs CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-002- C:Total Jobs CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-003- F:Total Jobs CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-004- P:Total Jobs CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-005- S:Total Jobs CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-006- L:Total Jobs CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-011- T:Jobs/LS CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-012- C:Jobs/LS CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-013- F:Jobs/LS CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-014- P:Jobs/LS CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-015- S:Jobs/LS CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-016- L:Jobs/LS CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-017- O:Jobs/LS CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-021- T:Pjob/LS CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-022- C:Pjob/LS CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-023- F:Pjob/LS CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-024- P:Pjob/LS CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-025- S:Pjob/LS CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-222 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step]

CTL
001
8-026- L:Pjob/LS CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-027- O:Pjob/LS CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-031- T:Pjob/DesApl CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-032- C:Pjob/DesApl CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-033- F:Pjob/DesApl CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-034- P:Pjob/DesApl CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-035- S:Pjob/DesApl CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-036- L:Pjob/DesApl CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-037- O:Pjob/DesApl CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-041- T:TX Jobs/LS CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-042- C:TX Jobs/LS CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-043- F:TX Jobs/LS CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-044- P:TX Jobs/LS CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-045- S:TX Jobs/LS CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-046- L:TX Jobs/LS CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-047- O:TX Jobs/LS CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-051- T:TX Jobs/DesApl CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-052- C:TX Jobs/DesApl CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-223 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step]

CTL
001
8-053- F:TX Jobs/DesApl CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-054- P:TX Jobs/DesApl CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-055- S:TX Jobs/DesApl CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-056- L:TX Jobs/DesApl CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-057- O:TX Jobs/DesApl CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-061- T:FIN Jobs Sort CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-061- T:FIN Jobs Stack CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-061- T:FIN Jobs Staple CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-061- T:FIN Jobs Booklet CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004
8-061- T:FIN Jobs Z-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
005
8-061- T:FIN Jobs Punch CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
006
8-061- T:FIN Jobs Other CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
007
8-061- T:FIN Jobs Inside-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
008
8-061- T:FIN Jobs Three-IN-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
009
8-061- T:FIN Jobs Three-OUT-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
010
8-061- T:FIN Jobs Four-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
011
8-061- T:FIN Jobs KANNON-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
012
8-061- T:FIN Jobs Perfect-Bind CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-224 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step]

CTL
013
8-061- T:FIN Jobs Ring-Bind CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
014
8-061- T:FIN Jobs 3rd Vendor CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
015
8-061- T:FIN Jobs TwinLoop-Bind CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
016
8-062- C:FIN Jobs Sort CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-062- C:FIN Jobs Stack CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-062- C:FIN Jobs Staple CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-062- C:FIN Jobs Booklet CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004
8-062- C:FIN Jobs Z-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
005
8-062- C:FIN Jobs Punch CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
006
8-062- C:FIN Jobs Other CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
007
8-062- C:FIN Jobs Inside-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
008
8-062- C:FIN Jobs Three-IN-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
009
8-062- C:FIN Jobs Three-OUT-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
010
8-062- C:FIN Jobs Four-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
011
8-062- C:FIN Jobs KANNON-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
012
8-062- C:FIN Jobs Perfect-Bind CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
013
8-062- C:FIN Jobs Ring-Bind CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
014
8-062- C:FIN Jobs 3rd Vendor CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-225 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step]

CTL
015
8-062- C:FIN Jobs TwinLoop-Bind CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
016
8-063- F:FIN Jobs Sort CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-063- F:FIN Jobs Stack CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-063- F:FIN Jobs Staple CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-063- F:FIN Jobs Booklet CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004
8-063- F:FIN Jobs Z-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
005
8-063- F:FIN Jobs Punch CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
006
8-063- F:FIN Jobs Other CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
007
8-063- F:FIN Jobs Inside-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
008
8-063- F:FIN Jobs Three-IN-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
009
8-063- F:FIN Jobs Three-OUT-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
010
8-063- F:FIN Jobs Four-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
011
8-063- F:FIN Jobs KANNON-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
012
8-063- F:FIN Jobs Perfect-Bind CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
013
8-063- F:FIN Jobs Ring-Bind CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
014
8-063- F:FIN Jobs 3rd Vendor CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
015
8-063- F:FIN Jobs TwinLoop-Bind CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
016
8-064- P:FIN Jobs Sort CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-226 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step]

CTL
001
8-064- P:FIN Jobs Stack CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-064- P:FIN Jobs Staple CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-064- P:FIN Jobs Booklet CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004
8-064- P:FIN Jobs Z-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
005
8-064- P:FIN Jobs Punch CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
006
8-064- P:FIN Jobs Other CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
007
8-064- P:FIN Jobs Inside-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
008
8-064- P:FIN Jobs Three-IN-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
009
8-064- P:FIN Jobs Three-OUT-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
010
8-064- P:FIN Jobs Four-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
011
8-064- P:FIN Jobs KANNON-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
012
8-064- P:FIN Jobs Perfect-Bind CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
013
8-064- P:FIN Jobs Ring-Bind CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
014
8-064- P:FIN Jobs 3rd Vendor CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
015
8-064- P:FIN Jobs TwinLoop-Bind CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
016
8-065- S:FIN Jobs Sort CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-065- S:FIN Jobs Stack CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-065- S:FIN Jobs Staple CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-227 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step]

CTL
003
8-065- S:FIN Jobs Booklet CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004
8-065- S:FIN Jobs Z-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
005
8-065- S:FIN Jobs Punch CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
006
8-065- S:FIN Jobs Other CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
007
8-065- S:FIN Jobs Inside-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
008
8-065- S:FIN Jobs Three-IN-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
009
8-065- S:FIN Jobs Three-OUT-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
010
8-065- S:FIN Jobs Four-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
011
8-065- S:FIN Jobs KANNON-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
012
8-065- S:FIN Jobs Perfect-Bind CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
013
8-065- S:FIN Jobs Ring-Bind CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
014
8-065- S:FIN Jobs 3rd Vendor CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
015
8-065- S:FIN Jobs TwinLoop-Bind CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
016
8-066- L:FIN Jobs Sort CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-066- L:FIN Jobs Stack CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-066- L:FIN Jobs Staple CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-066- L:FIN Jobs Booklet CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004
8-066- L:FIN Jobs Z-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-228 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step]

CTL
005
8-066- L:FIN Jobs Punch CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
006
8-066- L:FIN Jobs Other CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
007
8-066- L:FIN Jobs Inside-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
008
8-066- L:FIN Jobs Three-IN-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
009
8-066- L:FIN Jobs Three-OUT-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
010
8-066- L:FIN Jobs Four-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
011
8-066- L:FIN Jobs KANNON-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
012
8-066- L:FIN Jobs Perfect-Bind CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
013
8-066- L:FIN Jobs Ring-Bind CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
014
8-066- L:FIN Jobs 3rd Vendor CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
015
8-066- L:FIN Jobs TwinLoop-Bind CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
016
8-067- O:FIN Jobs Sort CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-067- O:FIN Jobs Stack CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-067- O:FIN Jobs Staple CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-067- O:FIN Jobs Booklet CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004
8-067- O:FIN Jobs Z-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
005
8-067- O:FIN Jobs Punch CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
006
8-067- O:FIN Jobs Other CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-229 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step]

CTL
007
8-067- O:FIN Jobs Inside-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
008
8-067- O:FIN Jobs Three-IN-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
009
8-067- O:FIN Jobs Three-OUT-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
010
8-067- O:FIN Jobs Four-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
011
8-067- O:FIN Jobs KANNON-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
012
8-067- O:FIN Jobs Perfect-Bind CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
013
8-067- O:FIN Jobs Ring-Bind CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
014
8-067- O:FIN Jobs 3rd Vendor CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
015
8-067- O:FIN Jobs TwinLoop-Bind CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
016
8-071- T:Jobs/PGS 1 Page CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-071- T:Jobs/PGS 2 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-071- T:Jobs/PGS 3 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-071- T:Jobs/PGS 4 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004
8-071- T:Jobs/PGS 5 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
005
8-071- T:Jobs/PGS 6~10 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
006
8-071- T:Jobs/PGS 11~20 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
007
8-071- T:Jobs/PGS 21~50 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
008
8-071- T:Jobs/PGS 51~100 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-230 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step]

CTL
009
8-071- T:Jobs/PGS 101~300 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
010
8-071- T:Jobs/PGS 301~500 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
011
8-071- T:Jobs/PGS 501~700 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
012
8-071- T:Jobs/PGS 701~1000 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
013
8-071- T:Jobs/PGS 1001~ Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
014
8-072- C:Jobs/PGS 1 Page CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-072- C:Jobs/PGS 2 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-072- C:Jobs/PGS 3 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-072- C:Jobs/PGS 4 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004
8-072- C:Jobs/PGS 5 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
005
8-072- C:Jobs/PGS 6~10 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
006
8-072- C:Jobs/PGS 11~20 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
007
8-072- C:Jobs/PGS 21~50 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
008
8-072- C:Jobs/PGS 51~100 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
009
8-072- C:Jobs/PGS 101~300 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
010
8-072- C:Jobs/PGS 301~500 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
011
8-072- C:Jobs/PGS 501~700 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
012
8-072- C:Jobs/PGS 701~1000 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-231 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step]

CTL
013
8-072- C:Jobs/PGS 1001~ Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
014
8-073- F:Jobs/PGS 1 Page CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-073- F:Jobs/PGS 2 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-073- F:Jobs/PGS 3 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-073- F:Jobs/PGS 4 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004
8-073- F:Jobs/PGS 5 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
005
8-073- F:Jobs/PGS 6~10 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
006
8-073- F:Jobs/PGS 11~20 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
007
8-073- F:Jobs/PGS 21~50 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
008
8-073- F:Jobs/PGS 51~100 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
009
8-073- F:Jobs/PGS 101~300 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
010
8-073- F:Jobs/PGS 301~500 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
011
8-073- F:Jobs/PGS 501~700 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
012
8-073- F:Jobs/PGS 701~1000 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
013
8-073- F:Jobs/PGS 1001~ Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
014
8-074- P:Jobs/PGS 1 Page CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-074- P:Jobs/PGS 2 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-074- P:Jobs/PGS 3 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-232 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step]

CTL
003
8-074- P:Jobs/PGS 4 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004
8-074- P:Jobs/PGS 5 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
005
8-074- P:Jobs/PGS 6~10 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
006
8-074- P:Jobs/PGS 11~20 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
007
8-074- P:Jobs/PGS 21~50 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
008
8-074- P:Jobs/PGS 51~100 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
009
8-074- P:Jobs/PGS 101~300 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
010
8-074- P:Jobs/PGS 301~500 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
011
8-074- P:Jobs/PGS 501~700 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
012
8-074- P:Jobs/PGS 701~1000 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
013
8-074- P:Jobs/PGS 1001~ Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
014
8-075- S:Jobs/PGS 1 Page CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-075- S:Jobs/PGS 2 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-075- S:Jobs/PGS 3 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-075- S:Jobs/PGS 4 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004
8-075- S:Jobs/PGS 5 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
005
8-075- S:Jobs/PGS 6~10 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
006
8-075- S:Jobs/PGS 11~20 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-233 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step]

CTL
007
8-075- S:Jobs/PGS 21~50 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
008
8-075- S:Jobs/PGS 51~100 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
009
8-075- S:Jobs/PGS 101~300 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
010
8-075- S:Jobs/PGS 301~500 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
011
8-075- S:Jobs/PGS 501~700 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
012
8-075- S:Jobs/PGS 701~1000 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
013
8-075- S:Jobs/PGS 1001~ Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
014
8-076- L:Jobs/PGS 1 Page CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-076- L:Jobs/PGS 2 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-076- L:Jobs/PGS 3 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-076- L:Jobs/PGS 4 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004
8-076- L:Jobs/PGS 5 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
005
8-076- L:Jobs/PGS 6~10 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
006
8-076- L:Jobs/PGS 11~20 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
007
8-076- L:Jobs/PGS 21~50 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
008
8-076- L:Jobs/PGS 51~100 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
009
8-076- L:Jobs/PGS 101~300 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
010
8-076- L:Jobs/PGS 301~500 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-234 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step]

CTL
011
8-076- L:Jobs/PGS 501~700 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
012
8-076- L:Jobs/PGS 701~1000 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
013
8-076- L:Jobs/PGS 1001~ Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
014
8-077- O:Jobs/PGS 1 Page CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-077- O:Jobs/PGS 2 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-077- O:Jobs/PGS 3 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-077- O:Jobs/PGS 4 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004
8-077- O:Jobs/PGS 5 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
005
8-077- O:Jobs/PGS 6~10 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
006
8-077- O:Jobs/PGS 11~20 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
007
8-077- O:Jobs/PGS 21~50 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
008
8-077- O:Jobs/PGS 51~100 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
009
8-077- O:Jobs/PGS 101~300 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
010
8-077- O:Jobs/PGS 301~500 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
011
8-077- O:Jobs/PGS 501~700 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
012
8-077- O:Jobs/PGS 701~1000 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
013
8-077- O:Jobs/PGS 1001~ Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
014
8-081- T:Smart Device Smart Device CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-235 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step]

CTL
001
8-082- C:Smart Device Smart Device CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-083- F:Smart Device Smart Device CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-084- P:Smart Device Smart Device CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-085- S:Smart Device Smart Device CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-111- T:FAX TX Jobs B/W(Tel) CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-111- T:FAX TX Jobs B/W(Cloud) CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
101
8-113- F:FAX TX Jobs B/W(Tel) CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-113- F:FAX TX Jobs B/W(Cloud) CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
101
8-121- T:IFAX TX Jobs B/W CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-123- F:IFAX TX Jobs B/W CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-131- T:S-to-Email Jobs B/W CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-131- T:S-to-Email Jobs Color CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-131- T:S-to-Email Jobs ACS CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-135- S:S-to-Email Jobs B/W CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-135- S:S-to-Email Jobs Color CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-135- S:S-to-Email Jobs ACS CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-141- T:Deliv Jobs/Svr B/W CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-141- T:Deliv Jobs/Svr Color CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-236 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step]

CTL
002
8-141- T:Deliv Jobs/Svr ACS CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-145- S:Deliv Jobs/Svr B/W CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-145- S:Deliv Jobs/Svr Color CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-145- S:Deliv Jobs/Svr ACS CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-151- T:Deliv Jobs/PC B/W CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-151- T:Deliv Jobs/PC Color CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-151- T:Deliv Jobs/PC ACS CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-155- S:Deliv Jobs/PC B/W CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-155- S:Deliv Jobs/PC Color CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-155- S:Deliv Jobs/PC ACS CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-161- T:PCFAX TX Jobs CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-163- F:PCFAX TX Jobs CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-171- T:Deliv B/W CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001 Jobs/WSD/DSM
8-171- T:Deliv Color CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002 Jobs/WSD/DSM
8-171- T:Deliv ACS CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003 Jobs/WSD/DSM
8-175- S:Deliv B/W CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001 Jobs/WSD/DSM
8-175- S:Deliv Color CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002 Jobs/WSD/DSM
8-175- S:Deliv ACS CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-237 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step]

CTL
003 Jobs/WSD/DSM
8-181- T:Scan to Media Jobs B/W CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-181- T:Scan to Media Jobs Color CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-181- T:Scan to Media Jobs ACS CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-185- S:Scan to Media Jobs B/W CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-185- S:Scan to Media Jobs Color CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-185- S:Scan to Media Jobs ACS CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-191- T:Total Scan PGS CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-192- C:Total Scan PGS CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-193- F:Total Scan PGS CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-195- S:Total Scan PGS CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-196- L:Total Scan PGS CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-201- T:LSize Scan PGS A3/DLT, Larger CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-203- F:LSize Scan PGS A3/DLT, Larger CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-205- S:LSize Scan PGS A3/DLT, Larger CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-211- T:Scan PGS/LS CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-212- C:Scan PGS/LS CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-213- F:Scan PGS/LS CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-215- S:Scan PGS/LS CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-238 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step]

CTL
001
8-216- L:Scan PGS/LS CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-221- ADF Org Feeds Front CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-221- ADF Org Feeds Back CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-231- Scan PGS/Mode Large Volume CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-231- Scan PGS/Mode SADF CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-231- Scan PGS/Mode Mixed Size CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-231- Scan PGS/Mode Custom Size CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004
8-231- Scan PGS/Mode Platen CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
005
8-231- Scan PGS/Mode Mixed 1side/2side CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
006
8-241- T:Scan PGS/Org Text CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-241- T:Scan PGS/Org Text/Photo CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-241- T:Scan PGS/Org Photo CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-241- T:Scan PGS/Org GenCopy, Pale CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004
8-241- T:Scan PGS/Org Map CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
005
8-241- T:Scan PGS/Org Normal/Detail CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
006
8-241- T:Scan PGS/Org Fine/Super Fine CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
007
8-241- T:Scan PGS/Org Binary CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
008
8-241- T:Scan PGS/Org Grayscale CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-239 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step]

CTL
009
8-241- T:Scan PGS/Org Color CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
010
8-241- T:Scan PGS/Org Other CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
011
8-242- C:Scan PGS/Org Text CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-242- C:Scan PGS/Org Text/Photo CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-242- C:Scan PGS/Org Photo CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-242- C:Scan PGS/Org GenCopy, Pale CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004
8-242- C:Scan PGS/Org Map CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
005
8-242- C:Scan PGS/Org Other CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
011
8-243- F:Scan PGS/Org Text CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-243- F:Scan PGS/Org Text/Photo CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-243- F:Scan PGS/Org Photo CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-243- F:Scan PGS/Org Normal/Detail CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
006
8-243- F:Scan PGS/Org Fine/Super Fine CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
007
8-243- F:Scan PGS/Org Other CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
011
8-245- S:Scan PGS/Org Text CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-245- S:Scan PGS/Org Text/Photo CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-245- S:Scan PGS/Org Photo CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-245- S:Scan PGS/Org GenCopy, Pale CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-240 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step]

CTL
004
8-245- S:Scan PGS/Org Binary CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
008
8-245- S:Scan PGS/Org Grayscale CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
009
8-245- S:Scan PGS/Org Color CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
010
8-245- S:Scan PGS/Org Other CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
011
8-246- L:Scan PGS/Org Text CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-246- L:Scan PGS/Org Text/Photo CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-246- L:Scan PGS/Org Photo CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-246- L:Scan PGS/Org GenCopy, Pale CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004
8-246- L:Scan PGS/Org Map CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
005
8-246- L:Scan PGS/Org Other CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
011
8-251- T:Scan PGS/ImgEdt CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-252- C:Scan PGS/ImgEdt CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-255- S:Scan PGS/ImgEdt CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-256- L:Scan PGS/ImgEdt CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-257- O:Scan PGS/ImgEdt CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-281- T:Scan PGS/TWAIN CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-285- S:Scan PGS/TWAIN CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-291- T:Scan PGS/Stamp CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-241 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step]

CTL
001
8-293- F:Scan PGS/Stamp CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-295- S:Scan PGS/Stamp CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-301- T:Scan PGS/Size A3 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-301- T:Scan PGS/Size A4 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-301- T:Scan PGS/Size A5 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-301- T:Scan PGS/Size B4 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004
8-301- T:Scan PGS/Size B5 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
005
8-301- T:Scan PGS/Size DLT CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
006
8-301- T:Scan PGS/Size LG CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
007
8-301- T:Scan PGS/Size LT CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
008
8-301- T:Scan PGS/Size HLT CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
009
8-301- T:Scan PGS/Size Full Bleed CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
010
8-301- T:Scan PGS/Size Other (Standard) CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
254
8-301- T:Scan PGS/Size Other (Custom) CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
255
8-302- C:Scan PGS/Size A3 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-302- C:Scan PGS/Size A4 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-302- C:Scan PGS/Size A5 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-302- C:Scan PGS/Size B4 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-242 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step]

CTL
004
8-302- C:Scan PGS/Size B5 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
005
8-302- C:Scan PGS/Size DLT CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
006
8-302- C:Scan PGS/Size LG CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
007
8-302- C:Scan PGS/Size LT CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
008
8-302- C:Scan PGS/Size HLT CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
009
8-302- C:Scan PGS/Size Full Bleed CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
010
8-302- C:Scan PGS/Size Other (Standard) CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
254
8-302- C:Scan PGS/Size Other (Custom) CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
255
8-303- F:Scan PGS/Size A3 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-303- F:Scan PGS/Size A4 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-303- F:Scan PGS/Size A5 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-303- F:Scan PGS/Size B4 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004
8-303- F:Scan PGS/Size B5 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
005
8-303- F:Scan PGS/Size DLT CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
006
8-303- F:Scan PGS/Size LG CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
007
8-303- F:Scan PGS/Size LT CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
008
8-303- F:Scan PGS/Size HLT CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
009
8-303- F:Scan PGS/Size Full Bleed CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-243 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step]

CTL
010
8-303- F:Scan PGS/Size Other (Standard) CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
254
8-303- F:Scan PGS/Size Other (Custom) CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
255
8-305- S:Scan PGS/Size A3 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-305- S:Scan PGS/Size A4 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-305- S:Scan PGS/Size A5 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-305- S:Scan PGS/Size B4 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004
8-305- S:Scan PGS/Size B5 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
005
8-305- S:Scan PGS/Size DLT CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
006
8-305- S:Scan PGS/Size LG CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
007
8-305- S:Scan PGS/Size LT CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
008
8-305- S:Scan PGS/Size HLT CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
009
8-305- S:Scan PGS/Size Full Bleed CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
010
8-305- S:Scan PGS/Size Other (Standard) CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
254
8-305- S:Scan PGS/Size Other (Custom) CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
255
8-306- L:Scan PGS/Size A3 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-306- L:Scan PGS/Size A4 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-306- L:Scan PGS/Size A5 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-306- L:Scan PGS/Size B4 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-244 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step]

CTL
004
8-306- L:Scan PGS/Size B5 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
005
8-306- L:Scan PGS/Size DLT CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
006
8-306- L:Scan PGS/Size LG CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
007
8-306- L:Scan PGS/Size LT CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
008
8-306- L:Scan PGS/Size HLT CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
009
8-306- L:Scan PGS/Size Full Bleed CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
010
8-306- L:Scan PGS/Size Other (Standard) CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
254
8-306- L:Scan PGS/Size Other (Custom) CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
255
8-311- T:Scan PGS/Rez 1200dpi ~ CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-311- T:Scan PGS/Rez 600dpi~1199dpi CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-311- T:Scan PGS/Rez 400dpi~599dpi CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-311- T:Scan PGS/Rez 200dpi~399dpi CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004
8-311- T:Scan PGS/Rez ~199dpi CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
005
8-315- S:Scan PGS/Rez 1200dpi ~ CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-315- S:Scan PGS/Rez 600dpi~1199dpi CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-315- S:Scan PGS/Rez 400dpi~599dpi CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-315- S:Scan PGS/Rez 200dpi~399dpi CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004
8-315- S:Scan PGS/Rez ~199dpi CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-245 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step]

CTL
005
8-321- T:Sacn Poster 2 Sheet CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-321- T:Sacn Poster 4 Sheet CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-321- T:Sacn Poster 9 Sheet CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-322- C:Sacn Poster 2 Sheet CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-322- C:Sacn Poster 4 Sheet CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-322- C:Sacn Poster 9 Sheet CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-326- L:Sacn Poster 2 Sheet CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-326- L:Sacn Poster 4 Sheet CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-326- L:Sacn Poster 9 Sheet CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-381- T:Total PrtPGS Field Number CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-382- C:Total PrtPGS Field Number CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-383- F:Total PrtPGS Field Number CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-384- P:Total PrtPGS Field Number CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-385- S:Total PrtPGS Field Number CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-386- L:Total PrtPGS Field Number CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-387- O:Total PrtPGS Field Number CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-391- LSize PrtPGS A3/DLT, Larger CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-401- T:PrtPGS/LS CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-246 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step]

CTL
001
8-402- C:PrtPGS/LS CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-403- F:PrtPGS/LS CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-404- P:PrtPGS/LS CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-405- S:PrtPGS/LS CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-406- L:PrtPGS/LS CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-411- Prints/Duplex CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-421- T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Simplex> Duplex CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-421- T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Duplex> Duplex CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-421- T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Book> Duplex CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-421- T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Simplex Combine CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004
8-421- T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Duplex Combine CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
005
8-421- T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
006
8-421- T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 4in1 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
007
8-421- T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 6in1 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
008
8-421- T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 8in1 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
009
8-421- T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 9in1 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
010
8-421- T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 16in1 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
011
8-421- T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Booklet CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-247 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step]

CTL
012
8-421- T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Magazine CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
013
8-421- T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1 + Booklet CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
014
8-421- T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 4in1 + Booklet CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
015
8-421- T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 6in1 + Booklet CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
016
8-421- T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 8in1 + Booklet CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
017
8-421- T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 9in1 + Booklet CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
018
8-421- T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1 + Magazine CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
019
8-421- T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 4in1 + Magazine CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
020
8-421- T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 6in1 + Magazine CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
021
8-421- T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 8in1 + Magazine CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
022
8-421- T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 9in1 + Magazine CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
023
8-421- T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 16in1 + Magazine CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
024
8-422- C:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Simplex> Duplex CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-422- C:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Duplex> Duplex CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-422- C:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Book> Duplex CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-422- C:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Simplex Combine CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004
8-422- C:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Duplex Combine CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
005
8-422- C:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-248 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step]

CTL
006
8-422- C:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 4in1 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
007
8-422- C:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 8in1 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
009
8-422- C:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Booklet CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
012
8-422- C:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Magazine CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
013
8-422- C:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1 + Booklet CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
014
8-422- C:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 4in1 + Booklet CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
015
8-422- C:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 8in1 + Booklet CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
017
8-422- C:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1 + Magazine CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
019
8-422- C:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 4in1 + Magazine CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
020
8-422- C:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 8in1 + Magazine CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
022
8-423- F:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Simplex> Duplex CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-423- F:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Simplex Combine CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004
8-423- F:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Duplex Combine CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
005
8-423- F:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
006
8-423- F:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 4in1 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
007
8-423- F:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 8in1 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
009
8-423- F:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 16in1 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
011
8-423- F:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Booklet CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-249 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step]

CTL
012
8-423- F:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Magazine CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
013
8-423- F:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1 + Booklet CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
014
8-423- F:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 4in1 + Booklet CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
015
8-423- F:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 8in1 + Booklet CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
017
8-423- F:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1 + Magazine CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
019
8-423- F:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 4in1 + Magazine CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
020
8-423- F:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 8in1 + Magazine CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
022
8-423- F:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 16in1 + Magazine CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
024
8-424- P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Simplex> Duplex CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-424- P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Simplex Combine CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004
8-424- P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Duplex Combine CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
005
8-424- P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
006
8-424- P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 4in1 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
007
8-424- P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 6in1 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
008
8-424- P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 8in1 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
009
8-424- P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 9in1 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
010
8-424- P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 16in1 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
011
8-424- P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Booklet CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-250 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step]

CTL
012
8-424- P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Magazine CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
013
8-424- P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1 + Booklet CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
014
8-424- P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 4in1 + Booklet CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
015
8-424- P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 6in1 + Booklet CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
016
8-424- P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 8in1 + Booklet CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
017
8-424- P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 9in1 + Booklet CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
018
8-424- P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1 + Magazine CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
019
8-424- P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 4in1 + Magazine CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
020
8-424- P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 6in1 + Magazine CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
021
8-424- P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 8in1 + Magazine CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
022
8-424- P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 9in1 + Magazine CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
023
8-424- P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 16in1 + Magazine CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
024
8-425- S:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Simplex> Duplex CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-425- S:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Simplex Combine CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004
8-425- S:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Duplex Combine CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
005
8-425- S:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
006
8-425- S:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 4in1 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
007
8-425- S:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 8in1 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-251 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step]

CTL
009
8-425- S:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 9in1 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
010
8-425- S:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 16in1 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
011
8-425- S:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Booklet CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
012
8-425- S:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Magazine CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
013
8-425- S:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1 + Booklet CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
014
8-425- S:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 4in1 + Booklet CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
015
8-425- S:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 8in1 + Booklet CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
017
8-425- S:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 9in1 + Booklet CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
018
8-425- S:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1 + Magazine CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
019
8-425- S:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 4in1 + Magazine CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
020
8-425- S:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 8in1 + Magazine CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
022
8-425- S:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 9in1 + Magazine CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
023
8-425- S:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 16in1 + Magazine CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
024
8-426- L:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Simplex> Duplex CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-426- L:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Simplex Combine CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004
8-426- L:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Duplex Combine CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
005
8-426- L:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
006
8-426- L:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 4in1 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-252 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step]

CTL
007
8-426- L:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 8in1 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
009
8-426- L:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 16in1 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
011
8-426- L:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Booklet CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
012
8-426- L:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Magazine CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
013
8-426- L:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1 + Booklet CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
014
8-426- L:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 4in1 + Booklet CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
015
8-426- L:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 8in1 + Booklet CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
017
8-426- L:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1 + Magazine CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
019
8-426- L:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 4in1 + Magazine CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
020
8-426- L:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 8in1 + Magazine CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
022
8-426- L:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 16in1 + Magazine CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
024
8-427- O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Simplex> Duplex CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-427- O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Duplex> Duplex CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-427- O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Book> Duplex CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-427- O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Simplex Combine CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004
8-427- O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Duplex Combine CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
005
8-427- O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
006
8-427- O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 4in1 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-253 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step]

CTL
007
8-427- O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 6in1 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
008
8-427- O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 8in1 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
009
8-427- O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 9in1 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
010
8-427- O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 16in1 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
011
8-427- O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Booklet CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
012
8-427- O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Magazine CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
013
8-427- O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1 + Booklet CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
014
8-427- O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 4in1 + Booklet CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
015
8-427- O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 6in1 + Booklet CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
016
8-427- O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 8in1 + Booklet CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
017
8-427- O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 9in1 + Booklet CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
018
8-427- O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1 + Magazine CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
019
8-427- O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 4in1 + Magazine CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
020
8-427- O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 6in1 + Magazine CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
021
8-427- O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 8in1 + Magazine CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
022
8-427- O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 9in1 + Magazine CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
023
8-427- O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 16in1 + Magazine CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
024
8-431- T:PrtPGS/ImgEdt Cover/Slip Sheet CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-254 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step]

CTL
001
8-431- T:PrtPGS/ImgEdt Series/Book CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-431- T:PrtPGS/ImgEdt User Stamp CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-432- C:PrtPGS/ImgEdt Cover/Slip Sheet CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-432- C:PrtPGS/ImgEdt Series/Book CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-432- C:PrtPGS/ImgEdt User Stamp CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-434- P:PrtPGS/ImgEdt Cover/Slip Sheet CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-434- P:PrtPGS/ImgEdt Series/Book CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-434- P:PrtPGS/ImgEdt User Stamp CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-436- L:PrtPGS/ImgEdt Cover/Slip Sheet CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-436- L:PrtPGS/ImgEdt Series/Book CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-436- L:PrtPGS/ImgEdt User Stamp CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-437- O:PrtPGS/ImgEdt Cover/Slip Sheet CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-437- O:PrtPGS/ImgEdt Series/Book CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-437- O:PrtPGS/ImgEdt User Stamp CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-441- T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size A3 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-441- T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size A4 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-441- T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size A5 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-441- T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size B4 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-255 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step]

CTL
004
8-441- T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size B5 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
005
8-441- T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size DLT CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
006
8-441- T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size LG CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
007
8-441- T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size LT CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
008
8-441- T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size HLT CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
009
8-441- T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Full Bleed CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
010
8-441- T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Other (Standard) CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
254
8-441- T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Other (Custom) CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
255
8-442- C:PrtPGS/Ppr Size A3 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-442- C:PrtPGS/Ppr Size A4 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-442- C:PrtPGS/Ppr Size A5 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-442- C:PrtPGS/Ppr Size B4 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004
8-442- C:PrtPGS/Ppr Size B5 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
005
8-442- C:PrtPGS/Ppr Size DLT CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
006
8-442- C:PrtPGS/Ppr Size LG CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
007
8-442- C:PrtPGS/Ppr Size LT CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
008
8-442- C:PrtPGS/Ppr Size HLT CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
009
8-442- C:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Full Bleed CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-256 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step]

CTL
010
8-442- C:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Other (Standard) CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
254
8-442- C:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Other (Custom) CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
255
8-443- F:PrtPGS/Ppr Size A3 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-443- F:PrtPGS/Ppr Size A4 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-443- F:PrtPGS/Ppr Size A5 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-443- F:PrtPGS/Ppr Size B4 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004
8-443- F:PrtPGS/Ppr Size B5 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
005
8-443- F:PrtPGS/Ppr Size DLT CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
006
8-443- F:PrtPGS/Ppr Size LG CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
007
8-443- F:PrtPGS/Ppr Size LT CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
008
8-443- F:PrtPGS/Ppr Size HLT CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
009
8-443- F:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Full Bleed CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
010
8-443- F:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Other (Standard) CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
254
8-443- F:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Other (Custom) CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
255
8-444- P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size A3 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-444- P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size A4 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-444- P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size A5 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-444- P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size B4 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-257 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step]

CTL
004
8-444- P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size B5 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
005
8-444- P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size DLT CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
006
8-444- P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size LG CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
007
8-444- P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size LT CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
008
8-444- P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size HLT CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
009
8-444- P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Full Bleed CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
010
8-444- P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Other (Standard) CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
254
8-444- P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Other (Custom) CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
255
8-445- S:PrtPGS/Ppr Size A3 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-445- S:PrtPGS/Ppr Size A4 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-445- S:PrtPGS/Ppr Size A5 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-445- S:PrtPGS/Ppr Size B4 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004
8-445- S:PrtPGS/Ppr Size B5 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
005
8-445- S:PrtPGS/Ppr Size DLT CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
006
8-445- S:PrtPGS/Ppr Size LG CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
007
8-445- S:PrtPGS/Ppr Size LT CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
008
8-445- S:PrtPGS/Ppr Size HLT CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
009
8-445- S:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Full Bleed CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-258 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step]

CTL
010
8-445- S:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Other (Standard) CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
254
8-445- S:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Other (Custom) CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
255
8-446- L:PrtPGS/Ppr Size A3 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-446- L:PrtPGS/Ppr Size A4 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-446- L:PrtPGS/Ppr Size A5 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-446- L:PrtPGS/Ppr Size B4 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004
8-446- L:PrtPGS/Ppr Size B5 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
005
8-446- L:PrtPGS/Ppr Size DLT CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
006
8-446- L:PrtPGS/Ppr Size LG CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
007
8-446- L:PrtPGS/Ppr Size LT CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
008
8-446- L:PrtPGS/Ppr Size HLT CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
009
8-446- L:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Full Bleed CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
010
8-446- L:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Other (Standard) CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
254
8-446- L:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Other (Custom) CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
255
8-447- O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size A3 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-447- O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size A4 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-447- O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size A5 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-447- O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size B4 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-259 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step]

CTL
004
8-447- O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size B5 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
005
8-447- O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size DLT CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
006
8-447- O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size LG CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
007
8-447- O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size LT CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
008
8-447- O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size HLT CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
009
8-447- O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Full Bleed CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
010
8-447- O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Other (Standard) CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
254
8-447- O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Other (Custom) CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
255
8-451- PrtPGS/Ppr Tray Bypass Tray CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-451- PrtPGS/Ppr Tray Tray 1 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-451- PrtPGS/Ppr Tray Tray 2 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-451- PrtPGS/Ppr Tray Tray 3 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004
8-451- PrtPGS/Ppr Tray Tray 4 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
005
8-451- PrtPGS/Ppr Tray Tray 5 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
006
8-451- PrtPGS/Ppr Tray Tray 6 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
007
8-451- PrtPGS/Ppr Tray Tray 7 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
008
8-451- PrtPGS/Ppr Tray Tray 8 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
009
8-451- PrtPGS/Ppr Tray Tray 9 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-260 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step]

CTL
010
8-451- PrtPGS/Ppr Tray Tray 10 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
011
8-451- PrtPGS/Ppr Tray Tray 11 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
012
8-451- PrtPGS/Ppr Tray Tray 12 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
013
8-451- PrtPGS/Ppr Tray Tray 13 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
014
8-451- PrtPGS/Ppr Tray Tray 14 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
015
8-451- PrtPGS/Ppr Tray Tray 15 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
016
8-451- PrtPGS/Ppr Tray LC Inserter CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
101
8-451- PrtPGS/Ppr Tray 3rd Vendor CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
102
8-461- T:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Normal CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-461- T:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Recycled CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-461- T:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Special CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-461- T:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Thick CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004
8-461- T:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Normal (Back) CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
005
8-461- T:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Thick (Back) CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
006
8-461- T:PrtPGS/Ppr Type OHP CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
007
8-461- T:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Other CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
008
8-462- C:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Normal CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-462- C:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Recycled CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-261 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step]

CTL
002
8-462- C:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Special CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-462- C:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Thick CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004
8-462- C:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Normal (Back) CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
005
8-462- C:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Thick (Back) CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
006
8-462- C:PrtPGS/Ppr Type OHP CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
007
8-462- C:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Other CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
008
8-463- F:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Normal CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-463- F:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Recycled CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-463- F:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Special CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-463- F:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Thick CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004
8-463- F:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Normal (Back) CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
005
8-463- F:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Thick (Back) CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
006
8-463- F:PrtPGS/Ppr Type OHP CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
007
8-463- F:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Other CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
008
8-464- P:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Normal CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-464- P:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Recycled CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-464- P:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Special CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-464- P:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Thick CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-262 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step]

CTL
004
8-464- P:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Normal (Back) CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
005
8-464- P:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Thick (Back) CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
006
8-464- P:PrtPGS/Ppr Type OHP CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
007
8-464- P:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Other CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
008
8-466- L:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Normal CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-466- L:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Recycled CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-466- L:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Special CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-466- L:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Thick CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004
8-466- L:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Normal (Back) CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
005
8-466- L:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Thick (Back) CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
006
8-466- L:PrtPGS/Ppr Type OHP CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
007
8-466- L:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Other CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
008
8-471- PrtPGS/Mag ~49% CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-471- PrtPGS/Mag 50%~99% CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-471- PrtPGS/Mag 100% CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-471- PrtPGS/Mag 101%~200% CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004
8-471- PrtPGS/Mag 201% ~ CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
005
8-481- T:PrtPGS/TonSave CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-263 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step]

CTL
001
8-484- P:PrtPGS/TonSave CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-511- T:PrtPGS/Emul RPCS CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-511- T:PrtPGS/Emul RPDL CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-511- T:PrtPGS/Emul PS3 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-511- T:PrtPGS/Emul R98 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004
8-511- T:PrtPGS/Emul R16 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
005
8-511- T:PrtPGS/Emul GL/GL2 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
006
8-511- T:PrtPGS/Emul R55 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
007
8-511- T:PrtPGS/Emul RTIFF CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
008
8-511- T:PrtPGS/Emul PDF CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
009
8-511- T:PrtPGS/Emul PCL5e/5c CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
010
8-511- T:PrtPGS/Emul PCL XL CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
011
8-511- T:PrtPGS/Emul IPDL-C CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
012
8-511- T:PrtPGS/Emul BM-Links CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
013
8-511- T:PrtPGS/Emul Other CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
014
8-511- T:PrtPGS/Emul IPDS CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
015
8-511- T:PrtPGS/Emul XPS CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
016
8-514- P:PrtPGS/Emul RPCS CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-264 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step]

CTL
001
8-514- P:PrtPGS/Emul RPDL CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-514- P:PrtPGS/Emul PS3 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-514- P:PrtPGS/Emul R98 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004
8-514- P:PrtPGS/Emul R16 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
005
8-514- P:PrtPGS/Emul GL/GL2 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
006
8-514- P:PrtPGS/Emul R55 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
007
8-514- P:PrtPGS/Emul RTIFF CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
008
8-514- P:PrtPGS/Emul PDF CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
009
8-514- P:PrtPGS/Emul PCL5e/5c CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
010
8-514- P:PrtPGS/Emul PCL XL CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
011
8-514- P:PrtPGS/Emul IPDL-C CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
012
8-514- P:PrtPGS/Emul BM-Links CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
013
8-514- P:PrtPGS/Emul Other CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
014
8-514- P:PrtPGS/Emul IPDS CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
015
8-514- P:PrtPGS/Emul XPS CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
016
8-521- T:PrtPGS/FIN Sort CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-521- T:PrtPGS/FIN Stack CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-521- T:PrtPGS/FIN Staple CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-265 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step]

CTL
003
8-521- T:PrtPGS/FIN Booklet CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004
8-521- T:PrtPGS/FIN Z-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
005
8-521- T:PrtPGS/FIN Punch CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
006
8-521- T:PrtPGS/FIN Other CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
007
8-521- T:PrtPGS/FIN Inside-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
008
8-521- T:PrtPGS/FIN Three-IN-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
009
8-521- T:PrtPGS/FIN Three-OUT-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
010
8-521- T:PrtPGS/FIN Four-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
011
8-521- T:PrtPGS/FIN KANNON-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
012
8-521- T:PrtPGS/FIN Perfect-Bind CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
013
8-521- T:PrtPGS/FIN Ring-Bind CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
014
8-521- T:PrtPGS/FIN 3rd Vendor CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
015
8-521- T:PrtPGS/FIN TwinLoop-Bind CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
016
8-522- C:PrtPGS/FIN Sort CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-522- C:PrtPGS/FIN Stack CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-522- C:PrtPGS/FIN Staple CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-522- C:PrtPGS/FIN Booklet CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004
8-522- C:PrtPGS/FIN Z-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-266 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step]

CTL
005
8-522- C:PrtPGS/FIN Punch CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
006
8-522- C:PrtPGS/FIN Other CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
007
8-522- C:PrtPGS/FIN Inside-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
008
8-522- C:PrtPGS/FIN Three-IN-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
009
8-522- C:PrtPGS/FIN Three-OUT-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
010
8-522- C:PrtPGS/FIN Four-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
011
8-522- C:PrtPGS/FIN KANNON-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
012
8-522- C:PrtPGS/FIN Perfect-Bind CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
013
8-522- C:PrtPGS/FIN Ring-Bind CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
014
8-522- C:PrtPGS/FIN 3rd Vendor CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
015
8-522- C:PrtPGS/FIN TwinLoop-Bind CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
016
8-523- F:PrtPGS/FIN Sort CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-523- F:PrtPGS/FIN Stack CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-523- F:PrtPGS/FIN Staple CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-523- F:PrtPGS/FIN Booklet CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004
8-523- F:PrtPGS/FIN Z-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
005
8-523- F:PrtPGS/FIN Punch CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
006
8-523- F:PrtPGS/FIN Other CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-267 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step]

CTL
007
8-523- F:PrtPGS/FIN Inside-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
008
8-523- F:PrtPGS/FIN Three-IN-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
009
8-523- F:PrtPGS/FIN Three-OUT-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
010
8-523- F:PrtPGS/FIN Four-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
011
8-523- F:PrtPGS/FIN KANNON-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
012
8-523- F:PrtPGS/FIN Perfect-Bind CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
013
8-523- F:PrtPGS/FIN Ring-Bind CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
014
8-523- F:PrtPGS/FIN 3rd Vendor CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
015
8-523- F:PrtPGS/FIN TwinLoop-Bind CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
016
8-524- P:PrtPGS/FIN Sort CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-524- P:PrtPGS/FIN Stack CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-524- P:PrtPGS/FIN Staple CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-524- P:PrtPGS/FIN Booklet CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004
8-524- P:PrtPGS/FIN Z-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
005
8-524- P:PrtPGS/FIN Punch CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
006
8-524- P:PrtPGS/FIN Other CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
007
8-524- P:PrtPGS/FIN Inside-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
008
8-524- P:PrtPGS/FIN Three-IN-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-268 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step]

CTL
009
8-524- P:PrtPGS/FIN Three-OUT-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
010
8-524- P:PrtPGS/FIN Four-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
011
8-524- P:PrtPGS/FIN KANNON-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
012
8-524- P:PrtPGS/FIN Perfect-Bind CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
013
8-524- P:PrtPGS/FIN Ring-Bind CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
014
8-524- P:PrtPGS/FIN 3rd Vendor CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
015
8-524- P:PrtPGS/FIN TwinLoop-Bind CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
016
8-525- S:PrtPGS/FIN Sort CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-525- S:PrtPGS/FIN Stack CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-525- S:PrtPGS/FIN Staple CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-525- S:PrtPGS/FIN Booklet CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004
8-525- S:PrtPGS/FIN Z-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
005
8-525- S:PrtPGS/FIN Punch CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
006
8-525- S:PrtPGS/FIN Other CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
007
8-525- S:PrtPGS/FIN Inside-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
008
8-525- S:PrtPGS/FIN Three-IN-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
009
8-525- S:PrtPGS/FIN Three-OUT-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
010
8-525- S:PrtPGS/FIN Four-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-269 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step]

CTL
011
8-525- S:PrtPGS/FIN KANNON-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
012
8-525- S:PrtPGS/FIN Perfect-Bind CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
013
8-525- S:PrtPGS/FIN Ring-Bind CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
014
8-525- S:PrtPGS/FIN 3rd Vendor CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
015
8-525- S:PrtPGS/FIN TwinLoop-Bind CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
016
8-526- L:PrtPGS/FIN Sort CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-526- L:PrtPGS/FIN Stack CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-526- L:PrtPGS/FIN Staple CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-526- L:PrtPGS/FIN Booklet CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004
8-526- L:PrtPGS/FIN Z-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
005
8-526- L:PrtPGS/FIN Punch CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
006
8-526- L:PrtPGS/FIN Other CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
007
8-526- L:PrtPGS/FIN Inside-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
008
8-526- L:PrtPGS/FIN Three-IN-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
009
8-526- L:PrtPGS/FIN Three-OUT-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
010
8-526- L:PrtPGS/FIN Four-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
011
8-526- L:PrtPGS/FIN KANNON-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
012
8-526- L:PrtPGS/FIN Perfect-Bind CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-270 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step]

CTL
013
8-526- L:PrtPGS/FIN Ring-Bind CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
014
8-526- L:PrtPGS/FIN 3rd Vendor CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
015
8-526- L:PrtPGS/FIN TwinLoop-Bind CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
016
8-531- Staple Staples CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-531- Staple Stapless CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-551- T:PrtBooks/FIN Perfect-Bind CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-551- T:PrtBooks/FIN Ring-Bind CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-551- T:PrtBooks/FIN TwinLoop-Bind CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-552- C:PrtBooks/FIN Perfect-Bind CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-552- C:PrtBooks/FIN Ring-Bind CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-552- C:PrtBooks/FIN TwinLoop-Bind CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-554- P:PrtBooks/FIN Perfect-Bind CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-554- P:PrtBooks/FIN Ring-Bind CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-554- P:PrtBooks/FIN TwinLoop-Bind CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-556- L:PrtBooks/FIN Perfect-Bind CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-556- L:PrtBooks/FIN Ring-Bind CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-556- L:PrtBooks/FIN TwinLoop-Bind CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-561- T:A Sheet Of Paper Total: Over A3/DLT CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-271 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step]

CTL
001
8-561- T:A Sheet Of Paper Total: Under A3/DLT CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-561- T:A Sheet Of Paper Duplex: Over A3/DLT CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-561- T:A Sheet Of Paper Duplex: Under A3/DLT CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004
8-562- C:A Sheet Of Paper Total: Over A3/DLT CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-562- C:A Sheet Of Paper Total: Under A3/DLT CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-562- C:A Sheet Of Paper Duplex: Over A3/DLT CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-562- C:A Sheet Of Paper Duplex: Under A3/DLT CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004
8-563- F:A Sheet Of Paper Total: Over A3/DLT CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-563- F:A Sheet Of Paper Total: Under A3/DLT CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-563- F:A Sheet Of Paper Duplex: Over A3/DLT CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-563- F:A Sheet Of Paper Duplex: Under A3/DLT CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004
8-564- P:A Sheet Of Paper Total: Over A3/DLT CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-564- P:A Sheet Of Paper Total: Under A3/DLT CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-564- P:A Sheet Of Paper Duplex: Over A3/DLT CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-564- P:A Sheet Of Paper Duplex: Under A3/DLT CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004
8-566- L:A Sheet Of Paper Total: Over A3/DLT CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-566- L:A Sheet Of Paper Total: Under A3/DLT CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-566- L:A Sheet Of Paper Duplex: Over A3/DLT CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-272 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step]

CTL
003
8-566- L:A Sheet Of Paper Duplex: Under A3/DLT CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004
8-567- O:A Sheet Of Paper Total: Over A3/DLT CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-567- O:A Sheet Of Paper Total: Under A3/DLT CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-567- O:A Sheet Of Paper Duplex: Over A3/DLT CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-567- O:A Sheet Of Paper Duplex: Under A3/DLT CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004
8-581- T:Counter Total CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-581- T:Counter Total(A3) CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
032
8-591- O:Counter A3/DLT CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-591- O:Counter Duplex CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-601- T:Coverage Counter B/W CTL* [ 0 to 2147483647 / 0 /
001 1%]
8-601- T:Coverage Counter B/W Printing Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
011
8-602- C:Coverage Counter B/W CTL* [ 0 to 2147483647 / 0 /
001 1%]
8-603- F:Coverage Counter B/W CTL* [ 0 to 2147483647 / 0 /
001 1%]
8-604- P:Coverage Counter B/W CTL* [ 0 to 2147483647 / 0 /
001 1%]
8-606- L:Coverage Counter B/W CTL* [ 0 to 2147483647 / 0 /
001 1%]
8-617- SDK Apli Counter SDK-1 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-617- SDK Apli Counter SDK-2 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-617- SDK Apli Counter SDK-3 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-273 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step]

CTL
003
8-617- SDK Apli Counter SDK-4 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004
8-617- SDK Apli Counter SDK-5 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
005
8-617- SDK Apli Counter SDK-6 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
006
8-617- SDK Apli Counter SDK-7 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
007
8-617- SDK Apli Counter SDK-8 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
008
8-617- SDK Apli Counter SDK-9 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
009
8-617- SDK Apli Counter SDK-10 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
010
8-617- SDK Apli Counter SDK-11 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
011
8-617- SDK Apli Counter SDK-12 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
012
8-621- Func Use Counter Function-001 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-621- Func Use Counter Function-002 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-621- Func Use Counter Function-003 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-621- Func Use Counter Function-004 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004
8-621- Func Use Counter Function-005 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
005
8-621- Func Use Counter Function-006 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
006
8-621- Func Use Counter Function-007 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
007
8-621- Func Use Counter Function-008 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
008
8-621- Func Use Counter Function-009 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-274 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step]

CTL
009
8-621- Func Use Counter Function-010 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
010
8-621- Func Use Counter Function-011 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
011
8-621- Func Use Counter Function-012 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
012
8-621- Func Use Counter Function-013 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
013
8-621- Func Use Counter Function-014 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
014
8-621- Func Use Counter Function-015 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
015
8-621- Func Use Counter Function-016 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
016
8-621- Func Use Counter Function-017 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
017
8-621- Func Use Counter Function-018 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
018
8-621- Func Use Counter Function-019 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
019
8-621- Func Use Counter Function-020 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
020
8-621- Func Use Counter Function-021 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
021
8-621- Func Use Counter Function-022 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
022
8-621- Func Use Counter Function-023 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
023
8-621- Func Use Counter Function-024 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
024
8-621- Func Use Counter Function-025 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
025
8-621- Func Use Counter Function-026 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
026
8-621- Func Use Counter Function-027 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-275 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step]

CTL
027
8-621- Func Use Counter Function-028 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
028
8-621- Func Use Counter Function-029 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
029
8-621- Func Use Counter Function-030 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
030
8-621- Func Use Counter Function-031 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
031
8-621- Func Use Counter Function-032 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
032
8-621- Func Use Counter Function-033 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
033
8-621- Func Use Counter Function-034 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
034
8-621- Func Use Counter Function-035 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
035
8-621- Func Use Counter Function-036 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
036
8-621- Func Use Counter Function-037 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
037
8-621- Func Use Counter Function-038 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
038
8-621- Func Use Counter Function-039 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
039
8-621- Func Use Counter Function-040 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
040
8-621- Func Use Counter Function-041 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
041
8-621- Func Use Counter Function-042 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
042
8-621- Func Use Counter Function-043 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
043
8-621- Func Use Counter Function-044 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
044
8-621- Func Use Counter Function-045 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-276 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step]

CTL
045
8-621- Func Use Counter Function-046 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
046
8-621- Func Use Counter Function-047 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
047
8-621- Func Use Counter Function-048 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
048
8-621- Func Use Counter Function-049 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
049
8-621- Func Use Counter Function-050 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
050
8-621- Func Use Counter Function-051 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
051
8-621- Func Use Counter Function-052 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
052
8-621- Func Use Counter Function-053 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
053
8-621- Func Use Counter Function-054 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
054
8-621- Func Use Counter Function-055 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
055
8-621- Func Use Counter Function-056 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
056
8-621- Func Use Counter Function-057 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
057
8-621- Func Use Counter Function-058 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
058
8-621- Func Use Counter Function-059 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
059
8-621- Func Use Counter Function-060 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
060
8-621- Func Use Counter Function-061 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
061
8-621- Func Use Counter Function-062 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
062
8-621- Func Use Counter Function-063 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-277 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step]

CTL
063
8-621- Func Use Counter Function-064 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
064
8-631- T:FAX TX PGS B/W(Tel) CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-631- T:FAX TX PGS B/W(Cloud) CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
101
8-633- F:FAX TX PGS B/W(Tel) CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-633- F:FAX TX PGS B/W(Cloud) CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
101
8-641- T:IFAX TX PGS B/W CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-643- F:IFAX TX PGS B/W CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-651- T:S-to-Email PGS B/W CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-651- T:S-to-Email PGS Color CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-655- S:S-to-Email PGS B/W CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-655- S:S-to-Email PGS Color CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-661- T:Deliv PGS/Svr B/W CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-661- T:Deliv PGS/Svr Color CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-665- S:Deliv PGS/Svr B/W CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-665- S:Deliv PGS/Svr Color CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-671- T:Deliv PGS/PC B/W CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-671- T:Deliv PGS/PC Color CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-675- S:Deliv PGS/PC B/W CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-278 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step]

CTL
001
8-675- S:Deliv PGS/PC Color CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-681- T:PCFAX TXPGS CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-683- F:PCFAX TXPGS CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-691- T:TX PGS/LS CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-692- C:TX PGS/LS CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-693- F:TX PGS/LS CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-694- P:TX PGS/LS CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-695- S:TX PGS/LS CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-696- L:TX PGS/LS CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-701- TX PGS/Port PSTN-1 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-701- TX PGS/Port PSTN-2 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-701- TX PGS/Port PSTN-3 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-701- TX PGS/Port ISDN(G3,G4) CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004
8-701- TX PGS/Port Network CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
005
8-711- T:Scan PGS/Comp JPEG/JPEG2000 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-711- T:Scan PGS/Comp TIFF(Multi/Single) CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-711- T:Scan PGS/Comp PDF CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-711- T:Scan PGS/Comp Other CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-279 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step]

CTL
004
8-711- T:Scan PGS/Comp PDF/Comp CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
005
8-711- T:Scan PGS/Comp PDF/A CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
006
8-711- T:Scan PGS/Comp PDF(OCR) CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
007
8-711- T:Scan PGS/Comp PDF/Comp(OCR) CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
008
8-711- T:Scan PGS/Comp PDF/A(OCR) CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
009
8-715- S:Scan PGS/Comp JPEG/JPEG2000 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-715- S:Scan PGS/Comp TIFF(Multi/Single) CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-715- S:Scan PGS/Comp PDF CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-715- S:Scan PGS/Comp Other CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004
8-715- S:Scan PGS/Comp PDF/Comp CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
005
8-715- S:Scan PGS/Comp PDF/A CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
006
8-715- S:Scan PGS/Comp PDF(OCR) CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
007
8-715- S:Scan PGS/Comp PDF/Comp(OCR) CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
008
8-715- S:Scan PGS/Comp PDF/A(OCR) CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
009
8-721- T:Deliv B/W CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001 PGS/WSD/DSM
8-721- T:Deliv Color CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002 PGS/WSD/DSM
8-725- S:Deliv B/W CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001 PGS/WSD/DSM
8-725- S:Deliv Color CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-280 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step]

CTL
002 PGS/WSD/DSM
8-731- T:Scan PGS/Media B/W CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-731- T:Scan PGS/Media Color CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-735- S:Scan PGS/Media B/W CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-735- S:Scan PGS/Media Color CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-741- RX PGS/Port PSTN-1 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-741- RX PGS/Port PSTN-2 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-741- RX PGS/Port PSTN-3 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-741- RX PGS/Port ISDN(G3,G4) CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004
8-741- RX PGS/Port Network CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
005
8-771- Dev Counter Total CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-781- Toner_Botol_Info. BK CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-791- LS Memory Remain CTL* [ 0 to 100 / 0 / 1%]
001
8-801- Toner Remain K CTL* [ 0 to 100 / 0 / 1%]
001
8-811- Eco Counter Eco Total CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-811- Eco Counter Duplex CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004
8-811- Eco Counter Combine CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
005
8-811- Eco Counter Duplex(%) CTL* [ 0 to 100 / 0 / 1%]
008
8-811- Eco Counter Combine(%) CTL* [ 0 to 100 / 0 / 1%]

SM Appendices 3-281 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step]

CTL
009
8-811- Eco Counter Paper Cut(%) CTL* [ 0 to 100 / 0 / 1%]
010
8-811- Eco Counter Sync Eco Total CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
051
8-811- Eco Counter Sync Duplex CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
054
8-811- Eco Counter Sync Combine CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
055
8-811- Eco Counter Sync Duplex(%) CTL* [ 0 to 100 / 0 / 1%]
058
8-811- Eco Counter Sync Combine(%) CTL* [ 0 to 100 / 0 / 1%]
059
8-811- Eco Counter Sync Paper Cut(%) CTL* [ 0 to 100 / 0 / 1%]
060
8-811- Eco Counter Eco Totalr:Last CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
101
8-811- Eco Counter Duplex:Last CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
104
8-811- Eco Counter Combine:Last CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
105
8-811- Eco Counter Duplex(%):Last CTL* [ 0 to 100 / 0 / 1%]
108
8-811- Eco Counter Combine(%):Last CTL* [ 0 to 100 / 0 / 1%]
109
8-811- Eco Counter Paper Cut(%):Last CTL* [ 0 to 100 / 0 / 1%]
110
8-811- Eco Counter Sync Eco Totalr:Last CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
151
8-811- Eco Counter Sync Duplex:Last CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
154
8-811- Eco Counter Sync Combine:Last CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
155
8-811- Eco Counter Sync Duplex(%):Last CTL* [ 0 to 100 / 0 / 1%]
158
8-811- Eco Counter Sync Combine(%):Last CTL* [ 0 to 100 / 0 / 1%]

SM Appendices 3-282 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step]

CTL
159
8-811- Eco Counter Sync Paper Cut(%):Last CTL* [ 0 to 100 / 0 / 1%]
160
8-851- Cvr Cnt:0-10% 0~2%:BK CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
011
8-851- Cvr Cnt:0-10% 3~4%:BK CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
021
8-851- Cvr Cnt:0-10% 5~7%:BK CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
031
8-851- Cvr Cnt:0-10% 8~10%:BK CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
041
8-861- Cvr Cnt:11-20% BK CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-871- Cvr Cnt:21-30% BK CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-881- Cvr Cnt:31%- BK CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-891- Page/Toner Bottle BK CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-901- Page/Toner_Prev1 BK CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-911- Page/Toner_Prev2 BK CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-921- Cvr Cnt/Total Coverage(%):BK CTL* [ 0 to 2147483647 / 0 /
001 1%]
8-921- Cvr Cnt/Total Coverage/P:BK CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
011
8-941- Machine Status Operation Time CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-941- Machine Status Standby Time CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-941- Machine Status Energy Save Time CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-941- Machine Status Low Power Time CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004
8-941- Machine Status Off Mode Time CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-283 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step]

CTL
005
8-941- Machine Status SC CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
006
8-941- Machine Status PrtJam CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
007
8-941- Machine Status OrgJam CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
008
8-941- Machine Status Supply PM Unit End CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
009
8-951- AddBook Register User Code /User ID CTL* [ 0 to 99999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-951- AddBook Register Mail Address CTL* [ 0 to 99999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-951- AddBook Register Fax Destination CTL* [ 0 to 99999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-951- AddBook Register Group CTL* [ 0 to 99999 / 0 / 1]
004
8-951- AddBook Register Transfer Request CTL* [ 0 to 99999 / 0 / 1]
005
8-951- AddBook Register F-Code CTL* [ 0 to 99999 / 0 / 1]
006
8-951- AddBook Register Copy Program CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
007
8-951- AddBook Register Fax Program CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
008
8-951- AddBook Register Printer Program CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
009
8-951- AddBook Register Scanner Program CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
010
8-961- Electricity Status Ctrl Standby Time CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-961- Electricity Status STR Time CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-961- Electricity Status Main Power Off Time CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-961- Electricity Status Reading and Printing CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-284 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step]

CTL
004 Time
8-961- Electricity Status Printing Time CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
005
8-961- Electricity Status Reading Time CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
006
8-961- Electricity Status Eng Waiting Time CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
007
8-961- Electricity Status Low Pawer State Time CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
008
8-961- Electricity Status Silent State Time CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
009
8-961- Electricity Status Heater Off State Time CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
010
8-961- Electricity Status LCD on Time CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
011
8-961- Electricity Status Silent Print CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
101
8-971- Unit Control Engine Off Recovery CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001 Count
8-971- Unit Control Power Off Count CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-971- Unit Control Force Power Off Count CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-999- Admin. Counter List Total CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-999- Admin. Counter List Copy: BW CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-999- Admin. Counter List Printer: BW CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
007
8-999- Admin. Counter List Fax Print: BW CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
010
8-999- Admin. Counter List A3/DLT CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
012
8-999- Admin. Counter List Duplex CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
013
8-999- Admin. Counter List Copy: BW(%) CTL* [ 0 to 2147483647 / 0 /

SM Appendices 3-285 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step]

CTL
023 1]
8-999- Admin. Counter List Printer: BW(%) CTL* [ 0 to 2147483647 / 0 /
027 1]
8-999- Admin. Counter List Fax Print: BW(%) CTL* [ 0 to 2147483647 / 0 /
030 1]
8-999- Admin. Counter List Transmission Total: Color CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
101
8-999- Admin. Counter List Transmission Total: BW CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
102
8-999- Admin. Counter List FAX Transmission CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
103
8-999- Admin. Counter List Scanner Transmission: CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
104 Color
8-999- Admin. Counter List Scanner Transmission: CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
105 BW

SM Appendices 3-286 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

3.9 PRINTER SERVICE MENU

3.9.1 SP1-XXX (Service Mode)
1001 [Bit Switch]
1- Bit Switch 1 0 1
001- bit DFU - -
001 0
bit Responding with the hostname as the sysName Model Hostname
1 name
(PnP name)
This BitSwitch can change the value of the sysName.
0 (default): Model name (PnP name) such as "MP C401SP"
1: Host name
bit DFU - -
2
bit No I/O Timeout Disabled Enabled
3 Enables/Disables MFP I/O Timeouts. If enabled, the MFP I/O Timeout setting will have
no affect. I/O Timeouts will never occur.
bit SD Card Save Mode Disabled Enabled
4 If this bit switch is enabled, print jobs will be saved to the GW SD slot and not output to
paper.
bit [PS and PDF] Paper size error margin ±5pt ±10pt
5 When a PS job is printed by using a custom paper size, the job might not be printed
because of a paper size mismatch caused by a calculation error. By default, the error
margin for matching to a paper size is ±5 points. By enabling this BitSwitch, the error
margin for matching to a paper size can be extended to ±10 points.
bit DFU - -
6
bit [RPCS,PCL]: Printable area frame border Disabled Enabled
7 Prints all RPCS and PCL jobs with a border around the printable area.

1001 [Bit Switch]

1-001- Bit Switch 2 0 1
002 bit DFU - -
0
bit DFU - -
1
bit Applying a Collate Type Shift Collate Normal Collate

SM Appendices 3-287 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

2 A collate type (shift or normal) will be applied to all jobs that do not explicitly define a
collate type.
Note: If #5-0 is enabled, this BitSwitch has no effect.
bit [PCL5e/c,PS]: PDL Auto Switching Enabled Disabled
3 Enables/Disables the MFPs ability to change the PDL processor mid-job.
Some host systems submit jobs that contain both PS and PCL5e/c. If Auto PDL
switching is disabled, these jobs will not be printed properly.
bit DFU - -
4
bit DFU - -
5
bit DFU - -
6
bit DFU - -
7

1001 [Bit Switch]

1-001- Bit Switch 3 0 1
003 bit DFU - -
0
bit DFU - -
1
bit [PCL5e/c]: Legacy HP compatibility Disabled Enabled
2 Uses the same left margin as older HP models such as HP4000/HP8000.
In other words, the left margin defined in the job (usually "<ESC>*r0A") will be
changed to "<ESC>*r1A".
bit DFU - -
3
bit DFU - -
4
bit DFU - -
5
bit DFU - -
6
bit DFU - -
7

1001 [Bit Switch]

SM Appendices 3-288 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

1-001- Bit Switch 4 0 1

004 bit DFU - -
0
bit DFU - -
1
bit DFU - -
2
bit IPDS print-side reversal Disabled Enabled
3 If enabled, the simplex pages of IPDS jobs will be printed on the front side because of
printing on the back side of the page. This might reduce printing speed.
bit DFU - -
4
bit DFU - -
5
bit DFU - -
6
bit DFU - -
7

1001 [Bit Switch]

1-001- Bit Switch 5 0 1
005
bit Show "Collate Type", "Staple Type" and "Punch Disabled Enabled
0 Type" buttons on the operation panel.
If enabled, users will be able to configure a Collate Type, Staple Type, and Punch Type
from the operation panel. The available Types will depend on the device and
configured options.
After enabling this BitSw, the settings will appear under:
"User Tools > Printer Features > System"
bit Multiple copies if a paper size or type mismatch Disabled Enabled
1 occurs (single copy) (multiple)
If a paper size or type mismatch occurs during the printing of multiple copies, only a
single copy is output by default. Using this BitSw, the device can be configured to print
all copies even if a paper mismatch occurs.
bit Prevent SDK applications from altering the Disabled Enabled
2 contents of a job.
If this BitSw is enabled, SDK applications will not be able to alter print data. This is
achieved by preventing SDK applications from accessing a module called the "GPS

SM Appendices 3-289 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

Filter".
Note: The main purpose of this BitSw is for troubleshooting the effects of SDK
applications on data.
bit [PS] PS Criteria Pattern3 Pattern1
3 Change the number of PS criterion used by the PS interpreter to determine whether a
job is PS data or not.
For details, refer to “Printing Features”.
bit Increase max. number of stored jobs. Disabled Enabled
4 (100) (750)
Changes the maximum number of jobs that can be stored on the HDD. The default
(disabled) is 100. If this is enabled, the max. will be raised to 750 or 1000 depending
on the model.
bit DFU - -
5
bit Method for determining the image rotation for the Disabled Enabled
6 edge to bind on.
If enabled, the image rotation will be performed as they were in the specifications of
older models for the binding of pages of mixed orientation jobs.
The old models are below:
- PCL: Pre-04A models
- PS/PDF/RPCS:Pre-05S models
bit Letterhead mode printing Disabled Enabled
7 (Duplex)
Routes all pages through the duplex unit.
If this is disabled, simplex pages or the last page of an odd-paged duplex job, are not
routed through the duplex unit. This could result in problems with letterhead/pre-printed
pages.
Only affects pages specified as Letterhead paper.

1001 [Bit Switch]

1-001-006 Bit Switch 6 0 1
bit 0 DFU - -
bit 1 DFU - -
bit 2 DFU - -
bit 3 DFU - -
bit 4 DFU - -
bit 5 DFU - -
bit 6 DFU - -

SM Appendices 3-290 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

bit 7 DFU - -

1001 [Bit Switch]

1- Bit Switch 7 0 1
001- bit Print path Disabled Enabled
007 0 If enabled, simplex pages (in mixed simplex/duplex PS/PCL5 jobs only) and the last
page of an odd paged duplex job (PS, PCL5, PCL6), are always routed through the
duplex unit. Not having to switch paper paths increases the print speed slightly.
bit DFU - -
1
bit DFU - -
2
bit DFU - -
3
bit DFU - -
4
bit DFU - -
5
bit DFU - -
6
bit DFU - -
7

1001 [Bit Switch]

1-001- Bit Switch 8 0 1
008 bit DFU - -
0
bit DFU - -
1
bit DFU - -
2
bit [PCL,PS]: Allow BW jobs to print Disabled Enabled (allow BW jobs to
3 without requiring User Code print without a user code)
BW jobs submitted without a user code will be printed even if usercode authentication
is enabled.
Note: Color jobs will not be printed without a valid user code.
bit DFU - -
4

SM Appendices 3-291 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

bit DFU - -
5
bit DFU - -
6
bit [PDF]: Orientation Auto Detect Enabled Disabled
7 Function
Automatically chooses page orientations of PDF jobs (Landscape or Portrait) based
on the content.

1001 [Bit Switch]

1- Bit Switch 9 0 1
001- bit PDL Auto Detection timeout of jobs submitted Disabled Enabled
009 0 via USB or Parallel Port (IEEE 1284). (Immediately) (10 seconds)
To be used if PDL auto-detection fails. A failure of PDL auto detection doesn't
necessarily mean that the job can't be printed. This bit switch tells the device whether to
time-out immediately (default) upon failure or to wait 10 seconds.
bit DFU - -
1
bit Job Cancel Disabled Enabled
2 (Not cancelled) (Cancelled)
If this bit switch, all jobs will be cancelled after a jam occurs.
Note: If this bitsw is enabled, printing under the following conditions might result in
problems:
- Job submission via USB or Parallel Port
- Spool printing (WIM >Configuration > Device Settings > System)
bit PCL/PS bypass tray paper rotation (SEF/LEF) Disabled Enabled
3 This bitsw causes the device to revert to the behavior of previous generations. It only
takes effect if "Bypass Tray Setting Priority" = "Driver/Command".
Previous spec (bitsw=1): If a standard sized paper mismatch occurred in the bypass
tray, the MFP always prompted for SEF paper.
If this bitsw=0 (default) then in the event of a standard sized paper mismatch, the MFP
will always prompt for paper of the rotation (SEF/LEF) determined by the MFP bypass
tray paper setting or by the bypass tray sensor.
bit Timing of the PJL Status ReadBack (JOB Disable Enable
4 END) when printing multiple collated copies.
This bitsw determines the timing of the PJL USTATUS JOB END sent when multiple
collated copies are being printed.
0 (default): JOB END is sent by the device to the client after the first copy has

SM Appendices 3-292 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

completed printing. This causes the page counter to be incremented after the first copy
and then again at the end of the job.
1: JOB END is sent by the device to the client after the last copy has finished printing.
This causes the page counter to be incremented at the end of each job.
bit Display UTF-8 text in the operation panel Enabled Disabled
5 Enabled (=0):
Text composed of UTF-8 characters can be displayed in the operation panel.
Disabled (=1):
UTF-8 characters cannot be displayed in the operation panel.
For example, job names are sometimes stored in the MIB using UTF-8 encoded
characters. When these are displayed on the operation panel, they will be garbled
unless this BitSw is enabled (=0).
bit Disable super option Enabled Disabled
6 Switches super option disable on / off. It this is On, multiple jobs are grouped at LPR
port. PJL settings are enabled even jobs that are specified queue names are sent.
bit Enable/Disable Print from USB/SD's Preview Enabled Disabled
7 function
Determines whether Print from USB/SD will have the Preview function.
Enabled (=0): Print from USB/SD will have the Preview function.

Disabled (=1): Print from USB/SD will not have the Preview function.

1001 [Bit Switch]

1-001- Bit Switch A 0 1
010 bit DFU - -
0
bit DFU - -
1
bit DFU - -
2
bit DFU - -
3
bit DFU - -
4
bit Store and Skip Errored Job locks the queue Queue is not Queue locked
5 locked after after SSEJ
SSEJ
If this is 1, then after a job is stored using Store and Skip Errored Job (SSEJ), new

SM Appendices 3-293 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

jobs cannot be added to the queue until the stored job has been completely printed.
bit Allow use of Store and Skip Errored Job if Does not allow Allows SSEJ
6 connected to an external charge device. SSEJ with ECD with ECD
If this is 0, Store and Skip Errored Job (SSEJ) will be automatically disabled if an
external charge device is connected.
Note: We do not officially support enabling this bitsw (1). Use it at your own risk.
bit Job cancels remaining pages when the paid- Job does not Job cancels
7 for pages have been printed on an external cancel
charge device
When setting 1 is enabled, after printing the paid-for pages on an external charge
device, the job that includes any remaining pages will be canceled.
This setting will prevent the next user from printing the unnecessary pages from the
previous user's print job.

1001 [Bit Switch]

1- Bit Switch B 0 1
001-
011
bit Show Menu List Hide Menu Show Menu
0 List List
If this is 0, the Menu List button will be removed from Printer Features.
bit DFU
1 .

bit DFU - -
2
bit Change the behavior of the center staple Cancel the Continue to
3 job print
This Bit Switch can change the behavior of the center staple when the maximum
number of sheets for stapling is exceeded.
0 (default): The job is canceled, and an error is recorded in the log.
1: The job is not canceled and is produced. How the job is produced in any behavior
depends on the type of finisher.
bit Add "Apply Auto Paper Select" is the condition that Disabled Enabled
4 decides if the device's paper size or paper type

SM Appendices 3-294 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

should be overwritten.
If this BitSwitch is set to "1" (enabled), the "Apply Auto Paper Select" setting will decide
if the paper size or paper type that is specified in the device settings should be
overwritten by the job's commands when "Tray Setting Priority" is set to
"Driver/Command" or "Any Type".
- Apply Auto Paper Select = OFF: Overwritten (priority is given to the job’s commands)
- Apply Auto Paper Select = ON: Not overwritten (priority is given to the device settings)
bit DFU - -
5
bit DFU - -
6
bit DFU - -
7

1001 [Bit Switch]

1-001- Bit Switch C 0 1
012 bit DFU - -
0
bit DFU - -
1
bit DFU - -
2
bit DFU - -
3
bit DFU - -
4
bit Change the user ID type displayed on the Disabled Enabled
5 operation panel
As of 15S models, the Login User Name can be displayed on the operation panel. The
user ID type displayed on the operation panel can be changed by configuring
BitSwitch #12-5 as follows:
- 0 (default): Login User Name
- 1: User ID. If this is enabled, User ID will be displayed, which is equivalent to the
behavior exhibited in 14A and earlier models.
bit AirPrint Enabled Disabled
6 For 15S and later models that support AirPrint, AirPrint can be disabled by changing
this Bit Switch from 0 (default) to 1.
bit DFU - -

SM Appendices 3-295 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

1003 [Clear Setting]

1-003-001 Initialize Printer System *CTL [- / - / -]
[Execute]
Initializes settings in the "System" menu of the user mode.
1-003-003 Delete Program *CTL [- / - / -]
[Execute]

1004 [Print Summary]

Prints the service summary sheet (a summary of all the controller settings).
1-004-001 Print Printer Summary *CTL [- / - / -]
[Execute]
1-004-002 Print Printer Summary2 *CTL [- / - / -]
[Execute]

1005 [Display Version]

1-005-002 Printer Version *CTL [-/-/-]
Displays the version of the controller firmware.

1110 [Media Print Device Setting]

Selects the setting for the media print device.
1-110-002 0: Disable 1: Enable *CTL [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]

1111 [All Job Delete Mode]

1-111- 0:excluding New Job 1:including New Job *CTL [ 0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step ]
001 0: Excluding New Job
1: Including New Job
Selects whether to include an image processing job in jobs subject to full cancellation
from the SCS job list.

1117 [Airprint]
1-117-001 - CTL* [ 0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step ]

SM Appendices 3-296 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

3.10 SCANNER SERVICE MENU

3.10.1 SP1-XXX (System and Others)
1001 [Scan Nv Version]
1-001-005 - *CTL [- / - / -]

1005 [Erase Margin(Remote scan)]

1-005-001 Range from 0 to 5 mm *CTL [0 to 5 / 0 / 1 mm / step]

1009 [Remote scan disable]

1-009-001 - *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
0: ON (enabled)
1: OFF (disabled)

1010 [Non Display Clear Light PDF]

1-010-001 - *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
0: Display, 1: No display

1011 [Org Count Display]

1-011-001 - *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
0: OFF (no display)
1: ON (count displays)

1012 [User Info Release]

1-012-001 - *CTL [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
1: Release
0: Do not release

1013 [Scan to Media Device Setting]

1-013-002 - *CTL [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
0: Disable
1: Enable

1014 [Scan to Folder Pass Input Set]

1-014-001 0: OFF 1: ON *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
0: OFF
1: ON

SM Appendices 3-297 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

1041 [Scan:FlairAPI Setting]

1- 0x00 – 0xff *CTL * see BitSwitch below:
041- Sets Scanner FlairAPI Function enable / disable.
001 This SP is set by BitSwitch and needs to reboot the machine after making changes.
bit Setting meanings Description
0 1
bit 0 Start of FlairAPI Off On Sets whether to start exclusive FlairAPI http
Server (Do not (Start) server. If it is 0, scanning FlairAPI function
Start) and simple UI function will be disabled.
bit 1 Access Disabled Enabled If it is “0”, accessing is limited from the
permission of machine only, such as operating panel,
FlairAPI from SDK/J, MFP browsers etc… If it is “1”,
outside of the accessing is allowed from outside of FlairAPI
machine such as PC, Remote UI, IT-Box etc…
bit 2 IPv6 (Exclusive) / IPv6 IPv4 If this bit is “0”, only IPv6 accessing is
IPv4 (Priority) (Exclusive) (Priority) permitted.
Switching If this bit is “1” and IPv4 is enabled, the
machine uses IPv4 accessing. If this bit is “1”
and IPv4 is disabled, the machine uses IPv6
accessing. In this case, it is unable to access
through Smart Operation Panel if IPv4
address is enabled.
bit 3 Remote UI Not Used Use Sets use of Remote UI for scanner function.
Function
bit 4 Reserved - - -
bit 5 Reserved - - -
bit 6 Reserved - - -
bit 7 Reserved - - -

3.10.2 SP2-XXX (Scanning-image quality)

2021 [Compression Level (Gray-scale)]
2-021-001 Comp1:5-95 *CTL [5 to 95 / 20 / 1 / step]
2-021-002 Comp2:5-95 *CTL [5 to 95 / 40 / 1 / step]
2-021-003 Comp3:5-95 *CTL [5 to 95 / 65 / 1 / step]
2-021-004 Comp4:5-95 *CTL [5 to 95 / 80 / 1 / step]
2-021-005 Comp5:5-95 *CTL [5 to 95 / 95 / 1 / step]

2023 [ClearLightPDF:ACS Setting]

SM Appendices 3-298 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

This SP code enables/disables the ACS function.

2-023-001 - *CTL [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
0: Disable
1: Enable

2024 [Compression ratio of ClearLight PDF]

2-024-001 Compression Ratio (Normal image) *CTL [5 to 95 / 25 / 1 / step]
2-024-002 Compression Ratio (High) *CTL [5 to 95 / 15 / 1 / step]

2025 [Compression ratio of ClearLightPDF JPEG2000]

2-025-001 Compression Ratio (Normal) JPEG2000 *CTL [5 to 95 / 25 / 1 / step]
2-025-002 Compression Ratio (High) JEPG2000 *CTL [5 to 95 / 15 / 1 / step]

2030 [OCR PDF DetectSens]

2-030-001 White Lumi Value: 0 - 255 *CTL [0 to 255 / 250 / 1 / step]
2-030-002 White Pix Ratio: 0 - 100 *CTL [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 / step]
2-030-003 White Tile Ratio: 0 - 100 *CTL [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 / step]

2031 [Vertical Judgment Setting]

2-031- Function Setting: 0 - 1 *CTL [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]

001 0:Enable
1:Disable
When the image does not become upright state due to the vertical judgment error, set this
SP to "0: Disable". After changing the setting, turn OFF/ON the main power.
2-031- Algorithm Setting: 0 - 2 *CTL [0 to 3 / 1 / 1 / step]
002 0: Normal Algorithm
1: Simple Algorithm
2: Composite Algorithm
Set the identification algorithm when SP2-031-001 is "1: Enable". Change the setting when
the vertical judgment error occur frequently. After changing the setting, turn OFF/ON the
main power.

SM Appendices 3-299 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

3.11 INPUT AND OUTPUT CHECK

3.11.1 Input Check Table

Main Machine, Paper Feed Tray

5803 [INPUT Check]
5-803- Registration Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
001 0: paper exist
1: paper non exist
5-803- Paper Feed Sensor 1 ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
002 0: paper exist
1: paper non exist
5-803- Transport Sensor 1 ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
003 0: paper exist
1: paper non exist
5-803- Paper Feed Sensor 2 ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
004 0: paper exist
1: paper non exist
5-803- Transport Sensor 2 ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
005 0: paper exist
1: paper non exist
5-803- Fusing Exit Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
006 0: paper exist
1: paper non exist
5-803- Fusing Entrance Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
007 0: paper exist
1: paper non exist
5-803- Paper Exit Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
008 0: paper exist
1: paper non exist
5-803- Inverter Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
009 0: paper exist
1: paper non exist
5-803- Duplex Exit Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
010 0: paper exist
1: paper non exist
5-803- Duplex Entrance Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
011 0: paper exist
1: paper non exist

SM Appendices 3-300 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

5803 [INPUT Check]

5-803- Paper Exit Tray Full Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
012 0: Not full
1: full
5-803- Tray 1 Remain Switch ENG [ 0 to 3 / 0 / 1]
013 When full is 100%,
11: 71 to 100%
01: 31 to 70%
00: 11 to 30%
10: 1 to 10%
5-803- Tray 1 Upper Limit Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
014 0: less then limit
1: high then limit
5-803- Tray 1 Paper End Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
015 0: No paper
1: paper remaining
5-803- Tray 1 Set Switch ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
016 0: set
1:not set
5-803- Tray 2 Remain Switch ENG [ 0 to 3 / 0 / 1]
017 When full is 100%,
11: 71 to 100%
01: 31 to 70%
00: 11 to 30%
10: 1 to 10%
5-803- Tray 2 Upper Limit Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
018 0: less then limit
1: high then limit
5-803- Tray 2 Paper End Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
019 0: No paper
1: paper remaining
5-803- Tray 2 Set Switch ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
020 0: set
1: not set
5-803- Tray 2 Size Switch ENG [ 0 to 15 / 0 / 1]
021
5-803- Bypass Paper End Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
022 0: No paper

SM Appendices 3-301 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

5803 [INPUT Check]

1: paper remaining
5-803- Bypass Main Scan Length Switch ENG [ 0 to 15 / 0 / 1]
023
5-803- Bypass Sub Scan Length Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
024
5-803- Main Door Interlock Switch ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
025 00: Unlocked
11: Locked
5-803- Right Door Open/Close Switch ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
026 0: close
1: open
5-803- Duplex Guide Plate Open/Close Switch ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
027 0: close
1: open
5-803- Transfer Open/Close Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
028 0: open
1: close
5-803- Transfer Contact Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
029 0: Abutting
1: Alienate
5-803- Waste Toner Bottle Near Full Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
032 0: Not full
1: full
5-803- Toner Bottle Set Switch ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
033 0: set
1: not set
5-803- Fusing Set & Country Detection ENG [ 0 to 7 / 0 / 1]
038 0111:200V system
1011:100V System
5-803- Fusing New Fuse Blown Detection ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
039 0: New
1: Old
5-803- Fusing Exit Fan1:Lock ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
048 0: Running
1: Stopped, or locked
5-803- Fusing Exit Fan2:Lock ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
049 0: Running

SM Appendices 3-302 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

5803 [INPUT Check]

1: Stopped, or locked
5-803- PSU Cooling Fan:Lock ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
051 0: Running
1: Stopped, or locked
5-803- Main Exhaust Fan:Lock ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
057 0: Running
1: Stopped, or locked
5-803- Paper Exit Cooling Fan:Lock ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
058 0: Running
1: Stopped, or locked
5-803- Toner Bottle Cooling Fan:Lock ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
060 0: Running
1: Stopped, or locked
5-803- Development Motor:Lock ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
061 0: Running
1: Stopped, or locked
5-803- Fusing/Fusing Exit Motor:Lock ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
065 0: Running
1: Stopped, or locked
5-803- Drum Motor:Lock ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
066 0: Running
1: Stopped, or locked
5-803- HVP/Separation DC/(-):Abnormal ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
067 Detection 0: SC detected
1: Normal
5-803- HVP/ChargeDC/(-):Abnormal Detection ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
068 0: SC detected
1: Normal
5-803- HVP/PTR DC/(+)&(-):Abnormal Detection ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
069 0: SC detected
1: Normal
5-803- HVP/Development DC/(-):Abnormal ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
070 Detection 0: SC detected
1: Normal
5-803- Key Counter:Set Sensor 1 ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
072 0: set
1:unset

SM Appendices 3-303 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

5803 [INPUT Check]

key counter: set 1=0, 2=1 for set,
others for unset
5-803- Key Counter:Set Sensor 2 ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
073 0: set
1:unset
key counter: set 1=0, 2=1 for set,
others for unset
5-803- Key Card:Set Detection ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
074 0: set
1: not set
5-803- 1-Bin Remain Paper Detection ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
075 0: paper exist
1: paper non exist
5-803- 1-Bin Set Detection ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
076 0: paper exist
1: paper non exist
5-803- Bridge Relay Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
077 0: paper exist
1: paper non exist
5-803- Bridge Exit Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
078 0: Paper exist
1: Paper do not exist
5-803- Relay Set Detection Mechanism ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
079 0: set
1:not set
5-803- RelayTransCov OP Detect/LeftTransCov ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
082 OP Sn 0: close
1: open
5-803- RelayPprExitCovOP ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
083 Detect/UpperTransCovOP Sn 0: close
1: open
5-803- Shift Tray Set Detection Mechanism ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
084 01: set
11:not set
5-803- Shift Tray Position Sensor 1 ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
085 0: Stop on this side. during moving
towards inner

SM Appendices 3-304 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

5803 [INPUT Check]

1: Stop on inner side. during moving
towards this side
5-803- GAVD Open/Close Detection ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
094
5-803- Relay Fuse Blown Detection +24V ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
095 0: Not cut
1: Cut
5-803- Relay Fuse Blown Detection +5V ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
096 0: Not cut
1: Cut
5-803- PCB Ver Management ENG [ 0 to 15 / 0 / 1]
100
5-803- Tray 1 Size Switch ENG [ 0 to 15 / 0 / 1]
101
5-803- ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
102
5-803- HP Senser ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
200
5-803- Platen Cover Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
201
5-803- Bank: Tray3: Feed Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
211 0: paper not detected
1: paper detected.
5-803- Bank: Tray4: Feed Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
212 0: paper not detected
1: paper detected.
5-803- Bank: Tray5: Feed Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
213 0: paper not detected
1: paper detected.
5-803- Bank: Tray3: Transport Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
214 0: paper not detected
1: paper detected.
5-803- Bank: Tray4: Transport Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
215 0: paper not detected
1: paper detected.
5-803- Bank: Tray5: Transport Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
216 0: paper not detected

SM Appendices 3-305 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

5803 [INPUT Check]

1: paper detected.
5-803- Bank: Feed Cover Open Detection 1 ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
217 0: cover open
1: cover closed
5-803- Bank: Feed Cover Open Detection 2 ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
218 0: cover open
1: cover closed
5-803- LCT Paper Supply Open/Close ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
219 0: cover open
1: cover closed
5-803- LCT Slide Open/Close ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
220 0: slide open
1: slide closed

ADF
6007 [ADF INPUT Check]
6-007-001 Original Length 1 (B5 Detection Sensor) ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-007-002 Original Length 2 (A4 Detection Sensor) ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-007-003 Original Length 3 (LG Detection Sensor) ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-007-004 Original Width 1 ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-007-005 Original Width 2 ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-007-006 Original Width 3 ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-007-007 Original Width 4 ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-007-008 Original Width 5 ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-007-009 Original Detection ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-007-011 Skew Correction ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-007-013 Registration Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-007-014 Exit Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-007-015 Feed Cover Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-007-016 Lift Up Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-007-023 Rear Edge Detection ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]

6011 [1-Pass ADF INPUT Check]

6-011-001 Original Length 1 (B5 Sensor) ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-011-002 Original Length 2 (A4 Sensor) ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-011-003 Original Length 3 (LG Sensor) ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-011-004 Original Width 1 ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-306 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

6011 [1-Pass ADF INPUT Check]

6-011-005 Original Width 2 ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-011-006 Original Width 3 ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-011-007 Original Width 4 ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-011-008 Original Width 5 ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-011-009 Original Detection ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-011-010 Separation Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-011-011 Skew Correction ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-011-012 Scan Entrance Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-011-013 Registration Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-011-014 Exit Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-011-015 Feed Cover Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-011-016 Lift Up Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-011-018 Pick-Up Roller HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-011-021 Bottom Plate HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-011-022 Bottom Plate Position Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-011-023 Original Length 4 (LT/A4 Tail Sensor) ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]

Finisher
6123 [INPUT Check: 2K/3K FIN]
6-123-001 Entrance Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-002 Horizontal Transport Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-003 Switchback Transport Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-004 Proof Tray Exit Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-005 Shift Tray Exit Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-006 Booklet Stapler Exit Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-007 Paper Exit Open/Close Guide HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-008 Punch HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-009 Punch Move HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-010 S-to-S Registration Detection HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-011 Lower Junction Solenoid HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-012 Jogger HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-013 Positioning Roller HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-014 Feed-out HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-015 Stapler Moving HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-016 Booklet Stapler HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-017 Booklet Jogger HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-018 Booklet Jog Solenoid HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-307 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

6123 [INPUT Check: 2K/3K FIN]

6-123-019 Booklet Standard Fence HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-020 Booklet Stapler HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-022 Folder Blade Cam HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-023 Folder Blade HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-024 Shift Roller HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-025 Shift Jogger HP Sensor: Front ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-026 Shift Jogger HP Sensor: Rear ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-027 Shift Jogger Retraction HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-028 Drag Roller Vibrating HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-029 LE Guide HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-030 TE Stack Plate HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-031 Staple Tray Paper Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-032 ITB Paper Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-033 Booklet Stapler Transport Paper Sn: Upper ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-034 Booklet Stapler Transport Paper Sn: Lower ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-035 Paper Height Sensor: Shift ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-036 Corner Stapler Paper Height Sensor 1 ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-037 Corner Stapler Paper Height Sensor 2 ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-038 Proof Tray Full Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-039 Booklet Stapler Full Sensor 1 ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-040 Booklet Stapler Full Sensor 2 ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-041 S-to-S Registration Detection Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-042 Punch RPS Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-043 Corner Stapler Leading Edge Detection Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-044 Corner Stapler Staple End Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-045 Booklet Stapler Staple End Sensor: Front ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-046 Booklet Stapler Staple End Sensor: Rear ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-047 Shift Tray Lower Limit Sensor 1 ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-048 Shift Tray Lower Limit Sensor 2 ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-049 Shift Tray Lower Limit Sensor 3 ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-050 Shift Tray Lower Limit Sensor 4 ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-051 Shift Tray Lower Limit Sensor 5 ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-052 Punch Chad Full Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-053 Punch Set Detection ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-054 Shift Jogger Set Detection ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-055 Booklet Stapler Set Detection ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-308 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

6123 [INPUT Check: 2K/3K FIN]

6-123-056 Front Door SW ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-057 Dynamic Roller Open/Close Guide Plate Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-058 Tray Upper Limit SW ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-059 Paper Exit Open/Close Guide Plate Limit SW ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-060 Punch Selection DIPSW 1 ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-061 Punch Selection DIPSW 2 ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-065 Paper Guide HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-066 Shift Jogger HP Sensor: Front ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-067 Shift Jogger HP Sensor: Rear ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-068 Shift Jogger Retraction HP Sensor: Upper ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-069 Shift Jogger Retraction HP Sensor: Lower ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]

6135 [INPUT Check: FrontFIN]

6-135-001 Entrance Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-135-002 Carry Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-135-003 Exit Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-135-004 Staple Tray Paper Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-135-005 Front Jogger HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-135-006 Rear Jogger HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-135-007 Sft Roller HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-135-008 Hitroll HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-135-009 Ext Guide Plate HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-135-010 Staple Moving HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-135-011 Shift Tray Paper Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-135-012 Shift Tray Limit Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-135-013 Staple Rotation Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-135-014 Staple Near End Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-135-015 Self Priming Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-135-016 Stopper HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-135-017 Punch HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-135-018 Punch Pluse Count Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-135-019 Punch Chad Full Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-135-020 Punch Moving HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-135-021 Punch Registration Detection HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-135-022 Punch Registration Detection Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-135-023 Slide Door SW ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-309 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

6135 [INPUT Check: FrontFIN]

6-135-024 Shift Tray Upper Limit SW ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]

6161 [FIN (1K FIN) INPUT Check]

6-161-001 Entrance Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-161-002 Upper Cover Open/Close Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-161-003 Proof Tray Exit Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-161-004 Proof Tray Full Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-161-005 Shift HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-161-006 Exit Guide Plate Open/Close HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-161-007 Shift Paper Exit (Lift Tray Exit) Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-161-008 Positioning Roller HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-161-009 Lift Tray Paper Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-161-010 Jogger HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-161-011 Feed Out HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-161-012 Lift Tray Lower Limit Sensor (Upper) ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-161-013 Lift Tray Lower Limit Sensor (Lower) ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-161-014 Staple Tray Paper Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-161-015 Stapler Moving HP Sensor (with Staples) ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-161-016 Near End Sensor (Common: Corner/Bklt Stplr) ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-161-017 Self Priming Sensor (Common:Crnr/Bklt Stplr) ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-161-018 Driver HP Sensor (Corner/Booklet Stapler) ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-161-020 Clincher HP Sensor (Corner/Booklet Stapler) ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-161-022 Stapler Retraction Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-161-023 Stapler Moving HP Sensor (without Staples) ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-161-024 Stapler HP Sensor without Staples ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-161-025 Move Guide Plate HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-161-026 Punch HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-161-027 Punch RP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-161-028 Punch Hopper Full Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-161-029 Punch Move HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-161-030 S-to-S Registration Detection HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-161-031 S-to-S Registration Detection Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-161-032 Punch Selection DIPSW 1 ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-161-033 Punch Selection DIPSW 2 ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-161-034 ITB Transport Sensor: Right ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-161-035 ITB Transport Sensor: Left ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-310 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

6161 [FIN (1K FIN) INPUT Check]

6-161-036 Stack Transport Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-161-037 Stack Trans Upper Pressure Release HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-161-038 Stack Trans Lower Pressure Release HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-161-039 Fold Blade HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-161-040 Fold Cam HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-161-041 TE Stopper Transport Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-161-042 TE Stopper HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-161-043 Booklet Folder Exit Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-161-044 Booklet Folder Tray Full Sensor: Upper ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-161-045 Booklet Folder Tray Full Sensor: Lower ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-161-046 Door Open/Close SW ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-161-047 Lift Tray Upper Limit SW ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-161-048 Paper Guide HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]

6184 [Input Check:NoStplBindFIN]

6-184-001 Entrance Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
0: Sensor Off
1: Sensor On
6-184-002 Exit Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
0: Sensor Off
1: Sensor On
6-184-003 Horizontal Registration Detection Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
0: Sensor Off
1: Sensor On
6-184-004 Shift HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
0: Sensor Off
1: Sensor On
6-184-005 Junction Solenoid HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
0: Sensor Off
1: Sensor On
6-184-006 Exit Pressure Release HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
0: Sensor Off
1: Sensor On
6-184-007 Stapler HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
0: Sensor Off
1: Sensor On
6-184-008 Tray Full Detection Sensor 1 ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 0]

SM Appendices 3-311 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

6184 [Input Check:NoStplBindFIN]

0: Paper overflow
6-184-009 Tray Full Detection Sensor 2 ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
0: Paper overflow
6-184-010 Slide Door Open/Close Door SW ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
0: Close
1: Open

Multi-Fold Unit
6322 [INPUT Check]
6-322-001 Registration Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Sensor Off
1: Sensor On
6-322-002 Folding Junction HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Sensor Off
1: Sensor On
6-322-003 1st 2-direction Paper Feed SN ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Sensor Off
1: Sensor On
6-322-004 2nd 2-direction Paper Feed SN ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Sensor Off
1: Sensor On
6-322-005 Crease Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Sensor Off
1: Sensor On
6-322-006 Crease HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Sensor Off
1: Sensor On
6-322-007 Top Tray Exit Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Sensor Off
1: Sensor On
6-322-008 Top Tray Full Sensor 1 ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Sensor Off
1: Sensor On
6-322-009 Top Tray Full Sensor 2 ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Sensor Off
1: Sensor On
6-322-010 Bridge Exit ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-312 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

6322 [INPUT Check]

0: Sensor Off
1: Sensor On
6-322-011 Cover SW ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Sensor Off
1: Sensor On
6-322-012 Exit Unit Open/Close SW ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Sensor Off
1: Sensor On

3.11.2 Output Check Table

Main Machine, Paper Feed Tray

5804 [OUTPUT Check]
5-804- Tray 1 Pickup Solenoid ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
001
5-804- Tray 2 Pickup Solenoid ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
002
5-804- Bypass Pickup Solenoid ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
003
5-804- Paper Exit Junction Gate Solenoid ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
004
5-804- Tray 1 Lift Motor:CW ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
005
5-804- Tray 1 Lift Motor:CCW ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
006
5-804- Tray 2 Lift Motor:CW ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
007
5-804- Tray 2 Lift Motor:CCW ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
008
5-804- Registration Motor:CCW:Std Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
009
5-804- Registration Motor:CCW:Mid Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
010
5-804- Registration Motor:CCW:Low Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
011
5-804- Registration Motor:CCW:Std Speed:IncSpd ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
012

SM Appendices 3-313 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

5804 [OUTPUT Check]

5-804- Registration Motor:CCW:Position Hold ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
015
5-804- Feed Motor:CW:Std Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
016
5-804- Feed Motor:CW:Mid Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
017
5-804- Feed Motor:CW:Low Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
018
5-804- Feed Motor:CW:Std Speed:IncSpd ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
019
5-804- Feed Motor:CCW:Std Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
022
5-804- Feed Motor:CCW:Mid Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
023
5-804- Feed Motor:CCW:Low Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
024
5-804- Feed Motor:CCW:Std Speed:IncSpd ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
025
5-804- Vertical Transport Motor:CW:Std Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
028
5-804- Vertical Transport Motor:CW:Mid Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
029
5-804- Vertical Transport Motor:CW:Low Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
030
5-804- Vertical Transport Motor:CW:Std Speed:IncSpd ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
031
5-804- Vertical Transport Motor:Position Hold ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
034
5-804- Paper Exit Motor:CW:Std Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
041
5-804- Paper Exit Motor:CW:Mid Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
042
5-804- Paper Exit Motor:CW:Low Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
043
5-804- Paper Exit Motor:CW:Std Speed:IncSpd ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
044
5-804- Inverter Motor:CW:Std Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-314 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

5804 [OUTPUT Check]

047
5-804- Inverter Motor:CW:Mid Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
048
5-804- Inverter Motor:CW:Low Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
049
5-804- Inverter Motor:CW:Std Speed:Feed Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
052
5-804- Inverter Motor:CW:Low Speed:Feed Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
054
5-804- Inverter Motor:CW:Mid Speed:Feed Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
055
5-804- Inverter Motor:CCW:Std Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
056
5-804- Inverter Motor:CCW:Mid Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
057
5-804- Inverter Motor:CCW:Low Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
058
5-804- Inverter Motor:CCW:Std Speed:IncSpd ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
061
5-804- Inverter Motor:CCW:Mid Speed:IncSpd ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
062
5-804- Inverter Motor:CCW:Low Speed:IncSpd ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
063
5-804- Duplex Entrance Motor:CW:Std Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
065
5-804- Duplex Entrance Motor:CW:Mid Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
066
5-804- Duplex Entrance Motor:CW:Low Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
067
5-804- Duplex Entrance Motor:CW:Std ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
068 Speed:FeedSpeed
5-804- Duplex Entrance Motor:CW:Low ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
069 Speed:FeedSpeed
5-804- Duplex Entrance Motor:CW:Std Speed:IncSpd ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
070
5-804- Duplex Bypass Motor:CW:Std Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
071

SM Appendices 3-315 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

5804 [OUTPUT Check]

5-804- Duplex Bypass Motor:CW:Mid Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
072
5-804- Duplex Bypass Motor:CW:Low Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
073
5-804- Duplex Bypass Motor:CW:Std Speed:Feed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
074 Speed
5-804- Duplex Bypass Motor:CW:Low Speed:Feed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
075 Speed
5-804- Duplex Bypass Motor:CCW:Std Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
077
5-804- Duplex Bypass Motor:CCW:Mid Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
078
5-804- Duplex Bypass Motor:CCW:Low Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
079
5-804- Duplex Bypass Motor:CCW:Std Speed:Feed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
080 Speed
5-804- Duplex Bypass Motor:CCW:Low Speed:Feed ENG
081 Speed
5-804- Duplex Bypass Motor:CW:Std Speed:IncSpd ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
082
5-804- Duplex Bypass Motor:Position Hold ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
083
5-804- Fusing/Fusing Exit Motor:CCW:Std Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
092 *See Important below the
table

5-804- Fusing/Fusing Exit Motor:CCW:Mid Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]

093 *See Important below the
table
5-804- Fusing/Fusing Exit Motor:CCW:Low Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
094 *See Important below the
table
5-804- Fusing/Fusing Exit Motor:CW:Low Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
098 *See Important below the
table
5-804- Polygon Motor: L ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
104

SM Appendices 3-316 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

5804 [OUTPUT Check]

5-804- Polygon Motor: M ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
105
5-804- Polygon Motor: H ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
106
5-804- Fusing Fan:Middle Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
110
5-804- Fusing Fan:Low Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
111
5-804- ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
112
5-804- PSU Cooling Fan ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
113
5-804- Toner Bottle Cooling Fan ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
114
5-804- Main Exhaust Fan:Half Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
115
5-804- Main Exhaust Fan:Full Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
116
5-804- Paper Exit Cooling Fan:Half Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
118
5-804- Paper Exit Cooling Fan:Full Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
119
5-804- Development Motor:Std Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
120
5-804- Development Motor:Mid Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
121
5-804- Development Motor:Low Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
122
5-804- Drum Motor:Std Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
124
5-804- Drum Motor:Mid Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
125
5-804- Drum Motor:Low Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
126
5-804- Transfer Contact Motor:CW ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
140
5-804- Transfer Contact Motor:CCW ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-317 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

5804 [OUTPUT Check]

141
5-804- Toner Bottle Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
162
5-804- Bridge Relay/Left Paper Feed Motor:Std Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
163
5-804- Bridge Relay/Left Paper Feed Motor:Mid Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
164
5-804- Bridge Relay/Left Paper Feed Motor:Low Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
165
5-804- BridgeRelay/LefExit Motor:Std Speed:IncSpd ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
166
5-804- BridgeRelay/LeftExit Junction Gate Solenoid ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
169
5-804- <Shift Tray> Lift Motor:CW ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
170
5-804- <Shift Tray> Lift Motor:CCW ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
171
5-804- HVP/ChargeDC/(-):PWM ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
179
5-804- HVP/Development DC/(-):PWM ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
187
5-804- HVP/Separation DC/(-):PWM ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
194
5-804- HVP/PTR DC/(+):PWM ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
199
5-804- HVP/PTR DC/(-):PWM ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
200
5-804- Scanner Lamp ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
202
5-804- Transfer Open/Close LED ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
206
5-804- ID Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
209
5-804- ID Tag Power ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
211
5-804- Bank: Tray3: Feed Mt: Standard Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
241

SM Appendices 3-318 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

5804 [OUTPUT Check]

5-804- Bank: Tray4: Feed Mt: Standard Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
242
5-804- Bank: Tray5: Feed Mt: Standard Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
243
5-804- Bank: Tray3: Transport Mt: Standard Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
244
5-804- Bank: Tray4: Transport Mt: Standard Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
245
5-804- Bank: Tray5: Transport Mt: Standard Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
246
5-804- Bank: Tray3: PU Solenoid ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
247
5-804- Bank: Tray4: PU Solenoid ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
248
5-804- Bank: Tray5: PU Solenoid ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
249
5-804- OPC Quenching LCD ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
251
5-804- Anti-Condensation Heater Relay ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
253
Important: Use the procedure below to do the output checks for the fusing exit motor in SP5-804-092
to 098. If you do not follow this procedure, a kink will form in the fusing belt sleeve, and the fusing
sleeve belt unit will need to be replaced.
1. Do one of the following:
• Open the right cover of the paper bank
• Remove one of the toner bottles
• Pull out the waste toner bottle half-way
• Remove the fusing unit
2. Enter SP mode.
3. Do the following out output checks:
• SP5-804-092 (Fusing Motor:CW:Standard Speed)
• SP5-804-093 (Fusing Motor:CW:Middle Speed)
• SP5-804-094 (Fusing Motor:CW:Low Speed)
• SP5-804-098 (Fusing Motor:CCW:Low Speed)
4. Without exiting SP mode, turn the main power switch off and then on again.
Important: If you exit SP mode before you turn the main power switch off, the fusing exit motor will stay
off when the machine warms up. Heat will be concentrated in one area of the fusing belt sleeve and

SM Appendices 3-319 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

cause a kink to form. If this happens, you will need to replace the fusing sleeve belt unit.
5. Do the reverse of what you did in step 1 (for example, reattach the fusing unit).

ADF
6008 [ADF OUTPUT Check]
6-008-003 Feed Motor Forward ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-008-004 Feed Motor Reverse ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-008-005 Relay Motor Forward ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-008-006 Relay Motor Reverse ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-008-011 Inverter Solenoid ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-008-012 Stamp ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-008-013 Fan Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-008-014 Feed Clutch ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-008-015 Feed Solenoid ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]

6012 [1-Pass ADF OUTPUT Check]

6-012-001 Pick-Up Motor Forward ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0:Off
1:On
6-012-003 Feed Motor Forward ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0:Off
1:On
6-012-005 Relay Motor Forward ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0:Off
1:On
6-012-009 Exit Motor Forward ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0:Off
1:On
6-012-010 Bottom Plate Motor For/Rev ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0:Off
1:On
6-012-012 Stamp ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0:Off
1:On
6-012-015 Pull-Out Motor Forward ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0:Off
1:On
6-012-016 Middle Motor Forward ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-320 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

6012 [1-Pass ADF OUTPUT Check]

0:Off
1:On

Finisher
6124 [OUTPUT Check: 2K/3K FIN]
6-124-001 Entrance Transport Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-124-002 Horizontal Transport Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-124-003 Pre-Stack Transport Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-124-004 ITB Transport Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-124-005 Paper Exit Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-124-006 Upper Junction Solenoid ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-124-007 TE Stack Plate Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-124-008 Paper Exit Open/Close Guide Plate Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-124-009 Punching Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-124-010 Punch Move Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-124-011 S-to-S Registration Detection Move Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-124-012 Lower Junction Solenoid Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-124-013 Jogger Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-124-014 Positioning Roller Rotation Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-124-015 Feed-out Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-124-016 Booklet Stapler Move Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-124-017 Corner Stapler Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-124-018 Booklet Stapler Jogger Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-124-019 Booklet Stapler Jog Solenoid Move Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-124-020 Booklet Stapler Standard Fence Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-124-021 Booklet Stapler Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-124-022 Dynamic Roller Transport Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-124-023 Folder Transport Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-124-025 Square-fold Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-124-026 Tray Lift Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-124-027 Shift Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-124-028 Front Shift Jogger Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-124-029 Rear Shift Jogger Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-124-030 Shift Jogger Retraction Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-124-031 Drag Roller Vibrating Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-124-032 LE Guide Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-124-033 Navigation LED (All) ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-321 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

6124 [OUTPUT Check: 2K/3K FIN]

6-124-037 Positioning Roller Transport Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-124-038 Paper Guide Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]

6136 [OUTPUT Check: FrontFIN]

6-136-001 Entrance Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-136-002 Carry Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-136-003 Exit Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-136-004 Front Jogger Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-136-005 Rear Jogger Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-136-006 Shift Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-136-007 Hitroll Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-136-008 Exit Guide Plate Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-136-009 Staple Moving Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-136-010 Tray Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-136-011 Staple Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-136-012 Stopper Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-136-013 Punch Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-136-014 Punch Moving Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-136-015 Punch Registration Moving Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]

6162 [FIN (1K FIN) OUTPUT Check]

6-162-001 Entrance Transport Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-162-002 Proof Transport Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-162-003 Paper Feed/Positioning & Move Roller Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-162-004 Junction Solenoid ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-162-005 Shift Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-162-006 Jogger Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-162-007 Exit Guide Plate Open/Close Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-162-008 Feed-out Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-162-009 Tray Lift Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-162-010 Paper Guide Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-162-011 Positioning Roller Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-162-012 Stapler Shift Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-162-013 Stapler Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-162-014 Stapler Moving Motor (without Staples) ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-162-015 Stapler Motor (without Staples) ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-322 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

6162 [FIN (1K FIN) OUTPUT Check]

6-162-016 Move Guide Plate Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-162-017 Punch Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-162-018 Punch Move Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-162-019 S-to-S Registration Detection Move Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-162-020 Stack Transport Motor: Upper ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-162-021 Stck Trns Uppr Prss Rls/Stndrd Fence Rtrct M ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-162-022 Stack Lower Pressure Release Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-162-023 Folder Transport Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-162-024 TE Stopper Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-162-025 Folder Blade Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-162-026 Navigation LED (All) ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]

6185 [Output Check:NoStplBindFIN]

6-185-001 Transport Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
6-185-002 Shift Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
6-185-003 Junction Solenoid Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
6-185-004 Exit Pressure Release Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
6-185-005 Stapler Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 0]

Multi-Fold Unit
6323 [OUTPUT Check]
6-323-001 Transport Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-323-002 Registration Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-323-003 Folding Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-323-004 2nd 2-direct Paper Feed Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-323-005 JG/Crease Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-323-006 Junction Solenoid ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-323-007 Navigation LED (All) ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]

SM Appendices 3-323 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

SP Mode Tables

3.12 TEST PATTERN PRINTING

Printing Test pattern: SP2-109
Some of these test patterns are used for copy image adjustments but most are used primarily for
design testing.

• Do not operate the machine until the test pattern is printed out completely. Otherwise, SC will
occur.
1. Enter the SP mode then select SP2-109-003.
2. Select test pattern for print from the list then press [OK].
3. When changing density of test pattern, select density with SP2-109-006.

• If select "0" with SP2-109-006, the color adjusted so will not show up in the test pattern.
4. To print, touch "Copy Window", then set settings within the following window for test print (paper
size etc…).
5. Press "Start" key to start test print.
6. After checking test pattern, touch "SP Mode" on the LCD to return to SP mode display.
7. Reset all settings to the default values.
8. Exit SP mode.
No. Pattern No. Pattern
0 None 13 4dot Ind. Pttrn (4dot independent Pattern)
1 1dot Vertical Line 14 Trimming Area
2 2dot Vertical Line 15 Hounds tooth H
3 1dot Horizontal Line 16 Hounds tooth V
4 2dot Horizontal Line 17 Black Band H (Horizontal)
5 Grid Vert (Grid Vert ical Line) 18 Black Band V (Vertical)
6 Grid Horizontal (Grid Horizontal Line) 19 Checker Flag Pattern
7 Grid Pattern Small 20 Grayscale V (Vertical)
8 Grid Pattern Large 21 Grayscale H (Horizontal)
9 Argyle Pattern Small 22 2 Beam Density Pttrn
10 Argyle P:L (Argyle Pattern Large) 23 Full Dot Pattern
11 1dot Ind. Pttrn (1dot independent Pattern) 24 All White Pattern
12 2dot Ind. Pttrn (2dot independent Pattern)

SM Appendices 3-324 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Appendices: Software Configuration

4. APPENDICES: SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION

4.1 PRINTING FEATURES
4.1.1 Auto PDL Detection Function

Overview
The Auto PDL Detection function gives the MFP the ability to determine the PDL of a job or of specific
parts of a job. This can be especially useful in cases where the PDL is not specified or if the job
contains multiple PDLs. This is only possible if the job was not created using a driver.

Conditions for detection of the PDL

The MFP will only attempt to detect a job's PDL if all of the following conditions are met.
• No @PJL ENTER LANGUAGE command is contained in the job
• No submission protocol options (lpr, ftp, rcp, or rsh options) have been used to specify the PDL
• User Tools > Printer > System > Printer Language = Auto

• The printer is unable to detect PCL6 or RPCS. However these are almost always created
using a driver and therefore contain the PJL command specifying the PDL.

PDL detection by the printer system, PCL interpreter and PS interpreter

There are 3 components in the printer which can perform Auto PDL Detection:
1. Printer system:
Uses a set of triggers unique to PCL5, PS or PDF. Up to 2KB from the start of the job can be
searched for triggers.
2. PCL interpreter:
It can detect PS triggers in PCL data. If a PS trigger is detected, the PCL interpreter will abort
processing and return the unprocessed part of the job back to the printer system. Up to 256 bytes
from the start of each page can be searched for triggers.
3. PS interpreter:
It can detect PCL5 triggers in PS data. If a PCL trigger is detected, the PS interpreter will abort
processing and return the unprocessed part of the job back to the printer system. The entire page
(regardless of the number of bytes) is searched for triggers.

• 2. and 3. can be disabled using Printer Bit Switch 2-3=1.

• If the "Printer Language" is configured to anything other than Auto, all detection will be
disabled.
• An interpreter submits a job page by page to the rasterizer. Therefore, when an interpreter

SM Appendices 4-1 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Appendices: Software Configuration

detects a trigger mid-job, the previous pages will have already been submitted and will be
output using the previously detected PDL.
• If the PDL cannot be detected by the printer system, then the PDL defaults to the one
configured in "Configuration > Printer Basic Settings > Default Printer Language".

The Printer Language setting and Default Printer Language setting in WIM:

PDL selection and switching

3 types of PDL selection/switching are performed:
1. PDL selection (PCL5 or PS (including PDF)) at the beginning of the job: performed by the printer
system

SM Appendices 4-2 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Appendices: Software Configuration

2. PDL switching from PCL5 to PS: performed by the PCL interpreter and the printer system

3. PDL switching from PS to PCL5: performed by the PS interpreter and the printer system

Triggers
Printer system

PCL5 triggers [ESC]E

[FF]
PS triggers %!PS-Adobe-3.1
"%!"
"dict begin"
"bind def"
"findfont"
"showpage"
"/statusdict"
"0 startjob"
[EOT]
"}" + space character + "def"
"userdict" (*)
PDF triggers %PDF-
%!PS-Adobe-M.nPDF- (*M, n=numeric)

SM Appendices 4-3 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Appendices: Software Configuration

* "userdict" is excluded by configuring Printer Bit Switch 5-3=1.

• Up to 2KB from the start of the job can be searched for triggers.
• "%%" can be added to the PS triggers by configuring Printer Bit Switch 5-3=1
• If a job is identified as PDF, it will be sent to the PS interpreter to be processed as a regular PS
job.

PS interpreter

PCL5 trigger [ESC]E and 2 or more continuous PCL commands

• Up to 256 bytes from the start of each page can be searched for triggers.

Some possible problems

Garbled output:

If a string of characters (or binary data) is mistaken as a trigger and an incorrect PDL is applied, the
output will be garbled.

Incorrect printer settings:

Printer settings, for example the paper size, is incorrectly applied. This can happen when the printer
settings at the beginning of the job are initialized before a PDL switch occurred and no settings were
configured for the rest of the job.

Printer Bit Switch description

Bit Switch 2-3
This controls Auto PDL Detection by the PCL interpreter and PS interpreter.
BitSW 2-3=0 (default):
If PDL switching is applied to the job, all of the printer system, PCL interpreter and PS interpreter will
search for switching criteria (triggers).
BitSW 2-3=1:
Only the printer system will search for switching criteria (triggers). PCL/PS interpreters will not.
Bit Switch 5-3
This affects the PDL switching criteria (triggers) used by the printer system.
BitSW 5-3=0 (default):
"%%" is not used as a printer system PS trigger. "%%" will not call the PS interpreter.
BitSW 5-3=1:
"%%" is used as a printer system PS trigger.
The reason that "%%" is not included as a trigger by default, is that a string of text in the body of the job
such as the below, could result in a false positive. This would trigger a switch and result garbled output.
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

SM Appendices 4-4 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Appendices: Software Configuration

However some customers prefer that "%%" be included as a switching criteria. BitSW5-3=1 should be
used in such a case.

• A side effect of BitSW5-3=1 is that "userdict" will no longer be used as a PS trigger.

Bit Switch 9-0
These determine whether Auto PDL Detection for print jobs transmitted via USB/parallel will wait 10
seconds to make sure the first 2KB of the job has been sent.
The Printer system portion of the Auto PDL Detection function is only performed on the first 2KB of a job
and can wait up to 10 seconds for that first 2KB to arrive. As the printer is unable to detect the end of
jobs submitted over a USB/Parallel connection, it might be preferable to not wait 10 seconds if jobs of
less than 2KB are going to be printed. Enabling/disabling this waiting time is the purpose of BitSw 9-0.
BitSw 9-0=0 (default):
The printer system will not wait 10 seconds for the first 2KB of data to arrive.
BitSw 9-0=1:
The printer system will wait up to 10 seconds for the first 2KB of data to arrive.

4.1.2 Print Images Rotation

Printer Bit Switch description

Bit Switch 5-6
This change the way an MFP/LP rotates PCL, PS, PDF, or RPCS print images.
BitSW 5-6=0 (default):
A uniform binding edge (short or long edge) will be applied to every page of every job. Pages will
always be rotated as if they were to be bound on that edge.
BitSW 5-6=1:
A uniform binding edge (short or long edge) will only be applied if the job is stapled, punched, or Z-
folded. Otherwise, the bound edge might differ from page to page.
Example:
A 3-page job. Page 1 has the PCL simplex command. Page 2 and 3 have the PCL duplex long-edge
bind commands.
No finishing options (staple, punch, z-fold) are used.

Bit Switch #5-6=0:

SM Appendices 4-5 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Appendices: Software Configuration

Bit Switch #5-6=1:

• Used in conjunction with Bit Switch #5-6, Orientation Auto Detect for PS/PDF jobs might cause
unexpected results.

4.1.3 PJL USTATUS

Printer Bit Switch description

Bit Switch 9-4
These control the way PJL USTATUS returns page count totals in cases where multiple copies of a job
are being printed.
BitSw 9-4=0 (default):
This change the way an MFP/LP rotates PCL, PS, PDF, or RPCS print images.
1. The page count for a single copy is returned after the first copy is printed.
2. The page count for the rest of the copies, excluding the first copy, is returned after all copies have
been printed.
3. This emulates an older HP PCL firmware spec. It is only needed for compatibility with legacy
software.

SM Appendices 4-6 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Appendices: Software Configuration

BitSw 9-4=1:
The page count for all copies is output after all copies have been printed.
This emulates more recent HP PCL firmware specs.
For example, consider 3 copies of a 3 page job:
9-4 = 0
@PJL USTATUS JOB
START
NAME="TEST_page1-3"
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
1
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
2
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
3
@PJL USTATUS JOB
END
NAME="TEST_page1-3"
PAGES=3
<comment> The page count of the first copy is returned.</comment>
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
1
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
2
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
3
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
4
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
5
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
6
<comment> The page count of the remaining two copies is returned.</comment>
9-4 = 1
@PJL USTATUS JOB
START
NAME="Microsoft Word - TEST_page1-3"
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
1
@PJL USTATUS PAGE

SM Appendices 4-7 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Appendices: Software Configuration

2
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
3
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
4
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
5
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
6@PJL USTATUS PAGE
7
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
8
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
9
@PJL USTATUS JOB
END
NAME="Microsoft Word - TEST_page1-3"
PAGES=9
<comment> The page count of all three copies is returned.</comment>

4.1.4 Behavior of USB Printer Detection

An MFP/LP connected via USB sends its product name and unique serial number. With the data, the
machine determines whether requires a printer driver for the USB device to be installed.
SP5-844-005 allows you to change how to determine the MFP/LP requires a printer driver installation:
• OFF
If SP5-844-005 is set to OFF, the unique serial number of the device is sent to the computer. As a
result, if the device is swapped out for a device of the same product, pop-up messages will appear,
because the serial numbers between the two are different.
• Level 1
If SP5-844-005 is set to Level 1, a common serial number for the product such as “RICOH MP
305+” series is sent to the computer. As a result, if the device is swapped out for a device of the
same product, pop-up messages will not appear because the devices are recognized as having the
same serial number.
• Level 2
If SP5-844-005 is set to Level 2, a common serial number for all GW/GW+ models is sent to the
computer. As a result, if a GW/GW+ device is swapped out for a different GW/GW+ device, pop-up
messages will not appear because the devices are both recognized as being based on GW/GW+.

SM Appendices 4-8 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Appendices: Software Configuration

4.2 SCANNER FEATURES

4.2.1 Display settings of recently used scan destination
Configuring the scanner interface so that the most recently used scan destination is cleared.
Whether the MFP clears the most recently used scan destination, can be configured using Scanner SP
1-012-001.
By default, this is cleared to avoid subsequent users scanning to it by mistake.
Scanner SP 1-012-001
1 (default): Clear
0: Do not clear
This will cause all of the following to be cleared after the scanning is complete:
• Destination
• Sender
• Email subject
• Email message
• File name
Scanner SP 1-012-001=1 (default):
The information in the list above will be cleared after scanning is finished.

Exceptions:

• User Auth.:
If SP 1-012-001 = 0 and if User Auth. (excluding User Code authentication) is enabled, the most
recently used scan destination will only be retained until the user logs out.
• Scanner Auto Reset timer:
Even if SP 1-012-001 = 0 the most recently used scan destination can still be cleared by the
Scanner Auto Reset timer. If the Scanner Auto Reset timer is shorter than the System Auto Reset
timer, then the most recently used scan destination will be cleared when the Scanner Auto Reset
timer elapses.

4.2.2 The Setting of SMTP authentication in Scan to Email

Scan to Email fails with the error message "Transmission has failed ". The SMTP username and
password are correct. How can I make Scan to Email pass ?
Change SP 5-860-022 "SMTP Auth. From Field Replacement" to On. By doing this, Scan to Email will
pass the SMTP authentication.

• Using this option to solve the above problem, the device email address will appear in the
email's "From" field. The email address of the user who sent the email will appear in the
"Reply-to" field.
Explanation

SM Appendices 4-9 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Appendices: Software Configuration

This is an SMTP authentication issue that aborts transmission of an already started Scan to Email.
Currently this has only been reproduced using MS-Exchange server.
MS-Exchange requires that all of the following match:
1. The sender's address in the "MAIL FROM" field. This is also known as the "envelope sender" or
"MIME sender". It is an SMTP command sent at the beginning of the email transmission process.
2. The sender's address in the mail header "From:" field. This appears as "From" in email clients. It is
a part of the email itself.
3. The email address corresponding to the SMTP username used to login into the SMTP server.
When the MFP logins into the SMTP server, the email address of the username 3) will be compared to
1) and 2). If these comparisons fail, authentication will also fail. Exchange server will stop the
transmission procedure, and the "Transmission has failed" message will be returned to the sender.

Typical example
NG case:

SP5-860-022 is Off:
1. The "MAIL FROM" field = device (Fig.1 )
2. The mail header "From:" field = user (Fig.2 )
3. The SMTP username = device (Fig.1 )
When the SMTP server compares 2) and 3) the Exchange Server will stop the transmission procedure.

OK case:

SP5-860 can be used to make the values in the above example, match.
In this example, if SP5-860-022 is On, the user's email address in the mail header '2)' will be replaced
by the Administrator's email address. (see Fig.3 )
To solve the problem, the Administrator's address must be the same as the device's address.
If this is done:
1. The "Mail From: field = device
2. The mail header "From:" field = administrator
3. The SMTP username = device
1,2 and 3 must match and the authentication should be successful.

• The user's email address will still be inserted into the reply-to field.
The device SMTP user name, password, and email address are configurable in [User Tools] > [Machine
Features] > [System Settings] > [File Transfer] > [SMTP Authentication]
User email addresses are configurable in the user configuration of the Address Book.
The administrator email address is configurable in [User Tools] > [Machine Features] > [System
Settings] > [File Transfer] > [Administrator's Email Address]

SM Appendices 4-10 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Appendices: Software Configuration

4.2.3 The Qualification Switching of Scan to Folder

Determining which account Scan to Folder uses to access a scan destination and the effects of System
SP 5-846-021.
This method depends on how the destination is accessed, whether authentication is being used, and
SP 5-846-021.
Cases:
Case Destination User auth. Account used to access the folder
selection
A Manual entry Either enabled or The user's account *
disabled
B Destination list disabled The recipient's account
(as configured in the Address Book's Folder
Authentication setting)
C enabled If SP 5-846-021 =
0 (default): The authenticated user's account
1: The recipient's account
(as configured in the Address Book's Folder
Authentication setting)
* The "user's account" will be either the one entered during scanning (see the Manual Entry screen
capture) or if User Auth. is enabled, the account configured in the user's Folder Authentication setting
will be used.
The desintation's access logs:
Case A or Case C with SP=0: The access logs can be used to determine which user sent the scan.

Case B or Case C with SP=1: All access will be logged as the same user.

SM Appendices 4-11 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Appendices: Software Configuration

SM Appendices 4-12 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
SMART OPERATION PANEL 2ND
GENERATION
SERVICE MANUAL

VER. 1.0

Latest Release: -
Initial Release: November, 2016
Copyright (c) 2016 Ricoh Co.,Ltd.

Rev. 08/12/2021
SYMBOLS, ABBREVIATIONS
This manual uses several symbols and abbreviations.

Symbols:
Symbol What it means
Clip ring
Screw
Connector
Clamp
E-ring
Flat Flexible Cable
Timing Belt
SEF Short Edge Feed
LEF Long Edge Feed
K Black
C Cyan
M Magenta
Y Yellow
B/W, BW Black and White
FC Full color

[A] Short Edge Feed (SEF)

[B] Long Edge Feed (LEF)

SM Appendices i M0A0
 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
SMART OPERATION PANEL 2ND
GENERATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ......................................... 1-1

1.1 SMART OPERATION PANEL .................................................................................... 1-1
1.1.1 OPERATION PANEL UNIT .............................................................................. 1-1
1.1.2 MICRO COMPUTER BOARD .......................................................................... 1-2
1.1.3 WI-FI MODULE ............................................................................................... 1-6
1.1.4 LCD ................................................................................................................. 1-7
1.1.5 SPEAKER ....................................................................................................... 1-9
1.1.6 MICROPHONE ................................................................................................ 1-9

2. MECHANISM ................................................................................ 2-12

2.1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................................................. 2-12
2.1.1 SYSTEM COMPONENTS ............................................................................. 2-12
2.1.2 PANEL COMPONENTS/SCREEN LAYOUT................................................... 2-23
2.1.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS ...................................................................... 2-26
2.2 CONTROLLING THE POWER SUPPLY .................................................................. 2-28
2.2.1 EXITING ENERGY SAVING MODES ............................................................ 2-28
2.2.2 SCREEN STARTUP MODE ........................................................................... 2-28
2.2.3 SHUTDOWN FUNCTIONS ............................................................................ 2-29

3. SYSTEM MAINTENANCE ........................................................... 3-32

3.1 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE ....................................................................................... 3-32
3.1.1 MAINTENANCE MODES............................................................................... 3-32
3.1.2 LOGIN TO/LOGOUT FROM CONTROL PANEL SERVICE MODE................. 3-32
3.1.3 SERVICE MODE MENU ................................................................................ 3-34
3.1.4 PANEL SELF CHECK .................................................................................... 3-37
3.1.5 RECOVERY MODE ....................................................................................... 3-44
3.1.6 SPECIAL KEY COMBINATIONS.................................................................... 3-44
3.2 SOFTWARE UPDATE.............................................................................................. 3-46
3.2.1 UPDATING THE SMART OPERATION PANEL.............................................. 3-46

SM Appendices i M0A0
Replacement and Adjustment

3.2.2 INSTALLATION/UPDATE FROM AN SD CARD ............................................. 3-47

3.2.3 PACKAGE UPDATE ...................................................................................... 3-50
3.2.4 INSTALLATION/UPDATE FROM THE EDC SERVER .................................... 3-51
3.2.5 APPLICATION SITE ...................................................................................... 3-53

4. TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................. 4-54

4.1 TROUBLESHOOTING ............................................................................................. 4-54
4.1.1 SOFTWARE UPDATE ERRORS ................................................................... 4-54
4.1.2 ERRORS THAT OCCUR WHEN THE CONTROL PANEL DOWNLOADS DATA FROM
THE CONTROLLER AT STARTUP .......................................................................... 4-60

SM Appendices ii D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Replacement and Adjustment

1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

1.1 SMART OPERATION PANEL
1.1.1 Operation Panel Unit

• Turn off the main power switch of the MFP and disconnect the power cord.
• After replacing, make sure that all disconnected harnesses are connected up again and
secured in their clamps.
1. Remove the operation panel unit from the MFP.

• For details about how to remove the operation panel unit, refer to the service manual for
the MFP.
2. Remove the hinges [A] [B] from the operation panel.

• By factory default, the following switches of the DIP switch [A] on the micro computer board
are set to ON: No.1, No.3, No.6 and No.7. When installing the operation panel unit, make sure
that the DIP switch setting is correct for the MFP on which you are installing the panel.

• The correct DIP switch setting depends on the MFP. Note the DIP switch settings of the old

SM Appendices 1-1 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Replacement and Adjustment

operation panel unit before replacing, and apply the same settings to the new Smart Operation
Panel. Below is example for DIP switch settings when the following switches are set to ON:
No.1, No.3, No.6 and No.7 (This is the factory default setting of a service part)

• If the DIP switch setting is wrong, SC672 will be displayed.

• The DIP switch No.1 turns ON/OFF the SC reduction function. Change the setting when
needed.
• 0 (OFF): The SC is displayed on the operation panel when SC672/SC673 occur.
• 1 (ON): If the error is caused by the software defect when SC672/SC673
occur, automatically reboot is performed and the SC is reset. If the error is caused by the
hardware defect when SC672/SC673 occur, the SC is displayed on the operation panel.
• After replacing the operation panel unit, make sure that the latest version of the firmware is
installed on the Smart Operation Panel. Update it if necessary (Updating the Smart
Operation Panel).

1.1.2 Micro Computer Board

1. Operation panel unit (Operation Panel Unit)
2. Bottom cover [A] ( ×4)

• There are four hooks inside the operation panel unit. Before removing the operation panel

SM Appendices 1-2 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Replacement and Adjustment

bottom cover, check the photos below.

3. Base bracket [A]

4. Lift the fastener of the LCD I/F cable [A] on the micro computer board side.

SM Appendices 1-3 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Replacement and Adjustment

5. Remove the LCD I/F cable [A] from the micro computer board.

6. Remove the FFC [A] from the micro computer board.

• Pull out the black part to unlock the connector, and then remove the FFC.
7. Micro computer board [A]

• By factory default, the following switches of the DIP switch [A] on the micro computer board
are set to ON: No.1, No.3, No.6 and No.7. When installing the operation panel unit, make sure

SM Appendices 1-4 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Replacement and Adjustment

that the DIP switch setting is correct for the MFP on which you are installing the panel.

• The correct DIP switch setting depends on the MFP. Note the DIP switch settings of the old
operation panel unit before replacing, and apply the same settings to the new Smart Operation
Panel.
Below is example for DIP switch settings when the following switches are set to ON: No.1,
No.3, No.6 and No.7 (This is the factory default setting of a service part)

• If the DIP switch setting is wrong, SC672 will be displayed.

• The DIP switch No.1 turns ON/OFF the SC reduction function. Change the setting when
needed.
• 0 (OFF): The SC is displayed on the operation panel when SC672/SC673 occur.
• 1 (ON): If the error is caused by the software defect when SC672/SC673
occur, automatically reboot is performed and the SC is reset. If the error is caused by the
hardware defect when SC672/SC673 occur, the SC is displayed on the operation panel.
• After replacing the micro computer board, perform the following checks:
• LED Check (LED Check)
• Key Check (Key Check)

SM Appendices 1-5 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Replacement and Adjustment

1.1.3 Wi-Fi Module

1. Operation panel unit (Operation Panel Unit)
2. Bottom cover [A] ( ×4)

3. Wi-Fi module [A]

• After replacing the Wi-Fi module, perform the following checks:

• Wireless LAN Check (Wireless LAN Check)
• Bluetooth Check (Bluetooth Check)

SM Appendices 1-6 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Replacement and Adjustment

1.1.4 LCD
1. Operation panel unit (Operation Panel Unit)
2. Micro computer board (Micro Computer Board)
3. Speaker [A] ( ×2)

4. Lift the fastener of the LCD I/F cable.

SM Appendices 1-7 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Replacement and Adjustment

5. LCD I/F cable (cable ×1)

6. Remove the tapes for fixing the microphone harness (tape ×3).

7. LCD [A] ( ×4)

• After replacing the LCD, perform the following checks.

• LCD Check (LCD Check)
• TouchPanel Check (TouchPanel Check)
• Perform "TouchPanel Calibration" (TouchPanel Calibration) and "MultiTouch Calibration"
(MultiTouch Calibration) of the Self Check function.

SM Appendices 1-8 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Replacement and Adjustment

1.1.5 Speaker
1. Operation panel unit (Operation Panel Unit)
2. Bottom cover [A] ( ×4)

3. Speaker [A] ( ×2, ×1)

• After replacing the speaker, perform the following check.

• Speaker Check (Speaker Check)

1.1.6 Microphone
1. Operation panel unit (Operation Panel Unit)
2. Micro computer board (Micro Computer Board)

SM Appendices 1-9 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Replacement and Adjustment

3. Lift up the securing wire of the LCD I/F cable.

4. LCD I/F cable (cable ×1)

5. Remove the tapes for fixing the microphone harness (tape ×3).

SM Appendices 1-10 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Replacement and Adjustment

6. LCD [A] ( ×4)

7. Microphone [A] (cushioning ×1)

SM Appendices 1-11 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Mechanism

2. MECHANISM
2.1 OVERVIEW
2.1.1 System Components

Hardware Specifications
Components

No. Name No. Name

1 Speaker 13 [Check Status] indicator
2 [Login/Logout] key 14 [Check Status] key
3 Main power indicator 15 Data In indicator (facsimile and printer modes)
4 [Energy Saver] key 16 Fax indicator
5 USB slot for digital cameras 17 Extended Feature key (EX3)
6 HDMI slot 18 Extended Feature key (EX2)
7 USB slot for NFC card readers 19 Extended Feature key (EX1)
8 Microphone 20 Control panel reboot key
9 [Stop] key 21 SD card slot
10 [Menu] key 22 Media access lamp
11 [Home] key 23 USB slot
12 [Back] key

SM Appendices 2-12 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Mechanism

Basic Specifications

Category Specification
LCD panel • Size
10.1 inch panel
• Resolution
WSVGA (1024x600)
• Bit width
RGB666 (18 bit color)
• Brightness
200cd/m2 (typ.)
• Backlight
LED Backlight (life: 15,000 hours)
CPU ARM Cortex-A9 Dual Core 1GHz (SoC: MCIMX6D5EYM10AC)
Touch panel Low load touch panel (recognizes touches to two points)
Memory • Volatile Memory
RAM (DDR3-1066), 2G
• Non-Volatile Memory
eMMC NAND, 8GB

• Uses a 16GB product in SLC Mode.

• Program area and data area for the operating system and
applications.
External interfaces • USB Memory
USB2.0 Host Type-A
• SD Card
SD card slot 1ch (SD*1/SDHC*2)
*1 Up to 2GB
*2 Up to 32GB
• USB expansion
USB2.0 Host Type-A
(for camera, USB keyboard, USB card reader)
• USB expansion
USB2.0 Host Type-miniB
(for NFC expansion)
• HDMI
HDMI 1.4
(for large screens available as custom order)
Internal interfaces • Extended Features

SM Appendices 2-13 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Mechanism

Category Specification
microSD card slot

• When a media is inserted in the microSD card slot, its capacity is

shown in the control panel service mode (Screen Features >
Device > microSD card) and the SMC (in the report for the Smart
Operation Panel).
Network • Wireless LAN
802.11b/g/n
• Bluetooth
Bluetooth4.0
Audio input/output Monaural speaker 1ch (output: 1 to 2 W), Microphone
RTC accuracy ±52.56 seconds per month (using external crystal oscillator, 20 ppm)
Hard keys • Extended Feature keys (EX1, EX2, and EX3)
Use for startup in extended mode etc.
• Control panel reboot key
Use to reboot the control panel when it freezes.
LED types • Main power indicator (blue)
Lights when the power is on. Flashes slowly in Sleep mode.
• [Check Status] indicator lamp (red/blue)
Lights when an error occurs.
• Data In indicator (blue)
Flashes when the machine receives data from a printer driver or LAN-Fax
driver.
• Fax indicator (blue)
Flashes while sending or receiving a fax. Lights when there is a received
fax document in the fax memory.
• Media access lamp (blue)
Lights when there is an SD card inserted in the SD card slot.
Maximum power 4 W or less
consumption (excluding external interfaces and internal feature expansions)
Power 0.35 W or less
consumption in (When in Sleep mode, power is not supplied to USB devices connected to the
Sleep mode USB slots.)

SM Appendices 2-14 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Mechanism

Specification comparison with the previous model

Item This model Previous model

Appearance

Control panel size 267 × 160 mm 345 × 161 mm

(Width × Height)
CPU operating frequency 1 GHz 533 MHz
RAM size 2 GB 1 GB
LCD panel size 10.1 inch 10.1 inch
Android OS Version. 4.2 Version. 2.3
Types of the following keys Soft keys Hard keys
• [Home] key
• [Stop] key
• [Check Status] key
• [Back] key
• [Menu] key
LED types Four types Seven types
• Main power indicator • Main power indicator
• [Check Status] indicator • [Check Status] indicator
• Data In indicator • Data In indicator
• Media access lamp • Media access lamp
• [Home] key
• [Menu] key
• [Back] key
Wireless LAN interface IEEE802.11bgn IEEE802.11bgn
Types of external interfaces • USB port (type A/mini) • USB port (mini)
• USB media slot • USB media slot
• SD card slot • SD card slot
Bluetooth Available Not available

SM Appendices 2-15 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Mechanism

Available languages

Japanese, English, French, German, Italian, Spanish, Dutch, Norwegian, Danish, Swedish, Polish,
Portuguese, Hungarian, Czech, Finnish, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Russian, Greek,
Korean, Catalan, Turkish, Brazilian Portuguese

Software Specifications
A software package consisting of the Android Firmware and the manufacturer’s own pre-installed
applications is installed on the Smart Operation Panel.

The following three types of software are installed on the Smart Operation Panel.
1. Android Firmware (Android OS)
2. Pre-installed applications
3. Applications that can be installed additionally

Android Firmware (Android OS)

The Android Firmware (Android OS) consists of the following modules that are called “stacks”.
• Linux kernel
• Android Runtime
• Library
• Application Framework

SM Appendices 2-16 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Mechanism

Pre-installed applications

On the Smart Operation Panel, applications such as the GW applications (Copy/Printer/Document

Server/Scanner/Fax), Control Panel Browser, the standard keyboard, Installer, Gallery, Self Check are
pre-installed. Unlike those installed on the controller board of the MFP, GW applications that are
installed on the Smart Operation Panel are for controlling operation and display of the Smart Operation
Panel.
Pre-installed applications are provided as part of the control panel firmware (Cheetah System) together
with the Android firmware. When you update the control panel firmware using the recovery mode or
another method, the pre-installed applications will also be updated.

Applications that can be installed

On the Smart Operation Panel, applications can be installed in addition to the pre-installed applications.
Applications that can be installed include optional applications that customers can purchase,
applications that are installed only on machines sold in specific regions, and custom-made applications.
On an MFP, applications such as Simple UI applications (Quick Copy, Quick Fax, and Quick Scanner)
and Scan to Me are installed.

Communication specifications
The Smart Operation Panel and the GW controller are connected by a USB 2.0 cable. They
communicate with each other via the Android OS on the Smart Operation Panel, using protocols called
“OCS Library” and “Flair-API (System/Application)”.

SM Appendices 2-17 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Mechanism

System block diagram

Overview of Components

Communication Details
module/signal name
OCS Library OSC stands for Operating Control Service. It is a module that controls the
control panel. The set of signals used by this module to control the control
panel are called the OCS Library.
It is used during communication between the Legacy UI (system) module
on the Smart Operation Panel and the GW module for the following
processes.
• Deciding on the display format suitable for a particular model of the
control panel, so that the intended image data can be converted to
actual image data.
• Converting touch panel operations to commands.
Flair-API Flair is the manufacturer's own communication interface between software
(System/Application) modules. The interface uses a generic WebAPI.

SM Appendices 2-18 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Mechanism

Communication Details
module/signal name
It is divided into two parts: a part that communicates directly with
applications such as the application manager, Home, Authentication,
Banner, Check Status, and Widgets, and a part that monitors applications.
It communicates with the GW controller via the CATS module.
CATS CATS stands for Cheetah Application Total System. It is a module in the
GW controller.
Because the Smart Operation Panel uses the Android OS, the contents
and protocols of communication are not the same as those of the
conventional control panel. CATS serves as an intermediary between the
GW controller and the Smart Operation Panel.
It also controls the power status of the control panel.
CATS communicates with the Smart Operation Panel using the Flair-API,
and communicates with the GW module using the GW-API.
GW-IPC The name of the interface used among modules in the GW controller. The
role is the same as that of the Flair-API.

• API stands for Application Programming Interface. An API is an interface that software
modules use in order to communicate with each other.

Application Specifications
The pre-installed applications and applications that can be additionally installed on the Smart Operation
Panel can be classified into the following 3 categories.
• System applications
Applications that operate in conjunction with multiple functions (operating regardless of the
application)
• Program applications
Applications that provide a single additional function
• Widget applications
Applications that provide a widget
The following table explains the function of each application.
SM Appendices 2-19 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Mechanism

Application Functions
Settings Provides the Android OS’s standard settings.
Screen Features Provides the manufacturer’s own settings.
Authentication Monitors login to/logout from the MFP, and transmits authentication
information to other services and applications.
Monitoring service Monitors the status of the MFP. This service is used by widgets and
applications including Banner, Check Status, Authentication, and Home.
Launcher (Legacy This application provides an application switching function when there is
Application Manager) no Home application.
Installer Provides the installer UI. Internal operation is controlled by the Package
Installer application.
Server service Provides server functions for application installation.
Remote control Works together with the server service and provides the functions and
displays of RFU and import/export of settings, including the UI.
Manual Provides connection to the server where manuals are stored (HTTP
server). Manuals are displayed using the Web Browser application.
Splash screen Provides the image that is displayed immediately after the MFP is turned
ON.
Startup animation Provides the startup animation for the operation screen.
Validation Performs validation when the machine is started in CC certified mode.
* CC stands for Common Criteria. It is the evaluation criteria for IT
security (ISO15408).
LUI system LUI stands for Legacy User Interface. The conventional control panel
display is displayed by this application. Model-specific settings are
included in this application
Package Installer Provides installation and update functions for applications.
Also provides the screen for uninstallation.
Self Check Provides a self-check function for the control panel hardware.
See Panel Self Check for contents of the self-check.
Initialization Initializes settings of the MFP or the control panel.
Web Browser Android OS’s standard Browser application
Gallery Reads images from SD cards or other media, and sets them as wallpaper
or live wallpaper.
Standard keyboard Android OS’s standard operation panel that is called up when the user
enters characters or numbers.
Home screen Provides the Home screen. Also provides screen customization and
application switching.
Banner Displays balloon messages in the banner area at the bottom of the panel

SM Appendices 2-20 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Mechanism

Application Functions
display.
OCS emulator This application serves as an intermediary between the control panel and
the controller board. (The emulator allows the controller board to work the
same way regardless of the type of control panel.)
Simple UI applications Simple (Quick) applications.
• Quick Copy
Provides the Quick Copy function.
• Quick Fax
Provides the Quick Fax function.
• Quick Scanner
Provides the Quick Scanner function.
Widgets Resident applications that display information on the screen as
configured.
• Date/time indicator
Displays the date and time.
• Supply information
Displays toner status.
• Change Languages
Provides the language switching function.
• Eco-friendly
Displays detailed information about the eco functions.
• Fax Received File
Displays the fax reception status.
• Stop
Provides a [Stop] key on the application screen. Used by functions
such as Quick Copy and Scan to Me.
• System Message
Displays system messages.
IME (excluding the Multiple settings can be configured (the user can select one when using
standard keyboard) the keyboard).
• iWnn IME Chinese (Simplified) Pack
Chinese (simplified) language pack for iWnnIME
• iWnn IME Chinese (Traditional) Pack
Chinese (traditional) language pack for iWnnIME
• iWnn IME Korean Pack
Korean language pack for iWnnIME
ICCardDispatcher Host application for NFC (Near Field Communication). Transmits card

SM Appendices 2-21 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Mechanism

Application Functions
information to authentication applications.
Quick Card Provides simple authentication using an IC card.
Authentication
Standard IC card plugin A plugin for using IC cards. Examples of IC cards are the FeliCa (Lite)
and Mifare card systems.
Bluetooth Service Provides configurations for standard Bluetooth on the Android OS.
Bluetooth Authentication This plugin is required to use Bluetooth authentication.
Plugin
Copy Copy application with a new UI.
This application is not available for MP C 306Z/406Z series.
Fax Fax application with a new UI.
This application is not available for MP C 306Z/406Z series.
Scan Scan application with a new UI.
This application is not available for MP C 306Z/406Z series.
Printer Printer application with a new UI.
This application is not available for MP C 306Z/406Z series.
Quick Print Release Ability to view and print stored documents.
This application is not available for MP C 306Z/406Z series.
Print/Scan (Memory "Media Print" and "Scan to Media" have been integrated into this
Storage Device) application.
This application is not available for MP C 306Z/406Z series.
Web Browser NX Provides an operating environment for solution applications' functions and
configuration.
Proximity Card Reader Provides support for USB card readers.
Support Plugin

SM Appendices 2-22 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Mechanism

2.1.2 Panel Components/Screen Layout

Components of the Control Panel

No. Name Description

1 Speaker There is currently no function that uses this.
2 Display panel Displays icons for functions and applications. Displays the operation
screens, operation keys and other information.
3 Main power indicator Indicates power OFF/ON status.
4 USB slot for digital A digital camera can be connected here.
cameras
5 USB slot for NFC A near field communication (NFC) device can be connected here.
card readers
6 Microphone There is currently no function that uses this.
7 [Check Status] Indicates system status.
indicator
8 Data In indicator Flashes when the machine receives data from a printer driver or LAN-
Fax driver.
9 Fax indicator Indicates fax status.
• During communication: Flashes
• When fax documents have been received using Substitute
Reception: Lights
• When the machine has received a confidential fax document:
Lights
10 Extended Feature Used for system maintenance, such as control panel self-check.
key (EX3)

SM Appendices 2-23 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Mechanism

No. Name Description

11 Extended Feature Used for system maintenance, such as control panel self-check.
key (EX2)
12 Extended Feature Used for system maintenance, such as control panel self-check.
key (EX1)
13 Control panel reboot Used when rebooting the control panel.
key
14 SD card slot Insert an SD card here.
15 Media access lamp Lights when an external media is inserted into the SD card slot or the
USB slot.
16 USB slot Insert a USB memory device here.

Panel display
Screen Layout

No. Name Description

1 Login Login information is displayed.
information area
2 [Login/Logout] Displayed when authentication is enabled. The login screen appears if you
key press [Login]. [Logout] is displayed if you have already logged in. You will
be logged out when you press [Logout].
3 [Energy Saver] Enters Sleep mode.
key
4 Icon display area Application icons, widgets, and system messages are displayed.

SM Appendices 2-24 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Mechanism

Soft keys displayed on the screen

No. Name Description

1 Function keys Users can assign shortcuts for each application. Up to three applications can
be assigned as shortcuts. When an application is assigned as a function key,
users can call the application from any screen. The function keys are disabled
by default. Users must enable this function to be able to allocate applications
to function keys.
2 System System messages are displayed in this area. If there are multiple messages to
messages be displayed, they are displayed in rotation. Tapping the message opens a
key dialog which shows all the messages.
3 [Application Displays the list of installed applications.
List] key
4 [Stop] key Stops the scanning of a document, fax transmission, or printing to paper.
5 [Menu] key Displays the menu screen of the application in use. May not be available
depending on the application.
6 [Home] key Displays the Home screen.
7 [Back] key Use this to go back to the previous screen when the Screen Features screen
or the screen of an application is displayed.
8 [Check You can check the status of the MFP, each function, and the current job. You
Status] key can also check the job history and maintenance information of the MFP.

SM Appendices 2-25 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Mechanism

2.1.3 Electrical Components

Touch panel
The touch panel of this machine uses a 4-wire resistive film method (low load resistive film analog 4-
wire method). It can detect two points for flick/drag/pinch-in/pinch-out operations. Resistive touch panel
has been adopted in order to allow operation with a prosthetic hand.

Basic Structure

An analog 4-wire resistive film touch panel has 2 layers. Two materials (mainly film or glass) with
transparent conductive film (ITO) are attached such that the transparent conductive film layers face
each other.
When the film is pressed with a finger or a pen, the transparent conductive films contact each other and
the touch panel operation is recognized.
Insulators (spacing dots) secure space between the two transparent conductive film layers to prevent
short-circuiting.
Because the transparent conductive film has a uniform resistance characteristic, the resistance value
reflects the distance of contact.

SM Appendices 2-26 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Mechanism

[A]: Spacing dot

[B]: PET film
[C]: Transparent conductive film
[D]: Base glass
[E]: LCD panel

Self-Check (multi-touch calibration) mechanism

With the Multi-touch calibration in the self-check function, the touch panel is automatically calibrated
using the results of touches to the top left and bottom right positions.
The values of “EVR_X”, “EVR_Y”, “X_MAX”, and “Y_MAX” are used for internal processing. They do
not indicate the positions or distance of the touched points. There is no problem unless there is a huge
difference between the values of the first calibration and the second calibration.

SM Appendices 2-27 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Mechanism

2.2 CONTROLLING THE POWER SUPPLY

2.2.1 Exiting Energy Saving Modes
Because this model of Smart Operation Panel has no hardware keys, the MFP exits from energy saving
mode when the user does one of the following:
• Touches the display panel
• Lifts the ADF
• Sets an original in the ADF

2.2.2 Screen Startup Mode

Startup Modes
There are two screen startup modes. The factory default setting is Normal.
4. Normal
This is the standard startup mode. When the main power of the MFP is turned ON, the control
panel starts up using less power compared to Quick mode.
5. Quick
By preparing for the next startup when the machine shuts down, the control panel starts up faster
than in Normal mode.

Changing the Screen Startup Mode

Screen Startup Mode can be changed in Screen Features.
Select [Screen Features] > [SYSTEM] > [Screen Device Settings] > [Screen Startup Mode], and then
select [Normal] or [Quick].

• In the following cases, the control panel starts up in Normal mode even if [Quick] is selected.
• The power cord has been disconnected from the power outlet after the last shutdown.
• The MFP is turned ON after being turned OFF due to reasons such as a power failure.
• The MFP was not properly shut down the last time it was turned OFF.

SM Appendices 2-28 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Mechanism

How the Control Panel Starts Up

In Normal mode

The startup screen is displayed on the display panel, followed by the startup animation.

In Quick mode

The [Home] screen is displayed immediately after the main power of the MFP is turned ON. The startup
screen displayed when starting in Normal mode is not displayed.

How the Screen Shuts Down When Quick mode Is Selected

When Quick mode is selected, the MFP prepares for the next startup when it shuts down The main
power indicator flashes during preparation for the next startup. The indicator turns off when preparation
is completed.

If the MFP is turned ON during shutdown, the preparation for the next startup continues. When
preparation for the next startup is completed, the control panel starts up in Quick mode.

• When Quick mode is selected, the control panel starts up faster than in Normal mode but
shutdown takes longer than in Normal mode.

2.2.3 Shutdown Functions

The shutdown functions and their uses are as follows.
Shutdown mode Use Operation
Normal Same as shutdown by users. Turn the main power
Shutdown switch off.
Forced shutdown When normal shutdown does not complete even Hold the main power

SM Appendices 2-29 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Mechanism

though you waited a long time. switch 6 seconds or

longer.
Shutdown for • When you have to disconnect the power cord from Turn the main power
parts the power outlet, such as when replacing parts. switch off while holding
replacement • When you want to start the machine normally and down [Stop].
then enter recovery mode, without changing the
Startup mode in Screen Features. (For updating
control panel firmware)
Shutdown for When you are going to turn on the MFP within 5 Turn the main power
software update minutes for updating the MFP firmware or package. switch off while holding
(Use shutdown for parts replacement if you are down the [EX1] key.
updating the control panel firmware.)

Normal Shutdown
The MFP is equipped with a function to shut down safely in order to:
• Prevent damage to the file systems in the HDD and the NAND flash memory.
• Prevent paper from being left inside the body of the MFP (except when paper is jammed).
If the main power switch is a rocker switch, the shutdown process begins when the rocker switch is
moved to the OFF position.
If the main power switch is a push switch, the shutdown process begins when the switch is pressed. To
make a forced shutdown, press and hold the push switch for 6 seconds. However, if you force a
shutdown during the shutdown process, data being processed may be lost. Forced shutdown is to be
used to shut down the MFP without disconnecting the power cord when the shutdown process cannot
be completed.

Other Shutdown Functions

This MFP has two additional shutdown functions to facilitate maintenance.

Shutting down the MFP for parts replacement (Starting up in Normal mode when Quick
mode is selected)

When Quick mode is selected, the MFP prepares for the next startup when it shuts down. This causes
the shutdown process to take longer than when Normal mode is selected.
If you need to disconnect the power cord after shutdown in order to replace parts or for other reasons,
you can use the following procedure to shut down the MFP just like you do in Normal mode. This
shortens the time it takes to shut down the MFP.
• Procedure
Turn the main power switch OFF while holding down the [Stop] key on the control panel. Continue
to hold down the [Stop] key until the shutdown screen is displayed.

Shutting down the MFP for software updates (Shutting down the MFP with the control
SM Appendices 2-30 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Mechanism

panel in Sleep mode)

If you are going to turn ON the MFP within 5 minutes, you can use the following procedure to shut down
the MFP with the control panel in Sleep mode.
• Procedure
Turn the main power switch OFF while holding down the [EX1] key. Continue to hold down the
[EX1] key until the shutdown screen is displayed.

• You must turn ON the MFP within 5 minutes.

• If more than 5 minutes has elapsed after shutting down the MFP using the above procedure,
the machine starts up in Normal mode even if Quick mode is selected.

SM Appendices 2-31 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

System Maintenance

3. SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
3.1 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
3.1.1 Maintenance Modes
Service program (SP) modes for the Smart Operation Panel are as follows:
Mode Use Notes
SP Mode (MFP) SP modes for the MFP The numeric keys are required to enter this
(controller, engine) mode. Display the soft keys of the GW
application or of the SP mode.
Service mode SP modes for the Smart Same as above
(control panel) Operation Panel.
• Changing SP mode settings
in the Screen Features
menu.
• Installing and updating
applications that can be
installed
Recovery mode Maintenance modes for the -
Android OS
• Updating firmware
• Initializing all data

3.1.2 Login to/Logout from Control Panel Service Mode

Login
In the same way as you log in to the SP Mode on the MFP, you use the soft keys to enter a combination
of numbers in order to login to the service mode of the control panel.

• You cannot log in to the service mode of the control panel when one of the following screens is
displayed.
• Stop All Jobs
• User Tools
• Address Book Management
Use the numeric keys on one of the following screens.
• Soft keys on the GW application screen
• Soft keys for the control panel’s service mode (displayed by pressing both the [EX3] key and
[Check Status] at the same time)

SM Appendices 3-32 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

System Maintenance

• To exit the soft keys, press [EXIT] on the screen.

Login Status Indicator

When you log in to the control panel’s service mode, the Screen Features screen is displayed.
• “Service” is displayed in the login information area [A].
• [Logout] is displayed in the Login key area [B] to allow logout from the service mode.

Logout
Press [Logout] to log out from the control panel’s service mode.

• You need to logout manually because the Auto Logout function does not work.
Depending on the authentication settings of the MFP, the following screen is displayed after you log out.
Authentication settings
Administrator authentication: OFF Administrator authentication: ON Administrator
User authentication: OFF User authentication: OFF authentication: ON
User authentication: ON
Screen of the function selected in Screen of the function selected in [Home] screen
[Function Priority] [Function Priority]

When Entry to Service Mode Is Prohibited by the Administrator

The administrator of the MFP can prohibit entry into the control panel’s service mode by enabling
[Service Mode Lock] in [System Settings].
When [Service Mode Lock] is enabled, the machine does not enter the service mode even if you enter
the number combination for the control panel’s service mode. There will be no error messages or
beeping sounds to indicate login failure.

SM Appendices 3-33 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

System Maintenance

• The machine can enter the recovery mode even if [Service Mode Lock] is enabled.

3.1.3 Service Mode Menu

There are three menus of settings.
• WIRELESS & NETWORKS
• DEVICE
• SYSTEM

WIRELESS & NETWORKS

Menu level Description
1st level 2nd level 3rd level
Wireless Group Owner Mode You can only view the setting.
Direct
Settings
Connection Password You can only view the setting.
DHCP Server IP Address You can only view the setting.
DHCP IP Address Range You can only view the setting.
Select Channel You can only view the setting.
PEER DEVICES View and configure devices that can be
connected.
REMEMBERED Displays groups that have been
GROUPS previously connected.
Bluetooth ON/OFF You can only view the setting.
SEARCH FOR DEVICES Scans for Bluetooth devices in the
vicinity.
(name of this device) You can only view the setting.
PAIRED DEVICES View and configure paired devices.

SM Appendices 3-34 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

System Maintenance

Menu level Description

1st level 2nd level 3rd level
AVAILABLE DEVICES View and configure available devices.
Port Port Forwarding Settings Port Requests sent to the wireless LAN unit
Forwarding Forwarding of the Smart Operation Panel can be
to Machine Cinfig 1-20 forwarded to the controller of the MFP.
You can enable or disable ports to
forward these requests.
MTU Settings PathMTU(Enable/Disable) Enables/disables the PathMTU size set
in [MTU Size]. When you change this
setting, the control panel restarts.
MTU Size Sets the size of PathMTU. Default:
1500.

DEVICE
Menu level Description
1st 2nd level 3rd level
level
Storage INTERNAL Total space Displays the total size of the internal
STORAGE storage.
Available Displays the available space of the internal
storage.
Apps (app data & Displays the size of applications in the
media content) internal storage.
SD CARD *1 Total space Displays the total size of the SD card.
Available Displays the available space of the SD
card.
Apps (app data & Displays the size of applications in the SD
media content) card.
Erase SD card Erase data written to the SD card.
Apps Install Install from SD Card Install or update applications from an SD
card.
Install from Server Enter a product key to install or update
applications from the server.
Activate Applications Activate applications that have been
installed from the server.
Update Applications Update applications that have been
installed.

SM Appendices 3-35 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

System Maintenance

Menu level Description

1st 2nd level 3rd level
level
Uninstall Uninstall applications.
Check Server Connect Check if you can connect to the Server.
*1 Displayed only when an SD card is inserted into the SD card slot of the control panel.

SYSTEM
Menu level Description
1st level 2nd level 3rd level
Screen Device Status Displays the following:
Settings • Wi-Fi MAC address
Information • Bluetooth address
• Interface Settings
• Wi-Fi settings (ON/OFF)
Legal information Open source Displays the open source license
licenses information.
Software Version Displays the versions of control panel
List firmware and installed applications.
When saving the software version list on
an SD card, insert an SD card into the
SD card slot of the control panel, and
then press [Save to SD Card].
Screen Device Server Settings Port number Input a port number for communication
Settings with the import/export and RFU server.
The input number is used for both HTTP
and HTTPS connections.
(Normally, input a number within 55101-
55111.)
Application Displays a list of installed applications.
Settings If you press [Settings] for an application,
the setting screen for the CE is
displayed. The screen does not change if
the application has no setting items.
Authentication Authentication This setting gives priority to the recovery
priority mode priority mode time from energy saving modes when an
IC card authentication device is
connected.

SM Appendices 3-36 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

System Maintenance

Menu level Description

1st level 2nd level 3rd level
When this setting is selected, the MFP
does not enter Engine OFF mode, and
always recovers from Silent mode.
Start You can specify the start time of
time(hhmm) Authentication priority mode.
Note: This can be changed only when
[Authentication priority mode] is
deselected.
Expiration You can specify the period of validity of
time(hours) Authentication priority mode.
Note: This can be changed only when
[Authentication priority mode] is
deselected.
Screen device This setting prevents the control panel
always-connection from entering Sleep mode, so that
Setting Bluetooth and other communication
devices remain connected.
When this setting is selected, the control
panel does not enter Sleep mode. Only
the LCD (display panel) turns OFF.
Panel Self Check Starts self-diagnosis of the control panel.
(Panel Self Check)

3.1.4 Panel Self Check

The following are available as self-diagnostics functions of the control panel:
• LED Check
• Key Check
• LCD Check
• Speaker Check
• TouchPanel Check
• TouchPanel Calibration
• MultiTouch Calibration
• Wireless LAN Check
• Bluetooth Check

SM Appendices 3-37 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

System Maintenance

• The [Self Check] menu is displayed in either English or Japanese. The language can be
changed using [Change Language] in the Home screen.
• If an unavailable language is selected, English will be displayed.
• With some diagnostic items, press [Back] [A] at the bottom of the screen to return to the top
menu of [Self Check].

LED Check
Select the [All Light On] check box, and make sure the following LEDs light:
• Data In indicator (facsimile and printer modes)
• Fax indicator
• [Check Status] indicator (flashes in red and orange alternately)

When the check is completed, press [Back] to return to the top menu of [Self Check].

Key Check
Check if the Extended Feature keys on the left side of the control panel (EX1, EX2, EX3 from top to

SM Appendices 3-38 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

System Maintenance

bottom) are functioning normally. If they are functioning normally, the key will turn green when pressed.
[FOOT SW] is not used.

When the check is completed, press [End] to return to the top menu of [Self Check].

LCD Check
Visually inspect the color of the LCD. The displayed colors are white/black/red/green/blue. The LCD
changes to the next color when you press it.

The check is completed when all colors have been displayed. The screen returns to the top menu of
[Self Check].

Speaker Check
Tests the speaker by playing the reference sound.
1. Select the frequency (220Hz, 440Hz, 880Hz, 1760Hz, or 2000Hz).
2. Press [START/STOP] to play the sound.
3. Touch the volume bar, and play the sound at minimum and maximum volumes.
4. Press [START/STOP] to stop the sound.

SM Appendices 3-39 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

System Maintenance

When the check is completed, press [Back] to return to the top menu of [Self Check].

TouchPanel Check
For each of the nine reference points on the screen, the distance between the detected position and the
nearest reference point is displayed.

When the check is completed, press [Back] to return to the top menu of [Self Check].

SM Appendices 3-40 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

System Maintenance

TouchPanel Calibration
Calibrate the touch panel by touching the center of each of the five “+” signs.
The five “+” signs are displayed in the order of top left, bottom right, bottom left, center, and top right.
After you have touched the five “+” signs, the display switches to the [Retry/OK] screen.
• If you want to calibrate again, press [EX1].
• If you want to confirm that the calibration results are OK, press the [EX3] key to return to the top
menu of [Self Check].

MultiTouch Calibration
Calibrate the touch panel for multi-tap input methods such as pinch-in/pinch-out.
Touch the center of both “+” signs. The two “+” signs are displayed in the order of top left and bottom
right. Repeat the procedure. The touch panel will be calibrated.
• If you want to adjust it again, press the [EX1] key.
• If you want to confirm that the calibration results are OK, press the [EX3] key to return to the top
menu of [Self Check].

SM Appendices 3-41 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

System Maintenance

The “Back Key” in the message is actually the [EX1] key and the “Menu Key” in the message is actually
the [EX3] key.

• The values of “EVR_X”, “EVR_Y”, “X_MAX”, and “Y_MAX” are for internal processing and do
not indicate the positions or distance of the points touched. There is no problem unless there
is a huge difference between the values of the first calibration and the second calibration.

Wireless LAN Check

Checks the condition of the wireless LAN connection.
When you select the connected access point, the signal strength, IP address and other information are
displayed.

SM Appendices 3-42 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

System Maintenance

When the check is completed, press [Back] to return to the top menu of [Self Check].

Bluetooth Check
Check and configure the Bluetooth device connection.

When the check is completed, press [Back] to return to the top menu of [Self Check].

• You cannot switch Bluetooth to [ON] or [OFF] from the [Self Check] menu. Before checking the
Bluetooth device connection, specify [ON] for [Bluetooth] in [Screen Features] > [WIRELESS &
NETWORKS] > [Bluetooth].

SM Appendices 3-43 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

System Maintenance

3.1.5 Recovery Mode

The recovery mode menu is as follows. Ask your manager for details on how to enter Recovery mode.
Menu Description
reboot system Reboots the Android OS.
now
apply update from Updates the Cheetah System firmware by specifying the folder path.
sdcard
wipe data/factory Deletes all installed applications and all settings on the Cheetah.
reset
wipe cache Deletes all data that is stored on the cache partition. Currently, Cheetah does
partition not use the cache partition, so nothing happens when this menu item is
accessed.
wipe free area Deletes all data that is stored on the free partition. Cheetah stores the version
partition history on the free partition. When this menu item is selected, it will then
disappear.
wipe LegacyUI Deletes Legacy UI.
area
micon update Updates Keymicon by specifying the folder path.
from sdcard

• If [Update Firmware] is set to [Prohibit] in [System Settings] of the MFP, the control panel
cannot enter the recovery mode.
• Ask your manager for information on how to enter the recovery Mode.

3.1.6 Special Key Combinations

This section describes special key combinations for operations which required combinations of
hardware keys on the previous models.
Function Operation for previous models Operation for Smart Operation Panel
SSP (Super Login to SP mode, and then press an Login to SP mode, and then press an
Service) mode login SP mode item while holding down the SP mode item while holding down the
[#] key. EX3 key.
Resetting User In the User Tools screen, press a In the User Tools screen, press a
Tools User Tools category while holding User Tools category while holding
down the [#] key. down the EX3 key.
Available for: System Settings, Available for: System Settings,
Copier/Document Server Features, Copier/Document Server Features,
and Scanner Features. and Scanner Features.
System Reset Hold down the [*] and [#] keys Hold down the EX3 key and [#]

SM Appendices 3-44 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

System Maintenance

Function Operation for previous models Operation for Smart Operation Panel
simultaneously for 10 seconds. simultaneously for 10 seconds.
Resets the controller software. Resets the controller software of the
main machine.
Application Reset Hold down the [7] and [9] keys Hold down the EX3 key and [9]
simultaneously for 10 seconds. simultaneously for 10 seconds.
Resets a single application. Resets a single application.
Resetting User Press the [Reset] key and [Clear] key Hold down [Reset] for 2 seconds.
Code Authentication simultaneously. Returns to the User Code entry
Returns to the User Code entry screen.
screen.

SM Appendices 3-45 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

System Maintenance

3.2 SOFTWARE UPDATE

3.2.1 Updating the Smart Operation Panel
There are four methods to update the Smart Operation Panel. The method is different depending on
what you want to update.
6. Installation/update from an SD card
7. Package update
8. Installation/update from the eDC Server
9. Installation/update from Application Site
Update method Features Control Applications
panel
firmware
Installation/update Update using an SD card. Yes Yes
from an SD card • This is the only method to install an older
version of currently installed software.
• Enter the recovery mode to update the control
panel firmware.
• Use the installation screen in the control
panel’s service mode to update applications.
• You can install or update multiple applications
at once.
• You can also uninstall an application.
Package update Uses the Package update function of the GW+ Yes Yes
controller to update the software.
• The software is updated in the following order:
controller firmware, applications, and then the
control panel firmware.
• The procedure for updating the control panel
firmware is the same as when updating from
an SD card using Recovery mode.
Installation/update Downloads applications from the eDC Server for No Yes
from the eDC Server installation or update.
This method is mainly for paid applications. A
product key is required when an application is
installed for the first time.
Installation/update Installation and Updating of applications and Yes*1 Yes
from Application Site firmware update can be done from Application
Site. When administrator authentication is

SM Appendices 3-46 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

System Maintenance

Update method Features Control Applications

panel
firmware
enabled, an administrator privilege is required to
start Application Site. If you log in to the operation
panel service mode, however, you can use it with
CE privilege.
*1 Update can only be done by using a package file.
The following three methods can be used for updating the firmware.
• Update from an SD card (recovery mode)
• Package update
• Installation/update from Application Site
The following four methods can be used for updating an application.
• Installation/update from an SD card
• Package update
• Installation/update from the eDC Server
• Installation/update from Application Site

3.2.2 Installation/update from an SD card

Updating the Smart Operation Panel Firmware

Enter the recovery mode to update the firmware of the Smart Operation Panel.

• When [Quick] is selected for [Screen Startup Mode], the control panel cannot enter the
recovery mode. Change the startup mode to [Normal]. When update is completed, restore the
startup mode setting because the setting affects startup time.
• Shut down the MFP with [Normal] selected for [Screen Startup Mode], or shut it down using
the special shutdown procedure used for maintenance.
• If [Prohibit] is selected for [Update Firmware] in [System Settings], the machine cannot enter
Recovery mode. Ask the administrator of the MFP to change the setting.

Creating an SD card for firmware update

1. Download the update module “Cheetah System” from the Firmware Download Center.
2. Execute the downloaded file.
A file named “part number + suffix.zip” will be created.

• Do not unzip the created file.

3. Copy the “part number + suffix.zip” file to the root directory of the SD card.

SM Appendices 3-47 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

System Maintenance

Updating the firmware (for the Cheetah System)

1. Turn OFF the MFP.

• Shut down the MFP with [Normal] selected for [Screen Startup Mode], or shut it down
using the special shutdown procedure used for maintenance.
2. Insert the SD card into the SD card slot of the control panel and start up the MFP in Recovery
mode.

• Ask your manager for details on how to enter the recovery mode.
• In the recovery mode, key functions are shown on the screen. However, the key functions
for moving/selecting directories are different for executing an update. Check the key
functions while operating.
• Keys
When moving/selecting directories
When executing an update
[EX1]
Moves the cursor up.
Executes updating.
[EX2]
Moves the cursor down.
Cancels updating.
[EX3]
Selects the item.
3. Select “apply update from sdcard” in the “Android system recovery” screen, and then press the
[EX3] key.

SM Appendices 3-48 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

System Maintenance

4. The contents of the SD card is displayed. Select “part number + suffix.zip” with the [EX1] or [EX2]
key, and then press the [EX3] key.
Example: “D1961400A.zip”

5. The installation screen is displayed.

6. The version of the firmware installed in the control panel is displayed as “Current version” and the
version of the firmware saved on the SD card is displayed as “Update version”. Make sure that you
have the correct version.
7. When “Continue Update?” is displayed, press [OK] ([EX1] key).
The update process starts.

• To cancel the firmware update, press the [EX2] or [EX3] key.

SM Appendices 3-49 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

System Maintenance

8. When “Install from sdcard complete.” is displayed, select “reboot system now” and then press the
[EX1] key to reboot the system.

Installing/Updating an Application
Creating an SD card for update

1. Download the update modules from the Firmware Download Center.

2. Unzip the downloaded file.
3. Create a folder named “romdata” in the root directory of the SD card.
4. Put the unzipped file in the “romdata” folder.

Update procedure

1. Log in to the control panel in service mode.

2. Insert the SD card into the SD card slot of the control panel.
3. Select [Apps] > [Install] > [Install from SD Card].
4. Select the application you want to install or update, and then press [Install]
5. The installation or update results are displayed.
6. Check that the application is correctly installed or updated, and then press [reboot operation panel].

3.2.3 Package Update

This method uses the package update function to update the control panel firmware and/or
applications. The package update function is provided by the controller.
Update is done in the following order:
10. Controller firmware
11. Applications
12. Control panel firmware
If the control panel firmware has to be updated, the control panel starts in the recovery mode and the
firmware is automatically updated.
The control panel restarts when updating is completed. The result notification is processed after the
SM Appendices 3-50 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
System Maintenance

control panel restarts.

When Installation/Update Is Prohibited

If [Prohibit] is selected for [Update Firmware] in [System Settings], the execution key is grayed out and
installation/update cannot be executed.
When trying to update from a PC, updating fails and the result is recorded as “Failed”.

3.2.4 Installation/update from the eDC Server

Downloads applications from the eDC Server, and installs or updates them.
This method is mainly for paid applications. A product key is required when an application is installed for
the first time.

• Installation/activation/update of applications from the server can only be done in the service
mode.

Check Server Connect

1. Log in to the control panel’s service mode.
2. Select [Apps] > [Install].
3. Press [Check Server Connect] and make sure that “Connect Server Succeeded!” is displayed.

• The server address is stored in the firmware of the Smart Operation Panel.
• To connect to the server, the network settings of the MFP must be configured correctly.
For the required configuration, see the Field Service Manual of the MFP.
• If server connection fails, see Troubleshooting for error codes.

SM Appendices 3-51 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

System Maintenance

Installation
1. Log in to the control panel’s service mode.
2. Select [Apps] > [Install].
3. Select [Install from Server].
4. Enter the product key and press [Execute].

5. Follow the instructions shown on the screen.

• An application cannot be installed unless it is digitally signed by Ricoh.

Activation
1. Log in to the control panel’s service mode.
2. Select [Apps] > [Install].
3. Select [Activate Applications].
4. Select the application to be activated, and then enter the activation key and press [Execute].

5. Follow the instructions shown on the screen.

• Only charged applications have to be activated.

SM Appendices 3-52 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

System Maintenance

Update
1. Log in to the control panel’s service mode.
2. Select [Apps] > [Install].
3. Select [Update Applications].
4. Select the application to be updated, and then press [Check Update Status].
5. Follow the instructions shown on the screen.

3.2.5 Application Site

"Application Site" has been added to Screen Service mode. Field engineers can start up Application
Site to install or update applications or firmware without needing user administrator credentials.

This menu item opens Application Site by using the Web Browser NX app.

SM Appendices 3-53 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Troubleshooting

4. TROUBLESHOOTING
4.1 TROUBLESHOOTING
4.1.1 Software Update Errors

Errors that occur during application update from an SD card

Error message / screen Explanation Solution
display
Insert a correct SD card. - • Remove the SD card and insert it
again.
• Make sure that the directory of the
SD card is correct. You must
create the "app" folder in the root
directory of the SD card and put
the zip file in the "app" folder.
You are trying to install Displayed when you attempt Check the file, and select [OK] or
the same application with to update an application that [Cancel].
a different part number. Is is the same but has a different
it OK to continue? part number.
Some applications could Displayed in the following Restart the control panel and repeat
not be installed. cases. the update procedure.
• You attempted to update
a module (application) in
use.
• The application is
corrupted.
- - • Make sure that the directory of the
(The application you want SD card is correct. You must
to update is not displayed create the "app" folder in the root
in the list of applications.) directory of the SD card and put
the zip file in the "app" folder.
• Check the application file in the
SD card.

SM Appendices 4-54 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Troubleshooting

Errors that occur during update from the eDC Server

Error Explanation
code
101 Server connection error
102 Signature verification error
103 License error (for example, the product key was keyed in wrongly)
215 Dependency check error
Displayed when the control panel firmware version does not meet the installation
requirement of the application.
Example: The firmware version of the control panel is 1.02 and you attempted to install an
application that requires firmware version 1.03.
20X Other errors
Example of an error code display

• An additional 3-digit code may be displayed to indicate the details.

Example: 101-805

Errors that occur during remote (batch file) update

When the update is completed, a result report file (install_result_yyyymmddhhmm.txt) is created in the
same folder as the batch file.
The result report file shows the IP address of the MFP and whether the update process was successful
or not. “yyyymmddhhmm” shows the date and time according to the clock of the MFP.
Result Explanation
Succeed Updated the machine successfully.
Failed Failed to update the machine. An error code follows.
Not connected Failed to connect to the machine.
Can't get result Failed to obtain the result (occurs only with firmware updates).

Example of a result report file

SM Appendices 4-55 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289
Troubleshooting

• Name: install_result_201512041005.txt
• Contents:
192.168.0.100: Successful
192.168.0.102: Failed error:XX (XX indicates an error code.)
192.168.0.103: Not connected

Error codes

The meanings of error codes recorded after "error:" in the result file are as follows:

Error codes recorded during firmware update

Error code Explanation Access Log

-2 Invalid file Recorded
-3 The target application cannot be found. Recorded
-501 Installation has already been requested. Recorded (*1)
-602 Invalid signature Recorded
-603 Updating is prohibited. Recorded
-604 Failed to put the application offline. Not recorded
-610 Authentication failed. Not recorded
-699 Unknown error Recorded (*2)
-701 Version of the micro computer firmware is invalid. Recorded
-709 File structure error (invalid file) Recorded
-710 Writing failure Recorded

Error codes recorded during application update

Error code Explanation Access Log

-2 Invalid file Recorded
-3 The target application cannot be found. Recorded
-4 The storage capacity is not enough. Recorded
-12 The version of the Android application cannot be installed. Recorded
-602 Invalid signature Recorded
-603 Updating is prohibited. Recorded
-604 Failed to put the application offline. Not recorded
-610 Authentication failed. Not recorded
-699 Unknown error Recorded (*2)
*1 The error code recorded in the Access Log will be "223: machine-busy".
*2 If the error occurs during preparation for configuration change, it will not be recorded in the Access
Log.

SM Appendices 4-56 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Troubleshooting

• If the preparation for configuration change (putting the application offline, authentication, file
size check) cannot be carried out, an error code is displayed on the screen. However, it is not
recorded in the Access Log as a firmware update/installation error.

Error codes recorded in the Access Log

Error Error name Explanation Solution

code
49 fwu-prohibit Firmware update is prohibited. Enable firmware update, and repeat
the procedure.
60 other:E60 The HDD cannot be used. • Turn the main power OFF and
ON, and then repeat the
procedure.
• If the HDD is damaged, replace
it.
62 other:E62 The structure of the application or Prepare a valid package file.
control panel firmware in the
package is invalid.
221 terminate-fail Failed to terminate an application • If a job is under way in the
when attempting to update or target application, wait until the
uninstall it. job is finished, and then repeat
the procedure.
• Turn the main power OFF and
ON, and then repeat the
procedure.
222 signature- Failed to verify the signature Repeat the procedure using a valid
invalid attached to the application or signature.
firmware.
223 machine-busy Failed to execute installation • Wait a while and repeat the
because another function was being procedure.
used on the MFP. • Turn the main power OFF and
ON, and then repeat the
procedure.
224 capacity-lack The storage capacity is not enough. • Reduce the number of
applications to be installed.
• Uninstall unnecessary
applications.
225 download-fail The product ID is incorrect. Use a correct product key.
226 dependency- The control panel does not meet the Check the installation requirements

SM Appendices 4-57 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Troubleshooting

Error Error name Explanation Solution

code
check-fail installation requirements of the of the application. Update the
application. control panel as necessary.
227 license-invalid There are no remaining licenses. Use an unused product key to
The product key that you are trying activate the application.
to use has already been activated
for another device.
An invalid product key was used to Update the application using an
issue the license. activated product key.
The number of licenses issued has Deactivate the application, and then
exceeded the limit. activate it again.
The license has expired. The Use an unused product key to
product key being used is no longer activate the application.
valid.
The license contract is invalid. Use a valid product key to activate
the application.
228 file-not-found * The target firmware file cannot be • Turn the main power OFF and
found. ON, and then repeat the
procedure.
• Check the file in the SD card.
• Check the SD card slot. If there
is a problem with the hardware,
replace the control panel PCB.
229 file-invalid * The target update file is invalid. Repeat the procedure using a valid
Occurs in the following cases. file.
• Failed to decompress the file.
• Failed to obtain application
information.
• Failed to read the public key for
signature verification.
230 wrong-folder- The folder directory of the control Repeat the procedure using a valid
structure * panel firmware is invalid. directory.
231 write-fail * • Failed to write data when Turn the main power OFF and ON,
updating the control panel and then repeat the procedure. If
firmware. updating fails again, replace the
• There is a problem with the control panel.
hardware.

SM Appendices 4-58 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Troubleshooting

Error Error name Explanation Solution

code
232 deactivate-fail The application could not be • Check whether the network is
uninstalled because deactivation configured correctly.
failed. • If the server is under
• Failed to connect to the server. maintenance, wait a while and
• The license has not been repeat the procedure.
issued. • Check the activation status of
the application. If it has not
been activated, activate it.
233 uninstall-fail Failed to uninstall an application. Turn the main power OFF and ON,
and then repeat the procedure. If
updating fails again, replace the
control panel.
234 fixed-app You attempted to uninstall an Cancel uninstallation.
application that cannot be
uninstalled.
235 install-fail The target file is invalid, and the • Repeat the procedure using a
Android OS returns an error. valid file.
• If the same application has
already been installed, uninstall
it and then repeat the
procedure.
236 sdk- The Android SDK version required Check that the Android SDK version
incompatible by the application is not installed on required by the application is
the control panel. installed on the control panel.
237 server- Failed to connect to the eDC server. • Check the network connection
disconnect (SSL) settings.
• Check the proxy settings.
• If the server is under
maintenance, wait a while and
repeat the procedure.
255 panel-system * Software malfunction. Turn the main power OFF and ON,
and then repeat the procedure.
* These errors are not expected to occur.

SM Appendices 4-59 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

Troubleshooting

4.1.2 Errors That Occur When the Control Panel Downloads Data from
the Controller at Startup
Some of the graphic data used in the control panel display is model-specific. Model-specific
components are stored in the controller board of the MFP.
During startup, the control panel checks if it is necessary to update the model-specific data. If it is
necessary, the control panel downloads the data from the MFP controller board and installs it in the
control panel.
During update, a dialog appears to inform you that the settings are being changed. When the update
process is completed, a dialog indicates whether update was successful or not.
Error code Explanation
E1 An error has occurred when downloading data from the controller board of the MFP.
E2 An error has occurred when installing data on the control panel.
An additional error code is displayed after "E2".

SM Appendices 4-60 D284/D285/D286/D287/D288/D289

 D3B0
SPDF DF3100

Latest Release: -
Initial Release: November, 2016
Copyright (c) 2016 Ricoh Co.,Ltd.

Rev. 08/12/2021
 SPDF DF3100 (D3B0)
TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ............................................. 1

1.1 EXTERIOR COVERS ................................................................................................... 1
1.1.1 ADF FRONT COVER ......................................................................................... 1
1.1.2 ADF REAR COVER............................................................................................ 3
1.1.3 FEED COVER .................................................................................................... 4
1.2 FEED UNIT................................................................................................................... 5
1.2.1 ORIGINAL FEED UNIT ....................................................................................... 5
1.3 SENSORS, FEELER, AND SWITCHES ........................................................................ 6
1.3.1 ORIGINAL REGISTRATION SENSOR ............................................................... 6
1.3.2 ORIGINAL EXIT SENSOR .................................................................................. 7
1.3.3 SEPARATION SENSOR, SKEW CORRECTION SENSOR ................................ 9
1.3.4 ORIGINAL WIDTH SENSOR, INTERVAL SENSOR.......................................... 10
1.3.5 ORIGINAL LENGTH SENSORS ....................................................................... 11
A4 LEF, LT LEF Sensor ........................................................................................ 12
1.3.6 APS FEELER ................................................................................................... 12
1.3.7 ADF LIFT INTERLOCK SWITCH, LIFT SENSOR ............................................. 13
1.3.8 ORIGINAL SET SENSOR ................................................................................. 14
1.3.9 BOTTOM PLATE HP SENSOR......................................................................... 15
1.3.10 BOTTOM PLATE POSITION SENSOR............................................................. 15
1.3.11 ADF FEED COVER INTERLOCK SWITCH, PICK-UP ROLLER HP SENSOR .. 16
1.4 MOTORS .................................................................................................................... 18
1.4.1 ADF ENTRANCE MOTOR................................................................................ 18
1.4.2 ADF SCANNING MOTOR ................................................................................ 19
1.4.3 ADF EXIT MOTOR ........................................................................................... 20
1.4.4 ADF BOTTOM PLATE LIFT MOTOR ................................................................ 22
1.4.5 ADF PICK-UP ROLLER LIFT MOTOR, ADF TRANSPORT MOTOR................. 23
1.4.6 ADF FEED MOTOR.......................................................................................... 24
1.5 ROLLERS AND BELTS............................................................................................... 26
1.5.1 PICK-UP ROLLER, TRANSPORT BELT ........................................................... 26
1.5.2 ADF SEPARATION ROLLER ............................................................................ 28
1.6 BOARDS .................................................................................................................... 29
1.6.1 ADF CONTROLLER BOARD ........................................................................... 29
1.7 CIS UNIT .................................................................................................................... 30

SM i D3B0
 1.7.1 CIS UNIT .......................................................................................................... 30
Reinstallation........................................................................................................ 32
1.7.2 CIS WHITE ROLLER CLEANING ..................................................................... 33
1.8 ADJUSTMENT AFTER ADF REPLACEMENT ............................................................ 34
1.8.1 CHECKING THE VERTICAL REGISTRATION.................................................. 34
1.8.2 CHECKING THE HORIZONTAL REGISTRATION ............................................ 34
1.8.3 CHECKING SKEW ........................................................................................... 35
1.8.4 CHECKING MAGNIFICATION .......................................................................... 35
1.8.5 PLATEN ADJUSTMENT ................................................................................... 35

2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS............................................................ 37
2.1 SPDF DF3100 (D3B0) ................................................................................................ 37
2.1.1 CHANGES FROM THE PREVIOUS MACHINE ................................................ 37
2.1.2 PARTS LAYOUT ............................................................................................... 41
Cross-Section of the ADF Unit .............................................................................. 41
Scanning Sequence ............................................................................................. 42
2.1.3 MECHANISM ................................................................................................... 43
Motors .................................................................................................................. 43
Original Pick-up .................................................................................................... 44
Bottom Plate Lift ................................................................................................... 45
Original Feed and Separation Mechanism ............................................................ 46
Skew Correction Mechanism ................................................................................ 47
Original Size Detection ......................................................................................... 48
Original Transport ................................................................................................. 50
Original Scanning ................................................................................................. 53
Jam Detection ...................................................................................................... 54
2.1.4 ADF SC ERRORS ............................................................................................ 57
2.1.5 SP6-901-001 (SETTING TO GIVE PRIORITY TO STACKABILITY) .................. 59

D3B0 ii SM
READ THIS FIRST

Symbols, Abbreviations and Trademarks

Symbols, Abbreviations
This manual uses several symbols and abbreviations. The meaning of those symbols and
abbreviations are as follows:

Symbol What it means

Clip ring

Screw

Connector

Clamp

E-ring

Flat Flexible Cable

Timing Belt

SEF Short Edge Feed [A]

LEF Long Edge Feed [B]

K Black

C Cyan

M Magenta

Y Yellow

B/W, BW Black and White

FC Full color
Trademarks
Adobe, Acrobat, PageMaker, PostScript, and PostScript 3 are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
and any use of such marks by Ricoh Company, Ltd. is under license.
Firefox and Thunderbird are registered trademarks of the Mozilla Foundation.
Google, Android, and Chrome are trademarks of Google Inc.
iOS® is a registered trademark or trademark of Cisco Systems, Inc. and/or its affiliates in the
United States and certain other countries.
Java is a registered trademark of Oracle and/or its affiliates.
JAWS® is a registered trademark of Freedom Scientific, Inc., St. Petersburg, Florida and/or other
countries.
Kerberos is a trademark of the Massachusetts Institute of Technology (MIT).
Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds.
Macintosh, OS X, Bonjour, Safari, and TrueType are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the
U.S. and other countries.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Server, Windows Vista, Internet Explorer, and Outlook are either
registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corp. in the United States and/or other
countries.
PictBridge is a trademark.
QR Code is a registered trademark of DENSO WAVE INCORPORATED in Japan and in other
countries.
"Red Hat" is a registered trademark of Red Hat, Inc.
The SD and SD logo are trademarks of SD-3C, LLC.
UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group.
UPnP is a trademark of UPnP Implementers Corporation.
This product includes RSA BSAFE® Cryptographic software of EMC Corporation. RSA and
BSAFE are registered trademarks or trademarks of EMC Corporation in the United States and
other countries.
The proper names of Internet Explorer 6, 7, and 8 are as follows:
 Microsoft® Internet Explorer® 6
 Windows® Internet Explorer® 7
 Windows® Internet Explorer® 8
The proper names of the Windows operating systems are as follows:
 The product names of Windows Vista are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Ultimate
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Business
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Home Premium
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Home Basic
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Enterprise
 The product names of Windows 7 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Home Premium
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Professional
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Ultimate
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Enterprise
 The product names of Windows 8 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 8
Microsoft® Windows® 8 Pro
Microsoft® Windows® 8 Enterprise
 The product names of Windows 8.1 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 8.1
Microsoft® Windows® 8.1 Pro
Microsoft® Windows® 8.1 Enterprise
 The product names of Windows 10 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 10 Home Premium
Microsoft® Windows® 10 Pro
Microsoft® Windows® 10 Enterprise
 Microsoft® Windows® 10 Education
 The product names of Windows Server 2003 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 Standard Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 Enterprise Edition
 The product names of Windows Server 2003 R2 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2 Standard Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2 Enterprise Edition
 The product names of Windows Server 2008 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 Standard
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 Enterprise
 The product names of Windows Server 2008 R2 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 R2 Standard
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 R2 Enterprise
 The product names of Windows Server 2012 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 Foundation
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 Essentials
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 Standard
 The product names of Windows Server 2012 R2 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 R2 Foundation
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 R2 Essentials
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 R2 Standard
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of
their respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights to those marks.
Microsoft product screen shots reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation.
 Exterior Covers

1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

SPDF DF3100
(D3B0)
1.1 EXTERIOR COVERS

1.1.1 ADF FRONT COVER

1. Open the feed cover [A].

2. Slide the ADF front cover [A] to the left.

 Check the position of the hooks in the photo below before removing.

SM 1 D3B0
Exterior Covers

D3B0 2 SM
 Exterior Covers

1.1.2 ADF REAR COVER

SPDF DF3100
(D3B0)
1. Open the feed cover.
2. Cover [A].

3. Lift off the rear cover [A].

 Check the position of the hooks before removing.

SM 3 D3B0
Exterior Covers

1.1.3 FEED COVER

1. ADF front cover (page 1)
2. ADF rear cover (page 3)
3. Feed cover [A].

D3B0 4 SM
 Feed Unit

1.2 FEED UNIT

SPDF DF3100
(D3B0)
1.2.1 ORIGINAL FEED UNIT
1. Open the feed cover.
2. Remove the snap-fit [A].

3. Original feed unit [A] (Pull the original feed unit, remove the back side of the shaft.
Then, remove the bushing in the foreground.)

SM 5 D3B0
Sensors, Feeler, and Switches

1.3 SENSORS, FEELER, AND SWITCHES

1.3.1 ORIGINAL REGISTRATION SENSOR

1. Entrance lower guide [A].

2. Scanning guide plate [A].

3. Original registration sensor [A] along with the bracket.

4. Original Registration Sensor [A].

D3B0 6 SM
 Sensors, Feeler, and Switches

SPDF DF3100
(D3B0)
1.3.2 ORIGINAL EXIT SENSOR
1. Entrance lower guide [A].

2. Scanning guide plate [A].

3. Open the white cover [A].

SM 7 D3B0
Sensors, Feeler, and Switches

4. Remove the original exit sensor [B], which is mounted on the upper guide [A].

5. Remove the original exit sensor [B] from the upper guide [A].

D3B0 8 SM
 Sensors, Feeler, and Switches

1.3.3 SEPARATION SENSOR, SKEW CORRECTION SENSOR

SPDF DF3100
(D3B0)
1. Feed upper guide [A] in the feed cover.

2. Remove the sensors along with the bracket [A].

3. Separation Sensor [A] and Skew Correction Sensor [B].

SM 9 D3B0
Sensors, Feeler, and Switches

1.3.4 ORIGINAL WIDTH SENSOR, INTERVAL SENSOR

1. Feed cover (page 4)
2. Guide plate [A].

3. Interval sensor [A].

4. Remove the original width sensor guide plate [A].

5. Remove the five original width sensors [B].

D3B0 10 SM
 Sensors, Feeler, and Switches

1.3.5 ORIGINAL LENGTH SENSORS

SPDF DF3100
1. Raise the document tray [A], then remove the lower cover [B].

(D3B0)
2. Original Length Sensors
[A] B5
[B] A4
[C] LG

SM 11 D3B0
Sensors, Feeler, and Switches

A4 LEF, LT LEF Sensor

1. ADF front cover (page 1)
2. Remove the screw and raise the original tray [A].

3. A4 LEF/LT LEF Sensor [A].

1.3.6 APS FEELER

1. ADF rear cover (page 3)
2. APS Feeler [A].

D3B0 12 SM
 Sensors, Feeler, and Switches

1.3.7 ADF LIFT INTERLOCK SWITCH, LIFT SENSOR

SPDF DF3100
1. ADF Controller Board (page 29)

(D3B0)
2. ADF lift interlock switch [A] along with the bracket ( x 3, x 2)

3. Lift Sensor [A] along with the bracket.

SM 13 D3B0
Sensors, Feeler, and Switches

1.3.8 ORIGINAL SET SENSOR

1. ADF front cover (page 1)
2. Remove the screw and raise the original tray [A].

3. Original set sensor [A].

D3B0 14 SM
 Sensors, Feeler, and Switches

1.3.9 BOTTOM PLATE HP SENSOR

SPDF DF3100
(D3B0)
1. Original feed unit (page 5)
2. ADF front cover (page 1)
3. Remove the screw and raise the original tray [A].

4. Bottom plate HP sensor [A].

1.3.10 BOTTOM PLATE POSITION SENSOR

1. ADF rear cover (page 3)
2. Original feed unit (page 5)
3. Bottom plate position sensor [A].

SM 15 D3B0
Sensors, Feeler, and Switches

1.3.11 ADF FEED COVER INTERLOCK SWITCH, PICK-UP ROLLER

HP SENSOR
1. ADF rear cover (page 3)
2. Remove the ADF feed cover interlock switch [A] from the retaining bracket.

3. ADF feed cover interlock switch [A].

D3B0 16 SM
 Sensors, Feeler, and Switches

4. Pick-up roller HP sensor [A] along with the bracket.

SPDF DF3100
(D3B0)

SM 17 D3B0
Motors

1.4 MOTORS

1.4.1 ADF ENTRANCE MOTOR

1. ADF rear cover (page 3)
2. ADF entrance motor [A] along with the frame.

3. ADF entrance motor [A].

D3B0 18 SM
 Motors

1.4.2 ADF SCANNING MOTOR

SPDF DF3100
(D3B0)
1. ADF entrance motor along with the frame (page 18)
2. ADF scanning motor [A] along with the bracket.

3. ADF scanning motor [A].

SM 19 D3B0
Motors

1.4.3 ADF EXIT MOTOR

1. Remove the rear cover. (page 3)
2. The exit motor is on the back of the machine behind the vertical stay.

3. Remove the ADF control board.

4. Remove the anti-static plate.

5. Unfasten the motor.

6. Disconnect the drive belt.

D3B0 20 SM
 Motors

SPDF DF3100
(D3B0)
7. Disconnect the motor and remove it.

SM 21 D3B0
Motors

1.4.4 ADF BOTTOM PLATE LIFT MOTOR

1. ADF entrance motor along with the frame. (page 18)
2. ADF bottom plate lift motor [A].

D3B0 22 SM
 Motors

1.4.5 ADF PICK-UP ROLLER LIFT MOTOR, ADF TRANSPORT

SPDF DF3100
MOTOR

(D3B0)
1. ADF rear cover (page 3)
2. Frame (black) [A].

3. ADF pick-up roller lift motor [A].

4. ADF transport motor [A] along with the bracket.

SM 23 D3B0
Motors

5. ADF transport motor [A].

1.4.6 ADF FEED MOTOR

1. ADF rear cover (page 3)
2. Remove the fixing screws of the frame (black) [A].

D3B0 24 SM
 Motors

3. ADF entrance motor along with the frame (page 18)

SPDF DF3100
4. ADF feed motor [A] along with the bracket.

(D3B0)
5. ADF feed motor [A].

SM 25 D3B0
Rollers and Belts

1.5 ROLLERS AND BELTS

1.5.1 PICK-UP ROLLER, TRANSPORT BELT

1. Remove original feed unit. (page 5)
2. Slide bushing [A], and then remove the pick-up roller unit [B].

 At re-assembly, make sure that the tab on the front guide plate [A] is above the
pick-up roller [B].

3. Pick-up roller cover [A] and pick-up roller [B].

D3B0 26 SM
 Rollers and Belts

4. Lift the left and right sides of the feed belt holder [A], then remove it.

SPDF DF3100
(D3B0)
5. Remove the feed belt [B] from the feed belt holder [A].

SM 27 D3B0
Rollers and Belts

1.5.2 ADF SEPARATION ROLLER

1. Open the feed cover.
2. Original feed unit (page 5)
3. ADF separation roller cover [A].

4. ADF separation roller [A] and torque limiter clutch [B] (snaps off)

D3B0 28 SM
 Boards

1.6 BOARDS

SPDF DF3100
(D3B0)
1.6.1 ADF CONTROLLER BOARD
1. ADF rear cover (page 3)
2. ADF controller board [A].

SM 29 D3B0
CIS Unit

1.7 CIS UNIT

1.7.1 CIS UNIT

1. Original Feed Unit (page 5)
2. ADF Separation Roller (page 28)
3. ADF front cover (page 1)
4. Raise the ADF and open the white cover [A]. This will prevent scratching the CIS glass
when the unit is removed.

5. Guide plate (large) [A]

6. Guide plate (small) [A].

7. Unfasten the guide plate [A].

8. Remove the guide plate with Mylar [B] attached.

D3B0 30 SM
 CIS Unit

SPDF DF3100
(D3B0)
9. At the front, disconnect the timing belt.
10. Unfasten the Mylar plate and then remove it.

11. Disconnect the CIS unit [A].

12. Slowly, pull the CIS unit [B] out of the ADF.

13. Lay the CIS unit on a flat, clean surface, with the glass side facing up.

SM 31 D3B0
CIS Unit

Reinstallation
1. Before reinstallation, clean the surface of the CIS lens with a lens cloth.

 Never clean the surface of the CIS with tissue or any type of organic solvent.
2. Two pegs on the rear end of the CIS [A] fit into two holes [B] at the back of the ADF
unit.

3. To re-install the CIS, set the CIS in its channel so it is perfectly flat.
4. Slowly, push it to the rear until the pegs slide into the holes.

5. Follow the correct arrangement of the drive belt when you re-attach it.

6. If you have replaced the CIS unit, do these SP three codes in the following order:
 SP4-730-001 (FROM ADF Factory Setting: CIS Parameter)
Writes the initial value of the scan parameter in FROM.

D3B0 32 SM
 CIS Unit

 SP4-730-004 (FROM Data Update)

SPDF DF3100
Writes the SP value of the scan parameter in FROM.

(D3B0)
 SP4-730-002 (FROM Main Factory Setting Execution ON/OFF)
Copies the parameters written in FROM to the engine board in the MFP.

1.7.2 CIS WHITE ROLLER CLEANING

Frequently inspect the CIS white roller. A dirty or incorrectly installed white roller will cause the
machine to issue SC152-00 (White Level Error: Back Side).
1. Open the ADF.
2. At the upper left corner, release the white plate.

3. Swing the roller assembly away from the ADF [A].

4. White rotating the white roller by its gear, use a dry, clean cloth to wipe the surface of
the roller clean [B].

SM 33 D3B0
Adjustment after ADF Replacement

1.8 ADJUSTMENT AFTER ADF REPLACEMENT

 If the ADF is being replaced, do SP4-730-001, SP4-730-004 and SP4-730-002 (in that
order) after the new ADF has been installed.

1.8.1 CHECKING THE VERTICAL REGISTRATION

SP6-006-001 (ADF Adjustment Side-to-Side Regist: Front)
SP6-006-002 (ADF Adjustment Side-to-Side Regist: Rear)
1. Create an original as shown in the following picture.

The large white arrow indicates the direction of feed.

2. Copy the original and make sure that the position of the line [A] is within 0±1mm
3. If not within the standard, adjust with the SP modes.

1.8.2 CHECKING THE HORIZONTAL REGISTRATION

SP6-006-010 (ADF Adjustment L-Edge Regist (1-Pass): Front)
SP6-006-011 (ADF Adjustment L-Edge Regist (1-Pass): Rear)
1. Copy the original and make sure that the position of the line [B] is within 0±2mm.
2. If not within the standard, adjust with the SP modes.

D3B0 34 SM
 Adjustment after ADF Replacement

1.8.3 CHECKING SKEW

SPDF DF3100
(D3B0)
1. Make sure that the difference between both end positions of the line [A] that you wrote
on the original (see above) is within 0±2mm.
2. If not within the standard, change the position of the fixing screw [A] to the long hole
[B] at the right hinge.

1.8.4 CHECKING MAGNIFICATION

1. Copy the original and make sure that the length of the line [B] that you wrote on the
original (see above) is within 100±1mm.
2. If not within the standard, adjust with the SP mode.
 SP6-017-001 (DF Magnification Adj.)

1.8.5 PLATEN ADJUSTMENT

1. Open the ADF and remove the white cover [A].

2. Put the white cover [A] in the correct position on the exposure glass, aligning it with
the glass cover [B] and the rear scale [C].

SM 35 D3B0
Adjustment after ADF Replacement

3. Close the ADF [A] slowly and attach the ADF to the white cover [B] with the hook and
loop fastener.

D3B0 36 SM
 SPDF DF3100 (D3B0)

2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS

SPDF DF3100
(D3B0)
2.1 SPDF DF3100 (D3B0)

2.1.1 CHANGES FROM THE PREVIOUS MACHINE

1. CIS mis-installation prevention
To prevent installing the wrong kind of CIS in the DF3100, a blue label [A] is attached to the
CIS. Check that the color on this label is the same as the marking [B], to prevent installing the
wrong CIS.

 [A] (Blue label): CIS for DF3100

 [B] (Orange label): CIS for other machines

 If the wrong CIS is installed, JAM001 will occur if sheet-through scanning is done.
When JAM001 continues three times, SC151 or SC152 will occur.
2. Back curl "U" folding prevention
To prevent the originals from folding when picking up paper that is curled upward, the slope of
the paper feed guide [A] has been changed.

SM 37 D3B0
SPDF DF3100 (D3B0)

3. Smaller original exit motor

Changed the original exit motor to a next generation motor [A] with a smaller size.

4. Addition of fire prevention enclosure

To prevent fire spreading from the CIS [A] and the DF main board, a fire prevention enclosure
(shown by the red lines) has been added.
 CIS [A]

D3B0 38 SM
 SPDF DF3100 (D3B0)

SPDF DF3100
(D3B0)
ADF control board

5. Addition of cushioning to the outer cover

Cushioning has been added to the DF cover to reduce noise.
[A]: DF top cover, [B]: DF rear cover, [C]: Original transport guide

SM 39 D3B0
SPDF DF3100 (D3B0)

D3B0 40 SM
 SPDF DF3100 (D3B0)

2.1.2 PARTS LAYOUT

SPDF DF3100
(D3B0)
Cross-Section of the ADF Unit

No, Part No. Part

1 Feed Belt 13 CIS

2 Bottom Plate Position Sensor 14 Original Exit Sensor

3 Pick-up Roller 15 Scanning guide plate

4 Original Set Sensor 16 Sheet-through exposure glass

5 Original Tray 17 Original Registration Sensor

6 Original Length Sensors 18 Scanning Entrance Roller

7 Output Tray 19 Interval Sensor

8 Lift Sensor 20 Original Width Sensors

9 Bottom Plate HP Sensor 21 Skew Correction Sensor

10 Exposure Glass 22 Separation Sensor

11 Exit Roller 23 ADF Separation Roller

12 CIS White Roller 24 ADF Lift Interlock Switch

SM 41 D3B0
SPDF DF3100 (D3B0)

Scanning Sequence
 Original Pick-up. The pick-up roller picks up the leading edge of original.
 Original Feed and Separation. The feed belt and reverse roller feed the originals and
prevent double-feeds.
 Original size detection. 9 original size sensors, 5 for width and 4 for length, detect the
original size on the original tray.
 Original Scanning. A color CIS unit scans the reverse side of the originals (both sides are
scanned in one pass).

D3B0 42 SM
 SPDF DF3100 (D3B0)

2.1.3 MECHANISM

SPDF DF3100
(D3B0)
Motors

No. Part

1 Relay Motor

2 Entrance Motor

3 Feed Motor

4 Pick-up Motor

5 Tray Lift Motor

6 Exit Motor

7 Transport Motor

SM 43 D3B0
SPDF DF3100 (D3B0)

Original Pick-up
Paper Feed
When an original is placed on the original tray, its leading edge raises the feeler of the original set
sensor and the sensor detects the original.
Pick-up Roller
 When there is no original on the original tray, the pick-up roller [C] swings up to the limit of its
vertical movement.
 To lower the pick-up roller, the pick-up roller motor [A] rotates the lift cam [E] which lowers the
pick-up arm [D] and the pick-up roller.
 When the pick-up roller is lowered, the pick-up roller motor [A] switches on.
 When the actuator switches off the bottom plate position sensor [B], the pick-up roller motor
goes off, and then the lift cam [E] holds the roller up.

Pick-up Roller Down Timing

The pick-up roller lowers:
 When an original (or stack of originals) is set on the original table.
 When the trailing edge of the original passes the sensor (but, it does not lower for the last
original).
 For A4/LT LEF when the leading edge reaches the registration sensor.
Pick-up Motor On/Off Timing
The pick-up motor switches ON:
 When the original set sensor detects the leading edge of the original.
 Just after the machine is turned on
The pick-up motor switches OFF:
 When the original feed cover is open.
 When an original jams in the ADF paper path.

D3B0 44 SM
 SPDF DF3100 (D3B0)

Bottom Plate Lift

SPDF DF3100
 When an original is set on the original tray, after the pick-up roller drops, the bottom plate

(D3B0)
position sensor goes off, and then the plate lift motor [A] goes on and raises lift lever [B] which
raises the bottom plate.
 The actuator above the pick-roller holder switches on the bottom plate position sensor (see
the previous diagram), and this turns the plate lift motor [A] off so the stack is positioned at the
correct feed position.
 During scanning with the ADF, when the top of the stack becomes too low, the pick-up roller
drops low enough to turn the bottom plate position sensor off, which switches the lift motor [A]
on again and raises the stack until once again it is at the paper feed position.
 This mechanism performs continuously and keeps the top of the stack at the correct feed
height for original stacks of up to 220 sheets (81.4 g/m2).
 At the end of the job, the original table descends under its own weight as far as the bottom
plate HP sensor [C].

SM 45 D3B0
SPDF DF3100 (D3B0)

Original Feed and Separation Mechanism

 A feed belt [A] and ADF separation roller [C] comprise the FRR original separation
mechanism.
 If more than one original feeds between the nip of the feed roller and ADF separation roller,
when the pick-up roller [B] picks up the front edge of the original, the rotation of the ADF
separation roller [C] reverses immediately.
 This sends the bottom sheet back into the tray while the sheet above continues to feed
normally.

 When more than one original feeds, this increases torque above the limit of the spring loaded
torque limiter which reverses the rotation of the ADF separation roller against the rotation of
the feed belt above.
 The bottom sheet reverse feeds while the sheet above continues to feed into the paper path.

D3B0 46 SM
 SPDF DF3100 (D3B0)

Skew Correction Mechanism

SPDF DF3100
(D3B0)
 After the original feeds, the skew correction sensor detects its leading edge, and stops the
rotation of the feed motor for a prescribed number of pulses.
 The leading edge hits and straightens against the stationary roller to correct skew.
 If the original is small (B6, A5, B5, HLT) (or when duplex scanning regardless of paper size),
when the interval sensor [E] detects the leading edge of the original, it stops the pre-scanning
roller [D] for a prescribed number of pulses, long enough for the original to buckle against the
stationary roller and correct skew.

No. Part

A Original Width Sensors

B Skew Correction Sensor

C Entrance Roller

D Scanning Entrance Roller

E Interval Sensor

 You can turn on SP6020-001 (ADF Contact Mode In/Out) to enable skew correction at both
the entrance roller above as well as the pre-scanning roller below for all paper sizes but this
may slow down the speed of original feeding.

SM 47 D3B0
SPDF DF3100 (D3B0)

Original Size Detection

 When the leading edge of the original reaches the interval sensor, the machine determines
the width from the readings of the 5 original width sensors.
 The length of the original is determined by the readings of the 3 original length sensors under
the original table and one sensor on the bottom plate.
 These two arrays of sensors are used to determine the size of the originals.

No. Part

1 Original Length Sensor A4/LT LEF

2 Original Length Sensor B5

3 Original Length Sensor A4

4 Original Length Sensor LG

5 Original Width Sensor 5

6 Original Width Sensor 4

7 Original Width Sensor 3

8 Original Width Sensor 2

9 Original Width Sensor 1

D3B0 48 SM
 SPDF DF3100 (D3B0)

SPDF DF3100
Size (W x L) Width Sensors Length Sensors

(D3B0)
1 2 3 4 5 A4 LEF B5 A4 LG

A3(297x420) ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON

B4(257x364) ON ON ON --- --- ON ON ON ON

A4 SEF (210x297) ON ON --- --- --- ON ON ON -

A4 LEF (297x210) ON ON ON ON ON --- --- --- ---

A4 SEF (210x297) ON --- --- --- --- ON ON --- ---

A4 LEF (297x210) ON ON ON --- --- --- --- --- ---

A4 SEF (210x297) --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

A4 LEF (297x210) ON --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

DLT SEF (11"x17") ON ON ON ON --- ON ON ON ON

DLT SEF (11"x17") ON ON ON ON --- ON ON ON ON

8 1/2"x11" SEF (LT) ON ON --- --- --- ON ON --- ---

11"x8 1/2" LEF (LT) ON ON ON ON --- --- --- --- ---

 11"x17" and 11"x15" are detected as the same size, so you need to select one or the
other with SP6016-001 (Original Size Determination Priority) to choose whichever you
are using.

SM 49 D3B0
SPDF DF3100 (D3B0)

Original Transport
 At the beginning of the job, the original feed motor switches on and rotates the pick-up roller,
feed belt, and reverse roller to feed the original into the original feed path.
 The original is fed to the entrance roller as it leaves the original tray. Original skew is
corrected at the entrance roller.

No. Part

A Feed Motor

B Feed Belt

C Pick-up Roller

D ADF Separation Roller

E Entrance Roller

F Separation Sensor

 After skew is corrected at the entrance roller, the entrance motor [G] and transport motor [H]
rotate the rollers in the original path and feed the original to the scanning section below.

D3B0 50 SM
 SPDF DF3100 (D3B0)

SPDF DF3100
(D3B0)
No. Part

G Entrance Motor

H Relay Motor

I Transport Roller

 When the interval sensor [M] detects the original, the transport motor [K] turns on and rotates
the white roller [J] and feeds the original through the scan unit.
 After rotation of the entrance roller, the entrance motor speeds up slightly to reduce the gap
between the trailing edge of the original in the scanning unit and the leading edge of the next
original in the path.
 If this were allowed to continue, the differences in roller rotation speed could cause the
originals to bend or buckle in the original path around the pre-scanning roller.
 To avoid this, when the interval sensor detects the leading edge of an original it slows the
rotation of the scanning belt and the speed of the original in the nip of the pre-scanning roller
slows.

SM 51 D3B0
SPDF DF3100 (D3B0)

 When the original exit sensor [Q] detects the leading edge of the original, the exit motor [P]
switches on and rotates the exit roller [O] which feeds the original out onto the original output
tray.

D3B0 52 SM
 SPDF DF3100 (D3B0)

Original Scanning

SPDF DF3100
(D3B0)
This machine has a color CIS (Contact Image Sensor) so that it scan both sides of an original at
the same time.

No. Part

A ADF

B White Roller

C Scanner LEDs (Exposure Lamps)

SM 53 D3B0
SPDF DF3100 (D3B0)

Jam Detection

No. Part

1 Skew Correction Sensor

2 Separation Sensor

3 Original Exit Sensor

4 Registration Sensor

5 Interval Sensor

D3B0 54 SM
 SPDF DF3100 (D3B0)

SPDF DF3100
Jams are detected by the 5 sensors listed above. The detection conditions are shown in the table

(D3B0)
below.

Jam Display Jam Name Detection Condition

P1 Separation sensor late jam Feed motor on but leading edge

failed to arrive after motor on
long enough to feed 224 mm.

P1 Skew correction sensor late jam Leading edge failed to arrive

after separation sensor
detection and enough time
elapsed for the original to feed
46 mm.

P1 Interval sensor late jam Leading edge failed to arrive

after entrance motor started and
remained on long enough for the
original to feed 172 mm.

P! Registration sensor late jam Original failed to arrive after it

was detected by the interval
sensor and enough time elapsed
for the original to feed 96 mm.

P2 Original exit sensor late jam Original failed to arrive after it

was detected by the registration
sensor and enough time elapsed
for it to feed 130 mm.

P1 Separation sensor lag jam After the entrance roller started

to pull the original out of the
original tray after initial feeding,
the original failed to move based
on the calculations below.

SM 55 D3B0
SPDF DF3100 (D3B0)

A4/LT L1 L2 L3 Std.

Not Not Not Not 226.8

Detected Not Not Not 253.8

- Detected Not Not 291

- - Detected Not 320

- - - Detected 432

However, in some cases the operator may have specified another

length longer than the standard value and that value will be used as
standard (Std.).

P1 Skew correction sensor lag jam After the separation sensor

detected the trailing edge, the
trailing edge was still detected
after enough time had elapsed
for the original to feed 46 mm.

P! Interval sensor lag jam After the transport motor turned

on, the trailing edge of the
original was not detected after
enough time had elapsed for the
original to feed 82 mm.

P2 Registration sensor lag jam After the interval sensor

detected the trailing edge, the
trailing edge was still detected
after enough time had elapsed
for the original to feed 93 mm.

P2 Original exit sensor late lag After the registration sensor

detected the trailing edge, the
trailing edge was still detected
after enough time had elapsed
for the original to feed 130 mm.

D3B0 56 SM
 SPDF DF3100 (D3B0)

2.1.4 ADF SC ERRORS

SPDF DF3100
(D3B0)
SC Error Name Probable Cause

700-01* ADF bottom plate lift motor  No output from bottom plate position
error sensor
 No output from bottom plate HP sensor
 Bottom plate motor not operating
 ADF main board problem

700-02* ADF original pick-up motor  No signal from the pickup HP sensor
error because sensor harness, connector
loose, broken, defective.
 Pick-up HP sensor defective
 Pick-up motor harness, connector, is
loose, broken, defective.
 Pick-up motor defective.
 ADF main board defective

700-04* ADF feed motor error  Paper jammed in paper path

 Motor overload due to blockage
 Motor harness loose, broken, defective
 Motor bracket, motor installed
incorrectly
 Feed motor defective

700-05* ADF entrance motor error  Paper jammed in paper path

 Motor overload due to blockage
 Motor harness loose, broken, defective
 Motor bracket, motor installed
incorrectly
 Entrance motor defective

700-06* ADF transport motor error  Paper jammed in paper path

 Motor overload due to blockage
 Motor harness loose, broken, defective
 Motor bracket, motor installed
incorrectly
 Transport motor defective

SM 57 D3B0
SPDF DF3100 (D3B0)

SC Error Name Probable Cause

700-07* ADF Scanning Motor  Paper jammed in paper path

 Motor overload due to blockage
 Motor harness loose, broken, defective
 Motor bracket, motor installed
incorrectly
 Scanning motor defective

700-09* ADF exit motor error  Paper jammed in paper path

 Motor overload due to blockage
 Motor harness loose, broken, defective
 Motor bracket, motor installed
incorrectly
 Exit motor defective

702-04 ADF protection circuit error 4  Defective motor or harness on the

interlock circuit.

702-05 ADF protection circuit error 5  Interlock power circuit harness, switch
is loose, broken, defective.
 Motor harness, connector is loose,
broken, or defective.
 Motor is defective.

151-00 Black level error: Back side  CIS defective

152-00 White level error: Back side  ADF CIS device defective
 CIS white roller background or white
plate damaged
 CIS dirty or installed incorrectly

154-00 Scanner communication  Harness between the ADF PCB and

error: Back side CIS is loose, broken, defective
 ASIC in CIS is defective
 FROM in CIS is defective

*The machine issues a jam alert for first two occurrences, and then issues the SC code at the third
occurrence. To recover, cycle the machine off/on.

D3B0 58 SM
 SPDF DF3100 (D3B0)

2.1.5 SP6-901-001 (SETTING TO GIVE PRIORITY TO STACKABILITY)

SPDF DF3100
(D3B0)
To improve the alignment of the delivered originals, select to give priority to stackability in the
following SP. This will reduce the originals’ delivery speed and improve their stackability.
 SP6-901-001 (Setting to give priority to stackability): for DF3100
0: Higher throughput (default)
1: Higher stackability

SM 59 D3B0
 D3B8/D3B9
Booklet Finisher SR3220
Finisher SR3210
D717
Punch Unit PU3050

Latest Release: -
Initial Release: November, 2016
Copyright (c) 2016 Ricoh Co.,Ltd.

Rev. 08/12/2021
 BOOKLET FINISHER SR3220
FINISHER SR3210 (D3B8/D3B9)
TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ............................................. 1

1.1 EXTERIOR PARTS ....................................................................................................... 1
1.1.1 FRONT COVER ................................................................................................. 1
1.1.2 INNER COVER .................................................................................................. 2
1.1.3 REAR COVER.................................................................................................... 3
1.1.4 FRONT LEFT COVER ........................................................................................ 4
1.1.5 UPPER COVER ................................................................................................. 4
1.1.6 UPPER FRONT COVER .................................................................................... 5
1.1.7 UPPER REAR COVER....................................................................................... 6
1.1.8 PAPER EXIT GUIDE COVER ............................................................................. 7
1.1.9 UPPER LEFT COVER ........................................................................................ 7
1.1.10 PROOF TRAY .................................................................................................... 8
1.1.11 SHIFT TRAY ....................................................................................................... 8
1.1.12 BOOKLET TRAY (SR3220) ................................................................................ 8
1.1.13 LEFT CENTER COVER...................................................................................... 9
1.1.14 LEFT LOWER COVER ..................................................................................... 10
1.2 MAIN UNIT ................................................................................................................. 11
1.2.1 PAPER EXIT GUIDE PLATE OPEN/CLOSE MOTOR ....................................... 11
1.2.2 PAPER EXIT GUIDE PLATE OPEN/CLOSE HP SENSOR ............................... 11
1.2.3 PROOF TRAY FULL SENSOR ......................................................................... 12
1.2.4 PROOF TRAY PAPER EXIT SENSOR ............................................................. 12
1.2.5 ENTRANCE SENSOR ...................................................................................... 13
1.2.6 INTERMEDIATE TRANSPORT SENSOR RIGHT ............................................. 13
1.2.7 INTERMEDIATE TRANSPORT SENSOR LEFT ............................................... 14
1.2.8 SHIFT TRAY PAPER SURFACE SENSOR ....................................................... 14
1.2.9 SHIFT TRAY UPPER LIMIT SWITCH ............................................................... 15
1.2.10 SHIFT TRAY PAPER EXIT SENSOR ................................................................ 16
1.2.11 PAPER EXIT GUIDE HP SENSOR ................................................................... 16
1.2.12 ENTRANCE TRANSPORT MOTOR ................................................................. 17
1.2.13 PROOF TRANSPORT MOTOR ........................................................................ 17
1.2.14 POSITIONING ROLLER MOTOR ..................................................................... 18

SM i D3B0
 1.2.15 SHIFT MOTOR ................................................................................................. 19
1.2.16 PAPER EXIT TRANSPORT MOTOR ................................................................ 20
1.2.17 PAPER EXIT GUIDE DRIVE MOTOR ............................................................... 21
1.2.18 PAPER BUNDLE TRANSPORT UPPER MOTOR (SR3220) ............................. 22
1.2.19 STAPLER TRAY ............................................................................................... 23
1.2.20 STAPLER TRAY PAPER SENSOR ................................................................... 25
1.2.21 PAPER BUNDLE TRANSPORT UPPER PRESSURE RELEASE HP SENSOR 26
1.2.22 FEEDOUT PAWL HP SENSOR ........................................................................ 27
1.2.23 JOGGER HP SENSOR .................................................................................... 27
1.2.24 JOGGER MOTOR ............................................................................................ 28
1.2.25 PAPER BUNDLE TRANSPORT UPPER PRESSURE RELEASE MOTOR ....... 28
1.2.26 FEEDOUT PAWL MOTOR ................................................................................ 29
1.3 STAPLELESS STAPLER UNIT/STAPLER UNIT (SR3210) ......................................... 30
1.3.1 STAPLELESS STAPLER UNIT ......................................................................... 30
1.3.2 STAPLER UNIT ................................................................................................ 30
1.3.3 STAPLELESS STAPLER TRANSFER MOTOR ................................................ 32
1.3.4 STAPLER TRANSFER MOTOR ....................................................................... 33
1.3.5 PAPER GUIDE DRIVE MOTOR........................................................................ 33
1.3.6 STAPLELESS STAPLER HP SENSOR............................................................. 34
1.3.7 STAPLER HP SENSOR.................................................................................... 35
1.3.8 PAPER GUIDE HP SENSOR............................................................................ 36
1.4 BOOKLET STAPLER UNIT (SR3220) ......................................................................... 37
1.4.1 STAPLER UNIT ................................................................................................ 37
1.4.2 BOOKLET STAPLER UNIT............................................................................... 43
1.4.3 CENTER-FOLDING UNIT................................................................................. 44
1.4.4 CENTER-FOLDING TRAY PAPER EXIT SENSOR ........................................... 45
1.4.5 TRAILING EDGE STOPPER TRANSPORT SENSOR ...................................... 46
1.4.6 TRAILING EDGE STOPPER HP SENSOR....................................................... 47
1.4.7 CENTER-FOLDING BLADE HP SENSOR ........................................................ 48
1.4.8 CENTER-FOLDING CAM HP SENSOR ........................................................... 48
1.4.9 TRAILING EDGE STOPPER MOTOR .............................................................. 49
1.4.10 FOLDING BLADE MOTOR ............................................................................... 50
1.4.11 FOLDING TRANSPORT MOTOR ..................................................................... 50
1.4.12 BOOKLET TRAY FULL SENSOR 1, 2 .............................................................. 51
1.4.13 STAPLER TRANSFER MOTOR (MIDDLE) ....................................................... 52
1.4.14 PAPER BUNDLE TRANSPORT LOWER PRESSURE RELEASE HP SENSOR52
1.5 BOARDS .................................................................................................................... 54
1.5.1 MAIN CONTROLLER BOARD .......................................................................... 54

2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS............................................................ 56
D3B0 ii SM
 2.1 BOOKLET FINISHER SR3220 / FINISHER SR3210 (D3B9/D3B8) ............................. 56
2.1.1 CHANGES FROM THE PREVIOUS MACHINE ................................................ 56
Paper exit guide ................................................................................................... 56
2.1.2 STAPLELESS STAPLER (FINISHER SR3210 ONLY) ...................................... 57
2.1.3 SP6-160-004 (REPLACEMENT MODE FOR SERVICE)................................... 67
2.1.4 PARTS LAYOUT ............................................................................................... 68
2.1.5 DRIVE LAYOUT ............................................................................................... 69
2.1.6 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT ............................................................. 70
2.2 MECHANISMS ........................................................................................................... 76
2.2.1 SEPARATION MECHANISM ............................................................................ 76
2.2.2 PROOF TRAY TRANSPORT ............................................................................ 77
2.2.3 PROOF TRAY FULL DETECTION .................................................................... 77
2.2.4 SHIFT TRAY ASCENT/DESCENT MECHANISM .............................................. 78
2.2.5 SHIFT TRAY FULL DETECTION ...................................................................... 79
2.2.6 SHIFT MECHANISM ........................................................................................ 79
2.2.7 BOOKLET TRAY .............................................................................................. 80
2.2.8 STAPLED PAPER EJECT MECHANISM .......................................................... 81
2.2.9 BOOKLET STITCHING MECHANISM .............................................................. 87
2.3 PUNCH UNIT PU3050 (D717) .................................................................................... 91
2.3.1 CHANGES FROM THE PREVIOUS MACHINE ................................................ 91
2.3.2 PARTS LAYOUT ............................................................................................... 91
2.3.3 MECHANISM ................................................................................................... 92
Skew Correction ................................................................................................... 92
2.3.4 REGISTRATION ............................................................................................... 93
2.3.5 PUNCH HOLE ALIGNMENT ADJUSTMENT .................................................... 93
2.3.6 PAPER POSITION DETECTION ...................................................................... 94
2.3.7 PUNCH UNIT MOVEMENT .............................................................................. 95
2.3.8 PUNCH DRIVE................................................................................................. 95
2.3.9 PUNCH SCRAP COLLECTION/FULL DETECTION ......................................... 96

SM iii D3B0
READ THIS FIRST

Symbols, Abbreviations and Trademarks

Symbols, Abbreviations
This manual uses several symbols and abbreviations. The meaning of those symbols and
abbreviations are as follows:

Symbol What it means

Clip ring
Screw
Connector
Clamp
E-ring
Flat Flexible Cable
Timing Belt
SEF Short Edge Feed
LEF Long Edge Feed
K Black
C Cyan
M Magenta
Y Yellow
B/W, BW Black and White
FC Full color

Trademarks
Adobe, Acrobat, PageMaker, PostScript, and PostScript 3 are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
and any use of such marks by Ricoh Company, Ltd. is under license.
Firefox and Thunderbird are registered trademarks of the Mozilla Foundation.
Google, Android, and Chrome are trademarks of Google Inc.
iOS® is a registered trademark or trademark of Cisco Systems, Inc. and/or its affiliates in the
United States and certain other countries.
Java is a registered trademark of Oracle and/or its affiliates.
JAWS® is a registered trademark of Freedom Scientific, Inc., St. Petersburg, Florida and/or other
countries.
Kerberos is a trademark of the Massachusetts Institute of Technology (MIT).
Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds.
Macintosh, OS X, Bonjour, Safari, and TrueType are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the
U.S. and other countries.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Server, Windows Vista, Internet Explorer, and Outlook are either
registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corp. in the United States and/or other
countries.
PictBridge is a trademark.
QR Code is a registered trademark of DENSO WAVE INCORPORATED in Japan and in other
countries.
"Red Hat" is a registered trademark of Red Hat, Inc.
The SD and SD logo are trademarks of SD-3C, LLC.
UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group.
UPnP is a trademark of UPnP Implementers Corporation.
This product includes RSA BSAFE® Cryptographic software of EMC Corporation. RSA and
BSAFE are registered trademarks or trademarks of EMC Corporation in the United States and
other countries.
The proper names of Internet Explorer 6, 7, and 8 are as follows:
 Microsoft® Internet Explorer® 6
 Windows® Internet Explorer® 7
 Windows® Internet Explorer® 8
The proper names of the Windows operating systems are as follows:
 The product names of Windows Vista are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Ultimate
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Business
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Home Premium
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Home Basic
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Enterprise
 The product names of Windows 7 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Home Premium
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Professional
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Ultimate
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Enterprise
 The product names of Windows 8 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 8
Microsoft® Windows® 8 Pro
Microsoft® Windows® 8 Enterprise
 The product names of Windows 8.1 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 8.1
Microsoft® Windows® 8.1 Pro
Microsoft® Windows® 8.1 Enterprise
 The product names of Windows 10 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 10 Home Premium
Microsoft® Windows® 10 Pro
Microsoft® Windows® 10 Enterprise
 Microsoft® Windows® 10 Education
 The product names of Windows Server 2003 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 Standard Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 Enterprise Edition
 The product names of Windows Server 2003 R2 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2 Standard Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2 Enterprise Edition
 The product names of Windows Server 2008 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 Standard
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 Enterprise
 The product names of Windows Server 2008 R2 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 R2 Standard
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 R2 Enterprise
 The product names of Windows Server 2012 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 Foundation
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 Essentials
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 Standard
 The product names of Windows Server 2012 R2 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 R2 Foundation
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 R2 Essentials
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 R2 Standard
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of
their respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights to those marks.
Microsoft product screen shots reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation.
 Exterior Parts

1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

BOOKLET
FINISHER

FINISHER
SR3220

SR3210
1.1 EXTERIOR PARTS
1.1.1 FRONT COVER
1. Open the front cover [A].

2. Front cover [A] ( ×1)

SM 1 D3B8/D3B9
Exterior Parts

1.1.2 INNER COVER

1. Open the front cover
2. Remove the three knobs [A] (hook×1 for each).
 Use a flathead screwdriver to release the hooks.

3. Remove the three screws on the inner cover [A] ( ×3).

4. Pull the booklet stapler unit [A].

D3B8/D3B9 2 SM
 Exterior Parts

5. Inner cover [B] ( ×1)

BOOKLET
FINISHER

FINISHER
SR3220

SR3210
1.1.3 REAR COVER
1. Rear cover [A] ( ×3)

SM 3 D3B8/D3B9
Exterior Parts

1.1.4 FRONT LEFT COVER

1. Front cover
2. Inner cover
3. Paper exit guide cover
4. Front left cover [A] ( ×2)

1.1.5 UPPER COVER

1. Open the upper cover [A].

2. Upper cover [A] ( ×1, tab ×1)

D3B8/D3B9 4 SM
 Exterior Parts

 When reattaching the upper cover, attach the clips so that their tabs face upward.

BOOKLET
FINISHER

FINISHER
SR3220

SR3210
1.1.6 UPPER FRONT COVER
1. Front left cover
2. Upper cover
3. Upper front cover [A] ( ×3)

SM 5 D3B8/D3B9
Exterior Parts

1.1.7 UPPER REAR COVER

1. Rear cover
2. Paper exit guide cover
3. Upper left cover
4. Upper cover
5. Upper rear cover [A] ( ×3)

D3B8/D3B9 6 SM
 Exterior Parts

1.1.8 PAPER EXIT GUIDE COVER

BOOKLET
FINISHER

FINISHER
SR3220

SR3210
1. Paper exit guide cover (front) [A]
2. Paper exit guide cover (rear) [B] ( ×4)

If the view of the screw hole is obstructed by the paper exit guides [C], hold the paper exit guides
on the sides and move them inward.

1.1.9 UPPER LEFT COVER

1. Paper exit guide cover
2. Upper left cover [A] ( ×2)

SM 7 D3B8/D3B9
Exterior Parts

1.1.10 PROOF TRAY

1. Upper front cover
2. Upper rear cover
3. Proof tray [A] ( ×2)

1.1.11 SHIFT TRAY

1. Shift tray [A] ( ×1)

1.1.12 BOOKLET TRAY (SR3220)

1. Booklet tray [A]

D3B8/D3B9 8 SM
 Exterior Parts

1.1.13 LEFT CENTER COVER

BOOKLET
FINISHER

FINISHER
1. Front cover

SR3220

SR3210
2. Rear cover
3. Shift tray
4. Shift tray front bracket [B] ( ×2)
5. Shift tray bracket [A] with the shift tray rear bracket [C]

6. Left center cover [A] ( ×2)

SM 9 D3B8/D3B9
Exterior Parts

1.1.14 LEFT LOWER COVER

For SR3220
1. Booklet tray
2. Left lower cover [A] ( ×2)

For SR3210
1. Left lower cover [A] ( ×2)

D3B8/D3B9 10 SM
 Main Unit

1.2 MAIN UNIT

BOOKLET
FINISHER

FINISHER
1.2.1 PAPER EXIT GUIDE PLATE OPEN/CLOSE MOTOR

SR3220

SR3210
1. Proof tray
2. Paper exit guide plate open/close motor [A] ( ×2, ×1)

1.2.2 PAPER EXIT GUIDE PLATE OPEN/CLOSE HP SENSOR

1. Proof tray
2. Paper exit guide plate HP sensor [A] ( ×1, x1)

SM 11 D3B8/D3B9
Main Unit

1.2.3 PROOF TRAY FULL SENSOR

1. Proof tray
2. Proof tray full sensor [A] ( ×1, ×1)

1.2.4 PROOF TRAY PAPER EXIT SENSOR

1. Inner cover
2. Proof tray
3. Proof transport bracket [A] ( ×4)

D3B8/D3B9 12 SM
 Main Unit

4. Proof tray paper exit sensor [A] ( ×1, ×1)

BOOKLET
FINISHER

FINISHER
SR3220

SR3210
1.2.5 ENTRANCE SENSOR
1. Entrance sensor [A] ( ×1, ×1, ×1)

1.2.6 INTERMEDIATE TRANSPORT SENSOR RIGHT

1. Upper cover
2. Intermediate transport sensor right [A] ( ×1, ×1,)

SM 13 D3B8/D3B9
Main Unit

1.2.7 INTERMEDIATE TRANSPORT SENSOR LEFT

1. Proof tray
2. Intermediate transport sensor left [A] ( ×1, ×1, ×1)

1.2.8 SHIFT TRAY PAPER SURFACE SENSOR

1. Left center cover
2. Bracket [A] ( ×4)

D3B8/D3B9 14 SM
 Main Unit

3. Shift tray paper surface sensor [A] ( ×1, x1)

BOOKLET
FINISHER

FINISHER
SR3220

SR3210
1.2.9 SHIFT TRAY UPPER LIMIT SWITCH
1. Bracket of the shift tray
2. Shift tray upper limit switch [A] ( x2, hook × 1)

SM 15 D3B8/D3B9
Main Unit

1.2.10 SHIFT TRAY PAPER EXIT SENSOR

1. Left center cover
2. Shift tray paper exit sensor [A] (hook ×1, x1, ×1)

1.2.11 PAPER EXIT GUIDE HP SENSOR

1. Upper left cover
2. Paper exit guide HP sensor with bracket [A] ( ×1)

3. Paper exit guide HP sensor [A] ( ×1, hook ×2)

D3B8/D3B9 16 SM
 Main Unit

1.2.12 ENTRANCE TRANSPORT MOTOR

BOOKLET
FINISHER

FINISHER
1. Rear cover

SR3220

SR3210
2. Entrance transport motor [A] ( ×2, ×1)

1.2.13 PROOF TRANSPORT MOTOR

1. Rear cover
2. Proof transport motor [A] ( ×2, ×1)

SM 17 D3B8/D3B9
Main Unit

1.2.14 POSITIONING ROLLER MOTOR

For SR3220
1. Rear cover
2. Positioning roller motor [A] ( ×2, ×1)

For SR3210
1. Rear cover
2. Move the harness guide [A] to the right. ( ×2)

D3B8/D3B9 18 SM
 Main Unit

3. Positioning roller motor [A] ( ×2, ×1)

BOOKLET
FINISHER

FINISHER
SR3220

SR3210
1.2.15 SHIFT MOTOR
1. Rear cover
2. Paper exit guide cover (rear)
3. Shift motor [A] ( ×2, x1)

SM 19 D3B8/D3B9
Main Unit

1.2.16 PAPER EXIT TRANSPORT MOTOR

For SR3220
1. Rear cover
2. Paper exit transport motor [A] ( ×2, ×1)

For SR3210
1. Rear cover
2. Harness guide [A] ( ×2, ×6)

D3B8/D3B9 20 SM
 Main Unit

3. Paper exit transport motor [A] ( ×2, ×1)

BOOKLET
FINISHER

FINISHER
SR3220

SR3210
1.2.17 PAPER EXIT GUIDE DRIVE MOTOR
1. Upper left cover
2. Paper exit guide HP sensor bracket [A] ( ×1)

3. Paper exit guide drive motor [A] ( ×2, ×1)

SM 21 D3B8/D3B9
Main Unit

1.2.18 PAPER BUNDLE TRANSPORT UPPER MOTOR (SR3220)

1. Rear cover
2. Feeler [A] ( ×1)

3. Controller board bracket [A] ( ×5, ×21, ×17, ground plate×1)

D3B8/D3B9 22 SM
 Main Unit

4. Paper bundle transport upper motor [A] ( ×2, ×1)

BOOKLET
FINISHER

FINISHER
SR3220

SR3210
1.2.19 STAPLER TRAY
1. Inner cover
2. Front left cover 4)
3. Booklet stapler unit 43)
4. Harness guide [A] ( ×2, ×6) (SR3210 only)

SM 23 D3B8/D3B9
Main Unit

5. Paper exit transport motor bracket [A] ( ×3, ×1)

6. Reverse roller (front) [A], reverse roller (rear) [B]

 Be careful not to damage the shape of the hook enclosed by the blue circle when
removing the reverse rollers.

D3B8/D3B9 24 SM
 Main Unit

7. Stapler tray [A] ( ×7, ×2, ×1)

BOOKLET
FINISHER

FINISHER
SR3220

SR3210
1.2.20 STAPLER TRAY PAPER SENSOR
1. Stapler tray
2. Stapler tray paper sensor bracket ( ×1)

SM 25 D3B8/D3B9
Main Unit

3. Stapler tray paper sensor [A] ( x1, x1, x1)

1.2.21 PAPER BUNDLE TRANSPORT UPPER PRESSURE RELEASE

HP SENSOR
1. Stapler tray
2. Paper bundle transport upper pressure release HP sensor [A] ( ×1)

D3B8/D3B9 26 SM
 Main Unit

1.2.22 FEEDOUT PAWL HP SENSOR

BOOKLET
FINISHER

FINISHER
SR3220

SR3210
1. Stapler tray
2. Feedout pawl HP sensor [A] ( ×1)

1.2.23 JOGGER HP SENSOR

1. Stapler tray
2. Separate the jogger fence [A] from the jogger HP sensor [B].

3. Jogger HP sensor ( ×1)

 Release and remove the tab with a small driver, etc.

SM 27 D3B8/D3B9
Main Unit

1.2.24 JOGGER MOTOR

1. Stapler tray
2. Jogger motor [A] ( ×2, ×1)

1.2.25 PAPER BUNDLE TRANSPORT UPPER PRESSURE RELEASE

MOTOR
1. Stapler tray
2. Paper bundle transport upper pressure release motor [A] ( ×2, ×1)

D3B8/D3B9 28 SM
 Main Unit

1.2.26 FEEDOUT PAWL MOTOR

BOOKLET
FINISHER

FINISHER
SR3220

SR3210
1. Stapler tray
2. Feedout Pawl motor bracket [A] ( ×2, ×1, ×2)

3. Feedout Pawl motor [A] ( ×2)

SM 29 D3B8/D3B9
Stapleless Stapler Unit/Stapler Unit (SR3210)

1.3 STAPLELESS STAPLER UNIT/STAPLER UNIT (SR3210)

1.3.1 STAPLELESS STAPLER UNIT
1. Rear cover
2. Stapleless stapler unit [A] ( ×2, ×1, ×2)

1.3.2 STAPLER UNIT

1. Inner cover
2. Inner middle cover [A] ( ×2)

D3B8/D3B9 30 SM
 Stapleless Stapler Unit/Stapler Unit (SR3210)

3. Paper Guide Drive Motor with Bracket [A] ( ×2, ×1)

BOOKLET
FINISHER

FINISHER
SR3220

SR3210
4. Unhook the spring of the stapler unit.

5. Bracket [A] and harnesses ( ×1, ×1, ×2)

SM 31 D3B8/D3B9
Stapleless Stapler Unit/Stapler Unit (SR3210)

6. Bracket [A], Stapler unit [B] ( ×2)

1.3.3 STAPLELESS STAPLER TRANSFER MOTOR

1. Move the stapleless stapler [A] to the recess.

D3B8/D3B9 32 SM
 Stapleless Stapler Unit/Stapler Unit (SR3210)

2. Stapleless stapler transfer motor [A] ( ×2, ×1)

BOOKLET
FINISHER

FINISHER
SR3220

SR3210
1.3.4 STAPLER TRANSFER MOTOR
1. Move the stapleless stapler to the recess.
2. Stapler transfer motor [A] ( ×2, ×1)

1.3.5 PAPER GUIDE DRIVE MOTOR

1. Inner cover
2. Bracket [A] ( ×1)

SM 33 D3B8/D3B9
Stapleless Stapler Unit/Stapler Unit (SR3210)

3. Paper guide drive motor [A] ( ×2, ×1)

1.3.6 STAPLELESS STAPLER HP SENSOR

1. Move the stapleless stapler to the recess
2. Stapleless stapler HP sensor bracket [A] ( ×1)

3. Stapleless stapler HP sensor [A] ( ×1)

D3B8/D3B9 34 SM
 Stapleless Stapler Unit/Stapler Unit (SR3210)

1.3.7 STAPLER HP SENSOR

BOOKLET
FINISHER

FINISHER
SR3220

SR3210
1. Open the front cover.
2. Inner middle cover [A] ( ×2)

3. Bracket [A] ( ×1)

4. Stapler HP sensor [A] ( ×1)

SM 35 D3B8/D3B9
Stapleless Stapler Unit/Stapler Unit (SR3210)

1.3.8 PAPER GUIDE HP SENSOR

1. Rear cover
2. Paper guide HP sensor [A] ( ×1, ×1, hook ×2)

D3B8/D3B9 36 SM
 Booklet Stapler Unit (SR3220)

1.4 BOOKLET STAPLER UNIT (SR3220)

BOOKLET
FINISHER

FINISHER
1.4.1 STAPLER UNIT

SR3220

SR3210
1. Open the front cover, and then remove two knobs [A] ( x1 for each)

2. Booklet stapler unit cover [A] ( x4, x1)

3. Stopper [A] ( ×2)

4. Disconnect three connectors and one clamp at the rear side of the booklet stapler unit.

SM 37 D3B8/D3B9
Booklet Stapler Unit (SR3220)

5. Pull out the booklet stapler unit, and then release three clamps.

6. Bring the stapler unit [A] near the center.

7. Small guide plate [A]

D3B8/D3B9 38 SM
 Booklet Stapler Unit (SR3220)

8. Guide plate [A]

BOOKLET
FINISHER

FINISHER
SR3220

SR3210
9. Stapler cartridge [A]

10. Cover [A] ( ×2)

SM 39 D3B8/D3B9
Booklet Stapler Unit (SR3220)

11. Stapler unit (clincher side) [A] ( ×3, ×2)

12. Disconnect three connectors and release four clamps on the stapler unit (driver side).

13. Stapler unit (driver side) [A] ( ×3, ×4)

D3B8/D3B9 40 SM
 Booklet Stapler Unit (SR3220)

14. Attach the special tool* to the stapler unit to adjust the staple position of the stapler unit.
Check that four pins ([A] and [B]) on the special tool are fixed in the slots [C] on the stapler

BOOKLET
FINISHER

FINISHER
SR3220

SR3210
unit as shown below.
[A]: Two pins for driver
[B]: Two pins for clincher

*Use the following part numbers to get the special tool

 HOLDER FLONT(B7936410)
 HOLDER: REAR (B7936420)
 ROD: CLAMP (B7936431)
 ADJUSTING SCREW: M4 (B7936432)
-or-
 B7936400 STAPLER:SERVICE PARTS ASSY
15. Tighten the wing screw [A] on the special tool to secure the stapler and special tool.

SM 41 D3B8/D3B9
Booklet Stapler Unit (SR3220)

16. Tighten the screws completely to secure the clincher side [A] of the stapler ( ×3).

17. Loosen the wing screw to remove the special tool.

18. Reattach all the removed parts.

 Make sure that the harnesses [B] are routed behind the resin part [A]. Otherwise, the
harnesses block the route of the stapler, which causes a stapler transfer motor error.

19. Check that the stapler works properly.

 All staple patterns must be checked.

 If there are any problems with the clincher, adjust the staple position with the special
tool again.

D3B8/D3B9 42 SM
 Booklet Stapler Unit (SR3220)

1.4.2 BOOKLET STAPLER UNIT

BOOKLET
FINISHER

FINISHER
SR3220

SR3210
1. Rear cover
2. Remove the connectors of controller board [A] ( ×9, ×2, : ground plate×1)

3. Stopper [A] ( ×2)

4. Front cover
5. Pull out the booklet stapler unit [A].
6. Booklet stapler unit ( ×2)

 When you remove the booklet stapler unit from the main frame, be careful not to catch
the cable on the frame.

SM 43 D3B8/D3B9
Booklet Stapler Unit (SR3220)

1.4.3 CENTER-FOLDING UNIT

1. Booklet stapler unit
2. Knobs [A] ( ×2)

3. Booklet stapler unit cover [A] ( ×4, ×1)

4. Remove connectors ( ×1, ×4, ×4, ground plate×1)

D3B8/D3B9 44 SM
 Booklet Stapler Unit (SR3220)

5. Bracket [A] ( ×1, ×3, ×1)

BOOKLET
FINISHER

FINISHER
SR3220

SR3210
6. Center-folding unit [A] ( ×5)

1.4.4 CENTER-FOLDING TRAY PAPER EXIT SENSOR

1. Center-folding unit
2. Center-folding tray paper exit sensor bracket [A] ( ×1, ×1)

SM 45 D3B8/D3B9
Booklet Stapler Unit (SR3220)

3. Center-folding tray paper exit sensor [A]

1.4.5 TRAILING EDGE STOPPER TRANSPORT SENSOR

1. Center-folding unit
2. Trailing edge stopper transport sensor bracket [A] ( ×2, ×1, ×4)

D3B8/D3B9 46 SM
 Booklet Stapler Unit (SR3220)

3. Trailing edge stopper paper surface sensor [A] ( ×1)

BOOKLET
FINISHER

FINISHER
SR3220

SR3210
1.4.6 TRAILING EDGE STOPPER HP SENSOR
1. Center-folding unit
2. Trailing edge stopper HP sensor [A] ( ×1)

SM 47 D3B8/D3B9
Booklet Stapler Unit (SR3220)

1.4.7 CENTER-FOLDING BLADE HP SENSOR

1. Center-folding unit
2. Center-folding blade HP sensor [A] ( ×1)

1.4.8 CENTER-FOLDING CAM HP SENSOR

1. Center-folding unit
2. Center-folding cam HP sensor bracket [A] ( ×1, ×2)

D3B8/D3B9 48 SM
 Booklet Stapler Unit (SR3220)

3. Center-folding cam HP sensor [A] ( ×1)

BOOKLET
FINISHER

FINISHER
SR3220

SR3210
1.4.9 TRAILING EDGE STOPPER MOTOR
1. Center-folding unit
2. Trailing edge stopper motor [A] ( ×2, x1)

SM 49 D3B8/D3B9
Booklet Stapler Unit (SR3220)

1.4.10 FOLDING BLADE MOTOR

1. Center-folding unit
2. Folding blade motor [A] ( ×2)

1.4.11 FOLDING TRANSPORT MOTOR

1. Center-folding
2. Folding transport motor [A] ( ×2)

D3B8/D3B9 50 SM
 Booklet Stapler Unit (SR3220)

1.4.12 BOOKLET TRAY FULL SENSOR 1, 2

BOOKLET
FINISHER

FINISHER
SR3220

SR3210
1. Pull out the booklet stapler unit
2. Booklet tray full sensor bracket [A] ( ×2, ×2, ×2)

3. Booklet tray full sensor 1 [A], 2 [B]

SM 51 D3B8/D3B9
Booklet Stapler Unit (SR3220)

1.4.13 STAPLER TRANSFER MOTOR (MIDDLE)

1. Controller board bracket
2. Stapler transfer motor (Mid.) [A] ( ×2, ×1)

3. Damper [A] ( ×2)

Attach it in the correct orientation as shown below.

1.4.14 PAPER BUNDLE TRANSPORT LOWER PRESSURE RELEASE

HP SENSOR
1. Controller board bracket
2. Paper bundle transport lower pressure release HP sensor bracket [A] ( ×1, ×1)

D3B8/D3B9 52 SM
 Booklet Stapler Unit (SR3220)

3. Paper bundle transport lower pressure release HP sensor [A]

BOOKLET
FINISHER

FINISHER
SR3220

SR3210

SM 53 D3B8/D3B9
Boards

1.5 BOARDS
1.5.1 MAIN CONTROLLER BOARD

 Make sure to set the SP provided on the metal plate of the main controller board after
replacing the main controller board.

 An EEPROM [A] is installed in the controller board to record the drive frequency and
number of sheets. When the controller board is replaced, take the EEPROM off the old
board and install it on the new one.

 There is an EEPROM on the new main controller board, but this is not needed and can
be discarded or kept as a spare part.

D3B8/D3B9 54 SM
 Boards

1. Rear cover
2. Main controller board [A] ( ×4, ×23)

BOOKLET
FINISHER

FINISHER
SR3220

SR3210
SR3220

SR3210

SM 55 D3B8/D3B9
Booklet Finisher SR3220 / Finisher SR3210 (D3B9/D3B8)

2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
2.1 BOOKLET FINISHER SR3220 / FINISHER SR3210
(D3B9/D3B8)
2.1.1 CHANGES FROM THE PREVIOUS MACHINE

Paper exit guide

Overview
To achieve stable stacking of printouts and to prevent users from touching the printouts,
paper exit guide [A] and paper exit guide cover [B] have been added.

Drive
With the paper exit guide drive motor [A] and the timing belt, the paper exit guides on both
sides move at the same time.
Home position is detected by the paper exit guide HP sensor [B].

D3B8/D3B9 56 SM
 Booklet Finisher SR3220 / Finisher SR3210 (D3B9/D3B8)

BOOKLET
FINISHER

FINISHER
SR3220

SR3210
2.1.2 STAPLELESS STAPLER (FINISHER SR3210 ONLY)
Location of the stapleless stapler unit
The stapleless stapler unit [A] is on the same shaft as the conventional stapler unit [B], which
uses staples.
The stapleless stapler unit is at the back and the conventional stapler unit is at the front.
A spacer [C] on the shaft functions as a stopper, preventing the units from colliding.

SM 57 D3B8/D3B9
Booklet Finisher SR3220 / Finisher SR3210 (D3B9/D3B8)

Paper stack mechanism for stapling

The maximum thickness of the stack is 50 sheets for the conventional stapler, and 5 sheets
for the stapleless stapler.
In order for the stapleless stapler to stack the paper smoothly, cam [C] and paper guide [B]
adjusts the gap [A] of the stapler tray [E].
The cam [C] controlled by the paper guide motor [D] pushes the paper guide [B] down during
the stapleless staple operation.

D3B8/D3B9 58 SM
 Booklet Finisher SR3220 / Finisher SR3210 (D3B9/D3B8)

BOOKLET
FINISHER

FINISHER
SR3220

SR3210
Stapleless stapler unit movement mechanism
The stapleless stapler transfer motor [A] moves the stapleless stapler unit to the stapling
position from its home position when stapling with the stapleless stapler.
The home position is detected by the stapleless stapler HP sensor [B].
The stapler transfer motor [C] and the stapler HP sensor [D] are attached to the base plate.

SM 59 D3B8/D3B9
Booklet Finisher SR3220 / Finisher SR3210 (D3B9/D3B8)

There is a gap at the paper guide when the stapleless stapler unit is at the home position
when stapling with the conventional stapler.
Because of this, paper will be guided with the paper guide [B] which works together with the
lever [A] when the stapleless stapler unit moves to its home position.

Stapleless Stapler mechanism

The staple operation in this option applies a crimping method. V-shaped teeth press
the sheets, applying a pressure of 220 kg.

D3B8/D3B9 60 SM
 Booklet Finisher SR3220 / Finisher SR3210 (D3B9/D3B8)

This option performs two stapling operations for a single stapling operation as follows.
[Moving to the first stapling position =>Stapling => Moving to the second stapling position =>

BOOKLET
FINISHER

FINISHER
SR3220

SR3210
Stapling => Moving back to the home position]
Stapling is done by engaging the pressure cam [D] to stretch the pressure link [A], which
applies pressure between to the upper tooth [C] and the lower tooth [B]. Moving and stapling
operation for the stapler are driven by the stapler drive motor. The home position is detected
by the stapleless stapler HP sensor.

 Double/Single
The bond strength depends on the degree of entwining of fibers between sheets of the
paper bundle. Setting to Single or Double stapling allows you change the bond strength.
Single applies one staple operation.
Double applies one more, with the same operation as the first staple, at 4mm from the
first. The stapleless stapler drive motor moves the paper after the first stapling.

 Bundle ejection
After stapling, the trailing edge presser is released. The bundle of paper is ejected by
the paper output roller.

SM 61 D3B8/D3B9
Booklet Finisher SR3220 / Finisher SR3210 (D3B9/D3B8)

Stapler movement mechanism

This stapler needs to staple twice for a single staple position, and must be moved to do this
stapling.
A cam [A], which is located in the stapler unit and has a groove on the body, and a securing
pin perform the moving operation when stapling.

The moving and stapling is done by the stapleless stapler drive motor [B] and the home
position is detected by the stapler HP sensor [C].

D3B8/D3B9 62 SM
 Booklet Finisher SR3220 / Finisher SR3210 (D3B9/D3B8)

Stapler movement process

The movement differs between Single and Double stapling.

BOOKLET
FINISHER

FINISHER
SR3220

SR3210
[A]: Paper
[B]: Stapleless stapler unit
[P1]: Pre-stapling position
[P2]: Stapling position 1 (Single)
[P3]: Stapling position 2 (Double)
[P4]: Home position

Single stapling operation

1. The stapleless stapler unit is at the home position before receiving paper.

SM 63 D3B8/D3B9
Booklet Finisher SR3220 / Finisher SR3210 (D3B9/D3B8)

2. The stapleless stapler unit moves to the pre-stapling position when starting a stapleless
stapling job.

3. After receiving the first sheet, the stapleless stapler unit moves from the Stapling Position 1
towards the rear by 2.2 mm. After stacking the sheets, stapling is performed. (Stapling
Position 1)

4. When stapling on multiple copies, the stapleless stapler unit moves towards the front by 2.2
mm from the pre-stapling position after the paper is delivered.
When stapling on multiple copies, Steps 3 and 4 are repeated.

D3B8/D3B9 64 SM
 Booklet Finisher SR3220 / Finisher SR3210 (D3B9/D3B8)

5. The stapleless stapler unit returns to the home position after completing the job.

BOOKLET
FINISHER

FINISHER
SR3220

SR3210
Double stapling operation
6. The stapleless stapler unit is at the home position before receiving paper.

7. The stapleless stapler unit moves to the pre-stapling position when starting a stapleless
stapling job.

SM 65 D3B8/D3B9
Booklet Finisher SR3220 / Finisher SR3210 (D3B9/D3B8)

8. After receiving the first sheet, the stapleless stapler unit moves from the Stapling Position 1
towards the rear by 2.2 mm. After stacking the sheets, stapling is performed. (Stapling
Position 1)

9. The stapleless stapler unit moves further towards the rear by 4 mm and performs stapling.
(Stapling Position 2)

10. When stapling multiple copies, the stapleless stapler unit moves towards the front by 6.4 mm
from the pre-stapling position after the paper is delivered.
When stapling multiple copies, Steps 3 to 5 are repeated.

D3B8/D3B9 66 SM
 Booklet Finisher SR3220 / Finisher SR3210 (D3B9/D3B8)

11. The stapler returns to the home position after completing the job.

BOOKLET
FINISHER

FINISHER
SR3220

SR3210
2.1.3 SP6-160-004 (REPLACEMENT MODE FOR SERVICE)
It is easier to access the following parts for replacement after running SP-6-160-004.
 Positioning Roller [A]
The paper exit guide plate moves upwards and the positioning roller pops up in front for
easier access.
 Reverse Roller [B]
The paper exit guide plate moves upwards and the reverse roller can be accessed.

SM 67 D3B8/D3B9
Booklet Finisher SR3220 / Finisher SR3210 (D3B9/D3B8)

2.1.4 PARTS LAYOUT

No. Description No. Description

1 Booklet tray 7 Proof tray

2 Paper surface detecting arm 8 Junction gate

3 Stapler tray 9 Relay Guide Plate

4 Shift tray 10 Stapler unit

5 Paper exit guide plate 11 Booklet unit

6 Paper exit guide

D3B8/D3B9 68 SM
 Booklet Finisher SR3220 / Finisher SR3210 (D3B9/D3B8)

2.1.5 DRIVE LAYOUT

BOOKLET
FINISHER

FINISHER
SR3220

SR3210

No. Description No. Description

1 Edge stopper motor 12 Paper exit transport motor

2 Folding blade motor 13 Feedout Pawl motor

3 Folding transport motor 14 Stapler unit displacement motor

SM 69 D3B8/D3B9
Booklet Finisher SR3220 / Finisher SR3210 (D3B9/D3B8)

No. Description No. Description

Booklet transport (lower) pressure

4 15 Tray lift motor
release motor

Booklet bundle transport (upper) Paper exit guide drive motor*

5 16
motor

6 Shift motor 17 Paper guide drive motor*

7 Entrance transport motor 18 Stapleless stapler transfer motor*

8 Junction gate solenoid 19 Stapler transfer motor

9 Proof transport motor

Paper exit guide plate open/close

10
motor

11 Positioning roller motor

* Finisher SR3210 only

2.1.6 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT

Transport system

D3B8/D3B9 70 SM
 Booklet Finisher SR3220 / Finisher SR3210 (D3B9/D3B8)

No. Description No. Description

BOOKLET
FINISHER

FINISHER
SR3220

SR3210
Intermediate transport (right)
1 9 Upper cover open/close sensor
paper surface sensor

Intermediate transport (left) paper

2 10 Proof tray full sensor
surface sensor

3 Controller 11 Proof paper exit sensor

4 Shift HP sensor 12 Entrance paper surface sensor

5 Shift motor 13 Straight transport LED

6 Junction gate solenoid 14 Entrance jam detection LED

7 Proof transport motor 15 Stapler jam detection LED

8 Entrance transport motor

Shift system

SM 71 D3B8/D3B9
Booklet Finisher SR3220 / Finisher SR3210 (D3B9/D3B8)

No. Description No. Description

1 Tray lower limit sensor (upper) 8 Paper exit guide HP sensor

2 Tray lower limit sensor (lower) 9 Paper exit guide drive motor

3 Shift tray upper limit switch 10 Paper exit guide plate open/close motor

4 Shift tray paper surface sensor 11 Paper exit guide plate HP sensor

5 Paper Exit Transport Motor 12 Front door switch

6 Positioning roller HP sensor 13 Tray lift motor

7 Positioning roller motor

Jogger system

No. Description No. Description

1 Jogger motor 5 Booklet stitch transport (upper) motor

2 Paper exit sensor 6 Stapler tray paper surface sensor

Booklet transport (upper)

3 7 Feedout Pawl HP sensor
pressure release motor

4 Jogger HP sensor 8 Feedout Pawl motor

D3B8/D3B9 72 SM
 Booklet Finisher SR3220 / Finisher SR3210 (D3B9/D3B8)

Stapler/Intermediate transport system

BOOKLET
FINISHER

FINISHER
SR3220

SR3210
No. Description No. Description

1 Stapler transfer motor 6 Booklet transport jam detection LED

Paper Bundle Transport Lower Booklet unit jam detection LED1

2 7
Pressure Release HP Sensor

Booklet transport (lower) Stopper jam detection LED

3 8
pressure release motor

4 Stapler unit 9 Booklet unit jam detection LED2

5 Stapler HP sensor

SM 73 D3B8/D3B9
Booklet Finisher SR3220 / Finisher SR3210 (D3B9/D3B8)

Stapleless stapler unit (Finisher SR3210 only)

No. Description No. Description

1 Paper guide drive motor 6 Stapler transfer motor

2 Paper guide HP sensor 7 Stapler HP sensor

3 Stapleless stapler transfer motor 8 Stapleless Stapler drive motor

4 Stapleless stapler HP sensor

5 Stapler transfer motor

D3B8/D3B9 74 SM
 Booklet Finisher SR3220 / Finisher SR3210 (D3B9/D3B8)

Paper folding system

BOOKLET
FINISHER

FINISHER
SR3220

SR3210
No. Description No. Description

1 Booklet tray full sensor 1 6 Folding cam HP sensor

2 Booklet tray full sensor 2 7 Folding blade HP sensor

3 Edge stopper motor 8 Center-folding paper exit sensor

4 Folding blade motor 9 Edge stopper paper surface sensor

5 Folding transport motor 10 Edge stopper HP sensor

SM 75 D3B8/D3B9
Mechanisms

Punch system

No. Description No. Description

1 Hopper full sensor 6 Horizontal registration unit HP sensor

Horizontal registration correction unit HP

2 Punch unit drive motor 7
sensor

3 Punch unit HP sensor 8 Horizontal registration correction motor

4 Controller 9 Horizontal registration correction sensor

Horizontal registration unit

5
transfer motor

2.2 MECHANISMS
2.2.1 Separation mechanism
In the separation unit, the transport path of the paper is changed with the junction gate [A] by the
junction gate solenoid [B].
The change-over action of the junction gate is as follows.

D3B8/D3B9 76 SM
 Mechanisms

Mode Proof mode Shift mode

BOOKLET
FINISHER

FINISHER
SR3220

SR3210
Paper transport
path

Junction gate
ON OFF
solenoid

2.2.2 Proof tray transport

The proof paper exit roller, proof transport roller and the intermediate transport roller are driven by
the proof transport motor. The entrance transport roller is driven by the entrance transport motor.

2.2.3 Proof tray full detection

The proof tray full sensor [A] is above the proof tray. When a fixed amount of paper is ejected, it
switches OFF (blocked), and "Full" is detected.

SM 77 D3B8/D3B9
Mechanisms

2.2.4 Shift tray ascent/descent mechanism

Ascent/descent is performed according to the number of sheets of paper (paper surface height)
released to the shift tray. This height is detected by the shift tray paper surface sensor [B]
switching OFF/ON due to the rear end press lever [A], and is adjusted up and down by the tray lift
motor [C] so that the shift tray paper surface sensor switches OFF (blocked).

Ascent
The shift tray paper surface sensor detects the movement upper limit of the shift tray, and
disconnects the control circuit of the tray lift motor.
When paper is removed from the shift tray and the shift tray paper surface sensor switches
ON (unblocked), the shift tray ascends, and when the sensor switches OFF (blocked), it
stops.
Descent
 In shift mode
When every 5 sheets of paper are delivered to the shift tray, the tray moves up and down.
The shift tray first descends until the shift tray paper surface sensor switches ON
(unblocked), and the shift tray then ascends until the sensor switches OFF (blocked).
 In stapling mode
When exiting the paper to the shift tray, the tray lift motor switches ON/OFF for a definite
time, and the tray height is adjusted.

D3B8/D3B9 78 SM
 Mechanisms

2.2.5 Shift tray full detection

BOOKLET
FINISHER

FINISHER
SR3220

SR3210
Small size (Smaller than A4 SEF, LT LEF)
When the shift tray descends and the actuator [A] under the shift tray switches the lower limit
sensor (lower) [B] OFF (blocked), shift tray "Full" is detected.
Large size (Larger than B4, LG)
When the shift tray descends and the actuator [A] under the shift tray switches the lower limit
sensor (upper) [C] OFF (blocked), shift tray "Full" is detected.

2.2.6 Shift mechanism

The paper is shifted from side to side by the shift roller in the transport path.
The paper exit guide plate floats up from the paper exit roller, and waits for the paper. After the
shift paper exit sensor [A] switches ON, the paper exit guide plate is closed, and after the paper is
ejected to the tray, the shift roller returns to the home position (center).
This operation is performed for every sheet, and when the shift direction changes (this happens
when a new set of prints is fed out), the shift roller shifts in the opposite direction.
The shift roller [C] is moved to left and right by the shift motor [B].
The shift roller HP sensor [D] detects the home position of the shift roller.

SM 79 D3B8/D3B9
Mechanisms

2.2.7 Booklet tray

The paper surface detecting arm [A] detects the top of the pile of stapled booklets ejected to the
booklet tray.
The arm press [B] presses the bulge of the edges of the booklets from the top. The booklet tray
full sensor 1[C] and the booklet tray full sensor 2 [D] detect booklet tray "Full".

Tray full detection changes with the size of paper that has been stapled, and the number of sheets
in one bundle. If the tray is full, the machine stops.

D3B8/D3B9 80 SM
 Mechanisms

Tray status detection

BOOKLET
FINISHER

FINISHER
SR3220

SR3210
Tray status Booklet tray full sensor 1 Booklet tray full sensor 2

Standby position ON OFF

Full 1 ON ON

Full 2 OFF ON

Full 3 OFF OFF

2.2.8 Stapled paper eject mechanism

Paper must first be stored in the stapler tray [A]. After the stapler tray paper surface sensor
detects the paper sheet rear edge, the approach roller [C] descends, and transports the paper to
the stapler tray.

No. Description No. Description

[A] Stapler tray [C] Approach roller

[B] Jogger fence

SM 81 D3B8/D3B9
Mechanisms

Stacking mechanism (approach roller operation)

The rear edges of the paper stacked in the stapler tray are aligned one sheet at a time.
The paper is transferred to the reverse roller [B] by the approach roller [A], driven by the
positioning roller motor, after the intermediate transport (left) paper surface sensor turns OFF.
The paper is then continuously pressed against the trailing edge fence by the reverse roller
[B].

 Trailing edge fence operation

The trailing edge fence used depends on the binding mode of the stapler. There are two
trailing edge fences, upper and lower.
Upper trailing edge fence
Operated by the booklet transport (upper) pressure release motor.
Binding modes: Edge binding mode (one position)/edge binding mode (two positions),
and booklet stitch mode (small sizes: B5, A4, LT)

D3B8/D3B9 82 SM
 Mechanisms

Lower trailing edge fence

When the stapler moves to the center, the trailing edge fence is depressed by hitting the

BOOKLET
FINISHER

FINISHER
SR3220

SR3210
stapler.
Binding modes: booklet stitch mode (large sizes: LG, B4, A3, DLT, 12"×17.7")

Jogger operation
After the paper rear edges have been aligned by stacking, jogger operation is then performed
to align the width.
The jogger fences [B] are opened and closed by the jogger motor [A]. At the start of jogging,
the jogger fences [B] stand by in a state where they are opened wider than the paper width.
When the rear edge of the transported paper is pressed against the trailing edge fence by the
reverse roller, the jogger fences move close to the edges of the paper.
Next, the jogger fences move to the edges, to align the paper.
After jogging is complete, the jogger fences again open, and stand by to receive the next
sheet.
The home position of the jogger fences is detected by the jogger HP sensor [C].

SM 83 D3B8/D3B9
Mechanisms

Paper exit guide plate open/close mechanism

When paper is stacked in the stapler tray, the paper exit guide plate [A] is opened to cancel
the load on the paper exit roller.
When paper is stacked in the stapler tray, the paper exit guide plate remains open from the
first page to the last page, and after the stapling operation is finished, the paper exit guide
plate is closed, and the paper is ejected by the paper exit roller and release belt.
The switching action of the paper exit guide plate is driven by the paper exit guide plate
open/close motor [B] via a link.
The home position of the paper exit guide plate is detected by the paper exit guide plate
open/close HP sensor [C].

D3B8/D3B9 84 SM
 Mechanisms

Stapler displacement mechanism

The stapler unit [A] staples the stack of sheets.

BOOKLET
FINISHER

FINISHER
SR3220

SR3210
The stapling position changes with the stapling mode and paper size.
When the operation starts after power is switched on, or the front door opens and closes, the
main controller board drives the stapler transfer motor [B] to return the stapler unit to the
home position.
The stapler unit starts to transfer the paper to the front side of the stapler frame, and when the
stapler HP sensor [C] under the stapler unit detects the screen, it temporarily stops. Then, the
stapler transfer motor is driven for a predetermined number of pulses. The stapler unit
moves to the rear side, and stands by.
To prevent the stapler unit colliding with the feedout pawl and trailing edge fences, a stapler
retreat sensor is provided.

Edge binding mode (one position):

SM 85 D3B8/D3B9
Mechanisms

Edge binding mode (two positions):

Booklet stitch mode (small sizes: B5, A4, LT):

Booklet stitch mode (large sizes: LG, B4, A3, DLT, 12"×17.7"):

Release mechanism
Paper exits to the shift tray by the feedout pawl and the paper exit roller after the stapling is
done.
When the feedout pawl motor [A] turns ON, the release belt is driven and the paper is moved
upwards by the feedout pawl [D].
When the stapled stack touches the paper exit roller, the paper exit guide plate [B] closes and
the paper is released. To prevent the stack from moving up too much, the feedout pawl motor
is stopped temporarily.
The home position of the release belt is detected by the feedout pawl HP sensor [C].

D3B8/D3B9 86 SM
 Mechanisms

BOOKLET
FINISHER

FINISHER
SR3220

SR3210
2.2.9 Booklet stitching mechanism
Paper which has been stitched in the center is pressed in by the booklet stitch folding roller with
the folding blade.
The paper folded by the folding roller is released by the paper exit shutter, and is stacked in the
booklet tray one sheet at a time.
A compact layout is achieved by sharing the edge binding stapler, booklet tray, transport, and
stack.
The stapler unit and the folding process unit are divided.
Booklet stitch bundle transport and pressure release
In the case of booklet stitching, the paper must be transported to the stapling position.
Booklet transport rollers are provided at two positions, upper and lower. The transport and
timing of the rollers which transport the bundle differ according to the paper size.
A3, DLT, 12"×17.7"
After booklet stitching is complete, the (upper) booklet transport pressure release motor
operates, and at the same time, the (lower) booklet transport roller starts applying pressure.
B4 or smaller
The (lower) booklet transport roller starts to pressurize after a certain amount of paper (as
much as the leading edge goes through the nip of the (lower) booklet transport roller) for each
size is transferred after booklet stitching is done.

SM 87 D3B8/D3B9
Mechanisms

The booklet transport rollers transport the paper and apply pressure.
They transport the paper to the stapling position, and thence to the folding unit.
Transport and pressure/release are driven by upper and lower motors.
Upper: Booklet transport (upper) pressure release motor [A] (also performs trailing edge
fence retreat)
Lower: Booklet transport (lower) pressure release motor [B]

D3B8/D3B9 88 SM
 Mechanisms

Edge stopper operation

The paper is transported to the leading edge stopper of the paper folding unit.

BOOKLET
FINISHER

FINISHER
SR3220

SR3210
The leading edge stopper moves to the standby position according to the folding size.

Folding blade operation

The binding position is pressed by the movement of the folding blade, and pushed in until the
folding roller grips.
The movement is performed by front and rear folding cams, and the folding blade moves
horizontally.
The rotation of the folding cam is controlled by the folding cam HP sensor, and the folding
blade is controlled by the folding blade HP sensor.
This is driven by the folding blade motor.

SM 89 D3B8/D3B9
Mechanisms

Folding roller operation

The folding rollers apply pressure up and down by springs, and press the binding parts.
When the stitching position reciprocates back and forth, the paper is folded again, and the
paper is then ejected.

D3B8/D3B9 90 SM
 Punch Unit PU3050 (D717)

2.3 PUNCH UNIT PU3050 (D717)

BOOKLET
FINISHER

FINISHER
2.3.1 Changes from the Previous Machine

SR3220

SR3210
To prevent fire spreading from the circuit board, a cover [A] is placed over the controller board.

2.3.2 Parts Layout

No. Description No. Description

1 Hopper full sensor 6 Punch unit HP sensor

Horizontal registration correction unit

2 Punch drive motor 7
HP sensor

Horizontal registration correction

3 Punch HP sensor 8
motor

SM 91 D3B8/D3B9
Punch Unit PU3050 (D717)

No. Description No. Description

Horizontal registration correction

4 Controller 9
sensor

5 Punch unit movement motor

2.3.3 Mechanism
The punch unit is in the finisher paper feed unit, and when paper transported from the main
machine stops, it makes two punch holes in the rear edge of the paper one sheet at a time.
Offset in the angle of the paper is corrected by skew correction, and offset in the lateral direction is
corrected by moving the punch unit.

Skew Correction
1. Paper is output from the main machine.
2. The entrance sensor [A] detects the paper.
3. The paper is brought into contact with the entrance roller [B].
4. Skew correction is applied to the paper, and it is transported.

D3B8/D3B9 92 SM
 Punch Unit PU3050 (D717)

2.3.4 Registration

BOOKLET
FINISHER

FINISHER
SR3220

SR3210
1. The horizontal registration correction sensor [A] detects the lateral offset of the paper.
2. The punch unit moves by the lateral offset detection amount, and completes punching.

2.3.5 Punch hole alignment adjustment

SP Description

SP6-100-001 Sub-scanPunchPosAdj:2K/3K FIN JPN/EU: 2-Hole

SP6-100-002 Sub-scanPunchPosAdj:2K/3K FIN NA: 3-Hole

SP6-100-003 Sub-scanPunchPosAdj:2K/3K FIN Europe: 4-Hole

SP6-100-004 Sub-scanPunchPosAdj:2K/3K FIN NEU: 4-Hole

SP6-100-005 Sub-scanPunchPosAdj:2K/3K FIN NA: 2-Hole

SP6-101-001 Main-scanPunchPosAdj:2K/3K FIN JPN/EU: 2-Hole

SP6-101-002 Main-scanPunchPosAdj:2K/3K FIN NA: 3-Hole

SP6-101-003 Main-scanPunchPosAdj:2K/3K FIN Europe: 4-Hole

SP6-101-004 Main-scanPunchPosAdj:2K/3K FIN NEU: 4-Hole

SP6-101-005 Main-scanPunchPosAdj:2K/3K FIN NA: 2-Hole

SM 93 D3B8/D3B9
Punch Unit PU3050 (D717)

2.3.6 Paper position detection

When the horizontal registration correction sensor [A] of the punch unit detects the leading edge
of the paper from the MFP, the horizontal registration correction motor [B] is driven, and starts to
move the punch unit to the front.
After the horizontal registration correction sensor detects the paper rear edge (as viewed from the
front of the machine), the machine compares it with the paper size set in the MFP. The horizontal
registration correction motor is then driven to a predetermined position at the front, and stops the
punch unit.

D3B8/D3B9 94 SM
 Punch Unit PU3050 (D717)

2.3.7 Punch unit movement

BOOKLET
FINISHER

FINISHER
SR3220

SR3210
The punch unit moves towards the front or the rear according to the paper size. The front-rear
movement is driven by the punch unit movement motor [A]. The home position of the punch unit is
detected by the punch unit HP sensor [B].

2.3.8 Punch drive

Punching is driven by the punch drive motor [A]. The punch home position is detected by the
punch HP sensor [B].
Punch drive motor rotation control feeds back the encoder wheel rotation speed detected by the
punch pulse wave count sensor [C] to the punch drive motor.
Punching is performed by moving the punch unit once back and forth, by rotating the punch shaft
180 degrees from the home position.
In the home position, the punch HP sensor is ON. The first sheet is punched by rotating the punch
shaft 180 degrees in the forward direction, and is completed when the punch HP sensor switches
from OFF to ON. The 2nd sheet is punched by rotating the punch shaft 180 degrees in the reverse
direction, and is completed when the punch HP sensor switches from OFF to ON.
For 2 hole punch [D] and 3 hole punch [E], the timings are different.

SM 95 D3B8/D3B9
Punch Unit PU3050 (D717)

2.3.9 Punch scrap collection/full detection

Punch scraps are collected by the hopper [A] provided under the punch unit. There is a hopper full
sensor [B] in the hopper unit, and when punch scraps fill up to the sensor, the hopper is detected
to be full.

D3B8/D3B9 96 SM
 D3BA/D3BB
Finisher SR3230
Booklet Finisher SR3240

Latest Release: -
Initial Release: November, 2016
Copyright (c) 2016 Ricoh Co.,Ltd.

Rev. 08/12/2021
 FINISHER SR3230
BOOKLET FINISHER SR3240
(D3BA/D3BB)
TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ............................................. 1

1.1 COVERS ...................................................................................................................... 1
1.1.1 REAR UPPER COVER, REAR LOWER COVER, UPPER COVER .................... 1
1.1.2 FRONT COVER, FRONT LEFT SIDE COVER ................................................... 3
1.1.3 PAPER GUIDE COVER ...................................................................................... 4
1.1.4 PROOF TRAY .................................................................................................... 6
1.1.5 SHIFT TRAY ....................................................................................................... 7
1.1.6 LEFT COVER ..................................................................................................... 7
1.2 BOARDS ...................................................................................................................... 9
1.2.1 MAIN BOARD..................................................................................................... 9
When replacing the main board .............................................................................. 9
1.3 PAPER GUIDE ........................................................................................................... 11
1.3.1 PAPER GUIDE UNIT ........................................................................................ 11
1.4 MAIN MOTORS .......................................................................................................... 14
1.4.1 CORNER STAPLING UNIT .............................................................................. 14
1.4.2 PAPER EXIT GATE MOTOR ............................................................................ 19
1.4.3 LEADING EDGE GUIDE MOTOR..................................................................... 20
1.4.4 TRAILING EDGE PRESSURE PLATE MOTOR ................................................ 20
1.4.5 STACKING ROLLER MOTOR .......................................................................... 21
1.4.6 FEED OUT MOTOR ......................................................................................... 21
1.4.7 JOGGER MOTOR ............................................................................................ 21
1.4.8 PAPER GUIDE MOTOR ................................................................................... 22
1.5 SENSORS .................................................................................................................. 24
1.5.1 SHIFT TRAY PAPER SENSOR......................................................................... 24
1.5.2 TRAILING EDGE PRESSURE PLATE HP SENSOR ........................................ 25
1.5.3 STACKING ROLLER HP SENSOR................................................................... 26
1.5.4 STAPLE TRAY PAPER SENSOR ..................................................................... 27
1.5.5 PAPER GUIDE HP SENSOR............................................................................ 28
1.6 STAPLER UNIT .......................................................................................................... 30

SM i D3B0
 1.7 PUNCH UNIT ............................................................................................................. 33

2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS............................................................ 36
2.1 LAYOUT ..................................................................................................................... 36
2.1.1 GENERAL LAYOUT ......................................................................................... 36
2.1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT ............................................................. 37
2.1.3 TRANSPORT LAYOUT..................................................................................... 40
2.1.4 PROOF TRANSPORT LAYOUT (DRIVE) ......................................................... 41
2.1.5 PROOF TRANSPORT LAYOUT (SENSORS) ................................................... 41
2.1.6 SHIFT TRANSPORT LAYOUT (DRIVE) ............................................................ 42
2.2 OPERATION DETAILS ............................................................................................... 43
2.2.1 SHIFT OPERATION (SHIFT TRANSPORT)...................................................... 43
2.2.2 PRE-STACK OPERATION (IN CORNER STAPLING) ....................................... 43
2.2.3 UPPER TRAY SHIFT DRIVE / LIMIT SENSOR / FULL SENSOR ..................... 44
2.2.4 PULL-IN ROLLER / PAPER STACK HOLDER .................................................. 46
Components ......................................................................................................... 46
Operation ............................................................................................................. 46
2.2.5 CORNER STAPLING........................................................................................ 48
Components ......................................................................................................... 48
Edge Guide .......................................................................................................... 49
Stapler Movement ................................................................................................ 50
Positioning Roller / Drag Roller ............................................................................. 50
Jogger .................................................................................................................. 51
Stapling ................................................................................................................ 52
Feeding-out .......................................................................................................... 52
2.2.6 PAPER EXIT GUIDE ........................................................................................ 53
Paper Guide Unit .................................................................................................. 53
Related SP Codes ................................................................................................ 53
Paper Guide Removal .......................................................................................... 53
2.2.7 SP6-160-004 (REPLACEMENT MODE FOR SERVICE)................................... 54

D3B0 ii SM
READ THIS FIRST

Symbols, Abbreviations and Trademarks

Symbols, Abbreviations
This manual uses several symbols and abbreviations. The meaning of those symbols and
abbreviations are as follows:

Symbol What it means

Clip ring
Screw
Connector
Clamp
E-ring
Flat Flexible Cable
Timing Belt
SEF Short Edge Feed
LEF Long Edge Feed
K Black
C Cyan
M Magenta
Y Yellow
B/W, BW Black and White
FC Full color

Trademarks
Adobe, Acrobat, PageMaker, PostScript, and PostScript 3 are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
and any use of such marks by Ricoh Company, Ltd. is under license.
Firefox and Thunderbird are registered trademarks of the Mozilla Foundation.
Google, Android, and Chrome are trademarks of Google Inc.
iOS® is a registered trademark or trademark of Cisco Systems, Inc. and/or its affiliates in the
United States and certain other countries.
Java is a registered trademark of Oracle and/or its affiliates.
JAWS® is a registered trademark of Freedom Scientific, Inc., St. Petersburg, Florida and/or other
countries.
Kerberos is a trademark of the Massachusetts Institute of Technology (MIT).
Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds.
Macintosh, OS X, Bonjour, Safari, and TrueType are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the
U.S. and other countries.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Server, Windows Vista, Internet Explorer, and Outlook are either
registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corp. in the United States and/or other
countries.
PictBridge is a trademark.
QR Code is a registered trademark of DENSO WAVE INCORPORATED in Japan and in other
countries.
"Red Hat" is a registered trademark of Red Hat, Inc.
The SD and SD logo are trademarks of SD-3C, LLC.
UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group.
UPnP is a trademark of UPnP Implementers Corporation.
This product includes RSA BSAFE® Cryptographic software of EMC Corporation. RSA and
BSAFE are registered trademarks or trademarks of EMC Corporation in the United States and
other countries.
The proper names of Internet Explorer 6, 7, and 8 are as follows:
 Microsoft® Internet Explorer® 6
 Windows® Internet Explorer® 7
 Windows® Internet Explorer® 8
The proper names of the Windows operating systems are as follows:
 The product names of Windows Vista are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Ultimate
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Business
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Home Premium
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Home Basic
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Enterprise
 The product names of Windows 7 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Home Premium
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Professional
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Ultimate
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Enterprise
 The product names of Windows 8 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 8
Microsoft® Windows® 8 Pro
Microsoft® Windows® 8 Enterprise
 The product names of Windows 8.1 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 8.1
Microsoft® Windows® 8.1 Pro
Microsoft® Windows® 8.1 Enterprise
 The product names of Windows 10 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 10 Home Premium
Microsoft® Windows® 10 Pro
Microsoft® Windows® 10 Enterprise
 Microsoft® Windows® 10 Education
 The product names of Windows Server 2003 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 Standard Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 Enterprise Edition
 The product names of Windows Server 2003 R2 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2 Standard Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2 Enterprise Edition
 The product names of Windows Server 2008 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 Standard
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 Enterprise
 The product names of Windows Server 2008 R2 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 R2 Standard
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 R2 Enterprise
 The product names of Windows Server 2012 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 Foundation
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 Essentials
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 Standard
 The product names of Windows Server 2012 R2 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 R2 Foundation
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 R2 Essentials
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 R2 Standard
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of
their respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights to those marks.
Microsoft product screen shots reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation.
 Covers

1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

BOOKLET
FINISHER

FINISHER
SR3230

SR3240
1.1 COVERS
1.1.1 Rear Upper Cover, Rear Lower Cover, Upper Cover
1. Remove the rear upper cover [A].

2. Remove the rear lower cover [A].

SM 1 D3BA/D3BB
Covers

3. Open the front door [A], and remove the screws of the upper cover.

4. Remove the upper cover [A] (hook x 2).

D3BA/D3BB 2 SM
 Covers

1.1.2 Front Cover, Front Left Side Cover

BOOKLET
FINISHER

FINISHER
SR3230

SR3240
1. Open the front door [A], and then remove the front door bracket [B] ( x 1).
2. Remove the front door [A].

3. Remove the front left side cover [A] ( x 2).

SM 3 D3BA/D3BB
Covers

1.1.3 Paper Guide Cover

1. Remove the rear upper cover.

2. Remove the shift tray [A] ( x1).

3. Push the guides in to the center.

D3BA/D3BB 4 SM
 Covers

4. Remove the rear paper guide cover [A] ( x2).

BOOKLET
FINISHER

FINISHER
SR3230

SR3240
5. Remove the front paper guide cover [A] ( x2).

6. Remove the paper guide cover [A] screws ( x2).

SM 5 D3BA/D3BB
Covers

7. Disconnect the front tab, and then remove the cover.

1.1.4 Proof Tray

1. Remove the following covers.
• Rear upper cover (Rear Upper Cover, Rear Lower Cover, Upper Cover)
• Upper cover (Rear Upper Cover, Rear Lower Cover, Upper Cover)
2. Remove the proof tray [A] ( x 2).

D3BA/D3BB 6 SM
 Covers

1.1.5 Shift Tray

BOOKLET
FINISHER

FINISHER
1. Remove the shift tray [A] ( x 1).

SR3230

SR3240
1.1.6 Left Cover
1. Remove the shift tray [A] ( x 1).

2. Remove the rear mold bracket [A] ( x 1).

SM 7 D3BA/D3BB
Covers

3. Remove the front mold bracket [A] ( x 1).

4. Remove the shift tray bracket [A] ( x 4).

5. Remove the left cover [A] ( x 3).

D3BA/D3BB 8 SM
 Boards

1.2 BOARDS

BOOKLET
FINISHER

FINISHER
1.2.1 Main Board

SR3230

SR3240
1. Remove the following covers.
• Rear upper cover (Rear Upper Cover, Rear Lower Cover, Upper Cover)
• Rear lower cover (Rear Upper Cover, Rear Lower Cover, Upper Cover)
2. Remove the main board [A] ( x 8, connector x all).

When replacing the main board

This board has two blocks of dip switches. When you reinstall the main board, follow the
procedure below regarding the dip switch settings.
1. Check the settings of dip switch [A] on the old main board.
2. Replace the main board.
3. Change the settings of dip switch [A] on the new main board to match the settings on the old
main board.
4. Make sure the switches of dip switch [B] on the new main board are all OFF.

SM 9 D3BA/D3BB
Boards

5. Remove the EEPROM [C] from the old board and install it on the new board.

6. Locate the label [A] attached near the right corner of the board.

7. Go into the SP mode, open these SP codes, and then enter the numbers you see on the
label.
• SP6121-001 NV Adj. Data: Jog Position: Factory Adj.
• SP6121-002 NV Adj. Data: Fold Position: Factory Adj.

D3BA/D3BB 10 SM
 Paper Guide

1.3 PAPER GUIDE

BOOKLET
FINISHER

FINISHER
1.3.1 Paper Guide Unit

SR3230

SR3240
1. Remove the paper guide covers. (Paper Guide Cover)
2. Disconnect the cover support bracket.

3. Remove the cover support bracket.

4. Loosen (do not remove) the screws on both ends of the paper exit. This will loosen the tray
so that you can move the tray slightly side-to-side; then you can remove the bracket screws
more easily.

5. Disconnect the rear end of the paper guide unit bracket [A].

SM 11 D3BA/D3BB
Paper Guide

6. Disconnect the front end of the paper guide unit bracket [B].

7. At the rear, open the clamps and disconnect the motor and sensor harnesses.

8. Hold the unit bracket with both hands, lower the rear end [A], roll it toward you slightly, and
then disconnect the harnesses [B].

D3BA/D3BB 12 SM
 Paper Guide

9. Lay the unit on a flat clean surface so that you can see the paper guide motor [1] and paper
guide position sensor bracket [2].

BOOKLET
FINISHER

FINISHER
SR3230

SR3240

SM 13 D3BA/D3BB
Main Motors

1.4 MAIN MOTORS

1.4.1 Corner Stapling Unit
1. Remove the following covers.
• Front cover (Front Cover, Front Left Side Cover)
• Front left side cover (Front Cover, Front Left Side Cover)
• Left cover (Left Cover)
• Rear upper cover (Rear Upper Cover, Rear Lower Cover, Upper Cover)
• Rear lower cover (Rear Upper Cover, Rear Lower Cover, Upper Cover)
2. Remove the inner upper cover [A] ( x 3).

• Disconnect the harness from the back side of the inner upper cover when you
remove the inner upper cover.

D3BA/D3BB 14 SM
 Main Motors

3. Remove 6 screws from the front side of the finisher ( x 6).

BOOKLET
FINISHER

FINISHER
SR3230

SR3240
4. Remove the bushing [A] from the front side of the finisher (C-ring x 1).

5. Remove the pressure release motor bracket [A] from the rear side of the finisher ( x 2).

SM 15 D3BA/D3BB
Main Motors

6. Remove the gear [A] from the rear side of the finisher (snap-fit x 1).

7. Remove the pulley [A] from the rear side of the finisher (C-ring x 1).

D3BA/D3BB 16 SM
 Main Motors

8. Remove 6 screws from the rear side of the finisher ( x 6).

BOOKLET
FINISHER

FINISHER
SR3230

SR3240
9. Open the clamps shown below ( x 6).

SM 17 D3BA/D3BB
Main Motors

10. Disconnect the ground wire [A] of the main board ( x 1).

11. Disconnect the connectors shown below ( x 8).

12. Pull out the harnesses disconnected in step 11 to the right side of the finisher through the
hole [A].
13. Remove the harness from the clamps ( x 4).

D3BA/D3BB 18 SM
 Main Motors

14. Remove the corner stapling unit [A] from between the front and left plate.

BOOKLET
FINISHER

FINISHER
SR3230

SR3240
1.4.2 Paper Exit Gate Motor
1. Remove the corner stapling unit. (Corner Stapling Unit)
2. Remove the stapler bracket [A] ( x 3, x 1).

3. Remove the paper exit gate motor [A] ( x 2, x 1).

SM 19 D3BA/D3BB
Main Motors

1.4.3 Leading Edge Guide Motor

1. Remove the corner stapling unit. (Corner Stapling Unit)
2. Remove the stapler bracket [A] ( x 3, x 1).

3. Remove the leading edge guide motor [A] ( x 2, x 1).

1.4.4 Trailing Edge Pressure Plate Motor

1. Remove the corner stapling unit. (Corner Stapling Unit)
2. Remove the trailing edge pressure plate motor [A] ( x 2, x 1).

D3BA/D3BB 20 SM
 Main Motors

1.4.5 Stacking Roller Motor

BOOKLET
FINISHER

FINISHER
SR3230

SR3240
1. Remove the rear upper cover. (Rear Upper Cover, Rear Lower Cover, Upper Cover)
2. Remove the stacking roller motor [A] ( x 2, x 1).

1.4.6 Feed Out Motor

1. Remove the corner stapling unit. (Corner Stapling Unit)
2. Remove the feed out motor [A] ( x 2, x 1, x 2).

1.4.7 Jogger Motor

1. Remove the corner stapling unit. (Corner Stapling Unit)
2. Remove the stapler bracket [A] ( x 3, x 1).

SM 21 D3BA/D3BB
Main Motors

3. Remove the feed out motor. (Feed Out Motor)

4. Remove the jogger motor [A] ( x 2, x 1).

1.4.8 Paper Guide Motor

1. Remove the paper guide unit. (Paper Guide Unit)
2. The paper guide motor is at [A].

3. Remove the sensor bracket ( x1).

D3BA/D3BB 22 SM
 Main Motors

4. Unfasten the motor, and disconnect the belt ( x2, x1).

BOOKLET
FINISHER

FINISHER
SR3230

SR3240
5. Disconnect the motor harness, and then remove the motor ( x1).

6. When you re-install the motor, make sure that the connector is pointing to the back of the unit.

SM 23 D3BA/D3BB
Sensors

1.5 SENSORS
1.5.1 Shift Tray Paper Sensor
1. Remove the corner stapling unit. (Corner Stapling Unit)
2. Remove the stapler bracket [A] ( x 3, x 1).

3. Remove the shift tray paper sensor bracket [A] ( x 1).

4. Remove the shift tray paper sensor [A] ( x 1, x 1).

D3BA/D3BB 24 SM
 Sensors

1.5.2 Trailing Edge Pressure Plate HP Sensor

BOOKLET
FINISHER

FINISHER
SR3230

SR3240
1. Remove the corner stapling unit. (Corner Stapling Unit)
2. Remove the stapler bracket [A] ( x 3, x 1).

3. Turn back the stapler bracket, and remove the trailing edge pressure plate HP sensor bracket
[A] ( x 1).

4. Remove the trailing edge pressure plate HP sensor [A] ( x 1).

SM 25 D3BA/D3BB
Sensors

1.5.3 Stacking Roller HP Sensor

1. Remove the corner stapling unit. (Corner Stapling Unit)
2. Remove the stapler bracket [A] ( x 3, x 1).

3. Turn back the stapler bracket, and remove the paper exit gate motor bracket [A] ( x 1,
x 1).

4. Remove the stacking roller HP sensor bracket [A] ( x 1).

D3BA/D3BB 26 SM
 Sensors

5. Remove the stacking roller HP sensor [A] ( x 1).

BOOKLET
FINISHER

FINISHER
SR3230

SR3240
1.5.4 Staple Tray Paper Sensor
1. Remove the corner stapling unit. (Corner Stapling Unit)
2. Remove the stapler bracket [A] ( x 3, x 1).

3. Remove the staple tray paper sensor bracket [A] ( x 1, x 1).

SM 27 D3BA/D3BB
Sensors

4. Remove the staple tray paper sensor [A] ( x 1).

1.5.5 Paper Guide HP Sensor

1. Remove the paper guide unit. (Paper Guide Unit)
2. The paper guide HP sensor is located at [A].

3. Remove the sensor bracket [A] ( x1).

D3BA/D3BB 28 SM
 Sensors

4. Open the clamp and disconnect the sensor ( x1, x1).

BOOKLET
FINISHER

FINISHER
SR3230

SR3240
5. Separate the sensor and bracket (tab x3).

SM 29 D3BA/D3BB
Stapler Unit

1.6 STAPLER UNIT

1. Remove the rear upper cover [A] ( x 2).

2. Open the front door and push the stapler unit [A] towards the rear side of the finisher.

3. At the rear side, remove the screw circled in the photo below from the stapler unit [A] ( x 1).

4. Push the stapler unit to the front side of the finisher.

D3BA/D3BB 30 SM
 Stapler Unit

5. Remove the inner upper cover [A] ( x 3).

BOOKLET
FINISHER

FINISHER
SR3230

SR3240
6. Remove the bracket [B] from the stapler unit [A] ( x 1).

7. Remove the bracket [A] ( x 1).

SM 31 D3BA/D3BB
Stapler Unit

8. Remove the stapler unit [A] ( x 2).

D3BA/D3BB 32 SM
 Punch Unit

1.7 PUNCH UNIT

The punch unit is already adjusted in the factory, so you don’t need to adjust it. When you need to

BOOKLET
FINISHER

FINISHER
SR3230

SR3240
replace the parts of the punch unit, replace the whole unit.

• Do not disassemble the punch unit. This unit is precisely adjusted in the factory.
• Do not drop or give a shock to the unit when you replace it. The unit could be damaged.
1. Remove the following covers.
• Rear Upper Cover (Rear Upper Cover, Rear Lower Cover, Upper Cover)
• Rear Lower Cover (Rear Upper Cover, Rear Lower Cover, Upper Cover)
2. Remove the side-to-side detection unit [A] ( x 2, x 3, x 2).

SM 33 D3BA/D3BB
Punch Unit

3. Remove the stepper motor bracket [A] ( x 1, x 2).

4. Remove the punch unit control board [A] ( x1, tab x2).

5. Pull out the punch unit [A] ( x 2, x 3, x 2).

D3BA/D3BB 34 SM
SM
35
D3BA/D3BB
Punch Unit

FINISHER
SR3230
BOOKLET
FINISHER
SR3240
Layout

2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
2.1 LAYOUT
2.1.1 General Layout

No. Name
1 Punch Unit
2 Corner Stapler
3 Shift Tray
4 Proof Tray

D3BA/D3BB 36 SM
 Layout

2.1.2 Electrical Component Layout

BOOKLET
FINISHER

FINISHER
SR3230

SR3240
No. Part
1 Exit Motor
2 Transport Motor
3 Main Control Board
4 Pre-stack Transport Motor
5 Entrance Transport Motor
6 Horizontal Transport Motor
7 Tray Lift Motor
8 Paper Guide Motor
9 Paper Guide HP Sensor

SM 37 D3BA/D3BB
Layout

No. Part No. Part

1 Shift Motor 10 LED 3
2 Upper Junction Gate Solenoid 11 LED 2
3 Lower Junction Gate Motor 12 Horizontal Transport Sensor
4 Proof Tray Full Sensor 13 Switchback Transport Sensor
5 Entrance Sensor 14 Transport Path Paper Sensor
6 LED 5 15 Proof Tray Exit Sensor
7 LED 1 16 Lower Junction Gate HP Sensor
8 LED 4 17 Shift Roller HP Sensor
9 Front Door Switch

No. Part No. Part

1 Jogger Fence HP Sensor 8 Stapler HP Sensor
2 Jogger Motor 9 Leading Edge Guide Motor
3 Corner Stapler Movement Motor 10 Leading Edge Guide HP Sensor
4 Feed-out Belt Motor 11 Positioning Roller HP Sensor

D3BA/D3BB 38 SM
 Layout

No. Part No. Part

5 Staple Tray Paper Sensor 12 Positioning Roller Motor

BOOKLET
FINISHER

FINISHER
SR3230

SR3240
6 Feed-out Belt HP Sensor 13 Shift Tray Exit Sensor
7 Corner Stapler Motor

No. Part No. Part

1 Paper Exit Guide Plate Motor 9 Return Roller HP Sensor
2 Paper Exit Guide Plate Limit Switch 10 Return Roller Motor
3 Booklet Stack Height Sensor 1 11 Shift Tray Lower Limit Sensor 5
4 Booklet Stack Height Sensor 2 12 Shift Tray Lower Limit Sensor 4
5 Exit Guide Plate HP Sensor 13 Shift Tray Lower Limit Sensor 3
6 Trailing Edge Press HP Sensor 14 Shift Tray Lower Limit Sensor 2
7 Shift Paper Height Sensor 15 Shift Tray Lower Limit Sensor 1
8 Upper Tray Height Limit Switch 16 Trailing Edge Press Motor

Punch Unit

SM 39 D3BA/D3BB
Layout

No. Part
1 Punch Unit Movement Motor
2 Punch Unit HP Sensor
3 Punch Registration HP Sensor
4 Punch Registration Motor
5 Punch Registration Sensor
6 Punchout Hopper Full Sensor
7 Punch HP Sensor
8 Punch Drive Motor
9 Punch Motor Rotation Sensor
10 Punch Unit Control Board

2.1.3 Transport Layout

Red Straight Through Path

D3BA/D3BB 40 SM
 Layout

Orange Proof Path

Green Pre-stacking Path

BOOKLET
FINISHER

FINISHER
SR3230

SR3240
Purple Stapling Path

2.1.4 Proof Transport Layout (Drive)

No. Name No. Name

A Proof Exit Motor C Entrance Transport Motor
B Junction Gate Solenoid D Horizontal Transport Motor

2.1.5 Proof Transport Layout (Sensors)

No. Name No. Name

A Proof Tray Full Sensor C Horizontal Transport Sensor
B Proof Exit Sensor D Entrance Sensor

SM 41 D3BA/D3BB
Layout

2.1.6 Shift Transport Layout (Drive)

No. Name No. Name

A Shift Roller Motor (shift only) D Relay Transport Motor
B Entrance Transport Motor E Upper Tray Exit Motor
C Horizontal Transport Motor

D3BA/D3BB 42 SM
 Operation Details

2.2 OPERATION DETAILS

BOOKLET
FINISHER

FINISHER
2.2.1 Shift Operation (Shift Transport)

SR3230

SR3240
To separate the output stacks, the shift roller motor [A] moves the shift roller [B] side-to-side while
the shift roller is driven. The shift roller HP sensor [C] is used to control this mechanism.

2.2.2 Pre-stack Operation (In Corner Stapling)

• Pre-stack Capacity: 1 sheet
• Pre-stack Size: A4 SEF/LEF, B5 SEF/LEF, LT SEF/LEF
There are four steps as follows:
6. The upper tray exit guide plate [A] moves up (opens). Paper comes through the entrance
transport path and reaches the relay transport path.

SM 43 D3BA/D3BB
Operation Details

7. After paper passes the pre-stack junction gate [A], the pre-stack junction gate [A] moves
down (closes) and the relay transport roller [C] rotates in reverse. The pre-stack roller [B]
rotates to transport paper to the pre-stack position.

8. The rotation of the relay transport roller [C] and the pre-stack roller [B] stops, and the
pre-stack junction gate [A] moves up (opens). The shift roller [D] also moves up to release the
pressure between itself [D] and the relay transport roller [C].

9. The following sheet comes through the entrance and reaches the relay transport path. After
that, the shift roller [A] drops to press the pre-stacked sheet and the following sheet. Then
with the pre-stacked sheet, the following sheet goes to the next process (corner stapling).

2.2.3 Upper Tray Shift Drive / Limit Sensor / Full Sensor

Upper Tray Shift Up/down

The upper tray lift motor [A] moves the upper tray up/down.

Upper-position Detection

With the actuator, the shift paper height sensor [B] detects the upper position of the tray (without
output paper). The upper tray height limit switch [C] prevents the tray from moving up too much.
When the upper tray moves up to the upper position but doesn’t stop, the upper tray height limit
switch is pushed and the tray shift motor [A] stops.

Upper Tray Full Detection

Condition 1
D3BA/D3BB 44 SM
 Operation Details

There are five tray full sensors [D] on the rear side of the machine, but Shift Tray Lower Limit
Sensor 2 and 4 are not used for this finisher.

BOOKLET
FINISHER

FINISHER
SR3230

SR3240
State Sensors Paper Size Length
500 Shift Tray Lower A5 SEF, A5 LEF, B6 SEF, HLT SEF, A6 SEF 148 to
sheets Limit Sensor 5 182 mm
1,000 Shift Tray Lower Not used for this finisher.
sheet Limit Sensor 4
1,500 Shift Tray Lower A3 SEF, A4 SEF, B4 SEF, B5 SEF, B5 LEF, DLT SEF, 182 to
sheets Limit Sensor 3 LG SEF, LT SEF, 12"x18" SEF, SRA3 SEF, 13"x19.2" 488 mm
SEF
2,000 Shift Tray Lower Not used for this finisher.
sheets Limit Sensor 2
3,000 Shift Tray Lower A4 LEF, LT LEF
sheets Limit Sensor 1

Condition 2
When the feeler rises up to position "1", The booklet stack height sensor 1 [A] is "OFF" and the
booklet stack height sensor 2 [B] is "ON".
If this feeler remains in position "1" for 13 seconds continuously, the shift tray is detected full .
The purpose is to accurately detect tray full for stacks of Z-folded paper, or incorrectly stacked
documents.

SM 45 D3BA/D3BB
Operation Details

Condition 3
Shift tray detection input check: SP6123-35 normally set to "0" (default), tray not full.

2.2.4 Pull-in Roller / Paper Stack Holder

Components

No. Name No. Name

A Paper Stacking Holder E Stacking Sponge Roller Fluctuation Motor
B Holder HP Sensor F Stacking Sponge Roller Cam
C Stacking Sponge Roller G Stacking Sponge Roller HP Sensor
D Paper Stacking Holder Cam H Paper Stacking Holder Motor

Operation
There are five steps in the operation:
10. When a job starts, the paper stacking holder motor rotates the paper stacking holder cam [B]
to move the paper stacking holder [A] down.
11. The stacking sponge roller fluctuation motor rotates the stacking sponge roller cam [D] to
D3BA/D3BB 46 SM
 Operation Details

move the stacking sponge roller [E] down. The paper stacking holder motor rotates the paper
stacking holder cam [B] to lift the paper stacking holder [A] up to its HP (until the paper

BOOKLET
FINISHER

FINISHER
SR3230

SR3240
stacking holder interrupts the paper stacking holder HP sensor [C]).

12. The paper stacking holder motor drives in reverse to let the stacking sponge roller [A] pull the
output paper in.
13. The paper stacking holder motor rotates the paper stacking holder cam [C] to drop the paper
stacking holder [B] (until job end, the machine repeats step 3 and step 4).

SM 47 D3BA/D3BB
Operation Details

14. After job end, the stacking sponge fluctuation motor rotates the stacking sponge roller cam
[D] to lift the stacking sponge roller [A] up to its HP position. At the same time, the paper
stacking holder motor rotates the holder cam [E] to lift the paper stacking holder [B] up to its
HP (until the paper stacking holder HP sensor [C] detects the end of the paper stacking
holder [B]).

2.2.5 Corner Stapling

Components

No. Name No. Name

A Positioning Roller Lift Motor E Drag Roller
B Positioning Roller F Stapler
C Exit Motor G Stapler HP Sensor
D Stapler Movement Motor H Positioning Roller HP Sensor

D3BA/D3BB 48 SM
 Operation Details

BOOKLET
FINISHER

FINISHER
SR3230

SR3240
No. Name No. Name
A Edge Guide E Jogger Fence
B Upper Tray Exit Sensor F Staple Tray Paper Sensor
C Jogger HP sensor G Edge Guide HP Sensor
D Jogger Motor H Edge Guide Motor

No. Name No. Name

A Stack Feed-out Belt (with stack feed-out pawl) C Trailing Edge Fence
B Stack Feed-out Motor D Stack Feed-out Pawl HP

Edge Guide
This machine applies a corner staple to the paper stack while it is hanging out of the exit. At this
time, to prevent the paper stack from dropping to the upper tray, the edge guide [D] comes out of
the unit. The edge guide operates as follows:
15. When a job starts, the upper tray guide plate [A] shifts up.

SM 49 D3BA/D3BB
Operation Details

16. The edge guide motor [B] drives to push the edge guide [D] out. The edge guide retreats into
the machine when the last sheet of a job is output (the edge guide HP sensor [C] detects the
edge guide).

Stapler Movement
The stapler movement motor [A] moves the stapler [C] along the guide rod [B]. After a job finishes,
the stapler [C] returns to its HP (the stapler HP sensor [D] detects the base of the stapler).

Positioning Roller / Drag Roller

The positioning roller and drag roller operate as follows:
17. The positioning roller shift motor [A] moves the positioning roller [D] down at the start of every
job.
18. The positioning roller motor [B] rotates the positioning roller [D] to transport paper to the
staple tray.
19. The positioning roller motor [B] also rotates the drag roller [C]. The drag roller [C] is a sponge

D3BA/D3BB 50 SM
 Operation Details

roller that pushes paper against the trailing edge fence, in order to hold paper in the stapling
position.

BOOKLET
FINISHER

FINISHER
SR3230

SR3240
Jogger
The jogger motor [A] moves the jogger fences [C] to the ready position, where they wait for the
first sheet. As each sheet enters, the jogger fences push toward the center. At the end of the job,
the jogger fences return to their HP and stop. The jogger fence HP sensor [B] detects the jogger
fence at the home position.

SM 51 D3BA/D3BB
Operation Details

Stapling
The staple hammer motor [B] pushes the staple hammer [A] down in order to staple the paper
stack. The stapling positions are as follows:
• For oblique stapling: [1]
• For horizontal stapling: [2]
• For horizontal stapling at 2 points: [3]

Feeding-out
The trailing edge fence [B] moves paper up to the proper position to output. Then the stack
feed-out pawl [A] that is attached to the stack feed-out belt [C] pushes the paper out. The stack
feed-out motor [D] moves the stack feed-out pawl [A] and the trailing edge fence [B]. After a stack
is output, both the trailing edge fence [B] and stack feed-out pawl [A] return to their HP.
There are two types of stack output.
• 1. Pawl, exit roller: Small sizes (A4, LT, B4 SEF)
Output is done by the exit roller, and by the trailing edge fence and the stack feed-out pawl as
described above.
• 2. Roller exit: A4, LT, B5 LEF
Only the exit roller is used to output the stack, without using the trailing edge fence and the
stack feed-out pawl.
For Large Sizes (A3, B4, LG, DLT)
• 1 to 10 sheets: Roller exit method

D3BA/D3BB 52 SM
 Operation Details

• More than 11 sheets: Pawl, exit roller method

BOOKLET
FINISHER

FINISHER
SR3230

SR3240
2.2.6 Paper Exit Guide

Paper Guide Unit

As each stapled copy exits the finisher, it contacts the copy ahead of it already on the shift tray,
and the paper guide unit [A] prevents the copies from becoming entangled on the shift tray.
The paper guide motor drives the paper guide cover to reduce the amount of curl and prevent the
leading edges [B] from curling and to improve the output of stapled copies on the shift tray.

Related SP Codes
Selects whether or not to operate the paper guide in jobs other than corner stapling jobs.
0: Paper guide operates for all paper sizes
1: Paper guide does not operate
• SP6126-001 Use Paper Guide (Small sizes up to 300 mm)
• SP6125-001 Use Paper Guide (Large sizes large than 300 mm)

Paper Guide Removal

The paper guide unit is provided with the paper guide covers [A] at the initial position for users
who want to take advantage of the improved stacking, but these covers can be removed. (Even
with the covers removed, output will be done correctly even if the paper guides touch during

SM 53 D3BA/D3BB
Operation Details

operation.)

2.2.7 SP6-160-004 (Replacement Mode for Service)

It is easier to access the following parts after running SP-6-160-004.
• Positioning Roller [A]
The paper exit guide plate moves upwards and the positioning roller pops up in front for
easier access.
• Reverse Roller [B]
The paper exit guide plate moves upwards and the reverse roller can be accessed.

D3BA/D3BB 54 SM
 D3CQ
1 BIN TRAY BN311

Latest Release: -
Initial Release: November, 2016
Copyright (c) 2016 Ricoh Co.,Ltd.

Rev. 08/12/2021
 1 BIN TRAY BN3110
(D3CQ)
TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ............................................. 1

1.1 PAPER SENSOR.......................................................................................................... 1
1.2 BOARD......................................................................................................................... 6
1.2.1 CONTROLLER BOARD ..................................................................................... 6

2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS.............................................................. 7
2.1 1 BIN TRAY BN3110 (D3CQ) ........................................................................................ 7
2.1.1 PARTS LAYOUT ................................................................................................. 7
2.1.2 MECHANISM ..................................................................................................... 9
Paper detection display .......................................................................................... 9
Paper exit roller drive mechanism........................................................................... 9
Paper ejection mechanism ..................................................................................... 9

SM i D3CQ
READ THIS FIRST

Symbols, Abbreviations and Trademarks

Symbols, Abbreviations
This manual uses several symbols and abbreviations. The meaning of those symbols and
abbreviations are as follows:

Symbol What it means

Clip ring

Screw

Connector

Clamp

E-ring

Flat Flexible Cable

Timing Belt

SEF Short Edge Feed [A]

LEF Long Edge Feed [B]

K Black

C Cyan

M Magenta

Y Yellow

B/W, BW Black and White

FC Full color
Trademarks
Adobe, Acrobat, PageMaker, PostScript, and PostScript 3 are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
and any use of such marks by Ricoh Company, Ltd. is under license.
Firefox and Thunderbird are registered trademarks of the Mozilla Foundation.
Google, Android, and Chrome are trademarks of Google Inc.
iOS® is a registered trademark or trademark of Cisco Systems, Inc. and/or its affiliates in the
United States and certain other countries.
Java is a registered trademark of Oracle and/or its affiliates.
JAWS® is a registered trademark of Freedom Scientific, Inc., St. Petersburg, Florida and/or other
countries.
Kerberos is a trademark of the Massachusetts Institute of Technology (MIT).
Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds.
Macintosh, OS X, Bonjour, Safari, and TrueType are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the
U.S. and other countries.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Server, Windows Vista, Internet Explorer, and Outlook are either
registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corp. in the United States and/or other
countries.
PictBridge is a trademark.
QR Code is a registered trademark of DENSO WAVE INCORPORATED in Japan and in other
countries.
"Red Hat" is a registered trademark of Red Hat, Inc.
The SD and SD logo are trademarks of SD-3C, LLC.
UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group.
UPnP is a trademark of UPnP Implementers Corporation.
This product includes RSA BSAFE® Cryptographic software of EMC Corporation. RSA and
BSAFE are registered trademarks or trademarks of EMC Corporation in the United States and
other countries.
The proper names of Internet Explorer 6, 7, and 8 are as follows:
 Microsoft® Internet Explorer® 6
 Windows® Internet Explorer® 7
 Windows® Internet Explorer® 8
The proper names of the Windows operating systems are as follows:
 The product names of Windows Vista are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Ultimate
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Business
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Home Premium
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Home Basic
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Enterprise
 The product names of Windows 7 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Home Premium
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Professional
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Ultimate
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Enterprise
 The product names of Windows 8 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 8
Microsoft® Windows® 8 Pro
Microsoft® Windows® 8 Enterprise
 The product names of Windows 8.1 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 8.1
Microsoft® Windows® 8.1 Pro
Microsoft® Windows® 8.1 Enterprise
 The product names of Windows 10 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 10 Home Premium
Microsoft® Windows® 10 Pro
Microsoft® Windows® 10 Enterprise
Microsoft® Windows® 10 Education
 The product names of Windows Server 2003 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 Standard Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 Enterprise Edition
 The product names of Windows Server 2003 R2 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2 Standard Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2 Enterprise Edition
 The product names of Windows Server 2008 are as follows:
 Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 Standard
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 Enterprise
 The product names of Windows Server 2008 R2 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 R2 Standard
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 R2 Enterprise
 The product names of Windows Server 2012 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 Foundation
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 Essentials
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 Standard
 The product names of Windows Server 2012 R2 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 R2 Foundation
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 R2 Essentials
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 R2 Standard
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of
their respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights to those marks.
Microsoft product screen shots reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation.
 Paper Sensor

1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

1 BIN TRAY
BN3110
(D3CQ)
1.1 PAPER SENSOR

1. Unlock the lever [A], and then open the right door [B].

2. Small cover [A]

3. Proximity sensor cover [A]

SM 1 D3CQ
Paper Sensor

 There are three tabs at the positions of the red arrows.

 Tilt the operation panel [B], and then remove the proximity sensor cover [A].

4. Paper exit tray [A]

5. Left upper cover [A]

D3CQ 2 SM
 Paper Sensor

6. Left rear cover [A] (hook×1)

1 BIN TRAY
BN3110
(D3CQ)
7. Remove the cover [A] carefully in accordance with the notes described below.

 Do not twist the cover to remove the cover as shown below. Otherwise, some hooks
inside the cover may be broken.

SM 3 D3CQ
Paper Sensor

 Lift up the cover [A] vertically to remove the cover as shown below.

8. 1 bin tray [A] ( ×1)

9. 1 bin tray unit [A] ( ×1, ×2)

D3CQ 4 SM
 Paper Sensor

10. Paper sensor [A] ( ×1)

1 BIN TRAY
BN3110
(D3CQ)

SM 5 D3CQ
Board

1.2 BOARD

1.2.1 CONTROLLER BOARD

1. 1 bin tray unit (page 1)
2. Controller board [A] ( ×1, ×3)

D3CQ 6 SM
 1 Bin Tray BN3110 (D3CQ)

2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS

1 BIN TRAY
BN3110
(D3CQ)
2.1 1 BIN TRAY BN3110 (D3CQ)

2.1.1 PARTS LAYOUT

No. Description No. Description

1 LED 3 Paper exit roller

2 Paper tray 4 Paper sensor

SM 7 D3CQ
1 Bin Tray BN3110 (D3CQ)

No. Description No. Description

1 Paper sensor 3 LED

2 Controller board

D3CQ 8 SM
 1 Bin Tray BN3110 (D3CQ)

2.1.2 MECHANISM

1 BIN TRAY
BN3110
(D3CQ)
Paper detection display
The paper sensor is located in the 1 bin unit. When paper is detected, the LED lights up.

Paper exit roller drive mechanism

The 1 bin paper exit roller is driven by the main motor through a gear and timing belt.

Paper ejection mechanism

Paper transported from the mainframe’s paper exit is ejected to the 1 bin tray by the paper exit
roller.

SM 9 D3CQ
 D3DX
Fax Option Type M29
Ver. 1.0

Latest Release: -
Initial Release: November, 2016
Copyright (c) 2016 Ricoh Co.,Ltd.

Rev. 08/12/2021
 FAX OPTION TYPE M29
(D3DX)
TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. INSTALLATION .................................................................................. 1
1.1 FAX OPTION TYPE M29 (D3DX-01, -02, -03) .............................................................. 1
1.1.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ........................................................................................ 1
1.1.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ........................................................................... 1
Fax Stamp Installation ............................................................................................ 5
1.1.3 ADDING FAX APPLICATION ICONS TO THE HOME SCREEN ......................... 6
Registering the Function key .................................................................................. 7
Function Priority Setting ......................................................................................... 9
1.1.4 NOTES FOR CONNECTING THE TELEPHONE LINE ..................................... 10
Reasons why the Fax Board may be damaged ..................................................... 10
1.2 G3 INTERFACE UNIT TYPE M29 (D3DX-05, -06, -07, -13) ........................................ 11
1.2.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ...................................................................................... 11
1.2.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ......................................................................... 11
Single G3 Board ................................................................................................... 11
Double G3 Boards ................................................................................................ 16
1.2.3 NOTES FOR CONNECTING THE TELEPHONE LINE ..................................... 22
Reasons why the Fax Board may be damaged ..................................................... 22
1.3 FAX UNIT OPTIONS................................................................................................... 23
1.3.1 FAX MEMORY UNIT TYPE M19 64MB (D3BZ) ................................................ 23
Accessory Check.................................................................................................. 23
Installation Procedure ........................................................................................... 23
1.3.2 HANDSET HS3020 (D739) ............................................................................... 27
1.4 FAX CONNECTION UNIT TYPE M29 (D3DW-01, -02, -03) ........................................ 31
1.4.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ...................................................................................... 31
1.4.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ......................................................................... 31
Order of installation .............................................................................................. 31
Installing the fax connection unit ........................................................................... 32
Registering the client machine(s).......................................................................... 32
Registering the remote machine ........................................................................... 33
Configuring the Remote Reception Settings ......................................................... 33

SM i D3DX
2. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ........................................... 35
2.1 FCU ............................................................................................................................ 35
2.1.1 SRAM DATA TRANSFER PROCEDURE .......................................................... 35

3. TROUBLESHOOTING ..................................................................... 42
3.1 ERROR CODES ......................................................................................................... 42
3.2 FAX CONNECTION UNIT ERROR CODES ................................................................ 61
3.2.1 ERROR CODE - 01 .......................................................................................... 61
3.2.2 ERROR CODE - 02 .......................................................................................... 61
3.2.3 ERROR CODE - 03 .......................................................................................... 61
3.2.4 ERROR CODE - 04 .......................................................................................... 62
3.2.5 ERROR CODE - 05 .......................................................................................... 62
3.2.6 ERROR CODE - 06 .......................................................................................... 62
3.2.7 ERROR CODE - 07 .......................................................................................... 62
3.2.8 ERROR CODE - 08 .......................................................................................... 62
3.2.9 ERROR CODE - 09 .......................................................................................... 63
3.3 IFAX TROUBLESHOOTING ....................................................................................... 64
3.4 IP-FAX TROUBLESHOOTING .................................................................................... 66
3.4.1 IP-FAX TRANSMISSION .................................................................................. 66
Cannot send by IP Address/Host Name ................................................................ 66
Cannot send via VoIP Gateway ............................................................................ 67
Cannot send by Alias Fax number. ....................................................................... 67
3.4.2 IP-FAX RECEPTION ........................................................................................ 68
Cannot receive via IP Address/Host Name. .......................................................... 68
Cannot receive by VoIP Gateway.......................................................................... 69
Cannot receive by Alias Fax number..................................................................... 70

4. SERVICE TABLES ........................................................................... 72

4.1 CAUTIONS ................................................................................................................. 72
4.2 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES................................................................................... 73
4.2.1 SP1-XXX (BIT SWITCHES) .............................................................................. 73
4.2.2 SP2-XXX (RAM) ............................................................................................... 74
4.2.3 SP3-XXX (MACHINE SET) ............................................................................... 75
4.2.4 SP4-XXX (ROM VERSIONS) ........................................................................... 76
4.2.5 SP5-XXX (RAM CLEAR) .................................................................................. 77
4.2.6 SP6-XXX (REPORTS) ...................................................................................... 77
4.2.7 SP7-XXX (TESTS) ........................................................................................... 79
4.3 BIT SWITCHES – 1 .................................................................................................... 82
4.3.1 SYSTEM SWITCHES ....................................................................................... 82
4.4 BIT SWITCHES – 2 .................................................................................................... 95

D3DX ii SM
 4.4.1 I-FAX SWITCHES............................................................................................. 95
4.4.2 PRINTER SWITCHES .................................................................................... 101
4.5 BIT SWITCHES – 3 .................................................................................................. 109
4.5.1 COMMUNICATION SWITCHES ..................................................................... 109
4.6 BIT SWITCHES – 4 .................................................................................................. 119
4.6.1 G3 SWITCHES............................................................................................... 119
4.7 BIT SWITCHES – 5 .................................................................................................. 128
4.7.1 G3-2 AND G3-3 SWITCHES........................................................................... 128
4.7.2 G4 INTERNAL SWITCHES............................................................................. 135
4.7.3 G4 PARAMETER SWITCHES ........................................................................ 135
4.8 BIT SWITCHES – 6 .................................................................................................. 136
4.8.1 IP FAX SWITCHES......................................................................................... 136
4.9 NCU PARAMETERS................................................................................................. 144
4.9.1 NCU PARAMETERS ...................................................................................... 144
4.10 DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS .................................................. 158
4.10.1 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE .................................................................... 158
4.10.2 PARAMETERS ............................................................................................... 158
Fax Parameters .................................................................................................. 158
E-mail Parameters.............................................................................................. 162
4.11SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES................................................................................... 166
4.11.1 SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES ........................................................................ 166

5. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS ........................................ 180

5.1 OVERVIEW .............................................................................................................. 180
5.1.1 OVERVIEW .................................................................................................... 180
5.2 BOARDS .................................................................................................................. 181
5.2.1 FCU................................................................................................................ 181
5.2.2 SG3 BOARD .................................................................................................. 182
5.3 VIDEO DATA PATH ................................................................................................... 184
5.3.1 TRANSMISSION ............................................................................................ 184
Memory Transmission and Parallel Memory Transmission .................................. 184
Immediate Transmission..................................................................................... 185
JBIG Transmission ............................................................................................. 185
Adjustments ....................................................................................................... 185
5.3.2 RECEPTION .................................................................................................. 185
5.4 FAX COMMUNICATION FEATURES ........................................................................ 187
5.4.1 MULTI-PORT .................................................................................................. 187
5.4.2 DOCUMENT SERVER ................................................................................... 187
5.4.3 INTERNET MAIL COMMUNICATION ............................................................. 188
Mail Transmission............................................................................................... 188

SM iii D3DX
 Mail Reception ................................................................................................... 190
Handling Mail Reception Errors .......................................................................... 192
Secure Internet Reception .................................................................................. 193
Transfer Request: Request By Mail .................................................................... 193
E-Mail Options (Sub TX Mode) ........................................................................... 193
5.5 IP-FAX ...................................................................................................................... 198
5.5.1 WHAT IS IP-FAX?........................................................................................... 198
5.5.2 T.38 PACKET FORMAT .................................................................................. 198
UDP Related Switches ....................................................................................... 198
5.5.3 SETTINGS ..................................................................................................... 198

6. SPECIFICATIONS .......................................................................... 199

6.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS................................................................................... 199
6.1.1 FCU................................................................................................................ 199
6.2 CAPABILITIES OF PROGRAMMABLE ITEMS ......................................................... 201
6.3 IFAX SPECIFICATIONS............................................................................................ 202
6.4 IP-FAX SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................................................ 204
6.5 FAX UNIT CONFIGURATION ................................................................................... 205

D3DX iv SM
READ THIS FIRST

Symbols, Abbreviations and Trademarks

Symbols, Abbreviations
This manual uses several symbols and abbreviations. The meaning of those symbols and
abbreviations are as follows:

Symbol What it means

Clip ring

Screw

Connector

Clamp

E-ring

Flat Flexible Cable

Timing Belt

SEF Short Edge Feed [A]

LEF Long Edge Feed [B]

K Black

C Cyan

M Magenta

Y Yellow

B/W, BW Black and White

FC Full color
Trademarks
Adobe, Acrobat, PageMaker, PostScript, and PostScript 3 are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
and any use of such marks by Ricoh Company, Ltd. is under license.
Firefox and Thunderbird are registered trademarks of the Mozilla Foundation.
Google, Android, and Chrome are trademarks of Google Inc.
iOS® is a registered trademark or trademark of Cisco Systems, Inc. and/or its affiliates in the
United States and certain other countries.
Java is a registered trademark of Oracle and/or its affiliates.
JAWS® is a registered trademark of Freedom Scientific, Inc., St. Petersburg, Florida and/or other
countries.
Kerberos is a trademark of the Massachusetts Institute of Technology (MIT).
Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds.
Macintosh, OS X, Bonjour, Safari, and TrueType are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the
U.S. and other countries.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Server, Windows Vista, Internet Explorer, and Outlook are either
registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corp. in the United States and/or other
countries.
PictBridge is a trademark.
QR Code is a registered trademark of DENSO WAVE INCORPORATED in Japan and in other
countries.
"Red Hat" is a registered trademark of Red Hat, Inc.
The SD and SD logo are trademarks of SD-3C, LLC.
UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group.
UPnP is a trademark of UPnP Implementers Corporation.
This product includes RSA BSAFE® Cryptographic software of EMC Corporation. RSA and
BSAFE are registered trademarks or trademarks of EMC Corporation in the United States and
other countries.
The proper names of Internet Explorer 6, 7, and 8 are as follows:
 Microsoft® Internet Explorer® 6
 Windows® Internet Explorer® 7
 Windows® Internet Explorer® 8
The proper names of the Windows operating systems are as follows:
 The product names of Windows Vista are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Ultimate
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Business
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Home Premium
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Home Basic
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Enterprise
 The product names of Windows 7 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Home Premium
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Professional
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Ultimate
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Enterprise
 The product names of Windows 8 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 8
Microsoft® Windows® 8 Pro
Microsoft® Windows® 8 Enterprise
 The product names of Windows 8.1 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 8.1
Microsoft® Windows® 8.1 Pro
Microsoft® Windows® 8.1 Enterprise
 The product names of Windows 10 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 10 Home Premium
Microsoft® Windows® 10 Pro
Microsoft® Windows® 10 Enterprise
Microsoft® Windows® 10 Education
 The product names of Windows Server 2003 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 Standard Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 Enterprise Edition
 The product names of Windows Server 2003 R2 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2 Standard Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2 Enterprise Edition
 The product names of Windows Server 2008 are as follows:
 Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 Standard
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 Enterprise
 The product names of Windows Server 2008 R2 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 R2 Standard
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 R2 Enterprise
 The product names of Windows Server 2012 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 Foundation
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 Essentials
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 Standard
 The product names of Windows Server 2012 R2 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 R2 Foundation
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 R2 Essentials
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 R2 Standard
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of
their respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights to those marks.
Microsoft product screen shots reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation.
 Fax Option Type M29 (D3DX-01, -02, -03)

1. INSTALLATION

FAX OPTION
TYPE M29
(D3DX)
1.1 FAX OPTION TYPE M29 (D3DX-01, -02, -03)

1.1.1 ACCESSORY CHECK

Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list.

No. Description Q’ty

1 PCB:GWFCU3.8E:DOM:ASS'Y 1
2 FERRITE CORE:K3 NF-75(N)BK0 1
3 SCREW:M3X5 3
4 SCREW:M3X6 2
5 MODULAR CORD:6P2C:DOM 1
- CLAMP:LWST-1012 1
- INSULATING SHEET:FCU3.8E 1
- LABEL:RATING NAME PLATE:W105 1
- MY BANK & QA REGISTRATION CARD 1

1.1.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

• Before installing this fax unit, print out all data in the printer buffer. Turn the main power
to OFF and disconnect the power cord and the network cable.

SM 1 D3DX
Fax Option Type M29 (D3DX-01, -02, -03)

1. Remove the I/F cover [A].

2. Remove the interface slot cover [A].

3. Remove the "TEL" [A] and "LINE1" [B] covers on the interface slot cover using a
screwdriver.

D3DX 2 SM
 Fax Option Type M29 (D3DX-01, -02, -03)

4. Switch the battery jumper switch [A] to the "ON" position.

FAX OPTION
TYPE M29
(D3DX)
5. Attach the slot cover [A].

6. Insert the FCU [A] completely into the interface slot.

SM 3 D3DX
Fax Option Type M29 (D3DX-01, -02, -03)

• Insert the FCU board along the rail [A].

7. Reattach the interface slot cover [A].

8. Reinstall the I/F cover ( x 3).

9. Attach the handset support bracket and handset bracket to the machine. To install the
handset, connect the handset cord with the ferrite core to the "TEL" jack.

• For details about installation, refer to Handset HS3020 (D739).

Taiwan only: Install the telephone jack cap in the "TEL" jack if the handset is not installed on
the machine.

10. Make one loop with the telephone cord, and then attach the ferrite core [A] (this step is not
needed for NA).

D3DX 4 SM
 Fax Option Type M29 (D3DX-01, -02, -03)

11. Connect the telephone cord to the "LINE 1" jack.

12. Attach the clamp [A] as shown in the picture below, and put the cable in the narrow space

FAX OPTION
TYPE M29
(D3DX)
[B].

13. Attach the serial number decal under the machine serial number decal on the rear cover
of the machine.
14. Attach the FCC decal to the rear cover of the machine (NA only).
15. Insert the power plug into the outlet. Turn ON the main power of the machine.

• Make sure that the outlet is grounded.

• "SRAM formatted" is displayed on the operation panel after the main power is turned ON.
Turn the main power OFF and then ON again for normal use.
16. Make sure that the date and time are correctly set.
17. Execute SP3-102-000 in the fax SP mode and enter the serial number for the fax unit.
18. Enter the correct country code with SP1101-016(SYS OF): Country/area code for
functional setting.

Fax Stamp Installation

This procedure is needed only for machines with ARDF DF3090.

1. Open the ARDF original cover and stamp holder [A].

SM 5 D3DX
Fax Option Type M29 (D3DX-01, -02, -03)

2. Install the fax stamp [A] provided with the machine.

3. Close the holder.

Make sure that the holder is pushed into the position where the marks on the holder and the
exterior cover face each other. If not, jam detection (J001) will occur.

4. Close the ARDF.

5. As an operation test, place the original on ARDF tray, and send it with the
memory sending/fax stamp function ON.
• Set the sending time to a time when nobody uses the machine (such as 11 PM).
• Check if the fax stamp is marked on the trailing edge of the original.

1.1.3 ADDING FAX APPLICATION ICONS TO THE HOME SCREEN

The fax application icon is normally added automatically. However, if it is missing from the Home
screen, add it as follows:

1. Press the [Application List] key [A].

D3DX 6 SM
 Fax Option Type M29 (D3DX-01, -02, -03)

2. Press and hold the Fax application from the app list.

FAX OPTION
TYPE M29
(D3DX)
3. Drag and position the application on the home screen.

Registering the Function key

By registering a fax application to a function key on the Home screen, you can open the
application from any page. Specify the setting as required.

Function Keys 1, 2, and 3 are from the left, as shown:

Allocate an application to a function key as follows:

1. Login as the machine administrator

2. Press “User Tools” icon > “Screen Features”.

SM 7 D3DX
Fax Option Type M29 (D3DX-01, -02, -03)

3. Press [Screen Device Settings].

4. Press [Function Key Settings].

5. Select the key to register.

To disable a function key, deselect the corresponding function key check box.

6. Press [Allocated Function], and then select the fax application.

D3DX 8 SM
 Fax Option Type M29 (D3DX-01, -02, -03)

In [Display Name], you can change the name of the icon on the Home screen (using up to 64
characters).

FAX OPTION
TYPE M29
(D3DX)
Function Priority Setting
You can specify whether the fax application appears on the operation panel just after turning the
power on or just after the system is reset automatically.

1. Login as the machine administrator

2. Press “User Tools” icon > “Screen Features”.
3. Press [Screen Device Settings].

SM 9 D3DX
Fax Option Type M29 (D3DX-01, -02, -03)

4. Press [Function Priority].

5. Select the fax application.

1.1.4 NOTES FOR CONNECTING THE TELEPHONE LINE

Checking the following before connecting the telephone line:

If a phone line dedicated to business phones is connected to the MFP, the fax board may be
damaged. Make sure that the connecting phone line is for fax.

Reasons why the Fax Board may be damaged

Business phones have various functions. To operate those functions, a high current is supplied to
a business phone line. This may damage components on the Fax board.

D3DX 10 SM
 G3 Interface Unit Type M29 (D3DX-05, -06, -07, -13)

1.2 G3 INTERFACE UNIT TYPE M29 (D3DX-05, -06, -07, -13)

FAX OPTION
TYPE M29
(D3DX)
1.2.1 ACCESSORY CHECK
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list.

No. Description Q’ty

1 PCB:SG3-ND:DOM:ASS'Y 1
2 SEPARATION PLATE:G3G4:ASS'Y 1
3 FERRITE CORE:K3 NF-75(N)BK0 1
4 MODULAR CORD:6P2C:DOM 1
- DECAL:SERIAL NUMBER SHEET:FJI 1
- HARNESS:FCU-CCU:CORC15 1
- SCREW:M3X6 3
- MY BANK & QA REGISTRATION CARD 1

1.2.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

• Before installing this fax unit, print out all data in the printer buffer. Turn the main
power to OFF and disconnect the power cord and the network cable.
An additional two SG3 boards can be added for this model. Follow the procedures for installing a
single SG3 board or double SG3 board as required.

Single G3 Board

• If the Fax Option Type M19 is not installed in the machine, install the Fax Option
Type M19 first (Fax Option Type M29 (D3DX-01, -02, -03)).

SM 11 D3DX
G3 Interface Unit Type M29 (D3DX-05, -06, -07, -13)

1. Remove the I/F cover [A].

2. Remove the rear cover [A].

3. Remove the controller box cover [A].

Red circle: remove

Blue circle: loosen

D3DX 12 SM
 G3 Interface Unit Type M29 (D3DX-05, -06, -07, -13)

4. Remove the "LINE2" [A] cover using a screwdriver.

FAX OPTION
TYPE M29
(D3DX)
5. Connect the FFC [A] to the FCU.
• The FFC should be connected at this point (because it is difficult to connect the
FFC after installing the G3 interface unit).
• Connect the FFC in the direction as the photo below.

• Release the connector lock [A] and connect the FFC, and then lock the FFC.

SM 13 D3DX
G3 Interface Unit Type M29 (D3DX-05, -06, -07, -13)

6. Insert the tab [A] of the bracket into the.cutout, and attach the G3 interface unit
[B].

7. Attach the screws.

D3DX 14 SM
 G3 Interface Unit Type M29 (D3DX-05, -06, -07, -13)

8. Take the FFC [A] out and connect the CCU interface board connector [B].

FAX OPTION
TYPE M29
(D3DX)
9. Insert the tab [A] and attach the partition board [B].

10. Reinstall the controller box cover, rear cover and I/F cover.
11. Make two loops with the telephone cord, and then attach the ferrite core [A].

SM 15 D3DX
G3 Interface Unit Type M29 (D3DX-05, -06, -07, -13)

12. Connect the telephone cord to the "LINE 2" jack.

13. Attach the clamp [A] as shown in the picture below, and put the cable in the
narrow space [B].

14. Insert the power plug into the outlet. Turn ON the main power of the machine.
15. Enter the service mode. Set Bit 1 of Communication Switch 16 to "1"
(SP1-104-023).
16. Exit the service mode.
17. Turn OFF then ON the main power.
18. Print out the system parameter list. Check that "G3" is displayed as an option.
19. Set up and program the items required for PSTN-2 communications.

Double G3 Boards

• If the Fax Option Type M19 is not installed in the machine, install the Fax Option
Type M19 first. (Fax Option Type M29 (D3DX-01, -02, -03))
1. Remove the I/F cover [A].

D3DX 16 SM
 G3 Interface Unit Type M29 (D3DX-05, -06, -07, -13)

2. Remove the rear cover [A].

FAX OPTION
TYPE M29
(D3DX)
3. Remove the controller box cover [A].
Red circle: remove

Blue circle: loosen

4. Remove the "LINE2" [A] and "LINE3" [B] covers using a screwdriver.

5. Remove the CCU I/F board and SG3 board [A] from the SG3 interface unit.
Repeat the same procedure for the second SG3 interface unit.

SM 17 D3DX
G3 Interface Unit Type M29 (D3DX-05, -06, -07, -13)

6. Remove the SG3 board [A] from one of the CCU I/F and SG3 board assemblies
removed in step 5.
7. Attach the SG3 board removed in step 6 to the other CCU I/F and SG3 board
assembly [B].

8. Attach the boards (CCU I/F board and two SG3 boards) to the SG3 interface
unit bracket.
• Use two screws from the six screws removed in step 5.

9. Connect the FFC [A] to the FCU.

• The FFC should be connected at this point (because it is difficult to connect the

D3DX 18 SM
 G3 Interface Unit Type M29 (D3DX-05, -06, -07, -13)

FFC after installing the G3 interface unit).

Connect the FCC in the direction as the photo below.

FAX OPTION
•

TYPE M29
(D3DX)
• Release the connector lock [A] and connect the FFC, and then lock the FFC.

SM 19 D3DX
G3 Interface Unit Type M29 (D3DX-05, -06, -07, -13)

10. Insert the tab [A] of the bracket into the.cutout, and attach the G3 interface unit
[B].

11. Attach the screws.

D3DX 20 SM
 G3 Interface Unit Type M29 (D3DX-05, -06, -07, -13)

12. Take the FFC [A] out and connect the CCU interface board connector [B].

FAX OPTION
TYPE M29
(D3DX)
13. Insert the tab [A] and attach the partition board [B].

14. Reinstall the controller box cover, rear cover and I/F cover.

SM 21 D3DX
G3 Interface Unit Type M29 (D3DX-05, -06, -07, -13)

15. Make two loops with the telephone cord for each telephone line (LINE2, LINE3).
Attach the ferrite core [A] to each telephone line.

16. Connect the telephone cords to the "LINE2" and "LINE3" jacks.
17. Attach the clamp [A] as shown in the picture below, and put the cable in the
narrow space [B].

18. Insert the power plug into the outlet. Turn ON the main power of the machine.
19. Enter the service mode. Set Bit 1 of Communication Switch 16 to "1"
(SP1-104-023).
20. Set Bit 3 of Communication Switch 16 to "1" (SP1-104-023).
21. Exit the service mode.
22. Turn ON then OFF the main power.
23. Print out the system parameter list. Check that "G3" is displayed as an option.
24. Set up and program the items required for PSTN-2 communications.

1.2.3 NOTES FOR CONNECTING THE TELEPHONE LINE

Checking the following before connecting the telephone line:

If a phone line dedicated to business phones is connected to the MFP, the fax board may be
damaged. Make sure that the connecting phone line is for fax.

Reasons why the Fax Board may be damaged

Business phones have various functions. To operate those functions, a high current is supplied to
a business phone line. This may damage components on the Fax board.

D3DX 22 SM
 Fax Unit Options

1.3 FAX UNIT OPTIONS

FAX OPTION
TYPE M29
(D3DX)
1.3.1 FAX MEMORY UNIT TYPE M19 64MB (D3BZ)

Accessory Check
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list.

No. Description Q'ty

1 Bracket (Not used for this machine) 1

2 Memory unit 1

3 Screws M3x6 2

4 Screws 1

5 Clamp 1

Installation Procedure

• Before installing this fax unit, print out all data in the printer buffer. Turn the main
power to OFF and disconnect the power cord and the network cable.

SM 23 D3DX
Fax Unit Options

1. Remove the controller cover [A].

2. Remove the slot cover [A].

3. Remove the fax option unit [A] (Fax Option Type M29 (D3DX-01, -02,
-03)).

D3DX 24 SM
 Fax Unit Options

4. Remove the slot cover [A].

FAX OPTION
TYPE M29
(D3DX)
5. Separate the shield [A], FCU [B], and speaker bracket [C].

6. Attach the supplied clamp [B] to the speaker bracket [A].

SM 25 D3DX
Fax Unit Options

7. Attach the memory unit [B] to the FCU connector [A]

8. Re-assemble the shield [A], FCU [B], and speaker bracket [C].

• Make sure that the clamp [B] is pressing the memory unit [A] and holding it in place.

D3DX 26 SM
 Fax Unit Options

9. Reinstall the FCU in the interface slot.

10. Re-assemble the machine.

FAX OPTION
TYPE M29
(D3DX)
1.3.2 HANDSET HS3020 (D739)
The optional handset is available for NA only.

1. Open the front cover [A].

2. Remove the paper exit tray [A].

3. Remove the upper left cover [A] ( ×1).

Slide the cover in the direction of the blue arrow.

SM 27 D3DX
Fax Unit Options

4. Remove the hooks [A], and remove the left rear cover [B].

5. Remove the scanner front cover [A].

6. Remove the scanner left cover [A]( ×2).

D3DX 28 SM
 Fax Unit Options

7. Make two holes in the scanner left cover.

FAX OPTION
TYPE M29
(D3DX)
8. Reattach the scanner left cover ( x 3).
9. Re-assemble the machine.
10. Attach the bracket [A] enclosed with the fax unit ( x 2: M3 x 12) as shown.
For machines with the single pass ADF, the bracket can be attached slanted using the hole
[B].

11. Attach the cradle [A] to the handset bracket ( x 2).

SM 29 D3DX
Fax Unit Options

12. Make two loops with the telephone cord, and then attach the ferrite core [A] to the cable.

13. Connect the cable to the "TEL" jack [A] on the left side of the controller box.

D3DX 30 SM
 Fax Connection Unit Type M29 (D3DW-01, -02, -03)

1.4 FAX CONNECTION UNIT TYPE M29 (D3DW-01, -02, -03)

FAX OPTION
TYPE M29
(D3DX)
1.4.1 ACCESSORY CHECK
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list.

No. Description Q'ty

1 Fax Connection Unit SD card 1

1.4.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

This unit allows a machine without the fax unit installed (client machine) to send and receive faxes
via a machine with the fax unit installed (remote machine).

Requirements
• Up to six machines can be registered as the client machines.
• Machines that already have a fax unit installed cannot be used as client machines.
• Only one machine can be registered as the remote machine.
• Firmware for this unit: “aics” (software number: D3DW5759)
• Remote Fax transmission is possible using a G3 line.
• The Remote Fax function does not support User Code Authentication. Disable the User Code
Authentication on the remote machine.
• Use this function to check the contents of a file that is stored in memory and not yet sent. Also,
use this function to cancel a transmission from the client machine.

Order of installation
1. Install the Fax Connection Unit in the remote machine (fax unit already installed).
2. Install the Fax Connection Unit in the client machine (no fax unit is installed).
3. Register the client machine on the remote machine.

• Do not register the remote machine before the client machine is registered on the
remote machine. Otherwise, the remote machine cannot be registered.
4. Register the remote machine in the client machine.

SM 31 D3DX
Fax Connection Unit Type M29 (D3DW-01, -02, -03)

Installing the fax connection unit

• Before starting this procedure, connect the network cable to the target machine(s), and
then configure the network settings.
• When installing more than one SD card, perform the merge operation. For details about
how to merge, refer to “Card Appli Move” in the field service manual for the main frame.
1. Remove the SD card slot covers [A].

2. Insert the Fax Connection Unit SD card into SD card slot 1 [A: Upper Slot].

3. Reattach the SD-card slot cover ( x 1).

4. Turn ON the main power.
5. Make sure that the machine can recognize the option (See ‘Self-Diagnosis Report’ and check
whether the aics (D3DW5759) is listed in [Loading Program].)

Registering the client machine(s)

• Before starting this procedure, connect the network cable to the target machine(s), and
then configure the network settings.
1. On the remote machine, press the [User Tools/Counter] key on the operation panel.
2. Press [System Settings].
3. Press [Administrator Tools].

D3DX 32 SM
 Fax Connection Unit Type M29 (D3DW-01, -02, -03)

4. Press [Program/Change/Delete Remote machine].

5. Enter the IP address or host name of the client machines.

FAX OPTION
TYPE M29
(D3DX)
• Up to six machines can be registered as the client machines.
6. Press [OK] to set after “connection test”.
7. Press the [User Tools/Counter] key on the operation panel to terminate System Settings.

Registering the remote machine

• Only one machine can be registered as the remote machine.

• Before starting this procedure, connect the network cable to the target machine(s), and
then configure the network settings.
1. On the client machine, press the [User Tools/Counter] key on the operation panel
2. Press [System Settings].
3. Press [Administrator Tools].
4. Press [Program/Change/Delete Remote machine].
5. Enter the IP address or host name of the remote machine.
6. Press [OK] to set after “connection test”.
7. Press [Exit].

Configuring the Remote Reception Settings

Perform the following procedure to enable the client machine(s) to receive faxes via the remote
machine. You can forward or route received documents per line or to a specific sender.

• Before starting this procedure, connect the network cable to the target machine(s), and
then configure the network settings.
• By performing procedures #1-3 above, the client machines can send faxes via the
remote machine. The procedures shown below are necessary to enable the client
machines to receive faxes.
This procedure is performed on the remote machine.

Using "Remote Reception Setting per Line"

1. Press [Facsimile Features].
2. Press [Remote Reception Setting per Line] in [Reception Settings].
3. Enter an IP address or a host name of the client-side machine to connect.
4. Press [Set], and [Exit] to exit from the setting.

Using "Remote Reception per Sender"

SM 33 D3DX
Fax Connection Unit Type M29 (D3DW-01, -02, -03)

1. Press [Facsimile Features].

2. Press [Program Special Sender] in [Reception Settings].
3. Select the Special Sender.

4. Press [Remote Reception Setting per Sender].

5. Press [On] and [Remote machine].

6. Enter an IP address or a host name of the client machine to connect.

7. Press [OK] to exit from the setting.

D3DX 34 SM
 FCU

2. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

FAX OPTION
TYPE M29
(D3DX)
2.1 FCU

• When removing the FFC, lift the lever [A] to release the lock.

2.1.1 SRAM DATA TRANSFER PROCEDURE

When you replace the FCU board, transfer the SRAM data from the old FCU board to the new
FCU board. Do the following procedure to back up the SRAM data.

• The following data can be transferred: TTI, RTI, CSI, Fax bit switch settings, RAM
address settings, NCU parameter settings.

• Remove the G3 Unit and disconnect the FFC connection. (See the installation in G3
Interface Unit Type M29 (D3DX-05, -06, -07, -13))
Check "LINE2" to see if the G3 unit is installed.

G3 Unit Installed No G3 Unit Installed

SM 35 D3DX
FCU

G3 Unit Installed No G3 Unit Installed

1. Remove the controller box cover [A].

2. Remove the interface slot cover [A].

D3DX 36 SM
 FCU

3. Remove the rear cover [A].

FAX OPTION
TYPE M29
(D3DX)
4. Remove the controller box cover [A].
Red circle: remove

Blue circle: loosen

5. If the optional G3 interface unit is installed, remove the FFC from the FCU.
6. Pull out the FCU [A] from the interface slot.

SM 37 D3DX
FCU

7. Remove the slot cover [A].

8. Change the orientation of the battery jumper switch [A] on the removed FCU board, and then
attach the battery jumper switch [B] on the FCU board to switch to the Restore mode.
The battery jumper switch [B] is supplied with the new FCU board.

9. Switch the battery jumper switch [A] of the new fax unit to the "ON" position before installing.

D3DX 38 SM
 FCU

FAX OPTION
If the battery jumper switch is not in the correct position, SC820 will occur.

TYPE M29
•

(D3DX)
10. Replace the installed FCU board [A] with a new FCU board.

11. Reinstall the new fax unit, and then the slot cover ( x 2).
12. Attach one end of the flat cable [A] to CN603 of the new fax unit.
• When inserting the cable, make sure that it is not slanted.
• Connect the FFC in the direction as photo below.

SM 39 D3DX
FCU

13. Attach the bracket [A] (provided as a service part) to the center frame of the controller box.

14. Attach the removed FCU board [A] to the bracket.

Then attach the other end of the flat cable to the connector [B] of CN603 on the removed
FCU board.

• When inserting the cable, make sure that it is not slanted.

• Make sure that the blue tape of the flat cable faces outward.

• Keep the removed FCU board away from the metal frames. Otherwise, the removed
FCU board may have a short circuit.
15. Turn ON the main power.
SRAM data transmission starts. When the transmission is completed, you will hear a beeper
sound.

• The beeper sound is at the same volume as the speaker sound.

• The beeper sounds even if the speaker sound is turned off.
• If the beeper does not sound, repeat main power OFF/ON until the beeper sounds,
and then perform the transmission procedure. If the data cannot be transmitted,
repeat transmission 2 or 3 times.

D3DX 40 SM
 FCU

16. When “Ready” is displayed on the display panel, turn OFF the main power. Disconnect the
flat cable from the removed FCU board.

FAX OPTION
TYPE M29
(D3DX)
17. Remove the removed FCU board ( x 1).
18. Remove the bracket from the center frame of the controller box ( x 1).
19. Disconnect the flat cable from the new FCU board.
20. Re-assemble the machine.
21. Turn ON the main power. Execute SP6-101 to print the system parameter list.
22. Check the system parameter list to make sure that the data is transferred correctly.
23. Set the correct date and time with the User Tools: User Tools > System Settings > Timer
Setting > Set Date/Time.

SM 41 D3DX
Error Codes

3. TROUBLESHOOTING

3.1 ERROR CODES

If an error code is displayed, retry communication. If the same problem occurs, try to fix the
problem as suggested below.

• Error codes appear in the error code display and on the service report.
Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action
0-00 DIS/NSF not detected within 40 s of • Check the connection.
Start being pressed • The other party may be incompatible.
• Replace the FCU.
• Check for DIS/NSF with an oscilloscope.
• If the RX signal is weak, there may be a bad
connection.
0-01 DCN received unexpectedly • The other party is out of paper or has a paper
jam.
• The other party pressed the Stop button
during communication.
0-03 Incompatible modem at the other The other party is incompatible.
end

0-04 CFR or FTT not received after • Check the connection.

modem training • Try changing the TX level and/or cable
equalizer settings.
• Replace the FCU.
• The other machine may be defective. Try
sending to another machine.
• If the RX signal is weak or defective, there
may be a bad connection.
Reference:

• TX level: NCU Parameter 01 (PSTN)

• Cable equalizer: G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)
• Dedicated TX parameters in Service Program
Mode
0-05 Modem training fails even G3 shifts • Check the connection.
down to 2400 bps. • Try adjusting the TX level and/or cable
equalizer.

D3DX 42 SM
 Error Codes

Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action

FAX OPTION
• Replace the FCU.

TYPE M29
(D3DX)
• Check for line problems.
Reference:

See error code 0-04.

0-06 The other terminal did not reply to • Check the connection.
DCS • Try adjusting the TX level and/or cable
equalizer settings.
• Replace the FCU.
• The other end may be defective or
incompatible; try sending to another machine.
• Check for line problems.
Reference:

See error code 0-04.

0-07 No post-message response from • Check the connection.

the other end after a page was sent • Replace the FCU.
• The other party is out of paper or has a paper
jam.
• The other party may have disconnected the
call.
• Check for a bad line.
• The other machine may be defective. Try
sending to another machine.
0-08 The other end sent RTN or PIN • Check the connection.
after receiving a page, because • Replace the FCU.
there were too many errors • The other end may have jammed, or run out of
paper or memory space.
• Try adjusting the TX level and/or cable
equalizer settings.
• The other end may have a defective
modem/FCU; try sending to another machine.
• Check for line problems and noise.
Reference:

• TX level: NCU Parameter 01 (PSTN)

• Cable equalizer: G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)
• Dedicated TX parameters in Service Program
Mode

SM 43 D3DX
Error Codes

Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action

0-14 Non-standard post message • Incompatible or defective remote terminal; try
response code received sending to another machine.
• Noisy line; resend.
• Try adjusting the TX level and/or cable
equalizer settings.
• Replace the FCU.
Reference:

See error code 0-08.

0-15 The other terminal is not capable of The other party is unable to accepting the following
specific functions. functions, or the other party’s memory is full.

• Confidential RX
• Transfer function
• SEP/SUB/PWD/SID
0-16 CFR or FTT not detected after • Check the connection.
modem training in confidential or • Replace the FCU.
transfer mode • Try adjusting the TX level and/or cable
equalizer settings.
• The other machine may have disconnected, or
it may be defective. Try sending to another
machine.
• If the ax signal level is too low, there may be a
line problem.
Reference:

See error code 0-08.

0-17 Communication was interrupted by If the Stop key was not pressed and this error
pressing the Stop key keeps occurring, replace the operation panel or the
operation panel drive board.

0-20 Facsimile data not received within 6 • Check the connection.

s of retraining • Replace the FCU.
• Check for line problems.
• Try calling another fax machine.
• Try adjusting the reconstruction time for the
first line and/or RX cable equalizer setting.
Reference:

Reconstruction time - G3 Switch 0A, Bit 6

D3DX 44 SM
 Error Codes

Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action

FAX OPTION
Rx cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)

TYPE M29
(D3DX)
0-21 EOL signal (end-of-line) from the • Check the connection between the FCU and
other end not received within 5 s of line.
the previous EOL signal • Check for line noise or other line problems.
• Replace the FCU.
• The remote machine may be defective or may
have been disconnected.
Reference:

Maximum interval between EOLs and between

ECM frames - G3 Bit Switch 0A, Bit 4

0-22 The signal from the other end was • Check the connection.
interrupted for more than the • Replace the FCU.
acceptable modem carrier drop • The remote machine may be defective.
time (default: 200 ms) • Check for line noise or other line problems.
• Try adjusting the acceptable modem carrier
drop time.
Reference:

Acceptable modem carrier drop time: G3 Switch

0A, Bits 0 and 1

0-23 Too many errors during reception • Check the connection.

• Replace the FCU.
• The remote machine may be defective.
• Check for line noise or other line problems.
• Try asking the other party to adjust their TX
level.
• Try adjusting the RX cable equalizer setting
and/or RX error criteria.
Reference:

Rx cable equalizer: G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)

Rx error criteria: Communication Switch 02, Bits 0

and 1

0-29 Data block format failure in ECM • Check for line noise or other line problems.
reception • Check the FCU - NCU connectors.
• Replace the NCU or FCU.
0-30 The other terminal did not reply to • Check the connection.

SM 45 D3DX
Error Codes

Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action

NSS(A) in AI short protocol mode • Try adjusting the TX level and/or cable
equalizer settings.
• The other terminal may not be compatible.
Reference:

Dedicated TX parameters - Section 4

0-32 The other terminal sent a DCS, • Check the protocol dump list.
which contained functions that the • Ask the other party to contact the
receiving machine cannot handle. manufacturer.

0-33 The data reception (not ECM) is not • Check the connection.
completed within 10 minutes. • The other terminal may have a defective
modem/FCU.
0-52 Polarity changed during • Check the connection.
communication Retry communication.

0-55 FCU does not detect the SG3. • FCU firmware or board defective.
• SG3 firmware or board defective.
0-56 The stored message data exceeds SG3 firmware or board defective.
the capacity of the mailbox in the
SG3.

0-70 The communication mode specified • The other terminal did not have a compatible
in CM/JM was not available communication mode (e.g., the other terminal
was a V.34 data modem and not a fax
(V.8 calling and called terminal)
modem.)
• A polling TX file was not ready at the other
terminal when polling RX was initiated from
the calling terminal.
0-74 The calling terminal fell back to T.30 • The calling terminal could not detect ANSam
mode, because it could not detect due to noise, etc.
ANSam after sending CI. • ANSam was too short to detect.
• Check the connection. and condition.
• Try making a call to another V.8/V.34 fax.
0-75 The called terminal fell back to T.30 • The terminal could not detect ANSam.
mode, because it could not detect a • Check the connection. and condition.
CM in response to ANSam (ANSam • Try receiving a call from another V.8/V.34 fax.
timeout).

0-76 The calling terminal fell back to T.30 • The called terminal could not detect a CM due
mode, because it could not detect a to noise, etc.

D3DX 46 SM
 Error Codes

Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action

FAX OPTION
JM in response to CM • Check the connection. and condition.

TYPE M29
(D3DX)
• Try making a call to another V.8/V.34 fax.
(CM timeout).

0-77 The called terminal fell back to T.30 • The calling terminal could not detect a JM due
mode, because it could not detect a to noise, etc.
CJ in response to JM • A network that has narrow bandwidth cannot
pass JM to the other end.
(JM timeout).
• Check the connection. and condition.
• Try receiving a call from another V.8/V.34 fax.
0-79 The called terminal detected CI • Check for line noise or other line problems.
while waiting for a V.21 signal. • If this error occurs, the called terminal falls
back to T.30 mode.
0-80 The line was disconnected due to a • The guard timer expired while starting these
timeout in V.34 phase 2 – line phases. Serious noise, narrow bandwidth, or
probing. low signal level can cause these errors.
If these errors happen at the transmitting terminal:
0-81 The line was disconnected due to a
timeout in V.34 phase 3 – equalizer • Try making a call later.
training. • Try using V.17 or a slower modem using
dedicated TX parameters.
0-82 The line was disconnected due to a
• Try increasing the TX level.
timeout in the V.34 phase 4 –
• Try adjusting the TX cable equalizer setting.
control channel start-up.
If these errors happen at the receiving terminal:
0-83 The line was disconnected due to a
• Try adjusting the RX cable equalizer setting.
timeout in the V.34 control channel
• Try increasing the TX level.
restart sequence.
• Try using V.17 or a slower modem if the same
error is frequent when receiving from multiple
senders.
0-84 The line was disconnected due to • The signal did not stop within 10 s.
abnormal signaling in V.34 phase 4 • Turn off the main power switch, and then turn
– control channel start-up. it back on.
• If the same error is frequent, replace the FCU.
0-85 The line was disconnected due to • The signal did not stop within 10 s.
abnormal signaling in V.34 control • Turn off the main power switch, and then turn
channel restart. it back on.
• If the same error is frequent, replace the FCU.
0-86 The line was disconnected because • The other terminal was incompatible.
the other terminal requested a data • Ask the other party to contact the
rate using MPh that was not manufacturer.

SM 47 D3DX
Error Codes

Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action

available in the currently selected
symbol rate.

0-87 The control channel started after an • The receiving terminal restarted the control
unsuccessful primary channel. channel because data reception in the primary
channel was not successful.
• This does not result in an error
communication.
0-88 The line was disconnected because • Try using a lower data rate at the start.
PPR was transmitted/received 9 • Try adjusting the cable equalizer setting.
(default) times within the same
ECM frame.

2-11 Only one V.21 connection flag was • Replace the FCU.
received

2-12 Modem clock irregularity • Replace the FCU.

2-13 Modem initialization error • Turn off the machine, and then turn it back on.
• Update the modem ROM.
• Replace the FCU.
2-22 Counter overflow error of JBIG chip If error occurs frequently, change the settings for
resolution, paper size, and compression type.

2-23 JBIG compression or reconstruction Turn off the machine, and then turn it back on.
error

2-24 JBIG ASIC error • Turn off the machine, and then turn it back on.

2-25 JBIG data reconstruction error (BIH • JBIG data error

error) • Check the sender’s JBIG function.
• Update the FCU ROM.
2-26 JBIG data reconstruction error
(Float marker error)

2-27 JBIG data reconstruction error (End

marker error)

2-28 JBIG data reconstruction error

(Timeout)

2-29 JBIG trailing edge maker error • FCU defective

• Check the destination device.
2-50 The machine resets itself for a fatal • If this is frequent, update the ROM, or replace
FCU system error the FCU.

D3DX 48 SM
 Error Codes

Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action

FAX OPTION
2-51 The machine resets itself because • If this is frequent, update the ROM, or replace

TYPE M29
(D3DX)
of a fatal communication error the FCU.

2-53 Snd msg() in the manual task is an • The user did the same operation many times,
error because the mailbox for the and this gave too much load to the machine.
operation task is full.

4-01 Line current was cut • Check the line connector.

• Check for line problems.
• Replace the FCU.
4-10 Communication failed because of • Get the ID Codes the same and/or the CSIs
an ID Code mismatch (Closed programmed correctly, and then resend.
Network) or Tel. No./CSI mismatch • The machine at the other end may be
(Protection against Wrong defective.
Connections)

5-00 Data reconstruction not possible Replace the FCU.

5-10 DCR timer expired • Replace the FCU.

5-20 Storage impossible because of a • Temporary memory shortage.

lack of memory • Test the SAF memory.

5-21 Memory overflow

5-23 Print data error when printing a • Test the SAF memory.
substitute RX or confidential RX • Ask the other end to resend the message.
message

5-25 SAF file access error • Replace an SD card or HDD.

• Replace the FCU.
6-00 G3 ECM - T1 time out during • Try adjusting the RX cable equalizer.
reception of facsimile data • Replace the FCU.

6-01 G3 ECM - no V.21 signal was

received

6-02 G3 ECM - EOR was received

6-04 G3 ECM - RTC not detected • Check the connection.

• Check for a bad line or defective remote
terminal.
• Replace the FCU.
6-05 G3 ECM - facsimile data frame not • Check the connection.
received within 18 s of CFR, but • Check for a bad line or defective remote

SM 49 D3DX
Error Codes

Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action

there was no line fail terminal.
• Replace the FCU.
• Try adjusting the RX cable equalizer
Reference:

• RX cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)

6-06 G3 ECM - coding/decoding error • Defective FCU.
• The other terminal may be defective.
6-08 G3 ECM - PIP/PIN received in reply • The other end pressed Stop during
to PPS.NULL communication.
• The other terminal may be defective.
6-09 G3 ECM - ERR received • Check for a noisy line.
• Adjust the TX levels of the communicating
machines.
• See code 6-05.
6-10 G3 ECM - error frames still received • Check for line noise.
at the other end after all • Adjust the TX level (use NCU parameter 01 or
communication attempts at 2400 the dedicated TX parameter for that address).
bps • Check the connection.
• Defective remote terminal.
6-21 V.21 flag detected during high • The other terminal may be defective or
speed modem communication incompatible.

6-22 The machine resets the sequence • Check for line noise.
because of an abnormal handshake • If the same error occurs frequently, replace the
in the V.34 control channel FCU.
• Defective remote terminal.
6-99 V.21 signal not stopped within 6 s Replace the FCU.

9-30 HDD write error • Check the connection of the HDD.

9-31 HDD control error • If the problem persists, replace the HDD
9-32 HDD read error and/or harness.
9-33 HDD fatal error
13-17 SIP user name registration error • Double registration of the SIP user name.
• Capacity for user-name registration in the SIP
server is not sufficient.
13-18 SIP server access error • Incorrect initial setting for the SIP server.
• Defective SIP server.
13-24 SIP authentication error • Registered password in the device does not
match the password in the SIP server.

D3DX 50 SM
 Error Codes

Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action

FAX OPTION
13-25 Network I/F setting error • IPV4 is not active in the active protocol setting.

TYPE M29
(D3DX)
• IP address of the device is not registered.
13-26 Network I/F setting error at power • Active protocol setting does not match the I/F
on setting for SIP server.
• IP address of the device is not registered.
13-27 IP address setting error • IP address of the device is not registered.

14-00 SMTP Send Error • Error occurred during sending to the SMTP
server. Occurs for any error other than 14-01
to 16. For example, the mail address of the
system administrator is not registered.
14-01 SMTP Connection Failed • Failed to connect to the SMTP server
(timeout) because the server could not be
found.
• The PC is not ready to transfer files.
• SMTP server not functioning correctly.
• The DNS IP address is not registered.
• Network not operating correctly.
• Destination folder selection not correct.
14-02 No Service by SMTP Service (421) • SMTP server operating incorrectly or the
destination for direct SMTP sending is not
correct.
• Contact the system administrator and check
that the SMTP server has the correct settings
and operates correctly.
• Contact the system administrator for direct
SMTP sending and check the sending
destination.
14-03 Access to SMTP Server Denied • Failed to access the SMTP server because
(450) the access is denied.
• SMTP server operating incorrectly. Contact
the system administrator to determine if there
is a problem with the SMTP server and to
check that the SMTP server settings are
correct.
• Folder send destination is incorrect. Contact
the system administrator to determine that the
SMTP server settings and path to the server
are correct.

SM 51 D3DX
Error Codes

Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action

• Device settings incorrect. Confirm that the
user name and password settings are correct.
• Direct SMTP destination incorrect. Contact the
system administrator to determine if there is a
problem at the destination and that the
settings at the destination are correct.
14-04 Access to SMTP Server Denied • SMTP server operating incorrectly
(550) • Direct SMTP sending not operating correctly

14-05 SMTP Server HDD Full (452) • Failed to access the SMTP server because
the HDD on the server is full.
• Insufficient free space on the HDD of the
SMTP server. Contact the system
administrator and check the amount of space
remaining on the SMTP server HDD.
• Insufficient free space on the HDD where the
destination folder is located. Contact the
system administrator and check the amount of
space remaining on the HDD where the target
folder is located.
• Insufficient free space on the HDD at the
target destination for SMTP direct sending.
Contact the system administrator. Check the
amount of space remaining on the target HDD
or check if the mail size setting is the default
value (2MB).
• Check the size of the original data. For
example, if the original has too many pages,
the data size can be too big to send.
14-06 User Not Found on SMTP Server • The designated user does not exist.
(551) • The designated user does not exist on the
SMTP server.
• The designated address is not for use with
direct SMTP sending.
14-07 Data Send to SMTP Server Failed • Failed to access the SMTP server because
(4XX) the transmission failed.
• PC not operating correctly.
• SMTP server operating incorrectly
• Network not operating correctly.

D3DX 52 SM
 Error Codes

Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action

FAX OPTION
• Destination folder setting incorrect.

TYPE M29
(D3DX)
• Direct SMTP sending not operating correctly.
14-08 Data Send to SMTP Server Failed • Failed to access the SMTP server because
(5XX) the transmission failed.
• SMTP server operating incorrectly
• Destination folder setting incorrect.
• Direct SMTP sending not operating correctly.
• Software application error.
14-09 Authorization Failed for Sending to • POP-Before-SMTP or SMTP authorization
SMTP Server failed.
• Incorrect setting for file transfer
14-10 Addresses Exceeded • Number of broadcast addresses exceeded the
limit for the SMTP server.
14-11 Buffer Full • The send buffer is full so the transmission
could not be completed. Buffer is full due to
using Scan-to-Email while the buffer is being
used send mail at the same time.
14-12 Data Size Too Large • Transmission was cancelled because the
detected size of the file was too large.
14-13 Send Cancelled • Processing is interrupted because the user
pressed Stop.
14-14 Security Locked File Error • Update the software because of the defective
software.
14-15 Mail Data Error • The transmitting a mail is interrupted via DCS
due to the incorrect data.
• Update the software because of the defective
software.
14-16 Maximum Division Number Error • When a mail is divided for the mail
transmission and the division number of a mail
are more than the specified number, the mail
transmission is interrupted.
• Update the software because of the defective
software.
14-17 Incorrect Ticket • Update the software because of the defective
software.
14-18 Access to MCS File Error • The access to MCS file is denied due to the no
permission of access.
• Update the software because of the defective

SM 53 D3DX
Error Codes

Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action

software.
14-20 SMTP Authentication error Make sure the administrator's e-mail address is
same as the SMTP authentication address or POP
before SMTP address.

14-21 Transmission error of S/MIME Register the correct user certificate and device
certificate.

14-30 MCS File Creation Failed Failed to create the MCS file because:

• The number of files created with other

applications on the Document Server has
exceeded the limit.
• HDD is full or not operating correctly.
• Software error.
14-31 UFS File Creation Failed UFS file could not be created:

• Not enough space in UFS area to handle both

Scan-to-Email and IFAX transmission.
• HDD full or not operating correctly.
• Software error.
14-32 Cancelled the Mail Due to Error • Error detected with NFAX and send was
Detected by NFAX cancelled due to a software error.

14-33 No Mail Address For the Machine • Neither the mail address of the machine nor
the mail address of the network administrator
is registered.
14-34 Address designated in the domain • Operational error in normal mail sending or
for SMTP sending does not exist direct SMTP sending.
• Check the address selected in the address
book for SMTP sending.
• Check the domain selection.
14-50 Mail Job Task Error Due to an FCU mail job task error, the send was
cancelled:

• Address book was being edited during

creation of the notification mail.
• Software error.
14-51 UCS Destination Download Error Not even one return notification can be
downloaded:

• The address book was being edited.

• The number for the specified destination does

D3DX 54 SM
 Error Codes

Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action

FAX OPTION
not exist (it was deleted or edited after the job

TYPE M29
(D3DX)
was created).
14-60 Send Cancel Failed • The cancel operation by the user failed to
cancel the send operation.
14-61 Notification Mail Send Failed for All • All addresses for return notification mail failed.
Destinations

14-62 Transmission Error due to the • When the 0 line page exists in received pages
existence of zero line page with G3 communication, the transmission is
interrupted.
14-63 Fax Communication Unit: Check the followings.
Transmission Error
• Name of SMTP server
• Port number of SMTP
• DNS setting
• Server name (FTP)
• Path name (computer name and shared folder
name at SMTP/ NCP)
• Active protocol setting (Netware/ NCP)
• NW flame type (NCP)
• Log-on mode (NDS tree/ bindery)
- Check the SMTP server.

• Check if the SMTP server works normally and

is connected to the network.
• Check if the settings of the SMTP are correct.
- Check the DNS server.

• Check if the DNS server works normally and is

connected to the network.
• Check if the settings of the DNS server are
correct.
- Check the network.

• Check if the LAN works normally.

• Check if the no firewall exists.
- Check the destination folder for the data transfer.

• Check if the destination folder works normally.

• Check if the settings of the destination folder
are correct.
- Ask an administrator of the direct SMTP server in

SM 55 D3DX
Error Codes

Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action

which the data is supposed to be transferred.

• Check if the destination SMTP server works

normally.
• Check if the settings of the destination SMTP
server are correct.
15-01 POP3/IMAP4 Server Not • At startup, the system detected that the IP
Registered address of the POP3/IMAP4 server has not
been registered in the machine.
15-02 POP3/IMAP4 Mail Account • The POP3/IMAP4 mail account has not been
Information Not Registered registered.

15-03 Mail Address Not Registered • The mail address has not been registered.

15-10 DCS Mail Receive Error • Error other than 15-11 to 15-18.

15-11 Connection Error The DNS or POP3/IMAP4 server could not be

found:

• The IP address for DNS or POP3/IMAP4

server is not stored in the machine.
• The DNS IP address is not registered.
• Network not operating correctly.
15-12 Authorization Error POP3/IMAP4 send authorization failed:

• Incorrect IFAX user name or password.

• Another device, such as the PC, attempted
access.
• POP3/IMAP4 settings incorrect.
15-13 Receive Buffer Full • Occurs only during manual reception.
Transmission cannot be received due to
insufficient buffer space. The buffer is being
used for mail send or Scan-to-Email.
15-14 Mail Header Format Error • The mail header is not standard format. For
example, the Date line description is incorrect.
15-15 Mail Divide Error • The e-mail is not in standard format. There is
no boundary between parts of the e-mail,
including the header.
15-16 Mail Size Receive Error • The mail cannot be received because it is too
large.
15-17 Receive Timeout • May occur during manual receiving only
because the network is not operating correctly.

D3DX 56 SM
 Error Codes

Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action

FAX OPTION
15-18 Incomplete Mail Received • Only one portion of the mail was received.

TYPE M29
(D3DX)
15-31 Final Destination for Transfer • The format of the final destination for the
Request Reception Format Error transfer request was incorrect.

15-39 Send/Delivery Destination Error The transmission cannot be delivered to the final
destination:

• Destination file format is incorrect.

• Could not create the destination for the file
transmission.
15-41 SMTP Receive Error • Reception rejected because the transaction
exceeded the limit for the “Auth. E-mail RX”
setting.
15-42 Off Ramp Gateway Error • The delivery destination address was
specified with Off Ramp Gateway OFF.
15-43 Address Format Error • Format error in the address of the Off Ramp
Gateway.
15-44 Addresses Over • The number of addresses for the Off Ramp
Gateway exceeded the limit of 30.
15-61 Attachment File Format Error • The attached file is not TIFF format.

15-62 TIFF File Compatibility Error Could not receive transmission due to:

• Resolution error
• Image of resolution greater than 200 dpi
without extended memory.
• Resolution is not supported.
• Page size error
• The page size was larger than A3.
• Compression error
• File was compressed with other than MH, MR,
or MMR.
15-63 TIFF Parameter Error The TIFF file sent as the attachment could not be
received because the TIFF header is incorrect:

• The TIFF file attachment is a type not

supported.
• The TIFF file attachment is corrupted.
• Software error.
15-64 TIFF Decompression Error The file received as an attachment caused the
TIFF decompression error:

SM 57 D3DX
Error Codes

Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action

• The TIFF format of the attachment is
corrupted.
• Software error.
15-71 Not Binary Image Data • The file could not be received because the
attachment was not binary image data.
15-73 MDN Status Error • The disposition line in the header of the
Return Receipt could not be found, or there is
a problem with the firmware.
15-74 MDN Message ID Error • Could not find the Original Message ID line in
the header of the Return Receipt, or there is a
problem with the firmware.
15-80 Mail Job Task Read Error • Could not receive the transmission because
the destination buffer is full and the destination
could not be created (this error may occur
when receiving a transfer request or a request
for notification of reception).
15-81 Repeated Destination Registration • Could not repeat receive the transmission
Error because the destination buffer is full and the
destination could not be created (this error
may occur when receiving a transfer request
or a request for notification of reception).
15-91 Send Registration Error Could not receive the file for transfer to the final
destination:

• The format of the final destination or the

transfer destination is incorrect.
• Destinations are full so the final and transfer
destinations could not be created.
15-92 Memory Overflow • Transmission could not be received because
memory overflowed during the transaction.
15-93 Memory Access Error • Transaction could not complete due to a
malfunction of SAF memory.
15-94 Incorrect ID Code • The machine rejected an incoming e-mail for
transfer request, because the ID code in the
incoming e-mail did not match the ID code
registered in the machine.
15-95 Transfer Station Function • The machine rejected an incoming e-mail for
transfer because the transfer function was
unavailable.

D3DX 58 SM
 Error Codes

Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action

FAX OPTION
16-00 No IP address registered • The machine does not get an IP address

TYPE M29
(D3DX)
because the DNS server has not been
registered for the remote machine or IP
address of the remote machine has not been
registered.
• Register the DNS server for the remote
machine or configure an IP address of the
remote machine.
22-00 Original length exceeded the • Divide the original into more than one page.
maximum scan length • Check the resolution used for scanning. Lower
the scan resolution if possible.
• Add optional page memory.
22-01 Memory overflow while receiving • Wait for the files in the queue to be sent.
• Delete unnecessary files from memory.
• Transfer the substitute reception files to
another fax machine, if the machine’s printer is
busy or out of order.
• Add an optional SAF memory card or hard
disk.
22-02 TX or RX job stalled due to line • The job started normally but did not finish
disconnection at the other end normally; data may or may not have been
received fully.
• Restart the machine.
22-04 The machine cannot store received • Update the ROM
data in the SAF • Replace the FCU.

22-05 No G3 parameter confirmation • Defective FCU board or firmware.

answer

23-00 Data read timeout during • Restart the machine.

construction • Replace the FCU.

25-00 The machine software resets itself • Update the ROM

after a fatal transmission error • Replace the FCU.
occurred

F0-xx V.34 modem error • Replace the FCU.

F6-xx SG3 modem error • Update the SG3 modem ROM.

• Replace the SG3 board.
• Check for line noise or other line problems.

SM 59 D3DX
Error Codes

Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action

• Try communicating another V.8/V.34 fax.

D3DX 60 SM
 Fax Connection Unit Error Codes

3.2 FAX CONNECTION UNIT ERROR CODES

FAX OPTION
TYPE M29
(D3DX)
3.2.1 ERROR CODE - 01
Error Possible Causes Troubleshooting Procedures
Code
01(1) IPv4/IPv6 not enabled Enable IPv4 and IPv6

01(3) “Cancel” is pressed by user. -

01(4) A false connection ID is being used. Check that the network is

established.
01(5) Network is disconnected because of no response
within a specified time.

01(14) • Either this machine or the machine at the other • Exit SP or initial settings.
end has entered SP or Initial settings. • Wait until the connection
• An established connection exists. has finished.

3.2.2 ERROR CODE - 02

Error Possible Causes Troubleshooting Procedures
Code
02(5) • Wrong IP address/host name was used. • Enter the correct IP
• The main power of the other machine at address/host name
destination is OFF. • Turn ON the main power.
• LAN cable is disconnected. • Connect the LAN cable
• Network is rebooting. • Wait until rebooting has
finished.

3.2.3 ERROR CODE - 03

Error Possible Causes Troubleshooting Procedures
Code
03 • No user authentication (i.e. Configure the user authentication
Basic/Windows/LDAP/Custom Auth.) setting for client and remote
applies to fax application. machines as follows:
• Settings other than user authentication are
Client Machine Remote Machine
applied to the fax application.
OFF OFF

ON OFF

ON ON

SM 61 D3DX
Fax Connection Unit Error Codes

Error Possible Causes Troubleshooting Procedures

Code

3.2.4 ERROR CODE - 04

Error Possible Causes Troubleshooting Procedures
Code
04 Although the same user is registered on the • Register the same user to both
remote machine and client machine, the user the remote machine and client
name and login password do not match. machine.
• Make sure to match the
username and login password.

3.2.5 ERROR CODE - 05

Error Code Possible Causes Troubleshooting Procedures
05 An unauthorized user tried to connect. Authorize the user to use fax connection.

3.2.6 ERROR CODE - 06

Error Possible Causes Troubleshooting Procedures
Code
06 Timeout error on the node Adjust the value of SP5-741-001 to prolong the
authentication timeout for node authentication.

3.2.7 ERROR CODE - 07

Error Possible Causes Troubleshooting Procedures
Code
07 Multiple destinations are set in the On the client machine, execute SP5-801-021 to
client machine. clear AICS memory

3.2.8 ERROR CODE - 08

Error Possible Causes Troubleshooting Procedures
Code
08(1) • A client machine connects to another • Connect to the remote machine.
client machine. • Register the client machine to the
• The client machine is not registered on remote machine as a destination.
the remote machine as destinations.
08(2) • A remote machine connects to another • Connect to the client machine.

D3DX 62 SM
 Fax Connection Unit Error Codes

Error Possible Causes Troubleshooting Procedures

FAX OPTION
Code

TYPE M29
(D3DX)
Remote Machine. • Check the remote machine
• The wrong remote machine is registered on the client machine.
registered on the client machine.

3.2.9 ERROR CODE - 09

Error Suggested Cause Action
Code
09 Capacity of the HDD of the Remote Increase the remaining capacity of the HDD of
Machine is full. the Remote Machine.

SM 63 D3DX
IFAX Troubleshooting

3.3 IFAX TROUBLESHOOTING

Use the following procedures to determine whether the machine or another part of the network is
causing the problem.

Communication Item Troubleshooting Procedures

Route
General LAN 1. Connection with the • Check that the LAN cable is connected to the
LAN machine.
• Check that the LEDs on the hub are lit.
2. LAN activity Check that other devices connected to the LAN
can communicate through the LAN.

Between IFAX and 1. Network settings on • Check the network settings on the PC.
PC the PC • Check with the network administrator for the
IP address. (Is the IP address registered in
the TCP/IP properties in the network setup
correct?)
2. Check that PC can Use the “ping” command on the PC to contact the
connect with the machine.
machine
At the MS-DOS prompt, type ping then the IP
address of the machine, then press Enter.

3. LAN settings in the • Check the LAN parameters

machine • Check if there is an IP address conflict with
other PCs.
Use the “Network” function in the User Tools.

If there is an IP address conflict, inform the

administrator.

Between machine 1. LAN settings in the • Check the LAN parameters

and e-mail server machine • Check if there is an IP address conflict with
other PCs.
Use the “Network” function in the User Tools.

If there is an IP address conflict, inform the

administrator.

2. E-mail account on • Make sure that the machine can log into the
the server e-mail server.
• Check that the account and password stored
in the server are the same as in the machine.

D3DX 64 SM
 IFAX Troubleshooting

Communication Item Troubleshooting Procedures

FAX OPTION
Route

TYPE M29
(D3DX)
Ask the administrator to check.

3. E-mail server Make sure that the client devices which have an
account in the server can send/receive e-mail.

Ask the administrator to check.

Send a test e-mail with the machine’s own

number as the destination. The machine receives
the returned e-mail if the communication is
performed successfully.

Between e-mail 1. E-mail account on • Make sure that the PC can log into the e-mail
server and internet the Server server.
• Check that the account and password stored
in the server are the same as in the machine.
Ask the administrator to check.

2. E-mail server Make sure that the client devices which have an
account in the server can send/receive e-mail.

Ask the administrator to check.

Send a test e-mail with the machine’s own

number as the destination. The machine receives
the returned e-mail if the communication is
performed successfully.

3. Destination e-mail • Make sure that the e-mail address is actually

address used.
• Check that the e-mail address contains no
incorrect characters such as spaces.
4. Router settings • Use the “ping” command to contact the
router.
• Check that other devices connected to the
router can sent data over the router.
Ask the administrator of the server to check.

5. Error message by • Check whether e-mail can be sent to another

e-mail from the address on the same network, using the
network of the application e-mail software.
destination. • Check the error e-mail message.
Inform the administrator of the LAN.

SM 65 D3DX
IP-Fax Troubleshooting

3.4 IP-FAX TROUBLESHOOTING

3.4.1 IP-FAX TRANSMISSION

Cannot send by IP Address/Host Name

Check Point Troubleshooting Procedures

1 LAN cable connected? Check the LAN cable connection.

2 Specified IP address/hostname correct? Check the IP address/host name.

3 Firewall/NAT installed? The firewall cannot be breached. Send

by another method (Fax, Internet Fax)

4 Transmission sent manually? Manual sending not supported.

5 IP address of local machine registered? Register the IP address.

6 Remote terminal port number setting other than Send by specifying the port number.
1720 (when using H.323) or 5060 (when using
SIP)?

7 Specified port number correct? Confirm the port number of the remote
fax.

8 DNS server registered when host name specified? Contact the network administrator.

9 Remote fax a T.38 terminal? Check whether the remote fax is a T38
terminal.

10 Remote fax switched off or busy? Check that the remote fax is ON.

11 Network bandwidth too narrow? Request the network administrator to

increase the bandwidth.

Raise the delay level.

(IPFAX SW 01 Bit 0 to 3)

IP-Fax bandwidth is the same as the

DCS speed. Set IP-Fax SW00 Bit 6 to
1.

12 Remote fax cancelled transmission? Check whether the remote fax

cancelled the transmission.

D3DX 66 SM
 IP-Fax Troubleshooting

Cannot send via VoIP Gateway

FAX OPTION
Check Point Troubleshooting Procedures

TYPE M29
(D3DX)
1 LAN cable connected? Check the LAN cable connection.

2 VoIP Gateway T.38 standard? Contact the network administrator.

3 VoIP Gateway installed correctly? Contact the network administrator.

4 VoIP Gateway power switched on? Contact the network administrator.

5 Is the IP address/host name of the Check the IP address/host name.

specified Gateway correct?

6 Number of the specified fax correct? Check the remote fax number.

7 Firewall/NAT installed? The firewall cannot be breached. Send by another

method (Fax, Internet Fax)

8 Transmission sent manually? Manual sending not supported.

9 IP address of local fax registered? Register the IP address.

10 DNS registered when host name Contact the network administrator.

specified?

11 Remote fax a G3 fax? Check that the remote fax is a G3 fax.

12 G3 fax connected to VoIP gateway? Check that G3 fax is connected.

13 Remote G3 fax turned ON? Check that G3 fax is ON.

14 Network bandwidth too narrow? Request the network administrator to increase the
bandwidth.

Raise the network delay level.

(IPFAX SW 01 Bit 0 to 3)

IP-Fax bandwidth is the same as the DCS speed.

Set IP-Fax SW00 Bit 6 to 1.

Cannot send by Alias Fax number.

Check Point Troubleshooting Procedures

1 LAN cable connected? Check the LAN cable connection.

2 Number of specified Alias fax correct? Confirm the Alias of the remote fax.

Error Code: 13-14

3 Firewall/NAT installed? The firewall cannot be breached. Send by

SM 67 D3DX
IP-Fax Troubleshooting

another method (Fax, Internet Fax)

4 Transmission sent manually? Manual sending not supported.

5 Gatekeeper/SIP server installed correctly? Contact the network administrator.

6 Gatekeeper/SIP server power turned ON? Contact the network administrator.

7 IP address/host name of Gatekeeper/SIP Check the IP address/host name.

server correct?

8 DNS server registered when Contact the network administrator.

Gatekeeper/SIP server host name
specified?

9 Enable H.323/Enable SIP SW is set to on? Check the settings.

See User Parameter SW 34 Bit 0/SW 34 Bit 1

10 IP address of local fax registered? Register the IP address of the local fax.

11 Alias number of local fax registered? Register the Alias number of the local fax.

12 Remote fax registered in Gatekeeper? Contact the network administrator.

13 Remote fax a T.38 terminal? Check whether the remote fax is a T38
terminal.

14 Remote fax switched off or busy? Contact the network administrator.

15 Network bandwidth too narrow? Request the system administrator to increase

the bandwidth.

Raise the delay level.

(IPFAX SW 01 Bit 0 to 3)

Lower the modem transmission baud rate.

(IPFAX SW 05)

16 Remote fax cancelled transmission? Check whether the remote fax cancelled the
transmission.

3.4.2 IP-FAX RECEPTION

Cannot receive via IP Address/Host Name.

Check Point Troubleshooting Procedures

1 LAN cable connected? Check the LAN cable connection.

2 Firewall/NAT installed? The firewall cannot be breached. Send by another

D3DX 68 SM
 IP-Fax Troubleshooting

method (Fax, Internet Fax)

FAX OPTION
TYPE M29
3 IP address of local fax registered? Register the IP address.

(D3DX)
4 Port number specified at remote Request the sender to specify the port number.
sender fax (if required)?

5 Specified port number correct (if Request the sender to check the port number.
required)?

6 DNS server registered when host Contact the network administrator.

name specified on sender side?

• The sender machine displays this error

code if the sender fax is a Ricoh model.
7 Network bandwidth too narrow? Request the system administrator to increase the
bandwidth.

Lower the start modem reception baud rate on the

receiving side.

(IPFAX SW06)

8 Remote fax cancelled transmission? Check whether the remote fax cancelled the
transmission.

Cannot receive by VoIP Gateway.

Check Point Troubleshooting Procedures

1 LAN cable connected? Check the LAN cable connection.

2 Firewall/NAT installed? The firewall cannot be breached. Send by

another method (Fax, Internet Fax)

3 VoIP Gateway installed correctly? Contact the network administrator.

4 VoIP Gateway power turned ON? Contact the network administrator.

5 IP address/host name of specified VoIP Request the remote fax to check the IP
Gateway correct on sender’s side? address/host name.

6 DNS server registered when host name Contact the network administrator.
specified on sender side?

7 Network bandwidth too narrow? Request the network administrator to increase

the bandwidth.

8 G3 fax connected? Check that G3 fax is connected.

SM 69 D3DX
IP-Fax Troubleshooting

9 G3 fax power turned ON? Check that G3 fax is ON.

Cannot receive by Alias Fax number.

Check Point Troubleshooting Procedures

1 LAN cable connected? Check the LAN cable connection.

2 Firewall/NAT installed? The firewall cannot be breached. Send by

another method (Fax, Internet Fax)

3 Gatekeeper/SIP server installed correctly? Contact the network administrator.

• The sender machine displays this

error code when the sender fax is a
Ricoh model.
4 Power to Gatekeeper/SIP server turned Contact the network administrator.
ON?

• The sender machine displays this

error code when the sender fax is a
Ricoh model.
5 IP address/host name of Gatekeeper/SIP Request the sender to check the IP
server correct on the sender’s side? address/host name.

• The sender machine displays this

error code when the sender fax is a
Ricoh model.
6 DNS server registered when Contact the network administrator.
Gatekeeper/SIP server host name
specified on sender’s side?
• The sender machine displays this
error code when the sender fax is a
Ricoh model.
7 Enable H.323/Enable SIP SW set to on? Request the sender to check the settings.

User Parameter SW 34 Bit 0/SW 34 Bit 1

• Only if the remote sender fax is a

Ricoh fax.
8 Local fax IP address registered? Register the IP address.

D3DX 70 SM
 IP-Fax Troubleshooting

9 Local fax Alias number registered? Register the Alias number.

FAX OPTION
TYPE M29
10 Network bandwidth too narrow? Request the system administrator to increase

(D3DX)
the bandwidth.

Lower the start modem reception baud rate on

the receiving side.

(IPFAX SW06)

11 Remote fax cancelled transmission? Check whether the remote fax cancelled the
transmission.

12 Local fax registered in Gatekeeper/SIP Contact the network administrator.

server?

• The sender machine displays this

error code when the sender fax is a
Ricoh model.

SM 71 D3DX
Cautions

4. SERVICE TABLES

4.1 CAUTIONS

• Never turn off the main power switch when the power LED is lit or flashing. To avoid
damaging the hard disk or memory, press the operation power switch to switch the
power off, wait for the power LED to go off, and then switch the main power switch off.

• The main power LED lights or flashes while the platen cover or ARDF is open, while the
main machine is communicating with a facsimile or the network server, or while the
machine is accessing the hard disk or memory for reading or writing data.

D3DX 72 SM
 Service Program Tables

4.2 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

FAX OPTION
TYPE M29
(D3DX)
4.2.1 SP1-XXX (BIT SWITCHES)
1 Mode No. Function

101 System Switch

001 – 00 – Change the bit switches for system settings for the fax option
032 1F
"Bit Switches – 1" : "System Switches"

102 Ifax Switch

001 – 00 – Change the bit switches for internet fax settings for the fax option
016 0F
"Bit Switches – 2" : "I-Fax Switches"

103 Printer Switch

001 – 00 – Change the bit switches for printer settings for the fax option
016 0F
"Bit Switches – 2": "Printer Switches"

104 Communication Switch

001 – 00 – Change the bit switches for communication settings for the fax option
032 1F
"Bit Switches – 3" : "Communication Switches"

105 G3-1 Switch

001 – 00 – Change the bit switches for the protocol settings of the standard G3
016 0F board

"Bit Switches – 4" : "G3 Switches"

106 G3-2 Switch

001 – 00 – Change the bit switches for the protocol settings of the optional G3
016 0F board

"Bit Switches – 5" : "G3-2 and G3-3 Switches"

107 G3-3 Switch

001 – 00 – Change the bit switches for the protocol settings of the optional G3
016 0F board

"Bit Switches – 5": "G3-2 and G3-3 Switches"

108 G4 Internal Switch

SM 73 D3DX
Service Program Tables

001 – 00 – Not used (Do not change the bit switches)

032 1F

109 G4 Parameter Switch

001 – 00 – Not used (Do not change the bit switches)

016 0F

111 IP fax Switch

001 – 00 – Change the bit switches for optional IP fax parameters

016 0F
"Bit Switches – 6" : "IP Fax Switches"

4.2.2 SP2-XXX (RAM)

2 Mode No. Function

101 RAM Read/Write

001 Change RAM data for the fax board directly.

"Service RAM Addresses"

102 Memory Dump

001 G3-1 Memory Print out RAM data for the fax board.
Dump
"Service RAM Addresses"

002 G3-2 Memory Print out RAM data for the optional SG3 board.
Dump

003 G3-3 Memory Print out RAM data for the optional SG3 board.
Dump

004 G4 Memory Dump Not used

103 G3-1 NCU Parameters

001 – CC, 01 – 22 NCU parameter settings for the standard G3 board. "NCU
023 Parameters"

104 G3-2 NCU Parameters

001 – CC, 01 – 22 NCU parameter settings for the optional G3 board. "NCU
023 Parameters"

105 G3-3 NCU Parameters

001 – CC, 01 – 22 NCU parameter settings for the optional G3 board. "NCU
023 Parameters"

D3DX 74 SM
 Service Program Tables

4.2.3 SP3-XXX (MACHINE SET)

FAX OPTION
TYPE M29
3 Mode No. Function

(D3DX)
101 Service Station

001 Fax Number Enter the fax number of the service station.

002 Select Line Select the line type.

102 Serial Number

000 Enter the fax unit’s serial number.

103 PSTN-1 Port Settings

001 Select Line Select the line type setting for the G3-1 line. If the machine is
installed on a PABX line, select “PABX”, “PABX (GND)” or
“PABX (FLASH)”.

002 PSTN Access Enter the PSTN access number for the
Number
G3-1 line.

003 Memory Lock Not used

Disabled

104 PSTN-2 Port Settings

001 Select Line Select the line setting for the G3-2 line. If the machine is
installed on a PABX line, select “PABX”, “PABX (GND)” or
“PABX (FLASH)”.

002 PSTN Access Enter the PSTN access number for the G3-2 line.
Number

003 Memory Lock Not used

Disabled

004 Transmission If you turn this SP on, the machine does not send any fax
Disabled messages on the G3-2 line.

105 PSTN-3 Port Settings

001 Select Line Select the line setting for the G3-3 line. If the machine is
installed on a PABX line, select “PABX”, “PABX (GND)” or
“PABX (FLASH)”.

002 PSTN Access Enter the PSTN access number for the G3-3 line.
Number

003 Memory Lock Not used

SM 75 D3DX
Service Program Tables

Disabled

004 Transmission If you turn this SP on, the machine does not send any fax
Disabled messages on the G3-3 line.

106 ISDN Port Settings

001 Select Line Not used (Do not change the settings.)

002 PSTN Access

Number

003 Memory Lock

Disabled

004 Transmission
Disabled

107 IPFAX Port Settings

001 H323 Port Sets the H323 port number.

002 SIP Port Sets the SIP port number.

003 RAS Port Sets the RAS port number.

004 Gatekeeper port Sets the Gatekeeper port number.

005 T.38 Port Sets the T.38 port number.

006 SIP Server Port Sets the SIP port number.

007 IPFAX Protocol Select "H323" or "SIP".

Priority

201 FAX SW

001 – 00 – 1F
032

4.2.4 SP4-XXX (ROM VERSIONS)

4 Mode No. Function

101 001 FCU ROM Version Displays the FCU ROM version.

102 001 Error Codes Displays the latest 64 fax error codes.

103 001 G3-1 ROM Version Displays the G3-1 modem version.

104 001 G3-2 ROM Version Displays the G3-2 modem version.

105 001 G3-3 ROM Version Displays the G3-3 modem version.

D3DX 76 SM
 Service Program Tables

106 001 G4 ROM Version Not used (Do not change the settings.)

FAX OPTION
TYPE M29
(D3DX)
4.2.5 SP5-XXX (RAM CLEAR)
5 Mode Function
No.

101 Initialize SRAM (except Secure)

000 Initializes the bit switches and user parameters, user data in the SRAM, files in
the SAF memory, and clock.

102 Erase All Files

000 Erases all files stored in the SAF memory.

103 Reset Bit Switches (except Secure)

000 Resets the bit switches and user parameters.

104 Factory Setting

000 Resets the bit switches and user parameters, user data in the SRAM and files in
the SAF memory.

105 Reset All Bit Switches

000 Resets all the current bit switch settings.

106 Reset Security Bit Switches

000 Resets only the security bit switches. If you select automatic output/display for the
user parameter switches, the security settings are initialized.

4.2.6 SP6-XXX (REPORTS)

6 Mode No. Function

101 System Parameter List

000 - Touch the “ON” button to print the system parameter list.

102 Service Monitor Report

000 - Touch the “ON” button to print the service monitor report.

103 G3 Protocol Dump List

001 G3 All Prints the protocol dump list of all communications for all G3
Communications lines.

002 G3-1 (All Prints the protocol dump list of all communications for the

SM 77 D3DX
Service Program Tables

Communications) G3-1 line.

003 G3-1 Prints the protocol dump list of the last communication for the
G3-1 line.
(1 Communication)

004 G3-2 Prints the protocol dump list of all communications for the
G3-2 line.
(All
Communications)

005 G3-2 Prints the protocol dump list of the last communication for the
G3-2 line.
(1 Communication)

006 G3-3 Prints the protocol dump list of all communications for the
G3-3 line.
(All
Communications)

007 G3-3 Prints the protocol dump list of the last communication for the
G3-3 line.
(1 Communication)

104 G4 Protocol Dump List

001 Dch + Bch 1 Not used (Do not change the settings.)

002 Dch

003 Bch 1 Link Layer

004 Dch Link Layer

005 Dch +Bch 2

006 Bch 2 Link Layer

105 All Files print out

000 - Prints out all the user files in the SAF memory, including
confidential messages.

• Do not use this function, unless the customer is

having trouble printing confidential messages or
recovering files stored using the memory lock
feature.
106 Journal Print out

001 All Journals The machine prints all the communication records on the
report.

D3DX 78 SM
 Service Program Tables

002 Specified Date The machine prints all communication records after the

FAX OPTION
specified date.

TYPE M29
(D3DX)
107 Log List Print out

001 All log files These log print out functions are for designer use only.

002 Printer

003 SC/TRAP Stored

004 Decompression

005 Scanner

006 JOB/SAF

007 Reconstruction

008 JBIG

009 Fax Driver

010 G3CCU

011 Fax Job

012 CCU

013 Scanner Condition

108 IP Protocol Dump List

001 All Communications Prints the protocol dump list of all communications for the IP
fax line.

002 1 Communication Prints the protocol dump list of the last communication for the
IP fax line.

4.2.7 SP7-XXX (TESTS)

These are the test modes for PTT approval.

7 Function

101 G3-1 Modem Tests

102 G3-1 DTMF Tests

103 Ringer Test

104 G3-1 V34 (S2400baud)

105 G3-1 V34 (S2800baud)

SM 79 D3DX
Service Program Tables

106 G3-1 V34 (S3000baud)

107 G3-1 V34 (S3200baud)

108 G3-1 V34 (S3429baud)

109 Recorded Message Test

110 G3-2 Modem Tests

111 G3-2 DTMF Tests

112 G3-2 V34 (S2400baud)

113 G3-2 V34 (S2800baud)

114 G3-2 V34 (S3000baud)

115 G3-2 V34 (S3200baud)

116 G3-2 V34 (S3429baud)

117 G3-3 Modem Tests

118 G3-3 DTMF Tests

119 G3-3 V34 (S2400baud)

120 G3-3 V34 (S2800baud)

121 G3-3 V34 (S3000baud)

122 G3-3 V34 (S3200baud)

123 G3-3 V34 (S3429baud)

124 IG3-1 Modem Tests - Not used

125 IG3-1 DTMF Tests - Not used

126 IG3-1 V34 (S2400baud) - Not used

127 IG3-1 V34 (S2800baud) - Not used

128 IG3-1 V34 (S3000baud) - Not used

129 IG3-1 V34 (S3200baud) - Not used

130 IG3-1 V34 (S3429baud) - Not used

131 IG3-2 Modem Tests - Not used

132 IG3-2 DTMF Tests - Not used

133 IG3-2 V34 (S2400baud) - Not used

134 IG3-2 V34 (S2800baud) - Not used

D3DX 80 SM
 Service Program Tables

135 IG3-2 V34 (S3000baud) - Not used

FAX OPTION
TYPE M29
136 IG3-2 V34 (S3200baud) - Not used

(D3DX)
137 IG3-2 V34 (S3429baud) - Not used

SM 81 D3DX
Bit Switches – 1

4.3 BIT SWITCHES – 1

• Do not adjust a bit switch or use a setting that is described as "Not used", as this may
cause the machine to malfunction or to operate in a manner that is not accepted by local
regulations. Such bits are for use only in other areas, such as Japan.
Default settings for bit switches are not listed in this manual. Refer to the System Parameter List
printed by the machine.

4.3.1 SYSTEM SWITCHES

System Switch 00 (SP No. 1-101-001)

No Function Comments

0 Dedicated transmission Set this bit to 1 before changing any dedicated transmission
parameter programming parameters.

0: Disabled This setting is automatically reset to "0" after turning off and on.

1: Enabled

1 Not used Do not change this setting.

2 Technical data printout 1: Instead of the personal name, the following data are listed in
on the journal the journal for each G3 communication.

0: Disabled

1: Enabled

Example:

(1): EQM value (Line quality data). A larger number means more errors.

(2): Symbol rate (V.34 only)

(3): Final modem type used

(4): Starting data rate (for example, 288 means 28.8 kbps)

(5): Final data rate

(6): RX level (see below for how to read the RX level)

(7): Total number of error lines that occurred during non-ECM reception.

(8): Total number of burst error lines that occurred during non-ECM reception.

D3DX 82 SM
 Bit Switches – 1

FAX OPTION
TYPE M29
• EQM and RX level are fixed at "FFFF" in TX mode.

(D3DX)
• The seventh and eighth numbers are fixed at "00" for transmission records and
ECM reception records.
RX level calculation

Example:

The four-digit hexadecimal value (N) after "L" indicates the RX level.

The high byte is given first, followed by the low byte. Divide the decimal value of N by -16 to
get the RX level.

In the above example, the decimal value of N (= 0100 [H]) is 256.

So, the actual RX level is 256/-16 = -16 dB

3 Not used Do not change this setting.

4 Line error mark print When "1" is selected, a line error mark is printed on the printout if
a line error occurs during reception. This shows error locations
0: OFF, 1: ON (print)
when ECM is turned off.

5 G3 communication This is a fault-finding aid. The LCD shows the key parameters
parameter display (see "G3 Communication Parameters" below this table). This is
normally disabled because it cancels the CSI display for the
0: Disabled
user.
1: Enabled
Be sure to reset this bit to "0" after testing.

6 Protocol dump list output This is only used for communication troubleshooting. It shows
after each the content of the transmitted facsimile protocol signals. Always
communication reset this bit to 0 after finishing testing.

0: Off If system switch 09 bit 6 is at "1", the list is only printed if there
was an error during the communication.
1: On

7 Not used Do not change the setting.

G3 Communication Parameters

Modem rate 336: 33600 bps 168: 16800 bps

312: 31200 bps 144: 14400 bps

288: 28800 bps 120: 12000 bps

SM 83 D3DX
Bit Switches – 1

264: 26400 bps 96: 9600 bps

240: 24000 bps 72: 7200 bps

216: 21600 bps 48: 4800 bps

192: 19200 bps 24: 2400 bps

Resolution S: Standard (8 x 3.85 dots/mm)

D: Detail (8 x 7.7 dots/mm)

F: Fine (8 x 15.4 dots/mm)

SF: Superfine (16 x 15.4 dots/mm)

21: Standard (200 x 100 dpi)

22: Detail (200 x 200 dpi)

44: Superfine (400 x 400 dpi)

Compression mode MMR: MMR compression

MR: MR compression

MH: MH compression

JBO: JBIG compression (Optional mode)

JBB: JBIG compression (Basic mode)

Communication ECM: With ECM

mode
NML: With no ECM

Width and reduction A4: A4 (8.3"), no reduction

B4: B4 (10.1"), no reduction

A3: A3 (11.7"), no reduction

I/O rate 0: 0 ms/line

5: 5 ms/line

10: 10 ms/line

20: 20 ms/line

25: 2.5 ms/line

40: 40 ms/line

• "40" is displayed while receiving a fax message using AI short

protocol.

D3DX 84 SM
 Bit Switches – 1

FAX OPTION
System Switch 01 - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)

TYPE M29
(D3DX)
System Switch 02 (SP No. 1-101-003)

No Function Comments

0-1 Not used Do not change these settings.

2 Forced reset after With this setting on, the machine resets itself automatically if a
transmission stalls transmission stalls and fails to complete the job.

0: Off

1: On

3 Not used Do not change these settings.

4 File retention time 1: A file that had a communication error will not be erased
unless the communication is successful.
0: Depends on User
Parameter 24 [18(H)]

1: No limit

5-7 - Do not change this setting

System Switch 03 - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)

System Switch 04 (SP No. 1-101-005)

No Function Comments

0-2 Not used Do not change these settings.

3 Printing dedicated TX 1: Each Quick/Speed dial number on the list is printed with
parameters on Quick/Speed the dedicated TX parameters (10 bytes each).
Dial Lists
The first 10 bytes of data are the programmed dedicated TX
0: Disabled parameters; 34 bytes of data are printed (the other 24 bytes
have no use for service technicians).
1: Enabled

4-7 Not used Do not change these settings.

System Switch 05 - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)

System Switch 06 - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)

SM 85 D3DX
Bit Switches – 1

System Switch 07 - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)

System Switch 08 - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)

System Switch 09 (SP No. 1-101-010)

No Function Comments

0 Addition of image data from If this feature is enabled, the top half of the first page of
confidential transmissions on the confidential messages will be printed on transmission
transmission result report result reports.

0: Disabled 1: Enabled

1 Print timing of communication 0: The Journal is printed only when image data is sent.
reports on the Journal when no
1: The Journal is printed when any data is sent.
image data was exchanged.

0: After DCS/NSS communication

(default),

1: After polling

2 Automatic error report printout 0: Error reports will not be printed.

0: Disabled 1: Enabled 1: Error reports will be printed automatically after failed

communications.

3 Printing of the error code on the 1: Error codes are printed on the error reports.
error report
This can be used for detecting an error which occurs
0: No 1: Yes rarely.

4 Not used Do not change this setting.

5 Power failure report 1: A power failure report will be automatically printed

after the power is turned ON if a fax message
0: Disabled
disappeared from the memory when the power was
1: Enabled (default)
turned off last.

NOTE: If "0" is selected, no reports are printed and no

one may recognize that fax data is gone due to a
power failure.

6 Conditions for printing the protocol This switch becomes effective only when system
dump list switch 00 bit 6 is set to 1.

0: Print for all communications 1: Set this bit to 1 when you wish to print a protocol
dump list only for communications with errors.
1: Print only when there is a

D3DX 86 SM
 Bit Switches – 1

communication error NOTE: The memory size is limited. Use this bit switch

FAX OPTION
only when some log reports are necessary.

TYPE M29
(D3DX)
7 Not used Do not change this setting.

System Switch 0A (SP No. 1-101-011)

No Function Comments

0 Automatic port selection When "1" is selected, a suitable port is automatically selected if
the selected port is not used.
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
NOTE: This bit is useful if all communication lines at a customer
site are not the same quality

1-3 Not used Do not change these settings.

4 Dialing on the ten-key 0: Prevents dialing from the ten-key pad while the external
pad when the external telephone is off-hook. Use this setting when the external
telephone is off-hook telephone is not by the machine, or if a wireless telephone is
connected as an external telephone.
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
1: The user can dial on the machine's ten-key pad when the
handset is off-hook.

5 On hook dial 0: On hook dial is disabled.

0: Disabled 1: Enabled

6-7 Not used Do not change these settings

System Switch 0B - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)

System Switch 0C - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)

System Switch 0D - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)

System Switch 0E (SP No. 1-101-015)

No Function Comments

0-1 Not used Do not change the settings.

2 Enable/disable for direct Direct sending cannot operate when the capture function is on
sending selection during sending. Setting this switch to "1" enables direct
sending without capture.
0: Direct sending off
Setting this switch to "0" masks the direct sending function on
1: Direct sending on

SM 87 D3DX
Bit Switches – 1

the operation panel so direct sending with ScanRouter cannot

be selected.

3 Action when the external 0: Manual TX is possible while the external handset is
handset goes off-hook off-hook. However, manual TX during handset off-hook may
not be sent to a correct direction. Manual TX is not possible.
0: Manual TX and RX
operation 1: The display stays in standby mode even when the external
handset is used, so that other people can use the machine for
1: Memory TX and RX
memory TX operation. Note that manual TX and RX are not
operation (the display
possible with this setting.
remains the same)

4-7 Not used Do not change these settings.

System Switch 0F (SP No. 1-101-016)

No Function Comments

0 Country/area code for This country/area code determines the factory settings of bit
functional settings (Hex) switches and RAM addresses. However, it has no effect on
to
the NCU parameter settings and communication parameter
00: France 12: Asia
7
RAM addresses.
01: 13: Japan
Cross reference
Germany
NCU country code:
02: UK 14: Hong
Kong SP No. 2-103-001 for G3-1

03: Italy 15: South SP No. 2-104-001 for G3-2

Africa SP No. 2-105-001 for G3-3
04: Austria 16: Australia

05: 17: New

Belgium Zealand

06: 18: Singapore

Denmark

07: Finland 19: Malaysia

08: Ireland 1A: China

09: Norway 1B: Taiwan

0A: 1C: Korea

Sweden

D3DX 88 SM
 Bit Switches – 1

0B: Switz. 1D: Brazil

FAX OPTION
TYPE M29
0C: 20: Turkey

(D3DX)
Portugal

0D: Holland 21: Greece

0E: Spain 22: Hungary

0F: Israel 23: Czech

10: --- 24: Poland

11: USA

System Switch 10 (SP No. 1-101-017)

No Function Comments

0-7 Threshold memory level for parallel memory Threshold = N x 128 KB + 256
transmission KB

N can be between 00 - FF(H)

Default setting: 02(H) = 512 KB

System Switch 11 (SP No. 1-101-018)

No Function Comments

0 TTI printing position Change this bit to 1 if the TTI overprints information that
the customer considers to be important (G3
0: Superimposed on the page
transmissions).
data
NOTE: If "1" is selected, it is possible that sent data is
1: Printed before the data
printed on two sheets of paper.
leading edge

1-2 Not used Do not change these settings.

3 TTI used for broadcasting 1: The TTI (TTI_1 or TTI_2) which is selected for all
destinations during broadcasting.
0: The TTIs selected for each
Quick/Speed dial are used

1: The same TTI is used for all

destinations

4-7 Not used Do not change these settings.

SM 89 D3DX
Bit Switches – 1

System Switch 12 (SP No. 1-101-019)

No Function Comments

0-7 TTI printing TTI: 08 to 92 (BCD) mm

position in the
Input even numbers only.
main scan
This setting determines the print start position for the TTI from the left
direction
edge of the paper. If the TTI is moved too far to the right, it may
overwrite the file number which is on the top right of the page. On an A4
page, if the TTI is moved over by more than 50 mm, it may overwrite the
page number.

System Switch 13 - Not used (do not change these settings)

System Switch 14 - Not used (do not change these settings)

System Switch 15 (SP No. 1-101-022)

No Function Comments

0 Not used Do not change the settings.

1 Going into the Energy Saver mode 1: The machine will restart from the Energy Saver
automatically mode quickly, because the +5V power supply is active
even in the Energy Saver mode. The LED of the
0: Enabled
operation switch is flashing instead of entering Energy
1: Disabled
Saver mode.

Use this setting if an external telephone has to be used

when the machine is in the Energy Saver mode.

2-3 Not used Do not change these settings.

4-5 Interval for preventing the machine If there is a file waiting for transmission, the machine
from entering Energy Saver mode does not go to Energy Saver mode during the selected
if there is a pending transmission period.
file.
After transmitting the file, if there is no file waiting for
Bit 5 Bit 4 Setting transmission, the machine goes to the Energy Saver
mode.
0 0 1 min

0 1 30 min

1 0 1 hour

D3DX 90 SM
 Bit Switches – 1

1 1 24 hours

FAX OPTION
TYPE M29
6-7 Not used Do not change

(D3DX)
System Switch 16 (SP No. 1-101-023)

No Function Comments

0 Parallel 1: The machine sends messages simultaneously using all available

Broadcasting ports during broadcasting.

0: Disabled NOTE: If a customer wants to keep a line available for fax reception
or other reasons, select "0" (Disable).
1: Enabled

1 Priority setting for This function allows the user to select the default G3 line type. The
the G3 line. optional SG3 units are required to use the PSTN-2 or 3 setting.

0: PSTN-1 >
PSTN-2 or 3

1: PSTN-2 or 3 >
PSTN-1

2-7 Not used Do not change these settings.

System Switch 17 - Not used (do not change these settings)

System Switch 18 - Not used (do not change these settings)

System Switch 19 (SP No. 1-101-026)

No Function Comments

0-5 Not used Do not change the settings.

6 Extended scanner 0: After installing the memory expansion option, the scanner page
page memory after memory is extended to 4 MB from 2 MB.
memory option is
1: If this bit is set to 1 after installing the memory expansion option,
installed
the scanner page memory is extended to 12 MB. But the SAF
0: Disabled memory decreases to 18 MB.

1: Enabled

7* Special Original mode 1: If the customer frequently wishes to transmit a form or

letterhead which has a colored or printed background, change this
0: Disabled
bit to "1". "Original 1" and "Original 2" can be selected in addition to

SM 91 D3DX
Bit Switches – 1

1: Enabled the "Text", "Text/Photo" and "Photo" modes.

* This setting can be used for the client machine which has no FCU.

System Switch 1A (SP No. 1-101-027)

No Function Comments

0 LS RX memory Sets the value to x4KB. When the amount of available memory
capacity threshold drops below this setting, RX documents are printed to conserve
to
setting memory.
7
00-FF (0-1020 Kbyte: Initial setting 0x80 (512 KB)
Hex)

• If a customer wants available memory size to be larger,

decrease this threshold.

System Switch 1B - Not used (do not change these settings)

System Switch 1C - Not used (do not change these settings)

System Switch 1D (SP No. 1-101-030)

No Function Comments

0 RTI/CSI/CPS code 0: RTI, CSI, CPS codes are displayed on the top line of the LCD
display panel during communication.

0: Enable 1: Codes are switched off (no display)

1: Disable

1-7 Not used Do not change these settings.

System Switch 1E (SP No. 1-101-031)

No Function Comments

0 Communication after the 0: When this switch is on and the journal history becomes
Journal data storage area has full, the next report prints. If the journal history is not
become full deleted, the next transmission cannot be received. This
prevents overwriting communication records before the
0: Impossible
machine can print them.
1: Possible
1: If the buffer memory of the communication records for
the Journal is full, fax communications are still possible. But
the machine will overwrite the oldest communication

D3DX 92 SM
 Bit Switches – 1

records.

FAX OPTION
TYPE M29
(D3DX)
• This setting is effective only when Automatic
Journal printout is enabled but the machine
cannot print the report (e.g., no paper).
1* Action when the SAF memory 0: If the SAF memory becomes full during scanning for a
has become full during memory transmission, the successfully scanned pages are
scanning transmitted.

0: The current page is erased. 1: If the SAF memory becomes full during scanning for a
memory transmission, the file is erased and no pages are
1: The entire file is erased.
transmitted.

• This setting is effective only when Automatic

Journal printout is enabled but the machine
cannot print the report (e.g., no paper).
2 RTI/CSI display priority This bit determines which identifier, RTI or CSI, is displayed
on the LCD while the machine is communicating in G3
0: RTI 1: CSI
non-standard mode.

3 File No. printing 1: File numbers are not printed on any reports.

0: Enabled NOTE: The file numbers may not be printed in the

sequential order. If a customer does not like this
1: Disabled
numbering, select "0".

4 Action when authorized 0: If the user has stored no acceptable sender RTIs or
reception is enabled but CSIs, the user can select “ON” in the authorized reception
authorized RTIs/CSIs are not setting but the setting becomes invalid (“OFF”). The
yet programmed machine will not be able to receive any fax messages.

0: All fax reception is disabled If the customer wishes to receive messages from any
sender that includes an RTI or CSI, and to block messages
1: Faxes can be received if
from senders that do not include an RTI or CSI, change this
the sender has an RTI or CSI
bit to "0", then enable Authorized Reception.

Otherwise, keep this bit at "1 (default setting)".

5-7 Not used Do not change the settings

* This setting can be used for the client machine which has no FCU.

System Switch 1F (SP No. 1-101-032)

SM 93 D3DX
Bit Switches – 1

No Function Comments

0 Not used Do not change the settings.

1 Report printout after an original jam 0: When an original jams, or the SAF memory
during SAF storage or if the SAF overflows during scanning, a report will be printed.
memory fills up
Change this bit to "1" if the customer does not want
0: Enabled to have a report in these cases.

1: Disabled Memory TX – Memory storage report

Parallel memory TX – Transmission result report

2 Not used Do not change the settings.

3 Received fax print start timing 0: The machine prints each page immediately after
the machine receives it.
(G3 reception)
1: The machine prints the complete message after
0: After receiving each page
the machine receives all the pages in the memory.
1: After receiving all pages

4-6 Not used Do not change the factory settings.

7 Action when a fax SC has occurred 0: When the fax unit detects a fax SC code other
than SC1201 and SC1207, the fax unit automatically
0: Automatic reset
resets itself.
1: Fax unit stops
1: When the fax unit detects any fax SC code, the fax
unit stops.

Reference:

For fax SC codes, see "Troubleshooting".

D3DX 94 SM
 Bit Switches – 2

4.4 BIT SWITCHES – 2

FAX OPTION
TYPE M29
(D3DX)
• Do not adjust a bit switch or use a setting that is described as "Not used", as this may
cause the machine to malfunction or to operate in a manner that is not accepted by local
regulations. Such bits are for use only in other areas, such as Japan.
Default settings for bit switches are not listed in this manual. Refer to the System Parameter List
printed by the machine.

4.4.1 I-FAX SWITCHES

I-fax Switch 00 (SP No. 1-102-001)

No Function Comments

Original Width of TX This setting sets the maximum size of the original that the destination
Attachment File can receive. (Bits 3 to 6 are reserved for future use or not used.)

0 A4 -

1 B4

2 A3

3-6 Reserved

7 Not used

0: Off (not selected), 1: On (selected)

If more than one of these three bits is set to "1", the larger size has priority. For example, if
both Bit 2 and Bit 1 are set to "1" then the maximum size is "A3" (Bit 2).

When mail is sent, there is no negotiation with the receiving machine at the destination, so
the sending machine cannot make a selection for the receiving capabilities (original width
setting) of the receiving machine. The original width selected with this switch is used as the
RX machine's original width setting, and the original is reduced to this size before sending.
The default is A4.

If the width selected with this switch is higher than the receiving machine can accept, the
machine detects this and this causes an error.

I-fax Switch 01 (SP No. 1-102-002)

No Function Comments

Original Line Resolution These settings set the maximum resolution of the original that the

SM 95 D3DX
Bit Switches – 2

of TX Attachment File destination can receive.

0 200x100 Standard 0: Not selected

1 200x200 Detail 1: Selected

2 200x400 Fine If more than one of these three bits is set to "1", the higher resolution
has priority. For example, if both Bit 0 and Bit 2 are set to "1" Then
3 300 x 300 Reserve
The Resolution is set for "Bit 2 200 x 400.
4 400 x 400 Super
Fine

5 600 x 600 Reserve

6 Reserve

7 mm/inch

This setting selects mm/inch conversion for mail transmission.

0: Off (No conversion), 1: On (Conversion)

When on (set to "1"), the machine converts millimeters to inches for sending mail. There is
no switch for converting inches to millimeters.

Unlike G3 fax transmissions which can negotiate between sender and receiver to
determine the setting, mail cannot negotiate between terminals; the mm/inch selection is
determined by the sender fax.

When this switch is Off (0):

• Images scanned in inches are sent in inches.

• Images scanned in mm are sent in mm.
• Images received in inches are transmitted in inches.
• Images received in mm are transmitted in mm.
When this switch is On (1):

• Images scanned in inches are sent in inches.

• Images scanned in mm are converted to inches.
• Images received in inches are transmitted in inches.
• Images received in mm are converted to inches.

I-fax Switch 02 (SP No. 1-102-003)

No Function Comments

0 RX Text Mail Header Processing

This setting determines whether the header information is printed with text e-mails when
they are received.

D3DX 96 SM
 Bit Switches – 2

0: Prints only text mail.

FAX OPTION
1: Prints mail header information attached to text mail.

TYPE M29
(D3DX)
When a text mail is received with this switch On (1), the "From" address and "Subject"
address are printed as header information.

When a mail with only binary data is received (a TIFF-F file, for example), this setting is
ignored and no header is printed.

1 Output from Attached Document at E-mail TX Error

This setting determines whether only the first page or all pages of an e-mail attachment are
printed at the sending station when a transmission error occurs. This allows the customer to
see which documents have not reached their intended destinations if sent to the wrong
e-mail addresses, for example.

0: Prints 1st page only.

1: Prints all pages.

2-3 Text String for Return Receipt

This setting determines the text string output for the Return Receipt that confirms the
transmission was received normally at the destination.

00: "Dispatched"

Sends from PC mail a request for a Return Receipt. Receives the Return Receipt with
"dispatched" in the 2nd part:

Disposition: Automatic-action/MDN-send automatically; dispatched

The "dispatched" string is included in the Subject string.

01: "Displayed"

Sends from PC mail a request for a Return Receipt. Receives the Return Receipt with
"displayed" in the 2nd part:

Disposition: Automatic-action/MDN-send automatically; displayed

The "displayed" string is included in the Subject string.

10: Reserved

11: Reserved

A mail requesting a Return Receipt sent from an IFAX with this switch set to "00" (for
"dispatched") received by Microsoft Outlook 2000 may cause an error. If any setting other
than "displayed" (01) causes a problem, change the setting to "01" to enable normal
sending of the Return Receipt.

SM 97 D3DX
Bit Switches – 2

4 Media accept feature

This setting adds or does not add the media accept feature to the answer mail to confirm a
reception.

0: Does not add the media accept feature to the answer mail

1: Adds the media accept feature to the answer mail.

Use this bit switch if a problem occurs when the machine receives an answer mail, which
contains the media accept feature field.

5-6 Not Used

7 Image Resolution of RX Text Mail

This setting determines the image resolution of the received mail.

0: 200 x 200

1: 400 x 400

The "1" setting requires installation of the Memory Unit in order to have enough SAF (Store
and Forward) memory to receive images at 400 x 400 resolution.

I-fax Switch 03 - Not used (do not change these settings)

I-fax Switch 04 (SP No. 1-102-005)

No Function Comments

0 Subject for Delivery TX/Memory Transfer

This setting determines whether the RTI/CSI registered on this machine or the RTI/CSI of
the originator is used in the subject lines of transferred documents.

0: Puts the RTI/CSI of the originator in the Subject line. If this is used, either the RTI or CSI
is used. Only one of these can be received for use in the subject line.

1: Puts the RTI/CSI registered on this machine in the Subject line.

When this switch is used to transfer and deliver mail to a PC, the information in the Subject
line that indicates where the transmission originated can be used to determine automatically
the destination folder for each e-mail.

1 Subject corresponding to mail post database

0: Standard subject

1: Mail post database subject

The standard subject is replaced by the mail post database subject in the following three

D3DX 98 SM
 Bit Switches – 2

cases:

FAX OPTION
1) When the service technician sets the service (software) switch.

TYPE M29
(D3DX)
2) When memory sending or delivery specified by F code is applied by the SMTP server

3) With relay broadcasting (1st stage without the Schmidt 4 function).

• This switch does not apply for condition 3) when the RX system is set up for
memory sending, delivery by F-code, sending with SMTP RX and when operators
are using FOL (to prevent problems when receiving transmissions).
2-7 Not Used

I-fax Switch 05 (SP No. 1-102-006)

No Function Comments

0 Mail Addresses of SMTP Broadcast Recipients

Determines whether the e-mail addresses of the destinations that receive transmissions
broadcasted using SMTP protocol are recorded in the Journal.

For example:

"1st destination + Total number of destinations: 9" in the Journal indicates a broadcast to 9
destinations.

0: Not recorded

1: Recorded

1 IFAXTX Retries

Determines whether the machine retries sending IFAX when connection and transmission
fails due to errors.

0: Disabled

1: Enabled

2-7 Not Used

I-fax Switch 06 - Not used (do not change the settings)

I-fax Switch 07 - Not used (do not change the settings)

I-fax Switch 08 (SP No. 1-102-009)

SM 99 D3DX
Bit Switches – 2

No Function Comments

0-7 Memory Threshold for POP Mail Reception

This setting determines the amount of SAF (Store and Forward) memory. (SAF stores fax
messages to send later for transmission to more than one location, and also holds incoming
messages if they cannot be printed.) When the amount of SAF memory available falls below
this setting, mail can no longer be received; received mail is then stored on the mail server.

00-FF (0 to 1024 KB: HEX)

The hexadecimal number you enter is multiplied by 4 KB to determine the amount of

memory.

I-fax Switch 09 (SP No. 1-102-010)

No Function Comments

0-3 Not used Do not change the settings

4-7 Restrict TX This setting determines the number of retries when connection and
Retries transmission fails due to errors.

01-F (1-15 Hex)

I-fax Switch 0A - Not used (do not change the settings)

I-fax Switch 0B - Not used (do not change the settings)

I-fax Switch 0C - Not used (do not change the settings)

I-fax Switch 0D (SP No. 1-102-014)

No Function Comments

0-1 Not used Do not change the

settings

2-3 Select the signature when sending mail notification of the send In response to
results IEEE2600.1.

Bit 2 Bit 3 Setting

0 0 No sign

0 1 No setting

1 0 Individual setting

D3DX 100 SM
 Bit Switches – 2

1 1 Always sign

FAX OPTION
TYPE M29
4-5 Select the signature when sending mail. In response to

(D3DX)
IEEE2600.1.
Bit 5 Bit 4 Setting

0 0 No sign

0 1 No setting

1 0 Individual setting

1 1 Always sign

6-7 Not used Do not change the

settings.

I-fax Switch 0E - Not used (do not change the settings)

I-fax Switch 0F (SP No. 1-102-016)

No Function Comments

0 Delivery Method for SMTP RX Files

This setting determines whether files received with SMTP protocol are delivered or output
immediately.

0: Off. Files received via SMTP are output immediately without delivery.

1: On. Files received via SMTP are delivered immediately to their destinations.

1 Set to select the signature when receiving SMTP mail.

0: No sign

1: Always sign

2 Set to encrypt the data when receiving SMTP mail.

0: No encryption

1: Encryption

3-7 Not used

4.4.2 PRINTER SWITCHES

Printer Switch 00 (SP No. 1-103-001)

No Function Comments

SM 101 D3DX
Bit Switches – 2

0 Select page separation 0: If a 2 page RX transmission is split, [*] is printed in the bottom
marks right corner of the 1st page and only a [2] is printed in the upper
right corner of the 2nd page.
0: Off
1: If a 2 page RX transmission is split into two pages, for
1: On
example, [*] [2] is printed in the bottom right corner of the 1st
page and only a [2] is printed in the upper right corner of the 2nd
page.

• This helps the user to identify pages that have been

split because the size of the paper is smaller than the
size of the document received. (When A5 is used to
print an A4 size document, for example.)
1 Repetition of data when 1: Default. 10 mm of the trailing edge of the previous page are
the received page is repeated at the top of the next page.
longer than the printer
0: The next page continues from where the previous page
paper
stopped without any repeated text.
0: Off

1: On

2 Prints the date and time This switch is only effective when user parameter 02 - bit 2
on received fax (printing the received date and time on received fax messages)
messages is enabled.

0: Disabled 1: The machine prints the received and printed date and time at
the bottom of each received page.
1: Enabled

3-7 Not used Do not change the settings.

Printer Switch 01 (SP No. 1-103-002)

No Function Comments

0-2 Not used Do not change the settings.

3-4 Maximum print width used in the These bits are only effective when bit 7 of printer
setup protocol switch 01 is "1".

Bit 4 Bit 3 Setting

0 0 Not used

0 1 A3

D3DX 102 SM
 Bit Switches – 2

1 0 B4

FAX OPTION
TYPE M29
1 1 A4

(D3DX)
5-6 Not used Do not change the settings.

7 Received message width restriction 0: The machine informs the transmitting machine of
in the protocol signal to the sender the print width depending on the paper size available
from the paper feed stations.
0: Disabled
Refer to the table on the next page for how the
1: Enabled
machine chooses the paper width used in the setup
protocol (NSF/DIS).

1: The machine informs the transmitting machine of

the fixed paper width which is specified by bits 3 and 4
above.

Relationship between available paper sizes and printer width used in the setup protocol

Available Paper Size Printer width used in the Protocol (NSF/DIS)

A4 or 8.5" x 11" 297 mm width

B5 256 mm width

A5 or 8.5" x 5.5" 216 mm width

No paper available (Paper end) 216 mm width

Printer Switch 02 (SP No. 1-103-003)

No Function Comments

0* 1st paper feed 0: The paper feed station can be used to print fax messages and
station usage for fax reports.
printing
1: The specified paper feed station will not be used for printing fax
0: Enabled messages and reports.

1: Disabled

1* 2nd paper feed • Do not disable usage for a paper feed station which has
station usage for fax been specified by User Parameter Switch 0F (15), or which
printing is used for the Specified Cassette Selection feature.

0: Enabled

1: Disabled

2* 3rd paper feed

SM 103 D3DX
Bit Switches – 2

station usage for fax

printing

0: Enabled

1: Disabled

3* 4th paper feed

station usage for fax
printing

0: Enabled

1: Disabled

4* LCT usage for fax

printing

0: Enabled

1: Disabled

5-7 Not used Do not change the settings.

* This setting can be used for the client machine which has no FCU.

Printer Switch 03 (SP No. 1-103-004)

No Function Comments

0* Length reduction of received data 0: Incoming pages are printed without length
reduction.
0: Disabled
(Page separation threshold: Printer Switch 03, bits 4
1: Enabled
to 7)

1: Incoming page length is reduced when printing.

(Maximum reducible length: Printer Switches 04, bits

0 to 4)

1-3 Not used Do not change the settings

4 Page separation setting when sub Page separation threshold (with reduction disabled
scan compression is forbidden with switch 03-0 above).
to
00-0F (0-15 mm: Hex) For example, if this setting is set to "10", and A4 is
7
the selected paper size:
Default: 6 mm
If the received document is 10 mm or less longer than
A4, then the 10 mm are cut and only 1 page prints.

If the received document is 10 mm longer than A4,

D3DX 104 SM
 Bit Switches – 2

then the document is split into 2 pages.

FAX OPTION
TYPE M29
* This setting can be used for the client machine which has no FCU.

(D3DX)
Printer Switch 04 (SP No. 1-103-005)

No Function Comments

0 Maximum reducible length when length reduction is enabled with switch 03-0 above.

to [Maximum reducible length] = [Paper length] + (N x 5mm)

4 "N" is the decimal value of the binary setting of bits 0 to 4.

Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting

0 0 0 0 0 0 mm

0 0 0 0 1 5 mm

0 0 1 0 0 20 mm

1 1 1 1 1 155 mm

For A5 sideways and B5 sideways paper

[Maximum reducible length] = [Paper length] + 0.75 x (N x 5mm)

5 Length of the duplicated image on the next page, when page separation has taken place.

6 Bit 6 Bit 5 Setting

0 0 4 mm

0 1 10 mm

1 0 15 mm

1 1 Not used

7 Not used. Do not change the setting.

Printer Switch 05 - Not used (do not change the settings)

Printer Switch 06 (SP No. 1-103-007)

No Function Comments

0* Printing while a paper cassette is pulled out, when the Just Reference:
Size Printing feature is enabled.
Just size printing on/off –
0: Printing will not start User switch 05, bit 5

1: Printing will start if another cassette has a suitable size of

SM 105 D3DX
Bit Switches – 2

paper, based on the paper size selection priority tables.

1-7 Not used. Do not change the settings.

* This setting can be used for the client machine which has no FCU.

Printer Switch 07 (SP No. 1-103-008)

No Function Comments

0-3 Not used. Do not change the settings.

4 Receiver name printed on the Selects the printing target on the transmission
transmission result report result report.

0: All receivers

1: Printing only receivers which have received

fax transmission.

5-7 Not used. Do not change the settings.

Printer Switch 08 - Not used (do not change the settings)

Printer Switch 09 - Not used (do not change the settings)

Printer Switch 0A - Not used (do not change the settings)

Printer Switch 0B - Not used (do not change the settings)

Printer Switch 0C - Not used (do not change the settings)

Printer Switch 0E (SP No. 1-103-015)

No Function Comments

0* Paper size selection priority 0: A paper size that has the same width as the received
data is selected first.
0: Width
1: A paper size which has enough length to print all the
1: Length
received lines without reduction is selected first.

1* Paper size selected for This switch determines which paper size is selected for
printing A4 width fax data printing A4 width fax data, when the machine has both A4
and 8.5" x 11" size paper.
0: 8.5" x 11" size

1: A4 size

2 Page separation 1: If all paper sizes in the machine require page separation
to print a received fax message, the machine does not print
0: Enabled

D3DX 106 SM
 Bit Switches – 2

1: Disabled the message (Substitute Reception is used).

FAX OPTION
After a larger size of paper is set in a cassette, the machine

TYPE M29
(D3DX)
automatically prints the fax message.

3-4 Printing the sample image on "Same size" means the sample image is printed at 100%,
reports even if page separation occurs.

Bit Bit Setting User Parameter Switch 19 (13H) bit 4 must be set to "0" to
4 3 enable this switch.

0 0 The upper half Refer to “Detailed Descriptions” for more details.

only

0 1 50% reduction
(sub-scan only)

1 0 Same size

1 1 Not used

5-6 Not used Do not change the settings.

7 Equalizing the reduction ratio 0: When page separation has taken place, all the pages
among separated pages are reduced with the same reduction ratio.

(Page Separation) 1: Only the last page is reduced to fit the selected paper
size when page separation has taken place. Other pages
0: Enabled
are printed without reduction.
1: Disabled

* This setting can be used for the client machine which has no FCU.

Printer Switch 0F (SP No. 1-103-016)

No Function Comments

0-1* Smoothing feature (0, 0) (0, 1): Disable smoothing if the machine receives
halftone images from other manufacturers fax machines
Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting
frequently.
0 0 Disabled

0 1 Disabled

1 0 Enabled

1 1 Not used

2* Duplex printing 1: The machine always prints received fax messages in

duplex printing mode:
0: Disabled

SM 107 D3DX
Bit Switches – 2

1: Enabled

3 Binding direction for 0: Sets the binding for the left edge of the stack.
Duplex printing
1: Sets the binding for the top of the stack.
0: Left binding

1: Top binding

4-7 Not used Do not change the settings.

* This setting can be used for the client machine which has no FCU.

D3DX 108 SM
 Bit Switches – 3

4.5 BIT SWITCHES – 3

FAX OPTION
TYPE M29
(D3DX)
• Do not adjust a bit switch or use a setting that is described as "Not used", as this may
cause the machine to malfunction or to operate in a manner that is not accepted by local
regulations. Such bits are for use only in other areas, such as Japan.
Default settings for bit switches are not listed in this manual. Refer to the System Parameter List
printed by the machine.

4.5.1 COMMUNICATION SWITCHES

Communication Switch 00 (SP No. 1-104-001)

No Function Comments

0-1 Compression modes available in These bits determine the compression capabilities to be
receive mode declared in phase B (handshaking) of the T.30 protocol.

Bit Bit Modes

1 0

0 0 MH only

0 1 MH/MR

1 0 MH/MR/MMR

1 1 MH/MR/MMR/JBIG

2-3 Compression modes available in These bits determine the compression capabilities to be
transmit mode used in the transmission and to be declared in phase B
(handshaking) of the T.30 protocol.
Bit Bit Modes
3 2

0 0 MH only

0 1 MH/MR

1 0 MH/MR/MMR

1 1 MH/MR/MMR/JBIG

4 Not used Do not change the settings.

5 JBIG compression method: Change the setting when communication problems

Reception occur using JBIG compression.

0: Only basic supported

SM 109 D3DX
Bit Switches – 3

1: Basic and optional both

supported

6 JBIG compression method: Change the setting when communication problems

Transmission occur using JBIG compression.

0: Basic mode priority

1: Optional mode priority

7 Closed network (reception) 1: Reception will not go ahead if the polling ID code of
the remote terminal does not match the polling ID code
0: Disabled
of the local terminal. This function is only available in
1: Enabled
NSF/NSS mode.

Communication Switch 01 (SP No. 1-104-002)

No Function Comments

0 ECM If this bit is set to 0, ECM is switched off for all communications.

0: Off 1: On In addition, V.8 protocol and JBIG compression are switched off
automatically.

1 Not used Do not change the setting.

2-3 Wrong connection (0,1): The machine will disconnect the line without sending a fax
prevention method message, if the last 8 digits of the received CSI do not match the
last 8 digits of the dialed telephone number. This does not work
Bit Bit Setting
when manually dialed.
3 2
(1,0): The same as above, except that only the last 4 digits are
0 0 None
compared.
0 1 8 digit CSI
(1,1): The machine will disconnect the line without sending a fax
1 0 4 digit CSI message, if the other end does not identify itself with an RTI or
1 1 CSI/RTI CSI.

(0,0): Nothing is checked; transmission will always go ahead.

• This function does not work when dialing is done from

the external telephone.
4-5 Not used Do not change the setting.

6-7 Maximum printable The setting determined by these bits is informed to the
page length available transmitting terminal in the pre-message protocol exchange (in

D3DX 110 SM
 Bit Switches – 3

Bit Bit Setting the DIS/NSF frames).

FAX OPTION
7 6

TYPE M29
(D3DX)
0 0 No limit

0 1 B4 (364
mm)

1 0 A4 (297
mm)

1 1 Not used

Communication Switch 02 (SP No. 1-104-003)

No Function Comments

0 G3 Burst error threshold If there are more consecutive error lines in the received
page than the threshold, the machine will send a negative
0: Low 1: High
response. The Low and High threshold values depend on
the sub-scan resolution, and are as follows.

100 dpi 6(L) 12(H)

200 dpi 12(L) 24(H)

300 dpi 18(L) 36(H)

400 dpi 24(L) 48(H)

1 Acceptable total error line ratio If the error line ratio for a page exceeds the acceptable
ratio, RTN will be sent to the other end.
0: 5% 1: 10%

2 Treatment of pages received 0: Pages received with errors are not printed.
with errors during G3 reception

0: Deleted from memory

without printing

1: Printed

3 Hang-up decision when a 0: The next page will be sent even if RTN or PIN is
negative code (RTN or PIN) is received.
received during G3 immediate
1: The machine will send DCN and hang up if it receives
transmission
RTN or PIN.
0: No hang-up, 1: Hang-up
This bit is ignored for memory transmissions or if ECM is
being used.

SM 111 D3DX
Bit Switches – 3

4-7 Not used Do not change these settings.

Communication Switch 03 (SP No. 1-104-004)

No Function Comments

0-7 Maximum number of page retransmissions in a G3 00 - FF (Hex) times.

memory transmission
This setting is not used if ECM is
switched on.

Default setting - 03(H)

Communication Switch 04 (SP No. 1-104-005)

No Function Comments

0 Remote mode switch Set this bit to ON when you wish to switch TEL mode to FAX
(TEL mode) mode remotely.

0: Disable

1: Enable (Active)

1 Remote mode switch Set this bit to ON when you wish to turn on the remote mode
(FAX mode) switch after automatic reception with FAX mode.

0: Disable

1: Enable (Active)

2 Remote mode switch Set this bit to ON when you wish to turn on the remote mode
(AUTO mode) switch after automatic reception with AUTO mode.

0: Disable

1: Enable (Active)

3-7 Not used Do not change the settings.

Communication Switch 05 (SP No. 1-104-006)

No Function Comments

0-3 Remote mode switch Enter the number to switch between TEL/FAX modes using the
number external phone.

00-09 (0-9:HEX)

4-7 Not used Do not change the settings.

D3DX 112 SM
 Bit Switches – 3

FAX OPTION
Communication Switch 06 - Not used (do not change the settings)

TYPE M29
(D3DX)
Communication Switch 07 - Not used (do not change the settings)

Communication Switch 08 - Not used (do not change the settings)

Communication Switch 09 (SP No. 1-104-009)

No Function Comments

0-7 Minimum interval between This value is the minimum time that the machine waits
automatic dialing attempts before it dials the next destination.

Communication Switch 0A (SP No. 1-104-011)

No Function Comments

0 Point of resumption of memory 0: The transmission begins from the page where
transmission upon redialing transmission failed the previous time.

0: From the error page 1: Transmission begins from the first page, using
normal memory transmission.
1: From page 1

1-7 Not used Do not change these settings.

Communication Switch 0B (SP No. 1-104-012)

No Function Comments

0-3 Not used Do not change these settings.

4 Printout of the message When the machine is acting as a Transfer Station, this bit
when acting as a Transfer determines whether the machine prints the fax message
Station coming in from the Requesting Terminal.

0: Disabled, 1: Enabled

5-7 Not used Do not change the settings.

Communication Switch 0C - Not used (do not change the settings)

Communication Switch 0D (SP No. 1-104-014)

No Function Comments

SM 113 D3DX
Bit Switches – 3

0-7 The available memory threshold, 00 to FF (Hex), unit = 4 Kbytes

below which ringing detection (and
(e.g., 06(H) = 24 Kbytes)
therefore reception into memory) is
One page is about 24 Kbytes.
disabled
The machine refers to this setting before each fax
reception. If the amount of remaining memory is
below this threshold, the machine cannot receive any
fax messages.

If this setting is kept at 0, the machine will detect

ringing signals and go into receive mode even if there
is no memory available. This will result in
communication failure.

Communication Switch 0E (SP No. 1-104-015)

No Function Comments

0-7 Minimum interval between 06 to FF (Hex), unit = 2 s

automatic dialing attempts
(e.g., 06(H) = 12 s)

This value is the minimum time that the machine waits

before it dials the next destination.

Communication Switch 0F – Not used (do not change the settings.)

Communication Switch 10 (SP No. 1-104-017)

No Function Comments

0-7 Memory transmission: Maximum number of dialing attempts to the 01 – FE (Hex)

same destination times

Communication Switch 11 – Not used (do not change the settings.)

Communication Switch 12 (SP No. 1-104-019)

No Function Comments

0-7 Memory transmission: Interval between dialing attempts to the same 01 – FF (Hex)
destination minutes

D3DX 114 SM
 Bit Switches – 3

Communication Switch 13 – Not used (do not change the settings.)

FAX OPTION
TYPE M29
(D3DX)
Communication Switch 14 (SP No. 1-104-021)

No Function Comments

0 Inch-to-mm conversion 0: In immediate transmission, data scanned in inch format

during transmission are transmitted without conversion.

0: Disabled, 1: Enabled In memory transmission, data stored in the SAF memory in

mm format are transmitted without conversion.

Note: When storing the scanned data into SAF memory, the
fax unit always converts the data into mm format.

1: The machine converts the scanned data or stored data in

the SAF memory to the format which was specified in the
set-up protocol (DIS/NSF) before transmission.

1-5 Not used Do not change the factory settings.

6-7 Available unit of resolution in For the best performance, do not change the factory
which fax messages are settings.
received
The setting determined by these bits is informed to the
Bit 7 Bit 6 Unit transmitting terminal in the pre-message protocol exchange
(in the DIS/NSF frames).
0 0 mm

0 1 inch

1 0 mm and inch

1 1 Not used

Communication Switch 15 – Not used (do not change the settings)

Communication Switch 16 (SP No. 1-104-023)

No Function Comments

0 Not used Do not change the settings.

1 Optional G3 unit (G3-2) Change this bit to 1 when installing the first optional G3 unit.

0: Not installed

1: Installed

SM 115 D3DX
Bit Switches – 3

2 Not used

3 Select PSTN connection This switch enables the G3-2.

0: Off 0: Off, no connection

1: On 1: Recognizes and enables G3-2.

This switch can be used only after G3-2 has been installed.

4-7 Not used Do not change the settings.

Communication Switch 17 (SP No. 1-104-024)

No Function Comments

0 SEP reception 0: Polling transmission to another maker's machine using

the SEP (Selective Polling) signal is disabled.
0: Disabled

1: Enabled

1 SUB reception 0: Confidential reception to another maker's machine

using the SUB (Sub-address) signal is disabled.
0: Disabled

1: Enabled

2 PWD reception 0: Disables features that require PWD (Password) signal

reception.
0: Disabled

1: Enabled

3-4 Not used Do not change the settings.

5 PSTN dial-in routing setting 1: The machine sets multiple PSTN dial-in numbers in
the PSTN dial-in line and transfers received data from
0: OFF
each PSTN dial-in number to each address.
1: ON

6 Not used Do not change the settings.

7 Action when there is no box with Change this setting when the customer requires.
an F-code that matches the
received SUB code

0: Disconnect the line

1: Receive the message

(using normal reception mode)

D3DX 116 SM
 Bit Switches – 3

Communication Switch 18 (SP No. 1-104-025)

FAX OPTION
TYPE M29
No Function Comments

(D3DX)
0-4 Not used Do not change the settings.

5 IP-Fax dial-in routing 1: Transfers received data to each IP-Fax dial-in number.
selection
IP-Fax dial-in number is a 4-digit number.
0: Off

1: On

6 PSTN 2 dial-in routing Enables or disables dial-in routing for the PSTN 2
connection.
0: Off

1: On

7 PSTN 3 dial-in routing Enables or disables dial-in routing for the PSTN 3
connection.
0: Off

1: On

Communication Switch 19 - Not used (do not change the settings)

Communication Switch 1A - Not used (do not change the settings)

Communication Switch 1B (SP No. 1-104-028)

No Function Comments

0-7 Extension access If the PABX does not support V.8/V.34 protocol procedure, set this
code (0 to 7) to turn bit to "1" to disable V.8.
V.8 protocol On/Off
Example: If "0" is the PSTN access code, set bit 0 to 1. When the
0: On machine detects "0" as the first dialed number, it automatically
disables V.8 protocol. (Alternatively, if "3" is the PSTN access
1: Off
code, set bit 3 to 1.)

Communication Switch 1C (SP No. 1-104-029)

No Function Comments

0-1 Extension access code Refer to communication switch 1B.

(8 and 9) to turn V.8
Example: If "8" is the PSTN access code, set bit 0 to 1. When the
protocol On/Off
machine detects "8" as the first dialed number, it automatically

SM 117 D3DX
Bit Switches – 3

0: On disables V.8 protocol. (If "9" is the PSTN access code, use bit 1.)

1: Off

2-7 Not used Do not change the settings.

Communication Switch 1D - Not used (do not change the settings)

Communication Switch 1E - Not used (do not change the settings)

Communication Switch 1F - Not used (do not change the settings)

D3DX 118 SM
 Bit Switches – 4

4.6 BIT SWITCHES – 4

FAX OPTION
TYPE M29
(D3DX)
• Do not adjust a bit switch or use a setting that is described as "Not used", as this may
cause the machine to malfunction or to operate in a manner that is not accepted by local
regulations. Such bits are for use only in other areas, such as Japan.
Default settings for bit switches are not listed in this manual. Refer to the System Parameter List
printed by the machine.

4.6.1 G3 SWITCHES
G3 Switch 00 (SP No. 1-105-001)

No Function Comments

0 Monitor speaker during (0, 0): The monitor speaker is disabled all through the
communication (TX and RX) communication.
1
Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting (0, 1): The monitor speaker is on up to phase B in the T.30
protocol.
0 0 Disabled
(1, 0): Used for testing. The monitor speaker is on all
0 1 Up to Phase B
through the communication. Make sure that you reset
1 0 All the time these bits after testing.
1 1 Not used

2 Monitor speaker during 1: The monitor speaker is enabled during memory

memory transmission transmission.

0: Disabled 1: Enabled

3-5 Not used Do not change the settings.

6 Dedicated G3 line mode Set this bit to 1 when you wish to dedicate a line for G3.
selection

0: Off 1: On (Dedicated)

7 Not used Do not change this setting.

G3 Switch 01 (SP No. 1-105-002)

No Function Comments

0-3 Not used Do not change the settings.

SM 119 D3DX
Bit Switches – 4

4 DIS frame length 1: The bytes in the DIS frame after the 4th byte will not be transmitted
(set to 1 if there are communication problems with PC-based faxes
0: 10 bytes 1: 4
which cannot receive the extended DIS frames).
bytes

5 Not used Do not change the setting.

6 Forbid Do not change this setting (Default: 0: Off), unless communication

CED/ANsam problem is caused by a CED or ANSam transmission.
output

0: Off

1: On (Forbid
output)

7 Not used Do not change this setting.

G3 Switch 02 (SP No. 1-105-003)

No Function Comments

0 G3 protocol mode Change this bit to 1 only when the other end can only communicate
used with machines that send T.30-standard frames only.

0: Standard and 1: Disables NSF/NSS signals (these are used in non-standard

non-standard mode communication)

1: Standard only

1-6 Not used Do not change the settings.

7 Short preamble Refer to Appendix B in the Group 3 Facsimile Manual for details
about Short Preamble.
0: Disabled 1:
Enabled

G3 Switch 03 (SP No. 1-105-004)

No Function Comments

0 DIS detection number 0: The machine will hang up if it receives the same DIS frame
twice.
(Echo countermeasure)
1: Before sending DCS, the machine will wait for the second
0: 1
DIS which is caused by echo on the line.
1: 2

1 Not Used Do not change the settings.

D3DX 120 SM
 Bit Switches – 4

2 Not Used Do not change the settings.

FAX OPTION
TYPE M29
3 ECM frame size Keep this bit at "0" in most cases.

(D3DX)
0: 256 bytes

1: 64 bytes

4 CTC transmission conditions 0: When using ECM in non-standard (NSF/NSS) mode, the
machine sends a CTC to drop back the modem rate after
0: After one PPR signal
receiving a PPR, if the following condition is met in
received
communications at 14.4, 12.0, 9.6, and 7.2 kbps.
1: After four PPR signals
received (ITU-T standard)

NTransmit- Number of transmitted frames

NResend- Number of frames to be retransmitted

1: When using ECM, the machine sends a CTC to drop back

the modem rate after receiving four PPRs.

PPR, CTC: These are ECM protocol signals.

This bit is not effective in V.34 communications.

5 Modem rate used for the 1: The machine's TX modem rate will fall back before
next page after receiving a sending the next page if a negative code is received. This bit
negative code (RTN or PIN) is ignored if ECM is being used.

0: No change 1: Fallback

6 Not used Do not change the settings

7 Select detection of reverse This switch is used to prevent reverse polarity in ringing on
polarity in ringing the phone line (applied to PSTN-G3 ringing). Do not change
this setting
0: Off
0: No detection
1: On
1: Detection (Japan and Korea only)

G3 Switch 04 (SP No. 1-105-005)

No Function Comments

0-3 Training error 0 - F (Hex); 0 - 15 bits

detection threshold
If the number of error bits in the received TCF is below this
threshold, the machine informs the sender that training has

SM 121 D3DX
Bit Switches – 4

succeeded.

4-7 Not used Do not change the settings.

G3 Switch 05 (SP No. 1-105-006)

No Function Comments

0-3 Initial TX modem rate (kbps) These bits set the initial starting modem rate for
transmission.
Bit 3 Bit Bit Bit 0 kbps
2 1 Use the dedicated transmission parameters if you need
to change this for specific receivers.
0 0 0 1 2.4
If a modem rate 14.4 kbps or slower is selected, V.8
0 0 1 0 4.8
protocol should be disabled manually.
0 0 1 1 7.2
Cross reference
0 1 0 0 9.6
V.8 protocol on/off - G3 switch 03, bit 2
0 1 0 1 12.0

0 1 1 0 14.4

0 1 1 1 16.8

1 0 0 0 19.2

1 0 0 1 21.6

1 0 1 0 24.0

1 0 1 1 26.4

1 1 0 0 28.8

1 1 0 1 31.2

1 1 1 0 33.6

Other settings - Not used

4-5 Initial modem type for 9.6 k or These bits set the initial modem type for 9.6 and 7.2
7.2 kbps. kbps, if the initial modem rate is set at these speeds.

Bit 5 Bit Setting

4

0 0 V.29

0 1 V.17

1 0 V.34

D3DX 122 SM
 Bit Switches – 4

1 1 Not used

FAX OPTION
TYPE M29
6-7 Not used Do not change the settings.

(D3DX)
G3 Switch 06 (SP No. 1-105-007)

No Function Comments

0-3 Initial RX modem rate(kbps) These bits set the initial starting modem rate
for reception.
Bit 3 Bit Bit Bit kbps
2 1 0 Use a lower setting if high speeds pose
problems during reception.
0 0 0 1 2.4
If a modem rate 14.4 kbps or slower is
0 0 1 0 4.8
selected, V.8 protocol should be disabled
0 0 1 1 7.2 manually.
0 1 0 0 9.6 Cross reference
0 1 0 1 12.0 V.8 protocol on/off - G3 switch 03, bit2

0 1 1 0 14.4

0 1 1 1 16.8

1 0 0 0 19.2

1 0 0 1 21.6

1 0 1 0 24.0

1 0 1 1 26.4

1 1 0 0 28.8

1 1 0 1 31.2

1 1 1 0 33.6

Other settings - Not used

4-7 Modem types available for reception

The setting of these bits is used to inform the transmitting terminal of the available modem
type for the machine in receive mode.

If V.34 is not selected, V.8 protocol must be disabled manually.

Cross reference

V.8 protocol on/off - G3 switch 03, bit 2

Bit 7 Bit Bit Bit Types

SM 123 D3DX
Bit Switches – 4

6 5 4

0 0 0 1 V.27ter

0 0 1 0 V.27ter, V.29

0 0 1 1 V.27ter, V.29, V.33

0 1 0 0 V.27ter, V.29, V.17

0 1 0 1 V.27ter, V.29, V.17, V.34

Other settings - Not used

G3 Switch 07 (SP No. 1-105-008)

No Function Comments

0-1 PSTN cable equalizer Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higher frequencies
because of the length of wire between the modem and the
(TX mode: Internal)
telephone exchange.
Bit Bit Setting
Use the dedicated transmission parameters for specific receivers.
1 0
Also, try using the cable equalizer if one or more of the following
0 0 None
symptoms occurs.
0 1 Low
Communication error
1 0 Medium
Modem rate fallback occurs frequently.
1 1 High

• This setting is not effective in V.34 communications.

2-3 PSTN cable equalizer Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higher frequencies
because of the length of wire between the modem and the
(RX mode: Internal)
telephone exchange.
Bit Bit Setting
Also, try using the cable equalizer if one or more of the following
3 2
symptoms occurs.
0 0 None
Communication error with error codes such as 0-20, 0-23, etc.
0 1 Low
Modem rate fallback occurs frequently.
1 0 Medium

1 1 High
• This setting is not effective in V.34 communications.

4 PSTN cable equalizer Keep this bit at "1".

(V.8/V.17 RX mode:

D3DX 124 SM
 Bit Switches – 4

External)

FAX OPTION
0: Disabled

TYPE M29
(D3DX)
1: Enabled

5 Not used Do not change the settings.

6 Parameter selection 0: This uses the fixed table in the ROM for dial tone detection.
for dial tone
1: This uses the specific parameter adjusted with SRAM
detection (69ECBEH - 69ECDEH). Select this if the dial tone cannot be
detected when the "Normal parameter: 0" is selected.
0: Normal parameter

1: Specific parameter

7 Not used Do not change the settings.

G3 Switch 08 - Not used (do not change the settings)

G3 Switch 09 - Not used (do not change the settings)

G3 Switch 0A (SP No. 1-105-011)

No Function Comments

0-1 Maximum allowable These bits set the acceptable modem carrier drop time.
carrier drop during
Try a longer setting if error code 0-22 is frequent.
image data reception

Bit 1 Bit 0 Value

(ms)

0 0 200

0 1 400

1 0 800

1 1 Not used

2 Select cancellation of This switch setting determines if high-speed receiving ends if the
high-speed RX if carrier carrier signal is lost when receiving during non-ECM mode
signal lost while
receiving

0: Off

1: On

SM 125 D3DX
Bit Switches – 4

3 Not used Do not change the settings

4 Maximum allowable This bit set the maximum interval between EOL (end-of-line)
frame interval during signals and the maximum interval between ECM frames from
image data reception. the other end.

0: 5 s 1: 13 s Try using a longer setting if error code 0-21 is frequent.

5 Not used Do not change the settings.

6 Reconstruction time for When the sending terminal is controlled by a computer, there
the first line in receive may be a delay in receiving page data after the local machine
mode accepts set-up data and sends CFR. This is outside the T.30
recommendation. But, if this delay occurs, set this bit to 1 to give
0: 6 s 1: 12 s
the sending machine more time to send data.

Refer to error code 0-20.

ITU-T T.30 recommendation: The first line should come within 5

s of CFR.

7 Not used Do not change the settings.

G3 Switch 0B Not used (do not change the settings).

G3 Switch 0E (SP No. 1-105-013)

No Function Comments

0-1 Not used Do not change these settings.

4-5 Select detection of DTMF/DP This setting determines how to detect the signals
detection when using remote switch. from the handset when remote switch is active.

00: DTMF+PSTN (Simultaneous

detection)

01: DTMF

10: DP (10 PPPS)

11: DP (20 PPS)

G3 Switch 0D Not used (do not change the settings).

G3 Switch 0E (SP No. 1-105-015)

D3DX 126 SM
 Bit Switches – 4

No Function Comments

FAX OPTION
TYPE M29
0-7 Set CNG send time interval

(D3DX)
Some machines on the receiving side may not be able to automatically switch the 3-second
CNG interval.

High order bit 3000-2250ms: 3000-50xNms

3000 – 50 x Nms 0F (3000 ms) <= N <= FF (2250 ms)

Low order bit 00-0E(3000-3700ms: 3000+50xNms

3000 – 50 x Nms 0F (3000 ms) <= N <= 0F (3700 ms)

G3 Switch 0F (SP No. 1-105-016)

No Function Comments

0 Alarm when an error occurred in If the customer wants to hear an alarm after each error
Phase C or later communication, change this bit to "1".

0: Disabled

1: Enabled

1 Alarm when the handset is If the customer wants to hear an alarm if the handset is
off-hook at the end of off-hook at the end of fax communication, change this
communication bit to "1".

0: Disabled

1: Enabled

2-3 Not used Do not change these settings.

4 Manual calibration setting 1: manually calibrates for communication with a line

whose current change occurs such as an optical fiber
0: Off
line.
1: On

5-7 Not used Do not change the settings.

SM 127 D3DX
Bit Switches – 5

4.7 BIT SWITCHES – 5

• Do not adjust a bit switch or use a setting that is described as "Not used", as this may
cause the machine to malfunction or to operate in a manner that is not accepted by local
regulations. Such bits are for use only in other areas, such as Japan.
Default settings for bit switches are not listed in this manual. Refer to the System Parameter List
printed by the machine.

4.7.1 G3-2 AND G3-3 SWITCHES

These switches require an optional G3 interface unit.

G3-3 switches are the same as for G3-2 switches.

G3-2 Switch 00 (SP No. 1-106-001)

No Function Comments

0 Monitor speaker during (0, 0): The monitor speaker is disabled all through the
communication (TX and RX) communication.
1
Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting (0, 1): The monitor speaker is on up to phase B in the T.30
protocol.
0 0 Disable
(1, 0): Used for testing. The monitor speaker is on all
0 1 Up to Phase B
through the communication. Make sure that you reset
1 0 All the time these bits after testing.
1 1 Not used

2 Monitor speaker during 1: The monitor speaker is enabled during memory

memory transmission transmission.

0: Disabled 1: Enabled

3-7 Not used Do not change the settings.

G3-2 Switch 01 (SP No. 1-106-002)

No Function Comments

0-3 Not used Do not change the settings.

4 DIS frame length 1: The bytes in the DIS frame after the 4th byte will not be transmitted
(set to 1 if there are communication problems with PC-based faxes
0: 10 bytes 1: 4

D3DX 128 SM
 Bit Switches – 5

bytes which cannot receive the extended DIS frames).

FAX OPTION
TYPE M29
5 Not used Do not change the setting.

(D3DX)
6 Forbid Do not change this setting (Default: 0: Off), unless communication
CED/ANSam problem is caused by a CED or ANSam transmission.
output

0: Off

1: On (Forbid
output)

7 Not used Do not change the setting.

G3-2 Switch 02 (SP No. 1-106-003)

No Function Comments

0 G3 protocol mode Change this bit to 1 only when the other end can only communicate
used with machines that send T.30-standard frames only.

0: Standard and 1: Disables NSF/NSS signals (these are used in non-standard

non-standard mode communication)

1: Standard only

1-4 Not used Do not change the settings.

5 AI modem rate Selects if the AI modem rate is ON or OFF.

selection

0: OFF, 1: ON

6 Not used Do not change the settings.

7 Short preamble Refer to Appendix B in the Group 3 Facsimile Manual for details
about Short Preamble.
0: Disabled 1:
Enabled

G3-2 Switch 03 (SP No. 1-106-004)

No Function Comments

0 DIS detection number 0: The machine will hang up if it receives the same DIS frame
twice.
(Echo countermeasure)
1: Before sending DCS, the machine will wait for the second
0: 1
DIS which is caused by echo on the line.

SM 129 D3DX
Bit Switches – 5

1: 2

1 Not Used Do not change the settings.

2 Not Used Do not change the settings.

3 ECM frame size Keep this bit at "0" in most cases.

0: 256 bytes

1: 64 bytes

4 CTC transmission conditions 0: When using ECM in non-standard (NSF/NSS) mode, the
machine sends a CTC to drop back the modem rate after
0: After one PPR signal
receiving a PPR, if the following condition is met in
received
communications at 14.4, 12.0, 9.6, and 7.2 kbps.
1: After four PPR signals
received (ITU-T standard)

Ntransmit = Number of transmitted frames

Nresend = Number of frames to be retransmitted

1: When using ECM, the machine sends a CTC to drop back

the modem rate after receiving four PPRs.

PPR, CTC: These are ECM protocol signals.

This bit is not effective in V.34 communications.

5 Modem rate used for the 1: The machine's TX modem rate will fall back before
next page after receiving a sending the next page if a negative code is received. This bit
negative code (RTN or PIN) is ignored if ECM is being used.

0: No change 1: Fallback

6 Not used Do not change the settings

7 Select detection of reverse This switch is used to prevent reverse polarity in ringing on
polarity in ringing the phone line (applied to PSTN-G3 ringing). Do not change
this setting
0: Off
0: No detection
1: On
1: Detection (Japan and Korea only)

G3-2 Switch 04 (SP No. 1-106-005)

No Function Comments

0-3 Training error 0 - F (Hex); 0 - 15 bits

D3DX 130 SM
 Bit Switches – 5

detection threshold If the number of error bits in the received TCF is below this

FAX OPTION
threshold, the machine informs the sender that training has

TYPE M29
(D3DX)
succeeded.

4-7 Not used Do not change the settings.

G3-2 Switch 05 (SP No. 1-106-006)

No Function Comments

0-3 Initial TX modem rate (kbps) These bits set the initial starting modem rate for
transmission.
Bit 3 Bit Bit Bit 0 kbps
2 1 Use the dedicated transmission parameters if you need
to change this for specific receivers.
0 0 0 1 2.4
If a modem rate 14.4 kbps or slower is selected, V.8
0 0 1 0 4.8
protocol should be disabled manually.
0 0 1 1 7.2
Cross reference
0 1 0 0 9.6
V.8 protocol on/off - G3 switch 03, bit 2
0 1 0 1 12.0

0 1 1 0 14.4

0 1 1 1 16.8

1 0 0 0 19.2

1 0 0 1 21.6

1 0 1 0 24.0

1 0 1 1 26.4

1 1 0 0 28.8

1 1 0 1 31.2

Other settings - Not used

4-5 Initial modem type for 9.6 k or These bits set the initial modem type for 9.6 and 7.2
7.2 kbps. kbps, if the initial modem rate is set at these speeds.

Bit 5 Bit Setting

4

0 0 V.29

0 1 V.17

SM 131 D3DX
Bit Switches – 5

1 0 V.34

1 1 Not used

6-7 Not used Do not change the settings.

G3-2 Switch 06 (SP No. 1-106-007)

No Function Comments

0-3 Initial RX modem rate(kbps) These bits set the initial starting modem rate for reception.

Bit Bit Bit Bit kbps Use a lower setting if high speeds pose problems during
3 2 1 0 reception.

0 0 0 1 2.4 If a modem rate 14.4 kbps or slower is selected, V.8

protocol should be disabled manually.
0 0 1 0 4.8
Cross reference
0 0 1 1 7.2
V.8 protocol on/off - G3 switch 03, bit2
0 1 0 0 9.6

0 1 0 1 12.0

0 1 1 0 14.4

0 1 1 1 16.8

1 0 0 0 19.2

1 0 0 1 21.6

1 0 1 0 24.0

1 0 1 1 26.4

1 1 0 0 28.8

1 1 0 1 31.2

Other settings - Not used

4-7 Modem types available for reception

The setting of these bits is used to inform the transmitting terminal of the available modem
type for the machine in receive mode.

If V.34 is not selected, V.8 protocol must be disabled manually.

Cross reference

V.8 protocol on/off - G3 switch 03, bit 2

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit Bit 4 Types

D3DX 132 SM
 Bit Switches – 5

FAX OPTION
TYPE M29
0 0 0 1 V.27ter

(D3DX)
0 0 1 0 V.27ter

0 0 1 1 V.27ter

0 1 0 0 V.27ter

0 1 0 1 V.27ter

Other settings - Not used

G3-2 Switch 07 (SP No. 1-106-008)

No Function Comments

0-1 PSTN cable equalizer Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higher frequencies
because of the length of wire between the modem and the
(TX mode: Internal)
telephone exchange.
Bit Bit Setting
Use the dedicated transmission parameters for specific receivers.
1 0

0 0 None
Also, try using the cable equalizer if one or more of the following
0 1 Low
symptoms occurs.
1 0 Medium
Communication error
1 1 High
Modem rate fallback occurs frequently.

• This setting is not effective in V.34 communications.

2-3 PSTN cable equalizer Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higher frequencies
because of the length of wire between the modem and the
(RX mode: Internal)
telephone exchange.
Bit Bit Setting
Also, try using the cable equalizer if one or more of the following
3 2
symptoms occurs.
0 0 None
Communication error with error codes such as 0-20, 0-23, etc.
0 1 Low
Modem rate fallback occurs frequently.
1 0 Medium

1 1 High
• This setting is not effective in V.34 communications.

4 PSTN cable equalizer Keep this bit at "1".

SM 133 D3DX
Bit Switches – 5

(V.8/V.17 RX mode:
External)

0: Disabled

1: Enabled

5-7 Not used Do not change the settings.

G3-2 Switch 08 - Not used (do not change the settings)

G3-2 Switch 09 - Not used (do not change the settings)

G3-2 Switch 0A (SP No. 1-106-011)

No Function Comments

0-1 Maximum allowable These bits set the acceptable modem carrier drop time.
carrier drop during
Try a longer setting if error code 0-22 is frequent.
image data reception

Bit 1 Bit 0 Value

(ms)

0 0 200

0 1 400

1 0 800

1 1 Not used

2-3 Not used Do not change the settings

4 Maximum allowable This bit set the maximum interval between EOL (end-of-line)
frame interval during signals and the maximum interval between ECM frames from the
image data reception. other end.

0: 5 s 1: 13 s Try using a longer setting if error code 0-21 is frequent.

5 Not used Do not change the settings.

6 Reconstruction time for When the sending terminal is controlled by a computer, there may
the first line in receive be a delay in receiving page data after the local machine accepts
mode set-up data and sends CFR. This is outside the T.30
recommendation. But, if this delay occurs, set this bit to 1 to give
0: 6 s 1: 12 s
the sending machine more time to send data.

Refer to error code 0-20.

D3DX 134 SM
 Bit Switches – 5

ITU-T T.30 recommendation: The first line should come within 5 s

FAX OPTION
of CFR.

TYPE M29
(D3DX)
7 Not used Do not change the settings.

G3-2 Switch 0B- Not used (do not change the settings)

G3-2 Switch 0C- Not used (do not change the settings)

G3-2 Switch 0E- Not used (do not change the settings)

G3-2 Switch 0F- Not used (do not change the settings)

4.7.2 G4 INTERNAL SWITCHES

The G4 internal switches (SW00 to 1F) are displayed but do not change these settings.

4.7.3 G4 PARAMETER SWITCHES

The G4 parameter switches (SW00 to 0F) are displayed but do not change these settings.

SM 135 D3DX
Bit Switches – 6

4.8 BIT SWITCHES – 6

• Do not adjust a bit switch or use a setting that is described as "Not used", as this may
cause the machine to malfunction or to operate in a manner that is not accepted by local
regulations. Such bits are for use only in other areas, such as Japan.
Default settings for bit switches are not listed in this manual. Refer to the System Parameter List
printed by the machine.

4.8.1 IP FAX SWITCHES

IP Fax Switch 00 (SP No. 1-111-001)

No. Function Comments

0 Not used Do not change this setting.

1 IP Fax Transport Selects TCP or UDP protocol for IP-Fax

0: TCP, 1: UDP

2 IP Fax single port Selects single data port.

selection

0: OFF, 1: ON
(enable)

3 IP Fax double ports Selects whether IP-Fax uses a double port.

(single data port)
selection

0: OFF, 1: ON
(enable)

4 IP Fax Gatekeeper Enables/disables the gatekeeper for IP-Fax.

0: OFF, 1: ON
(enable)

5 IP Fax T30 bit signal Reverses the T30 bit signal.

reverse

0: LSB first, 1: MSB

first

6 IP Fax max bit rate When "0" is selected, the max bit rate does not affect the value of
setting the DIS/DCS.

D3DX 136 SM
 Bit Switches – 6

0: Not affected, 1: When "1" is selected, the max bit rate affects the value of the

FAX OPTION
Affected DIS/DCS.

TYPE M29
(D3DX)
7 IP Fax received When "0" is selected, fax data is received without checking the
telephone number telephone number.
confirmation
When "1" is selected, fax data is received only when confirming that
0: No confirmation, 1: the telephone number from the sender matches the registered
Confirmation telephone number in this machine. If this confirmation fails, the line
is disconnected.

IP Fax Switch 01 (SP No. 1-111-002)

No. Function Comments

0-3 IP Fax delay level setting

Selects the acceptable delay level.

Level 0 is the highest quality

Default is "0000" (level 0).

Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

0 0 0 0 Level 0

0 0 0 1 Level 1

0 0 1 0 Level 2

0 0 1 1 Level 3

4-7 IP Fax preamble wait time Selects the preamble wait time.
setting
[00 to 0f]

There are 16 values in this 4-bit binary switch

combination.

Waiting time: set value level x 100 ms

Max: 0f (1500 ms) Min: 00 (No wait time)

The default is "0000" (00H).

IP Fax Switch 02 (SP No. 1-111-003)

No. Function Comments

0 IP Fax bit signal reverse setting When "0" is selected, the bit signal reverse method is

SM 137 D3DX
Bit Switches – 6

0: Maker code setting decided by the maker code.

1: Internal bit switch setting When "1" is selected, the bit signal reverse method is
decided by the internal bit switch.

When communicating between IP Fax devices, LSB first

is selected.)

1 IP Fax transmission speed Selects the transmit speed for IP Fax communication.
setting

0: Modem speed

1: No limitation

2 SIP transport setting This bit switch sets the transport that has priority for
receiving IP Fax data.
0: TCP
This function is activated only when the sender has both
1: UDP
TCP and UDP.

3 CCM connection When "1" is selected, only the connection call message
with H.323 or no tunneled H.245 is transmitted via CCM.
0: No CCM connection

1: CCM connection

4 Message reception selection 0: This answers the INVITE message from the SIP server
from non-registered SIP server not registered for the machine.

0: Answer 1: This does not receive the INVITE message from the
SIP server not registered for the machine and send a
1: Not answer
refusal message.

5 ECM communication setting 0: This does not limit the type of the image compression
with ECM communication.
0: No limit for image
compression 1: When the other end machine is Ciscco, this permits the
image compression other than JBIG or MMR with ECM
1: Limit for image compression
communication.

6-7 Not used Do not change these settings.

IP Fax Switch 03 (SP No. 1-111-004)

No. Function Comments

0 Effective field limitation for G3 Limits the effective field for standard G3 function
standard function information information.

D3DX 138 SM
 Bit Switches – 6

0: OFF, 1: 4byte (DIS)

FAX OPTION
TYPE M29
1 Switching between G3 standard and Enables/disables switching between G3 standard

(D3DX)
G3 non standard and G3 non-standard.

0: Enable switching

1: G3 standard only

2 Not used Do not change this setting.

3 ECM frame size selection at Selects the ECM frame size for sending.
transmitting

0: 256byte, 1: 64byte

4 DIS detection times for echo Sets the number of times for DIS to detect echoes.
prevention

0: 1 time, 1: 2 times

5 CTC transmission selection When "0" is selected, the transmission condition is

decided by error frame numbers.
0: PPRx1
When "1" is selected, the transmission condition is
1: PPRx4
based on the ITU-T method.

6 Shift down setting at receiving Selects whether to shift down when negative codes
negative code are received.

0: OFF, 1: ON

7 Not used Do not change this setting.

IP Fax Switch 04 (SP No. 1-111-005)

No. Function Comments

0-3 TCF error threshold Sets the TCF error threshold level. [00 to 0f]

The default is "1111" (0fH).

4-7 Not used Do not change these settings.

IP Fax Switch 05 (SP No. 1-111-006)

No. Function Comments

0-3 Modem bit rate setting for transmission Sets the modem bit rate for transmission. The
(kbps) default is "0110" (14.4K bps).

SM 139 D3DX
Bit Switches – 6

Bit 3 Bit Bit 1 Bit kbps

2 0

0 0 0 1 2.4

0 0 1 1 4.8

0 0 1 1 7.2

0 1 0 0 9.6

0 1 0 1 12.0

0 1 1 0 14.4

4-5 Modem setting for transmission Sets the modem type for transmission.

Bit 5 Bit 4 Types The default is "00" (V29).

0 0 V29

0 1 V17

1 0 Not used

1 1 Not used

6-7 Not used Do not change these settings.

IP Fax Switch 06 (SP No. 1-111-007)

No. Function Comments

0-3 Modem bit rate setting for reception

Sets the modem bit rate for reception. The default is "0110" (14.4K bps).

4-7 Modem setting for reception

Sets the modem type for reception. The default is "0100" (V27ter, V29, V17).

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Types

0 0 0 1 V.27ter

0 0 1 0 V.27ter, V.29

0 0 1 1 V.27ter, V.29, V.33

0 1 0 0 V.27ter, V.29, V.17/V.33

Other settings - Not used

IP Fax Switch 07 (SP No. 1-111-008)

D3DX 140 SM
 Bit Switches – 6

No. Function Comments

FAX OPTION
TYPE M29
0 TSI information Adds or does not add TSI information to

(D3DX)
NSS(S).
0: Not added, 1: Added

1 DCN transmission setting at T1 timeout Transmits or does not transmit DCN at T1

timeout.
0: Not transmitted

1: Transmitted

2 Not used Do not change this setting.

3 Hang up setting at DIS reception Sets whether the machine disconnects after DIS
disabled reception.

0: No hang up

1: Hang up after transmitting DCN

4 Number of times for training Selects the number of times training is done at
the same bit rate.
0: 1 time, 1: 2 times

5 Space CSI transmission setting at no When "0" is selected, frame data is enabled.
CSI registration
When "1" is selected, the transmitted data is all
0: Not transmitted spaces.

1: Transmitted

6-7 Not used Do not change these settings.

IP Fax Switch 08 (SP No. 1-111-009)

No. Function Comments

0-1 T1 timer adjustment Adjusts the T1 timer.

Bit 1 Bit 0 The default is "00" (35 seconds).

0 0 35 s

0 1 40 s

1 0 50 s

1 1 60 s

2-3 T4 timer adjustment Adjust the T4 timer.

Bit 3 Bit 2 The default is "00" (3 seconds).

0 0 3s

SM 141 D3DX
Bit Switches – 6

0 1 3.5
s

1 0 4s

1 1 5s

4-5 T0 timer adjustment Adjusts the fail safe timer. This timer sets the interval between
"setup" data transmission and T.38 phase decision. If your
Bit 5 Bit 4
destination return is late on the network or G3 fax return is late,
0 0 75 s adjust the longer interval timer.
0 1 120 The default is "00" (75 seconds).
s

1 0 180
s

1 1 240
s

6-7 Not used Do not change these settings.

IP Fax Switch 09 (SP No. 1-111-010)

No. Function Comments

0 Network I/F setting for SIP Selects the connection type (IPV4 or IPV6) to connect to
connection the SIP server.

0: IPv4

1: IPv6.

1 Network I/F setting for Fax 0: The I/F setting for fax communication follows the
communication setting for SIP server connection.

0: Same setting as SIP server 1: The negotiation between the SIP server and the device
connection decides whether IPv4 or IPv6 is used for the I/F setting
for fax communication.
1: Automatic setting

2 Record-route setting 0: Disables the record-route function of the SIP server.

0: Disable 1: Enables the record-route function of the SIP server.

1: Enable

3-4 re-INVITE transmission delay This changes the interval for transmit re-INVITE after
timer setting receiving the ACK message transmitted by T.38 device.

D3DX 142 SM
 Bit Switches – 6

Bit 4 Bit 3

FAX OPTION
TYPE M29
0 0 No delay

(D3DX)
0 1 1 sec

1 0 2 sec

1 1 3 sec

5 SIP-IPFAX: Adding vender 0: Use this setting normally.

information selection
1: This setting is used only when a customer wants to
0: Declare connect the machine with SIP server + VOIP-GW
T38VendorInfo=RICOH provided by AVAYA Inc.

1: Not declare
T38VendorInfo=RICOH

6-7 Not used. Do not change these settings.

IP Fax Switch 0A - Not used (do not change the settings)

IP Fax Switch 0B - Not used (do not change the settings)

IP Fax Switch 0C - Not used (do not change the settings)

IP Fax Switch 0D - Not used (do not change the settings)

IP Fax Switch 0E (SP No. 1-111-013)

No. Function Comments

0-1 SIP: IP-FAX port mode Switch the port mode for IP-FAX (T38 transport: UDP) at SIP
(UDP) call control.

00: 3 port mode

01: 2 port mode

10: 1 port mode

2-3 SIP: IP-FAX port mode Switch the port mode for IP-FAX (T38 transport: TCP) at SIP
(TCP) call control.

00: 3 port mode

01: 2 port mode

10: 1 port mode

4-7 Not used. Do not change these settings.

SM 143 D3DX
NCU Parameters

4.9 NCU PARAMETERS

4.9.1 NCU PARAMETERS

The following tables give the RAM addresses and the parameter calculation units that the
machine uses for ringing signal detection and automatic dialing. The factory settings for each
country are also given. Most of these must be changed by RAM read/write (SP2-102), but some
can be changed using NCU Parameter programming (SP2-103, 104 and 105); if SP2-103, 104
and 105 can be used, this will be indicated in the Remarks column. The RAM is programmed in
hex code unless (BCD) is included in the Unit column.

• The following addresses describe settings for the standard NCU.

• Change the fourth digit from "5" to "6" (e.g. 680500 to 680600) for the settings for the first
optional G3 interface unit and from "5" to "7" (e.g. 680700) for the settings for the second
optional G3 interface unit.
Address Function
680500 Country/Area code for NCU parameters

Use the Hex value to program the country/area code directly into this address, or use
the decimal value to program it using SP2-103-001

Country Decimal Hex Country Decimal Hex

/Area /Area

France 00 00 Asia 18 12

Germany 01 01 Japan 19 13

UK 02 02 Hong Kong 20 14

Italy 03 03 South Africa 21 15

Austria 04 04 Australia 22 16

Belgium 05 05 New Zealand 26 17

Denmark 06 06 Singapore 24 18

Finland 07 07 Malaysia 25 19

Ireland 08 08 China 26 1A

Norway 09 09 Taiwan 27 1B

Sweden 10 0A Korea 28 1C

D3DX 144 SM
 NCU Parameters

Address Function

FAX OPTION
Switzerland 11 0B Brazil 29 1D

TYPE M29
(D3DX)
Portugal 12 0C Turkey 32 20

Holland 13 0D Greece 33 21

Spain 14 0E Hungary 34 22

Israel 15 0F Czech 35 23

USA 17 11 Poland 36 24

Address Function Unit Remarks

680501 Line current detection time 20 ms Line current detection is disabled.

680502 Line current wait time Line current is not detected if

680501 contains FF.
680503 Line current drop detect time

680504 PSTN dial tone frequency upper Hz (BCD) If both addresses contain FF (H),
limit (high byte) tone detection is disabled.

680505 PSTN dial tone frequency upper

limit (low byte)

680506 PSTN dial tone frequency lower Hz (BCD) If both addresses contain FF (H),
limit (high byte) tone detection is disabled.

680507 PSTN dial tone frequency lower

limit (low byte)

680508 PSTN dial tone detection time 20 ms If 680508 contains FF (H), the
machine pauses for the pause time
680509 PSTN dial tone reset time
(address 68050D / 68050E).
(LOW)
Italy: See Note 2.
68050A PSTN dial tone reset time
(HIGH)

68050B PSTN dial tone continuous tone

time

68050C PSTN dial tone permissible drop

time

68050D PSTN wait interval (LOW) -

68050E PSTN wait interval (HIGH)

68050F PSTN ring-back tone detection 20 ms Detection is disabled if this contains

SM 145 D3DX
NCU Parameters

Address Function Unit Remarks

time FF.

680510 PSTN ring-back tone off 20 ms -

detection time

680511 PSTN detection time for silent 20 ms -

period after ring-back tone
detected (LOW)

680512 PSTN detection time for silent 20 ms -

period after ring-back tone
detected (HIGH)

680513 PSTN busy tone frequency Hz (BCD) If both addresses contain FF (H),
upper limit (high byte) tone detection is disabled.

680514 PSTN busy tone frequency

upper limit (low byte)

680515 PSTN busy tone frequency Hz (BCD) If both addresses contain FF (H),
lower limit (high byte) tone detection is disabled.

680516 PSTN busy tone frequency

lower limit (low byte)

680517 PABX dial tone frequency upper Hz (BCD) If both addresses contain FF (H),
limit (high byte) tone detection is disabled.

680518 PABX dial tone frequency upper

limit (low byte)

680519 PABX dial tone frequency lower Hz (BCD) If both addresses contain FF (H),
limit (high byte) tone detection is disabled.

68051A PABX dial tone frequency lower

limit (low byte)

68051B PABX dial tone detection time 20 ms If 68051B contains FF, the machine
pauses for the pause time (680520 /
68051C PABX dial tone reset time
680521).
(LOW)

68051D PABX dial tone reset time

(HIGH)

68051E PABX dial tone continuous tone

time

D3DX 146 SM
 NCU Parameters

Address Function Unit Remarks

FAX OPTION
68051F PABX dial tone permissible drop

TYPE M29
(D3DX)
time

680520 PABX wait interval (LOW) -

680521 PABX wait interval (HIGH)

680522 PABX ringback tone detection 20 ms If both addresses contain FF (H),

time tone detection is disabled.

680523 PABX ringback tone off 20 ms

detection time

680524 PABX detection time for silent 20 ms If both addresses contain FF (H),
period after ringback tone tone detection is disabled.
detected (LOW)

680525 PABX detection time for silent 20 ms

period after ringback tone
detected (HIGH)

680526 PABX busy tone frequency Hz (BCD) If both addresses contain FF (H),
upper limit (high byte) tone detection is disabled.

680527 PABX busy tone frequency

upper limit (low byte)

680528 PABX busy tone frequency Hz (BCD) If both addresses contain FF (H),
lower limit (high byte) tone detection is disabled.

680529 PABX busy tone frequency

lower limit (low byte)

68052A Busy tone ON time: range 1 20 ms -

68052B Busy tone OFF time: range 1

68052C Busy tone ON time: range 2

68052D Busy tone OFF time: range 2

68052E Busy tone ON time: range 3

68052F Busy tone OFF time: range 3 20 ms

680530 Busy tone ON time: range 4

680531 Busy tone OFF time: range 4

680532 Busy tone continuous tone

SM 147 D3DX
NCU Parameters

Address Function Unit Remarks

detection time

680533 Busy tone signal state time tolerance for all ranges, and number of cycles required
for detection (a setting of 4 cycles means that ON-OFF-ON or OFF-ON-OFF must be
detected twice).

Tolerance (±)

Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = 75% Bits 2 and 3 must always be kept at 0.

Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = 50% Bits 2 and 3 must always be kept at 0.

Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = 25%

Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = 12.5%

Bits 7, 6, 5, 4 - number of cycles required for cadence detection

680534 International dial tone frequency Hz (BCD) If both addresses contain FF (H),
upper limit (high byte) tone detection is disabled.

680535 International dial tone frequency

upper limit (low byte)

680536 International dial tone frequency Hz (BCD) If both addresses contain FF (H),
lower limit (high byte) tone detection is disabled.

680537 International dial tone frequency

lower limit (low byte)

680538 International dial tone detection 20 ms If 680538 contains FF, the machine
time pauses for the pause time (68053D /
68053E).
680539 International dial tone reset time
(LOW) Belgium: See Note 2.

68053A International dial tone reset time

(HIGH)

68053B International dial tone

continuous tone time

68053C International dial tone

permissible drop time

68053D International dial wait interval -

(LOW)

68053E International dial wait interval

(HIGH)

D3DX 148 SM
 NCU Parameters

Address Function Unit Remarks

FAX OPTION
68053F Country dial tone upper Hz (BCD) If both addresses contain FF (H),

TYPE M29
(D3DX)
frequency limit (HIGH) tone detection is disabled.

680540 Country dial tone upper

frequency limit (LOW)

680541 Country dial tone lower If both addresses contain FF (H),

frequency limit (HIGH) tone detection is disabled.

680542 Country dial tone lower

frequency limit (LOW)

680543 Country dial tone detection time 20 ms If 680543 contains FF, the machine
pauses for the pause time (680548 /
680544 Country dial tone reset time
680549).
(LOW)

680545 Country dial tone reset time

(HIGH)

680546 Country dial tone continuous - -

tone time

680547 Country dial tone permissible 20 ms -

drop time

680548 Country dial wait interval (LOW)

680549 Country dial wait interval (HIGH)

68054A Time between opening or 1 ms See Notes 3, 6 and 8. SP2-103-012

closing the DO relay and (parameter 11).
opening the OHDI relay

68054B Break time for pulse dialing 1 ms See Note 3.

SP2-103-013 (parameter 12).

68054C Make time for pulse dialing 1 ms See Note 3.

SP2-103-014 (parameter 13).

68054D Time between final OHDI relay 1 ms See Notes 3, 6 and 8.

closure and DO relay opening or
SP2-103-015 (parameter 14).
closing
This parameter is only valid in
Europe.

68054E Minimum pause between dialed 20 ms See Note 3 and 8. SP2-103-016

SM 149 D3DX
NCU Parameters

Address Function Unit Remarks

digits (pulse dial mode) (parameter 15).

68054F Time waited when a pause is SP2-103-017 (parameter 16). See

entered at the operation panel Note 3.

680550 DTMF tone on time 1 ms SP2-103-018 (parameter 17).

680551 DTMF tone off time SP2-103-019 (parameter 18).

680552 Tone attenuation level of DTMF -N x 0.5 SP2-103-020 (parameter 19).

signals while dialing –3.5 dBm
See Note 5.

680553 Tone attenuation value -dBm x SP2-103-021 (parameter 20).

difference between high 0.5
The setting must be less than
frequency tone and low
–5dBm, and should not exceed the
frequency tone in DTMF signals
setting at 680552h above.

See Note 5.

680554 PSTN: DTMF tone attenuation -N x 0.5 SP2-103-022 (parameter 21). See
level after dialing –3.5 dBm Note 5.

680555 ISDN: DTMF tone attenuation -dBm x See Note 5

level after dialing 0.5

680556 Not used - Do not change the settings.

680557 Time between 68054Dh (NCU 1 ms This parameter takes effect when
parameter 14) and 68054Eh the country code is set to France.
(NCU parameter 15)

680558 Not used - Do not change the setting.

680559 Grounding time (ground start 20 ms The Gs relay is closed for this
mode) interval.

68055A Break time (flash start mode) 1 ms The OHDI relay is open for this
interval.

68055B International dial access code BCD For a code of 100:

(High)
68055B - F1
68055C International dial access code
68055C - 00
(Low)

68055D PSTN access pause time 20 ms This time is waited for each pause
input after the PSTN access code. If
this address contains FF [H], the

D3DX 150 SM
 NCU Parameters

Address Function Unit Remarks

FAX OPTION
pause time stored in address

TYPE M29
(D3DX)
68054F is used.

Do not set a number more than 7 in

the UK.

68055E Progress tone detection level, and Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 0, Bit 5: 0 = -25.0 dBm
cadence detection enable flags
Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 0, Bit 5: 1 = -35.0 dBm

Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 1, Bit 5: 0 = -30.0 dBm

Bit 7: 1, Bit 6: 0, Bit 5: 0 = -40.0 dBm

Bit 7: 1, Bit 6: 1, Bit 5: 0 = -49.0 dBm

Bits 2, 0 - See Note 2.

68055F Not used - Do not change the settings.

To

680564

680565 Long distance call prefix (HIGH) BCD For a code of 0:

680566 Long distance call prefix (LOW) BCD 680565 – FF

680566 - FF

680567 Not used - Do not change the settings.

to

680571

680572 Acceptable ringing signal 1000/ N SP2-103-003 (parameter 02).

frequency: range 1, upper limit (Hz).

680573 Acceptable ringing signal SP2-103-004 (parameter 03).

frequency: range 1, lower limit

680574 Acceptable ringing signal SP2-103-005 (parameter 04).

frequency: range 2, upper limit

680575 Acceptable ringing signal SP2-103-006 (parameter 05).

frequency: range 2, lower limit

680576 Number of rings until a call is 1 SP2-103-007 (parameter 06).

detected
The setting must not be zero.

680577 Minimum required length of the 20 ms See Note 4.

SM 151 D3DX
NCU Parameters

Address Function Unit Remarks

first ring SP2-103-008 (parameter 07).

680578 Minimum required length of the 20 ms SP2-103-009 (parameter 08).

second and subsequent rings

680579 Ringing signal detection reset 20 ms SP2-103-010 (parameter 09).

time (LOW)

68057A Ringing signal detection reset SP2-103-011 (parameter 10).

time (HIGH)

68057B Not used - Do not change the settings.

to

680580

680581 Interval between dialing the last 20 ms Factory setting: 500 ms

digit and switching the Oh relay
over to the external telephone
when dialing from the operation
panel in handset mode.

680582 Bits 0 and 1 - Handset off-hook detection time -

Bit 1:0, Bit 0: 0 = 200 ms

Bit 1:0, Bit 0: 1 = 800 ms

Other Not used

Bits 2 and 3 - Handset on-hook detection time

Bit 3: 0, Bit 2: 0 = 200 ms

Bit 3: 0, Bit 2: 1 = 800 ms

Other Not used

Bits 4 to 7 - Not used

680583 Not used - Do not change the settings.

To

6805A0

6805A1 Acceptable CED detection BCD (Hz) If both addresses contain FF (H),
frequency upper limit (high byte) tone detection is disabled.

6805A2 Acceptable CED detection

frequency upper limit (low byte)

D3DX 152 SM
 NCU Parameters

Address Function Unit Remarks

FAX OPTION
6805A3 Acceptable CED detection BCD (Hz) If both addresses contain FF (H),

TYPE M29
(D3DX)
frequency lower limit (high byte) tone detection is disabled.

6805A4 Acceptable CED detection

frequency lower limit (low byte)

6805A5 CED detection time 20 ms ± Factory setting: 200 ms

20 ms

6805A6 Acceptable CNG detection BCD (Hz) If both addresses contain FF (H),
frequency upper limit (high byte) tone detection is disabled.

6805A7 Acceptable CNG detection

frequency upper limit (low byte)

6805A8 Acceptable CNG detection BCD (Hz) If both addresses contain FF (H),
frequency lower limit (high byte) tone detection is disabled.

6805A9 Acceptable CNG detection

frequency lower limit (low byte)

6805AA Not used - Do not change the setting.

6805AB CNG on time 20 ms Factory setting: 500 ms

6805AC CNG off time 20 ms Factory setting: 3000 ms

6805AD Number of CNG cycles required - The data is coded in the same way
for detection as address 680533.

6805AE Not used - Do not change the settings.

6805AF Acceptable AI short protocol Hz (BCD) If both addresses contain FF (H),

tone (800Hz) detection tone detection is disabled.
frequency upper limit (high byte)

6805B0 Acceptable AI short protocol

tone (800Hz) detection
frequency upper limit (low byte)

6805B1 Acceptable AI short protocol Hz(BCD) If both addresses contain FF (H),

tone (800Hz) detection tone detection is disabled.
frequency lower limit (high byte)

6805B2 Acceptable AI short protocol

tone (800Hz) detection
frequency lower limit (low byte)

SM 153 D3DX
NCU Parameters

Address Function Unit Remarks

6805B3 Detection time for 800 Hz AI 20 ms Factory setting: 360 ms
short protocol tone

6805B4 PSTN: TX level from the modem -N – 3 SP2-103-002 (parameter 01).

dBm

6805B5 PSTN: 1100 Hz tone - N 6805B4 - 0.5N 6805B5 –3.5 (dB)

transmission level
See Note 7.

6805B6 PSTN: 2100 Hz tone - N6805B4 - 0.5N 6805B6 –3 (dB)

transmission level
See Note 7.

6805B7 PABX: TX level from the modem - dBm

6805B8 PABX: 1100 Hz tone - N 6805B7 - 0.5N 6805B8 (dB)

transmission level

6805B9 PABX: 2100 Hz tone - N 6805B7 - 0.5N 6805B9 (dB)

transmission level

6805BD Modem turn-on level (incoming -37-0.5N

signal detection level) (dBm)

6805BE to Not used - Do not change the settings.

6805C6

6805C7 Bits 0 to 3 – Not used

Bit 4 = V.34 protocol dump 0: Simple, 1: Detailed (default)

Bits 5 to 7 – Not used.

6805C8 to Not used - Do not change the settings.

6805D9

6805DA T.30 T1 timer 1s

6805E0 Maximum wait time for post 0: 12 s 1: Maximum wait time for post
bit 3 message message (EOP/EOM/MPS) can be
1: 30 s
changed to 30 s.

Change this bit to “1” if

communication errors occur
frequently during V.17 reception.

6805E3 Bits 0 and 1 – DCV (TIP/RING) Voltage

Bit 1:0, Bit 0: 0 = 3.1 V

D3DX 154 SM
 NCU Parameters

Address Function Unit Remarks

FAX OPTION
Bit 1:0, Bit 0: 1 = 3.2 V

TYPE M29
(D3DX)
Bit 1:1, Bit 0: 0 = 3.35 V

Bit 1:1, Bit 0: 1 = 3.5 V

Bits 2 and 3 – MINI (minimum loop electric current)

Bit 2:0, Bit 3: 0 = 10 mA

Bit 2:0, Bit 2: 1 = 12 mA

Bit 2:1, Bit 3: 0 = 14 mA

Bit 2:1, Bit 3: 1 = 16 mA

Bits 6 and 7 – ACIM (AC impedance)

Bit 7:0, Bit 6: 0 Bit 5:0, Bit 4: 0= 600

Bit 7:0, Bit 6: 0 Bit 5:1, Bit 4: 0= TBR21

6805E4 Bit 0 – OHS (on hook speed)

0: OHS=0

1: OHS=1

Bit 1 – SQ (spark quench)

0: SQ=00

1: SQ=11

Bit 2 – RZ (call signal Impedance)

0: RZ=0 (high)

1: RZ=1 (low)

Bit 3 – RT (call signal detection level)

0: RT=0 (low)

1: RT=1 (high)

Bit 4 – ILIM (DC limitation)

0: ILIM=0 (CTR 21)

1: ILIM=1 (other than CTR 21)

Bit 5 –FILTER

0: FILTER=0 (around 5Hz)

1: FILTER=1 (around 200Hz)

SM 155 D3DX
NCU Parameters

Address Function Unit Remarks

Bits 6 to 7 – Calibration in off hook state

Bit 6:0, Bit 7: 0 = off hook to ACAL:128 ms, off hook to MCAL: 1000 ms

Bit 6:1, Bit 7: 0 = off hook to ACAL:128 ms, off hook to MCAL: 500 ms

Bit 6:0, Bit 7: 1 = off hook to ACAL:128 ms (no MCAL)

Bit 6:1, Bit 7: 1 = off hook to ACAL:8 ms (no MCAL)

6805E5 Bits 0 to 6 – Not used

Bits 7 – Energy saving for DSP, COMBLK, SiDAA

0: Does not save energy

1: Saves energy

NOTES

5. If a setting is not required, store FF in the address.

6. Italy and Belgium only
RAM address 68055E: the lower four bits have the following meaning.

Bit 2 - 1: International dial tone cadence detection enabled (Belgium)

Bit 1 - Not used

Bit 0 - 1: PSTN dial tone cadence detection enabled (Italy)

If bit 0 or bit 2 is set to 1, the functions of the following RAM addresses are changed.

680508 (if bit 0 = 1) or 680538 (if bit 2 = 1): tolerance for on or off state duration (%), and
number of cycles required for detection, coded as in address 680533.

68050B (if bit 0 = 1) or 68053B (if bit 2 = 1): on time, hex code (unit = 20 ms)

68050C (if bit 0 = 1) or 68053C (if bit 2 = 1): off time, hex code (unit = 20 ms)

7. Pulse dial parameters (addresses 68054A to 68054F) are the values for 10 pps. If 20 pps is
used, the machine automatically compensates.
8. The first ring may not be detected until 1 to 2.5 wavelengths after the time specified by this
parameter.
9. The calculated level must be between 0 and 10.
The attenuation levels calculated from RAM data are:

High frequency tone:

• – 0.5 x N680552/680554–3.5 dBm

• – 0.5 x N680555 dBm
Low frequency tone:

D3DX 156 SM
 NCU Parameters

• – 0.5 x (N680552/680554 + N680553) –3.5 dBm

– 0.5 x (N680555 + N680553) dBm

FAX OPTION
•

TYPE M29
(D3DX)
• N680552, for example, means the value stored in address 680552(H)
10. 68054A: Europe - Between Ds opening and Di opening, France - Between Ds closing and Di
opening
68054D: Europe - Between Ds closing and Di closing, France - Between Ds opening and Di
closing

11. Tone signals which frequency is lower than 1500Hz (e.g., 800Hz tone for AI short protocol)
refer to the setting at 6805B5h. Tones which frequency is higher than 1500Hz refer to the
setting at 6805B6h.
12. 68054A, 68054D, 68054E: The actual inter-digit pause (pulse dial mode) is the sum of the
period specified by the RAM addresses 68054A, 68054D, and 68054E.

SM 157 D3DX
Dedicated Transmission Parameters

4.10 DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS

There are two sets of transmission parameters: Fax and E-mail

Each Quick Dial Key and Speed Dial Code has eight bytes of programmable parameters allocated
to it. If transmissions to a particular machine often experience problems, store that terminal’s fax
number as a Quick Dial or Speed Dial, and adjust the parameters allocated to that number.

The programming procedure will be explained first. Then, the eight bytes will be described.

4.10.1 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE

13. Set the bit 0 of System Bit Switch 00 to 1.
14. Enter Address Book Management mode ([User Tools]> System Settings> Key Operator>
Address Book Management).
15. Select the address book that you want to program.
16. For the fax parameter, select "Fax Dest.", for the E-mail parameter, select "E-mail", then
press "Start". Make sure that the LED of the Start button lights green.
17. The settings for the switch 00 are now displayed. Press the bit number that you wish to
change.
18. To scroll through the parameter switches, either:
19. Select the next switch: press "Next" or Select the previous switch: "Prev." until the correct
switch is displayed. Then go back to step 6.
20. After the setting is changed, press "OK".
21. After finishing, reset bit 0 of System Bit Switch 00 to 0.

4.10.2 PARAMETERS

Fax Parameters
The initial settings of the following fax parameters are all FF (H) - all the parameters are disabled.

Switch 00

FUNCTION AND COMMENTS

ITU-T T1 time (for PSTN G3 mode)

If the connection time to a particular terminal is longer than the NCU parameter setting, adjust this
byte. The T1 time is the value stored in this byte (in hex code), multiplied by 1 second.

Range:

0 to 120 s (00h to 78h)

FFh - The local NCU parameter factory setting is used.

D3DX 158 SM
 Dedicated Transmission Parameters

Do not program a value between 79h and FEh.

FAX OPTION
TYPE M29
(D3DX)
Switch 01

No FUNCTION COMMENTS

0-4 TX level If communication with a particular remote

terminal often contains errors, the signal level
Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0
may be inappropriate. Adjust the TX level for
0 0 0 0 0 0 communications with that terminal until the
0 0 0 0 1 –1 results are better.

0 0 0 1 0 –2 If the setting is "Disabled", the NCU parameter 01

setting is used.
0 0 0 1 1 –3

0 0 1 0 0 –4
• Do not use settings other than listed on
the left.
0 1 1 1 1 –15

1 1 1 1 1 Disabled

5-7 Cable equalizer Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at

higher frequencies because of the length of wire
Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 0, Bit 5: 0 = None
between the modem and the telephone exchange
Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 0, Bit 5: 1 = Low
when calling the number stored in this
Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 1, Bit 5: 0 = Medium Quick/Speed Dial.

Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 1, Bit 5: 1 = High Also, try using the cable equalizer if one or more
of the following symptoms occurs.
Bit 7: 1, Bit 6: 1, Bit 5: 1 = Disabled
Communication error with error codes such as
0-20, 0-23, etc.

Modem rate fallback occurs frequently.

• Do not use settings other than listed on

the left.
If the setting is "Disabled", the bit switch setting is
used.

Switch 02

No FUNCTION COMMENTS

SM 159 D3DX
Dedicated Transmission Parameters

0-3 Initial TX modem rate If training with a particular remote terminal always takes
too long, the initial modem rate may be too high.
Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 bps
Reduce the initial TX modem rate using these bits.
0 0 0 0 Not
For the settings 14.4 or kbps slower, Switch 04 bit 4
used
must be changed to 0.
0 0 0 1 2400

0 0 1 0 4800
• Do not use settings other than listed on the
0 0 1 1 7200 left. If the setting is "Disabled", the bit switch
0 1 0 0 9600 setting is used.

0 1 0 1 12000

0 1 1 0 14400

0 1 1 1 16800

1 0 0 0 19200

1 0 0 1 21600

1 0 1 0 24000

1 0 1 1 26400

1 1 0 0 28800

1 1 0 1 31200

1 1 1 0 33600

1 1 1 1 Disabled

Other settings: Not used

4-7 Not used Do not change the settings.

Switch 03

No FUNCTION COMMENTS

0-1 Inch-mm conversion If "inch only" is selected on the machine uses inch-based
before TX resolutions for scanning, the printed copy may be slightly distorted
at the other end if that machine uses mm-based resolutions.
Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0
If the setting is "Inch-mm conversion available ", Inch-mm
= Inch-mm conversion
conversion become effective to the special senders.
available
If the setting is "Disabled", the bit switch setting is used.
Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 1 = Inch

D3DX 160 SM
 Dedicated Transmission Parameters

only

FAX OPTION
Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 0 = Not

TYPE M29
(D3DX)
used

Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 1 =
Disabled

2-3 DIS/NSF detection (0, 1): Use this setting if echoes on the line are interfering with the
method set-up protocol at the start of transmission. The machine will then
wait for the second DIS or NSF before sending DCS or NSS.
Bit 3: 0, Bit 2: 0
If the setting is "Disabled", the bit switch setting is used.
= First DIS or NSF

Bit 3: 0, Bit 2: 1

= Second DIS or NSF

Bit 3: 1, Bit 2: 0 = Not

used

Bit 3: 1, Bit 2: 1 =
Disabled

4 V.8 protocol If transmissions to a specific destination always end at a lower

modem rate (14,400 bps or lower), disable V.8 protocol so as not to
0: Off
use V.34 protocol.
1: Disabled
0: V.34 communication will not be possible.

If the setting is "Disabled", the bit switch setting is used.

5 Compression modes This bit determines the capabilities that are informed to the other
available in transmit terminal during transmission.
mode
If the setting is "Disabled", the bit switch setting is used.
0: MH only

1: Disabled

6-7 ECM during For example, if ECM is switched on but is not wanted when
transmission sending to a particular terminal, use the (0, 0) setting.

Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 0 = Off

Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 1 = On • V.8/V.34 protocol and JBIG compression are automatically

disabled if ECM is disabled.
Bit 7: 1, Bit 6: 0 = Not
• If the setting is "Disabled", the bit switch setting is used.
used

Bit 7: 1, Bit 6: 1 =

SM 161 D3DX
Dedicated Transmission Parameters

Disabled

Switch 04 - Not used (do not change the settings)

Switch 05 - Not used (do not change the settings)

Switch 06 - Not used (do not change the settings)

Switch 07 - Not used (do not change the settings)

Switch 08 - Not used (do not change the settings)

Switch 09 - Not used (do not change the settings)

E-mail Parameters
The initial settings of the following e-mail parameters are all "0" (all parameters disabled).

Switch 00

No FUNCTION COMMENTS

0 MH Compression mode for e-mail Switches MH compression on and off for files
attachments attached to e-mails for sending.

0: Off

1: On

1 MR Compression mode for e-mail Switches MR compression on and off for files
attachments attached to e-mails for sending.

0: Off

1: On

2 MMR Compression mode for e-mail Switches MMR compression on and off for files
attachments attached to e-mails for sending.

0: Off

1: On

3-6 Not used Do not change these settings.

7 Designates the bits to reference for The "0" selection (default) references the settings for
compression method of e-mail Bits 00, 01, 02 above. The "1" selection ignores the
attachments selections of Bits 00, 01, 02.

0: Registered (Bit 0 to 6)

1: No registration.

D3DX 162 SM
 Dedicated Transmission Parameters

FAX OPTION
Switch 01

TYPE M29
(D3DX)
No FUNCTION COMMENTS

0 Original width of e-mail Sets the original width of the e-mail attachment as A4.
attachment: A4

0: Off

1: On

1 Original width of e-mail Sets the original width of the e-mail attachment as B4.
attachment: B4

0: Off

1: On

2 Original width of e-mail Sets the original width of the e-mail attachment as A3.
attachment: A3

0: Off

1: On

3-6 Not used Do not change these settings.

7 Designates the bits to reference The "0" selection (default) references the settings for
for original size of e-mail Bits 00, 01, 02 above. The "1" selection ignores the
attachments selections of Bits 00, 01, 02.

0: Registered (Bit 0 to 6)

1: No registration.

Switch 02

No FUNCTION COMMENTS

0 Line resolution of e-mail Sets the line resolution of the e-mail attachment as 200
attachment: 200 x 100 x100.

0: Off

1: On

1 Line resolution of e-mail Sets the line resolution of the e-mail attachment as 200 x
attachment: 200 x 200 200.

0: Off

SM 163 D3DX
Dedicated Transmission Parameters

1: On

2 Line resolution of e-mail Sets the line resolution of the e-mail attachment as 200 x
attachment: 200 x 400 400.

0: Off

1: On

3 Not used Do not change these settings.

4 Line resolution of e-mail Sets the line resolution of the e-mail attachment as 400 x
attachment: 400 x 400 400.

0: Off

1: On

5-6 Not used Do not change these settings.

7 Designates the bits to reference The "0" selection (default) references the settings for Bits
for original size of e-mail 00, 01, 02, 04 above. The "1" selection ignores the
attachments selections of Bits 00, 01, 02, 04.

0: Registered (Bit 0 to 6)

1: No registration.

Switch 03 - Not used (do not change the settings)

Switch 04

No FUNCTION COMMENTS

0 Full mode address If the other ends have the addresses, which have the full mode
selection function flag ("0"), this machine determines them as full mode
standard machines.
0: Full mode
address • This machine attaches the "demand of reception confirmation" to
a message when transmitting.
1: No full mode
• This machine updates the reception capability to the address
(simple mode)
book when receiving.
1-7 Not used Do not change these settings.

Switch 05

No FUNCTION COMMENTS

D3DX 164 SM
 Dedicated Transmission Parameters

0 Directr transmission selection to Allows or does not allow the direct transmission to

FAX OPTION
SMTP server SMTP server.

TYPE M29
(D3DX)
0: ON

1: OFF

1-7 Not used Do not change these settings.

Switch 06 - Not used (do not change the settings)

Switch 07 - Not used (do not change the settings)

Switch 08 - Not used (do not change the settings)

Switch 09 - Not used (do not change the settings)

SM 165 D3DX
Service RAM Addresses

4.11 SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES

4.11.1 SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES

• Do not change the settings that are marked as “Not used” or “Read only.”
680001 to 680004(H) - ROM version (Read only)

680001(H) - Revision number (BCD)

680002(H) - Year (BCD)

680003(H) - Month (BCD)

680004(H) - Day (BCD)

680006 to 680015(H) - Machine’s serial number (16 digits - ASCII)

680016(H) - Language code

0: Japanese, 1: UK English, 2: US English, 3: French, 4: German, 5: Spanish, 6: Italian, 7: Dutch,

8: Swedish, 9: Norwegian, 10: Danish, 11: Finnish, 12: Czech, 13: Hungarian, 14: Polish, 15:
Portuguese, 16: Russian, 17: Traditional Chinese, 18: Simplified Chinese, 19: Korean

680018(H) - Total program checksum (low)

680019(H) - Total program checksum (high)

680020 to 68003F(H) - System bit switches

680050 to 68005F(H) - Printer bit switches

680060 to 68007F(H) - Communication bit switches

680080 to 68008F(H) - G3 bit switches

680090 to 68009F(H) - G3-2 bit switches: Not used

6800A0 to 6800AF(H) - G3-3 bit switches: Not used

6800D0(H) - User parameter switch 00 (SWUER_00): Not used

6800D1(H) - User parameter switch 01 (SWUSR_01): Not used

6800D2(H) - User parameter switch 02 (SWUSR_02)

Bit 0: Forwarding mark printing on forwarded messages 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled

Bit 1: Center mark printing on received copies

(This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.)

0: Disabled, 1: Enabled

D3DX 166 SM
 Service RAM Addresses

Bit 2: Reception time printing

FAX OPTION
(This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.)

TYPE M29
(D3DX)
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled

Bit 3: TSI print on received messages 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled

Bit 4: Checkered mark printing

(This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.)

0: Disabled, 1: Enabled

Bit 5: Not used

Bit 6: Not used

Bit 7: Not used

6800D3(H) - User parameter switch 03 (SWUSR_03: Automatic report printout)

Bit 0: Transmission result report (memory transmissions) 0: Off, 1: On

Bit 1: Not used

Bit 2: Memory storage report 0: Off, 1: On

Bit 3: Polling reserve report (polling reception) 0: Off, 1: On

Bit 4: Polling result report (polling reception) 0: Off, 1: On

Bit 5: Transmission result report (immediate transmissions) 0: Off, 1: On

Bit 6: Not used

Bit 7: Journal 0: Off, 1: On

6800D4(H) - User parameter switch 04 (SWUSR_04: Automatic report printout)

Bit 0: Not used

Bit 1: Automatic communication failure report and transfer result report output 0: Off, 1: On

Bits 2 to 3: Not used

Bit 4: Indicates the parties 0: Not indicated, 1: Indicated

Bit 5: Include sender’s name on reports 0: Off, 1: On

Bit 6: Not used

Bit 7: Inclusion of a sample image on reports 0: Off, 1: On

6800D5(H) - User parameter switch 05 (SWUSR_05)

Bit 0: Substitute reception when the base copier is in an SC condition

0: Enabled, 1: Disabled

SM 167 D3DX
Service RAM Addresses

Bits 1 and 2: Condition for substitute RX when the machine cannot print messages (Paper end,
toner end, jam, and during night mode)

Bit 2: 0, Bit 1: 0 = The machine receives all the fax messages.

Bit 2: 0, Bit 1: 1 = The machine receives the fax messages with RTI or CSI.

Bit 2: 1, Bit 1: 0 = The machine receives the fax messages with the same ID code.

Bit 2: 1, Bit 1: 1 = The machine does not receive anything.

Bit 3: Not used

Bit 4: Not used

Bit 5: Just size printing 0: Off, 1: On

Bit 6: Not used

Bit 7: Add paper display when a cassette is empty 0: Off, 1: On

6800D6(H) - User parameter switch 06 (SWUSR_06)

Bit 0:

Bit 1: V8 protocol (G3-1: Super G3) 0: Off, 1: On

Bit 2: V8 protocol (G3-2: Super G3) 0: Off, 1: On

Bit 3: V8 protocol (G3-3: Super G3) 0: Off, 1: On

6800D7(H) - User parameter switch 07 (SWUSR_07)

Bit 0 Ringing 0: Off, 1: On

Bit1: Automatic answering message 0: Off, 1: On

Bit 2: Parallel memory transmission 0: Off, 1: On

Bits 3 and 4: Not used

Bit 5: Remote control 0: Off, 1: On

Bits 6 and 7: Not used

6800D8(H) - User parameter switch 08 (SWUSR_08)

Bits 0 and 1: Not used.

Bit 2: Authorized reception

0: Only faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are specified for this feature are accepted.

1: Only faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are not specified for this feature are accepted.

Bits 3 to 7: Not used.

6800D9(H) - User parameter switch 09 (SWUSR_09): Not used

D3DX 168 SM
 Service RAM Addresses

6800DA(H) - User parameter switch 10 (SWUSR_0A)

FAX OPTION
Bits 0 to 2: Not used

TYPE M29
(D3DX)
Bit 3: Page reduction 0: Off, 1: On

Bits 4 and 5: Not used

Bit 6: Use both e-mail notification and printed reports to confirm the transmission results 0: Off, 1:
On

Bit 7: Not used

6800DB(H) - User parameter switch 11 (SWUSR_0B)

Bits 0 and 1: Not used

Bit 2: White original detection 0: Off, 1: On (alarm and alert message on the LCD)

Bit 3: Receive rejection for 1300 Hz transmission 0: Off (receive), 1: On (not receive)

Bit 5: Not used

Bit 6: Printout of messages received while acting as a forwarding station 0: Off, 1: On

Bit 7: Not used

6800DC(H) - User parameter switch 12 (SWUSR_0C): Not used

6800DD(H) - User parameter switch 13 (SWUSR_0D): Not used

6800DE(H) - User parameter switch 14 (SWUSR_0E)

Bit 0: Message printout while the machine is in Night Printing mode 0: On, 1: Off

Bit 1: Maximum document length detection 0: Double letter, 1: Longer than double-letter (well log)
– up to 1,200 mm

Bit 2: Not used

Bit 3: Fax mode settings, such as resolution, before a mode key (Copy/Fax/Printer/Scanner) is
pressed 0: Not cleared, 1: Cleared

Bits 4 to 6: Not used

Bit 7: Not used

6800DF(H) - User parameter switch 15 (SWUSR_0F)

(This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.)

Bits 0, 1 and 2: Cassette for fax printout

Bit 2: 0, Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 1 = 1st paper feed station

Bit 2: 0, Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 0 = 2nd paper feed station

SM 169 D3DX
Service RAM Addresses

Bit 2: 0, Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 1 = 3rd paper feed station

Bit 2: 1, Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = 4th paper feed station

Bit 2: 1, Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 1 = LCT

Other settings Not used

Bits 3 and 4: Not used

Bit 5: Using the cassette specified by bits 0, 1 and 2 above only 0: On, 1: Off

Bits 6 and 7: Not used

6800E0(H) – User parameter switch 16 (SWUSR_10)

(This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.)

Bits 0 and 1: Not used

Bit 2: Paper size selection priority for an A4 size fax message when A4/LT size paper is not
available. 0: A3 has priority, 1: B4 has priority

Bits 3 to 7: Not used

6800E1(H) – User parameter switch 17 (SWUSR_11)

Bit 0: Not used

Bit 1: Not used

Bit 2: Inclusion of the “Add” button when a sequence of Quick/Speed dials is selected for
broadcasting 0: Not needed, 1: Needed

Bits 3 to 6: Not used

Bit 7: Press “Start” key without an original when using the on hook dial or the external telephone,

0: displays “Cannot detect original size”. 1: Receives fax messages.

6800E2(H) - User parameter switch 18 (SWUSR_12)

Bit 0: TTI date 0: Off, 1: On

Bit 1: TTI sender 0: Off, 1: On

Bit 2: TTI file number 0: Off, 1: On

Bit 3: TTI page number 0: Off, 1: On

Bits 4 to 6: Not used

Bit 7: Japan only

6800E3(H) - User parameter switch 19 (SWUSR_13)

Bit 0: Not used

D3DX 170 SM
 Service RAM Addresses

Bit 1: Journal format

FAX OPTION
0: The Journal is separated into transmissions and receptions

TYPE M29
(D3DX)
1: The Journal is separated into G3-1, G3-2, and G3-3 communications

Bit 2: Not used

Bit 3: 90° image rotation during B5 portrait TX (This switch is not printed on the user parameter
list.) 0: Off, 1: On

Bit 4: Reduction of sample images on reports to 50% in the main scan and sub-scan directions.
(This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.) 0: Technician adjustment (printer switch 0E
bits 3 and 4), 1: 50% reduction

Bit 5: Use of A5 size paper for reports (This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.) 0: Off,
1: On

Bits 6 and 7: Not used

6800E4(H) - User parameter switch 20 (SWUSR_14)

Bit 0: Automatic printing of the LAN fax result report 0: Off, 1: On

Bit 1: Not used.

Bits 2 to 5: Store documents in memory, which could not be printed from PC fax (LAN fax) driver

Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Setting

0 0 0 0 0 min.

0 0 0 1 1 min.

1 1 1 0 14 min.

1 1 1 1 15 min.

Bits 6 and 7: Not used.

6800E5(H) - User parameter switch 21 (SWUSR_15)

Bit 0: Print results of sending reception notice request message 0: Disabled (print only when error
occurs), 1: Enabled

Bit 1: Respond to e-mail reception acknowledgment request 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled

Bit 2: Not used

Bit 3: File format for forwarded folders 0: TIFF, 1: PDF

Bit 4: Transmit Journal by E-mail 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled

Bit 5: Not used

SM 171 D3DX
Service RAM Addresses

Bit 6: Network error display 0: Displayed, 1: Not displayed

Bit 7: Transmit error mail notification 0: Enabled, 1: Disabled

6800E6(H) - User parameter switch 22 (SWUSR_16)

(This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.)

Bit 0: Dial tone detection (PSTN 1) 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled

Bits 1 to 7: Not used

6800E7(H) – User parameter switch 23 (SWUSR_17): Not used

6800E8(H) - User parameter switch 24 (SWUSR_18): Not used

6800E9(H) - User parameter switch 25 (SWUSR_19)

Bit 0: Not used

Bit 1: Reception mode switch timer 0: Off, 1: On (switching Fax or Fax/Tel)

Bit 2: Mode priority switch 0: Fax first, 1: Tel first

Bit 3: Dial in function (Japan Only)

Bit 4: Do not Change this Bit.

Bits 5 to 7: Not used

6800EA(H) and 6800EB(H) - User parameter switches 26 and 27 (SWUSR_1A and 1B): Not
used

6800EC(H) - User parameter switch 28(SWUSR_1C): Not used

6800ED(H) - User parameter switch 29(SWUSR_1D): Not used

6800EE(H) and 6800EF(H) - User parameter switches 30 and 31 (SWUSR_1E and 1F): Not
used

6800F0(H) - User parameter switch 32 (SWUSR_20)

Bit 0: Quotation priority for a destination when there is no destination of the specified type

0: Paper output priority = Priority order: 1. IP-fax destination, 2. Fax Number, 3. E-mail address, 4.
Folder

1: Electric putout order = Priority order: 1. E-mail address, 2. Folder, 3. IP-fax destination, 4. Fax
number

Bits 1 to 7: Not used

6800F1(H) - User parameter switch 33 (SWUSR_21): Not used

6800F2(H) - User parameter switch 34 (SWUSR_22)

Bit 0: Gatekeeper server used with IP-Fax 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled

D3DX 172 SM
 Service RAM Addresses

Bit 1: SIP server used with IP-Fax 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled

FAX OPTION
Bits 2 to 7: Not used

TYPE M29
(D3DX)
6800F3(H) - User parameter switch 35 (SWUSR_23)

Redial interval when sending a backup file

6800F4(H) - User parameter switch 36 (SWUSR_24)

Maximum number of redials when sending a backup file

6800F5(H) - User parameter switch 37 (SWUSR_25)

Bit 0: Whether to stop sending a backup file if the destination folder becomes full while the
machine is sending or waiting to send a fax or the backup file. 0: No, • 1: Yes

Bit 2 and 3: Backup file is printed along with the TX communication failure report when a backup
file transmission failure occurs. 00: Do not print, 01: Print first page only, 10: Print whole file

Bit 4: Display the sender's information in the file name of documents that are forwarded to folder
destinations. 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled

Bit 5: Limit the file names of documents that are forwarded to folder destinations to plain
characters only. 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled

Bit 6: When using the remote fax function, the sub-machine beeps to let you know when it has
printed a received document (If you specify "On", the machine will beep according to the setting of
[Panel Key Sound] under [System Settings].) 0: On, 1: Off

Bit 7: Not used

6800F6(H) - User parameter switch 38 (SWUSR_26)

Maximum number of transmissions the machine attempts before determining that a fax cannot be
forwarded from a sender (including special senders) to a folder destination

6800F7(H) - User parameter switch 39 (SWUSR_27)

Interval (in minutes) between resend attempts after failing to forward a fax from a sender
(including special senders) to a folder destination

6800F8(H) - User parameter switch 40 (SWUSR_28)

Bit 0: When memory space is insufficient, the machine prints and then deletes the oldest faxes,
creating memory space for storage of new faxes. 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled

Bit 1 to 7: Not used

6800FD(H) - User parameter switch 45 (SWUSR_2D)

Bit 0 and 1:

Bit 2: File format for files transmitted to e-mail addresses and folders registered as forwarding,

SM 173 D3DX
Service RAM Addresses

destinations of backup file transmission, receivers for Personal Box, or end receivers for Transfer
Box. 0: PDF 1: PDF/A

Bit 3:

Bit 4 to 7: Not used

680100 to 68010F(H) - G4 Parameter Switches – Not used

680110 to 68012F(H) - G4 Internal Switches – Not used

680130 to 68016F(H) - Service Switches

680170 to 68017F(H) - IFAX Switches

680180 to 68018F(H) - IP-FAX Switches

680190 to 6801A3(H) - PSTN-1 RTI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII) - See the following note.

6801A4 to 6801B7(H) - PSTN-2 RTI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII)

6801B8 to 6801CB(H) - PSTN-3 RTI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII)

6801CF to 68020E(H) - TTI 1 (Max. 64 characters - ASCII) - See the following note.

68020F to 68024E(H) - TTI 2

68024F to 68028E(H) - TTI 3

68028F to 6802CE(H) - TTI 4

6802CF to 68030E(H) - TTI 5

68030F to 68034E(H) - TTI 6

68034F to 68038E(H) - TTI 7

68038F to 6803CE(H) - TTI 8

6803CF to 68040E(H) - TTI 9

68040F to 68044E(H) - TTI 10

• If the number of characters is less than the maximum (20 for RTI, 32 for TTI), add a stop
code (00[H]) after the last character.
68044F(H)

Printing format for TTI 1

0: DOM (Japan), 1:EXP (Export)

680450(H)

Printing format for TTI 2

D3DX 174 SM
 Service RAM Addresses

0: DOM, 1: EXP

FAX OPTION
680451(H)

TYPE M29
(D3DX)
Printing format for TTI 3

0: DOM, 1:EXP

680452(H)

Printing format for TTI 4

0: DOM, 1:EXP

680453(H)

Printing format for TTI 5

0: DOM, 1:EXP

680454(H)

Printing format for TTI 6

0: DOM, 1:EXP

680455(H)

Printing format for TTI 7

0: DOM, 1:EXP

680456(H)

Printing format for TTI 8

0: DOM, 1:EXP

680457(H)

Printing format for TTI 9

0: DOM, 1:EXP

680458(H)

Printing format for TTI 10

0: DOM, 1: EXP

680459 to 68046C(H) - PSTN-1 CSI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII)

68046D to 680480(H) - PSTN-2 CSI (Max.20 characters - ASCII)

680481 to 680494(H) - PSTN-3 CSI (Max.20 characters - ASCII)

680495(H) - Number of PSTN-1 CSI characters (Hex)

680496(H) - Number of PSTN-2 CSI characters (Hex)

SM 175 D3DX
Service RAM Addresses

680497(H) - Number of PSTN-3 CSI characters (Hex)

6804C6(H) - Memory Lock ID (BCD)

6804D2 to 6804D9(H) - Last power off time (Read only)

6804D2(H) - 01(H) - 24-hour clock, 00(H) - 12-hour clock (AM), 02(H) - 12-hour clock (PM)

6804D3(H) - Year (BCD)

6804D4(H) - Month (BCD)

6804D5(H) - Day (BCD)

6804D6 (H) – Hour

6804D7 (H) – Minute

6804D8(H) – Second

6804D8 (H) - 00: Monday, 01: Tuesday, 02: Wednesday, ///, 06: Sunday

6804E6(H) - Optional equipment (Read only – Do not change the settings)

Bit 0: Page Memory 0: Not installed, 1: Installed

Bit 1: SAF Memory (4M) 0: Not installed, 1: Installed

Bit 2: SAF Memory 0: Not installed, 1: Installed

Bits 3 to 7; Not used

6804E7(H) - Optional equipment (Read only – Do not change the settings)

Bits 0 to 3: Not used

Bit 4: G3-2 0: Not installed, 1: Installed

Bit 5: G3-3 0: Not installed, 1: Installed

Bit 6 and 7: Not used

6804EE(H) - Machine code (Check ram 3)

680500(H) - Start address of G3 table for G3-1

680600(H) - Start address of G3 table for G3-2

680700(H) - Start address of G3 table for G3-3

680800 to 68081F(H) - Service station’s fax number (SP3-101)

680820 to 680829(H) - Own fax PABX extension number – Not used

68082A to 680833(H) - Own fax number (PSTN) – Not used

680834 to 680847(H) - Own fax number (ISDN G4) – Not used

680848 to 680853(H) - The first subscriber number (ISDN G3) – Not used

D3DX 176 SM
 Service RAM Addresses

680854 to 68085F(H) - The second subscriber number (ISDN G3) – Not used

FAX OPTION
680860 to 68086B(H) - The first subscriber number (ISDN G4) – Not used

TYPE M29
(D3DX)
68086C to 680877(H) - The second subscriber number (ISDN G4) – Not used

6808A0 to 6808B7(H) - G4TID registered information (Max.24 characters - ASCII)

6808B8 to 6808CB(H) - ISDN CSI (Max.20 characters - ASCII)

6808CC(H) - Number of ISDN CSI characters (Hex)

6808D1 to 6808D4(H) - ISDN G3 sub address registered information

6808D5 to 6808D8(H) - G4 sub address registered information

6808DE to 6808E2 – Option G3 board (G3-2) ROM information (Read only)

6808DE(H) - Suffix (BCD)

6808DF(H) - Version (BCD)

6808E0(H) - Year (BCD)

6808E1(H) - Month (BCD)

6808E2(H) - Day (BCD)

6808E3 to 6808E7 – Option G3 board (G3-3) ROM information (Read only)

6808E3(H) - Suffix (BCD)

6808E4(H) - Version (BCD)

6808E5(H) - Year (BCD)

6808E6(H) - Month (BCD)

6808E7(H) - Day (BCD)

6808E8(H) - G3-1 Modem ROM version (Read only)

6808EA(H) - G3-2 Modem ROM version (Read only)

6808EC(H) - G3-3 Modem ROM version (Read only)

6808F8(H) - Number of multiple sets print (Read only)

68094E(H) - Time for economy transmission (Not used)

68094F(H) - Time for economy transmission (Not used)

68096A(H) - Transmission monitor volume 00 - 07(H)

68096B(H) - Reception monitor volume 00 - 07(H)

68096C(H) - On-hook monitor volume 00 - 07(H)

68096D(H) - Dialing monitor volume 00 - 07(H)

SM 177 D3DX
Service RAM Addresses

68096E(H) - Buzzer volume 00 - 07(H)

68096F(H) - Beeper volume 00 - 07(H)

680980(H) - Machine code (Check ram 4)

680982(H) - Machine serial number (ASCII)

687178 to 68717B(H) - Transmission counter (Max.24 characters - ASCII)

68717C to 68717F(H) - Reception counter (Max.24 characters - ASCII)

6871E8 to 6871EB(H) - Mail transmission counter (Max.24 characters - ASCII)

6871EC to 6871EF(H) - Mai reception counter (Max.24 characters - ASCII)

6A6DEE(H) to 6A70ED(H) - SIP server address (Read only)

6A6DEE(H) - Proxy server - Main (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)

6A6E6E(H) - Proxy server - Sub (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)

6A6EEE(H) - Redirect server - Main (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)

6A6F6E(H) - Redirect server - Sub (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)

6A6FEE(H) - Registrar server - Main (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)

6A706E(H) - Registrar server - Sub (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)

6A70EE(H) - Gatekeeper server address - Main (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)

6A716E(H) - Gatekeeper server address - Sub (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)

6A71EE(H) - Alias Number (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)

6A726E(H) - SIP user name (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)

6A72EE(H) - SIP digest authentication password (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)

6A736E(H) - Gateway address information (Max. 7100 characters - ASCII)

6A8F2A(H) - NGN initial setting method 0: Simple, 1: Manual

6A8F2B(H) - SIP digest authentication user name (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)

6A8FAB(H) - NGN-SIP domain name (Max. 64 characters - ASCII)

6A8FEB(H) - NGN-home gateway address (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)

6A906C(H) - Stand-by port number for H.323 connection

6A906E(H) - Stand-by port number for SIP connection

6A9070(H) - RAS port number

6A9072(H) - Gatekeeper port number

6A9074(H) - Port number of data waiting for T.38

D3DX 178 SM
 Service RAM Addresses

6A9076(H) - Port number of SIP server

FAX OPTION
6A9078(H) - Priority for SIP and H.323 0: H.323, 1: SIP

TYPE M29
(D3DX)
6A9079(H) - SIP function 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled

6A907A(H) - H.323 function 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled

6A907B(H) - SIP digest authentication function 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled

6B3AE4(H) - 6B3B04 (H) - Dial tone detection parameter (Max. 11 x 3 lines)

This initializes following order. [0x04, 0x40, 0x03, 0x60, 0x64, 0xf4, 0x01,0x64, 0x04, 0xc8, 0x00]

6B3AE4(H) – Dial tone detection frequency – Upper limit (High)

Defaults: NA: 06, EU: 06, ASIA: 06

6B3AE5(H) – Dial tone detection frequency – Upper Limit (Low)

Defaults: NA: 50, EU: 50, ASIA: 50

6B3AE6(H) – Dial tone detection frequency – Lower Limit (High)

Defaults: NA: 03, EU: 02, ASIA: 02

6B3AE7(H) – Dial tone detection frequency – Lower Limit (Low)

Defaults: NA: 60, EU: 90, ASIA: 90

6B3AE8(H) –Dial tone detection waiting time (20 ms)

Defaults: NA: 64, EU 64, ASIA: 64

6B3AE9 to 6B3AEA – Dial tone detection monitoring time (20 ms)

Defaults

Area 6B35A9 6B35AA

NA F4 01

EU F4 01

ASIA F4 01

6B3AEB(H) – Dial tone detect judge time (20 ms)

Defaults: NA: 64, EU: 1B, ASIA: 32

6B3AEC(H) – Dial tone disconnect permission time (20 ms)

Defaults: NA: 11, EU: 0F, ASIA: 11

SM 179 D3DX
Overview

5. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS

5.1 OVERVIEW

5.1.1 OVERVIEW

Together with the controller board, the FCU controls all the fax communications and fax features.
The FCU also contains the ROM, SRAM and NCU circuits.

Fax Options
• Extra G3 Interface option
This provides one more analog line interface. This allows full dual access. Two extra G3
interface options can be installed.

• Memory Expansion
This expands the SAF memory and the page memory (used for image rotation); without this
expansion, the page memory is not big enough for image rotation at 400 dpi, so transmission
at 400 dpi is not possible.

D3DX 180 SM
 Boards

5.2 BOARDS

FAX OPTION
TYPE M29
(D3DX)
5.2.1 FCU

The FCU (Facsimile Control Unit) controls fax communications, the video interface to the base
copier’s engine, and all the fax options.

FACE3.5 (Fax Application Control Engine)

• CPU
• Data compression and reconstruction (DCR)
• DMA control
• Clock generation
• DRAM backup control
Modem (FAME2)

• V.34, V33, V17, V.29, V.27ter, V.21, and V.8

DRAM

• The 16 MB of DRAM is shared as follows.

• SAF memory: 4MB
• Working memory: 4MB
• Page memory: 8MB
• The SAF memory is backed up by a rechargeable battery.
ROM

• 4MB flash ROMs for system software storage

SM 181 D3DX
Boards

SRAM

• The 512 KB SRAM for system and user parameter storage is backed up by a lithium battery.
Memory Back-up

• A rechargeable battery backs up the SAF memory (DRAM) for 12 hours.

• A lithium battery backs up the system parameters and programmed items in the SRAM, in
case the base copier's main switch is turned off.
Switches

Item Description
SW1 Switches the SRAM backup battery on/off.

5.2.2 SG3 BOARD

The SG3 board allows up to three simultaneous communications when used in combination with
the FCU and optional G3 boards. The NCU is on the same board as the common SG-3 board.
This makes the total board structure smaller. But, the specifications of the SG3 board do not
change.

NCCP (New Communication Control Processor)

• Controls the SG3 board.

• CPU (RU30)
• DPRAM (Dual Port RAM): Handshaking with the FCU is done through this block.
• DMA controller
D3DX 182 SM
 Boards

• JBIG
DSP V34 modem (RL5T892): Includes the DTMF Receiver function

FAX OPTION
•

TYPE M29
(D3DX)
• DCR for MH, MR, MMR, and JBIG compression and decompression
FROM

• 1Mbyte flash ROM for SG3 software storage and modem software storage
SDRAM

• 4Mbyte DRAM shared between ECM buffer, line buffer, and working memory
AFE (Analog Front End)

• Analog processing
CODEC (COder-DECoder)

• A/D & D/A conversions for modem

REG

• Generates +3.3 V from the +5V from the FCU

SM 183 D3DX
Video Data Path

5.3 VIDEO DATA PATH

5.3.1 TRANSMISSION

Memory Transmission and Parallel Memory Transmission

The base copier's scanner scans the original at the selected resolution in inch format. The IPU
processes the data and transfers it to the FCU.

• When scanning a fax original, the IPU uses the MTF, independent dot erase and
thresholding parameter settings programmed in the fax unit’s scanner bit switches, not
the copier's SP modes.
Then, the FCU converts the data to mm format, and compresses the data in MMR or raw format to
store it in the SAF memory. If image rotation will be done, the image is rotated in page memory
before compression.

D3DX 184 SM
 Video Data Path

At the time of transmission, the FCU decompresses the stored data, then re-compresses and/or
reduces the data if necessary for transmission. The NCU transmits the data to the line.

FAX OPTION
TYPE M29
(D3DX)
Immediate Transmission
The base copier's scanner scans the original at the resolution agreed with the receiving terminal.
The IPU video processes the data and transfers it to the FCU.

• When scanning a fax original, the IPU uses the MTF, independent dot erase and
thresholding parameter settings programmed in the fax unit’s scanner bit switches, not
the copier's SP modes.
Then the FCU stores the data in page memory, and compresses the data for transmission. The
NCU transmits the data to the line.

JBIG Transmission

Memory transmission
If the receiver has JBIG compression, the data goes from the DCR to the QM-Coder. Then the
NCU transmits the data to the line. When an optional G3 unit (SG3) is installed and PSTN2 is
selected as the line type, JBIG compression is available, but only for the PSTN-2 line.

Immediate transmission
If the receiver has JBIG compression, the data goes from the page memory to the QM-Coder.
Then the NCU transmits the data to the line. When an optional G3 unit (SG3) is installed and
PSTN2 is selected as the line type, JBIG compression is available, but only for the PSTN-2 line.

Adjustments
• Priority for the line used for G3 transmissions (PSTN 1/PSTN 2 or 3): System switch 16 bit 1

5.3.2 RECEPTION

SM 185 D3DX
Video Data Path

First, the FCU stores the incoming data from either an analog line to the SAF memory. (The data
goes to the FACE3 at the same time, and is checked for error lines/frames.)

The FCU then decompresses the data and transfers it to page memory. If image rotation will be
done, the image is rotated in the page memory. The data is transferred to the IPU.

If the optional G3 unit is installed, the line that the message comes in on depends on the
telephone number dialed by the other party (the optional G3 unit has a different telephone number
from the main fax board).

JBIG Reception
When data compressed with JBIG comes in on PSTN-1 (the standard analog line), the data is
sent to the QM-CODER for decompression. Then the data is stored in the page memory, and
transferred to the IPU.

When data compressed with JBIG comes in on PSTN-2 (optional extra analog line), the data is
sent to the QM-CODER on the SG3 board for decompression.

D3DX 186 SM
 Fax Communication Features

5.4 FAX COMMUNICATION FEATURES

FAX OPTION
TYPE M29
(D3DX)
5.4.1 MULTI-PORT
When the optional extra G3 Interface Unit is installed, communication can take place at the same
time through the two or three lines at once.

Option Available Line Type Available protocol Combinations

Standard only PSTN G3

Extra G3 Interface Unit (single) PSTN + PSTN G3 + G3

Extra G3 Interface Unit (double) PSTN + PSTN +PSTN G3 + G3 +G3

5.4.2 DOCUMENT SERVER

The base copier's scanner scans the original at the selected resolution. The IPU video processes
the data and transfers it to the controller board.

Then the controller stores the data in the page memory for the copier function, and compresses
the data in MMR (by software) to store it in the HDD. If image rotation will be done, the image is
rotated in the page memory before compression.

For transmission, the stored image data is transferred to the FCU. The FCU decompresses the
image data, then recompresses and/or reduces the data if necessary for transmission. The NCU

SM 187 D3DX
Fax Communication Features

transmits the data to the line.

The documents can be stored in the HDD (Document Server) from the fax application. The stored
documents in the document sever can be used for the fax transmission in many times. More than
one document and the scanned document can be combined into one file and then the file can be
transmitted.

• When using the document server, the SAF memory is not used.
• The document is compressed with MMR and stored.
• Up to 9,000 pages can be stored (1 file: Up to 1,000 pages) from the fax application.
• Only stored documents from the fax application can be transmitted.
• Scanned documents are given a name automatically, such as "FAX001". But it is possible to
change the file name, user name and password.
• Up to 30 files can be selected at once.

• The compression method of the fax application is different from the copy application. The
storing time is longer than the copier storing.
• When selecting "Print 1st page", the stored document will be reduced to A4 size.

5.4.3 INTERNET MAIL COMMUNICATION

Mail Transmission

T.37 simple and full modes

This machine supports T.37 full mode. (ITU-T Recommendation, RFC2532). The difference
between T.37 simple mode and full mode is as follows.

Function T.37 Simple T.37 Full Mode

Mode
Resolution 200 x 100 200 x100

200 x 200 200 x 200

200 x 400

400 x 400 (if available)

RX Paper Width A4 A4, B4, A3

RX Data MH MH (default), MR, MMR,

Compression
Method

Signals Image data Image data transmission, exchange of capability

transmission only information between the two terminals, and

D3DX 188 SM
 Fax Communication Features

Function T.37 Simple T.37 Full Mode

FAX OPTION
Mode

TYPE M29
(D3DX)
acknowledgement of receipt of fax messages

Data Formats
The scanned data is converted into a TIFF-F formatted file.

The fields of the e-mail and their contents are as follows:

Field Content
From Mail address of the sender

Reply To Destination requested for reply

To Mail address of the destination

Bcc Backup mail address

Subject From CSI or RTI (Fax Message No. xxxx)

Content Type Multipart/mixed

Attached files: image/tiff

Content Transfer Base 64, 7-bit, 8-bit, Quoted Printable

Encoding

Message Body MIME-converted TIFF-F (MIME standards specify how files are attached
to e-mail messages)

Direct SMTP Transmission

Internet Fax documents can be sent directly to their destinations without going through the SMTP
server. (Internet Faxes normally transmit via the SMTP server.)

For example:

e-mail address: gts@ricoh.co.jp

SMTP server address: gts.abcd.com

In this case, this feature destination e-mail address (gts@ricoh.co.jp) is read as the SMTP server
address "gts.abcd.com", and the transmissions bypass the SMTP server. This leads to decrease
the server load and to reduce the time lag during transferring the mail.

• Requirements for destination server:

• Supports with Internet FAX (as a destination of Internet FAX)
• Can receive mails (as a destination of mail)
• Is installed in the same LAN as this machine
• Supports with the SMTP mail reception, and the reception protocol is set to SMTP
SM 189 D3DX
Fax Communication Features

• Set the port number for [SMTP server] to “25” to enable this feature.
• If the sender server sends an Internet FAX or a mail using this feature, the SMTP
authentication is disabled even if the server sets it.
• Using this feature, error notification mail will not be sent even if the mail is not
properly received.
• Also, error mail will not be sent even if the mail is not sent properly.
• This feature refers to A records (not supported with MX records).

Selectable Options
These options are available for selection:

• With the default settings, the scan resolution can be either standard or detail. Inch-mm
conversion before TX depends on IFAX SW01 Bit 7. Detail resolution will be used if Super
Fine resolution is selected, unless Fine resolution is enabled with IFAX SW01.
• The requirements for originals (document size, scan width, and memory capacity) are the
same as for G3 fax memory TX.
• The default compression is TIFF-F format.
• IFAX SW00: Acceptable paper widths for sending
• IFAX SW09: Maximum number of attempts to the same destination

Secure Internet Transmission

• SMTP Authentication:
User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> SMTP Authentication

• POP Before SMTP:

User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> POP Before SMTP

Mail Reception

Three Types
This machine supports three types of e-mail reception:

• POP3 (Post Office Protocol Ver. 3.)

• IMAP4 (Internet Messaging Access Protocol)
• SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)

• For details: Core Technology Manual – Facsimile Processes – Faxing from a PC –

Internet/LAN Fax Boards – Mail Reception

POP3/IMAP4 Mail Reception Procedure

The machine automatically picks up e-mail from the server at an interval which is adjustable in the

D3DX 190 SM
 Fax Communication Features

range 2 to 1440 min. in 1-minute steps:

FAX OPTION
User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> E-mail Reception Interval

TYPE M29
•

(D3DX)
SMTP Reception
22. The IFAX must be registered as an SMTP server in the MX record of the DNS server, and the
address of the received mail must specify the IFAX.
23. To enable SMTP reception: User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> Reception Protocol
• Even if the MX record on the DNS server includes the IFAX, mail cannot be received with
SMTP until SMTP reception is enabled:
• However, if SMTP reception is selected and the machine is not registered in the MX
record of the DNS server, then either IMAP4 or POP3 is used, depending on the setting:
User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> Reception Protocol

• An error will be issued and error mail will be sent to the mail source when the reception
protocol is not set to SMTP even If you configure to enable SMTP reception in the DNS
server.
• If the received mail contains error, the reception operation is stopped, the mail is
discarded and error report is output. Error mail is also sent to the mail source.
• When a mail is received from SMTP server during sending a mail in the machine, the
SMTP server will give a “Busy” response. The SMTP server will usually try to send the
mail again later until the time-out is reached.
• This feature cannot be used with the POP server.

Mail Delivery Conditions: Transferring Mail Received With SMTP

24. The machine must be set up for SMTP mail delivery:
• User Tools> Facsimile Features> Reception Settings> SMTP RX File Delivery Settings
25. If the user wishes to limit this feature so that the machine will only deliver mail from
designated senders, the machine's "Auth. E-mail RX" feature must be set (User Tools>
Facsimile Features> Reception Settings> SMTP RX File Delivery Settings).
26. If the "SMTP RX File Delivery Setting" is set to “Off” to prohibit SMTP receiving, and if there is
mail designated for delivery, then the machine responds with an error. (User Tools> Facsimile
Features> Reception Settings> SMTP RX File Delivery Settings)
27. If the quick dial, speed dial, or group dial entry is incorrect, the mail transmission is lost, and
the IFAX issues an error to the SMTP server and outputs an error report.

Auth. E-mail RX
In order to limit access to mail delivery with IFAX, the addresses of senders must be limited using
the Access Limit Entry. Only one entry can be registered.

28. Access Limit Entry

SM 191 D3DX
Fax Communication Features

For example, to limit access to @IFAX.ricoh.co.jp:

gts@IFAX.ricoh.co.jp Matches and is delivered.

gts@IFAX.abcde.co.jp Does not match and is not delivered.

IFAX@ricoh.co.jp Does not match and is not delivered.

29. Conditions
• The length of the Access Limit Entry is limited to 127 characters.
• If the Access Limit Entry address and the mail address of the incoming mail do not match,
the incoming mail is discarded and not delivered, and the SMTP server responds with an
error. However, in this case an error report is not output.
• If the Access Limit Entry address is not registered, and if the incoming mail specifies a
delivery destination, then the mail is delivered unconditionally.

Handling Mail Reception Errors

Abnormal files
When an error of this type occurs, the machine stops receiving and commands the server to erase
the message. Then the machine prints an error report and sends information about the error by
e-mail to the sender address (specified in the "From" or "Reply-to" field of the message). If there is
an incomplete received message in the machine memory, it will be erased.

The machine prints an error message when it fails to send the receive error notification after a
certain number of attempts.

The following types of files are judged to be abnormal if one or more of the following are detected:

30. Unsupported MIME headers.

Supported types of MIME header

Header Supported Types

Content-Type Multipart/mixed, text/plain, message/rfc822 Image/tiff

Charset US-ASCII, ISO 8859 X. Other types cannot be handled, and some
garbage may appear in the data.

Content-Transfer- Base 64, 7-bit, 8-bit, Quoted Printable

Encoding

31. MIME decoding errors

32. File format not recognized as TIFF-F format
33. Resolution, document size, or compression type cannot be accepted

Remaining SAF capacity error

D3DX 192 SM
 Fax Communication Features

The machine calls the server but does not receive e-mail if the remaining SAF capacity is less
than a certain value (the value depends on IFAX Switch 08. The e-mail will be received when the

FAX OPTION
TYPE M29
(D3DX)
SAF capacity increases (for example, after substitute reception files have been printed). The error
handling method for this type of error is the same as for "Abnormal files".

If the capacity of the SAF memory drops to zero during reception, the machine operates in the
same way as when receiving an abnormal file (refer to "Abnormal files" above).

Secure Internet Reception

To enable password encryption and higher level security: User Tools> System Settings> File
Transfer> POP3/IMAP4 Settings> Encryption (set to "On")

Transfer Request: Request By Mail

For details: Core Technology Manual – Facsimile Processes – Faxing from a PC – Internet/LAN
Fax Boards – Transfer Request

The fields of the e-mail and their contents are as follows:

Field Content
From E-mail address of the requesting terminal

To Destination address (Transfer Station address)

Bcc Backup mail address

Subject From TSI (Fax Message No. xxxx)

Content-Type Multipart/mixed

Text/Plain (for a text part), image/tiff (for attached files)

Content-Transfer-Encoding Base 64, 7-Bit, 8-bit, Quoted Printable

Mail body (text part) RELAY-ID-: xxxx (xxxx: 4 digits for an ID code)

RELAY: #01#*X#**01….

Message body MIME-converted TIFF-F.

E-Mail Options (Sub TX Mode)

The following features are available as options for mail sending: entering a subject, designating
the level of importance, confirming reception of the mail.

Subject and Level of Importance

You can enter a subject message with: TX Mode> Subject

The Subject entry for the mail being sent is limited to 128 characters. The subject can also be
prefixed with a "Confidential", "Urgent", "Please phone" or "Copy to corres. Section" notation.

SM 193 D3DX
Fax Communication Features

- How the Subject Differs According to Mail Type -

Mail Type Item Item 2 Item 3

1
Subject Entry --- Entry Condition Fax Message No.

No Subject Entry 1. "CSI" ("RTI") +

2. "RTI" CSI not File No.

registered

3. "CSI" RTI not

registered

4. None CSI, RTI not

registered

Confirmation of From 1. "CSI" ("RTI") Normal:

Reception
2. "RTI" CSI not Return Receipt
registered (dispatched).

You can select

"displayed" with IFAX
SW02 Bits 2 and 3.

3. "CSI" RTI not Error:

registered
Return Receipt
4. None CSI, RTI not (processed/error)
registered

Mail delivery, memory From RTI or CSI of the Mail delivery Fax Message No. + File
transfer, SMTP station Number
receiving and delivery designated for
delivery

RTI or CSI of Mail sending

sender from G3 memory

Mail address of Memory sending

sender

Mail address of SMTP receiving

sender and delivery (Off
Ramp Gateway)

Mail error notification --- Error Message No. xxxx From CSI (RTI)

Items 1, 2, and 3 in the table above are in the Subject.

D3DX 194 SM
 Fax Communication Features

- Subjects Displayed on the PC -

FAX OPTION
TYPE M29
(D3DX)
E-mail Messages
After entering the subject, you can enter a message with: TX Mode> Text

An e-mail message (up to 5 lines) can be pre-registered with: User Tools> System Settings> File
Transfer> Program/Change/Delete E-mail Message

- Limitations on Entries -

Item Maximum
Number of Lines 5 lines

Line Length 80 characters

Name Length 20 characters

Message Disposition Notification (MDN)

For details: Core Technology Manual – Facsimile Processes – Faxing from a PC – Internet/LAN
Fax Boards – E-mail Options

The network system administrator can confirm whether a sent mail has been received correctly or
not. This confirmation is done in four steps.

34. Send request for confirmation of mail reception. To enable or disable this request (known as
MDN): TX Mode> Reception Notice
35. Mail reception (receive confirmation request)
36. Send confirmation of mail reception
37. Receive confirmation of mail reception
The other party's machine will not respond to the request unless the two conditions below are
met:

• The other party's machine must be set up to respond to the confirmation request.
• The other party's machine must support MDN (Message Disposition Notification).
- Setting up the Receiving Party -

The receiving party will respond to the confirmation request if:

38. The "Disposition Notification To" field is in the received mail header (automatically inserted in
the 4th line in the upper table on the previous page, if MDN is enabled), and
39. Sending the disposition notification must be enabled (User Parameter Setting SW21 (15 [H])
Bit 1 for this model). The content of the response is as follows:
SM 195 D3DX
Fax Communication Features

Normal reception: "Return Receipt (dispatched)" in the Subject line

IFAX SW02 (Bit 2, 3) "Return Receipt (displayed)" in the Subject line

Error: "Return Receipt (processed/error)" in the Subject line

Handling Reports
- Sending a Request for a Return Receipt by Mail -

After the mail sender transmits a request for a return receipt, the mail sender's journal is
annotated with two hyphens (--) in the Result column and a "Q" in the Mode column.

- Mail Receipt (Request for Receipt Confirmation) and Sending Mail Receipt Response -

After the mail receiver sends a response to the request for a return receipt, the mail receiver's
journal is annotated with two hyphens (--) in the Result column and an "A" in the Mode column.

- Receiving the Return Receipt Mail -

• After the mail sender receives a return receipt, the information in the mail sender's journal
about the receipt request is replaced, i.e. the journal is annotated with "OK" in the Result
column.
• When the return receipt reports an error, the journal is annotated with an "E" in the Result
column.
• The arrival of the return receipt is not recorded in the journal as a separate communication.
Its arrival is only reported by the presence of "OK" or "E" in the Result column.
• If the mail address used by the sender specifies a mailing list (i.e., a Group destination; the
machine sends the mail to more than one location. See "How to set up Mail Delivery"), the
Result column of the Journal is updated every time a return receipt is received. For example,
if the mailing list was to 5 destinations, the Result column indicates the result of the
communication with the 5th destination only. The results of the communications to the first 4
destinations are not shown.
Exceptions:

If one of the communications had an error, the Result column will indicate E, even if
subsequent communications were OK.

If two of the communications had an error, the Journal will indicate the destination for the first
error only.

- Report Sample -

D3DX 196 SM
 Fax Communication Features

FAX OPTION
TYPE M29
(D3DX)

SM 197 D3DX
IP-Fax

5.5 IP-FAX

5.5.1 WHAT IS IP-FAX?

For details: Core Technology Manual – Facsimile Processes – Faxing from a PC – Internet/LAN
Fax Boards – IP-FAX

5.5.2 T.38 PACKET FORMAT

TCP is selected by default for this machine, but you can change this to UDP with IPFAX SW 00 Bit
1.

UDP Related Switches

IP-Fax Switch 01
No. Function Comments
0-3 Select IP FAX Delay Level Raise the level by selecting a higher setting if too many
transmission errors are occurring on the network.
Bit Bit Bit Bit Level
3 2 1 0 If TCP/UDP is enabled on the network, raise this setting on
the T.30 machine. Increasing the delay time allows the
0 0 0 0 0
recovery of more lost packets.
0 0 0 1 1
If only UDP is enabled, increase the number of redundant
0 0 1 0 2 packets.
0 0 1 1 3 Level 1~2: 3 Redundant packets

Level 3: 4 Redundant packets

5.5.3 SETTINGS
User parameter switch 34 (22[H]), bit 0

IP-Fax Gate Keeper usage, 0: No, 1: Yes

IP Fax Switches: Various IP-FAX settings (see the bit switch table)

D3DX 198 SM
 General Specifications

6. SPECIFICATIONS

FAX OPTION
TYPE M29
(D3DX)
6.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

6.1.1 FCU
Type: Desktop type transceiver

Circuit: PSTN (max. 3ch.)

PABX

Connection: Direct couple

Original Size: Book (Face down)

Maximum Length: 432 mm [17 ins]

Maximum Width: 297 mm [11.7 ins]

ARDF (Face up)

(Single-sided document)

Length: 128 - 1200 mm [5.0 - 47.2 ins]

Width: 105 - 297 mm [4.1 - 11.7 inch]

(Double-sided document)

Length: 128 - 432 mm [5.0 - 17 inch]

Width: 105 - 297 mm [4.1 - 11.7 inch]

Scanning Flat bed, with CCD

Method:

Resolution: G3

8 x 3.85 lines/mm (Standard)

8 x 7.7 lines/mm (Detail)

8 x 15.4 line/mm (Fine) See Note1

16 x15.4 line/mm (Super Fine) See Note 1

200 x 100 dpi (Standard)

200 x 200 dpi (Detail)

400 x 400 dpi (Super Fine) See Note 1

SM 199 D3DX
General Specifications

• Optional Expansion Memory required

Transmission G3: 3 s at 28800 bps; Measured with G3 ECM using memory for an ITU-T #1
Time: test document (Slerexe letter) at standard resolution

Data MH, MR, MMR, JBIG

Compression:

Protocol: Group 3 with ECM

Modulation: V.34, V.33, V.17 (TCM), V.29 (QAM),

V.27ter (PHM), V.8, V.21 (FSK)

Data Rate: G3: 33600/31200/28800/26400/24000/21600/

19200/16800/14400/12000/9600/7200/4800/2400 bps

Automatic fallback

I/O Rate: With ECM: 0 ms/line

Without ECM: 2.5, 5, 10, 20, or 40 ms/line

Memory SAF
Capacity:
Standard: 4 MB

With optional Expansion Memory: 60 MB (4 MB+ 56 MB)

Page Memory

Standard: 8 MB (Print: 4 MB + Scanner: 4 MB)

With optional Expansion Memory: 16 MB (8 MB + 8 MB)

(Print 8 MB + Scanner: 8 MB)

D3DX 200 SM
 Capabilities of Programmable Items

6.2 CAPABILITIES OF PROGRAMMABLE ITEMS

FAX OPTION
TYPE M29
(D3DX)
The following table shows the capabilities of each programmable items.

Item Standard

Quick Dial 2000

Groups 100
Destination per Group 500

Programs 100
Communication records for Journal stored in the memory 200
Specific Senders 30

Memory Transmission file 800

The following table shows how the capabilities of the document memory will change after the
Expansion Memory are installed.

Without the Expansion With the Expansion

Memory Memory

Memory capacity for memory 320 4800

transmission

(Note1)

• Measured using an ITU-T #1 test document (Slerexe letter) at the standard resolution,
the auto image density mode and the Text mode.

SM 201 D3DX
IFAX Specifications

6.3 IFAX SPECIFICATIONS

Item Spec.
Connectivity: Local area network

Ethernet 100base-Tx/10base-T

Gigabit Ethernet 1000 Base-T

IEEE802.11a/b/g/n (wireless LAN)

Resolution: 200 x 100 dpi (Standard resolution), 200 x 200 dpi (Detail resolution), 200 x
400 dpi (Fine resolution), 400 x 400 dpi (Super Fine resolution)

To use 200 × 400 dpi and 400 × 400 dpi, IFAX SW01 Bit 2 and/or bit 4 must be
set to "1".

Transmission 1 s (through a LAN to the server)

Time:
Condition: ITU-T #1 test document (Selerexe Letter)

MTF correction: OFF

TTI: None

Resolution: 200 x 100 dpi

Communication speed: 10 Mbps

Correspondent device: E-mail server

Line conditions: No terminal access

Document Size: Maximum Original Size: A3/DLT.

To use B4 and A3 width, IFAX SW00 Bit 1 (B4) and/or Bit 2 (A3) must be set to
"1".

E-mail File Single/multi-part

Format:
MIME conversion

Image: TIFF-F (MH, MR, MMR)

Protocol: Transmission:

SMTP, TCP/IP

Reception:

D3DX 202 SM
 IFAX Specifications

Item Spec.

FAX OPTION
POP3, SMTP, IMAP4, TCP/IP

TYPE M29
(D3DX)
Data Rate: 1000 Mbps (1000 Base-T)

100 Mbps (100base-Tx)

10 Mbps (10base-T)

Authentication SMTP-AUTH
Method:
POP before SMTP

A-POP

Remark: The machine must be set up as an e-mail client before installation. Any client
PCs connected to the machine through a LAN must also be e-mail clients, or
some features will not work (e.g. Autorouting).

SM 203 D3DX
IP-FAX Specifications

6.4 IP-FAX SPECIFICATIONS

Item Spec.
Network: Standard: Ethernet interface (1000 Base-T/100 Base-TX/10 Base-T)

Optional: IEEE802.11a/b/g/n wireless LAN interface

Scan line density: 8 x 3.85 lines/mm, 200 x 100dpi (standard character),

8 x 7.7lines/mm, 200 x 200dpi (detail character),

8 x 15.4lines/mm (fine character: optional expansion memory

required),

16 x 15.4lines/mm, 400 x 400dpi (super fine character: optional

expansion memory required)

Maximum original size: Standard: A3 SEF, 11 x 17 SEF

Custom: 297 x 1,200 mm (11.7 x 47.3 inches)

Maximum scanning 297 x 1,200 mm (11.7 x 47.3 inches)

size:
Transmission protocol: Recommendation: T.38, TCP, UDP/IP communication, SIP (RFC 3261
compliant), H.323 v2
Compatible machines: IP-Fax compatible machines
IP-Fax transmission Specify an IP address and send faxes to an IP-Fax compatible fax
function: through a network.

Also capable of sending faxes to a G3 fax connected to a telephone

line via a VoIP gateway.

IP-Fax reception Receive faxes sent from an IP-Fax compatible fax through a network.
function:
Also capable of receiving faxes from a G3 fax connected to a telephone
line via a VoIP gateway.

D3DX 204 SM
 Fax Unit Configuration

6.5 FAX UNIT CONFIGURATION

FAX OPTION
TYPE M29
(D3DX)
Component Code No. Remarks
FCU D3DX-01 (NA) 4 Included with the fax unit

Speaker D3DX-02 (EU) 5

D3DX-03 (AP/KOR)

D3DX-11 (TWN)

D3DX-11 (CHN)

Expansion Memory D3BZ-17 6 Optional

SG3 Board D3DX-05 (NA) 2 Optional

SG3 Board (2nd) D3DX-06 (EU/AP/KOR) 3 Optional

CCU I/F Board D3DX-07 (TWN) 1 Included with optional G3 unit

D3DX-13 (CHN)

SM 205 D3DX
 D685
BRIDGE UNIT BU3070

Latest Release: -
Initial Release: November, 2016
Copyright (c) 2016 Ricoh Co.,Ltd.

Rev. 08/12/2021
 BRIDGE UNIT BU3070 (D685)
TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ............................................. 1

1.1 DRIVE MOTOR UNIT ................................................................................... 1
1.2 PAPER EXIT SENSOR................................................................................. 4
1.3 BRIDGE UNIT TRANSPORT SENSOR ........................................................ 7
1.4 PAPER EXIT TRAY SET DETECTION SWITCH .......................................... 8
1.5 PAPER EXIT SWITCHING UNIT SET SWITCH ........................................... 9

SM i D685
READ THIS FIRST

Safety and Symbols

This manual uses several symbols and abbreviations. The meaning of those symbols and
abbreviations are as follows:

Clip ring

Screw

Connector

Clamp

SEF Short Edge Feed

LEF Long Edge Feed

[A] Short Edge Feed (SEF)

[B] Long Edge Feed (LEF)

Trademarks
Microsoft®, Windows®, and MS-DOS® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and /or other countries.
PostScript® is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems, Incorporated.
PCL® is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
Ethernet® is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.
PowerPC® is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and may be trademarks of
their respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights involved with those marks.
 Drive Motor Unit

1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

BU3070 (D685)
BRIDGE UNIT
1.1 DRIVE MOTOR UNIT

1. Separate the finisher, and remove the connecting bracket.

2. Bridge unit [A] ( ×2)

3. Drive motor unit cover [A] ( ×2)

SM 1 D685
Drive Motor Unit

4. Bridge unit rear cover [A] ( ×1)

5. Drive motor unit [A] ( ×3, ×2)

D685 2 SM
SM
3
D685
Drive Motor Unit

BRIDGE UNIT
BU3070 (D685)
Paper Exit Sensor

1.2 PAPER EXIT SENSOR

1. Bridge unit ( page 1 "Drive Motor Unit" )

2. Drive motor unit cover ( page 1 "Drive Motor Unit")
3. Bridge unit rear cover ( page 1 "Drive Motor Unit")
4. Paper exit tray [A]

5. Paper exit cover [A] ( ×1)

6. Paper exit switching unit [A] ( ×1, ×1, ×1)

D685 4 SM
 Paper Exit Sensor

BU3070 (D685)
BRIDGE UNIT
7. Paper exit switching unit cover [A] ( ×3)

8. Guide plate [A]

SM 5 D685
Paper Exit Sensor

9. Guide plate [A] ( ×1)

10. Paper exit sensor [A]

D685 6 SM
 Bridge Unit Transport Sensor

1.3 BRIDGE UNIT TRANSPORT SENSOR

BU3070 (D685)
BRIDGE UNIT
1. Bridge unit ( page 1 "Drive Motor Unit")
2. Upside down.

3. Bridge unit transport sensor [A] ( ×1)

SM 7 D685
Paper Exit Tray Set Detection Switch

1.4 PAPER EXIT TRAY SET DETECTION SWITCH

1. Paper exit tray

2. Paper exit tray set switch cover [A]

3. Paper exit tray set switch [A]

D685 8 SM
 Paper Exit Switching Unit Set Switch

1.5 PAPER EXIT SWITCHING UNIT SET SWITCH

BU3070 (D685)
BRIDGE UNIT
1. Open the Paper exit switching unit [A]

2. Paper exit switching unit set switch cover [A]

3. Paper exit switching unit set switch [A]

SM 9 D685
 D690
INTERNAL FINISHER SR3130

Latest Release: -
Initial Release: November, 2016
Copyright (c) 2016 Ricoh Co.,Ltd.

Rev. 08/12/2021
 INTERNAL FINISHER SR3130
(D690)
TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ............................................. 1

1.1 INNER FINISHER ......................................................................................... 1
1.2 FINISHER FRONT COVER .......................................................................... 3
1.3 FINISHER UPPER COVER .......................................................................... 4
1.4 PAPER EXIT TRAY ...................................................................................... 5
1.5 PAPER EXIT COVER ................................................................................... 6
1.6 CONTROL BOARD ...................................................................................... 7
1.7 ENTRANCE SENSOR .................................................................................. 8
1.8 ENTRANCE MOTOR.................................................................................. 10
1.9 TRAY LIFT MOTOR ................................................................................... 11
1.10 PAPER EXIT FULL SENSOR ............................................................... 12
1.11 PAPER BAIL HOME POSITION SENSOR............................................ 13
1.12 PAPER SURFACE DETECTION SENSOR .......................................... 14
1.13 PAPER BAIL MOTOR ........................................................................... 15
1.14 TRANSPORT SENSOR ........................................................................ 16
1.15 STRIKE ROLLER HOME POSITION SENSOR .................................... 17
1.16 PAPER EXIT GUIDE PLATE MOTOR .................................................. 19
1.17 PAPER EXIT GUIDE PLATE HOME POSITION SENSOR ................... 20
1.18 STRIKE ROLLER MOTOR.................................................................... 21
1.19 SHIFT MOTOR ..................................................................................... 22
1.20 SHIFT ROLLER HOME POSITION SENSOR ....................................... 24
1.21 STAPLER HOME POSITION SENSOR ................................................ 25
1.22 STAPLER DISPLACEMENT MOTOR ................................................... 27
1.23 STAPLER UNIT .................................................................................... 29
1.24 JOGGER FENCE MOTOR (FRONT / REAR) ....................................... 32
1.25 JOGGER FENCE HOME POSITION SENSOR (FRONT) ..................... 34
1.26 JOGGER FENCE HOME POSITION SENSOR (REAR) ....................... 35
1.27 STAPLER TRAY JAM DETECTION SENSOR ...................................... 36
1.28 PAPER DETECTION SENSOR ............................................................ 37
1.29 PAPER EXIT MOTOR (FRONT) ........................................................... 39
1.30 PAPER EXIT MOTOR (REAR) ............................................................. 40

SM i D690
READ THIS FIRST

Safety and Symbols

This manual uses several symbols and abbreviations. The meaning of those symbols and
abbreviations are as follows:

Clip ring

Screw

Connector

Clamp

SEF Short Edge Feed

LEF Long Edge Feed

[A] Short Edge Feed (SEF)

[B] Long Edge Feed (LEF)

Trademarks
Microsoft®, Windows®, and MS-DOS® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and /or other countries.
PostScript® is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems, Incorporated.
PCL® is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
Ethernet® is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.
PowerPC® is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and may be trademarks of
their respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights involved with those marks.
The Aim of Anti-tip Components and Precautions
The anti-tip components are necessary for meeting the requirements of IEC60950-1, the
international standard for safety.
The aim of these components is to prevent the products, which are heavy in weight, from toppling
as a result of people running into or leaning onto the products, which can lead to serious
accidents such as persons becoming trapped under the product. (U.S.: UL60950-1, Europe:
EN60950-1)
Therefore, removal of such components must always be with the consent of the customer.
Do not remove them at your own judgment.
 Inner Finisher

1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

INTERNAL
FINISHER
SR3130
(D690)
1.1 INNER FINISHER

1. Interface cable [A]

2. Open the front cover [A]

3. Upper left cover [A] ( ×1)

SM 1 D690
Inner Finisher

4. Left rear cover [A] ( ×2)

5. Finisher [A] ( ×1)

6. Bridge guide plate [A] ( ×2)

D690 2 SM
 Finisher Front Cover

1.2 FINISHER FRONT COVER

INTERNAL
FINISHER
SR3130
(D690)
1. Pull the finisher [A]

2. Finisher front cover [A] ( ×2)

SM 3 D690
Finisher Upper Cover

1.3 FINISHER UPPER COVER

1. Finisher ( page 1 "Inner Finisher")

2. Finisher front cover ( page 3 )
3. Finisher upper cover [A] ( ×2)

D690 4 SM
 Paper exit tray

1.4 PAPER EXIT TRAY

INTERNAL
FINISHER
SR3130
(D690)
1. Finisher front cover ( page 3 )
2. Left lower cover [A] ( ×2)

3. Paper exit tray [A] ( ×2)

SM 5 D690
Paper Exit Cover

1.5 PAPER EXIT COVER

1. Paper exit tray ( page 5)

2. Paper exit cover [A] ( ×3, ×3, ×2)

D690 6 SM
 Control Board

1.6 CONTROL BOARD

INTERNAL
FINISHER
SR3130
(D690)
 When a control board is replaced, use the same DIP switch settings as those of the
control board before replacement.
1. Finisher front cover ( page 3 )
2. Control board [A] ( ×3, ×17)

SM 7 D690
Entrance Sensor

1.7 ENTRANCE SENSOR

1. Finisher ( page 1 "Inner Finisher")

2. Open/Close upper cover [A] ( ×2)

3. Entrance sensor unit [A] ( ×1, ×1)

D690 8 SM
 Entrance Sensor

4. Entrance sensor [A]

INTERNAL
FINISHER
SR3130
(D690)

SM 9 D690
Entrance Motor

1.8 ENTRANCE MOTOR

1. Finisher ( page 1 "Inner Finisher" )

2. Finisher right rear bracket [A] ( ×2)

3. Finisher rear cover [A] ( ×2)

4. Entrance motor [A] ( ×2, ×1)

D690 10 SM
 Tray Lift Motor

1.9 TRAY LIFT MOTOR

INTERNAL
FINISHER
SR3130
(D690)
1. Paper exit tray ( page 5)
2. Tray lift motor unit [A] ( ×2, ×1, ×1)

3. Cam [A], shaft [B] ( ×1)

4. Tray lift motor [A] ( ×2)

SM 11 D690
Paper Exit Full Sensor

1.10 PAPER EXIT FULL SENSOR

1. Paper exit tray ( page 5)

2. Paper exit full sensor [A] ( ×1, ×1)

D690 12 SM
 Paper Bail Home Position Sensor

1.11 PAPER BAIL HOME POSITION SENSOR

INTERNAL
FINISHER
SR3130
(D690)
1. Paper exit cover ( page 6)
2. Paper bail home position sensor [A]

SM 13 D690
Paper Surface Detection Sensor

1.12 PAPER SURFACE DETECTION SENSOR

1. Paper exit cover ( page 6)

2. Paper surface detection sensor [A]

D690 14 SM
 Paper Bail Motor

1.13 PAPER BAIL MOTOR

INTERNAL
FINISHER
SR3130
(D690)
1. Paper exit cover( page 6)
2. Paper bail motor [A] ( ×2, ×1)

SM 15 D690
Transport Sensor

1.14 TRANSPORT SENSOR

1. Upper cover ( page 4 "Finisher Upper Cover" )

2. Transport sensor unit [A] ( ×1, ×1, ×1)

3. Transport sensor [A]

D690 16 SM
 Strike Roller Home Position Sensor

1.15 STRIKE ROLLER HOME POSITION SENSOR

INTERNAL
FINISHER
SR3130
(D690)
1. Upper cover ( page 4 "Finisher Upper Cover" )
2. Rear cover ( page 10 "Entrance Motor" )
3. Rotate the timing belt [A], and release the strike roller arm unit [B] from the strike roller
HP sensor [C].

4. Strike roller home position sensor unit [A] ( ×1, ×1, ×1)

SM 17 D690
Strike Roller Home Position Sensor

5. Strike roller home position sensor [A]

D690 18 SM
 Paper Exit Guide Plate Motor

1.16 PAPER EXIT GUIDE PLATE MOTOR

INTERNAL
FINISHER
SR3130
(D690)
1. Control board ( page 7 )
2. Paper exit guide plate motor [A] ( ×2, ×1, ×3)

SM 19 D690
Paper Exit Guide Plate Home Position Sensor

1.17 PAPER EXIT GUIDE PLATE HOME POSITION SENSOR

1. Control board ( page 7 )

2. Rotate the paper output guide plate gear [A] counterclockwise, and release the paper
output guide plate [B] from the paper output guide plate HP sensor [C].

3. Paper exit guide plate home position sensor [A] ( ×1)

D690 20 SM
 Strike Roller Motor

1.18 STRIKE ROLLER MOTOR

INTERNAL
FINISHER
SR3130
(D690)
1. Paper exit cover ( page 6 )
2. Rear cover ( page 10 "Entrance Motor" )
3. Rear rail [A] ( ×2)

4. Strike roller motor [A] ( ×2, ×1)

SM 21 D690
Shift Motor

1.19 SHIFT MOTOR

 After attaching, rotate the knob, and check that all gear trains can rotate.
 After attachment, when the cam is rotated, check that the link interlocks.

1. Open/Close upper cover ( page 4 "Finisher Upper Cover")

2. Control board bracket ( page 7 "Control Board")
3. Pulley [A], Timing belt [B] ( ×1)

4. Shift motor unit [A] ( ×2, ×1, ×1)

D690 22 SM
 Shift Motor

INTERNAL
FINISHER
SR3130
(D690)
5. Shift motor [A] ( ×2)

SM 23 D690
Shift Roller Home Position Sensor

1.20 SHIFT ROLLER HOME POSITION SENSOR

1. Control board bracket ( page 7 "Control Board" )

2. Shift roller home position sensor unit [A] ( ×1, ×2, ×1)

3. Shift roller home position sensor [A]

D690 24 SM
 Stapler Home Position Sensor

1.21 STAPLER HOME POSITION SENSOR

INTERNAL
FINISHER
SR3130
(D690)
1. Control board bracket ( page 7 "Control Board" )
2. Open/Close upper cover ( page 4 "Finisher Upper Cover" )
3. Knob [A]

4. Entrance cover [A] ( ×2)

5. Stapler home position sensor unit [A] ( ×1, ×1)

SM 25 D690
Stapler Home Position Sensor

6. Stapler home position sensor [A]

 If it is difficult to remove and attach, insert the stapler unit into the rear.

D690 26 SM
 Stapler Displacement Motor

1.22 STAPLER DISPLACEMENT MOTOR

INTERNAL
FINISHER
SR3130
(D690)
 When the finisher is inverted, be careful not to deform the frame.
1. Paper exit cover ( page 6 )
2. Clamps (4)

3. Upside down.

4. Base cover [A] ( ×3)

SM 27 D690
Stapler Displacement Motor

5. Stapler displacement motor [A]( ×2, ×1)

D690 28 SM
 Stapler Unit

1.23 STAPLER UNIT

INTERNAL
FINISHER
SR3130
(D690)
1. Control board bracket ( page 7 "Control Board")
2. Insert the stapler unit [A] into the rear.

3. Rear end reference fence [A] ( ×2)

4. Entrance cover ( page 25 "Stapler Home Position Sensor" )

5. Cover open/close switch unit [A] ( ×1, ×2)

SM 29 D690
Stapler Unit

6. Harness guide unit [A] ( ×1)

7. Move the stapler unit to the front, and remove the cartridge [A].

 During installation, install the cartridge last.

8. Remove the unit fixing screw of the stapler unit ( ×1)

D690 30 SM
 Stapler Unit

9. Stapler unit [A] ( ×1, ×2)

INTERNAL
FINISHER
SR3130
(D690)

SM 31 D690
Jogger Fence Motor (Front / Rear)

1.24 JOGGER FENCE MOTOR (FRONT / REAR)

1. Base cover ( page 27 "Stapler Displacement Motor")

2. Jogger fence motor (front) [A] ( ×2, ×1)

 During attachment, remove the jogger fence motor (rear) bracket [A], and check that
the motor pulley has not separated from the timing belt.

3. Jogger fence motor (rear) [A] ( ×2, ×1)

D690 32 SM
 Jogger Fence Motor (Front / Rear)

 During attachment, check that the motor pulley has not separated from the timing

INTERNAL
FINISHER
SR3130
(D690)
belt.

SM 33 D690
Jogger Fence Home Position Sensor (Front)

1.25 JOGGER FENCE HOME POSITION SENSOR (FRONT)

1. Paper exit cover ( page 6)

2. Jogger fence home position sensor (front) unit [A] ( ×1, ×1, ×1)

3. Jogger fence home position sensor (front) [A]

D690 34 SM
 Jogger Fence Home Position Sensor (Rear)

1.26 JOGGER FENCE HOME POSITION SENSOR (REAR)

INTERNAL
FINISHER
SR3130
(D690)
1. Paper exit cover ( page 6)
2. Jogger fence home position sensor (rear) unit [A] ( ×1, ×1)

3. Jogger fence home position sensor (rear) [A]

SM 35 D690
Stapler Tray Jam Detection Sensor

1.27 STAPLER TRAY JAM DETECTION SENSOR

1. Paper exit cover ( page 6 )

2. Paper exit roller unit [A] ( ×1)

3. Stapler tray jam detection sensor unit [A] ( ×1, ×1, ×1)

4. Stapler tray jam detection sensor [A]

D690 36 SM
 Paper Detection Sensor

1.28 PAPER DETECTION SENSOR

INTERNAL
FINISHER
SR3130
(D690)
1. Jogger fence motor (rear) ( page 32 )
2. Jogger fence motor (rear) bracket [A] ( ×2, ×3)

3. Paper detection sensor unit [A] ( ×2, ×1, ×1)

4. Paper detection sensor [A]

SM 37 D690
Paper Detection Sensor

 During attachment, stop the sensor actuator from being caught.

D690 38 SM
 Paper Exit Motor (Front)

1.29 PAPER EXIT MOTOR (FRONT)

INTERNAL
FINISHER
SR3130
(D690)
1. Paper exit cover ( page 6 )
2. Control board ( page 7 )
3. Rear cover ( page 10 "Entrance Motor" )
4. Pulley [A], Timing belt [B]

5. Paper exit motor (front) [A] ( ×2, ×1, ×2)

SM 39 D690
Paper Exit Motor (Rear)

1.30 PAPER EXIT MOTOR (REAR)

1. Paper exit motor (front) ( page 39 )

2. Control board bracket ( page 7 "Control Board")
3. Gear [A] ( ×1)

4. Clip ring [A] (2), Shaft bracket [B]

5. Remove the fan, fan defeat ( ×2)

D690 40 SM
 Paper Exit Motor (Rear)

6. Paper exit motor (rear) [A] ( ×2, ×1)

INTERNAL
FINISHER
SR3130
(D690)

SM 41 D690
 D691
INTERNAL SHIFT TRAY SH3070

Latest Release: -
Initial Release: November, 2016
Copyright (c) 2016 Ricoh Co.,Ltd.

Rev. 08/12/2021
 INTERNAL SHIFT TRAY SH3070
(D691)
TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ............................................. 1

1.1 CONTROLLER BOARD................................................................................ 1
1.2 SHIFT MOTOR ............................................................................................. 2

SM i D691
READ THIS FIRST

Safety and Symbols

This manual uses several symbols and abbreviations. The meaning of those symbols and
abbreviations are as follows:

Clip ring

Screw

Connector

Clamp

SEF Short Edge Feed

LEF Long Edge Feed

[A] Short Edge Feed (SEF)

[B] Long Edge Feed (LEF)

Trademarks
Microsoft®, Windows®, and MS-DOS® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and /or other countries.
PostScript® is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems, Incorporated.
PCL® is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
Ethernet® is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.
PowerPC® is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and may be trademarks of
their respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights involved with those marks.
 Controller Board

1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

SHIFT TRAY
INTERNAL

SH3070
(D691)
1.1 CONTROLLER BOARD

1. Shift tray [A]

2. Upper tray [A]

3. Controller board [A]

SM 1 D691
Shift Motor

1.2 SHIFT MOTOR

1. Upper tray ( page 1 "Controller Board")

2. Interlocking plate [A]

3. Rotating plate [A]

4. Shift motor [A] ( ×1)

D691 2 SM
 D696
LCIT RT3030

Latest Release: -
Initial Release: November, 2016
Copyright (c) 2016 Ricoh Co.,Ltd.

Rev. 08/12/2021
 LCIT RT3030 (D696)
TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ............................................. 1

1.1 REAR COVER .............................................................................................. 1
1.2 FRONT COVER ........................................................................................... 4
1.3 UPPER COVER ........................................................................................... 5
1.4 RIGHT COVER............................................................................................. 6
1.5 PICK-UP ROLLER, FEED ROLLER, FRICTION ROLLER............................ 7
1.6 PAPER FEED MOTOR................................................................................. 9
1.7 TRANSPORT MOTOR ............................................................................... 10
1.8 TRAY LIFT UNIT ........................................................................................ 11
1.9 CONTROLLER BOARD.............................................................................. 12
1.10 LCT SET SWITCH (FRONT)................................................................. 13
1.11 LCT SET SWITCH (REAR) ................................................................... 14
1.12 PAPER FEED SENSOR, PAPER END SENSOR, LIMIT SENSOR,
TRANSPORT SENSOR ................................................................................... 15

2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS ........................................................... 18

2.1 LCIT RT3030 (D696) .................................................................................. 18
2.1.1 CHANGES FROM THE PREVIOUS MACHINE ................................. 18
2.1.2 PARTS LAYOUT ............................................................................... 19
2.2 MECHANISM .............................................................................................. 21
2.2.1 PAPER FEED SEPARATING MECHANISM...................................... 21
2.2.2 DRIVE MECHANISM ......................................................................... 22
2.2.3 TRAY LIFT/DESCENT MECHANISM ................................................ 23
2.2.4 REMAINING PAPER/PAPER END DETECTION .............................. 24

SM i D696
READ THIS FIRST

Safety and Symbols

This manual uses several symbols and abbreviations. The meaning of those symbols and
abbreviations are as follows:

Clip ring

Screw

Connector

Clamp

SEF Short Edge Feed

LEF Long Edge Feed

[A] Short Edge Feed (SEF)

[B] Long Edge Feed (LEF)

Trademarks
Microsoft®, Windows®, and MS-DOS® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and /or other countries.
PostScript® is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems, Incorporated.
PCL® is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
Ethernet® is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.
PowerPC® is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and may be trademarks of
their respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights involved with those marks.

SM 3 D696
The Aim of Anti-tip Components and Precautions
The anti-tip components are necessary for meeting the requirements of IEC60950-1, the
international standard for safety.
The aim of these components is to prevent the products, which are heavy in weight, from toppling
as a result of people running into or leaning onto the products, which can lead to serious
accidents such as persons becoming trapped under the product. (U.S.: UL60950-1, Europe:
EN60950-1)
Therefore, removal of such components must always be with the consent of the customer.
Do not remove them at your own judgment.

SM 4 D696
 Rear Cover

1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

1.1 REAR COVER

LCIT RT3030
(D696)
1. Pull out the LCT [A].

2. Cable cover [A] ( ×1)

SM 1 D696
 Rear Cover
3. Cable bracket [A] ( ×1, ×1)

LCIT RT3030
(D696)
4. Open the right cover [A].

SM 2 D696
 Rear Cover
5. Rear cover [A] ( ×3)

LCIT RT3030
(D696)

SM 3 D696
 Front Cover

1.2 FRONT COVER

LCIT RT3030
1. Open the right cover ( page 6)

(D696)
2. Front cover [A] ( ×4)

SM 4 D696
 Upper Cover

1.3 UPPER COVER

LCIT RT3030
1. Front cover ( page 4)

(D696)
2. Rear cover ( page 1)
3. Upper cover [A] ( ×2)

SM 5 D696
 Right Cover

1.4 RIGHT COVER

LCIT RT3030
1. Front cover ( page 4 )

(D696)
2. Right cover [A] ( ×1, ×1)

SM 6 D696
 Pick-up Roller, Feed Roller, Friction Roller

1.5 PICK-UP ROLLER, FEED ROLLER, FRICTION ROLLER

1. Open the right cover.

LCIT RT3030
(D696)
3. Pick-up roller [A] ( ×1)

4. Sensor bracket [A] ( ×2)

SM 7 D696
 Pick-up Roller, Feed Roller, Friction Roller
2. Feed roller [A] ( ×1)

LCIT RT3030
(D696)
5. Friction roller [A] ( ×1)

SM 8 D696
 Paper Feed Motor

1.6 PAPER FEED MOTOR

LCIT RT3030
1. Rear cover ( page 1)

(D696)
2. Paper feed motor [A] ( ×2, ×1)

SM 9 D696
 Transport Motor

1.7 TRANSPORT MOTOR

LCIT RT3030
1. Rear cover ( page 1)

(D696)
2. Transport motor [A] ( ×2, ×1)

SM 10 D696
 Tray Lift Unit

1.8 TRAY LIFT UNIT

LCIT RT3030
1. Rear cover ( page 1)

(D696)
2. Tray lift unit [A] ( ×3, ×1, ×10)

SM 11 D696
 Controller Board

1.9 CONTROLLER BOARD

LCIT RT3030
1. Rear cover ( page 1)

(D696)
2. Controller board [A] ( ×4, ×9, ×2)

SM 12 D696
 LCT Set Switch (Front)

1.10 LCT SET SWITCH (FRONT)

LCIT RT3030
1. Front cover ( page 1)

(D696)
2. LCT set switch (front) [A] ( ×1)

SM 13 D696
 LCT Set Switch (Rear)

1.11 LCT SET SWITCH (REAR)

LCIT RT3030
1. Front cover ( page 4)

(D696)
2. LCT set switch (rear) [A] ( ×1)

SM 14 D696
 Paper Feed Sensor, Paper End Sensor, Limit Sensor, Transport Sensor

1.12 PAPER FEED SENSOR, PAPER END SENSOR, LIMIT

SENSOR, TRANSPORT SENSOR

LCIT RT3030
(D696)
1. Upper cover ( page 5)
2. Paper feed unit [A] ( ×2, ×1, ×2)

3. Paper feed unit cover [A] ( ×5)

SM 15 D696
 Paper Feed Sensor, Paper End Sensor, Limit Sensor, Transport Sensor
4. Paper feed sensor [A] ( ×1)

LCIT RT3030
(D696)
5. Paper end sensor [A] ( ×1)

6. Limit sensor [A] ( ×1)

SM 16 D696
 Paper Feed Sensor, Paper End Sensor, Limit Sensor, Transport Sensor
7. Transport sensor [A] ( ×1)

LCIT RT3030
(D696)

SM 17 D696
 LCIT RT3030 (D696)

2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS

LCIT RT3030
2.1 LCIT RT3030 (D696)

(D696)
2.1.1 CHANGES FROM THE PREVIOUS MACHINE
The maximum paper quantity is increased.

The bottom part [B] of the tray holder [A] which holds the paper tray and the timing belt has been
shortened to increase the maximum paper quantity ([C]: The tray holder for increasing the LCIT capacity).

A maximum of 1500 sheets of paper (thickness: 0.11 mm) can now be set, but only after changing some of
the parts (a paper tray, a belt pulley, and side fences). For the modification procedure, refer to
“Modification for Increasing the LCIT Capacity” in the installation procedure for LCIT RT3030 (D696) in the
main service manual.

• Tray horizontal adjustment

SM 18 D696
 LCIT RT3030 (D696)
For the previous machine, the paper tray [C] could not be placed on the bottom plate [B], so a jig [A] was
placed in between to make the tray horizontal. For this machine, the paper tray can be placed on the base
plate so the jig is removed.

LCIT RT3030
(D696)
2.1.2 PARTS LAYOUT

No. Description No. Description

1 Friction roller 6 Feed roller

2 Transport sensor 7 Paper end sensor

3 Transport roller 8 Pickup roller

SM 19 D696
 LCIT RT3030 (D696)

No. Description No. Description

LCIT RT3030
4 Paper feed sensor 9 Remaining paper sensor (inside lift unit)

(D696)
5 Upper limit sensor 10 Lower limit sensor

No. Description No. Description

1 Tray set switch (front) 8 Transport motor

2 Paper feed sensor 9 Paper feed motor

3 Upper limit sensor 10 Remaining paper sensor (inside lift unit)

4 Transport sensor 11 Tray lift motor (inside tray lift unit)

5 Pick-up roller solenoid 12 Interlock switch

6 Paper end sensor 13 Controller board

7 Tray set switch (rear) 14 Lower limit sensor

SM 20 D696
 Mechanism

2.2 MECHANISM

LCIT RT3030
2.2.1 PAPER FEED SEPARATING MECHANISM

(D696)
The tray unit and paper feed transport unit are integrated. The pick-up roller, feed roller and
reverse roller are common with the main frame’s paper feed unit. Both paper feed and paper
separation mechanisms use the same RF paper feed system.

In order to feed the paper at regular intervals, there is a paper feed sensor between the pick-up roller and
the feed roller, and this sensor is used to adjust the paper feed timing.
1. The paper feed motor turns ON, and feeds the first sheet of paper.
2. To prevent the next sheet from being transported, the pick-up solenoid turns ON just
before the trailing edge of the first sheet passes through the pick-up roller, and the pick- up
roller leaves the paper surface.
3. Just before the trailing edge of the first sheet leaves the paper feed roller, the paper feed
motor turns OFF.
However, at this time, if the paper feed sensor does not detect paper (the second sheet is not transported
to the paper feed sensor position), the paper feed motor does not turn OFF. Pre-feed is performed as
follows:
1. The pick-up solenoid turns OFF, and the second sheet of paper is transported to the paper
feed sensor position.
2. When the trailing edge of the second sheet passes the feed roller, the paper feed motor is
turned OFF. The pick-up solenoid remains OFF.
3. Just before the trailing edge of the first sheet passes the feed roller, the pick-up solenoid
turns OFF. The pick-up roller is brought into contact with the paper surface.
If paper is pre-fed, the pick-up solenoid will remain OFF, and this operation will not performed.
1. When the first sheet is transported a specified distance by the downstream transport roller,
the paper feed motor turns ON to feed the second sheet.

SM 21 D696
 Mechanism

LCIT RT3030
(D696)
No. Description No. Description

1 Friction roller 5 Feed roller

2 Transport sensor 6 Paper end sensor

3 Transport roller 7 Pick-up roller

4 Paper feed sensor

2.2.2 DRIVE MECHANISM

The pick-up roller and feed roller are driven by the paper feed motor. The transport roller is driven by the
transport motor. The friction roller is not driven.

SM 22 D696
 Mechanism

2.2.3 TRAY LIFT/DESCENT MECHANISM

The tray lift motor is coupled with the lift shaft, so that when the shaft rotates, the tray bottom plate

LCIT RT3030
rises.

(D696)
Conditions for tray lift
• The main power is turned ON.
• During copying, the tray upper limit sensor is ON (the sensor is not blocked)
• The top cover is closed and the tray upper limit sensor is ON.
• The main machine recovers from low power mode.

• The tray lifts until the upper limit sensor turns OFF (the sensor is blocked).

No. Description

1 Upper limit sensor

2 Actuator

Conditions for tray descent

• The right cover is opened.
• Paper end is detected.

• The tray descends until the lower limit sensor turns OFF (the sensor is blocked).

SM 23 D696
 Mechanism

LCIT RT3030
(D696)
No. Description

1 Remaining paper sensor (inside lift

unit)
2 Tray lift motor

3 Lower limit sensor

4 Tray

2.2.4 REMAINING PAPER/PAPER END DETECTION

Remaining paper detection
Remaining paper in the paper feed tray is detected using a pulse count by the remaining paper sensor.
The paper remaining is displayed on the control panel.

Control panel
Remaining paper Paper end sensor
display
100% OFF 4 bars

70% OFF 3 bars

30% OFF 2 bars

10% OFF 1 bar

Paper end ON None

SM 24 D696
 Mechanism

Paper end detection

There is a reflector-type sensor in the upper stay that detects the upper surface of the paper in the
tray.

No. Description No. Description

1 Paper end sensor 2 Remaining paper sensor

SM 25 D696
 D716
PUNCH UNIT PU3040

Latest Release: -
Initial Release: November, 2016
Copyright (c) 2016 Ricoh Co.,Ltd.

Rev. 08/12/2021
 PUNCH UNIT PU3040 (D716)
TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ............................................. 1

1.1 PUNCH UNIT ............................................................................................... 1
1.2 CONTROLLER BOARD................................................................................ 4
1.3 PUNCH UNIT HOME POSITION SENSOR .................................................. 5
1.4 PUNCH MOTOR........................................................................................... 6
1.5 PUNCH UNIT PULSE DETECTION SENSOR.............................................. 7
1.6 HORIZONTAL REGISTRATION MOVEMENT UNIT HOME POSITION
SENSOR ............................................................................................................ 8
1.7 HORIZONTAL REGISTRATION MOVEMENT UNIT MOTOR ...................... 9
1.8 PUNCH UNIT ............................................................................................. 10
1.9 HORIZONTAL REGISTRATION DETECTION UNIT HOME POSITION
SENSOR .......................................................................................................... 12
1.10 HORIZONTAL REGISTRATION DETECTION UNIT MOTOR............... 14
1.11 PUNCH HOPPER FULL SENSOR........................................................ 15
1.12 HORIZONTAL REGISTRATION SENSOR ........................................... 16
READ THIS FIRST

Safety and Symbols

This manual uses several symbols and abbreviations. The meaning of those symbols and
abbreviations are as follows:

Clip ring

Screw

Connector

Clamp

SEF Short Edge Feed

LEF Long Edge Feed

[A] Short Edge Feed (SEF)

[B] Long Edge Feed (LEF)

Trademarks
Microsoft®, Windows®, and MS-DOS® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and /or other countries.
PostScript® is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems, Incorporated.
PCL® is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
Ethernet® is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.
PowerPC® is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and may be trademarks of
their respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights involved with those marks.
 Punch Unit

1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

PU3040 (D716)
PUNCH UNIT
1.1 PUNCH UNIT

1. Open the front cover [A]

2. Upper left cover [A] ( ×1)

3. Left rear cover [A] ( ×2)

SM 1 D716
Punch Unit

4. Interface cable [A]

5. Inner finisher [A] ( ×1)

6. Hopper [A]

SM 2 D716
 Punch Unit

7. Punch unit front cover [A] ( ×1)

PU3040 (D716)
PUNCH UNIT
8. Punch unit [A] ( ×1)

SM 3 D716
Controller Board

1.2 CONTROLLER BOARD

1. Punch unit (page 1)

2. Invert the punch unit, and remove the control plate cover [A].
Release the claw in the blue circle, lift it in the direction of the blue arrow, and remove.

3. Controller board [A] ( ×2, ×7)

SM 4 D716
 Punch Unit Home Position Sensor

1.3 PUNCH UNIT HOME POSITION SENSOR

PU3040 (D716)
PUNCH UNIT
1. Punch unit (page 1)
2. Upper front cover [A] ( ×1)

3. Push the punch unit [A].

4. Punch unit home position sensor [A] ( ×1, Release the claw)

SM 5 D716
Punch Motor

1.4 PUNCH MOTOR

1. Upper front cover ( page 1)

2. Punch motor unit [A] ( ×2, ×2, ×3)

3. Punch motor [A] ( ×2)

SM 6 D716
 Punch Unit Pulse Detection Sensor

1.5 PUNCH UNIT PULSE DETECTION SENSOR

PU3040 (D716)
PUNCH UNIT
1. Upper front cover (page 1)
2. Punch unit pulse detection sensor [A] ( ×1, ×1, release the claw)

SM 7 D716
Horizontal Registration Movement Unit Home Position Sensor

1.6 HORIZONTAL REGISTRATION MOVEMENT UNIT

HOME POSITION SENSOR

1. Upper front cover (page 1)

2. Horizontal registration movement unit home position sensor unit [A] ( ×1, ×1)

3. Horizontal registration movement unit home position sensor [A](release the claw)

SM 8 D716
 Horizontal Registration Movement Unit Motor

1.7 HORIZONTAL REGISTRATION MOVEMENT UNIT

PU3040 (D716)
PUNCH UNIT
MOTOR

1. Upper front cover (page 1)

2. Horizontal registration movement unit motor unit [A] ( ×2, ×2, ×3)

3. Horizontal registration movement unit motor [A] ( ×2)

SM 9 D716
Punch Unit

1.8 PUNCH UNIT

1. Upper front cover (page 1)

2. Upper cover [A] ( ×2)

3. Horizontal registration movement unit motor unit ( page 9)

4. Upper entrance guide plate [A] ( ×3)

 To prevent it from falling out, press the moving parts [A] of the detached upper inlet
guide plate into the groove in the blue circle.

SM 10 D716
 Punch Unit

PU3040 (D716)
PUNCH UNIT
 During attachment, attach while bringing moving parts close to the left-hand side.

5. Punch unit [A] ( ×1, ×3, ×7)

SM 11 D716
Horizontal Registration Detection Unit Home Position Sensor

1.9 HORIZONTAL REGISTRATION DETECTION UNIT

HOME POSITION SENSOR

1. Upper cover (page 1)

2. Upper entrance guide plate (page 10)
3. Spring [A], Bracket[B] ( ×1)

4. Horizontal registration detection unit [A] ( ×6, ×1)

 When reassembled, the protrusion of the joint needs to be in the notch of the cam.

SM 12 D716
 Horizontal Registration Detection Unit Home Position Sensor

PU3040 (D716)
PUNCH UNIT
5. Horizontal registration detection unit home position sensor [A] ( ×1)

SM 13 D716
Horizontal Registration Detection Unit Motor

1.10 HORIZONTAL REGISTRATION DETECTION UNIT

MOTOR

1. Horizontal registration detection unit (page 12)

2. Horizontal registration detection unit motor [A] ( ×2, ×1)

SM 14 D716
 Punch Hopper Full Sensor

1.11 PUNCH HOPPER FULL SENSOR

PU3040 (D716)
PUNCH UNIT
1. Horizontal Registration Detection Unit ( page 12)
2. Punch hopper full sensor unit [A] ( ×1)

3. Punch hopper full sensor [A] ( ×1)

SM 15 D716
Horizontal Registration Sensor

1.12 HORIZONTAL REGISTRATION SENSOR

1. Horizontal registration detection unit (page 12)

2. Horizontal registration unit bracket [A] ( ×2)

3. Horizontal registration sensor [A] ( ×1)

SM 16 D716
 D725
SIDE TRAY TYPE M3

Latest Release: -
Initial Release: November, 2016
Copyright (c) 2016 Ricoh Co.,Ltd.

Rev. 08/12/2021
 SIDE TRAY TYPE M3 (D725)
TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ............................................. 1

1.1 DRIVE MOTOR UNIT ................................................................................... 1
1.2 UPPER PAPER EXIT SENSOR ................................................................... 4
1.3 LEFT PAPER EXIT SENSOR ....................................................................... 7
1.4 UPPER PAPER EXIT TRAY SET SWITCH .................................................. 8
1.5 PAPER EXIT SWITCHING UNIT SET SWITCH ........................................... 9

SM i D725
READ THIS FIRST

Safety and Symbols

This manual uses several symbols and abbreviations. The meaning of those symbols and
abbreviations are as follows:

Clip ring

Screw

Connector

Clamp

SEF Short Edge Feed

LEF Long Edge Feed

[A] Short Edge Feed (SEF)

[B] Long Edge Feed (LEF)

Trademarks
Microsoft®, Windows®, and MS-DOS® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and /or other countries.
PostScript® is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems, Incorporated.
PCL® is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
Ethernet® is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.
PowerPC® is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and may be trademarks of
their respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights involved with those marks.
 Drive Motor Unit

1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

SIDE TRAY TYPE

M3 (D725)
1.1 DRIVE MOTOR UNIT

1. Upper extension tray [A], Left extension tray [B]

2. Fixing plate [A] ( ×1)

SM 1 D725
Drive Motor Unit

3. Side tray [A]

4. Drive motor unit cover [A] ( ×2)

D725 2 SM
 Drive Motor Unit

5. Side tray rear cover [A] ( ×1)

SIDE TRAY TYPE

M3 (D725)
6. Drive motor unit [A] ( ×3, ×2)

SM 3 D725
Upper Paper Exit Sensor

1.2 UPPER PAPER EXIT SENSOR

1. Side tray ( page 1 "Drive Motor Unit")

2. Upper paper exit tray [A]

3. Drive motor unit cover ( page 1 "Drive Motor Unit")

4. Side tray rear cover ( page 1 "Drive Motor Unit")
5. Left paper exit cover [A] ( ×1)

D725 4 SM
 Upper Paper Exit Sensor

6. Paper exit switching unit [A] ( ×1)

SIDE TRAY TYPE

M3 (D725)
7. Paper exit switching unit cover [A] ( ×3)

8. Guide plate [A]

SM 5 D725
Upper Paper Exit Sensor

9. Guide plate [A] ( ×1)

10. Upper paper exit sensor [A]

D725 6 SM
 Left Paper Exit Sensor

SIDE TRAY TYPE

1.3 LEFT PAPER EXIT SENSOR

M3 (D725)
1. Paper exit tray ( page 4 "Upper Paper Exit Sensor")
2. Turn it upside down.

3. Left paper exit sensor [A] ( ×1)

SM 7 D725
Upper Paper Exit Tray Set Switch

1.4 UPPER PAPER EXIT TRAY SET SWITCH

1. Upper paper exit tray ( page 4 "Upper Paper Exit Sensor")

2. Upper paper exit tray set switch cover [A]

3. Upper paper exit tray set switch [A]

D725 8 SM
 Paper Exit Switching Unit Set Switch

SIDE TRAY TYPE

1.5 PAPER EXIT SWITCHING UNIT SET SWITCH

M3 (D725)
1. Open the Paper exit switching unit [A]

2. Paper exit switching unit set switch cover [A]

3. Paper exit switching unit set switch [A]

SM 9 D725
 D766
INTERNAL FINISHER SR3180

Latest Release: -
Initial Release: November, 2016
Copyright (c) 2016 Ricoh Co.,Ltd.

Rev. 08/12/2021
 INTERNAL FINISHER SR3180 (D766)
TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ............................................. 1

1.1 INTERNAL FINISHER SR3180..................................................................... 1
1.2 FINISHER FRONT COVER .......................................................................... 3
1.3 FINISHER UPPER COVER .......................................................................... 4
1.4 PAPER OUTPUT TRAY ............................................................................... 5
1.5 PAPER OUTPUT COVER ............................................................................ 6
1.6 REAR COVER .............................................................................................. 7
1.7 CONTROL BOARD ...................................................................................... 8
1.8 ENTRANCE SENSOR .................................................................................. 9
1.9 TRANSPORT MOTOR ............................................................................... 10
1.10 SHIFT MOTOR ..................................................................................... 11
1.11 JUNCTION SOLENOID MOTOR .......................................................... 12
1.12 EXIT PAPER PRESSURE MOTOR ...................................................... 13
1.13 SIDE-TO-SIDE REGISTRATION SENSOR .......................................... 14
1.14 OPEN/CLOSE DOOR SWITCH ............................................................ 15
1.15 SHIFT HOME POSITION SENSOR ...................................................... 16
1.16 PAPER OUTPUT SENSOR .................................................................. 17
1.17 PAPER OUTPUT PRESSURE HP SENSOR ........................................ 18
1.18 JUNCTION SOLENOID MOTOR HP SENSOR..................................... 19
1.19 PAPER OUTPUT FULL SENSOR 1/ PAPER OUTPUT FULL SENSOR 2
(STAPLE) ......................................................................................................... 20
1.20 STAPLER UNIT .................................................................................... 21
1.21 STAPLER DRIVE HP SENSOR ............................................................ 23
1.22 STAPLER MOTOR ............................................................................... 24

SM i D766
READ THIS FIRST

Safety and Symbols

This manual uses several symbols and abbreviations. The meaning of those symbols and
abbreviations are as follows:

Clip ring

Screw

Connector

Clamp

SEF Short Edge Feed

LEF Long Edge Feed

[A] Short Edge Feed (SEF)

[B] Long Edge Feed (LEF)

Trademarks
Microsoft®, Windows®, and MS-DOS® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and /or other countries.
PostScript® is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems, Incorporated.
PCL® is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
Ethernet® is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.
PowerPC® is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and may be trademarks of
their respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights involved with those marks.

SM 3 D766
 Internal Finisher SR3180

1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

SR3180 (D766)
INTERNAL
FINISHER
1.1 INTERNAL FINISHER SR3180

1. Interface cable [A]

2. Paper output tray [A] ( × 2)

SM 1 D766
Internal Finisher SR3180

3. Cover [A] ( × 2)

4. Remove the screw on the Finisher [A] ( × 1).

5. Finisher [A].

D766 2 SM
 Finisher Front Cover

1.2 FINISHER FRONT COVER

SR3180 (D766)
INTERNAL
FINISHER
1. Finisher (page 1)
2. Paper output tray (page 5)
3. Paper output cover (page 6)
4. Finisher front cover [A] ( × 2).

SM 3 D766
Finisher Upper Cover

1.3 FINISHER UPPER COVER

1. Finisher (page 1)
2. Paper output tray (page 5)
3. Paper output cover (page 6)
4. Finisher front cover (page 3)
5. Finisher upper cover [A] ( × 1).

D766 4 SM
 Paper output tray

1.4 PAPER OUTPUT TRAY

SR3180 (D766)
INTERNAL
FINISHER
1. Paper output tray [A] ( × 2).

SM 5 D766
Paper output cover

1.5 PAPER OUTPUT COVER

1. Finisher (page 1)
2. Paper output tray (page 5)
3. Paper output cover [A] ( × 2).

D766 6 SM
 Rear cover

1.6 REAR COVER

SR3180 (D766)
INTERNAL
FINISHER
1. Finisher (page 1)
2. Rear cover [A] ( × 2)

 The screw on the right as you face the rear cover [A] is a step screw

SM 7 D766
Control Board

1.7 CONTROL BOARD

1. Finisher (page 1)
2. Paper output tray (page 5)
3. Paper output cover (page 6)
4. Control board [A] ( ×4, × all)

D766 8 SM
 Entrance Sensor

1.8 ENTRANCE SENSOR

SR3180 (D766)
INTERNAL
FINISHER
1. Finisher(page 1)
2. Rear cover (page 7)
3. Remove the entrance sensor [A] together with the bracket ( × 1, × 1).

4. Entrance sensor [A] ( × 1, × 1, release the claw).

SM 9 D766
Transport Motor

1.9 TRANSPORT MOTOR

1. Finisher (page 1)
2. Paper output tray (page 5)
3. Paper output cover (page 6)
4. Finisher front cover (page 3)
5. Disconnect the connecter attached to the transport motor [A] ( × 1).

6. Loosen the screw securing the spring bracket, and then release the belt tension ( ×
1).

7. Transport motor [A] ( ×2)

D766 10 SM
 Shift Motor

1.10 SHIFT MOTOR

SR3180 (D766)
INTERNAL
FINISHER
1. Finisher (page 1)
2. Paper output tray (page 5)
3. Finisher front cover (page 3)
4. Shift motor [A] ( × 2, × 1, × 2)

SM 11 D766
Junction solenoid motor

1.11 JUNCTION SOLENOID MOTOR

1. Finisher (page 1)
2. Paper output tray (page 5)
3. Paper output cover(page 6)
4. Release the clamp ( × 1).

5. Junction solenoid motor [A] ( × 2, × 1).

D766 12 SM
 Exit Paper Pressure Motor

1.12 EXIT PAPER PRESSURE MOTOR

SR3180 (D766)
INTERNAL
FINISHER
1. Finisher (page 1)
2. Paper output tray (page 5)
3. Paper output cover (page 6)
4. Rear cover (page 7)
5. Exit paper pressure motor [A] ( × 2).

6. Remove the clamp ( × 1).

7. Exit paper pressure motor [A] ( × 1).

SM 13 D766
Side-to-Side Registration Sensor

1.13 SIDE-TO-SIDE REGISTRATION SENSOR

1. Finisher (page 1)
2. Paper output tray (page 5)
3. Paper output cover (page 6)
4. Finisher front cover (page 3)
5. Finisher upper cover
6. Remove the screws ( × 2).

7. Remove the Side-to-Side registration sensor [A] together with the bracket ( × 1).

8. Side-to-Side registration sensor [A] (release the claw).

D766 14 SM
 Open/Close Door Switch

1.14 OPEN/CLOSE DOOR SWITCH

SR3180 (D766)
INTERNAL
FINISHER
1. Rear cover (page 7)
2. Remove the screw ( × 1).

3. Open/close door switch [A] ( × 1).

SM 15 D766
Shift Home Position Sensor

1.15 SHIFT HOME POSITION SENSOR

1. Finisher (page 1)
2. Paper output tray (page 5)
3. Paper output cover (page 6)
4. Finisher front cover (page 3)
5. Remove the shift home position sensor [A] together with the bracket ( × 1, × 1).

6. Shift home position sensor [A] ( × 1, release the claw).

D766 16 SM
 Paper output sensor

1.16 PAPER OUTPUT SENSOR

SR3180 (D766)
INTERNAL
FINISHER
1. Finisher (page 1)
2. Paper output tray (page 5)
3. Paper output cover (page 6)
4. Finisher front cover (page 3)
5. Finisher upper cover (page 4)
6. Remove the screw ( × 1).

7. Paper output sensor [A] ( × 1, release the claw).

SM 17 D766
Paper output pressure HP sensor

1.17 PAPER OUTPUT PRESSURE HP SENSOR

1. Loosen the screw and release the clamp ( × 1, × 1).

2. Remove the paper output pressure HP sensor [A] ( × 1, release the claw).

D766 18 SM
 Junction solenoid motor HP sensor

1.18 JUNCTION SOLENOID MOTOR HP SENSOR

SR3180 (D766)
INTERNAL
FINISHER
1. Remove the screw ( × 1).

2. Junction solenoid motor HP sensor [A] ( ×1, ×1, release the claws)

SM 19 D766
Paper output full sensor 1/ Paper output full sensor 2 (Staple)

1.19 PAPER OUTPUT FULL SENSOR 1/ PAPER OUTPUT

FULL SENSOR 2 (STAPLE)

1. Remove the paper output cover (page 6)

2. Remove the paper output full sensor 1 [A], paper output full sensor 2 [B] ( × 1, ×
1, for each. Release the claws)

D766 20 SM
 Stapler Unit

1.20 STAPLER UNIT

SR3180 (D766)
INTERNAL
FINISHER
1. Disconnect the connecter and release the clamps ( × 1, × 2).

2. Reverse the Finisher [A].

3. Remove the screws that secure the stapler unit [A] ( × 5).

SM 21 D766
Stapler Unit

4. Stapler unit [A] ( × 1)

D766 22 SM
 Stapler drive HP sensor

1.21 STAPLER DRIVE HP SENSOR

SR3180 (D766)
INTERNAL
FINISHER
1. Stapler unit (page 21)
2. Loosen the screw and release the clamp ( × 1, × 1).

3. Remove the stapler drive HP sensor [A] from the bracket ( × 1, × 1).

SM 23 D766
Stapler Motor

1.22 STAPLER MOTOR

1. Stapler unit (page 21)

2. Stapler drive HP sensor (page 23)
3. Stapler motor [A] ( × 2).

D766 24 SM
 D779
ARDF DF3090

Latest Release: -
Initial Release: November, 2016
Copyright (c) 2016 Ricoh Co.,Ltd.

Rev. 08/12/2021
 ARDF DF3090 (D779)
TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ............................................. 1

1.1 DOCUMENT FEEDER ................................................................................. 1
1.1.1 ORIGINAL FEED UNIT ........................................................................ 1
1.2 EXTERIOR COVERS AND ORIGINAL TRAY............................................... 2
1.2.1 REAR COVER ..................................................................................... 2
1.2.2 FRONT COVER AND ORIGINAL TRAY .............................................. 2
1.2.3 HINGE ................................................................................................. 3
1.3 SENSORS AND SWITCH........................................................................... 11
1.3.1 ORIGINAL LENGTH SENSORS AND ORIGINAL SENSOR.............. 11
1.3.2 ORIGINAL SET SENSOR.................................................................. 12
1.3.3 ORIGINAL WIDTH SENSORS AND SKEW CORRECTION SENSOR14
1.3.4 ORIGINAL EXIT SENSOR................................................................. 14
1.3.5 REGISTRATION SENSOR ................................................................ 15
1.3.6 DF POSITION SENSOR .................................................................... 16
1.3.7 LEFT COVER SWITCH ..................................................................... 16
1.4 MOTORS, SOLENOIDS, AND CLUTCHES ................................................ 17
1.4.1 FEED MOTOR................................................................................... 17
1.4.2 TRANSPORT MOTOR ...................................................................... 18
1.4.3 STAMP SOLENOID ........................................................................... 19
1.4.4 PICK-UP SOLENOID......................................................................... 21
1.4.5 INVERTER SOLENOID ..................................................................... 21
1.4.6 FEED CLUTCH ................................................................................. 22
1.5 BELT AND ROLLERS ................................................................................ 23
1.5.1 FEED BELT ....................................................................................... 23
1.5.2 PICK-UP ROLLER ............................................................................. 24
1.5.3 SEPARATION ROLLER .................................................................... 24
1.6 BOARD....................................................................................................... 26
1.6.1 ARDF DRIVE BOARD ....................................................................... 26

2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS ........................................................... 27

2.1 ARDF DF3090 (D779) ................................................................................ 27
2.1.1 PARTS LAYOUT ............................................................................... 27
2.1.2 MECHANISM ..................................................................................... 28
Original Detection ................................................................................. 28
Original Size Detection / Original Set Detection Mechanism ................. 28
SM i D779
 Paper Feed / Separation Mechanism .................................................... 29
Skew Correction Mechanism, Registration Mechanism ......................... 30
2.1.3 SP6-901-002 (SETTING TO GIVE PRIORITY TO STACKABILITY) .. 33
READ THIS FIRST

Safety and Symbols

This manual uses several symbols and abbreviations. The meaning of those symbols and
abbreviations are as follows:

Symbol What it means

Clip ring

Screw

Connector

Clamp

E-ring

Flat Flexible Cable

Timing Belt
SEF Short Edge Feed

LEF Long Edge Feed

K Black

C Cyan

M Magenta

Y Yellow

B/W, BW Black and White

FC Full color

[A] Short Edge Feed (SEF)

[B] Long Edge Feed (LEF)
Trademarks
Microsoft®, Windows®, and MS-DOS® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and /or other countries.
PostScript® is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems, Incorporated.
PCL® is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
Ethernet® is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.
PowerPC® is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and may be trademarks of
their respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights involved with those marks.
 Document Feeder

1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

ARDF DF3090
(D779)
1.1 DOCUMENT FEEDER

1.1.1 ORIGINAL FEED UNIT

1. Open the left cover.
2. Original feed unit [A]

• Pull the original feed unit forward to release the back side of the shaft.

SM 1 D766
Exterior Covers and Original Tray

1.2 EXTERIOR COVERS AND ORIGINAL TRAY

1.2.1 REAR COVER

1. Open the left cover [A].
2. Open the original tray [B].
3. Rear cover [C] ( ×1, hook ×5)

1.2.2 FRONT COVER AND ORIGINAL TRAY

1. Open the left cover.
2. Rear cover (Rear Cover)
3. Front cover [A] ( ×1)

• Keep the original tray open when removing the front cover.

D766 2 SM
 Exterior Covers and Original Tray

4. Original tray [A] ( ×1, ×1, ×1)

ARDF DF3090
(D779)
1.2.3 HINGE
1. Remove the ARDF from the main machine.
2. Place the ARDF on a flat surface, and place it so that the hinge does not hit against that
surface.

• Be careful not to scratch the scanning area [A] (guide plate and mylar).
• Be careful not to hook the actuator [B]. (It is a movable actuator; it is stored in the ARDF when
you push it and it comes back because of a spring.)

SM 3 D766
Exterior Covers and Original Tray

3. Remove the rear cover of the ARDF.

4. Remove the following parts.

• Clamp
• Harness
• Connectors [A] ( ×3)
• Screw [B] ( ×1)

5. Remove the screws [A] and spring [B] of the feed motor bracket, and remove the feed motor
unit. ( ×2, spring ×1)

D766 4 SM
 Exterior Covers and Original Tray

6. Remove the resin ring [A] and flanges, and remove the timing belt. Then, remove the reverse

ARDF DF3090
torque limiter [B] from the shaft.

(D779)
7. Disconnect the link [A] of the junction gate, and remove the E-ring [B] of the fixing shaft.
( ×1)

8. Loosen the screw [A] of the belt tension unit and remove the spring [B]. ( ×1, spring ×1)

SM 5 D766
Exterior Covers and Original Tray

9. Remove the screws [A] of the motor bracket, and remove the transport motor unit. ( ×2)

10. Remove the belt tension unit and screw [A], and pull out the hinge fixing shaft [B] (do not
remove the E-ring on the fixing shaft side).

11. Remove the step screws and springs [A] of the hinge, and remove the hinge [B]. ( ×2,
spring ×2)

• Grease is applied to the step screws.

D766 6 SM
 Exterior Covers and Original Tray

12. Insert the left hinge with a damper [A] and insert the hinge fixing shaft [B].

ARDF DF3090
(D779)
13. Fix the hinge fixing shaft with an E-ring, and insert the link [B] of the junction gate. ( ×1)
After inserting the link, pull it slightly to check that it does not fall out.

14. Attach the step screws and springs of the hinge. After attaching them, push the screw top to
check that the screws are pushed down.
When the screws do not move, the step screws may be fixed with the plate stay. Loosen and
fix the screws again.

SM 7 D766
Exterior Covers and Original Tray

15. Attach the reverse torque limiter [A].

Put the torque limiter on the shaft, hook the timing belt, attach the flange, and fix it with the
resin ring.

16. Attach the transport motor unit. ( ×2)

Attach the bracket to the plate, hook the timing belt onto the motor pulley, and hook the
spring.

Do not fix the screws [A] completely, so that the motor unit can move left and right.

17. Rotate the white gear [A] by hand to warm up the timing belt. ( ×2)
Fix the screws [B] of the feed motor bracket completely, which were attached in step 16.

(The picture has been taken after attaching the harness guide.)

D766 8 SM
 Exterior Covers and Original Tray

18. Attach the belt tension unit. Do not fix the screw [A] completely. Move the cutout of the belt

ARDF DF3090
tension unit to fit the hole [B] in the rear plate. ( ×1)

(D779)
19. Hook the belt [A] onto the pulley of the transport motor unit, and insert the shaft into the hole
in the rear plate, shown in step 18.

20. Fix the two screws [A] of the transport motor unit, and hook the spring [B] of the belt tension
unit. Do not fix the screw [C] of the belt tension completely. ( ×3, spring×1)

SM 9 D766
Exterior Covers and Original Tray

21. Attach the harness guide and fix it with the screw [A]. ( ×1)
The harness [B] of the clutch should be passed as shown below.

22. Insert the connector of the motor and the connector of the cooling fan, and fix the harness
with the clamp. ( ×2, ×1)

D766 10 SM
 Sensors and Switch

1.3 SENSORS AND SWITCH

ARDF DF3090
(D779)
1.3.1 ORIGINAL LENGTH SENSORS AND ORIGINAL SENSOR
1. Original Tray (Front Cover and Original Tray)
2. Tray cover [A] ( ×3)

3. Remove the following items:

• Original sensor [A] ( ×1)
• Original length sensors [B] ( ×1 each)

SM 11 D766
Sensors and Switch

1.3.2 ORIGINAL SET SENSOR

1. Original feed unit (Original Feed Unit)
2. Original tray (Front Cover and Original Tray)
3. Original feed-in guide plate [A] ( ×3)

4. Feed guide [A]

5. Original turn guide plate [A] (hook ×2)

D766 12 SM
 Sensors and Switch

ARDF DF3090
(D779)
6. Original set sensor bracket [A] (hook ×2)

7. Original set sensor [A] ( ×1)

SM 13 D766
Sensors and Switch

1.3.3 ORIGINAL WIDTH SENSORS AND SKEW CORRECTION

SENSOR
1. Original turn guide plate (Original Set Sensor)
2. Original width sensors [A] ( ×1 each) and skew correction sensor [B] with bracket ( ×1,
×1)

1.3.4 ORIGINAL EXIT SENSOR

1. Original feed-in guide plate (Original Set Sensor)

• The original exit sensor [A] is located in the ARDF mainframe.

D766 14 SM
 Sensors and Switch

2. Original exit sensor bracket [A] ( ×1)

ARDF DF3090
(D779)
3. Original exit sensor [A] ( ×1)

1.3.5 REGISTRATION SENSOR

1. Original feed-in guide plate (Original Set Sensor)
2. Registration sensor [A] ( ×1)

SM 15 D766
Sensors and Switch

1.3.6 DF POSITION SENSOR

1. ARDF Drive Board (ARDF Drive Board)
2. DF position sensor with bracket [A] ( ×1)

3. DF position sensor [A] ( ×1)

1.3.7 LEFT COVER SWITCH

1. Rear cover (Rear Cover)
2. Left cover switch [A] ( ×2, ×2)

D766 16 SM
 Motors, Solenoids, and Clutches

1.4 MOTORS, SOLENOIDS, AND CLUTCHES

ARDF DF3090
(D779)
1.4.1 FEED MOTOR
1. Rear cover (Rear Cover)
2. Feed motor harness [A] ( ×1)

3. Harness guide [A] ( ×5)

SM 17 D766
Motors, Solenoids, and Clutches

4. Feed motor with bracket [A] ( ×2, spring [B]×1, ×1)

5. Feed motor [A] ( ×2)

1.4.2 TRANSPORT MOTOR

1. Rear cover (Rear Cover)
2. Transport motor bracket [A] (spring ×1, ×2, ×1)

D766 18 SM
 Motors, Solenoids, and Clutches

3. Transport motor [A] ( ×2)

ARDF DF3090
(D779)
1.4.3 STAMP SOLENOID
1. Rear cover (Rear Cover)
2. Stamp solenoid harness [A] ( ×1, ×1)

3. Open the DF and remove the platen sheet [A].

SM 19 D766
Motors, Solenoids, and Clutches

4. Stamp solenoid cover [A] ( ×1)

5. Stamp solenoid [A] ( ×1)

6. Pull out the harness [A].

D766 20 SM
 Motors, Solenoids, and Clutches

1.4.4 PICK-UP SOLENOID

ARDF DF3090
1. Rear cover (Rear Cover)

(D779)
2. Harness guide (Feed Motor)
3. Pick-up solenoid [B] ( ×2, ×1)

1.4.5 INVERTER SOLENOID

1. Rear cover (Rear Cover)
2. Harness guide (Feed Motor)
3. Inverter solenoid [A] ( ×2, ×1, ×1, gear ×1, gear cover ×1, ×1)

SM 21 D766
Motors, Solenoids, and Clutches

1.4.6 FEED CLUTCH

1. Rear cover (Rear Cover)
2. Original feed unit (Original Feed Unit)
3. Feed clutch [A] ( ×2, bushing ×1, shaft ×1, ×1, ×1)

D766 22 SM
 Belt and Rollers

1.5 BELT AND ROLLERS

ARDF DF3090
(D779)
1.5.1 FEED BELT
1. Original feed unit (Original Feed Unit)
2. Feed belt cover [A] (spring×1)

• When reattaching the feed belt cover, make sure that the projection [B] of
the feed belt cover is on the guide plate rear [C].
3. Belt tension unit [D]

SM 23 D766
Belt and Rollers

4. Feed belt [E]

1.5.2 PICK-UP ROLLER

1. Original feed unit (Original Feed Unit)
2. Pick-up roller [A] ( ×1)

1.5.3 SEPARATION ROLLER

1. Original Feed Unit (Original Feed Unit)
2. Separation roller cover [A]

D766 24 SM
 Belt and Rollers

3. Separation roller [A] ( ×1)

ARDF DF3090
(D779)

SM 25 D766
Board

1.6 BOARD

1.6.1 ARDF DRIVE BOARD

1. Rear cover (Rear Cover)
2. ARDF drive board [A] ( ×2, ×7)

D766 26 SM
 ARDF DF3090 (D779)

2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS

ARDF DF3090
(D779)
2.1 ARDF DF3090 (D779)

2.1.1 PARTS LAYOUT

No. Description No. Description

1 Original Width Sensor 5 (LL) 13 Original Length Sensor (M)

2 Original Width Sensor 4 (L) 14 Original Length Sensor (L)

3 Original Width Sensor 3 (M) 15 DF Position Sensor

4 Original Width Sensor 2 (S) 16 Transport Motor

5 Original Width Sensor 1 (SS) 17 Feed Clutch

6 Skew Correction Sensor 18 Cooling Fan Motor

SM 27 D766
ARDF DF3090 (D779)

No. Description No. Description

7 Registration Sensor 19 Cover Switch

8 Original Exit Sensor 20 Pick-up Solenoid

9 Original Set Sensor 21 Feed Motor

10 Stamp Solenoid 22 Inverter Solenoid

11 Original Sensor 23 ARDF Drive Board

12 Original Length Sensor (S) - -

2.1.2 MECHANISM

Original Detection
When an original is placed on the original tray correctly, the edge of the original pushes up the
feeler of the original sensor.

Original Size Detection / Original Set Detection Mechanism

Five original width sensors detect the width of the original just when the leading edge of the
original passes the interval sensor. Three original length sensors on the original table detect the
length. These two pieces of size information summarize the original size.

Size (Width x Length: mm) Width Detection Length Detection

1 2 3 4 5 S M L
1 A3 SEF (297 x 420) On On On On On On On On

2 B4 SEF (257 x 364) On On On - - On On On

3 A4 SEF (210 x 297) On On - - - On On -

4 A4 LEF (297 x 210) On On On On On - - -

5 B5 SEF (182 x 257) On - - - - On -

6 B5 LEF (257 x 182) On On On - - -

7 A5 SEF (148 x 210) On - - - - -

8 A5 LEF (210 x 148) On On - - - -

9 B6 SEF (128 x 182) - - - - - -

10 B6 LEF (182 x 128) On - - - - - - -

11 11" x 17" SEF (DLT) On On On On - On On On*

12 11" x 15" SEF On On On On - On On On *

D766 28 SM
 ARDF DF3090 (D779)

Size (Width x Length: mm) Width Detection Length Detection

ARDF DF3090
1 2 3 4 5 S M L

(D779)
13 8 1/2" x 11" SEF (LT) On On - - - On - -

14 11" x 81/2" LEF (LT) On On On On - - - -

* The machine cannot tell the difference between certain original sizes, such as DLT (11 x 17”)
and 11 x 15”. The machine assumes such originals are 11 x 17”. To change this, use SP mode.

Sensor Position

Description
A Original Width Sensors

B Original Set Sensor

C Original Length Sensors

Paper Feed / Separation Mechanism

The separation mechanism uses the RF method.

When the originals are placed and [Start] is pressed, the paper feed solenoid is turned ON and
the pickup roller [A] goes down to the original. At this time, the paper feed motor [B] switches on
and the pickup roller and paper feed motor [B] start rotating. Then a sheet of paper is fed.

SM 29 D766
ARDF DF3090 (D779)

Description
A Pickup Roller

B Paper Feed Motor

C Paper Feed Belt

Skew Correction Mechanism, Registration Mechanism

• Skew Correction
This machine adjusts paper skew by hitting the originals against the pullout roller [A].

The skew correction sensor [B] detects the leading edge of the original after it passes through
the separation area.

After hitting the originals against the pullout roller and making a buckle in the original, the
transport motor turns ON. This mechanism prevents skewed feeding of the originals.

• Registration Mechanism
The registration sensor [C] detects the leading edge of the originals. The machine uses the
data for registration during copying.

D766 30 SM
 ARDF DF3090 (D779)

ARDF DF3090
A Pullout Roller

(D779)
B Skew Correction Sensor

C Registration Sensor

D Original Width Sensor

E Sheet-through Exposure Glass

• Transport Mechanism (Simplex)

Originals are transported by the pullout roller [A] and the entrance transport roller [B] to the
sheet-through exposure glass [C], which scans the image. After this process, the originals are
transported to paper exit section by the exit transport roller [D] and the exit driven roller [E].

Description
A Pullout Roller

B Entrance Transport Roller

C Sheet-through Exposure Glass

D Exit Transport Roller

E Exit Driven roller

• Transport Mechanism (Duplex)

When originals are detected by the skew correction sensor [A], the transport motor
switches OFF and the original stops for a while. After skew correction, the originals are
re-transported to the sheet-through exposure glass [B], which scans the first side (front).
Then the inverter solenoid switches ON and the junction gate [C] opens. By that process,
the originals are transported to the reverse roller. At this time, the transport motor stops
and the inverter solenoid switches off.

SM 31 D766
ARDF DF3090 (D779)

Description
A Skew Correction Sensor

B Sheet-through Exposure Glass

C Junction Gate

The originals, which reached the reverse roller, are re-fed over the upper surface of the
junction gate [A]. When the originals reach the sheet-through exposure glass [B], the
second side (back) is scanned.

To make the order of the sheets on the exit tray correct, the two sides (front/back) of the
original need to be inverted. Therefore, the inverter solenoid switches ON and the
originals are transported to the reverse roller again. After the inversion, the originals exit
onto the exit tray [C].

D766 32 SM
 ARDF DF3090 (D779)

ARDF DF3090
(D779)
2.1.3 SP6-901-002 (SETTING TO GIVE PRIORITY TO
STACKABILITY)
To improve the alignment of the delivered originals, select to give priority to stackability in the
following SP. This will reduce the originals’ delivery speed and improve their stackability.

• SP6-901-002 (Setting to give priority to stackability): for DF3090

0: Higher throughput (default)

1: Higher stackability

SM 33 D766
 D787
PAPER FEED UNIT PB3210/PB3220

Latest Release: -
Initial Release: November, 2016
Copyright (c) 2016 Ricoh Co.,Ltd.

Rev. 08/12/2021
 PAPER FEED UNIT PB3210/PB3220
(D787)
TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ............................................. 1

1.1 REAR COVER .............................................................................................................. 1
1.1.1 PRECAUTIONS CONCERNING STABILIZERS.................................................. 1
1.1.2 REAR COVER.................................................................................................... 1
1.2 TRAY LIFT MOTOR (UPPER)....................................................................................... 2
1.2.1 TRAY LIFT MOTOR (UPPER) ............................................................................ 2
1.3 TRAY LIFT MOTOR (LOWER) ...................................................................................... 3
1.3.1 TRAY LIFT MOTOR (LOWER)............................................................................ 3
1.4 TRANSPORT MOTOR.................................................................................................. 4
1.4.1 TRANSPORT MOTOR ....................................................................................... 4
1.5 PAPER FEED MOTOR ................................................................................................. 5
1.5.1 PAPER FEED MOTOR ....................................................................................... 5
1.6 CONTROLLER BOARD................................................................................................ 6
1.6.1 CONTROLLER BOARD ..................................................................................... 6
1.7 TRANSPORT SENSOR, UPPER LIMIT SENSOR, PAPER END SENSOR .................. 7
1.7.1 TRANSPORT SENSOR...................................................................................... 7
1.7.2 UPPER LIMIT SENSOR ..................................................................................... 8
1.7.3 PAPER END SENSOR ....................................................................................... 8
1.8 2ND PAPER FEED UNIT .............................................................................................. 9
1.8.1 2ND PAPER FEED UNIT .................................................................................... 9
1.9 1ST PAPER FEED UNIT............................................................................................. 13
1.9.1 1ST PAPER FEED UNIT .................................................................................. 13
1.10 PICK-UP ROLLER, FEED ROLLER, FRICTION ROLLER .................................... 15
1.10.1 PICK-UP ROLLER, FEED ROLLER, FRICTION ROLLER ................................ 15

2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS............................................................ 17
2.1 PAPER FEED UNIT PB3220 (D787-17)/PB3210 (D787-18, -22)................................. 17
2.1.1 PARTS LAYOUT ............................................................................................... 17
2.1.2 MECHANISM ................................................................................................... 19
Paper Feed Separation Mechanism...................................................................... 19
Drive Mechanism.................................................................................................. 19
Friction Roller/Pick-up Roller Release Mechanism................................................ 19
SM i D787
 Paper Feed Transport Mechanism........................................................................ 19
Tray Base Plate Lift .............................................................................................. 21
Paper size detection ............................................................................................. 23
Remaining paper detection/paper end detection ................................................... 25

D787 ii SM
READ THIS FIRST

Symbols, Abbreviations and Trademarks

This manual uses several symbols and abbreviations. The meaning of those symbols and
abbreviations are as follows:

Clip ring

Screw

Connector

Clamp

SEF Short Edge Feed [A]

LEF Long Edge Feed [B]

Trademarks
Microsoft®, Windows®, and MS-DOS® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and /or other countries.
PostScript® is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems, Incorporated.
PCL® is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
Ethernet® is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.
PowerPC® is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and may be trademarks of
their respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights involved with those marks.
 Rear Cover

1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

PB3210/PB3220
PAPER FEED

(D787)
UNIT
1.1 REAR COVER
1.1.1 PRECAUTIONS CONCERNING STABILIZERS
The stabilizers are necessary for meeting the requirements of IEC60950-1, the international
standard for safety.
The aim of these components is to prevent the products, which are heavy, from toppling as a
result of people running into or leaning on the products, which can lead to serious accidents such
as persons becoming trapped under the product. (U.S.: UL60950-1, Europe: EN60950-1)
Therefore, removal of such components must always be with the consent of the customer.
Do not remove them at your own judgment.

1.1.2 REAR COVER

1. Securing brackets [A] ( ×2)

2. Rear cover [A] ( ×2)

SM 1 D787
Tray Lift Motor (Upper)

1.2 TRAY LIFT MOTOR (UPPER)

1.2.1 TRAY LIFT MOTOR (UPPER)
1. Rear cover (page 1)
2. Tray lift motor (upper) [A] ( ×2, ×1)

D787 2 SM
 Tray Lift Motor (Lower)

1.3 TRAY LIFT MOTOR (LOWER)

PB3210/PB3220
PAPER FEED

(D787)
1.3.1 TRAY LIFT MOTOR (LOWER)

UNIT
1. Rear cover (page 1)
2. Tray lift motor (lower) [A] ( ×2, ×1)

SM 3 D787
Transport Motor

1.4 TRANSPORT MOTOR

1.4.1 TRANSPORT MOTOR
1. Rear cover (page 1)
2. Transport motor [A] ( ×2, ×1)

D787 4 SM
 Paper Feed Motor

1.5 PAPER FEED MOTOR

PB3210/PB3220
PAPER FEED

(D787)
1.5.1 PAPER FEED MOTOR

UNIT
1. Rear cover (page 1)
2. Paper feed motor [A] ( ×2, ×1)

SM 5 D787
Controller Board

1.6 CONTROLLER BOARD

1.6.1 CONTROLLER BOARD
1. Rear cover (page 1)
2. Controller board [A] ( ×4, ×10)

D787 6 SM
 Transport Sensor, Upper Limit Sensor, Paper End Sensor

1.7 TRANSPORT SENSOR, UPPER LIMIT SENSOR, PAPER

PB3210/PB3220
PAPER FEED
END SENSOR

(D787)
UNIT
1.7.1 TRANSPORT SENSOR
1. 2nd paper feed unit (page 9), 1st paper feed unit (page 13)
2. Transport sensor bracket [A] ( ×1)

3. Transport sensor [A] ( ×1)

SM 7 D787
Transport Sensor, Upper Limit Sensor, Paper End Sensor

1.7.2 UPPER LIMIT SENSOR

1. 2nd paper feed unit (page 9), 1st paper feed unit (page 13)
2. Upper limit sensor [A] ( ×1)

1.7.3 PAPER END SENSOR

1. 2nd paper feed unit (page 9), 1st paper feed unit (page 13)
2. Paper end sensor [A] ( ×1)

D787 8 SM
 2nd Paper Feed Unit

1.8 2ND PAPER FEED UNIT

PB3210/PB3220
PAPER FEED

(D787)
1.8.1 2ND PAPER FEED UNIT

UNIT
1. Pull out the paper trays.
2. Rear cover (page 1)
3. Right front cover [A] ( ×1)

4. Right rear cover [A] ( ×1)

SM 9 D787
2nd Paper Feed Unit

5. Stabilizer covers [A] ( ×2)

6. Right lower cover [A] ( ×2)

7. Open the transport cover [A].

D787 10 SM
 2nd Paper Feed Unit

8. Stopper [A] ( ×1)

PB3210/PB3220
PAPER FEED

(D787)
UNIT
9. Interlock switch cover [A] ( ×1)

10. Paper feed guide plate [A]

SM 11 D787
2nd Paper Feed Unit

11. Harness cover [A] ( ×2)

12. Harness [A] ( ×1, ×4)

13. 2nd Paper feed unit [A] ( ×2)

D787 12 SM
 1st Paper Feed Unit

1.9 1ST PAPER FEED UNIT

PB3210/PB3220
PAPER FEED

(D787)
1.9.1 1ST PAPER FEED UNIT

UNIT
1. 2nd Paper feed unit (page 9)
2. Harness [A] ( ×1, ×6)

3. Guide plate [A]( ×1)

SM 13 D787
1st Paper Feed Unit

4. 1st Paper feed unit [A] ( ×2)

D787 14 SM
 Pick-up Roller, Feed Roller, Friction Roller

1.10 PICK-UP ROLLER, FEED ROLLER, FRICTION ROLLER

PB3210/PB3220
PAPER FEED

(D787)
1.10.1 PICK-UP ROLLER, FEED ROLLER, FRICTION ROLLER

UNIT
1. 2nd paper feed unit (page 9), 1st paper feed unit (page 13)
2. Holder [A] ( ×1)

3. Pick-up roller [A]

4. Feed roller [A]

SM 15 D787
Pick-up Roller, Feed Roller, Friction Roller

5. Friction roller [A] ( ×1)

D787 16 SM
 Paper Feed Unit PB3220 (D787-17)/PB3210 (D787-18, -22)

2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS

PB3210/PB3220
PAPER FEED

(D787)
UNIT
2.1 PAPER FEED UNIT PB3220 (D787-17)/PB3210 (D787-18,
-22)
2.1.1 PARTS LAYOUT

No. Description

1 Paper size switch

2 Tray set switch

3 Pick-up roller

4 Feed roller

5 Transport roller

6 Friction roller

SM 17 D787
Paper Feed Unit PB3220 (D787-17)/PB3210 (D787-18, -22)

No. Description No. Description

1 Paper size switch 8 Anti-condensation heater

2 Controller board 9 Paper feed sensor

3 Tray set switch 10 Paper end sensor

4 Tray lift motor 11 Transport sensor

5 Paper feed motor 12 Upper limit sensor

6 Transport motor 13 Pick-up solenoid

7 Transport cover open/close switch

D787 18 SM
 Paper Feed Unit PB3220 (D787-17)/PB3210 (D787-18, -22)

2.1.2 MECHANISM

PB3210/PB3220
PAPER FEED
Paper Feed Separation Mechanism

(D787)
UNIT
Paper feed is an RF paper feed system. The paper feed unit comprises a pick-up roller, feed roller
and friction roller. These rollers are high durability.
In the RF system, paper separation is assisted by the resistance of a separation roller with a
torque limiter (reverse drive is not performed).

Drive Mechanism
The pick-up roller and feed roller are driven by the paper feed motor [A]. The transport roller is
driven by the transport motor [B]. The friction roller is not driven.

Friction Roller/Pick-up Roller Release Mechanism

When the paper feed tray is set, the friction roller comes in contact with the feed roller, and the
pick-up roller contacts the uppermost sheet of paper.
However, when the paper feed tray is pulled out, to prevent paper from dropping out, the contact
between the feed roller and friction roller, and between pick-up roller and paper is released.

Paper Feed Transport Mechanism

In this MFP, to maintain a fixed clearance between sheets, a paper feed sensor is provided near
the pickup roller, which adjusts the paper feed timing.

SM 19 D787
Paper Feed Unit PB3220 (D787-17)/PB3210 (D787-18, -22)

1. The paper feed motor turns ON, and supplies the first sheet.
2. To prevent the next sheet from being fed, the pick-up solenoid switches ON just before the
trailing edge of the first sheet leaves the pickup roller, and the pickup roller separates from the
paper surface.
3. Slightly before the trailing edge of the first sheet leaves the paper feed roller, the paper feed
motor switches OFF.
However, at this time, when the paper feed sensor detects no sheet (when the second sheet
is not fed to the paper feed sensor position), pre-feed is performed without switching the
paper feed motor OFF.
Pre-feed is as follows.
1. The pickup solenoid switches OFF, and the second sheet of paper is fed to the paper
feed sensor position.
2. When the trailing edge of the second sheet passes the feed roller, the paper feed motor is
switched OFF. The pickup solenoid remains OFF.
4. Just when the trailing edge of the first sheet passes the paper feed roller, the pickup solenoid
is switched OFF, and the pickup roller is brought in contact with the paper surface.
5. When the first sheet is fed a predetermined distance by the downstream transport roller, the
paper feed motor is switched ON to supply the second sheet.

D787 20 SM
 Paper Feed Unit PB3220 (D787-17)/PB3210 (D787-18, -22)

Tray Base Plate Lift

PB3210/PB3220
PAPER FEED

(D787)
When the paper feed tray is set in the main unit, the set switch switches ON, and it is detected that

UNIT
the tray is set. At this time, the coupling of the lift motor engages with the shaft at the rear of the
tray, the motor rotates, and the tray base plate is lifted up. The paper surface pushes up the
Pickup roller, the tray base plate is lifted until the upper limit sensor switches OFF (blocked), and
the machine enters the standby mode.
When the paper feed tray is removed, the coupling is disengaged, and the base plate descends.
At this time, the lift motor rotates until the coupling returns to the home position.

No. Description No. Description

1 Lift motor 3 Tray rear side shaft

2 Coupling 4 Tray base plate

SM 21 D787
Paper Feed Unit PB3220 (D787-17)/PB3210 (D787-18, -22)

No. Description No. Description

1 Upper limit sensor 2 Pick-up roller

D787 22 SM
 Paper Feed Unit PB3220 (D787-17)/PB3210 (D787-18, -22)

Paper size detection

PB3210/PB3220
PAPER FEED

(D787)
The end fence interlocks mechanically with the size detection actuator, and when the end fence is

UNIT
moved, the size detection actuator also moves.
When the paper feed tray is set, 4 size detection switches switch ON/OFF depending on the
position of the size detection actuator. Paper size is detected by the detected combination of
these switches.

No. Description No. Description

1 End fence 3 Size detection actuator

2 Paper size switch 4 Tray set switch

SM 23 D787
Paper Feed Unit PB3220 (D787-17)/PB3210 (D787-18, -22)

Paper size switch operation

Paper size switch

Paper size
SW4 SW3 SW2 SW1

SRA3 (12”×18”) 1 0 1 0

A3 (DLT) 0 1 0 0

0 0 1 1
B4 (LG)
0 1 1 1

A4_SEF 1 1 1 0

LT_SEF 1 1 0 0

B5_SEF 1 0 0 0

A4_LEF (LT_LEF) 0 0 0 1

B5_LEF (Exe_LEF) 0 0 1 0

A5_LEF 0 1 0 1

D787 24 SM
 Paper Feed Unit PB3220 (D787-17)/PB3210 (D787-18, -22)

Remaining paper detection/paper end detection

PB3210/PB3220
PAPER FEED

(D787)
Remaining paper detection

UNIT
Detection of paper remaining in the paper feed tray is performed by a combination of ON/OFF
(contact/non-contact) of contact-type remaining detection plates (printed circuits) CN-3,
CN-5.
When the amount of remaining paper decreases, and the tray lift motor rotates, the remaining
paper sensors CN-3 and CN-5 in the motor are turned ON/OFF.
The following 4 levels of remaining paper can be detected:

Amount remaining 100% 70% 30% 10%

CN-3 OFF ON ON OFF

CN-5 OFF OFF ON ON

Control panel
remaining paper 4 bars 3 bars 2 bars 1 bar
display

SM 25 D787
Paper Feed Unit PB3220 (D787-17)/PB3210 (D787-18, -22)

Paper end detection

When the paper feed tray is empty, the paper end sensor switches ON (unblocked) due to the
end feeler.

No. Description No. Description

1 Paper end sensor 3 Slot in the tray base plate

2 End feeler

D787 26 SM
 M482
INTERNAL MULTI-FOLD UNIT FD3000

Latest Release: -
Initial Release: November, 2016
Copyright (c) 2016 Ricoh Co.,Ltd.

Rev. 08/12/2021
 INTERNAL MULTI-FOLD UNIT FD3000
(M482)
TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ............................................. 1

1.1 HOW TO HOLD THE INTERNAL MULTI-FOLDING UNIT ............................................. 1
1.2 REMOVING THE INTERNAL MULTI-FOLD UNIT ......................................................... 2
1.3 EXTERIOR COVERS ................................................................................................... 5
1.3.1 REAR COVER.................................................................................................... 5
1.3.2 DOOR ................................................................................................................ 5
1.3.3 FRONT RIGHT COVER...................................................................................... 6
1.3.4 FRONT LEFT COVER ........................................................................................ 7
1.3.5 TOP COVER ...................................................................................................... 8
1.3.6 EXIT UNIT COVER............................................................................................. 9
1.4 MOTORS, SOLENOID................................................................................................ 10
1.4.1 JG CREASE MOTOR ....................................................................................... 10
1.4.2 TRANSPORT MOTOR ..................................................................................... 10
1.4.3 REGISTRATION MOTOR ................................................................................. 11
1.4.4 2ND FOLD MOTOR.......................................................................................... 11
1.4.5 1ST FOLD MOTOR .......................................................................................... 12
1.4.6 JUNCTION GATE SOLENOID .......................................................................... 12
1.5 SWITCHES................................................................................................................. 14
1.5.1 EXIT UNIT SWITCH ......................................................................................... 14
1.5.2 FRONT DOOR SWITCH................................................................................... 14
1.6 SENSORS .................................................................................................................. 15
1.6.1 CREASE HP SENSOR ..................................................................................... 15
1.6.2 JUNCTION GATE HP SENSOR ....................................................................... 16
1.6.3 REGISTRATION SENSOR ............................................................................... 17
1.6.4 CREASE SENSOR........................................................................................... 18
1.6.5 1ST FOLD SENSOR ........................................................................................ 20
1.6.6 2ND FOLD SENSOR ........................................................................................ 20
1.6.7 FOLDER TRAY EXIT SENSOR ........................................................................ 21
1.6.8 FOLDER TRAY FULL SENSOR........................................................................ 22
1.6.9 FOLDER TRAY FULL SENSOR 2..................................................................... 23
1.6.10 HORIZONTAL PATH EXIT SENSOR ................................................................ 24

SM i D787
 1.7 PCB ............................................................................................................................ 26

2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS............................................................ 27
2.1 SENSOR LAYOUT...................................................................................................... 27
2.2 ROLLER LAYOUT ...................................................................................................... 28
2.3 DRIVE LAYOUT.......................................................................................................... 29
2.4 PARTS LAYOUT ......................................................................................................... 30
2.5 MECHANISM.............................................................................................................. 31
2.5.1 FOLD TYPES ................................................................................................... 31
2.5.2 JUNCTION GATE / CREASE MECHANISM ..................................................... 31
2.5.3 NUMBER OF FOLD OPERATIONS .................................................................. 34
2.5.4 FOLDING MECHANISM ................................................................................... 35
Letter Fold-in / Letter Fold-out / Z-fold .................................................................. 37
Half Fold............................................................................................................... 38

D787 ii SM
READ THIS FIRST

Symbols, Abbreviations and Trademarks

This manual uses several symbols and abbreviations. The meaning of those symbols and
abbreviations are as follows:

Clip ring

Screw

Connector

Clamp

SEF Short Edge Feed [A]

LEF Long Edge Feed [B]

Trademarks
Adobe, Acrobat, PageMaker, PostScript, and PostScript 3 are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.

The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
and any use of such marks by Ricoh Company, Ltd. is under license.

Firefox and Thunderbird are registered trademarks of the Mozilla Foundation.

Google, Android, and Chrome are trademarks of Google Inc.

iOS® is a registered trademark or trademark of Cisco Systems, Inc. and/or its affiliates in the
United States and certain other countries.

Java is a registered trademark of Oracle and/or its affiliates.

JAWS® is a registered trademark of Freedom Scientific, Inc., St. Petersburg, Florida and/or other
countries.
Kerberos is a trademark of the Massachusetts Institute of Technology (MIT).

Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds.

Macintosh, OS X, Bonjour, Safari, and TrueType are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the
U.S. and other countries.

Microsoft, Windows, Windows Server, Windows Vista, Internet Explorer, and Outlook are either
registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corp. in the United States and/or other
countries.

PictBridge is a trademark.

QR Code is a registered trademark of DENSO WAVE INCORPORATED in Japan and in other

countries.

"Red Hat" is a registered trademark of Red Hat, Inc.

The SD and SD logo are trademarks of SD-3C, LLC.

UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group.

UPnP is a trademark of UPnP Implementers Corporation.

This product includes RSA BSAFE® Cryptographic software of EMC Corporation. RSA and
BSAFE are registered trademarks or trademarks of EMC Corporation in the United States and
other countries.

The proper names of Internet Explorer 6, 7, and 8 are as follows:

• Microsoft® Internet Explorer® 6

• Windows® Internet Explorer® 7
• Windows® Internet Explorer® 8
The proper names of the Windows operating systems are as follows:

• The product names of Windows Vista are as follows:

Microsoft® Windows Vista® Ultimate

Microsoft® Windows Vista® Business

D787 4 SM
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Home Premium

Microsoft® Windows Vista® Home Basic

Microsoft® Windows Vista® Enterprise

• The product names of Windows 7 are as follows:

Microsoft® Windows® 7 Home Premium

Microsoft® Windows® 7 Professional

Microsoft® Windows® 7 Ultimate

Microsoft® Windows® 7 Enterprise

• The product names of Windows 8 are as follows:

Microsoft® Windows® 8

Microsoft® Windows® 8 Pro

Microsoft® Windows® 8 Enterprise

• The product names of Windows 8.1 are as follows:

Microsoft® Windows® 8.1

Microsoft® Windows® 8.1 Pro

Microsoft® Windows® 8.1 Enterprise

• The product names of Windows 10 are as follows:

Microsoft® Windows® 10 Home Premium

Microsoft® Windows® 10 Pro

Microsoft® Windows® 10 Enterprise

Microsoft® Windows® 10 Education

• The product names of Windows Server 2003 are as follows:

Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 Standard Edition

Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 Enterprise Edition

• The product names of Windows Server 2003 R2 are as follows:

Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2 Standard Edition

Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2 Enterprise Edition

• The product names of Windows Server 2008 are as follows:

Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 Standard

Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 Enterprise

• The product names of Windows Server 2008 R2 are as follows:

Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 R2 Standard
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 R2 Enterprise

• The product names of Windows Server 2012 are as follows:

Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 Foundation

Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 Essentials

Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 Standard

• The product names of Windows Server 2012 R2 are as follows:

Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 R2 Foundation

Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 R2 Essentials

Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 R2 Standard

Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of
their respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights to those marks.

Microsoft product screen shots reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation.

D787 6 SM
 How to Hold the Internal Multi-folding Unit

1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

UNIT FD3000
MULTI-FOLD
INTERNAL

(M482)
1.1 HOW TO HOLD THE INTERNAL MULTI-FOLDING UNIT

When lifting the internal multi-folding unit, be sure to hold the side frames, as shown in the image
below. Holding the exterior or other parts might damage or deform the unit.

SM 1 M482
Removing the Internal Multi-fold Unit

1.2 REMOVING THE INTERNAL MULTI-FOLD UNIT

1. When a finisher is connected, first remove the finisher and then proceed to step 3.
2. When no finisher is connected, perform the following steps.
1. Remove the paper exit tray [A].

2. Open the front cover, and then remove the left upper cover [A].
Slide the cover in the direction of the blue arrow.

3. Remove the left rear cover [A].

M482 2 SM
 Removing the Internal Multi-fold Unit

4. Open the door [A] and remove the coin screw [B].

UNIT FD3000
MULTI-FOLD
INTERNAL

(M482)
5. Disconnect the connector [A].

6. Remove the fixing screw [A] and bracket [B].

When removing the bracket [B], remove the top screw first, and then the bottom one.

SM 3 M482
Removing the Internal Multi-fold Unit

7. Open the front cover of the internal multi-fold unit, and then, holding the exit tray frame [A]
and the top part of the opening [B], lift the internal multi-fold unit and remove it.
• Lower the lever [C] to keep the paper guide plate open during operation, because the
plate might be deformed if a strong force is applied while the guide plate is closed.
• Hold the metal frame part [B], not the exterior cover, to avoid damaging the cover.
• Be careful not to touch the mylar sheet [D] located behind.

M482 4 SM
 Exterior Covers

1.3 EXTERIOR COVERS

UNIT FD3000
MULTI-FOLD
INTERNAL

(M482)
1.3.1 REAR COVER
1. Remove the rear cover [A].

1.3.2 DOOR
1. Remove the small cover [A] and clip ring.

SM 5 M482
Exterior Covers

2. Open the door [A] and remove it by sliding upward.

1.3.3 FRONT RIGHT COVER

1. Open the door [A].

2. Remove the knobs [A], and then lower the lever [B].

M482 6 SM
 Exterior Covers

3. Remove the front right cover [A].

UNIT FD3000
Remove the connector [B] connected to the LED on the back of the cover.

MULTI-FOLD
INTERNAL

(M482)
1.3.4 FRONT LEFT COVER
1. Open the door [A].

SM 7 M482
Exterior Covers

2. Open the exit unit [A].

3. Remove the front left cover [A].

1.3.5 TOP COVER

1. Remove the front right cover. (Front Right Cover)
2. Slide the top cover [A] to the left, turn the left side, and then remove the cover.

M482 8 SM
 Exterior Covers

1.3.6 EXIT UNIT COVER

UNIT FD3000
MULTI-FOLD
INTERNAL
1.

(M482)
Remove the front left cover. (Front Left Cover)
2. Remove the exit unit cover [A].
Disconnect the connector and open the clamp for the LED [B] on the back of the cover.

SM 9 M482
Motors, Solenoid

1.4 MOTORS, SOLENOID

1.4.1 JG CREASE MOTOR
1. Remove the front right cover. (Front Right Cover)
2. Remove the JG crease motor [A].

1.4.2 TRANSPORT MOTOR

1. Remove the front right cover. (Front Right Cover)
2. Remove the front left cover. (Front Left Cover)
3. Remove the transport motor [A].

M482 10 SM
 Motors, Solenoid

1.4.3 REGISTRATION MOTOR

UNIT FD3000
MULTI-FOLD
INTERNAL
1.

(M482)
Remove the rear cover. (Rear Cover)
2. Remove the registration motor [A].

1.4.4 2ND FOLD MOTOR

1. Remove the rear cover. (Rear Cover)
2. Remove the 2nd fold motor [A]

SM 11 M482
Motors, Solenoid

1.4.5 1ST FOLD MOTOR

1. Remove the rear cover. (Rear Cover)
2. Remove the 1st fold motor [A].

1.4.6 JUNCTION GATE SOLENOID

1. Remove the exit unit cover. (Exit Unit Cover)
2. Remove the junction gate solenoid unit [A].

M482 12 SM
 Motors, Solenoid

3. Remove the junction gate solenoid [A].

UNIT FD3000
MULTI-FOLD
INTERNAL

(M482)

SM 13 M482
Switches

1.5 SWITCHES
1.5.1 EXIT UNIT SWITCH
1. Remove the front left cover. (Front Left Cover)
2. Remove the exit unit switch [A].

1.5.2 FRONT DOOR SWITCH

1. Remove the front right cover. (Front Right Cover)
2. Remove the front door switch bracket [A].

3. Remove the front door switch [A].

M482 14 SM
 Sensors

1.6 SENSORS

UNIT FD3000
MULTI-FOLD
INTERNAL

(M482)
1.6.1 CREASE HP SENSOR
1. Remove the rear cover. (Rear Cover)
2. Remove the crease HP sensor bracket [A].

3. Remove the crease HP sensor [A].

SM 15 M482
Sensors

1.6.2 JUNCTION GATE HP SENSOR

1. Remove the front right cover. (Front Right Cover)
2. Remove the junction gate HP sensor bracket [A].

3. Remove the junction gate HP sensor [A].

M482 16 SM
 Sensors

1.6.3 REGISTRATION SENSOR

UNIT FD3000
MULTI-FOLD
INTERNAL

(M482)
1. Remove the top cover. (Top Cover)
2. Remove the registration sensor bracket [A].

3. Remove the registration sensor [A].

SM 17 M482
Sensors

1.6.4 CREASE SENSOR

1. Remove the top cover. (Top Cover)
2. Remove the N5 cover [A].

3. Remove the fixing plate [A].

4. Lift the N5 cover [A], slide it to the left, and then remove it by pulling.

M482 18 SM
 Sensors

5. Remove the crease roller cover [A].

UNIT FD3000
MULTI-FOLD
INTERNAL

(M482)
6. Remove the crease sensor bracket [A].

7. Remove the crease sensor [A].

SM 19 M482
Sensors

1.6.5 1ST FOLD SENSOR

1. Remove the crease sensor bracket. (Crease Sensor)
2. Remove the 1st fold sensor bracket [A].

3. Remove the 1st fold sensor [A].

1.6.6 2ND FOLD SENSOR

1. Remove the front right cover. (Front Right Cover)
2. Raise the N1 lever [A].

M482 20 SM
 Sensors

3. Remove the screw [A] with a short screwdriver, and remove the bracket [B].

UNIT FD3000
MULTI-FOLD
INTERNAL

(M482)
4. Remove the 2nd fold sensor [A].

1.6.7 FOLDER TRAY EXIT SENSOR

1. Remove the exit unit cover. (Exit Unit Cover)
2. Raise the exit unit [A] and remove the folder tray exit sensor bracket [B].

SM 21 M482
Sensors

3. Remove the folder tray exit sensor [A].

1.6.8 FOLDER TRAY FULL SENSOR

1. Remove the exit unit cover. (Exit Unit Cover)
2. Remove the exit fence [A].

3. Remove the folder tray full sensor bracket [A].

M482 22 SM
 Sensors

4. Remove the folder tray full sensor [A].

UNIT FD3000
MULTI-FOLD
INTERNAL

(M482)
1.6.9 FOLDER TRAY FULL SENSOR 2
1. Remove the exit unit cover. (Exit Unit Cover)
2. Remove the exit fence [A].

3. Remove the folder tray full sensor 2 bracket [A].

SM 23 M482
Sensors

4. Remove the folder tray full sensor 2 [A].

1.6.10 HORIZONTAL PATH EXIT SENSOR

1. Put the internal multi-fold unit upside down.

Do not turn over the unit with the top cover removed, as shown in the image below, to avoid
damage to the circuit board [A].

M482 24 SM
 Sensors

2. Remove the horizontal path exit sensor cover [A].

UNIT FD3000
MULTI-FOLD
INTERNAL

(M482)
3. Remove the horizontal path exit sensor bracket [A].

4. Remove the horizontal path exit sensor [A].

SM 25 M482
PCB

1.7 PCB
1. Remove the top cover. (Top Cover)
2. Remove the PCB [A].

What to do After Replacing the PCB

After replacing the PCB, set the unit to the adjustment values that are specified in the label [A] on
the left frame, in the following SP modes.

• 6-324-001 (NV Adj. Data Mod. 1st Fold Pos. Factory Setting)
• 6-324-002 (NV Adj. Data Mod. 2nd Fold Pos. Factory Setting)
• 6-324-003 (NV Adj. Data Mod. Crease Pos. Factory Setting)

M482 26 SM
 Sensor Layout

2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS

UNIT FD3000
MULTI-FOLD
INTERNAL

(M482)
2.1 SENSOR LAYOUT

No. Description No. Description

1 Registration sensor 5 Folder tray exit sensor

2 2nd fold sensor 6 Folder tray full sensor 1

3 1st fold sensor 7 Folder tray full sensor 2

4 Crease sensor 8 Horizontal path exit sensor

SM 27 M482
Roller Layout

2.2 ROLLER LAYOUT

No. Description No. Description

A Paper entrance roller G Folding roller 3

B Registration roller H Crease roller

C 1st fold roller (F/R) I Relay transport roller

D Folding roller 1 J Folder tray exit roller

E 2nd fold roller (F/R) K Horizontal path exit roller

F Folding roller 2

M482 28 SM
 Drive Layout

2.3 DRIVE LAYOUT

UNIT FD3000
MULTI-FOLD
INTERNAL

(M482)
No. Description No. Description

1 Registration motor 4 JG crease motor

2 1st fold motor 5 Transport motor

3 2nd fold motor 6 Junction gate solenoid

SM 29 M482
Parts Layout

2.4 PARTS LAYOUT

No. Description No. Description

1 Registration sensor 10 Folder tray full sensor 2

2 1st fold sensor 11 Horizontal path exit sensor

3 Crease sensor 12 Folder tray exit sensor

4 Junction gate HP sensor 13 Folder tray full sensor 1

5 Front door open/closed switch 14 PCB

6 JG crease motor 15 Crease HP sensor

7 Transport motor 16 2nd fold motor

8 Exit unit switch 17 1st fold motor

9 Junction gate solenoid 18 Registration motor

M482 30 SM
 Mechanism

2.5 MECHANISM

UNIT FD3000
MULTI-FOLD
INTERNAL

(M482)
2.5.1 FOLD TYPES
This unit is capable of the following fold types:

[A] : Half Fold

[B] : Letter Fold-out

[C] : Letter Fold-in

[D] : Z-fold

2.5.2 JUNCTION GATE / CREASE MECHANISM

The JG crease motor [A] rotates clockwise/counterclockwise to operate the junction gate / crease
roller.

SM 31 M482
Mechanism

Junction Gate

• When the JG crease motor [A] rotates clockwise, the junction gates 1, 2, and 3 operate.
• The cam moves the levers 1, 2, and 3 to switch the corresponding junction gates on and off.

Paper feeding Junction Gate Status

When feeding paper without folding

[1]: Junction Gate 1

[2]: Junction Gate 2

[3]: Junction Gate 3

When entering Folding Roller 1

M482 32 SM
 Mechanism

Paper feeding Junction Gate Status

UNIT FD3000
MULTI-FOLD
When adjusting the letter fold position

INTERNAL

(M482)
When performing half fold

Crease

• When the JG crease motor [A] rotates counterclockwise, the crease motor [B] operates.

SM 33 M482
Mechanism

2.5.3 NUMBER OF FOLD OPERATIONS

You can change the strength of the fold by changing the number of times that the crease roller
mechanism presses the paper to make the fold. To do this, use SP6-315-001.

SP No. Name [Min to Max/Init./Step]

6-315-001 Set Number of Creasing [0 to 4 / 1 / times]

0: -1

1: 0

2: 1

3: 2

4: 3
For each fold, you can specify the number of times that the mechanism presses the paper from 0
to 4.

As the default, the number of times is set to 1. You can change the number with this SP setting.

• If you set the SP value to 0 (-1), the number of times is set to 0.

• If the number of times increases, the throughput decreases.

The internal multi-fold unit makes a crease fold by rotating the crease roller [A], which has a
protrusion [B] as shown below, along the fold of the paper [C]. (Paper feed direction [D])

M482 34 SM
 Mechanism

UNIT FD3000
MULTI-FOLD
INTERNAL

(M482)
2.5.4 FOLDING MECHANISM
By the bidirectional movement of the roller, the paper is fed to the fold position, and the paper
stays in close contact with the roller when folding. This enables precise folding regardless of the
characteristics of the paper.

After feeding the paper to the 1st fold roller (F/R), the machine can control precisely where to stop
the paper [A] by using a proportional-integral-differential (PID) controller.

The distance [D] between the folding position [C] and the fold-assessment position [B] is short
(about 30 mm regardless of the fold type or paper size). Furthermore, folding is performed with
the paper in contact with the folding roller, preventing arching regardless of the paper curl,
thickness, grain, and stiffness.

SM 35 M482
Mechanism

In the previous multi-fold unit, the folding position was determined by the stopper [B]. The
distance [A] from the folding position [C] to the stopper is long (about 100 to 240 mm, depending
on the fold type and paper size). Furthermore, the arch of the paper in the space to the stopper
was influenced by the paper curl, thickness, grain, and stiffness.

Even if the stop position was accurate, the arch of the paper influenced the fold length.

M482 36 SM
 Mechanism

UNIT FD3000
MULTI-FOLD
INTERNAL

(M482)
Letter Fold-in / Letter Fold-out / Z-fold
[1] The leading edge of the paper passes the registration roller.

[2] The leading edge of the paper passes the 1st fold roller (F/R).

[3] When the paper is fed to the fold-assessment position, the 1st fold roller (F/R) reverses,
forming an arch in the paper.

[4] When this arched part passes through the nips of the folding rollers 1 and 2, the first fold is
performed.

[5] After the paper passes the folding roller, the 2nd fold roller pulls in the paper and feeds it to the
2nd fold position.

[6] At the fold position, the 2nd fold roller (F/R) rotates in reverse to form an arch in the paper.

[7] The 2nd fold is formed when this arched part is fed through the nips of the folding rollers 2 and
3. Depending on the difference in the fold positions, Letter Fold-In, Letter Fold-Out, or Z-Fold is
performed.

The following diagrams show a Letter Fold-In example.

SM 37 M482
Mechanism

Half Fold
[1] The leading edge of the paper passes the registration roller.

[2] The paper is fed to the folding rollers 1 and 2 by the junction gate [A].

[3] The leading edge of the paper passes the 2nd fold roller (F/R) and is fed to the fold position.

[4] At the fold position, the 2nd fold roller (F/R) rotates in reverse to form an arch in the paper.

[5] The 2nd fold is formed when this arched part is fed through the nips of the folding rollers 2 and
3.

M482 38 SM
 M495
PAPER FEED UNIT PB3250

Latest Release: -
Initial Release: November, 2016
Copyright (c) 2016 Ricoh Co.,Ltd.

Rev. 08/12/2021
 PAPER FEED UNIT PB3250
(M495)
TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ............................................. 1

1.1 PRECAUTIONS CONCERNING STABILIZERS ............................................................ 1
1.2 REAR COVER .............................................................................................................. 2
1.3 TRAY LIFT MOTOR ...................................................................................................... 3
1.4 TRANSPORT MOTOR.................................................................................................. 4
1.5 PAPER FEED MOTOR ................................................................................................. 5
1.6 CONTROLLER BOARD................................................................................................ 6
1.7 TRANSPORT SENSOR, UPPER LIMIT SENSOR, PAPER END SENSOR, PAPER
FEED SENSOR................................................................................................................... 7
1.8 PAPER FEED UNIT ...................................................................................................... 9
1.9 PICK-UP ROLLER, FEED ROLLER, FRICTION ROLLER .......................................... 12

2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS............................................................ 14
2.1 PARTS LAYOUT ......................................................................................................... 14
2.2 MECHANISM.............................................................................................................. 16
2.2.1 PAPER FEED SEPARATION MECHANISM...................................................... 16
2.2.2 DRIVE MECHANISM ........................................................................................ 16
2.2.3 FRICTION ROLLER/PICK-UP ROLLER RELEASE MECHANISM .................... 16
2.2.4 PAPER FEED TRANSPORT MECHANISM ...................................................... 16
2.2.5 TRAY BOTTOM PLATE LIFT ............................................................................ 17
2.2.6 PAPER SIZE DETECTION ............................................................................... 19
2.2.7 REMAINING PAPER/PAPER END DETECTION .............................................. 20

SM i D787
READ THIS FIRST

Symbols, Abbreviations and Trademarks

This manual uses several symbols and abbreviations. The meaning of those symbols and
abbreviations are as follows:

Symbol What it means

Clip ring

Screw

Connector

Clamp

E-ring

Flat Flexible Cable

Timing Belt
SEF Short Edge Feed

LEF Long Edge Feed

K Black

C Cyan

M Magenta

Y Yellow

B/W, BW Black and White

FC Full color
Trademarks
Adobe, Acrobat, PageMaker, PostScript, and PostScript 3 are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.

The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
and any use of such marks by Ricoh Company, Ltd. is under license.

Firefox and Thunderbird are registered trademarks of the Mozilla Foundation.

Google, Android, and Chrome are trademarks of Google Inc.

iOS® is a registered trademark or trademark of Cisco Systems, Inc. and/or its affiliates in the
United States and certain other countries.

Java is a registered trademark of Oracle and/or its affiliates.

JAWS® is a registered trademark of Freedom Scientific, Inc., St. Petersburg, Florida and/or other
countries.

Kerberos is a trademark of the Massachusetts Institute of Technology (MIT).

Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds.

Macintosh, OS X, Bonjour, Safari, and TrueType are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the
U.S. and other countries.

Microsoft, Windows, Windows Server, Windows Vista, Internet Explorer, and Outlook are either
registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corp. in the United States and/or other
countries.

PictBridge is a trademark.

QR Code is a registered trademark of DENSO WAVE INCORPORATED in Japan and in other

countries.

"Red Hat" is a registered trademark of Red Hat, Inc.

The SD and SD logo are trademarks of SD-3C, LLC.

UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group.

UPnP is a trademark of UPnP Implementers Corporation.

D787 4 SM
This product includes RSA BSAFE® Cryptographic software of EMC Corporation. RSA and
BSAFE are registered trademarks or trademarks of EMC Corporation in the United States and
other countries.

The proper names of Internet Explorer 6, 7, and 8 are as follows:

• Microsoft® Internet Explorer® 6

• Windows® Internet Explorer® 7
• Windows® Internet Explorer® 8
The proper names of the Windows operating systems are as follows:

• The product names of Windows Vista are as follows:

Microsoft® Windows Vista® Ultimate

Microsoft® Windows Vista® Business

Microsoft® Windows Vista® Home Premium

Microsoft® Windows Vista® Home Basic

Microsoft® Windows Vista® Enterprise

• The product names of Windows 7 are as follows:

Microsoft® Windows® 7 Home Premium

Microsoft® Windows® 7 Professional

Microsoft® Windows® 7 Ultimate

Microsoft® Windows® 7 Enterprise

• The product names of Windows 8 are as follows:

Microsoft® Windows® 8

Microsoft® Windows® 8 Pro

Microsoft® Windows® 8 Enterprise

• The product names of Windows 8.1 are as follows:

Microsoft® Windows® 8.1

Microsoft® Windows® 8.1 Pro

Microsoft® Windows® 8.1 Enterprise

• The product names of Windows 10 are as follows:

Microsoft® Windows® 10 Home Premium

Microsoft® Windows® 10 Pro

Microsoft® Windows® 10 Enterprise

Microsoft® Windows® 10 Education

• The product names of Windows Server 2003 are as follows:

Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 Standard Edition

Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 Enterprise Edition

• The product names of Windows Server 2003 R2 are as follows:

Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2 Standard Edition

Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2 Enterprise Edition

• The product names of Windows Server 2008 are as follows:

Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 Standard

Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 Enterprise

• The product names of Windows Server 2008 R2 are as follows:

Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 R2 Standard

Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 R2 Enterprise

• The product names of Windows Server 2012 are as follows:

Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 Foundation

Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 Essentials

Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 Standard

• The product names of Windows Server 2012 R2 are as follows:

Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 R2 Foundation

Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 R2 Essentials

Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 R2 Standard

Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of
their respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights to those marks.

Microsoft product screen shots reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation.

D787 6 SM
 Precautions Concerning Stabilizers

1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

PAPER FEED
UNIT PB3250
(M495)
1.1 PRECAUTIONS CONCERNING STABILIZERS
Stabilizers are necessary for meeting the requirements of IEC60950-1, the international standard
for safety.

The aim of these components is to prevent the products, which are heavy, from toppling as a
result of people running into or leaning on them, which can lead to serious accidents such as
persons becoming trapped under the product. (U.S.: UL60950-1, Europe: EN60950-1)

Therefore, removal of such components must always be with the consent of the customer.

Do not remove them under your own judgment.

SM 1 M495
Rear Cover

1.2 REAR COVER

1. Remove the securing brackets [A] ( ×1 each).

2. Remove the rear cover [A] ( ×4).

M495 2 SM
 Tray Lift Motor

1.3 TRAY LIFT MOTOR

PAPER FEED
UNIT PB3250
(M495)
1. Remove the rear cover. (Rear Cover)
2. Remove the tray lift motor [A] ( ×2, ×1).

SM 3 M495
Transport Motor

1.4 TRANSPORT MOTOR

1. Remove the rear cover. (Rear Cover)
2. Remove the transport motor [A] ( ×2, ×1).

M495 4 SM
 Paper Feed Motor

1.5 PAPER FEED MOTOR

PAPER FEED
UNIT PB3250
(M495)
1. Remove the rear cover. (Rear Cover)
2. Remove the paper feed motor [A] ( ×2, ×1).

SM 5 M495
Controller Board

1.6 CONTROLLER BOARD

1. Remove the rear cover. (Rear Cover)
2. Remove the controller board [A] ( ×4, ×7).

M495 6 SM
 Transport Sensor, Upper Limit Sensor, Paper End Sensor, Paper Feed Sensor

1.7 TRANSPORT SENSOR, UPPER LIMIT SENSOR, PAPER

PAPER FEED
UNIT PB3250
END SENSOR, PAPER FEED SENSOR

(M495)
1. Remove the paper feed unit. (Paper Feed Unit)
2. Remove the transport sensor bracket [A] ( ×1, ×1).

3. Remove the transport sensor [A].

4. Remove the paper feed sensor bracket [A] ( ×1, ×1).

SM 7 M495
Transport Sensor, Upper Limit Sensor, Paper End Sensor, Paper Feed Sensor

5. Remove the paper feed sensor [A].

6. Remove the paper end sensor [A] ( ×1).

7. Remove the upper limit sensor [A] ( ×1).

M495 8 SM
 Paper Feed Unit

1.8 PAPER FEED UNIT

PAPER FEED
UNIT PB3250
(M495)
1. Pull out the paper tray.
2. Remove the rear cover. (Rear Cover)
3. Remove the right lower cover [A] (hook ×1).

4. Remove the right rear cover [A] ( ×1).

5. Open the transport cover [A].

SM 9 M495
Paper Feed Unit

6. Remove the transport guide [A] (tab ×1).

7. Remove the harness guide [A] ( ×2).

8. Release the clamp, and then disconnect the harness at the right rear of the unit ( ×1,
×1).

9. Release the four clamps ( ×4).

M495 10 SM
 Paper Feed Unit

10. Remove the paper feed unit [A] ( ×2).

PAPER FEED
UNIT PB3250
(M495)

SM 11 M495
Pick-up Roller, Feed Roller, Friction Roller

1.9 PICK-UP ROLLER, FEED ROLLER, FRICTION ROLLER

1. Remove the paper feed unit. (Paper Feed Unit)
2. Remove the holder [A] ( ×1).

3. Remove the pick-up roller [A].

4. Remove the feed roller [A].

M495 12 SM
 Pick-up Roller, Feed Roller, Friction Roller

5. Remove the friction roller [A] ( ×1).

PAPER FEED
UNIT PB3250
(M495)

SM 13 M495
Parts Layout

2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
2.1 PARTS LAYOUT

No. Description No. Description

1 Paper size switch 4 Feed roller

2 Tray set switch 5 Transport roller

3 Pick-up roller 6 Friction roller

M495 14 SM
 Parts Layout

PAPER FEED
UNIT PB3250
(M495)
No. Description No. Description
1 Paper size switch 8 Anti-condensation heater

2 Controller board 9 Paper feed sensor

3 Tray set switch 10 Paper end sensor

4 Tray lift motor 11 Vertical transport sensor

5 Paper feed motor 12 Upper limit sensor

6 Transport motor 13 Pick-up solenoid

7 Vertical transport cover open/closed switch

SM 15 M495
Mechanism

2.2 MECHANISM
2.2.1 PAPER FEED SEPARATION MECHANISM
The feed system is a RF paper feed system. The paper feed unit has a pick-up roller, feed roller,
and friction roller. The feed roller and friction roller are high durability rollers.

2.2.2 DRIVE MECHANISM

The pick-up roller and feed roller are driven by the paper feed motor [A]. The transport roller is
driven by the transport motor [B]. The friction roller is not driven.

2.2.3 FRICTION ROLLER/PICK-UP ROLLER RELEASE MECHANISM

When the tray is set, the friction roller comes in contact with the feed roller. The pick-up roller
touches the top sheet of paper.

When the tray is opened, contact between the feed roller and friction roller, and contact between
the pick-up roller and paper are released.

2.2.4 PAPER FEED TRANSPORT MECHANISM

In order to feed the paper at regular intervals, there is a paper feed sensor near the pick-up roller,
and this sensor is used to adjust the paper feed timing.

1. The paper feed motor turns ON, and feeds the first sheet of paper.
2. To prevent the next sheet from being fed, the pick-up solenoid turns ON just before the

M495 16 SM
 Mechanism

trailing edge of the first sheet passes through the pick-up roller, and the pick-up roller leaves

PAPER FEED
UNIT PB3250
the paper surface.

(M495)
3. Slightly before the trailing edge of the first sheet leaves the paper feed roller, the paper feed
motor turns OFF.
However, at this time, if the paper feed sensor does not detect paper (the second sheet is not
fed to the paper feed sensor position), the paper feed motor does not turn OFF. Pre-feed is
performed as follows:
1. The pick-up solenoid turns OFF, and the second sheet of paper is fed to the paper feed
sensor position.
2. When the trailing edge of the second sheet passes the feed roller, the paper feed motor
is turned OFF. The pick-up solenoid remains OFF.
4. Just when the trailing edge of the first sheet passes the feed roller, the pick-up solenoid turns
OFF. The pick-up roller is brought into contact with the paper surface.
5. When the first sheet has been fed a specified distance by the downstream transport roller, the
paper feed motor turns ON to feed the second sheet.

2.2.5 TRAY BOTTOM PLATE LIFT

When the paper feed tray is set in the main frame, the tray set sensor switch turns ON. The
coupling of the lift motor connects with the shaft at the rear of the tray, and the motor rotates to lift
the tray bottom plate. The tray bottom plate rises until the paper surface lifts up the pick-up roller
and the upper limit sensor turns OFF (the sensor is blocked). The tray is now ready to feed.

When the paper feed tray is removed, the coupling is disengaged, and the bottom plate descends.
At this time, the lift motor rotates until the coupling returns to the home position.

SM 17 M495
Mechanism

No. Description No. Description

1 Lift motor 3 Tray shaft (rear)

2 Coupling 4 Tray bottom plate

No. Description No. Description

1 Upper limit sensor 2 Pick-up roller

M495 18 SM
 Mechanism

2.2.6 PAPER SIZE DETECTION

PAPER FEED
UNIT PB3250
(M495)
The end fence is linked mechanically with the size detection actuator. When the end fence is
moved, the size detection actuator also moves.

When the paper feed tray is set, 4 paper size switches turn ON/OFF depending on the position of
the size detection actuator. Paper size is detected by the detected combination of these switches.

No. Description No. Description

1 End fence 3 Size detection actuator

2 Paper size switch 4 Tray set switch

Paper size switch operation

Paper size Paper size switch
SW4 SW3 SW2 SW1
SRA3 (12”×18”) 1 0 1 0

A3 (DLT) 0 1 0 0

B4 (LG) 0 0 1 1

0 1 1 1

A4_SEF 1 1 1 0

LT_SEF 1 1 0 0

B5_SEF 1 0 0 0

A4_LEF (LT_LEF) 0 0 0 1

B5_LEF (Exe_LEF) 0 0 1 0

SM 19 M495
Mechanism

Paper size Paper size switch

SW4 SW3 SW2 SW1
A5_LEF 0 1 0 1

2.2.7 REMAINING PAPER/PAPER END DETECTION

Remaining paper detection

Remaining paper in the paper feed tray is detected by a combination of ON/OFF status
(contact/non-contact) of contact-type remaining paper sensors (boards) CN-3 and CN-5.

When the amount of remaining paper decreases, and the lift motor rotates, the remaining paper
sensors CN-3 and CN-5 in the motor are turned ON/OFF.

The following 4 levels of remaining paper can be detected.

Remaining paper 100% 70% 30% 10%

CN-3 OFF ON ON OFF

CN-5 OFF OFF ON ON

Control panel display 4 bars 3 bars 2 bars 1 bar

Paper end detection

When there is no more paper in the paper feed tray, the paper end feeler turns ON the paper end
sensor (the sensor is unblocked).

No. Description No. Description

1 Paper end sensor 3 Slot in the tray base plate

2 End feeler

M495 20 SM
 M496
LCIT PB3260

Latest Release: -
Initial Release: November, 2016
Copyright (c) 2016 Ricoh Co.,Ltd.

Rev. 08/12/2021
 LCIT PB3260
(M496)
TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ............................................. 1

1.1 PRECAUTIONS CONCERNING STABILIZERS ............................................................ 1
1.2 REAR COVER .............................................................................................................. 2
1.3 LEFT AND RIGHT TRAYS ............................................................................................ 3
1.4 LEFT TRAY PAPER SENSOR ...................................................................................... 4
1.5 PAPER TRANSFER HOME POSITION SENSOR ......................................................... 5
1.6 CONTROLLER BOARD................................................................................................ 6
1.7 PAPER FEED UNIT ...................................................................................................... 7
1.8 LOWER LIMIT SENSOR............................................................................................... 9
1.9 LEFT TRAY SET SENSOR SWITCH .......................................................................... 10
1.10 RIGHT TRAY SET SENSOR SWITCH.................................................................. 11
1.11TRAY LIFT/PAPER TRANSFER UNIT ........................................................................ 12
1.12 TRAY LIFT MOTOR.............................................................................................. 13
1.13 PAPER TRANSFER MOTOR ............................................................................... 14
1.14 REMAINING PAPER SENSOR ............................................................................ 15
1.15 PAPER FEED MOTOR ......................................................................................... 16
1.16 PAPER TRANSPORT MOTOR............................................................................. 17
1.17 PICK-UP ROLLER, FEED ROLLER, FRICTION ROLLER .................................... 18
1.18 PAPER TRANSPORT SENSOR, PAPER FEED SENSOR, PAPER END SENSOR,
UPPER LIMIT SENSOR .................................................................................................... 20
1.19 RIGHT TRAY SIDE FENCE .................................................................................. 22

2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS............................................................ 23
2.1 PARTS LAYOUT ......................................................................................................... 23
2.2 MECHANISM.............................................................................................................. 25
2.2.1 PAPER FEED SEPARATION MECHANISM...................................................... 25
2.2.2 DRIVE MECHANISM ........................................................................................ 25
2.2.3 FRICTION ROLLER/PICK-UP ROLLER RELEASE MECHANISM .................... 25
2.2.4 PAPER FEED TRANSPORT MECHANISM ...................................................... 25
2.2.5 TRAY LIFT/DESCENT MECHANISM................................................................ 26
2.2.6 LEFT TRAY TRANSFER FENCE MECHANISM ............................................... 27
2.2.7 REMAINING PAPER DETECTION ................................................................... 28
SM i D787
D787 ii SM
READ THIS FIRST

Symbols, Abbreviations and Trademarks

This manual uses several symbols and abbreviations. The meaning of those symbols and
abbreviations are as follows:

Symbol What it means

Clip ring

Screw

Connector

Clamp

E-ring

Flat Flexible Cable

Timing Belt
SEF Short Edge Feed

LEF Long Edge Feed

K Black

C Cyan

M Magenta

Y Yellow

B/W, BW Black and White

FC Full color
Trademarks
Adobe, Acrobat, PageMaker, PostScript, and PostScript 3 are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.

The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
and any use of such marks by Ricoh Company, Ltd. is under license.

Firefox and Thunderbird are registered trademarks of the Mozilla Foundation.

Google, Android, and Chrome are trademarks of Google Inc.

iOS® is a registered trademark or trademark of Cisco Systems, Inc. and/or its affiliates in the
United States and certain other countries.

Java is a registered trademark of Oracle and/or its affiliates.

JAWS® is a registered trademark of Freedom Scientific, Inc., St. Petersburg, Florida and/or other
countries.

Kerberos is a trademark of the Massachusetts Institute of Technology (MIT).

Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds.

Macintosh, OS X, Bonjour, Safari, and TrueType are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the
U.S. and other countries.

Microsoft, Windows, Windows Server, Windows Vista, Internet Explorer, and Outlook are either
registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corp. in the United States and/or other
countries.

PictBridge is a trademark.

QR Code is a registered trademark of DENSO WAVE INCORPORATED in Japan and in other

countries.

"Red Hat" is a registered trademark of Red Hat, Inc.

The SD and SD logo are trademarks of SD-3C, LLC.

UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group.

UPnP is a trademark of UPnP Implementers Corporation.

D787 4 SM
This product includes RSA BSAFE® Cryptographic software of EMC Corporation. RSA and
BSAFE are registered trademarks or trademarks of EMC Corporation in the United States and
other countries.

The proper names of Internet Explorer 6, 7, and 8 are as follows:

• Microsoft® Internet Explorer® 6

• Windows® Internet Explorer® 7
• Windows® Internet Explorer® 8
The proper names of the Windows operating systems are as follows:

• The product names of Windows Vista are as follows:

Microsoft® Windows Vista® Ultimate

Microsoft® Windows Vista® Business

Microsoft® Windows Vista® Home Premium

Microsoft® Windows Vista® Home Basic

Microsoft® Windows Vista® Enterprise

• The product names of Windows 7 are as follows:

Microsoft® Windows® 7 Home Premium

Microsoft® Windows® 7 Professional

Microsoft® Windows® 7 Ultimate

Microsoft® Windows® 7 Enterprise

• The product names of Windows 8 are as follows:

Microsoft® Windows® 8

Microsoft® Windows® 8 Pro

Microsoft® Windows® 8 Enterprise

• The product names of Windows 8.1 are as follows:

Microsoft® Windows® 8.1

Microsoft® Windows® 8.1 Pro

Microsoft® Windows® 8.1 Enterprise

• The product names of Windows 10 are as follows:

Microsoft® Windows® 10 Home Premium

Microsoft® Windows® 10 Pro

Microsoft® Windows® 10 Enterprise

Microsoft® Windows® 10 Education

• The product names of Windows Server 2003 are as follows:

Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 Standard Edition

Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 Enterprise Edition

• The product names of Windows Server 2003 R2 are as follows:

Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2 Standard Edition

Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2 Enterprise Edition

• The product names of Windows Server 2008 are as follows:

Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 Standard

Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 Enterprise

• The product names of Windows Server 2008 R2 are as follows:

Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 R2 Standard

Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 R2 Enterprise

• The product names of Windows Server 2012 are as follows:

Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 Foundation

Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 Essentials

Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 Standard

• The product names of Windows Server 2012 R2 are as follows:

Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 R2 Foundation

Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 R2 Essentials

Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 R2 Standard

Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of
their respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights to those marks.

Microsoft product screen shots reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation.

D787 6 SM
 Precautions Concerning Stabilizers

1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

LCIT PB3260
(M496)
1.1 PRECAUTIONS CONCERNING STABILIZERS
Stabilizers are necessary for meeting the requirements of IEC60950-1, the international standard
for safety.

The aim of these components is to prevent the products, which are heavy, from toppling as a
result of people running into or leaning onto them, which can lead to serious accidents such as
persons becoming trapped under the product. (U.S.: UL60950-1, Europe: EN60950-1)

Therefore, removal of such components must always be with the consent of the customer.

Do not remove them under your own judgment.

SM 1 M495
Rear Cover

1.2 REAR COVER

1. Remove the connecting brackets [A] (2 brackets, ×2).

2. Remove the rear cover [A] ( ×2).

M495 2 SM
 Left and Right Trays

1.3 LEFT AND RIGHT TRAYS

LCIT PB3260
(M496)
1. Open the paper tray [A].

2. Remove the left tray [A].

3. Remove the right tray [A].

SM 3 M495
Left Tray Paper Sensor

1.4 LEFT TRAY PAPER SENSOR

1. Remove the left tray. (Left and Right Trays)
2. Remove the rear cover. (Rear Cover)
3. Remove the left tray paper sensor [A] ( ×1).

M495 4 SM
 Paper Transfer Home Position Sensor

1.5 PAPER TRANSFER HOME POSITION SENSOR

LCIT PB3260
(M496)
1. Open the paper tray.
2. Remove the left cover [A] ( ×1).

3. Remove the paper transfer home position sensor unit [A] ( ×1, ×1, ×2).

4. Remove the paper transfer home position sensor [A].

SM 5 M495
Controller Board

1.6 CONTROLLER BOARD

1. Remove the rear cover. (Rear Cover)
2. Remove the controller board [A] ( ×4, ×9).

M495 6 SM
 Paper Feed Unit

1.7 PAPER FEED UNIT

LCIT PB3260
(M496)
1. Open the paper tray.
2. Open the paper transport cover [A].

3. Remove the interlock switch cover [A] ( ×1).

4. Remove the paper feed guide plate [A].

SM 7 M495
Paper Feed Unit

5. Remove the paper feed unit [A] ( ×2, ×1, ×1).

M495 8 SM
 Lower Limit Sensor

1.8 LOWER LIMIT SENSOR

LCIT PB3260
(M496)
1. Remove the right tray. (Left and Right Trays)
2. Remove the rear cover. (Rear Cover)
3. Remove the tray lift/paper transfer unit. (Tray Lift/Paper Transfer Unit)
4. Remove the lower limit sensor [A] ( ×1).

SM 9 M495
Left Tray Set Sensor Switch

1.9 LEFT TRAY SET SENSOR SWITCH

1. Remove the left tray. (Left and Right Trays)
2. Remove the rear cover. (Rear Cover)
3. Remove the left tray set sensor switch [A] ( ×1).

M495 10 SM
 Right Tray Set Sensor Switch

1.10 RIGHT TRAY SET SENSOR SWITCH

LCIT PB3260
(M496)
1. Remove the right tray. (Left and Right Trays)
2. Remove the rear cover. (Rear Cover)
3. Remove the right tray set sensor switch [A] ( ×1).

SM 11 M495
Tray Lift/Paper Transfer Unit

1.11 TRAY LIFT/PAPER TRANSFER UNIT

1. Remove the rear cover. (Rear Cover)
2. Remove the tray lift/paper transfer unit [A] ( ×4, ×3, ×14).

M495 12 SM
 Tray Lift Motor

1.12 TRAY LIFT MOTOR

LCIT PB3260
(M496)
1. Remove the tray lift/paper transfer unit. (Tray Lift/Paper Transfer Unit)
2. Remove the tray motor unit [A] ( ×5).

3. Remove the tray lift motor [A] ( ×2).

SM 13 M495
Paper Transfer Motor

1.13 PAPER TRANSFER MOTOR

1. Remove the tray motor unit. (Tray Lift Motor)
2. Remove the paper transfer motor [A] ( ×2, ×1).

M495 14 SM
 Remaining Paper Sensor

1.14 REMAINING PAPER SENSOR

LCIT PB3260
(M496)
1. Remove the rear cover. (Rear Cover)
2. Remove the remaining paper sensor unit [A] ( ×2, ×1, ×3).

3. Remove the actuator [A].

4. Remove the remaining paper sensor [A].

SM 15 M495
Paper Feed Motor

1.15 PAPER FEED MOTOR

1. Remove the rear cover. (Rear Cover)
2. Remove the paper feed motor [A] ( ×2, ×1).

M495 16 SM
 Paper Transport Motor

1.16 PAPER TRANSPORT MOTOR

LCIT PB3260
(M496)
1. Remove the rear cover. (Rear Cover)
2. Remove the paper transport motor [A] ( ×2, ×1).

SM 17 M495
Pick-up Roller, Feed Roller, Friction Roller

1.17 PICK-UP ROLLER, FEED ROLLER, FRICTION ROLLER

1. Remove the paper feed unit. (Paper Feed Unit)
2. Remove the holder [A] ( ×1).

3. Remove the pick-up roller [A].

4. Remove the feed roller [A].

M495 18 SM
 Pick-up Roller, Feed Roller, Friction Roller

5. Remove the friction roller [A] ( ×1).

LCIT PB3260
(M496)

SM 19 M495
Paper Transport Sensor, Paper Feed Sensor, Paper End Sensor, Upper Limit Sensor

1.18 PAPER TRANSPORT SENSOR, PAPER FEED SENSOR,

PAPER END SENSOR, UPPER LIMIT SENSOR
1. Remove the paper feed unit. (Paper Feed Unit)
2. Remove the paper transport sensor unit [A] ( ×1, ×1).

3. Remove the paper transport sensor [A].

4. Remove the paper feed sensor unit [A] ( ×1).

M495 20 SM
 Paper Transport Sensor, Paper Feed Sensor, Paper End Sensor, Upper Limit Sensor

5. Remove the paper feed sensor [A].

LCIT PB3260
(M496)
6. Press the claw shown by the blue circle, and remove the paper end sensor [A] ( ×1).

7. Remove the upper limit sensor [A] ( ×1).

SM 21 M495
Right Tray Side Fence

1.19 RIGHT TRAY SIDE FENCE

1. Open the left and right trays.
2. Remove the right tray side fence (front) [A], right tray side fence (rear) [B], and right tray end
fence [C] ( ×3).

M495 22 SM
 Parts Layout

2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS

LCIT PB3260
(M496)
2.1 PARTS LAYOUT

No. Description No. Description

1 Pick-up roller 3 Paper transport roller

2 Feed roller 4 Friction roller

SM 23 M495
Parts Layout

No. Description No. Description

1 Paper transfer home position sensor 10 Paper transport cover open/closed switch

2 Left tray set switch 11 Right tray set switch

3 Left tray paper end sensor 12 Lower limit sensor

4 Transfer fence home position sensor 13 Anti-condensation heater

5 Controller board 14 Paper feed sensor

6 Paper transfer motor 15 Paper end sensor

7 Paper lift motor 16 Paper transport sensor

8 Paper feed motor 17 Upper limit sensor

9 Paper transport motor 18 Pick-up solenoid

M495 24 SM
 Mechanism

2.2 MECHANISM

LCIT PB3260
(M496)
2.2.1 PAPER FEED SEPARATION MECHANISM
The feed system is a RF paper feed system. The paper feed unit has a pick-up roller, feed roller,
and friction roller. The feed roller and friction roller are high durability rollers.

2.2.2 DRIVE MECHANISM

The pick-up roller and feed roller are driven by the paper feed motor. The transport roller is driven
by the transport motor. The friction roller is not driven.

2.2.3 FRICTION ROLLER/PICK-UP ROLLER RELEASE MECHANISM

When the right tray is set, the friction roller comes in contact with the feed roller. The pick-up roller
touches the top sheet of paper that is to be fed.

When the right tray is opened, contact between the feed roller and friction roller, and contact
between the pick-up roller and paper are released.

2.2.4 PAPER FEED TRANSPORT MECHANISM

In order to feed the paper at regular intervals, there is a paper feed sensor between the pick-up
roller and the feed roller, and this sensor is used to adjust the paper feed timing.

SM 25 M495
Mechanism

2.2.5 TRAY LIFT/DESCENT MECHANISM

Tray lift
When the right tray is set, the tray set switch on the rear plate turns ON, and the tray lift motor
starts rotating. Simultaneously, the remaining paper sensor performs a pulse count to determine
the amount of paper in the tray.

The tray lift motor and rotation shaft are joined by a coupling, so that when the rotation shaft
rotates, the tray bottom plate rises. The tray bottom plate rises until the actuator turns OFF the
upper limit sensor (the sensor is blocked). If there is paper, lifting stops. If there is no paper, the
tray bottom plate descends.

• After the right tray is set, if the upper limit sensor is OFF, it will turn ON. The tray
descends until the lower limit sensor turns OFF. After stopping temporarily, the tray
bottom plate then rises to the upper limit.

No. Description
1 Upper limit sensor

2 Pick-up roller

Tray descent
If there is no paper when the upper limit operation is completed, the tray bottom plate descends
until the lower limit sensor turns OFF (the sensor is blocked). The tray bottom plate will descend if
paper end is detected during paper transport.

M495 26 SM
 Mechanism

LCIT PB3260
(M496)
No. Description
1 Remaining paper sensor (inside lift/transfer unit)

2 Tray lift motor (inside lift/transfer unit)

3 Lower limit sensor

4 Actuator

5 Tray bottom plate

2.2.6 LEFT TRAY TRANSFER FENCE MECHANISM

After the right tray has finished descending, if there is paper in the left tray, the left tray transfer
fence shifts, and the paper in the left tray is transferred to the paper feed tray. When the paper has
been transferred to the right tray, the left tray transfer fence returns to its original position, until the
transfer home position sensor turns OFF (the sensor is blocked).

The left tray end fence is moved by the transfer motor (DC motor inside the lift/transfer unit).

When the right tray has finished descending, the transfer motor is driven, and the left tray transfer
fence begins to shift.

After the left tray paper sensor detects no paper (detection is by a feeler), the left tray transfer
fence shifts for a certain time that depends on the paper size. After shifting, the transfer motor
turns OFF.

• The time for which the left tray transfer fence shifts is set for either A4 or LT paper, so
that the paper stops at the feed position of the right tray

SM 27 M495
Mechanism

No. Description
1 Left tray transfer fence

2 Paper transfer home position sensor

3 Left tray paper sensor

4 Paper transfer motor (inside lift transfer unit)

2.2.7 REMAINING PAPER DETECTION

Right tray remaining paper detection

The remaining paper sensor in the lift/transfer unit performs a pulse count.

Left tray remaining paper detection

The left tray paper sensor is turned ON/OFF using a feeler.

If there is paper in the left tray, paper end will not be displayed even if there is no paper in the right
tray.

Remaining paper Left tray paper sensor Display

100% OFF 4 bars

Paper end ON None

M495 28 SM